JP7323123B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally called "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally called "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, when winning an internal lottery, a bonus game, an ART (assist replay time) game, and an AT (assist time) game are executed in which more game media can be obtained than in the normal game state. A reel-type gaming machine is known. In addition, many reel-type gaming machines have been proposed in which a display device is used to perform an effect while a game is being played or when the game is not being played. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-142346 A

However, there is room for improvement in such an effect, and there are not a few players who desire a more elaborated effect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the performance is devised.

Lottery means for acquiring lottery information regarding a win based on the establishment of a starting condition and executing a lottery based on the lottery information;
symbol variation executing means for executing symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition;
a performance determining means for determining a performance from among a plurality of performances based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means;
an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means;
an effect display means capable of displaying the effect executed by the effect execution means;
holding means for storing the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied although the establishment of the start condition is satisfied;
holding display means for displaying on the effect display means a holding display corresponding to each of the lottery information stored by the holding means and the lottery information corresponding to the variation being executed,
The plurality of productions are
A specific effect that makes the pending display displayed on the effect display means unrecognizable;
a first effect in which the specific effect is displayed when a specific time elapses after the execution of the symbol variation is started and the reserved display is rendered unrecognizable;
Even if the specific time elapses after the start of execution of the pattern variation, the reserved display is recognizable without the specific effect being displayed, and the specific performance is made at a predetermined timing after the specific time elapses. a second effect in which an effect is displayed to render the pending display unrecognizable;
In the pattern variation in which the first performance is executed, a special performance can be displayed in a situation before the specific time elapses after the start of the pattern variation, and the pattern in which the second performance is executed. Also in the variation, the special effect can be displayed in a situation before the specified time has elapsed after the symbol variation is started,
Expectations for winning are higher in the second production than in the first production,
There is a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect,
The third effect is displayed before the reserved display is made unrecognizable when making the reserved display to be recognized out of the reserved displays unrecognizable and re-recognizing the reserved display made unrecognizable. a holding display is displayed in a mode in which the expectation of winning is higher than the mode in which the winning is expected, and a specific sound is output based on the display of the holding display in the mode in which the expectation of winning is high;
The specific sound is not output when the hold display made unrecognizable by the first effect and the second effect is re-recognized,
When re-recognizing the hold display made unrecognizable by the first effect without outputting the specific sound, the hold display is made unrecognizable by the second effect without outputting the specific sound. Make it possible to be the same as the hold display when re-recognizing the hold display,
The on-hold display when re-recognizing the on-hold display made unrecognizable by the first effect without outputting the specific sound is more successful than the mode displayed before the on-hold display is made unrecognizable. is not displayed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, and the holding display made unrecognizable by the second effect is re-recognized without the specific sound being output. It is not displayed in a mode with a higher expectation of winning than the mode that was displayed before being disabled,
The time during which the pending display is rendered unrecognizable by the first effect and the second effect is different from the time during which the pending display is rendered unrecognizable by the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the performance is devised.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. 1 is a plan view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is the front view which cut|disconnected the front structural member and front unit in a game board in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure in main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the arithmetic circuit in main-control MPU. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a serial communication circuit; FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of initialization processing; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 21; FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of character product ratio calculation and display processing. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the role product ratio calculation/display processing of FIG. 24; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning of the program (code|code) stored in ROM and RAM which were built in main control MPU, and data. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the character product ratio calculation area|region. It is a figure which shows the structure of a character thing ratio display. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a driver circuit; FIG. 4 is a timing diagram of data input to the driver circuit; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of main-control MPU and a character-object ratio display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a load register selection table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table; It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a role product ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a role product ratio. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation/display processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a diagram showing another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the renewal timing of the number of winning balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a diagram showing another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. It is a diagram showing another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the structure of data stored in a base calculation area; It is a front view showing another example of the game board. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 1; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 2; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 1; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 2; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 3; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 4; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base display processing; 10 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 3; 10 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 4; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base display processing; It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge|emission ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge|emission ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the connection example of an ejection|emission ball sensor and a main-control board. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a main control input circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a main control I/O port; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a main control I/O port; FIG. FIG. 98 is a timing chart in the configuration example of the main control I/O port shown in FIG. 97; It is a figure which shows the change of the state (interval) concerning calculation of a base value. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on a base display; 5 is a flowchart showing an example of initialization processing; FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 101; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing; FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the base calculation processing of FIG. 105; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base display data generation processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a modified example of base calculation processing; It is a figure which shows calculation of a base when a game state switches. It is a figure which shows the structure regarding a storage area among the internal structures of main-control MPU1311. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing; It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning of the program (code|code) stored in ROM and RAM which were built in main control MPU, and data. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recorded on a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the example of an error screen. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an error signal; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an error; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an error; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an error; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; It is a figure which shows an example of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of game history. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a peripheral control board and its periphery; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the peripheral configuration of a peripheral control SRAM; FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows the modification of game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of game history. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which has a setting part from the back in the open state. 131 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 with the door closed; FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a setting section of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130; FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a setting part. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from the back. 136 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko machine on which the game board shown in FIG. 135 is mounted; FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of initialization processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing; It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a special symbol variation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special design variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big win. FIG. 144(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). FIG. 144(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). FIG. 144(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). FIG. 144(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the loss variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of a main control board. FIG. 151B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A' in FIG. 151(B); It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of a main control board. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of initialization processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting confirmation processing; FIG. 4 is a timing diagram of security signals; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of initialization processing; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of setting confirmation processing; It is another example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is an example of a final reserved color table. Table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. An example. Table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. An example. Table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. An example. It is an example of a notice effect table. It is an example of a dialogue production table. This is another example of the advance notice effect table. It is an example of a setting suggestion effect table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect; (A) is an example of an effect limit table during setting confirmation mode, and (B) is an example of an effect limit table when an error occurs. It is an example of a new start prize effect limit table. 1 is an example of a processing table 1; 3 is an example of a processing table 2; 3 is an example of a processing table 3; 4 is an example of a processing table 4; 5 is an example of a processing table 5; 6 is an example of a processing table 6; 10 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of performance display processing of another example 1; It is a figure which shows the alert|reporting aspect of another example 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing notification priorities of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 1; FIG. 11 is a flowchart of RAM abnormality initialization processing of another example 1; FIG. 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of setting processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of setting display processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of random number update processing 2 of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1; 10 is a flowchart of switch input processing 1 of another example 1; 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch winning prize information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area of another example 1. be. FIG. 199(A) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 199(B) is another configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area of another example 1. It is a figure which shows. 10 is a flowchart of setting change/confirmation processing of another example 1; 201A is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2 of another example 1, and FIG. 201B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area of another example 1. FIG. 202A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 1, and FIG. 202B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 1, 202C is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on recovery destination command of another example 1, and FIG. 202D is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting value command of another example 1. FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the order of transmission of commands in another example 1; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing state transition of the setting state management area of another example 1; 10 is a time chart from start to end of the setting change mode of another example 1; 10 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode of another example 1; 10 is a time chart from start to end of the setting change mode of another example 1; 10 is a time chart from start to end of the setting change mode of another example 1; 10 is a time chart from start to end of the setting change mode of another example 1; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big-hit determination threshold value table of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big-hit determination threshold value table of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big-hit determination threshold value table of another example 1. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 2; 14 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 2; 14 is a flowchart of setting value confirmation processing of another example 2; 14 is a flowchart of a RAM confirmation process outside the game area when the power is turned on of another example 2. FIG. It is a flow chart of the RAM abnormality outside the game area of another example 2 processing. 14 is a flowchart of RWM initialization processing outside the used area of another example 2; 14 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing of another example 2. FIG. FIG. 220A is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area of another example 2, and FIG. 220(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 2. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 2; 14 is a flowchart of power-off processing of another example 2; 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 2; 10 is a flowchart of setting processing of another example 2; 10 is a flowchart of setting display processing of another example 2; 14 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 3; 14 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another example 3; 14 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 3; 13 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing of another example 3; It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for normal game of another example 3. 14 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 4; 19 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing of another example 4; It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front in which the center accessory and the display effect unit of the front unit of the game board are disassembled. FIG. 10 is a front view showing a state in which the display effect unit luminesces the first pattern; FIG. 10 is a front view showing a state in which the display effect unit luminesces the second pattern; It is a figure which shows the structure of a light-guide plate. 4A and 4B are diagrams showing the structure of a reflective portion provided on the light guide plate; FIG. 4A and 4B are diagrams showing the structure of a reflective portion provided on the light guide plate; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that the pattern seen planarly by a light-guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing a mode that the pattern seen planarly by a light-guide plate is displayed. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing how a pattern viewed stereoscopically by a light guide plate is displayed; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing how a pattern viewed stereoscopically by a light guide plate is displayed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; It is a circuit diagram around the synchronous serial interface of the main control board. 4 is a circuit diagram showing connections between a serial/parallel conversion circuit and LEDs; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of connection of terminals of an IC that accommodates an inverter buffer; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of connection of terminals of an IC that accommodates an inverter buffer; It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning on the main-control board|substrate of main-control MPU and peripheral components. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the port in main control MPU. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the timing of data output and capture by a synchronous serial signal; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another arrangement of the main control board in the main control board box; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another arrangement of the main control board in the main control board box; It is a block diagram showing the connection of the power supply system around the production drive board. 4 is a block diagram showing connection of signals around the handle unit; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the branch circuit provided in a relay board. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine with a front member opened; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. provided in the slot machine; FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of a storage area provided by ROM, RAM, etc., and a ROM area in this embodiment; It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area|region in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the character product ratio calculation area|region. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area|region of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining the procedure of system reset start-up processing that is executed when the slot machine is reset; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a procedure of regular processing; 4 is a flowchart showing the procedure of information signal N output processing; 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front; (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, viewed from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a plate base unit in the plate unit; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit in a dish unit from the forward-backward direction of the production|presentation operation part button unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front right. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front left. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit, and was seen from the front lower side. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation portion of the pressing operation portion. is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. Figure 379(a) is exploded and is an exploded perspective view seen from the front; It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side; 1 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which front components, a game panel, a front unit, etc. are made opaque; FIG. FIG. 386 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 385 as seen from the front right; Figure 386 is a perspective view of the game board of Figure 385 as seen from the front left; It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. 1 is a front view of a game board with the front constituent members, the game panel, the front unit, etc. made transparent; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 386 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 385; It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate and the obstacle nail. (a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel. (a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front unit on the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, (b) is a back perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit. It is a left side view of a starting mouth unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general prize-winning opening, and the inclination of the door member of the variable prize-winning opening at the time of an open state. It is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the starting port unit and the side unit in the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front; It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the 1st big prize-winning entrance door in a 1st attacker unit from left side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in a 1st attacker unit in a cross section. (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as seen from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (a) is a front perspective view of the second attacker unit, the middle right side unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and (b) is the second attacker unit, the middle right side unit, and the gate member in the front unit. is a perspective view of the from behind. It is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the path of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side middle unit. FIG. 393 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged right portion of the game area. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine showing an enlarged upper left corner of a game board with a transparent door frame; FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of a back guide unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a back-side effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back-side perspective view of the back-side effect unit in the back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rear back production|presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rear back production|presentation unit, and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a back production|presentation unit from a front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back production|presentation unit. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the rear movable decorative body together with the rear decorative substrate. 420. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 420, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rear movable decorative body. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back rear movable decoration body, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back rear movable decoration body, and was seen from the back. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back rear movable decoration. FIG. 426 is an explanatory diagram showing the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the front view of FIG. 425 with broken lines. (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in (a), (c ) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the same part as the decoration of (a). Fig. 421(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion; Figure 429 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of Figure 428; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the rear movable decorative body. (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate in the region of the first LED, and (b) is a second LED positioned on the optical axis of the first LED. FIG. 10C is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide radiation plate at the part where the light guide radiation plate is located, and FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the arrangement of , from the front. FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the back decoration substrate together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. (a) is a front view of the rear decorative substrate, and (b) is a rear view of the rear decorative substrate. (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part with a form different from that of (a). It is a figure and (c) is an enlarged sectional view which shows a part of decoration which has the metal decoration part of a different form from (a) and (b). 420. (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the configuration of the movable back decoration of the second embodiment, which is different from the movable back decoration of FIG. 420, and (b) is a movable back decoration of the third embodiment. FIG. 11C is an explanatory view showing the configuration of 1 in a cross section, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the rear movable decorative body of the fourth embodiment in a cross section. (a) is a front perspective view of a lower back left effect unit and a lower right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a perspective view of a lower back left effect unit and a lower back right effect unit in the back unit. is a perspective view. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit when viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit when viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a back bottom left effect unit and a back bottom right effect unit from a front. (a) is a front perspective view of a back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back-bottom view of the back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom-side lifting mechanism of the bottom-side effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom-side lifting mechanism of the bottom-side effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the underside decoration unit of the underside effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the underside decoration unit of the underside effect unit, viewed from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing the lifting and lowering of the lower back decoration body unit by the lower back middle lifting mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decoration of the back-lower middle decoration unit in the back-lower middle effect unit, and (b) is a stop position of the back-lower middle rotating decoration. and each detection sensor in a table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the arrangement of LEDs of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the lower back middle effect unit from the front. (a) is a front perspective view of an upper back effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper back effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back elevation decorative body unit in the upper back effect unit, which is viewed from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back upper raising/lowering decoration body unit in a back unit, and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the rotation mechanism of the back top front rotary decoration in a back top production|presentation unit. (a) is an explanatory view showing the lifting mechanism of the upper lifting decorative body unit in the upper back effect unit from the front; It is an explanatory view showing from the front the elevating mechanism of the body unit and the rotating mechanism of the back-up rear rotary decoration. FIG. 10 is an explanatory view showing the decoration substrate from the front in a state where the upper back elevating decorative body unit is moved to the appearing position in the upper back effect unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the rear left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back-left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left decorative body unit of the rear rear left effect unit exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left decorative body unit of the rear rear left effect unit exploded and viewed from the rear; It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back left production|presentation unit from the front. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back left decorative body unit in the back left effect unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a back rear right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of a back rear right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back-right production unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-right decoration unit of the rear-right effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decorative body unit of the rear rear right effect unit exploded and viewed from the rear; It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back right production|presentation unit from the front. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-right decorative body unit in the back-right effect unit; (a) is a front perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left effect unit, viewed from the rear; (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the closed state in the back front left effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the open state in the back front left effect unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right effect unit exploded and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view showing the closed state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the open state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-back movable decorative body of the rear-back production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-lower middle rotary ornament of the back-lower middle effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back upper rear rotating decoration of the back upper rear effect unit moves from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back left rotating ornament of the back rear left effect unit moves from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back of the back rear right effect unit moves from the retracted position to the first appearance position It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-right rotating decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the first appearing position. A state in which the back-left rotating decoration of the back-left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-right rotating decoration of the back-right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in . FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit, respectively, from the closed state to the open state; Back rear movable decoration of the back rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, Back upper rear rotary decoration of the back upper rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, Back left rotating decoration of the back left production unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back right rotation decoration of the back right production unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back bottom middle rotation decoration of the back bottom middle production unit is raised from the lowered position. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved to respective positions; It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-standing support member. (a) is a flow chart showing the procedure of main processing executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flow chart showing the procedure of interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special design process processing performed by the main control MPU. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of first starting opening passage processing executed by a main control MPU; 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of pre-determination processing executed by a main control MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a hit determination process executed by a main control MPU; (A) is a win determination table used for lottery processing for winning, (B) is a big win symbol determination table used for lottery processing for types of big wins, and (C) is types of small wins. It is a small winning symbol determination table used in the lottery process for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process performed by main-control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop process performed by main-control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small-hit control process performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate passage processing executed by a main control MPU; It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a normal pattern hit determination table used in the lottery process for a normal pattern hit, and (B) is a normal pattern hit time open pattern table used for determination processing about the open pattern at the time of a normal pattern hit. be. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol variation pattern determination processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the normal electric accessary product opening process executed by the main control MPU. 4 is a flowchart showing the procedure of sub-main processing executed by a peripheral control MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of 16 ms steady-state processing executed by the peripheral control MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production|presentation control processing performed by peripheral control MPU. (A) is a hit probability table, and (B) is an example of a jackpot distribution table. It is a transition diagram showing an example of game state transition of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of rush rush chance production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of rush rush chance production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of rush rush chance production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation in small-hit rush. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation in small-hit rush. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation in high-probability short working hours no jackpot. It is an example of a timetable of a demo screen. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of screen transition for volume control; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the upstart production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the rising performance. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing when the promotion production|presentation in the upstart production|presentation is performed. (A) is a reserved color determination table used when a game ball enters a starting hole during non-reserved and variable non-execution. (B) is a reserved color determination table used when a game ball enters a starting hole during variable execution without holding. (C) is a reserved color determination table used when a game ball enters a starting hole with one reserved state. (D) is a pending color determination table used when a game ball enters a starting hole with two pending. (E) is a pending color determination table used when a game ball enters a starting hole with three pending. It is an example of a change pending color determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a suspension notice effect by a suspension color change; (A) is a gacha-coin reserve decision table used when a game ball enters a starting slot during no reserve and variable non-execution. (B) is a gacha-coin reserve decision table used when a game ball enters a starting hole during variable execution without reserve. (C) is a gacha coin reservation determination table used when a game ball enters a starting hole with one reservation. (D) is a gacha coin reservation determination table used when a game ball enters a starting hole with two reservations. (E) is a gacha coin reservation determination table used when a game ball enters a starting hole with three reservations. It is an example of a gacha coin reserved color correspondence table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a gacha coin reservation notice effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach collapse pseudo-continuous effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of reach symbol promotion production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation in a sugoroku stage. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation in a sugoroku stage. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a pine zone production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a pine zone production|presentation. It is an explanatory view showing an example of super pine zone production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of super pine zone production. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a holding peek effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of rocket production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of rocket production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of rocket production|presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a schedule of dynamic presentation of character A and fuel after the start of still image presentation in rocket presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a battle production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a battle production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a battle production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of battle production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of battle production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of reel production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of reel production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a bee extermination effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a bee extermination effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the bee extermination effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the bee extermination effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the ready-to-reach production in which Mr. Daruma falls. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the ready-to-reach production in which Mr. Daruma falls. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the ready-to-win production in which Mr. Daruma fell down. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an informing process selection ready-to-win production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an informing process selection ready-to-win production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an informing process selection ready-to-win production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a pending|holding gathering production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a pending|holding gathering production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a division|segmentation reach production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a division|segmentation reach production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a cut selection effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a cut selection effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a cut selection effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a cut selection effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a cut selection effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of reach change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of reach change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of reach change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a sound presence/absence hold change production. It is an example of a final pending color sorting table used when a sound presence/absence pending change effect is performed in a loss variation. It is an example of a final pending color sorting table used when a sound presence/absence pending change effect is performed in the jackpot variation. It is an example of a reserve color sorting table at the start of fluctuation. It is an example of a pending change timing table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process performed when the sound presence/absence hold change effect executable timing comes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a hold|hold & zone change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a hold|hold & zone change production. It is an example of a chance time frequency table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the light production|presentation of wind ahead. It is an example of a windward light hold change table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a blackout effect; It is an example of a blackout time table. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a slot machine; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a door-shaped front member is omitted; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine; FIG. 1 is a longitudinal sectional view of a slot machine showing a state in which a door-shaped front member is omitted; FIG. FIG. 594 is an enlarged view of part Z1 of FIG. 593; 594 is an enlarged view of part Z1 of FIG. 593 showing a state in which the connector holder has been moved; FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted; (a) is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 596, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 596 showing the state in which the connector holder is moved. Fig. 597(a) is an enlarged view showing the main part of Fig. 597(a); FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of main parts of the slot machine showing the back plate side; 4 is an exploded perspective view of a case member; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from the back. 4(a) and 4(b) are perspective views of main parts of the case member for explaining a temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which abbreviate|omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a stopper that stops the case member; FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another form; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing the guide structure of the case member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing the guide structure of the case member; FIG. 11 is a partial perspective view of the variable pattern display device showing another form of the handle; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a main part showing the relationship between a case member and a stopper on the outer body side; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing the relationship between the wiring window and the reels of the variable pattern display device; It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine. It is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal ejection device omitted. 616 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 615; FIG. It is the back view which looked at the heat radiation port from the back side of the slot machine. It is a partially cross-sectional partial front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked up at the power supply device from the bottom. Fig. 10 is a cross-sectional view of main parts of the side plate of the outer main body and the power supply unit, showing another form; It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member showing the transparent plate and the light emitting unit exploded; FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member showing an exploded transparent plate; FIG. 622A is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the line of FIG. 622A-A of the door-shaped front member to which the transparent plate is attached; It is an exploded/assembled perspective view of the hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram which shows the chain of hinge metal fittings. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening; It is the perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut|disconnected the coupler in the longitudinal direction. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main portion of the door-shaped front member showing another example of hinge metal fittings; FIG. 632 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member of FIG. 631 in the middle of opening; FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which an image display body and a frame member are opened in the model unit; FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened while the couplers are connected; FIG. 10 is a development view in which the pattern rows of the reel band are developed two-dimensionally; FIG. 10 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the symbol display window in the slot machine viewed from the front; FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, and operation members provided in the slot machine; It is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for a winning combination when the setting is 1. It is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for a winning combination when the setting is 2. It is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for a winning combination when the setting is 3. It is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for a winning combination when the setting is 4. It is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for a winning combination when the setting is 5. It is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for a winning combination when the setting is 6. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a basic processing procedure for one game in a slot machine; FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of a processing procedure of start-up processing; FIG. 4 is an example of a block diagram showing RT state transitions; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of a rough processing flow of instruction function processing; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of processing related to generation of an instruction function; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a hell state process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of advantageous state A processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of advantageous state B time processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of an advantageous state C process; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an advantageous state D time process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of an advantageous state E process; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pullback state process. It is an example of a lottery table used for the addition determination lottery. It is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery for determining the number of additional games when the ART middle-low probability state is reached. It is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery for determining the number of games to be added when the ART middle-high probability state is reached. It is an example of a lottery table used in the lottery for determining the number of games to be added in the special zone. It is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery to determine the number of additional games during preparation for the special zone. It is an example of a table used in the ART first winning lottery when the combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" or "normal maintenance lip". When the combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance + normal maintenance" or "normal maintenance", (a) An example of a table used for the addition decision lottery, (b ) This is an example of a table used for the lottery for determining the number of additional games. It is an example of the ART initial winning lottery table in advantageous state D during the game number management process. It is an example of a lottery state transition lottery table during ART. It is an example of a specialized zone lottery table. It is an example of the ART first hit lottery table in the pullback state. It is an example of the effect operation lottery table when winning the internal lottery in RT1. It is an example of the effect operation lottery table when winning the internal lottery in RT2. It is an example of the effect operation lottery table when winning the internal lottery in RT3. This is another example of the effect operation lottery table when winning the internal lottery. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining indication function display; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining indication function display; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of reel stop processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of reel stop processing; FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of determination processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of bonus game start processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of bonus game end determination processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of ART game determination processing; FIG. 5 is a time chart showing an example of the overall game flow; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a data block of RAM; It is a figure for demonstrating the error display by special display LED. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining processing when an error occurs; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining processing when an error occurs; FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for power failure recovery processing; It is an example of an effect image related to the addition determination lottery and the addition game number determination lottery. It is an example of a minor combination lottery table. It is an example of an AT first hit lottery table. It is an example of a precursor game number lottery table. It is an example of an AT stock lottery table. It is an example of a pseudo-bonus lottery table. It is an example of an AT initial game number lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop type of various bells. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect; 7 is a flowchart showing an example of flag processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during an AT precursor; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when ATs are stocked; FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of a relief state process; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of processing after all reels are stopped; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect; It is an example of a minor combination lottery table. It is an example of an AT first hit lottery table. It is an example of a CZ transition lottery table. It is an example of an AT first hit lottery table that is referenced at the start of each game during CZ. It is an example of an AT first hit lottery table referred to during a pseudo-game during CZ. It is an example of an AT addition lottery table. It is an example of an AT addition game number lottery table. It is an example of a specialized zone transfer lottery table. It is an example of a red 7 stop pattern table. It is an example of pattern arrangement of each reel in a slot machine. It is an explanatory view showing an image of a reel in CZ. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation in CZ. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation in CZ. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation in CZ. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation in CZ. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the amount of operation of the starting lever during a simulated game of the CZ game and the visibility of the pattern on the lower row of the right reel hidden by the transmissive liquid crystal; 7 is a flowchart showing an example of flag processing; , and a flowchart showing an example of a process executed when all reels are stopped (when the reels are stopped at the third time). FIG. 646 is a flow chart showing an example of flag processing in step S107 of FIG. 645 when the CZ flag is on; FIG. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing at the time of the first simulated stop in the simulated game during CZ. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing at the time of the second simulated stop in the simulated game during CZ. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing at the time of the third simulated stop in the simulated game during CZ. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing at the time of the third stop of the main game of the game in which the pseudo game is executed. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the production during CZ (eye pressing practice production). It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pseudo-game that is normally executed during the game. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the effect in the special zone. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of CZ production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of CZ production|presentation. It is an example of an AT lottery table showing a lottery value of an AT lottery executed when red 7 is stuck in the middle row at each pseudo stop of CZ2. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of production|presentation of CZ2. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of production|presentation of CZ2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of production|presentation of CZ2. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine equipped with a seesaw accessory; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a slot machine (excluding an outer body) on which a seesaw accessory is mounted; FIG. It is a front view which shows the outline of a seesaw accessory. It is an example of a minor combination lottery table. It is an example of a lottery table for entering a seesaw game effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a seesaw game effect performed during a normal game; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a seesaw game effect (failure) performed during a normal game; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a seesaw game effect (success) performed during a normal game; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a seesaw game effect (success) performed during a normal game; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a practice effect of an additional chance in a seesaw game effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of an additional chance effect in the seesaw game effect (fate two-choice effect); FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a seesaw game effect executed during AT; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a seesaw game effect executed during AT; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a seesaw game effect executed during AT; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a seesaw game effect executed during AT; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a seesaw game effect executed during AT; It is an explanatory view showing an example of sudden seesaw game effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example when the seesaw game effect fails. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of an additional chance performed in a seesaw game effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a seesaw game effect executed during AT; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a seesaw game effect executed during AT;

A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. As shown in FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and viewed from the front. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from behind;

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. 20 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 .

The outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 . The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a door frame base unit 100 attached to the front lower part of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side portion attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball stored in the upper dish 201 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 through the tray unit 200. A handle unit 500 which a player can operate to hit the ball into the game area of the game board 5, and a tray unit 200 which is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and receives the game ball that fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower tray 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and feeds the game balls on the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher 680, and the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped body frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 attached to the right side of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. , and a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out game balls to the player side. A letter-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. and a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game played on the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with a character ratio indicator 1317 . The character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The performance display device may constitute the character ratio display device 1317 . Note that the character product ratio display 1317 may be provided in the payout control board unit 950 instead of the main control unit 1300 .

Also, the character product ratio may be displayed on the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 without separately providing a display device for displaying the character product ratio. In this case, if the performance display device 1600, 3114, or 244 always displays the role ratio, the player can be notified of the role ratio and the player can check the condition of the pachinko machine.

As will be described later, the role ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls won by the total number of balls won. Since it is obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has few jackpot games and few prize balls during the jackpot, so it can be said to be in poor condition. Therefore, the player can select the pachinko machine to play in consideration of the value of the accessory ratio.

As a mode for notifying the player of the role ratio, the numerical value of the role ratio may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 . For example, if the character ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinked in red, and if it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit or blinked in green. do. It is preferable to display the numerical value of the character ratio in such a manner that it is not mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative pattern when it does not fluctuate, or the size of the number indicating the role ratio may be made smaller than the decorative pattern. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Also, the aspect of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed according to the numerical value of the role ratio, and the player may be notified of the role ratio. For example, when the role ratio is 70% or more, the decorative pattern is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit red or blinks, and when it is 69% to 30%, the decorative pattern is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit in green. or blink. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Also, it may be displayed on the performance display device 244 provided in the door frame 3 . In that case, the above-described display mode may be changed, and not only the role item ratio but also other information may be displayed. The other information includes the number of big wins, the number of consecutive big wins (so-called number of consecutive wins), the number of balls in possession, the remaining money, and the like.

Further, not only the character product ratio, but also a continuous character product ratio, a base value, and the like, which will be described later, may be displayed by changing the mode as described above. The character product ratio, the continuous character product ratio, and the base value may be displayed in different ways.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin-made main control board box 1320 which is sealed in such a way that once it is closed, it cannot be opened without being destroyed, and is placed on a printed circuit board. The finished parts can be seen from the outside. Furthermore, for example, when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the character ratio indicator 1317 provided in the main control unit 1300 can be used for pachinko. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1 . By enclosing the character ratio display 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the character ratio display 1317 to make the pachinko machine 1 look less gambling, and the pachinko machine 1 can be displayed accurately. It can display the gambling nature.

If the back cover 980 is made of an opaque resin, the pachinko machine can be used by making a hole in the back cover 980 at the position of the character ratio indicator 1317 or by making the position of the character ratio indicator 1317 transparent. The character product ratio indicator 1317 may be viewed from the back side of the machine 1 .

Further, even when the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the character ratio indicator 1317 can be flattened or the back cover 980 can be made thin. The ratio indicator 1317 may be made easy to see from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

At the bottom of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, a discharge port is provided for collecting the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a via the out port 1111 and the prize winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharging them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 for detecting game balls discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318 . The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. On the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320, it is preferable to display (print, engrave, seal, etc.) that it is a switch for operating the display of the character product ratio. The display switch 1318 is desirably provided near the character ratio display 1317, but even if it is not on the main control unit 1300, if it is a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, the effect control board 4700 , power supply device 4112 ), housing 4100 , or front member 4200 . It may be provided in the peripheral control unit 1500, the relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, the power board in the power board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Also, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also serve as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the top of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right to open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. It is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side, and the game ball guided by the ball guiding unit 820 is instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. a payout device 830 which pays out one by one based on the base 801 and guides downward the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. An upper full ball path unit 850 that releases game balls from either a normal outlet or a full ball outlet according to the above, and an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 From the normal outlet of the upper full ball path unit 850 A normal guiding path guides the discharged game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge opening forward and guides the game balls forward and guides them from the front end of the door frame 3. and a lower full ball path unit 860 having a full guideway leading to the full ball receptacle 530 .

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view and having a bass speaker installed therein. 921, a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside the box. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 which is attached across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls is housed inside. A payout control board unit 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and shoots game balls from the ball launching device 680 into the upper part of the game area 5a. A front structural member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide to the front structural member 1000, a flat plate-like game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, and the game panel 1100 It has a box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control substrate 1310 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 and a front unit (not shown) having a plurality of winning holes attached in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving game balls hit into the game area 5a ) and a back unit 3000 attached to the upper side of the board holder 1200 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 .

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 201, the ball launcher 680 plays a game with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 . Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are accepted by the winning openings (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning openings. . Since the payout of the game balls can enhance the interest of the player, the game balls in the upper tray 201 can be hit into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. 11 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. Also, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. Furthermore, FIG. 16 is a front view of the front constituent members and the front unit of the game board, cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction within the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by the player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 . The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front structural member 1000 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to cover the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is played by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) for controlling game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and an effect display device 1600 attached to the front of the game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. A performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game balls hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by this, and the first special lottery that is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a first big winning hole 2005 and a second big winning hole 2006 which can accept game balls either according to the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery. The second big winning hole 2006 is composed of two big winning holes, a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b, which are arranged in one channel through which game balls circulate (Fig. 16).

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005. A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning slots 2001, and is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A side unit top 2300 and a frame-shaped frame having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a. A center accessory 2500 is provided.

The rear unit 3000 is arranged at a predetermined position in the rear box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock mechanism attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably mounting the performance display device 1600. 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end in the front view inside the back box 3010 and for discharging game balls received in the general prize winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, A lower right ball passage unit 3035 is attached near the front end of the lower right corner in the front view in the box 3010 and is used to discharge the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 or the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. and have.

The rear unit 3000 includes an upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and rotatably mounted to the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A box-shaped production drive board box 3042, a production drive board 3043 housed in the production drive board box 3042, a panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a panel relay board 3044. and a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side of the .

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable production unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape clockwise from the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view, passing through the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The front structural member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 which is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front structural member 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004. from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

A shot ball sensor 1020 for detecting a game ball hit into the game area 5a is provided on the back side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing the backflow prevention member 1007). For example, the shot ball sensor 1020 is composed of a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and flowed into the game area 5a is detected. In addition, the shot ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position through which the game ball always passes within the game area. By fixing the position of the shot ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, specifications can be shared among a plurality of models, and inspections at manufacturing sites and after installation in halls are facilitated.

A shot ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects an out ball before the winning opening sensor detects a winning game ball. That is, since game balls are detected in the order of out balls and prize balls, the base value can be accurately calculated without detecting prize balls caused by game balls not counted as out balls.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 from the rear side. In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and positioning holes formed on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. FIG. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guide section 1003 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 .

[2-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 can be received. 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a, as shown. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and two LEDs based on the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. A normal pattern display device for displaying these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the normal lottery after the normal pattern is variably displayed by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal pattern related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003 Among them, a normal holding indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the condition for starting the variable display has not yet been established, and acceptance of game balls into the first start port 2002 (start winning After changing and displaying the first special pattern by blinking the eight LEDs based on the result of the first special lottery drawn by generation), these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery. The holding number, which is the number of variable displays for which the condition for starting the variable display has not yet been established, among the variable displays of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 and the first special symbol display device. Eight LEDs blink based on the first special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs to be displayed and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball into the second start port 2004 (occurrence of start winning prize) A second special symbol indicator for displaying the eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the second special lottery after the second special symbol is variably displayed by controlling, and acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004. A second special pending number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the pending number, which is the number of variable displays for which the condition for starting the variable display has not yet been established among the variable displays of the second special symbols related to the first special When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, a round indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing patterns of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006. and are mainly provided. In addition, some indicators (for example, the first special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 may be configured with 7-segment LEDs.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back case 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Production display device]
Next, the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. More specifically, the effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the approximate center. This performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is a full-color display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the production display device 1600 has two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side when viewed from the front. and have. This performance display device 1600 has a liquid crystal screen facing forward, and two fixed grooves 3010c that are open to the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of the back box 3010, which will be described later, are fitted into the back box. After inserting the two left fixation pieces 1601 obliquely behind the 3010, the right fixation piece 1602 is moved forward to insert the right fixation piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is pushed downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding.

[2-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. FIG. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are located within the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball A second starting port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first big winning hole 2005 and a second big winning hole 2006 are provided in which a game ball can be accepted in either one according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Three of the plurality (here, four) of the general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right in the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially directly below the impact portion 1006 on the upper right side in the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 to the right in front view. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning opening 2001 arranged near the upper right in the front view in the game area 5 a is arranged directly above the second starting opening 2004 . The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111 . The second big prize winning opening 2006 is arranged above the first big winning opening 2005 on the right side of the first start opening 2002 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second large winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes a second upper large winning opening 2006a and a second lower large winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which game balls circulate. It is composed of As for the second big winning opening 2006, the second upper big winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right in the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower big winning opening 2006b is arranged in the front view of the second upper big winning opening 2006a. It is positioned downwards on the left side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005. A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning slots 2001, and is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A side unit top 2300 and a frame-shaped frame having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a. A center accessory 2500 is provided.

[2-8a. starting unit]
Next, starter unit 2100 of front unit 2000 will be described. The starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out port 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. This starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 and a first big winning opening 2005 .

The starting port unit 2100 includes a flat unit base 2101 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and having a rectangular shape extending left and right and having a first grand prize winning port 2005 penetrating back and forth. A ball receiving portion 2102 protruding forward from the upper part of the left-right direction approximately center above the big winning opening 2005 and forming the first starting opening 2002, and the first starting opening attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. A ball guide portion 2103 that guides the game ball received in 2002 downward, a first start port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guide portion 2103 and detects the game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the main prize winning opening 2005 .

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big prize winning port 2005 from behind, and the front end is opened forward with substantially the same size as the first big prize winning port 2005. A box-shaped unit case 2111 and a flat plate-shaped first big prize door with a horizontally elongated rectangular shape whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so as to be able to open and close the first big prize gate 2005. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 for opening and closing the first big prize winning opening door member 2112, and a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 and received by the first big winning opening 2005. A first large winning opening sensor 2114 that detects a game ball, a first starting opening sensor 2104 attached to the upper surface of the unit case 2111, a first attacker solenoid, and a first large winning opening sensor 2114 and a main control board 1310 and a starter unit relay board 2115 for relaying the connection with the starter unit, and a starter unit decoration board (not shown) attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 for decorating the first grand prize winner 2005 with light. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 opens upward to a size that allows only one game ball to be received at a time. The first big prize winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 opens forward with a size capable of receiving a plurality of (for example, 4 to 6) game balls at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, a first starting port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is guided by a ball guiding portion 2103 to the unit base. After being guided downward at the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the first attacker unit 2110 can be penetrated and discharged downward. In this embodiment, two first starting hole sensors 2104 are provided, and in the main control board 1310, when the two first starting hole sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting hole At 2002, it is determined that the game ball has been received. This makes it possible to detect a fraudulent act by inserting a fraudulent tool into the first starting opening 2002 .

In the starting opening unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first big winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 opens to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the opening 2005 from behind to close the first big winning opening 2005 . This first big prize winning opening door member 2112 is in an upright state that closes the first big winning opening 2005, and both left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111, and the upper side is forward and The first big prize winning port 2005 can be opened from the closed state by rotating so as to move downward.

The first large prize winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (the state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first large winning prize opening 2005 . Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first big prize winning opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. Positioned. In other words, the first big prize winning opening door member 2112 is inclined forward from the lower side of the first big winning opening 2005 so as to be higher.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first big prize winning port 2005 and contacts the first big prize winning port door member 2112, the inclination of the first big prize winning port door member 2112 causes the game ball to flow from below. It changes to the rear, is received by the first big winning opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111 . After being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2114 , the game ball received in the first big winning hole 2005 is ejected downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 .

[3. control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). Peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various production devices during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a production display device 1600 and a top plate production display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display of the effect image on the device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of game balls and a launch control unit 953 that controls launch of game balls by rotating the handle lever 504 .

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311, which is a microprocessor that includes a ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and an input/output device (I /O device), a main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, a main control and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311 . The main control MPU 1311 has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting hole sensor 2104 that detects a game ball accepted in the first starting hole 2002 and a second starting hole sensor that detects a game ball accepted in the second starting hole 2004. 2551, a general winning hole sensor 3015 that detects a game ball received in the general winning hole 2001, a gate sensor 2547 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate section 2003, and a game ball that has been received in the first big winning hole 2005. 1st big prize winning hole sensor 2114, second big winning hole 2006a as second big winning hole 2006 and second big winning hole sensor 2554 for detecting the game ball accepted in the second big winning hole 2006b and Detected signals from the second lower grand prize opening sensor 2557, the discharged ball sensor 3060, the fired ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are sent through the main control I/O port 1314, respectively. is entered.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the starting opening solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, the second upper attacker Output a drive signal to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, or from the main control I / O port 1314 to the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, the second special symbol display device, the first special symbol storage A drive signal is output to an indicator, a second special symbol memory indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal symbol memory indicator, a game state indicator, a round indicator, and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper big winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning opening The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, while the general winning hole sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 2104, the second starting hole sensor 2551, And detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2547 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starter sensor 2104, the second starter sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. FIG. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened (or enlarged) and the game balls are frequently released. Since the ball enters, the game ball is frequently detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper big winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning hole sensor 2557. For this reason, the first big winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper big winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning hole sensor 2557 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3015 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various commands related to the control of the game effects executed by the effect display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. For example, it transmits to the control unit 1511 . In addition, when the main control MPU 1311 receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 , the various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power board in the power board box 930 . The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. do.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various information in the RAM 1312 during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I/O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

A character ratio indicator 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 . The character product ratio display 1317 displays the character product ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311 .

A display switch 1318 is also provided on the main control board 1310 . The display switch 1318 may comprise a momentary pushbutton switch, but other types of switches may be used. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 . Note that the role product ratio display 1317 may always display the role product ratio, and the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318 .

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311. As shown in FIG.

The main control MPU 1311 includes a CPU 13111, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, a random number generation circuit 13112, a parallel input port 13113, a serial communication circuit 13114, a timer circuit 13115, an interrupt controller 13116, an external bus interface 13117, a clock circuit 13118, a verification block 13119, a unique It has information 13120 , an arithmetic circuit 13121 and a reset circuit 13122 .

The CPU 13111 executes programs stored in the ROM 1313 . A RAM 1312 stores data necessary for program execution.

One or more random number generation circuits 13112 are provided in the main control MPU 1311 . The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery results of the variable display game results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect contents of the variable display game. The random number generating circuit 13112 is a so-called hard random number generating means that outputs a random number updated at the timing of, for example, the clock period supplied to the main control MPU 1311 (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock period). The hard random numbers generated by the random number generating circuit 13112 are used for special symbol winning lotteries, special symbol variation display game winning symbol lotteries, and normal symbol winning lotteries.

A parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315 .

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits/receives various commands regarding the control of game effects and various commands regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 to/from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314 . In addition, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits/receives various information (game information) about the game and various commands about the payout of game balls to/from the payout control board 951 via the main control I/O port 1314 . Furthermore, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the character product ratio to the character product ratio display device 1317 . A detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

A timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts to the CPU 13111 (general interrupts, NMI that cannot be masked by software). That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the vector table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the vector table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 with external devices. An I/O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0-A15), and 8-bit data (D0-D7) can be input/output from the external bus interface 13117 .

A clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock for the main control MPU 1311 from an input external clock signal (eg, 32 MHz). Also, the clock circuit 13118 divides the frequency of the input clock signal by a set number and outputs the result from the CLKO terminal to the outside. For example, a clock signal to be supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the character ratio indicator 1317 may be output.

A verification block 13119 is a functional block that verifies whether or not the ROM 1313 has been illegally modified using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311, and is written in a non-rewritable manner when the chip is manufactured.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function independent of the program recorded in the ROM 1313 . This arithmetic function is permanently written into the chip when it is manufactured.

The reset circuit 13122 has an undesignated running prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address other than the predetermined address in the ROM 1313, the undesignated travel prohibition circuit presumes that the access is by an unauthorized program, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer time elapses and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 . The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by a reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121. As shown in FIG.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function independent of a program for the arithmetic result, and has a multiplication circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215 .

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a 32-bit product. It functions as an output conversion circuit.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores multipliers and multiplicands of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A131212 and the multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214 . The CPU 13111 acquires the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214 . The process from writing values to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the operation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock). , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks has passed, the multiplication result register 131214 can be referenced to obtain the multiplication result.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) and outputs a 32-bit quotient and a 32-bit remainder. It functions as a conversion circuit that converts an input value (divisor, dividend) into a quotient and remainder by a function and outputs the result.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a dividend of 32 bits or less in the division input register A131216 and stores a divisor of 32 bits or less in the division input register B131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that values are stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, the stored values are read out at a predetermined timing, and the quotient obtained by dividing the dividend by the divisor is obtained. The result is stored in the division result register A131218, and the remainder is stored in the division result register B131219. In addition, when the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, it is preferable to erase the read values and clear the registers. Also, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start instruction is input, and store the division results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 . In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may not be erased at read timing. Further, even if the division input registers 131216 and 131217 already store values (without clearing the stored values), the values may be overwritten.

The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131219 . The process from writing values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the operation results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed within a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks). After the values are stored in the registers 131216 and 131217 and a predetermined number of clocks has passed, the division result registers 131218 and 131219 are referenced to obtain the quotient and remainder.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as will be described later, division processing is necessary to calculate the base value. It takes. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing division processing using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt processing (see FIGS. 75 and 80). . In addition, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing during the period from the writing of values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. Base calculation processing can be efficiently executed during timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 20 shows a configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114. As shown in FIG.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission/reception circuits, and each data transmission/reception circuit transmits/receives data for one channel to/from a predetermined device. Note that FIG. 20 shows only the data transmission circuit, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is implemented) is omitted.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the serial communication circuit 13114 has, as described above, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, character ratio Three channels are used, channel 2 used to communicate with driver circuit 13171 of display 1317, channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

Data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then in the transmission data register 3142 . The transmission data register 3142 is composed of a FIFO with a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores it in the transmission shift register 3144 .

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at the rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118 . Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

A command status register 3145 is a register referred to for checking the transmission status.

Communication setting register 3146 stores commands for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. Baud rate register 3148 stores the baud rate setting for defining the data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, transmission trigger setting level register 3147 and baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

These settings are described in detail below. A communication format for each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, whether or not to use FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, 1 xxx 1010B meaning even parity , and in channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317, FIFO mode, stop bit=1 bit, and 1×××1000B meaning no parity are set.

In FIFO mode, the FIFO of transmit data register 3142 is used to transmit data. In addition, since the game machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set parity when transmitting data to the outside of the main control board 1310 at high speed.

Since the character ratio display device 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the effect of noise is small compared to communication with other boards via communication wires. Also, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and there is little need to use parity. In addition, along the pattern for transmitting signals between the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, the left and right and / or thickness direction of the signal line provided on the surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board A ground pattern is provided on the layer adjacent to the signal transmission pattern), and the shielding effect of the ground pattern can reduce noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit in the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By judging the relevant bit of the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is empty, and to judge the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 .

Note that the corresponding bit of the status register can be used to determine whether there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if data is not written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period of time, if the corresponding bit of the status register is not set, the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 does not have an empty space. It may be determined that data has not been transmitted from the FIFO, and error processing (for example, error reporting) may be performed.

Baud rate register 3148 defines the data transmission rate. For example, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 is set to 19200 bps, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 is set to 1200 bps, and the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio indicator 1317 1200 bps is set for channel 2 used for communication with.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed according to the data transmitted on each channel. This is because game balls are rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuits of the gaming machine are in an environment susceptible to noise. For this reason, the data for controlling the output of balls directly related to the profit given to the player is transmitted at a low speed to the payout control board 951 so as to be reliably transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and has nothing to do with the ball being put out. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and if it determines that it is abnormal, it does not operate the peripheral control board 1510 or executes abnormality processing (for example, communication error notification), and the command request retransmission of Then, if the resent command is determined to be normal, the normal command is used to restore the state of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, communication with the peripheral control board 1510 can transmit data at a high rate. Furthermore, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player will be able to recognize the delay from the winning of the starting gate to the start of the pattern fluctuation, which may reduce interest.

The communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 is at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). good. In addition, communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 has a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). You may adopt a rate between If the data transmission rate is increased, there is a possibility that other circuits may malfunction due to transistor switching noise or the like in the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio indicator 1317 . On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data is retransmitted at each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated. returns to normal, so there is no need to reduce the transmission rate extremely.

Command status register 3145 is a register referred to for checking the transmission status, and each bit is defined as follows, for example.
Bit 7: SnTC This is a flag indicating completion of transmission, 0 indicating that transmission is in progress, and 1 indicating completion of transmission. Bit 6: SnTDBE In normal mode (a communication mode that does not use FIFO), this is a flag indicating that transmission data is empty. That is, it is set when data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and no transmission data is stored in the transmission data register 3142 .

In the SnTFTL FIFO mode, the flag indicates the transmission FIFO trigger level. amount of transmitted data is below the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, during communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, data is written in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 .
Bits 5-2: Not used (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL Bit to clear transmit buffer, break code transmit, empty transmit data, or set transmit FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), written externally. For example, when forcibly clearing the contents of the buffer, 1 is set to the relevant bit. More specifically, it is used when a command is written to the FIFO, but transmission of the written command is canceled due to some circumstances (for example, occurrence of an abnormality). Note that even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of start-stop synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the other party of communication (the driver circuit 13171 of the character product ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. FIG. Each transmitting/receiving circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, or a serial communication circuit for asynchronous communication and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication may be separately provided.

Although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating data loading timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Payout control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine is continued. Although not shown in detail, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching solenoid 682 that controls shooting. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guide unit 820, and a ball extracting switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 to start the ball extracting operation.

[3-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 951 is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM as well as functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the ball out detection sensor 827, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. be.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Of the signals output from the external terminal board 784 , the signal generated by the main control board 1310 is output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310 . In addition, the signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951 .

The error LED indicator is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 951), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it informs that there is no game ball in the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball caught" (specifically, the blade Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, it is notified that the payout blade and the game ball are engaged in the payout passage of the payout device 830 and the payout blade is difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is displayed. When there is, a ``counting switch error'' (specifically, a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified, and the number "5" is displayed. When the number "6" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, "full tank (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535, the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 are full), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is, it informs that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection is cut off in any part from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Sometimes, it is notified that it is "in stock" (specifically, that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button and a prepaid card return requesting signal from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. be done. The CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display. entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control unit]
Although not shown in detail, a firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551 has a firing control input that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, and this launch reference pulse. and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the discharge reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit, A ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to a ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle lever 504, and a stop sensor that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is to be forcibly stopped by the player's will. A detection signal from the button is input to the firing timing control circuit after being input to the firing control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle operation sensor 507, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle lever 504, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit receives a drive current for firing a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, and a firing reference pulse is input. Triggered by this, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682 . On the other hand, the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball-feeding solenoid 551 in response to the input of the ball-feeding reference pulse, thereby feeding the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. When one ball is received in the feeding unit 540 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is terminated, the output of the constant current is stopped to feed the received game ball to the ball launching device 680 side. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

In addition, the power board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 has a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power-off process even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510 includes, as shown in FIG. An effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244 is provided.

[3-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the effect driving board 3043, or the game board The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor that operates the various production units provided in 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the production drive board 3043, and the door Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the vibrating device 242 provided on the frame 3 and the door lower right drive motor 272; door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to an LED or the like; or transmit control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the tray effect display device 244 from the serial I/O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. In addition, it outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. . Detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 that indicates that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally. monitoring the action.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs music and sounds in accordance with various effects from the speaker 921 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a , 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound presentation) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It is used together with WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. k) Bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blinking command, the game board side lighting blinking command, the movable body driving command, the display command , and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

This effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting flashing command to the LED of each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, or outputs the received game board side lighting flashing command A lighting signal or blinking signal based on is output to the LED of each decoration board provided on the game board 5. - 特許庁

In addition, the effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibrating device 242 and door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. output to

[3-3b. Various control processing of the peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit as shown in FIG. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the performance control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, the hot start/cold start determination process, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for this process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect and the pachinko game output from the main control board 1310 are output. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the year, month, day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and stored in the peripheral control RAM as the current calendar information in the calendar information storage unit. , and set it in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V-blank signal, which will be described later, which is executed when a V-blank signal is input to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such determinations, a standby state is established until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by starting this 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. In this case, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to perform continuous transmission to the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 220C etc. is performed based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220. Based on the acquired various information, it monitors whether or not the operation button 220C is operated, and appropriately determines whether or not to reflect the operation state of the operation button 220C in the game effect.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP in the display data creation process described later is transferred to the VDP built-in sound source on the game board side decorative substrate 3053 and the door frame side. Output to the decoration board 233 . As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side decoration board 3053 and the door frame side decoration board 233 .

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation process to be described later to the speaker 921, or notifies other than the music and sound effects. It outputs sound data of sounds and notification sounds to the speaker 921 .

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, in order to indicate which screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the VDP with built-in sound source, Update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data, the number of light emission data from the top light emission data is to be used as the light emission mode of each LED. , to update the pointer.

In the scheduler update process, among the sound data such as music and sound effects arranged in time series and the sound command data indicating the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound, the first sound A pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data is to be output from the command data to the tone generator built-in VDP.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of which order from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program is information transmitted from the game board side decoration board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means) analyzes various commands received (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, furthermore, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into predetermined notification displays, the effect control program issues various abnormal notifications. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for execution, are stored in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of anomalies can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly before the anomaly is resolved after the occurrence of one anomaly. can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into various commands that are classified into status displays, such as In the case of the error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling in a mode different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game board side decoration board 3053 (drawing device), the door frame side A decorative substrate 233 (rendering device) and a lamp (rendering device) are used to visually warn the outside, and a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 in spite of being in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to deter fraudulent actions on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the presentation control program stores the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is designated among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Peripheral control of game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data Created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the unit 1511, set it in the peripheral control RAM, and a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the tone generator built-in VDP. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the game board side decoration board 3053. And drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side decoration board 233 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the tone generator built-in VDP. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with built-in sound source extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM, and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the performance control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM externally attached to the first backup area and the second backup area, respectively. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM are copied and backed up in the first backup area and the second backup area, respectively.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing, effect control program, first step S1009 peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and starts from setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, 1 ms in step S1010 , and step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as execution completion of the peripheral controller normal processing. is set to complete. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the tone generator built-in VDP to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP of the effect display control unit 1512. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed with the . When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 61 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

If the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral controller steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer at step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 60 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 62 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

If the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, pointer drives various motors, solenoids, and other electrical drive sources in accordance with the drive data indicated by , updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and executes this motor and solenoid drive process each time Update the pointer.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. From history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information (for example, operation operation history information of the button 220C, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side performance receiver IC of the door frame side decoration board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 of the door frame side decorative board 233 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. It is a signal that is output to inform the decision when it is judged.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the first backup area and the second backup area for backup, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup second area. 1 area and the backup second area, respectively, to be backed up.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. are doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V-blank signal, the peripheral control unit will not be affected by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt. After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Also, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side decoration board 3053 and the door frame side decoration board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the sound source built-in VDP are mounted. In addition, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly depending on the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 as well. In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[3-4. Effect display control unit]
Next, the effect display control unit 1512, which controls drawing of the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the plate effect display device 244 in the peripheral control board 1510, is displayed as a microprocessor, although detailed illustration is omitted. A control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the effect display device 1600 and the table effect display device 244, and the effect display device 1600 , an image ROM for storing various data of screens displayed on the sub effect display device 3114 and the top plate effect display device 244, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the effect display device 1600, the sub Rendering control of the effect display device 3114 and the dish effect display device 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the tray effect display device 244. A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to corresponding schedule data, its control data (display command), and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244. ing. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data is the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the top plate effect display device 244 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data. are stipulated.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. Thus, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and displays the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the top plate effect. Drawing data to be displayed on the display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the top plate effect display device 244. Also, when the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, or the top plate effect display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to notify that effect. . Note that the VDP employs a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" is a method in which drawing data for one line for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 is held in a line buffer, and is held in this line buffer. This is a method of outputting the drawn data for one line to the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, or the top plate effect display device 244. FIG.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the top plate effect display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the effect display device cannot be ignored. 1600 , the drawing speed on the sub effect display device 3114 and the top plate effect display device 244 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the rendering display device 1600 or the top plate rendering display device 244. FIG. For example, when various persons (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, or the tray effect display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called "sprite". As a result, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, or the table effect display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. For these sprites, the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order") are set. and is drawn on the plate effect display device 244 .

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the top plate effect display device 244 sequentially set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel from left to right when viewed from the front. , and sub-scanning that repeats main scanning in a direction intersecting with the one direction. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 display the effect display device 1600 and the sub-effect display device 1600 as main scanning. When viewed from the front of the display device 3114 or the top plate effect display device 244, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 are sequentially scanned from left to right as viewed from the front as main scanning for one line. Output to each pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, game balls are stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 by rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 by the player. is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more the handle lever 504 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. That is, the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and game balls are placed on the obstacle nails. By abutting, the falling speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball hit to the top of the center role 2500 enters the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500 to the left of the highest portion in front view, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are generated. While contacting the center accessory 2500, it flows down in the left area. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500, it passes through the warp passage 2521 and passes through the center role. It is supplied to the stage 2530 through the guide path 2523 from the warp exit 2522 opening in the frame of 2500 .

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and moves to the center guide portion 2531 in the center in the left and right direction, or the side guide portions 2532 on the left and right of it. is emitted backward from either When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530, the central guiding portion 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so the game released from the central guiding portion 2531 The ball will be accepted into the first launch port 2002 with high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide part 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. - 特許庁A game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the first big winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and will enter the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200. 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters (is hit) to the right of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500. ), it enters into the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540 . In the upper right circulation space 2541, although not shown, a plurality of obstructing pegs are planted, and the game ball circulates while abutting against the obstructing pegs and variously changing its flowing direction. In this upper right circulation space 3541 , a gate part 2003 is provided in the upper part, and a general prize winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 normally closed by a second starting opening door member 2549 are provided in the lower part.

The game ball flowing down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enters into the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right circulation passage 2542 on the downstream side. The game ball that has entered this lower right circulation space 2543 is the second upper big winning hole 2006a and the second lower big winning hole 2006b that are arranged side by side as the second big winning hole 2006. The upper surfaces of the door member 2552 and the second lower big prize opening door member 2555 pass through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and enter the game area 5a from the left end of the lowered release plate portion 2559 on the left side in front view. released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is open so that the game ball is directed to the first large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first large winning opening 2005 is in the open state , When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the second attacker path 2543a, the game ball is accepted in the first big winning hole 2005 with a high probability.

A game ball that circulates in the right circulation path 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 flows down while an increase in circulation speed is suppressed by a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 . In rare cases, in the lower right circulation space 2543, it may enter the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a. It is discharged outside the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right circulation space 2541 passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, normal random numbers are updated within a numerical range predetermined in the main control board 1310. A normal lottery is performed by obtaining one normal random number from among them and comparing the obtained normal random number with a predetermined normal winning judgment table. When the result of this normal lottery is "normal hit" when the time saving control described later is not executed, the second start opening door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front to open the second start opening. 2004 is opened, and it is possible to accept game balls into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period of time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time-saving control is executed, a lottery is drawn to select which of the ``first normal win'', ``second normal win'', and ``third normal win'' as the ``normal win'' in the normal lottery. Then, when the time saving control is executed, the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is one of "first normal win", "second normal win", and "third normal win", the second start opening door member 2549 By rotating in the counterclockwise direction in the front view and opening the second start port 2004, the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 over a predetermined period. By rotating in the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting port 2004, the opening and closing control is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 times). In addition, when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "first ordinary hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where it is possible to accept game balls 5 times "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", and "0.28 seconds" as the periods of five times when the second starting port 2004 is in a state capable of accepting game balls. , "0.3 seconds", and when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "third normal hit", the second start port 2004 is set to a state where it is possible to accept game balls. The period is set to "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "second normal per" and "third normal "Hit" is a hit that is more advantageous to the player than the "first normal hit" (easy acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004). In addition, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) game balls from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 are paid out to the upper tray 201. be.

In this embodiment, in the variable display of the normal symbols performed by the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbols are displayed after starting the variable display of the normal symbols. A certain amount of time (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time) is set until the stop display (until the normal lottery result is suggested). In the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. In addition, during execution of the time saving control described later, the control for shortening the normal fluctuation time is performed more than normal (the state in which the time saving control is not performed). In addition, the opening time to rotate the second starting port door member 2549 to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the game state, for example, time saving control is performed. You may make it change the opening time of the 2nd starting mouth 2004 to a long time compared with the case where time saving control is performed when there is nothing.

In addition, after the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, until the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device is stopped and displayed (until the result of the normal lottery is indicated), a new game ball is placed in the gate section. After passing 2003, it is not possible to start the variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device, so the start of the variable display of normal symbols is continued until the variable display of the previous normal symbols is completed (the result of the normal lottery). I'm trying to put it on hold until the suggestion ends). Specifically, the normal random number acquired by the main control board 1310 is stored based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate part 2003 by the gate sensor 2547, and the normal symbol fluctuation display can be started. The start of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended until. It should be noted that the number of normal random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 has an upper limit of 4, and the game balls that pass through the gate section 2003 are discarded without being held. . As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 updates the numerical range predetermined. One first special random number is obtained from one special random number, and the obtained first special random number is collated with a predetermined big hit determination table to provide an advantageous game state (for example, "big hit") that is advantageous to the player. , "small win", etc.) is performed. Then, based on the first special lottery result drawn, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink over a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds). After that, the first special lottery result The result of the first special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode corresponding to (displaying the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the first special lottery after the first special symbol is variably displayed). The results of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 include "lose", "minor win", "2R big win", "8R big win", and "10R big win". By comparing the first special random number obtained with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which one of these, and after the jackpot game, it is normal (low probability state: in this example, the probability is about 1/395 Probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as probability variable state): winning a jackpot with a probability of about 1/44 in this example) to improve the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) rather than winning a jackpot) Whether to execute (whether it is a probability variable jackpot) and whether to execute time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time than usual when at least the first special lottery result is lost (whether it is a time saving jackpot) ) and the period for executing the time saving control (the number of times of time saving: special design (the number of fluctuations of the first special hitting design and the second special design)) is also discriminated. Incidentally, the winning probability of the "small win" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

In addition, when the game ball accepted in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated within a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310 The second special random number is acquired, and the obtained second special random number is collated with a predetermined big hit determination table to create an advantageous game state (for example, "big win", "small win", etc.) that is advantageous to the player. ) will be drawn for the result of the second special drawing. Then, based on the selected second special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink over a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) After the second special lottery result The result of the second special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode corresponding to (displaying the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the second special lottery after the second special symbol is variably displayed). It should be noted that the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball in the second starting port 2004 includes "lose", "2R big win", "4R big win", "5R big win", "6R big win", There are ``7R jackpot'', ``8R jackpot'', and ``16R jackpot'', and by collating the acquired second special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which one of these, and furthermore, after the jackpot game, the normal ( Low probability state: probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as variable state) to improve the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) than the probability of winning a jackpot with a probability of about 1/395 in this example): this example Then you will win the jackpot with a probability of about 1/44) Whether to execute (whether it is a probability variable jackpot or not), and at least if the second special lottery result is lost Time saving control that shortens the fluctuation time than usual Whether or not (time saving state) is executed (whether it is a time saving jackpot) and the period for executing time saving control (number of times of time saving: special pattern (number of fluctuations of first special hitting pattern and second special pattern))) and also discriminate It is designed to be

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state , Eight LEDs of the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) after the elapse of a predetermined fluctuation time are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and then the first big winning opening Either of 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006 will be in a state in which a game ball can be received with a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball is received in the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 A predetermined number from the payout device 830 (for example, 11 when the game ball is received in the first big winning opening 2005, or 15 when the game ball is received in the second big winning opening 2006) Game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201. - 特許庁Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are capable of accepting game balls, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 to accept the game balls, many games can be played. Balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is a "small win" or "2R big win", the first big winning hole 2005 holds the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). Repeat the open/close pattern multiple times (eg, twice) to reach an acceptable open state and then close. On the other hand, if the special lottery results are "4R big win", "5R big win", "6R big win", "7R big win", "8R big win", "10R big win", and "16R big win", the first big prize opening 2005 or the second large prize winning port 2006, after it becomes an open state capable of receiving a game ball, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or it is predetermined to the first large winning prize port 2005 Either the number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted to the second big winning hole 2006, and any condition is satisfied. , an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which a game ball is in a closed state, is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 4 rounds for a "4R big win", 5 rounds for a "5R big win", and 16 rounds for a "16R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R big win" (the first big winning opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) It is difficult to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 2005 substantially in the opening and closing pattern that closes after becoming an open state that can accept the game ball. On the other hand, the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery results are "4R big win", "5R big win", "6R big win", "7R big win", "8R big win", "10R big win" and "16R big win". (After the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 becomes an open state capable of accepting a game ball, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or the first big winning hole 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted into the second big winning port 2006 or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted to the second big winning opening 2006 When this condition is satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 in the open/close pattern that makes it impossible to accept the game ball. In addition, if the special lottery result is "4R big win", "5R big win", "6R big win", "7R big win", "8R big win", "10R big win", "16R big win", the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 becomes open to accept a game ball, or the first big winning opening 2005 is preliminarily determined. Either the number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted to the second big winning opening 2006, any condition is satisfied. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball is in a closed state that cannot be accepted may be used as a substantial special lottery result, and the number (for example, , 7) game balls are accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted into the second big winning hole 2006, or any condition is satisfied, the game balls are satisfied. and the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is a "small win" or "2R big win" (the first big prize winning opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds 0.6 seconds), it may be provided to execute a plurality of rounds. For example, as a special lottery result, "8R jackpot with real 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted into the first big prize opening 2005, or the second big prize opening 2006, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted or any condition is satisfied, after repeating the open/close pattern four times to make the game ball unacceptable in a closed state, The opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (first big winning opening 2005 for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds), An opening/closing pattern that closes after being in an open state capable of accepting game balls) may be repeated four times.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second big prize opening 2006 is composed of a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b arranged side by side. In the case of "jackpot", for example, in the first round (1Rth), the second upper big winning opening 2006a is opened to allow the reception of game balls, and is closed when the conditions for unacceptability are satisfied, making it possible to accept the next game ball. Until (during the interval), the second lower big winning hole 2006b is opened to start the next round (2Rth) in which the game balls can be accepted, and when the second lower big winning hole 2006b becomes unacceptable, In the meantime, since the period of the interval has passed, the second upper big prize winning opening 2006a is opened again to allow reception of game balls. Then, the second upper big prize winning opening 2006a and the second lower big winning prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are completed. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, either the second upper big winning hole 2006a or the second lower big winning hole 2006b can receive the game ball during the "jackpot". When the game ball is circulated in the second attacker passage 2543a by hitting right with , the game ball is surely accepted in the second big prize winning port 2006, and the game ball is not left out to entertain the player. can be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for some of the above-described multiple types of big wins, whether or not the time saving control is executed after the end of the big win game is differentiated according to the game state at the time of winning the big win. For example, when the result of the first special lottery is an 8R normal jackpot in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big win game in a non-time saving state (state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big win game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game. When the result of the second special lottery is a 2R normal jackpot in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big win game in a non-time saving state (a state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big win game. On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery is the 2R normal jackpot in the time saving state (when the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the big win game. In addition, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result in the low probability non-time-saving state (both probability improvement control and time-saving control are not executed: normal state) Execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game In the case of the 2R probability variable jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the 2R probability improvement control is executed after the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are big hits in a state other than the normal state where the probability improvement control is executed or the time reduction control is executed. In the case of a big hit, time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display device by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002, and the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004 The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the two special symbol display devices is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and the second Until the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is stopped and displayed (until the second special lottery result is suggested), the first start When a new game ball is received in the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device newly start the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Because it is not possible, the start of the fluctuation display of the special design (first special design, second special design) until the end of the fluctuation display of the previous special design (first special design, second special design) (first special lottery pending the completion of the results and the suggestion of the results of the second special draw). Specifically, the first special random number obtained by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted in the first starting hole 2002 by the first starting hole sensor 2104, and the second starting hole sensor 2551 The second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted by the second start port 2004 is stored, and special symbols (first special symbol, second special The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbol) can be started. In addition, the first special random number and the second special random number holding number that can be stored in the main control board 1310 are respectively up to four, and more than that are used in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. A ball is accepted but discarded instead of being held. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations. Also, of the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310, the second special random number is preferentially digested. That is, regardless of the reception timing of the game ball to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the symbol.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 (the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device) and the performance display device 1600 (the sub performance display device 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is repeated lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs that constitute the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) for a predetermined time. The lights are blinked and then stopped in a predetermined lighting mode, and the special lottery result is suggested by the combination of the LEDs that are lit at the time of this stop.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested by the effect image. is done. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a series of decorative pattern rows consisting of a plurality of different patterns are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern). The variable display of the symbol rows is started, and then the display is stopped in sequence (in this example, the left decorative symbols → the right decorative symbols → the middle decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in order), and finally all the decorative symbol rows are stopped and displayed. Then, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped symbols is suggested to the player side. In other words, according to the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) obtained when the start winning occurs, the plurality of decorative pattern rows fluctuate. After being displayed, an effect image is displayed that is stop-displayed so as to suggest the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). The decorative design displayed on the effect display device 1600 is larger than the first special design variably displayed on the first special design display and the second special design variably displayed on the second special design display. Since it is easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). The time until the display is displayed) is different, and the time for the function display unit 1400 is set to be shorter.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, according to the special lottery result of the lottery, the decoration body of the center accessory 2500, the back left center By appropriately using the decoration unit 3050, the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, the back top left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc. Light-emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, and the like can be performed, and the players can be entertained by various effects, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[5. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. Specifically, system/user reset processing executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 ms in this embodiment) by a timer activated by the system/user reset processing. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure of initialization processing of the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, thereby enabling writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and "03H" indicating activation of the watchdog timer is written. Furthermore, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure notice voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit detects the power failure. A blackout warning signal is input from In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the process is made to wait for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) while activating the watchdog timer.

If the predetermined wait time has passed, the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) has passed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). . When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the role product ratio calculation work area (the role product ratio calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30 ) and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power failure flag has been set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off through normal processing such as power failure (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. S30), and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48 The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may not be correct. (other than the character product ratio calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. proceed to

Subsequently, using the check code, it is determined whether or not the work area for character product ratio calculation (area for character product ratio calculation 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the role product ratio calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the role product ratio calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In addition, when one or more backup areas are provided in the character product ratio calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup area 1 , 2, and N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal should be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area can be erased or left as is. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

As for the area for calculating the role product ratio, the data in the area for calculating the role product ratio 13128 may be erased at predetermined time intervals, separately from the check code determination result when the power is turned on. In addition, for each predetermined amount of operation (for example, each predetermined number of shot balls, each predetermined number of winning balls, each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) Data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

Thus, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are different for each type of data (the game control data 13132 and the character ratio calculation/display data 13136). Erase conditionally. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed up character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased. If the role product ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the role product ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at any timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased, thereby preventing the erasure of the character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall staff. , It is possible to prevent the concealment of an abnormal state of the character ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled to have a high or low accessory ratio.

The main control MPU 1311 executes initial setting for setting various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when power recovery setting of the RAM work area or RAM initialization processing is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, the initial setting of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) is performed and interrupts are permitted. In addition, the serial communication port and test signal output port are initialized. Start the hardware random number generator. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951 and the character product ratio display 1317 is set. Furthermore, after starting the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114, initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 is performed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes processing for setting a power-on command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command generation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . A power-on command is generated by setting the power-on state reference command as reference command data and adding command addition data corresponding to the command to be generated.

The power-on command includes a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol/electric accessory operation number command. The state buffer command at power-on is a command for notifying the game state at the time of restoration after power-off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the normal electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol/electric accessary product operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). Initialization of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the processing from power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initialization means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal (step S36), and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure warning signal is not ON (result of step S38 is "No"), that is, random number update processing is executed (step S40). In the random number update process of step S46, random numbers other than the random numbers for judging wins are mainly updated in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery. Note that random number update processing for judging winning in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery is executed by timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure warning signal is detected, and these processes are defined as the main control side main process (normal means after initial setting).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes power failure processing (power failure setting means). In the power failure process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, and writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 is prevented, thereby protecting game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set in the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption during the time until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal.

Subsequently, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the role product ratio calculation work area (the role product ratio calculation area 13128) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, there is no need to calculate the check code in step S50. It should be noted that the check code may be calculated and stored each time the data is updated in the character product ratio calculation/display process instead of the main board power-off process.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the character product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the role product ratio calculation work (area for role product ratio calculation 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) in the character product ratio calculation/display process instead of the process when the power is turned off on the main board side.

By storing the data used for calculating the character ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code in this way, the data for calculating the character ratio can be retained even when the power is cut off. , the function ratio in long-term operation can be calculated.

Further, a value indicating normal backup is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register, writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S58), and the system waits until recovery from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization processing shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 . FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 to the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the registers (step S70). The main control board 1310 in this embodiment has bank 0 and bank 1, which are switched each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect game balls that have entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, and prize ball control processing. The payout control board 951, which tells that the payout control board 951 has received the prize ball command sent in the normal way, is read from the payout control board 951 and stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, in the switch input process, detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the fired ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs timer update processing (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 lights up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process described later, the normal determined by the normal symbol and normal electric auditors control process In addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the symbol variation display pattern, a payout control board 951 normally receives various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). Time management such as ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not an ACK signal is input is performed. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes random number update processing 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the random number for judging a big hit, the random number for a big hit design, and the random number for a small hit design are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the small hit are updated in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S40 in the system/user reset process (main process on the main control side) shown in the figure. The random number for design initial value determination is also updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is performed. create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, (see FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The processing of step S81 can be skipped when there are no prize balls to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes frame command reception processing (step S82). In the payout control board 951, by the payout control program, various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays are transmitted. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 as output information. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the normally received command as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, frame status display command, error cancellation notification command, etc.), and transmits the above-mentioned transmission as transmission information. Store in the information storage area. In addition, in the prize ball discharge process, the number of prize ball discharges is recorded in the storage area (see FIG. 27) determined by the gaming state of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 .

The character ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the character ratio calculation/display process (step S89). .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes fraud detection processing (step S84). In the fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and when it is detected that the game ball is entering the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 by the count switch when it is not in the jackpot game state, the main control program creates a prize winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process, it is determined whether or not the random number value for the big hit matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Furthermore, based on the jackpot symbol random number value, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. Then, when the variable probability transition condition is satisfied, the state is shifted to the probability variable state after that, and when the variable probability transition condition is not satisfied, the state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "variable probability state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the odds of winning the special lottery are set relatively high compared to the normal game state (low probability state).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol per determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal per symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" “General Lottery”). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the ordinary lottery. When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be received in the starting port 2004. A game advantageous to the player. transition to state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switch 1318 is operated. By referring to the number of prize balls stored in the calculation area 13128, the role ratio is calculated. Then, the calculated role product ratio is displayed on the role product ratio display 1317 (step S89). Thus, by calling the role product ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the role product ratio, it is possible to confirm the role product ratio (gambling property of the pachinko machine 1) based on the most recent data.

Regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated or not, if a body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the character ratio may be displayed. . Also, when the display switch 1318 is operated while the body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the role product ratio is displayed on the role product ratio display 1317. good too. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, if the display switch 1318 is displayed, the body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, when the role ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division and subtraction for calculating the role ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

Details of the character product ratio calculation/display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25 . A specific example of the method of displaying the character ratio will be described later. In addition, when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (character ratio, continuous character ratio, total, total total) may be calculated, but each time the display switch 1318 is operated, You may calculate only the values that Also, the character product ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated character product ratio may be displayed on the character product ratio display 1317 if the display switch 1318 is operated.

Note that even when the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and stops the game, the role product ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the role product ratio calculation/display process (step S89) are executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, by executing these processes, it is possible to check the role product ratio even during the fraud notification.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311 . For example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, when normally receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 output the main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or jackpot game When in the state, output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that performs opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the large winning opening 2005, 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that performs the opening and closing operation of the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), information output signal during probability fluctuation, special design display information output signal, normal design display information output Various information (game information) signals related to games such as signals, information output information during time saving, start winning prize information output signals, and security signals are output to the payout control board 951 .

Also, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal plate 784. FIG. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 every predetermined number of out balls (10, etc.).

In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a special symbol stop symbol (information signal output means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information stores various commands created by the timer interrupt processing of this routine. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation processing of the role ratio and the continuous role ratio in the timer interrupt process. You may perform the calculation process of a material ratio. In this case, the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be sent a command for displaying the role ratio and the continuous role ratio, or from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511 A command for displaying the character product ratio or the continuous character product ratio may be transmitted.

[5-3. Character ratio calculation/display processing]
FIGS. 24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of character product ratio calculation/display processing. The main control MPU 1311 executes the role product ratio calculation/display processing. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the character product ratio calculation/display processing. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the character product ratio, the calculated character product ratio may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when the calculated accessory ratio is within (or outside) a predetermined range, the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the role product ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the notice effect may be changed to perform a notice effect that is more interesting than the normal notice effect.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is compared with the check code stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is normal, so the role product ratio calculation process is executed and the role is calculated from the data in the main area. The product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated and stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the character ratio is calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls, and the ratio by the number of continuous acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls. It is preferable to truncate or round off the decimal part (value below the decimal point) of the calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S156, each time the character product ratio and/or the continuous character product ratio in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 is updated, the updated value may be copied to the backup area.

If the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, in the calculation of the character ratio, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted and division is performed. may be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, numerical values from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8- or 16-bit calculations, the lowest 16 bits of the number of winning balls stored in 32 bits with a value of 1 is taken out and calculated. It is preferable to divide by storing in a register (16 bits). If the number of acquired balls is less than the maximum number of bits (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits) that can be used for calculation, the lower 16 bits should be taken out and used for calculation.

Also, if the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100 (rounded down to the decimal point) and used as the dividend (divided number) to calculate the character ratio, calculation using decimal numbers can be avoided.

Also, the upper limit of the character product ratio may be set to 99, and may be set to 99 when the calculation result of the character product ratio is 100 or more.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, so calculation of the character product ratio from the data in the backup area 1 is performed. try. Specifically, the check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128. (step S146). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148 ), a role product ratio calculation process is executed, and a role product ratio and a continuous role product ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code does not match the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, so the character product ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. try. Specifically, the check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128. (step S152). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154 ), a role product ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read, and the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

If there is another backup area, similarly, it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all the backup areas are abnormal, the character product ratio calculation work area (character product ratio calculation area 13128) is initialized, and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The reason why the check code is calculated in the character ratio calculation/display process is that if it is reset in the middle of the power failure process on the main board side, the power failure flag and checksum are not calculated. Although the backed-up data is initialized, if the check code is calculated and stored periodically in the character ratio calculation/display process, the work area for calculating the character ratio can be saved even if the pachinko machine is turned on again. This is because the data in (character product ratio calculation area 13128) can be left without being erased.

Subsequently, the backup area allocation counter value is updated by adding 1 (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area allocation counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area allocation counter value is an odd number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). It is possible to prevent an abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas by distributing the copy destinations of the data in the main area according to the backup area distribution counter value and writing the data only to a part of the backup areas.

When three or more backup areas are provided, the backup areas to which data is written may be allocated according to the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area allocation counter value by the number of backup areas.

Subsequently, the calculated role product ratio is displayed on the role product ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of role product ratio and the calculated value, a conversion table (not shown) is referenced to obtain data to be displayed on each digit of the role product ratio display 1317, The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the character product ratio display 1317 . For example, if the type of role product ratio is the role product ratio (total), A7 is displayed in the upper two digits, and if the calculated role product ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

The role ratio calculation process (step S156) of the role ratio calculation/display process reads out the data of the number of obtained balls from the role ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the role ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 27). , Data cannot be written in the storage area related to the number of winning balls in the role product ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processing of steps S156 and S172 is configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the character ratio calculation area 13128. , data can be written in the storage areas for the calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio.

As explained above, the data for calculating the character product ratio in the character product ratio calculation/display process is duplicated in the backup area. , the data for calculating the character ratio can be protected.

It should be noted that the processes of steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of gaming machine, and thus may be configured with one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code in the main area and the check code in the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the data check and backup methods differ from model to model. However, if the data check and backup methods are shared among the models, they may be arranged in a common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. FIG.

ROM 1313 contains game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debugging (inspection function) code 13133, debugging (inspection function) data 13134, character ratio calculation/display code 13135, and character ratio calculation/display An area for storing data 13136 is included. The ROM 1313 of this embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. and debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134 and a role product ratio calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for the purpose of calculating the role product ratio, such as the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the role product ratio calculation/display data 13136. is assigned.

Between the end address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, there is a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more, and when displayed in dump list format In addition, the game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 and the leading address of the character product ratio calculation/display code 13135. When displayed in the form of a dump list, the debug (inspection function) area and the character product ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. The value stored in the empty area should be the same fixed value, and should be set to a value different from or less frequently set to the value set in the game area and debug area. Also, the value stored in the empty area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that causes the CPU to do nothing. In this way, when displayed in dump list format, the game control area, debug (inspection function) area, and character ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Alternatively, the code 13135 for calculating/displaying the character ratio and the data 13136 for calculating/displaying the character ratio may be stored in a part of the debug area without dividing the debug (inspection function) area and the character-object ratio calculation area. good. That is, it is sufficient if the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, the character ratio calculation area (the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 and character object The ratio calculation/display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that a malfunction (such as a bug) of the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 affects the game control.

In addition, the debugging (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes not directly related to the game. A code 13133 for outputting an inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. Further, the role product ratio calculation area stores a program for the purpose of calculating the role product ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game.

Also, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311 . In addition, the game control code 13131 can be read and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be performed. Thus, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area accessible only from the game control code 13131 . The processing based on the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed. is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the modification of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. .

Also, the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311 . The character product ratio calculated by the character product ratio calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 . As illustrated, the role product ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). Thus, by designing the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 is inspected and the game control code 13131 is stored. can be performed separately from the inspection of the pachinko machine 1, and the labor of inspecting the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Also, the code 13135 for calculating/displaying the role product ratio can be used in common for a plurality of models without depending on the model.

FIG. 26B is a diagram showing details of the character product ratio calculation area 13128. As shown in FIG. The character product ratio calculation area 13128 may include a main area for storing the calculation result of the character product ratio, and a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 for storing a copy of the data stored in the main area. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set each time the data in the main area is updated in the character ratio calculation/display process, or is set in the process when the power is turned off on the main control side (Fig. 22 steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power failure process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Also, if the power failure flag is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the check code of each area has a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Incidentally, if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether or not the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Also, in the main control side power-off process, the values in the main area may be copied to each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Also, in the role product ratio calculation/display process, every time the value in the main area is updated, the updated data may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2 . By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digits of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128. As shown in FIG. The data of the number of winning balls in the character ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) clocked by the main control MPU 1311, and the character ratio calculation processing (step in FIG. 24) of the character ratio calculation/display processing S156). In this way, the role ratio calculation/display process reads out the data of the number of acquired balls from the area 13128 for calculating the role ratio, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) stores the data of the number of acquired balls in the area 13128 for calculating the role ratio. By writing , the game control program and the program for executing the character ratio calculation/display processing can be completely separated, and the program for the character ratio calculation/display processing can be shared even on gaming machines with different specifications. .

Note that the character product ratio calculation processing (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the character product ratio calculation/display processing uses the calculated character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio as the character product ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the character product ratio calculation area 13128. Write to the ratio storage area. Data of the calculated character ratio and continuous character ratio are read in the character ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the character ratio calculation/display process when the character ratio is displayed. The game control program does not access the storage area of the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 .

FIG. 27A shows the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of winning ball, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the ratio of the winning role, and the ratio of the continuous winning role are stored. The number of prize balls obtained is the number of prize balls obtained by winning prizes for the prizes in operation (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 that are open, the second start opening 2004 that the second start opening door member 2549 is open). be. The number of consecutive award winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize to a role while the role is continuously operating (for example, the winning opening is open during a series of jackpot wins). The total number of won balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The role ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls. The continuous role ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls acquired in a row divided by the total number of acquired balls. The number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt process, Stored.

Among the structure of the work area shown in FIG. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numeric values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data will not be erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is provided so that long-term data can be stored. Also, the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of successive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are stored. Each data storage area is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n=10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls). When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers for all the data are moved, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After the data for the predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (number of acquired balls, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol variation display games, number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, You may move the write pointer.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings are moved for each predetermined number of winning balls. Further, the read pointer also moves along with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer points to the storage area one before the write pointer. This is for calculating the character ratio using the most recent data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer. Yes, when the ring buffer is cycled and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the role ratio and continuous role ratio calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data after the ring buffer completes one cycle, the total accumulated value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of winning character balls, the number of consecutive winning ball, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are the same as those explained in FIG. 27(A). The number of other won balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning prizes other than accessories (a winning opening that does not open and close, for example, the general winning opening 2001). The total number of won balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. The number of acquired balls, the number of other acquired balls, the number of continuous acquired balls, and the total number of acquired balls are updated in the storage area where the write pointer is located in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the percentage of the acquired role and the number of continuous winning balls are updated. The product ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 27C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), it is possible to obtain more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 27(B). , Other winning hole winning ball number, continuous role winning ball number, total winning ball number, role ratio and continuous role ratio are stored. Each data storage area is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of winning balls is When the predetermined number (6000) is reached, the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After the data for the predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when data other than the total number of acquired balls (number of special electric accessory acquired balls, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol variation display games, number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number You may move the write pointer to

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer. When the ring buffer is cycled and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous component ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the total accumulated value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIGS. 27(B) and (C), the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, and the normal electric winning balls Each of the number, the number of winning balls for the special electric accessory, the number of winning balls for the starting opening, and the number of winning openings is a storage area of 2 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 65,535 in decimal. Number of winning balls, number of other winning balls, number of continuous winning balls, total number of winning balls, number of normal electric winning balls, number of special electric winning balls, number of starting balls and other winning balls The cumulative total of numbers is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the sum of data for 6000 prize balls×n (60000 prize balls when n=10), a large storage area is provided. Number of balls acquired, number of other balls acquired, number of consecutive balls acquired, total number of balls acquired, ratio of role, ratio of consecutive roles, number of normal electric accessories acquired, number of special electric accessories acquired, starting point The number of winning balls and the total cumulative number of winning balls are each a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16,777,215 or 4,294,967,295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not deleted unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is provided so that long-term data can be stored. Also, the sum total and total sum of the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are each a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), the total acquired number of balls, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are the same as those explained in FIG. 27(B). The number of other winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning prizes other than accessories (a winning opening that does not open and close). The number of winning balls of the normal electric accessory is the prize ball obtained by winning the normal electric accessory in operation (the second start port 2004 with the second start port door member 2549 open) according to the result of the lottery based on the normal pattern. is a number. The number of winning balls of the special electric role is the number of prize balls obtained by winning the special electric role in operation (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 that are open) according to the result of the special symbol lottery. The number of winning balls from the starting opening is the number of winning balls obtained by winning the starting opening (first starting opening 2002). The number of other prize-winning balls is the number of prize-winning balls obtained by winning a prize in a prize gate (general prize gate 2001) that is not an accessory (does not operate) and does not trigger a special symbol lottery. The number of normal electric accessory winning balls, the number of special electric accessory winning balls, the number of starting opening winning balls, the number of other winning opening winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls are obtained in step S81 of timer interrupt processing. The data in the storage area with the write pointer is updated, and the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of timer interrupt processing.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27A, when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. Data will not be erased on the occasion of Therefore, the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 may be erased for each predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total accumulation in FIGS. 25B and 25C may be erased every predetermined period.

Also, the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated character product ratio is an abnormal value (for example, the character product ratio is over 100%, the calculation result of the character product ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculation value , the number of winning balls>total number of winning balls, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. All the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted in addition to the abnormal value. In addition, when the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated character product ratio is an abnormal value, an abnormality may be notified. Also, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the character product ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Configuration of character ratio indicator]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the character product ratio display 1317. As shown in FIG.

The character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172 . For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 consists of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are preferably housed in one package as a unit, but both may be housed in separate packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the character ratio display 1317 and signals for setting the operating state of the character ratio display 1317 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311 . The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating data loading timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311 . The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operating cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311 .

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals for lighting each LED element (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7 segment LED 13172 . The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit control signals indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 the signals transmitted by the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp are. The direction of the illustrated signal (current) differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is of the anode common type or the cathode common type, but an example of the anode common type is illustrated.

The R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171 is connected to a resistor 13174 that determines the current value to be passed through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 . By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the light emission brightness of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio indicator 1317. As shown in FIG.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A-D, an 8x4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2x8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, a driver 3179, It has a latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 , a Digit-Limit controller 3181 , a duty ratio controller 3182 , a data selector controller 3183 , a standby mode controller 3184 and an oscillator 3185 .

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16-bit data, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. The 4 bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 35), and the 4 bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting the operation mode and the corresponding register. (see FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are data for the detailed settings.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and D15 to D8 are controlled by each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section 3183, standby mode control section 3184), and send D7-D0 to 8-bit data latches 3173A-D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rise timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section 3183, standby mode control section 3184). Also, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at the fall timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 . A latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects an 8-bit data latch 3173 that stores display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 selects data register 0, that is, 8 bits of Digit-A. Signals to select 8-bit data latch 3173 so that data latch 3173A stores data.

The 8-bit data latches 3173 are provided for the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, take in the data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED, Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8×4 data selector 3174 .

The 8×4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at the predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends it to the decoder 3175 and 2×8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses the character generator decode table (see FIG. 34) to convert the input data into characters to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to 2×8 data selector 3176 .

The 2×8 data selector 3176 refers to the decode setting and selects the data from the decoder 3175 when the mode is set to use the decoder, and selects the data from the decoder 3175 when the mode is set to not use the decoder. 4 Select data from data selector 3174 . The selected data is input to constant current driver 3178 .

The constant current driver 3178 uses data from the 2×8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. The current output from constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal, as described above.

Driver 3179 accepts a sink current of the current output from constant current driver 3178 to illuminate each segment of seven segment LED 13172 . Driver 3179 controls the current sink timing of terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3 to determine which 7-segment LED (digit) is displayed.

Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by driver circuit 13171 . That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of digits to be lit from 1 to 4 by external setting. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to XXXXXX0011B, a setting is made to use all four digits in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. is written. Note that x indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio control section 3182 controls the duty ratio when the 7-segment LED 13172 is lit. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by setting from the outside, and controls the brightness with which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights. The duty ratio control section 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179 . Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 00100000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 can be set to 16 levels of duty from 0/16 to 15/16. Ratio settings are written.

A data selector control unit 3183 controls the setting of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not the decoder 3175 is used by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001××××B, the settings for using the decoder are written to the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000××. By inputting the data of XXB, the setting of NO DECODER that does not use the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select the data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to not be used. It controls the x8 data selector 3176 to select data from the 8x4 data selector 3174 .

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls standby mode setting and data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by external setting. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In the standby mode, the setting at that time is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is interrupted, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

In addition, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all data held therein by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all data held in registers and latches are cleared and initialized.

Oscillator 3185 generates the clocks used within driver circuit 13171 .

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIG. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is indicated by solid lines, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is indicated by dotted lines.

FIG. 31(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of the implementation example 1. FIG. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without being destroyed once closed. (sticker, engraving, printing, etc.) or tamper seal is attached. The unsealed seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310 .

Mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In implementation example 1, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1311 is preferably mounted such that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in a main control board box 1320 and constitutes a main control unit 1300 . The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that it has not been improperly remodeled. Moreover, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that it has not been improperly remodeled by arranging no parts around it.

The character ratio indicator 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the character ratio indicator 1317 should be the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the model number display of 1320 on the main control board box. Moreover, it is preferable that the longitudinal direction of the character ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are aligned in the same direction. In addition, when the main control board 1310 is mounted in the game machine in a landscape orientation, the longitudinal direction of the character ratio display 1317 or the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are the same. It is preferable to implement the character ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that it becomes. In addition, when the main control board 1310 is installed in a game machine in a portrait orientation, the longitudinal direction of the character ratio display 1317 or the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are at 90 degrees. It is preferable to implement the character ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to be oriented.

Connectors CN1 and CN2 for drawing out signal lines from the main control board 1310 have ends along the long sides of the main control board 1310 (upper side Although it is the upper end along the side, it may be mounted on the lower end along the lower long side or the end along the left and right sides). That is, the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the character ratio display 1317, and it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged at a position where the character ratio display 1317 is not obstructed. .

Furthermore, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached to a position that does not overlap with either the main control MPU or the character ratio indicator 1317 .

By mounting the character ratio display 1317 in this way, the model number display of the character ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct direction, and the visibility of these is improved. Even in the inspection after installation, it is possible to check the ratio of accessories and whether or not the main control MPU 1311 has been modified without taking an unreasonable posture.

In another implementation example shown in FIG. 31(C), the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display of the character ratio display 1317 are mounted in the same direction, but circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 The orientation of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the orientation of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display of the character ratio indicator 1317 . Also, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the unsealing sticker attached to the main control board box 1320 . This is because the importance of circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 is low when inspecting unauthorized modification, so there is little significance in arranging them in the same direction on the main control board 1310 .

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the character ratio indicator 1317. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 32A, the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio indicator 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may become unstable due to noise. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 as close as possible.

For example, as illustrated, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio indicator 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101 L1) arranged to be shorter. That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

Also, as described above, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311, as indicated by the dotted line, in order to easily confirm from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made. For this reason, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but the length L2 is made as short as possible.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or in different packages, and in either case, they are mounted such that L1 is greater than L2.

FIG. 32(B) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the character ratio indicator 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 32(C) is a diagram showing the implementation example shown in FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a printed circuit board; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 32B, ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 . Furthermore, on the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 where no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and inner layer of the signal line 13101 . It is preferable to provide a ground pattern 13107 as a guard pattern or a power supply pattern on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106 .

To explain the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13103 that supplies the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 should avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 placed so that they do not cross). Also, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the rear surface or the inner layer through the through hole 13105 . In this case also, the signal line 13104 is arranged to avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not cross each other).

In addition, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board having patterns on the front and back sides and no inner layer. It can also be applied to multi-layer substrates (4-layer, 6-layer, etc.) having inner layers.

FIG. 33 shows a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171. As shown in FIG.

A load register selection table is a table for determining a register for storing data input to the driver circuit 13171 .

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by duty ratio control section 3182 to set the duty ratio for lighting 7 segment LED 13172 . For example, when D15-D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7-D0 is data for setting the duty ratio and is written to the duty register of the duty ratio control section 3182. FIG.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181 to set the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence/absence of decoding and the number of display digits. The decode register and the number of digits register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence/absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits. It is written to the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181 .

The data registers are used by 8-bit data latches 3173A-D to set the data to be displayed on each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172. For example, if D15-D8 are 00100010B-00100101B, the data set in D7-D0 is data for turning on the 7-segment LEDs and is written to the data registers in the 8-bit data latches 3173A-D.

The duty ratio, the presence/absence of decoding, and the number of display digits, which are set in the registers described above, do not need to be set every time the character ratio is displayed. is set as In addition, if the setting is made only once in the initial setting, there is a possibility that the setting will be changed due to the influence of noise after the initial setting. is pressed). As a result, correct display can always be performed even if the settings are switched due to noise.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decode table. The character generator decode table is used by decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data for display on 7-segment LED 13172 . By using the character generator decode table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. When displaying numbers, since D5 to D0 match the numbers to be displayed, the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 without conversion.

The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states: an initial state, a data input state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (all lighting). is prepared.

To control these five states, there are mode setting instructions for blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby. A blank command shuts off the output of constant current driver 3178 and the output of driver 3179 . The normal operation command causes the 7-segment LED 13172 to display after completing each setting. When a normal operation command is input without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of digits to be used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. D11 to D8 select a register into which data is to be written, and D7 to D0 input contents to be set in the register (see FIG. 33). The all lighting command turns on the output of the data side constant current driver 3178 to light all segments of the 7 segment LED 13172 . Standby instructions are divided into two types according to parameters: a standby instruction for transitioning to a standby state and a clear instruction for transitioning to an initial state. The standby command maintains the current settings, stops the operation of the constant current drivers 3178 and 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. A clear command clears and initializes all data held in registers and latches, and turns off the display.

Note that the blank command is also a kind of display command, so in this specification, "display" includes any state of all lighting of the 7-segment LED, lighting of a part of the segments, and all extinguishing.

A display example in each state described above will be described with reference to FIG.

When the game machine is powered on, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 has not been completed or the display data has not been set, so the initial state (ALL BLANK) is present. All segments of are turned off. Also, when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game can be played, the character ratio indicator 1317 cannot be visually recognized.

After initial setting is completed by setting control data in various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 , when display data is input, a predetermined display is performed on the 7-segment LED 13172 . As for this predetermined display, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits or all segments may be lit. It is preferable that the normal operation of the character product ratio display 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

Further, when the body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that the character product ratio display 1317 can be confirmed to be operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be illuminated.

When the display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED is turned on (lighted according to the input data). Specifically, the character product ratio display state is entered, a code indicating the display content is displayed on the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and the value of the character product ratio is displayed on the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the character ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, when the displayed character product ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display the fact so as to be identifiable. For example, all digits (or numbers) are displayed by blinking, or the decimal point is lit or blinked.

Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display contents of the 7-segment LED 13172 are changed. In other words, another kind of character product ratio is displayed. Also in this case, the left two digits indicate the code indicating the display content, and the right two digits indicate the value of the character ratio. In the example shown in FIG. 36(D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the character ratio 2 is 63%. Also in this case, similarly to the above, it is preferable to provide a display that allows the user to identify that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range. A more specific display example of the character product ratio will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the character ratio display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is preferable to turn off the lights to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This character product ratio non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed, but may be a different aspect as long as it can be distinguished from the character product ratio display.

FIG. 36(E) is a display example when the character ratio indicator 1317 or the main control MPU 1311 has an abnormality and the character ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be illuminated, blinked, or displayed differently for each digit. Also, the abnormal display may be in a form different from that illustrated, as long as it is distinguishable from the normal character product ratio display in order to indicate that the character product ratio display is not possible.

In addition, when an all-lighting command is input in any state, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit. In addition, when a blank command or a standby command is input in any state, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are extinguished while retaining data. In addition, when a data clear command is input in any state, all the data held in the registers and latches are cleared, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit, and the state returns to the initial state.

[8. Display of character ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the character product ratio will be described.

As described above, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 provided on the main control board 1310 . As described above, the character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED or an effect display device, and displays the numerical value of the character ratio in the lower two digits and the type of numerical value in the upper two digits. display.

Also, the character ratio indicator 1317 may be composed of a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, it is preferable to alternately display the value of the role product ratio and the type of the value.

The display mode of the numerical value of the role product ratio may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the result of comparison between the role product ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the role product ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (green when normal, red when exceeding the reference value, etc.). By changing the display mode according to the result of comparison with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the character ratio is abnormal.

The character ratio indicator 1317 may be composed of one or more LED lamps. When the character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of one LED lamp, the result of comparison between the character ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in different modes. For example, when the character product ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and when the character product ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. Also, when the role product ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is lit, and when the role product ratio is larger than the reference threshold value, it is displayed by blinking.

When the character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the character ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the character ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are lit. In this case, it may be displayed in different display modes (display colors) depending on the display contents (character ratio or continuous character ratio, recent data display or mid-term data display, etc.).

In addition, if the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the period for collecting prize ball data is short, and the value of the character ratio may not have converged, so it is displayed in a different display mode (display color, blinking, etc.) You may It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is less than the threshold is different from the display mode when the total number of acquired balls exceeds the above-described reference value.

The character product ratio display 1317 may display the latest data, the medium-term data, and the long-term data by switching. The latest data display is the role product ratio calculated using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and (C). The medium-term data display is the role product ratio calculated using the cumulative sum in the ring counters shown in FIGS. 27(B) and (C). The long-term data display is the character product ratio calculated using the total sum in the ring counters shown in FIGS. 27(B) and (C).

The function display unit 1400 may also be used as the character ratio indicator 1317 . The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the character ratio. Although the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the body frame 4, it is preferable to continue the progress of the game. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the character product ratio display to the display of the game state. For example, when the body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variation display game, the character ratio is displayed, but if the body frame 4 is closed before the variation time elapses, the variation display for the remaining time can be performed. can. Since the special symbols displayed on the function display unit 1400 are synchronized with the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols stop at the timing when the special symbol variation display on the function display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the character ratio, it can be configured so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

The character product ratio display 1317 may display other than the character product ratio. For example, the number of winnings per type of winning opening per unit time and the number of winning balls paid out may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, or 10 hours.

The character ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the normal ball output rate excluding special prizes (during big hits), and can be calculated by dividing the number of safe balls by the number of out balls. The number of shot balls (number of out balls) is detected by a shot ball sensor 1020 . As described above, the shot ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exit (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game ball from the ball launcher to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Also, the number of out balls may be detected by the discharged ball sensor 3060 . As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In addition, an out-hole passing ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) is provided to detect game balls passing through an out-hole 1111 provided in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the number of game balls detected by the out-hole passing ball sensor 1021, The number of out balls may be detected based on the sum of the number of game balls detected by the starting opening sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by various winning opening sensors 3015 , 2114 , 2554 and 2557 . Further, a ball sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball supplied to the ball launching device 680, and a game ball (so-called foul ball) that has been launched from the ball launching device 680 but has not reached the game area 5a. A foul ball sensor (not shown) that detects is provided, and the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) is calculated by subtracting the number of foul balls from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launching device 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor. may be detected.

The number of out balls may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient to provide either the discharged ball sensor 3060 or the fired ball sensor 1020 among the illustrated sensors.

Also, the number of safe balls is equal to the number of awarded balls. Also, the base may be defined as the ball output rate for each game state (during normal play, during power supply, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and calculated by the number of safe balls / the number of out balls for each game state. . By displaying the base on the role ratio indicator 1317, it is possible to check the deviation of the ball putting performance from the design value during operation for each game machine on the spot. In addition, since the ball-putting performance can be confirmed without using a hole controller, inspection of each game machine can be easily performed during an on-site inspection of the game arcade.

The character ratio indicator 1317 displays information about other prizes and prize balls of the base (the number of prizes won to the general prize gate 2001 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, the number of prizes to the start gate 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, The number of winnings to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls resulting from the winning, etc.) may be displayed.

The character product ratio display 1317 may always display the character product ratio, or may display the character product ratio by operating the display switch 1318 . For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the character ratio is started, and the display is turned off after being displayed for a predetermined time. Note that if the display switch 1318 is operated while the body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the role product ratio is displayed on the role product ratio display 1317. good. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the body frame is open, the character ratio display 1317 does not display the character ratio.

Also, the display content may be changed for each operation of the display switch 1318 . For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the role ratio (total), is displayed in the upper two digits, and the role for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is displayed. Display the ratio in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the upper two digits switches to A6, which means the continuous role ratio (total), and the continuous role ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is reduced by 2. It may be displayed on the digit (Fig. 37(B)). Furthermore, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the role ratio (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the upper two digits, and the role ratio according to the latest data is displayed in the lower two digits (recent data display). (Fig. 37(C)). When the display switch 1318 is operated once more, the display of the upper two digits is switched to y6, which means the role ratio (total), and the role ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is displayed in the lower two digits. Display (mid-term data display) may be performed (FIG. 37(D)).

The display switch 1318 may not be provided as an independent switch, but may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510 . That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a display switch 1318 when operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, only one switch is operated by the staff of the game arcade, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the gaming machine in operation, and to check the gambling nature of the gaming machine in operation.

In addition, since the data of the number of winning balls is accumulated as the character ratio calculation/display data 13136, and the check code is abnormal, the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is erased, so that an incorrect character ratio is displayed. can be avoided.

In addition, since the data 13136 for calculating and displaying the character ratio is erased under conditions other than the conditions for erasing the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the accurate number of prize balls is retained. , can calculate the exact role ratio.

In addition, since the role product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the role product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by mistake due to the operation of the game hall staff. Since the product ratio calculation/display data is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased due to an erroneous operation by the staff of the game arcade. In addition, since the amusement center cannot intentionally delete the data for character product ratio calculation/display, the reliability of the character product ratio to be displayed is increased, and concealment of a high character product ratio can be prevented.

[9. Display Base]
[9-1. Basic Configuration of Game Machine Displaying Base]
So far, the embodiment of the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the character ratio has been described. Next, the embodiment of the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value will be exclusively described, but the character ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball wins at the starting port (the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004), a lottery based on random numbers is performed, and a special symbol variation display game is executed. . The variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation display game is a relatively short time variation pattern (normal variation pattern of about 10 seconds, shortened variation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easy to select when the number of reservations is large) Or, there are relatively long-time fluctuation patterns (variation patterns such as Super Reach exceeding 1 minute). When the base value is calculated by the pachinko machine, the notification of the base value requires less urgency than the notification of the error. However, if the variable display time is long, without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the number of out balls (number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls number) has changed), it is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls (the number of payout balls ) changes), calculate and display the base value. Next, a specific configuration of the pachinko machine that operates in this manner will be described.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has almost the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may use, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIGS. A 7-segment LED may also be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the area update process for calculating the role ratio (step S81) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311, A base value is calculated and displayed in the role product ratio calculation/display process (step S89). In the following description, the "renewal process for calculating the character ratio calculation" in step S81 of FIG. calculation/display processing”. 26, the "character ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is read as "base calculation area 13128"; The description will be made by replacing the "character product ratio calculation/display data 13136" with "base calculation/display data 13136".

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of base calculation region update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update process, the current game state is determined, the number of prize balls to be paid out as game value is added to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 is updated. do. In particular, the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out-balls is directly updated using the number of out-balls (step S822).

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). When the game state is during the special prize, it means that the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can win many prize balls, but the opening and ending times of the big win game are included. good. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed during one big win, the time (closing interval) from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the condition device is in operation, for example, from the finalization of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the instruction to hit to the right.

Furthermore, in the starting ports 2002 and 2004, during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during electric sapo may be included in the special prize. Furthermore, in a game state other than during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during power supply, a predetermined time after opening the starting port 2004 after closing (for example, until the ball that has won the starting port is detected as an out ball) seconds required) may be included in the prize.

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculation of the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the special prize relating to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during operation of the condition device (for example, from the finalization of the jackpot pattern of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of winning balls and out balls other than those during the special prize, normal winnings (during the so-called big wins) to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening and closing member uses winning balls and winning balls other than during the special prize (low probability time and non-time saving time) to calculate the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize openings 2005 and 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls to calculate the base value regardless of the game state (whether or not a special prize is being played). Not used, other accessories (starting port 2004) can be switched between using the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls for calculation of the base value or not depending on the game state (whether special prizes are in progress or not). It will be. Not using the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value means not counting the paid out prize balls in (the number of prize balls other than those in the special prize, which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value), It also includes not creating edge information for paying out prize balls according to the winning signal even if the winning signal is input.

Also, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small win) even when the condition device does not operate. In general, small hits occur during a short period of time, and since the game balls are less likely to win due to the short opening, there is no influence on the calculation of the base value. However, it is also possible to generate a small hit during a time other than the special prize (normal time) and open only the time when the possibility of winning the game ball becomes high. In this case, winning balls and winning balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins other than during the special prize may be used for calculation of the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly comply with the standard of the base value, and improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is during a special prize, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation region updating process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation region updating process may be the number of prize balls determined to be put out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prepared payout command may be used. Alternatively, it may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command that has already been sent. Moreover, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the reception confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 . Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls (the number of paid out prize balls) that receives a payout completion report from the payout control board 951 . This variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. FIG.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether there are prize balls or not, and if there are no prize balls, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. In addition, although the game balls enter the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the suspension is the upper limit value, and even if the winning to the starting ports is not suspended, the prize balls are paid out, so the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a game state in which no prize balls are generated even if a game ball enters the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), no prize balls are generated due to the winning, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out-balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out-balls is updated so that the acquired number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ball sensor 1020, the ball sensor 3060, etc. In the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a sensor detection signal, an out ball is detected. Get the number of balls=1. The total number of out-balls is recorded in the total number of out-balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312 . That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (Fig. 40), so the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge without delay whether the base is normal or abnormal.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46), which will be described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed out, and when the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up, a command for stopping the abnormal prize notification is generated, and the abnormal prize notification is performed. may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes base value calculation processing in timer interrupt processing, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute base value calculation processing. In this case, a command for notifying the base from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511 may be sent.

Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if the information of both the winning ball to the winning hole and the out ball is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). The number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (or the number of out-balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winning to a plurality of winning openings is acquired, the total number of winning balls due to multiple winning is calculated as the total number of winning balls (or in the embodiment described later, ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize-winning sensor detects a prize-winning hole with 5 prize balls and a prize-winning hole sensor with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls are detected as the total number of prize balls. (or add to the prize number buffer).

Also, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the shooting of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time after detection by the ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of winning balls (or the number of winning balls buffer). In addition, the operation of the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops operating) to the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds)) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Also, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) when the player is operating the firing handle. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is detected to touch the contact detection sensor 509 with the palm or finger is counted as the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize number buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the base value from being reflected in the base value of the prize balls due to an abnormality in which the prize balls are detected in a state where the game balls are not shot or fraudulent acts, and to prevent an incorrect base value from being displayed. Further, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, the base is calculated by excluding the number of winning balls and the number of out balls during the special prize, but the number of winning balls due to the winning of the general winning opening and the starting opening are not counted even during the special prize. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated by counting the number of out-balls, excluding the number of balls that have entered the big prize pool.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated each time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). When the total number of winning balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. In addition, if an abnormal base value is calculated (e.g., if the total number of balls won is greater than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value must not be calculated. good too. When the base value is expressed as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of awarded balls divided by the total number of out balls by 100. Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number by which the total number of balls stored in divide input register A131216 is multiplied controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated up to the 1's place in the hundredth fraction, and the fractions below the decimal point are not calculated. Also, if this predetermined number is 10000, the base value is calculated to two decimal places in a fraction of 100. That is, by dividing the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit by 100, the base value of the fraction of 100 with two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. During the 32-clock wait time from writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to reading data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 waits without performing any other processing. may be performed. For example, the random number for judging the winning or losing of the jackpot may be updated between the writing of data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and the reading of data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock cycle supplied to the main control MPU 1311 (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle). is also updated with hard random numbers.

That is, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processes related to the game include at least a process of updating random numbers for judging winning or losing. Also, during the calculation (division) process in the arithmetic circuit 13121, the random number that affects the game result is updated one or more times.

Also, if the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128 . In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify an abnormality of the base value. Abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. In addition, a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of divergence of the base values.

There are various methods for base notification, and one or more of the methods described below may be used in combination. For example, the base value may be notified at all times or at a predetermined timing by the base indicator (7-segment LED) 1317, effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, and the like. Informing the player of the base value may allow the player to check the condition of the pachinko machine. At that time, the display mode described in the role item ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage notation on the indicator or the display device described above. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. In display devices capable of displaying images, such as the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the first decimal place is displayed and displayed in more detail. may

When displaying a base value on the base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317 . That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data to be set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as the base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 designates the digits for displaying numerical values in D15 to D8 by "data n setting", and sets the display content in D7 to D0. is generated and written to the shift register 3171 .

Also, when the base value is displayed on the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) is provided for the base value, and if the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. . For example, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green when normal, red when exceeding the standard, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple steps. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages, and may be displayed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow in each stage. In addition, when the base value is low, self-deprecating comments may be displayed at each stage, such as "I'm feeling good", "I'm getting worse", "It's not bad", and "In a way it's amazing". If the base value exceeds the standard value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud is being carried out. For this reason, it is desirable to display in a manner that indicates a warning such as red. In addition, the display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, "similar" means that at least one of display, lamp, and sound is the same.

In addition, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be notified by various lamps, effect display devices, sounds, or the like. Further, when the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command may be generated for displaying on the effect display device that base notification is impossible. By transmitting the notification command to the generated sub-board, the effect device controlled by the sub-board can notify the state of the base. can be reduced. Further, by informing that the base display is impossible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between the failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of the base value to be displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the effect display device, the abnormality of the base value can be known without looking at the back side of the game board provided with the base display 1317.例文帳に追加

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317 . In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 should be used for constant notification. In addition, it is preferable to notify at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, when the special symbol variation display game is finished while the special symbol variation display game is not being executed).

Base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game arcade. In this case, as in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, etc.) to be described later, outputting base information at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of winning balls and for each predetermined number of out balls) good.

The base information output from the external terminal plate 784 may be a binary (high, low) signal indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold value. In addition, a signal having a length roughly indicating the calculated base value may be output (for example, a 30-millisecond pulse when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%). Also, the number of continuous pulses roughly indicating the calculated base value may be output (eg, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

The base notification command may be generated even when the base value is not updated, and the base notification command may not be generated when the base value is not updated. The display of the base value continues even if the base notification command is not generated.

In addition, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 56, etc., it determines whether the calculated base value is abnormal, generates a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value, and notifies the player or the hall employee of the abnormality of the base value. may be notified.

Also, whether or not to inform the player of the base may be determined according to the game state (game situation). This is because, if the base value is constantly reported to the player, the player's attention to the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original enjoyment of the pachinko machine, may be neglected and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. is.

Also, based on the calculated base value, the effect of the special symbol variation display game being executed or to be executed in the future may be changed. For example, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of display selection tables and select an effect from different display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) depending on the base value.

Also, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold value (for example, 30%) during the special symbol variation display game. Therefore, when the threshold value is exceeded or fallen below during the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. When the base value rises above a predetermined threshold value and when it falls, the effect may be changed in the same manner, or the effect may be changed in different manners.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of winning balls is updated in the base calculation area update process of step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation/display process of step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), The prize number buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). Thereafter, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89), and the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 . When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In addition, the number of undischarged prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of undistributed prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to transmit a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is not necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of completion of ball payout. do not have. On the other hand, when the main control board 1310 backs up the number of undistributed prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout, but the payout command reception confirmation is transmitted to the main control board 1310. No need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, an abnormality in the gaming machine can be detected early. For example, when it is determined that the base value is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol variation display game, and the predetermined threshold is exceeded. The game is not stopped even if it is determined as such, and the calculation processing of the base value is continuously executed regardless of the abnormality determination. For example, the special symbol variation display game includes short-time games such as normal variation and long-time games such as reach variation, and the base value is calculated from the start to the end of one special symbol variation display game. If the condition is met multiple times, the base value should be calculated each time, and the base value should be updated and displayed each time. This is because if the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variation display game is restricted (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the variation display), it may take a long time to change the base value depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because there is a possibility that the information necessary for hall operation will not be output at an appropriate timing, causing inconvenience to the hall.

Also, if the launched game ball does not enter the starting opening or the general winning opening, the base value is lowered. In this state, the player is at a loss, so for example, additional effects to the effects performed on the liquid crystal (for example, effects related to wins and losses that are not related to changes in the base value, and effects that appear with changes in the base value) (Specific effects to be added), and notice effects with high expectations for big hits (among the effects that are not related to changes in the base value, notice effects with high expectations such as the next notice effect, and changes in the base value Of the specific effects that appear, a highly anticipated advance notice effect (for example, displaying the base value in a rainbow display) may be performed. As a result, the player can be motivated to continue the game by alleviating the discomfort caused by not winning the starting slot and the general winning slot.

On the other hand, if many of the launched game balls enter the start hole or the general winning hole (if more than the average number of past winnings wins), the base value rises. In this state, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the player receives more game balls than usual, so the player's disappointment is alleviated. The effect of the variable display game may be changed to a less expected effect.

[9-2. Variation of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44, variations of the update timing of the number of awarded balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described. The outline of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Fig. 41: Number of prize balls calculated → Number of prize balls updated → Base value calculated → Payout command sent ・Fig. 42: Number of prize balls calculated → Number of prize balls updated → Payout command sent → Base value calculated ・Fig. 43: Number of prize balls calculated → Send payout command → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Fig. 44: Calculate number of prize balls → Send payout command → Confirm command reception → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Fig. →notification of payout completion→update of the number of prize balls→calculation of the base value Note that the variations shown in FIGS. It is applicable to any base calculation area update process and base calculation/display process.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the procedure of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. - Execute the display process (step S89).

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base calculation area. In the updating process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. Thereafter, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 . When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or You may omit either of the ball payout completion.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the procedure of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. to run.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (step S90). After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and the base ratio is calculated. The base value is updated in the display processing (step S89). The number of prize balls corresponding to the generated payout command may be used instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 . When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or You may omit either of the ball payout completion.

In addition, the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830, so the base calculation area update process ( The order of step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (step S90).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 .

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the number of winning balls buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of undistributed prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951 so that the data of the number of undischarged prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs. Therefore, although it is necessary to confirm receipt of the command from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the procedure of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (step S90).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 . When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or Award number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the main control board 1310 backs up the data of the number of unpaid prize balls so as not to lose the data of the number of unpaid prize balls when a power failure occurs. Therefore, it is necessary to notify the completion of the ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, but the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment updates the number of winning balls and the number of out balls, which are the parameters used for calculating the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the processes shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the number of winning balls is updated when the winning opening sensor detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74). Also, in the processing shown in FIG. 43, when the payout command is transmitted, the number of prize balls is updated. Also, in the process shown in FIG. 44, the number of prize balls is updated when the reception of the payout command is confirmed. Also, in the processing shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of prize balls is completed.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls during the special prize cannot be counted accurately due to the difference between the timing of determining whether the game state is the special prize and the timing of updating the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem becomes serious when it takes a long time to update the number of prize balls after winning a prize in the prize opening. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning prize during the special prize, and the flag is inherited to the number of winning balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification. Then, using the flag, it is determined at each stage whether the ball is in the middle of a grand prize. In this way, even if it takes a long time to update the number of prize balls after entering the winning hole, the number of prize balls during the special prize can be accurately counted and updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of winning balls and the number of out balls are updated at these opportunities, and the base values are calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known from the game machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be shortened, and the game machine can be efficiently manufactured.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of undischarged balls, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which the winning is detected is not counted. Add to the number of balls paid out. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of unpaid balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In this case, each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated, the number of prize balls buffer for calculating the base value or the total number of prize balls may be updated. Also, the number of prize balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 .

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which winning is detected to the payout control board 951. Even when the pachinko machine is out of balls and prize balls cannot be paid out, a payout command is transmitted and the number of unpaid balls is held in a payout control board 951.例文帳に追加In this case, each time a payout command is transmitted, it is preferable to update the number of prize balls buffer or the total number of prize balls for calculating the base value.

Also, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. Although a predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of prize balls, the upper limit may not be set. Moreover, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

Also, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, without comparing the winning balls buffer value with the threshold value Th1, every predetermined number of wins (for example, 10 times) or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) , steps S891 and S892 may be performed.

As described above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various times. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. FIG. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figures 39 and 40: Calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 46 and 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of winning balls ・Figures 48 and 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out balls Calculation ・Figure 50 and Figure 51: When either the number of awarded balls or the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, the base value is updated.

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the number of prize balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). In FIG. 46, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process (FIG. 39), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is during a special prize, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, whether the number of prize balls obtained is one or more (step S812). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer (step S813). Each time the number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall, or the number of prize balls, which will be described later, becomes a predetermined threshold value Th1 or more. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the winning ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of winning balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls is defined as a number of prize balls in a predetermined time period other than during the special prize (for example, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the start opening, a prize corresponding to 10 or more prizes per minute) sphere) is obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls provided with a plurality of stages of allowable ranges. Also, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, it is not necessary to add the number of prize balls acquired to the number of prize balls buffer in step S813. good too.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player or hall employee that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for announcing an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, various lamps, effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sounds, and the like may be used to notify the abnormal number of prize balls. Also, an abnormality in the number of winning balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Furthermore, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal may not be used for calculating the base value. In this case, prize balls may be paid out to the player. Also, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and is notified by the above-described notification means (sound, lamp, LED, effect display device, information output from the external terminal board 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal May be used to calculate base values. Furthermore, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all data in the RAM of the peripheral controller 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, the game is started from operation confirmation in the initial state. As another method of stopping the game, the game is temporarily stopped (for example, the variable display of the special symbols is stopped), and after the error notification is stopped, the original state is restored and the game is restarted. Therefore, even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, the power failure detection signal is output, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. After the error notification ends, the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area, and the game is restarted. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 as it is. However, 100 game balls (that is, out balls) are launched into the game area 5a, and all game balls may enter the general winning opening or the starting opening, so an abnormality in the number of prize balls is notified. It is preferable that the mode of alerting is a gentle mode (for example, a low volume or a low amount of light than a normal error notification) that is less urgent than a normal error (such as a magnetic sensor error). Also, the display time may be the same as or shorter than that of normal errors. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and the notification may not be performed.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

After that, the number of out-balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out-balls is updated so that the acquired number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for announcing abnormal prize balls started in step S817 has timed up (step S824). Then, when the timer for prize ball abnormality notification times up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the abnormality of the prize ball for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so that the abnormality is notified only for the predetermined number of shot balls. may Alternatively, the anomaly may continue to be reported until a hall employee confirms it.

In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of awarded balls in step S985. (ie, whether there is an abnormality in the base value). For example, if the number of winning balls exceeds the number of out-balls in a predetermined time, or if the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the starting opening is considered, a high percentage of out-balls (for example, 50% or more) wins. For example, if

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 47, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as those of the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 40) described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the value of the number of prize balls buffer may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the value of a predetermined bit in the number of prize balls storage area may be used for determination. If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Also, in the base calculation region update process (Fig. 46), the determination result of comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold Th1 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation and display process (Fig. 47), the flag is used to set the number of prize balls buffer is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value Th1.

Then, if the number-of-balls buffered value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to calculate the base value, so the base calculation/display process ends.

On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). That is, if the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1), the fractional portion of the number of prize balls is calculated. Retain (leave the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the number of prize balls buffer in the number of prize balls buffer), store the other part in memory (add the threshold Th1 to the total number of prize balls), and use it to calculate the base value Execute the processing to be performed. Specifically, when the threshold value Th1 is 100, the prize ball number buffer value is 99, and if 5 prize balls are generated by entering the general winning hole, the prize ball number buffer value is 104. However, 100 are moved to the total number of balls to be used for calculating the base value, and the remaining 4 are left in the number of winning balls buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball buffer is used for calculating the base value when the prize ball buffer value becomes equal to or greater than the threshold value Th1 next time. Also, although the threshold value Th1 has been described as 100, other numerical values such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a big win is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed. If there are jackpots (e.g., 4-round and 8-round jackpots), it should be set to less than or equal to the minimum number of prize balls per jackpot. In addition, from the viewpoint of detecting fraud at an early stage, it is preferable to update the base value frequently. For example, it is preferable to set the threshold Th1 to 10 instead of 100 because the base value is updated frequently.

It should be noted that steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined number of wins (for example, 10 times) without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1. Furthermore, Steps S891 and S892 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the winning ball number buffer value with the threshold value Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311 or measured by the output of an RTC (real time clock).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error (or undefined). In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

In addition, when the total number of out balls is 0, or when the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the base value may not be calculated and the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated. For example, when the total number of out balls is less than or equal to the total number of prize balls, the base value is 100% or more, and the number of prize balls equal to or more than the number of shot balls (out balls) is obtained, and the game is normally played. Therefore, it is not necessary to store numerical values in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and to calculate the base value. Further, when the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, the base calculation area 13128 need not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Also, the abnormality of the base value may be determined with a threshold of 1500%. Since the theoretical upper limit of the base value of a pachinko machine in which the maximum number of prize balls per winning hole is 15 is 1500%, a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is Also in this case, the base value may not be calculated, or the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Also, the threshold for determining whether the base value is abnormal may be another value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in normal operation of the pachinko machine is determined, and if it is outside the range of the normal value, the value read from the division result register A 131218 is used to fill the base calculation area 13128. It does not update and may not update the display of the base value.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

As will be described later with reference to FIG. 52, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values from when the pachinko machine 1 started operation. It may be initialized at timing (for example, every predetermined number of winning balls, every predetermined number of out balls).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment determines whether the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is obtained, so that fraud can be detected early. This is because during a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of shot balls) do not enter the general prize winning opening 2001 and the start openings 2002 and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, an abnormality in the prize winning to the prize winning openings (the general winning opening 2001 and the starting openings 2002 and 2004) which are always open is determined and notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated when the number of winning balls satisfies a predetermined condition, so an accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number. load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 48, the number of out balls is recorded in the number of out balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 48, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, as a result of determination in step S812, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation region updating process shown in FIG. 48, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for prize abnormality notification is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

Also, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls. For this reason, for example, when a game ball wins the starting hole and it is decided to generate a look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the pending display is displayed in a mode different from usual (blinking display, red pending, etc.), The player expects that the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the prefetched hold will be a big hit, but the player will be disappointed if the special symbol variation display game fails. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls as in this embodiment, the disappointment of the player as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the timing of generating the prize ball, so that the base value increased by the prize ball that has entered the starting hole is notified. That is, even if it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect at the time of winning to the start opening, even if the number of prize balls paid out at the time of winning to the start opening is added, the above-described predetermined number (for example, threshold value Th1 = 100) If not reached, the base value is not updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should increase (in some cases, only the lower value changes due to the number of display digits, and the display does not change). Therefore, even if the above-described look-ahead effect is missed, the player thinks that the base value will rise later (that is, the player is in good shape), and the loss of interest can be suppressed. In other words, even if it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value has not reached the predetermined number (threshold value Th1). In addition, when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect and when the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. .

It should be noted that the player may be allowed to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate it without delay. For example, at the start of the game, the operation button 220C can be used for selection. Also, the calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to execute an effect capable of notifying the delay in the calculation of the base value. In addition, when the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game reaches the upper limit, the jackpot lottery is not executed even if the player wins the starting slot. Even in this case, since prize balls are paid out as a prize is won in the starting hole, the number of prize balls is counted and used for calculating the base value. In addition, even if you win a start gate or a general winning gate due to a specific error, it will be treated as no winning and if no prize balls will be paid out, the number of prize balls will not be counted, and the base value will depend on the winning. is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 49, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball number buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the number of out-balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out-balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of out-balls is composed of 8 bits). , if the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Also, in the base calculation area updating process (Fig. 48), the determination result of comparing the number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (Fig. 49), the number of out balls is specified by the flag. is equal to or greater than a threshold value Th2.

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation/display processing ends.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out-ball number (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball number buffer (step S900). Steps S899 and S900 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, one minute) without comparing the out-ball number buffer value with the threshold value Th2.

Thereafter, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

The total number of awarded balls and the total number of out-balls are cumulative values from when the pachinko machine 1 started operation. may be initialized for each number of balls or for each predetermined number of out balls).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, may notify the base value with a specific effect, or may notify an abnormality of the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed each time the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at appropriate timing. Also, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that pursues amusement.

In addition, each time a prize ball is detected (detection of a prize, transmission of a payout command, arrival of a payout command, completion of payout of prize balls, etc.), the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. This is because there is a possibility that the base value cannot be calculated correctly if it is checked whether a predetermined condition is satisfied when adding the number of prize balls (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball). For example, even if the shot is not performed for a predetermined time (about one minute), the slinging (grape) state caused by the game ball being caught on a nail arranged in the game area is eliminated, and the game ball is delayed in the winning opening. This is because they may win prizes. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

If both the number of out balls and the buffer value of the number of out balls are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the buffer value of the number of out balls is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the buffer value of the number of out balls may be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the base value is calculated when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number. The amount of calculation (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. be done.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 50 records the number of prize balls in the number of prize balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , records the number of out pitches in the number of out pitches buffer. In FIG. 50, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for prize abnormality notification is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the buffer value for the number of out balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S897), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the buffer for the number of out balls (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify an abnormality of the base value. Note that the base notification command may be generated each time the base value is calculated, or the base notification command may not be generated even if the base value is calculated.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of won balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value and the base value remains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded balls or the total number of out-balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the specific structure of the work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128. As shown in FIG.

The data of the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated in the base calculation area updating process and the base calculation/display process executed by the main control MPU 1311 (Figs. 39, 46, 47, 48, 49, 51, etc.) and read out in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 40, 47, 49, 51, etc.). In addition, the data of the winning ball number buffer and the out ball number buffer of the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update process (FIGS. 46, 48, 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation - Read out in display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, 51, etc.). For this reason, base calculation area update processing and base calculation/display processing can be configured separately from timer interrupt processing (game control program). can.

FIG. 52(A) shows an example of the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(A), winning ball number buffer, total winning ball number, out ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer, specific winning ball number buffer, total out ball number and base are stored. The number of prize balls buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls) is used to calculate The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player except during the special prize. The number of out balls buffer is the number of game balls shot by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of out balls). be done. The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the starting opening. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls that have won a specific general winning hole or starting hole. The winning ball number buffer is used when counting the number of out balls by the number of balls passing through the out hole (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when correcting the number of out balls with the number of winning balls into a specific general winning hole (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls shot by the player except during the special prize. The base is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls/total number of out balls×100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation/display processing.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(A), the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls correspond to each area of the total accumulation shown in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later. and can store values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data will not be erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. The base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total sum of bases in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later. It should be noted that a capacity that can be recorded with a decimal base value may be allocated.

FIG. 52B shows another example of a work area structure using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), winning ball number buffer, total winning ball number, out ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer, specific winning ball number buffer, total out ball number and base are stored. Each data item is the same as described in FIG. 52(A). The storage areas for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are divided into n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (or for each predetermined number of out balls or for each predetermined time period) (for example, every 6000 prize balls). n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer for all data moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. . After the data for the predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. Note that the write pointer may be moved when data other than the number of winning balls (the number of out balls, the predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings are moved for each predetermined number of winning balls. Further, the read pointer also moves along with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer points to the storage area one before the write pointer. This is for calculating the base value using the most recent data for 6000 prize balls.

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is the accumulated value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the base total value is the total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls. is a value calculated from the values of recalculated. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of all data collected in the past, and the base total cumulative value calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer is Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the original data of the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 65535 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the sum of the data for 6000 prize balls.times.n (60000 prize balls when n=10), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of winning balls and the total number of out-balls are storage areas of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16,777,215 or 4,294,967,295 in decimal. Since the total sum is not deleted unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. Also, each of the base total and the total total is a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. It should be noted that a capacity that can be recorded with a decimal base value may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52(A), since the stored data is not erased, even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.) good. Similarly, the total accumulation in FIG. 52(B) may be erased every predetermined period.

Also, if the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. All the data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted as well as the abnormal value. Also, it may be notified that the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Alternatively, the check code may be used to inspect the data in the backup area, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the base value may be calculated again.

[9-4. Base value display]
The base value calculated as described above may continue to be displayed while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Since this is not possible, the power consumption of the gaming machine may be reduced by turning off the 7-segment LED 13172 . Of course, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation region updating process (step S81) and the base calculation/display process (step S89) are executed.

Also, the base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318 . For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the base value is started, and the display is turned off after being displayed for a predetermined period of time. The base value may be displayed on the base display 1317 when the display switch 1318 is operated while the body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the character ratio.

Further, when the body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that the base display 1317 can be confirmed to be operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be illuminated.

Then, when the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. , the power consumption of the game machine should be reduced. This base non-display state is in the same mode as after completion of the initial setting (FIG. 36(B)), but may be in a different mode as long as it can be distinguished from the displayed base value.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317 . The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game is preferably continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base display can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, when the body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variation display game, the base value is displayed, but when the body frame 4 is closed before the variation time elapses, the variation display for the remaining time can be performed. . Since the special symbols displayed on the function display unit 1400 are synchronized with the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols stop at the timing when the special symbol variation display on the function display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, even when the body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (character object ratio in the above-described embodiment) may be displayed on the base indicator (character object ratio indicator) 1317 . By doing so, the base value (accessory ratio) can be checked without opening the main body frame 4, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation of the gaming machine. Moreover, it is not necessary to determine whether the body frame 4 is open. In an island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back side of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such a game machine, by opening the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, the base (character ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back can be confirmed. In addition, when the base value is displayed even when the body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form recognizable by the player (for example, on a display device that displays the effect of the special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer representing the condition of the pachinko machine and is worth watching by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310 , a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 . When the payout control board 951 calculates the base value, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 . Also, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

Further, the pachinko machine of this embodiment does not change the amount of light (brightness) of the base display 1317 even if it shifts to the energy saving mode. This is because if the amount of light on the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it will be difficult to confirm the base value on the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine outside the opening hours.

Specifically, the gaming machine of the present embodiment enters a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after the game ball does not enter any of the winning holes and the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is consumed. . In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs BGM that is output with so-called normal variation. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the standby state, the state shifts to the demonstration state. In the demo state, a moving image showing the motif of the game machine is reproduced, or the game machine is explained. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demonstration state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that the demonstration state and the energy saving mode do not have to be distinguished). In the energy saving mode, in order to suppress power consumption, the light amount of the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 and various lamps is reduced. However, the power consumption of the display devices (the function display unit 1400 and the base display device 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the pachinko machine as a whole. good too. Also, if the light intensity of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, a player who is going to play on an empty table can easily see the result of the previous lottery.

In addition, even if a game ball does not enter the starting gate or general winning gate, when a game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value can be recalculated and updated. have a nature. If game balls are shot and the number of out balls increases, but the number of prize balls does not increase, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players will take revenge.

By informing such a player of the state of the game with the function display unit 1400 which also serves as the base display 1317, the interest in the game can be revived. That is, even if the player shifts to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the display mode of the display on which the base value is displayed is maintained at the amount of light before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or the amount of light is increased. It is good to be able to check the base value properly.

In this way, maintaining or increasing the light intensity of the display that displays the base value has been explained, but from the viewpoint of reducing energy consumption, even if the light intensity of the display that displays the base value is decreased or extinguished good. For example, during the energy saving mode, predetermined operations (fire stop button to forcibly stop firing, operation button to change the effect that appears, RAM clear button to clear the contents of RAM, power supply to the game machine It is preferable to reduce the amount of light of the display on which the base value is displayed when the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine, such as a supply adjustment button for switching between the presence and absence of the base value, is detected. Furthermore, not only during the energy saving mode, if the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, the light amount of both the lamp that reduces power consumption and the display that displays the base value will be reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. good too.

When reducing or turning off the light intensity of both the lamp, etc. and the display that displays the base value, the light intensity of the lamp, etc. that reduces power consumption during energy saving mode is reduced before the display that displays the base value. In this case, the light amount of the lamp or the like, which consumes a large amount of power, is reduced first, thereby achieving a large reduction in power consumption. In addition, the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed may be reduced or turned off prior to the lamp or the like. Effective. In addition, the lamp or the like that reduces power consumption and the display that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time during the energy saving mode. . Note that the terms before and after time (meaning "before" or "at the same time") in these descriptions include the order of internal processing timings and the order of appearance from the player's point of view.

Moreover, the display mode of the base value may be set in multiple stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. divided into multiple stages. The indicator for displaying the base value may be composed of a multi-color LED, and may be displayed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, the indicator that displays the base value is configured with a production display device, and at each stage, the base value is low Occasionally it may display self-deprecating comments. Further, an effect of adding a comment as described above to the effect display device 1600 displaying the decorative pattern may be executed without changing the display mode of the display for displaying the base value.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of balls passing through the out mouth]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. FIG. In the processing described in FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out port, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figures 54 and 40: Base value is calculated every timer interrupt cycle ・Figure 55 and Figure 56: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls The base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls will be omitted, but they can be realized by combining FIGS.

If out balls are detected by the out ball sensor 1021 provided near the out hole 1111, there is a problem that the number of out balls cannot be counted accurately. This is because the game ball launched toward the game area 5a flows out from the game area 5a via the out hole 1111, the general winning hole 2001, the starting hole 2002, the big winning holes 2005 and 2006. Therefore, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls shot toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out hole are used to accurately calculate the number of out balls, and to accurately calculate the base value.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has substantially the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. Out mouth passing ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of balls passing through the mouth is provided. The out-port-passing ball sensor 1021 is preferably installed at a position where the player can see it through the out-port 1111 . By installing the sensor 1021 for balls passing through the out hole at a position where the player can see through the out hole 1111, the player can be made aware that the out balls are being counted, that is, the base is being calculated.

In addition, the out-hole passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a gathering gutter where the game balls flowing down from the game area 5a through the out-hole 1111 are aligned. If it is installed at a position where the player cannot visually recognize it, the player does not need to be aware of counting out balls. In addition, by providing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 on the far side of the out-port 1111, it is possible to secure a sufficient space for arranging a performance display device and accessories (movable bodies), thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5. can. In addition, in order to prevent double counting of game balls, the rolling surface on which the game ball that has passed the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 rolls is provided so that the game ball that has passed through the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 does not bounce back. It should be slanted or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54 acquires the number of prize balls, the number of balls passed through the out hole, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passed through the out hole at each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether there are prize balls or not, and if there are no prize balls, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of balls passing through the outlet is obtained (step S818), and the number of winning balls is obtained (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize ball notification has timed up. You may stop ball abnormality information.

After recording the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 records the number of prize balls in the number of prize balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , the number of balls passing through the out-hole is recorded in the out-ball number buffer, and the number of prize-winning balls is recorded in the prize-winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 55, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for prize abnormality notification is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of balls passing through the out port is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of balls passing through the out port is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls buffer (step S821).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. Then, the obtained number of balls passing through the out-hole and the number of winning balls are added to separate storage areas (out-ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer). In this way, the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in separate storage areas.

Also, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 55, if the acquired number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls are recorded in separate storage areas, the number of out balls increases by 1 when the winning hole is won. Counting the number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls are simultaneously executed (within one timer interrupt processing), but the base value is calculated after updating both the out ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer. At that time, if both the buffer for the number of out balls and the buffer for the number of winning balls cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, whether the number of balls passing through the out port should be preferentially counted or the number of winning balls should be preferentially counted. should be determined in advance rather than being determined by lottery. In this case, if the process related to the prize balls is prioritized over other processes, the payout process of the prize balls can be executed quickly.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of passing balls stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S896). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out-balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to update the total number of out-balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the number of prize balls buffer value is added to the total number of prize balls (step S897), and the number of prize balls buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted (step S901). . Steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or at predetermined time intervals without comparing the number of out balls (buffer value for number of out balls + buffer value for number of winning balls) with the threshold value Th2.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of won balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value and the base value remains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded balls or the total number of out-balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls passed through the out hole, so the number of out balls is counted accurately, and the base value is calculated accurately. can. Furthermore, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process and inspection process of the game machine, it is possible to confirm whether the prize-winning switch, the base display 1317, and the processing for calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Base Abnormality Notification]
The processing described above is for generating a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, the processing for determining an abnormality in the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
・Figure 57: Base value is calculated every timer interrupt cycle ・Figure 58: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls Although the explanation of the pattern for calculating the base value for each number of out pitches is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIG. 57 and FIG.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated each time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). Abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. In addition, a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of divergence of the base values. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process is terminated. The same method as the above-described base notification can be adopted as the method of notifying the abnormality of the base.

For example, one or a combination of two or more of the methods described below may be used. Specifically, base display (7-segment LED) 1317, effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, etc. may be used to notify the abnormality of the base value. Informing the player of the abnormality of the base value may allow the player to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. Abnormality of the base value may be notified by displaying the calculated base value in percentage notation on the above-described indicator or display device. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. In display devices capable of displaying images, such as the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the first decimal place is displayed and displayed in more detail. may

Further, when the base value is displayed on the effect display devices 1600, 3114 and 244, the display mode may be changed if the base value is abnormal. For example, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green when normal, red when abnormal, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple steps. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages, and may be displayed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow in each stage.

In addition, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be notified by various lamps, effect display devices, sounds, or the like. The function display unit 1400 may notify an abnormality of the base value. Also, the information on the abnormality of the base may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall.

Note that the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 57 calculates the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out-balls at the timing when the number of awarded balls and the number of out-balls satisfy predetermined conditions as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, for example. It is preferable to use it in combination with the base calculation region update processing to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the buffer value for the number of out balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S897), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the buffer for the number of out balls (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). Abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. In addition, a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of divergence of the base values. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process is terminated.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of won balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value and the base value remains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded balls or the total number of out-balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

Note that the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58 directly updates the total number of prize balls and total number of out balls using the acquired number of prize balls and number of out balls, as shown in, for example, FIG. 39 and FIG. It is preferable to use it in combination with the base calculation area update process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine, and the hall staff can It is possible to know the possibility of illegal operation to the game machine. In addition, it is possible to detect and report abnormalities in gaming machines that cannot be detected by conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of base change]
Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine that reports changes in calculated base values will be described.

The base value calculated by pachinko machines naturally fluctuates. Since the base value indicates the condition of the gaming machine, the player during the game cares not only about the base value itself but also about changes in the base value. Therefore, it is desirable to inform the player of the change in the base value. The player can play the game with peace of mind when the display that serves as a reference for the upper and lower levels of the base value appears.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 59, the history of calculated base values is recorded in order to compare the current base value with the history of past base values. In FIG. 59, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the buffer value for the number of out balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S897), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the buffer for the number of out balls (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the base value management timer has expired (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed out, it is not the time to store the base value in the base history, so the base calculation/display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the base value management timer has timed out, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record a base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and every time the base value management timer times up, the current base value is stored in the base history. The base history is stored in base calculation area 13128 . Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128 , or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128 . When storing a plurality of base histories in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128 to store, for example, predetermined time×10 base values. Also, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, the number of prize balls and the total number of out balls for a predetermined time×n are stored, A base value may be calculated as needed.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, most recent base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. (step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, the base decrease continuation time measurement timer is referred to, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started decreasing. (Step S10302). Then, if the predetermined time has not passed since the base has started to decrease, the effect table for which the base is decreasing is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if the predetermined time has passed from the start of the decrease of the base, the effect table for the continuation of the decrease of the base is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller than (equal to or larger than) the current base value, the timer for measuring the duration of the base decrease is reset (step S10305), and the display selection table during base increase is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, in step S10301, it is determined whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value. You may Since the base value is obtained by division, it is generally a decimal value. Therefore, it is preferable to determine whether the base historical value and the current base value are equal in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (eg, 3%).

64 to 68 are diagrams showing examples of display selection tables. These display selection tables are used to select the effect of the special symbol variation display game with a random number selected upon winning a prize at the starting port (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is increasing or when the base value does not change, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected during the base value decrease. selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

Each display selection table includes items of effect number, effect content, variable time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The effect content is the name of the effect. The variation time is the time from when the variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends due to the effect. The remarks are information describing the outline of the presentation so that the designer can understand it. Distribution is the probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

The display selection table 1 (lost) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss and the base value is increasing or unchanged, and the display selection table 1 (win 1) shown in FIG. 65 is selected. is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not lead to a variable probability state and the base value is increasing or not changing. The display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a variable probability big win that derives a variable probability state and the base value is increasing or not changing.

The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value continues to decrease even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

As shown, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2 which are effects in which the pattern does not change, and the freeze effect is selected with a high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after determination of the effect.

In addition, if the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the base value started to decrease, the display selection table 3 is used to select an effect, and the selected effect is displayed. You can switch.

Further, whether or not to display a specific effect for notifying the change of the base value may be determined according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the player is always notified of the change in the base value, the player's attention to the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original enjoyment of the pachinko machine, may be neglected and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is

For example, during the execution of the special symbol variation display game (game situation in which the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the effect of the special symbol variation display game is preferentially executed, and when the variation is not in progress, the base value is increased. It is preferable to display a specific effect (an effect that serves as a guideline for a change in the base value) at the time of hour or at the time of descent.

The specific effect may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined period of time. This is because if the specific effect is displayed immediately after the special symbol variation display game ends, the player's sense of tension continues and fatigue accumulates. When the game ball wins in the starting hole while the specific effect is being displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because the winning of the start slot triggers a big winning lottery and the special symbol variation display game is started, so it is better to make the player pay attention to the special symbol variation display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even when the number of prize balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold Th1) or when the number of out balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold Th2). Also, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, or may be executed without fail if the same conditions are met.

Moreover, it is preferable that the specific effect is not displayed when the base value is increased, and is displayed only when the base value is decreased. This is because when a player is notified of a rise in the base value, the player's expectations rise, and if the base value does not rise to the extent that the player expects, the player may be disappointed due to the gap between expectations and expectations. be. On the other hand, if the player is notified of the decrease in the base value, some players will increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display selection table is changed depending on whether the base value is decreasing or not (increasing, steady state), but the display is divided into three states: decreasing base value, steady state, and increasing base value. A selection table may be defined to inform the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is steady (whether the base history value and the current base value are equal) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

Also, the specific effect may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to decrease when displayed outside the special symbol variation display game than when displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

In addition, when no game ball enters the starting hole and the special symbol variation display game is not performed, the base value usually decreases. Further, if the special symbol variation display game is not performed for a predetermined time, the effect display device 1600 displays a demo screen.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69(A) is a display example of normal reach, in which the left and right symbols are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69(B) is a display example of special reach 1, the left and right symbols displayed on the upper left of the screen stop at 7, and the middle symbol fluctuates. In the central part of the screen, the player and the opponent are competing in rock-paper-scissors, and the middle pattern is determined according to the result of the rock-paper-scissors. FIG. 69(C) is a display example of special ready-to-win 2, in which the left and right symbols displayed on the upper left of the screen stop at 7, and the middle symbol fluctuates. In the central part of the screen, the player and the opponent are fighting each other, and the medium pattern is determined according to the result of the fighting.

FIG. 69(D) is a display example of freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered to a position (for example, the lower right part of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. recognizable display. FIG. 69(E) is a display example of freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the bottom of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Display a recognizable continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease of the base value may be displayed at any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Also, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. For example, a pop-up display in the center of the display screen may be used.

An example of displaying the degree of change in the base value on the effect display device 1600 has been described above, but the lighting mode of the decoration lamp may be changed. Also, instead of showing the up-and-down trend of the base value, changes in the base value may be displayed numerically.

The change in the displayed base value is the result of comparing the base value calculated in the time interval before the specified time with the base value calculated in the current time interval. and the total cumulative sum of the latest base values.

[9-8. Calculation of Base Considering Specific General Entrances]
Next, the process of accurately calculating the base value in consideration of the winning in a specific general winning slot will be described.

In a pachinko machine, a player shoots a game ball with the aim of winning a prize in a specific winning hole (for example, the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 that are open) in which the game ball is likely to win during the big win. Adjust the strength of the projectile. Even during a big hit, the game ball is shot at the same place as the so-called normal hitting to aim at the big winning hole 2005, or the shooting strength is strengthened to the maximum, so-called right-hand hitting to aim at the big winning hole 2006. - 特許庁There are variations. Among such variations, there is a case where a game board is designed such that a starting hole or a general winning hole is arranged downstream of the big winning hole and the balls spilled from the big winning hole are picked up.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of a pachinko machine that hits to the right during a big win will be described in detail. During the big win, the player hits to the right in order to win the game ball into the opened big winning hole. Most of the game balls shot toward the game area enter the large winning opening 2006 that is open. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005. When the player does not win the special prize-winning slot 2006, he/she wins the general prize-winning slot 2001.例文帳に追加That is, it can be said that the general winning hole 2001 on the right side of the big winning hole 2005 wins only when the right-handed game ball does not enter the open big winning hole 2006 .

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the start opening and the general winning opening when 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a (that is, the number of out balls paid out). In order to show the percentage of the number of prize balls that were put out), the number of balls that flowed into the game area but are unlikely to enter the start hole or the general winning hole (high possibility to enter the big winning hole) If the number of out-balls is counted, it is assumed that the base value will deviate from the actual base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the specific general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. to calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning hole is as follows.
・Figure 70 and Figure 40: Base value is calculated every timer interrupt cycle. ・Figure 71 and Figure 72: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls. and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls will be omitted, but they can be realized by combining FIGS.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. Get the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. In FIG. 70, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether there are prize balls or not, and if there are no prize balls, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls into a specific general winning hole (specific number of winning balls) is acquired (step S820). Then, the value obtained by subtracting the specific number of winning balls from the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated each time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize ball notification has timed up. You may stop ball abnormality information.

After recording the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). In order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition, the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. Record the number in the out pitches buffer. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for prize abnormality notification is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, and it is determined whether the winning hole corresponding to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning hole, and the number of winning balls to the specific general winning hole is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls to the specific general winning hole is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific winning ball number recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 72, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of passing balls stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out-balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to update the total number of out-balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the number of prize balls buffer value is added to the total number of prize balls (step S897), and the number of prize balls buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific number of winning balls is subtracted from the total number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). Abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. In addition, a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of divergence of the base values. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process is terminated.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value remains the same value, and if the total number of awarded balls or the total number of out balls is updated, Base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out-balls is updated, or at the timing when both are updated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, since the base value is calculated by excluding game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to enter the starting hole or the general winning hole, deviation from the actual base value is calculated. A small base value can be calculated accurately.

In addition, the pachinko machine that hits to the right during the big win has explained the case where the general winning hole 2001 is downstream of the big winning hole 2006, but the invention according to this embodiment aims at the big winning hole 2005 by normal hitting during the big win. It can be applied to a pachinko machine or a game machine in which a starting opening or a general winning opening is arranged downstream of the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

Also, in the game area 5a, big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are arranged, which normally do not accept game balls, but allow acceptance of game balls according to the result of the jackpot lottery. Prize balls that have won prizes in the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball wins the start openings 2002 and 2004, the special symbol variation display game starts, and the special symbols are confirmed until the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (big winning opening). During the period from the closing of 2005 and 2006 to the start of the next special symbol variation display game (jackpot ending), the detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In this way, the number of winning balls and the number of out balls during the special prize can be counted without determining whether the special prize is being executed in step S810 in FIG. 39 and the like. In addition, when the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed in one jackpot, the time (closing interval) from the closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 to the next opening may be included in the special prize. That is, during the special prize means that the condition device is in operation, for example, from the finalization of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the instruction to hit to the right. Furthermore, in the starting ports 2002 and 2004, during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during electric sapo may be included in the special prize. Furthermore, in a game state other than during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during power supply, a predetermined time after opening the starting port 2004 after closing (for example, until the ball that has won the starting port is detected as an out ball) seconds required) may be included in the prize.

Also, in the game area 5a, a second start port 2004 is arranged which normally does not accept game balls, but allows acceptance of game balls according to the lottery result of normal symbols. Prize balls that enter the second starting port 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol variation display game is started, and the normal symbol is confirmed and released (opening), from the second start port 2004. During the period from the closing of the game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game (ending), the detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In addition, when the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing according to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time (closing interval) from the closing of the second starting port 2004 to the next opening may be included in the special prize. In this way, all winnings to the second starting port 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value, not just during the time saving.

As described above, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than those during special prizes (jackpots, short working hours, etc.) without determining in step S810 of FIG.

In this way, the number of out balls and the number of winning balls while the player is hitting right can be accurately excluded, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

Also, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game with the left hand when neither the big win nor the time saving is in progress (so-called normal state), and to play the game with the right hand during the big win or the time saving. In such a game machine, a general prize winning port 2001 and a first start port 2002 for winning a prize when hitting to the left and a general prize winning port 2001 and a second start port 2004 for winning a prize when hitting to the right are provided. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning holes in the left to center of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting to the left) and the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting to the right), Depending on the arrangement and the position of the nail, the ball entry rate to each winning hole is different. In other words, the base value for left-handed hitting and the base value for right-handed hitting are different.

The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player hits to the left in the normal state. However, if the base value differs between left-handed and right-handed, for the reason described above (for example, the base value for right-handed is designed to be lower than that for left-handed in normal conditions). , a low base value is calculated when the player hits right in normal conditions.

A pachinko machine with a low base value is considered to be abnormal and should be inspected or judged to be a machine with poor ball output performance. Even if the pachinko machine is judged to have poor ball output performance (lower than the expected base), the hole judges that the player is hitting the left hand, so the start opening that affects the base when hitting the left hand. Make adjustments to increase the ball entry rate of the general winning entrance. Then, adjust the abnormal nail to increase the base value. When the game machine adjusted in this way hits to the left, many prize balls can be obtained even in the normal state. In other words, many lotteries can be received with a small amount. In other words, even if the base when hitting left-handed is not different from what the hole has assumed, the hole misunderstands and adjusts to increase the ball entry rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening that wins when hitting left-handed. Since there is a possibility that the hole may be disadvantaged by such malice of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value for hitting left and the base value for hitting right.

By the way, in a pachinko machine that hits to the right during time saving, the second starting port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the game state and the gate part 2003 for performing the normal symbol lottery for opening the second starting port 2004 are used when hitting to the right. It is arranged in the area where the game ball rolls. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 by striking to the right in the normal state, even if the lottery of the normal pattern is performed, the probability of winning the normal pattern is extremely low to prevent the second start port 2004 from opening. Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened to make it difficult to win a prize to the second starting port 2004 in a normal state.

Here, in order to increase the base value in the normal state of hitting to the right, the rate of entry into the second starting hole 2004 should be increased. However, since the second starting hole 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting hole 2002, increasing the ball entry rate to the second starting hole 2004 will put pressure on the profit of the hole. Therefore, when calculating the base value by counting the number of game balls passing through the gate section 2003 in the normal state, it is preferable to calculate the corrected base value using the number of passing balls of the gate section 2003 .

Specifically, the number of game balls passing through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls hit toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. A reduction in the number of out pitches allows for higher base calculations. For example, if a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate section 2003, a very high base value will be calculated. The degree of correction processing may be appropriately determined based on the design values (performance) of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored, and when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 without entering the starting hole, etc.) (conditions may be added), the number of out balls counted in a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after (or before and after) passing through the gate section 2003 may not be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When passing through the gate unit 2003 is detected, a display or sound such as "Please return to left-handed" may be output without actively informing the player that the result will not be reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the hole may be notified that the ball is hit to the right. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or the fact that the game is being played to the right may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game arcade.

As described above, by excluding the number of balls passing through the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting to the right) from the number of out balls, The base value of time can be corrected to a larger value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluctuations in the calculated value of the base due to the game style of the player.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value of confirming the operation status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value is retained for a long period of time. Also, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily deleted. Therefore, the base calculation/display data 13136 is erased under conditions different from the conditions for erasing the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 . As a result, it is possible to hold accurate data on the number of winning balls and to calculate an accurate role ratio.

Specifically, the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation) does not erase the base calculation/display data 13136, but cuts off the backup power supplied to the main control MPU 1311 and turns off the power of the pachinko machine 1. All data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased by the second operation of shutting down. For the second operation, one switch may be provided to realize this operation, or the pachinko machine 1 may be operated by removing the connector of the backup power line supplied to the main control board 1310 by an employee of the game parlor. may be turned off.

In other words, two operations are prepared for erasing the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. The first operation erases only the data related to the progress of the game, while the second operation erases the calculated base value. Delete all data, including data related to game progress.

By configuring in this way, the base calculation/display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation by the staff of the game hall, so the reliability of the displayed character object ratio is increased, and concealment of a high character object ratio can be prevented. .

[9-10. Calculation of Base Considering Winning Abnormality]
73 and 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, an abnormality in prize winning may be detected. For example, when a prize is detected other than during the opening of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 due to the derivation of a big win in the special symbol variation display game, or when a winning is derived in the normal symbol variation display game, the starting port 2004 If winning is detected other than when the is open, it is a winning error. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and is mainly when many prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, a winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a case where a winning is impossible or many winnings are detected within a predetermined period of time.

Since the winning ball related to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to calculate the base accurately by correcting this amount. Therefore, in the base calculation area update process considering the winning abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

It should be noted that normally the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting opening 2004 win prizes only during the special prize, so the winning balls to these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base, and they win prizes. No need to consider anomalies.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update process, the current game state is determined, the number of prize balls to be paid out as game value is added to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 is updated. do. In particular, the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73 is similar to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. The total number of awarded balls is directly updated using the number of awarded balls calculated in (step S814), and the total number of out-balls is directly updated using the number of out-balls (step S822). In FIG. 73, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded.

If the game state is during a special prize, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation region updating process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation region updating process may be the number of prize balls determined to be put out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prepared payout command may be used. Alternatively, it may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command that has already been sent. Moreover, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the reception confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 . Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls (the number of paid out prize balls) that receives a payout completion report from the payout control board 951 . This variation has already been described with reference to FIGS. 41-44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether there are prize balls or not, and if there are no prize balls, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. In addition, although the game balls enter the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the suspension is the upper limit value, and even if the winning to the starting ports is not suspended, the prize balls are paid out, so the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a game state in which no prize balls are generated even if a game ball enters the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), no prize balls are generated due to the winning, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . That is, in the base calculation region updating process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). Then, it is determined whether or not a winning abnormality is detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is obtained (step S827). Specifically, as described above, when a winning to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is detected in addition to the special prize (while the condition device is in operation) caused by the derivation of the big win in the special symbol variation display game, or In the case where winning to the starting port 2004 is detected while the game is not open due to the winning being derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that there is a winning abnormality.

It may be determined that the winning ball is abnormal when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or it may be determined that the winning ball is abnormal when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. Further, when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are continuously detected, it may be determined as a winning abnormality, and when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined as a winning abnormality. You may

Then, the total number of out-balls is updated so that the acquired number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822). The number of out balls is detected by the ball sensor 1020, the sensor 3060, etc., as described above, and is obtained by reading the detection signals of these sensors in the switch input process of step S74. At this time, the value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, and after adding the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls, winning a prize The number of winning balls that are abnormally applied may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total number of out-balls is recorded in the total number of out-balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312 . That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (Fig. 40), so the base value is displayed without delay. It can be determined without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 74), which will be described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed out, and when the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up, a command for stopping the abnormal prize notification is generated, and the abnormal prize notification is performed. may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes base value calculation processing in timer interrupt processing, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute base value calculation processing. In this case, a command for notifying the base from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511 may be sent.

Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if the information of both the winning ball to the winning hole and the out ball is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). The number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (or the number of out-balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winning to a plurality of winning openings is acquired, the total number of winning balls due to multiple winning is calculated as the total number of winning balls (or in the embodiment described later, ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize-winning sensor detects a prize-winning hole with 5 prize balls and a prize-winning hole sensor with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls are detected as the total number of prize balls. (or add to the prize number buffer).

Also, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the shooting of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time after detection by the ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of winning balls (or the number of winning balls buffer). In addition, the operation of the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops operating) to the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds)) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Also, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the player is operating the shooting handle. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it was detected that the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 was in contact with the contact detection sensor 509 is the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize number buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the base value from being reflected in the base value of the prize balls due to an abnormality in which the prize balls are detected in a state where the game balls are not shot or fraudulent acts, and to prevent an incorrect base value from being displayed. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, there is no need to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so the increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 74, the number of out balls is recorded in the number of out balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). . That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 74, the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the timer for prize abnormality notification is reset (step S817).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether or not a winning abnormality is detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined as abnormal is obtained (step S827).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out balls are corrected for all the winning balls related to the winning abnormality. It is not necessary to correct the out ball for the winning ball related to the specific type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of winning ball related to the winning abnormality, the winning ball may or may not be paid out. It is preferable that whether or not a prize ball is to be paid out in response to this prize winning abnormality is determined for each prize winning opening. In this case, in the case of a prize-winning abnormality in which no prize balls are paid out, the prize-winning balls should not be counted as total-out balls and should not be used in the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, as for the prize winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, the winning balls are counted as total out balls, and the paid out prize balls are also counted as the total number of prize balls, and used for calculating the base value. Note that even in the case of a prize winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, the winning balls may not be counted as the total out balls, the paid out prize balls may not be counted as the total number of prize balls, and may not be used in the calculation of the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance (removal of jammed balls, etc.) for a game machine malfunction, a hall employee may manually insert a game ball into the starting hole to compensate for the ball output so that the player does not lose money. In that case, a prize ball is paid out for winning a prize to the start hole. Winning to this starting port is detected as a prize winning abnormality, but prize balls are paid out. When prize balls are paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it should not be determined as a winning abnormality. In this case, in the winning openings (starting openings 2002, 2004) that are reflected in the calculation of the base value, prize balls are dispensed and abnormal winning is not determined. It is preferable to determine the winning abnormality without paying out. A winning hole for judging a winning abnormality has a smaller number of prize balls to be put out by winning than a winning hole for not judging a winning abnormality (three prize balls for a starting hole and 15 balls for a big winning hole). For this reason, although a winning abnormality is determined at the big winning opening, even if abnormal winning is not determined at the starting opening, it does not become a big security hole from the viewpoint of defense against fraud. In this way, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the number of out balls and the number of prize balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls using the number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality that does not generate any prize balls, it is possible to match the number of prize balls with the out balls that cause the prize balls.

As described above, it is possible to determine a winning abnormality in various winning ports, but a specific implementation example for a pachinko machine will be described.

First, the normal winning gate 2001 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning gate other than the general winning gate 2001 (large winning gates 2005 and 2006, starting gates 2002 and 2004) may determine the winning abnormality. Since it is difficult for a plurality of game balls to win at the same time, the general prize gates are designed to improve the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts. The player can be compensated for the put-out ball by entering the general prize winning openings 2001 (4 in total) which are provided more than three in total. In addition, since the general prize winning opening 2001 can be easily identified by hall employees, maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and operation for compensating for ball output are easy. The reason why hall employees can easily identify the general prize winning openings 2001 is that the general winning openings 2001 are often arranged together (in separate areas) in the game area, and the electric accessories (large winning openings) 2005, 2006, starting ports 2002, 2004) and decorative members (appearance) are different. In addition, when the number of winning balls for one winning ball in the general winning opening is small, there is an effect that the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts is improved. It should be noted that it is also possible to determine the winning abnormality not only for a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end) but also for other general winning openings.

In addition, no prize-winning abnormality is determined in the large prize-winning ports 2005 and 2006 with a large number of prize balls, and prizes are won in the prize-winning ports other than the large prize-winning ports 2005 and 2006 (general prize-winning ports 2001, starting ports 2002 and 2004 with a small number of prize balls). Abnormalities may be determined. Since the number of winning balls for one winning ball is large in the big winning hole, even a small number of winning balls greatly changes the base value. Therefore, it is convenient to easily inspect the change of the base value when inspecting the pachinko machine. It should be noted that, instead of determining the winning abnormality only in a specific big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 2005 where the game ball is easy to put in by hand), the winning abnormality may be determined in other big winning openings (for example, 2006). .

Further, the winning abnormality may not be determined at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, and the winning abnormality may be determined at the winning ports other than the starting ports 2002 and 2004 (general winning port 2001, big winning ports 2005 and 2006). Since the number of winning balls for one winning ball is smaller than that of the big winning hole, the starting hole can compensate the player for the ball while improving the security resistance of the game machine against the goto. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific start opening (for example, the start opening 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to understand), and the other start opening 2004 may be used to determine the winning abnormality.

Furthermore, in the case of the big winning opening and the start opening, the opening/closing member of the winning opening is located in a position that can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening/closing member can be easily operated by hall employees. Instead, the opening/closing member of the winning opening is located at a position that cannot be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening/closing member may be difficult for hall employees to operate. For example, by tilting the opening and closing member that is vertically positioned in the closed state to an oblique position, the opening and closing member can easily operate a winning opening (so-called electric tulip) that picks up game balls. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning opening is closed with a flat plate member, and when the flat member is retracted, the entrance to the winning opening opens (so-called Velochu). is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only for the winning openings used to compensate the players for putting out balls, so it is easy for hall employees to understand, and the security resistance of the gaming machine can be improved.

Also, the detected winning abnormality may be reported. The method of notifying the abnormal prize may be the same as the method of notifying the abnormal number of prize balls described above (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal, Lighting and flashing of decorative lamps, output of voice, sound effect, warning sound, etc.) should be made looser than the notification of other abnormalities. Specifically, the abnormal notification time is short, the characters that notify the abnormality are small, the lamp does not light up when the abnormality is notified, and the abnormality notification sound is set to a lower volume than other abnormal notification sounds (suppressed). ).

In addition, in the notification of the winning abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the detection of the winning abnormality. It is preferable to end the notification after a predetermined time or change the mode of notification. In this way, when the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is performing maintenance on the gaming machine, not the player's fraudulent act. Therefore, if the winning abnormality is notified only for a predetermined time and the notification is not continued after that, the work efficiency can be improved without interfering with the maintenance work of the game machine by the hall. In addition, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined time, it can be seen that the maintenance work of the game machine is not hindered and the work is continued correctly. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the sound notification (or reduce the volume) while continuing the notification by the display device or the lamp.

In summary, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has correcting means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correcting means classifies a plurality of winning holes into a plurality of types (starting hole, big winning hole). However, for the first type of winning opening, the number of out balls is corrected based on the winning balls detected while a predetermined condition is not satisfied (during the special prize), and for the second type of winning opening, a predetermined number of winning balls are detected. The number of out balls is not corrected based on the winning balls detected except when the condition is established (during the special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent deviation of the number of out balls when compensating the player for maintenance of the gaming machine, and to accurately calculate the number of out balls. In addition, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the game machine, and the adjustment of the base value is possible as the adjustment (maintenance). This allows an accurate base value to be calculated and displayed.

Up to this point, we have explained the detection of a winning abnormality and the exceptional handling of the detection of a winning abnormality (when it is not detected). Since there is a high possibility that the winning balls will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning balls determined to be abnormal should not be reflected in the number of out balls and should not be used in the calculation of the base value.

In addition, the winning abnormality detected in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be reported. For example, in the fraudulent act detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, a winning abnormality display command is created with the winning abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). The notification of the abnormal winning may be performed when one abnormal winning ball is detected, or when a predetermined number of abnormal winning balls are detected. Further, when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the abnormal winning are continuously detected, the notification of the abnormal winning may be performed, and when a predetermined number of the winning balls related to the abnormal winning are detected within a predetermined time, the abnormal winning is notified. Notification may be made.

Further, the notification of the winning abnormality may be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be ended when the winning opening is opened next time (the condition device is activated).

It should be noted that it is not necessary to report the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base Value Calculation Processing Utilizing Characteristics of Arithmetic Circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division processing for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processing than when the CPU 13111 executes division by a program. The base calculation processing described so far does not take advantage of this characteristic.

That is, in relation to the calculation of the base value, in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) described above, in the switch input processing (step S74), the detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the fired ball sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out balls is counted, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). Thereafter, in base calculation area update processing (step S98), the number of winning balls and the number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

Thereafter, in the base calculation/display process (step S89), the base value is calculated by referring to the number of winning balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Although timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals, it is necessary to complete the predetermined processing for each timer interrupt. Therefore, in the slow division processing by the program, the timer interrupt processing includes the time-consuming processing. In other words, it was difficult to include base calculation processing multiple times in timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, by performing division processing using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt processing, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

In addition, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing from the writing of values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the dividend and divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively used, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the dividend and divisor is separate from the output timing of the quotient, the flexibility of the base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) except for the base calculation processing (steps S97 and S98), so description of the same processing will be omitted.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Specifically, it reads the detection signal from the sensor that detects winning balls, the detection signal from the switch that detects fraud, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020, and determines the number of out balls. to count.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 1 (step S97). In base calculation processing 1, the total number of out-balls counted in step S74 is used to update the total number of out-balls, and the base value is calculated. The details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78. FIG.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes timer update processing (step S76) and random number update processing 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 2 (step S98). In base calculation processing 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and the base value is calculated. The details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79. FIG.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbols and special electric auditors control processing (step S86), normal symbols and normal electric auditors A control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 1 ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out-balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of winning balls/total number of out balls) is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

After that, similarly to step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base (base value or base value abnormality) is notified to the player or hall employee. The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 or the display device (effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244) controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the effect display control unit 1512, or when the speaker 921 notifies the base value. and sound output commands. Also, when notifying with the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs and LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED elements. is the drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by the driver, the drive signal including the character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. Further, when the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the game state is during the special prize, the base value calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). In addition, when the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). When the total number of winning balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. Furthermore, when the total number of prize balls is greater than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of awarded balls/total number of out balls) is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that base calculation processing 1 and base calculation processing 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt processing, but may be executed in timer interrupt processing at predetermined time intervals (for example, one minute longer than the timer interrupt processing). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced compared to the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of winning balls.

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 1 ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer. The ball number buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out-balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out-balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out-balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of out-balls is 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 ends.

On the other hand, if the buffer value for the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the buffer value for the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S9705), and the buffer for the number of out balls is set to 0. set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of winning balls/total number of out balls) is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the base value is not calculated because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the base calculation process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and whether there are prize balls, that is, the number of prize balls obtained is 1 or more. (step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805). The ball count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or hall employee that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for announcing an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

Abnormality in the number of prize balls is, for example, a lot of prize balls in a predetermined time other than during the special prize (for example, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the start opening, a prize corresponding to 10 or more prizes per minute sphere) is obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls provided with a plurality of stages of allowable ranges.

Then, the timer for prize ball abnormality notification is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the value of the number of prize balls buffer may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the value of a predetermined bit in the number of prize balls storage area may be used for determination. If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall, or the number of prize balls, which will be described later, becomes a predetermined threshold value Th1 or more. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the winning ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of winning balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of awarded balls/total number of out balls) is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

After that, it is determined whether the timer for announcing abnormal prize balls started in step S9807 has timed up (step S9815). Then, when the timer for prize ball abnormality notification times up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the abnormality of the prize ball for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so that the abnormality is notified only for the predetermined number of shot balls. may Alternatively, the anomaly may continue to be reported until a hall employee confirms it.

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 23 and 75) except for the base calculation processing (steps S93 and S94) and the base display processing (step S95). are omitted.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the fired ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the number of out balls counted in step S74 is used to update the total number of out balls, and the parameter for calculating the base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 84 .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes timer update processing (step S76) and random number update processing 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the number of prize balls counted in step S80 is used to update the total number of prize balls, and the parameter for calculating the base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. The details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 85. FIG.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbols and special electric auditors control processing (step S86), normal symbols and normal electric auditors A control process (step S88) is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 reads from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and executes base display processing to generate a command for informing the base (step S95).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 1 ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out-balls cannot be obtained or the number of out-balls that is obtained is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 3 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 4 (step S94). Base calculation processing 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing step S9813 and subsequent steps from base calculation processing 2 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the base value is not calculated because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). In addition, when the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. , and the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total number of prize balls/total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display processing shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process every predetermined time (for example, one minute).

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of winning balls.

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 1 ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer. The ball number buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out-balls cannot be obtained or the number of out-balls that is obtained is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out-balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out-balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of out-balls is 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 ends.

On the other hand, if the buffer value for the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the buffer value for the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S9705), and the buffer for the number of out balls is set to 0. set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). Base calculation processing 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing step S9813 and subsequent steps from base calculation processing 2 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the base value is not calculated because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and whether there are prize balls, that is, the number of prize balls obtained is 1 or more. (step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805). The ball count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or hall employee that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for announcing an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls is, for example, when a large number of prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time period other than during the special prize (for example, considering the number of prize balls at the general prize opening and the start opening, 10 or more prizes are won per minute). For example, if It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls provided with a plurality of stages of allowable ranges.

Then, the timer for prize ball abnormality notification is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the value of the number of prize balls buffer may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the value of a predetermined bit in the number of prize balls storage area may be used for determination. If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall, or the number of prize balls, which will be described later, becomes a predetermined threshold value Th1 or more. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the winning ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of winning balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. , and the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total number of prize balls/total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

After that, it is determined whether the timer for announcing abnormal prize balls started in step S9807 of base calculation processing 4 has timed up (step S8903). Then, when the timer for prize ball abnormality notification times up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the abnormality of the prize ball for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the abnormality of the prize ball for the predetermined number of shot balls. good too. Alternatively, the anomaly may continue to be reported until a hall employee confirms it.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, before the timer interrupt processing ends (before the timer interrupt cycle elapses and the next timer interrupt processing starts), the arithmetic circuit Input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 are written at the timing when the division result can be read from the circuit 13121 . Specifically, the timing of writing the input value (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is in the first half of the timer interrupt process, or before the random number update process (step S78), or in the special design or normal design. Before the control process (steps S86, S88) is preferable.

Further, whether or not to execute the process of calculating the base value may be determined based on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole, whether to use the number of prize balls or the number of out balls for calculating the base value may be switched. For example, the winning ball in the winning hole that gives the maximum winning ball to one winning ball may not be used in the calculation of the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one winning ball) given when a game medium determined for each prize winning port provided in the game area wins is 1, 3, or 3. In the case of three types of 1 and 5, the maximum number of 5 winning balls and the number of out balls corresponding thereto may not be used for calculation of the base value. This is because if a prize with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the calculated base value will change greatly, and the lower digits of the calculated base value will be rounded (rounded off, rounded up, rounded down, etc.) ), the displayed value may change frequently. This is because, in such a case, it is difficult for the pachinko hall to determine whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether the ball output rate is as set).

Also, the minimum number of one winning ball and the corresponding number of out balls may not be used for calculating the base value. Since the change in the base value due to winning with a small number of prize balls is small, the lower digits of the base value calculated by the processing means are rounded off even if the single prize ball is not used in the calculation of the base value. This is because the displayed base value may not change if the displayed value is rounded (rounded off, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), and processing that does not contribute to the change in display may be omitted.

In addition, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the case where the number of prize balls is the minimum have been described, it is not necessary to use an intermediate number of prize balls between the maximum and the minimum for calculation of the base value. In this case, since the maximum and minimum numbers of winning balls are used to calculate the base value, the number of winning balls and the number of out-balls representing the operation of the pachinko machine as a whole are shown by averaging the maximum and minimum values, A base value can be indicated.

Although three types of prize ball number patterns have been described, the patterns are not limited to three types, and other types of prize ball number patterns such as five types and seven types may be used.

In addition, if a particular type of winning ball (such as the minimum value of 1, the middle value of 3, the maximum value of 5, etc.) is not used in the calculation of the base value, such winning will be All winnings in the game state when detected need not be used in calculating the base value. For example, if the winning to a winning hole that gives five balls is not used for calculating the base value, in the game state in which the winning to the winning hole is detected, until the game state ends, the winning Winnings in mouths or other winnings should not be used to calculate base values. Moreover, even after the start of the game state, winnings in the relevant winning opening and other winning openings are not retroactively used for calculation of the base value.

In addition, when the game state when the winning is detected occurs again, the winning may not be used for calculating the base value, and the game state when the winning is detected transitions to another game state. Winnings up to 2000 do not have to be used to calculate the base value. This is done by not using the number of winning balls and the number of out balls in the game state in which the base value to be calculated changes greatly, in calculating the base value. This is to eliminate the possibility of a delay in the judgment of

When the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state, the maximum (or minimum or intermediate) prize ball for one winning ball may not be used for calculating the base value.

Next, a specific process of not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls for calculating the base value will be described, depending on the number of game media (prize balls) described above.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning opening sensor is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether to use the winning for the calculation of the base value. . For winnings that are determined not to be used for calculating the base value, the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls for calculating the base value are not updated, or the calculation processing of the base value is not executed. do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0, and is excluded from the number of out balls to calculate the base value. In process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Also, if none of the detected winnings are used for calculating the base value, the base calculation process 1 (step S97) and the base calculation process 2 (step S98) of FIG. 75 need not be executed.

In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). , the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. If none of the detected prize winnings are used for calculating the base value, base calculation processing 3 (step S93), base calculation processing 4 (step S94) and base display processing (step S95) of FIG. 80 are not executed. may

The method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls may adopt the same method as the correction of out balls due to abnormal winning explained in FIGS. 73 and 74.

In this case, it is determined from the number of winning balls whether the detected winning prize is to be used for calculating the base value. In step S93) and base calculation processing 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether a prize is being awarded.

In this way, by excluding the number of out balls and the number of winning balls for a predetermined prize from the calculation of the base value, the processing can be executed without skipping. can be confirmed. In addition, by not executing the processing for calculating the base value and not updating the base value, the processing of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processing (lottery processing, processing for determining the variation pattern, etc.) is executed accurately. can.

That is, even if there are multiple prizes with different degrees of advantage, even if the largest prize is awarded to the player, it is not used for calculating the base value, and the base value is displayed without any change due to the awarding of the prize. be. Further, the calculated base value is displayed without change until at least the gaming state in which the maximum prize is given is terminated.

[9-12. Another configuration of the game machine displaying the base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 4. Either one of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

The board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A is, as described above, the out-hole passing ball sensor 1021 that detects game balls passing through the out-hole 1111 provided at the bottom of the game area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to main control board 1310 and input to main control MPU 1311, as will be described later with reference to FIG. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-hole passing ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the starting hole sensors 2104 and 2551, and the number of game balls detected by various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, and 2557 The total number of out balls is the number of out balls.

As described above, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 .

When both the board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B are provided, the counting result of the board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A and the counting result of the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B are compared to obtain two counting results. An error may be notified when there is a difference of a predetermined value or more. Also, an error may be reported when a difference of a predetermined value or more occurs between two count results within a predetermined period of time.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an essential component, and as described later, the display contents of the base display 1317 (temporary section display and final section display) are switched at predetermined time intervals ( 99), the display switch 1318 may be operated to display the base value or switch the display contents.

Configurations other than those described above are the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

88 and 89 are diagrams showing the arrangement of the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism for aligning out-balls in a row in the ball flow path 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board and counting out-balls with one frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B. . A game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, the big winning ports 2005 and 2006. The body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 for causing discharged game balls to flow down to the right side in a front view and to be aligned in a line. The frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls aligned in one row.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls aligned in a ball flow path 960 provided on the back surface of the game board are made to flow down in two rows and counted by a plurality of discharged ball sensors 3060 . A game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, the start ports 2002 and 2004, and the big winning ports 2005 and 2006. The body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 for causing the discharged game balls to flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and to be aligned in two lines. Each of the two frame-side discharge ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls aligned in each row.

The frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. Also, the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the body frame 4 .

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of connection between the ejected ball sensor and the main control board.

The output line of board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected to connector 13101 provided on main control board 1310 via a relay board, and the output signal of board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected to the connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame side ejected ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU1311.

A connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and a connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected is connected to the main control board 1310. It is preferable to be provided on the lower side of the

A connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected and a connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side ejected-ball sensor 3060B is connected are separately provided. The output line of 3060A and the output line of frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

Note that the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without going through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310 . The output line of the frame-side ejection ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame-side ejection ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it is connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. You may

Also, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030 . The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as will be described later using FIG.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and particularly shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensors 1030 provided on the game board 5. FIG.

The magnetism detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of the sensors that detect winnings to the various prize-winning ports 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (star positions in the figure). provided in The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a dashed line on the game board 5 and is partially overlapped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the outlet 1111 . This is to prevent calculation of incorrect base values. That is, when the player brings the magnet closer to the out port 1111 to operate the discharged ball sensor 3060, the number of out balls is counted more than the actual number, and the base value is lowered. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 is sometimes subjected to maintenance work so as to return the base value to a predetermined standard value at the game parlor. In a pachinko machine which has undergone maintenance work based on a base value different from the actual one, the number of balls put out in a normal state is increased, so that the player can play in a more advantageous state than usual and can obtain a lot of put out balls. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent such an illegal payout of balls. In addition to the vicinity of the outlet 1111, the magnetic sensor 1030 may be provided at a location where the ejected ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 should have a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030 as illustrated. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when detecting an out ball with a plurality of ejection ball sensors 3060, magnetism is detected within a sufficient range to cover the plurality of ejection ball sensors 3060. FIG. Also, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the outlet 1111 may include other prize-winning outlets (for example, the large prize-winning outlet 2005 provided above the outlet 1111).

FIG. 92 shows a structure of main control input circuit 1315. Referring to FIG. The main control input circuit 1315 includes the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the winning opening sensors (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first big winning opening sensor 2114, second big winning opening Sensor 2554, second lower grand winning opening sensor 2557, etc.), the output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is received and input to the main control MPU 1311.

Main control input circuit 1315 includes interface circuit 1331 and buffer circuit 1332 . The interface circuit 1331 level-converts or shapes (for example, eliminates chattering) signals input from various sensors, and outputs the signals. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at the timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311 .

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to one of terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and the signals level-converted and shaped by the interface circuit 1331 are output from terminals Y1 to Y8 and buffered. It is input to one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. FIG. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. Thereby, the detection result by each sensor is taken into the main control MPU 1311 .

The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The anomaly detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the inputs to the A1 to A8 terminals, and the level of the input signal to each terminal is lower than a predetermined threshold (eg, 4 V) or a predetermined threshold (eg, power supply voltage - 0.1 V), it detects a disconnection of the connection wire to the switch or a short circuit of the switch, and if the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold value, an abnormal signal E , and outputs a signal at a level at which each sensor is OFF from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and outputs an abnormality signal E when the power supply voltage becomes lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 12V-20%) and an abnormality of the power supply is detected. At the same time, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals, each sensor outputs a signal at an OFF level from the Y1 to Y8 terminals. That is, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit corresponding to the input becomes OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine that the signal output from the sensor is valid (the output of the sensor is invalidated). This eliminates the need for the main control MPU 1311 to determine whether or not to process the input signal based on whether or not the power supply of the switch has decreased. Regardless of the states of the input signals A1 to A8, a signal at a level that turns each sensor off can be output.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, it does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives signals from sensors used to calculate the base value (number of discharged balls, number of prize balls) and signals from sensors not used to calculate the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.). . The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in a sensor unrelated to the base calculation, the base calculation is not executed and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for calculating the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for calculating the base value. Output an anomaly signal to stop the base calculation.

93, 94, and 95 are diagrams showing examples of mounting the main control board 1310. FIG. FIG. 93(A) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. An example of connection to a driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement on the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317 and the main control board 1310. FIG. 95(A) is a front view of main control board 1310 housed in main control board box 1320, FIG. 95(B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95(C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334. FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333 . Display data is then output from the different driver circuits 1334 to the functional display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 .

In the example shown in FIG. 93(B), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into one latch circuit 1333 . Display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 .

In the examples shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the main control MPU 1311 receives the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and the clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 . Signal lines for outputting display data from the main control MPU 1311 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 should preferably be arranged so as not to cross signal lines for reset signals and clock signals.

Connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A is connected, and is preferably provided above main control board 1310 . The connector 13101 is connected not only to the output line from the board-side ejection ball sensor 3060A, but also to the output lines from the other prize winning opening sensors 3015 and 2104 and the magnetic detection sensor 1030 . Connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected, and is preferably provided below main control board 1310 . Signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 are input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and buffer circuit 1332 .

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components on the main control board 1310 arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317. FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the printed circuit board that constitutes the main control board 1310 from the back side. Solid lines are patterns on the back side, dashed lines are patterns on the component surface side, and dotted lines are components mounted on the component surface of the printed circuit board. indicates The illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333) and passed through the driver 2 (1334) to the cathode side segment of each digit of the 7 segment LED of the base display 1317. connected to the terminal.

In addition, some of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 1 (1333) and passed through the driver 1 (1334) to each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. connected to the common terminal on the anode side of the

A chip select signal that controls the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333 is output from the main control MPU 1311. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) receives the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311. , the data for controlling blinking of each segment is fetched from the data lines (D1 to D8). Also, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

A reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311 . The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333. The latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to cross the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to cross the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal.

This is because, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the base indicator 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting. The data line between the base indicator 1317 frequently changes levels. In particular, a large current flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base indicator 1317 to drive the LED elements. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (especially between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) causes noise. Then, when the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the signal line of the reset signal or clock signal cross each other, the signal line of the reset signal or clock signal will have noise, causing the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction. there's a possibility that. This intersection of signal lines can also occur in the intersection of wiring patterns on the front and back surfaces of the printed circuit board, or in the intersection of wiring patterns on inner layers and surface layers (front and back surfaces).

Specifically, when a reset signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that cannot occur originally, the main control MPU 1311 is reset during the game, and the game may stop or the game state may be erased. . It should be noted that if the game state is erased at a timing that cannot occur originally, normal power-off processing will not be executed and will be reset. The game ends in the middle, or the suspension of the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game is erased.

The main control board box 1320 is partly lower in height and higher in other parts depending on the height of the components attached to the main control board 1310 and interference with other members when assembled. It's becoming For example, as shown in FIG. 95, since the main control MPU 1311 is tall, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area on the left side of , the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and components such as relatively tall electrolytic capacitors are mounted. On the other hand, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low in the area on the right side of the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and short components such as ICs are mounted thereon (tall components cannot be placed). It should be noted that the main control board box 1320 is tall, and hatching indicates a region where tall components can be mounted. In addition, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height equal to or lower than the surface into which the mating connector is inserted (preferably the same height as the board surface). It is recommended that the insertion and removal of cables (connectors) to be connected to the board of the board should not be hindered.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 according to the height of the components mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the act of mounting illegal parts (circuits) on the main control board. can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is arranged in the upper right part of the main control board 1310. However, even if the body frame 4 is opened at a predetermined angle for maintenance reasons, the base display is placed in a position where it is difficult for the player to see the display contents. A display 1317 is preferably arranged. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened at a predetermined angle for maintenance during business (confirming the presence or absence of game balls in the supply tank), if the player can visually recognize the display contents of the base display 1317, the player can In many cases, the player does not correctly understand how to read the display of the base display 1317, so the player may ask for an explanation of the display content of the base display 1317. In addition, it is preferable to arrange the base display 1317 at a position where the player cannot visually recognize the display contents. In addition, by arranging the base display 1317 in this way, it is possible to suppress inquiries from players. That is, the base display 1317 displays the base value for the operation of 52,000 out-balls at maximum, but since the base value differs from the base value in a short-time game played by the player, complaints about the ball-out rate may arise. There is By arranging the base display 1317 in this manner, complaints from players can be suppressed. The above is the same for the character product ratio display 1317 described above, and it is preferable that the character product ratio display 1317 is arranged at a position where the display content is difficult for the player to see.

As shown, the base indicator (7-segment LED) 1317 is low in height, so it is mounted in the low height area of the main control board box 1320 .

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are configured by light-emitting diodes (LEDs) will be described, but they may be configured by lamps (light bulbs) or other light-emitting elements. The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400. do.

As previously mentioned, main control I/O port 1314 includes latch circuit 1333 and driver circuit 1334 .

The latch circuit 1333 takes in the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs it. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the input signal, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12 V) input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334 .

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 captures the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs the data to the driver circuit 1334 from the Q1 to Q8 terminals, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the signals input to the I1-I8 terminals, and changes the voltages of the O1-O8 terminals, respectively. The outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LEDs forming the base indicator 1317 and the 7-segment LEDs of the function display unit 1400. FIG.

For example, in order to light the first digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) loads the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). Also, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the first digit of the base display 1317 is turned on. driven.

In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) converts the bus data D1 to D8 fetched into the latch 3 (1333) to the segment data (low when lit) at the rising timing of CS2. ). Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken in the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rise timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LEDs of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 are of the anode common type, current flows from the driver 1 to the driver 2 through the 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, when the segment is lit, the outputs of drivers 1 and 4 are VCC (+12V), and the outputs of drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus to the Q1 to Q8 terminals as they are. A signal may be output from one of the terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary number data obtained from.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. The segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt processing. That is, since both the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 through separate signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 are Output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and segment data for controlling lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of common data.

The display data for the base display 1317 and the display data for the function display unit 1400 are generated by different processes within the timer interrupt process and output at different timings within the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area to generate and output display data to the base display device 1317 . On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 executes the game control code 13131 in the game control area to generate and output display data to the function display unit 1400 . These data are generated by different programs (codes) and output at different timings.

Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Similarly, segment data sent from driver 3 (1334) to function display unit 1400 and common data sent from driver 4 (1334) to function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317 is executed at a different timing from the timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and is preferably executed subsequently.

The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to programs (game control code 13131, base calculation/display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but the same In order to prevent the common signal from being transmitted at the same timing, control data common to the two codes may be used to control the transmission timing of the common signal so as not to overlap. For example, a common counter is provided that is commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400, and the common counter is 4 to 7, control is performed to output a common signal to the base indicator 1317 .

The processing of outputting the common signal and the processing of outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or in one subroutine. A game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and a base calculation/display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317, respectively. It is preferable to call the subroutine at the timing determined by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 and base display 1317 . In this case, the output of data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of data to be sent to the base display 1317 are not performed within the same timer interrupt process. The game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 are executed in one timer interrupt process, but the subroutine is called in different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, the display provided outside the main control board 1310 (function display unit 1400) Even if noise is mixed in from the main control board 1310, the influence on the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 shows the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93(B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram of an example that is used; The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400. do.

As previously mentioned, main control I/O port 1314 includes latch circuit 1333 and driver circuit 1334 . Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I/O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, differences from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. Common.

In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) converts the bus data D1 to D8 fetched into the latch 3 (1333) to the segment data (low when lit) at the rising timing of CS2. Output. Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

Thus, by sharing the driver circuit between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the circuit scale can be reduced. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate is lowered, the board size can be reduced, and the board unit (including main control board 1310 and main control board box 1320) can be easily miniaturized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (printed board with three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board having patterns only on the front and back sides. For this reason, even if parts can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 configured with a two-layer board, it is not possible to secure an area for routing wiring patterns, and the board must be larger than a multi-layer board with three or more layers. Therefore, miniaturization by reducing the number of parts is important.

FIG. 98 is a timing chart for an example configuration of the main control I/O port 1314 shown in FIG. In FIG. 98, dotted lines perpendicular to the time axis indicate divisions of timer interrupt processing (start timing of timer interrupt processing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising edge of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) outputs common data (when driving) corresponding to the digits indicated by D1 to D4. is HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment to be lit in the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. Latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising edge of CS2, and driver 3 (1334) outputs segment data (LOW when lit) indicated by D1 to D8. output to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 .

After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment to be lit on the base indicator 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. The latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising edge of CS1, and the driver 2 (1334) stores the segment data (LOW when lit) indicated by D1 to D8. output, and the 7-segment LED of the base indicator 1317 is lit.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all the data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1 and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt processing, the main control MPU 1311 outputs next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, repeats the above-described processing, and outputs digit selection data and display data. In this way, the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share the common side driver circuit, segment data are time-divided and output, and the common common data is used to display the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be lit.

As shown in FIGS. 93(B) and 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334, the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced and high-density mounting (for example, , the adoption of a multi-layer board and the close arrangement of components) can be easily mounted on the main control board 1310 .

In addition, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 with common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be 1317 outputs the segment data at a different timing. Therefore, while controlling both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 by a common data line, both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be displayed and controlled within one timer interrupt process. .

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data for the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data for the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of chip select (CS2, CS1) and erased at the rising timing of chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, when the display data for the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data for the base display 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is equal to the display time of the base display 1317. be longer. This is done by lengthening the lighting time in one cycle of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing the brightness, thereby reducing visibility caused by direct lighting of the hall. This is to prevent In addition, since the base indicator 1317 is arranged on the back side, which is darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the base indicator 1317 is less affected even if the LED emits light at a low luminance. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the emission brightness of the first LED is made higher than the emission brightness of the second LED.

In contrast to the above, the display data for the base display 1317 is output first, the display data for the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display data for the base display 1317 is displayed on the function display unit 1400. It can be longer than hours.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in states (intervals) involved in base value calculation.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, provisional section display and fixed section display are switched at intervals of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and displayed. In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, "bA." is displayed in the upper two digits to indicate that the base value A is being displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the lower two digits as a percentage of two digits. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, the base value A can be displayed so as to be 0% or 100%.

Also, in the provisional section display, if the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 6000), the upper two digits (or all four digits) are displayed blinking (e.g., cycle 0.6 seconds (Repeatedly turned on for 0.3 seconds and turned off for 0.3 seconds), indicating that an accurate base value cannot be measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability non-time-saving out balls is a predetermined number (for example, 6000) or more, the upper two digits are lit and displayed to indicate that an accurate base value can be measured.

In the fixed interval display, the base value of the previous interval is displayed. Specifically, the upper two digits indicate that the base value B is displayed by lighting up “bb.” The base value B), which is the final value of two digits, is lit and displayed as a percentage of two digits. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value B is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base indicator 1317 is two, the base value B can be displayed so as to be 0% or 100%.

In the first section, the base value is not measured because the previous section is the test section. For this reason, in the fixed section display, the upper two digits are indicated by blinking "bb." and the lower two digits are indicated by blinking "--".

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the base value is not calculated for a predetermined number (for example, 256) of less than 500 out balls since the power is turned on for the first time as a test section. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on for the first time and a predetermined number of shots are fired, the ball output may vary within the range of the probability distribution, the base value is not stable, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. . Therefore, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value is indefinite. Specifically, in the provisional section display, the upper two digits are displayed as "bA." and the lower one digit is displayed as "--". , displays “--” in the last digit. In the test section, all the digits of the base indicator 1317 are displayed blinking to indicate that an accurate base value cannot be measured. It should be noted that the base value may be indefinite without calculating the base value in the test section and displaying the calculated base value on the base display 1317 .

Here, when the power is turned on for the first time, the power is turned on for the first time after the pachinko machine 1 is completed, or immediately after the initialization of the base calculation work area (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108) is executed. state. Further, the time of power-on generally used in this specification means the time of power-on other than the first power-on.

Further, all the LEDs of all digits of the base display 1317 may flash for a predetermined time after the power is turned on, or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished (from the OFF operation of the setting key 971). .

In addition, in the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, if an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is erased, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the number of all out balls reaches 52000 in all game states (during jackpot, normal game, time saving, non time saving, high probability, low probability, etc.), the next section , and measure a new base value. Note that the number of out balls in one section is not 52,000, and may be any other number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the pachinko machine 1 operates for 10 hours a day, 60,000, which is the number of out balls in one day, may be used as the number of out balls in one section. A round number of 50000 or 100000 may be adopted.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the number of out-balls in one section can be changed as appropriate. For example, a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, etc.) may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out balls for one section may be set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 or on another board connected to the main control board 1310 . Furthermore, if the setting of the switch is changed, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) of the RAM 1312 is initialized to restart the calculation of the base value from the test section, or restart from the beginning of the current section. good. Since the pachinko machine is often operated immediately after being introduced as a new machine, the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and after the business period has passed, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a setting means capable of setting the operation that determines the length of the section that is the unit for calculating the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, the operation set by the setting means is used. , the length of one section is set.

An example of displaying the section immediately before the provisional section currently being measured as the final section display will be explained. You may At this time, even if the display is switched from the provisional section → the fixed section 1 → the fixed section 2 → the fixed section 3 at predetermined time intervals, by operating the display changeover switch provided separately, the provisional section → the fixed section 1 → the fixed section 2 → The confirmation section 3 may be switched and displayed.

In this case, the upper two digits of the base display 1317 in the definite section display are not "bb." It should be displayed differently.

In this manner, the base display 1317 switches between the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of one or a plurality of immediately preceding sections at predetermined time intervals. In addition, a part of the base display 1317 displays a distinguishable display content, and the other part displays the measured base value.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317. FIG.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a plurality of digits (for example, 4 digits) of 7-segment LEDs, and displays numbers and characters by lighting or blinking segments of each digit. 0 to 9 can be displayed as numbers, and alphabetic characters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and - can also be displayed as letters. In addition, decimal points can be displayed at the same time as numbers and letters. A case where the number 6 is displayed together with the decimal point and a case where the number 9 is displayed are illustrated.

101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of initialization processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The initialization processing shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 is different from the initialization processing described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, except that the check code calculation processing (step S50) and the check code storage processing (step S52) are deleted. Therefore, the calculation of the check code in the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. The same steps as those of the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, thereby enabling writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and checks whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activation of the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has passed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. proceed to On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power failure flag has been set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). , the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48 The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may not be correct. area other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. proceed to

Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18) and the power failure flag abnormality in which the power failure flag is not set (step S20) , a RAM error (step S22) in which the checksums of the RAM do not match, and an error in the work for base calculation (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and in the case of power failure flag abnormality and RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack area ) are cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Moreover, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

It should be noted that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of power failure flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 You may clear the entire RAM area including If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state will be lost and normal processing cannot be executed. should be initialized only. Also, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared in the same manner as described above, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared. No need to clear.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code. , N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal should be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area can be erased or left as is. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are erased under different conditions for each type of data (game control area 13126 and base calculation area 13128). do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. If the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at any timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up base calculation area 13128 is not erased, thereby preventing the base calculation area 13128 from being erased by the operation of the game hall attendant, thereby preventing the abnormal base value from being concealed. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled to have a high base value or a low base value.

When the main control MPU 1311 executes power recovery setting of the RAM work area or RAM initialization processing, the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) initializes various setting registers (step S28), peripheral control board A power-on command setting process (step S32) for transmission to 1510 is executed, and execution of interrupt processes including timer interrupt process is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal (step S36), and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), random number update processing is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes power failure processing (power failure setting means). In the power-off processing, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), the output ports are cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally retained (step S46), and checks the RAM 1312 for the checksum calculation result. Store in the thumb area (step S48).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) in the base calculation process instead of the main board side power-off process. By storing the data used to calculate the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code in this way, the data for base calculation and the calculated base value can be saved even when the power is shut off. can be stored and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

Note that the check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in a modified example described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Furthermore, a value indicating normal backup is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56), and writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S56). S58), it waits until recovery from the power failure (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of the base calculation area 13128 in which the character product ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26A is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is constituted by a partial area of the RAM 1312, and is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area) as described above.

The base calculation area 13128 includes storage areas for the base value A, the base value B, the section counter, the number of all out balls, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls.

The base value A storage area consists of 1 byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area for the base value B consists of 1 byte and stores the base value measured in the section immediately before the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter consists of 1 byte and stores a value indicating the section in which the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated each time the section is switched, and is used to control different display contents depending on the section. It should be noted that the interval counter should be controlled to be any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, not to exceed 2. Specifically, the section counter is 0 in the test section, the section counter is 1 in the first section, and the section counter is 2 in the second and subsequent sections. Also, the section counter may be controlled to have a value from 0 to 255 so as not to exceed 255, and the section counter will be 2 or more after the second section.

The storage area for the total number of out-balls consists of 2 bytes, and stores all the number of out-balls regardless of the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). Total out pitches are used to determine interval switching, which is the base unit of measure. In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is measured for each section, with the operation of approximately one day as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the number of all-out pitches. As described above, the total number of out balls is a storage area for counting all the number of out balls regardless of the game state for each section. total value from the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

The storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of out-balls for calculating the base value (the number of out-balls in the game state other than the special prize) Store. The storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (the number of prize balls in the game state other than the special prize) Store. In addition, the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls and the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls may be an area of 2 bytes or more, but considering the calculation process of the base value, the same number of bytes It is preferable to

The storage capacity (number of bytes) of each storage area described above is merely an example, and may be determined according to the number of out balls in one section.

When providing the main area and the backup area of the base calculation area 13128 , storage areas having the same configuration are provided in the RAM 1312 .

FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is different from the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. Object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 to the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the registers (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 ( 103) is updated, and the base value is calculated (step S801). The details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80). .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbols and special electric auditors control processing (step S86), normal symbols and normal electric auditors control processing ( Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is measured by the timer interrupt process, so the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts showing an example of base calculation processing.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as described above, the winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first large winning opening sensor 2114, second upper large winning opening sensor 2554, second When there is an abnormality in the ball sensor (board-side ball sensor 3060A, frame-side ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated based on the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be performed. In addition, even if it is determined that fraudulent activity has occurred (for example, the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, or the radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), the base value is accurately determines that there is an error that cannot be calculated. If it is determined that there is this error, the display on the base indicator 1317 may be extinguished. In step S8011, for an error that accompanies the game stop (eg, magnetism, vibration, radio wave error, etc.), it is determined to be an error (YES), and an error that does not accompany the game stop (eg, prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.) It may be determined that there is no error (NO) for failures that are not directly related to the calculation of the base (out of supply, full-tank error, etc.). In other words, the base calculation process may be executed even if some of the multiple types of abnormal conditions exist, and the base calculation process may not be executed if there are other abnormalities.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ball sensor 1020, the ball sensor 3060, etc. In the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a sensor detection signal, an out ball is detected. Get the number of balls=1. When out-balls are detected by a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060, the total value of the number detected by each sensor is obtained as the number of out-balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of prize balls (step S8015). As for the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process of step S80 is acquired. The number of prize balls obtained in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prepared payout command may be used. Alternatively, it may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command that has already been sent. Moreover, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the reception confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 . Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls (the number of paid out prize balls) that receives a payout completion report from the payout control board 951 . This variation is as described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. FIG.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball is detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If an out ball has not been detected, the process advances to step S8022 without executing processing related to an out ball. On the other hand, if an out-ball is detected, the detected out-ball number is added to the total number of out-balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether it is currently in the test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is the initial value of 0. It's becoming Therefore, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined to be a test section. If it is the test section, there is no need to calculate the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not the test section, it is determined whether or not the current game state is during the special prize (step S8019). Whether or not a special prize is being awarded can be determined in the same manner as in step S810 in FIG. 39 described above. When the game state is during the special prize, it means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to the big win, and it is during the time when the player can win many prize balls, but it includes the opening and ending time of the big win game. may When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed during one big win, the time (closing interval) from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the condition device is in operation, for example, from the finalization of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the instruction to hit to the right.

Furthermore, in the starting ports 2002 and 2004, during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during electric sapo may be included in the special prize. Furthermore, in a game state other than during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during power supply, a predetermined time after opening the starting port 2004 after closing (for example, until the ball that has won the starting port is detected as an out ball) seconds required) may be included in the prize. In addition, the so-called "hidden game state" that is in a high probability game state but does not become a time saving (during power supply) is not included in the special prize, and in the same game state as the normal state (low probability, non-time saving state) The base value may be calculated using the number of winning balls or the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal game state and the hidden game state, and the base value may be displayed so as to be identifiable as to which base is displayed.

The hidden game state is a game state in which even if the probability is high, the player does not recognize that it is a high probability state. In addition, the player may look at the base display 1317 and recognize that he is in a hidden game state (that is, a high probability). In other words, in the frame open state, the player can know the game state by whether the base display changes when the staff of the hall repairs the ball in the winning hole or throws the ball in the out hole. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal game state and the hidden game state.

On the other hand, there are cases where it is necessary to manage the base value in a low-probability/non-time-saving state for the operation of the hall. . Such problems can be avoided by calculating the base value while excluding the latent gaming state. A similar problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the hidden game state. In other words, since the normal game state and the hidden game state are different game states in the first place, depending on the business form of the hall, it may be desired to separately manage (inspect) the base value for each game state. .

In addition, when calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the hidden game state, even if the base value is calculated using the dedicated calculation process for each game state, the base value is calculated using the common calculation process. You may By calculating the base value using common calculation processing, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced, and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculation of the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the special prize relating to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during operation of the condition device (for example, from the finalization of the jackpot pattern of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of winning balls and out balls other than those during the special prize, normal winnings (during the so-called big wins) to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening and closing member uses winning balls and winning balls other than during the special prize (low probability time and non-time saving time) to calculate the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize openings 2005 and 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls to calculate the base value regardless of the game state (whether or not a special prize is being played). Not used, other accessories (starting port 2004) can be switched between using the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls for calculation of the base value or not depending on the game state (whether special prizes are in progress or not). It will be.

Also, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small win) even when the condition device does not operate. In general, small hits occur during a short period of time, and since the game balls are less likely to win due to the short opening, there is no influence on the calculation of the base value. However, it is also possible to generate a small hit during a time other than the special prize (normal time) and open only the time when the possibility of winning the game ball becomes high. In this case, winning balls and winning balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins other than during the special prize may be used for calculation of the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly comply with the standard of the base value, and improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is during the special prize, the out-ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out-balls detected in step S8014 should be used for base calculation, so it is detected as the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls stored in the base calculation area 13128. The number of out-balls given is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 each time the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is executed, when an out ball or a prize ball other than during a special prize is detected, and indicates the timing at which the base value should be calculated (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a prize ball is detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If the prize ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process relating to the prize ball. On the other hand, if a prize ball has been detected, it is determined whether the current game state is a special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether a special prize is being awarded may be the same as in step S8019.

If the game state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 should be used for base calculation, so it is detected as the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls stored in the base calculation area 13128. The awarded number of balls is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). When the update flag is 1, out balls or prize balls other than during the special prize are detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), so the number of low probability/non-time-saving prize balls is low probability/non-time-saving out ball The base value is calculated by dividing by the number and stored in the base value A storage area of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether it is in the test section (step S8028). Then, if the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is time to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the section counter indicates that it is a test section, If the number of all-out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is time to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the time to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 in order to continue the test section. On the other hand, if it is during the test section and the timing is for ending the test section, the process advances to step S8032 to shift from the test section to the first section. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The interval counter changes from 0 representing the test interval to 1 representing the first interval. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). By this process, the test section is terminated and the process shifts to the first section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and that the game is not in the test section, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the number of all out balls is 52000 or more (step S8030). If the number of all out balls is less than 52000, the process proceeds to step S8034 to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the number of all-out balls is 52000 or more, the section ends and processing for starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area and writes it to the base value B storage area in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8031). After that, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the interval counter is controlled to be any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, not to exceed 2. Therefore, when the interval counter value is 2, adding 1 to the interval counter The interval counter value is not incremented and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). If the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch between the provisional section display and the fixed section display described in FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the fixed section display is the period of blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 in FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls in each section is less than 6000. It should be longer enough. This is because if the blinking and display switching are at the same period, the blinking display (that is, whether the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is less than 6000) becomes difficult to understand. This is for making it easy to understand whether it is switching or not.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). The check code calculation method uses the same calculation method as the process of calculating the check code in step S50 of the initialization process (FIG. 22). If the check code is to be a fixed value without calculating it, it is preferable to use a multi-byte value in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, if it is 2 bytes, it will be A55AH (1010010101011010B). to). Moreover, instead of setting a fixed value in a continuous area, the areas may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored in the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. If the check code is a fixed value, it should be configured with a larger number of bytes than the check data obtained by calculating the checksum to improve the possibility of determining a RAM abnormality.

Thus, according to the base calculation process of this embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so the base value can be calculated without delay ( can be displayed in real time), and it can be judged without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal. In addition, the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for base calculation, is extremely small compared to the capacity of the game control area 13126. Even if calculated, the effect on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

Also, regarding the prize balls, if the base value is calculated and displayed using the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning signal generated, the timing of calculating and displaying the base value and the timing of the prize balls being paid out will differ. is different. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the payout device and the prize balls are not paid out (out of supply, top tray is full, failure of the payout count sensor provided in the prize ball passage, failure of the payout device due to failure of the payout motor, etc.) stop, etc.), the base value is calculated and displayed.

In the base calculation process described above, the base value is calculated using the number of out balls detected in the timer interrupt process and the number of prize balls calculated each time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called multiple times, and the base value is calculated multiple times. In this way, even if the timing for switching the interval (the number of out balls is 52,000) arrives in one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which interval before and after is calculated as the base value. , can display accurate base values in real time.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed out, and when the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up, a command for stopping the abnormal prize notification is generated, and the abnormal prize notification is performed. may be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display data generation processing.

The base display data generation process is called from step S8035 of the base calculation process and executed.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have passed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499. Therefore, the processing of steps S8042 to S8045 is executed while the display switching counter is between 0 and 1249, and the processing of steps S8042 to S8045 is executed while the display switching counter is between 1250 and 2499. executes the processing of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every five seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether it is currently in the test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not the test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured is generated in the provisional section (step S8045).

If it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is equal to or greater than 1250, data for displaying "bb." After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is the test section or the first section (step S8047). In the test section or the first section, since the base value has not been measured in the past definite section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest defined section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls is smaller than 6000 (step S8050 ). And if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls is less than 6000, the number of operations (number of out-balls) after starting the measurement of the base value in the section is small, so the base value may not be stable. Control is performed so that the display on the base display 1317 blinks (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls is 6000 or more, the display of the base indicator 1317 is controlled to light up without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the display switching counter is not initialized and the process proceeds to step S8055. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is equal to or greater than 2499, one repetition has been completed, so the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt processing (base calculation processing) that is executed at predetermined time intervals, by switching the display content on the base display unit 1317 using the display switching counter that is periodically updated, the current The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the fixed interval can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, since the blinking display is performed in the range in which the base value is not stable in each section, whether the base value is in the stable range or not can be easily confirmed by the display of the base display 1317.例文帳に追加

FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of base calculation processing. The modified example shown in FIG. 108 is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105, except for the addition of base calculation work check processing (steps S8012 and S8013). In FIG. 108, the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation processing will be described, but the processing from steps S8028 to S8038 is the same as in FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S8012). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code. , N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal should be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area can be erased or left as is. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). After determining whether 13128 is normal (step S8012) and performing necessary processing based on the determination result, it may be determined whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

The subsequent processing (from step S8014 onwards) is the same as in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal at each timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds). display of base values can be suppressed.

Next, a method for judging abnormality of the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described. The value used for calculating the base value and the calculated base value are stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the "character ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is called the "base calculation area 13128"). read), and it is determined at a predetermined timing whether the data is normal. There are the following variations in which process (timing) the normality/abnormality determination step and the check code calculation step are performed.
101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization processing).
106 and 108: The check code calculated by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is judged by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(Case where the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and judged when the power is turned on)
101 and 106, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) when the power is turned on will be described.

101 and 102, and the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation processing (FIGS. 105 and 106), A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data.

Also, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined using a check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state related to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value starts from the test period.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code. , N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal may be copied to the main area to restore the data in the base calculation area 13128 . After that, the data in the backup area can be erased or left as is. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In this case, the frequency of check code determination is low, and the consumption of computational resources (main control MPU 1311) required for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
21 and 22, the process of determining the check code calculated when the power is turned off when the power is turned on (initialization process) will be described.

Assuming that the initialization processing is shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 and the base calculation processing is shown in FIGS. A check code (eg, checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Also, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined using a check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of check code calculation and determination is low, and the consumption of computational resources (main control MPU 1311) required for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated and judged by timer interrupt processing)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 and 108, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described.

108 and 106, a check code (for example, checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106).

Also, in step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined using a check code whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area is normal in steps S24 and S26 may be omitted.

In this case, abnormalities in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

If a fixed value is used instead of the checksum for the check code, the timing for setting and determining the check code may be the same as the timing for calculating and determining the checksum. Also, both the checksum and the fixed value may be used as the check code for determination.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing calculation of the base value when the game state is switched.

One game ball wins while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, and after that, the variable display game of a predetermined number of times is finished, the time saving state is finished, and the normal state is restored. After that, in the normal state, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the starting port 2004 which is open.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display according to the winning to the starting port 2004. - 特許庁That is, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in relation to any winning to the starting port 2004 as shown.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the out ball during the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the start port 2004 is not added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, The second prize-winning ball is added to the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls.

In the above description, the end of the time saving state has been described, but the same applies to the end of the probability variation by ST.

A similar phenomenon occurs when a big hit occurs in the special symbol variation display game, in addition to the end of the time-saving state described above. In a normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, then a big hit state starts, and the game ball wins the starting port 2004 during opening.

Also in this case, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is variable and displayed in relation to the winning of any starting port 2004 . On the other hand, since the out ball during the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time-saving out ball number, but the second winning ball has a low probability.・It is not added to the number of non-time-saving out balls.

Furthermore, a similar phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In the normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while opening the starting port 2004 (electric tulip), then a specific error occurs, and furthermore, the game ball wins the starting port 2004 during opening. . As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error that makes it impossible to accurately calculate the base value based on the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the out Do not use spheres in base calculations.

Also in this case, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is variable and displayed in relation to the winning of any starting port 2004 . On the other hand, since the out ball during a specific error occurrence is not used for base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls, but the second winning ball is not added to the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of game balls that have won during the operation of the electric accessory under specific conditions (at the end of time saving, at the occurrence of a special symbol variation display game big hit, at the occurrence of a specific error, etc.) There are cases where it is used for calculation of the base value and cases where it is not used for calculation of the base value, and it is possible to start the fluctuation of the special figure in any winning prize.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the prefetch effect of the pending special symbol variation display game, the first prize won in the time saving state to the start port 2004 is not subject to the prefetch effect, and in the normal state The second prize that has been won may be the target of the look-ahead effect. On the contrary, the first prize winning in the time saving state to the start port 2004 may be targeted for the look-ahead performance, and the second prize winning in the normal state may not be targeted for the look-ahead performance.

In addition, although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the variable probability state (ST) or the electric sapo state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of memory used by the CPU in processing outside the game control area (for example, base calculation processing) will be described.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311 regarding storage areas.

The main control MPU 1311 is configured as shown in FIG. 18 as a whole, and FIG. 110 shows the configuration regarding storage areas in detail.

In the main control MPU 1311, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and an internal CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 are provided as storage areas for storing data. The intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 only temporarily stores data when the CPU 13111 executes the program (for example, a flag indicating the state of the operation result, the execution state of the program, data input/output to/from the CPU 13111, etc.). The internal CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 temporarily stores, for example, random values updated in the random number update process (step S40 in FIG. 22) and intermediate values in random value update calculations. Also, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the jump destination address are temporarily stored in the internal CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 so that the processor core 13141 executes the process corresponding to the stored address. Furthermore, values input to ports from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, values in the process of creating edge information of signals input from the switches, detection results of edge information) are temporarily store in

In addition, when a random number is acquired and stored in the reserved storage area at the time of winning the starting opening, the random number is temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the temporarily stored random number is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 1312. memorize to In addition, when obtaining a random number at the time of starting entrance winning and performing look-ahead judgment (hitting judgment at the time of starting entrance winning) based on the value of the random number, the random number temporarily stored in the CPU internal auxiliary storage unit 13142 The prefetch determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the random value stored in the reserved storage area may be read (again) to any storage area of the intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 to perform the prefetch determination.

The intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 is provided separately from a memory space configured by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313 and specified by an address, and is specified by the name of each storage area included in the intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 (for example, Area0). . The intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 includes a switching unit 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C.

The auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C are composed of a plurality of storage areas (Area 0 to 6) each having a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes). The access from the processor core 13141 is enabled for each group. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can access only the auxiliary storage area 13145A and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and C.

As will be described later, the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 can collectively switch a plurality of storage areas for each group with one CHANGE instruction. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of group 0 and switches the auxiliary storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 to group 0.

The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but any number of groups of two or more may be used. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

The storage area (Area 0 to 5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is a storage area provided separately from the RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data during program execution, and one (1 byte = 8 bits) can be used. , and it can be used even if a plurality of them are set (for example, 2 bytes=16 bits as a set of Area0 and Area1). Therefore, 8-bit data and 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without causing excess capacity in the storage area. In addition, the storage area (Area6) is set as a storage area to be used with a capacity that is an integer multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of the other storage areas, and cannot be used by dividing it into 1-byte storage areas. In this way, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured with storage areas having a plurality of capacities, and storage areas that can be used in arbitrary combination are provided, so that storage areas are properly used according to the application (for example, data length) in arithmetic processing. be able to. For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, one (or a combined set) of storage areas can be addressed. Therefore, the number of arguments of the instruction can be reduced, and the instruction can be executed with a small number of clocks.

The switching unit 13143 switches groups of storage areas accessible by the processor core 13141 according to the values stored in the switching register 13144 .

The switching register 13144 is a storage area for storing data for determining the accessible auxiliary storage area 13145 , and is an area accessible by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 . The switching register 13144 stores, for example, data for identifying the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be selected (for example, 2-bit data for switching between four areas), an error flag indicating that the switching was not performed normally, (If the error flag is set, the switching instruction will be executed again), and an unauthorized access flag that is set when an error occurs in which the value of the unselected auxiliary storage area 13145 changes is stored. good.

Also, the switching register 13144 may store flags (for example, carry flag, parity/overflow flag, zero flag, sign flag, etc.) representing the state of the operation result.

In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be provided. For example, a program counter indicating the address at which the program is being executed and a stack pointer indicating the start address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a portion that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but interrupts are prohibited by the DI instruction before proceeding to the base calculation process. The base calculation process can be performed without interrupting the process from the DI instruction to the EI instruction.

Then, by the PUSH instruction, save the data of the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113). After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation processing by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the CHANGE instruction causes the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be used in the base calculation process of the callee from group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the caller. Switch to Group 1. In this way, a single CHANGE instruction can switch a plurality of storage areas for each group, and a single instruction (that is, a small number of steps) can collectively switch a plurality of storage areas.

Also, the LD instruction writes the stack pointer value being used in timer interrupt processing to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzz) in the RAM 1312 to save the stack pointer value. After that, the LD instruction writes the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 to the stack pointer to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 in FIG. 105 or FIG. After the base calculation process ends (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction. After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 1 used in the callee's base calculation process to group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt process. return. In general, an instruction to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 and an instruction to restore data saved in the stack have different roles. By returning the data saved in the stack to the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched. For this reason, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to group 0 by the CHANGE instruction after the base calculation process is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

In this way, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing the argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145 .

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP command. The data of the switching register 13144 may be saved and restored using other instructions (for example, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) instead of using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

After that, after enabling the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt processing is continued, the timer interrupt processing is terminated by RETI, and the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21) is returned to.

It should be noted that interrupts may be inhibited by a DI instruction at the beginning of timer interrupt processing, and interrupts may be permitted by an EI instruction at the end of timer interrupt processing. Alternatively, by directly manipulating the interrupt enable flag without relying on the DI or EI instruction, interrupts may be prohibited when timer interrupt processing starts, and interrupts may be enabled at the timing of execution of the RETI instruction.

Further, timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state in which interrupts are disabled, so there is no need to further disable or enable interrupts within timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the DI instruction disables interrupts in order to disable interrupts when interrupts are enabled for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In the above example, saving of the switching register 13144 is executed by the timer interrupt processing of the caller, and switching of the auxiliary storage area 13145 and switching of the stack area are executed by the base calculation processing of the callee. One process may be executed by either the caller or callee when the process moves outside the game control area and when the process returns to the game control area. An example of switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 in timer interrupt processing of the calling source will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing another example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a part that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but interrupts are prohibited by the DI instruction before proceeding to the base calculation process. By interrupting between the DI instruction and the EI instruction, the base calculation processing can be performed without interrupting the processing during that period.

Then, by the PUSH instruction, save the data of the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113). After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 0 used for timer interrupt processing of the caller to group 1 used for base calculation processing of the callee. In this way, a single CHANGE instruction can switch a plurality of storage areas for each group, and a single instruction (that is, a small number of steps) can collectively switch a plurality of storage areas.

After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation processing by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the LD instruction writes the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzz) in the RAM 1312, and the stack pointer value evacuate. After that, the LD instruction writes the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 to the stack pointer to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 in FIG. 105 or FIG. After the base calculation process ends (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 1 used in the called base calculation process to the group 0 used in the caller timer interrupt process, and the POP instruction causes the game The data of the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 . The data of the switching register 13144 may be saved and restored using other instructions (for example, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) instead of using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

As described above, by restoring the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to the state before the base calculation process is called. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

After that, after enabling the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt processing is continued, the timer interrupt processing is terminated by RETI, and the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21) is returned to.

In the same manner as described above, the DI instruction may be used to inhibit interrupts at the beginning of timer interrupt processing, and the EI instruction may be used to enable interrupts at the end of timer interrupt processing. Alternatively, by directly manipulating the interrupt enable flag without relying on the DI or EI instruction, interrupts may be prohibited when timer interrupt processing starts, and interrupts may be enabled at the timing of execution of the RETI instruction.

Further, timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state in which interrupts are disabled, so there is no need to further disable or enable interrupts within timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the DI instruction disables interrupts in order to disable interrupts when interrupts are enabled for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In FIG. 111, an example of switching timer interrupt processing, base calculation processing, and auxiliary storage area 13145 has been described, but auxiliary storage area 13145 may also be switched in inspection processing executed by debugging (inspection function) code 13133 . In this case, it is preferable to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing by the CHANGE instruction at the beginning of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 . In addition, initialization processing (steps S10 to S34 in FIG. 21), main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21), and power-off processing (steps S42 to S58 in FIG. 21). , timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 23, 75, 80, etc.), the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched to use different auxiliary storage areas 13145 for each process.

Furthermore, if only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, the processing executed within the game control area (eg, main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.) and outside the game control area (eg, debugging ( Inspection function) area, base calculation area, etc.) processing (e.g., debug processing, base calculation processing, etc.) to be executed by switching the auxiliary storage area 13145, and using different auxiliary storage areas 13145 inside and outside the game control area good too.

In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 is used for the main control side main processing and the timer interrupt processing. At the start of processing (eg, at the beginning of timer interrupt processing) temporarily store the value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the game control stack area 13137, at the end of the timer interrupt processing (eg, at the end of the timer interrupt processing) It is preferable to return the value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 to the auxiliary storage area 13145 .

For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality of (byte) storage areas, saving to the stack area one unit (byte or word) at a time increases the number of instructions for saving. Similarly, the number of instructions for recovering data from the stack area increases. Also, in this case, if the order of processing for saving data to the stack area and restoring data from the stack area is incorrect, different data will be read from the stack area, and subsequent processing may not be performed correctly. . Therefore, by providing an instruction to collectively save the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and restore all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area, It can solve the above problem.

Furthermore, if the entire storage area of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is saved to the stack area, the stack area may overflow and data outside the area reserved for the stack area (stack area for other purposes, etc.) may be rewritten. be. For this reason, in addition to the instruction to store all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area collectively, there is an instruction to collectively save a plurality of storage areas specified arbitrarily from the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area. Alternatively, an instruction may be provided and executed to collectively restore data to a plurality of arbitrarily designated storage areas among the auxiliary storage areas 13145 saved in the stack area.

In this way, it switches to another auxiliary storage area 13145 when moving to the process outside the game control area, and switches to the original auxiliary storage area 13145 when moving to the process within the game control area, so stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 The processing can proceed without saving the received data to the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area).

In addition, when moving to the process outside the game control area, save the switching register 13144 to RAM1312 (for example, stack area), and when moving to the process within the game control area, restore the switching register 13144 from the RAM1312, The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when moving to the processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be recovered without recovering from the RAM 1312 .

Also, when moving to the process outside the game control area, switch to another stack area, and when moving to the process within the game control area, switch to the original stack area, so the stack area used in the process within the game control area , The processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated without being updated in the processing outside the game control area.

In addition, the value stored in the switching register 13144 when moving to the process outside the game control area is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area), and the value saved when moving to the process within the game control area is used for switching. Since it restores to the register 13144, the value regarding the execution result of the program in the game control area can be completely separated from the process inside and outside the game control area without being updated in the process outside the game control area.

FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. FIG. In the memory arrangement shown in FIG. 113, the stack area omitted in the memory arrangement described above with reference to FIG. 26 is shown in the RAM 1312, but the RAM 1312 shown in FIG.

The ROM 1313 contains game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debugging (inspection function) code 13133, debugging (inspection function) data 13134, base calculation/display code 13135, and base calculation/display data 13136. Contains storage space. The ROM 1313 of this embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. and debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134 , and a base calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for calculating base values, such as base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136 .

Between the end address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, there is a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more, and when displayed in dump list format In addition, the game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of a predetermined length is provided between the final address of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 and the leading address of the base calculation/display code 13135 . If the predetermined length is 16 bytes or more, the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in dump list format, which is desirable, but the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. The value stored in the empty area should be the same fixed value, and may be set to a value different from or less frequently set to the value set in the game control area and debug area. Also, the value stored in the empty area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that causes the CPU to do nothing. In this way, when displayed in dump list format, the game control area, debug (inspection function) area, and base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Alternatively, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the base calculation/display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without dividing the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, it is sufficient if the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, the debug area (code for debugging (inspection function), data for debugging (inspection function)), which is processing that is not directly related to the control of the progress of the game, ) and the base calculation area (base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area, so that defects (bugs, etc.) in the base calculation/display code 13135 can be prevented from affecting the game control. Avoiding the danger of impact.

The debug (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes not directly related to the game. A code 13133 for outputting an inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. The base calculation area stores a program for calculating a base value that is not directly related to the progress of the game.

Also, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311 . In addition, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read and written to the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code 13133. is configured to be executable, and is configured not to be able to write to this area. Thus, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area accessible only from the game control code 13131 . Processing based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed during execution of the game control code 13131, but the game control code 13131 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the modification of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. .

Also, the base calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311 . The base value calculated by the base calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 . The base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area) as shown. Thus, by designing the base calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the inspection of the base calculation/display code 13135 and the inspection of the game control code 13131 can be performed. It can be performed separately, and the labor for inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. In addition, the base calculation/display code 13135 can be used in common for a plurality of models without depending on the model.

The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debug area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

The game control area 13126 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is stored, and reading and writing from the game control area 13126 are possible. In addition, the game control area 13126 cannot write data from the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but read access is possible, and the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation · The display code 13135 can refer to the data stored in the game control area 13126 .

The debug area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debug area can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation/display code 13135 . The base calculation area 13128 can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the debug (inspection function) code 13133, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited.

The game control stack area 13137 is an area where the data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area in which data used by the base calculation/display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is exclusively used to temporarily save data stored in the intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 . Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111 . Note that the stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the start address of the stack area.

FIG. 113B is a diagram showing details of the base calculation area 13128. As shown in FIG. The base calculation area 13128 may include a main area for storing base calculation results, and a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 for storing a copy of the data stored in the main area. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, set each time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation/display process, or set when the power is turned off on the main control side (Fig. 22). It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power failure process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Also, if the power failure flag is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the check code of each area has a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Incidentally, if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether or not the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Also, in the main control side power-off process, the values in the main area may be copied to each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the base calculation/display process, the values in the main area may be copied to the backup area when the base calculation/display process ends. When at least part of the main area is updated, the entire main area or only the updated value area may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2 . By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digits of the address.

[11. Recording game history]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game histories will be described.

[11-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine that records gaming history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines an effect suitable for the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 from a plurality of prepared effects, and displays the determined effect on the effect display device. Display at 1600. At that time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that a specific effect (for example, 2 types of specific effects out of 3 types of super reach) is to be displayed among a plurality of prepared effects, the switching of the game state is the starting point. How many times the special symbol variation display game has been played and the specific effect has appeared (in other words, in what rotation the effect has appeared) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 along with the progress of the game. indicate.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, Super Reach 1 appears on the 34th rotation at 10:25, the result of the special symbol variation display game is lost, and on the 127th rotation at 10:54. Super reach 2 appeared, the result of the special symbol variation display game was a loss, and super reach 2 appeared on the 428th spin at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol variation display game was a hit. is displayed.

The display of the jackpot history (for example, the history of the jackpot on the 15th spin and the jackpot on the 50th spin) can be confirmed with a data display provided in the hall, but the specific performance that appears before the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players judge whether the pachinko machine 1 is good or bad based on the extent to which a specific effect appears (for example, if Super Ready-to-Win 2 appears within 50 spins after the end of the big win, it is considered that the big win will be won in a short time). In order to meet the player's expectations, the degree of appearance of the effect is visually displayed. In addition, since the game ball is not fired when the player is confirming the degree of appearance of the effect, if a display showing the degree of appearance of all of the prepared effects is displayed, the player can check the degree of appearance of the effect. It takes time to confirm the degree of appearance of the game machine, and there is a possibility that the operation of the game machine will decrease. Therefore, it is preferable to display only a specific ready-to-win effect (a ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win) out of the ready-to-win effects. Also, the history of appearance for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C, etc.).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it stores information on the number of variations and the effect that has appeared. Further, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates information on the number of times of variation and the effect that has appeared based on the received variation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C, etc.) is operated, the number of fluctuations required until a limited specific effect appears is added and displayed instead of all the effects that have appeared. Processing should be performed.

Also, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 during business, error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 to notify the staff of the hall. As for the form of this notification, the error screen shown in FIG. 115(A) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 116, and outputs an error signal shown in FIG. Typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 117, 118 and 119. FIG. An error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is notified outside the pachinko machine 1 so that an employee of the hall can know the cause. For example, a code determined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400 . Specifically, if the cable connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is defective, the state display LED included in the function display unit 1400 displays "0", and the LED in the right of the door lights up. Lights blue.

However, errors occur due to various causes, such as a minor failure of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, disconnection of a connector), a serious failure requiring part replacement, or fraudulent activity.

The pachinko machine 1 in which an error has occurred must find the cause of the error occurrence, recover from the error, and operate. Investigating the cause of the error requires time and cost, and stoppage of operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error leads to a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hole can know the detailed information of the error that has occurred, the error can be resolved early, and the operation stop time of the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened.

More specifically, the hall uses the hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 according to the signal output from the external terminal board 784 . However, in order to investigate the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, it is desirable to use "the number of winnings in the general winnings", "the number of winnings in the big winnings", "the number of passing through the gate", "normal symbol fluctuation Game history information such as "number" is required. If the pachinko machine 1 is out of order, it can be solved by repair or parts replacement, so there is no big problem. business, and eventually the hall may face financial difficulties.

When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of connector terminals used in the external terminal board 784 increases, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Furthermore, since events such as "winning a general winning slot", "winning a big winning slot", "passing through a gate", and "fluctuation of normal symbols" occur frequently, if all the data is output from the pachinko machine 1, the data A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze this, increasing the burden on the hall.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in order to solve the above-described problems, data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1 so that the stored data can be referred to later. This makes it possible to check the details of the process leading up to the occurrence of an error.

In addition, since the time of occurrence of events (number of winnings in general winnings, number of winnings in big winnings, number of gates passed, number of normal symbol fluctuations, etc.) that occurred in the course of the error occurrence is recorded, how long It is possible to know how many events have occurred in For example, an abnormality such as the number of prizes won in a general prize gate being 50 per minute can be detected.

If the date and time of occurrence are recorded for each event, the amount of data used to search for the cause of the error will increase, and it will take time to search for the cause of the error. Therefore, when a predetermined number or more of events occur within a predetermined time period (for example, one minute), the error information may be output and notified.

For example, since it is possible to win a prize in a general prize-winning slot in any game state, it is preferable to output and notify error information when a predetermined number or more of prizes are won in a predetermined period of time. Therefore, it is preferable to set a predetermined time from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and output and notify error information when a predetermined number or more of prizes are won in the big winning openings in the predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history and outputs it as data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing an example of the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit according to the present embodiment. 120 is obtained by adding a game history recording process (step S1023) to the peripheral control unit power-on process described above with reference to FIG.

In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310 when the received command is a predetermined command. The game history is recorded as date and time of event occurrence in a format as shown in FIG. 122, for example. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be a DRAM, but it is preferable to record the game history in an SRAM that does not require a refresh operation and consumes low power in consideration of retaining the memory contents even when the power is turned off.

The game history recording process (step S1023) is preferably executed before the game control process (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the steady process of the peripheral control part, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped on the way and part of the performance is not executed. That is, even if some effects are not executed (even if all effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed by the main control board 1310 does not change, and the benefits given to the player also change. Therefore, the game history is recorded with priority over the performance. In addition, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to the game control, the game history recording process can be shared by a plurality of pachinko machine models.

Next, a description will be given of the processing when the memory capacity of the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit. When the data amount of the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the capacity of the memory, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not have to be updated. That is, the information recorded in memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history. processing can be reduced.

Further, when the memory capacity of the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to erase the oldest game history and record the latest game history. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 every time can be reduced.

Also, when the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed. control, sound control) can be reliably executed, and at the same time, using the spare processing time, new processing (for example, processing that is executed over multiple times of peripheral control unit steady processing due to lack of processing time) Alternatively, a process (for example, a process of switching the selection table) that is executed once in a number of peripheral control unit steady processes because it is not necessary to be executed each time may be executed.

Note that the received command may be analyzed (step S1022) immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table.

The game history recording condition setting table registers the types of commands recorded as game history among the commands received by the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310, that is, the events recorded as the game history.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the conditions for generating the commands and the purpose of recording as game history are as follows.

For example, when starting gate 1 winning command and starting gate 2 winning command are detected, respectively, the winning of the game ball to the starting gate 2002 and the starting gate 2004 are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each starting hole. In addition, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are respectively transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the special symbols 1 and 2 The number of fluctuations can be counted.

Also, the power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the RAM clear operation and the like. The state command at the start of fluctuation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. The states that can be distinguished by the state command at the start of fluctuation are 4 states: low probability/time saving, low probability/non-time saving, high probability/non-time saving, high probability/non-time saving. You can count the number of changes that occur. Here, the low probability is a state in which the probability that a big win is derived in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol variation display game is a normal probability, and the high probability is a jackpot lottery in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol variation display game. is a state in which the probability of being derived is higher than usual. Time saving, the probability that the above-mentioned second starting door member 2549 is open (or expanded) state is higher than non-time saving, or the time from the start of the normal pattern to the determination It is a state in which the frequency that the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or expanded) state, such as shortening, is higher than in a non-time-saving state. Along with this, the probability of selecting an effect in which the duration of one special symbol variation display game is short increases.

A large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and a large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006 respectively. A command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each big winning hole.

For the big winning gate 1 winning command (regular winning or less) and the big winning winning gate 2 winning command (regular winning or less), only the number of game balls less than the regulated number won by the end of the round at the big winning gate 2005 and the big winning gate 2006, respectively. If not, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the closing of each big winning hole (for example, from 1 second before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 Winning status in one round to each big winning opening can be acquired. The big winning mouth 1 winning command (larger than the prescribed winning) and the big winning mouth 2 winning command (larger than the prescribed winning) are the rounds where the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number wins in the big winning mouth 2005 and the big winning mouth 2006 respectively. is completed, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 after a predetermined time has passed since the closing of each big winning hole (for example, from 1 second before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 It is possible to obtain the status of winning in one round to each big winning slot. It should be noted that this command is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed since the closing of each of the big prize openings 2005 and 2006, when a specified number of prize balls (for example, 10) determined in one round is detected and the big prize openings are opened. This is because there is a possibility that undetected game balls exist in the big winning opening when the opening is closed, and the state of winning can be accurately grasped even in such an over winning.

The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is activated or when the role product continuous operation device is activated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires a change to the jackpot state. You can count the number of hits. The transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the jackpot state ends, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the end of the jackpot state and the situation after the jackpot.

In the small hit OP command, the opening of the big winning opening is relatively short (for example, the opening time of one time is 1.8 seconds, or the total opening time of multiple times is less than 1.8 seconds). A command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small win), and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small wins.

The normal symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the normal symbol stop symbol and can count the normal symbol variation number. The normal figure gate passage command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003.

Even if the lottery for special symbols or normal symbols is not performed even after winning the starting gate or passing the gate (overflow or no memory, etc.), the main control board 1310 instructs the peripheral control unit 1511 to start the starting gate 1 winning. Send the time command, start gate 2 winning time command and normal figure gate passing command. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls entering the starting hole and the number of balls passing through the gate.

The error display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the error occurrence timing and count the number of errors.

The general winning port 1 winning command, the general winning port 2 winning command, and the general winning port 3 winning command are respectively transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins to each general winning port 2001, and the peripheral The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each general winning hole 2001 . It should be noted that the general winning opening winning command may be determined by the number of general winning openings 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the case where three general winning openings 2001 are provided is exemplified above. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with four general winning slots 2001, so four types of general winning slot winning commands from the general winning slot 1 winning command to the general winning slot 4 winning command are provided. Commands are defined.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a configuration example of game history recorded in the memory.

The game history includes a history number, event, and event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in order of event occurrence time. As the event occurrence date and time, the time at which the peripheral control unit 1511 received the command from the main control board 1310 may be recorded as the event occurrence date and time. Then, the peripheral controller 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310 . In the illustrated game history, the date and time of event occurrence are recorded down to the minute, but may be recorded up to the second.

By analyzing the game history in the form shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know the details of the events that have occurred in relation to the commands sent from the main control board 1310 (for example, changes in the game state, the result of the variable display game, etc.). . For example, the power-on command with history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, and from the content of the command, the RAM was cleared, and the game started in a low-probability, non-time-saving state. I understand. That is, the pachinko hall opened at 15:30, the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, and after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette), the player started to beat, and won the general prize gate 2001. I understand. In addition, the special design 1 fluctuation start event of history number 4 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and from the contents of the received special design 1 design type command (type of stop design), special design fluctuation You can see the result of the display game. The special symbol 1 variation start event of history number 6 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and from the contents of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol), the special symbol variation display game I can see the result of Although the result of the special symbol variation display game is not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol variation display game is determined by the numerical value indicating the result of the variation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the special symbol variation. The result of the variable display game (losing, normal per 4 rounds, high probability per 4 rounds, high probability per 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

Next, a method of referring to the information (game history) recorded in the memory by the hole will be described.

First, a history output interface 1590 for outputting information recorded in the memory from the peripheral controller 1511 is provided. When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a history reference command from the main control board 1310 , the game history recorded in the memory is output from the history output interface 1590 .

Also, a data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 , and when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a history reference command from the data collection terminal, the game history recorded in the memory is output from the history output interface 1590 . The history output interface 1590 may be composed of a history output terminal provided in the peripheral controller 1511 or may be provided separately from the peripheral controller 1511 . The data collection terminal is preferably owned by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1 .

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range radio (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).

The command that triggers the output of the game history by the peripheral control unit 1511 is a command that is not transmitted when a normal game is being played after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, even if it is a history reference command dedicated to the output of the game history (see FIG. 121). A command when a special condition (operation) is performed in a command that is not defined in the history reference command may be used as the history reference command. The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Also, a history reference command may be sent under the condition of an event that cannot (or is unlikely to occur) occur even in a command that is sent during a normal game. For example, it is the case that 50 prizes are won in the starting gate or the general prize gate in one minute. In addition, the game history may be output when the commands used for game control are received in a special order that is usually impossible.

An operation panel (keyboard) and a display (effect display device) may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (where the player cannot see) to display the game history.

FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board and its periphery.

Peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from main control board 1310, and through frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, effect display drive board 4450 and control commands and various information (various data) Peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges, drawing control of the effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, and effect display control that controls sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs for controlling performance operations to be executed, various data, various control data and various schedule data, and V blank from VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of performance display control unit 1512 to be described later. Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady-state processing that is executed each time a signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc. Information for managing data, etc.) and various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state and management of special effect flags ), and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. ) and

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when the power is interrupted for a long time (when power failure occurs for a long time). (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") supplies a backup power supply, so that the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since an SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. loses its contents as it becomes incapable of

Power is supplied to a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d by a backup power supply 1513 different from the backup power supplied from the power supply board 931 . In the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513, the game history is recorded, and even if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the stored contents can be retained. The backup power supply 1513 is composed of a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and preferably has a power supply capability capable of holding data in at least a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to one month.

FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The area for storing the game history in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be configured in a package separate from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in the package of the peripheral control CPU together with the peripheral control MPU.

FIG. 124(A) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d which constitutes an area for storing the game history in a package separate from the peripheral control CPU. As shown, the performance control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. be done.

When the RAM clear switch is operated to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (production control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. data area) 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 124(B) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d forming an area for storing the game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As illustrated, both the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 124(B), when the RAM clear switch is operated to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control Data in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. Therefore, the performance control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are preferably physically separated.

Note that the area for storing the game history in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be composed of a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be retained even in the pachinko machine 1 to which power is not supplied without providing a backup power source 1513.例文帳に追加

124A and 124B, the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be any procedure different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. good. For example, a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch, and when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. A history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. may be changed.

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a command different from the normal power-on command.

Further, while the RAM clear switch is being operated, the main control board 1310 continues to transmit power-on commands to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives power-on commands a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. or when the power-on command is received continuously, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing means for initializing the data in the game history storage area in this way, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed even if the gaming machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, for example.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a fixed period, it restarts the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decoration board of the game board 5 is controlled based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the motor drive board serial Door-side motor drive data for transmitting to the motor drive board 4180 from the I/O port via the peripheral control output circuit and for outputting drive signals to the electrical drive source provided on the door frame 3 is used for the frame decoration drive. Signals are transmitted from the amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration driving amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and to the plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED through the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 to drive the frame decoration. Transmit to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 220 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and via the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the serial I/O port for detecting the performance operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable object detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, according to commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, events occurring during the game are recorded as the game history. The event can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall closes) to understand the performance and failure of the gaming machine. In addition, since the game history is stored in the non-volatile memory (SRAM with backup power input), the game history can be confirmed even after restarting the gaming machine.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121, 122, etc., various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence. Also, for example, when winning the start gate 1, (1) the fact that the start gate 1 was won, (2) the time when the start gate 1 was won, (3) the event that occurred before the start gate 1 was won As shown in FIG. 116, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. 116 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1 . In this case, the minimum necessary information (information indicating the fact that (1) the starter has won) is output from the external terminal board 784, such as when the starter wins. This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be checked when investigating the This is because outputting all of the internally stored information from the external terminal board 784 at the time of winning a prize at the starting hole increases the output amount of information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1, which may become a burden on the pachinko hall. is. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and part of the information recorded inside is transmitted through the external terminal board 784 to the pachinko machine. 1, and in a special case, the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed.

[11-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game history will be described. It should be noted that some of the modified examples described below change a part of the above-described embodiment and constitute a part of the embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, for a predetermined command, the event (type of command) that occurred and the event occurrence date and time were recorded. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is limited, and it is difficult to record all of the enormous amount of events that occur during the game over a long period of time. Therefore, in Modification 1 (Compact Proposal 1), changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events occurring in that state are recorded.

125 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table of modification 1. FIG.

In the game history recording condition setting table of Modified Example 1, commands recorded as game history are defined as counting commands and commands that trigger state changes. There is also The column of information that can be counted and the column of state change that can be obtained are provided for convenience of explanation. .

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which a counting attribute is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered command issuance as a result of command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, as a result of command analysis, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the state of the game history recorded in the memory, and generates a record for counting the number of events. Add

For example, the power-on command, the state command at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot OP command, the transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation, and the error display command are commands issued by state changes, respectively, power-on, special symbol fluctuation display start, It can be grasped as switching between the start of the jackpot state, the end of the jackpot state, and the occurrence of an error state.

Also, using the count command, the number of events that triggered the issuance of the count command is counted. Specifically, the number of winning balls to each starting port can be counted in the start port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of variations of each special symbol. The large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls to each large winning opening. The large winning mouth 1 winning command (regular winning or less) and the big winning mouth 2 winning command (regular winning or less) can count the number of rounds ended with the number of winnings equal to or less than the defined winning number. The large winning mouth 1 winning command (greater than the prescribed winning) and the big winning mouth 2 winning command (greater than the prescribed winning) can count the number of rounds ended in excess of the prescribed number of winnings (that is, over winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal design stop command can normally count the number of fluctuations in the design. Ordinary figure gate passage command can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section. The error display command can count the number of error occurrences. The general winning hole 1 winning command, the general winning hole 2 winning command, and the general winning hole 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning hole.

126 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 1. FIG.

The game history of the modified example 1 includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurred, and the state from a predetermined starting point. and the cumulative number of counting events detected until the end of (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the initialization time of the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The state in which the counting event is recorded separately is assumed to be 5 states: low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, jackpot state. A state may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 1 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, as counting events, the number of starting gate 1 wins, the number of starting gate 2 winnings, the number of special symbol 1 variations, the number of special symbol 2 variations, the number of general winnings 1 winning, the number of general winnings 2 winning, The number of winnings in general winning opening 3, the number of winning in large winning opening 1, the number of winning in large winning opening 2, the number of gate passages, and the number of normal pattern variations are recorded. Note that the number of events other than those shown may be counted.

Two bytes are sufficient for storing the cumulative number of each counting event. In particular, data that is not derived very frequently and does not have a large cumulative number (for example, the number of general winnings) may be 1 byte, and other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, 1-byte data and 2-byte data should be arranged in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or in the order of 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing 1-byte data and 2-byte data.

Also, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. A new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created when the state changes, but the new record may be created at the start of the period in which the counting event is counted. In this case, an initial value of 0 may be stored in the new record created while the count event is being counted, even though no data is stored in the new record. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period during which counting events are counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of counting events in the period is stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read out from the game history storage area and the data recorded in the work area is changed. The numerical value is added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of counting events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event) is recorded as the game history, the count value of the counting event is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in the history storage area.

That is, every time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. , will be initialized by the normal RAM clear operation. Specifically, for example, in the low probability / non-time saving state, the game history information that 50 winning numbers to the starting port 1 are recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of the first modification In 1, after the game state changes, it is recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, if the game state does not change, the game history is not recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the RAM clear operation is performed while the probability is low and the time is not shortened, the 50 winning prizes are initialized to 0.

Also, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a count event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Also, even when the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the capacity of the memory, it is preferable to execute the game history recording process. In this case, the game history is continuously recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current state, and the cumulative number of counting events does not have to be stored from the peripheral control RAM 1511c to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Alternatively, the game history (accumulated number of counting events) in the oldest state may be erased and the accumulated number of counting events in the immediately preceding state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 every time is reduced. can. Also, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the most recent game history can be checked.

Also, when the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of unnecessary processes and reduce the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 .

As described above, in Modification 1, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (the number of wins, the number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state between the switching is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of Modification 1 is characterized by internally recording more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 .

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of Modification 1, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state. Information (game history) is not written. In other words, if fraud is committed in a state in which no new record is created in the game history storage area (during the same game state), it may be difficult to detect fraud. As described above, in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, the hole can check the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. As long as the game state does not change, information is not written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so even if information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the current state information (game history) cannot be confirmed. Even in such a case, a check function may be provided to detect fraud at an early stage.

Specifically, the first record (latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the game history of the most recent state is recorded and the second record (record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the game history of the current state is recorded. An error may be reported when the result of the comparison with .

For example, in a so-called right-handed pachinko machine 1 that shoots a game ball so as to roll on the right side of the game area 5a in a high-probability/time-saving state or a jackpot game state, transition from a high probability/time-saving state to a jackpot game state. In addition, when the state is changed to a high probability/time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, even if the state is switched, the possibility of winning the general winning opening on the left side of the game area 5a is not extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be compared between the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent high-probability/time-saving state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be reported. The permissible value of the difference in the number of winning balls entering the general winning opening between states is set to 1, and an error is reported when there is a difference of 2 or more. This is because when the shooting handle is released, the shooting force becomes uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

A security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. 116 instead of the error notification. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function detects an error by predicting the game from the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, it is a high probability / time saving state, so it will hit right), so that an inexperienced player can There is a possibility that an error will be detected when you hit unexpectedly. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may output only a security signal from the external terminal board 784 without announcing the error, and may not inform the player of the error. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and troubles with the player can be prevented.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

[11-3. Compact plan 2]
In the above-described modification 1, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change event of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events in each state during the change is counted. was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of recurring state. Therefore, in Modification 2 (Compact Proposal 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the total number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In modification 2, the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in modification 1 is used to record the game history.

127 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 2. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 127, the game history of Modification 2 is composed of the history of state events and the total number of count events for each state. The state event history includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, and the time when the state change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 2, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states of low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. be. The counting events (and the commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 2 are the number of start 1 wins (command when start 1 wins), the number of start 2 wins (command when start 2 wins), special Design 1 variation number (special design 1 design type command), special design 2 variation number (special design 2 design type command), general winning mouth 1 winning number (general winning mouth 1 winning command), general winning mouth 2 winning number (general Winning mouth 2 winning command), general winning mouth 3 winning number (general winning mouth 3 winning command), big winning mouth 1 winning number (big winning mouth 1 winning command), big winning mouth 2 winning number (big winning mouth 2 winning command ), gate passing number (general figure gate passing command), normal design fluctuation number (normal design stop command).

Note that the number of count events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the count events are separately recorded may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by a state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in the nonvolatile memory, and the above-described counting events are generated in correspondence with the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the accumulated value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. For this reason, the count results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power failure, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Also, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a count event occurs, the accumulated value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in Modification 2, changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 are recorded, and counting events (the number of wins, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each type of state are recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the .

[11-4. Compact plan 3]
In the modification 2 described above, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded by the state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing of state switching may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of state. For this reason, in modification 3 (compact version 3), the change of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In modification 3, the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in modification 1 is used to record the game history.

In Modification 3, the same events as those recorded in Modification 1 are recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG.

128 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 3. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of Modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counting events in each state. Furthermore, the game history of Modification 3 includes the cumulative time of each state. The reason why the accumulated time is included is that the hole can estimate the number of occurrences of the event (eg, the number of occurrences of the jackpot, etc.) from the accumulated time. The states in which counting events are recorded separately are 5 states: low probability/non-time-saving state, low probability/time-saving state, high probability/non-time-saving state, high probability/time-saving state, and jackpot state. Counting events may be recorded.

The counting events (and the commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 3 are the number of start 1 wins (command when start 1 wins), the number of start 2 wins (command when start 2 wins), special Design 1 variation number (special design 1 design type command), special design 2 variation number (special design 2 design type command), general winning mouth 1 winning number (general winning mouth 1 winning command), general winning mouth 2 winning number (general Winning mouth 2 winning command), general winning mouth 3 winning number (general winning mouth 3 winning command), big winning mouth 1 winning number (big winning mouth 1 winning command), big winning mouth 2 winning number (big winning mouth 2 winning command ), gate passing number (general figure gate passing command), normal design fluctuation number (normal design stop command). Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of counting events described above is recorded corresponding to the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the accumulated value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. For this reason, the count results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power failure, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Also, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a count event occurs, the accumulated value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in Modification 2, changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 are recorded, and counting events (the number of wins, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each type of state are recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the .

As described above, in modifications 1 to 3, when an event occurs by the game history recording process, it is temporarily recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c), and when the conditions for writing to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are met. Then, the data in the work area is written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. In a normal RAM clear operation, information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Here I will briefly touch on the hall business. In many cases, halls have set business hours, for example, opening at 10:00 and closing at 23:00. For this reason, it is sometimes difficult for staff to monitor whether players are playing illegal games during hours when there are many players, such as hours just after the store opens or in the evening. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of players decreases, and if there is a pachinko machine in a high-probability/short-time state just before closing time, the high-probability/short-time state pachinko machine is initialized for the next day's business, and the low-probability/ It may be in a non-working time state. In this case, since the number of players is small, it is possible to monitor pachinko machines in a high-probability/time-saving state, so it is possible to know whether or not the most recent game has been fraudulent. In other words, considering that some pachinko machines do not require the most recent game history, it is possible to provide an efficient gaming machine by enabling the store clerk to select whether or not to keep the most recent information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by a RAM clear operation, the game history stored in the work area regarding the event that occurred after the latest event is erased, and the game history is stored regarding the event that occurred before the latest event. The game history stored in the area remains. In other words, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, there are information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and information recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The game history is recorded separately. In this way, if you want to keep a record of all events recorded in the work area, the clerk only needs to cause a change in the state of the pachinko machine. The store clerk should just perform the ram clear operation. The RAM clear operation does not erase all game histories, but only erases the game histories stored in the work area related to events that occurred after the most recent event. This is because the store clerk has not seen the events that have occurred by then (since there are many players, they cannot see them).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only is the information about winning the starting slot, but also the winning of the general winning slot unrelated to the lottery is once recorded in the work area. A pattern that starts to fluctuate by winning a prize in a starting slot, and even if the pattern indicating the lottery result of winning or losing with the stop mode of this pattern) does not fluctuate, the game is played while the game ball is launched in the game area 5a. It is characterized by collecting history. In other words, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed when the lottery for win or loss is triggered, but a process that may be executed at all times while the power is supplied to the pachinko machine.

Moreover, if it is a low-probability and non-time-saving state, it shoots a game ball so that a game ball may win a prize to the starting opening 2002 like so-called left-handed hitting and choro-hitting. In such a case, it should be moderately awarded to the starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 . However, if there is no winning (or extremely few) to the general winning opening 2001, but many game balls have won the starting opening 2002, conversely there is no winning (or extremely few) to the starting opening 2002 ), but if many game balls have won in the general winning hole 2001, there is a possibility that fraud has been committed. Therefore, the first winning hole and the second winning hole in which the game ball wins at the same time are set as objects to be monitored, and the number of winning to the first winning hole is a predetermined ratio of the number of winning to the second winning hole. An error may be signaled when the

Also, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 instead of the error notification. The detection method described above may detect an error when an inexperienced player makes an unexpected stroke. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may output only a security signal from the external terminal board 784 without announcing the error, and may not inform the player of the error. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and troubles with the player can be prevented.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is also characterized by collecting information accumulated in a plurality of games as a game history. There is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded. there is

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has, as game performance, a setting function for changing, for example, the operating ratio of the condition device.

[12-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section, FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having a setting section with the door open, viewed from the rear side, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 with the door closed, viewed from the back side, and FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the setting section of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 , and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operating state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974 .

As shown in the front view of FIG. 132(A), the setting board 970 has a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting key 971 for changing the setting value. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting a changed setting value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that receives a setting change operation.

In this embodiment, operation signals of the setting key 971 , the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control section 952 . Also, the setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control section 952 . The determined settings are transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 . Note that the main control board 1310 may control components on the setting board 970, as will be described later.

The setting key 971 is used to change to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode by inserting a predetermined key into a keyhole (key insertion part) and turning the key to the setting position to maintain the shorted or open state of the contact. It is a switch that outputs a signal that triggers the Note that the setting key 971 may not be provided, and another switch may also be used. In this case, by operating (long pressing) the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 is operated during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. A long press may end the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Also, the setting change mode may be started/finished by operating the RAM clear switch 954 . For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press). Also, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by pressing the RAM clear switch 954 for a long time during the setting change mode.

By doing so, even an employee who does not have a key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operating time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation when the setting change switch 972 falls.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select setting values (1 to 6). In other words, when the setting change switch 972 is pushed once, the set value is increased by 1, and when the set value=6 and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the set value becomes 1. The setting value may be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972 . It should be noted that the set value is not limited to 6 steps, and may be set in fewer steps (for example, 2 steps) or in more steps (for example, 8 steps).

Also, the setting change switch 972 may not be provided, and the setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972 . In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three steps, and the key can be inserted and removed at the neutral position (normal position). This is an operation for selecting a value (turning it to the right functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation capable of holding the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation in which the right position is not held (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

In addition, the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the probability of winning the special symbol), and the set value = 1 has a low hit probability, and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the setting value, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot, the ratio of the time saving (ST) after the jackpot, the number of times of saving time, the number of rounds and counts of the jackpot, the probability of the normal drawing, the general winning mouth, the starting mouth and the big winning mouth Various game-related parameters, such as the number of prize balls, may be changed to change the number of prize balls that a player can win.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming a setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1 . The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 are preferably configured with switches having different operating methods (operating directions) and shapes so as not to operate both switches by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be configured by a push button switch, and the setting determination switch 973 may be configured by a momentary toggle switch.

Alternatively, the selected setting may be confirmed by returning the setting key 971 to the normal position without providing the setting confirmation switch 973 . Further, the set value selected with the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1 as a trigger may be determined. For example, operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, operation of the operation button 220C, operation of the ball lending button , the operation of the return button, the winning detection of the game ball to the starting ports 2002 and 2004, etc., may determine the selected setting. The operation unit substituting for the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used in the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

That is, in the illustrated example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board 970 in order to set the game performance of the pachinko machine 1, but the setting board 970 is provided with one or two switches. It is enough to set it.

Furthermore, setting change operation may be enabled only with the RAM clear switch 954 without providing any of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973. FIG. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press). Also, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 in the setting change mode for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, the RAM clear switch By operating (long pressing) 954 for a predetermined time or longer, the set value can be determined. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by long-pressing the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating the setting key 971). . It should be noted that the setting display 974 may be configured by LEDs for the number of values that can be set instead of the 7-segment LEDs. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type indicator by a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of payout error. The selected setting value and the current setting value may be displayed on the error type indicator. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished from each other. For example, dots may be turned off when displaying error types, and lit when displaying set values. Alternatively, the error type display may be lit (not blinking), and the setting value may be blinking.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 , but may be connected to a power board (not shown) in the power board box 930 . By providing the setting board 970 side by side with the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated when changing the settings are arranged close to each other, thereby improving the operability of the setting change. can be improved.

Also, as will be described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310 .

As another form, the setting board 970 may be configured not as an independent board but as a part of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310. That is, either the payout control board 951, the power supply board or the main control board 1310 may be equipped with the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973 and the setting display 974.

As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the main body frame 4 (that is, the frame side instead of the game board 5) that constitutes the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. When the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 , at least part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 . When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the space between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, making it difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. In this way, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971, prevents the key from being inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971, and makes it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation unit). act as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting keys 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap while the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the keys and switches vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40 . In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap, setting is made during operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, with the body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2). By making it difficult to operate the substrate 970, it is possible to prevent a player from cheating by changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In the illustrated example, the member facing the setting board 970 (means for making setting change difficult) while the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but other members may be used. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 with a narrow gap when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 . Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the body frame 4 may be provided, and when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 with a narrow gap. .

The setting change making means configured by a member provided facing the setting board 970 may be a cover that covers the setting board 970 . In this case, it is preferable to cover the setting key 971 that triggers the start of the setting change mode with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Also, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in a setting board case, and the setting board case has a first cover for preventing careless operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). A body (eg, a door-like lid that can be opened during operation) is provided. Further, the outer frame 2 is provided with a second cover body that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 . The second cover body may be provided on the body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being started by careless operation, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of an illegal player changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head held during operation). ).

The setting board 970 is preferably arranged near the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 operated when changing the settings and the power switch 932 are arranged near each other. By doing so, it is possible to improve the operability when starting the setting change mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided for clearing. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during a game and can be operated from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) are provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, so they are provided at positions where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so as to be difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent actions to change the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during the game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches are arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

Similarly, the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for the player's machine selection, so it is desirable that the player does not know it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 131, like the setting key 971, the setting indicator 974 should also face the right frame member 40 with a narrow gap so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as visibility making means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section) difficult to see.

FIG. 132B is a top view of the setting board 970 with the body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 . In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 with a narrow gap, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other. The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 , the right frame member 40 is not positioned in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 .

The display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. It is difficult to confirm the current setting values of pachinko machines.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a modification of the setting board 970. As shown in FIG.

In this modified example, a setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting determination switch 973, and a setting display 974, as in the above-described example. However, in this modification, the setting key 971 is arranged horizontally on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

For this reason, the setting board 970 of this modified example is installed not on the side surface side of the body frame 4 but on the back surface side so that the keyhole faces the side surface. As shown in FIG. 133(B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, and the side surface (that is, the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is the right frame member 40. , the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, and the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

In the modification shown in FIG. 133, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards, and even if the difficulty of board arrangement is reduced, the setting board 970 can be operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. A fraudulent act of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Next, a modified example of a pachinko machine having a setting section will be described. In this modified example, the setting board 970 is provided on the game board 5 instead of the main body frame 4 and is connected to the main control board 1310 .

FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this modified example, FIG. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine mounted with a game board shown; FIG.

A setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971 , a setting change switch 972 , a setting determination switch 973 and a setting display 974 . The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 132(A) or the one shown in FIG. 133(A).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the setting board 970 for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, controls the display of the settings indicator 974 .

The setting board 970 and the functions and configurations of the components on the setting board are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, and the common description will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base indicator 1317 composed of a 7-segment LED. Therefore, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used together, and the selected setting value and the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317 . The base display 1317 normally switches between the base value of the provisional section (the section currently being measured) and the base value of the fixed section (straight section) at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, during the setting change mode, the selected (to be set next) setting value is displayed, and during setting confirmation (see FIG. 152), the current setting value is displayed.

In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished from each other. For example, the base value may be displayed using four digits, but the setting value may be displayed using only one predetermined digit (for example, the rightmost digit) and displaying "-". Digits that are not used to display the set value may display other numbers, letters, or symbols instead of "-" as long as they are not used to display the base value. Also, when displaying the setting value, characters that are not used for displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the set value is displayed in six stages of alphabetical characters A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Furthermore, in the setting change mode, it is preferable that the setting value is displayed blinking while the setting value is being selected, and the determined setting value is lit. In addition, the current set value should be indicated by lighting. Also, in the base display, the upper two digits represent the type of display data, and numbers are not displayed. Therefore, the most significant digit may be used to display the setting value. When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the setting value is preferentially displayed during the setting change mode and setting confirmation, so the base value is displayed even though the base value is being calculated. not. After that, when the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set values are completed, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base values.

Also, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the display content to the base display 1317 is executed. The process of outputting is executed by base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, part of the base calculation/display code 13135 (for example, processing for outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided within the game control area. By sharing the processing, the capacity of the program can be reduced and the memory can be saved.

On the other hand, the process of outputting the display contents to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the process of outputting the display contents to the base display 1317 is for base calculation/display outside the game control area. When executed with code 13135, processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated, and security can be improved.

In addition, the process of setting change and setting confirmation may be executed outside the game control area.

That is, whether the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is shared with the base display 1317 is included in the scope of the invention described herein. In this way, by displaying a plurality of displays provided in the main control board box 1320 so as not to be confused during the setting change mode and setting value confirmation, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation and setting value misunderstanding when changing settings.

Also, even if the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not used together, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off or all of them may be turned on while the setting display 974 is displaying the set values. Even in this case, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base value when the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value are completed. By not displaying a plurality of displays in the main control board box 1320 during the setting change mode and setting value confirmation, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation and setting value misrecognition at the time of setting change.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed as a part of the main control board 1310 instead of being an independent board. That is, the main control board 1310 may be equipped with a setting key 971 , a setting change switch 972 , a setting confirmation switch 973 and a setting display 974 .

The configuration board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 along with the main control board 1310 . When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes or cutouts for operating the setting keys 971, setting change switches 972, and setting confirmation switches 973 on the setting board 970. is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320 , the structure of the main control board box 1320 , that is, the opening/closing direction differs depending on the direction of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970 . Specifically, when the key 975 is vertically inserted into the board from the front side of the board, the main control board box 1320 is vertically separated from the setting board 970 on the front side and the back side of the setting board 970 or the front side box body ( (or cover) and the box on the back side may be configured to be openable and closable with one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted from the side in the direction in which the board extends, the main control board box 1320 is configured so that the front side box (or cover) and the back side box of the setting board 970 extend in the direction in which the setting board 970 extends. It is preferable to have a structure in which they are separated by sliding in (the direction in which the key 975 is inserted).

In this modification, operation signals of setting keys 971 , setting change switches 972 and setting confirmation switches 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311 . Also, the setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311 .

As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side (the left side in FIG. 135) of the game board 5 that constitutes the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. When the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 , at least part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 . When the body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the space between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow. Switch operation is difficult. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting keys 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap while the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the keys and switches vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40 . In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap, setting is made during operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, with the body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2). A fraudulent act of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the board 970 can be suppressed.

In the illustrated example, the member facing the setting board 970 (means for making setting change difficult) while the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but other members may be used. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 with a narrow gap when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 . Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the body frame 4 may be provided, and when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 with a narrow gap. .

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head held during operation). ).

136, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 has the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 initialized. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided for clearing. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during a game and can be operated from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) are provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, so they are provided at positions where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so as to be difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent actions to change the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during the game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches are arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

Similarly, the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for the player's machine selection, so it is desirable that the player does not know it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, like the setting key 971, the setting indicator 974 should also face the right frame member 40 with a narrow gap so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as visibility making means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section) difficult to see.

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the top view of the setting board 970 with the body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIGS. 132(B) and 133(B). . In this state, the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 with a narrow gap, so that the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 .

The display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. It is no longer possible to check the current settings of the pachinko machine.

Next, processing related to setting change will be described.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 137 is different from the initialization process described above in FIG. The difference is that the setting change processing is performed in S28). The same steps as in the initialization process described above in FIG. 21 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, thereby enabling writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and checks whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activation of the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the data of the set value and the game state (for example, the probability variable state, the time saving state, the special design and the normal design reservation storage, the prize ball information) is left, and other data are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. proceed to On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power failure flag has been set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). , the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48 The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may not be correct. area other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. proceed to

Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There is a power failure flag failure (step S20), a RAM failure (step S22) in which the RAM checksum does not match, and a base calculation workpiece failure (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the set value and the game Leave the data of (for example, probability variable state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls), clear other data, and do not clear the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) . When operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and in the case of power failure flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, game control area 13126 (including game work area and game stack area) is cleared, for base calculation Area 13128 (including base calculation work area and base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Moreover, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

It should be noted that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of power failure flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 You may clear the entire RAM area including If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state will be lost and normal processing cannot be executed. should be initialized only. Also, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared in the same manner as described above, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared. No need to clear.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are stored for each type of data (game control area 13126 (setting value, game state data), base calculation Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the set values need to be reset for each RAM clear operation, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

Either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be employed for the processing after step S28 as required. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

138 and 139 are flowcharts showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing, and FIG. 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is configured integrally with the main control board 1310).

First, the setting change processing in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(A) cooperate will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Whether or not the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the body frame release switch. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, so the determination of whether the body frame 4 is opened may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control section 952 starts the setting change mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as setting change permission state generation means. Conditions for starting the setting change mode other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 of touching the handle lever 504, insertion of a prepaid card in the CR unit (prepaid If there is a balance on the card) or there is a balance in the cash sand, it is not necessary to start the setting change mode. Moreover, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error). These conditions may be determined after the main control MPU 1311 instead of the payout control unit 952 receives the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the hall, and there is a possibility that an illegal player is about to change the settings, so it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. .

(2) When the setting change mode starts, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change start command to the main control board 1310 .

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, it executes RAM clear processing before setting change. RAM clear processing before this setting change, game control area 13126 (including game work area and game stack area), game state (for example, probability variable state, time saving state, special design and normal design pending storage , information about prize balls) are left, other data are cleared, and the area for base calculation 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Note that the setting value is set to the initial value later in procedure (6), so it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. The notification during the setting change mode includes performing an initial action of the character and performing a predetermined display on the effect display device 1600 . Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial action of the role object. For example, when the setting change procedure or state is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if the initial action of the character is performed during the setting change, the display of the effect display device 1600 is partially hidden. because it interferes with

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511 . For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during the normal game (for example, all LEDs for special symbol display are turned off or turned on) to stop the progress of the game. . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the firing permission signal, stops firing the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functions as firing disabling means, thereby notifying the setting change mode. good too. When stopping the shooting of game balls during the setting change mode, the shooting of game balls during the shooting stop period may be treated as an error, and the error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during this period. .

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, the setting value = 0 is a state in which no setting has been made, and the setting change mode cannot be ended with the setting value = 0, and the game (game ball firing, floating display games, etc.) does not start.

(7) Thereafter, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout control section 952 determines whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Although the procedure (1) described above also determines whether the body frame 4 is open, it may be determined at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 has been operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as setting change allowable state generation means for determining whether the setting change conditions are met before the setting change is finalized.

(9) Furthermore, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value, and confirms the setting value. is displayed on the setting display 974 . The setting value confirmation display may display a value (for example, 8) that cannot be selected as the setting value, or may blink the fixed setting value for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated, so the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310 . By this setting change end command, the main control MPU 1311 is notified of the determined set values.

(13) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952 , it transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the setting is being changed. Along with this, if the main control MPU 1311 is informing that the setting is being changed, this is also terminated.

The notification (including game stop and firing stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered merely to be a notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification should be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is taken from the viewpoint of discovery of fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting change mode is terminated. This is because when the setting is changed, a predetermined display is performed for a predetermined period of time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the shooting of game balls is stopped during a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, shooting of game balls during the shooting suspension period is treated as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. RAM clear processing after this setting change, among game control area 13126 (including work area for game and stack area for game), set value and game state Reservation storage, information about prize balls) data is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clear processing after setting change, the set values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clear processing before setting change.

Then, the setting change mode is terminated.

Thus, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the payout control board 951) , the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate to execute the setting change process.

In the processing described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine. In this case, the signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 can be transmitted by serial communication, by transmitting a predetermined pulse signal (a pulse with a predetermined frequency for a predetermined number of times), or by transmitting a power supply voltage. However, an intermediate potential signal that is not the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent a fraudulent act of activating the setting change mode by short-circuiting the terminals of the setting key 971, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 is sent from the payout control unit 952 by a signal that cannot be caused by a short-circuit of the terminals. This is because it is preferable to transmit to the substrate 1310 .

Next, the setting display processing in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (energized), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout control section 952 determines whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, so the determination of whether the body frame 4 is opened may be omitted. .

(2) The payout controller 952 sends a set value request command to the main control board 1310 when it is determined that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 .

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives a set value request command from the payout control unit 952, it reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and transmits a set value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout control unit 952 displays on the setting display 974 the setting value notified by the setting value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 .

In the above description, the setting values stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) are displayed on the setting display 974. The set value may be displayed on the setting indicator 974 .

Next, setting change processing by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 139(A) will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as setting change allowable state generating means. Whether or not the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the body frame release switch. A detection signal of the body frame open switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 . The payout control board 951 may transmit a body frame open detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the body frame open detection switch. Also, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the body frame open detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, so the determination of whether the body frame 4 is opened may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. Conditions for starting the setting change mode other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 of touching the handle lever 504, insertion of a prepaid card in the CR unit (prepaid If there is a balance on the card) or there is a balance in the cash sand, it is not necessary to start the setting change mode. Moreover, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error). In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the hall, and there is a possibility that an illegal player is about to change the settings, so it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. .

(3) When the setting change mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, and executes RAM clear processing before setting change. RAM clear processing before this setting change, game control area 13126 (including game work area and game stack area), game state (for example, probability variable state, time saving state, special design and normal design pending storage , information about prize balls) are left, other data are cleared, and the area for base calculation 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Note that the setting value is set to the initial value later in procedure (6), so it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. The notification during the setting change mode includes performing an initial action of the character and performing a predetermined display on the effect display device 1600 . Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial action of the role object. For example, when the setting change procedure or state is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if the initial action of the character is performed during the setting change, the display of the effect display device 1600 is partially hidden. because it interferes with

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511 . For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all LEDs for special symbol display are turned off or turned on) to stop the progress of the game. . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the firing permission signal, stops firing the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functions as firing disabling means, thereby notifying the setting change mode. good too. When stopping the shooting of game balls during the setting change mode, the shooting of game balls during the shooting stop period may be treated as an error, and the error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during this period. .

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, the setting value = 0 is a state in which no setting has been made, and the setting change mode cannot be ended with the setting value = 0, and the game (game ball firing, floating display games, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974 each time the player operates the setting change switch 972 .

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Although the procedure (1) described above also determines whether the body frame 4 is open, it may be determined at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 has been operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the conditions for the setting change are met before the setting change is confirmed (especially whether the main body frame opening switch detection signal is input from the payout control board 951). It functions as an allowable state generating means.

(9) Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected setting value and notifies that the setting value is confirmed. Displayed on the setting display 974 . The setting value confirmation display may display a value (for example, 8) that cannot be selected as the setting value, or may blink the fixed setting value for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated, so the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the setting is being changed. Along with this, if the main control MPU 1311 is informing that the setting is being changed, this is also terminated.

The notification (including game stop and firing stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered merely to be a notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification should be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is taken from the viewpoint of discovery of fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting change mode is terminated. This is because when the setting is changed, a predetermined display is performed for a predetermined period of time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the shooting of game balls is stopped during a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, shooting of game balls during the shooting suspension period is treated as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. RAM clear processing after this setting change, among game control area 13126 (including work area for game and stack area for game), set value and game state Reservation storage, information about prize balls) data is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clear processing after setting change, the set values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clear processing before setting change.

Then, the setting change mode is terminated.

In this way, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a slave board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is integrated with the main control board 1310). Since the main control board 1310 acquires the detection signal of the body frame opening switch from the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 alone cannot execute the setting change process, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate. is executing the setting change process.

Next, the setting display processing in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 139(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (energized), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, so the determination of whether the body frame 4 is opened may be omitted. .

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 , it reads the setting values stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays them on the setting display 974 .

138(A) and 139(A), when the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting change mode, the setting change mode is invalidated and the setting change mode is temporarily stopped. Then, by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1 and turning on the power again, the stopped setting change mode is resumed. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage where it was stopped due to error detection, or from the beginning of the setting change mode (set value=0 when no set value is selected).

It is preferable to record a history of changes in set values for a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting was confirmed and the confirmed setting value are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 . When the history of setting values is stored in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. Furthermore, a history of changes in recorded set values can be output. For example, a history of changes in recorded set values may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

The interval for measuring the base value may be changed when the set value is changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of out-balls in the section in which the base value is currently being measured is less than 52000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the game performance of the game machine changes depending on the setting value, by changing the interval by changing the setting value, it is possible to calculate the base value that does not mix different game performance, and it is possible to grasp the transition of the base value due to the change of the setting value. .

Also, when the setting value is changed, the interval in which the base value is currently being measured may be continued without changing the interval for measuring the base value. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the conditional device, it is possible to design the base value not to change greatly by changing the set value. This is because, in such a case, it is not necessary to change the calculation interval of the base value by changing the set value.

Also, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. Considering the method of operation and the layout of the operation means, the possibility of erroneously operating the setting key 971 is lower than the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971. Therefore, the setting change mode is activated. is considered to be the intention of the operator. In addition, in the setting change mode, since the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 other than the game state and the base value are cleared, it is considered sufficient to activate the setting change mode even if the user wishes to clear the RAM. .

On the other hand, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without activating the setting change mode. This is because it is assumed that the operator wants at least a RAM clear when both are being operated. Also, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to start the setting change mode and clear the RAM. This is because, from the viewpoint of file safety against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the intention of the operator is not clear.

In the RAM clearing of the procedures (3) and (15) described above, the game state data is maintained, but the reserved memory of the special symbols may be erased. The setting value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, and the random number determination result of the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved memory of the special symbols and make a new lottery.

On the other hand, the lottery for special symbols (extraction of winning random numbers) is performed when the game ball enters the starting hole, but the lottery result is determined at the start of the variable display game. It suffices to determine the reserved and stored random value. Therefore, the reserved memory of the special symbol may be maintained.

Further, in the RAM clearing of the procedures (3) and (15) described above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 . That is, in the RAM clearing process in the setting change mode, the backed-up game control area 13126 other than the set values is erased (game state data is also erased), and the set values and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. Normally, setting changes are made between the closing of the hall and the opening of the next day. This is because there is no need to maintain without

[12-2. Effect in pachinko machine with setting function]
[12-2-1. Special pattern and special electric accessories control process]
Details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described below. First, the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. The special symbol and special electric accessary product control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are also collectively referred to as starting ports. Also, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are collectively referred to simply as the big prize opening. Moreover, the first special design and the second special design are generically called simply a special design.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port, that is, triggered by the starting winning prize (satisfaction of the starting condition), a big hit for each starting memory information (starting information) that satisfies this starting condition A determination random number is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number matches a big hit determination value preliminarily stored in a main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a big win game state based on the lottery result. A game state is shifted to a jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing will be described along the flowchart shown in FIG.

When the special symbol and special electric role product control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won the big winning hole (step S100). When the game ball B wins the big winning hole (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a big winning hole winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the starting hole (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won the starting hole is determined by the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002 or the second starting hole sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process. This is performed based on the input information read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1311, when the game ball has won the starting hole (the result of step S114 is "yes"), executes the starting hole winning process (step S116). In the start-up win-time process, a start-up win-win command to be transmitted when a game ball newly wins in the start-up win is set, a random number for judging a big hit is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a special pattern is set. It also executes processing and the like for executing the look-ahead effect.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes corresponding processing based on the special symbol/electric accessary product operation number, which is a game progress state variable in which the type of branch processing executed according to the progress of the game is specified (step S124). The game progress state variables are stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and are updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to a branching process designated based on the value of the game progressing state variable stored in the game progressing state storage area. End the process. Since the values of the game progress state variables and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information, they are backed up in the main control side power failure process.

In the processing of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, the branch processing includes special symbol variation waiting processing (step S130), special symbol variation in-process (step S132), special symbol big hit determination processing (step S134), Special symbol deviation stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before large winning opening opening (step S140), large winning opening opening processing (step S142), large winning opening closing process (step S144) or a special winning opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), when the game ball B enters the starting hole, the special symbol display device starts to display the variation of the special symbol.

In the special symbol fluctuation process (step S132), a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol and the like are performed. In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), it is determined whether or not the fixed and stopped special symbol generates a big win game state based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole.

In the special symbol deviation stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed. In the special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), when a jackpot game state is to be generated, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols and notifying that effect is performed.

In the interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big win game state and informing that a big win operation is started is performed. In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), a process related to a big winning operation for making it easier for a game ball to enter each big winning opening is performed by opening the big winning opening.

In the big winning opening closing process (step S144), by closing the big winning opening from the open state, a process related to the big winning operation to make it difficult for the game ball to enter each big winning opening is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the jackpot operation is over, a process of notifying that effect is performed.

[12-2-2. Special symbol variation waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation waiting process. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the special symbol variation display is not performed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparations are made to start the special symbol variation display.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of special symbol operation pending balls is not zero. In addition, the number of special symbol operation pending balls is stored for each starting port when a plurality of starting ports are provided. When the variation of the special symbol is not suspended (the result of step S420 is "no"), the variation display of the special symbol is not started, so this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbols is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets a pending ball number designation command as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol/flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on the random number for judging the big hit acquired at the time of winning the starting game.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 . Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special figure variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area is set as lower command data (step S458). Furthermore, the variation type classification value is acquired from the variation type classification area (step S460), and the upper byte of the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type is obtained by adding the variation type classification value to the command value set in step S452. is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command thus created is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, the change state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-3. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting the variation pattern in the special symbol variation display. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the number of special symbol operation pending balls (step S530). The number of special symbol operation pending balls is stored in the special symbol operation pending ball number buffer. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets a jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a special symbol variation pattern based on the number of special symbol operation pending balls and the big hit flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value is retrieved from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes variation type determination processing for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbols (step S548). The variation type classification value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches the variable time addition value corresponding to the variation type type value from the variation time addition value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time according to the number of times of pseudo consecutive. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the variable time added value retrieved in the process of step S552 to the standard variable time value retrieved in the process of step S546 to obtain the final variable time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol/electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[12-2-4. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of variation pattern selection determination processing. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the variation information source table based on the variation table number (step S340). The variation table number is a value for selecting (obtaining) a variation information source table from the variation information source address table. The variation information source table includes hit (hit variation selection information state table), loss (loss variation selection information state table), reach (reach variation selection information state table), reach probability (special symbol reach probability table) and variation type (variation type determination data table) are stored in table information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value (step S350). When a big win is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), a big win flag and a big win symbol type are obtained (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes variation information number search processing based on the jackpot flag and jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hit time variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the big hit variation selection information type table based on the acquired variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 has not won a big win or a small win (the result of step S350 is "no"), it determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S372).

The main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the lost variation selection information retention table based on the number of retained balls when the reach is not generated in the variation display (step S372 result is "no") (step S376).

On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information state table based on the state flag when the reach is generated in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is "yes") (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes variation information number search processing based on the variation pattern random number 1 acquired in the processing of step S360, step S378 or step S382 (step S388). Then, the variation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the variation information number search process, and the variation pattern random number 2 is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Furthermore, based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table, variation information number search processing is executed (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two steps by two types of random numbers, variation pattern random number 1 (steps S360, S372, S378) and variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as ○○ system reach) is selected based on the random number 1 for variation pattern. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in a variation pattern command) to be finally displayed in a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2 . It should be noted that the method is not limited to the method of drawing lots in two stages, and a method of drawing lots in three or more stages may be used, or a variation pattern may be directly selected using one variation pattern random number.

[12-3. Explanation of production in pachinko machine with setting function]
The effect of the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described below. Specifically, a setting suggestion rendering that suggests the current settings will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the greater the number of game balls to be paid out with respect to the number of special lotteries. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning a big hit in the non-variable state (for example, setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4: 1/270 , setting 5: 1/250, setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 with the highest possible settings, the player's willingness to play is enhanced by installing the setting suggesting effect.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, the main control MPU 1311 selects a variation pattern directly with one variation pattern random number in the variation pattern selection determination process of step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 executes the following processing in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state (whether it is a time-saving state (state in which time-saving control is being executed) or a normal state other than the time-saving state), and the result of the special lottery (won the jackpot It selects a variation pattern table according to whether it is positive or negative). If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number for the variation pattern, and based on the acquired random number for the variation pattern and the distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, A variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is out, it is further determined whether or not reach occurs, the random number for the variation pattern is obtained, and the obtained random number for the variation pattern and the distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, Based on, the variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table.

FIG. 144(A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is lost. FIG. 144(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big win.

The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding effect content column, and a variation pattern determination random number distribution column. The variation pattern type column stores information specifying the type for identifying the variation pattern in the table. The fluctuation time column stores information specifying the fluctuation time in the corresponding fluctuation pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information specifying the effect content to be executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for determining the variation pattern stores the distribution for selecting the corresponding variation pattern for each setting. In addition, the random number column for determining the variation pattern of the variation pattern table selected when the special lottery result is out (that is, the variation pattern table in FIG. 144 (A) and FIG. 149 (A) described later) is when reach occurs. And for each of reach non-occurrence time, the distribution in which the corresponding variation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting Suggestion Effect Executed After Temporary Display of Special Lottery Result]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A) will be described. First, the effect executed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 144 as well.

FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In the variation of the loss variation pattern 20, after the special lottery result is likely to be lost after SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be lost is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the special lottery result is lost. A confirmation display indicating that there is a game is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . On the other hand, in the fluctuations of the lost fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, after the special lottery result is likely to be lost after the SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A suggestive effect is executed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is lost is displayed on the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加

In this way, in the variation patterns 25 to 29, after the provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be lost is performed, the setting suggestion effect is performed, so that even if the provisional display is performed The player can expect the generation of the setting suggesting effect after that and maintain the sense of anticipation. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is generated in the loss fluctuation, even if the special lottery result is a loss, the disappointment of the player due to the result of the special lottery can be suppressed, and the feeling of exhilaration can be enhanced.

In addition, in the variation of the loss variation pattern 24, after the special lottery result is likely to be lost after SP reach 1 is executed, a provisional display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the setting suggestion effect is executed. Although the false effect suggesting is executed, the setting suggesting effect itself is not performed, and a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is lost is displayed on the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加

The SP reach is a ready-to-win effect that is highly selected when the special lottery result is a big hit and is less likely to be selected when the special lottery result is a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit of variation in which SP reach is executed is high.

Below, the effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically described. In addition to the contents described below, in each production, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and/or display on the production display device 1600, etc. are executed at the same time. good too.

In the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, first, the ready-to-win effect is executed. In the pre-reach performance, all the decorative symbols change in the performance display device 1600. - 特許庁Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, it develops into a normal reach effect. In the normal ready-to-win effect, the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, among three decorative patterns (for example, a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern), the left pattern and the right pattern stop at the same pattern, and the middle pattern is fluctuating.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, it develops to SP reach 1, and the first half production of SP reach 1 is executed. In SP reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and they play rock-paper-scissors. In the first half production of SP reach 1 in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the production display device 1600 executes a production in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game. During the SP reach, the decorative pattern may be displayed smaller and closer to the periphery of the effect display device 1600 than during the pre-reach effect and during the normal reach effect, for example.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, it develops into the second half performance of SP reach 1. In the second half production of SP reach 1 in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called revival production is executed, for example, at the start of the second half production, the main character's voice such as "still more!" On the display device 1600, an effect is executed in which a rock-paper-scissors game is played again between the main character and the enemy character. In the second half production of SP reach 1 in the loss fluctuation patterns 24 to 29, the production display device 1600 executes the production that the main character loses again to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game.

Subsequently, a provisional display that the special lottery result is out is executed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one combination of the decorative symbols in the off state (for example, the left and right decorative symbols are the same symbols as the symbols stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is the A pattern different from the same pattern) is displayed in a manner of swaying in a small width.

Subsequently, in the loss variation pattern 20, after the provisional display, the effect display device 1600 displays a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss without any other effect being performed. In the loss variation pattern 24, the setting suggestion false effect is executed after the provisional display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and then the effect display device 1600 displays a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. In the final display, for example, in the effect display device 1600, the same combination of decorative symbols displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped manner. In the temporary display and final display, the decorative pattern is displayed, for example, in the center of the effect display device 1600 in the same size as during the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

In the setting-suggestion fake effect in the deviation variation pattern 24, for example, in the effect display device 1600, an effect is executed in which one main character finds two enemy characters and chases the enemy characters but cannot catch them. Like the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 24 in FIG. 144(A), it is desirable that the distribution of the variation patterns for which the setting-suggestion fake effect is executed is uniform or approximately uniform in all settings. This is because, if the distribution is not even, the setting suggestion fake effect suggests the setting.

In addition, it is desirable that the proportion of the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 24 in the total distribution of the fluctuations in which the SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, the setting suggestion fake effect will occur frequently when the SP reach 1 develops, and there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect will be reduced.

In the set-suggestion effects in the outlier variation patterns 25 to 29, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one main character finds two enemy characters, chases and catches the enemy characters, and then three people play rock-paper-scissors. A performance is performed.

In the setting-suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25, an effect is executed in which the three players play rock-paper-scissors, and the three players goo and become in love. Also, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 25 is determined to be sorted only in the low settings (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation pattern 25 is the effect that the low setting is confirmed.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 144 (A), the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 25 is the same value as the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 26 etc. in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is If it occurs, the player may stop the game early, so the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of other set fixed effects in other settings, or the deviation variation pattern 25 itself may not exist.

In the set-suggestion effect in the outlier variation pattern 26, an effect is executed in which all three players pull out scissors in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players and become in love with each other. Also, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 26 is determined to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation pattern 26 is a effect in which the high setting is confirmed.

In the setting-suggestion effect in the loss variation pattern 27, an effect is executed in which all three players get a par in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players. Also, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 27 is determined to be distributed only in the even number settings (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation pattern 27 is the effect that the even setting is confirmed.

In the set-suggestion effect in the outlier variation pattern 28, an effect is executed in which the three players put out different moves in a rock-paper-scissors game, and become in love with each other. Also, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 28 is determined to be distributed only in odd number settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation pattern 28 is the effect that the odd setting is confirmed.

In addition, for example, when the odd number setting and the even number setting have different characteristics, the player's interest in the effect can be attracted by installing the odd number setting confirmed effect or the even number set confirmed effect as described above. .

Specifically, for example, in order of setting 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1, the probability of winning the jackpot in the normal state is high (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), setting 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, In order of 2, the ratio of probability variable jackpots among jackpot winnings is high (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are set in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and probability variation rate in each setting are determined so that the ratio of the total number of game balls put out to the winning number of game balls to the game ball is high (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest).

In this case, compared to the odd number setting, the even number setting has a higher jackpot winning probability in the normal state, but a lower probability variable ratio, that is, the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be smaller. The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in one consecutive game from the beginning tends to be small. On the other hand, compared to the even number setting, the odd number setting has a low jackpot winning probability in the normal state, but a high probability variation ratio, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first win tends to be large, but the first win The total amount of game balls that can be obtained from a single consecutive residence tends to be large. In such a case, there is a possibility that one player prefers an even-numbered ball payout tendency and another player prefers an odd-numbered ball payout tendency. The player's interest in the performance increases. Also, compared to the odd number setting, the even number setting may have a feature such as a higher jackpot winning probability in the normal state, but a larger jackpot with a smaller number of rounds being more likely to be selected.

In the outlier variation patterns 25 to 29 described above, the effect until the setting suggestion effect starts is the same, but the content of the setting suggestion effect is different (the results of the rock-paper-scissors game among three players are different). Incidentally, it is desirable that the three-person rock-paper-scissors game effect be used only in the lost variation patterns 25-29. As a result, when the three-person rock-paper-scissors game performance starts, the player can recognize that the setting suggesting performance has started, and the feeling of exhilaration is heightened.

It should be noted that, for example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect in which the high setting is confirmed is executed, but it may be a variation pattern in which an effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting is high is executed. Specifically, for example, if there is a distribution of the fluctuation pattern 25 even in the low setting, and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the fluctuation pattern 25 in the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the production in the outlier fluctuation pattern 25 is not a production that confirms the high setting, but a production that suggests that the possibility of high setting is high.

In addition to the variation pattern in which the effect that the high setting is confirmed is performed, a variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting as described above is performed may be determined. What has been described above is the same for the low setting confirmation effect, the odd setting confirmation effect, the even setting confirmation effect, the highest setting confirmation effect, and the like.

According to the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (B) (variation pattern table at normal time and jackpot winning), when the special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, the winning variation pattern other than 34 in which the highest setting is fixed The setting suggestion effect of is not executed. In addition, the distribution of variation patterns in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is high compared to the case where the special lottery result is a loss. As a result, the setting suggestion performance becomes a performance mainly executed when the special lottery result is a win, and the player can get a sense of expectation even when the special lottery result is a win.

[12-5. Setting Suggestion Production Using Shortened Variation]
The deviation fluctuation pattern 30 will be described below with reference to FIG. 146 as well. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A).

For outlier variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, shortening variation is performed. The shortened variation is, for example, a variation in which the variation time is shorter than other variation patterns, and after starting the variation of the decorative symbols on the production display device 1600, all the decorative symbols are displayed without developing into a ready-to-win state. is the fluctuation that stops. In the normal variation, the decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600 are stopped in the order of left, right, and middle symbols, for example, but in the shortened variation, all the decorative symbols may be stopped all at once.

Subsequently, in loss fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, after provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be a loss is performed, final display is performed to indicate that the special lottery result is a loss. Descriptions of temporary display and final display are omitted because they are the same as those described above.

The outlier variation pattern 30 has a variation time that is different from the variation times of all other variation patterns such as the outlier variation patterns 1 and 2 for which shortening variation is performed. In the example of FIG. 144(A), the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. . Also, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is determined to be sorted only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In addition, the distribution of the deviating fluctuation pattern 30, which is a fluctuation pattern in which shortening fluctuation is executed and suggests setting, is extremely low compared to the distribution of other fluctuation patterns in which shortening fluctuation is executed (for example, the other fluctuation pattern is less than 10% of the minimum allocation of ). Moreover, in each variation pattern in which shortened variation is performed, it is desirable that the execution time of temporary display and final display be the same, and that only the time of shortened variation is different. Also, it is desirable that the difference between the variation time of the outlier variation pattern 30 and the variation time of the variation pattern in which other shortened variation is executed is recognizable by the player (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). .

As a result, when the shortened variation is executed, the player assumes a variation time such as the often-distributed outlier variation patterns 1 and 2, but when the outlier variation pattern 30 is executed, the variation time does not match the assumed variation time. You can recognize the difference and enjoy the production that the highest setting is fixed. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144(A), the variation pattern including the shortened variation is selected only when there is no reach, so the player's expectations are reduced when the shortened variation is executed, and the interest in the shortened variation is reduced. I can't have it. However, by executing the setting suggestion effect using the shortened variation in this way, the player can have expectations for the shortened variation that is selected only when the reach is out of reach, and suppresses the decline in interest. can do.

Also, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, although the content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is the same, only the shortening fluctuation time is different. As a result, the player can concentrate on the performance so as not to miss the highest setting fixed performance.

Note that the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is a fluctuation pattern in which the maximum setting is confirmed and the shortened fluctuation is executed. Patterns may exist. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the variation time of each of the variation patterns is different from the variation time of other deviating variation patterns for which shortening variation is performed.

[12-6. Setting Suggestion Effect Executed Before Temporary Display of Special Lottery Result]
The loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described below with reference to FIG. 147 as well. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the losing variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144, the loss variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are determined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, a special movie 1 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the losing variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, that is, an effect in which the highest setting is determined.

In the loss variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be lost is performed, and then final display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is performed. In the winning variation pattern 34, after the special movie 1 ends, temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is winning is performed, and then final display indicating that the special lottery result is winning is performed.

Unlike the loss variation patterns 25 to 30 and the like, the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 start the setting suggesting effect before the provisional display (specifically, for example, at the same time as the variation starts). As a result, the player can get an exhilarating feeling waiting for the notification of the result of the jackpot lottery while the maximum setting is fixed. In addition, when the display time of the special movie 1 is particularly long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and thus the player can The player can feel a sense of superiority over the other player, and the hole can easily appeal to the other player that the highest setting is used.

[12-7. Setting suggestion production that confirms jackpot winning or high setting]
The loss variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described below with reference to FIG. 148 as well. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 32 is determined to be sorted only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation fluctuation pattern 32 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the loss variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, a special movie 2 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that occurs only with the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34.

In the loss variation pattern 32, after the special movie 2 is finished, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be lost is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is performed. In the winning variation pattern 35, after the special movie 2 ends, temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is winning is performed, and then final display indicating that the special lottery result is winning is performed.

Therefore, when the special movie 2 occurs, either the high setting or the big hit in the variation is decided. In other words, if the special lottery result is lost after the special movie 2 occurs, the high setting is confirmed, so the player can suppress the disappointment that the special lottery result has been lost, and thus the high setting is achieved. A feeling of elation can be obtained by confirming

In addition, when the display time of the special movie 2 is particularly long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel a sense of superiority over the other players. When the special lottery result is a loser, the hole can easily appeal to other players that the high setting is being used.

[12-8. Setting suggestion production in time saving state]
Hereinafter, the variation pattern selected in the game state time saving state will be described. FIG. 149(A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out. FIG. 149(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

In the example of FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the larger the allocation of the loss variation pattern 3 and the smaller the allocation of the loss variation pattern 2 at the time of loss without reach. Also, the variation time of the error variation pattern 2 is shorter than the variation time of the error variation pattern 3 . For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning a big hit, and if the distribution of each variation pattern is the same for all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win a big win in a short time. There is a risk that the number of game balls to be paid out will increase, leading to a burden on the hole.

However, as in the example of FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the more variation patterns with longer variation times are distributed, so that the number of game balls paid out by the big hit per unit time in each setting can be equalized. can. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of the deviating variation pattern 3, which has a longer variation time, among the variation patterns including the shortening variation. Therefore, the deviating variation pattern 3 also functions as a variation pattern that suggests a high setting. can be done.

Similarly, when the reach is not reached, the higher the setting, the larger the allocation of the deviation fluctuation pattern 11 with a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the allocation of the deviation fluctuation pattern 12 with a short fluctuation time. Likewise, when the big win is won, the higher the setting, the larger the allocation of the winning variation pattern 2 with the longer variation time and the smaller the allocation of the winning variation pattern 3 with the shorter variation time.

As described above, for example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning a big hit, and if the distribution of each variation pattern is the same for all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win a big win in a short time. In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the big win, and the more game balls are shot until the big win is won. For example, the lower the setting, the greater the distribution of variation patterns with a long variation time, and the lower the selection rate of variation patterns with a short variation time. It is possible to equalize the number of shots of game balls per unit time in the setting.

It should be noted that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing when the setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. Note that the predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be dedicated ones that are executed only during the setting suggestion effect. In addition, especially in the setting suggestion effect in which the high setting and the maximum setting are confirmed, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect output and a predetermined light emission effect, which are executed only in the setting suggestion effect, are executed.

In addition, it is desirable that the allocation of the variation pattern in which the high setting or the highest setting is decided or the effect suggesting a high possibility is executed is extremely low compared to the allocation of the other variation patterns. When the distribution of the variation pattern is high, the player loses his sense of expectation and ends up playing the game early if the high setting suggesting effect or the highest setting suggesting effect is not executed even though he has played only a short game time. This is because there is a risk of discontinuation.

In addition, it is desirable that the distribution of variation patterns in which an effect suggesting that the low setting or the lowest setting is confirmed or executed with a high possibility is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns. This is because, if the distribution of the variation pattern is high, the low setting suggesting performance and the minimum setting suggesting performance are frequently executed, so that the player loses his sense of anticipation and eventually stops playing the game at an early stage.

Also, the setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting group such as high setting, low setting, maximum setting, odd setting, and even setting has been described, but the setting group in the setting suggesting effect is not limited to these. A setting suggestion effect may be executed for any group consisting of one or more settings. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be grouped as low settings, settings 3 and 4 as medium settings, and settings 5 and 6 as high settings.

[12-9. Other form of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIG. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a dotted line.

In the above description, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974. , the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 , and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974 .

FIG. 150(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without being destroyed once closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 150(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In the example shown in FIG. 150B, on the main control board 1310, a main control MPU 1311, a driver circuit (not shown), a base display 1317, a display switch 1318 and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted. In addition, the RAM clear switch 954 may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board) without being mounted on the main control board 1310 . In this case, main control board box 1320 is not provided with hole 954A.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971) are provided in the main control board box 1320 to trigger RAM clear. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 where data is erased differs between when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be made by connecting the boards directly with a connector or by using an electric wire. A setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying set or selected setting values are mounted on the setting board 970 . A setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970 .

Outputs of various switches 971 , 972 , and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to ports of the main control MPU 1311 .

Also, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970 .

Since the main control board box 1320 is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 , the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position that can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 .

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each pachinko machine manufacturer is set in the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads the authentication code set in the setting board 970 and checks it. If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from starting a game. In other words, the game ball can be shot toward the game area 5a, but the prize ball is not paid out even if it enters the winning hole, and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each pachinko machine model, or may be set for each pachinko machine serial number. The method of setting the authentication code includes, for example, setting the authentication code with a DIP switch, jumper wire, jumper pin, pattern short circuit, etc. provided on the setting board 970, or setting the authentication code in a logic circuit (for example, A small-capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array)) may be mounted on the setting board 970 .

Also, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. FIG. For example, by outputting different signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs +5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). Signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to specific ports of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1311 determines the connected board by the input signal to the port.

In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model), it is possible to prevent the wrong setting board 970 from being mounted on the main control board box 1320 . By setting the authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970 can be prevented.

FIG. 150(C) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A).

As described above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a game performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 related to prize balls won by the player, such as the probability of a big hit in the special symbol variation display game, and the setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 in accordance with the hall business policy. On the other hand, there are halls where conventional pachinko machines without setting functions are sufficient and the setting functions are unnecessary. For this reason, pachinko machine manufacturers must design and produce both pachinko machines without setting functions and pachinko machines with setting functions. There is a demand for efficient design and production of pachinko machines.

For this reason, in the pachinko machine 1 that does not have the setting function, the dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same manner as when the setting board 970 is mounted. to Further, the main control board 1310 can be shared between a pachinko machine without a setting function and a pachinko machine with a setting function.

The dummy board 979 does not have the devices mounted on the setting board 970, such as the setting keys 971 and the setting display 974, but may have patterns for mounting these devices. That is, a pattern for mounting a device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, but no device is mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 may be a member (for example, a unit made up of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970 without being made up of a printed board.

Also, since the driver circuit of the setting indicator 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting indicator 974 is neither open nor grounded on the dummy board 979, and is terminated by a dummy resistor. Good. This can prevent damage to the driver circuit due to overcurrent. Also, when the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310 .

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 971A. A setting function is provided by providing a small door in the main control board box 1320 which can be moved to close the hole 971A so as to be operable from the inside of the main control board box 1320 and not operable from the outside. The main control board box 1320 may be made common for a pachinko machine that does not have a setting function and a pachinko machine that has a setting function.

An authentication code for authentication by the main control board 1310 may also be set in the dummy board 979 to be described later. Also, the dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310 and does not need to be set with an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above are summarized as follows.

(1) With a setting change switch 972 and with a setting confirmation switch 973. In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (while pressing the RAM clear switch 954), the pachinko machine will start. Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, the setting determination switch 973 is operated.

(2) With the setting change switch 972 and without the setting confirmation switch 973. In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (while the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without setting change switch 972 and with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (while the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select the setting value to be set, the setting determination switch 973 is operated. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the set value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

(4) Without setting change switch 972 and without setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (while the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. After selecting the set value to be set by operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the set value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

151 and 152 are diagrams showing another mounting example of the main control board 1310. FIG. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a dotted line.

The mounting example shown in FIGS. 151 and 152 differs from the mounting example shown in FIG. 150 in that a main control board box 1320 is provided with a small door 1321 .

FIG. 151(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. As described above, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened once closed without breaking. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A for manipulating 976 is provided.

The hole 976A is normally covered with a small door 1321. A key unit 1322 is provided on the small door 1321. By inserting a key 975 into the key hole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, the hole 976A is exposed, and the setting is performed. The mode switch 976 becomes operable.

As shown in FIG. 152(A), in a normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the bar 1323 is at the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, and the bar 1323 is inserted into the receiving seat 1324. are engaged to fix the small door 1321 in the closed position. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated as shown in FIG. , the hinge 1325 as an axis, the small door 1321 can be opened. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152(B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing yet another mounting example of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIG. In the mounting example shown in FIG. 153, a key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In the example shown in FIG. That is, by inserting the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the back cover 980 is opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (the setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It becomes possible.

That is, in a normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed by closing the back side of the main body frame base 600 , and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980 . On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the rear cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the rear cover 980 is exposed to the rear side. The setting mode switch 976 becomes operable.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 151(C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without being destroyed once closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A is provided for manipulating the . The main control board box 1320 accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 . On the main control board 1310, a base display 1317, a display switch 1318 and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted in addition to the main control MPU and driver circuit (not shown). In addition, the RAM clear switch 954 may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board) without being mounted on the main control board 1310 . In this case, main control board box 1320 is not provided with hole 954A.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be made by connecting the boards directly with a connector or by using an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying set or selected setting values are mounted. A setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970 .

[12-10. Details of setting change processing]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 154 differs from the initialization process described above with reference to FIG. 101 in that RAM clear processing is performed (steps S17 and S30) when the setting key 971 is operated. 21 and 101, the same steps as those of the initialization process described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, thereby enabling writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and checks whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activation of the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has passed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S18).

It should be noted that the RAM clear switch 954 may be detected immediately after power-on (for example, before step S12), the detection result may be stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value may be determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after power-on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after power-on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 has not been operated, it is a normal RAM clearing operation, so the process advances to step S30 to initialize a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 . On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is operated, that is, if the power is turned on while both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the setting change mode is entered. That is, since it is necessary to operate two switches and to operate the power switch to start the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of starting the setting change mode.

In the setting change mode, first, the setting values are displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974 . Then, a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality. Therefore, the hall computer should be notified when the setting change mode is entered during business hours.

Whether the security signal is output for a predetermined period from the start of the setting change mode, or is output from the start to the end of the setting change mode, or is output from the start of the setting change mode to the predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode. may be output. By outputting the security signal for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further enhanced.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting change operation has been performed depending on whether or not the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S62), changes the setting value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes it to the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is configured by a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pushed once, the set value is changed by one step. When the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned right once, the setting value is changed by one step. Then, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for displaying the changed setting value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

After that, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change mode and fix the setting value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S30. Alternatively, the setting change mode may be ended by an operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position. Also, the setting change mode may be ended with the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1 as a trigger.

In the above-described process, after the setting change mode ends, or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but the process may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20), whether the checksum matches (step S22), whether the power failure flag is not set, and the check If the sums do not match, a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. If it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30.

After the setting change mode ends, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data, base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and game state (for example, variable probability state, Time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls) are left, other data are erased, and the process proceeds to step S24. It should be noted that the game state data may be erased without being left. In this case, the memory area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation and the memory area erased by the RAM clear operation are the same.

On the other hand, if an operation to end the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62 and further detects a setting change operation.

In step S17, if the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data and the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) ) are left, and other data are erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

Also, in step S18, if the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312, and determines whether a power failure flag is set (step S20). .

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. (step S30) and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and checks the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power shutdown. The sum is compared (verified) with the checksum stored in step S48 (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. The stored data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. proceed to

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag There are a blackout flag error (step S20) that is not set, a RAM error (step S22) in which the RAM checksum does not match, and an error in the work for base calculation (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the set value and the game Leave the data of (for example, probability variable state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls), clear other data, and do not clear the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) . When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, and in the case of power failure flag abnormality and RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation) is not cleared. Moreover, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

It should be noted that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of power failure flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 You may clear the entire RAM area including If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state will be lost and normal processing cannot be executed. should be initialized only. Also, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared in the same manner as described above, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared. No need to clear.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are stored for each type of data (game control area 13126 (setting value, game state data), base calculation Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the set values need to be reset for each RAM clear operation, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

Either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be employed for the processing after step S28 as required. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, and is executed in the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 155 and 156). may be executed. By executing the setting confirmation process in the initialization process, the setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the setting value by careless operation during operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented.

In this case, an operation unit (for example, a push button switch) for setting confirmation is provided separately from the setting key 971 (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of the operation unit for setting confirmation), and when the power is turned on, When the operation unit for confirming the setting is operated, the current setting value is read from the main control RAM 1312 to generate data for displaying on the setting display 974, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 974. do it. Also in this case, it is preferable to output the security signal along with the display of the setting value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear processing even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode is completed (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clearing process and executes the RAM clearing process after a predetermined condition is satisfied (end of the setting change mode). During the setting change mode, it can be said that the main control MPU 1311 controls to store the execution of the RAM clear processing. On the other hand, if the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above. Next, the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be described.

After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control section may be cleared together with this. Moreover, it is not necessary to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952 . Further, it may be switched whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit by an operation. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 are cleared, and with the setting key 971 turned on, When the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. Thus, by changing the operation method, it is possible to clear a partial area of the main control RAM 1312 and execute a process in which the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared.

Also, when clearing the RAM of the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952, depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated, there is a difference between the timing of clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the timing of clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952. can occur. That is, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, it immediately clears the RAM. Therefore, depending on the conditions (operations), the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 may not be cleared.

In addition, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310, but also in the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931, when changing the setting value, while operating the RAM clear switch 954 It is preferable that the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared when the power is turned on. That is, instead of the payout control unit 952 clearing the RAM by the RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, the payout control unit 952 detects the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 It is determined whether or not it is operated, and whether or not to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is determined. If the payout control board 951 is provided with a RAM clear switch, there is an effect that various models can be supported without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. Details of setting confirmation process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is different from the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. Object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. In addition, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operating ratio of the condition device) is added. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt process described above in FIGS. 23 and 104 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 to the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the registers (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 ( 103) to calculate the base value (step S801, see FIGS. 105 and 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80). .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbols and special electric auditors control processing (step S86), normal symbols and normal electric auditors control processing ( Step S88) is executed.

After that, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying the setting value indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation process, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 974 by the hall employee performing a predetermined operation. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing an example of the pachinko machine setting confirmation process of the present embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155) and executed.

In the setting confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting confirmation operation is in progress (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers a transition to the setting change mode (step S17 in FIG. 154), and if it is operated during operation, it becomes a setting confirmation operation, and the current settings can be displayed.

If no operation of the setting key 971 is detected, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, so data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (step S8065).

On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062).

As a setting display condition, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 by the output of the frame release switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is opened. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected while the outer frame 2 is closed, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 has some kind of abnormality (malfunction or fraudulent act). should not be displayed. Further, since the setting display 974 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and there is no need to display the setting.

The setting value may be displayed at any time during operation of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁Also, a set display condition may be provided to enable display at a specific time. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the elapsed time from power-on (or CPU initial setting in step S28), and to display the set value until the timer expires.

Also, a setting display condition may be provided to enable the setting value to be displayed in a specific game state. For example, the set display conditions cannot be displayed during variable display of special symbols or during a jackpot game. That is, a setting display condition is provided to enable the setting value to be displayed during a period other than during the special symbol fluctuation and during the jackpot. It should be noted that the display of the setting value may be disabled in game states other than those described above. In this case, when the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game, the set value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the set display condition is satisfied, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to check the settings during a game, and it is a sign of fraud. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours.

The security signal may be output for a specified period of time from the start of setting value display, from the start of setting value display to the end of setting value display, or from the start of setting value display to a predetermined period after the end of setting value display. good. By outputting the security signal for a predetermined period after the setting value is displayed, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and security can be further enhanced.

In the illustrated setting confirmation process, the security signal is transmitted when the setting display condition is satisfied. good.

After that, the setting value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974 .

If the set display conditions are not met, the conditions are checked until the set display conditions are met. The confirmation process may end. For example, after it is determined that the set value is not displayed because of the special symbol variation display, when the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the set display condition is set with the end of the special symbol variation display as an opportunity. and displays the set value. Also, if the setting condition is not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be terminated immediately without repeating confirmation of the setting condition.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, a new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and a new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the set values can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, so that the set values can be confirmed without interfering with other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the setting value is preferentially displayed during setting confirmation, so the base value is not displayed even though the base value is being calculated. In a game state in which a large number of prize balls are paid out in a short period of time, it may be desired to confirm a change in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without interfering with the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Security signal output accompanying setting change and setting confirmation]
FIG. 157 is a timing chart of security signals output with setting change and setting confirmation.

As described above, a security signal is output during the setting change mode and setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 154, S8063 in FIG. 156).

In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157A, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined period of time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than the time at which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Also, the security signal may be output for a period from the start to the end of the setting change mode instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode.

Further, in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157B, the security signal may be output for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clearing process executed in conjunction with the setting change mode.

At the time of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157(C), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined period of time from the start of setting confirmation. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than the time at which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Also, the security signal may be output for a period from the start to the end of the setting confirmation (the period during which the setting value is displayed) instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation.

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, as shown in FIG. 157(D), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) after the error is detected. When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error while checking the settings, as shown in FIG. 157(E), a security signal is output for a predetermined time after the error is detected. That is, the security signal resulting from setting confirmation and the security signal resulting from error detection are continuously output over a predetermined time (T seconds) (predetermined time after error detection). Even if an error is detected during setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal may not be extended. That is, even if an error is detected during security signal output, the security signal resulting from the error detection is not output and is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Since the pachinko machine 1 does not detect an error during the setting change mode, the security signal resulting from setting confirmation and the security signal resulting from error detection do not overlap. That is, the output time of the security signal is not extended even if an error occurs during the setting change mode, but the output time of the security signal is extended if an error occurs during setting confirmation.

[12-13. Another example of setting confirmation processing]
Another example of the setting confirmation process will be described below. In the above description, an example in which setting confirmation processing is performed in the timer interrupt processing in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been mainly described. example.

Specifically, for example, when the setting key is on when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the process proceeds to the setting confirmation process. Details of the processing will be described below. Note that the timer interrupt processing executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is assumed to be the timer interrupt processing in FIG. 23 (that is, the timer interrupt processing that does not include the setting confirmation processing in step S802).

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing another example of initialization processing. Differences from FIG. 154 will be described. If the main control MPU 1311 determines in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated (step S18: No), it determines whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S29).

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S29: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 shifts to setting confirmation processing in step S807, and then shifts to step S20. The setting confirmation processing in step S807 will be described later. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is OFF (step S29: No), the process proceeds to step S20.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing another example of setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation processing in step S807). Differences from FIG. 156 will be described. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting display condition is satisfied without performing the processing of step S8061 (step S8062). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes), it outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the setting value (step S8064). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the set display condition is not satisfied (step S8062: No), it executes the process of step S8062 again.

Following the processing of step S8064, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is off (step S8071). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S8071: No), for example, after a predetermined time has passed, the determination of step S8071 is performed again. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), it hides the setting value (step S8075) and ends the setting confirmation process. That is, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the setting confirmation state is entered.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation, the number of pending memories managed by the main control board 1310, the remaining variation time in the special symbol, etc. are stored as they are. After that, when the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 turned on), after the setting confirmation process is completed (setting is performed without turning off the power) After returning the key 971 to the initial position), the special symbol variation resumes. At this time, for example, the production that has been executed along with the special design variation (production using a display device, production using a lamp, sound production using a speaker, and production using a movable body, etc.) is the special design Nothing is done after the resumption of the fluctuation.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, when the special symbol variation is resumed after the completion of the setting confirmation process, the special symbol variation You may restart the production that was being executed with. For example, the production using the display device, the lamp, and the speaker, which has been interrupted, is resumed. In addition, regarding the production using the movable body, for example, after the special symbol variation is restarted or after the movable body is returned to the initial position when the power is turned on, it is determined to operate the movable body in the production pattern of the production. If so, move the movable body according to the effect pattern.

In other words, if the movable body is not in the initial position and has shifted to the setting confirmation state, it is returned to the initial position once when the power is turned on or the setting confirmation process is completed, and then based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation If the determined effects include an effect of moving (moving) the movable body, the movable body may be moved (moved). If the setting confirmation state is entered while the movable body is moving (moving), the action pattern for that movement (moving) may not be executed, or the movable body may be returned to its initial position. The movable body may be operated as long as it is a pattern that allows it to operate even if it is empty.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, when the special symbol variation is resumed after the completion of the setting confirmation process, the special symbol variation Among the productions that were being executed with the display device, the production using the lamp, and the sound production using the speaker are resumed, and after the special pattern variation is restarted or when the power is turned on, the movable body is returned to the initial position. It is not necessary to perform the effect using the return and the movable body.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, the effect display device 1600 is displayed when the special symbol variation is resumed after the completion of the setting confirmation process. You may restart the fluctuation of the decorative pattern that was displayed in (restart the production that was originally planned to be performed), or until the pattern is confirmed in the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (or until the shake fluctuation just before the pattern is confirmed) A high-speed variation may be performed by making the decorative pattern transparent, or the decorative pattern may not be displayed until the design is fixed (or until the shake fluctuation immediately before the pattern is fixed). Also, at the time of finalizing the design, for example, the effect display device 1600 displays a combination of decorative designs planned before the power is turned off. Also, in this case, at the end of the special pattern fluctuation after the restart, a combination of predetermined decorative patterns, a combination of decorative patterns displayed at the time of initial power-on, or a special decorative pattern that is not displayed during normal special pattern fluctuation A combination (for example, “xxx”, etc.) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

It should be noted that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special pattern variation, and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time. When the power is turned on (that is, when the power is normally turned on), the same initial operation (for example, a predetermined operation of the movable body, an operation such as confirmation of predetermined light emission of the LED, etc.) may be performed. (After this initial action is performed, the above-described effect or the like may be restarted).

Also, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the look-ahead effect is being performed during the special symbol fluctuation, and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special When the symbol variation is restarted, the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect for the special symbol variation that was suspended immediately before turning off the power are not executed (specifically, for example, the power is turned off before the A special zone that was displayed during the fluctuation of the special pattern that was used (for example, a special stage that shows the player that the expectation of a big hit is high across multiple fluctuations, from the rival horse production to the horse racing production described later) Developing zone (horse racing production is a special zone that is set with high expectations (for example, expectations are relatively higher than the dialogue production described later))) Waiting display and the special The display effect in the zone is erased, and if the state of the pending display is blue instead of the normal white, the normal white is restored). However, for the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning after the setting confirmation process is completed, the prefetch effect may be executed.

Also, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the look-ahead effect is being performed during the special symbol fluctuation, and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special When the pattern change resumes, the look-ahead effect during the special pattern change is canceled (specifically, for example, the special zone that was displayed during the special pattern change that was performed before the power was turned off) The standby display and the display effect in the special zone are erased, and if the pending display mode is blue instead of the normal white, for example, it is returned to normal white), but the following The look-ahead effect may be resumed from the special pattern variation (or restore the erased display, or if the pattern is a pattern that promotes the look-ahead effect at the start of the variation, restore it in the display mode after the promotion. can also be used). In this case, the look-ahead effect executed from the next special symbol variation is restarted assuming that, for example, the look-ahead effect during the special symbol variation was not stopped. That is, before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the look-ahead performance scheduled to be executed after the next special symbol variation is executed. Moreover, a pattern of a new look-ahead effect may be set, and the effect of the new look-ahead pattern may be executed from the next special symbol variation.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion effect]
An example of processing for restricting execution of the setting suggestion effect will be described below. In the following description, the probability of setting 1 to setting 6 in normal times is 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, 1/190, respectively. Assume that the jackpot probabilities of setting 1 to setting 6 at time are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. In addition, it is assumed that the probability variation rate at the time of winning the jackpot is 50%.

[12-14-1. Fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. In the description of FIG. 142 and the like, an example in which a variation pattern table exists for each winning/losing type of the special lottery result has been described, but in the example of FIG. is defined. Also, in the example of FIG. 160, it is assumed that a common variation pattern table is used for all settings.

The variation pattern table in FIG. 160 shows the correspondence between the winning/losing type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, the outline of the effect of the variation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, the information on the variation pattern of each special lottery result is stored in one variation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects the variation pattern corresponding to the winning/losing type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate indicated by the variation pattern table. In addition, as in the example of FIG. 144, the variation time of each variation pattern may be defined in the variation pattern table.

In addition, the movie reach described in the summary column is a reach effect that has a high percentage of selection when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and an extremely low percentage of selection when the result of the special lottery is a loss. is. In other words, the expectation of a big hit is high for variations in which Movie Reach is executed. Also, a predetermined movie is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the movie reach occurs.

In addition, the "+1 pattern" when the winning type is "lost", which is described in the summary column, means that after the decorative pattern stops in the reach state, the decorative pattern that is fluctuating until the end is in the reach state. Indicates to stop past one decorative symbol. Specifically, for example, after reaching the ready-to-win state with the decorative pattern "7", the decorative pattern that has been fluctuating until the end stops at "8". "+1 pattern" when the win/lose type is "jackpot" means that after the decorative pattern stops in the ready-to-win state, the decorative pattern that is fluctuating to the end passes one decorative pattern in the ready-to-reach state and temporarily stops. After making it look like this, the decorative pattern stops as the same pattern as the decorative pattern in the ready-to-win state. Specifically, for example, after reaching the ready-to-win state at the decorative pattern "7", the decorative pattern that has fluctuated until the end is made to appear to stop temporarily at "8", and then the decorative pattern stops at "7". and announce the jackpot.

In addition, in the overview column in the example of FIG. 161, "+1 pattern" is selected only when the hit type is "jackpot (non-variable)" among the big hits, but in the case of "jackpot (variable probability)" It may be selected only, or may be selected in the case of "jackpot (non-probability variation)" and "jackpot (probability variation)". In addition, "+1 symbol" may be selected only when the winning/losing type is "lost".

Also, "+pseudo 1" and "+pseudo 2" described in the summary column indicate that a double pseudo-continuous effect and a triplex pseudo-continuous effect are executed, respectively. Pseudo-continuous production is a production that performs the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the fluctuation of the decorative pattern multiple times during one fluctuation of the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device. . ``Finishing the variation of the decorative symbols'' means, for example, a manner in which part or all of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, a manner in which the player recognizes that the variation in the decorative symbols has ended, and In some cases, pseudo-run symbols (symbols in which a pseudo-run is confirmed when this symbol stops) are stopped. A pseudo-continuous production in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called an N-run pseudo-continuous production. The following natural number) is called the M-th pseudo-continuous effect. In addition, while suggesting to the player that there is a possibility that the action may be executed again during one fluctuation of the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device, the action is actually executed again. A production that does not perform is called a “pseudo fake production”. In addition, hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous effect is simply referred to as "pseudo-continuous effect".

Pseudo continuous effect occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the decorative pattern change is executed again during one time fluctuation of the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device. When it is decided to do so, the peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo-continuous design in at least one of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU causes a character such as "Continue!" It should be noted that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are odd-numbered or even-numbered and reach-free) may be pseudo-continuous symbols. It should be noted that the pseudo fake effect can be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is "normal variation" or the like. Also, for example, even if the variation pattern is to execute "+pseudo 1", a pseudo-gise effect suggesting the occurrence of the third pseudo-run in "+pseudo-2" may be executed.

[12-14-2. Final reserved color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored, for example, in the peripheral main control ROM. The final pending color table is, for example, the display color of the pending display at the end of the variation for each variation pattern (special lottery result winning/losing type, variation pattern identifier, and outline of the variation pattern production) (hereinafter referred to as the final pending color ) and the selectivity.

It should be noted that the effect display device 1600 includes a pending display area indicating the numbers of the pending first special random numbers and second special random numbers. In the start-up winning process of step S116 in FIG. The peripheral control MPU displays the number of reservations indicated by the number-of-holds specification command in the reservation display area.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (starting conditions are established), the number of reservations specified from the number of reservations designation command (the number of reservations stored) is increased. , to display one additional reserved display in the reserved display area. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special patterns) based on the reserved display (start condition is satisfied), the number of reservations (the number of reservations stored) specified by the number of reservations designation command is reduced. , delete the relevant pending display in the pending display area.

It should be noted that the hold display may have a plurality of display modes. For example, as the plurality of display modes, there is a display mode of holding display in a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, rainbow). Hereafter, it is assumed that the degree of expectation for a big hit in the special lottery result corresponding to the reserved display increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow as the colors of the reserved display. In particular, in the example of FIG. 161, the rainbow-colored pending display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big win.

That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selection rate indicated by the final reserved color table. Further, the peripheral control MPU responds to the pending display by, for example, changing the display mode of the pending display during the display period from when the pending display is displayed in the pending display area to when the pending display is erased. It is possible to execute a holding advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit with respect to the variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special patterns).

Further, in the present embodiment, during the display period of the pending display, a pending change effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the pending display may change can be executed. In addition, the suspension change effect and the suspension notice effect during the display period of the suspension display and before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension are also called a suspension look-ahead effect.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a hold notice table (not shown) that defines the change timing of the display mode of the hold display. Specifically, for example, the pending notice table defines, for each final pending color, the change timing of the display mode of the pending display and the display mode (display color) of the pending display at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start time, during the change, and the end time of the special symbol variation after the winning and before the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning are examples of the change timing.

In addition, it is desirable that the display mode of the pending display at each change timing is a reserved color having a jackpot expectation less than or equal to the jackpot expectation of the final reserved color. Also, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for a big win indicated by the pending display does not drop at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that the blue pending display does not change to the white pending display). It should be noted that there may be a different pending notice table for each pending memory number at the time of winning.

It should be noted that, for example, the start of the special symbol variation suspended before the suspension display is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the suspension display described above. Also, for example, during the special symbol variation corresponding to the suspension display , a change timing of the display mode of the pending display may be provided.

It should be noted that the look-ahead effect including the pending look-ahead effect is executed based on the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the pre-determination process performed in the starting entrance winning process of step S116 in FIG. be.

Hereinafter, the prior determination processing in the start opening winning processing for the first special symbol will be described. In addition, since the same applies to the preliminary determination process in the starting opening winning process for the second special symbol, only the first special symbol will be described here. In the pre-determination process, the main control MPU 1311 compares a pre-determination table (not shown) with a special random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variable random number to determine whether or not a big hit will occur. The type of the big hit, whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 when the big win is not achieved, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed are specified.

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win production as a game production executed by the production display device 1600 Aspect type of game production to be played), type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and reserved memory number (value of reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the production pre-determination process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number. .

Then, by transmitting a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the starting opening where the starting winning has occurred, a special symbol based on the starting winning has occurred. Whether or not the display result of the fluctuation display is a big win, the kind of big win when it becomes a big win, and whether or not a ready-to-win performance is executed as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600 when it does not become a big win. The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the preliminary determination information such as the mode type of the game effect before starting the variable display according to the start winning.

FIG. 162 shows the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of Setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retained color is determined by the final retained color table of FIG. is an example of a table showing FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of Setting 3 in a similar case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 in a similar case. According to FIGS. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the pending display of the higher jackpot expectation degree. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the expectation of a big hit for each color. It should be noted that these appearance rates and expectations are calculated based on the jackpot probability of each setting described above, and for the final reserved color table, the final reserved color table of FIG. 161 is used for all settings. It is assumed that there is

Note that the peripheral control ROM may hold a different final reserved color table for each setting. In this case, for example, the selection rate of the final reserved color table of the final reserved color is set such that the higher the setting, the higher the expectation of the big win in the same display mode of the reserved display. As a result, for example, when a big win is won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red pending display, the degree of expectation for the high setting is further increased, so that the player can get an exhilarating feeling.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the pending display other than white, which is most frequently selected, the final pending color of the final pending color table is changed so that the lower the setting, the higher the expectation of the big hit, for the same pending display display mode. A selection rate may be set (specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation when the pending display mode is red is 50% for setting 1, which is a low setting, and 30% for setting 6, which is a high setting. %). As a result, for example, even if a big hit is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red pending display, the degree of expectation for the high setting is high, so that the disappointment of the player is suppressed and the game is continued. can be promoted.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the pending display other than white, which is most frequently selected, for the display mode of the same pending display, the final pending color of the final pending color table so that the jackpot expectation is substantially common in all settings may be set. As a result, for example, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting from the combination of the final reserved color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate only on the expectation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the reserved display. Also, for example, when a big win is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the display mode of red, the possibility of low setting can be prevented from occurring.

[12-14-3. Notice production table]
FIG. 165 is an example of a notice effect table. The advance notice effect table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The advance notice effect table holds, for example, the selection rate of the advance notice effect for each variation pattern (specified by the winning/losing type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the outline of the effect of the variation pattern).

In the example of FIG. 165, the notice effects include dialogue effects, weather change effects, and rival horse effects. The dialogue effect is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and says a line in the variation. The weather change effect is, for example, a effect in which the weather in the background of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes during the change. The rival horse effect is a effect in which a rival horse of the horse raised by the main character appears on the effect display device 1600 in the variation.

It should be noted that it is possible to execute setting suggestive effects using advance notice effects, and the advance notice effect table stores the selection rate of each advance notice effect depending on whether or not the setting suggestive effects are executed. "No set" in the example of FIG. 165 indicates that the setting suggesting effect is not executed, and "with set" indicates that the setting suggesting effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines the announcement effect to be executed based on the variation pattern and the selection rate of the announcement effect table.

In each of the advance notice effects in each variation pattern of the notice effect table, it is desirable that the selection rate without the setting suggestion effect is sufficiently higher than the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect. If the selection rate of the presence of the setting suggestion effect is high, the setting suggestion effect occurs frequently. This is because, in this state, if the occurrence frequency of the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting is low, there is a high possibility that the player will stop playing the game in a short period of time. In other words, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, which is set at a low level, is significantly lowered, which may impose an excessive burden on the pachinko parlor. Conversely, for example, when the frequency of occurrence of setting suggestion performances suggesting high settings is high, the number of players who guess that other pachinko machines 1 in the hall are set low increases, and the other pachinko machines 1 operate. There is a risk that the rate will drop and impose an excessive burden on the hole.

In addition, the selection rate of the variation pattern in the variation pattern table is determined so that the expectation of the jackpot increases as the number of pseudo-runs increases. , the selection rate of execution/non-execution of the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table is determined. That is, for example, for the variation patterns whose outlines are "SP reach", "SP reach + pseudo 1", and "SP reach + pseudo 2", pseudo setting suggestion effects are set so that the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects is substantially the same. is determined. As a result, although the degree of expectation for a big hit is low for a variation pattern with a small number of pseudo-runs, the occurrence rate of the setting suggestion effect is not low compared to the variation pattern with a large number of pseudo-runs, so the player is encouraged to increase the number of pseudo-runs. We can also be interested in the fluctuations of small fluctuation patterns.

Further, the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggesting effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggesting effect increases as the number of pseudo repeats increases. The selection rate of execution/non-execution of the setting-suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting-suggestion effect is high. Note that if the appearance rate of setting-suggestion effects is increased as the number of pseudo-runs decreases, the above-described problem may occur. It is desirable to set the numbers to approximately the same values (specifically, for example, if the dialogue effect is set when variation pattern 5 is selected at the time of failure, it is 15/256, and if the dialogue effect is set when variation pattern 6 is selected, 16/256, etc.).

In addition, a variation pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (or a variation pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, but a performance with a relatively high degree of expectation for the produced performance (for example, a performance where the expectation for a big win is a predetermined value or more) ), the selection rate of execution/non-execution of the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases. Specifically, for example, in the order of "normal fluctuation", fluctuation including "normal reach", fluctuation including "SP reach", and fluctuation including "movie reach", so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases, A selection rate of execution/non-execution of the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 165, there is a possibility that the setting suggesting effect will occur in all of the advance notice effects (dialogue effect, weather change effect, and rival horse effect). may exist.

Also, if the outline of the variation pattern is the same, the special lottery result is a big hit without a probability change than the case where the special lottery result is a big hit with a probability change. A selection rate of execution/non-execution of the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined. As a result, the appearance rate of the setting suggesting performance is increased in the case of winning a jackpot with no probability variation, and the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the probability variation is not granted can be reduced. In the above example, the three types of advance notice effects, namely, the dialogue effect, the weather change effect, and the rival horse effect, have been described, but it goes without saying that the number of types is not limited to three.

[12-14-4. Dialogue production]
In the following, the details of the dialogue effect will be described among the advance notice effects. When the dialogue effect without setting suggestion effect is selected as the advance notice effect, the peripheral control MPU causes the character A to appear on the effect display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the change, for example. As the line of character A, "What day is it today?" is displayed. Then, the peripheral control MPU, for example, causes character B to appear on the effect display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after character A's dialogue is displayed, and character B's dialogue is "Come on...". indicate. It should be noted that, for example, the lines of character A and character B may suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit of the variation.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU selects the dialogue of the character B (the dialogue suggesting the setting) from a dialogue production table, which will be described later, when the dialogue effect with the setting suggestion effect is selected as the advance notice effect. For example, the peripheral control MPU displays the character on the effect display device 1600 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation (for example, two seconds later, that is, at the same timing as the character A appears when there is no setting suggestion effect). A appears, and "What day is it today?" is displayed as the dialogue of character A. The peripheral control MPU, for example, causes character B to appear on the effect display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after character A's dialogue is displayed, and displays the selected character B's dialogue. The dialogue of character A may be, for example, a dialogue that directly expresses a set value, such as "Do you know the settings for this table today?"

FIG. 166 is an example of a dialogue effect table. The dialogue effect table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The dialogue effect table holds the effect type of the dialogue effect and the selection rate of the content of the dialogue of the character B for each setting. Note that the production types include "patterns that are the same until the end" and "patterns that suddenly diverge", and for each of the two patterns, there are "Kamone" lines and "deterministic" lines. .

Each line belonging to the "partially same pattern" contains the same line halfway, and then branches to a different line. In the example of FIG. 166, all of the lines belonging to the "partially same pattern" start with "Come on..." and then branch into different lines. On the other hand, the lines belonging to the "suddenly branching pattern" branch into different lines from the beginning. It is desirable that the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "partially same pattern" is higher than the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "suddenly branching pattern". This is to create a sense of anticipation.

Lines belonging to the "Kamone system" are lines that suggest the current setting but do not definitely announce the setting. For example, "But I feel like it was an even-numbered day..." is a "Kamone-type" line suggesting an even-numbered setting. "But I feel like it was an even number day..." is a "maybe" type of line, so the selection rate is determined so that it may appear even in odd number settings. However, it is assumed that the selection rate of the line in the odd number setting is sufficiently lower than the selection rate of the line in the even number setting. Similarly, with regard to other "Kamone-type" lines, the selection rate of the line in the setting suggested by the line is sufficiently higher than the selection rate of the line in other settings.

On the other hand, the lines belonging to the "deterministic type" are lines that definitely announce the setting. For example, "Oh! I remember! It's an even number day!" Therefore, the selection rate of the line is 0 in the odd setting, and the selection rate exceeds 0 only in the even setting.

In addition, it is desirable that the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "Kamane type" is higher than the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "deterministic type". Assuming that the selection rate of lines belonging to the "deterministic type" is high, there is a good possibility that the player will be notified of the high setting deterministically in a short period of time after the start of the game. This is because there is a certain number of players who presume that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is not good, so there is a risk of lowering the operation of other game machines.

In addition, in the dialogue production when executing a specific reach production such as SP reach or movie reach, or in the dialogue production when performing a pseudo-continuation, the dialogue suggesting the setting of character B is written in red Dialogue in normal production may be displayed in white letters). This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the lines of the expected suggestive effect and the lines of the set suggested effect, so that the two types of effects (the set suggested effect and the expected suggested effect) coexist without making the player feel unnatural. can be made In addition, the expected suggestion production is a production that indicates that the degree of expectation for the big hit in the special symbol fluctuation is a predetermined value. Includes a look-ahead effect that suggests expectations for a big win across fluctuations in

It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU may also determine setting suggesting effects for the weather change effect and the rival horse effect using a lottery table similar to the dialogue effect table, although not shown. For example, in a setting suggestion effect in a weather change effect, a thundercloud is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a number such as "246?" In the setting suggesting effect in the horse effect, the combined horse effect of the horse being raised by the main character and the rival horse is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and for example, a number such as "135?" Production of `` Kamone system '' that suggests odd number setting).

In the above example, character A's line in the line production is "What day is it today?" Character B is ``66 points! A plurality of variations may be provided for the production (for example, dialogue production). In that case, it is preferable that the B effect (for example, asking for a test score) is more credible than the A effect (for example, asking for a date). Specifically, for example, when A production says, “I feel like it was a day with 6 (maybe)”, the expectation level, which is set to 6, remains at 30%, but B production says “ I feel like I scored 66 points... (maybe)", the expectation level, which is set at 6, should be set to 50%.

[12-14-5. Another example of the notice effect table]
FIG. 167 is another example of the notice effect table. In the example of FIG. 167, the notice effect table 173 holds the selection rate of the notice effect for each variation pattern. Unlike the example in FIG. 165, the advance notice effect table in FIG. 167 does not hold information on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In other words, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of notice effect according to the selection rate corresponding to the variation pattern of the notice effect table of FIG.

Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the variation pattern and the type of the selected advance notice effect. FIG. 168(A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the sorting of setting suggestion effect execution presence/absence when the outline of the variation pattern is "normal variation" and "dialogue effect" is selected as the notice effect. be. FIG. 168(B) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect when the outline of the variation pattern is "normal reach + 1 pattern" and "dialogue effect" is selected as the advance notice effect. is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of variation patterns and advance notice effects such as shown in FIG. 168 is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM.

In the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect after determining the content of the advance notice effect. You may By using such a method, although the amount of data is larger than that of the table shown in FIG. 165, it is possible to set the appearance rate and reliability of effects in detail. Also, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Concrete example of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of setting suggestion effect. 169A, 169B, and 169C are shown in the order of the dialogue production, and are suggested settings when "It's a day with 4, 5, or 6!" is selected as the dialogue of character B. This is an overview of the production.

In FIG. 169(A), the special symbol variation starts. In FIG. 169(B), after the start of the special symbol variation, character B's line "It's a day with 4, 5 or 6!" In FIG. 169(C), the lines are displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol variation.

169A, 169D, and 169E are outlines of setting suggestion effects when "It's a day with 6!" be. 169 (A), (D), (E) in the order of production, while setting suggestion production is started from the start of the special symbol variation, the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production is during the end of the special symbol variation has been changed. Specifically, in FIG. 169(D), after the start of the special symbol variation, character B's line "It's a day with 4, 5 or 6!" In FIG. 169(E), at the end of the special symbol variation, character B's line "It's a day with 6!" is displayed. In other words, the setting suggested by the dialogue of character B is elevated.

Specifically, for example, for each line in the line production table (line to be finally displayed), one or more scenarios indicating the timing of line change and the line at each timing, and the selection rate of each scenario are set. may be defined for each The peripheral control MPU displays the dialogue at the timing of the dialogue change according to the selected scenario.

In this case, it is desirable that the dialogue rendering table does not hold a scenario in which suggested settings may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the dialogue production table may not hold a scenario in which the dialogue "It's a day with 4, 5 or 6!" desirable.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggestion effect is performed in the special symbol variation, but other effects (for example, effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit, etc.) may be performed in parallel. Although the example in which the speech of character B is promoted at the end of the special symbol variation has been shown, this is not limiting and the promotion may be performed before the end of the special symbol variation. Character A appears before character B's dialogue, and an effect is performed in which character A speaks to character B, but this is omitted in the drawing.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an overview of the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect. In FIG. 170(A), the game ball B has won the first starting port 2002 during the special symbol variation in the state where the special symbol variation is not suspended. Subsequently, in FIG. 170(B), immediately after game ball B wins the first start hole 2002, character B's line "It's a day with 4, 5, or 6!" be. In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbols that have already changed is indeterminate, character B may be displayed immediately without displaying character A, or character B may be displayed after a predetermined time has passed since the prize was won. Alternatively, the character B may be displayed after the character A is displayed. Also, in FIG. 170(B), the number of reservations indicated by the display in the reservation display area is increased by one.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(C), all decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation ends. Also, the effect display device 1600 continues to display the character B's line "It's a day with 4, 5, or 6!" Subsequently, in FIG. 170(D), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning starts. At the same time when the special symbol variation starts, the dialogue of character B displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes to "It's a day with 5 or 6!". In other words, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B is promoted.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(E), all decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is terminated. At the end of the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning, the line of character B displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes to "It's a day with 6!". In other words, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B is promoted.

It should be noted that, for example, the peripheral control ROM holds a dialogue look-ahead effect table (not shown) that defines the dialogue of character B and the timing at which the dialogue changes. Specifically, for example, the dialogue look-ahead effect table defines the change timings of character B's dialogue and the dialogue of character B at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start time, during the change, and the end time of the special symbol variation after the winning and before the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning are examples of the change timing. It is desirable that the settings suggested by the dialogue are not downgraded at each change timing. It should be noted that there may be a different speech prefetch effect table for each number of pending memories at the time of winning. When the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the look-ahead effect based on the advance determination command, for example, at a predetermined rate, it executes the look-ahead effect with reference to the look-ahead effect table. In addition, in the case of promotion, promotion is performed one step at a time in FIG. !”) may be promoted in multiple stages at once. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the dialogue (E) may be displayed without displaying the dialogue (D).

Note that the setting suggestion effect may be executed under specific circumstances other than those described above. For example, when the condition of the pending series is satisfied, the setting suggesting effect may be executed. The reserved series means that the next big hit is realized by the special random numbers reserved until the end of the big win game. In this case, for example, after the suspension is performed and before the big win game ends, the setting suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when a specific variation pattern continues for a predetermined number of times, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the special symbol variation for the predetermined number of times.

[12-15. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects]
Restrictions on setting suggestion effects under specific conditions will be described below.

[12-15-1. Restriction of setting suggestion production after special state]
First, the limitation of the setting suggestion effect after the special state will be explained. Below, both the setting confirmation mode and the occurrence of an error are examples of special states. Note that the setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying setting values that is started when it is determined in the setting confirmation process that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes).

FIG. 171(A) is an example of an effect limit table for the setting confirmation mode. FIG. 171(B) is an example of an effect limit table when an error occurs. The effect limit table at the time of setting confirmation mode and the effect limit table at the time of error occurrence are stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM.

[12-15-1-1. Restriction of setting suggestion effect after setting confirmation mode]
First, the setting confirmation mode effect limit table will be described. The effect restriction table during setting confirmation mode is a table for the variation determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as setting suggestion variation in this chapter), when the setting confirmation mode starts during execution or pending. Stores a restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict setting suggestion rendering.

The setting confirmation mode effect limit table is set in the setting confirmation mode before the start of the setting suggestion effect (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) even though it is determined to perform the setting suggestion effect) A record 1701 that stores a limit flag when is started, and after the start of the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion change (that is, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is performed and the effect related to the setting suggestion is executed (displayed)) and a record 1702 that stores a restriction flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

When the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode. . Therefore, the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode stores a column 1703 for storing a restriction flag when the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode and a restriction flag when the game is progressing even during the setting confirmation mode. column 1704;

In addition, when the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended by winning a game ball in the starting hole during the setting confirmation mode. Accordingly, column 1704 includes column 1705 that stores limit flags in the new setting suggestion variation corresponding to winning the starting port during the setting confirmation mode. In addition, each restriction flag in the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode is, for example, an operation medium installed in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like (even an operation medium that the player cannot operate). It can be set by an operation medium that can be operated). It should be noted that, during the setting confirmation mode, when a game ball enters the starting hole, the acquisition of the lottery information and the winning ball may not be performed for the entered ball. However, even in such a case, the already reserved special symbol variation is executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting change mode is finished.

When the game stops at the start of the setting confirmation mode, the value of one of the fields 1706 and 1707 is 1 and the value of the other is 0, the values of the fields 1708 to 1711 are 0, and the fields 1712 and 1713 One value is 1 and the other is 0, and the values of fields 1714-1717 are 0.

In addition, when the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the values of the fields 1706 and 1707 are 0, the value of one of the fields 1708 and 1709 is 1 and the value of the other is 0, and the value of the field 1710 is 0. and field 1711 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, fields 1712 and 1713 have a value of 0, fields 1714 and 1715 have a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, and The value of one of fields 1716 or 1717 is 1 and the other is 0.

A peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect limit pattern according to a limit flag in each state defined in the effect limit table at the time of setting confirmation mode start and the effect limit table at the time of error occurrence. These restriction patterns are described below.

(1) Regarding the case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(1-1) After restarting the game, the setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1706 is 1 and the value of the field 1707 is 0). By executing the setting suggesting effect, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and the game results are not affected. can give.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1706 is 0 and the value of the field 1707 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when a sound or image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, by not executing the setting suggestion effect in this way, It is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the setting confirmation mode is started before the setting suggestion effect is started and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

(2-1) Execute setting suggestion rendering (the value of field 1708 is 1 and the value of field 1709 is 0). Since the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not slowed down. In addition, when the sound and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these sounds and images are output with priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggesting effect is displayed so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, in order to provide the player with a sense of expectation such as "When was the setting suggesting effect displayed?" The effect display device 1600 may display an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress so as to be hidden.

(2-2) Do not execute setting suggestion rendering (the value of field 1708 is 0 and the value of field 1709 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different If a suggestive effect occurs), the player may have a sense of distrust toward the gaming machine, and by not executing the setting suggestive effect, such a situation can be avoided.

(2′) New setting suggestion variation corresponding to winning in the starting hole during the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode. About the setting suggestion production.

(2'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1710 is 1 and the value of field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggesting performance, the player can be notified that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode, and can give a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1710 is 0 and the value of field 1711 is 1). For example, if Hall is in doubt about a setpoint and has moved to setpoint confirmation mode, he may change the setpoint later. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, while the even number setting is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect, the setting is changed to a different setting There is a possibility that an odd number setting will be confirmed in the setting suggestion effect later), so trouble may occur between the hole and the player. The occurrence of such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

It is desirable that the image, sound, light, etc., indicating the setting confirmation state described above should appear regardless of the field values described above. Also, when the game is stopped after shifting to the setting confirmation state, it is assumed that a new winning prize may be validated.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the setting suggestion effect is finished displaying). And about the case where the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(3-1) After restarting the game, the setting suggestion effect is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 1 and the value of the field 1713 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has already started is canceled, the player may have a sense of distrust that the setting has been changed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation.

(3-2) Do not restart the setting suggestion effect after restarting the game (the value of the field 1712 is 0 and the value of the field 1713 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when a sound or image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, by not executing the setting suggestion effect in this way, It is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the setting suggestion effect is finished displaying). And regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

(4-1) Continue setting suggestion rendering (the value of field 1714 is 1 and the value of field 1715 is 0). Since the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not slowed down. In addition, when the sound and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these sounds and images are output with priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed ( Display so that the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the image indicating the setting confirmation mode do not overlap, or the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the characters indicating the setting confirmation mode such as "in setting confirmation mode" do not overlap) . It should be noted that this display and the like can be processed in the same way even when an error occurs, which will be described later. It should be noted that the term "non-overlapping" as used herein indicates that the appearance from the player's point of view does not overlap, not the image data actually set in the RAM.

In addition, in order to provide the player with a sense of expectation such as "When was the setting suggesting effect displayed?" The effect display device 1600 may display an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress so as to be hidden.

(4-2) Stop the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1714 is 0 and the value of field 1715 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different If a suggestive effect occurs), the player may have a sense of distrust toward the gaming machine, and by not executing the setting suggestive effect, such a situation can be avoided.

(4') A new game corresponding to winning at the starting port during the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode is started after the setting suggestion change is started and the setting confirmation mode is started, and the game is progressing even during the setting confirmation mode. About setting suggestion production of setting suggestion change.

(4'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1716 is 1 and the value of field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggesting performance, the player can be notified that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode, and can give a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1716 is 0 and the value of field 1717 is 1). For example, if Hall is in doubt about a setpoint and has moved to setpoint confirmation mode, he may change the setpoint later. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, while the even number setting is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect, the setting is changed to a different setting In the subsequent setting suggestion effect, a display confirming the odd number setting is displayed), so trouble may occur between the hole and the player. The occurrence of such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, if the setting confirmation mode straddles a plurality of fluctuations, for example, the peripheral control MPU, for example, based on the notification from the main control MPU 1311, after starting the setting confirmation mode When the first pattern is determined or when the next variation starts, it is determined whether or not it is in the setting confirmation mode. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode is the setting confirmation mode, if the newly won hold is the setting suggestion variation, the setting suggestion effect is performed along with the variation corresponding to the hold. By executing the setting suggesting effect, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and the game results are not affected. can give.

Also, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. When the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as "Maybe high setting?" If the effect occurs), the player may have a sense of distrust toward the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggesting effect.

In this way, both when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed, the effect is exhibited in both cases. It is possible to provide amusement machines that meet the needs of each business style.

[12-15-1-2. Restriction of setting suggestion effect when error occurs]
Next, with reference to FIG. 171(B), the effect restriction table at the time of error occurrence will be described. The effect limit table at the time of error occurrence is a setting suggestion effect of the variation when an error occurs during the execution or suspension of the variation determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as setting suggestion change in this chapter) stores a restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict

The effect limit table at the time of error occurrence includes a record 1801 that stores a limit flag when an error occurs before the setting suggestion effect is started, and an error occurs during the change of the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started in the setting suggestion change. and a record 1802 that stores a restriction flag in the case where

Errors include a strong error that is reported after the game is stopped and a weak error that is reported while the game is in progress. An error that detects illegal magnetism in the launch ball sensor 1020 and the game area 5a is an example of a strong error. A full tank error (an error indicating that the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 are full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

Therefore, a column 1803 for storing a limit flag corresponding to an error notified when the game is stopped, and a column 1804 for storing a limit flag corresponding to an error notified while the game is in progress. ,including.

In addition, if the game progresses even during the occurrence of an error, there is a possibility that new setting suggestion fluctuations will be put on hold by winning a game ball in the starting hole during the occurrence of the error. Therefore, column 1804 includes a column 1805 that stores restriction flags in the new suggested setting variation corresponding to winning the starting port during error occurrence.

In addition, the restriction flag in the effect restriction table at the time of error occurrence can be set, for example, at the time of manufacture of the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall, etc., by operating the operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (even an operation medium which the player cannot operate can be operated by the player). It can be set by an operation medium).

In the effect restriction table when an error occurs, the value of one of the fields 1806 and 1807 is 1 and the value of the other is 0, the value of one of the fields 1808 and 1809 is 1 and the value of the other is 0, One of fields 1810 and 1811 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, one of fields 1812 and 1813 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, and one of fields 1814 and 1815 has a value of The value of one and the other is zero, and the value of one of fields 1816 and 1817 is one and the value of the other is zero.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of setting suggestion rendering according to the restriction flag of each case defined in the rendering restriction table at the time of error occurrence. These restriction patterns are described below.

(1) Regarding the case where an error starts before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(1-1) After restarting the game, a setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1806 is 1 and the value of the field 1807 is 0). By executing the setting suggesting effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has not been changed when the error is canceled by the hall clerk, and to give the player a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. can.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1806 is 0 and the value of the field 1807 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, the setting-suggestion effect may not be executed, which is disadvantageous to the player. can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when an error occurs before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game progresses even after the error occurrence (weak error).

(2-1) Execute setting suggestion rendering (the value of field 1808 is 1 and the value of field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not interrupted. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, when the sound and image indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these sounds and images are output with priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. . At this time, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, in order to provide the player with a sense of expectation such as ``when was the setting suggesting effect displayed?'' An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(2-2) Do not execute setting suggestion rendering (the value of field 1808 is 0 and the value of field 1809 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, the setting-suggestion effect may not be executed, which is disadvantageous to the player. can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(2′) In the case where an error occurs before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game progresses even during the occurrence of the error (weak error), a new setting suggestion corresponding to the winning of the starting hole during the error occurrence. About setting suggestion production of variation.

(2'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1810 is 1 and the value of field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not interrupted. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1810 is 0 and the value of field 1811 is 1). As a result, the setting-suggestion effect is not executed for the winning during the error occurrence, so that the player stops launching the game ball and cancels the error at an early stage.

(3) Regarding the case where an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started, and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(3-1) After restarting the game, the setting suggestion effect is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 1 and the value of the field 1813 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has already started is canceled, the player may have a sense of distrust that the setting has been changed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation.

(3-2) Do not restart the setting suggestion effect after restarting the game (the value of the field 1812 is 0 and the value of the field 1813 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, the setting-suggestion effect is canceled, which is disadvantageous to the player. can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started, and the game progresses even during the occurrence of the error (weak error).

(4-1) Continue setting suggestion rendering (the value of field 1814 is 1 and the value of field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not interrupted. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, when the sound and image indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these sounds and images are output with priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. . At this time, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, in order to provide the player with a sense of expectation such as "When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?" and "Was the setting suggestion effect suggesting high setting displayed?" Then, an image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

(4-2) Stop the setting suggestion effect (the value of the field 1814 is 0 and the value of the field 1815 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, the setting-suggestion effect is canceled, which is disadvantageous to the player. It can progress smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4') In the case where an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started, and the game progresses even during the occurrence of the error (weak error), a new prize corresponding to the winning at the starting port during the error occurrence About setting suggestion production of setting suggestion change.

(4'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1816 is 1 and the value of field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not interrupted. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1816 is 0 and the value of field 1817 is 1). As a result, the setting-suggestion effect is not executed for the winning during the error occurrence, so that the player stops launching the game ball and cancels the error at an early stage.

In this way, both when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed, the effect is exhibited in both cases. It is possible to provide amusement machines that meet the needs of each business style.

[12-15-2. Restrictions on production in new start winning prizes]
Hereinafter, the limitation of the effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize during the special symbol variation and in the state where the new variation can be reserved will be described. FIG. 172 is an example of a new start prize effect limit table. The new start prize effect limit table is stored in, for example, the peripheral control ROM.

The new start prize effect limit table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The conditions in the condition column are defined by the assumptions about the performance of the previous variation and the restrictions on the performances in the new starting winnings under the assumptions. It should be noted that the previous change in this chapter is the change immediately before the change corresponding to the new start winning. As a condition for the performance of the previous variation, there are a case where only an expectation suggesting performance is performed as to whether or not the special lottery result corresponding to the variation is a big hit, and a case where both the expectation suggesting performance and the set suggesting performance are performed.

In addition, as a production restriction for the pre-reading production in the new start prize, only the setting suggestion production in the pre-reading production is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion production is not executed), and both the setting suggestion production and the expected suggestion production in the pre-reading production are restricted (that is, the setting neither the suggestive effect nor the expected suggestive effect are executed), and neither the set suggestive effect nor the expected suggestive effect in the look-ahead effect are restricted (that is, the set suggestive effect and the look-ahead effect are executed).

The reference process table column stores the identifier of the process table to be referred to when executing the look-ahead effect restriction in the new start winning, which is included in the corresponding condition. The flag column stores flags indicating which conditions are to be executed and which processing table is used to determine the processing for the look-ahead effect in the new start winning.

1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to one of the processing tables 1-3, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 1-3. Also, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to one of the processing tables 4-6, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 4-6. The flags in the new startup prize effect restriction table are, for example, the operation media installed in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall, etc. It does not matter).

When the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a new start winning during the special symbol variation and in a state where the new variation can be suspended, and that only the expected suggestive performance is executed in the previous variation, the new start winning performance restriction table The condition indicated by the condition column corresponding to the flag column storing 1 as the value is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag column, and determines the content of the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU, when there is a new start winning during the special symbol variation and in a state where the new variation can be suspended, and when the expected suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect are executed in the previous change, the new start win By referring to the processing table corresponding to the flag column in which the value of the "previous variation effect" column of the effect restriction table corresponds to "expectation suggestion + setting suggestion" and which stores 1 as a value, a new Determine the contents of the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the start winning prize.

Each condition indicated by the condition column will be described below. The first condition (the condition for selecting the processing table 1) is that when only the expected suggestive effect is executed in the previous change, only the setting suggestive effect is restricted as the prefetch effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. It is to be done. In the first condition, the expectation-suggesting effect is performed in the previous variation, so the player has a heightened sense of exhilaration due to the expectation of the big win. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is executed as a variable prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning, the player's consciousness is also directed to the setting suggestion effect, so that the previous variation effect There is a risk that the feeling of exaltation will decrease. In addition, the player may confuse the setting suggesting effect with the expected suggesting effect, which may make the player feel uneasy. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the first condition.

In addition, in the first condition, the expected suggestive effect is performed in the previous variation, but in this state, if the set suggested effect is performed as the prefetch effect of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the player , even if it is assumed that the previous fluctuation will be off, since the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize can still be expected, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of security.

For example, when an effect is selected from the advance notice effect table of FIG. 165, the peripheral control MPU decides the effect from the table, and then determines whether the flag in the condition column indicating that the setting suggestion effect is restricted is 1 or not. (whether or not to restrict), and if it is 1 (restrict), even if set is selected, the setting suggestion effect is restricted by performing processing to rewrite and display without set. do. That is, the peripheral control MPU can limit the setting suggestion effect using the advance notice effect table shown in FIG. 165 by executing the determination process after determining the effect. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold an effect table for each restriction type of effect, the amount of data can be reduced. Similarly, in the expected suggestive effect described later, even if a color other than white is selected for the look-ahead pending display using the final pending color table in FIG. Rewrites the selected hold display to white and displays it.

The second condition (the condition for selecting the processing table 2) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion are set as the prefetch effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. It is to limit both sides of the production. In the second condition, the expectation-suggesting effect is performed in the previous variation, so that the player has a heightened sense of exhilaration due to the expectation of the big win. In such a state, when the setting suggesting effect and the attitude suggesting effect are executed as the variable anticipatory effect corresponding to the new start winning, the player's attention is directed to these effects as well. There is a possibility that the exhilaration in the presentation of the previous variation may be reduced. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the second condition.

The third condition (the condition for selecting the processing table 3) is that when only the expected suggestive effect is executed in the previous change, the setting suggested effect and the expected suggested effect are set as the prefetch effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Do not limit any of the renditions. In the third condition, since the expectation-suggesting effect is performed in the previous variation, the player has an increased sense of exhilaration due to the expectation of the big win. In such a state, the setting suggestion effect is executed as a variable look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning, so that in addition to the uplifting feeling for the big hit, the feeling of exhilaration for the setting suggesting effect (especially, the high setting fixed suggesting effect Or when a high setting confirmation effect etc. is executed) can be given to the player.

The fourth condition (the condition for selecting the processing table 4) is that when the expected suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect are executed in the previous change, the set suggestive effect is set as the prefetch effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The only limitation is In the fourth condition, since the expected suggestive effect and the setting suggestive effect are performed in the previous fluctuation, the player has an exhilarating feeling that he may win a big hit in the previous fluctuation (especially high setting suggestive effect or high setting fixed effect is executed), and feel a sense of exhilaration due to setting suggestions. In such a state, if the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, there is a possibility that the excitement of the expectation for the big win in the suspension of the previous variation may be lowered. .

Specifically, for example, when setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, in the previous change The setting suggesting effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (although originally the setting is 5 or higher, it also suggests the possibility of setting 4). In such a case, the player presumes that not only the setting suggestion effect in the previous fluctuation but also the expected suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (specifically, for example, the display mode is red There is a possibility that the degree of expectation for a big hit is not high for the reservation that is ), and there is a possibility that the feeling of exhilaration for the expected suggestive performance will decrease. By executing the fourth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

The fifth condition (the condition for selecting the processing table 5) is that when the expected suggestion effect and the set suggestion effect are executed in the previous variation, the set suggestion effect is set as the prefetch effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. and the expected suggestive performance. In the fifth condition, since the expected suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect are performed in the previous change, when the setting suggesting effect is performed in the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning, the setting suggesting effect is performed multiple times in a short period of time. There is a risk that the player will guess the setting value with high accuracy (for example, if the odd number setting suggesting effect and the high setting suggesting effect are performed, there is a high possibility that the setting is 5). In such a state, if the player determines that the setting is low, there is a risk of stopping the game with the pachinko machine 1, and if it is determined that the setting is high, other pachinko machines in the hall may There is a possibility that the operation of the machine 1 will decrease. By executing the fifth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

In particular, if the expected suggestive effect and setting suggestive effect are performed in the previous change, and the expected suggestive effect and setting suggestive effect are performed as the prefetch effect even in the change corresponding to the new start winning, many effects occur in a short period of time. This may confuse the player. By executing the fifth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

The sixth condition (the condition for selecting the processing table 6) is that when the expected suggestion effect and the set suggestion effect are executed in the previous variation, the set suggestion effect is set as the prefetch effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. and expected suggestive renditions. In the sixth condition, since the expected suggestive effect and the setting suggestive effect are performed in the previous variation, the player assumes the degree of expectation of the expected suggestive effect in the settings suggested by the set suggestive effect. In this state, the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are performed in the variation corresponding to the new start winning, and there is a possibility that the degree of expectation is raised by these two expected suggestion effects.

Specifically, for example, when a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting of 4 or more is executed in the previous variation, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting of 5 or more is executed as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning, the player Expectations are assumed at a setting of 4 or higher for the expected suggestive performance in the previous fluctuation. However, after that, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start prize suggests a setting of 5 or more, so that the expectation level of the expected suggestion effect comes to assume an expectation level of 5 or more, and the player The feeling of exhilaration increases.

In this way, since the effect is exhibited for each of the prefetching effect restriction contents corresponding to the new start winning, the hall etc. can set such prefetching effect restriction contents, so that the needs of the sales style of the hall etc. It is possible to provide a game machine that meets the needs.

Each processing table and the look-ahead effect executed with reference to each processing table will be described below. Each processing table is stored, for example, in a peripheral control ROM.

173 is an example of the processing table 1. FIG. First, contents common to each processing table will be described. Each processing table stores the type of winning in the special lottery result of the previous change, the processing content related to the new start winning corresponding to the type of winning, and the processing number as the identifier of the processing content.

It should be noted that the processing content held by each processing table defines the processing content for the look-ahead effect that is not subject to restriction. Specifically, for example, the processing contents of the processing table 1, which is a table to be referred to when restricting only the setting suggestive effect as a variable look-ahead effect restriction corresponding to a new start winning, includes the expected suggestive effect. Processing content is defined. Similarly, the processing contents of the processing table 3, which is a table referred to when restricting both the expected suggestive effect and the set suggested effect, as the variable prefetch effect restriction corresponding to the new start winning, include the expected suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect. The processing content for the setting suggestion effect is defined.

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the pre-reading effect to be restricted in the new start winning effect and the processing table to be referred to based on the flag of the new start winning effect restriction table, and based on the processing table, determines that the effect is not restricted. Determines the processing for the look-ahead effect.

Note that the processing table 3 and the processing table 6, which will be described later, store flags for selecting the processing content related to the new starting prize from a plurality of processing content. It should be noted that the flags in the processing table may be operation media provided in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like (either an operation medium that the player cannot operate or an operation medium that the player can operate). ) can be set.

Hereinafter, the processing contents related to the new start prize defined by the processing table 1 will be described. A processing table 1 is a table referred to when only the expected suggesting performance is executed in the previous variation and only the set suggesting performance is restricted as the pre-reading performance restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Hereinafter, an example in which pending prefetching is performed as a prefetching effect for suggesting expectations will be described.

The process of process number 1 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with short working hours. In the process of process number 1, the peripheral control MPU, if the state of the pending display of the new start winning is a specific state with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a pending display state of blue, green, red, etc.), for example , At the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous variation, the mode of pending display of the new start winning prize is returned to the default (display mode of white in the final pending color table in FIG. 161). However, when the suspension is not displayed in the suspension display area at the start of the opening screen of the big win, the suspension display of the specific mode is erased like the other suspension displays. In addition, the peripheral control MPU does not return the state of the pending display of the new start winning prize to the specific display state (that is, leaves the default display as it is) at the time of time saving shift after the end of the big win. In addition, even if the suspension of the new winning prize has not been completed at the end of the time saving, the peripheral control MPU does not return the suspension display mode of the new start winning prize to the specific display mode (i.e. leave the default view).

The process of process number 2 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot without time saving. In the process of process number 2, when the state of the pending display of the new start winning prize is a specific state in which the expectation of the big win is high, for example, at the start of the opening screen of the big win won in the previous variation, the peripheral control MPU: Restore default display mode for new start wins. However, when the suspension is not displayed in the suspension display area at the start of the opening screen of the big win, the suspension display of the specific mode is erased like the other suspension displays. In addition, even at the time of transition to the normal state controlled after the end of the big win game, the state of the pending display of the new starting prize is not returned to the specific display state (that is, the default display is left as it is).

The process of process number 3 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. In the process of process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the pending display of the new start winning (that is, continues the pending display, specifically, for example, if the pending display mode is blue, continue to display the pending display mode). Further, the peripheral control MPU may return the state of the pending display of the new start winning prize to the default at the start of the opening screen of the small win won in the previous variation. However, when the suspension is not displayed in the suspension display area at the start of the opening screen of the small prize, the suspension display of the specific mode is erased like the other suspension displays.

The process of process number 4 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is lost. In the processing of process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the pending display of the new start winning (that is, continues the pending display, specifically, for example, if the pending display mode is blue, continue to display the pending display mode).

174 is an example of the processing table 2. FIG. The processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggesting effect is executed in the previous variation and both the set suggesting effect and the expected suggesting effect are restricted as the pre-reading effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. be. Since the processing table 2 is a table to be referred to when restricting both the setting suggesting effect and the expected suggesting effect as the fluctuation predictive effect restriction corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the big hit type of the previous change, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

175 is an example of the processing table 3. FIG. The processing table 3 is a table referred to when only the expected suggestive effect is executed in the previous variation and neither the set suggestive effect nor the expected suggestive effect is limited as the prefetch effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. be.

The processing of processing numbers 5 and 6 is processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with short working hours. One of the processes of process numbers 5 and 6 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 5 and 6, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, specifically, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game won in the previous variation, or during the time reduction accompanying the big win won in the previous variation It is in the process of digesting the second special symbol pending. By the processing of processing number 5, when the player recognizes that the setting suggesting effect has started before the start of the previous variation, etc., the player can be reminded that the setting suggesting effect will be performed. can.

In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. In addition, since the big hit with time saving has been won in the previous fluctuation, there is a high possibility that the change corresponding to the new winning will start after the end of the time saving (during the time saving, the game ball will (Because when the winning is high frequency and there is a hold of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, the second special symbol variation is executed with priority over the first special symbol variation). Therefore, by the processing of processing number 6, the setting suggesting effect is executed after the end of the time saving, so that the disappointment of the player due to the end of the time saving can be reduced.

The processing of processing numbers 7 and 8 is processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot without time saving. One of the processes of process numbers 7-8 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 7 and 8, the process of the expected suggestive effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game winning in the previous variation, and the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he did not win in a short period of time even though he won the jackpot, if the processing of processing number 7 starts at the latest during the jackpot game, the disappointment is felt. A big hit game can be enjoyed in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 8, the setting suggesting effect is started immediately after the big win is finished, so that the player's disappointment due to the fact that the reduction of working hours was not provided can be alleviated.

The processing of processing numbers 9 to 10 is processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 9 to 10 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 9 to 10, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small win won in the previous variation, or during the small win. In the small win, only a small privilege is given to the player, so the player may be disappointed, but the process of process number 9 causes the player to be disappointed by starting the setting suggestion effect at an early timing. can be reduced.

In the process of process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion times related to small wins is shorter than the series of digestion times related to big wins, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous fluctuation, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the player may feel distrust. The process of process number 10 can prevent the player from feeling such distrust.

The processes of process numbers 11 to 13 are processes related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is lost. One of the processes with process numbers 11 to 13 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 11 to 13, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning.

In the process of process number 12, the peripheral control MPU, only when the form of the pending display in the pending look-ahead effect of the previous variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of a big hit, the new start During the variation corresponding to the winning, the setting suggesting effect is executed as the look-ahead effect in the new starting winning. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a line suggesting the setting by Character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (eg, 2 seconds) or advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (eg, 2 seconds). By the processing of the processing number 12, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player who feels disappointment at the fact that the state of the hold display with high expectation for the big hit has appeared in the previous variation but the game has not come off. can. In addition, in FIG. 175 and FIG. 178 to be described later, the old suspension is suspension corresponding to the previous variation, and the new suspension is suspension corresponding to the new start winning.

In the process of process number 13, if the mode of the pending display is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of a big win, the peripheral control MPU suggests setting as a look-ahead effect for the new start winning. Do not perform the performance. Due to the processing of process number 13, even though the state of the pending display with high expectation for the big hit appears in the previous variation, it is lost, and furthermore, even in the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect does not appear. , it is possible to suppress the player's addiction to the game.

176 is an example of the processing table 4. FIG. The processing table 4 is a table referred to when the expected suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect are executed in the previous variation and only the setting suggesting effect is limited as the prefetch effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. .

The process of process number 14 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with time saving. In the process of process number 14, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

The process of process number 15 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot without time saving. In the process of process number 15, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

The process of process number 16 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. In the process of process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

The process of process number 17 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is lost. In the process of process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

In addition, since the processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when limiting only the setting suggestion effect as the variable prefetch effect restriction corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the big hit type of the previous change, the new start It is defined that special processing is not executed for setting suggestion effects in variations corresponding to winning.

177 is an example of the processing table 5. FIG. The processing table 5 is referred to when both the expected suggesting effect and the set suggesting effect are executed in the previous variation, and both the set suggesting effect and the expected suggesting effect are restricted as the pre-reading effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. It is a table where Since the processing table 5 is a table that is referred to when limiting both the set suggesting effect and the expected suggesting effect as the variable prefetch effect restriction corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the type of the previous variation jackpot, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

178 is an example of the processing table 6. FIG. The processing table 6 is referred to when the expected suggesting effect and the set suggesting effect are executed in the previous variation and neither the set suggesting effect nor the expected suggesting effect are restricted as the prefetch effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. table.

The processing of processing numbers 18 to 21 is processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with short working hours. One of the processes of process numbers 18-21 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 18 to 21, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

In the process of process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, specifically, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game won in the previous variation, or during the time reduction accompanying the big win won in the previous variation It is in the process of digesting the second special symbol pending. By the processing of processing number 18, when the player recognizes that the setting suggesting effect has started before the start of the previous variation, etc., it is possible for the player not to forget that the setting suggesting effect will be performed. can.

In the processing of process number 19, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. If it is better (specifically, for example, it is notified that the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the setting as a look-ahead effect Only when it is notified that the setting of 5 or more is fixed in the suggestion performance, the setting suggestion performance as the look-ahead performance is executed before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, specifically, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game won in the previous variation, or during the time reduction accompanying the big win won in the previous variation It is in the process of digesting the second special symbol pending.

By the processing of the processing number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestive performance at the latest during the time-saving jackpot, so that the player can get double exhilaration by the time-saving jackpot and the high setting suggestion. Also, for example, it is notified that a setting of 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and a setting of 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. is notified, the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is a useless effect that does not provide new information to the player, and the process By the processing of number 19, such a useless effect can be omitted. Conversely, for example, when it is notified that setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation, setting 5 in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning Since there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing the game even if the above is not notified, the setting suggesting effect is highly likely to be a useless effect. You can omit the performance.

In the process of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of processing number 20, the setting suggestion effect is often started immediately after the end of time saving, so that the player's disappointment at the end of the time saving state can be reduced.

In the processing of process number 21, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. Only when is better, the setting suggestion performance is executed during the variation corresponding to the new start winning. The process of process number 21 can omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the process of process number 19, or reduce the player's disappointment with the end of the time saving state.

The processing of processing numbers 22 to 25 is processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot without time saving. One of the processes with process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 22 to 25, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game winning in the previous variation, and the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he did not win in a short period of time even though he won the jackpot, he feels disappointed when the setting suggesting performance starts during the jackpot game at the latest by the processing of processing number 22.例文帳に追加A big hit game can be enjoyed in a reduced state.

In the processing of process number 23, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game winning in the previous variation, and the like. By the processing of the processing number 23, when the setting suggestion performance is started during the big win game at the latest, the big win game can be enjoyed with the disappointment reduced.

In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of processing number 24, the setting suggestion performance is started immediately after the end of the big win, so that the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the game did not start in a short time can be reduced.

In the processing of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. Only when is better, the setting suggestion performance is executed during the variation corresponding to the new start winning. The process of process number 21 can omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the process of process number 19, and reduce the disappointment of the player for not rushing into the time saving. Also, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, If the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the player who is disappointed that the game does not start in a short time will be shown a further useless setting suggestion effect. There is a risk of stroking the person in the opposite direction.

Processing of processing numbers 26 to 29 is processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 26-29 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 26 to 29, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small win won in the previous variation, or during the small win. In the small win, only a small privilege is given to the player, so the player may be disappointed, but by the processing of the processing number 26, the setting suggesting effect is started at an early timing and the player is disappointed. can be reduced.

In the processing of process number 27, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small win won in the previous variation, or during the small win. The processing of processing number 27 can omit useless setting suggestion performance as explained in the processing of processing number 19, and can reduce the player's disappointment due to only a small merit given in the small win.

In the process of process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion times related to small wins is shorter than the series of digestion times related to big wins, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous fluctuation, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the player may feel distrust. By the processing of processing number 28, it is possible to prevent such distrust from being given to the player.

In the process of process number 29, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. Only when is better, the setting suggestion performance is executed during the variation corresponding to the new start winning. The processing of processing number 29 can omit useless setting suggestion performance as explained in the processing of processing number 19, and can reduce the disappointment of the player that only a small merit is given in the small win. Also, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, If the setting suggesting effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, the player who is discouraged that only a small merit is given in the small win is given a further useless setting suggesting effect. This may cause the player to be stroked in the wrong direction.

The processes of process numbers 30 to 34 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is lost. One of the processes with process numbers 30 to 34 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 30 to 34, the process of the expected suggestive effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. The processing of processing number 30 can reduce the disappointment of the player due to the deviation of the previous variation.

In the process of process number 31, the peripheral control MPU, only when the form of the pending display in the pending look-ahead effect of the previous fluctuation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of a big hit, the new start During the variation corresponding to the winning, the setting suggesting effect is executed as the look-ahead effect in the new starting winning. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a line suggesting the setting by Character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (eg, 2 seconds) or advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (eg, 2 seconds). By the processing of processing number 31, it is possible to reduce such disappointment for the player who feels disappointment at the fact that the state of the hold display with a high degree of expectation for a big hit has appeared in the previous variation but the game has not come off. can.

In the process of process number 32, the peripheral control MPU sets the pre-variation when the mode of the pending display in the pre-variation pending look-ahead effect is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high degree of expectation for a big win. Only when the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion effect, the new start prize During the fluctuation corresponding to , a setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning. By the processing of processing number 32, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player that the previous variation, which was in the mode of holding display with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, being a failure, can be reduced by the setting suggesting effect.

In the processing of process number 33, the peripheral control MPU only when the state of the pending display in the pending look-ahead effect of the previous variation is not a specific state (for example, green or red) with a high degree of expectation for a big win, the new start winning During the fluctuation corresponding to , a setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 33, the disappointment of the player who has continued to be disappointed because the degree of expectation for the big win cannot be obtained in the pending look-ahead performance of the previous variation can be alleviated by the setting suggestion performance.

In the processing of process number 34, the peripheral control MPU determines the settings suggested in the setting suggestion presentation of the previous variation when the mode of the pending display is not a specific mode (e.g., green or red) with a high expectation of a big win. Therefore, only if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is better, during the change corresponding to the new start winning, A setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning. By the processing of processing number 34, the state of pending display of the previous variation suggests a low setting in the setting suggestion effect in the variation corresponding to the low expectation and the new start winning, which amplifies the player's frustration. can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, in the above-described processing, even under circumstances where setting suggestion effects are not limited as changes in anticipation effects corresponding to new start winnings, in the following cases, the peripheral control MPU will not limit the setting suggestions. You don't have to perform the performance. For example, when the new start winning is performed during the big win, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion effect. This is because there is a high possibility that the player will continue the game immediately after the jackpot game without giving an incentive by the setting suggestion effect.

As in the examples of the processing table 3 and the processing table 6, each processing related to the new starting prize determined by each processing number is effective, so that the processing related to the new starting winning can be set by the hall or the like. This enables us to provide gaming machines that meet the needs of halls and other business styles.

Also, for example, the new start winning prize is just before the end of the ST state (a probability variable state that continues until the jackpot is won or a predetermined number of special symbol variations are executed) (specifically, for example, a special until the end of the ST state The number of remaining variations in the design is the maximum number of reserved special symbols 4 or less, or the number of remaining variations in the special design until the end of the ST state is displayed on the effect display device 1600). In this case, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not the player wins the jackpot in the relevant ST. In such a state, when the setting suggesting effect is started as a look-ahead effect related to the new start winning, the player immediately misunderstands the setting suggesting effect as a performance with a high expectation of a big hit, and a situation occurs in which the player is overjoyed. There is a risk of Occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by the above-described processing.

Also, for example, after the ST state ends and shifts to the normal state, a predetermined number of special symbol variations (specifically, for example, 4 special symbol variations, which is the maximum number of special symbols reserved, or from the ST state Immediately after the transition to the normal state, the second starting port 2004 may be open, and in consideration of that, the new new When the starting prize is won, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately after the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not he or she will soon win the jackpot. In particular, immediately after the end of the ST state, there is a high possibility that the variation corresponding to the holding of the second special symbol, which is likely to win the jackpot of a type with great merit for the player, will be executed. In such a state, when the setting suggesting effect is started as a look-ahead effect related to the new start winning, the player immediately misunderstands the setting suggesting effect as a performance with a high expectation of a big hit, and a situation occurs in which the player is overjoyed. There is a risk of Occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by the above-described processing.

In addition, in a plurality of holds, when it is determined that a setting suggestion effect that is completed independently is executed, so that one setting suggestion effect is executed across the fluctuations corresponding to the plurality of holds, In the previous fluctuation You may change setting suggestion production.

[12-16. Another example of setting change/confirmation process 1]
Another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described below. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972 .

179 and 180 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on. The power-on process shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is another example of steps S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 fetches the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 and the level of the signal of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the fetched level data in the register (step S201). It should be noted that determination of whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated is made by the main control MPU 1311 in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably activated. Therefore, if the hall employee accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up, the RAM will be cleared in an unintended state by the hall employee. Switch 954 and setting key 971 are determined. For this reason, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and after the peripheral control board 1510 is in the standby state, the input state (level) is stored. By judging the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a temporary storage means such as a register, even if the hall employee erroneously interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the power will not be turned on. To reliably detect operation of a RAM clear switch 954 or a setting key 971 at the time of input operation.

The ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON level of the setting key 971 may be different. For example, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be switched to have a positive/negative logic so that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON at High level and the setting key 971 is ON at Low level. Also, the voltage for determining ON may be changed between the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 . By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to cheat by changing the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves and activating the setting change mode. Also, as will be described later, it is not necessary to monitor the signal level of the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 in which settings can be selected in stages from 1 to 6, the values of works in which the setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined to be within the predetermined range.

If the setting value is not within the predetermined range, a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, and initialization by the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is waited for (step S203). Since the settings are not in the range where the checksum is calculated and are not erased by the RAM clear operation, erroneous settings are not corrected. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, the processing related to the normal game such as a special figure or a normal figure is not executed.

In addition, the set value is determined not only when the power is turned on, but also when winning a prize at the start gate, starting a variable display game, and when the game state changes (normal state to big hit state, low probability state to high probability state). , from a non-time-saving state to a time-saving state, etc.) is also determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This prevents the lottery from being performed based on the erroneous set value even if the set value is erroneously abnormal.

If the set value is determined to be abnormal, the game is stopped and the set value abnormality (RAM abnormality) state is maintained until the power is turned on again or the setting value is changed. . If the set value is determined to be abnormal, a predetermined value may be set. As the predetermined value, a value corresponding to setting 6 indicating the highest setting or a value corresponding to setting 1 indicating the lowest setting may be used to update the setting value storage area.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only through the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved only by turning on the power again. This is because RAM anomalies can be caused not only by defects but also by fraud, and if RAM anomalies caused by fraud can be resolved by turning on the power again, RAM anomalies can be easily resolved. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved without going through the setting change mode, the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved unless the power switch 932, the setting key 971, and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated. Since operation of the setting key 971, which can only be operated by the hall employee who has the key, is included, security performance against fraud can be enhanced.

In addition, in order to cope with fraudulent acts of changing the set value to an indeterminate value, if the set value is determined to be abnormal, updating it to the value corresponding to setting 1, which indicates the lowest setting, will prevent the security of the game machine. It is effective because it can improve performance.

The setting state management area, as shown in FIG. 201(B), is a storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. , the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, it waits for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S204).

Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the previous power shutdown is compared (verified) with the checksum calculated at the previous power shutdown and stored in step S48. A fixed value check code may be used instead of the checksum. Furthermore, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the power failure flag value indicating normal backup is stored in the backup flag area, the data in the RAM is normally backed up when the power failure occurs (step S205).

As a result of the determination, if either the checksum or the value of the backup flag area is abnormal, a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and all areas of the main control RAM 1312 (setting (including areas where values are stored) are initialized (step S207), and the process proceeds to step S216. Erasure of data stored in the entire area or a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is called "initialization", but "RAM clear" is also used in the same sense.

On the other hand, if the checksum and backup flag area values are normal, the setting change operation (the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON) is performed based on the value (content) of the setting key stored in the register. determine whether If it is not a setting change operation (both or one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is OFF), it is set in the setting state management area in order to determine whether the state is in the process of changing the setting before the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not a value (02H) indicating that it is being changed is recorded (step S208).

As a result, if it is stored in the register that a setting change operation has been performed, it means that the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 have been operated to enter the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and the setting change operation should be started. state can be determined. Further, if a value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is recorded in the setting state management area, it can be determined that the power is turned on after a power failure during the setting change operation. When it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, a value (02H) indicating the setting change state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S209), initializes the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 to be initialized when the RAM is normal (step S210), and proceeds to step S216.

In step S208, when shifting to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. In this case, since it is not necessary to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, when it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the setting change is performed in the setting state management area. The value (02H) indicating the state may not be recorded.

On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change operation should not be started. In order to determine whether the state of is during RAM abnormality, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

As a result, if a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before power-on is RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S216. On the other hand, if no value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the state before power-on is not RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), so the ON level of RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S212).

As a result, if the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register, since the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON when the power is turned on, the RAM in the game control area excluding the setting value and setting state management area In order to initialize the area (clear area when RAM is normal), the process proceeds to step S210.

On the other hand, if the ON operation level of the RAM clear switch 954 is not stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated when the power was turned on, so the power-on status buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command for notifying the game state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

After that, it is determined whether or not the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on and the setting confirmation operation should be started. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode is indicated in the setting state management area. A value (01H) is recorded (step S215).

After that, the device built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized (step S216), and a power-on operation command for notifying the operation of each part when the power is turned on is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to the state when the power is turned on (step S218).

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S219). If a value indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the process proceeds to step S220 to continue initial setting. On the other hand, if the setting state management area does not record a value indicating a game-startable state, the normal game cannot be started, so the initial setting is terminated and the process proceeds to step S224.

In step S220, the initial setting at the time of game start or the initial setting at the time of power failure recovery is performed. After that, a power-on state command for notifying the state of each unit when the power is turned on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, it stores in the buffer in order to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on recovery destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of power failure recovery (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on recovery destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. Various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in timer interrupt processing.

Further, a set value command for notifying the set value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), interrupts are permitted (step S224), and the routine proceeds to a normal main loop (eg, step S36 in FIG. 22).

181 and 182 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 differs from the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155 in that setting change processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing.

First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base indicator 1317 is to be turned on, that is, which digit to display. In this embodiment, an example in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together will be described, but the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be provided separately. In this case, as many LED common counters as the number of indicators should be provided.

Thereafter, switch input processing is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as step S74 in FIG.

Next, it is determined whether or not an initial value (a value indicating a game-startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S232). If the initial value (the value indicating the game-startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area, there is no need to execute the setting change/confirmation processing (after step S234) in the timer interrupt processing, so normal timer interrupt processing is performed. (for example, after step S76 in FIG. 23) are executed (step S233). In normal timer interrupt processing in step S233, performance display processing (FIG. 183), which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the initial value (the value indicating the game-startable state) is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game processing is not executed in the timer interrupt processing, and the setting change/confirmation processing is executed.

In the setting change/confirmation process, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, the security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal turns on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the LED display switching appears mixed. to prevent flickering of the LED.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing/confirming the setting value. On the other hand, if a value indicating RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether an operation to change/confirm the setting value has been performed (steps S236 and S237). Specifically, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

Then, if the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the set value is incremented by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. If the result of adding the set value exceeds the upper limit, the value is returned to the initial value. On the other hand, if a value indicating a setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (a value indicating setting confirmation is recorded in the setting state management area), or if the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key It is determined whether the OFF edge of the output level of 971 is detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, since the setting key 971 has been operated to the normal position, the setting change/confirmation mode end processing is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting change/confirmation mode is not ended, and the process proceeds to step S245.

In the setting change/confirmation mode ending process, as shown in FIG. (step S241), to send a power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the state of each part at the time of power-on (low probability / high probability, time saving / non-time saving game state, etc.) is stored in the buffer (step S242). Then, it stores in the buffer in order to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on recovery destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of recovery after the power failure (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating the processing state of the special symbol/special electric accessory (the state of each process (waiting, fluctuating, judging, jackpot, etc.) regarding the special symbol/special electric accessory is transmitted as a command. . As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the game state related to the special symbols and the operation state of the special electric accessory when the power is restored. Then, a setting value command for notifying the setting value is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process proceeds to step S245.

It should be noted that the command for notifying the setting value may be sent not only at the time of power-on, but also at the start of fluctuation or when the game state is switched. At that time, the setting value command transmitted when the power is turned on and the command transmitted during the normal game such as when the fluctuation starts may be the same command or different commands (for example, different upper byte values).

When the set value command is different between when the power is turned on and when the normal game is played, the peripheral control board 1510 sends a series of commands (variation pattern command, symbol command, etc.) including the set value at the start of the special symbol variation display game. When received, determine if the command is missing. By changing the content of the command depending on the timing at which the command is sent (when the power is turned on, during a normal game, etc.), the peripheral control board 1510 can determine whether the set value is correctly received when the power is turned on, or when the variation starts. It can be determined whether the variation pattern command or the design command is missing.

In step S245, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area. If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, settings are made to display an error on the base indicator 1317 (or the setting indicator 974 in the case of a separate unit) (step S246). On the other hand, if no value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, settings are made to display the current setting value on the base display 1317 (setting display 974 in the case of a separate unit) (step S247).

After that, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base display 1317, and the base display 1317 is lit by the segment signal output according to the setting in step S246 or S247 (step S248). In this way, after the start of the timer interrupt processing, the set value change operation is determined (step S237), and thereafter, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt to display the set value (display of set value). ). The setting value is displayed without using the setting operation as a trigger. Specifically, instead of performing processing related to setting change/confirmation as processing when the power is turned on, by performing it in the same timer interrupt processing as when a normal game is started, setting change/confirmation processing is executed. Even if power is restored after a power failure occurs and the setting key 971 is returned to its original state, the settings at the time of the power failure can be restored even if the setting key 971 and the setting change switch 972 are not operated to the same positions as when the power failure occurred. It is made possible to return to the state of change/confirmation processing. Furthermore, in the setting change/confirmation processing, processing that is also executed in normal game processing, such as command transmission processing and control of dynamic lighting of LEDs, can be made common.

Then, the command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt processing ends. That is, in step S249, the commands stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244, etc. are actually output from the main control board 1310 as serial data.

In the timer interrupt processing described above, the processing is branched depending on whether the normal game is executed or the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S232 in FIG. 181). may be provided, and different timer interrupt processes may be activated in the normal game state and the setting change mode and/or setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may include some common processes (for example, a common subroutine may be called in each timer interrupt process), or all may consist of different routines. That is, timer interrupt processing 1 (for setting change/confirmation) is called in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, and timer interrupt 2 (for normal game) is called in the normal game state, and these two timer interrupt processing are common It has a process (module) that is executed and a dedicated process (module) that is executed only in one timer interrupt process. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process for capturing outputs from various detection switches such as a winning hole sensor, a peripheral board command process for transmitting a command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the like.

Further, the processing executed in the normal game and the processing executed in the setting change mode may share a register bank. When bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, bank 1 is used in both timer interrupt processing. Since two timer interrupt processes do not start at the same time, they can share one register bank. That is, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched depending on the bank. 1 (during normal game) and timer interrupt processing 2 (setting change mode) which is periodically executed, and at least two of the main control side main processing and timer interrupt processing 1 and timer interrupt processing 2 are common. bank of registers.

The timer interrupt processing executed in the normal game and the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode may have the same execution cycle, but may be executed in different cycles. Since only the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are sampled for the switches in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode, the execution period of the timer interrupt processing in the normal game state is 4 ms, but it is executed in the setting change mode. The execution cycle of timer interrupt processing may be early (eg 2 ms) or late (eg 8 ms). It should be noted that if the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LEDs that display the set values will be delayed, and the display mode of the set values will differ from the base display during the normal game. become. When there are eight common LEDs, if the execution cycle of timer interrupt processing is 8 ms, the display cycle is 64 ms (display ON is 8 ms, OFF is 56 ms). The cycle is 32 ms (display ON is 4 ms, OFF is 20 ms), the OFF time is lengthened in proportion to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process, and the lighting flicker of the LED is increased, so that the base display during the normal game is displayed. can be recognized differently.

Also, when starting the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of power activation, the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is permitted, and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal game is prohibited. On the other hand, when starting in the normal game state (does not shift to setting change/confirmation mode) when power is turned on, timer interrupt process 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited and timer interrupt process 2 for normal game is permitted. At the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the timer interrupt process 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited, and the timer interrupt process 2 for normal game is permitted.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart of performance display processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. In the performance display process, the performance (for example, base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317 .

The performance display process is executed in the above-described normal game state timer interrupt. Specifically, it is executed in the normal interrupt processing in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 181 and the base display unit output processing in step S2087 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 saves the stack address in the game control area, sets the stack address outside the game control area (step S260), saves the register used in the game control area in the register saving buffer (step S261). In step S261, the save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. It should be noted that the save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM1312.

After that, it is determined whether the initial power-on flag is normal (step S262). The first power-on flag is a flag indicating whether the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized (that is, whether it is the first power-on), and when the area outside the game control area is initialized, 5AH is set. be done. That is, if the value of the initial power-on flag is 5AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the first power-on is initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area is also initialized).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the parameter used for displaying the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digits of the base indicator 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the parameter value is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area in step S264 initialize.

If the power failure flag is not normal, or the value of each parameter is not within a predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized, the power failure flag is set to 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within a predetermined range, the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and the discharge ball sensor 3060 are detected, and the base value is calculated ( step S265).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the switching time of the section for base value calculation (step S266), and if the switching time has come, the display mode is switched (step S267). Display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). Then, the display is controlled for each section. For example, the display control for each section includes display of test sections with less than 500 out-balls, and flashing display when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 6000) ( step S269).

After that, restore the value of the register from the register saving buffer (step S270), restore the stack address in the game control area (step S271), and end the performance display process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the notification mode of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is turned on, or during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is notified to the pachinko machine staff. Clearly communicate the status.

Note that the notification mode (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) described below is output in the mode selected in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. These notifications are controlled by selecting a notification pattern together with display settings on the base display 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181). Specifically, it is executed in the setting display process of step S2069 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided to perform the processing.

First, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181). It should be noted that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is reported with priority over the notification of other abnormalities and states.
Function display unit 1400 All lights off, or all LEDs blink at high speed at the same cycle Display device 1600 Display sound of "RAM error" characters (sound effect) Output RAM abnormality notification sound (RAM abnormality notification sound is set change mode or the notification sound other than the setting confirmation mode)
Sound (Voice) Output volume for the voice “RAM error” Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Frame decoration LED A predetermined frame lamp provided on the door frame 3 (top lamp (including ball out and stock notification LED) blinking in red Display panel decoration LED All off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Cancellation conditions for output re-notification RAM is cleared or power is cycled to peripheral control board 1510

Next, setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lighting or all LEDs blinking at medium speed at the same cycle. The volume of outputting the voice "Change is in progress" a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Predetermined frame lamp (top (including lamps, but excluding out-of-ball and stock notification LEDs) blinking in white Panel decorative LEDs All extinguished External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Cancellation conditions for output re-notification Peripheral control board 1510 is the power supply Received "A001H" as an action command at power-on

Next, setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lighting or all LEDs blinking at the same cycle at low speed. may be the same as the notification sound in the setting change mode)
Sound (Voice) Outputs the voice “Settings are being checked” a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). Predetermined frame lamps (including top lamps, excluding out-of-ball and stock notification LEDs) blinking in white Display panel decorative LEDs All off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-notification Cancellation conditions A predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 received "A001H" as the power-on operation command.

As for the above-mentioned three states, it is preferable that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with the highest priority, and that the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are given priority in this order. More specifically, the priority should be determined in the order shown in FIG. Note that priority 1 has a high notification priority, and priority 9 has a low notification priority. That is, when a plurality of notifications should be made, a notification with a higher priority (smaller number) is made. In addition, if the conditions for multiple notifications with the same priority are met and the notifications compete, even if the competing notifications are switched and notified, the notification that was met first is performed, and after the notification is canceled If a competing notification satisfies the conditions, the competing notification may be performed. Specifically, in priority 3, the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so the notifications do not conflict with each other. At priority 4, the ball excess abnormality notification and the normal electric accessory winning abnormality notification occur at the same time, and the two notifications may conflict.
Priority 1: RAM error notification when a RAM abnormality is detected Priority 2: Setting change notification priority in the setting change mode 3: RAM clear when the main control RAM is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch 954 Notification (excluding RAM clear due to setting change)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification in setting confirmation mode Priority 4: Prize ball excess abnormality notification when more than a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out When a prize is detected, or when more than a predetermined number of prizes are detected during a single operation of a normal electric accessory, the normal electric accessory winning abnormality notification priority 5: the difference between the number of prizes won and the number of discharges at the big winning opening is equal to or greater than a predetermined number 6: Vibration sensor abnormality notification priority when vibration is detected 7: Door open abnormality notification priority when opening of door frame 3 or body frame 4 is detected 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism 9: When a predetermined number or more of winnings are detected continuously when the big winning opening is not in operation, or when winning more than a predetermined number at the time of a single jackpot Big winning mouth prize anomaly notification when detected

Next, the details of the above-described power-on process (FIGS. 179 and 180) will be described. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protection register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid to enable access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312. FIG. It should be noted that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, a simple clear mode timer of a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2001), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). By once setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then setting it to OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has certainly started up, the hall If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state unintended by the hall employee. Therefore, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register or the like as temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By judging the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored later in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if the hall employee erroneously interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on. , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal indicates power failure (step S2006). If the power failure warning signal has been detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so the system waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2006.

After that, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 in which settings can be selected in stages from 1 to 6, the values of works in which the setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined to be within the predetermined range.

If the setting value is not within the predetermined range, the setting value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2024), and a reset signal for the pachinko machine 1 is generated. Wait for initialization by Since the setpoint is not the range over which the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, even if the setpoint is an abnormal value it will not be corrected. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, the normal game is not started. In a hall where a pachinko machine is installed, you want to initialize the game state while maintaining the set value (for example, you want to clear the latent probability change (high probability non-working hours) and return to the normal state with a low probability of working hours) In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. If the set values are initialized by the RAM clearing operation during business, the power is cut off to continue the business by resetting the set values, the setting change mode is started, and the original set values are set again. There is a need. In order to avoid such trouble, the setting values are maintained without being cleared by the RAM clearing operation.

On the other hand, if the set value is within a predetermined range, a sub-activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires. is activated (step S2008). Waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any period from when the power is turned on until the first command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, even if it is not after the setting value is determined.

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal indicates power failure (step S2009). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, so the system waits in step S2009.

Also, it determines whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and stores the determination result in the register (step S2010). Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. Also, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been performed normally (the power failure processing has been performed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when the power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal (power-off processing is not normally executed).

Then, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and the value indicating the RAM abnormality (08H) is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). .

Then, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked out of the register values in which the values of the PF ports are recorded (step S2013). Thereafter, it is determined using the values stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2014). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was in effect when the power failure occurred (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting state management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, determination can be made using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure occurred during RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2036 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the value (00H) indicating the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value (08H) temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 indicating a RAM abnormality is returned to a normal state. By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the values in the setting state management area differ when jumping from steps S2016 and S2019 to step S2031. size can be reduced.

Thereafter, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 was turned ON when the power was turned on (step S2019). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the RAM clear operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 and the values recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 08H is maintained until the power is turned off, so normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power supply, changing the settings, and turning on the power supply. That is, if it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 have been operated (setting change operation), the setting status management area changes from the value indicating RAM abnormality (08H) to the value indicating setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is supposed to go through the setting change without fail. In other words, since it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed before it is determined whether the state at the time of power failure is RAM abnormality, RAM abnormality can be eliminated only by changing the set value.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, in order to restore the state before the power failure occurred, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer (step S2020).

After that, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether or not the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on (step S2021). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, and the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022). The process proceeds to step S2036. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure is during setting confirmation, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the setting confirmation mode is entered.

Steps S2018 to S2022 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated. (step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021) after the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is determined (step S2019), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021). Operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

Next, FIG. 187, which is a continuation of the power-on processing (FIG. 186), will be described.

If YES is determined in step S2014 or step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). After that, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, determination can be made based on the determination result stored in the register in step S2032.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game control area (step S2033), and by the RAM abnormality initialization process, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 The RAM (work area and stack area) used outside is initialized (step S2034). The details of the RAM abnormality initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2035).

After that, the function of the device (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized (step S2036), and the hardware random number (for example, win-lose random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2037). Then, power-on setting processing is executed (step S2038). The details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Finally, the timer interrupt is enabled (step S2039), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 188).

FIG. 188 is a flow chart of main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The main control side main process is executed after step S2039 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2040). If the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step 2041). The details of the random number update process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. In random number update processing 2, random numbers other than random numbers for judging wins are mainly updated in special lotteries and ordinary lotteries.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected, power failure processing (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power failure process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2042). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, prohibits writing data to the main control built-in RAM 1312, and protects game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. It should be noted that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to ensure that the main-board-side power-off process is completed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, and stores it in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. In addition, the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting state management (set value and the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power failure processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2045). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, write RAM protection valid (write prohibited) and prohibited area invalid to the RAM protect register, prohibit writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2046), and wait until recovery from the power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby enabling access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312. FIG. It should be noted that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 189 is a flow chart of RAM abnormality initialization processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 . The RAM abnormality initialization process is executed in step S2034 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP saving buffer outside the game control area (step S2050), sets the stack pointer value outside the game control area to the stack pointer (step S2051), all registers The value is stored in the register saving buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

After that, it is determined whether the initialization is performed when the power is turned on for the first time, based on the value of the first power-on flag when the power is turned on (step S2053). When the power is turned on for the first time means when the power is first turned on as a pachinko machine, and when the power is turned on after the backup power supply is interrupted and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 is erased. For example, if the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power supply (for example, installed in the main body frame 4) is disconnected, the backup power supply to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off and data in the main control RAM 1312 cannot be retained.

If it is initialization at the time of the first power-on, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the initialization is not performed when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined whether or not the discharge ball for base calculation is outside the predetermined range (step S2054). If the discharged ball for base calculation is out of the predetermined range, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the discharged ball for base calculation is within the predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameters of the performance display monitor are within the normal range (step S2055). Then, if the display parameters of the performance display monitor are within the normal range, the RAM abnormality initialization process is terminated, and the caller process is returned to.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is out of the normal range, 00H is written to all work areas outside the use area of the main control RAM 1312 for initialization (step S2056), and 00H is written to all stack areas outside the use area. is written to initialize (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5AH) is set in the initialization flag at power-on (step S2058), and the processing returns to the calling source.

190 and 191 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group, and bank switching is performed. Both banks of registers cannot be used without Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area when an interrupt is started, and the RET It returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is restored. If a configuration is adopted in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt process to restore bank 0. FIG.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to enable interrupts, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not an interrupt is enabled is set to an interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless an interrupt is permitted (EI instruction, etc.) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state is not entered.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2061).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2062). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312 as input information.

Note that switch input processing 1 in step S2062 is processing related to a winning signal, and switch input processing 2 in step S2080 to be described later is processing related to input from fraud detection sensors (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, NO is determined in step S2604, so winning is detected, but fraud is not detected. Note that even if winning is detected, prize ball payout, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by hall employees, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and that fraud is not detected.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input process 1 and monitor specific types of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person (goto master) who tries to commit a fraudulent act forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number update process 1, the random number for judging a big hit, the random number for a big hit design, and the random number for a small hit design are updated. In addition to these random numbers, for changing the initial value of the random number for determining the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the minor symbol to be updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination.

After that, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal turns on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the LED display switching appears mixed. to prevent flickering of the LED.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output (step S2067). At step S2067, only the game state error signal is turned ON, and other signals are turned OFF.

Then, setting processing is executed (step S2068). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thereafter, setting display processing is executed (step S2069). Details of the setting display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read at step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer in the FIFO format of multiple bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510 .

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the bank of the register (step S2072), and returns to the processing before the interrupt.

Next, FIG. 191 will be explained. When it is determined in step S2064 in FIG. 190 that a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing 2 for detecting the state of a sensor (switch) for fraud detection. (step S2080). Specifically, when a detection signal from the magnetism detection switch 3024 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet is read, and a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined period of time, Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in switch input processing 2, it is determined whether or not fraud has been detected in the fraud detection processing of step S2084. In addition, in the fraud detection process (step S2084), in addition to the fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, a winning abnormality such as a large winning opening or an excessive winning of ordinary electric accessories is also determined.

Thereafter, timer update processing is executed (step S2081). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol indicator 1185 lights up according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process, the normal symbol fluctuation determined by the normal symbol and normal electric auditors control process In addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payout control board 951 normally receives various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not there is an input is performed. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, prize ball control processing is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written in the main control RAM 1312 . In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is performed. create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, frame status display command, error cancellation notification command, etc.), memorize to Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to perform notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 is adapted to the command system for transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510. and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Also, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, it generates a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, fraud detection processing is executed (step S2084). In the fraudulent activity detection process, an abnormal state (magnetism, vibration, winning anomaly, etc.) related to fraud is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and when it is detected that the game ball is entering the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 by the count switch when it is not in the jackpot game state, the main control program generates a prize-winning abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, a switch-passing command output process is executed to create a command corresponding to the detection of the passage of various switches relating to the winning switch and the starting switch and set it in the transmission information storage area (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game control area (step S2086), and the base display output process is executed (step S2087). The base display output process is a process executed using the second area outside the game control area, unlike other processes, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output process, before and after the execution of the base display output process, save the predetermined data such as the flag register to the stack area in the game control area, the base display It is set so that it is not updated in the output process. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2088).

Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric accessary product control process is executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuation state is established based on the big hit symbol random number value. Determine whether to migrate. Then, when the big win random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open and close the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 . When the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this determination, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded), and the gaming state is such that game balls can be received in the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. Then, the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state for the player. Further, when the variable probability transition condition is established, the state is shifted to the probability variable state after that, and when the variable probability transition condition is not established, the state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "variable probability state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the odds of winning the special lottery are set relatively high compared to the normal game state (low probability state).

Subsequently, normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing is executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol per determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal per symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" “General Lottery”). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the ordinary lottery. When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be received in the starting port 2004. A game advantageous to the player. transition to state.

Subsequently, output data setting processing is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311 . For example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, when normally receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 output the main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or jackpot game When in the state, output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that performs opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the large winning opening 2005, 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that performs the opening and closing operation of the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), as output information to the hall computer, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as an output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output information, a start winning prize information output signal, and a security signal are output to the external terminal board 784 .

Also, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal plate 784. FIG. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 every predetermined number of out balls (10, etc.).

Also, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

After that, the process proceeds to step S2070 in FIG.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart of setting processing. The setting process is executed in step S2068 of the timer interrupt process when the setting state management area does not indicate the normal game state (00H), and mainly executes the process of changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process returns to the caller without executing the setting process.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process related to the special design and the normal design is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM abnormality can be corrected by turning off the power once, executing power failure processing, and then, when turning on the power again, by operating the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 to activate the setting change mode. Then, the RAM abnormality is resolved. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to its original state, the setting change mode is terminated and the normal game can be started.

When the power is turned on again, if an operation other than starting the setting change mode is performed with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954, the value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained. The RAM abnormal state continues and the normal game cannot be started. In other words, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and return to the normal game state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if no value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ON to OFF change.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set to the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting state management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting processing is executed. (Step S2104), the processing returns to the calling source.

When an operation to terminate the setting change mode (turning off the setting key 971) is performed, by setting an output time value in the security signal output timer, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is terminated can be set. prepare. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), the shortest output signal of the security signal is set to the security signal output timer as the output time value. This ensures that the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Further, when fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, it is preferable to output the security signal for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

In addition, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal turns OFF, when the hot start is performed in the normal game state when the power is restored, the security signal for the remaining time is output, and when the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM abnormality, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value and stops the output of the security signal.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, one of five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation occurs.

When shifting to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, a security signal is output due to the continued RAM abnormality because the setting change operation has not been performed even after the power is restored. In the case of hot start, the security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even if the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time (for example, during the startup wait time of the peripheral control board 1510), the timer interrupt process starts. After the transition, output of the security signal resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, there is provided a period during which the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
・When the power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs while security signals are being output due to fraud detection, etc. ・After a power failure occurs while security signals are being output due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues. - After a power failure occurs while security signals are being output in setting change mode, the power is restored and the setting change mode continues. and the setting confirmation mode continues

In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, the hall computer can respond to the security signal by stopping the output of the security signal for a predetermined period after the power is restored. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or whether the state accompanying the output of the security signal has been released.

In the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends regardless of the remaining time for which the security signal is output. Stop outputting the security signal after the elapse. Also, in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, it is preferable to perform the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step S2106). Note that the setting change switch 972 may be configured to be used also as the RAM clear switch 954 . As a result, if it is determined that a value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the setting value is updated by +1. If the set value exceeds the upper limit of 6, it is set to 1 (step S2107). After that, it returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. return to the calling process.

When determining whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON. In this way, if the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, even if the setting change mode is in effect at the time of power failure and the setting key 971 is not turned ON at the time of recovery from the power failure, the setting change switch 972 is turned on. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by an operation.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart of setting display processing. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If no value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

After that, an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2113), and the driver is driven to output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). , return to the calling process.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process (FIG. 187) and S2104 of the setting process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). The power-on operation command, as shown in FIG. 202A, is a command for notifying the contents recorded in the setting state management area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is the initial value. Note that other bits should be set to 0 (step S2121). The reason why the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area is set to 1 is that the bit of the switch is detected as 1 at the time of the next timer interrupt, and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2122). If no value indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM is abnormal. Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, it is a state in which a normal game can be started. The area is initialized (step S2123).

Thereafter, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). As shown in FIG. 202(B), the power-on status command is a command for notifying whether or not the normal game can be started based on the contents recorded in the setting status management area.

Then, a power-on recovery destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). The return destination command at power-on is, as shown in FIG.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). The setting value command is a command for notifying a setting value, as shown in FIG. 202(D).

In addition to the power-on state command, the power-on return destination command, and the set value command, a special symbol holding number command indicating the number of holdings of the special symbol variation display game is transmitted, and the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 The display of the pending number may be restored to the state before the power failure occurred. In addition, the order of transmission of the special symbol hold number command is the state command at power on, the return destination command at power on, and the setting value command. may

After that, it returns to the calling process.

The power-on setting process is executed when the setting change mode is not in the setting confirmation mode when the power failure is restored, or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. , power-on status command, power-on recovery destination command, and set value command) are sent at the time of recovery from a power failure in neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, at the end of the setting change mode, or at the end of the setting confirmation mode.

195 is a flowchart of random number update processing 2. FIG. Random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (FIG. 188), and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for judging winning in special lotteries and ordinary lotteries.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial value random number (step S2132), and sets interrupt permission (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in random number update processing 1 in step S2063 of the timer interrupt processing, interrupts are prohibited before the initial value random number update processing so that the initial value random number update processing is not interrupted by the timer interrupt processing. Interrupts are allowed after initial value random number update processing. The initial value random number is a random number for judging the jackpot to draw the jackpot of the special pattern, the random number to draw the hit of the normal pattern, the type of pattern at the time of the special pattern jackpot (low probability / high probability / short time / non-short time etc.) ) is a random number for changing the initial value for each cycle.

After that, the random numbers (excluding the initial value random numbers) other than the winning random numbers are updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. 181 and 182, the same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In another example 1 described below, it is preferable that the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting confirmation mode as well as in the setting change mode. In this example 1, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It does not switch the confirmation mode, but only has a function as an operation for changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches the register bank (step S2060), and executes the switch input process 3 (step S2141). Details of the switch input process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. do. In step S2141, instead of switch input process 3 described in FIG. 197, switch input process 1 of S2062 may be applied.

Then, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063), and setting change/confirmation processing is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change/confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, switch input processing 2 is executed (step S2080), timer update processing is executed (step S2081), and prize ball control processing is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2083), fraud detection processing is executed (step S2084), and switch passage command output processing is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), the base display output process is executed (step S2087), and the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2088). Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process is executed (step S2089), a normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process is executed (step S2090), and an output data setting process is executed (step S2091). Further, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the processing before the interrupt is restored. do.

197 is a flowchart of switch input processing 3. FIG. The switch input process 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt process, reads various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates an ON edge, and inputs the main control RAM 1312 as input information. Store in the information storage area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the top address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and acquires the number of repetitions of the process from the switching winning information data (step S2161). The number of repetitions of the process is the number n of blocks in the switch winning prize information data table. Then, the input port address specified by the switch winning information data is obtained (step S2162), and the input level data area address specified by the switching winning information data is obtained (step S2163). Further, input information is read from the obtained input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected using the logical correction value specified by the switch winning prize information data (step S2165).

Thereafter, referring to the value recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S2166). Then, if it is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, you can get the bits of the input port that are used during normal play.

On the other hand, if it is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during setting change/confirmation specified in the switch winning prize information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits used in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be obtained from the input ports.

After that, the input level data is generated from the bits acquired by the mask processing, and the input level data area specified by the switch winning prize information data is updated (step S2169).

Then, the edge data of the change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area specified by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

After that, it is set in the next block as switch winning prize information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether the processing of all switch input ports is completed (step S2172). When it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports has not been completed, the process returns to step S2162 to process the next input port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports is finished, the switch input processing 3 is finished and the processing before the interruption is returned to.

FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning prize information data table.

The switch winning prize information data table shown in FIG. 198(A) is divided into n blocks (where n is the number of repetitions of processing), and each block contains an input port address, a logic correction value, and a normal game mask. value, mask value during setting change/confirmation, and address of the input level data area.

FIG. 198B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area.

The switch input level/edge data area includes n pairs of the address of the input level data area and the address of the input edge data area.

Since the address of the input edge data area is set to the next address of the input level data area, it is not designated as the switch winning information data. If the input level data area and the input edge data area are not arranged continuously, the address of the input edge data area is set in the same table together with the input level data area. Although the addresses of the input level data area and the input edge data area are 16-bit (2-byte) values, they are set as the addresses of the input level data area and the input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be the lower 8-bit (1 byte) value. That is, since the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change with the values of the input level data area and the input edge data area, the upper byte is the upper byte of the address in the RAM area, and only the lower byte needs to be set. can be reduced.

Fig. 199 shows another configuration example of the switch winning information data table, Fig. 199(A) shows a configuration example of the switching winning information data table used in the normal game state, and Fig. 199(B). shows a configuration example of a switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The switch winning prize information data table shown in FIG. 199 is divided into n blocks (where n is the number of repetitions of processing), and each block contains an input port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, and the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal game state and the switching winning information data table used in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode include ports with different logic correction values and mask values. That is, in the switch winning prize information data table shown in FIG. 198(A), the mask values are different between the setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and the normal game state, but the switch winning prize information data table shown in FIG. uses different switch winning information data tables in the setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and in the normal game state, making it possible to acquire different switch winning information data.

In order to accommodate such a configuration, switch input processing 3 (FIG. 197) is changed as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether it is the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) or the normal game state, and the start address of the switch winning information data is set according to the determination result. Then, in step S2166, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data without determining whether it is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in step S2167.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart of setting change/confirmation processing. The setting change/confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change/confirmation process shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those in the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIGS.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (00H) indicating game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change/confirmation process is terminated, and the process before the interruption is returned to. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned OFF (step S2065), the security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and the test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, the setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and the setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

FIG. 201A is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2. FIG.

A switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports to which outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is composed of 8 bits. In the illustrated example, bit 7 detects an acknowledgment signal (ACK) from payout control board 951 at level 1 . At bit 6, at level 0, a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected. At bit 5, the signal level becomes 1 when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Bit 4 has a signal level of 0 when the setting key 971 is turned on. At bit 3, the signal level becomes 1 when the door open sensor detects that the door frame 3 is open. In bit 2, the level becomes 0 when the magnetism detection switch (magnetism detection sensor) detects magnetism. Bits 1 and 0 are not used.

FIG. 201B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area.

The setting state management area, as shown in FIG. 201(B), is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. not Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 .

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, when the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Furthermore, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the setting change mode is updated from 08H to 02H, and the setting change mode is terminated from 02H to 00H.

FIG. 202A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the contents recorded in the setting state management area. For example, the power-on operation command consists of 2 bytes, the upper byte being A0H, and the lower byte indicating the content recorded in the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during a normal game, and therefore if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error in which the output is 0. is set to 1.

Note that the power-on operation command is generated at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, it is generated once at hot start, RAM clear, and RAM failure, and is generated twice in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, at power-on processing and at the end of setting change/confirmation.

Upon receipt of the power-on operation command, the peripheral control board 1510 performs notification in the manner described above according to the setting confirmation mode, setting change mode, and RAM abnormality state (see FIG. 184).

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H as the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent. It is determined to be invalid, and the game action (effect etc.) corresponding to the game command is not started. However, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, a game command during a normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), there is a possibility that the peripheral control board 1510 has missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to release the invalidation of the received game command and perform an effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in a state where the game commands are invalidated, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands is performed (for example, the effect corresponding to the received command is performed for symbol movements, lamps, movable bodies, sounds, etc.). ), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify the occurrence of an inconsistency in the game state. Also, the fact that the game state is inconsistent may be notified with a low volume. This is because unless any effect is performed until a predetermined condition is met, a player who cannot understand the occurrence of an inconsistency in the game state will not start the special symbol variation display game even if he/she wins the start gate. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the pachinko hall due to the pachinko machine 1 malfunctioning. In addition, even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing normal game processing, so the function displays such as special symbols and normal symbols on the function display unit 1400 are normally displayed. be done.

FIG. 202B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on status command. The power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not a normal game can be started based on the contents recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when the power-on status command is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the normal game can be started. The series code for each pachinko machine model may be notified using the lower byte of the power-on state command. For example, bits 6-4 can be used to identify eight different series. Note that the power-on state command may be another example shown in FIG. 220(C). By using the power-on state command shown in FIG. 220(C), the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the information recorded in the power-on buffer (game state before power failure).

FIG. 202C is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on recovery destination command. The power-on return destination command is a command for notifying the game state related to special symbols. show. The power-on return destination command notifies the state of the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory at the time of power failure. The power-on recovery destination command is sent once when the power is turned on.

FIG. 202D is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting value command. The setting value command is a command for notifying a setting value. For example, the setting value command is composed of 2 bytes, where the upper byte indicates A1H and the lower byte indicates the setting value. The set value command is sent at the time of recovery from a power failure in neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, at the end of the setting change mode, or at the end of the setting confirmation mode. In addition, it is transmitted at the time of the start of special symbol fluctuation, or at the time of change in the game state (at the time of start and end of big hit, probability variation, time reduction, etc.). As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the setting value command transmitted when the power is turned on, the setting value is changed to the correct setting value in the subsequent game (for example, the start of fluctuation of the special symbol), so that the setting value is incorrect. Rendering is not performed based on the value. Effects based on set values are effects that suggest set values using effects devices such as indicators, lamps, sounds, and movable bodies, and effects that are unlikely to occur (or do not occur) in normal times are performed with a predetermined probability. It suggests a set value by generating it. This set value suggesting effect may be effected in other aspects than the effect illustrated below, and may include a fake. As a setting value suggesting effect, the effect display device 1600, which is an example of a display device, displays an effect such as a notice corresponding to the setting value, or changes the pattern fluctuation mode from normal time (for example, the left and right middle pattern starts to fluctuate). And the timing of confirmation is different from normal time (normally each pattern starts to change at the same time, and in the case of high setting, the change starts in the order of left, middle, right, etc.)), When used, a notification sound corresponding to the set value will be generated with a predetermined probability when the starter wins, or a different sound will be generated during the production (normally male voice, high setting female voice voice, etc.), etc.

FIG. 203 shows commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following description, n is a counter value indicating a processing state regarding special symbols/special electric accessories, and m is a value corresponding to a set value.

As shown in the figure, in the hot start where the normal game state is started, the operation command at power on (A001H) → state command at power on (3001H) → return destination command at power on (310nH) → set value command (A10mH) sent in order.

Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, the operation command at power-on (A001H)→status command at power-on (3001H)→return destination command at power-on (3101H)→set value command ( A10mH).

In the setting change mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted, the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, and after the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, the power-on operation is performed. A command (A001H)→power-on state command (3001H)→power-on recovery destination command (3101H)→set value command (A10mH) is transmitted in this order.

In the setting confirmation mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A002H) is transmitted, the setting value is confirmed, and after the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) is sent. → Power-on status command (3001H) → Power-on recovery destination command (310nH) → Setting value command (A10mH).

In addition, when the RAM is abnormal, the operation command (A009H) at power-on is first transmitted, and the setting change mode is activated by the setting change operation (the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) when the power is restored after the power is cut off. A power-on action command (A003H) is sent. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the operation command at power-on (A001H)→state command at power-on (3001H)→return destination command at power-on (3101H)→setting value command (A10mH) in this order. sent.

When the RAM is abnormal, the power-on operation command (A009H) is first transmitted. ) is sent. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the operation command at power-on (A001H)→state command at power-on (3001H)→return destination command at power-on (3101H)→setting value command (A10mH) in this order. sent.

As described above, when the main control board 1310 is activated in the normal gaming state, a command group (combination of a plurality of commands in a predetermined order) indicating power restoration is sent to the peripheral at a predetermined timing. It is sent to the control board 1510 . For this reason, when it is determined that the normal game state can be started after all the series of commands from A001H to A10mH have been received, and some commands in the series of commands cannot be received (missed), It determines that the normal game state cannot be started, and informs that the normal game state cannot be started.

That is, in the same way as the above-described effect when the game command is disabled, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands is performed (for example, symbol movements, lamps, movable bodies, voices, etc. are received.) The effect corresponding to the given command may be performed), and the occurrence of inconsistency in the game state may be notified using the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp.

In addition, when the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the set value command transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display game compensates for the set value command that was missed when the power was turned on, and the normal game is started. You may

Further, when the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the setting value command, when the power of the peripheral control board 1510 is turned on, the setting value command is set to a predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) as the setting value. It may be updated to the setting value corresponding to the command.

Note that both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) notify the normal game start-ready state, and are normally transmitted in succession. Sending to the board is sufficient.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing state transition of values set after power restoration from the state before power shutdown in the setting state management area.

The operation of a pachinko machine having a setting function when the power is turned on differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated or whether the setting key 971 is operated. There are multiple patterns considering convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An operation example in which the normal game state (VALID_PLAY=00H) is in effect at the time of power interruption immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of restoration from power failure, as shown in FIG. 204(A), will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on, and when the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is the game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the region that will be used as a region. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Also, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated ON when the power is turned on, the memory contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. Also, the base display 1317 displays the current set values for setting confirmation.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is ON when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is a game control area including the stack area for all areas other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as Also, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Also, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the memory contents of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained in the state before the power failure. In addition, even if all the storage contents in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are not maintained, at least the area where the information for returning to the game state before the power failure is stored (the storage where the information about the game is stored) Areas (special symbols, areas related to normal symbols, areas related to prize balls, random numbers generated by the program (fluctuation pattern random numbers, initial value random numbers, etc.)) need only be maintained, and it is necessary to return to the game state before the power failure. After the power is restored, the area in which the information that is not stored may be in a state different from that before the power failure. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. The same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. Also, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on.

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204(B), in an operation example 1 in which the setting change mode is set at the time of power interruption immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of restoration from the power failure, operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is performed when the power is turned on. Whether or not the setting key 971 is operated or not, the main control RAM 1312 initializes the area used as the game control area including the stack area other than the set value and the base value. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Also, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

Initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in pattern 2-1 is to initialize the area used as the game control area including the stack area together with the storage area initialized by the initialization process that has already been executed at the time of power failure. good. For example, if the power is interrupted during the initialization process of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage areas that have not been initialized may be initialized. On the other hand, regardless of the progress of the initialization process at the time of power failure, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM1312 may be initialized after the power is restored.

If a power failure occurs during the initialization process, an area (for example, a RAM clearing flag) is provided to store whether the main control RAM 1312 is being initialized, and while the RAM clearing flag is set It is preferable to prohibit writing of data to the storage area to be initialized.

Further, the process of monitoring power failure may be repeatedly executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), for example, a timer interrupt may be used to monitor the power failure warning signal.

Whether the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process are executed as common processing in any of the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, and the normal game state, or executed as separate processing, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are performed. Common processing may be executed in the mode, and different processing may be executed in the normal game state. That is, out of three or more states (operation modes) in the operation of the pachinko machine, at least two states may share the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process.

As described above, in the pattern 2-1 when the power is interrupted in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the setting is always performed. Start in change mode. For example, if a power failure occurs during setting change work in a hall, the setting change mode should be activated when power is restored. However, the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 for activating the setting change mode may not be operated when the power is restored. Therefore, by controlling as in pattern 2-1, it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when power is restored.

For example, if only the setting key 971 is operated (the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated) when the power is restored, the system is started in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode, or only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. When (the setting key 971 is not operated), the main control RAM 1312 is initialized and the normal game state is started, and when any switch is not operated, the normal game state is started. However, when controlled as in pattern 2-1, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the setting change mode is always activated.

<Pattern 2-2>
If the setting change mode is set at the time of the last power interruption and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of restoration from the power failure, unlike the pattern 2-1, even if it operates in another pattern shown in FIG. 204(C). good. If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on, and if the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. initialize the area Also, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Also, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 when the power is turned on is other than the above, and if at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 memory contents are not changed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the game stop state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 08H indicating an abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 . Base indicator 1317 also displays errors (eg, error codes). The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing normal game processing.

That is, in pattern 2-1, regardless of the state of the setting key or the RAM clear switch after power is restored, the transition to the setting change mode is made unconditionally. When the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated to start the setting change mode, the setting change mode is started, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states, the game cannot be executed (RAM abnormality). and That is, in pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated at the time of power return, the normal game is not started as a RAM abnormal state, and the normal game is played after going through the setting change mode. Start playing. For this reason, when the operation to start the setting change mode is not performed, the normal game is not executed in a state different from the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode such as RAM abnormality, and the game stop state is notified. employees may be prompted to activate the configuration change mode.

If the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, without initializing the game control area and the stack area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, until the next setting change operation is performed. Wait in the game stop state. The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing normal game processing. After that, once the power is cut off, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are operated to the setting change mode, and the power is turned on, the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H, and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Pattern 3-1, 3-2>
204(D), an operation example will be described in which the setting confirmation mode is set at the time of power interruption immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of restoration from the power failure. First, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, and when the setting key 971 is turned ON, the main control RAM 1312 includes a stack area other than the set value and the base value as a game control area. Initialize the area used. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Also, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated ON when the power is turned on, the memory contents of the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Also, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. Also, the base display 1317 displays the current set values for setting confirmation.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be used. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Also, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Also, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Also, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on. In this case, like pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the setting), the base display 1317 may display the current setting value for setting confirmation.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204(F), an operation example when there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of recovery from power failure will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on, and when the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is the game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the region that will be used as a region. Also, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area becomes 02H. Also, the base display 1317 provides display for setting changes.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at power-on is other than the above, that is, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at power-on, the main The contents stored in the control RAM 1312 remain unchanged. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stop state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 08H. The same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. Base indicator 1317 also displays errors (eg, error codes).

If there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power interruption immediately before, if the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized before the power interruption, (1) The device built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized. (2) Restart the hardware random numbers. (3) It is preferable to execute the main loop after executing at least one of (3) setting interrupt permission.

In addition, even if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the last power shutdown, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are set before the determination of whether the RAM is abnormal in the state before the power failure (step S211 in FIG. 179). determines whether or not there is an operation of When a setting change operation (the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is activated. The RAM abnormal state is maintained regardless of whether the start operation is performed, only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, or neither is operated. That is, normally, when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are started, the setting change mode processing and the setting confirmation mode processing are executed within the timer interrupt processing. If so, different processes are executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the power is turned on again to recover from the RAM abnormal state, when starting in the setting change mode, the processing of the setting change mode is executed in the timer interrupt processing as usual, but the setting confirmation mode is started. When doing so, a process different from normal is executed in the timer interrupt process.

Thus, when the value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, it is not necessary to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be described using time charts. The outline of the time chart explained below is as follows.
・Time chart for normal setting changes (Fig. 205)
・Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Fig. 206)
・Time chart when transitioning to the setting change mode at power failure with the setting key 971 turned off and the RAM clear switch 954 turned off after the power is restored (Fig. 207)
・Time chart when transitioning to the setting change mode at power failure with the setting key 971 ON and the RAM clear switch 954 OFF after the power is restored (Fig. 208)
・Time chart when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode at the time of power failure with the setting key 971 turned off and the RAM clear switch 954 turned off after the power is restored (Fig. 209)

FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, since the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting change mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the startup of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has passed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Go to change mode. Also, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 . Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. The display mode of the function display unit is as described in FIG. 184 above.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 described above according to the power-on command received.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6). Furthermore, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N+1 to N+2, and updates the base display 1317. The subsequent set value N+2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, the set value is changed within the range of 1 to 6 each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, and when the set value exceeds 6, it is updated to 1. be.

The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after finishing changing the set values. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal game state. (T8). The generated power-on operation command (A0001H) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the main control MPU 1311 ends the lighting of all the function display units 1400 and starts the display in the normal game state. Furthermore, the base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal game state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Thus, by displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined manner at the start of the normal game state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly recognized, and operation errors at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on recovery destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH). Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on recovery destination command becomes 01H. m in the setting value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 corresponding to the setting value as shown in FIG. 202(D). Both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) notify the normal game start-ready state, and are normally transmitted continuously. It is sufficient to send to

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has passed since it is known by the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start a customer waiting production. It should be noted that during the predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect during setting change by some effect devices. Continue the notification production. In addition, the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamps is that some of the decorative lamps (eg, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (eg, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. good.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is not output at all or only for a short time, the hole computer cannot detect the transition to the setting change mode. This is to ensure

FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, when the power was cut off immediately before, it was in the normal game state or in the setting confirmation mode, and when the power was turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated and the setting key 971 was turned ON. , the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the startup of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records and sets 01H in the setting state management area. Go to confirmation mode. Also, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 . Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

After confirming the setting values, the hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T6). By setting the value of the setting state management area to 00H, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Also, the base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal game state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH). m in the setting value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 corresponding to the setting value as shown in FIG. 202(D). In the setting confirmation mode, since the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized in principle, the state before the power failure is transmitted as the lower byte of the power-on recovery destination command.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has passed since it is known by the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start a customer waiting production. It should be noted that during the predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect during setting change by some effect devices. Continue the notification production. In addition, the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamps is that some of the decorative lamps (eg, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (eg, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. good.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting change mode because it is in the setting change mode at the time of power shutdown immediately before. As shown in FIG. 204(B), if the setting change mode is set at the time of the last power shutdown, the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of power on. Indicates the case of starting.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the startup of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has passed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Go to change mode. Also, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 . Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes effects in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The operation state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted by the main control board 1310 and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects the power failure and executes the power failure processing (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal stops (T8). In addition, in the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, the power consumption during the power-off processing can be reduced, and a reset due to the power supply (5V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, it is preferable to turn OFF the output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the driving signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12. , and waits for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value of the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, at timing T13 after the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, the setting change mode is set. transition to When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized again in the same manner as the normal setting change mode. In addition, since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed, and then the power failure processing is executed, the RAM clear processing is not interrupted by the power failure processing, so it is in the setting change mode at the time of the power failure. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the game control area may not be initialized by executing the RAM clear process at the time of power failure recovery. After re-initialization, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting security signals.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes effects in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operation state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and updates the setting value after updating. Displayed on the display 1317 .

The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after finishing changing the set value. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Also, the base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal game state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on recovery destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH). m in the setting value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 corresponding to the setting value as shown in FIG. 202(D).

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has passed since it is known by the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start a customer waiting production. It should be noted that during the predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect during setting change by some effect devices. Continue the notification production. In addition, the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamps is that some of the decorative lamps (eg, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (eg, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. good.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is not output at all or only for a short time, the hole computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, even if the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode at the time of power shutdown immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in a different operation mode depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 at power on.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the startup of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has passed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Go to change mode. Also, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes effects in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The operation state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted by the main control board 1310 and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects the power failure and executes the power failure processing (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal stops (T8). In addition, in the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, the power consumption during the power-off processing can be reduced, and a reset due to the power supply (5V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, it is preferable to turn OFF the output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the driving signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12. , and waits for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch. The operation mode is changed depending on the level of the 954 signal. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so that the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on again. Since the value indicates the setting change (02H), the main control MPU 1311 is restarted in the setting change mode at timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has passed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. be done. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized again in the same manner as the normal setting change mode. In addition, since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed, and then the power failure processing is executed, the RAM clear processing is not interrupted by the power failure processing, so it is in the setting change mode at the time of the power failure. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the game control area may not be initialized by executing the RAM clear process at the time of power failure recovery. For example, in FIG. 186 described above, if the state before the power failure is during setting change, YES is obtained in step S2015, and the process branches to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187) to execute RAM abnormality initialization processing (step S2034). However, if it branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in FIG. 187), the state before the power shutdown is continued without executing the RAM abnormality initialization processing step S2034. After re-initialization, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting security signals. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, the setting change mode is started when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on when the power is turned on, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on when the power is turned on. Even if it is not ON, the setting change mode can be activated.

As indicated by a broken line at timing T12, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned off when the power is turned on again, unlike the time chart shown in FIG. 00H may be recorded, and the game may be restarted in a state in which the normal game cannot be executed (for example, RAM abnormality) without returning to the setting change mode. That is, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even in the setting change mode at the time of power failure, if the setting change operation is not performed at the time of power return, the device is restarted in the state of RAM abnormality. In other words, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally terminated at some point.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes effects in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The operation state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted by the main control board 1310 and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and updates the setting value after updating. It is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after finishing changing the set value. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Also, the base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal game state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on recovery destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH). Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on recovery destination command becomes 01H. m in the setting value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 corresponding to the setting value as shown in FIG. 202(D). Note that both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) notify the normal game start-ready state, and are normally transmitted in succession. Sending to the board is sufficient.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has passed since it is known by the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start a customer waiting production. It should be noted that during the predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect during setting change by some effect devices. Continue the notification production. In addition, the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamps is that some of the decorative lamps (eg, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (eg, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is not output at all or only for a short time, the hole computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, if the setting confirmation mode is set at the time of the last power-off, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at power-on.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the startup of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has passed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Go to change mode. Also, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on operation command.

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects the power failure, executes the power failure processing, and the main control MPU 1311 stops the operation (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal stops (T8). In addition, in the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, the power consumption during the power-off processing can be reduced, and a reset due to the power supply (5V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off processing. In addition, it is preferable to turn OFF the output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the driving signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12. , and waits for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value of the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so that the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on again. Since the value (01H) indicates setting confirmation, at timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, the controller is restarted in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of 01H is maintained in the setting state management area. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, if the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned OFF when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is started. can also start the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

During the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, and even if the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, the set value is displayed on the base display without updating the set value. Continue to 1317 to display.

After confirming the setting values, the hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Also, the base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal game state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH).

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 starts an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect) after a predetermined delay time has passed since it was known by the power-on state command that the normal game can be started. may In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 cancels the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has passed since it is known by the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start a customer waiting production. It should be noted that during the predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect during setting change by some effect devices. Continue the notification production. In addition, the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamps is that some of the decorative lamps (eg, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (eg, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. good.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is not output at all or only for a short time, the hole computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode. This is to secure the output time.

210 to 212 are diagrams showing configuration examples of the big hit determination threshold table. The big-hit determination threshold value table stores the hit-determination threshold value of the big-hit determination random number value for lottery for the big win of the special symbol.

The big hit threshold determination table shown in FIG. 210 is composed of a set value table selection address table and each set value determination threshold table. The big-hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 210 is an example of judging a big-hit when the random number value for big-hit determination is larger than the threshold value defined in the table.

In the set value table selection address table, the pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each set value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each setting value determination threshold table stores a threshold for low probability (normal state) and a threshold for high probability (variable probability state).

When judging a big hit, a pointer address defined in an address table for selecting a set value table is acquired, and this value is used as an offset to select a threshold judgment table for the current set value. Then, using the variable probability state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, the threshold value for big hit determination is acquired from the selected threshold value determination table. When the random number value for judging a big hit acquired at the time of winning of the start opening is equal to or greater than the acquired threshold value, it is determined as a big win, and when it is less than the threshold value, it is determined as a deviation.

The big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of a set value table selection address table and each set value determination threshold table. The big-hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is an example of judging a big-hit when the random number value for big-hit determination is within the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

In the set value table selection address table, the pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each set value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each setting value is the lower threshold at low probability (normal state), the upper threshold at low probability (normal state), the lower threshold at high probability (variable state), and the lower threshold at high probability (variable state). Stores the upper threshold.

When judging a big hit, a pointer address defined in an address table for selecting a set value table is acquired, and this value is used as an offset to select a threshold judgment table for the current set value. Then, by using the variable probability state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, it is determined whether the block is a low probability block or a high probability block in the selected threshold value determination table, and the lower limit threshold and upper limit for big hit determination Get the threshold. When the random number value for judging a big win acquired at the time of winning the starter is equal to or more than the acquired lower limit threshold and equal to or less than the upper threshold, it is judged as a big win, and when it is out of the range from the lower limit threshold to the upper limit threshold, it is judged as a deviation.

The big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 includes an address table for low probability setting value table selection, a determination threshold table for each setting value for low probability, an address table for high probability setting value table selection, and each setting for high probability. It consists of a value judgment threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of a low probability table and a high probability table, but the jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 has a low probability table and a high probability table. configured separately.

The low-probability setting value table selection address table defines the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected for each low-probability (normal state) setting value. defines the pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each set value of high probability (probability variable state). The data defined in each set value table selection address table may be configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold value table for each set value for low probability stores a lower limit threshold for a low probability (normal state) and an upper limit threshold for a low probability (normal state). The determination threshold value table for each set value for high probability stores a lower threshold value for a high probability (normal state) and an upper threshold value for a high probability (normal state).

At the time of jackpot determination, the address table for selecting the setting value table for low probability or the address table for selecting the setting value table for high probability is determined by the probability variable state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability). A set value is acquired as an offset from the address table for selecting the set value table, and the judgment threshold table corresponding to the current set value is selected by the acquired offset. When the random number value for judging a big win acquired at the time of winning the starter is equal to or more than the acquired lower limit threshold and equal to or less than the upper threshold, it is judged as a big win, and when it is out of the range from the lower limit threshold to the upper limit threshold, it is judged as a deviation.

[12-17. Example 2 of setting change/confirmation process]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972 .

213 and 214 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protection register (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid to enable access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312. FIG. It should be noted that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, a simple clear mode timer of a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2201), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2204). By once setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then setting it to OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2205). Any one of a plurality of general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information relating to computation in processing) provided in advance in the main control MPU 1311 may be used as the register. General-purpose registers are divided into bank 0 and bank 1, and bank 0 registers are used in step S2205. The register is provided in the main control RAM 1312, and is erased without retaining information at the time of power failure, and is different from the area of RAM where information is backed up at the time of power failure. Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has certainly started up, the hall If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state unintended by the hall employee. Therefore, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register or the like as temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By judging the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored later in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if the hall employee erroneously interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on. , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal indicates power failure (step S2206). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so the system waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2206.

Thereafter, a sub activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires to wait for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2207). Waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any period from power-on to transmission of the first command to the peripheral control board 1510 .

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal indicates power failure (step S2208). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, so the system waits in step S2208.

After that, setting value confirmation processing is executed to determine whether the setting value is within the normal range, and whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range (step S2209). Details of the setting value confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game control area (step S2210). This is because the information used in one process does not affect the other process in order to ensure the independence of the process outside the game control area and the process within the game control area. After that, when the power is turned on, a RAM confirmation process outside the game area is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2211). The details of the outside-game-area RAM checking process at power-on will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2212).

Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2214). The B and C registers used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general purpose registers. Note that the general-purpose registers of bank 0 are used in the processing at power-on.

The value set in the setting state management area in Example 2 is different from that shown in FIG. 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of example 2 is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 .

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, when the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Furthermore, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the setting change mode is updated from 03H to 02H, and the setting change mode is terminated from 02H to 00H.

Further, it determines whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, stores the determination result in the C register (steps S2215, S2216), and proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. Also, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been performed normally (the power failure processing has been performed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when the power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal (power-off processing is not normally executed).

Then, if there is no abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2217), and the information in the setting state management area is transferred to the B register. (step S2218) and proceeds to step S2219.

After that, a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2219).

Then, among the register values in which the values of the PF ports are recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2220). A general-purpose register different from the register provisionally set in S2213 and S2214 is used as the register in which the value of the PF port is stored. After that, it is determined using the values stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2221). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was in effect when the power failure occurred (step S2222). For example, when the value of the setting state management area is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality within the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2223). For example, using the determination results stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above, an abnormality in the game control area can be determined. As a result, if there is an abnormality either inside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 or outside the game control area, the process proceeds to step S2236.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure occurred during RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the saved value in the setting state management area is a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2236. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to the normal state. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the values in the setting state management area differ when jumping from steps S2226 and S2231 to step S2235. As described above, since the values in the setting state management area are different between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process associated with the setting change process, even if the same program is used for both RAM clearing processes, the calling source can be distinguished. , there is no need to provide a separate program, and the size of the program can be reduced.

Thereafter, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 was turned ON when the power was turned on (step S2226). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, the process proceeds to step S2235.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the values recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power supply, changing the settings, and turning on the power supply. That is, if it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 have been operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is supposed to go through the setting change without fail. In other words, since it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed before it is determined whether the state at the time of power failure is RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only with the change of the set value as a trigger.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, in order to restore the state before the power failure occurred, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on status buffer (step S2227).

After that, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on (step S2228). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2229), and the process proceeds to S2236. . That is, even if the state at the time of the power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the normal game state is entered. If the state at the time of the power failure is the setting confirmation mode and the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the game may shift to the same power failure confirmation mode as before the power failure instead of the normal game state.

Steps S2225 to S2229 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated. (step S2228) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, after judging the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2226), the operation of the setting key 971 may be judged (step S2228). Operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226).

If YES is determined in step S2221 or step S2222, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2266 described above, it is possible to determine the abnormality outside the game control area. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2235.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, RAM clear processing outside the game control area is executed. That is, the flag register is saved in the game area stack area (step S2232), and the outside game area RAM abnormality processing is executed (step S2233). The details of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the game area stack area in step S2232 is restored (step S2234).

Then, the setting value in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the area other than the setting state management area, and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2235). In other words, the RAM clear processing outside the game control area is not executed without going through the setting change. When the RAM is abnormal outside the game control area, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area in the same way as when the RAM is abnormal within the game control area, and the game stops. It is not possible. However, while the condition for clearing the RAM outside the game control area is only a setting change, the condition for clearing the RAM inside the game control area is a setting change and operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (even if no RAM abnormality has occurred). (when the RAM is forcibly cleared by an employee's operation).

In the RAM clearing process in the game area in step S2235, excluding the setting value and the setting state management area is because if the setting value becomes high due to an illegal RAM clearing operation by the player, damage will occur on the hall side. This is because if a problem (RAM abnormality) occurs during a game with high settings and the game is stopped, the high settings are changed to low settings by the RAM clearing operation, which causes damage to the player.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2236). When the power is turned off while commands are stored in the command buffer and the power is turned back on without clearing the RAM, the unsent commands stored in the command buffer are sent. For example, when the power supply is interrupted during the transmission of the variation command, the symbol command is transmitted, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be transmitted. Then, when only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, if a command that has not been transmitted during the setting change process is stored in the command buffer, the command that has not been transmitted during the setting process is transmitted after the power is restored, so that the peripheral control board 1510 There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state by In order to prevent such an abnormality from occurring, the command buffer is initialized in step S2236.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, the command buffer may be cleared only when starting the setting change process and when starting the setting confirmation process. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, so there is no need to clear the command buffer separately. However, in the setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is advisable to clear the command buffer when shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

After that, the function of the device (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized (step S2237), and the hardware random number (for example, win-lose random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2238). By activating the hardware random numbers in step S2238, the hardware random numbers are updated even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. may Then, power-on setting processing is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Finally, the timer interrupt is enabled (step S2240), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 221).

FIG. 215 is a flowchart of setting value confirmation processing. The setting value confirmation process is executed in step S2209 of the power-on process (FIG. 213) to determine whether the setting value in the setting state management area is within the normal range, and whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range. do. Note that the setting value confirmation process may be executed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, in addition to when the power is turned on. Also, it may be executed at the start of special symbol variation, or at the time of change in the game state (at the start and end of a big hit, probability variation, time reduction, etc.).

In the setting value confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value other than the value originally recorded in the setting state management area is set (step S2250). Since 00H to 03H are recorded in the setting state management area as shown in FIG. 220A, if a value of 04H or more is set, it is abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S2252.

On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 in which settings can be selected in stages from 1 to 6, the values of works in which the setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 6 or more is stored, it is determined to be outside the predetermined range.

If the set value is out of the predetermined range, a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to power-on processing. . On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to power-on processing.

Regarding the values and setting values recorded in the setting state management area, whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is also determined during the game progress (at each start of fluctuation, at the time of game state switching, etc.). For this reason, the conditions for determining that there is a RAM abnormality related to the setting state management area and setting values during the game, and the RAM abnormality when the power is turned on (the work area within the game area excluding the setting state management area and setting values, and the The two conditions for determining that the work RAM is abnormal are different. Part of these two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be the same. For example, if it is determined whether the setting state management area and the set value are abnormal even when the power is turned on, it can be said that the two determination conditions are partly the same.

The reason why the RAM abnormality determination conditions are different is that if the RAM abnormality determination regarding the setting value is performed only when the power is turned on, if the setting value is changed due to fraud or malfunction due to noise, etc. This is because it is desirable to detect the abnormality at an early stage and shorten the period during which the disadvantage occurs, because the problem will be disadvantageous to the user.

In addition, by subroutineing the RAM abnormality determination processing related to the setting state management area and the set value during the game, the same program can be used in a plurality of ways by calling the subroutine and determining the RAM abnormality as necessary during the game progress. It is possible to reduce the size of the program without providing it in place.

Also, the setting state management area is not subject to RAM abnormality determination at power-on, but may be handled in the same manner as other areas of the main control RAM 1312 as a RAM abnormality determination subject. By setting the setting state management area as a RAM abnormality determination object at power-on, if the setting change mode is set before the power failure and the RAM abnormality is determined at the time of power recovery, the RAM abnormality is prioritized. Therefore, it is desirable to initialize the values recorded in the setting state management area if an abnormality (that is, a RAM abnormality) occurs in the setting state management area. In this case, the storage area in which the setting value is stored in the main control RAM 1312 may be a target for RAM abnormality determination at power-on or may be excluded from RAM abnormality determination.

In addition, regarding the order of priority in the determination at the time of turning on the power, the RAM abnormality has the highest priority, and the normal game state has the lowest priority. Furthermore, entering the setting change mode has a higher priority than entering the setting confirmation mode and executing RAM clear processing by a RAM clear operation. By executing the determination process in the order of priority of the derived states in this way, it is possible to accurately derive the state with the highest priority even when a plurality of conditions are satisfied after the power is restored.

FIG. 216 is a flow chart of the outside-game-area RAM checking process when the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the outside game area RAM confirmation process is executed in step S2211 of the power on process (FIG. 213), and the abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is determined.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP saving buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), and sets the stack pointer value outside the game area value to the stack pointer (step S2261). , All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process are stored in the register saving buffer outside the game area (step S2262). It should be noted that the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all registers in the process executed outside the game control area.

Then, it is determined whether or not the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized by turning on the power for the first time or the like (step S2263). Specifically, if the value of the power down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5AH, it can be determined that the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by turning on the power for the first time.

If the main control RAM 1312 has not been initialized, for example, by turning on the power for the first time, the process proceeds to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by turning on the power for the first time, etc., the checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and whether the calculated checksum is normal is determined (step S2265).

If the calculated checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, the RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area (step S2266), and the process proceeds to step S2271. In addition, RAM abnormality outside the game control area is determined at S2231 based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area at S2266.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculated in step S2265 is normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is activated (step S2267), and the LED blink cycle timer is set to the blink cycle value (600 milliseconds) is set (step S2268), and the mode switching time (5 seconds) is set in the mode switching time timer (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking the upper two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and when the LED blinking cycle timer times out, it becomes one blinking cycle. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling mode switching in the base display 1317. When the mode switching time timer expires, the mode is switched to the base display mode.

Thereafter, the performance display monitor display management area is initialized by setting 0 (step S2270), and the process proceeds to step S2271.

After that, the power down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the calling source saved in the register save buffer outside the game area are restored (step S2272), and stored in the SP save buffer outside the game area. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to power-on processing.

FIG. 217 is a flow chart of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing. The RAM abnormality time process outside the game area is executed in step S2233 of the power-on process (FIG. 214), and the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP saving buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), sets the value of the stack pointer outside the game area to the stack pointer (step S2281), All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process are stored in the register saving buffer outside the game area (step S2282). It should be noted that the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all registers in the process executed outside the game control area.

Then, the RWM initialization process outside the use area is executed to initialize the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2283). Details of the out-of-use area RWM initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thereafter, the RAM normality determination value (00H) is set in the outside game area RAM abnormality determination area (EX_RWMERROR) of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2284, it is determined whether or not the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal in step S2231 when the power is turned on next time.

Then, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is activated (step S2285), the blinking cycle value (600 milliseconds) is set to the LED blinking cycle timer (step S2286), and the mode switching timer is set to the mode switching time timer. A switching time (5 seconds) is set (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying base values on base display 1317 .

Then, all the register values saved in the register save buffer outside the game area (the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the calling source saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288). , returns the stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the game area (step S2289), and returns to the power-on process of the caller.

FIG. 218 is a flow chart of RWM initialization processing outside the used area. The RWM initialization process outside the use area is executed in step S2283 of the RAM abnormality processing outside the game area, and initializes the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 .

First, the main control MPU 1311 initializes by writing 00H to the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2290). And it initializes by writing 00H in the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2291). After that, it returns to the outside game area RAM abnormality processing.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing. The power-on setting process is a subroutine and is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to perform initial settings when power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 220B, the power-on operation command is a 2-byte command that notifies the recording contents of the setting state management area. It is a value obtained by adding 1 to the area value.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is the initial value. Note that other bits should be set to 0 (step S2301). The reason why the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area is set to 1 is that the bit of the switch is detected as 1 at the time of the next timer interrupt, and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made

Next, the backup flag is cleared (step S2302).

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2303). If no value indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM is abnormal. Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a game-startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, it is a state in which a normal game can be started. The area is initialized (step S2304).

Thereafter, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in FIG. 220(C), the power-on state command is a command composed of 2 bytes, where the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte indicates the state before the power failure.

Then, a power-on recovery destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). As shown in FIG. 202(C), the power-on return destination command is a 2-byte command that notifies the game state related to special symbols. The state of the pattern and the operation state of the special electric accessory are shown. The power-on recovery destination command is sent once when the power is turned on.

Further, a setting value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). The setting value command, as shown in FIG. 202(D), is a 2-byte command for notifying a setting value, where the upper byte indicates A1H and the lower byte indicates the setting value.

In addition, along with the power-on state command, the power-on return destination command, and the set value command, a special symbol holding number command indicating the holding number of the special symbol variation display game is transmitted, and the holding number display is stopped on the effect display device 1600. You may restore to the state before occurrence. In addition, the order of transmission of the special symbol hold number command is to be transmitted during the transmission of these commands even after the transmission of the power-on state command, the power-on recovery destination command, and the setting value command, even before the transmission of these commands. may

After that, it returns to the calling process.

The power-on setting process is always executed regardless of whether the mode is the setting change mode. The power-on setting process is called from the setting process (FIG. 224) when it is detected that the setting key 971 is turned OFF and the setting change/confirmation process ends. At this time, 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, so all the processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

When executing the setting change/confirmation process, the power-on setting process is called from step S2239 of the power-on process and step S2355 of the setting process, so the power-on operation command is transmitted twice. On the other hand, if the setting change/confirmation process is not executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted once only by the power-on setting process called from step S2239 of the power-on process. The power-on operation command is sent to allow the peripheral control board 1510 to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM error, etc.). Peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving the command, performs notification corresponding to a setting change mode, a setting confirmation mode, a RAM abnormality, and the like.

In addition, in the setting/confirmation change mode, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, the adjustment of the volume and brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3) is stopped, and the adjustment by the hall employee (peripheral control board box 1520) may be effective. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

Also, in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the entire screen of the effect display device 1600 may be used to display whether it is the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM abnormal state. In this case, a voice message may be output indicating whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, some or all of the lamps (which may include the lamps provided on the door frame 3) may be used for notification.

FIG. 220B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recording contents of the setting state management area. Unlike the example shown in FIG. 202A, in Example 2, the lower byte becomes 04H when a RAM error occurs.

Specifically, the power-on operation command consists of 2 bytes, the upper byte being A0H, and the lower byte indicating the content recorded in the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during a normal game, and therefore if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error in which the output is 0. is set to 1.

Note that the power-on operation command is generated at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, a command A001H or A004H is created once in response to a hot start, RAM clear, or RAM abnormality, and a command A002H or A003H is created in power-on processing in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. After that, it is generated twice as the A001H command, once upon completion of setting change/confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, the above-mentioned Notification is performed in the manner in which the information is displayed (see FIG. 184). Although not shown in FIG. 184, the notification of the state in which the normal game can be started is performed by displaying a demo screen or performing a standby state to explain the contents of the game.

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H as the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent. It is determined to be invalid, and the game action (effect etc.) corresponding to the game command is not started. However, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, a game command during a normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), there is a possibility that the peripheral control board 1510 has missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to release the invalidation of the received game command and perform an effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in a state where the game commands are invalidated, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands is performed (for example, the effect corresponding to the received command is performed for symbol movements, lamps, movable bodies, sounds, etc.). ), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify the occurrence of an inconsistency in the game state. Also, the fact that the game state is inconsistent may be notified with a low volume. This is because unless any effect is performed until a predetermined condition is met, a player who cannot understand the occurrence of an inconsistency in the game state will not start the special symbol variation display game even if he/she wins the start gate. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the pachinko hall due to the pachinko machine 1 malfunctioning. In addition, even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing normal game processing, so the function displays such as special symbols and normal symbols on the function display unit 1400 are normally displayed. be done.

FIG. 220C is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on status command. Unlike the example shown in FIG. 202B in the above-described embodiment, the power-on state command of example 2 defines four states of 01H, 02H, 03H, and 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not a normal game can be started based on the contents recorded in the power-on state buffer, and for notifying the state before the power failure. For example, the power-on status command consists of 2 bytes. If the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized to notify RAM clear. Also, if the lower byte is 02H, the state before the power failure is a low probability/non-time saving state, and the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, indicating that the normal game can be started. Also, if the lower byte is 03H, the state before the power failure is a high probability/time saving state, and the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, indicating that the normal game can be started. Also, if the lower byte is 04H, the state before the power failure is a low probability/time saving state, and the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, indicating that the normal game can be started.

As described above, the power-on state buffer is a storage area for storing information on the game state at the time of the power failure in order to restore the state before the power failure occurred. , the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the power-on state buffer is stored. For example, in the low-probability non-shortening of working hours, 1 is stored in the power-on state buffer, and 2 obtained by adding 1 to this value is stored in the power-on state command. Also, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, the power-on state buffer is 0, so the power-on state command stores 1 and can notify that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

FIG. 221 is a flow chart of main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The main control side main process is executed after step S2240 of the power-on process (FIG. 214).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2310). In another example 2, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored in the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, if the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period in which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred in

If the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2311). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described in FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for judging winning in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery.

On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is detected, power failure processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. In the power failure process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2312). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S2313). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. It should be noted that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to ensure that the main-board-side power-off process is completed.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game area (step S2314), the power OFF processing is executed, and necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off (step S2315). The details of the power-off processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the game area stack area is restored (step S2316).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates the checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is held normally, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. In addition, the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting state management (set value and the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power failure processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2318). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, write RAM protection valid (write prohibited) and prohibited area invalid to the RAM protect register, prohibit writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2319), and wait until recovery from power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. Therefore, by invalidating the prohibited area of the RAM protect register, the reset function by accessing the main control RAM 1312 is canceled (not reset), and access to the entire area is enabled. It should be noted that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 222 is a flowchart of processing when the power is turned off. The power-off processing is executed in step S2315 of the main control-side main processing (FIG. 221), and executes necessary processing before the power is turned off.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP saving buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), sets the value of the stack pointer outside the game area to the stack pointer (step S2321), All register values are stored in the register saving buffer outside the game area (step S2322).

Subsequently, the checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in the outside game area checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). After that, 5AH is set in the power down check area (EX_PDIND), and it is recorded that the RAM area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2324). If 5AH is recorded in the power down check area, the power failure process has been executed normally. In this sense, the power down check area and the RAM backup flag in the game control area are substantially the same. Since the power failure process is normally executed, it is already determined that the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is normal, and as a result, if 5AH is set in the power down check area, the main control The initialization of the area outside the game control area of the RAM 1312 has been completed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two types of flags indicating that the power failure process has been normally executed are provided in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, respectively. . This is because it is determined twice in the game control area and outside the game control area, and since one storage area is not shared between the inside of the game control area and the outside of the game control area, This is because it is desirable to process. For example, if there is only one flag indicating that power failure processing has been performed normally, 5AH is erroneously set to the flag, and if power failure processing is not performed and the power is restored, it is mistakenly assumed that power failure processing has been performed normally. determined by This double determination reduces the possibility of erroneous determination.

Furthermore, the two flags should be provided in separate areas (for example, areas where the lower bytes (**00H to **FFH) or the upper bytes (00**H or 01**H) of addresses do not overlap). Even if the data is rewritten due to a problem such as noise, it can be restored correctly.

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the calling source, saved in the register save buffer outside the game area, are restored (step S2325), and stored in the SP save buffer outside the game area. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2326), and the caller is returned.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group, and bank switching is performed. Both banks of registers cannot be used without Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of an interrupt, and the RET It returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is restored. If a configuration is adopted in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt process to restore bank 0. FIG.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to enable interrupts, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not an interrupt is enabled is set to an interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless an interrupt is permitted (EI instruction, etc.) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state is not entered.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2331).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2332). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312 as input information.

Note that switch input processing 1 in step S2332 is processing related to winning signals, and switch input processing 2 in step S2080 of FIG. Therefore, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, NO is determined in step S2335, so winning is detected, but fraud by the fraud detection sensor is not detected. Note that even if winning is detected, prize ball payout, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by hall employees, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and that fraud is not detected. For example, since settings are changed or checked while the door is open, the door frame 3 and main body frame 4, which are connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge members, are likely to sway. Vibration may be falsely detected. Therefore, such erroneous reporting can be prevented by stopping fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In addition, hall employees have magnets to collect balls that have fallen on the floor, which can prevent false alarms from the magnets held by employees when changing or confirming settings. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has means for invalidating (or restricting, regulating, suppressing, etc.) fraud detection, and after shifting to normal game processing (for example, initial setting processing at power-on) ), the fraud detection is enabled, and in a specific gaming state (for example, during the setting process), the means disables (or limits, regulates, suppresses, etc.) the fraud detection.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input process 1 and monitor specific types of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person (goto master) who tries to commit a fraudulent act forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2333). In the random number update process 1, the random number for judging a big hit, the random number for a big hit design, and the random number for a small hit design are updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, for changing the initial value of the random number for determining the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the minor symbol to be updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination. In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, the random number is updated even when executing the setting process for changing the set value. This is because the hardware random numbers that determine wins and losses are updated regardless of whether settings are being changed or settings are being checked. By updating even during the process of setting change and setting confirmation, inconsistency between hardware random numbers and software random numbers is unlikely to occur, and the expected value of the performance in the game and the expected value of the expected value that leads to the big win at the time of a specific performance. It is possible to suppress the divergence from

Thereafter, the set value confirmation process (FIG. 215) is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2334). The set value confirmation process is periodically executed in the timer interrupt process. When switching, at the start or end of a jackpot game, at the start or end of a time-saving state), at the time of fraud detection (for example, when the door is opened, when magnetism is detected). Resource consumption of the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed by judging when a specific condition is satisfied, even if the judgment is not performed regularly in a short period as in the execution of timer interrupt processing.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By checking the value of the setting status management area after the setting value checking process (step S2334, FIG. 215), if the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the value of the setting status management area can be checked immediately after (S2335). It is controlled so that normal game processing is not executed. If a value indicating game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game start is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2336). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal turns on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the LED display switching appears mixed. to prevent flickering of the LED.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is saved in the game area stack area (step S2338). Then, the test signal output process is executed to output the test signal (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved in the game area stack area (step S2340). Before and after the execution of the processing for outputting the test signal is started, the stack pointer and the register are saved in the same manner as other processing outside the game area, and are restored after the processing is completed. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as processing outside the game control area. It should be noted that the test signal processing may be executed as processing within the game control area if it does not affect the game even if it is executed as processing within the game control area. When the test signal processing is executed as processing within the game control area, saving and restoring the flag register (steps S2337, S2340) executed before and after the test signal output processing (step S2339) becomes unnecessary.

Then, setting processing is executed (step S2341). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thereafter, setting display processing is executed (step S2342). Details of the setting display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read at step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a multi-byte FIFO format transmission information storage area. This transmission information storage area stores a command generated each time a command is generated, and the values (commands) stored in the transmission information storage area are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . It should be noted that each time a command is generated, the generated command may be directly stored in the FIFO format transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2344). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the bank of the register (step S2345), and returns to the processing before the interrupt.

The processing after it is determined in step S2335 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area is the same as the processing described above with reference to FIG. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process proceeds to step S2343 in FIG.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart of setting processing. The setting process is executed in step S2341 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area does not indicate the normal game state (00H), and mainly executes the process of changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, a power-on command is created (step S2351), and the process returns to the calling source.

As a result, in the case of a RAM abnormality, the power-on operation command (A004H) indicating the RAM abnormality is transmitted at each timer interrupt until the RAM abnormality is cleared. This is because if the power-on operation command indicating the RAM abnormality is sent only once, the RAM abnormality notification will not be sent again if the command is missing, so the peripheral control board 1510 cannot know the state of the gaming machine. is. Also, since the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the state of the game machine, the abnormality notification will not be performed. In addition, when the RAM is abnormal, the game is not played, so commands other than the power-on operation command are not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, as long as the RAM abnormality continues, the power-on operation command is repeatedly transmitted. are doing.

That is, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment is triggered by execution of regular processing (timer interrupt processing) that is executed every predetermined period in commands of the same system (for example, operation command at power-on), and executes a predetermined number of times (for example, , 1, 2, 3, etc.), and the second case, in which the number of times is not limited during operation of the pachinko machine and is repeatedly transmitted in a predetermined cycle. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly transmitted regardless of whether the peripheral control board 1510 has received it correctly, and other game-related commands are not transmitted when the normal game is stopped. is the command to be sent.

When peripheral control board 1510 receives a command regarding RAM abnormality, it notifies about RAM abnormality. Even if the same command is received again during the RAM abnormality notification, it is preferable to invalidate the received command regarding the RAM abnormality and continue the current notification. By invalidating the subsequent command, for example, it is possible to prevent the voice notification from being repeated from the beginning, and the normal notification can be performed.

Commands related to RAM abnormality may always be the same, but may differ depending on the timing of transmission. Command consistency may be determined by changing a command related to a RAM abnormality depending on the timing of transmission. For example, by setting the power-on operation command (A004H) that is transmitted when the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on and the power-on operation command (A005H) that is transmitted when the RAM is abnormal during a normal timer interrupt. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command (A005H) after the power-on command (A004H), it can determine that the RAM abnormality at power-on continues. On the other hand, when the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), after the power is restored (for example, during normal play), the setting values recorded in the main control RAM 1312 and the setting state management area can be determined to be abnormal. In this way, the notification mode can be made different for each of the two determined states. For example, if the RAM abnormality continues at the time of power-on, it is possible to notify that the RAM is abnormal, and if the RAM abnormality occurs after the power is restored, it is possible to notify that the setting value is abnormal.

It should be noted that while the RAM abnormality is being notified, the player's setting adjustment function (for example, adjustment of volume and brightness by operating buttons provided on the door frame 3) may be stopped. This is because the setting adjustment operation by the player during the RAM abnormality notification is considered to be an erroneous operation. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process related to the special design and the normal design is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM abnormality can be corrected by turning off the power once, executing power failure processing, and then, when turning on the power again, by operating the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 to activate the setting change mode. Then, the RAM abnormality is resolved. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to its original state, the setting change mode is terminated and the normal game can be started.

When the power is turned on again, if an operation other than starting the setting change mode is performed with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954, the value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained. The RAM abnormal state continues and the normal game cannot be started. In other words, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and return to the normal game state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if no value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ON to OFF change.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (it is determined that the setting change or setting confirmation is completed), the security signal output timer is set for the output time (step S2353), and the setting state management area is initialized (step S2353). S2354), the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2355), and the process returns to the calling process.

When an operation to terminate the setting change mode (turning off the setting key 971) is performed, by setting an output time value in the security signal output timer, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is terminated can be set. prepare. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), the shortest output signal of the security signal is set to the security signal output timer as the output time value. This ensures that the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Further, when fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, it is preferable to output the security signal for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

In addition, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal turns OFF, when the hot start is performed in the normal game state when the power is restored, the security signal for the remaining time is output, and when the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared by setting change, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset by the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, and the output of the security signal accompanying the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is started.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, one of five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation occurs.

When shifting to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, a security signal is output due to the continued RAM abnormality because the setting change operation has not been performed even after the power is restored. If the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and power failure occurs before the delay time elapses, or in the case of a hot start after the power is restored, the security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even if the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time (for example, during the startup wait time of the peripheral control board 1510), the timer interrupt process starts. After the transition, output of the security signal resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, there is provided a period during which the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
・When the power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs while security signals are being output due to fraud detection, etc. ・After a power failure occurs while security signals are being output due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues. - After a power failure occurs while security signals are being output in setting change mode, the power is restored and the setting change mode continues. and the setting confirmation mode continues

In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, the hall computer can respond to the security signal by stopping the output of the security signal for a predetermined period after the power is restored. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or whether the state accompanying the output of the security signal has been released.

In the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends regardless of the remaining time for which the security signal is output. Stop outputting the security signal after the elapse. Also, in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, it is preferable to perform the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356). If it is determined to be in mode, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S2357). Note that the setting change switch 972 may be configured to be used also as the RAM clear switch 954 . As a result, if it is determined that a value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). If the set value exceeds the upper limit of 6, it is set to 0 (steps S2359 and S2360). After that, it returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. return to the calling process.

When determining whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON. In this way, if the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, even if the setting change mode is in effect at the time of power failure and the setting key 971 is not turned ON at the time of recovery from the power failure, the setting change switch 972 is turned on. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by an operation.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of setting display processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The setting display process is executed in step S2342 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area does not indicate the normal game state (00H), and the process of displaying the setting value is executed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment port (step S2370).

Then, it is determined whether a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If no value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

After that, an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2374), and the driver is driven to output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2375). , return to the calling process.

[12-18. Another example 3 of setting change/confirmation process]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In another example 3 described below, the main difference from the above-described example 2 is that timer interrupt processing for setting change processing is provided separately from timer interrupt processing for normal games. Processes other than those described below are the same as those of Example 2 described above.

In addition, in Example 3, as in Example 2, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the setting change switch 972 may be used to describe the operation for changing the setting value.

226 and 227 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from address 8000, which is the starting address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protection register (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In this example 3, in order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid to enable access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312. FIG. It should be noted that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, the predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksum does not match or if the backup flag is not set normally, the function of the game machine is stopped as a RAM error, and the setting change operation is not performed after the game cannot be played. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized and the game is controlled so as not to be executed.

Therefore, if the prohibited area of the RAM protection register is set to valid, a reset occurs due to erroneous access to the prohibited area of the RAM due to a malfunction or defect. Since the power failure process has not been executed, the checksum has not been calculated, and the backup flag has not been set, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. If it is determined that there is a RAM abnormality, not only is the game initialized by RAM clearing processing, but the game cannot be restarted unless the hall employee performs a RAM abnormality cancellation operation (setting change operation), so the RAM protect register is prohibited. It is desirable to set the area to "disabled".

Note that the prohibited area may be set valid. By setting the prohibited area to valid, if the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 is accessed illegally, etc., the game cannot be restarted unless the hall clerk performs a RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation). can improve resistance to fraud.

Next, a simple clear mode timer of a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2401), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2404). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power failure warning signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal state (not a power failure state).

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2405). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has certainly started up, the hall If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state unintended by the hall employee. Therefore, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register or the like as temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By judging the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored later in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if the hall employee erroneously interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on. , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal indicates power failure (step S2406). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so the system waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2406. Since the watchdog timer is not cleared in the loop of step S2406, the watchdog timer is reset unless the power failure is canceled. This reset by the watchdog timer immediately starts the program from the start address without executing a security check like the system reset, and executes the power-on processing. Therefore, the loop of step S2406 is not exited until the power failure warning signal is canceled.

In this way, the power failure determination process for detecting the power failure warning signal is performed in steps S2406 and S2408 during the power-on process, and in step S2450 of the main control side main process during the normal game. running in place. In the latter (step S2450), power failure processing is executed after step S2462 by detecting a power failure, but in the former (steps S2406 and 2408), power failure processing is not performed even if a power failure is detected. Since the checksum value and the backup flag value are maintained during the loop period, the state at the time of the power failure can be restored correctly without executing power failure processing.

The reset in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a system reset generated by the reset circuit and a user reset generated by access outside the designated area of the watchdog timer or the game control RAM 1312 . A system reset launches a program after security checks are performed for several hundred milliseconds, while a user reset launches the program immediately without performing security checks when the reset is released.

Therefore, for example, if a watchdog timer resets during normal game processing, the power failure processing is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, so it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. be. When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game state is initialized by RAM clear processing, and the game cannot be restarted unless the hall clerk performs a RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation). On the other hand, in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, even if a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer, the hall clerk does not perform the RAM abnormality cancellation operation (setting change operation), and the state at the time of the power failure is correctly restored. can return.

Thus, regarding the reset generated by the watchdog timer, the setting change operation for canceling the RAM abnormality is required in order to restart the pachinko machine 1, and the case where it is not required is usually provided. When the watchdog timer resets during the game, it is when a software problem occurs, the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is destroyed, and the contents different from the game state at the time of the power failure are stored. Therefore, it is desirable to initialize the main control RAM 1312. On the other hand, the occurrence of a reset by the watchdog timer in the power-on processing occurs when a hardware failure occurs, and the possibility of destroying the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is low. This is because there is little need to convert

Although the reset generated by the watchdog timer has been described above, similar processing is performed for other types of user resets than the reset generated by the watchdog timer. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of reset factors, and the above-described processing can be executed by a reset (for example, a user reset by a watchdog timer) caused by one of the reset factors.

Thereafter, a sub activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer times out, and activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for (step S2407). Waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any period from when the power is turned on until the first command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, even if it is not after the setting value is determined.

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal indicates power failure (step S2408). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, so the system waits in step S2408. It should be noted that the determination of whether the power failure warning signal indicates a power failure may be made in either step S2406 or S2408 instead of in both.

After that, the setting value confirmation process shown in FIG. 215 is executed to determine whether the setting value is within the normal range (step S2409).

Thereafter, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game control area (step S2410), and the power-on time RAM confirmation process outside the game area shown in FIG. (Step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2412).

Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2414).

The value set in the setting state management area in Example 3 is different from that shown in FIG. 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of example 3 is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and for example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 .

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, when the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Furthermore, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the setting change mode is updated from 03H to 02H, and the setting change mode is terminated from 02H to 00H.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 (steps S2415 and S2416). Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. Also, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been performed normally (the power failure processing has been performed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when the power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal (power-off processing is not normally executed).

Then, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 or outside the game control area, the process proceeds to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2417), and the information in the setting state management area is transferred to the B register. (step S2418) and proceeds to step S2219. As a result, the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is set in the C register. Therefore, in the subsequent processing, the RAM abnormality is determined as the determination of "RAM abnormality" and "game state before power failure". There is no need to re-execute processing (processing for determining whether checksums and backup flags match), and the size of the program can be reduced.

In addition, in the B register, the value of the setting state management area at the time of power failure or the determination result (RAM abnormal value) of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power restoration is set, and the RAM abnormal value is provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419. By setting this, unnecessary processing can be deleted and the size of the program can be reduced. For example, if the RAM abnormal value is not provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, and if YES is determined in steps S2423 and S2424, the RAM abnormal value is set in the setting state management area and step S2436 is performed. It is necessary to execute a JUMP instruction to However, since the RAM abnormal value has already been temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419, by designating S2436 as the JUMP destination at the time of determination in step S2423, as shown in the source code example illustrated below, the JUMP Order can be reduced.

Source code example when RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in step S2419
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421 (bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear SW)
JR Z, RESET_P_6 ;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6 ;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR Z,$111 ;
$000:
LD W,03H ;Equivalent to S2419
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
JR S2436 ;Jump instruction to S2436
$111:
CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,$000 ;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;

Example of source code when temporary setting of RAM abnormal value in step S2419
LD W,03H ;S2419
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421
JR Z, RESET_P_6 ;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6 ;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR NZ,S2436 ;

CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,S2436 ;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;

After that, in step S2419, a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

Then, among the register values in which the values of the PF ports are recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2420). After that, it is determined using the values stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2421). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was set when the power failure occurred (step S2422). For example, when the value of the B register set in step S2418 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality within the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above, it is possible to determine an abnormality in the game control area. As a result, if there is an abnormality either inside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 or outside the game control area, the process proceeds to step S2436.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure occurred during RAM abnormality processing (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting state management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value (03H) indicating RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2436. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2419 is reset to 00H as a temporary setting value. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the values in the setting state management area differ when jumping from steps S2426 and S2431 to step S2435. Therefore, since the value of the setting state management area differs between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process associated with the setting change process, even if the same program is used for both RAM clearing processes, the calling source cannot be distinguished. , there is no need to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

As shown in the source code example exemplified below, at the timing of step S2425, it is not determined whether 01H or 00H is recorded in the setting state management area. The determined value should be set in the setting state management area at the time of determination, but in that case, 00H is set in the setting state management area after the RAM clearing process when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on. A recording process is required. Therefore, since the contents of processing are different between the power-on processing and the RAM clear processing at the time of setting change, dedicated processing is required for each portion other than the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312 . Therefore, 00H is provisionally set in step S2425 in order to share the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312 when the setting is changed and when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated.

Source code example when 00H is not temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2425
CP A,10H ;S2426 (PF port information is stored in A register)
JR NZ,$000 ;(bit5: setting key bit4: RAM clear SW)

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A ;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR NZ,$111 ;

LD W,01H ;S2429
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
JR S2436;

$000:
XOR W,W ;Equivalent to S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
JR S2435 ;increase

$111:
XOR W,W ;increment
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;increase
JR S2436 ;increase

S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
・・・・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

Source code example when 00H is provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2425
XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;

CP A,10H ;S2426
JR NZ,S2435 ;

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A ;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR Z,S2436 ;

LD W,01H ;
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W ;
・・・・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

Thereafter, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 was turned ON when the power was turned on (step S2426). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, the process proceeds to step S2435.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the values recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power supply, changing the settings, and turning on the power supply. That is, if it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 have been operated (setting change operation), the setting status management area changes from the value indicating RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is supposed to go through the setting change without fail. In other words, since it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed before it is determined whether the state at the time of power failure is RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only with the change of the set value as a trigger.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the work area and the stack area in the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, even if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is possible to automatically return to the normal game state.

Also, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is cut off, when the work area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area is determined to be normal when the power is restored, The game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this way, the normal game state can be restored by the ON/OFF operation of the power switch.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is cut off, when the power is restored, it is determined that the work area in the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area is normal, and the RAM is cleared. When the switch is operated, the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. By doing so, it is possible to return to the normal game state by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is turned off.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is cut off, when the power is restored, it is determined that the work area in the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area is normal, and the setting When the key 971 is operated, the work area and the stack area of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, the normal game state can be restored by operating the setting key 971 after the power is cut off.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, in order to restore the game state before the power failure occurred, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on status buffer (step S2427). In this way, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, each game state (for example, low probability state or high probability state, time saving state or non-time saving state) corresponding to production (background, decorative pattern mode (low probability time and high probability) are prepared for returning to the original state.In step S2300 of the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439, the power-on operation command used in creating the

After that, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on (step S2428). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2429), and the process proceeds to S2436. . That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the setting confirmation mode is entered.

Steps S2425 to S2429 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated. (step S2428) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, after judging the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2426), the operation of the setting key 971 may be judged (step S2428). Operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426).

If YES is determined in step S2421 or step S2422, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2431). For example, using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above, it is possible to determine an abnormality outside the game control area. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2435.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the game area stack area (step S2432), and the game area RAM abnormality processing shown in FIG. 217 is executed (S2433). Thereafter, the flag register saved in the game area stack area in step S2432 is restored (step S2434).

Then, the work area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2435). An unused area provided between the work area and the stack area may be initialized together.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). When the power is turned off without clearing the RAM after the power is turned off while commands are stored in the command buffer, the unsent commands stored in the command buffer are transmitted. For example, when the power supply is interrupted during the transmission of the variation command, the symbol command is transmitted, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be transmitted. Then, when only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, if a command that has not been transmitted during the setting change process is stored in the command buffer, the command that has not been transmitted during the setting process is transmitted after the power is restored, so that the peripheral control board 1510 There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state by In order to prevent such an abnormality from occurring, the command buffer is initialized in step S2436.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, the command buffer may be cleared when starting the setting change process or when starting the setting confirmation process. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, so there is no need to clear the command buffer separately. However, in the setting confirmation process, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is good to clear the command buffer when moving to setting confirmation.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2437). Specifically, a timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC0 for setting change processing, and CTC0 is set to allow interrupts. In addition, the time of CTC1 for controlling timer interrupt processing in the normal game state is not set, and the interrupt of CTC1 for normal game remains set to be prohibited.

Then, the hardware random number (for example, win-lose random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2438), the update of the hardware random number is started, and the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2439).

Finally, the timer interrupt is enabled (step S2440), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 228).

FIG. 228 is a flow chart of main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227).

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes first main loop processing (steps S2450 to S2453) for setting change processing. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 3, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored in the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, if the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period in which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred in In another example 3, timer interrupt processing for setting processing and timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, so power failure may be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. For this reason, the same program (code ) into each timer interrupt process, the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power failure warning signal is detected, power failure processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so interrupts are set to be prohibited (step S2451), and it is checked whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area. Determine (step S2452). If a value indicating game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game start is not recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt is set to be permitted (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for setting change process is repeatedly executed. .

When it is determined in step S2452 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, after switching the interrupt timer to the normal game, the second main loop processing for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458) to run. Before executing the second main loop process, first, set the timer interrupt cycle time in CTC1 for normal game (step S2454), stop the interrupt of CTC0 (timer interrupt for setting process), interrupt the CTC1 ( Timer interrupt for normal game processing) is activated (step S2455), and interrupt permission is set (step S2456).

After that, a power failure warning signal is obtained, and it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure warning signal is detected, power failure processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described in FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for judging winning in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery. After that, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed.

When the power failure warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power failure processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the main control side main process shown in FIG. 228, in the power failure process, a process of backing up data for restoring the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. It should be noted that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to ensure that the main-board-side power-off process is completed.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game area (step S2464), the power OFF processing is executed, and necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area (step S2465). ). The details of the power-off processing are as shown in FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the game area stack area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates the checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is held normally, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. In addition, the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting state management (set value and the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power failure processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, write a setting value for validating RAM protection (writing prohibited) and invalidating the prohibited area to the RAM protection register, prohibiting writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and waiting until recovery from the power failure ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In this embodiment, the reset function due to access to this prohibited area is cancelled, allowing access to all areas. By designating an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area to be valid in the RAM protection register, when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 It may be reset.

In the above-described processing, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), processing when the power is turned off (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated one, and other orders may be used.

In example 3, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main processing on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt processing, and the power failure processing may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power failure signal at least at the start and end, measure the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output, and if the measurement result reaches a predetermined value It is preferable to detect the occurrence of a power failure.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 228, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing and the timer interrupt for normal game. There is an opportunity to execute the timer interrupt processing of Also, in this execution opportunity, timer interrupt processing for setting change processing may not be executed (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) executes processing for calculating the base value, and the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing calculates unnecessary base values. It is possible to switch between executing the processing for calculating the base value and not executing the processing. In another example 3, timer interrupt processing for setting processing and timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, so power failure may be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. For this reason, the same program (code ) into each timer interrupt process, the size of the program can be reduced.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 .

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group. It is configured so that one of the banks can be used by In this embodiment, the register bank 0 is used in the main control side main process, and the register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt process for setting process or normal game. Therefore, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of an interrupt, and the RET It returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. This is because the bank flag stored in the flag register is restored by executing the RET instruction. If a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, it is necessary to return to bank 0 by executing a bank switching instruction at the end of timer interrupt processing.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to enable interrupts, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not an interrupt is enabled is set to an interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless an interrupt is permitted (EI instruction, etc.) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state is not entered.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312 as input information.

Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, NO is determined in step S2473, so the winning detection is performed. , no fraud is detected. Note that even if winning is detected, prize ball payout, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by hall employees, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and that fraud is not detected.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input process 1 and monitor specific types of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person (goto master) who tries to commit a fraudulent act forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like. For example, while a hall employee is changing or checking settings, the door is open and the sensor attached to the door is positioned to approach the next pachinko machine. Therefore, while the setting change operation or setting confirmation is being performed, it is possible to detect any fraudulent activity caused by radio waves or the like in the neighboring pachinko machine.

Then, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interrupt process for the setting change process, the value of the game state management area is usually other than 00H (01H to 03H), so the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is displayed in the setting state management area. Although it is not necessary to determine whether or not is recorded, determination is purposely made in order to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally shifting to the setting change mode during the normal game.

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process for changing the setting value and setting display (steps S2474 to S2478) is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2479. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). , a solenoid signal such as a large winning opening and an electric chew, and a response signal (ACK) at the time of command reception to the payout control board 951 . After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal turns on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the LED display switching appears mixed. to prevent flickering of the LED.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2477). After that, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2478).

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission command. A value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer in the FIFO format of multiple bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510 . Since the capacity of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is finite, unsent commands remain in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is full or full. , it is preferable to control whether the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit according to the free state of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it determines whether the free space in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is larger than the size (number of bytes) of the command to be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. It may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, each time the command transmission process to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed, a predetermined upper limit is set for the size of the command to be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. If the size of commands to be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit exceeds a predetermined upper limit without judging the free space, all the commands cannot be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, in the peripheral board command transmission process executed in the next timer interrupt process, the remaining commands should be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

It should be noted that the upper limit number should be set equal to or less than the amount of data that can be transmitted by the serial communication circuit (SIO) in one timer interrupt period. For example, if the communication speed of the serial communication circuit is 20 kbps and the timer interrupt period is 4 ms, serial communication of approximately 80 bits is possible in one timer interrupt period. If one command consists of 20 bits, 80/20=4, so the upper limit should be 4 commands. In practice, the upper limit may be set to 5 commands, which is one more command. This is because although the maximum command length was assumed to be 20 bits, there are many commands shorter than the maximum length.

Regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set for the amount of command data stored in the transmission information storage area in one command transmission process, data is stored in the transmission information storage area so that the transmission information storage area does not become full. It is preferable that the capacity of the storage area in which the previous command is stored be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the transmission information storage area.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the bank of the register (step S2481), and returns to the processing before the interrupt.

Unlike the other timer interrupt processes, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 229 does not execute the random number update process (R_ATART_K). As with the random number, the random number update process may be executed in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process.

In another example 3, the test signal output process is called in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process even if it is executed in the timer interrupt process for the normal game (for example, the output data setting process S2505 in FIG. 230). good too.

FIG. 230 is a flow chart of the normal game timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311 .

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one is used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group. Any bank can be used by In this embodiment, the register bank 0 is used in the main control side main process, and the register bank 1 is used in the setting process or the timer interrupt process for normal games. Therefore, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of an interrupt, and the RET It returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. This is because the bank flag stored in the flag register is restored by executing the RET instruction. If a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, it is necessary to return to bank 0 by executing a bank switching instruction at the end of timer interrupt processing.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to enable interrupts, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not an interrupt is enabled is set to an interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless an interrupt is permitted (EI instruction, etc.) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state is not entered.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2491).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2492). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312 as input information.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2493). In the random number update process 1, the random number for judging a big hit, the random number for a big hit design, and the random number for a small hit design are updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, for changing the initial value of the random number for determining the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the minor symbol to be updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination.

Thereafter, switch input special processing is executed (step S2494).

Thereafter, timer update processing is executed (step S2495). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol indicator 1185 lights up according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process, the normal symbol fluctuation determined by the normal symbol and normal electric auditors control process In addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payout control board 951 normally receives various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not there is an input is performed. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, prize ball control processing is executed (step S2496). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written in the main control RAM 1312 . In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is performed. create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a 2-channel output serial communication circuit, transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 on one channel, and transmits a command to the payout control board 951 on the other channel. The transfer rate (baud rate) of serial communication can be set for each channel. For example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, as for the transfer rate, the transfer rate on the payout control board 951 side may be set lower than the transfer data on the peripheral control board 1510 side. Since the prize balls controlled by the payout control board 951 have game value, they are not easily affected by noise and the like. On the side of the peripheral control board 1510, since commands for effects not accompanied by game values are transmitted, the effects can be restored by the next command. It is desirable to send the command to the peripheral control board 1510 quickly so as not to make the user feel uncomfortable. It should be noted that the performance response is poor (for example, even if a game ball wins in the starting winning hole and the special symbol display on the function display unit 1400 starts to change, the decorative symbols on the performance display device 1600 do not start to fluctuate). This is because the player feels uneasy about the malfunction.

Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2497). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, frame status display command, error cancellation notification command, etc.), memorize to Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to perform notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 is adapted to the command system for transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510. and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Also, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, it generates a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit. Note that the main ACK signal may be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, fraud detection processing is executed (step S2498). In the fraudulent activity detection process, an abnormal state (magnetism, vibration, winning anomaly, etc.) related to fraud is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and when it is detected that the game ball is entering the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 by the count switch when it is not in the jackpot game state, the main control program generates a prize-winning abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, a switch-passing command output process is executed to create a command corresponding to the detection of the passage of various switches relating to the winning switch and the starting switch and set it in the transmission information storage area (step S2499).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2500), and the base display output process is executed (step S2501). The base display output process is a process executed using the second area outside the game control area, unlike other processes, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, before and after the execution of the base display output processing, the predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area, and the base display It is set so that it is not updated in the output process. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2502).

Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric accessary product control process is executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuation state is established based on the big hit symbol random number value. Determine whether to migrate. Then, when the big win random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open and close the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 . When the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this determination, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded), and the gaming state is such that game balls can be received in the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. Then, the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state for the player. Further, when the variable probability transition condition is established, the state is shifted to the probability variable state after that, and when the variable probability transition condition is not established, the state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "variable probability state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the odds of winning the special lottery are set relatively high compared to the normal game state (low probability state).

Subsequently, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is executed (step S504). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol per determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal per symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" “General Lottery”). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the ordinary lottery. When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be received in the starting port 2004. A game advantageous to the player. transition to state.

Subsequently, output data setting processing is executed (step S2505). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311 . For example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, when normally receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 output the main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or jackpot game When in the state, output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that performs opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the large winning opening 2005, 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that performs the opening and closing operation of the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), as output information to the hall computer, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as an output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output information, a start winning prize information output signal, and a security signal are output to the external terminal board 784 . Also, in the output data setting process, the test signal output process may be executed to output the test signal.

Also, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input special process (step S2494) is output from the external terminal plate 784. FIG. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 every predetermined number of out balls (10, etc.).

Also, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read at step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer in the FIFO format of multiple bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510 .

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2507). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the bank of the register (step S2508), and returns to the processing before the interrupt.

[12-18. Another example 4 of setting change/confirmation process]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In another example 4 described below, the processing related to the setting change is executed in the main processing on the main control side instead of the timer interrupt processing. Processes other than those described below are the same as those of Example 3 described above.

In addition, in Example 4, as in Example 2, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the setting change switch 972 may be used to describe the operation for changing the setting value.

FIG. 231 is a flow chart of main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227). The main-control-side main process of another example 4 executes steps S2481 to S2484 in place of step S2452 of the main-control-side main process of another example 3 (FIG. 228). Execution of setting change and setting confirmation processing in the main control side main processing is not limited to the case of separately providing timer interrupt processing for setting processing and timer interrupt processing for normal game processing as in Example 4. It is also applicable to example 1 and example 2. For example, the main control main process shown in FIG. 231 includes a first main loop process for setting process (steps S2450 to S2453) and a second main loop process for normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). Also in the main loop process, one timer interrupt process (FIG. 196 of another example 1, FIG. 223 of another example 2) is executed. ) and normal game processing are executed. In this case, since only one timer interrupt process is executed in the main loop, switching of CTC in steps S2454 and S2455, which will be described later, is unnecessary.

In the main-control-side main process shown in FIG. 231, the same processes as those of the main-control-side main process (FIG. 228) of Example 3 are given the same reference numerals.

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes first main loop processing (steps S2450 to S2453) for setting processing. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2450). In Example 4, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored in the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the power failure is detected. For example, if the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period in which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred in In another example 4, timer interrupt processing for setting processing and timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, so power failure may be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. For this reason, the same program (code ) into each timer interrupt process, the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power failure warning signal is detected, power failure processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so interrupts are disabled (step S2451), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2482). After that, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2483).

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting change/setting confirmation process is completed depending on whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2484). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ON to OFF change. If the operation to end the setting change/setting confirmation process has been performed, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the setting change/setting confirmation processing has not ended, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). By clearing the edge information, it is possible to prevent multiple times of changing the set value with one operation. This is because the first main loop process may be executed multiple times while the timer interrupt process for detecting the edge of the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 is executed once. This is so that the same edge information as the previous time is not used to change the setting in the first main loop process executed later. Only the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 may be cleared without clearing the edge information of the setting key 971 . After that, the interrupt is set to be permitted (step S2453), and the first main loop processing for setting change processing, which returns to step S2450, is repeatedly executed. The reason why interrupts are disabled in the processes from S2482 to S2485 is to prevent the setting change process and the setting confirmation process from being interrupted by a timer interrupt.

In addition, in the first main loop processing (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting processing, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is kept being cleared, and when the game shifts to the normal game (execution of the second main loop processing ), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are not referred to.

When it is determined in step S2484 that the setting change/setting confirmation process is completed, the second main loop process for normal game (steps S2457 to S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop process, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC1 for normal game (step S2454), the interrupt of CTC0 is stopped, and the interrupt of CTC1 is started (step S2455), CTC1 is set to allow interrupts (step S2456).

After that, a power failure warning signal is obtained, and it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure warning signal is detected, power failure processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described in FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for judging winning in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery. After that, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed. If it is detected that the setting key 971 has been turned ON during the normal game (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 generates a command notifying that fact, and controls peripheral control. Substrate 1510 may provide a notification effect on the display device. Since this notification effect is performed during the normal game, it is desirable that it be in a mode that does not interfere with the progress of the normal game. , a specific symbol, etc., or a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 is being turned ON may be displayed in accordance with the progress of the game.

When the power failure warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power failure processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

In the power failure process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. It should be noted that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to ensure that the main-board-side power-off process is completed.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area within the game area (step S2464), the power OFF processing is executed, and necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area (step S2465). ). The details of the power-off processing are as shown in FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the game area stack area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates the checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is held normally, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. In addition, the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting state management (set value and the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power failure processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, write a setting value for validating RAM protection (writing prohibited) and invalidating the prohibited area to the RAM protection register, prohibiting writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and waiting until recovery from the power failure ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and determining that an abnormality has occurred and resetting when a prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In this embodiment, the reset function due to access to this prohibited area is cancelled, allowing access to all areas. By designating an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area to be valid in the RAM protection register, when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 It may be reset.

In the above-described processing, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), processing when the power is turned off (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated one, and other orders may be used.

In Example 4, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main processing on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt processing, and power failure processing may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power failure signal at least at the start and end, measure the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output, and if the measurement result reaches a predetermined value It is preferable to detect the occurrence of a power failure. In another example 4, timer interrupt processing for setting processing and timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, so power failure may be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. For this reason, the same program (code ) into each timer interrupt process, the size of the program can be reduced.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing and the timer interrupt for normal game. There is an opportunity to execute the timer interrupt processing of Also, in this execution opportunity, timer interrupt processing for setting change processing may not be executed (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) executes processing for calculating the base value, and the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing calculates unnecessary base values. It is possible to switch between executing the processing for calculating the base value and not executing the processing.

232 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. FIG. In another example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation process is repeatedly executed in the main loop for the setting process. Therefore, the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in Example 4 does not include the setting change/setting confirmation processing (steps S2477 to S2478) of the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in Example 3 (FIG. 229). It is a thing.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group, and bank switching is performed. Both banks of registers cannot be used without Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of an interrupt, and the RET It returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is restored. If a configuration is adopted in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt process to restore bank 0. FIG.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to enable interrupts, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not an interrupt is enabled is set to an interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless an interrupt is permitted (EI instruction, etc.) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state is not entered.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312 as input information.

In addition, since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, even if the winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, special symbols, normal Processing related to the progress of the game, such as symbol variation display, is not executed. Winning detection relating to the progress of the game is performed, but detection relating to fraud such as magnets and impact (vibration) is not performed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by hall employees. This is because it is considered preferable not to detect it.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input process 1 and monitor specific types of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person (goto master) who tries to commit a fraudulent act forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Then, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). It should be noted that the value of the gaming state management area may not be determined in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. This is to deal with the fraudulent act of illegally shifting to the setting change process. Further, whether or not the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area is determined before the switch input process 1 (step S2472), and the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area. If so, the process may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission process (step S2479).

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the processing (steps S2474 to S2476) relating to change and display of setting values is not executed, and the process advances to step S2479. Incidentally, when a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command for notifying that an abnormal timer interrupt process is being executed may be generated. This is because when a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing shown in FIG. 232 is not executed, and some kind of abnormality has occurred. This anomaly notification mode may be notification using a liquid crystal, lamp, or sound, such as magnet, radio wave, or vibration notification, or may output a security signal from the external terminal board 784 . One or more of these notification modes may be employed for notification either singly or in combination.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). , a solenoid signal such as a large winning opening and an electric chew, and a response signal (ACK) at the time of command reception to the payout control board 951 . After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal turns on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the LED display switching appears mixed. to prevent flickering of the LED.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476). The process of outputting the security signal may also be executed in the main loop for the setting change process of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, similarly to the setting change/setting confirmation process.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read at step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer in the FIFO format of multiple bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510 . The peripheral board command transmission process may be executed after the process of S2480 or S2481 of the main process is completed instead of the timer interrupt process.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the bank of the register (step S2481), and returns to the processing before the interrupt.

In timer interrupt processing for setting change processing shown in FIG. 232, unlike other timer interrupt processing, random number update processing (R_ATART_K) is not executed. This is because there is no need to update random numbers generated by software when a RAM abnormality occurs, but random number update processing may be executed.

[13. Pachinko machine with light guide plate]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine having a light guide plate will be described. A recent pachinko machine has a light guide plate that emits light by illumination on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and together with the effect display device 1600, performs a special symbol variation display game effect. In this type of pachinko machine, a complicated effect can be produced by superimposing images, for example, using the effect display device and the light guide plate. In addition, since the light guide plate is provided in front of the effect display device, a three-dimensional effect is displayed together with the image displayed on the effect display device. In addition, there is a light guide plate that enables stereoscopic vision using the parallax of the left and right eyes, and displays an effect with a greater three-dimensional effect.

However, the performance using the light guide plate has become boring, and it is necessary to improve the interest by a new light emission performance. Furthermore, there is a light guide plate that can display a plurality of patterns on a single plate, and there is a demand for more interesting effects by displaying a wider variety of patterns.

[13-1. structure]
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory 2500 and the display effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 of the game board 5, viewed from the front. FIG. 234 is a front view showing a state in which the display effect unit illuminates the first pattern. FIG. 235 is a front view showing a state in which the display effect unit illuminates the second pattern.

The display effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center role 2500 so as to close the frame of the frame-like center role 2500 . The presentation effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁The display effect unit 2600 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center role 2500, and a first pattern substrate 2611 and a second pattern substrate that are attached to the rear side of the center role 2500. 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 capable of emitting light to the right side surface of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 , and the second pattern substrate 2612 is mounted to emit light to the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610 . A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of irradiating are mounted.

The first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are arranged perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 so that the side surfaces of the light guide plate 2610 can be irradiated with light. Therefore, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the sides of the first pattern board 2611 and the second pattern board 2612 can be seen, and the first pattern board 2611 and the second pattern board 2612 can be seen from the player side. This makes the game area 5a look better.

Although the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 will be described in this embodiment, another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 .

The light guide plate 2610 includes a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) formed by a large number of concave-convex first reflecting portions that reflect light from above to the front side, and light from the lateral direction to the front side. and a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 235) formed by a large number of uneven second reflecting portions that reflect the light. In other words, the display effect unit 2600 can emit light 2613 for the light guide plate of the first pattern substrate 2611, and can emit light to display the first pattern 2621 on the light guide plate 2610. When light is emitted, the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 by light emission. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are desirably full-color LEDs, and are light-emitting sources (lens-equipped LEDs) that irradiate light in a narrow range and have strong directivity. is desirable. By using full-color LEDs, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be projected onto the light guide plate 2610 with any single color or multiple colors (for example, seven rainbow colors).

On the light guide plate 2610, unevennesses forming a plurality of first reflecting portions for reflecting the first pattern 2621 and unevennesses forming a plurality of second reflecting portions for reflecting the second pattern 2622 are minutely formed. When the light guide plate LEDs 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LEDs 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 do not emit light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light, Various decorations of the unit 3000 and effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well. In the light guide plate 2610, even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light-emitting state, the effect display device 1600 provided on the back side can be seen through a transmission region, and the light with which the light guide plate 2610 is irradiated is not reflected. A glass-like processed matte region, a lame region formed with a reflective pattern that reflects light that passes through the light guide plate 2610 regardless of the direction in which the light travels, and a light emitting portion of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( In other words, there is provided a moving area in which a reflective pattern is formed so as to change whether light is emitted depending on the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610 .

As shown in FIG. 234, the first pattern 2621 forms part of the effect of the special symbol variation display game together with the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as will be described later. The first pattern 2621 is composed of moving areas 2621a and 2621c, lame areas 2621b and 2621d, and a matte area 2621e. The outside of the first pattern 2621 is a transmissive area 2621f. In the moving areas 2621a and 2621c, part of the light guide plate LEDs 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 is lit, and the moving area 2621a and the moving area 2621c emit light by switching the lit portions. Therefore, by blinking the LED 2613 for the light guide plate, it is possible to make it appear that the size of the first pattern 2621 changes.

In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving area and the lame area are arranged so as to be repeated twice, but they may be repeated any number of times. Complicated movements can be represented by the first pattern 2621 by forming the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving region and the lame region a plurality of times. In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, moving regions and lame regions are alternately repeated. The moving regions having different light incident positions) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

By causing the light guide plate LEDs 2613 to emit light so that the color of light emitted by the light guide plate LEDs 2613 changes, each moving region 2621a can be illuminated in a different color. Then, by sequentially changing the emission color of the light guide plate LED 2613 (for example, repeating red→orange→yellow→green→blue→indigo→purple→red), the pattern appears to move as the color changes. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 235, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of streaks of light extend obliquely downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed such that the diagonally extending light streaks correspond to the positions of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612 . In other words, when one light guide plate LED 2614 emits light, a light streak extending obliquely downward from the light guide plate 2610 from the portion of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light on the upper side of the light guide plate 2610 emits light.

The second pattern 2622 becomes farther from the light guide plate LEDs 2614 as it goes down the light guide plate 2610 , so the brightness of the light streaks becomes darker as it goes down the light guide plate 2610 . Thus, when the second picture 2622 is viewed from the front (player's side), the lines of light appear to extend backward toward the lower direction of the light guide plate 2610, and the light is emitted three-dimensionally. It is possible to give the illusion that the light guide plate 2610 emits light.

Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the reflectors so that stereoscopic viewing is possible due to parallax between the left and right eyes. For example, focusing on one light streak that constitutes the second pattern 2622, the second reflecting portion that emits the light that forms an image of the light streak on the retina of the player is positioned on the light guide plate 2610 for the left and right eyes. By arranging it at the position, a parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern with depth can be shown.

As shown in FIG. 234, the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment has a first pattern 2621 projected by irradiation of light from one direction, a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, or a Instead, it consists of lame regions 2621b and 2621d formed with reflection patterns that reflect transmitted light, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a formed with reflection patterns that reflect light traveling in a specific traveling direction. , the first pattern can be composed of a moving pattern area (dynamic pattern) that appears to move and a still pattern area (static pattern) that appears stationary.

234 and the second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 235 can be projected by using one light guide plate 2610 depending on the lighting direction. For this reason, a single color light (for example, red light with a single wavelength or white light with multiple wavelengths) is emitted from the side, and multiple colors of light are emitted from above (for example, a group of adjacent LEDs). 2614 emit light at different wavelengths), one light guide plate 2610 can produce a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single color pattern.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the matte area 2621e and the lame areas 2621b and 2621d of the first pattern 2621 are still patterns and the moving patterns appear to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c and 2622a by irradiation of light from the lateral direction. is showing That is, the first pattern 2621, which is irradiated with light from the horizontal direction, produces a light guide plate presentation with both a still pattern and a moving pattern. In this case, the still picture and the moving picture of the first picture 2621 are projected simultaneously.

Unlike the above, the first pattern 2621 may be composed of a matte area and a lame area, and the first pattern 2621 may not include a moving pattern. In this case, the light guide plate presentation is performed with a static pattern of the first pattern 2621 by irradiation of light from the lateral direction and a second pattern 2622 by irradiation of light from above. In this case, the still picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture by the second picture 2622 can be projected at different timings. That is, the moving picture may be projected after the still picture is projected, or the still picture may be projected after the moving picture is projected. In this way, by projecting the still picture and the moving picture at different timings, it is possible to perform various effects. In particular, by displaying a specific character as a still picture after displaying a rainbow picture as a moving picture, it is possible to perform an effect in which the character descends. On the other hand, by displaying a character with a moving picture after displaying a background with a still picture, it is possible to produce an effect in which the character moves to a specific place.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged so as to overlap each other. When the light is irradiated from the horizontal direction and the upward direction, in the area where the two patterns are superimposed on the light guide plate 2610, since the reflection patterns of the two patterns are provided in a mixed manner, the two patterns can be recognized together. . However, when the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that can be viewed two-dimensionally and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic vision may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. When the reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided and a transmission area 2621f through which the back side (effect display device 1600) can be seen is provided, and the pattern of the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is played. This allows a person to easily view stereoscopically.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in separate areas without overlapping. When the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that can be viewed two-dimensionally and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic vision may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. By dividing the area in which the reflection pattern of the pattern 2621 is provided and the area in which the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is provided, and by projecting the pattern of the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622, the second pattern can be easily presented to the player in three dimensions. can be seen.

[13-2. Configuration of Light Guide Plate]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflector will be described. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (especially the arrangement of the reflectors).

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 has a transmissive area 2621f through which the back side (effect display device 1600) can be seen through, and a matte area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light. Lame regions 2621b and 2621d formed with reflection patterns for reflecting transmitted light and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a formed with reflection patterns for reflecting light traveling in a specific traveling direction are provided.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing the structure of the reflector.

The reflecting portion is formed by a concave portion provided on the back side of the light guide plate 2610, and the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 by reflection of light on the boundary surface (reflecting surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light so that the player can visually recognize the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, light incident from the light guide plate LEDs 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain amount of spread (eg ±30 degrees). The streaks of light forming the second pattern 2622 are visible when the light traveling in the direction of the streaks of light is reflected by the reflecting section 2650 described below.

In the reflecting portion of the moving area 2622a shown in FIG. 237(A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along the streak of light. The size of the reflecting part 2650 is desirably several hundred micrometers to several millimeters, which is much smaller than the streaks of light appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown enlarged in the figure.

The reflecting portion 2650 is composed of a reflecting surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflective surface 2651 is arranged at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and such that the vertical line of the reflective surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are approximately 45 degrees. Therefore, the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 and hitting the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650 is reflected toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 237(B).

In addition, the direction perpendicular to the streak of light appearing in the moving region 2622 a , that is, the light traveling parallel to the reflecting surface 2651 along the reflecting surface 2651 does not hit the reflecting surface 2651 and is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650 to reach the light guide plate 2610 . do not exit from the surface of Similarly, a small amount of light traveling in a direction that has an angle (especially an acute angle) with the streak of light appearing in the moving region 2622a hits the reflecting surface 2651, and only a small amount of light is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650, leading Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610 . For this reason, the light of the wavelengths that reach more can be seen by the player's eyes, and the pattern can be seen in the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light at a specific position.

At this time, by tilting the reflecting surface 2651 a little, the emission direction of the reflected light may be slightly shifted left and right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 . Since the light source that irradiates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment emits light with strong directivity, the reflected light from the reflecting section 2650 also reaches the player as a light beam with directivity. Therefore, a parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern with depth can be displayed. That is, since the reflecting portion 2650 that reflects the light reaching the right eye and the reflecting portion 2650 that reflects the light reaching the left eye are in different positions, the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye are different. A virtual intersection is not on the light guide plate 2610 . In other words, if the virtual intersection point of the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the pattern appears to be at a deep position, and the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye are visible. If the virtual intersection point with the incoming light is in front of the light guide plate 2610, the pattern appears in front.

The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflective surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 like the reflective surface 2651, and may be arranged so that the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is inclined. may be formed at an angle that does not reflect toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being displayed by light coming from a direction other than a specific direction without strongly reflecting light incident from one direction.

Reflecting portions 2660 of lame regions 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. 238 are configured by spherical concave portions provided on the back side of light guide plate 2610, and travel through light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of directions (that is, The light arriving at the reflecting portion 2660 is reflected (through a plurality of paths) and emitted to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 . Since the reflecting portion 2660 in the lame region reflects the light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614, the lame region 2621b glitters when the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blink at different timings. Also, when the light guide plate LEDs 2614 emit lights of different colors, the lame region 2621b emits a mixture of a plurality of colors. Furthermore, when the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blink in different colors, the lame region 2621b is mixed with a plurality of colors and glitters.

Note that the matte region 2621e is not provided with a reflecting portion, and is processed to have an irregular shape like frosted glass, so that the light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 is not reflected to the front side.

So far, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first pattern and the second pattern has been described. Next, an example of a light guide plate representing a different pattern will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs and the reflecting portions in the light guide plate forming the patterns shown in FIGS. 240 to 242. FIG.

The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 239 is formed on the rear surface thereof, and reflects incident light from any of the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2630 on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610, and emits the light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. It has a plurality of fine reflecting portions 2670 that The plurality of specific light entrance portions 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 introduce light so that the light travels through the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. As for the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2630, the first specific light entrance portion 2630a, the second specific light entrance portion 2630b, the third specific light entrance portion 2630c, and the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d are illustrated. A specific light entrance section 2630a to a seventh specific light entrance section are provided. This is to repeatedly provide seven specific light receiving portions 2630 (LED group 2614) for a rainbow effect in which the light guide plate emits light in seven colors. The first specific light-entering portion 2630a to the seventh specific light-entering portion (not shown) repeat in order from left to right on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610 in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) (seventh specific light-entering portion are arranged in the order of the first specific light entrance portion 2630a).

The reflecting portion 2670 extends in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630 (the direction in which the light incident from the specific light entrance portion 2630 travels in the light guide plate 2610) and guides the light. It has an interface inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610 . Reflector 2670 is recessed into a pent-roof-like triangle. Reflecting portion 2670 reflects light incident from corresponding specific light entering portion 2630 and emits the light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of light guide plate 2610 . Also, the reflecting portion 2670 reflects the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light entering portion 2630 and emits the light in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 .

As a result, as indicated by broken lines in FIG. 239, the light incident from the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630 is reflected by the reflecting portion 2670 toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (perpendicular to the plane of the paper). A player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees the reflecting part 2670 as emitting light. On the other hand, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630 is reflected by the reflection portion 2670 in a direction other than the front of the light guide plate 2610, and the pachinko machine 1 The reflecting part 2670 does not appear to emit light from the player sitting in front of it.

In this embodiment, the reflecting portion 2670 is recessed in a triangular shape and extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entering portion 2630. However, this is not the case. , and it may extend in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630 .

The plurality of reflecting portions 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light entering portions 2630, and the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a and second specific light entering portion 2630b corresponding to the first specific light entering portion 2630a. a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b corresponding to the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c corresponding to the third specific light entering portion 2630c; and a plurality of fourth reflecting portions corresponding to the fourth specific light entering portion 2630d including portion 2670d and the like.

Further, the light guide plate 2610 is capable of displaying a plurality of patterns 2623 that can be illuminated in different manners by reflecting light forward from a specific reflecting portion 2670 of the plurality of reflecting portions 2670 . The plurality of patterns 2623 includes a pattern 2623a consisting of a plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a, a pattern 2623b consisting of a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, a pattern 2623c consisting of a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670c. A pattern 2623d made up of a portion 2670d is included.

As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the patterns are arranged in order from the center to the outside in a circulating manner.

The second picture board 2612 has a strip-like shape extending left and right, and LEDs 2614 are mounted at positions corresponding to the respective specific light receiving portions 2630 . The plurality of LEDs 2614 includes a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light entrance portion 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light entrance portion 2630b, and a third specific light entrance portion 2630c. A third LED group 2614c corresponding to, a fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d, and a fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light entrance portion (not shown) (illustration omitted), a sixth LED group (not illustrated) corresponding to the sixth specific light receiving portion (not illustrated), and a seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light receiving portion (not illustrated) (not shown). Note that FIG. 239 illustrates the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d, and omits the fifth to seventh LED groups. Each LED group is formed by dividing a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the drawing) on the second pattern substrate 2612 in the horizontal direction of the second pattern substrate 2612, and sequentially from left to right. , (the seventh LED group is followed by the first LED group 2614a). In this embodiment, each LED group has six LEDs 2614 each.

Next, the lighting effect by the display effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the first specific light entrance portion 2630a, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the first reflection portion 2670a, Since the second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect light to a direction other than the front, only the first reflecting portion 2670a appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the pattern composed of the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a can be caused to emit light.

When the second LED group 2614b of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light entrance portion 2630b, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the second reflection portion 2670b, Since the first reflecting portion 2670a, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, etc. reflect light to a direction other than the front, only the second reflecting portion 2670b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the pattern composed of the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b can be caused to emit light.

When the third LED group 2614c of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light entrance portion 2630c, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the third reflecting portion 2670c, Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, second reflecting portion 2670b, fourth reflecting portion 2670d, etc. reflect light to a direction other than the front, only the third reflecting portion 2670c appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the pattern composed of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c can be caused to emit light.

When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the fourth reflection portion 2670d, Since the first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, etc., reflect to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting portion 2670d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the pattern composed of the plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670d can be caused to emit light.

Similarly, when each LED group is caused to emit light from the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group 2614, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630, and the light guide plate 2610 passes through the corresponding reflection portion 2670. The light is reflected to the front, and the other reflecting parts 2670 reflect to other than the front, and only the corresponding reflecting parts 2670 appear to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. You can make the pattern you are holding emit light.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by switching the group of LEDs to emit light, the plurality of patterns 2623 can be caused to emit light. Such light emission production can be performed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 240, in a light guide plate 2610 on which similar patterns are superimposed, a moving effect is achieved in which the patterns emit light like an animation that spreads from the center to the outside or shrinks from the outside to the center. can be done.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in a moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 240, by switching the position of the group of LEDs that emit light with the lapse of time, a moving effect is performed in which the size of the pattern changes.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light entrance portion 2630a to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. In addition, in FIG. 240, the position corresponding to each specific light entrance part is represented by the alphabet of the last letter of a code|symbol.

As shown in FIG. 240(A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light enters from the sixth specific light entrance portion 2630f and the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g, the light guide plate 2610 The incident light is reflected by the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

After that, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and the light is incident from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e and the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the fifth reflection portion 2670e and the sixth reflecting part 2670f are reflected, and the pattern in which the fifth reflecting part 2670e and the sixth reflecting part 2670f are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 240(B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light enters from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d and the fifth specific light entrance portion 2630e, the light guide plate The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

After that, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and the light is incident from the third specific light entrance portion 2630c and the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the third reflection portion 2670c and the fourth reflecting part 2670d are reflected, and the pattern in which the third reflecting part 2670cd and the fourth reflecting part 2670d are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 240(C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light enters from the second specific light entrance portion 2630b and the third specific light entrance portion 2630c, the light guide plate The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the pattern in which the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

In this way, by changing the position of the group of LEDs (LED elements) to emit light without changing the number thereof, the size of the pattern can be changed, and a moving effect can be realized in which the pattern is emitted so as to move outward from the center. At this time, the LED groups may emit a single color, or each group may emit a different color (ie, depending on the position).

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 241, by changing the number of light-emitting LED groups with the lapse of time, a moving effect is performed in which the size of the pattern changes.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light entrance portion 2630a to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. In addition, in FIG. 241, the position corresponding to each specific light entrance part is represented by the alphabet of the last letter of a code|symbol.

As shown in FIG. 241(A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the incident light from the second specific light entrance section 2630b to the seventh specific light entrance section 2630g is reflected by the second reflection section 2670b. The second to seventh reflecting portions 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the second to seventh reflecting portions 2670b to 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

After that, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light entrance section 2630c to the seventh specific light entrance section 2630g is reflected by the third reflection section 2670c to the seventh reflection section 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670c to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 241(B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the incident light from the fourth specific light entrance section 2630d to the seventh specific light entrance section 2630g is fourthly reflected. The part 2670d to the seventh reflecting part 2670g reflect, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting part 2670d to the seventh reflecting part 2670g are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

After that, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light entrance portion 2630e to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflection portion 2670e to the seventh reflection portion 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and light incident from the sixth specific light entrance portion 2630f to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g is reflected in the sixth direction. The part 2670f to the seventh reflecting part 2670g reflect, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting part 2670f to the seventh reflecting part 2670g are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, it is possible to change the size of the pattern (light emission range) and perform a moving effect in which the pattern emits light in a shrinking manner. At this time, the LED groups may emit a single color, or each group may emit a different color (ie, depending on the position).

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 242, by changing the emission color of the LED group with the lapse of time, a moving effect is performed in which the color of the pattern changes.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light entrance portion 2630a to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In addition, in FIG. 242, the position corresponding to each specific light entrance part is represented by the alphabet of the last letter of a code|symbol.

As shown in FIG. 242(A), the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the red light incident from the first specific light entrance portion 2630a is reflected by the first reflection portion 2670a, and the first reflection portion 2670a is arranged. The drawn pattern emits red light, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light entrance portion 2630b is reflected by the second reflection portion 2670b to emit light with an orange pattern. In addition, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light receiving portion 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c to emit a yellow pattern. In addition, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light entering portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d to emit green light. In addition, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light entering portion 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to emit blue light. In addition, the sixth LED group 2614f is lit in indigo blue, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light receiving portion 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflecting portion 2670f to emit light in the pattern in indigo. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the seventh specific light receiving portion 2630g to emit a purple pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242(B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the color of the pattern changes. After a further period of time, as shown in FIG. 242(C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively. color changes.

In this way, the colors of the LEDs forming the group of LEDs are changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye pays close attention to patterns that emit light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the patterns emit light as if they move inward.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the arrangement of patterns on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED group 2614. FIG.

In this embodiment, a plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to a reflecting portion 2670 forming one pattern, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one pattern. Specifically, control is performed such that the light emission pattern of the LED group 2614 (the specific light incident portion 2630) is repeated with a group of seven LEDs as a repeating unit. Moreover, the LED is configured to emit light with directivity and illuminate a predetermined angle range from the front of the LED.

That is, as shown in FIG. 243, the illumination range of the LEDs emitting light in the same pattern (which is the light emitting source of the light forming one picture) is the range shown by the fan shape in the drawing. In the vicinity, there is a range where the light from the LED does not reach.

For this reason, a pattern is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 where light is incident. For example, if the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (full angle at half maximum θ = ±30 degrees), the range where the light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (with the same pattern The pattern is separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length of 0.87 times α).

To generalize, the following relationship is established where α is the length of the repeating unit of the LED group, θ is the illumination angle of the LED, and L is the distance separating the pattern from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 .
L=tan θ×α/2

In this way, when a moving picture that appears to move is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving picture must be placed at a position a predetermined distance away from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 . In other words, the moving pattern area that displays a pattern that appears to move is smaller than the static pattern area that displays a static pattern. If the light guide plate 2610 has the same size as the display area of the effect display device 1600, the moving effect by the light guide plate 2610 is possible in a region narrower than the display area of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the effect of the variable display game, the player can be made aware of the progress of the variable display game without obstructing the visibility of the special symbols normally displayed near the end of the display area of the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加. In addition, by performing the moving effect in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 that the player gazes at, the excitement of the player due to the moving effect can suppress the decrease in interest.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the center accessory 2500 light guide plate 2610 of the front unit 2000 is attached has been described. An area within a predetermined distance from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 is formed in the visible opening window), and the player can visually recognize the area where the moving effect is not possible. In addition, the area where the moving effect is possible becomes narrower, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000 . In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center accessory 2500, the area where the moving effect is not possible is hidden by the center accessory 2500, and the area where the moving effect is not possible is the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is arranged on the outside, and the moving effect can be performed in the entire (or most) area of the inner frame of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is located outside the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the periphery of the center accessory 2500 .

Since the back unit 3000 includes various decorations (decoration unit 3050, movable effect units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end of the light guide plate 2610 is positioned behind these decorations. A light guide plate 2610 can be arranged, and a light emitting device (first pattern substrate 2611, second pattern substrate 2612) can be positioned behind the decoration. As a result, the board serving as the light source can be arranged at a position where the player cannot see it, and the decorativeness can be ensured.

Furthermore, the LEDs for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613 and 2614 for the light guide plate) and the LEDs for causing the decoration to emit light may be mounted on one substrate.

In this way, when the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 can be made a moving effect area, and the player does not notice the unnaturalness due to the limitation of the moving effect area. can be done.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 244, by changing the emission color of the LED group with the lapse of time, a moving effect is performed in which the color of the pattern changes.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light entrance portion 2630a to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g. Group 2614g is located. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In addition, in FIG. 244, the position corresponding to each specific light entrance part is represented by the alphabet of the last letter of a code|symbol.

As illustrated, the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the first reflecting portion 2670a reflects the red light incident from the first specific light receiving portion 2630a, and the pattern on which the first reflecting portion 2670a is arranged is red. , and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the second reflection part 2670b reflects the orange light incident from the second specific light entrance part 2630b to emit light with an orange pattern. Also, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light receiving portion 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c to emit a yellow pattern. In addition, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflection portion 2670d to emit green light. In addition, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light entrance portion 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to emit blue light. In addition, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in indigo blue, and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f reflects the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light receiving portion 2630f to emit light in the pattern in indigo. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the seventh specific light receiving portion 2630g to emit a purple pattern.

After that, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the pattern changes. As time passes further, the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively, and the color of the pattern changes.

In this way, the colors of the LEDs forming the group of LEDs are changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye pays close attention to patterns that emit light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the pattern emits light as if streaks of light in seven colors flow.

Although the detailed explanation is omitted, even with the light guide plate 2610 having a pattern in which two light lines intersect as shown in FIG. The color of the pattern (light streaks) changes, and it is possible to create a moving effect that makes the pattern emit light so that seven colors of light streaks flow. In addition, by using left-right eye parallax to make the lines of light appear deeper or closer to the viewer as they move away from the light source, it is possible to display a pattern with a three-dimensional effect.

Next, a stereoscopic pattern and a planar pattern by the light guide plate 2610 will be described.

FIG. 245 is a diagram showing how the light guide plate 2610 displays a picture in plan view.

As shown in FIG. 245B, since the reflecting surface of the reflecting portion 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is curved, light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in a plurality of directions. , reach the player's right eye 10R and left eye 10L. Reflecting portion 2660 also reflects light that travels through light guide plate 2610 and arrives at reflecting portion 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, through a plurality of paths), and emits the light to the front side of light guide plate 2610 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 245(A), the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portion 2660 does not cause parallax between the left and right eyes, so that the player can view the pattern 2621 as a planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610. will be seen as

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing how the light guide plate 2610 displays a picture in plan view.

As shown in FIG. 246(B), the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the left eye 10L of the player, and the reflecting portion 2650R Light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected toward the player's right eye 10R. However, since the reflective portion 2650L and the reflective portion 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less), as shown in FIG. The parallax of the eye is small, and it can be said that the pattern for the left eye formed by the reflecting portion 2650L and the pattern for the right eye formed by the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610 .

FIG. 247 is a diagram showing how a stereoscopic pattern is displayed by the light guide plate 2610. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 247(B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set at an angle to reflect the light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflecting portions 2650L and 2650R. A right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 247, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at point 2621C on the back side of light guide plate 2610. In FIG. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern behind the light guide plate 2610. FIG.

FIG. 248 is a diagram showing how a stereoscopic pattern is displayed by the light guide plate 2610. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 248(B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set at an angle to reflect the light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 248(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflecting portions 2650L and 2650R. A right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 248, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at point 2621C on the surface side of light guide plate 2610. In FIG. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610. FIG.

As described above, according to the display effect unit 2600, since a plurality of different patterns can be illuminated by a single light guide plate 2610, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display animation or the like. Therefore, the thickness of the display effect unit 2600 in the front-rear direction can be reduced as much as possible. In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close to the player side as possible, making it easy to secure a wide space behind the light guide plate 2610. can. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured behind the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, the upper front movable production unit 3300, etc. can be arranged behind the light guide plate 2610. By improving the appearance of the game area 5a, the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the players. By performing the movable performance by the upper front movable performance unit 3300 or the like, it is possible to provide the player with various performances, to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, by arranging the light guide plate 2610 in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of semi-transparent patterns due to the light emission of the plurality of reflecting parts 2670 emerge to show the luminous decoration that moves like an animation. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is accustomed to the light emitting effect using the conventional light guide plate, to surprise and amuse the player, and to provide something good to the player. It is possible to make the player think that something might happen, and to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the game, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the luminous display of the pattern by the light guide plate 2610, the luminous display of the pattern 2623 is not visible to other players far from the front. becomes difficult to see, making it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed, so that it is possible to suppress other players from paying attention and To enable a player to play a game without hesitation, to enjoy the game and to suppress the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame of the center role 2500 attached to the center of the front view game area 5a, the patterns 2621 and 2622 are illuminated by the LEDs 2613 and 2614. Also, the light-emitting patterns do not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good condition, making it difficult to see the game. To prevent distrust from being given to a player and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, by matching the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500, the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 (first picture substrate 2611, second pattern board 2612) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light guide plate 2610 does not exist when the pattern is displayed by light emission. A strong impact can be given to the player who thought that there is no such thing, and the player can be surprised.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the luminous display of a plurality of patterns different from each other by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 are combined. Since the performance can be shown to the player, various performances can be produced by appropriately combining them, and the player can be hardly bored, and the player can be entertained by the performance by the light guide plate 2610 and the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 are different. Therefore, it is possible to display effect images related to the plurality of patterns 2623 that are light-emitting displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and to give the light-emitting patterns 2623 a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect. A performance (display performance) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Also, the LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be monochromatic LEDs or full-color LEDs. In addition, the number of specific light entering portions, reflecting portions, and the number of LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number, shape, and size of patterns.

[13-3. Production example]
Next, an example of effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variation display game will be described. 249 to 254 are diagrams showing examples of effects using a light guide plate.

In the effect display shown in FIG. 249, the effect display device 1600 displays a movement effect in which the light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light so that a predetermined pattern is reflected on the light guide plate 2610, and the image is moved toward the predetermined image. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variation display game (for example, as a specific ready-to-win effect or advance notice effect).

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 249(A), nothing is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the entire screen turns black (blacks out). This blackout causes the player to gaze at the effect display device 1600 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 249(B), the LEDs 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 are turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is reflected on the light guide plate 2610 . This causes the player to gaze at the first pattern 2621 . Then, as shown in FIG. 249(C), a moving effect is performed in which an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . Further, as shown in FIG. 249(D), the moving effect may move the image 1611 toward the first pattern 2621 from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) on the effect display device 1600 . The image 1611 that is moved and displayed on the effect display device 1600 may have the same color as the first pattern 2621 or a different color. Further, the image 1611 moved and displayed on the effect display device 1600 may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first pattern 2621 as shown in FIG. 249, or may have a different shape as shown in FIG. The image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 that are moved and displayed are images of the same character (the pose and face may be the same or different), or the same characters (for example, the name of the character) with the same font and color. They can be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the light guide plate 2610 is arranged on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the back side of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. It is preferable that an image is also displayed by the effect display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249(E), in the moving effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the proportion of the moving images 1611 occupying the display area of the effect display device 1600 are measured over time. may be changed according to

The aspect of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 251, the color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. The color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or stepwise (stepwise).

Also, as shown in FIG. 252, the size of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. In this case, it is preferable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and use the other light guide plates to project patterns of different sizes. In addition, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. , oblique directions), different sizes (large or small) of the first pattern 2621 may be projected.

After performing the moving effect for a predetermined time, the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is removed from the light guide plate 2610, as shown in FIG. 249(F). Furthermore, the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen is blacked out. This blackout makes the player look at the performance display device 1600 and creates a space for improving the expectation for the next performance.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249(G), the effect display device 1600 displays an image 1612 different from the first pattern 2621 and the moving image (for example, a character with high hit reliability). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 249(H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, if the size of the character image 1612 is increased, the player's expectation of winning increases, but if the size of the character image 1612 is decreased, the player's expectation of winning decreases. Note that the color and expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. Also, the character image 1612 is preferably displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the first pattern 2621 . Furthermore, along with displaying the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be illuminated from above to project a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 235).

Note that this character image may be projected on the light guide plate 2610 . As described above, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. A character image may be projected by irradiating light from the direction). Also, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided and the character image may be projected on other light guide plates. When character images with different sizes and facial expressions are projected on a light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610, a performance display with a sense of depth is possible unlike the flat performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

In the above-described moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, the image on the effect display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is projected, but the image on the effect display device 1600 moves. , the first picture 2621 may be projected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, after the blackout (FIG. 253(A)), before the first pattern 2621 is projected as shown in FIG. A movement effect for displaying an image moving toward a projected position on the effect display device 1600 is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 253(C), the LEDs 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 are turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is reflected on the light guide plate 2610 . After that, as shown in FIG. 253(D), the moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

Thus, the time during which the first pattern 2621 is projected (duration of the light guide plate effect) and the effect time during which the image 1611 moves (the time during which the moving image is displayed on the effect display device 1600) The light guide plate effect in which is projected may be started before or after the effect in which the image 1611 moves. Also, the duration of the light guide plate effect in which the first pattern 2621 is projected may be longer or shorter than the effect time in which the image 1611 moves.

Also, as shown in FIG. 254, a variable display game effect may be performed by switching between a moving pattern in which the patterns where the images are gathered appears to move and a static pattern in which the patterns appear to not move.

In the light guide plate presentation shown in FIG. 254, when a moving picture appears, the expectation for a big win is high, and when a static picture only appears, the expectation for a big win is low. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 254(A), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 2621 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to perform a moving effect. Further, as the variable display game progresses, the static pattern 2621 is switched to the moving pattern as shown in FIG. 254(C). Further, as shown in FIG. 254(D), a moving effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, in a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254(E), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. A movement effect is performed in which an image 1611 moving by pressing is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . Also, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. good. After that, as shown in FIG. 254(H), the variable display game ends without switching the stationary pattern 2621 to the moving pattern.

In the effect shown in FIG. 254, when a specific display effect (for example, a specific ready-to-win effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, or a specific look-ahead effect) is selected in the special symbol variation display game, the specific display effect is displayed. The specific image 1611 may perform an effect together with the moving effect by the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the first pattern may not perform the moving effect.

As described above, in the effect of the variable display game shown in FIG. 254, the effect of selectively displaying the stationary pattern and the moving pattern by the light guide plate 2610 is performed, so that the player has a sense of anticipation for the development of the variable display game. , it is possible to suppress the decline in game interest.

Next, an example of an effect in which an effect using an operating object is added to the effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variation display game will be described.

255 and 256 are diagrams showing examples of effects using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. FIG.

In the effect shown in FIG. 255, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing in front of the effect display device 1600 constitute one pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 255(A), a part of the movable body 3601 appears or disappears from the upper part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a short cycle according to the progress of the variable display game. Repeatedly, the player's expectation for a big win is heightened. Then, as shown in FIG. 255(B), the entire movable body 3601 appears in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 255(C), a moving effect is displayed in which a pattern 2621 superimposed on the movable body is displayed by light emission of the light guide plate 2610, and an image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. conduct. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 255(D), a moving effect may be performed in which an image is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the pattern 2621. .

The movable body 3601 may emit light at the timing when this moving effect starts or during the moving effect. The light-emitting mode (light-emitting color and light-emitting timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light-emitting mode of the light guide plate 2610 .

Players' expectations for the development of the variable display game can be increased by selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 does not appear as shown in FIG. 249 or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 appears as shown in FIG. The pachinko machine can be enhanced and highly interesting.

In the above example, the movable body 3601 is made to appear instead of the pattern on which the images are gathered. For example, if the body is represented by the movable body 3601 and the face is represented by the light guide plate 2610, the expression of the face can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. FIG. In this way, in addition to the effects by the effect display device 1600, various effects by the light guide plate 2610 can be realized.

In the effect shown in FIG. 256, a light guide plate 2610 is used as the effect suggesting the appearance of the movable body 3601 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 256(A), according to the progress of the variable display game, the light guide plate 2610 emits light to display a pattern 2621, and as shown in FIG. A movement effect is performed in which an image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加Also, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. may After that, as shown in FIG. 256(D), a movable body 3601 appears from above the display screen of the effect display device 1600 and stops at a position overlapping the pattern 2621 of the light guide plate 2610 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 256(E), according to the progress of the variable display game, a pattern 1613 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and as shown in FIG. A movement effect is performed in which a moving image 1611 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256(H), the variable display game ends with a loss without the movable object appearing.

In this manner, in the effect shown in FIG. 256, the effect suggesting that the movable body is coming out can be performed using the light guide plate.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to the conventional communication function by an 8-bit parallel bus.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port in which one signal is transmitted by one signal line or an 8-bit bus. , data output from the main control MPU 1311 may be read, or an illegal signal may be input to the main control MPU 1311 to commit a fraudulent act. For this reason, a configuration that makes it difficult to externally detect the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 is required. It becomes difficult to read data or input data in line with the timing of the lines.

In addition, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a test signal output circuit for the purpose of monitoring the signal when the inspection agency inspects the pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of the special electric accessory, in order to monitor the output signal of the solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory, the signal input to the solenoid driver (transistor) (for example, 5V on/off signal) was branched and used as a signal for inspection. If the serial signal transmitted in the main control board 1310 described above is output as a signal for inspection, the inspection agency will need a device to analyze the serial signal, so it is difficult to use the serial signal as a signal for inspection. is. Therefore, in a pachinko machine that transmits signals by serial communication within the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise the output of the inspection signal. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, by inputting one serial signal into two parallel-connected serial-to-parallel conversion circuits, an inspection signal whose level changes at the same timing as the solenoid driving signal is generated. is to be generated. If the output transistor of the serial/parallel conversion circuit is configured with an open collector (or open drain), the voltage level will be different by changing the voltage (5V and 12V) applied to the two serial/parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

Furthermore, it is necessary to reduce the number of steps of the program for detecting the input by serial communication and reduce the software load. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit, and part of the signal is input directly to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. It is necessary to devise how to accept the input signal. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after power-on should be directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 without being input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPUI 1311 can be detected even before execution of interrupt processing, so that the signal level can be detected even in processes other than timer interrupt processing such as immediately after power-on.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it is not necessary to use the extended I/O using chip select, and input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 The level of the signal can be captured in bit units for each clock, and the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for reception of the serial signal.

257 is a block diagram around the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram showing connection between the serial/parallel conversion circuit and the LEDs, and FIG. 261 is a main control MPU 1311 and peripheral It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning on the main control board 1310 of components. In FIGS. 257, 258 and 261, thick lines indicate parallel signal transmission lines, and thin lines indicate serial signal transmission lines.

The main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment includes an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with other boards (peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951, etc.), Synchronous serial communication port (synchronous serial communication function) for communicating with the interface circuit, output of control signals for other devices (solenoids, etc.), and output from abnormality detection sensors such as vibration detection sensors and magnetic detection sensors It has a general-purpose port to which signals are input.

The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has multiple transmission/reception ports and multiple transmission ports. A communication partner of the transmission/reception port is selected by a chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311 .

The transmission/reception port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), chip select output terminals (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). A transmission port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

As shown in FIG. 257, one parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission/reception port. The number of parallel/serial conversion circuits connected to the transmission/reception port is not limited to that illustrated.

A larger number of serial/parallel conversion circuits may be connected by connecting like the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

A parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmission/reception port takes in the parallel data input when CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) is at level 0, and after CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1, it receives a predetermined clock signal. Data is output from the serial port at the timing of The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 receives signals from game ball detection switches (start winning opening, large winning opening count switch, normal winning opening, specific area switch, normal symbol gate switch, game board ejection switch) and photosensors. , and mainly detects game balls flowing down the game area 5a. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 has a configuration having a 16-bit input port, but may have a 16-bit configuration by connecting in parallel integrated circuits having an 8-bit input port.

Specifically, since the serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to the CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, when the serial transmission signal output by the main control MPU 1311 is 0 level, The input output signal of the game ball detection switch is taken in, and after the serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, serial data corresponding to the level of the game ball detection switch is output from the serial port at a predetermined clock timing. Thus, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the output signal of the game ball detection switch with the SERTX signal as a trigger, so it can take in the data of the ball detection sensor at an arbitrary timing.

The serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 connected to the transmission/reception port both output signals for lighting the LEDs (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). , the chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311 selects the data transmission destination. Serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 take in serial data input when the chip select (CS) signal is at level 0 according to a predetermined clock signal, and output signals from the parallel port at the timing when the chip select signal rises to 1. do. The output level from the parallel port is latched in the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and is maintained until the chip select signal rises to 1 next time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 is connected to the segment side of the LED, and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the common side of the LED. The serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 outputs a signal at a predetermined timing to dynamically light the LED. The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are configured to have a 16-bit output port, but may be configured to have a 16-bit configuration by connecting in parallel integrated circuits having an 8-bit output port.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). A segment signal is output at the timing to light the LED.

In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED having a common terminal on the anode side of the LED is used for the base indicator 1317, and when the LED is turned on, a drive current flows from the common terminal on the anode side to the segment terminal on the cathode side. flow. However, since integrated circuits having the same configuration are used for the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output by the driver circuit in each conversion circuit 1342 and 1343 (the direction of the output transistor of the driver circuit) polarity) will be the same. For this reason, a driver circuit 1344 is provided after the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a driving current for lighting the LED, and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of absorbing the driving current for lighting the LED.

In other words, the common side of the LEDs (function display unit 1400, base display 1317) is connected to a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 and a driver circuit 1344 that function as signal direction regulation means for regulation of the signal direction. In other words, two stages of signal direction control means are provided on the common side of the LEDs. On the other hand, a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 is provided on the LED segment side, and a one-step signal direction regulation means is provided.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 may use an integrated circuit having only a parallel-to-serial conversion function and an integrated circuit having only a serial-to-parallel conversion function, respectively. Alternatively, an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting a serial signal and a parallel signal may be used by switching between a parallel-to-serial conversion function and a serial-to-parallel conversion function.

Two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 . The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346, like the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 described above, take in serial data input when the chip select (CS) is at level 0 according to a predetermined clock signal, and when CS is at 1. Output from the parallel port at the rising timing. A driver transistor is provided at the output of the parallel port, and the voltage applied to the driver transistor is switched to generate an output signal. In other words, output signals of various voltages can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

An external terminal board 784 is connected to the channel A output ports (PA0 to PA7) of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and signals output from the external terminal board 784 (for example, security signals, ball pay-out signals, etc.). is output. Various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals for the various solenoids are output. In addition, an inspection terminal 1348 is connected to the output port (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory opening signal, Ordinary electric accessory opening signal, etc.) is output. The output port of channel A of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 is not connected to anything.

The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can control only one channel (16 bits), and the same branched signal including chip select is input to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, the same signal is output on the parallel side. Therefore, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. That is, the solenoid drive signal output from the channel B output port (PB0 to PB7) of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the test signal output from the channel B output port (PB0 to PB7) of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 A signal changes at the same timing. Therefore, the motion of the solenoid can be accurately output from the inspection terminal 1348 . Note that +12 V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid at 12 V, and +5 V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5 V inspection signal. In this way, by using two serial/parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, synchronized signals with different voltage levels can be generated.

Among the outputs from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is thickened, and the pattern on the output side of the inspection signal through which only a relatively small current flows is thickened. The pattern can be thin. Even if the pattern is not thickened, it is sufficient to reduce the resistance of the pattern. Patterns are formed on both the front and back surfaces to increase the effective cross-sectional area, or an inner layer pattern is formed to increase the effective cross-sectional area. may be increased.

In addition, since the two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load on one conversion circuit increases, the waveform of the output signal from the other conversion circuit will not be disturbed, and the output signal will not be affected. does not occur. That is, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output an inspection signal having the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate inspection. .

A reset signal is input from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 . A reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via two inverter buffers of the buffer circuit 1336 . When the main control MPU 1311 receives the reset signal, the operation is reset and the program is executed from the top address.

The reset signal is also input to each of the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 from the reset circuit 1335 via the two inverter buffers of the buffer circuit 1336 . When the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 receive the reset signal, the operation is reset, and the display contents of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are returned to the initial state (for example, the display is erased).

The buffer circuit 1336 has at least four inverter buffers, two inverter buffers are arranged between the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311, and the reset circuit 1335 and the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342, 1343 and two inverter buffers are arranged between The reason why the inverter buffers with the same characteristics are arranged in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 and in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is that the two paths from the reset circuit 1335 output This is to make the waveforms and timings of the reset signals to be the same as much as possible.

The inverter buffer of this buffer circuit 1336 functions as a signal direction regulating means for passing signals in only one direction. By regulating the signal direction on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, it is possible to suppress the arrival of external noise to the main control MPU 1311. FIG. However, when the reset circuit 1335 and the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are directly connected, the reset signal is sent to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 at a timing different from the reset signal input from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311. will be entered. That is, the transmission of the reset signal to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is accelerated by the two-stage inverter buffer provided on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311, and the main control MPU 1311 controls the reset signal. The reset command reaches the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 first.

For this reason, in this embodiment, two stages of inverter buffers are mainly provided in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the control MPU 1311 and the paths to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and the main control MPU 1311 and the serial A reset signal is transmitted to the parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 at the same timing, and each circuit is reset at the same timing. In this way, the inverter buffers arranged on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 are matched with the transmission timing of the reset signal input to the paths to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 as much as possible. At first glance, the circuits provided in the two paths look similar, but perform different functions.

In general, it is not necessary to place a special circuit in the path for transmitting the reset signal output from the reset circuit. ) is required.

Further, in order to match the signal timing (to delay the signal), other types of circuits that match the timing may be used instead of the inverter buffer described above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 259 and 260, an IC accommodating six inverter buffers is used, but six inverter buffers are integrated into one packaged IC. It is formed on a semiconductor chip with a A semiconductor chip is formed by several sets of circuits on a silicon wafer cut out from single crystal silicon (ingot) through several processes. This is diced to separate the circuit, and the chip-shaped circuit is packaged to form an IC. Therefore, variations in the characteristics of each of a plurality of circuits formed on the same silicon wafer are small. In this case, in consideration of this, the inverter buffer housed in one IC is arranged in two paths to make the signal transmission characteristics on the paths the same.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is arranged on the hinge side for opening and closing the frame, and the prize ball payout mechanism is also arranged on the hinge side. A game ball supplied from an island facility where a pachinko machine is installed moves in a prize ball payout mechanism in a charged state. The game ball is further electrified by friction with the resin member forming the prize ball payout mechanism. Electromagnetic noise is generated when the static electricity is discharged from the charged game ball, and this noise penetrates the electronic circuit directly or along the signal path (the electric wire constituting the harness).

As described above, the main control board of the present embodiment executes game control by interrupt processing of a constant cycle (initialization processing to timer interrupt processing described above: FIGS. 21 to 23). Therefore, even if the information is reset, the peripheral control board 1510 will receive new information (display data) at the next interrupt period (after 4 ms in this case) as long as the main control MPU 1311 is operating normally. A command is issued from the control MPU 1311 to return to normal operation.

However, when the main control MPU 1311 is reset, it waits for the time necessary for the initialization processing of the peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effect display device 1600, so the command to the function display unit 1400 is interrupted and the function When the display on the display unit 1400 disappears, the player becomes uneasy about whether the game can be continued. Therefore, it is desirable not to reset the main control MPU 1311 .

Next, the arrangement of the inverter/buffer in the IC package and the connection of the terminals will be described. 259 and 260 are diagrams for explaining connection examples of terminals of an IC that accommodates an inverter buffer.

The IC shown in FIGS. 259 and 260 has a shape in which terminals are arranged (that is, in two rows) on both sides of the IC package (for example, an insertion mounting type Dual In-line Package or a surface mounting type Small Outline Package). ), which has six inverter buffers, and the input and output terminal numbers of each inverter buffer are 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 9-8, 11-10, and 13-12. It's becoming

Each inverter buffer is preferably not a simple inverter buffer but a Schmitt trigger type inverter buffer having a hysteresis characteristic. By giving the inverter buffer a hysteresis characteristic, the waveform of the reset signal can be reliably shaped, and the resistance to noise can be improved. Also, by using a Schmitt trigger type buffer, it is possible to cope with waveforms of input signals whose rise is slow. That is, in CMOS, when the level of the input signal is near the threshold for a long time, a large current flows in the gate, causing latch-up. Latch-up can be suppressed even with slow waveforms.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 259, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to terminals 3 and 11, and the reset signal input to terminal 3 is output from terminal 4 via an inverter buffer. , terminal 5 , output from terminal 6 via an inverter buffer, and input to serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 . On the other hand, the reset signal input to the terminal 11 is output from the terminal 10 via the inverter buffer, input to the terminal 9, output from the terminal 8 via the inverter buffer, and input to the main control MPU 1311. be done.

In the example of connection shown in FIG. Since the reset signal to be sent to the main control MPU 1311 is passed through the terminal on the other side, the reset signals of the two systems are not intermingled, and the noise induced in the signal lines to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is not transmitted to the main control MPU 1311. Input can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the connection example shown in FIG. 260, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to terminals 1 and 3, and the reset signal input to terminal 1 is output from terminal 2 via an inverter buffer. It is output, input to the terminal 13 , further output from the terminal 12 via the inverter buffer, and input to the main control MPU 1311 . On the other hand, the reset signal input to the terminal 3 is output from the terminal 4 via the inverter buffer, input to the terminal 11, and output from the terminal 10 via the inverter buffer to be output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit. 1342 and 1343.

Thus, in the connection example shown in FIG. 260, the reset signals sent to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are collected and passed through one part of the IC, and the reset signals sent to the main control MPU 1311 are collected and passed to another part. Since the reset signals of the two systems are passed through, the noise induced in the signal lines to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 can be suppressed from being input to the main control MPU 1311 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 261, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around it. An inspection circuit layout area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and an inspection terminal 1348 are provided in the inspection circuit layout area. The circuit components (serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) provided in the inspection circuit layout area are mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by the inspection agency, and are generally commercially available pachinko machines. 1 (patterns for component mounting are provided). That is, although the pachinko machine 1 that is generally available on the market is equipped with a connector that relays the signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid, the test signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 A relaying inspection terminal 1348 is not mounted. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 on the market is configured so that the inspection signal is not detected by a fraudulent person and used for fraudulent activity.

As described above, in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, no parts are mounted in the inspection circuit layout area, but a printed pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided. For this reason, there is a possibility that noise is induced in the data bus and causes malfunction. pull down) to reduce the effect of noise.

Furthermore, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the pachinko machine 1 on the market does not use surface-mounted parts, but the circuit parts provided in the inspection circuit layout area are not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 on the market. Surface mount components can be used. Therefore, the parts of the inspection circuit can be made smaller, the inspection circuit layout area can be made smaller, and the main control board 1310 can be made smaller. Similarly, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 has no parts mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, but the circuit parts provided in the inspection circuit layout area are 1, components can be mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Of the parts of the inspection circuit, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on another board arranged near the main control board 1310 . This separate board is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 that is inspected by an inspection agency, and is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally on the market. Also in this case, the inspection signal is not output from the pachinko machine 1 that is generally commercially available.

By arranging the circuit parts used for inspection of the pachinko machine 1 collectively in the inspection circuit arrangement area in this way, it is easy to discover missing parts in the commercial pachinko machine 1, and additional parts for fraud can be found. Easy to find installation. Also, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be arranged near the inspection terminal 1348, and the main control board 1310 with high noise resistance can be configured.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 261, the circuit components placed in the inspection circuit placement area are oriented differently from the same type of circuit components placed elsewhere on the main control board 1310 (for example, 180 degrees as shown). rotated direction). In this way, by arranging the circuit parts in different directions in the inspection circuit layout area and other places on the main control board 1310, it becomes possible to easily distinguish between the parts used in normal games and the parts for inspection. In the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 on the market, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting such as erroneously arranging parts in the circuit arrangement area for inspection.

Also, on the main control board 1310, the symbols and numbers (or combinations thereof) of the mounted circuit components are displayed, for example, by silk printing. The numbers may be collectively attached with the symbols and numbers following the symbols and numbers of the circuit components used for game control. For example, the integrated circuits for game control are IC1 to IC11, and the integrated circuits arranged in the inspection circuit layout area are denoted by IC12 and subsequent symbols. In this way, it is possible to attach symbols and numbers that do not skip to the circuit parts for game control mounted on the pachinko machine 1 on the market, and to easily check after the circuit parts are mounted on the main control board 1310. can.

Furthermore, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are in a separate system from the symbols and numbers of the connectors connected to the game control parts, the connectors and inspection terminals connected to the game control parts can be easily identified. It is possible to distinguish between them and prevent miswiring of incorrectly connecting cables. In particular, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are the same as the symbols and numbers of the connection destinations of the inspection device of the other party, it is convenient for cable connection during inspection, and connection errors can be reduced.

In addition, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are free ports that are not used, and it is preferable to arrange the free ports so as to concentrate on adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311 . That is, regardless of whether the port numbers of the unused ports are consecutive, it is preferable that the terminals of the unused ports are arranged at a concentrated position. By concentrating and arranging the empty terminals, the area where the printed pattern is not provided on the main control board 1310 is concentrated, making it easy to discover the lack of parts and to discover the attachment of additional parts for fraud. It's getting easier.

In addition, the terminal of the empty port is arranged at a position close to the connector through which a relatively large current flows (for example, a solenoid is connected) in terms of the positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting and outputting game control signals are arranged on the left and right sides (top and bottom in the figure) of the terminals of the empty ports. Therefore, when adding an additional function to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without routing a long pattern.

As described above, by using serial communication for signal transmission within the main control board 1310, the wiring of the data bus can be reduced, making it easier to detect the attachment of additional parts for fraud. In other words, the number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits is eliminated, and several signal lines including control lines are used. Therefore, a clean circuit pattern is obtained. In addition, by shortening the routing distance of the data lines, the main control board 1310 that is resistant to noise can be configured.

In addition, since the number of data lines is reduced, the circuits can be arranged without being affected by the routing of the data lines.

Further, by reducing the number of circuit patterns, the number of ground patterns can be increased without changing the area of main control board 1310, and main control board 1310 that is more resistant to noise can be configured.

FIG. 262 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311. FIG.

The parallel output port of address D2 (chip select SERS0) is the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, and as shown in FIG. , and the output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side of the base indicator 1317 (the anode terminal of the 7-segment LED). Channel B output ports PB0 to PB7 of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

Also, the parallel output port of address D3 (chip select SERS1) is the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342, and as shown in FIG. terminal), and channel B output ports PB0 to PB7 are connected to the segment side of the base indicator 1317 (the cathode terminal of the 7-segment LED).

On the common side of the LED (anode terminal of the LED), the output port to be turned on is switched at a constant cycle (for example, interrupt every 4 ms). When focusing on the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned on in the timer interrupt processing, only PA1 is turned on in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms), and only PA7 is turned on in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms). is repeatedly turned ON at a constant cycle (4 ms×the number of ports). That is, when repeatedly switching 8 ports, each port is turned ON every 32 ms. Alternatively, if the channel A output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 are grouped respectively and attention is focused on the channel A output port, only PA0 and PA4 are turned ON in the timer interrupt processing, and in the next timer interrupt processing (4 ms later) ON only PA1 and PA5, . . . , ON only PA3 and PA7 in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms) may be repeated at a constant cycle (4 ms×the number of ports). By using serial communication for this constant cycle operation, it is possible to make it difficult to perceive the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311 .

The parallel input port of address D5 is parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and switches (ball detection sensors) for detecting game balls are connected to inputs PA1-PA7 and PB0-PB7. The outputs of these ball detection sensors are input as serial signals to the main control MPU 1311 and read as signals of address D5.

In addition, general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311 are input with operation information of the setting key 971, operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, power failure warning signal, primary payment ACK signal, and frame open detection switch detection signal. ing. These signals need to be monitored in real time (when requested by the program) or outside the timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after power-on). It is directly input to the MPU 1311 .

Furthermore, the general-purpose input/output ports (both input/output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311 receive the detection signal of the radio wave detection sensor, the detection signal of the vibration detection sensor, the detection signal of the magnetic detection switch, and the detection signal of the proximity error switch. is entered. These signals are output when an abnormality (malpractice, malfunction, etc.) occurs in the pachinko machine 1, and since real-time monitoring (when requested by the program) is required, a parallel/serial conversion circuit is used. It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without intervening. Moreover, an abnormality is notified by the effect display device 1600 or by a sound based on the detection signals of these sensors and switches. With this anomaly notification, the staff of the pachinko hall comes to check the state of the pachinko machine, so the game is substantially stopped. If this abnormality notification is a false notification, it will make the player feel uncomfortable, so it is necessary to suppress false detection. Therefore, it is preferable to input these signals to a general-purpose input/output port and detect them a plurality of times in a short period of time (so-called double reading) to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise.

In this double read process, in one timer interrupt process, read instructions are continuously executed to determine the signal level input to a general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. Execute multiple read instructions with several instructions in between to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or perform multiple read operations with a wait of several clocks in between. This is done by executing an instruction to determine the signal level input to a general purpose input/output port (or general purpose input port) at short time intervals. Therefore, when the port level is continuously determined via the parallel/serial conversion circuit, the level can be detected only at intervals of several tens of microseconds. The level can be detected at the following intervals, and the signal level can be detected in a short period.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, signals from various switches and sensors that require real-time performance are directly input to the general-purpose input port and general-purpose output port without using extended I/O using chip select. Since the level of the signal input to the general-purpose input/output port (both input and output) is captured in bit units for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for reception of the serial signal.

Although the general-purpose input/output ports (both input/output) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, part of the signals input via the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 is transferred to the general-purpose input/output ports (both input/output) IOP4 to IOP7. can be entered in

Although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

If the general-purpose input port is a vacant terminal, it is pulled up to 5 V via a resistor or pulled down to GND to prevent the terminal from going to an intermediate potential and reduce the effects of noise induced in the power supply line. should be reduced. Also, if the general-purpose output port is a free terminal, it may be left open, but it should be pulled up to 5V or pulled down to GND via a dummy resistor so that the level change of the output port does not become noise.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the test signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311, and the signal used for game control is output via the serial/parallel conversion circuit. For this reason, the winning ball detection signals are collectively input to one port, which facilitates handling by the game control program.

In addition, among the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, signals that need to be detected multiple times in a short period of time (so-called double reading) are input to the general-purpose port, and signals that do not need to be read twice are sent serially. It is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can check the signal level in real time, the signal level can be detected multiple times in a short period of time to eliminate the influence of noise and make a decision. Ports may be assigned such that signals that do not need to be read twice are input to the general purpose port if the general purpose input port is free.

A signal input to the main control MPU 1311 can be assigned to the general-purpose input port, and a signal input to the main control MPU 1311 and a signal output from the main control MPU 1311 can be assigned to the general-purpose input/output port (both input and output). Since any of them can be assigned, the general-purpose input/output port has high versatility for specification changes. For this reason, general-purpose input/output ports (both input and output) are desirable for the ports left as spares for adding new functions, and it is desirable to assign priority to general-purpose input ports.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the timing of data output and capture by synchronous serial signals will be described.

When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS 0 , the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs a common side selection signal for the base display 1317 . In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected among PA7 to PA4. After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected from PA3 to PA0.

Since no output is assigned to the B channel port of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, nothing is originally output at the data fetching timings of PB7 to PB0, and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR/LOAD terminal that determines the data loading timing of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( LOW), data is fetched from PA0 to PB7. Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is read from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341. FIG.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in data, and after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) in accordance with the clock signal. During this time, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH) and controlled so as not to receive new data.

As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment uses the transmission signal of the open output port as a trigger to capture the output of the game ball detection sensor, so the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at any timing.

Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265. FIG.

It is desirable to use the main control board 1310 in common for a plurality of models without redesigning. However, the input/output signals of the main control board 1310 may differ depending on the model and specifications. Therefore, in this embodiment, the input/output interface of the main control board 1310, which differs depending on the model, is mounted on a separate board (input/output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311 common to each model is mounted on the main control board 1310. configuration. By making the main control board 1310 common to multiple models, that is, by making the board size, circuit design, printed board artwork, component layout, etc. the same, performance (for example, noise resistance performance) is evaluated and designed. A main control board 1310 with stable quality can be used in common for a plurality of models without redesigning.

Also, when the input/output interface of the main control board 1310 is mounted on another input/output board 1351, where to divide the circuit becomes a problem. One is a method of separating with a serial signal line, and the other is a method of separating with a parallel signal converted from a serial signal. In the former case, the number of wirings between substrates can be reduced more than the latter, which is desirable. Moreover, even if the signal itself is obtained, it is difficult to know the order in which the data is transmitted in the serial signal, and it is unclear which data is transmitted at which timing. Furthermore, it is output at a speed synchronous with the serial signal clock, and this synchronous clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if the serial signal is acquired, it is difficult to know the content of the data being transmitted. Therefore, it is preferable to connect the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 with a serial signal line.

As shown in FIG. 264, an input/output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 are mounted inside the main control board box 1320 . The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without being destroyed once closed. The input/output substrate 1351 is provided with a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 . The main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 (main control MPU 1311, parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port. Boards can be connected with a smaller number of wires. The serial signal line may be connected by an electric wire or by a board-to-board connector.

In addition, if serial communication is used between boards, it is difficult to analyze the data even if the signal is acquired. In addition, the input/output board 1351 for inputting/outputting signals for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310, and input/output signals that vary depending on the model are set on the input/output board 1351, so the main control board 1310 is modified. The number of models that can be applied without doing so increases, and the versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

Furthermore, by housing the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the signal line for serial communication can be shortened.

Also, when the main control board 1310 is used for other models, the design of the input/output board 1351 may be changed, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model. can be easily designed, and the main control board 1310 whose performance (for example, noise resistance performance) has been evaluated and whose design quality is stable can be used. Further, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be used without redesigning the main control board box 1320 unless the size of the input/output board 1351 and the position of the mounting hole are changed. In addition, countermeasures against noise that vary depending on the model may be implemented by the input/output board 1351 instead of the main control board 1310 .

Serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 for outputting drive signals for the base display 1317 are preferably arranged on the main control board 1310 . When the base display unit 1317 is arranged on the input/output board 1351, the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are arranged on the input/output board 1351, and the signals for driving the function display unit 1400 are applied to the input/output board. It is preferable to output from 1351.

Also, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 that generates the inspection signal is preferably arranged on the main control board 1310 . That is, it is preferable to provide the inspection circuit layout area and the inspection terminals 1348 on the main control board 1310 . This is because a part of the signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 via a parallel bus, so that when the inspection terminal 1348 is arranged on the input/output board 1351, the main control board 1310 and input/output This is because the number of connection lines with the substrate 1351 increases.

Also, as shown in FIG. 265, the main control board 1310 may be accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and the input/output board 1351 may be mounted outside the main control board box 1320. FIG.

In the form shown in FIG. 265, since the input/output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be used in common even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes. In addition, since the input/output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in separate board boxes, the degree of freedom in arranging the boards is improved. In addition, if the main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the input/output board box 1350 that accommodates the input/output board 1351 are provided separately, each board box becomes smaller and the board installation position becomes more flexible. . Furthermore, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code, and a setting key 971, it must appear on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input/output board 1351 Since it does not have to be visible from the back side of the machine 1, the substrate installation position is free. Thus, in the form shown in FIG. 265, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

265, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320. FIG. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to the serial signal. In the pachinko machine, it is desirable not to output the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 to the outside of the main control board box 1320 which is sealed, in order to prevent unauthorized persons from detecting the operation of the pachinko machine. . However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, there is a low possibility that a fraudulent person will perceive the operation status of the pachinko machine. This is because the data bus outputs data according to the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311, and the data rate is constant, so the data rate can be easily guessed from the outside, and as a result, the signal transmitted on the data bus cannot be obtained. There is something. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the serial signal clock, and the speed of this synchronous clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if the serial signal is acquired, it is difficult to know the content of the data being transmitted.

As described above, the input/output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310, and the input/output function of the signal depending on the model is mounted on the input/output board 1351. It may be mounted on the input/output board 1351 as long as there is a portion where resistance to fraud and noise does not decrease even if it is arranged. For example, output of signals requiring drive current for solenoids and motors attached to the game board 5, output of drive signals for the function display unit 1400, and various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) is a function that may be mounted on the input/output board 1351 . In addition, communication with the payout control board 951, output of signals output from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, input of the setting key 971 (the setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), base display The output to 1317 is a function that should be installed in 1310 on the main control board.

Also, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input/output board 1351 input a dummy signal (0 V or 5 V) to an empty input terminal or connect a dummy resistor to an empty output terminal. good. This is because if nothing is connected to an empty terminal, noise may be taken in and the circuit may malfunction.

In particular, it is difficult to analyze the serial signals when some of the multiple signals that the fraudster attempts to acquire are transmitted via a parallel bus or general-purpose port, and other signals are transmitted as serial signals. A fraudulent person needs to obtain signals from a plurality of locations including the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351, which enhances the deterrence against fraud.

[15. Example of Power Supply Path Inside Pachinko Machine]
Next, an embodiment relating to overcurrent protection in the power supply path inside the pachinko machine will be described.

The pachinko machine 1 is supplied with AC 24V power. The power supply board 931 has a power generation circuit 933 that generates various DC power (for example, 5V, 12V, 24V, 35V) used inside the pachinko machine 1 from the 24V AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The power output from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the performance members, the control device, and the like in order to drive accessories and lamps (LEDs) for performance and decoration of the pachinko machine 1 . Although the electric wire that supplies the driving power to such a performance member is generally fixed, the length of the electric wire in the movable part of the driving part of the character is sufficiently long so that the electric wire is not pulled by the character. is wired with For this reason, there is a risk that the movement of the accessory may cause the electric wire to rub against members constituting the accessory or be caught in the movable portion of the driving portion of the accessory, thereby damaging the covering of the wire. Under such circumstances, if the power supply line and the ground line are close to each other, they will be short-circuited and a large amount of current will flow.

However, if a short circuit occurs near the power supply board 931, a large current flows, and an overcurrent protection function (fuse) mounted on the power supply board 931 operates to cut off the power.

However, as described above, if a short circuit occurs at a location far from the power supply board 931, a current large enough to operate the overcurrent protection function (fuse) does not flow, and the problem does not occur. This is because the wired electric wire becomes a load. For example, if there is a short circuit at a place where the wire impedance is about 1Ω, and the driving power supplied to the production member is 12V, the current of 12A will flow, but the overcurrent protection function (eg, 15A fuse) of the power supply board 931 will operate. do not. An overcurrent protection device (fuse) having an appropriate capacity considering the current flowing in a normal state should be attached to all the power lines, but this leads to an increase in parts cost and assembly cost.

Therefore, especially when the power line and the ground line are arranged close to each other with the electric wire passing near the movable part, the board to which the electric wire is connected operates at 2 to 3 times the current actually flowing in the power supply. Overcurrent protection devices (fuses) are placed to prevent large currents from flowing in the event of a short circuit.

Here, the upper movable unit 3400 in FIG. 16 will be described as an example of the driving device.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. body) 3410 is arranged. The point stick accessory 3410 stands by at the upper position in the non-rendering state, can move to the lower center position of the game board in the performance state, and rotates around the center decoration lamp 3412a at the center position of the game board. It is.

Although not shown, a unit base body is provided on the back side of the right side overlapping the game area when viewed from the front of the game board, and the point stick accessory 3410 is rotatably supported by the driven shaft on the unit base body. Then, the turning motion of the role object base body extending from the point stick role object 3411 to the unit base body and the turning motion of the role object base body are regulated and assisted (the vertical movement of the point stick role object 3410 is regulated and assisted), and the point It has a slit for inserting and sliding a bush provided in the accessory base of the stick accessory 3410, and is supported by an arm body movably supported by a driven shaft on the unit base body.

The unit base body is also provided with a moving stepping motor MA for moving the point stick accessory 3410 to the lower central position of the game board, a movement detecting sensor, and the like. In addition, the LED board (4250A) on which the stepping motor MB for rotation for rotating the accessory base body, the rotation detection sensor, and the LED of the central decorative lamp 3412a are mounted, and the LEDs of the left and right decorative lamps 3411 are mounted. LED board (such as 4250B) is provided.

Then, the stepping motor MB for rotation, the rotation detection sensor, and the drive signal line and detection signal line for driving the LED are routed from the accessory base along with the power line and the ground line, and the relay board (3044A , 3044B, 3044C, etc.) or directly to the production drive board 3043. Various electric wires are determined between the standby position and the performance position of the point stick accessory 3410 of the upper movable unit 3400, and have a wire length with a certain amount of play, and bundled loose wires are used. You may wire using a flat cable. In addition, although the relay board and the performance driving board are provided in the upper movable unit 3400, they may be provided outside.

FIG. 266 is a block diagram showing the electrical connections of various substrates, drive sources, etc. in the upper movable unit 3400, which is the drive device described above.

24V AC power supplied from the outside of the pachinko machine 1 is input to the power board 931 . The power supply board 931 has a power generation circuit 933, to which a 24V AC power source is input via a fuse 934 as an overcurrent protection device (overcurrent protection means).

The power generation circuit 933 converts 24V AC to various DCs used inside the pachinko machine 1 (mainly 12V, 24V, 35V used for stepping motors, solenoids, LEDs, various sensors, etc., and electronic Create a power supply such as 5V used as a control power supply for the circuit (it may be created by stepping down from another DC power supply separately on the control board).

In this embodiment, a stepping motor that operates at 12V and an LED (substrate) that is lit and blinked using a 12V power supply are used as examples for explanation. Therefore, in FIG. Systems are omitted. In addition, various control lines and drive lines, which will be described later, are indicated by thin lines. It is assumed that each board is connected by a connector and a harness (electric wire).

The 12V power supply output from the power supply board 931 passes through the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and various stepping motors (MA, MB) and various LED boards through the effect drive board 3043. (4250A, 4250B).

As shown, a relay board 3044B and a relay board 3044C are provided between the effect drive board 3043 and the stepping motor MA for movement and the stepping motor MB for rotation, respectively. Similarly, a relay board 3044A is provided between the production drive board 3043 and the central decorative lamp LED board 4250A. It should be noted that the left and right decoration lamp board 4250B is directly connected to the effect driving board 3043.

Next, various stepping motors (MA, MB) and various LED boards (4250A, 4250B) are supplied with driving signals for driving various stepping motors and control signals for lighting and blinking various LEDs.

When the entrance of the ball is detected by the first starting inlet sensor 2014 and the second starting inlet sensor 2551 of the first starting inlet 2002 and the second starting inlet 2004 connected to the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 uses the control line connected to the payout control board 951 to operate the payout device 830 and transmits a command for executing ball payout, and uses the control line connected to the peripheral control board 1510 to input When the ball is detected, a command is transmitted to cause the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to display an effect based on the result of the lottery.

Various stepping motors (MA, MB) and driving devices including various LED boards (4250A, 4250B) are driven along with the execution of the effect display. The control signal (drive signal) output from the peripheral control board 1510 is input to the stepping motor driver provided on the performance drive board 3043 using the drive line connecting the stepping motors (MA, MB), and further as a drive signal It drives by receiving a drive signal output from the production drive board.

For the LEDs mounted on various LED boards, control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 are once received by the LED driver using control lines that connect the various LED boards, and are further processed as drive signals on the board. Lights up or blinks in response to the output drive signal.

Here, in the case of a stepping motor, the drive signal means a so-called excitation signal given to each coil (each phase). Indicates a signal for blocking.

The stepping motor driver mounted on the effect drive board 3043 has a serial/parallel conversion function, and the control signal of each stepping motor serially output from the peripheral control board 1510, which is connected in a daisy chain, is used as a drive signal for stepping. It outputs to the motor, and is a device that operates by generating a circuit power supply inside the device when a 12V power supply is supplied.

The fuse 934 has a rated current determined from the total power consumed by the pachinko machine 1 in the normal game state, and the breaking current is larger than the rated current.
In this embodiment, a rated current of 15 A and a breaking current of 37.5 A (2.5 times the rating) are used so as not to cut off even the total current consumption of the power supply during normal use of the pachinko machine 1 .

In addition, chip fuses 3071, 3072, 3074, 3075 for current interruption are mounted on the performance drive board 3043 and various relay boards (3044A, 3044C), respectively. The roles and the like of these fuses will be explained subsequently.

[15-1. Protection of the driving device that implements accessories and LED decorations]
The effect drive board 3043 is connected to the LED boards 4250A and 4250B, and outputs a power source for lighting and blinking the LEDs and a control signal for the LED driver.

Further, fuses 3074 and 3075 as overcurrent protection devices are provided on the power lines output to the LED substrates 4250A and 4250B. This is because the movement of the accessory may cause the electric wire to rub against the members constituting the drive device, or may be caught in a moving part such as the drive part of the accessory, and the wire coating may be damaged. When the power line and the ground line are close to each other under certain circumstances, a short circuit causes a large current to flow through the power line. For this reason, the fuses 3074 and 3075 are operated so that the power line is not burnt out, thereby preventing damage to the parts constituting the driving device such as melting or scorching of the parts due to the burning of the power line.

The rated current of each fuse 3074, 3075 can be determined by the potential difference generated between the wires bundled together and the routing length (impedance) of the wires. The maximum potential difference occurs between the ground (0V) and the power supply voltage (12V, for example). A current obtained by using Ohm's law based on the impedance of the wire between the power supply substrate 931, which is the supply source, and this maximum potential difference is used as the breaking current.

Assuming that the 12V power supply is a load that consumes 2A of the estimated total current consumption of 15A even at normal times, if the impedance of the wire to the LED board 4250A is 2Ω, a current of 6A will flow during a short circuit. Therefore, the fuse 3075, for example, should have a rating of 2 A and a breaking current of 5 A (2.5 times the rating).

As for the fuse 3074, if the same number of LEDs are mounted on the LED board 4250A, the impedance of the electric wire to the LED board 4250B is assumed to be 1.5. If the resistance is 5Ω, a current of 8A will flow in the event of a short circuit, so that the fuse 3074 with a rating of 2A and a breaking current of 5A may be adopted.

Originally, if a wire were to short-circuit anywhere, a large breaking current would immediately flow to break the fuse 934 provided on the power supply board 931, and the fuse 934 would break it, but in reality, it is supplied to the load. Since even the wires used to connect the wires were regarded as a load (impedance of the wires), in this embodiment, a separate fuse is provided in consideration of the impedance of the wires routed in places far from the power supply board where there is a short-circuit factor. (3071, etc.) are provided to prepare for a short circuit and cut off.

Also, when the driving device is placed not only on the game board side but also on the door side, the length should be sufficient so that the electric wire for driving the driving device is not pulled when the door is opened or closed by the hall clerk. Wires are wired, but on the other hand, when the door is opened and closed, the wires rub against members near the wiring route, or the wires get caught in the opening and closing parts of the door (hinges, etc.) and other moving parts, causing the wires to be covered. There is a risk of damage. Under such circumstances, if the power supply line and the ground line are close to each other, they will be short-circuited and a large amount of current will flow.

Alternatively, when a hall clerk attaches and detaches a game board, if it is unavoidable to wire the wires on the hinge side or the opening/closing side, the wires may rub or get caught between the main frame and the wire coating. may be damaged. Even if the power line and the ground line are close to each other under such circumstances. A short circuit will cause a large current to flow.

In this way, the present invention can be applied even in the case of human operation of the sliding portion or in the case of human property damage. A fuse with an appropriate capacity should be placed in an appropriate position, but especially when arranging a drive unit on the door side, a relay board with a fuse mounted should be placed near the downstream of the opening/closing part of the door, which is a factor. should be placed.

So far, the fuses 3074 and 3075 have been described as an example of the second overcurrent protection device. A device such as a thermistor may also be used.

In this embodiment, a surface-mounted chip fuse is used for the fuse 3071, which is the second overcurrent protection device, in consideration of the size of the driving device. However, it is not possible to tell from the appearance whether or not electrical continuity is possible. In such a case, from the electric wire or the load (driving source) to which the electric wire is connected, the performance drive board 3043 for driving the movable body and the relay board 3044A on which the fuse is mounted must be replaced as a set.

A thermistor has the function of increasing internal resistance and cutting off current when its temperature changes due to heat generated by a large current. As its temperature returns to a low temperature again, the internal resistance is lowered and it becomes reusable. That is, if the fuse is replaced with a surface-mounted thermistor, there is an advantage that at least the board (for example, relay board) on which the thermistor is mounted does not need to be replaced and can be used continuously.

Regarding the fuse 934 as the first overcurrent protection device, a tube fuse is used in this embodiment. As you can see from the appearance, it is possible to tell whether or not electrical continuity is possible, but the fuse element of the tube fuse itself is thin and has a metallic color close to gray, so it is difficult to see whether it is blown on a general green resist substrate. Therefore, in order to make it easier to see that the fuse is blown, the metal-colored fuse element is conspicuous on the resist in the area where the fuse is mounted. It's good to print silk.

In addition, for overcurrent protection devices that have different ratings or that require special attention even if they have the same rated capacity, for the purpose of identification, a special mark (such as an asterisk) is silk-printed near the device. Different colors may be used, or the orientation of the devices may be set vertically, horizontally, or obliquely with respect to the substrate for distinction.
[15-2. Protection of Stepping Motor Driver]

The performance drive board 3043 is provided with a stepping motor driver and fuses 3071 and 3072 as overcurrent protection devices. Although two stepping motor drivers are shown in FIG.

The stepping motor driver switches the power supplied from the power supply board 931 according to the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to generate a drive signal. This drive signal drives a stepping motor incorporated in the accessory to operate the accessory. Although 12 V is supplied to the stepping motor driver and the stepping motor in the illustrated example, a necessary power supply may be selected according to the specifications of the stepping motor driver and stepping motor to be driven.

In the example shown in FIG. 266, fuses are provided in the 12V power supply lines of the two stepping motors, but in the case of daisy chain connection, fuses may also be provided in the power supply lines of the other stepping motor drivers.

The fuses 3071 and 3072 connected to the power lines of the daisy-chained stepping motors prevent damage to other stepping motor drivers caused by a large current flowing through one of the power lines. are doing. That is, if the stepping motor continues to be driven at a temperature exceeding the specified temperature, the resistance of the coil may decrease and a large current may flow into the stepping motor driver. In that case, a large current would also flow into the other stepping motor drivers connected in a daisy chain, but this is prevented.

In addition, when the resistance value of the coil decreases, the stepping motor itself heats up, and if the coating of the wire (coil) that ensures insulation is damaged, a short circuit will occur within the stepping motor. In preparation for such a situation, in addition to damage to the stepping motor driver, a separate fuse is also provided to prevent damage to the components that make up the drive device, such as melting or burning of components caused by a short circuit in the stepping motor. should be provided.

Regarding the breaking current of the fuse employed in the present embodiment, whether to mount the fuse on the relay board or on the effect drive board may be similarly determined in consideration of the wiring impedance.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is arranged on the path for supplying the AC power to the power generation device (power generation circuit 933), and causes the power generation device to overcurrent according to the current supplied by the power generation device. A first overcurrent protection means (fuse 934) that protects against a state and a drive source (stepping motor MA, LED of LED board 4250A, etc.) is arranged in a path for supplying DC power, and the current supplied by the power generation device a second overcurrent protection means (such as a fuse 3075) for protecting the power generation device from an overcurrent state according to (Production drive board 3043), which is located at a position closer to the drive source than the first overcurrent protection means, and protects the power generation device from an overcurrent state more than the first overcurrent protection means. Since the electric current required for this is small, it is possible to effectively prevent damage to performance parts such as accessories and electric wires.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 that controls the performance in the game, and the performance members (the point stick accessory (movable body) 3410 and the central A drive control board (effect drive board 3043) that outputs a drive signal to a drive device (upper movable unit 3400) equipped with a drive source (stepping motor MA, LED of LED board 4250A, etc.) that drives a decorative lamp 3412a etc. A power source creating device (power source creating circuit 933) that creates DC power to be supplied to the power source, and a power source creating device that is arranged in a path for supplying AC power to the power source creating device according to the current supplied by the power source creating device. and a driving device protection means (fuse 934) arranged in a path for supplying DC power to the driving source to protect the driving device according to the current supplied by the power generating device (fuse 934). 3075 etc.), it is possible to effectively prevent damage to performance parts such as accessories and electric wires.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, two or more electric wires including the electric wire for transmitting the drive signal, which are connected to the upstream side or the downstream side of the relay board 3044A, have a potential difference with each other. The protection means (fuse 3075) performs a breaking operation with the current that flows when the wires having the potential difference are short-circuited. The current for this breaking operation is obtained from the electric potential difference and the impedance of the electric wire using Ohm's law. Therefore, even if the first overcurrent protection means (fuse 934) arranged in the path for supplying the AC power to the power generation device (power generation circuit 933) does not operate, the second protection means prevents the parts and wires from being damaged. Damage can be effectively prevented.

To summarize the invention according to this embodiment, it is a game machine having the following means.
Means 1: A peripheral control board that controls the performance in the game,
a drive control board for outputting a drive signal for driving a drive source for driving the production member based on the drive data transmitted from the peripheral control board;
a power generation device that generates DC power to be supplied to the drive source;
first overcurrent protection means arranged on a path for supplying alternating current power to the power supply generating device and protecting the power generating device from an overcurrent state according to the current supplied by the power supply generating device;
a second overcurrent protection means arranged on a path for supplying the DC power supply to the drive source and protecting the power generation device from an overcurrent state according to the current supplied by the power generation device;
The second overcurrent protection means is positioned after the DC power supply generated by the power supply generation means is distributed to the drive control board and closer to the drive source than the first overcurrent protection means. A gaming machine, wherein a current for protecting said power supply generating device from an overcurrent state is smaller than that of said first overcurrent protection means.

Means 2: A peripheral control board that controls the performance in the game,
a drive control board for outputting a drive signal to a drive device having a drive source for driving the effect member, based on the drive data transmitted from the peripheral control board;
a power generation device that generates DC power to be supplied to the drive source;
a power generating device protection means arranged on a path for supplying AC power to the power generating device and protecting the power generating device according to the current supplied by the power generating device;
a driving device protection means arranged in a path for supplying the DC power to the driving source and protecting the driving device in accordance with the current supplied by the power generating device.

[16. Example of Contact Detection Sensor for Launch Handle]
FIG. 267 is a block diagram showing connection of signals around the handle unit 500. As shown in FIG.

The handle unit 500 includes a handle lever 504 whose surface is metallized (eg, plated) as described above, and is electrically connected to the plating of the plated handle lever 504 to allow the player to attach the handle lever 504 to the handle lever 504 . It has a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not a hand or finger is in contact with the device.

The contact detection sensor 509 measures the capacitance (stray capacitance) of the handle lever 504, measures changes in the capacitance of the handle lever 504 due to contact with the human body, and detects the measured capacitance at a predetermined threshold value. Human body contact is detected when the number increases. Since the contact detection sensor 509 detects the contact of the human body based on such a principle, it is preferable that the difference in capacitance between the state in which the human body is in contact and the state in which the human body is not in contact is large. That is, the smaller the capacitance in the non-contact state, the larger the change in capacitance due to contact with the human body. In other words, the change in capacitance due to contact with the human body is not the rate of change from the non-contact state, but the value of change in capacitance.

On the other hand, in order to enhance the decorativeness of the pachinko machine, the surface of the casing is often plated. Parts of the handle unit 500 other than the handle lever 504 may also be plated. In this case, in order to reduce the influence on the capacitance of the handle lever 504, it is preferable to form a metal film on the portion other than the handle lever 504 using discontinuous vapor deposition. Although discontinuous vapor deposition can form a surface with metallic luster, since the processed portion does not have conductivity, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacitance of the plating of the handle lever 504 in a non-contact state.

Also, in the handle unit, an LED board (printed board) on which an LED 512 and an LED driver IC 513 for driving the LED 512 are mounted is provided. flashes red. Note that the LED driver IC 513 in this embodiment converts the serialized ON/OFF data into parallel, and drives the plurality of LEDs 512 mounted on the printed circuit board at the timing according to the parallel-converted data. . Therefore, when the LED driver IC 513 is not required, for example, when driving one LED 512, the LED driver 513 may be omitted.

From a similar point of view as described above, capacitance is also generated between the conductors forming the circuit pattern on the printed circuit board in the handle unit 500 and the plating of the handle lever 504 . Therefore, the area of the circuit pattern formed on the printed circuit board in the handle unit 500 should be minimized. For example, a printed circuit board may be provided with a wide ground pattern for noise suppression and ground potential stabilization. However, since the plating of the handle lever 504 also generates capacitance between it and the ground pattern, a wide ground pattern increases the capacitance of the handle lever 504 in a non-contact state. Therefore, it is preferable to reduce the area of the ground pattern on the printed circuit board in the handle unit 500 as much as possible to reduce the capacitance with the handle lever 504 in the non-contact state. In other words, it can be said that the ideal printed board is a printed board in which only connectors for electrically connecting the printed boards are mounted in addition to the LEDs 512, and patterns only for electrically connecting the LEDs 512 and the connectors are wired.

The contact detection sensor 509 outputs a contact detection signal when the measured capacitance of the handle lever 504 exceeds a preset threshold value. As shown in FIG. 268, the contact detection signal is output by the potential difference between the touch sensor + signal and the touch sensor - signal. Lower the potential of the touch sensor-signal to a low level.

As shown in FIG. 267, the contact detection signal is input from the branch circuit 991 to the firing control section 953a provided on the power supply board 931 and the main control board 1310. FIG. The shooting control unit 953a uses the contact detection signal as a shooting permission condition, and controls the shooting device 680 so that game balls can be shot only when the player touches the handle lever 504 of the shooting handle unit 500. .

The main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormality of the pachinko machine using the contact detection signal. For example, after the player releases the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 and the contact detection signal is interrupted, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds after the state indicating non-contact) elapses, so to speak, 30 seconds. After a period of preparation, start monitoring. After the preparation period has elapsed, if the number of balls entered into the winning or large winning openings is counted and exceeds the specified number, there is a high possibility that game balls have entered the winning or large winning openings due to fraudulent acts. It is judged to be in an abnormal state. The preparation period is assumed to be a period sufficient for all game balls launched into the game area 5a to reach the out port 1111 immediately after the end of the game. Some machines that are no longer popular close without attracting any customers from the time they open to the time they close, so the credibility of the numbers calculated after the number of customers has clearly increased, and the lack of popularity. Abnormality is correctly determined as if a natural event occurred. In addition, various countermeasures are taken against static electricity that is applied from the outside or generated internally in game machines. In addition to the need to avoid false alarms and the correct determination of abnormalities, monitoring after grasping whether or not the player is actually playing the game is useful in avoiding unnecessary trouble with the player. have a nature.

Further, the gaming machine of this embodiment is provided with the base display (character product ratio display, performance display monitor) 1317 as described above, so that the progress of the gaming machine can be visually managed. The display of the base indicator 1317, which counts the number of winning balls and displays the base value, is updated only when game balls are being shot, that is, only when the player is playing a game. That is, only the number of prize balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when the contact detection sensor 509 detects the player's contact with the handle unit 500 to the handle lever 504 is counted and the base value is calculated. calculate. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the base value from being reflected on the base value of the prize balls obtained by the abnormality of detecting the prize balls in a state where the game balls are not shot or the fraudulent act, and the base value can be calculated accurately. Further, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. In the progress management of such a gaming machine as well, the progress management after grasping whether or not the player is actually playing the game is useful for correctly judging the performance of the gaming machine.

Next, the details of the processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 267 and the flowchart of FIG. 23, especially regarding the processing related to the contact detection signal. The contact detection signal is sent from the main control input circuit 1315 in the block diagram shown in FIG. It is taken into the main control MPU 1311 and various processes are executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes fraud detection processing (step S84). In the fraudulent act detection process, the main control MPU 1311 switches detection of an abnormal state according to the state of the contact detection signal that has been taken in. That is, the method of detecting an abnormal state is switched between detecting/not detecting an abnormal state.

For example, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the contact detection signal is interrupted (indicating non-contact state), even in the jackpot game state, the count switch causes the game to enter the big winning openings 2005 and 2006. When it is detected that the ball is entering the ball, a winning abnormality display command is generated. The created command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92).

It should be noted that the main control MPU 1311 may execute fraud detection processing when the contact detection signal is interrupted (indicating non-contact). In addition, only specific fraud detection processing (for example, detection processing of fraudulent prize winning to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006) may be executed according to non-detection of the contact detection signal. When the contact detection signal changes to the detected state (enters a state indicating contact), it is preferable to stop the execution of the fraudulent act detection process triggered by the change in the contact detection signal.

Further, even when the contact detection signal changes from the non-detection state to the detection state (changes to a state indicating contact), the execution of the fraudulent activity detection process triggered by the change in the contact detection signal may be continued. . In this case, for example, the operation of the hall employee, such as turning on the power again, stops the notification of the abnormality and returns to the normal game state.

Also, the main control MPU 1311 executes the role product ratio calculation/display process (step S89) to calculate the role product ratio (base value). At this time, if the determination using the contact detection signal indicates that the handle unit 500 is in a non-contact state with the handle lever 504, the game ball is not launched without executing the character ratio calculation/display processing. To prevent the obtained prize balls from being reflected in the base value.

A command based on the detection result of the contact detection signal is also transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Peripheral control unit 1511 reports an abnormality detected according to a command received from main control board 1310 . In addition, when the contact detection signal changes from the non-detected state to the detected state (enters a state indicating contact), the detected abnormality is the winning abnormality in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). A non-display command may be transmitted to encourage the peripheral control unit 1511 to stop the notification. Further, even if the contact detection signal changes from the non-detection state to the detection state (even if the state indicates contact), the abnormality notification may be continued. In this case, for example, the operation of the hall employee, such as turning on the power again, stops the notification of the abnormality and returns to the normal game state.

FIG. 268 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a branch circuit 991 provided on the relay board 990. As shown in FIG.

The branch circuit 991 is composed of three switching transistors Tr2, Tr3, and Tr5, and generates and outputs two signals, a touch sensor-1 signal and a touch sensor-2 signal, from the touch sensor-signal. Specifically, in the branch circuit 991, when the touch sensor- signal is at H level, the transistor Tr2 is turned on, the transistors Tr3 and Tr4 are turned off, and the touch sensor-1 signal is at H level (touch sensor + signal). voltage). At this time, since Tr3 is an open collector output, the output of the touch sensor-2 signal becomes undefined. On the other hand, when the touch sensor-signal is L level, the transistor Tr2 is turned off, the transistors Tr3 and Tr4 are turned on, and the touch sensor-1 signal and the touch sensor-2 signal become L level (ground voltage).

Thus, the branch circuit 991 divides the contact detection signal into two signals with different signal levels and outputs them.

As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment uses the player's handle operation as an abnormality determination condition, so that an abnormality of the gaming machine can be correctly determined, and fraud can be accurately detected.

In addition, whether or not the player operates the steering wheel determines whether the base value is updated, that is, whether the number of out balls or the number of winning balls is counted. can be evaluated. In other words, out balls and prize balls are counted while the shooting handle is being operated (+a predetermined time after releasing the hand).

Details of the processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 (flowchart of FIG. 23) will be described below, in place of the configuration shown in the block diagram of FIG. explanation. The difference between FIG. 267 and FIG. 17 is that the contact detection signal input to the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 is directly input via the branch circuit 991 in the configuration of FIG. The configuration differs in that it is input to the payout control board 951 and the command is input to the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control MPU of the payout control board 951 .

The contact detection signal passes through one of the payout control I/O ports from the payout control input circuit in the payout control unit 952, is taken into the payout control MPU in the switch input process of the timer interrupt process, and various processes are executed. . Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control MPU captures the contact detection signal and transmits the state of the contact detection signal periodically captured by the timer interrupt process to the main control MPU 1311 as a command. Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes the frame command reception process (step S82) of the interrupt process described above, receives the command, analyzes the received command, and executes the fraud detection process (step S84). Other processes executed by the main control MPU 1311 are the same as those described above.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the touch sensor contact detection signal is used to determine an abnormality of the game machine. may be performed. The effect control performed when the contact detection signal changes to a state indicating non-contact will be exemplified below.

For example, when the player releases the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 and the contact detection signal is interrupted (indicating non-contact state), the present effect is changed to a highly expected effect. You can change it. By performing performance with a high degree of expectation in a state where the player releases the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the player who is thinking of stopping the game can be given an opportunity to continue the game. Also, at the timing when the player releases the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, an effect may be performed to directly ask whether the game should be continued (for example, an effect in which the character asks, "Can you stop now?").

Therefore, depending on whether or not the player operates the steering wheel, an effect display not intended by the player can be performed, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game. In addition to the contact detection signal, the handle unit 500 is provided in a manner operable by the player in the same manner, and can be turned on and off by rotating the handle lever 504, and the game ball can be shot temporarily by turning the handle lever 504 on. Similarly, the on/off signal from the firing stop button (not shown) to stop is input to the main control board 1310, and the above-described effect control is performed with the presence or absence of the firing stop button as a trigger. Well, a similar effect can be obtained in this case as well.

To summarize the invention according to this embodiment, it is a game machine having the following means.
Means 1: A game control means for performing a lottery for a special game beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A shooting operation means having contact detection means for detecting contact by a player and performing an operation for shooting a game ball by the player;
a shooting control means for controlling shooting of game balls according to the operation of the shooting operation means;
a shooting means for shooting game balls into the game area under the control of the shooting control means;
A gaming machine, wherein a contact detection signal indicating a result of detection by said contact detection means is input to said game control means.

Means 2: The gaming machine according to Means 1,
The gaming machine, wherein the game control means detects an abnormality of the gaming machine according to the state of the contact detection signal.

Means 3: The gaming machine according to Means 2,
The gaming machine, wherein the game control means detects an abnormality of the gaming machine when the contact detection signal indicates non-contact.

Means 4: The gaming machine according to Means 3,
The gaming machine, wherein the game control means uses, as an abnormality detection condition, that the contact detection signal indicates non-contact.

Means 5: The gaming machine according to Means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine, wherein the game control means controls whether to update a value for evaluating the performance of the gaming machine according to the state of the contact detection signal.

Means 6: The gaming machine according to Means 5,
The game control means evaluates the performance of the gaming machine for winning balls detected during the period from when the contact detection signal indicates non-contact to when the contact detection signal indicates contact after a predetermined time has elapsed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is not used to update values.

[17. slot machine]
The arrangement of the programs and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described so far, and the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (rotary game machine) will now be described. Although the outline of the pachinko machine has been described with reference to FIG. 26, programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM in the same manner as the slot machine 4000 described below.

[17-1. structure]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. 269 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 270 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

As shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, the slot machine 4000 of this embodiment has various devices inside a box-shaped housing 4100 with an open front, and a front member on the front of the housing 4100. 4200 is provided so as to be openable and closable in a one-sided manner. Above the front member 4200, there are provided an image display 4500 for effecting display and information display according to the progress of the game, a speaker for effecting sound, and the like. The image display unit 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to effect display related to the game. Various effects displays and history information displays on the image display 4500 are controlled by the effects control board 4700 . That is, the image display 4500 serves as an effect display means capable of displaying an effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 serves as a display control means capable of controlling the display of the effect display means. Eggplant.

At the center of the front member 4200, there is a front panel on which a pattern or the like for decoration is drawn so that the rear cannot be seen. ) A pattern display window 4401 is formed. It should be noted that the front panel may be composed of a display device, and the reels 4301 are visible when no image is displayed in the symbol display window 4401, and an image that directs the game is displayed mainly around the symbol display window 4401. do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for effecting a game in the symbol display window 4401 .

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), the symbols that are variably displayed by the rotation of the reels 4301 arranged in the housing can be visually recognized. The reel 4301 is configured by horizontally arranging a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c. Strip-shaped sheets on which a plurality of patterns are drawn along the longitudinal direction are wound around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c, so that a plurality of patterns are arranged according to a predetermined arrangement.

Reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b and 4341c (see FIG. 271), which are stepping motors, are provided for the reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c, respectively. It is possible to That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b and 4341c constitute the drive sources for the respective reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c are controlled by a two-phase excitation method, similarly to the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1, to increase drive torque and static torque. As a result, a small motor can be used as the drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

In the following description, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are referred to as a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c, respectively, as required. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c are called a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to the respective reels are assumed to be a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel driving motor 4341, the plurality of types of symbols viewed from the symbol display window 4401 are varied so as to circulate, for example, from top to bottom (variation display). On the other hand, when the reels 4301 are stopped, a predetermined number of consecutive symbols (for example, 3), that is, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3, are displayed through the symbol display window 4401 for each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the game stop result are visible.

A predetermined activatable line is set for the 3×3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 . In this embodiment, a line (middle line) that crosses the middle pattern of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the bottom of the left reel 4301a to the middle of the middle reel 4301b to the top of the right reel 4301c ( A line diagonally crossing the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c from the upper stage of the left reel 4301a to the middle stage of the middle reel 4301b and the lower stage of the right reel 4301c (the line descending to the right) is an activatable line. Then, the player inserts medals or inputs from the credits (hereinafter referred to as "betting operation") to activate the activatable line, and based on the pattern combinations (lots) formed on the activated line. Establishment/non-establishment of a prize (role) is determined.

When a prize is established, there are cases where three predetermined patterns are lined up on the activated line, and there are cases where three predetermined patterns are lined up on another line visually. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) that crosses the upper pattern of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. In addition, the line (lower line) that crosses the lower pattern of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, and the front part (visible part) facing the pattern display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above The patterns may be visually arranged on the virtual line to be positioned. Below, the lines that can be activated (middle, upward to the right, downward to the right), lines that can align the visible patterns when winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) line).

The upper, middle, lower, right-up and right-down lines are set as activatable lines, and predetermined activatable lines are activated according to the number of bets. role) is established/not established. For example, if the number of bets is 1, the middle line is the valid line, if the number of bets is 2, in addition to the middle line, the upper and lower lines are valid lines. and Also, regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2), all lines may be valid, or may be dedicated to 3-coin stakes.

Around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401, a payout number display LED 4562 for displaying the number of medals to be paid out by the game is provided. A credit display for displaying the number of medals accumulated in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of remaining games during the grand prize may be provided.

Below the pattern display window 4401, a stepped portion is formed to protrude forward, and the upper surface of this stepped portion serves as an operation portion 4202 that slopes downward toward the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, and a one coin insertion button 4205 and a max bet button 4206 as progress operation units for advancing the game.

The medal slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation section 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000 . A game can be executed by a player inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performing a betting operation. An insertion sensor 4207b for detecting the passage of medals is provided on the route through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the information detected by the insertion sensor 4207b.

A single insert button 4205 and a max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000 . The one-card input button 4205 can be input one by one from the credit by pressing it once. The max bet button 4206 can be pressed once to allow input from credits to the maximum bet amount (for example, 3), but if the credit amount is less than the maximum bet amount, the credit amount is input as the bet amount. It's like

Below the operation unit 4202, a payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided. A payout button 4209 is used to pay out medals inserted from the medal slot 4203, medals (bet medals) input as the number of bets from the one insert button 4205 and the max bet button 4206, or credits that are paid out when a prize is established and stored. It is used when giving a command to return the stored medals (stored medals) to the medal receiving tray 4201 . In addition, when medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 after the automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a replay winning (replay winning), or medals exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as credits are also used for medals via the medal selector 4207. It is returned to the receiving tray 4201 .

The start lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a game in one section. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or when resetting an error (eg, hopper error) condition of the slot machine 4000 . The return button 4208 is used to return the medals inserted from the medal slot 4203 and stuck in the medal selector 4207 to the medal receiving tray 4201 .

The reel stop button 4211 is composed of a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively. and stops the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c according to the stop operation.

A decorative plate (decorative panel) forming the lower region of the front member 4200 is provided below the portion where these operation buttons are provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the lowest part of the front member 4200, a medal receiving tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout port, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided.

A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 271) for controlling the entire slot machine 4000 is arranged in the upper part of the inside of the housing. A character ratio indicator 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600 . The character ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. A liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600 may constitute the character ratio indicator 1317 .

The character ratio indicator 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another indicator (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display body 4500) provided on the front of the slot machine 4000, and the payout number display LED 4562 or the character ratio may be displayed on the image display 4500 .

When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 . It is preferable to display (print, engrave, seal, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100 that it is a switch for operating the display of the character object ratio. The display switch 1318 is desirably provided near the character ratio display 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, it can be placed on another board (for example, the production control board 4700) if it is easy to operate. , power supply device 4112 ), housing 4100 , or front member 4200 . Also, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also serve as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

In addition, a pattern variation display device 4300 is provided at approximately the center inside the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are placed thereon. An external relay terminal board 4131 for outputting a signal from the main substrate 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000 .

Furthermore, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is arranged in the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the activated line and a prize is awarded, this prize is awarded. or the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the credit due to the addition associated with winning is paid out to the medal receiving tray 4201.例文帳に追加By operating the payout button 4209, the medal payout device 4110 pays out the medals for the credit to the medal receiving tray 4201.例文帳に追加In addition, on the right side of the medal payout device 4110, the medals overflowing from the medal payout device 4110 are stored, and the medals that have flowed in are sent to the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for induction.

[17-2. Internal configuration of the slot machine]
FIG. 271 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. provided in the slot machine 4000. As shown in FIG. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for overall control of the game progress, and the main board 4600 is mounted with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input/output interface 4604, and the like.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with a character ratio display 1317 that displays the character ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and a display switch 1318 that switches the display of the character ratio display 1317 . The display switch 1318 may comprise a momentary pushbutton switch, but other types of switches may be used. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character product ratio may be displayed on the character product ratio display 1317 .

All of the above-described single insert button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, payout button 4209, etc. are connected to the main substrate 4600, and these operation buttons are sensors (not shown). is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600 . Specifically, when the starting lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c) is output to the main substrate 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a. , 4211b and 4211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c are output to the main board 4600 respectively.

Further, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main substrate 4600, and various signals are input to the main substrate 4600 from these devices. Equipment includes a symbol variation display device 4300, a medal payout device 4110, and the like.

As described above, the variable symbol display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c for respectively rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right reel drive motor 4341b, reel drive motor 4341c). The reel driving motor 4341 is a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c can rotate and stop independently. It is displayed while continuously changing downward.

Position sensors 4331a, 4331b, and 4331c are provided for detecting reference positions for rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. They are provided correspondingly within the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

Inside the medal selector 4207, the above-described solenoid 4207a and insertion sensor 4207b are installed. The insertion sensor 4207 b detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 4600 . When the solenoid 4207a is in the OFF state, inserted medals are detected by the inserted medals sensor 4207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the path to the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out, and insertion of medals cannot be accepted. The medal that flows through the return gutter returns to the medal receiving tray 4201 . At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is invalidated, so that neither betting by inserting medals nor accumulation of medals is performed.

The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e for detecting the paid out medals one by one in the outlet, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main substrate 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. . In addition, the game medal auxiliary storage box is provided with a medal full sensor 4111a. output to At this time, the image display 4500, the error lamp 4554, and the like display an error indicating an abnormality in the accumulation of medals, thereby informing the player, hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of the abnormality.

On the other hand, the main board 4600 outputs control signals to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110 . That is, the main substrate 4600 outputs drive pulse signals for controlling the start and stop of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c. In addition, the medal payout device 4110 receives a drive signal from the main substrate 4600 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and upon receipt of this, the medal payout device 4110 pays out medals. At this time, if the medal payout device 4110 does not have enough medals to be paid out, or if there are no medals, the payout sensor 4110e will not be able to detect the number of medals. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the payout sensor 4110e outputs an abnormal medal payout signal to the main board 4600, and the main board 4600 receives the signal to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of medals. is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display 4500, etc., to inform the player, hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of an abnormality.

The slot machine 4000 is provided with an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600. This effect control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, a ROM 4702, a RAM 4703, an input/output interface 4707, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and an AMP (audio amplifier). ) 4705, a sound source IC 4706 and the like are mounted. The performance control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600, and controls the display of the image display 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 4502, etc., and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Furthermore, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 of the game arcade via the external relay terminal board 4131 . The external relay terminal board 4131 has a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, paid-out medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800 .

The power supply unit 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from 24 volt AC (24V AC) power supplied from the island facility. For example, three types of power supplies are created: DC +5V (hereinafter "+5V"), DC +12V (hereinafter "+12V"), and DC +24V (hereinafter "+24V"). Three types of power of +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each component included in the slot machine 4000. is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is attached with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000 and can be operated only when the front member 4200 is opened. The power switch 4112v is for turning ON/OFF the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the settings of the slot machine 4000 (for example, settings 1 to 6). The reset switch 4112u is used to clear an error that has occurred in the slot machine 4000, and is operated together with the setting change key switch 4112t when changing settings.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel driving motor voltage switching circuit 4605 . When the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is rotationally driven to obtain drive torque for rotating the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, HI) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. , the control is performed so that +12V is supplied to the reel drive motor 4341 as the motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining static torque for maintaining the stopped state of the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. , the control is performed to supply +5V to the reel drive motor 4341 as the motor drive voltage.

The configuration example of the slot machine 4000 has been described above. In the game using the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the starting lever 4210 after determining the number of medals to be wagered, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c rotate, and then the player presses the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c. is operated, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are controlled to stop, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the active line, and if necessary Accordingly, the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded.

As described above, each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c is provided with a reel strip on which a pattern is drawn. Then, when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed in the symbol display window 4401 (combination of symbols displayed on the activated line). It is determined whether or not a combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line in the symbol display window 4401 . It is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of activated lines. As a result, when it is determined that a plurality of winning combinations of symbol combinations are displayed, medals are paid out in the amount obtained by adding up the payout numbers corresponding to the displayed winning combinations.

[17-3. Storage area configuration]
Next, storage areas provided by the ROM 4602 and RAM 4603 provided on the main substrate 4600 will be described. The storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined in FIG. 24, but is configured in the same manner as the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 272-275. FIG. 272 is a diagram showing details of the access area in the game control of the slot machine 4000 and the ROM area 5100 which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602 in this embodiment.

The storage area in this embodiment is provided by media such as the ROM 4602 and the RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from "0000H" to "FFFFH" are assigned. The access area of this embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I/O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. is Note that each area does not necessarily correspond to the medium that provides the access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

Since the access area of this embodiment is configured as described above, the CPU 4601 can access programs and data by specifying an address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. Details of the access area will be described below.

[17-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be described. ROM area 5100 corresponds to the storage area provided by ROM 4602 . The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains the stored data even when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. This is not possible. Note that the ROM 4602 may be a non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updated.

The ROM area 5100 is given addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH". The data stored in the ROM 4602 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "0000H" to "1FFFH".

The ROM area 5100 has a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. Each area has a start address and an end address.

The first control area is a game control area, and stores programs and the like for performing game control. The first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for game control are stored. That is, the program stored in the first control area is executed, and game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. In addition, let the area|region (1st control area, 1st data area) used for game control be the area|region for game control (1st storage area).

The second control area stores a program for debugging (functional inspection) of the control program. The second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (function test). The second data area is not necessarily required, and debugging data may be stored in the second control area. In addition, the area (second control area, second data area) where the program and data for debugging (function inspection) of the game control program without being used for game control are stored is the area for debugging (inspection function) ( second storage area).

The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying the character product ratio. The third control area also stores data for character product ratio calculation. A third data area may be provided for storing data for character product ratio calculation. An area (third control area) in which a program and data for calculating the role product ratio without being used for game control are stored is defined as a role product ratio calculation area (third storage area). Thus, by designing the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 is inspected and the game control code 13131 is stored. can be performed separately from the inspection of the slot machine 4000, and the trouble of inspecting the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Also, the code 13135 for calculating/displaying the role product ratio can be used in common for a plurality of models without depending on the model.

The first isolation area, the second isolation area, the third isolation area, and the fourth isolation area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and access is prohibited. In the processing by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset processing is forcibly executed. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas that are continuous with the preceding and following areas. ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first isolated area is the address ("0AFFH") one before the first data area. In addition, the third isolated area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function test) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the debug (function test) area may be treated as Similarly, the fourth isolated area is arranged between the area for debugging (functional inspection) and the area for character ratio calculation, and is treated as the area for debugging (functional inspection) in FIG. It may be treated as an object ratio calculation area.

[17-3-2. RAM area]
Next, the configuration of the RAM area 5200 will be described. FIG. 273 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 5200 in this embodiment. RAM area 5200 corresponds to the storage area provided by RAM 4603 . The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose stored contents are erased when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores the programs and data stored in the ROM area 5100, and stores data derived by executing the programs. Note that the RAM 4603 may be a non-volatile storage medium as long as it can read and write data. Also, when a power failure occurs, the data stored in the RAM 4603 can be held for a predetermined period by the backup power supply.

The RAM area 5200 is given addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH". The data stored in the RAM 4603 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 5200 includes a work area for game control, a work area for debugging (inspection function), a save area and an isolation area. Each area has a start address and an end address.

The work area for game control is a work area (temporary area) used when executing game control (first control). The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing program debug control (second control). The role product ratio calculation work area is an area for storing data for calculating the role product ratio and the calculated role product ratio (character product ratio, continuous accessory ratio, advantageous section accessory ratio, etc.). It should be noted that the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the character ratio do not necessarily need to secure a dedicated work area. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating the character ratio may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the control area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the character ratio is reduced. However, if the program configuration does not use the work area for debugging (inspection function) or the work area for calculating the character ratio, it is not necessary to use the work area for debugging (inspection function) or the work area for calculating the character ratio. good too.

The withdrawal area is an area for temporarily storing in order to save data used in game control or debug (inspection function) control or character product ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various CPU registers (calculation registers, flag registers, stack pointers, etc.) are copied to a save area before executing the predetermined process, After the processing is completed, the copied values are returned to various registers of the CPU. The retreat area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and character ratio calculation. Calculation may be divided separately. Thereby, independence can be maintained more by game control, debug (inspection function) control, and role product ratio calculation.

The isolated area is between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the character ratio, and the work area for debugging (inspection function), the save area, and the save area for calculating the character ratio. , and is a continuous area with each area (areas before and after). For example, the start address of the isolated area between the work area for game control and the work area for debugging (inspection function) is the next address ("3076H") after the end address of the work area for game control, and the end address is It becomes the previous address ("307FH") of the work area for debugging (inspection function). The isolated area is an area to which access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute reset processing when accessed during processing by the CPU 4601 .

FIG. 273 shows the details of the role product ratio calculation work area on the right side thereof. The role product ratio calculation work area may include a main area for storing the calculation result of the role product ratio, and a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 for storing a copy of the data stored in the main area. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, is set each time the data in the main area is updated in the character ratio calculation/display process, or is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 276). ) may be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, even if the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 276) good. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Also, if a predetermined value is set in the power interruption flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area has a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

In the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 276), it is determined whether or not the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal should be copied to the main area. Also, in the power-off processing executed when the power is turned off, the values in the main area may be copied to each backup area.

Unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2 . By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digits of the address.

FIG. 274 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the role product ratio calculation work area.

FIG. 274(A) shows the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274(A), the number of payouts, the number of consecutive payouts, the total number of payouts, the ratio of the prizes, the ratio of consecutive prizes, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section Stores a percentage. The number of prizes paid out is the number of medals paid out while the prize is in operation (for example, during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive award winning balls is the number of medals paid out during continuous award operation (for example, during big bonus). The total number of payouts is the total number of medals paid out in the game. The role ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of payouts by the total number of payouts. The continuous accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of continuous accessory payouts divided by the total number of wins and payouts. The number of games played in an advantageous interval is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the number of medals in hand is less likely to decrease, such as ART (Assist Replay Time)), and the number of games played in a non-advantageous interval. , is the number of games executed in a game state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of games in the advantageous section by (the number of games in the advantageous section + the number of games in the non-advantageous section).

Among the structure of the work area shown in FIG. It corresponds to the cumulative total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data will not be erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is provided so that long-term data can be stored. Also, the role product ratio, continuous role product ratio, and advantageous section ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

The number of bonus payouts, the number of continuous bonus payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous zone games, and the number of non-advantageous zone games are updated in the zone update process for calculating the role ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 276), and the role ratio , the continuous role ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the role ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 277).

FIG. 274(B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. Stores the number of games played in the advantageous section and the ratio of the advantageous section. Each data storage area is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games). When the number (400) is reached, the write pointers for all data are moved, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers for all data are moved for each predetermined number of winning balls. Further, the read pointer also moves along with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer points to a storage area one behind the write pointer. This is for calculating the character ratio using data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer. When the ring buffer is cycled and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous component ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the total accumulated value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274(B), the number of replays, the number of prize payouts, the number of award payouts, the number of continuous award payouts, and the number of games in the ring buffer are each a 2-byte storage area. Numerical values up to 65535 in decimal can be stored. The number of replays, the number of winning prizes, the number of payouts, the number of consecutive payouts, and the total number of games are storage areas of 3 bytes each, and can store values up to 16,777,215 in decimal. A large storage area is provided because the cumulative total is, for example, the sum of data for 400 games×n (6000 games when n=15). The number of replays, the number of prize payouts, the number of payouts of the award, the number of consecutive payouts of the award, and the cumulative total of the number of games are each a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not deleted unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is provided so that long-term data can be stored. Also, the sum total and total sum of the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are each a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. The number of games played in an advantageous section and the number of games played in a non-advantageous section are each a 3-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal. The advantageous interval ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

By increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, the data for the same 6000 games in total can be stored. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

Among the structure of the work area shown in FIG. The description is the same as in FIG. 274(A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The winning payout number is the total number of medals paid out in the game. The number of games played is the number of games played, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of replays, the number of prize payouts, the number of accessory payouts, the number of continuous accessory payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated in the area update process for calculating the role ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 276). ), and the role ratio, continuous role ratio, and advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the role ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 277).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 274(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the role product ratio calculation work area is deleted in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 276). data is not erased by other triggers. For this reason, the data in the work area for calculating the role product ratio may be erased every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total accumulation in FIG. 274(B) may be erased every predetermined period.

Also, the data in the work area for calculating the character ratio or the calculated character ratio is an abnormal value (for example, the character ratio is over 100%, or the calculation result of the character ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculation value. , number of payouts>total number of payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the role product ratio may be deleted. Further, if the data in the work area for calculating the role product ratio or the calculated role product ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that there is an abnormality. Also, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the character product ratio may be calculated again.

[17-3-3. Configuration of I/O Area]
Next, the I/O area 5300 will be described. An input/output port corresponds to the I/O area 5300 , and each input/output port can be accessed by the CPU 4601 accessing the I/O area 5300 . Input/output ports correspond to, for example, ports related to inputs such as switches, and ports related to outputs such as large winning opening solenoids and LED drive signals. Input/output port settings (settings related to use/unuse such as input settings and output settings) are set based on the setting values in the parameter information setting area 5400 .

[17-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be explained. FIG. 275 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 5400 of this embodiment. A parameter information setting area 5400 is an area in which various settings can be made. For example, various settings include the start/end addresses of each control area and data area, as shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 275, the definition of the start address and the end address of each area of the third control area, the work area for calculating the character ratio calculation, and the save area for calculating the character ratio calculation is omitted, but the third control area start setting And the third control area end setting is defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work area start setting for character ratio calculation and the work area end setting for character ratio calculation are the start and end settings of other work areas It is defined in the same manner as the end setting, and the character product ratio calculation save area start setting and character product ratio calculation save area end setting are defined in the same manner as the start and end settings of other save areas. An area other than the area set here is an unused (unset) area. As a result, when the CPU 4601 accesses the unused area, the reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601 . In FIG. 275, the areas are set as continuous areas, but the set areas do not have to be continuous. For example, the parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Further, in this embodiment, when an area other than the setting area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 5100 and the isolated area of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, by intentionally accessing the isolated area and resetting, it is possible to perform the initial activation of the program. Since slot machines execute processes sequentially, by accessing the isolation area after the last game process is completed, the program can be executed from the startup process and the initial settings can be executed again. As a result, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, the normal value can be set again by executing the initial setting again. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, RAM clearing is determined by the power failure flag, but it is possible to forcibly clear the RAM by accessing the isolated area without setting the power failure flag. Become. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, since the game is played in parallel, once the game itself is initialized, it becomes impossible to continue the game. Since it is necessary to initialize the information in the RAM, it is possible to eliminate the processing for initializing the information in the RAM by accessing the isolated area.

The values set in the parameter information setting area 5400 are not set sequentially by user program processing such as initial setting of the CPU 4601, but by setting the address of the parameter area and the set value in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. , the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at startup. As a result, various parameters can be set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the set values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[17-4. Game control]
[17-4-1. System reset startup process]
Next, control of the slot machine of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 276 is a flow chart for explaining the procedure of system reset activation processing executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset activation process is a process that is executed when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on or when a power failure occurs, and is a process that is activated when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601 .

When the system reset activation process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting values stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area are set in the function setting registers of the CPU 4601, and the addresses of the areas assigned to the access areas are set as the setting values. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area and a save area are assigned to the RAM area 5200 as used areas, and areas not assigned as used areas (isolated areas in FIG. 273) are treated as unused areas. assigned. Also, the work area and the save area are divided into game control and debugging (inspection function) (or other uses). In the ROM area 5100, as in the RAM area 5200, areas for storing programs and data are allocated as used areas, and areas not allocated as used areas are allocated as unused areas.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes security check processing (step S1012). Security check processing is processing for determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, there is a possibility that the ROM 4602 has been replaced with an illegal ROM, so activation of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Furthermore, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check elapses (step S1014).

It should be noted that the processing from power-on of the slot machine to the end of the security check (processing up to step S1014) is not defined by the user program, but is configured by hardware inside the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It has become.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes device initialization setting processing for initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting processing, processing such as startup setting of periodic processing (timer interrupt processing in FIG. 277) for periodically executing predetermined processing is executed. In this embodiment, the parameter setting process executes a function such as a random number function setting that prevents the user program from rewriting the settings related to the game lottery after the security check, and the device initialization setting process for functions other than these functions. running with By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom of game control is enhanced and cheating is less likely to occur in the game.

Furthermore, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 or hot start to return to the game with the contents of the backed up RAM 4603 is performed.

When performing a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is "Yes"), the CPU 4601 executes initialization processing to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1020). A cold start is performed when the settings of the pachinko machine 1 are changed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, when the power interruption flag is not set, and the like.

On the other hand, the CPU 4601 executes processing for returning to the game based on the backed-up contents of the RAM 4603 when performing a hot start to return to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is "No"). (Step S1022). At this time, the process that was interrupted at the time of power failure is restored by the return process. Specifically, in either of steps S1024 to S1042 of the system reset activation process described later or steps S1110 to S1130 of the regular process (FIG. 277), the process that was interrupted at the time of power failure is resumed.

Note that the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment calculates a checksum based on information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when recovery processing is executed. At this time, only the work area for game control excluding the work area for debugging (inspection function) out of all areas that use the checksum calculation target as work (work area for game control and work area for debugging (inspection function)) may be Calculating the checksum only in the game control work area is because the debugging (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process, and it does not affect the game results. Since it is a process that does not exist, it is possible that some bugs may remain due to insufficient verification.In this case, a work area for debugging (inspection function) that holds information obtained by executing such processing Using it as a checksum calculation target may impair the reliability of normal recovery from a power outage. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is installed in a product with bugs remaining, it will cause a big trouble in the market. Depending on the situation, sales may be discontinued and the product may need to be recalled. This is because the work area for game control is more reliable than the work area for debugging (inspection function) because the verification is performed practically.

When the initialization process ends, or when a series of games ends, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, the information in the RAM 4603, which is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls, is once returned to the initial setting state.

After completing the game initial setting process, the CPU 4601 executes an information signal 1 output process for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting the debugging (inspection function) signal to the initial state is performed. For the information signal output processing, information signal 1 to N output processing is defined, and necessary modules are called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when outputting a debug (inspection function) signal (information on reel rotation start, start lever ON, winning combination) associated with the start of the game in the game start processing, debugging regarding the stop of each reel in the symbol stop processing ( When the inspection function) signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) is output, the debugging (inspection function) signal related to the fixed combination in the winning judgment process (fixed combination stopped on each reel, payout accompanying the fixed combination At the time of outputting the number information, the information of the output signal regarding the payout number at the time of payout (the number of payout medals, etc.), the "information signal N output processing" module necessary for the processing is appropriately called and executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes standby processing for performing processing before the player operates the starting lever 4210 (step S1028). Before the start lever 4210 is operated, for example, it is determined whether or not a replay execution instruction has been given, whether or not medals have been inserted, and whether or not medals have been settled. Confirmation of game setting values and the like are performed.

When the starting lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes game start processing for starting the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for drawing a game is obtained, a winning combination is determined, and the rotation of the reels 4301 is started. After that, the CPU 4601 executes Wait processing for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches the normal rotational speed (step S1032).

When the reels 4301 reach the normal rotational speed, the CPU 4601 makes it possible to accept input from the reel stop button 4211, and executes symbol stop processing until all the reels 4301 are stopped (step S1034).

Furthermore, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, the winning combination is determined, and when the winning combination is determined, the setting corresponding to the winning combination is performed, and the setting for executing the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize medals to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and adds the value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and adds the value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state. 273, see FIG. 274) is updated (step S1038). The processing of step S1038 can be skipped when there are no prize medals to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Note that even when the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and stops the game, the role product ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, by executing these processes, it is possible to collect data for character product ratio calculation even during fraud notification.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes game end processing for processing at the end of the game (step S1042). In the game ending process, a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if there is no winning or if there is no payout, this process is skipped. When the game ending process ends, the process returns to the game initialization process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[17-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, periodic processing, which is interrupt processing that is activated at predetermined intervals while the main loop processing of the system reset initial activation processing is being executed, will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the procedure of regular processing.

When the regular processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all registers (step S1110). At this time, the saved data is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. As mentioned above, periodic processing is interrupt processing that is activated while main loop processing is being executed. need to be

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer incorporated in the CPU (step S1112). This allows the watchdog timer to be cleared periodically.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes switch input processing for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Furthermore, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of a driver (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, it performs stepping motor pulse output, origin position detection, and the like.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes timer measurement processing for updating various timers used in game control (step S1118). Since the periodic processing is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic processing times the set number of times.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether the display switch 1318 has been operated, and if the display switch 1318 has been operated, calls the role product ratio calculation/display processing, and displays the medals stored in the role product ratio calculation work area. Refer to the number of payouts to calculate the accessory ratio. Then, the calculated role product ratio is displayed on the role product ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The role product ratio calculation/display processing is the same as the role product ratio calculation/display processing ( FIGS. 24 and 25 ) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 . Further, the specific calculation method of the character ratio and the specific display method of the character ratio are the same as the methods described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 . In this way, by calling the character product ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the character product ratio, it is possible to confirm the character product ratio (gambling property of the slot machine 4000) based on the most recent data.

In addition, when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (character ratio, continuous character ratio, total, total total) may be calculated, but each time the display switch 1318 is operated, the may be calculated only for Also, the role product ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated role product ratio may be displayed on the role product ratio display device 1317 when the display switch 1318 is operated.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes LED output processing for controlling the LED (step S1120). The LED to be controlled is the one controlled by the main substrate 4600, and for example, the payout number display LED 4562. It also outputs data for displaying the character ratio on the LED.

CPU 4601 executes information output processing for outputting a signal to external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to hall computer 4800 via external relay terminal board 4131 . Furthermore, CPU4601 outputs the command memorize|stored in the command buffer to the production|presentation control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes random number update processing for updating the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). In random number update processing, random numbers to be generated by software processing are updated. Here, in addition to random numbers generated only by software, update processing of soft random numbers built into the CPU is executed. With the software random numbers built into the CPU, although the count itself is executed by hardware, the update trigger is determined in this process. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce program processing related to random number updating.

When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process to return to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Furthermore, execution of interrupts is permitted (step S1130). During execution of regular processing (timer interrupt processing), even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending, and the interrupt is enabled after the timer interrupt processing that was executed immediately before ends normally. It is now running. Therefore, the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is configured so as not to be executed multiple times.

[17-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Next, information signal output processing executed in system reset start-up processing and the like will be described. The information signal output processing is provided according to each output signal function (1 to N), and is composed of a plurality of modules. For example, there are "conditional device output signal (signal output related to conditional device operation)" and "lottery determination processing (signal output related to lottery)". Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the explanation of each flow is omitted. FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing the procedure of information signal output processing of this embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the value set in the register from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure recovery even if it is destroyed), and the values of all registers are saved to the stack area. It is designed to let Also, the stack area used at this time is assigned to the save area for debugging (inspection function), and is assigned to a different area separated from the save area for game control.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires from the RAM 4603 information referred to for selecting (ON/OFF) an information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) to be output (step S1212). Each information signal output process only refers to the information stored in the RAM 4603, and does not write data to the RAM 4603 in the process. When writing is necessary, information is output to the work area for debugging (inspection function). A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured so as not to be used (including reference) in processes other than the information signal output process. Thereby, even if the program for executing the information signal output process is placed in a different place from the other game control programs, independence from the other game control programs can be ensured without using a common area. .

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information obtained in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Furthermore, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, elapses (step S1218). The information signal output time is predetermined, and by setting a sufficient time, the debugging (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the destination. After that, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process ends.

As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output by the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processing from step S1210 to step S1220 is executed for the debug (inspection function) signals to be output. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each output signal function (1 to N). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processing are defined for each function. Information signal output processing may be made common by preparing two data areas and selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to a function designated by a caller.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a program (signal output program) for executing information signal output processing etc. is stored in an area clearly distinguished from the area for storing the game control program (game control area). By providing an area (debugging (inspection function) area), a program for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged independently. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, and is a process that does not affect the results of the game and does not impair the fairness of the game. In addition, for purposes other than this (for example, to arrange game control programs and general-purpose programs to compensate for the lack of capacity in the game control area), programs should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program, and at this time, the address of the call destination is specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and protects all registers used in the game control area when called. Also, as mentioned above, when executing the program processing of the game control area, access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and the program processing of the debug (inspection function) area is executed. If it is, it is configured to permit only reference to the game control work area and prohibit writing. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling modules (including subroutines) placed in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program placed in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in the form of a subroutine, and after the subroutine ends, the return instruction returns immediately after the call. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. By configuring in this way, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (the program placed in the debug (inspection function) area).

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (game control work area, role product ratio calculation work area) may be the same as steps S18 to S26 in FIG. The slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and if the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the game state backup data is deleted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine described above, it is possible to accurately calculate the role ratio of the slot machine in operation, and to enhance the gambling nature of the gaming machine in operation. I can confirm.

Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, representative aspects of the invention other than those described in the scope of claims are as follows.

(0) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of a game;
and a character ratio indicator that displays information about the given game value,
The character ratio display device has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device,
The main controller is
transmitting data to be displayed on the character ratio display to the driver circuit by serial communication;
The game according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that, after power-on, the synchronization method, communication rate, whether to use parity, and whether to use stop bits are set for serial communication with the driver circuit. machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein communication between the main controller and the driver circuit is slower than communication between the main controller and the peripheral controllers.

As a result, inaccurate display of the character product ratio due to garbled data during communication can be suppressed.

(2) the main controller,
It has a work RAM that holds data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the character ratio even when the power is off,
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the settings for the serial communication are executed after the work RAM is cleared.

As a result, it is possible to prevent display of an erroneous character product ratio by using erroneous RAM data.

(3) the main controller,
has a function of transmitting the data accumulated in the FIFO buffer by serial communication,
The game machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a data storage amount is set to determine the timing of data transmission from the FIFO buffer after power-on.

This allows data to be sent in any number of bits from the FIFO buffer.

(4) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of a game;
and a character ratio indicator that displays information about the given game value,
The character ratio display device has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device,
The main controller, the display device and the driver are arranged such that the length of the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. The game machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by arranging a circuit.

By lengthening the signal line that connects the main controller and the driver circuit, it is possible to easily detect illegal modifications without arranging parts around the main controller, and furthermore, the signal line that connects the driver circuit and the display device. is shorter than the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the character-object ratio can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main controller and the character product ratio display are housed in one case.

As a result, unauthorized modification can be easily discovered without arranging other parts around the main controller, and the influence of noise can be reduced.

(6) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main controller and the character product ratio display are arranged on a single printed circuit board.

As a result, unauthorized modification can be easily discovered without arranging other parts on the printed circuit board around the main controller, and the influence of noise can be reduced.

(7) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the character product ratio display device is configured by housing the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

This can reduce the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. Also, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit.

As a result, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit can be reduced.

(9) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display direction of the character ratio indicator is the same as the display direction of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) the driver circuit has a standby mode in which characters and numbers are not displayed on the display device to reduce power consumption;
The game according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the main controller sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the character product ratio display is in a closed state in which the character product ratio display is not visible in the installed state of the game machine. machine.

As a result, wasteful power consumption of the game machine can be prevented when display of the character product ratio is unnecessary.

(11) A gaming machine that gives prize balls as game value to a player by winning a prize in a predetermined winning hole of a game ball shot toward a game area,
a main control device that controls the progress of a game;
Equipped with a role ratio indicator that displays information about the prize ball,
The winning opening includes a general winning opening whose entrance shape does not change depending on the game state, and an electric winning opening whose entrance opens or expands depending on the game state,
The main control device determines the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player, at least the number of first prize balls to be paid out triggered by the winning in the general winning opening, and the number of winning balls in the electric winning opening triggered by counted separately from the number of second prize balls to be paid out,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the character ratio display device displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main controller stores the counted number of prize balls in a memory,
the memory stores check code for verifying the stored number of prize balls;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main controller erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

As a result, an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory can be detected, and display of an erroneous role ratio (the ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls) can be suppressed.

(13) The main controller,
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when power is cut off,
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area,
storing the data of the number of prize balls for calculating the character ratio in the second backup area;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

Thus, when at least one of the data for game control and the data on the number of winning balls for calculating the role product ratio is normal, only the abnormal data can be deleted and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main controller,
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when power is cut off,
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area,
storing the data of the number of prize balls for calculating the character ratio in the second backup area;
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the game machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. A game machine described in the item.

When the role product ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the role product ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased, thereby preventing the erasure of the character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall staff. , It is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the character ratio is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled to a state with a high role ratio, and to prevent concealment of the state with a high role ratio.

(15A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
a display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in response to input/output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) the information about the gaming value is a base;
The control means is
controlling the progress of a game by switching between a special game state in which a player can obtain a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state is the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine). The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of balls, the sum of the number of game balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls.

(15C) The control means receives, as the predetermined signal, a winning detection signal for detecting a winning to a winning opening, a reception confirmation signal for a prize ball payout command or a prize ball payout completion signal, or a timing for receiving a prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of prize balls used to calculate the base to be displayed on the display means is updated at the timing when the prize ball payout command instructing the payout is transmitted.

(15D) The control means
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal game state, when receiving a signal that a game ball has won a prize in a winning hole provided in the game area, calculating the number of prize balls determined corresponding to the winning hole,
updating the total number of prize balls using the calculated number of prize balls;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(15E) comprising payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means is
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal game state, when the winning of a game ball into a winning hole provided in the game area is detected, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(15F) provided with a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means is
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal game state, when the winning of a game ball into a winning hole provided in the game area is detected, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
receiving confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction for which the receipt confirmation is received;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(15G) comprising payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means is
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal game state, when the winning of a game ball into a winning hole provided in the game area is detected, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
receiving the completion of the payout of the prize balls according to the instruction from the payout control means;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the received instruction of completion of the payout;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(15H) The control means includes information updating means for updating information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in response to input/output of a predetermined signal, and updating the updated information on the game value on the display means. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means for processing (statistically processing) and displaying the results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 15A to 15H, it is possible to accurately execute processing related to acquisition of game media.

(16A) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
a display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates the information related to the game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to satisfaction of a predetermined condition in the game situation.

(16B) the information about the gaming value is a base;
The control means is
controlling the progress of a game by switching between a special game state in which a player can obtain a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal game state, when a winning game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning hole is calculated and stored in a buffer,
At a predetermined timing, the predetermined number is transferred from the buffer to the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the game area). , the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, the sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls) to calculate the base.

(16D) The predetermined timing is timing when the number of winning balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer, adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, and thereby removes the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that the predetermined number is moved to a number.

(16E) The control means includes information updating means for updating information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in response to input/output of a predetermined signal, and updating the information on the updated game value to the display means. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means for processing (statistically processing) and displaying the results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from the game while maintaining the game within the regular restrictions of the main controller.

(17A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
a display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The control means is
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game value information to be displayed on the display means is updated in relation to the fact that the counted number of balls consumed satisfies a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means
controlling the progress of a game by switching between a special game state in which a player can obtain a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the information regarding the game value is calculated at the timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means determines the number of balls to be consumed according to the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, or the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that it counts .

(17D) the information about the gaming value is a base;
The control means is
stores the total number of out balls used for calculating the base;
calculating the number of balls consumed in the normal game state and storing it in a buffer;
A predetermined number is transferred from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing, and the base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(17E) The predetermined timing is timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out balls, thereby A game machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that a predetermined number is moved to a number.

(17F) The control means
Triggered by winning the start winning slot, a special symbol variation display game for deriving the special game state is executed,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that, when the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is the upper limit value, the number of winning balls is counted without storing the winning to the starting winning hole.

(17G) The control means includes information updating means for updating information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in response to input/output of a predetermined signal, and updating the updated information on the game value on the display means. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means for processing (statistically processing) and displaying the results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to inventions 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from the game while maintaining the game.

(18A) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
a main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is played is detachably attached;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display means displays the information about the game value even when the body frame is closed.

(18B) the main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to an island facility of a playground;
The game machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided on the back side of the game machine so as to be visible when the body frame is opened.

(18C) the control means is attached to the body frame;
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided in the case of the control means so as to be visible from the back side of the game machine.

According to the inventions 18A to 18C, it is possible to suppress the decrease in hall sales.

(19A)
A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
a display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The control means is
Information updating means for updating information on game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to satisfaction of a predetermined condition in the game;
a game execution means for performing a special symbol variation display game triggered by winning a prize in the starting prize opening,
wherein the game value information is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the special symbol variation display game is being played by the game execution means; The game machine described.

(19B) the information about the gaming value is a base;
The control means, as the predetermined condition, at any timing of detection of winning to the winning opening, transmission of prize ball payout command, reception of receipt confirmation of prize ball payout command, and reception of prize ball payout completion signal The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of winning balls used to calculate the base to be displayed on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has sufficient countermeasures against cheating even during a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a main control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
Effect control means for controlling the effect of a special symbol variation display game that is triggered by winning a prize in the starting port;
a game value information display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The production control means is
controlling the transition to a low power mode in which the power consumption of the game machine is reduced from the normal mode,
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein during the low power mode, the display mode is not changed so as to reduce the power consumption of the game value information display means.

(20B) an effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game and comprising a liquid crystal display means having a backlight;
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value information display means is composed of light emitting diodes and does not reduce brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) an effect display means for displaying an effect of the special symbol variation display game;
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time elapses after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is consumed,
The game value information display means does not change the display mode so as to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is consumed. The game machine described in each of the preceding items.

According to the inventions 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a substantial energy saving mode.

(21A) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
a display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The control means is
game state control means for controlling the game state to any one of a normal game state and a plurality of advantageous game states more advantageous to the player than the normal game state;
The information regarding the game value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state, and updating the information. game machine.

(21B) The control means controls the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, or the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls, The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of balls consumed in the normal game state is counted.

(21C) The control means
When the special symbol variation display game results in a big win, the advantageous game state is derived, and control is performed to open the winning openings from which the player can obtain a large amount of game value,
The advantageous gaming state is defined as the period from the determination of the big win in the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumption balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information on the game value. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(21D) The control means
In the advantageous game state, control is performed to open the winning openings from which the player can obtain a large amount of game value,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of game balls that have entered the winning slot is excluded from the number of game balls that have been launched into the game area, and the number of balls that have been consumed in the normal game state is counted.

According to the inventions 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that provides a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
and display means for displaying information about the given game ball,
In the game area where the launched game balls roll, there are a start port that triggers a special game state that facilitates the acquisition of a large number of game balls, and a trigger that leads the open state from the closed state of the start port. At least a passage opening is provided,
The control means is
It is also possible to control a special game state that makes it easy to derive the open state of the start port,
The number of prize balls given to the player is played by excluding the number of prize balls given and the number of consumption balls consumed by the player while being controlled to either the special game state or the special game state. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the information on the game balls is calculated and updated by dividing by the number of balls consumed by the player.

(22B) The control means selects one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls, The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of balls consumed in the normal state is counted.

(22C) The control means determines the number of winning balls and the number of consumed balls during the period from the determination of winning by the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game as the expanded state, The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that it is excluded from information calculation.

(22D) The control means counts the number of balls consumed in the normal state by excluding the number of game balls that have entered the starting hole from the number of game balls launched into the game area. A game machine described in each item.

According to the inventions 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) a shooting device operable by a player for shooting game balls toward a game area;
prize ball awarding means for awarding a predetermined number of prize balls when the game balls are detected in a winning hole provided in the game area;
a main control means for executing a lottery to decide whether or not to grant an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player when the game ball is detected in a predetermined winning opening among the winning openings;
A gaming machine comprising peripheral control means for determining an effect to appear based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means has an information update means capable of updating information on the given game ball to either increase or decrease,
A first state in which the information on the given game ball can be updated by the information updating means to increase or decrease, and a state in which the information on the given game ball can be updated to increase or decrease by the information updating means There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information on the given game ball is updated to increase is suppressed compared to the first state,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the state has shifted from the first state to the second state.

(23B) the information about the gaming value is a base;
The main control means is
controlling the progress of a game by switching between a special game state in which a player can obtain a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
calculating the base by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect with the timing at which the base is likely to fall as the second state.

(23C) The main control means
Writing information about game balls into a storage area at a predetermined time, every predetermined number of prize balls, or every predetermined number of consumed balls,
comparing the information about the game ball written in the storage area with the information about the game ball stored in the storage area before the writing, and determining the increase or decrease of the information about the game ball;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines appearance of the adversity effect in accordance with the determined increase/decrease.

According to the inventions 23A to 23C, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest even if the state in which the variable display game is interrupted continues for a long time.

(24A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a control means for repeatedly executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
prize ball acquisition means for acquiring the number of prize balls won by the player at a predetermined timing;
Consumed ball detection means for detecting the consumed ball consumed by the player,
The control means is
When the predetermined timing and the detection of the consumed balls by the consumed balls detection means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls obtained at the predetermined timing and the detected number of consumed balls are detected within the same repetition. count with
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the information on the game value is calculated using the counted number of awarded balls and number of consumed balls.

(24B) the information about the gaming value is a base;
The control means is
To control the progress of a game by switching between a special game state in which a player can obtain a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state,
counting the total number of prize balls in the normal game state and the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state within the same repetition;
The game according to each of the preceding items, wherein the information regarding the game value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. machine.

According to the inventions 24A to 24B, information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
an out-port detecting means for detecting a game ball passing through an out-port provided at the bottom of the game area;
winning ball detection means for detecting a winning ball into a predetermined winning hole,
The control means is
game state control means for controlling to any one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
counting the number of game balls passing through the out port from the output of the out port detection means;
counting the number of winning balls from the output of the winning ball detection means;
counting the number of balls consumed by the player based on the sum of the counted number of game balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls;
Information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , the game machine described in the preceding items.

(25B) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
a detection means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area,
The control means is
game state control means for controlling to any one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
counting the number of game balls hit into the game area from the output of the detection means, counting the consumption game balls consumed by the player;
Information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , the game machine described in the preceding items.

(25C) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
a detection means for counting the number of game balls discharged from the game machine,
The control means is
game state control means for controlling to any one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can obtain more game value than in the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine from the output of the detection means, counting the number of consumption balls consumed by the player;
Information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , the game machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions 25A to 25C, it is possible to accurately execute processing related to acquisition of game media.

(26A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
a display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The control means is
game state control means for controlling to any one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can obtain more game value than the normal game state;
a prize ball counting means for counting the number of prize balls excluding the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball hit toward the right side of the game area enters a prize winning opening;
Consumed ball number counting means for counting the number of consumed balls consumed by the player excluding the number of game balls hit toward the right side of the game area,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates the information on the game value using the counted number of awarded balls and number of consumed balls.

(26B) the information about the gaming value is a base;
Counting the number of prize balls in the normal game state, excluding the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball hit toward the right side of the game area enters a prize winning opening, and
excluding the number of game balls hit toward the right side of the game area and counting the number of consumption balls in the normal game state;
Any of the preceding items, wherein the control means calculates the information on the game value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state. game machine.

(26C) The control means detects that the game ball has passed through the gate section provided on the right side of the game area or won a prize in the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the predetermined period is The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls are excluded from counting.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period according to the elapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time to consume a predetermined number of game balls, or the time to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(26E) The control means excludes the number of balls passing through the gate section provided on the right side of the game area and the number of winning balls into the winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls is counted.

According to inventions 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player according to the result of a win-lose lottery in the game;
first data setting means for setting first data according to a game result;
second data setting means for setting second data independent of game results;
third data setting means for setting third data according to game results;
a first conversion means for obtaining first conversion data from the first data set by the first data setting means and the second data set by the second data setting means;
a second conversion means for obtaining second conversion data from the first conversion data obtained by the first conversion means and the third data set by the third data setting means;
and display means for displaying the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display device does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value within a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is multiplication means, and multiplies the first data and the second data at the timing when a predetermined condition is established to obtain the first conversion data, The game machine described in each of the preceding items.

(27D) The second conversion means is division means, and is characterized by dividing the first conversion data by the third data to obtain the second conversion data at the timing when a predetermined condition is established. , the game machine described in the preceding items.

(27E) the first data is a game value given to the player (for example, the number of prize balls);
The third data is the gaming value (for example, the number of out balls) consumed by the player,
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain second conversion data, and obtains information about the given game value,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display displays information (for example, base) regarding the game value obtained by the second conversion means.

According to the inventions 27A to 27E, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, it is possible to accurately display in real time the base value required for evaluating the gaming machine. Further, by using the second conversion means (division means), it is possible to accurately display the information (for example, the base value) regarding the game value in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a control means for executing regular processing for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
and conversion means for calculating information about the game value,
The control means is
Passing an argument to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, obtaining a result converted by the conversion means based on the argument from the conversion means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the process of passing the argument and the process of acquiring the result of the conversion can be executed within one periodical process.

(28B) The conversion means includes:
It is an arithmetic circuit that performs a division operation,
a divisor register for inputting a divisor, a dividend register for inputting a dividend, and a result register for outputting a quotient of a division operation,
The control means is
writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register;
reading the quotient from the result register after a predetermined time has passed since the argument was written;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the process of writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) prize game medium number counting means for counting the game medium given to the player in a predetermined game state;
Consumed game media number counting means for counting the game media consumed by the player in the predetermined game state;
The control means is
writing a value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game medium count means by 100 into the dividend register;
writing the number of consumed game media counted by the consumed game media count means into the divisor register;
A gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein a base value is read from the result register.

According to inventions 28A to 28C, information on game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of obtaining the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed within one repetition process (timer interrupt process), complication of control can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a prize-winning opening in which a game ball can win a prize;
a control means for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
Consumed ball counting means for counting the consumed balls consumed by the player;
a prize ball counting means for counting the prize balls given to the player;
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state in which game ball winning is easy and a closed state in which winning is difficult,
The control means is
updating the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means based on the counted number of consumed balls and the number of prize balls;
If winning to the specific winning opening is detected even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that there is a winning abnormality, and if the determination is made, the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality. is excluded from the number of balls consumed, and the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29B) At least one of the winning holes is a starting winning hole that triggers a special game state that facilitates the acquisition of a large number of game balls;
The control means determines that there is a prize winning abnormality when the starting prize winning port is in a closed state and a winning to the starting prize winning port is detected, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , the game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein information relating to game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29C) at least one of the winning openings is a big winning opening opened in a special game state;
The control means determines that there is a winning abnormality when a winning to the big winning opening is detected while the big winning opening is closed, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , the game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein information relating to game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29D) having consumable ball detection means for detecting consumable balls consumed by the player;
The consumable ball counting means counts the consumable balls consumed by the player by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumable balls detected by the consumable ball number detection means. The game machine described in the item.

(29E) the control means stores the total number of balls consumed to be used for calculating the information on the game value;
The consumed ball counting means adds the number of consumed balls detected by the consumed ball number detection means to the total number of consumed balls, subtracts the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the total number of consumed balls, and calculates the number of consumed balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by counting.

(29F) the control means stores the total number of balls consumed to be used for calculating the information on the game value;
The consumed ball counting means counts the consumed balls by adding a value obtained by subtracting the number of consumed balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls detected by the consumed ball number detecting means to the total number of consumed balls. A game machine according to any of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by:

(29G) The winning opening is switchable between an open state in which game ball winning is easy and a closed state in which it is difficult to win,
When a winning to the winning opening is detected in the closed state and no winning balls are dispensed in relation to the winning, the control means determines that there is a winning abnormality, and reduces the number of winning balls related to the winning. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game value information to be displayed on the display means is updated by excluding it from the number of balls consumed.

(29H) When the abnormal winning to the winning opening is detected multiple times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the number of winning balls related to the abnormal winning from the number of consumed balls and displays it on the display means. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that information on game value for playing is updated.

According to inventions 29A to 29H, information on game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, by excluding the number of winning balls related to abnormal winning from the number of out balls, the information (for example, the base value) regarding the game value can be accurately displayed in real time.

(30) A gaming machine that gives a game medium as a prize to a player,
a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are arranged;
a prize granting means for granting a predetermined specific prize out of a plurality of prizes when a game medium is detected in each of the prize winning openings;
Arithmetic processing means for executing a predetermined arithmetic process using the number of game media flowing into the game area and the number of game media given as a prize given by the prize giving means;
a processing means for processing the result of the arithmetic processing executed by the arithmetic processing means;
a display means for displaying the result of arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device;
When a specific prize among the plurality of prizes is generated in the game, the prize giving means gives the specific prize, and the display means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so as not to change. game machine.

According to invention 30, it is possible to accurately and quickly display information about game results. In particular, when a specific prize is generated (for example, a prize ball paid out when a high-value prize is awarded (general prize hole with a large number of prize balls, big prize hole, etc.)) Even if it is awarded, the result of arithmetic processing (calculated base value) can be displayed so that it does not change, and it is easy to judge whether the gaming machine is demonstrating the predetermined performance (for example, whether the set ball payout rate is correct) can.

(31A) A game comprising a main control means including a lottery means for executing a lottery for winning and losing when a specific condition is satisfied, and a peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means. machine and
The peripheral control means is
Temporary storage means for storing information based on signals received from the main control means;
information storage means updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means;
and a first information output means for outputting at least part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized in that the status history of the gaming machine can be comprehended.

(31B) Even if it is not in a special game state, it has a general prize winning opening that can win a game ball launched into the game area,
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating winning to the general winning slot,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winning to the general winning slot to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(31C) external output means for outputting information based on the predetermined condition to an external terminal board when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing information more detailed than the information output to the external terminal board when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
and information presentation means for presenting the information stored by the information storage means.

(31D) comprising first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
The peripheral control means is
a storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
and limited initialization means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storage means even if the information is initialized by the first initialization means. machine.

(31E) a first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
and a second initialization means for initializing the storage contents of the information storage means,
The information storage means can retain stored contents even when power to the game machine is cut off,
The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the first initialization means does not initialize the storage contents of the information storage means, but initializes the storage contents of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of signal received from the main control means and the time at which the signal is received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signals transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means include a signal relating to a counting event counted according to the progress of the game and a signal relating to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. including
The peripheral control means is
Temporary storage means for storing information based on signals received from the main control means;
information storage means updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means;
a first information output means for outputting at least part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
The peripheral control means is
counting the counting events based on the signal received from the main control means and storing the counting result in the temporary storage means;
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(31H) the signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal relating to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal relating to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine;
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means is
counting signals related to the counting event received from the main control means and storing them in the temporary storage means;
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event and the time when the signal was received are stored in the information storage means, and the counting event stored in the temporary storage means. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means is added to the counting result of the above.

(31I) the signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal relating to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal relating to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine;
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means is
counting signals related to the counting event received from the main control means and storing them in the temporary storage means;
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The game machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions 31A to 31I, it is possible to know how the number of balls released has changed. In particular, according to inventions 31D and 31E, it is possible to properly store information about games.

(32) A gaming machine that gives prize game media as game value to a player,
a control means for executing regular processing related to the progress of the game;
Consumed game media counting means for counting the consumed game media consumed by the player;
prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player;
calculation means for calculating information about the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media;
a first light-emitting element group including a plurality of light-emitting elements for displaying game-related information including variable display of symbols;
a second light-emitting element group including a plurality of light-emitting elements that display information about the given gaming value;
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and
the first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output drive means,
Although the control means outputs a selection signal to the first terminal and the third terminal at a common timing, at least one of the first light emitting element groups is output during the period in which the selection signal is output. a signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting one light emitting element and a signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element in the second light emitting element group; are output at different timings to control the display of the first light emitting element group and the second light emitting element group within one periodical process.

According to invention 32, it is possible to simply configure a circuit for displaying information (for example, base value and role ratio) about the game value to be given, and to quickly and accurately display the information about the game value.

(33) A gaming machine that gives prize game media as game value to a player,
a control means for executing regular processing related to the progress of the game;
Consumed game media counting means for counting the consumed game media consumed by the player;
prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player;
calculation means for calculating information about the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media;
a first light-emitting element group including a plurality of light-emitting elements for displaying game-related information including variable display of symbols;
a second light-emitting element group including a plurality of light-emitting elements that display information about the given gaming value;
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and
A selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group, and at least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group corresponding to the selection signal output to the first terminal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal The signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group in response to is output within the same periodical processing, but is output in the same periodical processing, a process of outputting a selection signal output to one terminal and a signal output to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal; a selection signal output to the third terminal and the selection signal; The processing of outputting the signals to be output to the corresponding plurality of fourth terminals is outputting signals at different timings within the periodic processing by different processing within the same periodic processing. .

According to invention 33, a circuit for displaying information about the game value to be given can be configured simply. Therefore, it is possible to quickly and accurately display the information on the game value.

(34A) A gaming machine that gives a prize game medium as a game value to a player,
a control means for controlling the progress of a game;
Consumed game media counting means for counting the consumed game media consumed by the player;
prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player;
calculation means for calculating information about the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media;
a calculation result display means for displaying information about the game value calculated by the calculation means;
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
timing means for generating a signal (e.g., a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device;
an output drive means controlled by the control device and outputting at least a control signal for display by the calculation result display means;
In a board on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction as viewed from the control device, the output drive means and the calculation result display means are arranged in the other direction different from the one direction, and the The game machine is characterized by being arranged apart from the timing means.

(34B) A connection line between the control device and the timing means and a connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to cross each other. The game machine described in each preceding item.

(34C) the timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal to be input to the control device; and an oscillator circuit that generates a clock signal to be input to the control device;
On a printed circuit board on which the control means is implemented, the reset circuit is arranged in the same direction from the processor as the oscillator circuit, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged away from the reset circuit and the oscillator circuit. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by:

According to the inventions 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress interference between the signal regarding game control and the signal for displaying information regarding the game. Therefore, the influence on the game control can be suppressed, and the information regarding the game value can be quickly and accurately displayed.

(35A) A gaming machine that gives prize gaming media as gaming value to a player,
a control means for controlling the progress of a game;
Consumed game media counting means for counting the consumed game media consumed by the player;
prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player;
calculation means for calculating information about the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media;
display means for displaying information about the game value under the control of the control means;
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
a memory that is accessed by the control device when executing the process and stores at least information about the game value;
The game machine is provided with input means for instructing initialization of the memory,
The control means is
a first initialization means for determining whether or not the data stored in the memory is normal at a predetermined timing, and initializing a predetermined first area of the memory when it is determined to be abnormal; ,
a second initialization means for determining whether or not the input means is being operated when the power is turned on, and initializing a predetermined second area of the memory when it is determined that the input means is being operated; have
The first area initialized by the first initialization means and the second area initialized by the second initialization means are the same as the second initialization means by the first initialization means. including overlapping regions that are also commonly initialized by the initialization means;
at least the first region includes a region that does not overlap with the second region;
A gaming machine, wherein the information about the game value is stored in the first area other than the overlapping area.

(35B) the first area stores data used for calculating information about the game value;
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game,
The control means is
when the data stored in the first area is determined to be abnormal, initializing the first area;
when the data stored in the second area is determined to be abnormal, initializing the second area;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) the first area stores data used for calculating information about the game value;
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game,
The control means is
when the data stored in the first area is determined to be abnormal, initializing the first area and the second area;
when the data stored in the second area is determined to be abnormal, initializing the first area and the second area;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35D) Each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time periodic processing is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals. The gaming machine described in .

(35E) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time the information regarding the game value is calculated. .

(35F) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal when the power of the game machine is turned on.

According to the inventions 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory that stores the information (base value and role ratio) about the game value to be given. Therefore, the information regarding the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A gaming machine that gives a prize game medium as a game value to a player,
a control means for controlling the progress of a game;
Consumed game media counting means for counting the consumed game media consumed by the player;
prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player;
calculation means for calculating information about the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media;
display means for displaying information about the game value;
and an electric accessory operated by the control means,
Under certain conditions, when a plurality of game media wins during the operation of the electric role product triggered by a single win, some of the winning game media are provided with information on the game value. A gaming machine characterized in that any game medium can trigger a variable display game, although it is used for calculation and is not used for calculation of the information on the game value for other game media.

(36B) The control means includes:
executing a variable display game when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first game state (shorter working hours, high probability state, big hit, etc.) advantageous to the player and a second game state (normal state) lower in advantage than the first game state. and control to either
When a plurality of game media wins during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in the second game state are used to calculate the information on the game value, and the first game media The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein any game medium that has won a prize in a state is not used for calculating the information on the game value, but any game medium can trigger a variable display game.

(36C) The control means includes:
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in game machines,
When a plurality of game media wins during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won while the predetermined type of error is detected are not used for calculating the information on the game value. First, game media that have won in a state in which the above-mentioned error of a predetermined type has not been detected are used to calculate the information on the above-mentioned game value, but any of the game media can be a trigger for a variable display game. The game machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions 36A to 36C, it is possible to quickly and accurately display the information on the game value because the use of the game medium for calculating the information on the game value is switched according to the state of the gaming machine.

(37A) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main body frame supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and provided with a game board, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game. hand,
Difficulty in setting change making it difficult to operate the setting change operation unit when the body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame, compared to when the body frame is in an open state with respect to the outer frame A game machine characterized by having a conversion means.

(37B) an outer frame, a main body frame supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and provided with a game board; A gaming machine comprising a setting state display unit for displaying,
A game machine, comprising: visibility making means for making the display contents of the setting state display unit difficult to see when the body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) an outer frame, a main body frame supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and provided with a game board, and a setting determination operation section for performing a setting determination operation for determining a setting state related to a game. A game machine that
A gaming machine comprising decision making means for making it difficult to operate the setting decision operation section when the body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main body frame supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and having a game board provided thereon, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game. hand,
The setting change operation unit has a setting key insertion unit into which a setting key is inserted,
A specific portion of the outer frame prevents insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion portion when the body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame. game machine.

According to the inventions 37A to 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to illegally change the setting state, thereby increasing the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37E) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined game profit when performing variable display of symbols based on establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of variable display of the symbols,
variation time determination means for determining the variation time of the pattern;
a setting information determination unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding a game based on an operation on the specific operation unit;
The variable time determination means is capable of determining the specific variable time when the setting information is determined to be the specific information based on the operation on the specific operation unit.

(37F) A gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game profit when performing variable display of symbols based on establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbols,
variation time determination means for determining the variation time of the pattern;
a probability determining unit that determines the probability of deriving the winning result to one of a plurality of probabilities based on an operation on the specific operation unit;
The game machine, wherein the variable time determination means can determine the specific variable time when the probability determined based on the operation on the specific operation unit is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined game profit when performing variable display of symbols based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbols,
variation time determination means for determining the variation time of the pattern;
a setting information determination unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding a game based on an operation on the specific operation unit;
The variable time determining means may determine a common variable time regardless of the setting information, or may determine a different variable time according to the setting information,
A gaming machine, wherein a probability that the different variable time is determined according to the setting information is set lower than a probability that the common variable time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined game profit when performing variable display of symbols based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbols,
variation time determination means for determining the variation time of the pattern;
a setting information determination unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding a game based on an operation on the specific operation unit;
A production control unit that performs a predetermined production,
The variable time determination means can determine different variable times according to the setting information,
When a specific variable time is determined by the variable time determining means in correspondence with specific setting information of the setting information, the effect control unit performs variable display of the symbol within the specific variable time. A gaming machine characterized by sequentially performing a result suggesting effect suggesting a result and a setting suggesting effect suggesting the content of the setting information determined by the setting information determining section.

According to the inventions 37E to 37H, it is possible to make the player perceive the setting state in a new manner, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control unit for controlling games, a separate control board connected to the main control board and provided with a control unit different from the game control unit, and the game control A gaming machine comprising a setting-related operation unit for changing the setting state related to the game performed by the unit,
The game control unit has setting change allowable state generation means for allowing an operation related to changing the setting state to the setting related operation unit,
The gaming machine characterized in that the setting change permission state generating means allows an operation related to the change of the setting state when the information transmitted from the separate control board to the main control board is specific information. .

According to the invention of 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to illegally change the setting state, thereby increasing the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game control unit for controlling a game, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to the control performed by the game control unit. A gaming machine that provides a game profit by winning a game ball fired toward a predetermined winning hole,
It is characterized by comprising a firing disabling means that disables the shooting of the game ball by operating the shooting operation unit for a predetermined period when the setting change operation unit is operated and the setting state is changed. game machine.

According to the invention of 37J, the act of illegally changing the setting state can be suppressed.

(38A) A gaming machine comprising a game control unit for controlling a game, and a setting operation unit for changing settings related to the control performed by the game control unit,
A gaming machine, wherein a game control board forming the game control section and a setting board forming the setting operation section are accommodated in one case.

(38B) The above-described items, wherein the case can accommodate a dummy unit that cannot be operated to change settings in place of the setting operation unit together with the game control unit. game machine.

(38C) The setting operation unit
a first operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed;
a second operation unit for confirming the setting and ending the setting state;
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising a setting display for displaying the contents of settings.

(38D) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the dummy unit has none of the first operating section, the second operating section, and the setting display.

According to the inventions 38A to 38D, the specifications of a game machine with a setting function and a game machine without a setting function can be made common to enable efficient design and production.

(39A) a game control unit having a processor that executes a program for controlling games, and a memory that the processor accesses;
a clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation unit for changing settings related to control performed by the game control unit,
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed,
The game control unit is
When the game machine is powered on, detecting the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation unit,
A gaming machine, wherein the setting state is started when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation section is operated.

(39B) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit initializes the first area of the memory after the setting state is completed.

(39C) The game control unit, when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is not operated, in the second area at least partially different from the first area, the The game machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that the memory is initialized.

According to inventions 39A to 39C, erroneous operations for changing settings can be prevented.

(40A) A gaming machine comprising a game control unit for controlling a game and a setting operation unit for changing settings related to the control performed by the game control unit,
The game control unit has game value display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed, and a setting display unit for displaying the content of the setting,
The gaming machine, wherein the game control unit displays the game value display means and the setting display means in the setting state so as not to cause confusion.

(40B) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit and the setting operation unit are accommodated in one case.

(40C) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game value display means and the setting display means are configured by one display.

(40D) the game value display means displays information about the given game value on the display without delay according to the progress of the game;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information about the setting on the display instead of information about the given game value in the setting state.

(40E) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the game value display means and the setting display means are configured by separate displays.

(40F) The game value display means
Except for the setting state, information about the given game value is displayed without delay according to the progress of the game,
In the setting state, displaying any of characters, numbers, and figures that are not displayed in the setting state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The game value display means
Except for the setting state, information about the given game value is displayed without delay according to the progress of the game,
In the setting state, extinguished or all lit,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

According to the inventions 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent confusion of a plurality of displays arranged on the substrate.

(41A) Lottery means for performing a lottery for a win based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting port;
an effect determination means for determining one of a plurality of effects based on the result of the lottery;
an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means;
setting information determination means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding a game when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit;
setting information confirmation means for displaying the setting information determined by the setting information determination means on a predetermined display unit when an operation different from the predetermined operation is performed;
the plurality of effects include a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means;
The game machine is characterized in that it is possible to execute the setting suggesting performance even if the different operation is performed when the performance determining means has decided to perform the setting suggesting performance.

(41B) lottery means for performing a lottery for a win based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting port;
setting information determination means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding a game when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit;
a performance determining means for determining one of a plurality of performances based on the result of the lottery;
an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means;
error detection means for detecting an error;
and an error notification means for notifying the error detected by the error detection means,
the plurality of effects include a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means;
The game machine, wherein the effect executing means can execute the setting suggesting effect during a period in which the error notification means is reporting an error that satisfies a predetermined condition.

(41C) lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the starting condition;
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether it is a hit;
Special symbol variation executing means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of the start condition;
holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the establishment of the starting condition is not satisfied although the establishment of the starting condition is satisfied;
setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding a game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
and a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggesting effect for the determination result by the determining means and a setting suggesting effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is determined that the expected suggestive effect is to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is being held, the newly established A game machine characterized by limiting the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the special symbol variation corresponding to the starting condition.

(41D) lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the starting condition;
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether it is a hit;
Special symbol variation executing means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of the start condition;
holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the establishment of the starting condition is not satisfied although the establishment of the starting condition is satisfied;
setting information determination means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding a game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
and a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggesting effect for the determination result by the determining means and a setting suggesting effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which the expected suggestive effect is determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is being held, the newly established A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute said expected suggestion performance and said set suggestion performance in special symbol variations corresponding to said starting condition.

(41E) lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the starting condition;
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether it is a hit;
Special symbol variation executing means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of the start condition;
holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the establishment of the starting condition is not satisfied although the establishment of the starting condition is satisfied;
setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding a game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
and a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggesting effect for the determination result by the determining means and a setting suggesting effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which the expected suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect are determined to be executed, or during the holding of the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol change. , a game machine characterized by limiting the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

(41F) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the starting condition;
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether it is a hit;
Special symbol variation executing means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of the start condition;
holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the establishment of the starting condition is not satisfied although the establishment of the starting condition is satisfied;
setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding a game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
and a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggesting effect for the determination result by the determining means and a setting suggesting effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which the expected suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect are determined to be executed, or during the holding of the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol change. , a game machine characterized by limiting the execution of said expected suggestion performance and said set suggestion performance in a special symbol variation corresponding to said newly established starting condition.

(41G) lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the starting condition;
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether it is a hit;
Special symbol variation executing means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of the start condition;
holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the establishment of the starting condition is not satisfied although the establishment of the starting condition is satisfied;
setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding a game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
and a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggesting effect for the determination result by the determining means and a setting suggesting effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which the expected suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect are determined to be executed, or during the holding of the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol change. A gaming machine characterized in that the expected suggestion performance and the set suggestion performance can be executed in the special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

According to the inventions of 41A to 41G, it is possible to improve amusement in games.

(42A) A gaming machine comprising main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to a player according to the result of a win-lose lottery in a game,
The main control means is
program storage means for storing a first program and a second program;
A calculation means for performing required calculation processing by the first program and the second program;
a first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as that of the first storage means;
Access permission/inhibition of the first storage means and the second storage means are switched so that either one of them can be accessed,
The computing means is
using the first storage means when executing the first program;
A gaming machine, wherein the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42B) A gaming machine, wherein the first storage means and the second storage means are switched between accessibility and non-accessibility by one command input to the computing means.

(42C) The instruction to switch the first storage means to be accessible and the instruction to switch the second storage means to be accessible are different in at least one of an instruction (opcode) and an argument (operand). game machine.

(42D) The first program is a program (within the game control area) that performs a win-lose lottery in the game,
The gaming machine, wherein the second program is a program (outside the game control area) that calculates information about a game value given in a game, and is called and executed from the first program.

(42E) A gaming machine comprising main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player according to the result of a win-lose lottery in the game,
The main control means is
program storage means for storing a first program and a second program;
A calculation means for performing required calculation processing by the first program and the second program;
a first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as that of the first storage means;
Access permission/inhibition of the first storage means and the second storage means are switched so that either one of them can be accessed,
The computing means is
When executing the first program, using the first storage means,
at the start of the second program, in the second program, switching to disable access to the first storage means and enable access to the second storage means;
A gaming machine, wherein the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42F) A game machine characterized in that, when the second program ends, the computing means switches the second program so that the second storage means is inaccessible and the first storage means is accessible.

(42G) A gaming machine comprising main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to a player according to the result of a win-lose lottery in a game,
The main control means is
program storage means for storing a first program and a second program;
A calculation means for performing required calculation processing by the first program and the second program;
a first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as that of the first storage means;
Access permission/inhibition of the first storage means and the second storage means are switched so that either one of them can be accessed,
The computing means is
When executing the first program, using the first storage means,
When starting the second program, in the first program, switching the first storage means to be inaccessible and the second storage means to be accessible,
A gaming machine, wherein the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42H) After the second program is terminated, the computing means switches from being inaccessible to the second storage means to being accessible to the first storage means in the first program returned from the second program. A game machine characterized by

According to the inventions 42A to 42H, data can be saved at high speed with a simple instruction when processing is transferred between programs, and precautions at the time of program creation can be reduced.

(43A) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player according to the result of a win-lose lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling effects in games based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device in which effect display is performed under the control of the peripheral control means;
a display panel that displays a performance pattern;
a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel through the display panel;
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflectors that reflect light traveling along specific paths in the display panel toward the front side of the game machine, and Having a plurality of second reflection parts that reflect to the front side of the game machine,
The peripheral control means is
displaying a dynamic pattern on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting section;
A gaming machine characterized in that a static pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting section.

(43B) the light-emitting device has a plurality of light-emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the sides of the display panel;
The peripheral control means changes the emission colors of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time so that light of different colors travels along different paths in the display panel, thereby causing the plurality of first reflections to occur. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that the color of the picture pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed over time by emitting light of different colors from the portions.

(43C) The light-emitting device has a plurality of light-emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the sides of the display panel,
The peripheral control means switches lighting of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls a path of light within the display panel, and emits light from at least a portion of the plurality of first reflecting portions. The game machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that the color of the pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed according to the lapse of time by causing the plurality of first reflecting portions to change.

(43D) the light-emitting device has a plurality of light-emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions toward the side of the display panel;
The peripheral control means switches the number of light emitting elements that emit light among the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light in the display panel, and controls the light path of the plurality of first reflecting portions. The game machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that the colors of the patterns reflected by the plurality of first reflecting portions are changed with the passage of time by emitting light from at least a portion thereof.

According to inventions 43A to 43D, a pattern that appears to move and a pattern that appears to stand still can be displayed on a single light guide plate, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

(44A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player according to the result of a win-lose lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling effects in games based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device in which effect display is performed under the control of the peripheral control means;
a display panel that displays a performance pattern;
a light-emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel through the display panel;
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflectors that reflect light traveling along specific paths in the display panel toward the front side of the game machine, and Having a plurality of second reflection parts that reflect to the front side of the game machine,
The first reflector includes a plurality of first right-eye reflectors for reflecting light traveling along a specific path in the display panel in a direction to reach the player's right eye, and a player's left eye. and a plurality of first left-eye reflectors that reflect in a direction reaching the
the plurality of first right-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
The plurality of first left-eye reflective parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at a position different from the right-eye pattern,
The peripheral control means is
The pattern for the right eye and the pattern for the left eye are caused by causing the light emitting device to emit light so that the light emitted in the same pattern reaches the first reflector for the right eye and the first reflector for the left eye. is displayed on the display panel to make the player recognize a stereoscopic pattern that causes parallax between the left and right eyes,
A gaming machine characterized in that a planar pattern free from parallax between left and right eyes is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting section.

(44B) The second reflecting section directs the light traveling through a plurality of paths in the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine in the direction of reaching the player's right eye and the direction of reaching the left eye. The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the light on the display panel.

(44C) The second reflecting section includes a plurality of second right-eye reflecting sections that reflect light traveling along a specific path in the display panel in a direction to reach the player's right eye, and the player's and a plurality of second left-eye reflectors that reflect in a direction reaching the left eye,
the plurality of second right-eye reflective parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
The plurality of second left-eye reflective parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at the same position as the right-eye pattern,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by the light reflected by the second reflecting section.

According to the inventions 44A to 44C, a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern can be displayed on a single light guide plate, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

(45A) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player according to the result of a win-lose lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling effects in games based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device in which effect display is performed under the control of the peripheral control means;
a display panel that displays a performance pattern;
a light-emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel through the display panel;
The peripheral control means is
A dynamic pattern and a static pattern can be displayed on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light;
A game machine characterized by performing an effect suggesting a result of the win/lose lottery by combining the display of the dynamic picture and the display of the static picture.

(45B) The display panel includes a plurality of first reflectors for reflecting light traveling along specific paths in the display panel and emitting the light toward the front side of the game machine, and a plurality of paths in the display panel. and a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect traveling light and emit it to the front side of the game machine,
The peripheral control means is
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, changing the path of light traveling in the display panel and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting section, the changing pattern is displayed on the display panel. display in
displaying a static pattern on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting portion;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display of the changing pattern and the display of the stationary pattern are combined to produce an effect suggesting the result of the win-lose lottery.

According to the inventions 45A to 45B, a moving picture and a static picture can be displayed on a single light guide plate, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

(46A) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player according to the result of a win-lose lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling effects in games based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect image under the control of the peripheral control means;
a display panel that displays a performance pattern;
a light-emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel through the display panel;
The display panel has a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means is
displaying a target pattern on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light;
A gaming machine, wherein an image moving toward the target pattern is displayed on the display device.

(46B) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the pattern displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or letter.

(46C) The game according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that said peripheral control means displays an image moving toward said target pattern on said display device after displaying said target pattern on said display panel. machine.

(46D) The game according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that the peripheral control means causes the display panel to display the target pattern after displaying an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device. machine.

According to inventions 46A to 46D, a plurality of patterns or patterns of different modes can be displayed on a single light guide plate, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in games.

(47A) game control means for performing a lottery for a special game beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a set value related to the control performed by the game control means,
The game control means is
executing power-on processing that is executed when power is turned on to the gaming machine, and periodic processing that is executed at each predetermined cycle;
When power to the game machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, in the power-on processing, the setting change is possible to change the setting value according to the operation state of the setting operation means. perform setting corresponding to a setting confirmation state in which the state or the setting value cannot be changed;
In the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, after executing the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, in the periodic processing, the processing corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be executed. A gaming machine characterized by:

(47B) The regular process is common to at least two of the plurality of processes, including a process related to changing the set value, a process related to confirmation of the set value, a process related to a normal game, and the plurality of processes. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that it includes a process executed in the above.

(47C) The regular process is composed of at least a first repeated process for executing a process related to the normal game and a second repeated process for executing a process related to changing the setting,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the game control means selectively executes the first repeating process and the second repeating process according to an operation mode of the gaming machine.

(47D) the memory includes a setting state management area for recording the operation state of the gaming machine in an area in which the stored contents are backed up when power is cut off;
The game control means is
In the setting change mode, setting that the setting change mode is in the setting state management area as the predetermined condition,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the setting confirmation mode, as the predetermined condition, the fact that the setting confirmation mode is set is set in the setting state management area.

(48) A game control means for performing a lottery for a special game beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a set value related to the control performed by the game control means,
The game control means is
executing power-on processing that is executed when power is turned on to the gaming machine, and periodic processing that is executed at each predetermined cycle;
When power to the game machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, in the power-on processing, the setting change is possible to change the setting value according to the operation state of the setting operation means. perform setting corresponding to a setting confirmation state in which the state or the setting value cannot be changed;
The regular processing can execute a normal game process related to a normal game and a setting process related to setting change or setting confirmation,
The gaming machine, wherein the normal game process comprises a plurality of processes, and a specific process among the plurality of processes is a process that can be executed in common between the normal game and the setting process.

(49A) game control means for performing a lottery for a special game beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A setting operation means operated to change or confirm a set value related to the control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising
The setting operation means is composed of at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means is
Equipped with storage means capable of storing information related to games,
storing and holding the output signal of the setting operation means in a specific storage means of the storage means in a power-on process executed when the gaming machine is powered on;
In the power-on processing, when determining whether or not the setting operation means is operated, the determination is made based on the information stored and held in the specific storage means without reading the output signal of the setting operation means. death,
The second setting operation means performs the storage means when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated in the power-on processing. a means for initializing the
In the power-on processing, when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated, when the storage means is initialized, the specific A game machine characterized by not initializing a storage means.

(49B) provided with peripheral control means for controlling effects on the display device,
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game control means determines a mode for starting the game machine based on the output signal stored in the memory after the peripheral control means is activated.

(50A) game control means for performing a lottery for a special game beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A setting operation means operated to change or confirm a set value related to the control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising
The setting operation means is composed of at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means is
A storage means having at least a first storage area capable of storing game-related information and a second storage area different from the first storage area,
The first storage area is an area for storing the setting value,
The second storage area is an area for storing various parameters used by the game,
The game control means is
Initializing the first storage area and the second storage area when it is determined that the set value is not a normal value;
When it is determined that the first setting operation means of the setting operation means is not operated and the second setting operation means is operated, the first storage area is not initialized , and initializing the second storage area.

(50B) the memory further includes a third storage area;
Said game control means, when said third condition is established, said first storage area, said second storage area and said third storage area are initialized, characterized in that in each of the preceding items The game machine described.

(50C) the third storage area is a storage area other than an area for storing various parameters used in the normal game;
The game control means, when the data backed up in the memory at the time of power failure is erased, determines that the third condition is established, the first storage area, the second storage area and the third The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that the memory area of is initialized.

(51A) game control means for performing a lottery for a special game beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A setting operation means operated to change or confirm a set value related to the control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising
The game control means is
Equipped with storage means capable of retaining game-related information even when the power is shut off,
executing power-on processing that is executed when power is turned on to the gaming machine, and periodic processing that is executed at each predetermined cycle;
When power to the game machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, in the power-on processing, the setting change is possible to change the setting value according to the operation state of the setting operation means. perform setting corresponding to a setting confirmation state in which the state or the setting value cannot be changed;
The storage means stores a setting state management area in which a value set corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is stored according to an operation state of the setting operation means at least in the power-on processing. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

(51B) A setting operation means operated to start in a setting change mode for changing the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means,
The game control means is
When an operation is performed to start the game machine in the setting change mode while the RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area and stored in the memory. When a predetermined area is initialized and an operation to end the setting change mode is performed by the setting operation means, the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area, and the game is played in the normal game state in which game balls can be shot. start the machine,
When an operation is performed to activate the gaming machine in the setting confirmation mode in a state in which the RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued, and the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area continues. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the normal game state is not recorded in the setting state management area even if an operation to end the setting confirmation mode is performed by the setting operation means.

(52) A game control means for performing a lottery for a special game beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A setting operation means operated to change or confirm a set value related to the control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising
The game control means is
Execution of power-on processing executed when power is turned on to the gaming machine, first periodic processing executed in each predetermined first period, and second periodic processing executed in each predetermined second period. make it possible
determining whether or not an operation associated with a setting operation is being performed in the setting operation means in the power-on processing;
When the setting operation means determines that an operation associated with the setting operation is being performed, a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed depending on the operation state. Run the settings corresponding to
When the setting operation means determines that an operation associated with the setting operation is not performed, setting corresponding to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is performed. Without, normal game start processing can be executed,
The first periodic process is executed after executing settings corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the power-on process,
The gaming machine, wherein the second periodic processing is executed after normal game start processing is made executable in the power-on processing.

(53A) game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
an accessory controlled according to a control signal output from the game control means;
a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
A game machine capable of mounting an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspection of the game machine,
The inspection signal generation circuit includes:
a second driver circuit to which the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit is input and which generates an inspection signal from the control signal;
an inspection connector that outputs the generated inspection signal,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The gaming machine, wherein the second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal.

(53B) the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit each have an output transistor that switches an input power source to generate an output signal;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit receive different voltages and independently generate different voltage signals that change at the same timing.

(53C) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein a connector connected to the first driver circuit is mounted, and a connector connected to the second driver circuit is not mounted.

(53D) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the connector connected to the first driver circuit is a discrete part, and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is a surface-mounted part. .

(53E) game control means for executing regular processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game;
a first detection means for detecting an event taken by the game control means in the periodic processing, among the events related to the progress of the game;
A gaming machine comprising a second detection means for detecting an event taken by the game control means in a process other than the regular process among the events related to the progress of the game,
The game control means is
conversion means for converting the signal from the first detection means into a serial signal;
a serial input port to which a serial signal is input;
a general-purpose input port to which signals from the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input;
a signal from the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or to the serial input port via the conversion means;
A gaming machine, wherein the signal from the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port.

(53F) the first detection means is ball detection means for detecting a game ball launched toward the game area;
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a set value relating to control performed by the game control means.

(53G) an accessory driven according to the control signal output from the game control means;
a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The serial input port is a serial input/output port capable of inputting serial signals and outputting serial signals,
The game control means outputs a control signal for driving the accessory from the serial input/output port,
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit converts the control signal into the drive signal.

(53H) game control means for executing regular processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game;
A gaming machine comprising first detection means and second detection means for detecting an event related to the progress of the game,
The game control means is
conversion means for converting the signal from the first detection means into a serial signal;
a serial input port to which a serial signal is input;
a general-purpose input port to which signals from the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input;
The first detection means determines a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal once in one periodical process,
The second detection means determines the signal level based on the result of detecting the signal a plurality of times within one periodical process,
a signal from the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or to the serial input port via the conversion means;
a signal from the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port;
The gaming machine, wherein the game control means detects the signal of the second detection means a plurality of times and determines the signal level within one periodical process.

(53I) the first detection means is ball detection means for detecting a game ball launched toward the game area;
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a set value relating to control performed by the game control means.

(53J) game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a display device driven according to a control signal output from the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The game control means is mounted on the first printed circuit board,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the display device, and is mounted on a second printed circuit board. cage,
The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are connected by a serial communication line for transmitting from the first printed circuit board a serial signal obtained by converting the signal repeating at the predetermined cycle. game machine.

(53K) can be equipped with an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspection of the gaming machine;
The inspection signal generation circuit includes:
a second driver circuit to which the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit is input and which generates an inspection signal from the control signal;
an inspection connector that outputs the generated inspection signal,
The second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the test signal, and is mounted on the first printed circuit board. game machine.

(53L) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are accommodated in one circuit board box.

(53M) the first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in different board boxes;
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the first printed circuit board is sealed by a caulking mechanism.

(53N) the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit each have an output transistor that switches an input power source to generate an output signal;
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit receive different voltages and independently generate different voltage signals that change at the same timing.

Means 1: In the game machine,
"A translucent plate-shaped decorative member with decorations,
a transparent flat plate-like radiating plate provided behind the decorative member and capable of radiating forward light in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness;
a decorative substrate provided behind the radiation plate, wherein a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate are mounted on the front surface; ” is characterized by being equipped with

Here, the "decorative member" may be composed of one member, or composed of a plurality of members (for example, a relief formed by three-dimensional relief) and a decorative sheet having a pattern).

In addition, the "decoration" of the decorative member includes "three-dimensional relief", "two-dimensional pattern", "three-dimensional relief and two-dimensional pattern", and the like. . In terms of “decoration,” there are “decorations with logos and characters in line with the concept of the game machine,” “decoration with characters in line with the concept of the game machine,” and “items in line with the concept of the game machine.” "decoration with a game machine", "decoration with a scene in line with the concept of the game machine", and the like.

Further, the ``radiating plate'' includes ``having a plurality of LED housing portions formed so as to be recessed forward from the rear surface and housing the LEDs of the decorative substrate from the rear'', ``a plate within the plate thickness Those having a plurality of reflecting parts that reflect forward light in the direction along the surface over substantially the entire surface", "Those that have a plurality of reflecting parts that reflect forward light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness Something that is partly possessed”, and the like.

Further, the "LED" mounted on the decorative substrate includes a "side-view type LED", a "side-mounted top-view type LED", and the like. Further, "LED" includes "full-color LED", "single-color LED", "two-color LED", and the like.

In addition, the configuration for irradiating light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate includes “configuration for irradiating light into the plate thickness from the inner surface of a hole penetrating the radiation plate”, “light radiation plate and light is emitted from the inner surface of the slit that is open to the side of the radiating plate into the plate thickness”, “From the inner surface of the concave part recessed forward from the rear surface of the radiating plate configuration for irradiating light into the plate thickness”, “configuration for irradiating light from the side surface of the radiation plate into the plate thickness”, and the like.

Further, the "drawing member" may be movable or may be fixed without being movable.

According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine includes a light-transmitting flat plate-shaped decorative member provided with a decoration, and a transparent plate-shaped decorative member provided behind the decorative member, and a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness A transparent flat radiation plate capable of emitting light forward, and multiple LEDs capable of emitting light in a direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate are mounted on the front surface of the radiation plate. and a decorative substrate provided at the rear.

As a result, when the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate behind the decorative member and the radiating plate are caused to emit light, the light from the LEDs is emitted in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiating plate. The light emitted forward by the radiation plate and emitted forward from the radiation plate illuminates the light-transmitting decorative member provided with the decoration. At this time, the light emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate is reflected forward within the plate thickness of the radiation plate so that the decorative member is decorated with light, so the LED is directed forward. Compared to the conventional method in which light is directed toward the radiation plate, the distance from the front surface of the radiation plate until the light from the LED is emitted forward can be lengthened, and the light from the LED is widely diffused to form the radiation plate. can be emitted forward from Therefore, when the LED emits light, the light from the LED can be widely diffused, and it is possible to suppress the appearance of point-like light emission. It is possible to make the game look beautiful, entertain the player, and suppress the loss of interest. In addition, since the decorative board is provided behind the plate-shaped decorative member and the radiating plate, the dimension in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the space for arranging the decorative member can be easily secured. At the same time, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other performance members, and it is possible to provide a game machine that can entertain players more by providing various performance members.

In addition, the decorative member includes a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body that constitutes at least a part of the decoration and has a relief portion formed by three-dimensional relief, and is provided behind the decorative body, It is preferable that the decorative sheet is a sheet-like decorative sheet having a pattern that constitutes the rest of the decoration. Thus, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is composed of the decorative body having the embossed portion and the decorative sheet having the pattern, the embossed portion can impart a three-dimensional effect to the decoration. A sense of depth can be imparted to the pattern of the decorative sheet provided behind by the lens effect of the embossed part. Therefore, the three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be presented to the player by the embossed portion of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, so that even if the thickness (length in the front-rear direction) of the decorative member is reduced, the decoration can still be achieved. It is possible to attract and entertain the player's interest without deteriorating the effect, and the performance member can be made thinner through the decorative member, so that the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. can.

Further, when the decorative member is composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet as described above, the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the embossed portion, so that the transparent decorative body is formed. It is possible to make the decorative body look as if it were colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet without coloring the decorative sheet, thereby reducing the cost of the decorative body. Also, in this case, by changing the pattern of the decorative sheet, the decoration of the decorative body (decorative member) can be easily changed, so that the game machine can easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like. can be done.

Further, the decorative member may have a hologram portion that constitutes a part of the decoration and displays a pattern by light interference fringes. As a result, the light from the LED of the decoration board, the light from other light emitting means provided in the game machine, the light in the game hall where the game machine is installed, etc. Since a predetermined hologram can be seen by the interference fringes of the hologram, the appearance of the decoration can be improved by the hologram, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. A three-dimensional effect can be imparted, and even if the performance member is made thin, the thinness can be prevented from being felt by the player.

Furthermore, when the decorative member has a hologram portion and the decorative member is composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the hologram portion constitutes at least a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet. Also good. As a result, since part of the pattern of the decorative sheet is composed of the hologram portion, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the embossed portion. A sense of depth can be imparted to the pattern, and decorations capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player can be presented to the player. Further, in this case, since the decorative sheet has the hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, when the decorative member is composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened, and the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body. is desirable. As a result, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the outer shape of the decorative sheet is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, even the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet. Since there is no such thing as a frame around the decoration, it is possible to impart a sense of openness to the decoration of the production member and to make the decoration look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the performance member (picture pattern of the decoration sheet, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the decoration effect of the performance member can be fully exhibited, and the player's interest is strongly attracted by the decoration of the performance member. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain players.

Further, as described above, when the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flattened, the decorative sheet is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative body, so light is diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. The pattern of the decorative sheet can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be fully exhibited.

In addition, as described above, when the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened, it is possible to reduce the front-rear dimension of the decorative member composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet as much as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the thickness of the member can be reduced and the effects described above can be embodied.

Furthermore, as described above, when the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, the design of the decorative sheet can decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the production member (decorative body). A large decoration with a sense of unity can be shown to the player by making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the performance member so as to be continuous with the decoration of the performance member, and the visual impact is given to the player. It is possible to attract the player's attention by providing the player with a large decoration, and to suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

Moreover, it is desirable that the radiation plate has a plurality of LED housing portions formed so as to be recessed forward from the rear surface, and in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are housed from behind. As a result, the rear surface of the radiation plate and the front surface of the decorative substrate can be brought as close as possible by housing the LEDs in the LED housing portion of the radiation plate from behind, thereby reducing the thickness of the production member in the front-rear direction. A gaming machine that can be made thin and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, if the radiation plate has an LED accommodating portion recessed forward to accommodate the LED, it is possible to irradiate light from the LED into the plate thickness from the inner surface of the LED accommodating portion. Even in a portion of the radiation plate where light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach (for example, the central portion) as compared to the case where light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate, the LED housing portion is provided at that portion. By irradiating the light from the inner surface, it is possible to brightly emit light from the corresponding part, and the decorative member can be decorated with light evenly.

Moreover, it is desirable that the LED of the decorative substrate be of a side-view type capable of emitting light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate. As a result, by mounting the LED on the decorative substrate and causing it to emit light, it is possible to irradiate light from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the decorative substrate (radiation plate), so the light from the LED can be emitted directly. It is possible to make it easier to irradiate the inside of the plate thickness, and it is possible to make it easier to achieve the above-described effects.

Further, it is desirable that substantially the entire rear surface of the radiating plate has a plurality of reflecting portions for reflecting forward the light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness. As a result, when light is emitted from the LEDs of the decorative substrate in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, the light can be reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions provided on substantially the entire rear surface, Since light can be radiated forward from substantially the entire surface of the radiating plate, the entire decorative member can be decorated with light, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Further, when a plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate, the light can be emitted to substantially the entire decorative member. It is possible to provide a game machine which does not need to change parts, can easily cope with changes in the decoration of decorative members, and can easily cope with model changes, design changes, and the like.

Furthermore, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors provided on the decorative substrate on the rear surface of the decorative substrate. As a result, compared to the case where electronic parts such as ICs and resistors excluding LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the decoration board, the height of the electronic parts from the board surface of the decoration board is reduced. The rear surface of the decorative substrate can be brought closer to the front surface of the decorative substrate, and the thickness of the effect member can be made thinner.

In addition, as described above, when electronic components such as ICs and resistors are mounted on the back surface of the decoration board, when using a side-view type LED as the LED, the direction along the front surface of the decoration board is irradiated. It is possible to prevent the light from the LEDs to be blocked by the electronic components, and to allow the light from the LEDs to fully reach. Therefore, since the electronic parts do not cast shadows, the entire decorative member can be uniformly illuminated, and the player can be entertained with a good-looking light emitting effect, and the entire decorative member can be illuminated even with a small number of LEDs. can be decorated with light emission, and an increase in the cost of the game machine can be suppressed.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The decorative member
a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body having a embossed part that constitutes at least a part of the decoration and is formed by three-dimensional relief;
and a sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a pattern that constitutes the rest of the decoration, which is provided behind the decorative body.

Here, the "decorative body" may be that which the embossed part has on both the front surface and the rear surface, or which the embossed part has only on the front surface. The portion may be provided only on the rear surface.

In addition, the "decorative sheet" includes "a sheet having a hologram portion in which a pattern is displayed by interference fringes of light" and "a sheet having a prism portion in which countless minute prisms are formed". , "has a lens part in which countless minute lenses are formed", "has an opaque part that makes the rear invisible", and the like.

As for the relationship between the embossed portion of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, the embossed portion and the pattern may be related to each other, or the embossed portion and the pattern may be completely unrelated.

According to the configuration of means 2, the decorative member is composed of a transparent flat plate-like decorative body having a embossed part that constitutes at least a part of the decoration and is formed by three-dimensional relief, and and a sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a pattern forming the rest of the decoration.

Thus, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is composed of the decorative body having the embossed portion and the decorative sheet having the pattern, the embossed portion can impart a three-dimensional effect to the decoration. A sense of depth can be imparted to the pattern of the decorative sheet provided behind by the lens effect of the embossed part. Therefore, the three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be presented to the player by the embossed portion of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, so that even if the thickness (length in the front-rear direction) of the decorative member is reduced, the decoration can still be achieved. It is possible to attract and entertain the player's interest without deteriorating the effect, and the performance member can be made thinner through the decorative member, so that the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. can.

In addition, since the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the embossed portion, the decorative body appears to be colored with the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet even if the transparent decorative body is not colored. , and the cost of the decorative body can be reduced. Also, by changing the pattern of the decoration sheet, the decoration of the decoration body (decorative member) can be easily changed, so that the game machine can be easily adapted to model changes, design changes, and the like.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The decorative member
It has a hologram part that constitutes a part of the decoration and displays a pattern by interference fringes of light.

Here, the "hologram portion" includes a "transmission hologram", a "rainbow hologram", a "Lipmann hologram", and the like. Further, the hologram portion may be provided on the surface of the decorative member, or may be provided on the rear surface of the decorative member.

According to the configuration of means 3, the decorative member has a hologram portion that constitutes a part of the decoration and displays a pattern by means of interference fringes of light.

As a result, the light from the LED of the decoration board, the light from other light emitting means provided in the game machine, the light in the game hall where the game machine is installed, etc. Since a predetermined hologram can be seen by the interference fringes of the hologram, the appearance of the decoration can be improved by the hologram, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. A three-dimensional effect can be imparted, and even if the performance member is made thin, the thinness can be prevented from being felt by the player.

Means 4: In the configuration of Means 3,
"The hologram part
It constitutes at least part of the pattern on the decorative sheet.

According to the configuration of means 4, the hologram portion constitutes at least part of the pattern on the decorative sheet.

As a result, since part of the pattern of the decorative sheet is composed of the hologram portion, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the embossed portion. A sense of depth can be imparted to the pattern, and decorations capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player can be presented to the player.

In addition, since the decorative sheet has the hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique to form the hologram portion, thereby suppressing an increase in cost.

Means 5: In any one configuration from Means 2 to 4,
"The decorative body has a flat rear surface, and
The decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the external shape of the decorative body.

By the way, in the conventional technique such as Patent Document 1, the decorative body provided on the frontmost side of the production member has a flange-like portion that protrudes rearward over substantially the entire outer circumference. Therefore, when a sheet-shaped decorative sheet is provided behind the decorative body, the size of the outer circumference of the decorative sheet must be smaller than the size of the inner circumference of the flange-shaped portion of the decorative body. The presence of the flange portion on the outer periphery of the pattern of the decorative sheet that can be seen through the decorative sheet makes it look as if it is tightly fitted in a frame, and the decoration of the production member looks small, so that the decorative effect cannot be sufficiently exhibited. It is likely to disappear.

According to the configuration of means 5, the rear surface of the decorative body is formed flat, and the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body.

As a result, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the outer shape of the decorative sheet is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, even the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet. Since there is no such thing as a frame around the decoration, it is possible to impart a sense of openness to the decoration of the production member and to make the decoration look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the performance member (picture pattern of the decoration sheet, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the decoration effect of the performance member can be fully exhibited, and the player's interest is strongly attracted by the decoration of the performance member. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain players.

In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decoration is flat, the decoration sheet is in contact with the rear surface of the decoration, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the decoration and the decoration sheet. Therefore, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be fully exhibited.

In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flat, it is possible to reduce the front-rear dimension of the decorative member composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet as much as possible. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be made thin and that can embody the above-described effects.

Furthermore, since the pattern of the decorative sheet can decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the production member (decorative body), the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the production member is a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the production member. By doing so, it is possible to show the player a large decoration with a sense of unity, to give a visual impact to the player to attract the player's attention, and to entertain the player with the large decoration, thereby reducing the interest of the player. can be suppressed.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
"The radiating plate
It is formed so as to be recessed forward from the rear surface, and has a plurality of LED housing portions in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are housed from the rear.

Here, the ``LED housing portion'' includes ``a hole penetrating the radiation plate in the front-rear direction'', a ``bottomed recess recessed forward from the rear surface of the radiation plate'', and a ``radiating A slit-like one penetrating the plate in the front-rear direction and opening to the lateral side”, and the like.

According to the configuration of means 6, the radiating plate has a plurality of LED housing portions formed so as to be recessed forward from the rear surface, in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are housed from behind.

As a result, since the radiation plate has an LED housing portion that can house the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate, the rear surface of the radiation plate and the The front surface of the decoration board can be brought as close as possible, the thickness of the performance member in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the game machine that exhibits the above-described effects can be realized without fail.

In addition, since the radiation plate has an LED accommodating portion recessed forward to accommodate the LED, it is possible to irradiate light from the LED into the plate thickness from the inner surface of the LED accommodating portion. . As a result, compared to the case where light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the radiating plate, even a portion of the radiating plate that is difficult for light to reach from the outer peripheral surface (for example, the central portion) is provided with an LED housing portion. By irradiating the light from the inner surface thereof, the corresponding portion can be brightly illuminated, and the decorative member can be decorated with light evenly.

Means 7: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 6,
"The said LED
It is characterized by being of a side-view type capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

According to the configuration of means 7, the LED of the decorative substrate is of a side-view type capable of emitting light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

As a result, by mounting the LED on the decorative substrate and causing it to emit light, it is possible to irradiate light from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the decorative substrate (radiation plate), so the light from the LED can be emitted directly. It is possible to make it easier to irradiate the inside of the plate thickness, and it is possible to make it easier to achieve the above-described effects.

In addition, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors on the rear surface of the decorative substrate. As a result, the light from the side-view type LED that emits light in the direction along the front surface of the decorative board can be prevented from being blocked by the electronic components, and the light from the LED can be sufficiently distributed. can let Therefore, since the electronic parts do not cast shadows, the entire decorative member can be uniformly illuminated, and the player can be entertained with a good-looking light emitting effect, and the entire decorative member can be illuminated even with a small number of LEDs. can be decorated with light emission, and an increase in the cost of the game machine can be suppressed.

Means 8: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 7,
"The radiating plate
It is characterized by having a plurality of reflecting portions on substantially the entire rear surface for reflecting forward light in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness.

Here, the "reflector" includes "quadrangular pyramid", "triangular pyramid", "cone", "pentroof (gable)", "hemispherical", etc. Further, the "reflector" may be provided in a fixed pattern regardless of the position of the LED on the decorative substrate, or may be provided on concentric circular arcs centered on the corresponding LED.

According to the configuration of means 8, substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate has a plurality of reflecting portions for reflecting forward the light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness.

As a result, when light is emitted from the LEDs of the decorative substrate in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, the light can be reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions provided on substantially the entire rear surface, Since light can be radiated forward from substantially the entire surface of the radiating plate, the entire decorative member can be decorated with light, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since a plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate, and light can be emitted to substantially the entire decorative member, the decoration provided on the decorative member can be changed. It is possible to provide a game machine which does not need to change the reflecting part, can easily cope with the change of the decoration of the decorative member, and can easily cope with the model change, the design change, and the like.

Means 9: In the gaming machine,
"A transparent flat plate-like decoration that constitutes a part of the decoration and has a relief part formed by three-dimensional relief and has a flat rear surface, and a decoration that is provided behind the decoration. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, and has a pattern constituting the rest of the decoration and a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern is displayed by interference fringes of light; A flat plate-shaped decorative member having translucency, which is composed of
A plurality of LED housing portions provided behind the decorative member and recessed forward from the rear surface, and substantially the entire rear surface reflect light forward in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness. a transparent flat plate-like radiating plate having a plurality of reflecting portions and capable of radiating forward light in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness by the plurality of reflecting portions;
A plurality of side-view type LEDs, which are housed in the LED housing portion of the radiation plate from behind and capable of irradiating light in a direction along the surface of the radiation plate within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, are mounted on the front surface of the radiation plate. and a decorative substrate provided behind the plate.

According to the configuration of the means 9, the game machine has a relief part which constitutes a part of the decoration and is formed by three-dimensional relief, and a transparent flat plate-like decoration having a flat rear surface. , and a hologram part in which a part of the pattern is displayed by interference fringes of light and a picture that constitutes the rest of the decoration provided behind the decoration, and is formed in the same size as the outer shape of the decoration. a transparent plate-shaped decorative member composed of a sheet-shaped decorative sheet; and a plurality of LED housing portions provided behind the decorative member and recessed forward from the rear surface, and a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect forward the light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness on substantially the entire rear surface, and the light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness is reflected by the plurality of reflecting portions A transparent flat radiation plate capable of emitting light forward, and a plurality of side views accommodated from behind in LED housings of the radiation plate and capable of irradiating light along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate. LEDs of the type are mounted on the front surface, and a decorative substrate provided behind the radiation plate.

Thus, in the production member, the transparent radiation plate and the decoration substrate are provided behind the decoration member composed of the decoration body and the decoration sheet, and the plurality of LEDs formed on the rear surface of the radiation plate. A side-view type LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate is inserted into each of the accommodation portions so as to be accommodated therein. When a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are caused to emit light, the light from the LEDs is emitted from the inner surface of the LED accommodating portion in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, and the rear surface of the radiation plate. The light is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions formed on substantially the entire surface, and radiated forward from the front surface of the radiation plate. Light radiated forward from the radiation plate is radiated forward through the decorative sheet and the decorative body that constitute the decorative member, so that the light-transmitting decorative member provided with the decoration is formed. It will be decorated with light. At this time, the light emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, so that the decorative member is decorated with light. , the distance from the front surface of the radiation plate until the light from the LED is emitted forward can be lengthened, and the light from the LED can be spread widely compared to the case where the LED is directed to irradiate the light forward. It can be diffused and radiated forward from the radiation plate. Therefore, when the LED emits light, the light from the LED can be widely diffused, and it is possible to suppress the appearance of point-like light emission. It is possible to make the game look beautiful, entertain the player, and suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since the decorative board is provided behind the plate-shaped decorative member and the radiating plate, the dimension in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the space for arranging the decorative member can be easily secured. At the same time, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other performance members, and it is possible to provide a game machine that can entertain players more by providing various performance members.

Furthermore, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is composed of the decorative body having the embossed portion and the decorative sheet having the pattern, the embossed portion can impart a three-dimensional effect to the decoration, A sense of depth can be imparted to the pattern of the decorative sheet provided behind by the lens effect of the embossed part. Therefore, the three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be presented to the player by the embossed portion of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, so that even if the thickness (length in the front-rear direction) of the decorative member is reduced, the decoration can still be achieved. It is possible to attract and entertain the player's interest without deteriorating the effect, and the performance member can be made thinner through the decorative member, so that the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. can.

In addition, since the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the embossed portion, the decorative body appears to be colored with the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet even if the transparent decorative body is not colored. , and the cost of the decorative body can be reduced. Also, by changing the pattern of the decoration sheet, the decoration of the decoration body (decorative member) can be easily changed, so that the game machine can be easily adapted to model changes, design changes, and the like.

In addition, the decorative sheet of the decorative member has a hologram portion in which a part of the decorative pattern is displayed by interference fringes of light. Light from other light emitting means, light in the game hall where this game machine is installed, etc. hits the hologram part, and a predetermined hologram can be seen by the interference fringes of the light. can be improved, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and a part of the decoration of the decorative member can be given a three-dimensional effect by the hologram, so that even if the production member is made thin, the player can still feel the It can be made not to make you feel thin.

Furthermore, since a part of the pattern of the decorative sheet is composed of the hologram portion, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the embossed portion. A sense of depth can be given to the player, and the player can see decorations that can strongly attract the player's interest. In addition, since the decorative sheet has the hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique to form the hologram portion, thereby suppressing an increase in cost.

In addition, in the decorative member, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the outer shape of the decorative sheet is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet. Since there is no such thing as a frame around the decoration, it is possible to impart a sense of openness to the decoration of the performance member and to make the decoration look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the performance member (picture pattern of the decoration sheet, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the decoration effect of the performance member can be fully exhibited, and the player's interest is strongly attracted by the decoration of the performance member. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain players.

In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decoration is flat, the decoration sheet is in contact with the rear surface of the decoration, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the decoration and the decoration sheet. Therefore, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be fully exhibited. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flat, it is possible to reduce the front-rear dimension of the decorative member composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet as much as possible. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be made thin and that can embody the above-described effects.

Furthermore, the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, and the design of the decorative sheet can decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the production member (decorative body), so that it is adjacent to the production member. A large decoration with a sense of unity can be shown to the player by making the decoration mode of the member which is attached to be continuous with the decoration of the performance member, and the visual impact is given to the player to attract the player's attention. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player with large decorations, thereby suppressing the loss of interest of the player.

In addition, since the radiation plate has a plurality of LED housing portions in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are housed from behind, by housing the LEDs in the LED housing portions of the radiation plate from behind, the rear surface of the radiation plate and the The front surface of the decoration board can be brought as close as possible, the thickness of the performance member in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the game machine that exhibits the above-described effects can be realized without fail.

In addition, since the LEDs of the decorative substrate are housed in the LED housing portion of the radiation plate and the light from the LEDs is emitted from the inner surface of the LED housing portion into the plate thickness, the light is irradiated from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate. Even in a portion of the radiation plate where light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach (for example, the central portion), an LED accommodating portion is provided in that portion to irradiate light from the inner surface. Therefore, the part can be brightly illuminated, and the decorative member can be evenly decorated with light.

Furthermore, since the LEDs of the decorative substrate are of the side-view type, simply by housing the LEDs in the LED housing portion of the radiation plate and causing them to emit light, the light can be emitted along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate from the inner surface of the LED housing portion. It is possible to reliably embody a game machine that can irradiate light in the same direction and that has the above-described effects.

In addition, since substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate has a plurality of reflecting portions, light can be radiated to substantially the entire decorative member. It is possible to provide a game machine which does not need to change parts, can easily cope with changes in the decoration of decorative members, and can easily cope with model changes, design changes, and the like.

Means 10: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 9,
The game machine is
a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation;
a plurality of receiving ports arranged in the game area and capable of receiving game media;
a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the receipt of game media into the receiving slot;

Here, the ``acceptance opening'' includes a ``general prize winning opening that is always open within the game area'', and a ``advantageous game state that is always open within the game area and gives an advantage to the player by accepting game media.'' A start prize winning opening (starting opening) where a special lottery is held to determine whether to generate a Acceptable variable winning gates (variable starting gates, prize winning gates, etc.)”, “Normal lottery drawn by game media passing through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the game area Depending on the result, a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, prize winning opening, etc.) that can accept game media, "a specific area within the game area (e.g., gate, chucker, etc.) Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game medium, it becomes possible to accept the game medium, and a variable start is performed in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous due to the acceptance of the game medium. Winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning opening that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game medium received in the accessory winning opening is sorted and received by the distribution means", " Advantageous gaming states in which the player is advantageous include a "big prize winning opening and a prize winning opening that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to accept game media".

In addition, the ``pachinko machine'' includes ``lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting game media into the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. A special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result drawn by the combination of the stopped and displayed special symbols after variably displaying the special symbols in response to the display, and displaying an advantageous game state in the special lottery result display means. Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a large winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called digipachi machine), A distribution means for distributing the game media received in the mouth, and when the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V prize winning port, the prize winning port is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to give an advantage to the player. Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state (so-called Hanemono machine)", "has a large winning opening and a prize winning opening, and is drawn by receiving game media into the starting opening Depending on the result of the special lottery, the large prize winning opening or the special prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium received in the special prize winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special prize winning opening or the special prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. (a so-called multi-function machine) having advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by opening and closing in a pattern of .

According to the configuration of the means 10, the game machine comprises a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of receiving ports which are arranged in the game area and are capable of receiving the game medium, and a game machine into the receiving port. and a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the receipt of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to obtain the effects of any of the means described above.

In addition, it is desirable that the effect (light-emitting effect) in which the decorative member is illuminated by the light emitted from the LED mounted on the decoration board is executed when the game medium driven into the game area is received by the receiving slot. As a result, when game media are accepted into the receiving slot, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and an effect is executed in which the decoration member of the effect member is decorated with light emission. It is possible to facilitate the continuation of the shooting of game media aimed at the entrance, and to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, a special lottery is conducted to generate an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by accepting game media into the starting port, and the result of the special lottery is presented to the player when suggesting the result to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the decoration member of the effect member may be decorated with light emission. As a result, since the decorative member is decorated with light emission, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player with the above-described effects, so that the special lottery result drawn for the player It is possible to make the player think that an advantageous game state (for example, ``jackpot'') will occur in which is advantageous, and to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state to suppress the deterioration of interest. In addition, as described above, by decorating the decorative member with light emission, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect with a higher effect. Therefore, an effect (for example, It can be suitably used for a ready-to-win effect), and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 11: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 9,
The game machine is
a plurality of hull bodies each having a plurality of graphics;
a starting operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of rotating bodies by being operated by the player after the game medium is inserted;
a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine comprising: a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of symbols stopped by all of the rotating bodies whose rotation is stopped by a player operating a plurality of the stop operation parts, respectively characterized by being

Here, the ``slot machine'' includes ``a machine in which the number of effective lines for determining a combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game'', and ``a slot machine with a An internal lottery is executed with the start of rotation, and benefits that are advantageous to the player are given according to the combination of the stop symbols and the result of the internal lottery drawn. It is done", etc. In addition, as "privileges", "big bonus (BB)", "regular bonus (RB)", "cherry rush bonus (CRB)", "replay", "long replay time (LRT)", "assist time ( AT)”, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 11, the game machine comprises a plurality of spinning bodies each having a plurality of patterns, and a starting operation section that rotates the plurality of spinning bodies by being operated by the player after the game medium is inserted. and a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and the stop symbols by all the rotating bodies whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operating parts. and a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, it is possible to obtain the effects of any of the means described above.

In addition, in the effect (light-emitting effect) in which the decorative member is illuminated by the light emission of the LEDs mounted on the decoration board, the combination of symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line is the combination of the symbols for the winning role. As one of the effects to be presented to the player when the condition is satisfied (so-called reach time), the decoration member of the effect member may be light-embellished. As a result, the decoration member is decorated with light, so that the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to win the winning combination. In addition, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the decoration member may be decorated with light emission, so that the decoration member with light emission decoration can give a strong impact to the player. When the game is stopped at a combination of specific symbols, the player can be made to think that an advantageous game state (for example, "BB") will occur, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state can be heightened. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making it possible. In addition, as described above, by decorating the decorative member with light emission, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect with a higher effect effect. It can be used to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

Means 12: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 9,
The game machine is
It is characterized by being a fusion machine that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, a "combined machine" that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine means that after inserting a plurality of game media, a pattern row consisting of a plurality of patterns according to the operation of a start operation part (for example, an operation lever) is variably displayed, and after that, the variation of the symbol row is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (eg, stop button), and game media are paid out according to the combination of the stopped symbols, or benefits advantageous to the player (eg , advantageous game state). It should be noted that if the stop operation unit is not operated even after a predetermined period of time has passed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped in response to the passage of the predetermined period of time.

According to the configuration of means 12, the game machine is a hybrid machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined. As a result, any one of the effects of the above-described means can be achieved in a hybrid machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined.

In addition, in the effect (light-emitting effect) in which the decorative member is illuminated by the light emission of the LEDs mounted on the decoration board, the combination of symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line is the combination of the symbols for the winning role. As one of the effects to be presented to the player when the condition is satisfied (so-called reach time), the decorative member of the effect member may be decorated with light emission, and the lottery result of the internal lottery may be the winning combination. At this time, the decorative member may be decorated with light emission, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 279 to 290. FIG. FIG. 279 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is one embodiment of the present invention. 280 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 281 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 282 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 283 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 284 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 285 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. Figure 286 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and Figure 287 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 288 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 289 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front, and Figure 290 is the door frame, game board, body frame and outer frame of the pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view viewed from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 368) is driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operating section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player can operate the performance operating section 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for putting out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640 and a locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and peripherals arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 290), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100. , and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege given to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B. General winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate section 2003, second starting opening 2004, first big winning opening 2005, and second big winning opening 2006 that provide (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) and have. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁A general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2002 , a gate section 2003 , a second starting opening 2004 , a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 by the player. As a result, the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the gate part 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, the second big winning hole 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. , the player can be entertained with the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be received or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays a reverse effect unit 3100, a reverse effect unit 3100, or a Left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top effect unit 3400, back rear left effect unit 3500, back rear right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700, back front right effect The unit 3800 or the like can be used to entertain the player by performing a lighting effect, a movable effect, or the like.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 296. FIG. 291 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 292 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 293 is a right side view of the outer frame. 294 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 295 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 296 is an exploded perspective view of the main members of the outer frame, viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 297 is an exploded front perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively; A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right at the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and rightward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-like abutting portion 13d that extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recessed portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The right outer frame member 21 and the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10 are formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape.

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-like contact portion 23d that extends short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 298 is an exploded front perspective view with the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame exploded; The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and right with an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a has an upper end that is slanted so as to be positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion 44a. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 communicates the inner space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain board and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 with two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 299(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front and top, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and bottom. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the shape of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely to the left front, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 300 to 308. FIG. Fig. 300 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, Fig. 301 is a rear view of the door frame, Fig. 302 is a left side view of the door frame, and Fig. 303 is a right side view of the door frame. 304 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 305 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 306 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the rear. Fig. 307 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 308 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side unit 400 attached to the tray unit, a door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, and mounted near the right end on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the rear side. a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the door frame main relay board 104; The door frame relay board cover 107 covers the rear handle relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay board 106 is covered from the rear side. It has a post-handle relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 has a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is ejected into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to hit into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309-311. FIG. 309(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 309(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 310 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 311 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting a handle unit 180, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the bottom corner of the front surface, a plate unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery thereof, and is close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and a lower side forming the inner periphery extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted is recessed near the right end in the front view from the front to the front and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray) in a front view and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed so as to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will now be described in detail, primarily with reference to Figures 309-311. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The handlebar mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion 102a. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) protrusions 102c protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and are arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a. and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle mounting member 102 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with a screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The cylindrical portion 102 a has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 . One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed in the handle base 181 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 102, the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309-311. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is positioned in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the player can be guided forward (to the player side) of the pachinko machine 1 in a favorable manner.

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the rear handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (Fig. 361). and FIG. 362) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410 side. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the body frame 4, The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board (inverted L-shaped portion extending up and down) can be covered. cover the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box-like shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical separation therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The cut-out portion 114a is formed at the position corresponding to the upper tray ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at the position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

[3-1g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will now be described primarily with reference to FIGS. 309-311. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 300, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 rotatably with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. can be done.

[3-1i. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309-311. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing and locking with. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 300, etc.).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 312 and 313. FIG. FIG. 312(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 312(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. Fig. 313 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the rear case and the tampering prevention member removed and viewed from the rear. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 can be supplied. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end, and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entering from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 312(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed actuation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball feed solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feed crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is arranged on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 313(b)) projecting downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 484) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

When the player presses downward the upper tray ball release button 222 of the tray unit 200, the upper tray ball release slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the operation transmission portion 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the inlet 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, and it is possible to prevent the ball extraction member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B can be inserted into the partition Rebounding at 143a can be prevented.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 313(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the rear of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The tamper-proof member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string that has been set to let the illegal game ball B enter and exit the first starting port 2002, etc., the illegal game ball B shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 is released. By force, the string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the portion with a narrowed shape, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act using a fraudulent game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 314 and 315. FIG. FIG. 314(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 314(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 315 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. - 特許庁As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper left corner in a front view, and is a penetration that communicates the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200. A ball passage 150a and a full ball receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and can communicate with a lower full discharge passage 610b of a lower full ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4. and a mouth 150b.

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and even though the ball is fired by the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4, it does not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received by a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c which are open forward near the lower right corner in front view. and a ball discharge port 150d that discharges the balls forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e. and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. to that effect and urge them to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a, and serves as a lower full-tank ball path unit 610 in the later-described payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 369). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can abut on a projecting portion 163 b of the glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 375). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 375).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-like body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . Also, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects further rearward than the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 316 and the like. FIG. 316(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 316(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle 182 covering the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 and a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183 .

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handlebar mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .

The handle 182 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d which protrude outwardly away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc from the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center from the slit 182e. and a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a protrudes outward from the portion protruding most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (gouged out) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second projection 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first projection 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotational angle of about 85 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 182b protrudes so that the clockwise side surface in the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the counterclockwise side surface, which is the opposite side, curves inward. and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first projection 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. Both side surfaces of the third projection 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the clockwise side surface is inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The portion of the fourth projection 182d that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the third projection 182c that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. It also protrudes slightly higher. Both sides of the fourth projection 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and is translucent. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without any sense of incongruity.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.例文帳に追加

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the player and detects the static electricity acting on the player's handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. Firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 can be rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the player can easily maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by switching the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. To reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320. FIG. FIG. 317 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 318 is a perspective view of the tray unit from behind. Fig. 319 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 320 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . A mounting base 213 attached to and protruding forward, a plate unit relay board 214 attached to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, It has an upper tray before ball removal unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper tray after ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray before ball removal unit 230. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate upper right decoration unit 275 and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 are provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular performance operation ring 330 having a rotation operation portion 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation portion 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 that lights up the effect operation ring 330, the decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation part base 320. an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330; and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320. and have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 300, and a ball renting operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper plate 201. - 特許庁

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes rearward as it goes to the right in the front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 is positioned below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211, and the game balls touch the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port 211e. It inclines so that it may become low toward the position of a little lower side than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320 and the like. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be discharged through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 321 to 324. FIG. 321 is a front perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit, and FIG. 322 is a rear perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit. Fig. 323 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 324 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached on the front surface.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper plate main body 212 on the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and projecting forward, and a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. and a plate unit relay board 214 .

The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray ball removal front unit 230. - 特許庁

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in a front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and a front view upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. an upper tray ball feeding port 211e extending vertically through the upper tray main body 212 and positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212. - 特許庁

The plate unit base 211 has a mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, which projects forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and an upper plate portion 211f on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which an operation transmission part 242b of an upper tray ball removal slider 242 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is inserted is passed through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction, and a front-view lower right corner penetrates the plate body in the front-rear direction. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion opening 211h that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. and a mouth 211i.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has a front end opened to the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a tubular rear end of the upper tray ball passage of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed port 211e, the entrance port 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feed unit 140, and the upper tray ball feed port 211e. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after tray ball removal, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding opening 211e is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the game balls in the upper tray 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324. FIG. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in the shape of a shallow box with an open top. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the right corner of the rear end.

The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is through which the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball removal front unit 230 is inserted. A wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, the plate lower left decorative board 283, and the plate lower right decorative board 288. , and the operation unit relay board 392 . The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 324 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the attachment base 213 . This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and operates a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. (omitted)), a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed. or return the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine after deducting the amount of the game balls B borrowed.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper tray ball ejection button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper tray ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the withdrawal button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental operation. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged on the lower rear portion of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed on the ball lending display section. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before upper tray ball removal and unit after upper tray ball removal]
The unit 230 before ball removal and the unit 240 after upper ball removal in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324 and the like. The upper tray ball before unit 230 and the upper tray after ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 . The upper bowl post-ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion behind the upper bowl ball removal pre-unit 230 on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 .

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 attached to the front surface of the tray unit base 211 and extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. and a slider 232 . The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240. It abuts on the top surface.

The upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. an upper tray ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the top, a spring 243 urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241, It has

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball receiving opening 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving opening 241a. A ball feeding guideway 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then backward, and a game is played from a position below the ball feeding guideway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. A ball extraction guideway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port 241a is installed in the plate base unit 210 and extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an open position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an operation receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface, which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a, projecting rearward. and an operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving section 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion opening 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the . When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243 .

In the upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 and the upper bowl ball extraction unit 240, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward. The front slider 232 abuts on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, and the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is positioned at the upper movement end. In addition, since the urging force of the spring 243 positions the upper disk ball removal slider 242 at the upper movement end, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is fed from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening 241a. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is operated. The actuating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partition portion 143a. retreats from between the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper tray 201 is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b that is open below the entry port 141a. It will be done. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is moved through the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission part 242b, and the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before the upper tray ball is removed and the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. Figure 325 is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit, and Figure 326 is a rear perspective view of the dish decoration unit. Fig. 327 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 328 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. be. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. An upper left decorative unit 270 and an upper right plate decoration unit 275, and a lower left plate decoration unit 280 and a lower right plate decoration unit attached below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and .

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower front portion of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape that extends laterally in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction protrudes further forward than the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . When the lower tray main body 251 is assembled with the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body 251 is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is used to supply the lower tray balls. It is positioned in front of the mouth 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. has a lower front decorative portion 252b protruding forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and are provided on the front surfaces of the upper left and lower plate decoration units 270 and 280, respectively, and the upper right and lower right plate decoration units 275 and 280, respectively. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b at the right end of the lower surface. In addition, the right upper side swelling portion 252a is connected at its lower end to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

In addition, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. and a bottom cutout portion 252f that is cut at a portion below the . A lower tray ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates the bottom right corner of the front decoration part 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are central in the left-right direction. A production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is positioned. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower pan ball extractor unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower pan main body 251 and includes a flat plate-like lower pan ball extractor base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower pan ball extractor base 261 . A slider 262 attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward, A lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower tray ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and is vertically aligned with the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (lower tray main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 has a projecting pin projecting upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower tray ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending axis at a position to the left of the slider 262 on the left end side, and is attached to the slider 262 on the right end side. , and the right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower disk ball removal cover 265 is formed with a laterally extending slit into which the projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower tray ball extractor unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball extractor base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit body 252, and the lower surface of the lower tray ball extractor base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower tray ball release button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the tray unit main body 252. As shown in FIG. In the normal state, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole. and closes the through hole (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加In addition, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower tray ball release button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is pushed backward to move backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower tray ball ejection button 263. becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower disk ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower disk ball removal cover 265 moves rearward on the right side with the left side as the center. It rotates in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 positioned directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, thereby opening the through hole and opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower tray ball eject button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower tray ball eject button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264 . As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game ball B in the lower tray 202 is continuously released. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. be. Then, when the pressure on the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower tray ball ejection button 263 returns to the state in which it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is positioned directly above the through hole, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265 . Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the plate upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 300 on the upper part of the plate unit 200 .

The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical upper left dish decoration body 271 extending in the left and right direction and having translucency, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration body 271, A plate upper left decorative substrate 273 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided.

The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper left ornamental body 271 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The upper left plate reflector 272 is inserted into the upper left plate decoration body 271 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the top left decorative body 271 of the plate can be decorated with light.

The left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 includes a plate upper right decorative body 276 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, A plate upper right decorative substrate 278 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper right ornamental body 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This plate upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The plate top right reflector 277 is inserted into the plate top right decoration 276 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate top right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decoration body 276 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled on the door frame 3. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a, a step can be formed in which the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the plate upper right decorative unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his finger using the step between the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side protrusion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Alternatively, it can be used as a finger hold when operating an effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. In addition, the step between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decorative unit and plate lower right decorative unit]
The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a lower left plate decoration body 281 which is semicylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a lower left plate reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, A lower left plate decorative substrate 283 is attached to the rear side of the lower left plate reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape centered rearward in a plan view. is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left plate decoration 281 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The lower left ornamental body 281 of the plate has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed in milky white.

The lower left plate reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left plate decoration body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light emission.

The left end of the plate lower decoration unit 280 is positioned below the left end of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the lower plate center decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Contiguous with the left edge. Since the left end of the plate lower left decorative body 281 of the plate lower left decorative unit 280 is formed in a spherical shape, the left end looks as if it is hidden inside the door frame 3 . Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower left plate decoration 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 includes a plate lower right decoration body 286 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rearward center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The lower right plate decoration 286 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The plate lower right ornament 286 has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the plate lower right decorative body 286 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is located below the right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is contiguous with the right edge of Since the right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the right end appears to be hidden inside the door frame 3 . The lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right plate decoration body 286. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are caused to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the display can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 329 to 332 and the like. FIG. 329 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as seen from the forward/backward direction of the effect operation button. Figure 330(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. Fig. 331 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 332 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation part 301, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation part 303 is arranged at the center of the rotating operation part 302, and has a central pressing operation part 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotating operation part 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing portion 303b disposed between the inner peripheral portion and the inner peripheral portion.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation part 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 , and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration board 352. A decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, a vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330. A performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation section cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 includes a downwardly recessed hemispherical unit lower cover 311, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover. A plate center upper reflector 313 attached from behind in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs attached to the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. a plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a plate center lower reflector 315 attached from behind in the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower reflector 315 attached to the plate center lower reflector 315 to direct light forward. and a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical surface bulging downward on the front side from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit main body 252 on the rear side from this. 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in a slanted state so that the axis perpendicular to the imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular shape of the front portion is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 is formed with a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest portion when assembled to the dish unit 200. As shown in FIG.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 when viewed from above. installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a plate center upper decoration 312a in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a plate center upper decoration 312a that extends forward below the plate center upper decoration 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided, the protruding semicircular arc extending in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. - 特許庁The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b.

The upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) into halves, and extend in a semicircular shape with the divided surfaces facing the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is slightly thinner than the upper plate center decoration 312a. is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decoration 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the lower plate center decoration 312b. When the plate unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a are continuous with the right ends of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the left ends of the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, and the lower plate center decorations. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and milky white.

The front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

The plate center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The upper plate center decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center upper decoration body 312a can be decorated with light.

The lower plate center reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower plate center decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the lower plate center decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated with light.

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape. When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower dish center decoration substrate 316 are caused to emit light, the whole of each can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and it is possible to make it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the upper plate center decoration 312a is continuous with the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is connected with the lower left plate decoration 281 and the right plate decoration. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332 and the like. The operation part base 320 is inserted into the effect operation part cover unit 310 from above, and the lower end is attached to the effect operation part cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 includes a body portion 321 that is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and has an open top, and a body portion 321 that extends outward from the upper end of the body portion 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the body portion 321 and opens upward to support the operation ring transmission gear 350 rotatably.

The operation part base 320 is formed such that the main body part 321 is sized to accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. The main body part 321 has a bottom wall to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from below, and a portion of the bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be flat. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified, and the vibrations can be converted into sounds such as voice and music and output. can.

A leg portion 361 b of a button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 . Further, the body portion 321 has a through-hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the body portion 321 . The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the body part 321, and the operating part relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . An effect operation ring decoration board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation section cover unit 310 .

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the transmission gear for the operation ring so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the driving side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is positioned at the flange portion. Below 322, it is in a state of being exposed to the outside.

When the operation part base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the flange part 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the upper plate center decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . In addition, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 333 and 334 and the like. FIG. 333(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 334(a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from above, and FIG. 334(b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation portion 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice the size of the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the effect operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of approximately 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushings 333 are attached to the ring mounting base 331 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring mounting base 332, and are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to prevent upward movement of the rotation base 332. and a regulating ring retaining member 334 .

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operation part 302 and form a part of the rotation operation part 302. and a ring inner cover 337 that is in the ring. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 and an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is separated in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 and a boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 projecting upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. and through-holes 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. A plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 .

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 . The rotation base 332 has a ring gear 332a projecting downward from the bottom surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332 . The ring gear 332 a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 , and faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331 when assembled to the effect operation ring 330 . The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on an outer upper surface portion 335a in which an arc forming the outer and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer upper surface portions 335a are arranged in the circumferential direction. and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. there is An outer upper surface portion 335a of the upper outer ring cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The upper outer cover mounting portion 335 c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the upper outer surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 .

The ring outer and lower cover 336 has an outer and lower surface portion 336a in which an arc forming the outer and lower portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer and lower surface portions 336a that protrude upward and toward the center from the inner side of the outer and lower surface portion 336a. and an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b arranged. A lower outer surface portion 336a of the outer lower ring cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The lower outer cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the upper outer cover 335 of the ring.

The ring inner cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis. and a plurality of inner cover mounting portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. An inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The cylinder surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter equal to the inner diameter of the rotation base 332 . The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332. As shown in FIG.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. - 特許庁

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 335 to 337 and the like. FIG. 335(a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 335(b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. 336 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit viewed from the front right, and FIG. 337 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit viewed from the front left. The rotary drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and for detecting the rotary operation of the rotary operation portion 302 . The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 .

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of an operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346 and .

The rotation drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The driving gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates together with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. there is A second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with a gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 .

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a left side surface of the gear portion 345a. and a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345 b are detected by a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345 . The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It's like As a result, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation portion 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 .

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the driving side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. engage with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is entirely located inside the effect operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

The rotation drive unit 340 is driven by an operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via a drive gear 343, a transmission gear 344, a transmission detection gear member 345, and an operation ring transmission gear. can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range by means of the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotary operation section 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to change the contents of the player participation type presentation according to the direction of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 .

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotational direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the rotation operation section 302, it is possible to apply a load to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these elements, it is possible to provide the rotary operation unit 302 with an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player-participation type presentation or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Operation ring transmission gear]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation portion base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and rotates together with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur-gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the driving-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation portion base 320 so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 . The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting it from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 and then attaching the gear mounting member 351 to the operation portion base 320 . be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a. It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340 . Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can light-embellish the effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is formed in a shape in which a ring is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decoration board 352a on the front side and a rear decoration board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. A plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is positioned below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300 . The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is covered with a transparent decoration board cover 353 on the upper side. The decoration board cover 353 is formed in a form divided into the front and rear sides, similarly to the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and covers the front decoration board 352a from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation part base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 to cover the rear decoration substrate 352b from above.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331 are passed through the ring outer side of the rotary operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to present the player with a light-emitting decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotary operation portion 302 .

[3-5e-7. vibration speaker]
Vibration speaker 354 in production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Also, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320 . The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more diverse effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 338 to 340 and the like. Fig. 338 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit of the performance operation unit, viewed from above, and Fig. 339 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit, viewed from below. FIG. 340(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation portion 303a. ing.

The performance operation button unit 360 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the button unit base 361 attached inside the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other. Upper base 363 , and between upper base 363 and button unit base 361 , are attached so as to be vertically movable by means of a pair of guide shafts 362 . and a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and biasing the lifting base 364 upward.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape, the upper end of which is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. An operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to protrude upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 are engaged with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevation cam driving gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and mounted rotatably with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, an elevation cam member 371, which is connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end and rotatably mounted through a central shaft 366, and rotates to raise and lower the elevation base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam driving gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom extending vertically with an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted above the elevation base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the lift base 364 and biasing the central button body 373 upward; A central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom and closed at the upper end side, and is attached to the upper end of the central button main body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363 . and a center button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted that are capable of emitting light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, a central button main body 373 and a central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the center button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364. An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373; A translucent cylindrical perimeter decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the perimeter button decoration substrate 377 on the outer perimeter side and that is three-dimensionally decorated, and lifts up and down so as to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the perimeter decorative lens 379. and a transparent outer perimeter button cover 380 attached to the base 364 and having a center button cover 375 facing upward at the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute the outer peripheral press operating portion 303b.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 includes a pressing detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 for detecting pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 attached to the button unit base 361. and an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. A base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 . The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to its upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 attached to its lower surface. is attached. The button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b.

A pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center. A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. A pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366 .

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and have their lower ends in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends in contact with the elevating base 364 . The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374 .

The elevating base 364 is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central hole 364b having a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass, and a central hole 364b that penetrates vertically. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. there is The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lifting base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space is provided between the lifting base 364 and the upper base 363 in which the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 can move. forming. Also, the elevation base 364 is vertically moved by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two locations facing each other and is detected by the elevation detection sensor 382. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by 180 degrees on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364. As shown in FIG.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see Figure 340). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371 a are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364 d of the lift base 364 .

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The elevation cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. is formed as By rotating the elevation cam member 371, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 can be guided by the cam portion 371a so that the elevation base 364 can be elevated.

The central button main body 373 has a vertically extending cylindrical cylindrical portion 373a, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted into a pair of guide holes 373c, a central opening 373d passing through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

The center button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the lift base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. As shown in FIG. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373 .

The center button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws through which washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. A washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevation base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is activated when the bottom 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 to protrude downward. This center button main body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker biasing force than the lifting spring 365 .

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 at the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full-color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can light-embellish the center button cover 375 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration board 377 . The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can light-embellish the peripheral decorative lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 includes an annular substrate portion 378 a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and is attached to the lift base 364 , and a cylindrical substrate portion 378 a that extends upward from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378 a to cover the center button main body 373 . and a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 has twisted portions extending upward so as to move in the circumferential direction and arranged in rows at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a of the peripheral substrate cover 378 . The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 at the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

In the state where the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. It is inserted into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevation cam member 371 from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, when assembled into the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 , and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 . also protrudes upward (see FIG. 341, etc.).

In this state (state shown in FIG. 340(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pushed downward to move downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is pushed downward. is detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 343(c)).

In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. Neither is detected by the detection sensor 381 . That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view, the elevation cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevation drive gear 368 . The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam driving gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. Together with this, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the elevated position, as shown in FIG. 340(b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevation base 364 is restricted. In addition, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central depressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral depressing operation portion 303b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 .

When it is moved to the raised position after being assembled into the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 protrude from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 343(b), etc.). reference).

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the center button main body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 . When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes downward from the lift base 364. , the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 abuts on the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lifting base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lifting base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lifting base 364, the peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364 and the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 is detected. is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the urging force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the lifting base 364 moves through the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the lifting spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365 , and the lower end of the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 . In this state, the lift base 364 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in the lowered position. The pressure detecting piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, and the pressure detecting piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. 340(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364, moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the elevation base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the state of the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 320 . The operating section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operating section base 320 and an operating section relay board 392 attached inside the board box 391 .

The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. The operation part relay board 392 includes the plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate center lower decoration board 316, the operation ring drive motor 342, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevation drive motor 367, center button decoration board 376, peripheral button decoration board 377, press detection sensor 381, elevation detection sensor 382, and plate unit relay board 214 of plate base unit 210 are relayed. there is

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 341 to 343 and the like. FIG. 341 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 342 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion. FIG. 343(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing portion of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a plate unit when an operation part is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on its upper surface. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a large annular rotating operating section 302 and a pressing operating section 303 arranged in the ring of the rotating operating section 302 . The press operation portion 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation portion 303 a positioned at the center of the rotary operation portion 302 and an annular outer peripheral press operation portion disposed between the central press operation portion 303 a and the rotary operation portion 302 . 303b.

The rotation operation part 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335 , a ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330 . The central pressing operation portion 303 a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360 , and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation part 302 (the effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 . Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 341, etc.).

In this normal state, when the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 clockwise in a left side view, the effect operation ring 330 rotates through the operation ring transmission gear 350 . , rotates clockwise in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 counterclockwise in left side view, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. .

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and rotates. When the operating portion 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. FIG. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is greater than the space between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in rows at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , is an interval that is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b after the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, after the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected from the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

Since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected in this way, the content of the player participation type presentation can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 . Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the rotary operation portion 302 in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotary operation, thereby making the rotary operation heavy or giving a click feeling.

The rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation portion 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the drawing, the rotary operation unit 302 is attached with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that is easy for the player to grasp. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to operate. is enhanced. Further, the rotary operation portion 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation portion 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. It should be noted that since the lower surface side of the rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 342, the effect operation unit 300 includes, below the effect operation ring 330, a effect operation ring decoration board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape. Thus, by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially turned on as the rotation operation unit 302 rotates. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decoration board) is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302 that rotates.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has a pressing operation part 303 arranged in a ring of the rotation operation part 302, and the upper surface of the rotation operation part 302 is larger than the upper surface of the rotation operation part 302, as shown in FIG. 343(a). It is in a state of a lowered position projecting slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation portion 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation portion 303a of the pressing operation portion 303 can be pressed. When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward, the upper surface of the central push operation portion 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer circumference push operation portion 303b (perimeter button cover 380), and the push is detected. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381 .

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. The pressure is never detected by the sensor 381 .

In a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the lifting base 364 to reach the raised position (see FIG. 343(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 . In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 .

When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward while the push operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the central push operation portion 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central push operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are moved to the rotation operating portion 302. It will be in a state of approximately the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 343(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotary operating portion 302 (see FIG. 343(a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation portion 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, regardless of whether the pressing operation portion 303 is in the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to encourage the player to press the central pressing operation portion 303a firmly, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , the player-participation type performance can be more enjoyable.

Note that the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation portion 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation portion 303 may hinder the rotation operation. Therefore, it is possible to change the operability of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby making it possible to enjoy a wider variety of operations.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 344 to 346. FIG. FIG. 344(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 344(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. 345 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 346 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, and a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 .

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can light-embellish the door-frame left-side decoration body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 . The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left plate decoration body 271 of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the top end of the door frame top decoration body of the door frame top unit 450 is formed. It is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end of 453 .

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 347 to 349. FIG. FIG. 347(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 347(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. 348 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 349 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. and a plurality of luminous side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and prevents a player playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and cylindrically extending forward and arranged vertically in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted in a portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and a side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 are mounted. and internal reflectors 414 respectively inserted into the interiors of the side window trims 410b.

The door-frame right-side unit 410 includes a right-side reflector 415 that is arranged forward of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and a door-frame right-side base 411 that is attached to the door-frame. A door having a through hole 416a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in a flat plate shape so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and penetrating in the left-right direction to constitute the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front and back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. and a door frame right side inner panel 417 formed with a through hole 417a extending in a shape and penetrating in the left-right direction to constitute the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the right side reflector 415. and a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415 .

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (three in this case) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416 at the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b. The side window inner decorative member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper position with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in translucent milky white.

The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is attached to a portion behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 . A plurality of LEDs provided on the side window inner decorative portion decorative substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape vertically and horizontally around the axial center of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear portion of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is

The internal reflector 414 has an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four sections, upper, lower, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward from the top end to the bottom end. It is The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and forward and backward. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and forward and backward. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed oval shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 can light-embellish the door-frame right-side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415 . As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decorative body 276 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453 .

The door-frame right-side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door-frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and the door-frame right-side decorative body 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed like a screen. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (columnar) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a. , the side window inner decorative portion 410b can be decorated with light. By luminous decoration of the side window interior decoration part 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be brightened, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the edge of the island facility) through the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window inner decorative portion 410b can block the line of sight of a player located nearby. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, so that the other players can play the game without hesitation. .

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are illuminated by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can dazzle the inside of the side window 410a, thereby changing the visibility through the side window 410a. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, the light is emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, so that the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzling and the opposite side is seen from between them. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as a neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being unable to concentrate on the game and feeling lost due to mistakes being induced, and making the player concentrate on the game to make the game more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 350 to 352 and the like. Figure 350 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is a top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the folded state. 351 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from above and front, and FIG. 352 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from below and front. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 arranged between a door frame top decoration 453 and a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457. and a top right reflector 460 located in and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 .

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. a top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below; A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. there is

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like body portion 451a extending in the left and right direction with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction. and a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right forward protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The forward projecting portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outer sides of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right forward protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes forward most at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top cover 452 also has an opening 452a on the upper surface thereof, which is largely cut forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a semi-circular arc that protrudes forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and it extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 . formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 faces downward at both ends in the horizontal direction, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively.

The door-frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door-frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door-frame top base 451, and bulges upward at the center in the left-right direction. , extending in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 has a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the lateral outside of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454 .

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decoration substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decoration substrate 456 can illuminate the left portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door-frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

Top center reflector 458 , top left reflector 459 , and top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, on door frame top center decoration substrate 455 , door frame top left decoration substrate 456 , and door frame top right decoration substrate 457 . Through-holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the respective mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. As shown in FIG. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as speech and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451 b of the door frame top base 451 . The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter, and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sounds output from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465 .

The door frame top relay board 467 includes the door frame top center decorative board 455 , the door frame top left decorative board 456 , the door frame top right decorative board 457 , the top center speaker 462 , the top side speaker 464 , and the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the door frame secondary relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. there is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top central speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464 .

[3-9. door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 353 and the like. FIG. 353 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate center upper decoration 312a, a door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side door frame decoration 404, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the Behind the door frame top decoration 453, there are a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately lighting the LEDs of these decoration substrates, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, A player can be shown or given a light emitting effect such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part 302. A pressing operation portion 303 composed of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operation portion 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or half-tube) large-diameter plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other. A door-frame left-side decoration 404 of the door-frame left-side unit 400 and a door-frame right-side decoration of the door-frame right-side unit 410 have similar shapes so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation portion 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, and the lower center plate decoration 312b, which are arranged below the upper plate center decoration 312a, are placed in half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger as it goes upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction. The push operation part 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the push operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest. can.

Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, a doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. Further, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 are easy to understand, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be made. can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 354 to 360. FIG. Fig. 354 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and Fig. 355 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 356 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 357 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 358 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. Fig. 359 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 360 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so that it can be opened and closed; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570, based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of locking with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 projecting backward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
Main body frame base unit 500 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 354 to 362 and the like. 361(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIGS. 362(a) to 362(c) are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front. A circular speaker opening 501g for facing forward the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620, and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rotatably attached rearwardly extending portion 501j is formed on the rear surface of the base body 501a near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the other end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame secondary board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 362 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see Figure 362(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably, α/3≧β). (see FIG. 362(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this manner, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511 a that penetrates vertically on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion in front view and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 359 and 360 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. A lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that opens to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 363 and the like. FIG. 363(a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching device. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that if the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 364 and the like. FIG. 364(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 has a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball straightening member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the side of the first rail cover 554 is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 370). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the top surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 and 366 and the like. Figure 365(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. Fig. 366(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. As shown in FIG.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the side of the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guide unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 and 366 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 370).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the top surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the top end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while being repeatedly folded between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 to 368 and the like. FIG. 367 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction. FIG. 368(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball ejection movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from behind to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 367, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the center of the delivery blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent rightward, and extends vertically along the left side of the rear view to the lower end. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585 , the first transmission gear 586 , the second transmission gear 587 , and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581 and covered with a dispensing device front lid 583 on the front side. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 has a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape, and three blade pieces 589a are provided at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a is arranged so that the distance between the wing piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the portion extending toward the rotating shaft from above in the payout passage 580a and then extending rightward in rear view. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 has a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removing movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 368).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b by the force of the contact. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B is prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, so that pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the back cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 and 366 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e that extends downward and then opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 370).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball extraction passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the In addition, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 and 366 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in the state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end to close the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state and are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( (This guidance is hereinafter also referred to as an instruction to remove the ball. The instruction to remove the ball is displayed, for example, on the effect display device 1600), and the payout motor of the payout device 580 584 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state. In addition, for example, in the state where the instruction to remove the ball is displayed during the big hit, if the full state is maintained without operating the lever for removing the ball, etc., the production will continue even in the time saving state or normal state. An instruction to remove the ball can be displayed on the display device 1600 .

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are ejected from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball extraction lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 371 to 375 and the like. FIG. 371(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 371(b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 372 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below. FIG. 373 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 374 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 375 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The substrate unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a speaker cover 621 facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. and a container-like speaker box 623 that is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and that opens forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient space can be secured on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, so that the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the lower outer frame assembly 40 through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through-cylinder 623a extending in a tubular shape communicating with the through-hole 621d and penetrating back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guiding part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guiding part 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the ink is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 375) and The payout control board 633 activates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. It is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 354 to 360. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The rear cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and its left side attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 376(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 376(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward. 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 377 to 384. FIG. FIG. 377(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 378 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 379(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and FIG. 379(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 379(a) viewed from below. FIG. 380 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 379(a). FIG. 381 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. FIG. 382 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 383 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper portion of the body frame. FIG. 384 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 in a front view on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and opens upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opens upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 leftward in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for paying out game balls B to the player side, It has

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right side wall 552e) with a length of about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. . The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guiding portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the clogged place can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from the rear. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and an overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is inclined to be lower, and part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the part of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. extended to The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the horizontal direction is about 1/3 of the length in the horizontal direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap with a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The upper end of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extends in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right stepped portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. In the following, the container-shaped area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 as well. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h whose front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and whose rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its circulation direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by releasing it to a wide area of the tank rail 553 .

In addition, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outer left portion of the rear wall 552c of the tank rail 553 in front view. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not fall backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the position about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. and has an opening 552k penetrating in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end of the tank rail 553 (right end in front view) is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )are doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is positioned at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a stepwise manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the lateral direction on the rear surface thereof. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 382). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 383, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be avoided. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting caught due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

In addition, on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since it is provided with a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be distant from the ball tank 552 to which game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 382) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 382, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4, causing a problem. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 385 to 393. FIG. FIG. 385 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which front components, game panels, front units, etc. are made opaque. 386 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 385 viewed from the front right, FIG. 387 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 385 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 388 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear. . FIG. 389 is a front view of the game board with the front constituent members, the game panel, the front unit, etc. made transparent. Fig. 390 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 391 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 392 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 385. FIG. FIG. 393 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decoration substrate is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decoration substrate, the LED emits light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decoration substrate. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative board is rectangular, it means that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative board (side-view LED). detailed description is omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section, and a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. 2003, a second start-up opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. 2006, etc., to perform a game that entertains the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a so as to be received or passed.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 393, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 392 and 484, etc.) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided.

A performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the performance display device 1600. - 特許庁A drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600 .

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape.

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 394, etc.) which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 according to the command from the panel relay board 1710 which relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510. It is provided with an effect drive board 1720 that drives the decoration board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, etc., and the drive board box 1730 that houses the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720 . The drive board box 1730 is hinge-rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 on the left side when viewed from the rear, and detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 on the right side when viewed from the rear.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the 5a, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first big prize winning opening 2005, a first starting opening 2002 or a second starting opening that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B. A second big prize winning opening 2006 is provided in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the 2004.例文帳に追加

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and has an out port 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the game area 5a, and is provided in the middle of the vertical direction in the game area 5a. is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging from inside the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the lower end of the playing area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the playing area 5a, and a front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit provided on the left side of the side unit 2200 and slightly above the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 is provided on the right side of the starter unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner of the game area 5a in the front view, and has a second starter outlet 2004, a first big prize-winning outlet 2005, and a first sub-outer outlet 2011. a first attacker unit 2400, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a, and a center role A second attacker unit 2600 provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the object 2500 and having a second large winning opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600 provided above the second attacker unit 2600 and one A side right center unit 2700 having a general prize winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right center unit 2700 and having a gate portion 2003. there is

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010, which has a square opening 3010a in the back wall and has a box shape with an open front. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 is provided.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a flat plate-like back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and a flat plate-like back front right decorative body 3040 provided below the front end inside the back box 3010. a back guidance unit 3050, a back rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the back box 3010, and a rear side guidance unit 3050 at the bottom in the back box 3010, and are provided separately to the left and right behind the back guidance unit 3050. a back bottom left effect unit 3200 and a back bottom right effect unit 3250, and a back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part inside the back box 3010, and a back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. a back rear left effect unit 3500, a back rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 in the back box 3010, and a back front left decoration 3030 and back rear left A back front left effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500 and a back front right effect unit provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800 and .

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 394(a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel.

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape clockwise from the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view, passing through the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear (out port 2010).

The front structural member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 which is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front structural member 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004. from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 2010 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The out port 2010 penetrates with a width sufficient for two game balls B to be aligned in the horizontal direction. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 2010 and an out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, and is discharged to the rear of the front structural member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since this front component member 1000 is formed transparently together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, when assembled on the game board 5, the boundary of the game area 5a can be reduced from being clearly visible. , it is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the front structural member 1000 is made transparent together with the game panel 1100, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 394 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 393, etc.).

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum required thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front structural member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

Although illustration is omitted, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge thereof are separated in the left-right direction. and a plurality of engaging stepped portions formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting projecting pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging step portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . be.

As shown in FIG. 394, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset from the center to the upper right when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) has a plurality of left and lower sides from the center. It has a wide width in which the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side and having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion are penetrated and the lower full-fill ball is formed. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and recessed forward from the rear surface. Out recessed portion 1123 communicates with out port 2010 at its upper portion. A cylindrical portion 3081 of an out-ball detecting member 3080 in a back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 to be described later is inserted into the out recess 1123 .

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and arranged outside the holding stepped portion. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging stepped portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 that protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding stepped portion. and a pair of engaging pieces respectively engaged with the two engaging stepped portions on the lower side of the . The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging stepped portion on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper side and the lower left side. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion by elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is held with the engaging claw. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparently together with the front structural member 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, the boundary of the game area 5a can be reduced from being clearly visible. It is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front structural member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 from the lower side and the rear side, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting portion 1201 is positioned directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and is positioned outside the back unit 3000. It is positioned directly below the ball detection member 3080 . The board holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000, and discharges them from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving part 628 below. can be done.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 390 to 392 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 484) for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and have.

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting opening sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first big winning opening sensor 2402, and a second big winning opening. It is connected to the sensor 2601, the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out-port sensor 2403, the second sub-out-port sensor 3054, the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 385 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and two LEDs for displaying the results of the ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display consisting of one LED, and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B in the gate part 2003 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the first big prize winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "win" or the like. A round indicator consisting of five LEDs displaying

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 388, 391, 392 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 484) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center thereof. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 .

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color effect display device using a white LED as a backlight, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The performance display device 1600 includes two upper fixed pieces 1601 protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixed piece 1602 protruding downward from the lower end surface. This performance display device 1600 has a liquid crystal screen facing forward, and two fixed grooves 3010c that are open to the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, are fitted into the back box. After inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1601 obliquely behind the 3010, the lower fixed piece 1602 side is moved forward to insert the lower fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right at .

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 395(a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and FIG. 395(b) is a back perspective view of the front unit on the game board. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end part of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate part 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , to the second starting port 2004 that allows the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 Different from the first big winning hole 2005 and the first big winning hole 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B. The game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A second big prize winning port 2006 is provided.

A plurality (here, four) of the general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. placed above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 2010 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a lower right corner of the game area 5a at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 . The second big prize winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The first sub-out port 2011 is arranged below the second start-up port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is arranged on the right side of the general prize winning port 2001 on the right side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the lower end of the playing area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the playing area 5a, and a front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit provided on the left side of the side unit 2200 and slightly above the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 is provided on the right side of the starter unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner of the game area 5a in the front view, and has a second starter outlet 2004, a first big prize-winning outlet 2005, and a first sub-outer outlet 2011. a first attacker unit 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. ing.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has a second big prize opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600. A side right center unit 2700 provided above and having one general prize winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012, and a side right center unit 2700 provided above the side right center unit 2700 and having a gate part 2003 and a gate member 2800 which is in contact with.

[5-8a. starting unit]
Starting unit 2100 of table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 396 to 398 and the like. Figure 396 (a) is a front perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, (b) is a back perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, (c) ) is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 397 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 398 is an enlarged front view showing parts of the starter unit and the side unit on the game board. The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starter opening unit 2100 has a first starter opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. A flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction from the middle in the front-rear direction is provided, and the whole is formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in a shape in which a rectangular portion elongated in the left and right direction and a semicircular portion having a lower side of the rectangular portion as a chord are combined when viewed from the front. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101 excluding the upper side, and is formed in a gutter shape with an open top. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered, and the game ball B can be guided backward.

The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 with the flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, and the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110 form a first starting port 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B. forming.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is formed. located just below the center of Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100 and guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102. can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in . The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

Although illustration is omitted, a decorative sticker is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so that it is more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 . As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting hole 2002 rather than the general prize winning hole 2001, and the player can be encouraged to hit the game ball B aiming at the first starting hole 2002.例文帳に追加At the same time, by allowing the first start port 2002 to receive the game ball B, a special lottery result (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game is advantageous to the player is generated. Therefore, it is possible to heighten expectations for the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002, and to suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

In this starting port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B backward is inclined at a looser angle (an angle close to the horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B relatively backward is slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 can be seen for a longer period of time. The reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be surely recognized, and the joy (feeling of superiority) for the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be felt through the general winning hole 2001. can be savored for a longer period of time than when it is received by the

In addition, in the state where the starting port unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. Light emitted from LEDs such as the first lower-side decoration substrate 3322 and the second lower-side decoration substrate 3329 of the lower-side decoration unit 3320 is used for decoration.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the starting port unit 2100 , a rib may be provided that spans the front wall portion 2101 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the first starting port 2002 . This rib is formed in a triangular shape (a part of which may be rounded) when viewed from the side, and the upper surface of the rib is inclined from the right side of the side unit 2200 to the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001. In addition, the distance from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is made longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203. (the rib is positioned below the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the timing at which the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 abuts the rib and is guided backward is It is possible to delay the timing of contacting the slanted portion and being guided backward, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

[5-8b. side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 396 to 398 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general prize winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002 . The two general prize winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general prize winning opening 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

The side unit 2200 includes a flat plate-shaped base plate, and extends forward and backward from the base plate in the shape of a gutter. One induction trough, a first front wall portion closing the front end sides of the two first induction troughs, and a trough-shaped extension extending forward and backward from the base plate on the left side of the two first induction troughs. and a second front wall closing the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is made entirely of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guide gutter 2202 has a U-shaped open portion directed upward, and the second guide gutter 2204 has a U-shaped open portion directed to the upper left. The front end of the first guide trough 2202 extends vertically from the upper part of the front end of the first guide gutter 2202 to the vicinity of the base plate 2201 so that the upper part extends vertically and the lower part moves backward as it goes downward. extends obliquely to Therefore, the first front wall portion 2203 closing the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a position about 3/4 of the height from the bottom.

The second guide gutter 2204 has a vertical front end. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 closing the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201 .

The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 with the base plate 2201 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . Then, the portion of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110, and the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205 can receive the game ball B. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. In addition, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the portions of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 protruding rearward from the base plate 2201 pass through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined so as to become lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B received in the general prize winning opening 2001 to the rear.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064 . The game ball B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051, and then It is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 .

The side unit 2200 differs from the starter opening unit 2100 in that no decorative stickers are attached to the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205 that form the front surface of the general prize winning opening 2001. It is made less conspicuous than the first starting port 2002 . In addition, since the front ends of the two general prize-winning ports 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general prize-winning ports 2001 can be emphasized. , it doesn't look bad.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. Light emitted from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for luminous decoration, and the back-bottom-left-rotation decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good condition. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has an inclined portion on the first front wall portion 2203 which forms the front ends of the two general prize winning openings 2001, the portion of the side unit 2200 makes the bottom left of the back unit 3000 The light emitted forward from the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the production unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 It can make you look better.

In this side unit 2200, since the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 is relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is faster. The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100 . Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B disappears in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being unnecessarily long with respect to the general prize winning opening 2001 while making the player surely recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general prize winning opening 2001.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player's interest can be easily directed to other winning openings such as the next game ball B, the first starting opening 2002, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, and continuously It is possible to keep the player entertained in the game in the game area 5a and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In other words, the portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 that is bent and extends obliquely is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the start opening unit 2100. The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 can be seen for a longer period of time. The reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be surely recognized, and the joy (feeling of superiority) for the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be felt through the general winning hole 2001. can be savored for a longer period of time than when it is received by the

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general prize-winning holes 2001 is inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 can be seen from the side of the first guide gutter 2202. It is possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined part of the . When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front. Since the game ball B is not paid out, the player may feel distrustful of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall, and may lose interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the slanted portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide gutter 2202 are received in the general winning opening 2001 and move backward. Since the guided game ball B can be visually recognized by the player for a short period of time, the player can recognize that the game ball B has been received in the general prize winning opening 2001 . Therefore, even if the game ball B passing in front of the first front wall portion 2203 is mistakenly received in the general winning hole 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

In addition, in this side unit 2200, since a part of the game ball B can pass through the front of the first front wall portion 2203, When B passes, if most of the game ball B (at least half or more of the game ball B) overlaps the general winning opening 2001 in a front view, the game ball B may enter the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. The player can be entertained by making the player feel as if he or she has been accepted. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap the general prize winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side even if the benefits (payout of the game ball B and lottery of the first special lottery result) are not given after that. This allows the player to continue to enjoy the game and suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (left end) general winning opening 2001 out of the three general winning openings 2001 parallel to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by the second front wall portion 2205. It has the same shape as the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001 at the left end, some players can be given the illusion that it has been received in the starting hole. Even if the game ball B is accepted in the general winning hole 2001 which is mistaken as the starting hole, the lottery for the special lottery result is not performed. There is a risk that it will be lost. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 away from the first start opening 2002 in the center in the left-right direction (a position that cannot be accepted by "right hitting"), and the second Since no decorative sticker indicating the starting opening is attached to the front surface of the front wall part 2205, the player can be reconfirmed that it is not the starting opening, and the player feels a sense of suspicion, thereby increasing interest in the game. You can avoid dropping it.

In addition, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning holes 2001 slanted, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is greater than when the front ends are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced because no decorative seal is attached to the front surface of the general prize winning opening 2001.例文帳に追加

Although not shown, the angle of inclination of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general prize-winning port 2001) from the horizontal is such that variable prize-winning ports such as the big prize-winning port and the accessory prize-winning port can be opened and closed. The angle of inclination from the horizontal is larger than that of the winning opening door when it is opened by rotating about the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to guide the game ball B to the winning opening side. angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B paid out by accepting the game balls B into the variable winning opening is larger than the general winning opening 2001, the number of game balls B to the variable winning opening is increased. I want to win a prize. Alternatively, even with a variable winning opening (large winning opening) in which a prescribed number of prizes is determined, the player wishes to win more than the prescribed number of prizes. Therefore, by making the inclination of the variable winning opening door gentler than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slowed down. As described above, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning opening, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 can be seen for a longer time. 2001 can surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the variable winning hole, and can give the general winning hole 2001 the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted in the variable winning hole. It can be savored for longer than when it is received. In addition, since the angle of the prize winning port door in the open state is gentle, it takes a long time for the prize winning port door in the open state to close, so that more than a prescribed number of game balls B win a prize for the player. can make you think to

In addition, in the two right side general winning holes 2001 in the side unit 2200, the portion extending obliquely downward from the lower end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the portion extending vertically downward from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203. is formed longer. As a result, since the winning opening is the general winning opening 2001, although the game ball B is paid out, a lottery such as a normal lottery or a special lottery is not performed. can be made to disappear from the player's field of vision early on.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the side unit 2200, the front surface of a specific general winning opening 2001 out of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 is shown with an inclined front surface. The front surface of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball B that is shot to the shooting position (so-called "left shot") in the normal game state can enter the general winning hole 2001 whose front surface is not inclined. Although the one provided at the position is shown, it is not limited to this. It may be provided at a position where the game ball B launched to the shooting position (so-called "right-handed") can enter, or may be provided at both.

Also, as shown in FIG. 397, the tilt angle of the general prize winning port 2001 having a tilted front surface is greater than the opening angle when the variable winning port (for example, the big winning port) is opened from the closed state. It has a narrow angle. When the number of game balls B to be paid out at the time of winning a prize in the big prize-winning port is set larger than that of the general prize-winning port 2001, the player cannot win more than the prescribed number of prizes even in the big prize-winning port where the prescribed number of prizes is determined. I hope Therefore, the speed at which the game ball B that has entered the big winning opening rolls to the back is slower than the speed at which the game ball B that has won in the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is inclined rolls to the back. there is In other words, when winning the general winning opening 2001, which is smaller than the number of payouts when winning the big winning opening, the game ball B that has won the big winning opening is faster than the speed when it rolls to the back side. ing. In other words, it can be said that the larger the payout amount, the longer it takes to disappear from the player's field of view. As a result, a prize-winning opening with a larger payout can provide a longer joyful time when a prize is won.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Side upper left unit 2300 in table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 395 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward to the right. The side upper left unit 2300 is entirely transparent.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[5-8d. 1st Attacker Unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 399 to 403 and the like. FIG. 399(a) is a front perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit, and FIG. 399(b) is a rear perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit. 400 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 401 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 402 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the first big winning opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 403 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a game ball path in the first attacker unit.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starter unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and is positioned in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. installed. This first attacker unit 2400 has a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 408, etc.). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second start opening 2004 is provided in the upper right side of the center in the left-right direction, and the first big winning opening 2005 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and further than the second start opening 2004. It is provided at a low position, and the first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the first big prize winning port 2005 .

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a first start opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005. It is equipped with a big winning hole sensor 2402, a first sub-out hole sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out hole 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting illegal magnetism. Two each of the first big prize winning opening sensor 2402 and the magnetic sensor 2404 are provided.

The first attacker unit 2400 includes a unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming a flow path for the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. a rear cover 2413 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second starting port 2004; a start solenoid 2415 for starting, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the start solenoid 2415, a first grand prize winning door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first grand prize winning port 2005, A first attacker solenoid 2418 for opening and closing the first major winning opening 2005 by moving the first major winning opening door 2417, and transmission for moving the first major winning opening door 2417 by transmitting forward/backward movement of the first attacker solenoid 2418. a member 2419;

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413 and attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413 and the first large prize winning opening decoration substrate 2420 for decorating the first large winning opening 2005 with light emission. Second starting opening sensor 2401, first big winning opening sensor 2402, first sub-out opening sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, starting opening solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, first big winning opening decoration board 2420 and panel relay board and a first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying connection with 1710 .

The unit base 2411 is made of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening portion 2411a penetrating in the front-rear direction near the upper end on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating in the front-rear direction below the first opening portion 2411a, and A second opening 2411c that is long in the left-right direction and penetrates in the front-rear direction in the upper part on the left side of the center; and a first sub-out port 2011 penetrating back and forth below the guide hole 2411b.

The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed so that the left and right widths are slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inserted. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The second opening 2411c extends to the left and right with a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 is inserted. Each of the second guide holes 2411d protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side thereof is lowered.

The unit base 2411 is arranged horizontally along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two triangular contact portions 2411e projecting forward. These abutting portions 2411e allow the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning port door 2417 to contact with the abutting portion of the front cover 2412 when the first big winning port 2005 is closed. Together, they circulate in a large zigzag fashion in the front-rear direction.

A second starting opening sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411 . Also, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first big winning hole sensor 2402 is attached with the detection hole projecting forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, a first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes are aligned. Magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d.

The front cover 2412 is formed in a box-like shape that is open rearward, and is formed as a transparent member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game balls B on the front surface of the unit base 2411 . As shown in FIG. 403, the front cover 2412 includes a first shelf portion 2412a extending downward from the vicinity of the upper right corner to the left in a front view, and a game ball extending leftward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. It is slightly longer than the diameter of B and extends shorter than the first shelf 2412a so as to be lower leftward from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2412a. The second shelf portion 2412b forming the second starting port 2004, and the second shelf portion 2412b so as to be lower left than the left end of the second shelf portion 2412b and lower than the diameter of the game ball B. A third shelf portion 2412c extending shorter than the portion 2412b, and a space of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B to the left from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c. and a fourth shelf portion 2412d that extends lower leftward from a lower position than the third shelf portion 2412c and forms the first big winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is away from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf portion 2412a, the second shelf portion 2412b, and the third shelf portion 2412c are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf portion 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf portions 2412a and so on. ing.

The front cover 2412 has a first vertical wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and a lower end of the first vertical wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f extending to a height, a third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. A fourth vertical wall portion 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end of the front cover 2412 to the lower side of the front cover 2412, a fifth vertical wall portion 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c, and a right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. and a seventh vertical wall portion 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

The fifth vertical wall portion 2412i extends from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to lower leftward. , further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412 . In addition, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then lower rightward. It extends upward and further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412 . The horizontal interval between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Furthermore, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting lower ends of a first standing wall portion 2412e, a second standing wall portion 2412f, and a third standing wall portion 2412g, and a first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e, after inclining to the left to leave an interval where the game ball B can flow between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l, to the middle of the fourth vertical wall portion 2412h on the left. and a second lateral wall portion 2412m that slopes upward. The first horizontal wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. The second lateral wall portion 2412m is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

In addition, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the direction of approaching each other. It has an extending third lateral wall portion 2412n and a partition portion 2412o extending upward while connecting the opposing ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lower leftward, and the space between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c allows the game ball B to circulate. are set apart. It has an upper shelf 2412p. The right end of the upper shelf 2412p is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. Also, the upper shelf 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lower rightward.

Although not shown, the front cover 2412 has a triangular shape at the front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and alternately in the left-right direction with respect to the two contact portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two rearwardly projecting abutments in shape. When the first big prize winning port 2005 is in the closed state, these abutting portions move the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big prize winning port door 2417 to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411. Together, they circulate in a large zigzag fashion in the front-rear direction.

The rear cover 2413 is shaped like a box that opens forward. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second starting door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first prize winning door 2417, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. In addition, the rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to sandwich and hold the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403.

The second starting door 2414 includes a flat plate-like door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and extending in the left-right direction from the lower end of the arm portion 2414b. and a connecting portion 2414d provided at a portion apart from the rotating shaft 2414c in the lower portion of the arm portion 2414b and connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. .

The door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c of the arm portion 2414b.

The second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 with a door portion 2414a. The second starter door 2414 rotates (turns) about a rotating shaft 2414c by advancing and retreating the plunger of the starter solenoid 2415 in the front-rear direction. The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The starting port solenoid 2415 is mounted so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes faces forward. The plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The first big prize winning opening door 2417 includes a horizontally long flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from the left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c coaxially extending from the lower end in the horizontal direction, and a columnar link pin 2417d protruding rightward from the lower portion of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The pair of arm portions 2417b extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c in the lower portion of the arm portion 2417b. This link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending vertically in a transmission member 2419, which will be described later.

The first big winning opening door 2417 can close the first big winning opening 2005 with a door portion 2417a. As the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, the first big prize opening door 2417 rotates (turns) about the rotary shaft 2417c, thereby moving the door portion 2417a in the front-rear direction. The first big prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is mounted so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes faces forward. The plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The transmission member 2419 includes a base portion 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, an extension portion 2419b extending forward from the base portion 2419a, and penetrating in the left-right direction near the front end of the extension portion 2419b. and a slit 2419c extending vertically. Into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419, the link pin 2417d of the first big winning opening door 2417 is slidably inserted.

A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first prize winning opening decoration board 2420 . A plurality of LEDs of the first big prize winning opening decoration board 2420 are full-color LEDs. The first big prize winning hole decoration board 2420 can light-embellish the first big prize winning hole 2005 by causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

In the normal state of the first attacker unit 2400, the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starter solenoid 2415 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second starter door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. protruding forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the door portion 2414a makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. It's becoming That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 403).

In addition, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is the second opening of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first big prize winning port door 2417 is positioned above the first big prize winning port 2005, and the door portion 2417a makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first big prize winning port 2005. It is in a good state. That is, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed by the first big winning opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 402 and 403).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf portion 2412a, the game ball B rolls leftward due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second start door 2414 After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, it is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning entrance door 2417 according to its momentum, and is tilted to the left due to their inclination. roll in the direction In addition, when the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b contacts the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c may enter the

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a that closes the first big prize opening 2005 is, with respect to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412, They come into contact with each other alternately, and roll leftward while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that rolls leftward on the door portion 2417a rolls on the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and is then released to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 from the left end thereof.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first vertical wall portion 2412e and falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, whereupon the second horizontal wall Due to the inclination of the part 2412m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Also, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, it passes through between the third vertical wall portion 2412g and the fourth vertical wall portion 2412h, and the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. It drops near the left end, rolls rightward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.例文帳に追加

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is not returned into the game area 5a, and reaches the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulated on the right side of the first shelf portion 2412a and the game ball B that passed through the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c It is formed to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger moves against the biasing force of the spring. retreats, and the connecting portion 2414d of the arm portion 2414b of the second starting door 2414 above the rotating shaft 2414c (door portion 2414a side) is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starting door 2414 rotates about the rotating shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. By rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retreat from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper portion of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004. becomes. That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and the second starting port sensor 2401 After being detected, it falls onto the first lateral wall portion 2412l. The portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first horizontal wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the inclination causes the game ball B to roll backward, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from the rear end. The game ball B released rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. Ejected.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retreats together with the transmission member 2419 attached to its tip against the biasing force of the spring. When this transmission member 2419 retreats, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 slides in the slit 2419c and is pressed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c. It will happen.

As a result, the first big prize winning opening door 2417 rotates about the rotating shaft 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. will have to move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first large prize winning port door 2417 rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first large prize winning port 2005 opens upward, and the first large prize winning port 2005 opens. It becomes possible to accept the game ball B (see FIG. 402). That is, the first big prize winning opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is received in the first large prize winning port 2005 when the first large prize winning port 2005 is in an open state, the fifth vertical wall after passing between the fifth vertical wall portion 2412i and the sixth vertical wall portion 2412j. Passing between the portion 2412i and the partition portion 2412o, or between the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and the partition portion 2412o, and after being detected by one of the two first prize winning opening sensors 2402, the second It falls on the three horizontal wall portions 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is inclined downward from the upper surface toward the rear, and the game ball B dropped on the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit base 2411 It is discharged rearward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released rearward from the second guide hole 2411d is transferred to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. .

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first large prize winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first large winning opening 2005, the vicinity of the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first large winning opening 2005 By rotating the door portion 2417a centering on the rotating shaft 2417c extending to the left and right at the same position in the front-rear direction, the first big prize winning port 2005 is opened and closed. The depth in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2400) can be shortened as much as possible. This effect is the same for the second starting port 2004 that is opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414 . Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

In addition, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first big winning hole 2005 is divided into two by the partition part 2412o, and each is detected by the different first big winning hole sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 Since the game ball B is released backward, it is possible to suppress the game ball B from stagnation between the first big prize hole 2005 and the first big prize hole sensor 2402, and to increase the number of game balls in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 404 and 405 and the like. Figure 404(a) is a front perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit. FIG. 405 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame, and the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a part that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped portion that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward until the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5 . Moreover, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110 into which the center accessory 2500 is inserted. This peripheral wall part 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center accessory 2500 in a state assembled to the game board 5 .

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502 ) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 .

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501 . In addition, the support portion 2503 has an edge protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a linear shape, so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 protrudes from the peripheral wall portion 2501 in a range from the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm). It is made to be inconspicuous from.

More specifically, a plurality of support portions 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in a support portion 2503 provided at a portion where the peripheral wall portion 2501 protrudes most to the left above a warp entrance 2511, which will be described later, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at that portion is midway between the vertically extending portions. has a shape that bulges out to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both upper and lower sides of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges leftward. It has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is formed linearly so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 413). The support part 2503 of this part is the back front left decorative body of the back unit 3000 in which the part extending linearly up and down at the tip side of the support part 2503 is provided in the back in the state assembled to the game board 5. 3030 along part of the right side. Therefore, since the tip side of the support part 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decoration body 3030, the support part 2503 is difficult to distinguish, and the back front left decoration provided at the rear is relatively small. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made conspicuous.

Further, among the plurality of support portions 2503, the support portion 2503 below the warp entrance 2511 extends rightward in a rectangular shape while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends obliquely. The support part 2503 of this part is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in the assembled state on the game board 5 (see FIG. 385, etc.). ). The laterally extending tip side of the support portion 2503 extends parallel to the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. , and the support portion 2503 is difficult to distinguish (see FIG. 389).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance that is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, at the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in front view and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, a warp exit 2512 which is open in the frame on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100 so that the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 can be released, and the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512. A stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the horizontal direction, and a stage cover 2515 provided to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 are provided (see FIG. 405, etc.). The stage cover 2515 bounces back the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 to the stage 2513 side, thereby preventing the game ball B from entering from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 into the frame.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with the central side in the left-right direction depressed, and the position corresponding to the position directly above the first start port 2002 of the starter unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is positioned on the panel board of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that when it is attached to 1110, the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portions 2513b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the elevated portion (central release portion 2513a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starter opening 2002 of the starter unit 2100. ing. Thereby, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 has a guide passage group 2520 which is provided in the upper right corner and consists of two passages through which the game balls B can flow. When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) is aligned with the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the impact of the front component 1000). It is almost in contact with the right rail 1005 near the part 1006 , and is formed so that the game ball B hit to the right side above the center accessory 2500 always passes through the guide path group 2520 .

The guide passage group 2520 has a length in the vertical direction that is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in the shape of a groove that is open forward, and the game balls B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good condition.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and includes a first guide passage 2521 away from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and a guide passage 2521 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 along the peripheral wall portion 2501. and a second guide passage 2522 extending along the The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated left and right. In addition, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are laterally adjacent to each other and open obliquely downward and to the right along the arc of the upper portion of the right rail 1005 .

The guide path group 2520 is positioned above the gate section 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 . In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the impinging portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that have hit the impinging portion 1006 are first guided. It is configured to enter passageway 2521 .

Further, the center accessory 2500 protrudes rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and has a lower right guide passage 2530 that guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward across the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit opening obliquely downward to the left with a width of one game ball B.

This lower right guide passage 2530 has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 in the state assembled to the game board 5 and is positioned between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600 . Therefore, between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged.

According to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is located at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it becomes the outer edge, the inner side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center role 2500) can be relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the back unit can be displayed through the frame of the center role 2500. The decoration of 3000 can be made more visible.

In addition, since the supporting portion 2503 projecting inward is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes short from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided on the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided behind the back. It is possible to reduce hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000, the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the like. In addition, the center accessory 2500 such as the support part 2503 is transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are positioned as close as possible to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500. is arranged, it is possible to suppress blurring of the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 on the rear side due to the lens effect of the transparent center accessory 2500. - 特許庁For this reason, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the decorative body or the like provided in the rear can be improved, and the decorative effect thereof can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 and the like are made transparent and the support part 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body capable of emitting light decoration and the effect display device 1600, the light emitted from them can be used for the light emitting decoration, and the appearance is improved. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 413 and the like, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000, the effect display device 1600, and the like are provided behind the support portion 2503 (the cross-hatched portion in FIG. 413). The LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 in the back front left effect unit 3700, the light emitted forward from the effect display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted, or diffused to create a gorgeous light emitting decoration. can be shown to the player. It should be noted that the support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like, and the step or the like can diffuse the light from the rear, thereby making the display more gorgeous.

In addition, by providing the support portion 2503, there is provided a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the near portion, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 as possible. As a result, the game area of the plurality of obstacle nails N can be made as wide as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to enjoy the original game.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support part 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, compared to the case where the support part 2503 is provided over the entire circumference, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further expanded. It can be widened, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear can be made more visible. In other words, if the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 is to be made to look larger, the support portion 2503 is provided along a portion of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind in a front view.

The edge of the support portion 2503 may have the same shape as the front cover 3711 (decorative shape) of the back front left effect unit 3700 provided at the rear. As a result, it is possible to prevent the support portion 2503 from conspicuously lowering the decorativeness of the rear decorative body due to the support portion 2503 being different from the rear decoration. can increase

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decorative body 3030 of the back unit 3000 and the back front left effect unit 3700, which are provided at the rear, so that these decorations are displayed by the lens effect. Although the one that suppresses blurring is shown, it is not limited to this, and the support part 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 away from the rear unit 3000 at the rear. The back front left decorative body 3030 of the back unit 3000 and the back front left effect unit 3700 may be intentionally made to appear blurred.

In the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an opening 1112 penetrating therethrough, and the rear side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, this is not the case. However, the peripheral wall portion 2501 may have no rear portion to be inserted into the opening 1112. In this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112. . Also, when the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112, the support part 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center role 2500 is not provided with the flange part 2502. You can do it.

[5-8f. Second Attacker Unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 406 and 407 and the like. Figure 406(a) is a front perspective view of the second attacker unit, the side middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and (b) is the second attacker unit, the side middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 407 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a game ball path in the second attacker unit and the side middle unit.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front surface of panel plate 1110 in panel 1100 . The second attacker unit 2600 has a second big prize winning opening 2006 openable to the left (see FIG. 407).

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second large winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second large winning hole 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal timing acting near the second large winning hole 2006. 2602 and . In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second large winning opening door 2611 for opening and closing the second large winning opening 2006 and the second large winning opening door 2611 to open the second large winning opening 2006. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) that transmits the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second large winning opening door 2611 (not shown), and the second large winning opening 2006 and a guide passage 2613 for guiding the received game ball B and releasing it backward.

The second attacker unit 2600 has a second large winning opening 2006 that opens leftward from the center in the left-right direction toward the right, and a second large winning opening 2006 that closes the second large winning opening 2006 from the left. A winning entrance door 2611 is provided.

The second big winning entrance door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that extends linearly upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and a left side that bulges out from the upper end of the right side. and an arcuate left side in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second prize winning door 2611 has a cylindrical rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction around the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape, and a link projecting in a columnar shape rearward from a position distant from the rotating shaft. A pin (not shown) is provided. The second big winning opening door 2611 is rotatably attached to the lower rotating shaft so that the upper end moves to the left.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger protrudes downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base portion attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second big winning opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit to be inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is positioned so that its right side is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000 in the state assembled on the game board 5, and the peripheral wall portion of the second prize winning opening 2006 and the center accessory 2500. A space in which the game ball B can flow is formed between the right side of 2501 . In addition, when the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled on the game board 5 , the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 .

In the normal state, the second attacker unit 2600 has the second attacker solenoid 2612 in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second large prize winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the second large winning prize opening 2006 is closed by the second large winning prize opening door 2611 . In other words, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted into the second big winning hole 2006.例文帳に追加

In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the second When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (turned on), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second big winning door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member pulls up. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the second big winning opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the rotating shaft 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the second large prize winning opening door 2611 moves leftward, the second large winning prize opening 2006 opens leftward, and the right end side of the second large winning prize opening door 2611 becomes lower. It will be in a tilted state. That is, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the falling game ball B abuts on the second big winning opening door 2611 , it rolls rightward due to its inclination and is received by the second big winning opening 2006 . The game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, then guided by the guide passage 2613 and discharged backward. The game ball B released rearward from the guide passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8g. Side right center unit]
Next, the side right center unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The side right center unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a and attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . This side right middle unit 2700 is provided with one general prize winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012 .

The side right center unit 2700 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a width of one game ball B in the left and right direction, and is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and the left and right direction is the game ball. A second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width of two spheres B.

In addition, the side right center unit 2700 includes a first guide passage 2701 that guides backward the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a second guide passage 2701 that guides backward the game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012. two guide passages 2702; The first guide path 2701 extends rearward from the general prize winning opening 2001, bends rightward, and further bends rearward to form a crank shape. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 more than the first guide passage 2701 and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

In this side right center unit 2700, when assembled on the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. there is

In addition, the side right center unit 2700, in a state assembled on the game board 5, has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000, and a lower end substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600, Between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, a space is formed in which the game ball B can flow. In this side right center unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the second big winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. Almost the entire space between them is open upward (see FIG. 408, etc.).

The side right center unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is detected by the general prize winning port sensor 3051 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the side right center unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and then the back unit provided behind. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 at 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 395, 406 and the like. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is The gate member 2800 includes a gate portion 2003 for performing a lottery for the ordinary lottery result that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 when the game ball B passes through, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate portion 2003. 2801 and . A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate portion 2003 .

The gate member 2800 has a guiding piece 2802 projecting obliquely downward to the left from near the right end of the bottom surface. The guiding piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. This guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes through the vicinity of the left end of the general prize winning opening 2001 in the side right center unit 2700 in the state assembled to the game board 5 .

The gate member 2800 is positioned substantially in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in a state where it is assembled to the game board 5. A gap is formed through which the sphere B can flow. This gate member 2800 is positioned slightly leftward from directly below the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and is positioned slightly to the right of right above the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 393, 408 and the like. FIG. 408 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part of the game area in FIG. 393 is enlarged. In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at both the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG. In addition, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center role 2500 mainly enter the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W for the game ball B struck on the left side of the center role 2500.例文帳に追加, and is adjusted to enter a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. As a result, the game ball B can enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 with a certain probability by hitting it so as to flow down the left side of the center role 2500 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are more difficult than the game ball B which has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. It is adjusted so that the game ball B that has passed through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. In addition, the plurality of obstructing nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are mainly adjusted so that the game balls B flow through the left side of the gate member 2800 rather than the right side thereof. ing.

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 .

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and hit upward along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When the game ball B is hit so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. N is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W has a lower probability than these. induced to enter the

The game ball B guided to the left part of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf part 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200 . Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the three general prize winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then is guided to the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. 3064 , and after being detected by the general prize winning slot sensor 3051 , it is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3051, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided. A game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002 . Then, the game ball B that has not been received by the general winning hole 2001 is discharged from the out hole 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the horizontal direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and accepted into the first starting port 2002 . In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize gate 2001 of

A game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512 . The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the center release portion 2513a is positioned directly above the first start port 2002, so that the first It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game ball B is released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is detected by the first starting port sensor. After being detected by 3052 , it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3052, a lottery for the first special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received by the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B that circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003, or is received by the second starting port 2004, the first big prize winning port 2005, and the second big prize winning port 2006. There is no possibility of being taken.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center role 2500 is accepted in the second start opening 2004 is higher than that of the game ball B hit to the left side of the center role 2500. The probability of being accepted at the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are not open, it is possible to prompt the operation of hitting the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 ("left hitting").

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is moved with such a force that the game ball B enters above the portion of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that is lowered toward the right from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction. When hit, the game ball B circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 .

More specifically, the game ball B is hit with a strength that makes contact with the impinging portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B in contact with the impingement portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 . The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is released downward at a position slightly rightward from the position just above the gate portion 2003 .

A game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is caught by a plurality of obstructing nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 to the left side of the gate member 2800, the gate portion. 2003 and the right side of the gate member 2800 are guided so that the probability decreases in order, and flow down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 emitted downward from The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide path 2522 is guided such that the probability of the gate part 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 is substantially the same, and the probability of the right side of the gate member 2800 is lower than them. and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

A game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012 . The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, the second sub-out port sensor After being detected by 3054, it is discharged outside the game area 5a. Also, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is released to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801 . When the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery for a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

A game ball B passing through the left side of the gate part 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of hitting the side right center unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right center unit 2700. It flows down the left side of , and is sometimes accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 or rarely accepted in the second sub-out opening 2012 . The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the eighth delivery opening 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, After being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051 , it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . At this time, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

A game ball B flowing down the left side of the right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and enters the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. flows down the left side of

At this time, when the game ball B is accepted by the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted by the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2006 is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2601, and after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, the game ball B in the back unit 3000 The substrate is transferred to the seventh transfer port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game balls B are detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

The game ball B, which was not accepted in the second big prize-winning hole 2006 and flowed down to the left of the second big prize-winning hole 2006, enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exits the lower right guide passage 2530. to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 downward (diagonally lower left) flows down onto the first shelf 2412 a of the first attacker unit 2400 . In addition, since a plurality of obstructing nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B can directly enter the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls leftward due to its inclination, and the upper surface of the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 and the second shelf portion 2412b. After rolling, it is released leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning entrance door 2417 according to its momentum, and the inclination of them After rolling leftward from the door portion 2417a to the fourth shelf portion 2412d, it is discharged to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400 from the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it may reach the upper shelf 2412p without flowing down to the first shelf 2412a by coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. It may run down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf portion 2412p rolls leftward due to its inclination, is released leftward from the left end of the upper shelf portion 2412p, and hits the obstacle nail N planted leftward. After contacting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first grand prize opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d roll leftward and the first It is released outside the attacker unit 2400 . Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing when the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing when the first big winning opening 2005 opens, It may be accepted in the winning slot 2005 .

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it bounces rightward due to contact with the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf 2412p, and the first shelf 2412a. By flowing upward, the first shelf 2412a may roll rightward against its inclination and be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf 2412a. The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a passes between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. Then, it rolls leftward due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m and is received by the first sub-out port 2011. As shown in FIG. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and then passes through the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. , and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the passing of the game ball B through the gate part 2003 results in the lottery of "ordinary hit" as the ordinary lottery result, the second start. Since the opening door 2414 is moved and the second start opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling leftward on the first shelf 2412a is accepted by the second start opening 2004. there is a possibility. When the game ball B is received by the second starting hole 2004, it is detected by the second starting hole sensor 2401 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting hole sensor 2401, a lottery for the result of the second special lottery is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

Also, when the game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b, the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery As a result, when a "big hit" is drawn, the first big prize opening door 2417 moves and the first big prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the ball is released to the left from the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B will be accepted in the first big winning hole 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005 is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game balls B are detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402, the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b, by contacting the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p, it flows down diagonally to the right and the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412b. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and reaches near the left end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and is received in the first sub-out port 2011.例文帳に追加

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received by any of the second start opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If not, it is discharged downward behind the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a from the out port 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open and close the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006, the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 is made to receive the game ball B, and "small win". It is necessary to draw a lottery for the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to allow the game ball B to pass through the gate part 2003 to draw a "normal win" as a result of the normal lottery. Therefore, the chances of receiving the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 are lower than the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the player hits the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received by the first starting port 2002 and the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first start port 2002 can be enjoyed. It can raise expectations for the acceptance of

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first start opening 2002, and a "small hit" or "big hit" is drawn as a result of the first special lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006. is opened and closed, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed" so that the game ball B can be accepted in the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006, and the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 to increase the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passage for circulation facilitates passage through the gate section 2003. , the second sub-out port 2012 can be easily received, so that the game ball B can be adjusted in striking strength so that the game ball B circulates in a desired guide passage, and the game ball B can be adjusted to the player. B's driving operation can be enjoyed.

In addition, by performing "right hitting", by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the second starting port 2004 is in an open state "normal hit" may be drawn, and the open state To increase the expectation for a game and to suppress the decrease in interest because a ``small win'' or a ``big win'' may be drawn by receiving a game ball B in a second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加can be done.

In addition, in the time-saving state, in order to enter the game ball B into the second starting hole 2004, an instruction to recommend so-called right-handed hitting (hereinafter also referred to as right-handed hitting instruction) is displayed. Also, during the big win, a right-handed instruction is displayed on the performance display device 1600 in order to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 2005 and the first big winning hole 2006 . The instruction to hit to the right instructs to keep twisting the handlebar 182 fully open to the right.

In addition, during a big hit game, during special pattern fluctuations in each state, etc., it is possible to execute an effect using the central pressing operation portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, the effect operation ring 330, and the like. In this case, for example, an effect operation instruction for instructing to operate these operation units is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . When the operation unit is operated in accordance with the instruction, for example, it suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit in the special symbol variation being executed, informs the result of the special lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, or indicates that the big hit is being executed. It suggests or informs whether it is a normal jackpot or a variable probability jackpot, and changes the presentation mode and BGM of the time-saving state during the jackpot and after the jackpot ends.

Note that the above-described ball-pulling instruction is displayed with priority over other effects images (that is, on the front side), so that other effects are difficult to see. When the ball removal lever is operated in accordance with the ball removal instruction, the full state of the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 is soon released, and the ball removal instruction is erased, thereby making it easier to see other presentations. In addition, the above-mentioned right-handed instruction can be displayed at a predetermined time such as the start of the time-saving state or the start of a big hit game, and the production operation instruction can also be displayed at a predetermined time within a predetermined production scenario. Displayable. On the other hand, the ball removal instruction is displayed when detection by the full tank detection sensor 154 is executed, but is not displayed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the right-handed instruction is not only at the start of the time saving state or the start of the jackpot game, but also, for example, at the time of the time saving state and the jackpot. is also displayed.

In addition, there may be situations where the ball withdrawal instruction, production operation instruction, and right-handed instruction are displayed at the same time, but in that case, considering the importance of each instruction, the sound, lamp, and display relationship It can be determined as appropriate.

In the time saving state, although it is possible to display all of the right hitting instruction, the production operation instruction, and the ball withdrawal instruction together, if the left hitting instruction is not followed in the time saving state, the first start A game ball B enters the opening 2002 . The average time of the first special symbol variation executed by the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002 is the average time of the second special symbol variation executed by the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004. longer than average time. In other words, in such a situation, if the right hand instruction is not followed, the time required for one game is lengthened, and the number of special lotteries per unit time is reduced.

In addition, when the time saving state ends and returns to the normal state, in order to enter the game ball B into the first start port 2002, an instruction to recommend so-called left hitting (hereinafter also referred to as left hitting instruction) is displayed. In addition, not only when returning to the normal state, in the normal state, a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls B enter the second start port 2004, or a predetermined number (for example, one) of the gate portion 2003 When the game ball B passes (that is, when the second special lottery or ordinary lottery is performed (these lotteries include prior determination)), a left-handed instruction appears.

Therefore, even in the normal state, there may be a situation in which the ball withdrawal instruction, the effect operation instruction, and the left-handed instruction are displayed at the same time. , lamps, and display relationships may be appropriately determined.

In addition, even when the special symbol variation is not performed, there may be a state in which the right-handed instruction and the ball-out instruction are displayed. Furthermore, it is also possible to carry out a special symbol variation when a performance operation instruction is newly displayed while the right-handed instruction and the ball-pulling instruction are being displayed.

Also, for example, the state in which the right-handed instruction, the ball-out instruction, and the performance operation instruction are displayed may change to the state in which only one type of instruction is displayed. For example, when the operation indicated by the performance operation instruction is performed in a state where the right hitting instruction, the ball drawing instruction, and the performance operation instruction are displayed during the time saving state, it is possible to erase only the performance operation instruction. In a state where only one of the instructions has been displayed, if a predetermined period of time elapses without the game ball B entering various starting ports, a demo screen is displayed, or a standby state effect explaining the game contents is performed. be broken.

As soon as the demo screen is displayed or after a predetermined period of time has passed, a certain operation unit (which may be the same as the operation unit corresponding to the production operation instruction) is used to shift to the menu screen for adjusting the volume and the amount of light. ) is displayed.

Further, as for the effect operation instruction, it may be possible to instruct an operation method selected from a plurality of types of operations. For example, it is an instruction to simply press down the operation unit corresponding to the performance operation instruction once, an instruction to repeatedly press the operation unit, or the like. During the execution of the special symbol variation, from the state where the right hitting instruction, the ball pulling instruction, and the production operation instruction (one-time pressing instruction) are displayed, the right hitting instruction, the ball pulling instruction, and the production operation instruction (continuous hitting instruction) can be changed to a state in which it is displayed.

In addition, for example, during the special pattern fluctuation in the time saving state, it is possible to simultaneously display the right hitting instruction, the ball pulling instruction, and the performance operation instruction, and when the time saving state ends and returns to the normal state, the right hitting instruction is finished and the left-handed instruction is displayed, it is possible to change to a state in which the left-handed instruction, the ball withdrawal instruction, and the performance operation instruction are displayed at the same time.

Further, for example, in a state in which two types of instructions out of the right-handed instruction, the ball-pulling instruction, and the performance operation instruction are displayed, the remaining one type of instruction can be displayed. For example, in a time-saving state or a jackpot state, when a right-handed instruction and an effect operation instruction are displayed, if detection by the full-tank detection sensor 154 is performed, an instruction to remove the ball is displayed.

Also, in the special symbol variation of the variation pattern with the shortest variation time, the effect operation instruction may not appear. That is, in the special symbol variation, the right-handed instruction, the ball withdrawal instruction, and the performance operation instruction may not all be displayed at the same time.

For example, when the operation unit is operated in accordance with the performance operation instructions, a special lottery result is reported to the judge performance. is desirable. In other words, in such a case, it is possible to prevent the special lottery result from being directly displayed when the instruction to hit to the right, the instruction to remove the ball, and the instruction to perform the performance operation are displayed at the same time.

Further, during the jackpot game, an instruction to hit to the right is displayed, and if detection by the full-tank detection sensor 154 is performed, an instruction to remove the ball is further displayed. Also, for example, although the jackpot with time saving is won, the same production as the jackpot game without time saving is performed, and in a predetermined round of the jackpot game, a production operation instruction appears, and when the operation is performed according to the instruction, it is being executed. It may be possible to execute a promotion performance for informing that the big hit game is a big hit game with variable probability. Also, for example, in a predetermined round of the time-saving big hit game, an effect operation instruction appears, and a character that appears in the effect during the time-saving state in which the operation is performed according to the instruction may be selected. That is, in a predetermined round during the jackpot game, it is possible to simultaneously display the instruction to hit to the right, the instruction to pull out the ball, and the instruction to perform the performance operation.

In this way, when the special symbol variation in the normal state and the time saving state is executed and not executed, and during the jackpot game, at least two of the ball withdrawal instruction, the performance operation instruction, and the right hitting instruction are displayed at the same time. However, in such a case, the importance of each instruction should be considered, and the relationship between sounds, lamps, and displays should be appropriately determined. In addition, at least two display orders (the display start order and display end order) and the length of the display time may be affected by the player's operation, and those not affected by the player's operation It can be determined as appropriate.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 409 to 412 and the like. 409 is a front perspective view of the back unit of the game board, and FIG. 410 is a rear perspective view of the back unit of the game board. FIG. 411 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 412 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the performance display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the back wall and having a box shape with an open front. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 is provided.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a flat plate-like back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and a flat plate-like back front right decorative body 3040 provided below the front end inside the back box 3010. a back guidance unit 3050, a back rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the back box 3010, and a rear side guidance unit 3050 at the bottom in the back box 3010, and are provided separately to the left and right behind the back guidance unit 3050. a back bottom left effect unit 3200 and a back bottom right effect unit 3250, and a back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part inside the back box 3010, and a back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. a back rear left effect unit 3500, a back rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 in the back box 3010, and a back front left decoration 3030 and back rear left A back front left effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500 and a back front right effect unit provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800 and .

[5-9a. back box]
The back case 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 409 to 412 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 . In the back box 3010, the back front left decoration body 3030, the back front right decoration body 3040 and various production units are installed, and the production display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are installed on the rear side. The back box 3010 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a with a gap therebetween. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b into which upper fixing pieces 1601 of the effect display device 1600 are inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A cutout portion 3010d is provided near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the performance display device 1600 to be fitted within the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear side as viewed from the rear so as to be slidable to the left and right.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting decorations, production units, etc., at appropriate positions.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a strip-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The reinforcing plate 3011 reinforces the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Next, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 409 to 413 and the like. FIG. 413 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing an enlarged upper left corner of the game board with the door frame made transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 so as to be separated from each other to the left and right.

The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031 . The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 , and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 . Although illustration is omitted, the decoration sticker 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front left decorative body 3030 is formed opaque, and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041 . The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to near the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 . Although illustration is omitted, the decoration sticker 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaque and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extend in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outside, is located outside the game area 5a in a front view when assembled on the game board 5. (See Figures 389 and 413, etc.). Furthermore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are formed in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outside, is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. extended to

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 413, in a front view, the back front left decorative body 3030 is positioned halfway from the bottom of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 provided at the upper left corner of the back rear left effect unit 3500. It is extended to the position of In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward beyond the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 .

As a result, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the lower half of the back left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered with the back front left decorative body 3030 (the shaded portion in FIG. The elevation drive motor 3554 can be made difficult to see. In addition, in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (the hatched portion in FIG. 413). Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3 can make the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 invisible from the player side. Therefore, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

In addition, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554, and in the state assembled to the game board 5, the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 is extended. A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but by assembling it to the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered with the door frame 3 and hidden. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, and it is possible to suppress the back front left decorative body 3030 from being unnecessarily large, thereby pachinko. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outside the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front structural member 1000 when viewed from the front, the function display unit The back front left decorative body 3030 can be used instead of 1400 to hide the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 (functional component) and the like provided at the rear.

On the other hand, the back front right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 in the back rear right effect unit 3600 in a front view, and has a transparent front. Even through the component 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved by making the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible from the player side. , and effects similar to those of the back front left decorative body 3030 can be exhibited.

As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least part of the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided on the rear side are covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts hard to see from the player side, and to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

In addition, as described above, since the front of the functional parts provided in the rear can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Also, the functional parts can be made invisible from the player side. That is, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 make it possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, thereby giving the player a sense of openness and the actual game area 5a. Although the size does not change, it is possible to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the parts of the decorative seal 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040, which are decorated with a predetermined decoration, are located outside the game area 5a. Since it can be visually recognized from the front through them, the outside of the game area 5a can also be decorated with them, and the game area 5a can be made to appear larger than it actually is, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It can be a board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, so that the performance display device 1600, the front unit 2000 and the back unit can be made transparent. 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (toward the player) by the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be displayed, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

In addition, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided in the rear can be accessed from the player side by the portions of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 that are extended outside the game area 5a. Since it can be made invisible, all the functional parts may be provided outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced in order to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, part of the functional parts are placed outside the game area 5a with a balance that allows the game area 5a to be large with respect to the size of the game board 5. It is desirable to have

Moreover, it is desirable that the decorations of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 are decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. As a result, the design in the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can make the 5a appear larger than it actually is and can strongly attract the player's interest.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 414 and the like. FIG. 414(a) is a front perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit, and FIG. 414(b) is a back perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit. The back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end inside the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape such that both ends extending to the left and right are bent upward. The back guiding unit 3050 is formed substantially entirely transparent.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening sensor 3052 that detects the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, An out-port sensor 3053 for detecting the game ball B received in the out-port 2010, a second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, and a warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. and a magnetic sensor 3055 that is provided at the rear of the and detects illegal magnetism.

In addition, the back guidance unit 3050 is received in the first delivery port 3061 to which the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is delivered, and the general winning port 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 through which the game ball B is delivered, a third delivery port 3063 through which the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 on the middle side of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and a general delivery port on the left side of the side unit 2200. A fourth delivery port 3064 where the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 is delivered, and a fourth delivery port 3064 where the game ball B accepted by the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The fifth delivery port 3065, the sixth delivery port 3066 where the game ball B received in the first large winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the second large winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 A seventh delivery port 3067 where the received game ball B is delivered, an eighth delivery port 3068 where the game ball B accepted by the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is delivered, and the side right middle unit 2700 A ninth delivery port 3069 through which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Further, the back guidance unit 3050, although not shown in detail, guides the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then discharges it downward. The game ball B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game ball B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are merged and delivered to the second discharge path and the fourth delivery port 3064. A third discharge path that guides the game ball B downward and discharges it obliquely to the lower right, and a position below the sixth delivery port 3066 for the game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 a fourth discharge path for guiding the liquid downward to the sixth delivery port 3066, guiding the liquid to the left to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066, and discharging the liquid obliquely downward to the left. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge path.

The game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery port 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. be done. A game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the second delivery opening 3062, and a game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side and delivered to the third delivery opening 3063 are played. The ball B joins with the second discharge path and is discharged downward after being detected by the general prize winning opening 2001 . The game ball B received by the general prize winning port 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general prize winning port 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. .

The game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and transferred to the fifth delivery port 3065, and the first big winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B accepted by the second big winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are the fourth It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The game ball B received by the general winning port 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is upstream of the part communicating with the ninth delivery port 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, then merges with the fourth discharge path, It is discharged through four discharge channels.

This back guidance unit 3050 is provided with an out ball detecting member 3080 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 2010. - 特許庁The out-ball detection member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006. To detect the game balls B received in the out port 2010 opened at the lower end of the game area 5a among the game balls B that did not receive the privilege (game balls B to which no privilege was given, also referred to as "out balls"). belongs to.

The out ball detection member 3080 is inserted from the rear into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and includes a cylindrical portion 3081 extending in the front-rear direction so that the game ball B can flow, and the cylindrical portion 3081. A partition portion 3082 that divides the interior into left and right, a flange portion 3083 projecting in the left-right direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081, and a game ball B that is continuous with the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081 and is positioned downward. and a rear cover 3084 that can be guided into and ejected (see FIG. 392). Out ball detection member 3080 is provided with out opening sensor 3053 between cylindrical portion 3081 and rear cover 3084 .

The cylindrical portion 3081 has substantially the same size as the out port 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction sufficient for two game balls B to line up (a width not to line up three game balls B), and a lower inner surface It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear side. The partition part 3082 is provided in the vicinity of the rear end of the cylinder part 3081, and is partitioned into a size through which one game ball B can pass on both left and right sides. The front end of the partition 3082 is curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and protrudes forward.

In the out-ball detection member 3080, two out-hole sensors 3053 are provided side by side on the left and right. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B that has flowed through the left side of the partition 3082 in the tubular section 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition 3082 in the tubular section 3081. It detects a game ball B that has been distributed. The out port sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two outlet sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3081 . As a result, the circulation direction of the game ball B circulating in the cylindrical portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the outlet sensor 3053, so the game ball B can be smoothly detected by the outlet sensor 3053. can be discharged quickly to prevent it from staying in front of the outlet sensor 3053 .

This out-ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, and the cylindrical portion 3081 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 392).

When the out-ball detection member 3080 is assembled on the game board 5, the front end upper portion of the cylindrical portion 3081 protrudes forward beyond the rear end of the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 392). That is, the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3081 . Also, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 .

This out ball detection member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and then is guided backward by the out guide portion 1003 and is received in the out port 2010. The game ball B passed through the cylindrical portion 3081 is detected by one of the two outlet sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 to be discharged. The out ball detecting member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharged ball receiving portion 628 of the body frame 4 without contacting the board holder 1200 .

According to the out-ball detection member 3080 of this embodiment, the partition 3082 separates the two out-hole sensors 3053 provided on the left and right, so that the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is detected. The game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the right side of the out sensor 3053 side while being guided to the left side of the out side sensor 3053 . Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "hit left" or "hit right" according to the number of game balls B detected per hour by each of the left and right outlet sensors 3053. Based on the determination, it is possible to encourage the player to perform the most suitable driving operation for the game situation, thereby allowing the user to enjoy the intended game.

In addition, in the out-ball detection member 3080, the forward protrusion of the partition part 3082 is shortened to make it easier for the game ball B to get over, so when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per time, the partition is detected. The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side of the part 3082 where the circulation amount of the game ball B is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out port 2010 without delay.

In addition, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second big winning hole 2006, the first sub-out hole 2011, and the second sub-out hole 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 is reversed by the out ball detecting member 3080 and is detected by the out hole sensor 3053. It is possible to prevent being detected, and it is possible to accurately detect only the "out ball" received in the out port 2010. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the out-ball detection member 3080 is provided in the back unit 3000 , but the configuration is not limited to this, and the out-ball detection member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100 . At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1123 can be supported. In addition, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.例文帳に追加

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is driven into the game area 5a, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been accepted by any of them can be detected by the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054, for example, a specific winning If the game ball B is continuously detected in the mouth, but the "out ball" is not detected, it means that a particular winning hole is being cheated. It is possible to report that a fraudulent act is being carried out.

In addition, since the number of "out balls" can be counted by detecting "out balls", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening The number of "winning balls" and the number of "out balls" counted by detecting the game ball B accepted in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large From the number of "safe balls" paid out by receiving game balls B into the winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006, the "ball output rate" of the pachinko machine 1 can be known. Although not shown, a display section for displaying the "ball output rate" is provided on the rear side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG.

In addition, in the game board 5, all game balls B ("whole ball") struck into the game area 5a are detected, or all game balls B ("whole ball") ejected from the game area 5a are detected. ), the out-out sensor 3053, the first sub-out sensor 2403, and the second sub-out sensor 3054 detect only the "out ball". ” and “global ball”, it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5 .

[5-9d. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 415 to 419 and the like. FIG. 415(a) is a front perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 415(b) is a back perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 416 is an exploded perspective view of the back-after effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 417 is an exploded perspective view of the after-behind effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 418 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable structure of the back effect unit from the front. FIG. 419 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back effect unit.

The back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost part (the front surface of the back wall) in the back box 3010 . The back-side effect unit 3100 has a U-shape opening downward when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010 . The back-side effect unit 3100 includes a back-side movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction, and a back-side movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-side movable decoration body 3110 in the vertical direction.

The back rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a translucent decorative body 3111 that extends in the left-right direction and has a relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a decorative body 3111 that is provided behind the decorative body 3111 and has a plurality of decorations on the front surface. It has a rear decoration substrate 3114 on which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the rear decoration substrate 3114. - 特許庁A plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114 are full-color LEDs. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the back decoration substrate 3114 can light-embellish the decoration 3111 (back movable decoration 3110).

In addition, the back rear movable decoration 3110 includes a left slider 3116 vertically extending on the left side of the decoration 3111 and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decoration 3111 . The left slider 3116 has a movable protrusion 3116a protruding leftward from near its lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding leftward from near its upper end in a triangular shape, and a detection piece 3116c provided at its upper end. have.

The back rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U-shape that is open downward when viewed from the front. A slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the back and rear movable decoration 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a slide shaft 3122 that extends vertically in parallel with the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122, and has a spiral on the outer periphery. and a spiral shaft 3123 in which a shaped groove is formed.

In addition, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and the motor gear 3125 as a rotating shaft. A rear rear drive motor 3126 attached, a motor base 3127 mounting the rear rear drive motor 3126 to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and an upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 rotatably mounted to the unit base 3121. A bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123 are provided.

In addition, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a slide guide 3130 that is screwed to a spiral shaft 3123 and that can contact the movable projection 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 from below, and a slide guide 3130 on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and is capable of moving up and down, the lower end of which can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that biases the transmission slider 3131 upward, and the transmission slider 3131 a link member 3133 that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction due to the elevation of the link member 3133; It has

Furthermore, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, a rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, A front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and a right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front. Attached front right cover 3138 and back rear drive motor 3126 attached to the front lower part of the front left cover 3137, back rear upper detection sensor 3135, back rear lower detection sensor 3136 and connection of effect drive board 1720 and the back rear left relay board 3139 that relays the connection between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138 and the back rear decoration board 3114 of the back rear movable decoration 3110 and the effect drive board 1720. and a rear right relay board 3140 that is relayed.

The unit base 3121 has an impact absorbing member 3121a that abuts against the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 that has moved downward to absorb the impact. The upper end and lower end of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 .

The slide guide 3130 has a detection piece 3130 a that protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end and is detected by a back rear bottom detection sensor 3136 . The slide guide 3130 is vertically slidable between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and is prevented from rotating about the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by coming into contact with them. The upper end surface of the slide guide 3130 can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 . The lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 .

The transmission slider 3131 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be vertically movable. A front left cover 3137 allows the transmission slider 3131 to move vertically only within a predetermined range. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a protruding rightward on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding rightward on the upper end side, and a columnar shape protruding rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. and a protruding pin 3131c. In the transmission slider 3131, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. Moreover, the transmission slider 3131 has a projecting pin 3131c slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 .

The spring 3132 has an upper end attached to the unit base 3121 and a lower end attached to an upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131 to urge the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The link member 3133 is formed in a triangular shape in which each vertex is R-chamfered when viewed from the front. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one vertex so as to be rotatable about the longitudinal axis. The link member 3133 has an elongated first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left vertex of the rotation axis, and an elongated slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the vertex above the rotation axis. It has a second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

Lock member 3134 is attached between unit base 3121 and front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by front left cover 3137 .
The lock member 3134 protrudes rearward in a columnar shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and forms a flat upper end surface, and extends in the left-right direction. The contact surface 3134b, which extends and can contact the lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110, is inclined so as to move leftward as it goes downward from the right end of the contact surface 3134b, and a guide surface 3134c with which the locking protrusion 3116b can abut.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be vertically slidable.

Next, the operation of the back effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the rear back effect unit 3100 is in a retracted position in which the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward, as shown in FIG. 418 (FIG. 419(a)). is positioned near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 is moved to the right and positioned at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the back movable decoration 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is in contact with the back movable decoration. The lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of 3110 abuts.

In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 3132 . Since the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, the spring The biasing force of 3132 acts on the link member 3133 in the clockwise direction around the rotation shaft, and biases the lock member 3134 in the direction of sliding rightward. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained at the lock position by the biasing force of the spring 3132 .

In this state, the downward movement of the back movable decorative body 3110 is restricted by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 . Therefore, even if one of the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 moves from the corresponding position for some reason (malfunction), the remaining can prevent the downward movement (fall) of the back movable decorative body 3110. can.

In addition, in a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is positioned above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. located to the right of the axis. Further, the rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130. FIG.

The rear back effect unit 3100 is located behind the upper back effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the retracted position, and is invisible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise direction in plan view) by the rear rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 moves downward. Move to Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable decorative body 3110 is in contact with the locking member 3134, so the movable back decorative body 3110 cannot move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110 .

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back-rear-lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 moves to the lower projection 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It abuts on the upper end surface (see FIG. 419(b)). When the slide guide 3130 moves further downward while the back-rear-bottom detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the biasing force of the spring 3132 .

As the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the projecting pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise around its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. Then, when the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves leftward, and through the transmission pin 3134a inserted in the second slit 3133b, The lock member 3134 moves to the left (see FIG. 419(c)).

When the locking member 3134 moves to the left of the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable decoration 3110, the locking (downward restriction) by the locking member 3134 is released, and the back movable decoration 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, which is moving downward, is in a non-detection state with respect to the rear rear bottom detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the rear rear driving motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the dropped back rear movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, thereby stopping the falling and being in the appearance position (see FIG. 419(c)). In this appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the back movable decoration 3110, and the back movable decoration 3110 does not come into contact with it.

In the back-back effect unit 3100, the back-back movable decoration 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player's side) in the appearance position where the back-back movable decoration 3110 has fallen. In this state, the back movable decoration 3110 (decoration 3111) can be decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 to emit light. A player can be entertained by the luminous decoration.

In order to return the rear movable decorative body 3110 from the appearance position of the lower movement end to the retracted position in the normal state, the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in the opposite direction (here, clockwise in plan view) by the rear rear drive motor 3126. direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 due to the biasing force of the spring 3132 . As the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates clockwise and the lock member 3134 moves rightward and stops at the lock position. Become.

In addition, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower projection 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable projection 3116a upward. By pressing the back movable decorative body 3110 upward (see FIG. 419(d)).

Then, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward to the vicinity of the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b abuts against the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b pushes the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c exerts a force to move the lock member 3134 to the left. As a result, the lock member 3134 slides rightward against the biasing force of the spring 3132 that moves rightward through the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133 .

When the locking protrusion 3116b is positioned above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressure of the locking protrusion 3116b against the guide surface 3134c disappears. The lock member 3134 slides rightward by the biasing force of the spring 3132 to reach the lock position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the locking member 3134 is positioned below the locking projection 3116b of the back movable decorative body 3110, and the locking member 3134 prevents the movable back decorative body 3110 from moving downward. can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected by the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the rear rear driving motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can return from the appearing position to the retracted position, which is the normal state.

According to the rear back effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extending to the left and right can be dropped from the retracted position invisible to the player to the appearing position visible to the player. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In addition, since the locking member 3134 that locks (regulates) the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position is moved to the left to release the lock, it can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. Compared to the case where the lock is released by moving, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when the lock is released.

[5-9d-1. Back rear movable decoration]
Next, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 420 to 434. FIG. FIG. 420 is a front view showing the rear movable decorative body together with the rear decorative substrate. 421(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 420, and FIG. 421(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. FIG. 422(a) is a front perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration, and FIG. 422(b) is a rear perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration. FIG. 423 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable decorative body as seen from the front, and FIG. 424 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable decorative body as seen from the rear. FIG. 425 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 426 is an explanatory diagram showing the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate in the front view of FIG. 425 with dashed lines. FIG. 427(a) is a front view showing a part of the decoration in the back rear movable decoration, and (b) is a front view showing a part of the decoration sheet in the same part as the decoration in (a), (c) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the same part as the decoration of (a).

FIG. 428 is an enlarged sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 421(a). FIG. 429 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 428 exploded. FIG. 430 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the rear movable decorative body. FIG. 431(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate at the position of the first LED, and (b) shows the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. FIG. 4C is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide radiation plate at the portion where the light guide radiation plate is formed, and (c) is an LED housing portion of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the second decoration portion of the decoration body and the decoration sheet, and the second decoration substrate of the back rear decoration substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement|positioning of one LED from a front. FIG. 432 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the back decoration substrate together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 433(a) is a front view of the rear decorative substrate, and FIG. 433(b) is a rear view of the rear decorative substrate. FIG. 434(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back movable decorative body, and (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion of a different form from (a). It is an enlarged cross-sectional view, and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion of a form further different from those of (a) and (b).

As shown in FIG. 420 and the like, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 having a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 includes two first decorative portions 3151 provided in the vicinity of both left and right ends in a front view, and two first decorative portions 3151 arranged in the horizontal direction between the two first decorative portions 3151 and a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row. Each of the first decorative parts 3151 imitates one cherry blossom. Although not shown, the second decorative portions 3152 imitate predetermined characters, and are arranged in rows on the left and right to form a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. ing. In this way, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is decorated with a logo between two cherry blossoms.

As shown in FIGS. 420 to 424 and the like, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decoration part 3150 with embossed (relief-like) unevenness. and a translucent sheet-like decorative sheet provided behind the decorative body 3111 and forming the rest of the decorative portion 3150 with a decoration (pattern) applied. 3112, a transparent plate-like light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113 and having a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof. a flat plate-shaped decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back rear decoration substrate 3114; A left slider 3116 and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111 are provided.

[5-9d-2. Decorative body of the rear movable decorative body]
The decorative body 3111 has flat general surfaces on the front side and the rear side. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from a general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and protruding forward, and a second decorative protrusion 3111a. and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111 a is provided at a portion that forms the contours of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 . The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the first decorative portion 3151 is formed on the outer periphery of the petals of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms and on the part imitating the stamen and pistil in the center, respectively. . The first decorative protrusion 3111a at the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer circumference of each second decorative portion 3152 in a double (two-line) manner. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved such that the front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative projection 3111 b is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 . The second decorative projection 3111b is shaped like a cherry blossom or petal smaller than the first decorative portion 3151 . The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved such that the front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative projection 3111c is provided within the frame of the first decorative projection 3111a. The third decorative projection 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 has a curved front surface. The third decorative projection 3111c corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 has a flat front surface.

The first decorative projection 3111a and the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 constitute part of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 of the decorative portion 3150, respectively.

In addition, the decoration body 3111 has a metal decoration portion 3111d ( 425 to 427, it has a dark shaded portion). The decoration body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for the metal decoration portion 3111d. As shown in FIGS. 428 and 434(a), the metal decorative portion 3111d of this embodiment is provided on the curved front portion of the first decorative projection 3111a. is not provided on the side of the As a result, the creeping distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made longer than when the metal decorative portion 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward, the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d can impart a sense of quality. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative projection 3111a can be emphasized by the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d. The metal decorative portion 3111d is provided in the second decorative portion 3152, as shown in FIG. is made difficult to see from the front.

In addition, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the light from the first LED 3114a and the like of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is emitted by the rear surface (rear surface) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. The light can be reflected backward to illuminate the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided in the rear, and the decoration (first outline portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible.

The metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by hot-stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). More specifically, first, the base material of the decorative body 3111 is molded by injection molding of synthetic resin. The base material of the formed decorative body 3111 is mounted in a predetermined position of a hot stamping device with the front surface side where the first decorative protrusions 3111a and the like protrude upward. At this time, above the base material of the decorative body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate having an elastic bottom surface and being heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. . Then, the hot plate is lowered to a position a predetermined distance downward from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a on the base material of the decorative body 3111 (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b), and the hot plate is lowered. The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil stamped) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, a metal decoration portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil stamping region FS1 above (in front of) the second decoration protrusion 3111b of the decoration body 3111 (see FIG. 434(a)). .

The hot plate of the hot stamping device used for forming the metal decoration portion 3111d of the present embodiment has elasticity at the portion of the transfer sheet that contacts the decoration body 3111 to which the metal foil is transferred. Even if the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a) is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil can be kept in a good state even on a three-dimensional shape such as a curved surface. It can be transferred (foil stamped) with As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment compared to the case of forming by plating or vapor deposition, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, the decoration body 3111 is provided with the metal decoration portion 3111d only at the tip portion of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by a hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, thereby forming the first decorative protrusion. A decoration body 3111 can be formed by providing a metal decoration portion 3111d at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b.

Alternatively, while the base material of the decorative body 3111 is attached to the hot stamping device, first, the hot plate is pressed using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of a predetermined color (first metal foil) to form a second decorative protrusion. It is lowered to a position (second foil stamping area FS2) lower than the portion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the first metal foil is applied to the tip portions of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. to transcribe. Subsequently, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a color different from the first metal foil, the hot plate is set lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. It is lowered to the position (first foil stamping area FS1) to transfer the second metal foil to the tip portion of the first decorative projection 3111a (see FIG. 434(b)). As a result, without masking the base material of the decoration 3111, the decoration 3111 having the metal decorations 3111d of different colors for the first decoration projection 3111a and the second decoration projection 3111b is formed. be able to.

Moreover, in the above embodiment, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after forming a metal film on the surface of the base material of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film is peeled off (laser peeling) at a portion other than the first decorative protrusion 3111a by laser light, and the first A decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d may be formed on the decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 434(c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided not only on the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a but also on the side surface thereof.

The decorative body 3111 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear concave portion 3111e that is concave forward from the general surface on the rear side. The rear concave portion 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. The plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 is made uniform by the recessed portion 3111e after this, so that deformation due to sink marks of the resin during injection molding can be suppressed.

The rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward at portions corresponding to the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear recessed portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 are in close contact with each other, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly visually recognized through the transparent decorative body 3111. - 特許庁

In addition, since the rear recessed portion 3111e is provided at a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is located in front of the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. provided in the part. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear concave portion 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112, and the light emitted from the front to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is blocked by the gap. , the light is irregularly reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front brightens the rear recess 3111e. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 are not illuminated, the light from the front causes the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, that is, , a first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom and a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 forming a logo are brightened and easily visible from the front.

Furthermore, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f projecting rearward in a columnar shape from the rear surface. The attachment boss 3111f is for attaching the decoration base 3115 to the rear side of the decoration 3111 . The mounting boss 3111f is provided at a portion immediately behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. This makes it difficult to see the attachment boss 3111f from the front (player's side) due to the lens effect of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative projection 3111c is provided in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative projection 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet for back movable decorative body]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape approximately the same size as the outer shape of the decoration 3111 . The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet with a pattern on the rear surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 at a portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the rear portion of the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. and a second contour portion 3112b provided at a portion between the first decorative projections 3111a corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and formed in duplicate on the decorative body 3111, a first light diffusing portion 3112c provided at a portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 and inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decoration body 3111 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); A second light provided at a portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a provided doubly on the decoration body 3111 corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c). and a diffusion portion 3112d.

In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transparent portion 3112e provided behind the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111. have.

As shown in FIG. 427(b), the first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a portion with a pattern imitating a cherry blossom that is smaller than the first decorative portion 3151, and the remaining portion is It is a part where light interference fringes are displayed by a hologram. The first outline portion 3112a is formed opaque. In this embodiment, the portion of the hologram in the first outline portion 3112a is the same gold color as the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 . In addition, the cherry blossom-like portion of the first contour portion 3112a is colored using white or pink. It should be noted that the ink (paint) used for the pattern or the like may be one having glitter particles.

The first outline portion 3112a is located outside and behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. Since it has a portion of the same color (gold in this embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration of the first contour portion 3112a and the metallic decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, the perspective between the first outline portion 3112a and the metal decoration portion 3111d can be emphasized, and the thinness of the back-rear movable decoration 3110 can be made difficult to perceive.

Further, the first outline portion 3112a is formed in bright gray or white on the rear surface side. This improves the coloring of the pattern and hologram on the front side. In addition, the light emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be reflected back to the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white back surface of the first outline portion 3112a, so that the light guide radiation Since the plate 3113 can be made to emit brighter light, the amount of light radiated forward from the light-transmitting portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be decorated with brighter light. In addition, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be decorated with more uniform light emission.

Furthermore, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative projection 3111a and the second decorative projection 3111b of the decoration 3111, the rear surface of the decoration 3111 is flat except for the rear recess 3111e. Located behind the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is emitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no irregular reflection, and the pattern and hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111. - 特許庁

As illustrated, the second outline portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in a black linear shape with a predetermined width. The second outline portion 3112b is positioned behind a portion of the second decorative portion 3152 between the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portions 3111d) provided in a double manner on the decorative body 3111. As shown in FIG. In other words, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the two gold metal decoration portions 3111d, the black color of the second contour portion 3112b complements the double metal decoration portion 3111d. The decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed of a plurality of minute projections and depressions capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a pear-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linearly extending ridges in random directions. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 427(b) and the like, in the first light diffusing portion 3112c, in one petal of the cherry blossom flower modeled by the first decorative portion 3151, light is emitted from the center to the peripheral edge of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed so that the gradation becomes darker (transparency becomes lower) as it goes. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 for emitting light from behind to the first light diffusing portion 3112c emits light, the pear-skin pattern of the first light diffusing portion 3112c causes a slight Therefore, the luminous decoration of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom can be given a three-dimensional effect.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed of a plurality of fine projections and depressions capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided entirely inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152, as shown by the light and shade shaded areas in FIGS. It is The second light diffusing portion 3112d has translucency and is formed of a plurality of fine unevennesses capable of disturbing light. A plurality of fine unevennesses forming the second light diffusion portion 3112d are formed in a dot-like pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in translucent milky white. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 for emitting light from behind to the second light diffusing portion 3112d emits light, the halftone dot pattern of the second light diffusing portion 3112d emits a predetermined light. The second decorative portion 3152 consisting of characters can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion inside the first decorative projection 3111a of the decoration 3111, and the rear surface of the portion of the decoration 3111 is provided with a rear recessed portion 3111e recessed forward. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 due to the presence of the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 at the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d. state. Due to this gap, the light emitted from the front toward the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front is the primary light. The diffusion part 3112c and the second light diffusion part 3112d become bright. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 are not illuminated, the light from the front causes the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, that is, , a first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom and a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 forming a logo are brightened and easily visible from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 forms a predetermined pattern by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d, and the decoration of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is formed. The portion 3150 except for the decoration by the decorative body 3111 constitutes the remainder. In the decorative sheet 3112 of this embodiment, the first outline portion 3112a, the second outline portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d are provided on the rear surface side of the transparent sheet serving as the base material. ing. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Also, the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by attaching a predetermined light diffusion film (diffuser film). Note that the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d may be lens films or prism films.

A transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since this transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 emits light from the light guide radiation plate 3113. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted and irradiated to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative projection 3111a projecting forward, the metal decoration 3111d is provided only on the front side, and the side faces remain transparent. The light irradiated to the first decorative protrusion 3111a leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. As a result, the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e can provide the player with a luminous decoration that looks like a halo is shining on the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d). In addition, the first outline portion 3112a located outside the first decorative projection 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light transmitted through the transmission portion 3112e and radiated to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a. Therefore, the patterns and holograms provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be made more visible, and the decorative effect of the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or a hologram. The decoration of the back rear movable decoration 3110 can be made to look larger. Since the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. At that time, the performance display device 1600 provided in the rear side displays a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, so that the player can see the performance with a sense of unity, and the game is played. The visual impact can be given to the player to attract attention, the large decoration can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, in the decorative sheet 3112 of the above-described embodiment, the transparent transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111, but the present invention is limited to this. isn't it. For example, the first outline portion 3112a may also be provided at a portion behind the metal decoration portion 3111d. As a result, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear side can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. , the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be prevented from becoming poor. In addition, by providing the first contour portion 3112a to the rear portion of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decoration body 3111 passes through the first decorative protrusion of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated with the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be used as the first decorative protrusion. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiating plate of rear movable decorative body]
As shown in FIGS. 423 and 424, the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent plate-like main body portion 3113a extending left and right, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3113a, and a main body portion 3113a. A plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c that pass through the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear decoration board 3114 are inserted; A plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED housing portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It has a leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the peripheral edge of 3113c, and an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g provided along the rear edge of the leg portion 3113f on the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c. .

The light guide radiation plate 3113 also has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a when viewed from the front.

The body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward by about 1.5 times the thickness of the body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 428 and the like, the rear end of the flange portion 3113b protrudes further rearward than the rear decorative substrate 3114 when assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110 .

The first LED housing portion 3113c has a rectangular inner peripheral shape. As shown in FIG. 426, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the portion of the decorative portion 3150 with low transparency when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the region of the first decorative portion 3151, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the region where the first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has a darker shade of pink due to the dots. ing. More specifically, the first LED housing portion 3113c provided in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is positioned closer to the center than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom. The center of the long side of the rectangular inner periphery is positioned on the center line of the petal.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c provided in the second decorative portion 3152 are provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second outline portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. It is For this reason, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to see from the front.

Also, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113 c are provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decorative portion 3152 at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 . Moreover, when the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. It is formed in a By connecting the first LED housing portions 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to avoid forming a portion thinner than the thickness of the main body portion 3113a, and damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner periphery and penetrates through the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside (within the plate thickness) of the main body portion 3113a reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light is A part of the light is reflected straight toward the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c and passes through the first LED housing portion. 3113c will be radiated inside. Then, when the light radiated inside from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches another inner peripheral surface, part of the light on the surface reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the remainder enters the main body 3113a. That is, in the interior of the main body portion 3113a, when the light that is guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing portion 3113c, it is radiated inside the first LED housing portion 3113c. Part of the light is reflected by the portion of the inner peripheral surface and the portion of the inner peripheral surface that is incident on the main body portion 3113a side of the first LED housing portion 3113c. , the amount of light is greatly reduced compared to that before passing through.

As such, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a. In addition, since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light that is about to pass through the first LED housing portion 3113c can be blocked by the first LED 3114a. In the portion where the first LED 3114a is accommodated, light does not pass to the opposite side of the first LED accommodation portion 3113c. Accordingly, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at an optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative portion 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is It is possible to prevent the light from being guided to another second decoration part 3152 to be decorated with light emission, and it is possible to surely decorate only the desired second decoration part 3152 in the plurality of second decoration parts 3152 with light emission. .

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 431(c), for example, as shown in FIG. In order to illuminate the decoration, a first LED housing portion 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each second decoration portion 3152, and light is irradiated toward the inside of the second decoration portion 3152 in each first LED housing portion 3113c. A first LED 3114a is provided so that the In this embodiment, since the first LED housing portions 3113c provided between "i" and "ro" and between "ro" and "ha" are close to each other, they are connected to each other. is a single hole. As a result, the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 does not have a thin portion that is easily damaged. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for decorating the "☆" arranged below the "I" are provided below the "☆". Therefore, if the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" is illuminated, the "I" provided above the "☆" may be illuminated. A first LED housing portion 3113c housing a first LED 3114a for decorating part of the letter "I" with light emission is provided with an extending portion 3113j extending so as to cover the top of the "☆". ing. The extending portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for luminous decoration of "☆" from being guided to the "I" side. As a result, even if "☆" is decorated with light emission, "I" is not decorated with light emission. In addition, the extension 3113j can reduce (block) the light for luminous decoration of "I" from being guided to the "☆" side. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” or “☆” can be reliably illuminated, and the desired rendering effect can be fully exhibited.

The second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference as shown in FIG. 430 and the like. The plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d are provided behind five circular portions resembling stamens provided around the center of the first decorative portion 3151 resembling a cherry blossom. More specifically, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided in each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms behind circular portions resembling stamens positioned on the center line of the petals. Thus, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and one second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the center line of the petal.

The second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference and penetrates through the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside (within the plate thickness) of the main body portion 3113a reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, the light is A portion of the light is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d so as to diffuse into the inner side of the main body portion 3113a in a fan shape. In this embodiment, in each of the five petals of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a. As shown, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body portion 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d. The light can make the petals more brightly luminous and decorated.

One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in the shape of a quadrangular pyramid, and is arranged in a row so as to be continuous in the vertical and horizontal directions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are formed on the rear surface of the body portion 3113a except for the portion of the flange portion 3113b, the portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and the portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed almost all over the surface. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e can mainly reflect forward the light irradiated in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the main body portion 3113a, and radiate the light forward from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a. The light guide radiating plate 3113 of this embodiment is formed so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear when viewed from the front due to the existence of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e.

In addition, since the plurality of reflective portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface. Even if the design of the decoration part 3150 made up of the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 is changed due to a change or the like, there is no need to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the design change or the like can be easily dealt with. can be suppressed.

The leg portion 3113f protrudes rearward from the rear end side of a portion of the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the inserted first LED 3114a. As shown in FIG. 428 and the like, the leg portion 3113f has a surface on the side of the first LED housing portion 3113c that is flush with the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Accordingly, the area of the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a can be widened, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted into the main body portion 3113a. can be done. When the leg portion 3113f is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surface of the leg portion 3113f abuts the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114, and a gap is formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. can be formed.

The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is provided in a chamfered shape along the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c at the rear end of the leg portion 3113f. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting forward the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f.

The right slider front portion 3113h is for forming a right slider 3117 in cooperation with a right slider rear portion 3115d of the decoration base 3115, which will be described later.

When the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, the flange portion 3113b covers the periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to make the surface difficult to see and prevent the appearance from becoming poor. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flange portion 3113b that protrudes rearward from the rear decorative substrate 3114, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 extends from the rear decorative substrate. The creepage distance EL to 3114 (copper foil 3114d and electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the rear decoration substrate 3114, and the rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. You can prevent it from being lost.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are formed as holes passing through the main body portion 3113a. The heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the thermal effect on the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

Further, since the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed as through holes, the front sides of the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are blocked by the decoration sheet 3112, the decoration body 3111, and the like. However, compared to the case where the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed in a bottomed concave shape (groove shape) that does not penetrate, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d The volume (heat capacity) of 3113d can be increased. As a result, a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the housed first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b can be mitigated, and the thermal influence on the rear decorative substrate 3114 and the like can be suppressed. In addition, in the first LED housing portion 3113c that is closely connected to each other and the first LED housing portion 3113c that has the extending portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is large. For the same reason as above, more heat from the first LED 3114a can be dissipated, and a rapid temperature rise can be mitigated.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from behind. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a can be brought as close to the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has leg portions 3113f projecting rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear ends of the leg portions 3113f can be brought into contact with the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114. , a gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113 a and the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 . As a result, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the back decoration substrate 3114 is suppressed, thereby preventing the influence of heat. can be reduced.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides the light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and transmits the light forwardly by the reflecting portion 3113e on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. Since the light can be radiated forward, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even in a portion where the rear decorative substrate 3114 is not provided on the rear side of the main body portion 3113a. In other words, even if the size of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is smaller than the size of the body portion 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the body portion 3113a. Therefore, since the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body portion 3113a, the distance between the outer periphery of the main body portion 3113a and the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made longer. By increasing the creeping distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface, it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the above effects.

[5-9d-5. Back-back decoration substrate of back-back movable decoration]
A plurality of side-view type first LEDs 3114a and a plurality of top-view type second LEDs 3114b are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 . The rear decorative board 3114 includes a flat board body 3114c, copper foils 3114d (see FIG. and electronic components 3114e (see FIG. 433(b)) such as LED driver ICs and resistors mounted on the rear surface of the main body 3114c.

In addition, the rear decorative substrate 3114 has a coating film (not shown) made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the rear decorative substrate 3114 has a labeling portion near the mounted components such as the mounted first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e. have. The inscription portion is provided by silk printing in a predetermined color (for example, yellow) that is inconspicuous from above the coating film.

The rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that substantially follows the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and has a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b between it and the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to have a substantially constant size. In addition, the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that substantially follows the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, which will be described later. It is formed in a size that is formed to be constant. In other words, the rear decoration substrate 3114 is sized to be accommodated inside the flange portion 3115 b of the decoration base 3115 .

As shown in FIG. 430 and the like, at the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first decorative protrusions 3111a of the decorative body 3111 are located on the center lines of each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms. It is provided so that the light is irradiated toward the center of the flower near the tip inside (the metal decorative portion 3111d). As a result, the first LEDs 3114a in the first decorative portion 3151 can light-embellish each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms.

In addition, at the part of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right, the first decorative protrusions provided doubly on the decorative body 3111 It is provided near the rear of 3111a so that light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 . As a result, the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right sides can be illuminated one by one by the first LEDs 3114a of the second decorative portion 3152 .

As shown in FIG. 430 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are arranged in the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151, which resembles a cherry blossom. located at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal imitating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151 . As a result, the five central stamen-like portions of the first decorative portion 3151 can be decorated with light emission by the second LEDs 3114b.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type that can irradiate light forward, when the second LED 3114b emits light, the part that imitates the stamen in the central part of the first decorative part 3151 is illuminated more than the other parts. It is possible to emit point light with high luminance, and to strongly attract the player's interest. Therefore, in the light-emitting decoration of the decorative portion 3150, it is possible to provide a portion that emits light in a planar shape by the first LED 3114a and a portion that emits light in a point shape by the second LED 3114b. A variety of lighting effects can be performed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

The substrate main body 3114 c is a rigid substrate slightly thinner than the main body portion 3113 a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 . The substrate main body 3114c of this embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (shaded portion in FIG. 432). As shown in FIG. 432, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is separated inward from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL=1 mm in this embodiment). ing. With this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance from the conductive member (for example, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111) outside the back decoration substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d are increased, thereby discharging static electricity and the like. Insulation against short circuits can be enhanced, and damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided to a portion within a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c, and the area of the copper foil 3114d is is made as wide as possible. As a result, part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e can be transferred to the copper foil 3114d, so that the heat can be dissipated from the copper foil 3114d. , and the electronic component 3114e can be prevented from being damaged by heat.

In addition, the back rear decoration substrate 3114 has a predetermined width for facilitating forward reflection of the light emitted from the first LED 3114a toward the substrate main body 3114c on the light emitting surface side of the side-view type first LED 3114a on the front side. of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (the region surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 432). As shown in FIGS. 429 and 431(a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of this embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. (1) The angle of the light emitted from the LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is close to the vertical line of the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, so that the light emitted to the substrate main body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. can be done.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 431(a) and the like, the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, and the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is Since they are in contact with each other, the leg portion 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, the light (light amount) emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be increased, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) can be decorated with brighter light emission.

In addition, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts within the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (see FIG. 431(a), etc.). As a result, even if the coating film (solder resist) applied to the surface is worn or flipped due to contact with the leg portion 3113f, only the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. never. Therefore, the exposure of the copper foil 3114d lowers the insulating properties, and damage due to short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 428 and the like, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 of this embodiment is assembled to the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 so that a flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 and a flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113, which will be described later, are formed. 3113b and 3113b, the outer periphery is double-enclosed, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surface from the outside, thereby preventing the appearance from deteriorating. In addition, in the state in which the rear decorative substrate 3114 is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. In addition, the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115 is inserted from the rear into the gap between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 is the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Since it meanders around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the rear decoration substrate 3114, and the rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to 10 mm or longer, or to a distance capable of supporting a discharge voltage of 10 kV.

In addition, since the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 allows a member provided behind the rear movable decorative body 3110 (in this embodiment, Light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with the light from the effect display device 1600 or the like provided behind, so that the decorative portion 3150 may be illuminated in an unintended state. The rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to reliably perform a desired light emission effect. In addition, since the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the rear decorative substrate 3114 can prevent the rear from being seen through the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the rear movable decoration can be prevented. The deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110 can be suppressed.

In addition, the rear decorative substrate 3114 has only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, which are accommodated from behind with respect to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113, provided on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be brought as close as possible to the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as LED driver ICs and resistors mounted on the rear surface. LED driver ICs, resistors, and the like as the electronic parts 3114e are generally black parts. The appearance of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved. In addition, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, which cannot be seen from the front, it is not necessary to apply white or other color paint to the electronic component 3114e to make it difficult to see. The cost of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative body base of back movable decorative body]
The decoration body base 3115 is formed transparent as a whole. The decoration base 3115 includes a flat cover plate portion 3115a covering the rear side of the rear decoration substrate 3114, a flange portion 3115b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover plate portion 3115a, and a cover plate portion 3115a. and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the right end of the covering plate portion 3115a in front view.

The covering plate portion 3115a has an outer peripheral shape that substantially follows the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed between the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed in a size that In other words, the cover plate portion 3115a (decorative body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. As shown in FIG. Since the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered by the cover plate portion 3115a, it is possible to protect the rear decorative substrate 3114 by preventing other members from coming into contact with the rear decorative substrate 3114 from behind. It is possible to prevent damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 .

As shown in FIG. 428, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and extends forward beyond the rear decorative substrate 3114. protrudes so that the The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and makes the outer peripheral surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 difficult to see from the outside, thereby improving the appearance. In addition, when the flange portion 3115b is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3115b is inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114. The shortest route from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface of the decoration body 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 can meander around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the existence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creeping distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from flowing to the back decoration substrate 3114 and damaging the back decoration substrate 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c has a slit-shaped portion that is elongated in the left and right direction and a portion that is larger than the slit-shaped portion. The plurality of openings 3115c allow the heat from the electronic components 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to escape to the outside of the rear movable decorative body 3110. can be reduced.

The right slider rear portion 3115d is for forming the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113 .

In addition, the decoration base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e that slightly protrude from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of projections 3115e are arranged so as to abut on the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, near the outer periphery thereof, where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 into contact with the front surfaces of the plurality of protrusions 3115e. . As a result, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily released through the gap between the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main functions and effects of back-rear movable decorative body]
Next, main functions and effects of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 in this embodiment will be described. In the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment, the decorative sheet 3112 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The mounting bosses 3111f of the decoration 3111 are attached to the decoration base 3115 while the back decoration substrate 3114 is sandwiched between them and the base 3115 (see FIG. 421, etc.). As a result, the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is relatively thin.

The back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent plate-like decorative body 3111 and a first decorative projection 3111a, a second decorative projection 3111b, and a third decorative projection 3111c projecting forward, Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first outline portion 3112a with the hologram that displays the pattern and the interference fringes of light, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 Thus, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can impart a three-dimensional effect, and the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c provide a lens effect. and a hologram can give a sense of depth. As a result, even if the back movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the player does not feel thinness, and the decoration effect of the decorative part 3150 of the back movable decorative body 3110 is sufficiently obtained. It can be displayed to entertain the player.

In addition, as described above, the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, the third decorative projection 3111c, the first contour portion 3112a, and the like can impart a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. , the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner. As a result, the space required for installing the back movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the back movable decorative body 3110 can be increased, and the inside of the game board 5 can be positioned more effectively. By providing the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the pachinko machine 1 that entertains the players can be easily realized. In addition, since the back movable decorative body 3110 can be made thin, it is relatively easy to secure a space for arranging other decorative bodies. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of providing a pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance, providing a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining various performances, and being highly appealing to a player and capable of further differentiation. can do.

The back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be conspicuous due to the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the metal decoration portion 3111d can be given a three-dimensional effect and a high-class feeling. As a result, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves from the retracted position invisible to the player to the appearing position visible to the player, the luxurious decorative part 3150 can be seen, giving the player a premium feeling. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that something good will happen, and to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a flat rear surface of the decorative body 3111, and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer circumference of the decorative body 3111. , the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated, and the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to look larger. In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 of the back movable decorative body 3110 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearing position, the performance display device 1600 provided on the rear side displays a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110, thereby playing a performance with a sense of unity. It is possible to show the decorations to other people, to give a visual impact to the players to attract their attention, and to entertain the players with large decorations, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest of the players.

In addition, since the back rear movable decoration 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a behind the metal decoration 3111d of the decoration 3111 and the second outline portion 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112, the metal decoration 3111d and the second outline 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112 are provided with the first LED 3114a. The two contoured portions 3112b can make it difficult to see the first LED 3114a from the front, thereby suppressing deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 and sufficiently exhibiting the decorative effect.

Furthermore, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, the first decorative portion 3151 , and the second decoration part 3152 can be decorated with light emission individually. As a result, the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right sides can be illuminated in order, or only specific first decorative portions 3151 and second decorative portions 3152 can be illuminated, By properly lighting up the first decoration part 3151 and the plurality of second decoration parts 3152, it is possible to show the player various lighting effects, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in interest. can.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 irradiates light in a direction along the surface within the plate thickness of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the side-view type first LED 3114a. The light from the first LED is radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 because the light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the first LED and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are decorated with light. distance can be increased. As a result, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, even if the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is thin, the decorative body 3111 The decorative sheet 3112 can be evenly and uniformly decorated with light, and the player can be entertained by the good-looking light-emitting decoration. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side-view type first LED 3114a can uniformly illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be increased. The pachinko machine 1 that can be made thin and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably embodied.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has the first LED 3114a of the side-view type used for planar light emission, and the second LED 3114b of the top-view type. ), it is possible to add a part that emits light with high brightness in a dotted manner by the second LED 3114b to the part that is planarly decorated with the first LED 3114a. As a result, since the light emission of the second LED 3114b can give a sharpness to the light emission effect, the optimum light emission effect corresponding to the game state can be easily presented, and the player can be more entertained and the game can be played. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which a side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light is received by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a so that the light enters the inside of the main body portion 3113a. As a result, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at a position close to the desired portion to be decorated with light emission by the first LED 3114a, the desired portion can be decorated with brighter light emission, resulting in a more dramatic effect. The player can be entertained by the luminous decoration with high brightness.

Furthermore, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear side of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the accommodation portion 3113d is provided, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a can be changed to the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodation portion 3113c and the second LED accommodation portion 3113d. , and the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is in contact with the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, so that the body portion 3113a and the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 are in contact with each other. Since a gap is formed in the back decoration board 3114, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 can escape through the gap. It is possible to suppress the temperature rise and reduce the influence of heat.

In addition, the back rear movable decoration 3110 can form a gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 by the leg portion 3113f, and the decoration base 3115 has a plurality of openings. Since it has the part 3115c, by raising and lowering the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c. Also, the heat from the electronic components 3114e and the like can be released, and the temperature rise of the back decoration substrate 3114 can be suppressed.

A temperature sensor is provided in the rear movable decorative body 3110, and when the temperature of the rear movable decorative body 3110 (back decorative substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the movable rear decorative body 3110 moves up and down. may be executed with a higher frequency (probability). As a result, the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, so that the surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated, and the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled to suppress the occurrence of problems due to heat.

Further, the rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 from the rear side with the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b is surrounded by the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decoration body 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 is the light guide radiation due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Since the plate 3113 meanders around the flange portion 3113b, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the rear decoration substrate 3114, and the rear decoration substrate 3114 flows. 3114 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is arranged such that the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit is provided in the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 at a position separated from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL. With this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance can be increased, and the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit can be enhanced, and damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharge can be suppressed.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. not As a result, the creepage distance EL to the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a, and the same effect as described above can be achieved. In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d is reduced compared to the case where the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The size can be reduced, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if discharge occurs to the rear decorative substrate 3114, its influence can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down (moves) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearing position moved downward by driving the back rear driving motor 3126. Therefore, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the slider 3116 moves up and down, and the static electricity generated by the friction tends to accumulate on the surface of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. FIG. Since the decoration body 3111 and the decoration body base 3115 constituting the surface of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 are formed of a synthetic resin with low conductivity, even if a lot of static electricity is accumulated, the surfaces of the decoration body 3110 and the decoration base 3115 are It is difficult to discharge the static electricity accumulated in the whole at once. On the other hand, since the metal decoration portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decoration body 3111 has high conductivity, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decoration portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the back rear movable decoration 3110 of the present embodiment, static electricity is likely to accumulate in the metal decoration 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111. However, as described above, the metal decoration 3111d Since the creeping distance EL to the rear decorative substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the rear decorative substrate 3114 is not damaged by the discharge of static electricity, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down, and the rear movable decorative body is provided. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that entertains both the 3110 with the luminous performance decorated with luminescence.

When the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is greater than or equal to a predetermined area (for example, 100 cm 2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decoration portion 3111d to GND (ground). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back decoration substrate 3114. FIG.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of back movable decorative body]
Next, referring mainly to FIG. 435, a back movable decoration 3160, a back movable decoration 3170, a back movable decoration 3180, etc., which are different from the back movable decoration 3110, are described. I will explain in detail. FIG. 435(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the configuration of the movable back decoration of the second embodiment, which is different from the movable back decoration of FIG. 420, and (b) is a movable back of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decoration in a cross section, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back movable decoration of 4th Embodiment in a cross section.

The back rear movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment is, as schematically shown in FIG. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiation plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3162 and internally emitting light in a direction along the front surface forward, and a light guide radiation plate. 3163 is equipped with a back decoration substrate 3164 on which a plurality of LEDs 3164a for irradiating light in a direction along the front surface are mounted on the front surface.

The decoration body 3161 of the back rear movable decoration body 3160 includes a transparent plate-shaped body part 3161a, a flange part 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the body part 3161a, and a metal body provided on the front surface of the body part 3161a. and a decorative portion 3161c. The body portion 3161a may be flat, or may be decorated with an uneven relief. The metal decoration portion 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3161a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decoration portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, plating, or vapor deposition.

The decoration sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet on which a predetermined decoration (pattern) is printed. This decorative sheet 3162 has a portion with low transparency in the decoration located in front of the LED 3164a of the rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161 b of the decorative body 3161 .

The light guide radiating plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape of the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and has an LED housing portion 3163a into which the LEDs 3164a of the rear decorative substrate 3164 are inserted from the rear, and a plurality of LEDs provided on the rear surface. and a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery thereof is formed in a quadrangular shape along the outer periphery of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular cross section, and is provided only at a predetermined portion. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are provided so as to forwardly reflect the light from the determined LED housing portion 3163a, and are arranged in a fan shape of concentric circles centered on the determined LED housing portion 3163a. . In other words, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b may be configured to reflect light forward from an unspecified direction in the same manner as the reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative substrate 3164 is formed to have the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163 . A plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3164. The side-view type LEDs 3164a are inserted into the LED housing portions 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163 from behind. Although illustration is omitted, the rear decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3164 within a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3164 . In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the surface (both sides) of the rear-back decorative substrate 3164 .

In the assembled state of the back rear movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment, the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. are in contact with each other, and the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 . As a result, the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3160 in the front-rear direction is thin. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3164 . Thus, in the rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer peripheries of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the rear rear decorative substrate 3164 are covered with the flange portion 3161b, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surfaces thereof from the outside. and make it look good.

In this back rear movable decoration 3160, since the flange 3161b extends rearward from the main body 3161a of the decoration 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3164, the metal decoration on the front surface of the main body 3161a The creepage distance EL from 3161c to (copper foil of) the back decoration substrate 3164 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back decoration substrate 3164, and the back decoration is achieved. Damage to the substrate 3164 can be prevented.

Thus, according to the rear-back movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. In the rear movable decorative body 3160, a decorative body base covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3164 may be provided.

Next, as schematically shown in FIG. 435(b), the back rear movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3171 (frame and a light guide radiation plate 3173 which is provided behind the interior decoration 3172 and which radiates light forward in a direction along the entire surface inside. and a rear decorative substrate 3174 on which a plurality of LEDs 3174a are mounted on the front surface for irradiating the interior of the light guide radiation plate 3173 with light in the direction along the front surface.

The outer decoration body 3171 of the back rear movable decoration body 3170 includes a main body part 3171a extending forward and backward in a frame shape, a supporting part 3171b protruding inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 3171a in a flat plate shape, and the main body part 3171a. and a metal decorative portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the . The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the interior decoration body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration part 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3171a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decoration portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

Although illustration is omitted, the interior decoration body 3172 is formed with an uneven relief-like decoration. The inner decoration 3172 is attached so as to close the front opening of the frame-shaped outer decoration 3171 .

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner decoration 3172 . The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the external decoration 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 has an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LEDs 3174a of the rear decorative substrate 3174 are inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED housing portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery thereof is formed in a square along the outer periphery of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc around the predetermined LED accommodating portion 3173a, and is provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflective portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. A plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect forward the light from the respective determined LED housing portions 3173a. In other words, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b may be configured to reflect light forward from an unspecified direction in the same manner as the reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative substrate 3174 is formed to have the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173 . A plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3174. The LEDs 3174a are inserted into the LED housing portions 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173 from behind. Although illustration is omitted, the back decoration board 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on the front and rear surfaces of the back decoration board 3174 at a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3174 . In addition, the rear back decoration substrate 3174 has a coating film made of a white solder resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back rear movable decorative body 3170 of this embodiment, the inner decorative body 3172 is fitted from the front in the frame of the outer decorative body 3171, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172 are fitted. , and the vicinity of the outer circumference of the rear surface of the inner decoration body 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. In the back rear movable decoration body 3170, a light guide radiation plate 3173 and a back rear decoration substrate 3174 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the outer decoration body 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 is attached to the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer circumference of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3170 in the front-rear direction is thin. In addition, in the rear movable decorative body 3170, a gap having the thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173. As shown in FIG.

A main body portion 3171 a of the external decoration body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 . In this back rear movable decoration 3160, the outer circumferences of the inner decoration 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back rear decoration substrate 3174 are covered with the main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration 3171, and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are covered from the outside. to make it look better.

The back rear movable decoration 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3174 with the main body portion 3171a extending rearward of the outer decoration 3171. The creepage distance EL to (copper foil of) the rear decorative substrate 3174 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3171c flows to the rear decorative substrate 3174, and the rear decorative substrate 3174 is discharged. can be prevented from being damaged.

Thus, according to the rear-back movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above-described rear-back movable decorative body 3110 . A metal decoration may be provided on the front surface of the inner decoration 3172 as well. Further, in the rear movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3174 may be provided.

Next, as schematically shown in FIG. 435(c), the back rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3181 (frame A translucent interior decoration body 3182 that closes the inside), and a back decoration substrate 3183 that is provided behind the interior decoration body 3182 and has a plurality of LEDs 3183a mounted on the front surface that can irradiate light forward. and has.

The outer decoration body 3181 of the back rear movable decoration body 3180 includes a flat frame-shaped main body part 3181a, a flange part 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body part 3181a, and the entire surfaces of the main body part 3181a and the flange part 3181b. and a covering metal decoration portion 3181c. The metal decoration part 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration body 3181. As shown in FIG. The metal decoration portion 3181c may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

The interior decoration body 3182 is made of a transparent member. The inner decoration 3182 has a flat plate-like main body 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body 3181a of the outer decoration 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange 3181b, and a rearward portion from the outer circumference of the main body 3182a. and a flange portion 3182b extending to the . Although illustration is omitted, the main body portion 3182a has an uneven relief-like decoration formed on substantially the entire surface thereof.

The rear decoration substrate 3183 has an outer shape smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182 b of the inner decoration body 3182 . In other words, the rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed to have a size such that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 . A plurality of top-view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3183 . Although not shown, the rear decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3183 within a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3183 . In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the surface (both sides) of the rear-back decorative substrate 3183 .

In the rear movable decorative body 3180 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the inner decorative body 3182 and the rear decorative substrate 3183 are inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. The rear movable decorative body 3180 has a front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3181 a of the outer decorative body 3181 , and the flange portion 3182 b of the inner decorative body 3182 contacts the outer decorative body 3181 . It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181 b of the outer decoration 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182 b of the inner decoration 3182 . In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration 3181. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 prevents the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 and the rear decorative substrate 3183 from being seen from the outside.

In this back rear movable decoration 3180, the flange 3182b of the inner decoration 3182 is provided inside the flange 3181b of the outer decoration 3181 on which the metal decoration 3181c is provided. Since the outer circumference of the back decoration board 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body part 3182a is separated from the inner circumference of the flange part 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182, the metal decoration part 3181c is separated from the back decoration board 3183 (copper The creeping distance EL to the foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3181c can be prevented from flowing to the back decoration substrate 3183 and damaging the back decoration substrate 3183. can do.

As described above, according to the rear-back movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. It should be noted that the front surface of the body portion 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182 may also be provided with a metal decoration portion. Further, in the rear movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back bottom left production unit and back bottom right production unit]
Next, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 436 to 439 and the like. Figure 436(a) is a perspective view of the bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit in the back unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . Figure 437 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom-left effect unit and bottom-right effect unit viewed from the front, and Figure 438 is an exploded view of the bottom-left effect unit and bottom-right effect unit viewed from the back It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 439 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the back bottom left effect unit and the back bottom right effect unit from the front.

The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back back effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 . The lower-back left effect unit 3200 and the lower-right right effect unit 3250 are positioned on both left and right sides of the lower-back middle decoration unit 3320 of the lower-back middle effect unit 3300 when assembled on the game board 5. They are visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the front unit 2000, and the like.

First, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left effect unit 3200 is provided behind the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and a translucent lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 having a rearwardly projecting shaft 3201a. , a lower back left decoration board 3203 provided behind the lower back left decoration body 3202 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back lower left decoration board 3203. A unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100 is provided with a back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 rotatably attached and a back bottom left decorative body 3202 attached. , is equipped with

In addition, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 is attached to the back bottom left driving motor 3205 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotating shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotating shaft of the back bottom left driving motor 3205. a spur gear-shaped driving gear 3206, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 meshing with the driving gear 3206 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and the first transmission gear 3207 meshing. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3208 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204. The second transmission gear 3208 is engaged with the second transmission gear 3208 and is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotary ornament 3201. and a front cover 3210 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 on the lower side than the back lower left decorative body 3202 .

The back-bottom-left-rotation decoration 3201 is formed in a shape that imitates a cherry blossom. A shaft 3201a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back left rotary decoration 3201 is formed to have a length that penetrates the lower back left decoration 3202, the lower back left decoration substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The back bottom left decorative body 3202 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 in the front and back direction, and rotating such that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that looks like it has been

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-bottom-left decorative board 3203 are full-color LEDs. The back bottom left decorative board 3203 is provided with a back bottom left detection sensor 3203a for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The back bottom left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a of the back bottom left decorative board 3203. As shown in FIG. When the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a, the back bottom left rotating decoration 3201 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 439). ).

The back bottom left effect unit 3200 of this embodiment rotates the driving gear 3206 by the back bottom left driving motor 3205, and the back side through the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotary decoration 3201 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back-bottom-left effect unit 3200 can cause the bottom-left rotary decoration 3201 and the bottom-left decoration 3202 to emit light by causing the plurality of LEDs of the bottom-left decoration board 3203 to emit light.

Next, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 will be described. The back bottom right effect unit 3250 is provided behind the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 and the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 having translucency having an axial shaft 3251a protruding rearward. , a lower back right decoration board 3253 provided behind the lower back right decoration body 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back lower right decoration board 3253. A unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100 is provided with a back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 rotatably attached and a back bottom right decorative body 3252 attached. , is equipped with

In addition, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 is attached to the back bottom right drive motor 3255 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotation shaft of the back bottom right drive motor 3255. a spur-gear-shaped driving gear 3256, a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 meshing with the driving gear 3256 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and the first transmission gear 3257 meshing. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3258 rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 and the second transmission gear 3258 are meshed and attached to the rear end of the axial shaft 3251a of the back lower right rotation ornament 3251. and a front cover 3260 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 on the lower side than the back lower right decorative body 3252 .

The lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. A shaft 3251a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower right rotary decoration 3251 is formed to have a length that penetrates the lower right lower back decoration 3252, the lower right decoration substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The back bottom right decorative body 3252 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 in the front-to-rear direction and rotating such that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that looks like it has been

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-bottom-right decorative board 3253 are full-color LEDs. The back bottom right decorative board 3253 is provided with a back bottom right detection sensor 3253a for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The back bottom right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259 a that protrudes forward and is detected by a back bottom right detection sensor 3253 a of the back bottom right decorative board 3253 . When the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a, the back bottom right rotation decoration 3251 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 439). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back bottom right driving motor 3255, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 of the present embodiment transmits the back side through the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotary decoration 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back-bottom-right effect unit 3250 can cause the back-bottom-right rotating decoration 3251 and the back-bottom-right decoration 3252 to emit light by causing a plurality of LEDs of the bottom-right decoration board 3253 to emit light.

[5-9f. Behind the scenes production unit]
Next, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 440 to 447 and the like. FIG. 440(a) is a front perspective view of the back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back-bottom view of the back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit. Fig. 441 is an exploded perspective view of the lifting mechanism for the back-lower middle effect unit and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view. Figure 443 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back middle decoration unit of the lower back middle effect unit and viewed from the front. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 445 is an explanatory diagram showing the lifting and lowering of the lower back decoration body unit by the lower back middle elevating mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. FIG. 446(a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decoration of the back-lower middle decoration unit in the back-lower middle effect unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decoration. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a table showing the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor; FIG. 447 is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, the arrangement of the LEDs of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the lower back middle effect unit.

The back lower middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 . The back bottom middle effect unit 3300 is attached behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 . The back-lower middle effect unit 3300 includes a back-lower middle-hanging decoration unit 3320 having a back-lower middle-rotating decoration 3310 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-lower middle-lifting mechanism for raising and lowering the back-lower middle decoration unit 3320. 3350 and.

The lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower-back middle effect unit 3300 is formed in a regular hexagon shape when viewed from the front. This back-bottom-middle rotary decoration 3310 has six number decorations "1" to "6" formed in a relief shape on the entire surface, which are arranged in circles at every angle of 60 degrees in a clockwise direction centering on the center. placed on the circumference. This back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310 has translucency. The rear lower middle rotary decoration 3310 has a concave portion 3311 that can accommodate the diffusion lens 3321, the lower rear middle first decoration substrate 3322, and the front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323 in the rear lower middle decoration unit 3320 described later. have.

As shown in FIGS. 443 and 444, the lower back center decoration unit 3320 includes a diffusion lens 3321 provided behind the back lower center rotary decoration 3310, and a diffusion lens 3321 provided behind the diffusion lens 3321. A rear lower center first decoration substrate 3322 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and a diffuser lens 3321 are attached so as to sandwich the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 from the rear side, and protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape. and a shaft hole 3324a into which the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is relatively rotatably inserted. a base 3324;

In addition, the lower inner decoration body unit 3320 includes an area detection piece 3325 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extends in a semicircular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference detection piece 3325 that is coaxial with the area detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 protruding from the rotating base 3324 and a spur-shaped rotating gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotating base 3324 are provided.

Further, the back and middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the rotation base 3324 and has a penetrating opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass. a back lower middle decorative body 3328, a back lower middle second decorative substrate 3329 provided behind the back lower middle decorative body 3328 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back lower middle second decorative substrate 3329 A plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that can detect the area detection piece 3325 and a position specifying sensor 3330 that can detect the position detection piece 3326. A sensor 3331 is provided.

In addition, the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the back bottom middle second decoration board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft part 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached, and the back bottom middle decoration body 3328 is attached. a movable base 3332 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3332; A drive gear 3334 in the form of a spur gear meshing with a rotary gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a back-lower-center lifting mechanism 3350 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. and a lifting slider 3336 slidably guided in the vertical direction by a slide rail 3360 .

The diffusing lens 3321, the first decoration board 3322 in the back, and the board fixing member 3323 are positioned between the bottom-center rotating decoration body 3310 and the rotation base 3324 in the assembled state. It is in a state of being accommodated in the concave portion 3311 of the rotary decoration 3310 and is not in contact with either the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 or the rotary base 3324 . By properly lighting the plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322, the number decoration (relief) portion of the lower back center rotary decoration 3310 can be decorated with light. The LEDs of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back and bottom are full-color LEDs. In addition, the LEDs of the second decorative substrate 3329 on the back side are full-color LEDs.

The area detection piece 3325 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 with a diameter larger than that of the rotation gear 3327 . As shown in FIG. 446(a), the area detection piece 3325 is arranged between the number decorations "2" and "3" on the back bottom middle rotating decoration body 3310. It is formed in an arc shape in a range of 180 degrees around the axis of rotation through the numeral decorations to between the numeral decorations "5" and "6".

A plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 each protrude rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on a circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection pieces 3325 . Each position detection piece 3326 is provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each is positioned at the center of the number decoration of the back and middle rotary decoration 3310. . In this embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape with a predetermined angle α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) around the rotation axis. A space of 2×β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) is provided between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis (see FIG. 446(a)). .

A plurality of (three in this case) region specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to line up at an angular interval of θ degrees (60 degrees) centering on the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 . The three area identification sensors 3330 are provided in clockwise order of a first area identification sensor 3330a, a second area identification sensor 3330b, and a third area identification sensor 3330c. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 detect the values of "3", "4", and "5" in a state in which the decoration "1" of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 is positioned directly above the center of rotation. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numeral decoration (see FIG. 446(a)).

The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in the counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis of the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310. ing.

The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from the lower portion of the rear surface. This elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the back, bottom, and middle elevating mechanism 3350 . The back-bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting the rotation position.

The back-lower middle decorative body unit 3320 rotates the back-lower middle-rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotating gear 3327 by rotating the driving gear 3334 with the back-lower middle rotating driving motor 3333. can be done. In addition, the lower back center decoration unit 3320 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first lower back center decoration substrate 3322 and the second lower back center decoration substrate 3329, respectively, so that the lower back center rotary decoration 3310 And the underside inner decoration 3328 can be decorated with light.

As shown in FIGS. 441 and 442 , the back-bottom-middle lifting mechanism 3350 extends to the left and right, and both ends thereof are attached to the back-bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back-bottom right effect unit 3250 . 3352 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3351 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward; A gear-shaped drive gear 3353 , a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354 that meshes with the drive gear 3353 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 , and meshes with the first transmission gear 3354 . A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and an outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a and an elevation cam gear 3356 which has a drive pin 3356b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity thereof and which is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 at the upper center in the left-right direction.

In addition, the base end extending in the left-right direction is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and the driving pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction of the back, bottom, and middle lifting mechanism 3350. A second slit 3357b extending in the longitudinal direction on the distal end side of the first slit 3357a and into which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , and a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip thereof; and a rear lower middle relay board 3358 attached to the front surface.

Further, the rear-lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the lifting cam gear 3356, and the lifting arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having an elevating slit 3359a extending vertically through which an elevating pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 in the decoration unit 3320 is inserted; A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the driving gear 3353 from the rear, and a tip end of the lifting arm 3357 moving upward (frontward). and a spring 3362 biasing the lift arm 3357 to pivot in a clockwise direction with respect to view.

The back bottom center elevation drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably mounted on the right side of the elevating cam gear 3356 at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356 . The elevating arm 3357 extends leftward from the elevating cam gear 3356 at its distal end side.

The back-bottom middle relay board 3358 includes the back-bottom middle first decoration board 3322, the back-bottom middle second decoration board 3329, the area specifying sensor 3330, the position-specifying sensor 3331, the back-lower middle rotation drive motor 3333, and the back-lower middle elevation drive motor. 3352 , the connection between the rear lower middle elevation detection sensor 3358 a and the production drive board 1720 is relayed.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. An elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower inner decoration body unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359 . The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction of the front cover 3359 . With the elevating slits 3359a and the slide rails 3360, the underside inner decoration body unit 3320 can be supported so as to slide straight up and down.

When the driving gear 3353 is rotated by the driving motor 3352, the lifting cam gear 3350 moves through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the lifting cam gear 3356. 3356 can be rotated. Then, the drive pin 3356b that revolves by the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 can rotate the lift arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a into which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The lower back center decoration body unit 3320 can be lifted and lowered together with the back lower center rotary decoration body 3310 via the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 which is slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

Next, a detailed description will be given of the movement of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 in the lower back middle effect unit 3300 . In a normal state, the back-bottom middle effect unit 3300 is in a lowered position where the back-bottom middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the lowest position. In this normal state, the front end of the elevating arm 3357 in the back-lower-middle lifting mechanism 3350 is positioned lower than the base-end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the front end moves the back-lower-middle lifting mechanism 3358 to the back-lower-middle lifting mechanism. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 445(a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 is positioned below its center of revolution, and is positioned near the proximal end of the first slit 3357a of the elevation arm 3357. . More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if the spring 3362 exerts an urging force to rotate the lifting arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the line of force of the urging force is applied to the driving pin 3356b in contact with the first slit 3357a. , the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356 passes through, so the elevation cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 does not revolve, so that the elevation arm 3357 does not rotate, and the underside decoration body unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position due to the biasing force of the spring 3362. The urging force of 3362 does not act on the rear lower/middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the proximal end portion of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lift arm 3357 tries to rotate clockwise due to the biasing force of the spring 3362, the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b causes the lift cam gear 3356 to rotate counterclockwise. try to rotate. At this time, the driving pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the proximal end of the lifting arm 3357, but the driving pin 3356b is in contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. , the driving pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the upward movement of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the normal state, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 has the uppermost number decoration among the plurality of number decorations in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 placed inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is positioned and can be visually recognized well from the front (player's side) (see FIG. 389, etc.). In addition, in a normal state, the lowermost numeric decoration is positioned behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the lower back center first decoration substrate 3322 and the back lower center third decoration are located behind the first starting port 2002. By making the LED of the second decoration substrate 3329 emit light, in addition to the light emission decoration of the back, bottom, and middle rotary decorations, the first start port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be light emission decoration (see FIG. 398, etc.). ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the back, bottom, middle, and lift drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are rotated. As a result, the elevation cam gear 3356 rotates clockwise, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 revolves clockwise. As the driving pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a in contact with the driving pin 3356b is pressed upward, and the driving pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the lifting arm The distal end of 3357 is rotated clockwise around the proximal end so that the distal end of the 3357 moves upward.

As the lifting arm 3357 rotates clockwise, the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the distal end side of the lifting arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. As a result, the lower back inner decoration body unit 3320 moves upward via the lifting pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves above the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the base end side. At this time, since the elevating arm 3357 is biased clockwise by the spring 3362, the biasing force assists the upward movement of the underside decoration unit 3320. The load applied to the lift drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When the drive pin 3356b further revolves clockwise and reaches near the end on the base end side of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the back, bottom, middle, and lift drive motor 3352 stops, and at the same time, the drive The revolution of pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 by the lifting arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 moves to the highest position and is in the raised position.

When the underside decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if a force acts to rotate the elevating arm 3357 counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320, the line of force of that force hits the first slit 3357a. Since the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356 passes through the contacting drive pin 3356b, the elevation cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevation arm 3357 does not rotate, and the underside decoration body unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position. The self-weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the rear lower/middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

In addition, in the state in which the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevation cam gear 3356 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the proximal end portion of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320, the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b causes the elevating cam gear 3356 to move clockwise. Attempt to rotate in the direction of rotation. At this time, the driving pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the proximal side of the lifting arm 3357, but the driving pin 3356b is in contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. , the driving pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the underside decoration body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the state in which the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (furthermore, the game ball rolling in the game area 5a B is located above the rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided in the center accessory 2500 that prevents B from rebounding from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and is positioned forward (the player All numeral decorations can be seen well from the side) (see Fig. 479).

In order to return the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 from the raised position to the lowered position, the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the opposite direction by the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352, and the lifting arm 3357 is rotated. rotates in the counterclockwise direction to move the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 downward from the raised position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the lifting arm 3357 is detected by the rear-lower-middle elevation detection sensor 3358a of the rear-lower-middle relay board 3358, the rear-lower-middle elevation driving motor 3352 stops the rotation of the driving gear 3353. , the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the normal state of the lowered position (furthermore, the center position that prevents the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a from rebounding from the outside of the center frame (surrounding wall portion 2501) to the inside) The rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the overlapping position when viewed from the front in the pachinko machine 1).

The back-bottom middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment rotates the back-bottom middle-rotational driving motor 3333 in the back-bottom middle-decorative body unit 3320 to rotate the drive gear 3334 , thereby rotating the back-bottom middle-rotation decoration body 3310 via the rotation gear 3327 . can be rotated about a longitudinal axis. By rotating the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310, the six number decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette wheel. The back-bottom middle rotary decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the back-bottom middle rotation driving motor 3333 in any position such as the lowered position or the raised position of the back-bottom middle decoration body unit 3320 .

In the normal state, one of the plurality of (here, six) number decorations in the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 is positioned directly above the center of rotation (stop position). are doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 446(a), in a state where the number decoration "1" on the back bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 is positioned above, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is used to identify the first area. Three area-specific sensors 3330, a sensor 3330a, a second area-specific sensor 3330b, and a third area-specific sensor 3330c, are used for detection. is not detected.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. When the numeral decoration “1” is set to the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are connected to the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324. is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 446(b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the numeral decoration of "1" is centered around the stop position. It is located within the range of ±30 degrees.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are detected and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is not detected, the numeral decoration "2" is displayed in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect, the numeral decoration of "3" is displayed in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are non-detecting, the numeral decoration of "4" is displayed within a range of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located inside.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are non-detecting, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detecting, the numeral decoration of "5" is displayed in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a is non-detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the number decoration "6" is in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

In this way, any combination of detection and non-detection of the three area identification sensors 3330, ie, the first area identification sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c, determines which number decoration can determine the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether it is positioned within the stop area including.

Since the back-bottom middle rotation driving motor 3333 of the present embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area specifying sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and rotates 30 degrees, the back-bottom middle rotation driving motor 3333 is rotated by 30 degrees. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired number decoration on the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 at the stop position. However, when performing such control, it is necessary to recognize the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the stop position region by the three region specifying sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of 3310 becomes complicated and the load increases. Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detection strips 3326 are provided. This suppresses the complication of the control for stopping the rotation of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 and reduces the load.

More specifically, when it is desired to stop the back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310 at the stop position of the desired number decoration, the back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 detect the desired stop position. If the combination satisfies the position, the position specifying sensor 3331 is shifted in the rotational direction by an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first area specifying sensor 3330a. ing. In this state, the desired digit is 30 degrees of rotation away from the stop position.

In this state, when the back and middle rotary decoration 3310 is further rotated by α/2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees), which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 is separated from the position specifying sensor 3331. Then, the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detection. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detected is taken as the origin. Then, after rotating β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees) from there (from the origin), the rotation of the lower back middle rotary ornament 3310 by the lower back middle rotation driving motor 3333 is stopped, thereby obtaining the desired number. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

In the above description, the stop of rotation of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 is explained by the angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the lower back middle rotary drive motor 3333 which is a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is 396 steps, in a state in which the combination of the three area specifying sensors 3330 satisfies the desired stop position, the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates 13 steps, the position detection piece 3326 is Moving away from the location sensor 3331, the location sensor 3331 becomes non-sensing. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detected is set as the origin, and when it rotates 20 steps, the rotation of the back-lower middle rotary decoration body 3310 by the back-lower middle-rotation driving motor 3333 is stopped, thereby stopping the desired number decoration. It can be stopped exactly in place.

Next, the light-emitting decoration in the back-lower middle effect unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 447, the back-lower middle production unit 3300 is a back-lower-middle primary decoration unit 3320 mounted with a plurality of LEDs for luminous decoration of the back-lower middle rotating decorations 3310 . It has a decoration substrate 3322 and a second decoration substrate 3329 in the lower back. A plurality of LEDs of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back side are located behind the six number decorations in the rotary decoration in the back side 3310, and each number decoration can be illuminated independently.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back center second decoration substrate 3329 are positioned behind the portion outside the plurality of number decorations on the back lower center rotating decoration 3310, and are located outside the back lower center rotating decoration 3310. The periphery can be decorated with luminescence.

As described above, this back-lower middle effect unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three area specifying sensors 3330. Therefore, based on the detection of the area specifying sensors 3330 By properly illuminating a plurality of LEDs on the back and inside first decoration substrate 3322, only specific number decorations are illuminated, or each number decoration is illuminated in a different color, and rotated. It is possible to show the player an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

In addition, when the lower back center decoration body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the number decoration on the lower side of the lower back center rotary decoration body 3310 is located behind the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, By illuminating the corresponding part of the LED on the back and middle first decoration substrate 3322, the first starting port 2002 can be decorated with light. This allows the player's interest to be directed to the first start port 2002 . In addition, when the game ball B has won the first start port 2002, the LED of the first decoration board 3322 in the back and bottom is emitted (or one emission mode is determined from among a plurality of emission modes to emit light. ).

As described above, according to the lower back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the rotating lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions can detect an area having a length covering three stop positions. A piece 3325 and six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position are provided, and three area identification sensors 3330 for detecting the area detection pieces 3325 and one position identification sensor for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the sensors 3331 and 3331 are provided, when the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates, the three area-specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area-detecting pieces 3325 sequentially increase from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. By repeating this process, all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detection once, and the area detection pieces 3325 are detected even until the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. The combination of the area specifying sensors 3330 that are connected allows the current rotational position of the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 to be roughly grasped.

Since the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 is provided with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area-specifying sensors 3330 causes the back-lower middle rotation. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331, and the deviation of the stop position can be corrected. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 having a plurality of stop positions as few as possible.

In addition, since the stop position of the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back-lower middle-rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to entertain the performance (movable performance) by the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is increased, the stop position deviation can be suppressed, and the back By rotating the lower middle rotary decoration 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 is increased compared to the case where the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is reciprocated. can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest, and the rotation of the back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can be strongly attracted. It is possible to amuse the player and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of number decorations are provided on the front surface, the rotation of the roulette is stopped at an arbitrary stop position after rotating in circles. Since it is possible to show such an effect to the player, it is possible to excite the player depending on whether or not the desired number decoration stops rotating at the stop position. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position , and the number of stop positions of the back and middle rotary decorations 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasping of stop positions) of the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and there are more stop positions. The back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress the loss of interest.

Furthermore, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the back and middle rotary decorative body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be changed. It is possible to further increase the positioning accuracy of the stop position.

In the above-described embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally (together with) the back-lower-middle rotary decorative body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. Without limitation, the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member such as the drive gear 3334 that rotates with the rotation of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 .

[5-9g. Backstage production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 448 to 455 and the like. FIG. 448(a) is a front perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 448(b) is a rear perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 449 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 450 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. be. Fig. 451 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back elevating decorative body unit in the upper back effect unit and is seen from the front. It is a diagram.

FIG. 453 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotary decoration in the back-up production unit. FIG. 454(a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the lifting mechanism of the upper lifting decorative body unit in the upper rear effect unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of a raising/lowering decoration body unit, and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotary decoration body from a front. FIG. 455 is an explanatory view showing the decoration substrate from the front in a state in which the upward lifting decorative body unit is moved to the appearing position in the upward rear effect unit.

The back up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back back effect unit 3100 . As shown in FIGS. 449 and 450, the back top effect unit 3400 includes a back top front rotating ornament 3410 having an axis shaft 3410a projecting rearward from the center of the back surface, and a back top front rotating ornament 3410. A rear upper front decoration body 3421 extending in the left and right direction through which the shaft shaft 3410a penetrates in the center in the left-right direction, and a rear upper front decoration body 3421 provided behind the rear upper front decoration body 3421 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A front decoration board 3422 and a back top front decoration body 3421 are provided behind the back top front decoration board 3422, and a back top front decoration body 3421 is attached to the front side to rotatably support the shaft 3410a of the back top front rotary decoration body 3410. and a unit base 3423 that

In addition, the rear effect unit 3400 is mounted between a rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space with the rear surface of the unit base 3423, and a unit base 3423 having a rotation axis in front of the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. A rear upper front rotation drive motor 3425 attached so as to protrude into the space of the rear upper front rotation drive motor 3425, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear upper front rotation drive motor 3425, and meshing with the drive gear 3426 A rotating gear 3427 having a spur gear-like shape and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and having a detecting piece 3427a projecting forward, and a back upper front decoration substrate 3422. and a rear upper rotation detection sensor 3428 attached to the rear surface of the rotary gear 3427 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, the rear side effect unit 3400 includes a rear side lifting drive motor 3429 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotating shaft protrudes into the space between the front unit base 3423, and a rear side lifting drive motor 3429. A spur-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of a motor 3429, a gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and a portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a penetrates the rear cover 3424. an elevation cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to a rear cover 3424 and having a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape and a detection piece 3431c protruding forward from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a; , a rear upper elevation detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the rear upper front decoration substrate 3422 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431, and a elevation cam gear 3431 at the tip side where the rear upper rear rotary decoration 3440 is provided. A back up elevating decoration unit 3450 whose base end side is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so as to be rotatable about the axis in the front-back direction so that it moves up and down by the revolution of the driving pin 3431b of the back up elevating decoration unit 3450 A spring 3433 is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 to urge the 3450 so that the front end side of the 3450 rotates upward, and the upward movement of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is restricted. and a bar-shaped restricting member 3434 that is engaged.

As shown in FIGS. 451 and 452, the upper back lifting decoration unit 3450 is a rear upper rear decoration in which an axial shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the upper rear rotary decoration 3440 penetrates at the center. A body 3451, a back top decoration board 3452 provided behind the top back decoration body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top back decoration body 3451 from behind the top back decoration board 3452. is attached to the front surface, and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3423 to rotatably support the shaft 3440a of the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440.

In addition, the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 includes a back upper rear rotation driving motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotation shaft of the back upper rear rotation driving motor 3454. A spur gear-shaped driving gear 3455 attached to the driving gear 3455, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 meshing with the driving gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456 A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3457 that is rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453 and the shaft shaft 3440a of the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3457 and a spur-like rotating gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

Furthermore, the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is attached to the rear surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the driving gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458 from behind. 3459, and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the lifting unit base 3453 so as to cover the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back top front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back top effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape resembling a cherry blossom and has translucency. An axial shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 penetrates the back upper front decoration 3421, the back upper front decoration substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and extends through the unit base 3423 and the rear. It extends to the space between the cover 3424 . The back upper front decoration 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper front rotating decoration 3410 placed in the center in the horizontal direction, and the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it is rotated so that it is positioned in the The entire back upper front decoration 3421 has translucency.

The back top front decoration substrate 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the back top front decoration body 3421 in the left-right direction. By illuminating the LED of the back top front decorative substrate 3422, the back top rotary decoration 3410 and the back top front decoration 3421 can be decorated with light. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper front decoration board 3422 are full-color LEDs.

The unit base 3423 has a through-hole 3423a through which the upper back rotation detection sensor 3428 and the upper back elevation detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the upper front decoration board 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 is coaxial with the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410, and has a cylindrical support shaft 3424a projecting rearward from the rear surface, and an arcuate shape through which the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 is inserted. and an elongated slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453. As shown in FIG.

A detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 is detected by a rear upper rotation detection sensor 3428 which penetrates through a through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward. The elevation cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semicircular arc shape, and a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward is provided at a portion that protrudes outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The driving pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevation unit base 3453 of the rear upper elevation decorative body unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by a rear elevation detection sensor 3432 that penetrates through the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward.

The back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. A shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the upper back rotary decoration 3440 penetrates the upper back decoration 3451, the upper back decoration substrate 3452, and the elevation unit base 3453 to extend through the elevation unit base 3453. extends to the rear of the The back top rear decoration 3451 stacks two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 in front and behind, and rotates so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it has been made. The rear upper back decoration body 3451 has translucency as a whole.

The back top decoration board 3452 can make the top back rotary decorations 3440 and the back top decorations 3451 emit light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The LEDs of the back top decoration board 3452 are full-color LEDs.

The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a through which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so that the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is relatively rotatable. and an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. In the slit 3453b of the elevation unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted. The motor cover 3460 has a cherry blossom-like decoration on the front surface.

Next, the movement of the back top front rotary decoration 3410, the back top rear rotation decoration 3440, and the back top lifting decoration unit 3450 in the back top effect unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state of the back side effect unit 3400, the detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 attached to the shaft 3410a of the back side front rotary decoration 3410 is detected by the back side rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 453). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back top front rotation drive motor 3425, the back top front rotation decoration body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, in a normal state, the back upper elevating decoration unit 3450 having the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 provided on the tip side extends in the left-right direction, and the whole except the tip side is It is positioned behind the back upper front decoration 3421 and is in a retracted position that is invisible from the front (see FIG. 454(a)). In addition, the part of the back upper elevating decoration unit 3450 protruding leftward from the back upper front decoration 3421 is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 in the state assembled to the game board 5, Not visible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431 c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the rear elevation detection sensor 3432 . In addition, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 is located below the center of revolution, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevation unit base 3453 of the rear elevation decoration unit 3450. positioned.

More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431 b of the elevation cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453 b extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431 . As a result, even if a force acts to rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward due to the weight of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450, the force is not applied. Since the line of force passes through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b in contact with the slit 3453b, the elevation cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 does not revolve either, the elevation unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back upper elevation decoration body unit 3450 rotates from the retracted position so that the tip side moves downward. no. Therefore, the weight of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back upper elevating drive motor 3429 via the elevating unit base 3453 and the elevating cam gear 3431 .

In a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the rear lifting decorative body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 rotates counterclockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b through the drive pin 3431b. Attempt to rotate in the direction of rotation. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b abuts on the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the driving pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, so that the counterclockwise rotation of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented. .

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear elevation drive motor 3429, the elevation cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. As a result, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise. As the driving pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the driving pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the driving pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. The vertical lifting unit base 3453 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3453a by the weight of the rear lifting decorative body unit 3450 so that the tip side thereof moves downward.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise and moves above the straight line connecting the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b It slides in the slit 3453b in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. Then, when the drive pin 3431b revolves further clockwise and reaches near the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the motor gear 3430 is stopped from rotating by the rear elevation drive motor 3429, and the drive pin 3431b is rotated. stops revolving.

As a result, the counterclockwise rotation of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 via the elevating unit base 3453 is stopped, and the tip side of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 including the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 is moved. 454(b)). In this appearance position state, the tip side of the upper back up/down decoration unit 3450 is positioned lower than the front upper back decoration 3421 from the vicinity of the center, so that the upper back rotation decoration 3440 and the like are visible from the front. becomes possible.

In the state in which the back-upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is at the appearing position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the driving pin 3431b with the slit 3453b extends through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 . As a result, even if a force is applied to further rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450, the line of force of that force hits the slit 3453b. Since the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431 passes through the contacting drive pin 3431b, the elevation cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevation unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the rear elevation decoration unit 3450 rotates counterclockwise so that the tip side moves downward from the appearance position. , and the weight of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back upper elevating drive motor 3429 via the elevating cam gear 3431 .

In addition, when the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearing position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3431b into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate further counterclockwise due to the weight of the rear lifting decorative body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 rotates clockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b through the driving pin 3431b. Attempt to rotate in the direction of rotation. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b abuts on the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the driving pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, so that the counterclockwise rotation of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented. .

When the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position side, the back upper back rotating decoration body 3440 provided on the tip side becomes visible from the front. In the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, the rear upper rear rotation decoration is rotated via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. Body 3440 can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 454(b)). Therefore, when the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 is visible from the front, by rotating the driving gear 3455 by the back top rear rotation driving motor 3454, the rotating back top rear rotary decoration 3440 can be visually recognized. .

When the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the opposite direction by the back upper elevating drive motor 3429, so that the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 moves up and down. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the lifting unit base 3453 rotates clockwise, and the front end side of the back lifting decorative body unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the rear elevation detection sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the rear elevation driving motor 3429 is stopped, thereby moving the rear elevation elevation decoration unit 3450 to the retracted position. can be restored.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the upper back elevating decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assisting the rotation of the upper elevating back decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, and elevating the upper back. The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 455, the back side effect unit 3400 of the present embodiment is provided with the back side front decoration substrate 3422 behind the back side front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back side front decoration body 3421. By properly emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decoration substrate 3422, the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421 can be decorated with light. In addition, since the back top decoration board 3452 is provided behind the back top back rotary decoration body 3440 and the back top back decoration body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back top back decoration board 3452 are appropriately emitted. By doing so, it is possible to light-embellish the back top rotating decoration body 3440 and the back top back decoration body 3451 .

At this time, in a state in which the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearing position side, the LED of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452 is caused to emit light, so that the back upper rear rotation decoration which is light-emitting decorated. The body 3440 and the back top decoration 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back left production unit]
Next, the back-left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. FIG. 456(a) is a front perspective view of the rear left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 457 is an exploded perspective view of the back left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 458 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 459 is an exploded perspective view of the back left decoration unit of the back left effect unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 460 is the exploded back left decoration unit of the back left effect unit from the back. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 461 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear-left effect unit from the front. FIG. 462 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-left decoration unit in the back-left effect unit.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100 . The back-left direction effect unit 3500 includes a back-left rotating decorative body 3510 having translucency that can rotate about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back side that rotatably supports the back-left rotating decorative body 3510 on the lower end side. A rear left decoration unit 3520 and a rear left rear drive unit 3550 mounted in the rear box 3010 for rotating the upper end side of the rear left decoration unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided. .

The back-left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back-left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape resembling a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back left rotation decoration 3510 has a columnar shaft 3510a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface (see FIG. 460).

459 and 460, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 includes a back rear left decoration 3521 through which the shaft 3510a of the back rear left rotating decoration 3510 penetrates at the center, and a back rear left decoration. A rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear left decorative board 3522 attached to the rear side of the rear left decorative body 3521 from the rear of the rear left decorative board 3522. , a front cover 3523 that rotatably supports the shaft 3510a of the back rear left rotary ornament 3510, and a front cover 3523 attached to the rear side of the front cover 3523, the upper end side of which is rotatable to the back rear left drive unit 3550. and a movable base 3524 to which it is attached.

In addition, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a rear rear left rotation driving motor 3525 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that the rotating shaft protrudes between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and a rear rear left rotary drive motor 3525. A drive gear 3526 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of a left rotation drive motor 3525 and a spur gear 3526 engaged with the drive gear 3526 and attached to the rear end of an axial shaft 3510a of a back rear left rotation decoration 3510 A gear-shaped rotary gear 3527 is provided.

The rear left decorative body 3521 of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 has translucency. The side petals are formed in a rotated shape so that they lie between the front petals. The plurality of LEDs on the rear left decorative substrate 3522 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape that combines a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the rear left decorative body 3521 in a front view and a portion extending upward from the upper left of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of the portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3523 is formed in the shape of a shallow container that opens rearward.

The movable base 3524 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523 , and the upper end side thereof extends upward beyond the upper end of the front cover 3523 . The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3524b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape away from the shaft hole 3524a. A support shaft 3551a of a reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3524b protrudes forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotation drive motor 3525, the left back back decoration body unit 3520 rotates the left back back decoration body 3510 through the rotation gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. Can be rotated around an axis of orientation.

As shown in FIGS. 457 and 458, the back left driving unit 3550 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a for rotatably supporting the back left decoration unit 3520. , a vertically extending unit base 3552 attached to the front surface of a reinforcing plate 3551 and attached inside the back box 3010; a unit cover 3553 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3552; A back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 mounted so that its shaft protrudes between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear mounted on the rotation shaft of the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 3555 and .

In addition, the rear rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with a motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to a unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. , a drive pin 3557b projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a, and a detection piece 3557c projecting forward from near the front periphery of the gear portion 3557a; A first slit 3558a extending horizontally into which a drive pin 3557b of 3557 is slidably inserted, and an operating pin 3524b of a movable base 3524 in the back rear left decoration unit 3520 extending horizontally below the first slit 3558a. has a second slit 3558b into which is slidably inserted, and a link member 3558 attached between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553 so as to be vertically slidable.

Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that biases the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevation cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. 3553, a back rear left relay board 3561 attached to the front surface of the rear rear left relay board 3561; It has

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is a vertically extending metal plate, and a support shaft 3551a protrudes forward from the top. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decoration body unit 3520 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3552 extends longer in the vertical direction than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is positioned near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the unit base 3552, and is formed in a shallow container shape that opens rearward.

The elevation cam gear 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558 with the drive pin 3557b passing through the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560 . The detection piece 3557c is detected by a back rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically and has a first slit 3558a near its upper end and a second slit 3558b near its lower end. The spring 3559 has its lower end attached to the link member 3558 and its upper end attached to the partition plate 3560 .

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular arc through which the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 is inserted. The rear left relay board 3561 relays the connection between the rear left decoration board 3522, the rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rear left elevation drive motor 3554, the rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for

Next, the operation of the rear-left effect unit 3500 will be described. 461 and 462(a), the back-left effect unit 3500 has a back-left rotary decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side (tip side) in a normal state. The unit 3520 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the rear front left effect unit 3700 and is invisible from the front (player side). It's becoming

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back-left effect unit 3500 is located behind the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-front left effect unit 3700, and the back-left elevating drive motor. Only part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 409, etc.). In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the part facing the front of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is covered with the part outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3, so that the player can becomes invisible from the side (see Figure 413).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557 c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 . Also, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 is positioned directly below the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3557 and positioned near the left end of the link member 3558 in the first slit 3558a. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is positioned at the lower movement end, and the operating pin 3524b positioned to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is It is positioned near the left end of the link member 3558 in the second slit 3558b.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged upward by the spring 3559, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the driving pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 that is in contact with the first slit 3558a is Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3557 (the revolution center of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b through the first slit 3558a due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 never moves upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the rear left decoration unit 3520 (back left rotary decoration 3510) moves from the retracted position about the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3559 does not act on the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557 and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 attempts to move upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the elevation cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the leftward direction. cannot revolve, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevation cam gear 3557, and the rotation of the back rear left decoration body unit 3520 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 rotates the motor gear 3555 counterclockwise, the elevation cam gear 3557 rotates counterclockwise via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. As a result, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 revolves counterclockwise. When the drive pin 3557b revolves counterclockwise, it slides rightward in the first slit 3558a while pushing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will happen.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the rear left decoration unit 3520 protruding below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. , and while the operating pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, the movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a, and the rear left decorative body unit 3520 moves. It rotates counterclockwise from the retracted position (see FIGS. 462(a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3559, and the load applied to the back rear left elevation driving motor 3554 is reduced.

In this way, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a, so that the rear left rotary decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side moves rightward. As a result, the back-left rotating decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back-front-left effect unit 3700 and becomes visible from the front (player's side).

In the rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the rotation of the rear left decoration unit 3520 when the elevation cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (retracted position). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 462(b)). In the state of the first appearing position, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees counterclockwise from the retracted position.

When the elevation cam gear 3557 further rotates counterclockwise from the first appearing position, the driving pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to just above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, and the counterclockwise rotation of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is stopped, resulting in the state of the second appearing position (Fig. 462 (c) )). In the state of the second appearing position, the back left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated counterclockwise by about 74 degrees from the state of the retracted position.

The drive pin 3557b is positioned directly above the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3557 when the back rear left decoration body unit 3520 is in the second appearing position. In this state, the weight of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 causes a force to rotate the left rear decorative body unit 3520 in the clockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a. The link member 3558 tries to move downward through the operating pin 3524b of 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the driving pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is positioned right above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevation cam gear 3557 does not rotate, so the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates from the second appearing position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the back left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the back left lifting drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557, and the like.

When the rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearing position, the elevation cam gear 3557 is further rotated counterclockwise so that the driving pin 3557b contacts the left end of the first slit 3558a. Also good. As a result, when the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 attempts to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a by its own weight, the link member 3558 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3524b. A force acting from the one slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b causes the elevation cam gear 3557 to rotate counterclockwise. At this time, the driving pin 3557b tries to revolve to move leftward, but since the driving pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the driving pin 3557b cannot revolve. Without this, the downward movement of the link member 3558 is blocked, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 can be unrotatably locked in the state of the second appearing position.

When the back left decoration unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back left rotation decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). becomes visible from

In this rear left decorative body unit 3520, the driving gear 3526 is rotated by the rear left rotational drive motor 3525, so that the left rear rear rotational decorative body 3510 is rotated via the rotating gear 3527 meshing with the driving gear 3526. It can rotate about an anterior-posterior axis (see Fig. 461). Therefore, when the back left rotating decorative body 3510 is visible from the front (player's side), if the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotating drive motor 3525, the rotating back left rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the rear left decorative body unit 3520 from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3555 is rotated by the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction of , the link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557. As the link member 3558 moves downward, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 moves. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562, the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear rear left elevation driving motor 3554 is stopped, thereby retracting the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520. It can be returned to the state of position.

As shown in FIG. 461, the back-left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with a back-left decorative substrate 3522 behind the back-left rotary decoration 3510 and the back-left left decoration 3521. By appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back left decoration substrate 3522 to emit light, the back left rotating decoration 3510 and the back left decoration 3521 can be decorated with light. At this time, the rear left decoration unit 3520 is turned from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, and the LED of the rear left decoration substrate 3522 is caused to emit light, thereby producing light emitting decoration. The back-left rotating ornament 3510 and the back-left left ornament 3521 can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Back rear right production unit]
Next, the back-right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 463 to 469 and the like. FIG. 463(a) is a front perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 464 is an exploded perspective view of the right back-right effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a diagram. Figure 466 is an exploded perspective view of the back right decoration unit of the back rear right effect unit and viewed from the front. Figure 467 is an exploded view of the back right decoration unit of the back rear right effect unit. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 468 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the back-right effect unit from the front. FIG. 469 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-right decoration unit in the back-right effect unit.

The back right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back back effect unit 3100 . The back right direction effect unit 3600 includes a back right rotation decorative body 3610 having translucency that can rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction, and a back side that rotatably supports the back right rotation decoration body 3610 on the lower end side. A rear right decoration unit 3620 and a rear rear right drive unit 3650 mounted in the rear box 3010 for rotating the upper end side of the rear right decoration unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided. .

The back-right rotation decorative body 3610 of the back-right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape resembling a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back rear right rotation ornament 3610 has a columnar shaft 3610a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface (see FIG. 466).

As shown in FIGS. 466 and 467, the back rear right decoration unit 3620 includes a back rear right decoration 3621 through which the shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 penetrates at the center, and a back rear right decoration. A rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear right decorative board 3622 attached to the rear side of the rear right decorative body 3621. , a front cover 3623 that rotatably supports the shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and the front cover 3623 is attached to the rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side is rotatable to the back rear right driving unit 3650. and a movable base 3624 to which it is attached.

In addition, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a rear rear right rotation driving motor 3625 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that the rotating shaft protrudes between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623; A drive gear 3626 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotation shaft of a right rotation drive motor 3625 and a drive gear 3626 meshing with the drive gear 3626 and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 A gear-shaped rotating gear 3627 is provided.

The rear right decoration 3621 of the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 has translucency. The side petals are formed in a rotated shape so that they lie between the front petals. A plurality of LEDs on the rear right decorative substrate 3622 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape that combines a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the rear right decorative body 3621 in a front view and a portion extending upward from the upper right of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of the portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3623 is shaped like a shallow container that opens rearward.

The movable base 3624 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623 , and the upper end side thereof extends upward beyond the upper end of the front cover 3623 . The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3624b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape away from the shaft hole 3624a. A support shaft 3651a of a reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3624b protrudes forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the rear right rotation driving motor 3625, the right rear rear decoration body unit 3620 rotates the right rear rear decoration body 3610 through the rotation gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. Can be rotated around an axis of orientation.

As shown in FIGS. 464 and 465, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a for rotatably supporting the rear right decoration unit 3620. , a vertically extending unit base 3652 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and attached in the back box 3010, a vertically extending unit cover 3653 having an upper portion attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652, and a unit cover A back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is attached to the upper front surface of the 3653 so that the rotation shaft protrudes between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653, and the rotation shaft of the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is attached. and a motor gear 3655 having a spur gear shape.

In addition, the rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a gear portion 3657a in the shape of a spur gear meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. A lift cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from near the outer circumference, a first slit 3658a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. It has a second slit 3658b extending left and right under the 3658a and into which the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decoration unit 3620 is slidably inserted. and a link member 3658 attached so as to be vertically slidable between.

Further, the back rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 that biases the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevation cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. 3653, a rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of the rear rear right relay board 3661, a rear rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 mounted to the rear surface of the rear rear right relay board 3661 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657, A lower base 3663 is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652 and the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

A reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3651a protrudes forward from the upper portion. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decorative body unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3652 extends above the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the supporting shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically with substantially the same length from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is shaped like a shallow container that opens rearward.

The elevation cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 with the drive pin 3657b passing through the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660 . The detection piece 3657c is detected by a rear rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically and has a first slit 3658a near its upper end and a second slit 3658b near its lower end. The spring 3659 has its lower end attached to the link member 3658 and its upper end attached to the partition plate 3660 .

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular arc through which the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 is inserted. The rear-right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the rear-right decoration board 3622, the rear-right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear-right elevation drive motor 3654, the rear-right elevation detection sensor 3662, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for

Next, the operation of the back-right effect unit 3600 will be described. The back right effect unit 3600, in a normal state, has a back right rotating ornament 3610 provided on the lower end side (front end side), as shown in FIGS. 468 and 469(a). The unit 3620 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is positioned behind the back front right effect unit 3800 and is invisible from the front (player side). It's becoming

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the right front decorative body 3040 and the right rear effect unit 3800, and the whole is forward (player side). is not visible from

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657 c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 . Also, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 is positioned directly below the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3657 and positioned near the right end of the link member 3658 in the first slit 3658a. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3658 is positioned at the lower movement end, and the operating pin 3624b positioned to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is It is located near the right end of the link member 3658 in the second slit 3658b.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged upward by the spring 3659, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 that is in contact with the first slit 3658a is Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the rear right decoration unit 3620 (rear rear right rotation decoration 3610) moves from the retracted position about the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevation cam gear 3657 and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 tries to move upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the lift cam gear 3657 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the driving pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the rightward direction. cannot revolve, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevation cam gear 3657, and the rotation of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated counterclockwise by the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654, the elevation cam gear 3657 rotates clockwise via the gear portion 3657a. drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise. When the drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise, it slides leftward in the first slit 3658a while pressing upward the inner surface of the first slit 3658a, and the link member 3658 moves upward. becomes.

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear right decoration unit 3620 protruding below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. As the operating pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, the movable base 3624 rotates clockwise about the support shaft 3651a, and the rear right decoration unit 3620 retreats. It will rotate clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 469(a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3659, and the load applied to the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is reduced.

In this way, the rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, so that the rear right rotary decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves leftward. As it moves upward, the back-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 moves to the left of the back-front-right effect unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the back right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rotation position of the back right decorative body unit 3620 when the elevation cam gear 3657 is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (retracted position state). is the first appearance position (see FIG. 469(b)). In the state of the first appearing position, the back right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated clockwise by about 44 degrees from the state of the retracted position.

When the elevation cam gear 3657 further rotates clockwise from the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides rightward within the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to just above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, and the clockwise rotation of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is stopped, resulting in the state of the second appearing position (Fig. 469(c)). ). In the state of the second appearing position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated clockwise by about 74 degrees from the state of the retracted position.

The drive pin 3657b is located directly above the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3657 when the rear right decoration body unit 3620 is in the second appearing position. In this state, the weight of the right back decoration unit 3620 causes a force to rotate the right back decoration unit 3620 about the support shaft 3651a in the counterclockwise direction. The link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operating pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the driving pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is positioned just above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevation cam gear 3657 does not rotate, so the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates from the second appearing position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the rear right elevation driving motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevation cam gear 3657, and the like.

In addition, in the state where the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevation cam gear 3657 may be further rotated clockwise to bring the drive pin 3657b into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the rear right decorative body unit 3620 attempts to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a by its own weight, the link member 3658 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3624b. A force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b causes the elevation cam gear 3657 to rotate clockwise. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b cannot revolve. Without this, the downward movement of the link member 3658 is blocked, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be unrotatably locked in the state of the second appearing position.

In a state in which the rear right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the rear rear right rotation decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). becomes visible from

In this back right decoration body unit 3620, the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back right rotation drive motor 3625, so that the back right rotation decoration body 3610 is rotated through the rotation gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 468). Therefore, when the rear right rotating decorative body 3610 is visible from the front (player's side), when the driving gear 3626 is rotated by the right rear rotating driving motor 3625, the rotating right rear rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3655 is rotated by the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction of , the link member 3658 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657, and as the link member 3658 moves downward, the rear right decoration unit 3620 moves. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear rear right elevation detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear rear right elevation driving motor 3654 is stopped, thereby retracting the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620. It can be returned to the state of position.

As shown in FIG. 468, the back rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear right decoration substrate 3622 behind the back rear right rotating decoration 3610 and the back rear right decoration 3621. By appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-right decoration substrate 3622 to emit light, the back-right rotating decoration 3610 and the back-right decoration 3621 can be decorated with light. At this time, in a state in which the rear right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the LED of the rear rear right decoration substrate 3622 is caused to emit light. The back-right rotating ornament 3610 and the back-right right ornament 3621 can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Back front left production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 470 to 473 and the like. FIG. 470(a) is a front perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 471 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decoration unit in the back front left effect unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 472 is an exploded back front left decoration unit in the back front left effect unit. and is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 473(a) is a front view showing the closed state of the shutter group in the back front left effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the open state of the shutter group in the back front left effect unit.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back box 3010 so that the vicinity of the left end is positioned behind the back front left decorative body 3030 . The back-front-left effect unit 3700 includes three back-front-left decorations in order from the top: a first back-front-left decoration unit 3710A, a second back-front-left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back-front-left decoration unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710 .

In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 473, the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C. It is slanted so that the upper end side moves to the right. Also, the shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is slightly different from those of the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 471 and 472, the back-front-left decoration unit 3710 of the back-front-left effect unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. A shutter support member 3712 having a shape is arranged vertically on the front surface of the shutter support member 3712 and supported so as to be rotatable about an axis in the horizontal direction so that the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed within the frame. A shutter unit 3730 is provided.

In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3710 closes the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and is composed of a translucent plate-shaped back front left decoration 3713 and a back front left decoration 3713 . A back front left decorative board 3714 provided at the back and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back rear left effect unit attached to a front cover 3711 so as to cover the back front left decorative board 3714 from the back. a rear cover 3715 attached to the front of the 3500;

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, a back front left A transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and a support plate 3716 are attached so as to be rotatable around a horizontal axis. It is provided with a link member 3719 that rotates, and an opening/closing slider 3720 that slides vertically as the link member 3719 rotates to open and close the shutter unit 3730 .

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is formed in a shape (a shape stylized as a "pine tree") in which the corners are rounded by tilting the letter "convex" to the right. The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712 a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3733 of the shutter members 3731 in the shutter unit 3730 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from near the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening/closing slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip.

The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731 . The shutter member 3731 includes a flat plate-like shutter 3732 extending in the left and right direction, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a columnar shape from both left and right ends of the shutter 3732, and a left shaft portion 3733 protruding from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733 in the direction perpendicular to the axis and then extending to the left. and a crankshaft 3734 extending cylindrically in the direction.

The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3711 . The shaft portion 3733 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located behind the shaft portion 3733 .

The shaft portion 3733 of the shutter member 3731 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712, so that the shutter member 3731 can rotate around the shaft portion 3733 in the horizontal direction. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening/closing slider 3720. As shown in FIG.

Although illustration is omitted, the back front left decorative body 3713 has patterns such as characters, items, logos, etc. along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 . The back front left decoration 3713 can diffuse the light from the LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 . The plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are full color LEDs.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with its plate surface directed in the left-right direction, and has a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. The support plate 3716 has a portion bent rightward on the front end side attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. there is The support plate 3716 also has a columnar support pin 3716a that protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719. As shown in FIG.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716, the link member 3719 can rotate about the axis in the horizontal direction around the support pin 3716a. The link member 3719 has a first connection portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with the support pin 3716a inserted therebetween, and a second connection portion 3719a connected to the opening/closing slider 3720. A connecting portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3720 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3730 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3731, and has a transmission groove into which each crank shaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is vertically slidably inserted.

Next, the operation of the back front left effect unit 3700 will be described. In the normal state of the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732 of the closed state. In this normal state, the back front left ornament 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (player's side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (the plurality of shutters 3732) has a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front left decorative body 3713. It is

In a normal state, the back front left driving solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. In a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3720 is positioned at the upper movement end, and the crank shaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is positioned above the shaft portion 3733 .

In this normal state, when the back front left driving solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to As the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connection portion 3719b opposite to the first connection portion 3719a moves downward. The downward movement of the second connection portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening/closing slider 3720 connected to the second connection portion 3719b to move downward.

When the opening/closing slider 3720 moves downward, the crank shaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crank shaft 3734 is positioned below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates around the shaft portion 3733 . As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 faces the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the front cover 3711 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is opened. The left ornament 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 473(b)).

After that, by deenergizing (OFF) the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the plunger, which had been moving upward, moves downward due to the biasing force of the spring. The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front left effect unit 3700 of the present embodiment, the shutter unit 3730 is opened and closed by the back front left driving solenoid 3717 , so that the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3730 is changed to the back front left decorative body 3713 . The decoration (picture) can be switched to a different decoration (picture), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, since the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be illuminated when the shutter unit 3730 is closed. , the shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 are caused to emit light, thereby displaying the back front left decorated with light emission. The ornament 3713 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front left effect unit 3700, there are three back front left decoration units: a first back front left decoration unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration unit 3710C. 3710 can independently open and close the shutter unit 3730 and can be decorated with light emission, so that by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, a variety of effects can be provided to the player. I can show you.

[5-9k. Back front right production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 474 to 477 and the like. FIG. 474(a) is a front perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit. Figure 475 is an exploded perspective view of one back-front-right decoration unit in the back-front-right effect unit and viewed from the front, and Figure 476 is an exploded view of one back-front-right decoration unit in the back-front-right effect unit. and is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 477(a) is a front view showing the closed state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the open state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit.

The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010 so that the upper part near the right end is positioned behind the back front right decorative body 3040. . The back-front-right effect unit 3800 has three back-front-right decorations in order from the top: a first back-front-right decoration unit 3810A, a second back-front-right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back-front-right decoration unit 3810C. It is composed of body unit 3810 .

In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 477, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is slanted so that the upper end side moves to the left. Also, the shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is slightly different from those of the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 475 and 476, the back front right decoration unit 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating back and forth and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. A shutter support member 3812 having a shape is arranged vertically on the front surface of the shutter support member 3812, and each member is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3830 is provided.

In addition, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear side, and includes a translucent plate-like back front right decorative body 3813 and a back front right decorative body 3813 . A back front right decorative board 3814 is provided at the rear and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a back front right effect unit is attached to a front cover 3811 so as to cover the back front right decorative board 3814 from the back. a rear cover 3815 attached to the front of the 3600;

Further, the back front right decoration body unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816. A transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger of the right drive solenoid 3817 and a support plate 3816 are attached so as to be rotatable around a horizontal axis. It has a rotatable link member 3819 and an opening/closing slider 3820 that slides vertically as the link member 3819 rotates to open and close the shutter unit 3830 .

A front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 is formed in a shape (a shape stylized as a “pine tree”) in which the corners are rounded by tilting the letter “convex” to the left. The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812 a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3833 of the shutter members 3831 in the shutter unit 3830 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from near the right end of the front surface. This boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening/closing slider 3820, and a support plate 3816 is attached to its tip.

The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831 . The shutter member 3831 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending in the left and right direction, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a cylindrical shape from both left and right ends of the shutter 3832, and a right shaft portion 3833 protruding from the tip of the right shaft portion 3833 in the direction perpendicular to the axis and then extending to the right. and a crankshaft 3834 extending cylindrically in the direction of.

The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3811 . The shaft portion 3833 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located behind the shaft portion 3833 .

The shaft portion 3833 of the shutter member 3831 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812, so that the shutter member 3831 can rotate around the shaft portion 3833 in the horizontal direction. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening/closing slider 3820. As shown in FIG.

Although illustration is omitted, the back front right decorative body 3813 has patterns such as characters, items, logos, etc. along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 . The back front right decoration 3813 can diffuse the light from the LED of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 . The plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are full color LEDs.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with its plate surface directed in the left-right direction, and its front end side is bent leftward. The support plate 3816 has a left bent front end portion attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. there is In addition, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a projecting leftward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the lower end. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819. As shown in FIG.

The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate about the axis in the horizontal direction around the support pin 3816a. The link member 3819 has a first connection portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with the support pin 3816a inserted therebetween, and a second connection portion 3819a connected to the opening/closing slider 3820. A connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3820 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3830 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3831, and has a transmission groove into which each crank shaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is vertically slidably inserted.

Next, the operation of the back front right effect unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 477(a), the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 faces forward. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832 of the closed state. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front (player's side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832) has a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front right decorative body 3813. It is

In a normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. In a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3820 is positioned at the upper movement end, and the crank shaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is positioned above the shaft portion 3833 .

In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. move to As the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connection portion 3819b opposite to the first connection portion 3819a moves downward. The downward movement of the second connection portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening/closing slider 3820 connected to the second connection portion 3819b to move downward.

When the opening/closing slider 3820 moves downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3834 is positioned below the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates around the shaft portion 3833 . As a result, since the plate surface of the shutter 3832 faces the vertical direction, the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832 . The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 477(b)).

After that, by deenergizing (OFF) the back front right driving solenoid 3817, the plunger, which had been moving upward, moves downward due to the biasing force of the spring. The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front right effect unit 3800 of the present embodiment, the shutter unit 3830 is opened and closed by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, so that the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3830 is changed to the back front right decorative body 3813. The decoration (picture) can be switched to a different decoration (picture), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, since the back front right decoration substrate 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decoration body 3813, the plurality of LEDs of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 can be illuminated when the shutter unit 3830 is closed. , the shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 are caused to emit light, thereby displaying the back front right decorated with light emission. The ornament 3813 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front right effect unit 3800, there are three back front right decoration units: a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C. Since the shutter units 3830 of the 3810 can be independently opened and closed, and the lighting can be decorated, by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front right decoration units 3810, a variety of effects can be provided to the player. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 478 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-back movable ornament of the rear-back effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. FIG. 479 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-bottom middle rotary ornament of the back-bottom middle effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. Fig. 480 shows the back top rear rotary decoration of the back top rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back left rotary decoration of the back rear left effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back rear right. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing the rear-right-rotating ornaments of the production unit moved from the retracted position to the first appearing position, respectively; Fig. 481 shows the back-left rotating ornament of the back-left effect unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-right rotating ornament of the back-right effect unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, respectively. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board shown in a moved state; FIG. 482 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state.

Fig. 483 shows the back rear movable decoration of the back rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back upper rear rotary decoration of the back upper rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, and the back rear left effect unit to the back rear. Move the left-hand rotation decoration from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the back-right rotation decoration of the back-right production unit from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and move the back-lower middle rotation decoration of the back-lower middle production unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved from the lowered position to the raised position;

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starter unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side unit 2100. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state 389, through them, the back front left decoration 3030, the back front right decoration 3040, and the back bottom left effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are rotated to the back bottom left. Decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 of back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 of back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and back top of back top effect unit 3400 The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left effect unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right effect unit 3800, etc. can be visually recognized well, and the center accessory 2500 Through the frame of , the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well.

More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 extends from the impinging portion 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. It is positioned along the side to the vicinity of the right middle unit 2700 . In addition, the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear effect unit 3100 is positioned behind the upper rear effect unit 3400 and is invisible from the player side.

In addition, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the center and left side of the side unit 2200, and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first big prize winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 . The bottom-left rotating decorative body 3201 and the bottom-right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000 .

In addition, the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is in the state of the lowered position, and is positioned behind the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 so that the upper part protrudes into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. This back-bottom middle-rotating decoration 3310 is viewed from diagonally above from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so the number decoration above the center of rotation is displayed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be visually recognized well.

Further, the upper front ornamental body 3421 of the upper rear effect unit 3400 extends laterally in the upper part of the game area 5a in a front view, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the horizontal direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and a center accessory. 2500 , and the rest can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The back upper front rotating decoration 3410 is in the center in the left-right direction in front of the back upper front decoration 3421, and is in a state in which one petal is directed upward. can be visually recognized. In a normal state, the upper back elevating decorative body unit 3450 having the upper back rotating decorative body 3440 of the upper back effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the front upper back decorative body 3421. Not visible from the side.

In addition, the back-left decoration unit 3520 having the back-left rotating decoration 3510 of the back-left effect unit 3500 is in a retracted position behind the back-front left effect unit 3700 in a normal state. , are invisible from the player side. In addition, the back-right decoration unit 3620 having the back-right rotating decoration 3610 of the back-right effect unit 3600 is in a retracted position behind the back-front-right effect unit 3800 in a normal state. , are invisible from the player side.

In addition, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are arranged vertically along the left side of the game panel 1100, are positioned within the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁The upper first back front left decoration unit 3710A of the three back front left decoration units 3710 is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view, The lower part is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The middle second back front left decorative body unit 3710B is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The lower third back front left decorative body unit 3710C is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view, and the right portion is within the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the normal state of the back front left effect unit 3700, in each of the three back front left decoration units 3710, the shutter unit 3730 is in a closed state and the back front left decoration 3713 is invisible. Along with this, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Further, the three back front right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are arranged vertically along the right side of the game panel 1100, are positioned within the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁The first back front right decoration unit 3810A on the upper side of the three back front right decoration units 3810 has its right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view, The left side is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The second back front right decoration unit 3810B on the middle side and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C on the bottom side have a transparent game panel 1100 and a center panel on the right side from the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in front view. It is positioned behind the role object 2500 and the remaining left side is positioned within the frame of the center role object 2500 .

In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, in each of the three back front right decoration units 3810, the shutter units 3830 are closed and the back front right decorations 3813 are invisible. Along with this, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

The game board 5 performs the rear back production of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Unit 3100, back bottom left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top effect unit 3400, back back left effect unit 3500, back back right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700 , and the back front right effect unit 3800 performs a predetermined effect (movable effect and light emitting effect).

Specifically, as an effect using the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. is released, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearing position. As a result, the player can see an effect (movable effect) in which the large rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the horizontal direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage over the player is generated. It is possible to make the player think that the game is not possible, and to increase the expectation for the game.

Although not shown, in this rear back effect unit 3100, after dropping the back rear movable decorative body 3110 to the appearance position, the rear rear driving motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward to move the back rear movable decorative body. 3110 is returned to the retracted position, by appropriately changing the forward/reverse rotation of the back driving motor 3126, the back movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. You may make it reciprocate up and down near the direction center. As a result, the rear back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the vertical direction. The movable decorative body 3110 can be focused on, and the movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be enjoyed.

As an effect using the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and the back-lower-middle rotary drive motor 3333 rotates the back-lower-middle rotary decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction. As a result, the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward so as to block part of the effect image on the effect display device 1600 and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is favorable from the player's side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates round and round, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained.

Since six number decorations are provided on the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310, by rotating the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310, the player is given the impression that the roulette wheel is spinning. can give Therefore, when the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated, the performance display device 1600 is caused to display a performance image such as "Sugoroku", and at the same time, the numeral decoration of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 that has stopped rotating is displayed. The "piece" may advance according to the . As a result, the player can feel nervous depending on whether or not the rotating back-lower-middle rotary decoration body 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired number decoration so that the "piece" advances to the desired "masu". It can make the player's heart beat faster and entertain the player. In addition, the advance of the "pieces" can make the player feel that the expectation value is increasing, and the expectation for the game can be heightened.

As an effect using the back bottom left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back top effect unit 3400, back back left effect unit 3500, and back back right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, FIG. As shown, in the bottom-left effect unit 3200, the bottom-left driving motor 3205 rotates the bottom-left rotating decoration 3201, and in the bottom-right effect unit 3250, the bottom-right driving motor 3255 rotates the bottom-right rotating decoration. Rotate the 3251. In addition, in the back upper effect unit 3400, the back upper front rotary drive motor 3425 rotates the back upper front rotary decoration body 3410, and the back upper lift drive motor 3429 moves the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 downward from the retracted position. At the same time when it is rotated to the appearing position, the back top rear rotary decoration body 3440 is rotated by the back top rear rotation driving motor 3454 . Further, in the rear left effect unit 3500, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the upper right first appearance position by the rear left elevation drive motor 3554, and the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is operated to move the rear rear left decoration body unit 3520 to the first appearance position. Rotate the counterclockwise rotation decoration 3510 . In addition, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly to the upper left, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 to the first appearance position. Rotate the right rotation decoration 3610 .

As a result, the back top/rear rotation decoration 3440, the back left rotation decoration 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration 3610 move to the front of the effect display device 1600 and become visible, and the back bottom left rotation decoration. Since the body 3201, the back bottom right rotation decoration 3251, the back top front rotation decoration 3410, the back top rear rotation decoration 3440, the bottom back left rotation decoration 3510, and the bottom back right rotation decoration 3610 rotate, Rotating the six ornaments can give a strong impact to the player, making them feel that something good will happen and increasing their expectations for the game.

At this time, the back upper elevating drive motor 3429, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 are repeatedly rotated forward and reverse as appropriate, so that the upper back elevating decoration body unit 3450 and the back rear left decoration are rotated. The body unit 3520 and the back right decoration body unit 3620 may be respectively swung. As a result, the back upper/rear rotating ornament 3440, the back left rotating ornament 3510, and the back back right rotating ornament 3610 rotate while swaying, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Players can be entertained.

Also, at this time, the back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 may be rotated. As a result, the seven decorations rotate round and round, so that the player can strongly feel that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage will occur. It is possible to heighten expectations for the game.

As an effect using the back-left effect unit 3500 and the back-right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the upper right second appearance position, and the rear left rotation decoration 3510 is rotated by the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 . In addition, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper left, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620 to the second appearance position on the upper left. The rotary decoration 3610 is rotated. As a result, the two decorations rotate at a position approximately at the height of the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the player is surprised and something good happens. It is possible to make the player think that this is not the case, and it is possible to heighten expectations for the game.

At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back-left rotating ornament 3510 and the back-right rotating ornament 3610 at the second appearance position are set to the eyes of the predetermined character's face in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. It is also possible to display an effect image that will be the position. As a result, it is possible to present the player with an effect in which the character's eyes are rolling, and the player can be entertained.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The closed state is changed to the open state, and the shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the back front right driving solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800 . As a result, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 become visible from the player side. The decoration of the decoration body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, as an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, since each has three back front left decoration units 3710 and three back front right decoration units 3810, , the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, or a combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed. Therefore, it is possible to show a variety of performances to the player and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

In the back unit 3000, a back rear effect unit 3100, a back bottom left effect unit 3200, a back bottom right effect unit 3250, a back bottom middle effect unit 3300, a back top effect unit 3400, a back back left effect unit 3500, and a back back right effect unit 3600. , back front left effect unit 3700 and back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. As a result, all the decorations are movable, so that the player can be convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) will occur, and the expectation for the advantageous game state can be heightened. can. In this case, in the back-left effect unit 3500 and the back-right effect unit 3600, the back-left decoration unit 3520 and the back-right decoration unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is avoided.

In the above description, the movement of each decoration has been described. It can be shown, and the interest of the player can be further attracted.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately combine the movable effect and the light emitting effect as described above, and the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can also be combined. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., making it difficult for the player to get bored. The player can be entertained, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[5-11. Main effects of the game board]
Next, the main functions and effects of the game board 5 of this embodiment having the above configuration will be described. The game board 5 of this embodiment has an opening 1112 penetrating the game panel 1100 having the game area 5a on the front side. A frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is divided into an impossibility non-circulation area and formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening part 1112, has its front end projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, it is likely that the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 will be the circulation area and the inner side will be the non-circulation area. A flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 thinner than the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 extends from a position in the peripheral wall portion 2501 in which the front surface of the game panel 1100 is the same in the front-rear direction toward the non-distribution area side (inner side). At the same time, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided with a flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 toward the distribution area side (outside) from the portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. Since nothing extends to the circulation area side of the part where the support part 2503 is provided, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall part 2501. Thus, the substantial circulation area can be made up to the position where it touches the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial circulation area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. That is, even if the non-distribution area (within the frame of the center role 2500) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 is enlarged, the substantial distribution area will not become smaller as in the conventional pachinko machine. . Therefore, by enlarging the non-circulation area partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 while suppressing the substantial reduction of the circulation area in which the game ball B circulates in the game area 5a, the non-circulation area The performance image of the performance display device 1600 as a performance device provided behind the region, the movable body of the performance unit, the decorative body, etc. can be made more visible, and the game ball B can be played in the circulation region and the non-circulation region. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining both the performance and the performance.

In addition, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-distribution area side (inside) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion is formed by the flange portion 2502 provided in a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. The portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution area side (outside), and the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502. , Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a contacts (abuts) the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall 2501 can be maintained by the support part 2503 and the like, Deformation and breakage of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented.

In addition, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by attaching the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, and the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be can be prevented from elastically deforming and flipping the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B, which circulates in the game area 5a, from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by coming into contact with the peripheral wall part 2501, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-distribution area side can be made difficult to see, and the support portion 2503 (center The performance image of the performance display device 1600 as a performance device provided behind and the movable body and decoration of the performance unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen through the accessory 2500), so the non-distribution area. It is possible to enlarge the range in which the production images, movable bodies, decorations, etc. provided behind the can be seen, making it easier to demonstrate the production effect of the production device, and providing behind the non-distribution area The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by making the performance image of the performance display device 1600, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. visible, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players. can.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, the transparent part can be used to light the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and to Since it is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, or transmit the light from the light-emitting means (LED, effect display device 1600, etc.), transparent parts such as the support part 2503 and the peripheral wall part 2501 can be illuminated. It is possible to make it look lively, improve its appearance, and enhance its appeal to the player. At this time, the transparent support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, the movable body provided behind the support part 2503 (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back rear left effect unit 3500) can be provided with The above effect can be obtained by the light emitted by the light emitting means (LED), and the transparent support portion 2503 enables the player to recognize the presence of the movable body.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 extends in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the peripheral wall portion 2501 as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the front-rear direction, the support portion 2503 can be attached to the game panel. Compared to when it is extended with the same thickness as 1100, the lens effect by the support part 2503 can be reduced, and the support part 2503 can be attached to the rear back front left decorative body 3030 and the production device (production display device 1600 etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support portion 2503 is further reduced, and the portion behind the support portion 2503 (design ) can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030, the effect image, and the like can be made more visible.

Furthermore, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 having a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Since a line different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown by the tip side of the , compared to the case where the shape is along the peripheral wall portion 2501, it is difficult to see a single design, and it looks like a detailed design. A pachinko machine 1 with a deep design can be provided.

In addition, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant at that portion of the support portion 2503, and is different. Therefore, by setting the extending amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the reinforcing effect of the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 extends from the peripheral wall part 2501 in the front and back directions of the game panel 1100 at the same position, the support part 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to create an illusion as if it were so, and it is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the support part 2503 .

In addition, the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front and rear directions of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends from the middle (middle) of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the front and rear direction. As compared with the case where the support part 2503 extends from the end side, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the reinforcing effect of the support part 2503 on the tip side of the peripheral wall part 2501, so that the strength of the peripheral wall part 2501 can be sufficiently increased. It is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (the center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged even if the game medium abuts against it.

Furthermore, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 so that the rear side can be inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 can be The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or obscured by the peripheral wall portion 2501 .

In addition, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be seen when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. The pachinko machine appears to protrude forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 1112, can give a sense of unity between the peripheral wall part 2501 (the center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and has a good appearance in the game area 5a. Machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, it is partitioned by the peripheral wall 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 regardless of whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque. The performance image of the performance display device 1600 provided behind the non-distribution area where the performance display device 1600 is provided, the movable body of the performance unit, the decorative body, etc. can be favorably visually recognized from the front (player side). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exhibiting the performance effect of the game, etc.

Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it appears to protrude outward, the player can easily notice the presence of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and can easily recognize the circulation area and the non-circulation area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 .

In addition, a flange portion 2502 extending to the distribution area side (outside) is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and the portion at which the flange portion 2502 is provided Since the support part 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside) is not provided, the support part 2503 interferes with the visibility of the production device (the production display device 1600 and the production unit of the back unit 3000). Instead, it is possible to enlarge the area where the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit, etc. can be seen, and it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the effect of the effect device, and to the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by entertaining the performance by.

Furthermore, in the center accessory 2500, the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502 allow the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to be maintained at the same level as that of the conventional product. Deformation of the molded product can be prevented when it is removed from the mold.

In addition, since the support part 2503 extends in a flat plate shape that is thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the central accessory 2500 is integrally molded with synthetic resin, only the part of the support part 2503 is in contact with the other parts. A large difference in shrinkage can be avoided, and deformation of the center accessory 2500 during molding can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the frame-shaped front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear side are provided. , and are transparent, and behind the back left elevation drive motor 3554 and back rear right elevation drive of the back rear right production unit 3600 as functional parts of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part of it is outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extend from the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a so as to cover at least the parts in the game area 5a of the lifting drive motor 3554 and the rear right lifting drive motor 3654. , the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654, The back rear left elevation driving motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation driving motor 3654 can be made difficult to see from the player side through the transparent front component member 1000, the game panel 1100 and the inside of the game area 5a, and the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 is improved. In addition, instead of the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654, the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 can be seen. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to players.

In addition, since the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundaries of the game area 5a defined by the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are difficult to understand. A feeling of openness can be given by looking like this, and even if the game area 5a has the same size as that of a conventional pachinko machine, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger. Therefore, by making the game area 5a look larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the game by the pachinko machine 1 can be heightened, and the player can enjoy the game. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to the players.

In addition, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged to cover at least the part in the game area 5a in front of the functional parts such as the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654. Therefore, the front left decorative body 3030 and the right front rear decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, so that the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as described above, the functional parts can be made difficult to see even when viewed obliquely from the central side of the game area 5a.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and in a front view, the back front extends from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. Since the decorations of the left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration can make the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a difficult to understand, giving a sense of openness to the game. The size of the area 5a can be made to appear larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加By making it stand out, the appeal to the player can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are made opaque, the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 It is possible to prevent the back-right effect unit 3600 and the like from being seen, and the back-left effect unit 3500 and the back-right effect unit 3600 and the like can be seen from the player side through the front constituent member 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the appearance is good. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by preventing the deterioration of the pachinko machine.

In addition, at least a part of the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 as functional parts are arranged outside the game area 5a in a front view (the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 completely (entirely) outside the game area 5a), in order to dispose the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654, The rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear right elevation drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them. It is possible to suppress the space of the game area 5a from becoming smaller by balancing. In other words, since a part of the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, the space between the front component member 1000 and the outer circumference of the game area 5a can be reduced. , the space of the game area 5a can be relatively increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can further exhibit the above-described effects. Further, by providing a part of the drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the movable character inside the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space inside the game area 5a can be increased. The range of effects performed in the game area 5a is widened. All drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) for the accessories that move within the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Furthermore, since the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the performance display device 1600, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, or diffuse the light from the pachinko machine 1 as if the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 were emitting light. can improve the appearance of Further, although opaque decorative seals 3032 and 3042 are applied to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the respective bases 3031 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are attached. And the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is made of a transparent member, so that the light from the various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be emitted from the back front left decoration 3030 or the back It is possible to give an impression that the light reaches the front right decoration 3040 and the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 emit light. It can also be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left elevation driving motor 3554 as a functional component, it can be understood that it is a functional component by covering it to some extent without covering the entire part. It can be spicy and made to look like part of the decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left ornament 3030 does not have a size that covers the entire back rear left elevation drive motor 3554, it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above. While reducing the cost of 3030, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger. At least a part of the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is covered and hidden by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040. 1 (a portion closer to the boundary line dividing the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). In addition, it extends from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a for a predetermined point where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (such as the lower left point in FIG. 409, that is, the lower left corner point on the game board 5). By providing the decoration, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger.

In addition, the inside of the frame of the front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from behind by the transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are provided behind the game area 5a. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from behind by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. Similar effects can be achieved, and the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game can be played smoothly in the game area 5a. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by entertaining the user.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a front view, the back front left decorative body The back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the like can be made invisible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to such an extent that the inside portion of the door window 101a in the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the rear front left decorative body 3030 can move the rear left decorative body 3030 upward and downward. Since the uncovered portion can be covered with the frame-shaped door frame 3 without covering the entire drive motor 3554, the back front left decorative body 3030 can be prevented from being longer than necessary. The cost of the back front left decorative body 3030 (pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right side of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is tilted toward the game panel 1100. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 in the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucency. Since the seal is attached, the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 faces forward (toward the player), and the first starting opening 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 . Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier to direct the player's consciousness to the first starting port 2002 rather than the general winning port 2001, the number of game balls B accepted in the first starting port 2002 is reduced (or the first starting A lottery of the first special lottery result performed by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 can avoid the player's concentration on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by increasing the expectation for the game, and to make the player recognize the position of the first starting port 2002 that the player should aim at, so that the player can aim at the first starting port 2002. You can enjoy the game.

Depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted by the first starting port 2002, the player can be nervous, and when the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002 Depending on whether or not the lottery of the first special lottery result generates an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot") is lottery, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the expectation for the game can be heightened. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. After that, when the winner is selected by lottery of the result of the first special lottery, an advantageous game state occurs in which the first big prize-winning port 2005 and the second big prize-winning port 2006 open and close in a predetermined pattern. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game. At this time, if the game ball B aimed at the first starting hole 2002 is accepted by the general winning hole 2001, the first special lottery result will not be drawn, but the game ball B will be paid out as a privilege. , the player can continue to enjoy the game without being discouraged, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 is parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the shape (appearance) of the general prize winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 is greatly different, a sticker is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 and a sticker is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, the player does not feel uncomfortable, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the player enjoys the game with the pachinko machine 1 and loses interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are made of a transparent member, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be visually recognized through the transparent member. As a result, the player can surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002, and can fully enjoy the joy of being accepted. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, since the general prize winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are made of a transparent member, the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1 can be used. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, or diffuse the light from the means (the LEDs of the decorative substrate), the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look gorgeous, and the appearance is improved. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the appeal to the player.

Furthermore, in the general prize winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first start opening 2002, the accepted game ball B is placed in the general winning opening. Since the game ball B received in the 2001 is guided backward later than the game ball B received in the first special lottery result lottery, the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is guided to the general prize winning opening 2001.例文帳に追加Since it can be guided backward at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 where the lottery for the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (feeling of superiority) due to the reception of the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 is given to the general winning. The player can enjoy the game ball B for a longer time than when the game ball B is received into the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately pushed backward ( Since it can be guided to the game panel 1100 side) and discharged faster than the game ball B accepted in the first start opening 2002, it is useless for the game ball B to be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 It is possible to prevent the player from experiencing the game for a long time, direct the player's interest to the next game ball B, and smoothly advance the game to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, in the general prize winning port 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100, and a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203. Therefore, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Then, depending on the player, an illusion can be given as if the game ball B has been received in the general winning hole 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap the general prize winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given after that, it is possible to avoid the distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, and the player can avoid it. Therefore, it is possible to keep the game enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of materials applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning opening can be reduced. A decoration such as a sticker on the front surface of the mouth 2001 can be omitted. Therefore, since the cost for the general prize winning opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more amusing to the players by using the reduced cost for the performance device or the like.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the back-bottom middle decorative body unit 3320 of the back-bottom middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, a rotating back-bottom middle rotation having a plurality of even-numbered (here, six) stop positions The decorative body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 whose length is half the length of the stop position, and a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 (here, six) corresponding to each stop position, and the area detection piece 3325 A plurality (here, four) of sensors consisting of a plurality (here, three) of area identification sensors 3330 consisting of half of the stop positions that detect Since it is provided, when the back-lower-middle rotary decorative body 3310 rotates, the plurality of area-specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area-detecting pieces 3325 repeatedly increase and then decrease in order from one side in the rotation direction. By combining the area specifying sensor 3330 that detects the area detecting piece 3325, the current rotational position of the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310 can be roughly grasped.

More specifically, in the case of the back-bottom center rotary decoration 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, the area detection pieces 3325 are half and three stop positions are arranged side by side. and the minimum number of area-specific sensors 3330 required to detect movement to any stop position is three, which is half the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set to a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 is positioned at the first stop position. It is assumed that only the first area specifying sensor 3330a is detecting the area detection piece 3325 at (the position of the decoration number "3"). From this state, when the back and middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position of the decoration number "2"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detection piece 3325. do. Furthermore, when the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative number "1"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are activated. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Furthermore, when the back and middle rotation decoration 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decoration number "6"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor Sensor 3330 c detects area detection piece 3325 . Further, when the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative number "5"), the second area specifying sensor 3330b becomes non-detecting, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is the area detection piece. 3325 is detected. Then, when the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decoration number "4"), the third area specifying sensor 3330c also becomes non-detecting, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 detect the area detecting piece 3325. is not detected. After that, when the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates, it will rotate to the first stop position (the position of the decorative number "3"), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a will detect the area detecting piece 3325. In the initial state where the bottom back middle rotary decorative body 3310 rotates, detection/non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above is repeated.

In this way, since the area detection pieces 3325 are provided with a length that covers half the number of stop positions, a combination of the detections of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 enables the back and bottom middle rotation decoration. Since the rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detected until the back underside middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the next stop position, the back underside can be detected. The current position of the middle rotation decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Further, since the back and middle rotation decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 After roughly detecting the rotation of the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. By minimizing the deviation of the stop position, it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back-lower middle rotary ornament 3310 having a plurality of stop positions.

In addition, since the stop position of the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back-lower middle-rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable (unpleasant feeling), and it is possible to entertain the performance (movable performance) by the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress the decrease in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310) that does not give discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is increased, the stop position deviation can be suppressed, and the back By rotating the lower middle rotary decoration 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 is increased compared to the case where the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is reciprocated. can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest, and the rotation of the back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can be strongly attracted. It is possible to amuse the player and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, by rotating the back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the back-bottom middle-rotation decoration body 3310 faces the front side of the player, and after rotating in circles, an arbitrary Since the player can see a roulette-like performance in which rotation is stopped at the stop position of , the player is thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. It is possible to entertain the movable presentation by the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 and suppress the deterioration of interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is an even number, the stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of sensors (region specifying sensors 3330) necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position and the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasping of stop positions) by a plurality of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. , and the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a larger number of stop positions can entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

It should be noted that, in the above-described embodiment, as the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 in the back-lower middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, six stop positions are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have 4 to 10 stop positions.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body having a plurality of stop positions (back and middle rotating decorative body 3310) was shown to rotate, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body having a plurality of stop positions. For example, it may be “rotating”, “moving in a straight line”, “moving in an arc”, “moving in a curve”, and the like.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 484 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start opening sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003, a second A second starting hole sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the starting hole 2004, a general prize winning hole sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001, and a first prize winning hole 2005. A first big prize winning hole sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball B, a second big prize winning hole sensor 2601 for detecting a game ball B received in a second big winning hole 2006, and a game ball B received in an out hole 2010 are detected. out port sensor 3053, first sub-out port sensor 2403 for detecting game ball B received in first sub-out port 2011, second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting game ball B received in second sub-out port 2012, And detection signals from magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are input via the main control I/O port, respectively.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit to control the starting solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid. 2612, etc., or output a drive signal from the main control I / O port to the function display unit 1400 status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal pending indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special pending number display device, second special symbol display, second special reserved number display, round display, etc., and output a drive signal.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 3052, the second start sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first grand prize sensor 2402, the second grand prize sensor 2601, and the outlet sensor 3053 While contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used, the general prize winning opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054 are contact type ON/OFF mechanical switches. I am using a switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 3052, the second starting hole sensor 2401, and Detection of game ball B by gate sensor 2801 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starter sensor 3052, the second starter sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous game state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are opened and the game ball B enters frequently. , The detection of the game ball B by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and the second big winning hole sensor 2601 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the first big winning slot sensor 2402 and the second big winning slot sensor 2601 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3051 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning hole sensor 3051 .

Furthermore, since the game ball B frequently enters the out port 2010, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used as the out port sensor 3053. FIG. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 frequently, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch. is used.

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. In addition, the main control MPU, which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This blackout warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball tank 552 and a tank rail during maintenance. 553, a ball guide unit 570, and a ball extraction switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting the ball extraction operation. .

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cut detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. input to the MPU.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is inputted to the payout control input circuit and inputted to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a signal indicating the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , to generate a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and output it to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the will of the player. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing timing control circuit after being input to the firing control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. Triggered by the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In addition, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decoration board of the game board 5. , game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for sending to the drive solenoid or for outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc., and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED, etc. provided in the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board. to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , and outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the effect display control unit 1512 that indicates that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally. monitoring the action.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and uses the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, and the top side Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It diagnoses whether or not its own system is running out of control by using it together with WDT.

A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. k) Bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable object drive command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side, are output by a plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display commands. 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer system. The "line buffer method" is to hold one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively, to pixels for one line.

[7. Game content]
The game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 393 and 408 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are rotated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The more the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail N, the game ball The flowing speed of B is suppressed, and various motions are imparted to the game ball B so that the motion can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opening in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 , it is supplied from the warp exit 2512 to the stage 2513 .

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the center release portion 2513a is positioned directly above the first start port 2002, so that the first It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", "probability variation (probability variation) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating a "hit" is performed.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200 , or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit above the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, the center role 2500 is guided. Through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520, a plurality of guide passages 2520 and 2520 are discharged above the gate portion 2003 and implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After coming into contact with the obstructing nail N, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

The group of guide passages 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance is open near the impinging portion 1006, and an entrance which is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. and a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006 (so-called right hitting), it enters the first guide passage 2521 and does not hit the impingement portion 1006 (right hitting). When the game ball B is hit with a strength somewhat weaker than the ball B, it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated rather than the first guide passage 2521 . Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 at a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521 .

When the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the normal lottery result of the lottery is "normal win", the first attacker unit. The closed second starting port 2004 at 2400 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 becomes possible.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0 .01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results is set to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, the game balls B are discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

A game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of hitting the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side of , and is sometimes accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 or rarely accepted in the second sub-out opening 2012 . When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 , a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out in the same manner as the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 . On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012, it is discharged out of the game area 5a without an opportunity to be received in the second big prize-winning port 2006, the second starting port 2004, or the first big prize-winning port 2005. .

In addition, the game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate portion 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the side right middle unit 2700 has a general winning port 2001, a second big winning port 2006, a second There is no opportunity to be accepted in the starting port 2004 or the first big prize winning port 2005, and it is discharged out of the game area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide path group 2520, the game ball B is discharged outside the game area 5a. It is possible to prompt a hitting operation such that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2012.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, in the guide path group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide path 2522 has a lower acceptance probability of the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide path 2521. , the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the second guide passage 2522 can be encouraged. In other words, it is possible to encourage a hitting operation that requires fine adjustment of the rotation operation of the handle 182 rather than a "right hitting" in which the game ball B contacts the impingement portion 1006. It is possible to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 mainly having .

A game ball B passing through the left side of the right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and enters the second big prize winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. , it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 .

At this time, when the game ball B is accepted by the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted by the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability. When the second large winning opening 2006 is open, when the game ball B is received in the second large winning opening 2006, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 from the payout device 580 a predetermined number (for example, 10, or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 .

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second big winning opening 2006 is the first shelf part 2412a, the second starting door 2414, and the second shelf part 2412b, the upper left After rolling in the direction, it is released to the left, and further rolls leftward on the third shelf 2412c, the first big winning opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d into the game area 5a. released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting door 2414, the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003 is "ordinary hit", and the second starting door When 2414 is retreating, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 . When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", "probability variation (probability variation) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating a "hit" is performed.

In addition, when the game ball B is rolling on the first big winning opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the second If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot"), after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the first big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. , the game ball B can be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first big winning opening 2005 when the first big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 . Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 to accept the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and the player is encouraged. can entertain.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received by the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", A lottery will be held for special lottery results that generate "middle hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability variation) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit".Then, the drawn special lottery result is Predetermined time (for example, 0.1 ~ 360 seconds, also referred to as special fluctuation time) suggested to the player.In addition, the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 lottery The special lottery results include "loss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "variable (probability change) hit", "time saving (time reduction) hit", " There are "probable short-time hit", "non-probable short-time hit", "second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is a "small hit", the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state capable of accepting the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", the first big prize winning opening 2005 becomes open for receiving the game ball B, and then a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or the first big prize winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the prize winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is 1 round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

If the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is the "second big hit", after the first big winning hole 2005 is able to accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special・Time) is generated. This ST maintains the state of probability variation and time saving during a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Reserved. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without holding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. A performance image suggesting a special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows made up of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and each pattern row is varied. are sequentially stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are in a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is executed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small winning" game, a "big winning" game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation, and the operation button elevation drive motor By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to be conspicuous, and the operation of the production operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type production.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back effect unit 3100, Bottom left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top effect unit 3400, back rear left effect unit 3500, back rear right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700, and back front left effect unit 3700 By appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., it is possible to perform lighting effect, display effect, etc., and various effects can entertain the player, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated. to notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is requested, the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b or the rotation operation of the rotating operation portion 302 causes the vibration speaker 354 to vibrate. The effect display device 1600 is made to display that effect.

[8. Standing Auxiliary Member]
Next, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 485 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown with the self-supporting support member. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the table plate 8 of the island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It assists the pachinko machine 1 to stand on its own when it is installed (attached) to the pachinko machine 1 to prevent it from overturning. This self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed in a block shape. Also, the self-supporting support member 7 is formed using at least one of hard foamed resin, plastic, cardboard, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

Although not shown in detail, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 . On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounted portion that is mounted on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 . In this embodiment, the plate unit 200 is provided with a groove extending back and forth as the mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a ridge inserted into the groove of the plate unit 200 as the mounting portion. ing. As a result, the self-standing auxiliary member 7 is slid forward and backward with respect to the dish unit 200, and the attached portion of the self-standing auxiliary member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, whereby the self-standing auxiliary member is attached to the dish unit 200. 7 can be attached (mounted). Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility with the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding it forward. . Further, when the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island facility is removed, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily attached by sliding it in the direction opposite to when it was removed.

The attachment (attachment) between the attachment portion of the plate unit 200 and the attached portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above, and includes "insertion of a projection into a hole", "attachment of a nail", and "attachment". "By locking", "Magnetic attachment by a magnet", "Velcro fastener", "Suction cup", "Peelable adhesive material", etc. may be used. Further, the position where the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 is provided is not limited to the lower surface of the plate unit 200 as described above, and may be "inside", "at least one of the left and right sides", or "front". .

After the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the self supporting member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 and stored on the game hall side. It is attached to the unit 200 and used. The self-standing auxiliary member 7 may be attached to the plate unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer side to the game hall side, or may be attached during the installation work.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 includes the plate unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450, which protrude greatly forward. Although the pachinko machine 1 tends to fall down easily, by mounting the self-supporting assisting member 7 on the lower mounting part of the plate unit 200, the self-standing of the pachinko machine 1 can be assisted to prevent it from falling forward. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island equipment of the game hall, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, the space between the plate unit 200 and the table plate 8 of the island equipment can be maintained. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from overturning forward by the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 positioned at the top, the pachinko machine 1 is held down so as not to overturn when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 is such that there is no need to install it and the labor required for installation work is easy.

In addition, by attaching the self-standing auxiliary member 7 to the attachment portion of the plate unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from overturning. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of reducing the burden on the side.

Furthermore, since the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, the pachinko machine 1 is assisted to stand on its own. Since it is possible to prevent the pachinko from overturning forward, it is possible to increase the size of the performance device, the decorative member, etc. provided on the door frame 3 and to protrude further forward. It is possible to easily construct a pachinko machine whose appearance is greatly different from that of the machine, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 and the like protrude greatly forward in the door frame 3, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In the above embodiment, by sliding the self-supporting member 7 in the front-rear direction, it can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting member 7 can be attached to the door. The plate unit 200 of the frame 3 may be attached and detached by sliding the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction.

In addition, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable with respect to the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and a functional member (for example, the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202) provided detachably on the door frame 3 , door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side unit 410, door frame top unit 450, etc.). As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island facility, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine is installed. Allow 1 to stand on its own in a stable state. On the other hand, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame 3 as a functional member, so that part of the pachinko machine 1 can be replaced. It can function as a constituent functional member. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 projecting forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 is used as a functional member that also serves as the self-standing auxiliary member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 By attaching the frame left side unit 400 to the lower side of the plate unit 200, it can function as a self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and by removing it from the lower side of the plate unit 200 and attaching it to the left side of the door window 101a, it can function as a functional member. be able to. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, there is no need to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is troublesome to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that it is not lost. can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be detachably attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and a functional member (for example, a “substrate cover that covers the substrate”, a “wiring "wiring holding member that holds", "protective cover that protects the back of the effect display device and movable decoration", "storage tank in which the game medium is stored", "guidance member in which the game medium circulates", etc.) and You may make it combine. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) to stabilize the pachinko machine 1. to be able to stand on their own. On the other hand, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 is attached to a predetermined portion of the main body frame 4, thereby forming a part of the pachinko machine 1. It can be made to function as a member. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, there is no need to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is troublesome to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that it is not lost. can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced. In addition, when the self-standing auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the main body frame 4, when the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4, the player touches the detachable functional member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Further, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is used also as a functional member provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, compared with the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not also used as a functional member, the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to reduce the number of parts required for this, and to suppress an increase in cost.

Furthermore, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be provided so as to be accommodated within the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 . As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 does not need to be attached to the island equipment and stand by itself, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is housed in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, so that the presence of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加It is possible to avoid the deterioration of the play and the hindrance of the self-standing assisting member 7 in the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 housed in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand on its own. , the installation work and removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. In addition, in this case, compared to the case where the auxiliary self-supporting member 7 is removed and stored separately, there is no need to store the auxiliary self-supporting member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the auxiliary self-supporting member 7 so as not to lose it. can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having a mounting portion that is attached to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 is shown. Also good.

Also, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, it is not limited to this. , when installed in the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be protruded downward and brought into contact with the tray plate 8 . As a result, after the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, it is not necessary to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and keep it separately, and the labor required for management on the game hall side can be reduced.

[10. Control processing of the main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU in particular) will be described. FIG. 486(a) is a flow chart showing the procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 486(a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first performs various Initializes the data stored in the registers and the RAM built in the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as main control built-in RAM). A RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the body frame 4 is opened. Also, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power was turned on, and the clear signal is input to the main control MPU when the power is turned on. When it is determined that it is, an initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed to store information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1), A restoration process is executed to restore the state according to the information. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process, and the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state. Also, when the initialization process is executed, the game state is controlled to a non-time-saving state.

Next, as the process of step S2, random numbers, which are numbers updated within a predetermined numerical range, are updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol Variable random numbers provided for lottery processing for a predetermined time (variable time) required for variable display control, whether or not to reach as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable display of the special symbol Reach random number provided for the lottery process (whether or not to execute the effect), Pattern random number provided for the lottery process for determining the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number), random number (normal random number) used for lottery processing related to the winning that triggers the opening of the second start port 2004), etc. A random number counter that holds random numbers. I have.

In addition, in this example, so as to use a common reach random number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even if the first start opening 2002 is started and won, the second start opening 2004 is started and won. Even in the case, it is configured to obtain reach random numbers from the same counter that updates reach random numbers, but by obtaining from counters with different ranges of random numbers that update reach random numbers, the execution ratio of reach effects It may be made different, and the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as a reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number corresponds to the second special symbol and is different from the first reach determination table By providing a second ready-to-win determination table in which the determination value is set, the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect may be varied.

In the process of step S2, the random number counter is operated such that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) that are not related to winning or losing among these random numbers are updated. After the processing of steps S1 and S2 is performed in this way, only the processing of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

FIG. 486(b) is a flow chart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 486(b), in this interrupt control, first, register save processing is performed as the processing of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2801, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first count sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005, Detection signals are input from various sensors such as the second count sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, the general winning opening sensor 3001, various magnetic sensors, and the like. Then, as the process of step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols and the normal symbols is stopped are updated in the counter of the random number counter. operation is performed.

After the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs special symbol process processing including lottery processing related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped as the process of step S14. to run. Although this special symbol process will be described later, here, basically, special symbol process flags (first special symbol process flag, second Special symbol process flag) corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on.

Next, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310 executes normal symbol process processing including lottery processing related to the hit or drop that triggers the opening of the second start port 2004 as the processing of step S15. It should be noted that even in this normal design process processing, basically, corresponding processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag indicating the progress of the game.

In addition, when the special symbol process processing (step S14) and the normal symbol process processing (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next performs the special symbol process processing as the processing of step S16. Then, a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed.

Further, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310 performs information output processing for outputting data such as hit information to be supplied to the hall management computer, as the processing of step S18.

Next, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310 performs the processing of step S19, the first start opening sensor 3052, the second start opening sensor 2401, the first count sensor, the second count sensor, the When the detection signals of the general winning hole sensor 3051 and the like are in the ON state, the prize ball processing of outputting a payout control command to the payout control board 633 is executed so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 to pay out prize balls to the player. In this example, when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 and the first start port sensor 3052 turns on, "3 balls", the game ball B wins the second start port 2004 and the above-mentioned third "1 ball" when the second starting hole sensor 2401 is turned on, "15 balls" when the game ball B enters the first big prize hole 2005 and the first count sensor is turned on, and the second big prize hole When the game ball B wins in 2006 and the second count sensor turns on, "15 balls", and when the game ball B wins in the general winning hole 2001 and the general winning hole sensor 3051 turns on. "8 balls" of prize balls are paid out to the players respectively.

Further, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310 next executes storage processing for checking increase/decrease in the number of reserved storages as the processing of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal for checking the control state of the pachinko machine 1 outside the game machine, is executed. After that, drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control is terminated. becomes.

By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In addition, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 487 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the main control. A first start opening passing process such as storing in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number A second starting port passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, the main control MPU determines whether or not a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot game is controlled. Big hit control processing (step S40) is executed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the content of the big hit type) of the display mode when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "15R big hit". When this happens, the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have entered the first big winning hole 2005 after the first big winning hole 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). A process of controlling to a 15R big hit game in which an opening/closing pattern to be closed is repeated 15 times is executed.

Moreover, in big hit control processing, after performing opening control of such 1st big winning a prize mouth 2005, the setting processing of a time saving flag is performed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control (control executed in the time saving state) is being executed, and is set when finishing the big hit game based on the time saving control big hit after the big hit game ends, and the figure described later It is reset by the second special symbol stop processing of the first special symbol stop processing shown in 498 or the second special symbol process processing described later. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of times of time saving is set so that the time saving control is terminated when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed five times or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed once. That is, when the time-saving control is started after the end of the jackpot game, and either the condition for executing the variable display of the first special symbol five times or the variable display of the second special symbol once is established. It is designed to end the time saving control.

Further, if the big hit running flag is not set, the main control MPU determines whether or not the small winning running flag indicating that the small winning game is being controlled is set (step S36), and determines whether or not the small winning running flag is set. If the in-execution flag is set, a small-hit control process (step S41) for controlling a small-hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped suggests a "small hit", the second big winning opening 2006 described later After opening the second large prize winning port 2006 based on the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B, or when the second count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won the second large prize winning port 2006, it is closed. Execute the process that causes the In addition, when the game ball B that has entered the second big winning hole 2006 and is distributed by the distribution member enters the specific area, it is controlled to a big win game and the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor that 10 game balls B have entered the first big prize opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern to be closed is repeated 15 times, and control is shifted to a 15R jackpot game. do. On the other hand, when the game ball B that has entered the first big winning port 2005 and is distributed by the distribution member does not enter the specific region and enters the discharge region, it is not controlled to the big win game, After the winning game is finished, the game state (normal state or time saving state) before the small winning game is controlled again.

In addition, the main control MPU is a second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area if neither the big hit execution flag nor the small hit execution flag is set. is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), On the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the two special design reservation storage area is not "0" (step S37), when the fluctuation display of the second special design is stopped A second special symbol process including a lottery process related to the display mode is executed (step S39).

FIG. 488 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting port passing process (step S32).

Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 3052 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first starting hole 2002, the process shown in FIG. Thus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) of "4" (step S42). In the processing of this step S42, when it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43- The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S44, each random number obtained in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S41, the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is to be a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( Variation pattern type) and other advance determination information are executed before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S45), and then the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S45, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of the first reserved memory changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first reserved. Along with updating to correspond to the number of memories, set a command (first reservation number specification command 0 to 4) for instructing the first reserved number of memories in the above-mentioned memory processing (step S20) and send it to the peripheral control board 1510 It is designed to In addition, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0-4.

FIG. 489 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number obtained in the above step S41, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not a big win will occur, if a big win will occur, the type of the big win will occur, and if a big win will not occur, a ready-to-win performance will be executed as a game performance executed by a performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加The mode type of the game presentation is specified (step S61).

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win production as a game production executed by the production display device 1600 Aspect type of game production to be played), type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and reserved memory number (value of reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reservation memory number (the One special reservation number counter value) and set the first special symbol pre-determination command according to (step S62).

Then, by transmitting a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), it is stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 where the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of pending memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbols based on the generated starting winning is a big win, the kind of big win in the case of a big win, and executed by the performance display device 1600 in the case of no big win. The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 executes the ready-to-win effect as the game effect to be executed, or pre-determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed, before starting the variable display according to the start winning. becomes comprehensible.

When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reservation storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU stores the advance judgment information indicated by the received advance judgment command in the first (first) storage area. Store in order from the area. Then, when the advance judgment command is received when the advance judgment information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the advance judgment information notified to the (n+1)th storage area (n=1 to 3). is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the first variation pattern command received when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received. Discard the determination information and move the advance determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). shift the stored pre-determined information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for the big hit (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control ) can be notified at a predetermined timing such as, for example, when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. .

FIG. 490 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S34).

Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the second starting hole 2004, the process shown in FIG. Thus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value ) is "4" (step S52). In the processing of this step S52, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53- The process of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S54, each random number obtained in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of second reserved storage changes based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reserved state. Along with updating to correspond to the number of memories, set a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1) for instructing the second reserved number of memories in the above-mentioned memory processing (step S20) and send it to the peripheral control board 4140 It is designed to In addition, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0-4.

Figure 491 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing are similar program modules, and the random number used for determination And only the table is different, here only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing will be described. In the first special symbol process processing, on condition that the interval timer described later has timed out (YES in step S85), according to the first special symbol process flag, one of the following five process processing It will be executed selectively. If the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following processes.

1. Read out the first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM, based on the read first special random number, lottery processing and the like for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special design first special design. Normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81 )
3. The fluctuation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the fluctuation random number, and the variation of the effect display executed corresponding to the first special symbol on the effect display device 1600 First variation pattern setting process (step S82) in which lottery process for mode etc. is performed
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S83) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process. First special symbol stop processing (step S84) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol

In addition, the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 486).

FIG. 492 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is the same main control built-in RAM read from And next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, while counting down the first special reservation number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM A random number (first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the pattern is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and the start winning prize to the first start port 2002 Random numbers extracted according to occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is memorized so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, as the process of step S105, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the hit/loss of the big hit or the small hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S106) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), this process is terminated.

FIG. 493 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table shown in FIG. When the second special symbol normal process is executed, the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process) is compared (step S114).

As shown in FIG. 494(A), the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM and provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random numbers, the two types of first special random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and three types different from the jackpot determination value. The first special random numbers are matched with the big hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has won the small win, and the first special random numbers of 265 kinds are matched with the loss determination value indicating that the first special random numbers are lost. It is associated (jackpot probability: 1/135, small hit probability: 3/270). Also, in this example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, two types of second special random numbers are 113 types of second special random numbers that match the big win determination value indicating that the big win has been won and are different from the big win determination value match the small win determination value that indicates that the small win has been won, and 155 types of second special random numbers. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss judgment value indicating the loss (probability of big win: 1/135, probability of small win: 113/270). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. , When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the second starting opening 2004 is executed than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 2002 is executed The player is in a more advantageous state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special read out in the second special symbol normal process As a result of comparison with a random number), when it is determined to be a big win (step S115), a big win flag indicating that the variation wins a big win is set (step S116), and the win determination process is finished.

Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation has been won as a small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, that is, if it is determined to be a loss, the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 are compared (step S119).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time saving state. and a reach determination table at the time of state. And in the reach determination table at the time of the time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time-saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, The reach random numbers are associated with each of the 67 types of reach random numbers so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased more than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (step S120), the change is A reach flag is set to indicate reach, and the process ends (step S121).

FIG. 495 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 495, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. By comparing with the selected big-hit symbol determination table, a big-hit symbol is determined as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S132).

As shown in FIG. 494 (B), the jackpot pattern determination table is associated with a pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number) according to the determination result (14R short-time jackpot, 5R short-time jackpot). remembered. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number.

in particular,
1. After the first big winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor that 10 game balls B have won the first big winning port 2005, it is closed. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled (easily) into a 14R jackpot game in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first jackpot 2005, and after the jackpot game ends, the pattern variation of the special pattern is 100. 14R Time-saving jackpot A that controls to a time-saving state A that ends the state if the next jackpot game does not occur until it is executed twice.
2. After the first big winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won the first big winning port 2005, it is closed. (1 round), after that the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example 28.5 seconds), or the second count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won the second big winning hole 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern to be closed when detected four times (four rounds), the game ball B can be (easily) entered into the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006, thereby controlling the 5R jackpot game. , After the end of the big win game, if the next big win game does not occur until the variation display of the first special symbol is executed 5 times or until the variation display of the second special symbol is executed once 5R time-saving jackpot A that controls to end time-saving state B
3. After the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won the second big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled (easily) into a 14R jackpot game in which the game ball B can enter the second big prize-winning port 2006, and after the jackpot game ends, the pattern variation of the special pattern is 100. 14R time-saving big hit B that controls to time-saving state A that ends the state if the next big win game does not occur until the next time is executed.
4. After the first big winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won the first big winning port 2005, it is closed. (1 round), after that the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example 28.5 seconds), or the second count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won the second big winning hole 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern to be closed when detected four times (four rounds), the game ball B can be (easily) entered into the first big prize winning port 2005 and the second big winning prize port 2006, thereby controlling the 5R jackpot game. After the end of the big win game, if the next big win game does not occur until the variation display of the first special symbol is executed five times or until the variation display of the second special symbol is executed once. 5R time saving jackpot B to control to end time saving state B

In addition, the jackpot pattern determination table to be compared with the first pattern random number is divided into 6 judgment values when the 14R short-time jackpot A is obtained, and 94 judgment values are distributed when the 5R short-time jackpot A is obtained. there is That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by the lottery based on the first special random number, the 14R short-time jackpot A is obtained with a probability of 6%, and the 5R short-time jackpot A is obtained with a probability of 94%. Similarly, in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number, 58 judgment values are distributed when the 14R short time big hit B is obtained, and 42 judgment values are distributed when the 5R short time big hit B is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number, the 14R short-time big hit B is obtained with a probability of 58%, and the 5R short-time big hit B is obtained with a probability of 42%. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number has a higher probability of being determined as a 14R short-time jackpot than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2002 The state is advantageous to the player.

Further, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained, the game state after the big win game is finished is determined according to the kind of the big win. Then, in the jackpot control process (step S40), after the jackpot game is controlled, the process of setting the time saving flag based on the determination result and the process of setting the time saving number of times corresponding to the type of the big hit to the time saving number counter. executed.

Specifically, when it is determined that the "14R short-time jackpot A" and "14R short-time jackpot B" have been obtained, a special symbol (first special symbol and the second special symbol) is controlled in a time-saving state until the symbol variation is executed 100 times, and when it is determined that the "5R time-saving jackpot A" and "5R time-saving jackpot B" hits have been obtained After five rounds worth of jackpot games are executed, the game machine is controlled in a time-saving state until the variable display of the first special pattern is executed five times or until the variable display of the second special pattern is executed once. In this way, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, control is always made to the time-saving state after the end of the big win game, and likewise a lottery result of a big win is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number. is obtained, the time-saving state is surely controlled after the end of the jackpot game. However, when the "14R Short Time Big Hit A" and "14R Short Time Big Hit B" are obtained, the number of jackpot games is higher than when the "5R Short Time Big Hit A" and "5R Short Time Big Hit B" are obtained. He is trying to be controlled to a time-saving state over a long period of time after execution.

In addition, when the 14R time-saving jackpot A is determined, the 14R time-saving jackpot A pattern is decided as the 14R jackpot pattern of the first special pattern, and when the 5R time-saving jackpot A is decided, 5R as the 5R jackpot pattern of the first special pattern. Decide on the time-saving jackpot A pattern. In addition, when the 14R time-saving big hit B is determined in the second special symbol stop design setting process, the 14R time-saving big hit B symbol is determined as the 14R big-hit symbol of the second special symbol, and when the 5R time-saving big hit B is determined. The 5R time-saving jackpot B pattern is determined as the 5R jackpot pattern of the second special pattern.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the symbol is a losing pattern when the big hit flag is not set (step S136).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S137, selects the lottery result (type of big win, small win, reach loss, or loss). A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may instruct the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . And after that, as the process of step S138, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

The peripheral control MPU controls display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command. On the performance display device 1600, a decorative design corresponding to the first special design on the first special design display device of the function display unit 1400 is variably displayed. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU, as a form (stop design) when the fluctuation of the decorative design is stopped, determines the jackpot design (the left, middle, and right decorative designs are Combination of the same pattern [0] to [8]) is determined, and if reach loss is specified, the loss pattern with reach (left and right decorative patterns are the same pattern [0] to [8] A combination of patterns with different middle decorative patterns; reach losing pattern), and if the loss is specified, a losing pattern that does not involve reach (at least left and right of the left, middle and right decorative patterns) (combination of different decorative symbols) is determined, and the display of the determined stop symbol is controlled when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game performance).

FIG. 496 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 496, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), select the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit determined in step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S142), and the reach flag is If it is set (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal loss (reach effect is not executed), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of failure is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S149). In addition, the main control MPU sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S150). As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 only for the variation time thus determined, and the effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol. Production control will be performed at .

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in such a way that it is associated with each variable random number. Thus, the main control MPU, among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process is compared, and the variation time information associated with the read-out variation random number is obtained from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the fluctuation random number. . For example, out of 241 types of variable random numbers, 164 types of variable random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are super reach with low expectations for big hits. It is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the effects is to be executed, and the judgment value (223 to 240) that indicates that one of the 18 types of fluctuation random numbers is to execute one of the super reach productions with high expectations for big hits. ). It should be noted that the super reach production has a higher expectation for the big hit than the normal reach production, and for the player who desires the occurrence of the big hit game, when the super reach production is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased. It has become.

In addition, in the variation pattern table of this example, 13 to 60 seconds are set in the non-time saving state as the variation time corresponding to the first special random number, and 4 to 60 seconds are set in the time saving state, similarly to the second special random number The corresponding variable time is set to 13 to 60 seconds in the non-time saving state, and is set to 2 to 60 seconds in the time saving state.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as the process of step S151, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter for setting the number of continuations of the time saving state is "0". If the counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S152), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short number counter is "0" (step S153). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving control is ended is set (step S154).

When it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S151, when it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S153, at that point , the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated (step S155) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83), this process is terminated.

FIG. 497 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variable pattern is set. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process is terminated when the first special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 498 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of one special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when the time saving end flag is set (step S183), resets the time saving end flag (step S184) and resets the time saving flag (step S185). Thereby, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed a predetermined number of times (in this example, either 100 times, 1 time, or 5 times), the time saving control is terminated. It will start controlling the non-time saving state.

In the time-saving state, in order to enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, an instruction to recommend so-called right-handed hitting (hereinafter also referred to as right-handed hitting instruction) is sent to the effect display device 1600, the speaker, etc. is executed using And as described above, when the predetermined number of special symbol variations are completed after the time saving state starts, the time saving state ends and returns to the normal state (non-time saving state). When returning to the normal state, in order to enter the game ball B into the first start hole 2002, the instruction to hit to the right ends and an instruction to recommend so-called hitting to the left (hereinafter also referred to as a left hitting instruction) is displayed as an effect display. It is performed using the device 1600 and a speaker or the like.

In addition, for example, if the number of times of time saving is 100 times (that is, the time saving state ends by the end of 100 special symbol variations after the time saving state starts), for example, the 100th change from the time saving start ( That is, during execution of the time saving final variation), by entering the game ball B into the second start port 2004, in the normal state after the time saving state is completed, the second special symbol variation can be executed up to four times. .

In other words, after the time-saving state is over, the second special symbol variation (mainly executable during the time-saving state) is executed, but since the state is the normal state, it is a different stroke from the time-saving state. A state occurs in which the hitting instruction is executed.

Hereinafter, it is assumed that the maximum four second special symbol fluctuations include the big hit fluctuation. In this case, when the big win variation ends, the big win game starts, and in the big win game, a right-handed instruction is executed in the same way as during the time saving state in order to enter the game ball B into the big winning opening.

In addition, in the normal state after the end of the time saving, when hitting to the right, it is difficult to get the game ball B to the second start port 2004, so there are fewer opportunities to receive the special symbol lottery compared to the case of hitting to the left. , that is, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. On the other hand, if the game ball B is hit to the right instead of following the instruction to hit to the left, it is possible to receive a lottery advantageous to the player, which is different from the special lottery such as the normal lottery when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003. can. Further, when the game ball B is hit to the right, the probability of the game ball B entering the general winning hole 2001 and receiving the payout of the game ball B is increased. However, in such a situation where the player should hit the left, if the player hits the right (specifically, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls B pass through the gate unit 2003 within a predetermined time), the left A left-handed warning effect for warning to hit is executed. The left-handed warning effect is an effect that does not appear in a situation where the right-handed player should hit, such as in a time-saving state or during a jackpot game.

In addition, by hitting left after the end of time saving, a situation may occur in which the first special symbol variation of the big hit is suspended until the second special symbol variation of the big hit variation is finished. In this case, it is also possible to reserve a plurality of (maximum 4) first special symbol variations of the big hit. For example, if two of the four holdings of the first special symbol variation are jackpot holdings, if the two jackpot holdings are continuous, and if there are one or two losing holdings between the two jackpot holdings Sometimes and sometimes.

Therefore, as long as the game ball B is not entered into the second winning hole 2004, it will be executed between the end of the jackpot game by the first jackpot reservation and the jackpot game by the second jackpot reservation is executed. The maximum number of fluctuations is three. In addition, when the maximum number (four) of the first special symbol change big hit reservation is obtained, unless the game ball B is entered into the second winning opening 2004, the big hit by the big hit reservation is made for each special symbol change. A game is executed.

In addition, when the second special symbol variation is suspended between the two first special symbol variation big hit suspensions, the game ball B is placed in the second winning hole 2004 after the big hit game by the first big hit suspension is completed. , the second special symbol variation is preferentially executed, so that activation of the big win game by holding the second big win can be delayed.

In addition, the probability of withholding the first special symbol variation of one big hit is higher than the probability of withholding the first special symbol variation of a plurality of big hits (up to four first special symbol variations can be withheld). However, the probability of big hit in the first special lottery is a low probability such as 1/100 or 1/319).

Return to the description of the flowchart. Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game (step S187), and starts the big win game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the big win to a big win number counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot number counter becomes "0", the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed. to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot control processing to be described later, the big win opening pre-opening process (step S91) and the big winning gate opening process (step S92) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot number counter reaches "0". When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S92), when the big win number counter is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0", the process shifts to the big winning mouth after opening process (step S93) and ends the big win game. Execute control that causes

Then, a jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (14R short-time jackpot A start command, 5R short-time jackpot A start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (14R short-time jackpot A, 5R short-time jackpot A) is set. As a result, the effect of the big win game corresponding to the kind of the big win instructed by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, the jackpot start command (14R time-shorter jackpot B start command, 5R time-shorter jackpot B start command according to the type of jackpot (14R time-shorter jackpot B, 5R time-shorter jackpot B) command) is set.

In addition, when the jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, when the jackpot game is ended, specifically, the jackpot is executed in the jackpot control processing (step S40) after the jackpot opening (step S93). Opening and closing control of the first big winning hole 2005 according to the type (for example, after the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 10 game balls B win the first big winning hole 2005 When this is detected by the first count sensor, it is reset when the opening/closing control for repeating the opening/closing pattern 14 times or 5 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the big win game). While the big hit control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14) by resetting the jackpot executing flag, the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set (step S186), if the small hit flag is set (step S190), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates to start the small hit game. A small-hit start command is set (step S191), and the standby time until the start of the small-hit game (time for displaying the start of the small-hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, a small-hit running flag indicating that the small-hit game is being executed is set (step S193). In addition, the small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the kind of the small hit. In step S191, a small hit start command (5R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit A start command). As a result, the production of the small-hit game corresponding to the kind of the small-hit instructed by the small-hit start command is executed by the production display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, a small hit start command (5R small hit B1 Start command, 5R small hit B2 start command, 14R small hit B start command) are set.

In addition, when the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is ended, specifically, the small hit middle process (step S401) of the small hit control process (step S41) described later ) to control the opening and closing of the first big winning hole 2005 according to the type of small win (for example, after the first big winning hole 2005 is opened (for example, 1.8 seconds), or 10 game balls B are placed in the first big winning hole 2005 It is reset when the opening/closing control that is closed when the winning is detected by the first count sensor) is completed. While the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14) by resetting the flag during execution of the small hit, the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 It becomes possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol on the device and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 .

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when it becomes a loss, the waiting time (the time during which the stop design of the special design is displayed) until the variable display of the next special design is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S194), the process proceeds to step S195.

When the processing of steps S186 to S194 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. (step S195), and the process ends.

FIG. 499 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S40). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The above-mentioned peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are shifted to the big-hit game based on the fact that the mode of the stop of the variable display of the special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) becomes the big-hit symbol. or waiting until the next round is started.
2. Based on the state at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols, the first big prize winning port 2005 and the second big prize winning port 2006 are controlled to be open based on the fact that it becomes a jackpot pattern, or based on the start of the next round. After controlling the first big winning mouth 2005 and the second big winning mouth 2006 to the open state, and opening the first big winning mouth 2005 and the second big winning mouth 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the first Processing during the opening of the big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006, which is closed when the first count sensor or the second counting sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won the big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 (step S92)
3. After all rounds are finished, the player is waited until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big win game is finished (step S93).

It should be noted that the big hit process flag is manipulated in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 486) so as to indicate that the big winning hole pre-opening process (step S91) should be performed. Further, in the process during the opening of the big winning opening (step S92), at the start of the round in which the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are controlled to be open, a big winning round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of the round for controlling the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 to be closed, a big winning round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effect corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is implemented by the device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, and the like.

FIG. 500 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S41). In the small-hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small-hit process flag.

1. Small hit start processing (step S400) for executing the setting process for starting the small hit game
2. Small-hit mid-process for monitoring the entrance and release time of the game ball B during the small-hit game (step S401)

The small hit process flag is operated in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 486) to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed. In addition, when the entry of the game ball B into the specific area is detected in the small-hit process, a flag during execution of the big-hit is set, and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big-hit game according to the type of the 4 rounds for a hit, 13 rounds for a 14R small win) are set in the big win frequency counter, and the process ends. As a result, the big winning game is started following the small winning game.

FIG. 501 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol process (step S15).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S802, first, acquires the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Execute.

Then, in the normal design process processing, one of the following five process processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag.

1. A normal design normal process (step S803) in which the normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and a lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal design is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. Ordinary design fluctuation pattern determination processing (step S804) in which lottery processing and the like are performed for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal design fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S805) to wait until the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The normal symbol display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process. Normal design stop processing to stop the fluctuation display of the design (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern winning", the process of controlling the reception of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is possible. Normal electric accessory opening process to be executed (step S807)

Incidentally, the normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 486).

FIG. 502 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S802).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is ON and the game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 502, The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S811, first acquires the counter value of the normal reservation number counter indicating the number of normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area from the RAM of the main control MPU. . Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved and stored normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

In the processing of this step S811, when it is determined that the number of pending memories of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly suspend the variable display control of the normal symbols. will be processed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S813, the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are obtained from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S814, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU.

However, in the processing of step S811, when it is determined that the number of pending memories of the normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S812 to S814 (the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are not obtained from the random number counter), the normal pattern fluctuation display control is not newly suspended.

It should be noted that the gate portion passage processing (step S802) may be performed in another example described below. For example, if the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is now in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The normal random numbers and the normal pattern fluctuating random numbers are obtained from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value of the normal reserved number counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is judged whether or not the number of reserved memory of the normal symbol is its maximum value "4". conduct. Then, when it is determined that the number of pending memories of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the normal pending number counter is counted up (adding 1 ), then, the previously acquired normal random numbers and normal pattern fluctuation random numbers (the normal random numbers and the normal pattern fluctuation random numbers stored in the temporary storage area) are stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is the maximum value "4" (the number of holding storage of the normal symbol is that If it is the maximum value), the previously acquired normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are discarded without being stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, and the fluctuation display control of the acquired normal pattern is newly performed. It may be configured not to be held.

FIG. 503 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the reserved state. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, then as the process of step S822, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the pattern (for example, normal random number, normal pattern fluctuation random number) is read out from the same RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reservation number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in the first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random number extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate section 2003 is stored from the first (foremost) area. Store in order. When the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. is stored, and when the condition for starting the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is established, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage is performed. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the normal hit determination table shown in FIG. 504(A) with the normal random numbers read out in step S822 (step S828).

The normal pattern hit determination table shown in FIG. 504(A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU. Then, in the normal per pattern determination table that is referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, the normal random numbers are matched with the normal per pattern determination value indicating that all 10 types of normal random numbers have been elected per normal pattern. Associated. That is, in this example, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the game is always won in the normal game.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a result of comparison between the normal pattern hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal pattern normal process, when it is determined to be a normal pattern hit (step S829), A normal pattern hit flag indicating that the variation has been elected per normal pattern is set (step S830), and the normal pattern per pattern is determined as a mode of stopping the variation control of the normal pattern (normal pattern stop pattern). (Step S831). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S829 that it is not a normal pattern hit, the normal pattern is determined to be a normal pattern losing pattern as a mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal pattern (normal pattern stop pattern) (step S833).

Then, after the lottery process for the normal symbols is performed in this way, as the process of step S834, these lottery results (specifying either the normal pattern hit or the loss) are lottery so that they are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the normal map judgment result notification command according to each result. And after that, as the process of step S835, this process is completed at the time when the above-mentioned normal design process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal design variation pattern determination process (step S804).

FIG. 505 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, as shown in FIG. If so (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time reduction is selected (step S842), and if the time reduction flag is set (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time reduction is selected. (Step S843).

Then, by comparing the selected normal symbol variation pattern determination table with the normal symbol variation random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process, the normal symbol variation pattern (normal symbol variation pattern) to be executed is determined (step S844). ), set the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal pattern fluctuation in the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern, and display the normal pattern fluctuation display on the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S845).

In addition, when the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined, the main control MPU sets the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern to the normal pattern fluctuation timer (step S846). As a result, the production control is performed on the normal design display device (normal design fluctuation display) of the function display unit 1400 only for the normal design fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal design fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of non-time saving of this example, 20 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time. On the other hand, in the normal pattern variation pattern determination table for time saving of this example, the normal pattern variation time is 0.8 seconds so that the normal pattern variation time is short compared to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time saving. is set. Incidentally, the normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Also, when the normal symbol variation display control is started, as the process of step S847, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the normal symbol variation process (step S805), this End the process.

FIG. 506 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation process (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 1 is subtracted from the normal pattern fluctuation timer in which the normal pattern fluctuation time is set in step S846. When it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the normal pattern fluctuation time has passed (step S852), the process proceeds to step S853. That is, in the process of this step S853, this process is terminated when the normal symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the first special symbol stop process (step S806).

FIG. 507 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the normal symbol stop processing (step S806).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Display control is performed to display the normal symbol stop symbol determined in the normal symbol normal process on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the derivation display of the first special symbol stop symbol is notified. A normal map stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S862).

And next, when the normal pattern per flag is set (step S863), using the normal pattern per open pattern table shown in FIG. 2004 is set (step S864).

Specifically, if it is controlled in a non-time saving state at the time of opening start of the second starting port 2004, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁That is, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to a non-time-saving state at the start of opening, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed when the lottery result of the normal drawing is obtained by the lottery based on the normal random numbers. The opening pattern A is executed in which the starting port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example). Thereby, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the time for the opening operation of the second starting port 2004 is short, and the game ball when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. It is difficult to enter the ball. That is, even if the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed during the non-time saving state, almost no game ball enters.

On the other hand, if the time saving state is controlled at the start of opening the second starting port 2004, the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁That is, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to a non-time-saving state at the start of opening, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed when the lottery result of the normal drawing is obtained by the lottery based on the normal random numbers. The opening pattern B in which the starting port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) is executed. Thereby, when the opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the time for the opening operation of the second starting port 2004 is long, and the game ball when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. can be entered.

When the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 is set, then as the process of step S885, a normal pattern per start command indicating that the normal pattern per game is started is set, and the normal pattern process flag is set to the normal electric accessory. When the process is updated so as to shift to the release process (step S866), this process ends. In addition, the normal pattern per start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the production of the normal pattern per game according to the normal pattern per type instructed by the normal pattern per start command is the effect display device 1600, It can be implemented by lamps, LEDs, speakers, and the like.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the normal design process flag so that the process is shifted to the normal design normal process which is the initial value when the normal pattern per flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

FIG. 508 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal electric accessary product opening process (step S807).

Now, in the process of step S871, if it is determined that the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. If a predetermined time (opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) has passed after controlling the second starting port 2004 to the open state (step S872), the control MPU opens the second starting port 2004 When the starting port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the starting port 2004 is turned off and the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be closed (step S873), this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second starting port 2004 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 closes the second starting port 2004 as shown in FIG. is in the open state (step S874), when the starting port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is turned on to open the second starting port 2004 (step S875), this End the process.

Further, in the process of step S871, if it is not the timing to open the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. When the number of times becomes a predetermined number of times (the number of openings of the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) (step S876), the general pattern per end command is set (step S877). Then, when the normal design process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the normal design normal process which is the initial value (step S878), this process is terminated. In addition, the end command per normal pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the end command per normal pattern is received in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect of the game per normal pattern being executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp, the LED, the speaker, etc. can be terminated.

[11. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 509 is a flow chart showing the processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 509, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs initialization processing (step S501). This initial setting process includes a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initial setting process, and interrupts are enabled after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes 2 mS steady processing. In the 2mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16mS progress monitoring counter) is executed. Along with setting the flag T, a process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 mS elapsed monitoring counter is executed. In this manner, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16mS elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then 16mS steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16mS steady process, based on the command received from the main control board 1310, the effect display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers and the like are controlled. When the 16mS steady process is finished, the process returns to step S502 again, and steps S503 to S504 are repeated each time the 16mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16mS. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 510 is a flowchart showing an example of 16mS steady process executed every 16mS in the sub-main process. In the 16mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, step S149a of the second variation pattern setting process) is received. Control processing related to the effect display device 1600 is executed based on this.

Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing related to the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, the control process related to the lamps/LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting lighting signals for lamps/LEDs to various decorative boards 184, 273, etc. is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, the process of updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

It should be noted that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16mS steady process ends within 16mS. Even if it takes 16mS or more from the start of the 16mS steady process to the end of the 16mS steady process, the 16mS steady process is started immediately after 16mS has passed since the start of the 16mS steady process (command from the analysis process) is not executed. That is, when 16 mS has elapsed during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapsed flag is set. to start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing of updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the various random numbers may be updated in either one or both of the loop processing and 16mS steady processing in the sub-main processing.

FIG. 511 is a flow chart showing an example of effect control processing (step S602).

In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. It will be done.

1. Variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed in the command analysis process (first variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the first special symbol, second After performing the process of controlling the production display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. based on the second variation pattern command for instructing the variation pattern of the special symbol, the production process flag is set to the value corresponding to the process during the fluctuation production. Variation production start processing to be changed (step S711)
2. The effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. are measured for the elapsed time from the start of control, and the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. are controlled according to the elapsed time. 1 special design, second special design) in response to the passage of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (step S712) to change the production process flag to a value corresponding to the fluctuation end processing (step S712)
3. Perform processing for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of a stop display command that instructs to stop the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and if it is a loss, the above effect A process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the fluctuation performance start processing, if it is a big hit, it is changed to a value that corresponds to the big win performance processing, and if it is a small hit, it is changed to a value according to the small win performance processing. (Step S713)
4. Processing for executing display control during the big win game is performed on the performance display device 1600 based on the reception of the big win start command for instructing the start of the big win game, and the above performance process flag is varied when the big win game ends. Big hit effect processing (step S714) to change to a value according to the effect start processing
5. Processing for executing display control during the small winning game is performed on the performance display device 1600 based on the reception of the small winning start command for instructing the start of the small winning game, and the second big winning opening is performed during the small winning game. If the game ball B accepted in 2006 is distributed to the specific area, the production process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the big win production start processing when ending the small winning game, and the game ball B is distributed to the specific area. Small hit production processing (step S715) to change to a value according to the fluctuation production start processing if not

Special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400) by the above processing In synchronism with the variable display of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed.

[10. Variation control at the end of time saving control]
As described above, in the time-saving state, the second starting port 2004 is controlled to open and close with an open pattern different from the non-time-saving state. That is, when the normal pattern variation executed by the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 stops, if it is in the time saving state, the second start port 2004 is opened with the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) with the open pattern A. is opened and closed, and when the normal pattern variation executed by the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 stops, if it is a non-time saving state, the second in the open pattern B of the long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) The start port 2004 is opened and closed.

In this way, in order to change the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 on the basis of when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 stops, immediately before the time saving state ends (for example, the time saving number of times is 100 times in the case of the time saving state A, the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 immediately before the 100th fluctuation display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) in the time saving state stops) In the case of opening and closing the second starting port 2004 by stopping the normal pattern fluctuation executed in, the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in the open pattern B of the long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) as a time saving state will be In addition, when the time saving state ends after the second start port 2004 is opened, the game player may feel uncomfortable because the opening pattern in the time saving state is executed even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, the start winning to the second start port 2004 may occur at an unexpected time such as after the symbol fluctuation is started in a non-time saving state after the end of the time saving state, which is not intended by the game designer. Behavior (in the non-time-saving state, the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed and the variation display of the second special symbol is hardly performed, but to the second start port 2004 despite the non-time-saving state start winning occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), and the behavior may give the player a sense of incongruity, resulting in a decrease in the interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the special symbols variably displayed on the special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400 are stopped with a losing symbol (for example, the second Step S194 of the special symbol stop processing), normally, "0.5 seconds" is set to the interval timer as the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol variable display is started. set. As described above, the interval timer is referred to in the first special symbol process processing (step S28) and the second special symbol process processing (step S39), and until the interval timer times out, the special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 (the 1 special design indicator, 2nd special design indicator) in the special design (the 1st special design, the 2nd special design) it controls so that the fluctuation display is not started.

Also, when the time saving state is ended, that is, when the pattern fluctuation of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the big hit game reaches the number of time saving times, when the pattern fluctuation stops (time saving When the last symbol variation in the state stops), set "2 seconds" to the interval timer as the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol variation display is started. set. After changing the second starting port 2004 to the open state in the time saving state as described above, when 1.5 seconds have passed, the second starting port 2004 is changed to the closed state. Therefore, by setting the interval timer to "2 seconds" when the last symbol variation in the time saving state stops and the time saving state ends, the special symbol variation in the non-time saving state starts before the second The second starting port 2004 can be changed to a closed state, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the starting prize to the second starting port 2004 after the pattern variation of the special pattern is started in the non-time-saving state.

In addition, the period to be set to the interval timer when the last symbol variation in the time saving state stops and ends the time saving state is at least equivalent to the opening time of the second large winning opening 2006 in the time saving state (in this example, "1. 5 seconds”) or longer. Also, if the second big winning opening 2006 has not changed to the open state when the last symbol variation in the time saving state stops and ends the time saving state, it is used as a waiting time until the next special symbol variation display is started. The same time as usual ("0.5 second" in this example) may be set.

In this way, regardless of the presence or absence of the first pending number and the second pending number when the last special lottery result in the time saving state is derived (when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state stops), in a predetermined period Time saving control that can be continued after the last special lottery result in the time saving state is derived (after the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state is stopped) by suppressing the execution of the next special lottery (hitting or losing determination) over time. is terminated within the predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the second pending number after the termination of the time saving control. As a result, the game progresses with a behavior not intended by the game designer that the start winning to the second start port 2004 occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in spite of the non-time saving state. Since the game can be prevented and the game progresses with the behavior intended by the game designer (game characteristics intended by the game designer), it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game by not giving the player a feeling of discomfort. .

It should be noted that, in the above example, the determination of whether or not the time saving state (determining whether or not to end the time saving state) is performed by the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when the normal symbol variation is stopped. Although what is performed as a reference is shown, when starting the normal design variation executed by the normal design display device of the function display unit 1400 to determine whether it is a time saving state (for example, the above normal design normal processing (step S803) is executed, or when the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S804) is executed) may be used as a reference. In this case, at least, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation executed in the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 during the time saving state (normal pattern fluctuation time: "0.8 seconds" in this example) and in the time saving state It may be equal to or longer than the period ("2.3 seconds" in this example) that is the sum of the opening time of the second big winning opening 2006 ("1.5 seconds" in this example).

In addition, the above-mentioned left-handed instruction (instruction to recommend left-handed hitting that appears in order to enter the game ball B into the first start port 2002 when returning from the time saving state to the normal state) is after the end of the time saving It may be performed even before the first normal fluctuation starts. In other words, the instruction to hit to the left may be executed across the start timing of the first normal variation. Further, for example, the end timing of the left-handed instruction may be before the end of the first normal fluctuation after the end of the time saving, or may be after the end of the first normal fluctuation.

In addition, for example, the symbol stops in the final variation of the time saving state, and after the symbol stops and before the start of the first variation after the end of the time saving, the left-handed instruction starts. Note that the instruction to hit left using the effect display device 1600 may be started after the instruction to hit left using the speaker is started, or the order may be reversed. Also, for example, the left-handed hitting instruction using the speaker may be finished before the left-handed hitting instruction by the effect display device 1600 is finished, or the order may be reversed. In addition, it is desirable that the left-handed hitting instruction at the end of the time saving is continued for a predetermined time even if the left-handed hitting is actually started.

In addition, the production mode of the left-handed hitting instruction that appears at the end of the time saving and the left-handed hitting instruction in the left-handed warning production that warns the left-handed hitting because the right-handed hitting is performed normally (for example, displayed on the production display device 1600 display mode) may be different. When hitting to the right while the hitting to the left instruction at the end of the time saving is being executed, the hitting to the left instruction may continue to be executed, or the hitting to the left instruction may be terminated and the hitting to the left warning effect is performed. A left-handed instruction may be executed.

In addition, when the second special symbol variation is executed in the state where the left-handed instruction that appears at the end of the time saving is completed, the left-handed instruction in the left-handed warning production described above is executed when the right-handed strike is performed. The instruction to hit to the left ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. There is a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the predetermined time. Therefore, in one variation, after the left-handed instruction starts and ends, the left-handed instruction can be started. Note that the predetermined time may be shorter than the shortest fluctuation time. In addition, when the jackpot game starts before the predetermined time elapses, the instruction to hit to the left ends by the time the jackpot game starts.

In addition, when hitting to the right while the instruction to hit to the left is being executed in the warning effect of hitting to the left, the performance time of the instruction to hitting to the left may be reset and the instruction to hit to the left may be restarted from the beginning. , Although the performance time of the left-handed instruction is reset, the left-handed instruction may be continued without redoing, or only the left-handed instruction production may be performed while ignoring the fact that the right-handed instruction was performed. It can be executed as is.

In addition, as described above, by entering the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the time saving final variation, it is possible to reserve a maximum of four second special symbol variations, for example, time saving When the normal symbol lottery is won just before the end of the final variation, the second winning opening 2004 opens during the execution of the first variation in the normal state after the end of the time saving, and the second special during the execution of the first variation. It is also possible to reserve one more pattern variation.

Suspending the second special symbol variation during the execution of the time saving final variation, further suspending one second special symbol variation during the execution of the first variation after the end of the time saving, and only the one second special symbol variation is a big hit. In the case of variation, the second special symbol variation of the big win is executed after the execution of the loss variation suspended during the execution of the time saving final variation, and the big win game is started. In addition, the right-handed instruction is executed during the time-saving state, and as long as the right-handed instruction is followed, there is a possibility that the maximum number of four second special symbol fluctuations are suspended during the execution of the time-saving final fluctuation. Since it is the highest, it is most likely that the losing variation will be executed 4 times before the second special symbol variation of the jackpot is performed.

On the other hand, for example, if there is no suspension of the special symbol variation at the end of the time saving, although the variation is not executed, as described above, when the normal lottery is won just before the end of the time saving final variation There is a possibility that the second special symbol variation can be performed from the state where variation is not performed by performing right hitting. In particular, when the second special symbol variation is a big hit variation, the time saving is finished, the variation is not executed, and after one variation is performed, the big win game is started.

[12. Production in an advantageous situation]
[12-1. Pachinko machine specifications]
First, an example of the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter will be described. FIG. 512(A) is a hit probability table, and (B) is an example of a jackpot distribution table. The hit probability table and the jackpot distribution table are stored, for example, in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol is also called special figure 1, and the second special symbol is also called special figure 2. In addition, the first special design and the second special design are generically referred to simply as the special design. In addition, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are collectively referred to as special symbol variation or simply variation. The special lottery result in special figure 1 and special figure 2 includes a big hit and a small hit.

The hit probability table includes a low probability state (that is, non-probability variable state) and a high probability state (that is, probability variable state), and a small probability (no distinction between low probability state and high probability state), Define The jackpot probability is common in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also, the hit probability table defines the small hit probability in the special figure 2. In other words, according to the hit probability table of FIG. 512, a small hit is won with a high probability when the special figure 2 is won. Also, from the winning of special figure 1, it is not won a small hit, or it is won with a very low probability (for example, 1/300 or less) compared to the special figure 2.

In addition, in this chapter, when a small hit is won, the first big prize winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). Then, the opening and closing pattern of closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

The jackpot distribution table defines the jackpot type distribution for each of the special figures 1 and 2 when winning the jackpot. "2R", "8R", and "16R" in the jackpot type indicate the number of rounds of the jackpot, and "low probability with short time", "high probability with short time", and "high probability with short time" are the jackpots Shows the game state to transition after the end.

In addition, "Special Figure 1_8R Low Probability Short Time Pattern 1", "Special Figure 1_8R Low Probability Short Time Pattern 2", "Special Figure 1_8R Low Probability Short Time Pattern 3", "Special Figure 2_2R Low Probability Short Time Pattern 1", The number of time reductions of "Special Figure 2_2R Low Probable Time Saving Pattern 2", "Special Figure 2_2R Low Probability Time Saving Pattern 3", and "Special Figure 2_2R High Probability Time Saving Pattern 3" is 10 times, and "Special Figure 2_2R High The number of times of time saving of "probable time saving pattern 1" is 7 times, and the number of time saving times of "special figure 2_2R low probability time saving pattern 2" is 9 times.

The number of times of time saving is the number of times of fluctuation that triggers the end of the time saving state that starts after the end of the big hit game. That is, after entering the time saving state, the time saving state ends when the fluctuation of the number of times determined by the time saving number of times ends. In addition, the number of time reduction may be determined by the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or may be determined by the number of fluctuations of one of the special figures. In this chapter, it is assumed that the number of times of reduction in working hours is determined by the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 2. In other words, for example, even if the total number of fluctuations of special figures 1 and 2 reaches 7 times, the change of special figure 2 is not completed 7 times, it shall not be completed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are designed to start fluctuating display individually according to the extraction of the special random number, and the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 display can be executed simultaneously (simultaneous variation of special symbols). When both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (reserved), the reserved special random numbers are individually digested according to the progress of the variation display of the individual special random numbers.

That is, when the first special symbol during fluctuation stops, the first special symbol reserved in the first special symbol storage display device starts to vary, and when the second special symbol during fluctuation stops, the second special symbol. Variation of the second special symbol held in the memory display is started. In addition, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, in the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are displayed so as to change simultaneously in correspondence with the variation of each special symbol.

In addition, if one of the special figures 1 or 2 is stopped in the display mode indicating the big hit, one of the following processes is performed as a process for the other special figure during simultaneous fluctuation . As a first processing example, while controlling the jackpot game by one special figure, the variation of the other special figure is deleted (forcibly stopped by losing). In this case, even after the big hit game ends, the variation of the deleted special symbol is not resumed, and the next special symbol of the other is started.

As a second processing example, while controlling the jackpot game by one of the special symbols, the elapse of the variation time of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped during execution of the jackpot game. During the execution of the big hit game, the special symbols during the suspension of fluctuation are displayed, for example, by blinking on the special symbol display (displayed in a manner different from when it is not paused (the player can recognize that it is paused)) be done. After the end of the big win game, the temporarily stopped variable display of the other special figure is resumed from the remaining variable time. As a third processing example, while controlling the big hit game by one special figure, the fluctuation time of the other special figure is reset, and after the end of the big hit game, the variation of the other special figure is started again.

In this chapter, the high-probability non-time-saving state is a state (so-called small-hit rush) in which it is easy to obtain a small-hit output ball. Hereinafter, only in the high-probability non-time-saving state, an example of specifications for realizing a small hit rush will be described.

First, normal symbol variation time and normal lottery probability will be described. The variation time of the normal symbol is, for example, about 1 second in both the time saving state and the non-time saving state, which is a short time compared to the variation time of the special symbol variation. Moreover, in both the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, the normal winning probability in the normal lottery result performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 is very high (for example, 1/1). In addition, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 when the normal symbol is won is long in the time saving state (for example, about 6 seconds) and short in the non-time saving state (for example, about 0.7 seconds).

Next, the game method in each state will be explained. As described above, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is extremely high compared to the first special symbol lottery (54552/65536 in the example of FIG. 512(A)). Therefore, in the low-probability short-time state, the second starting port 2004 is opened by allowing the game ball B to pass through the gate part 2003, the game ball B is entered into the second starting port 2004, and a small hit is achieved with a high probability. can be elected.

However, in the low probability non-time saving state, the variation time of the special figure 2 is very long compared to the variation time of the special figure 1. Specifically, for example, the shortest variation time of Toku-zu 2 (eg, about 10 minutes) is longer than the longest variation time of Tok-zu 1 (eg, about 5 minutes). Therefore, the time interval from when the small win is won until the first big winning hole 2005 is opened is very long, and furthermore, the opening and closing time of the first big winning hole 2005 in the small winning game is short and the number of times of opening and closing is small. Even if the variation of the special figure 2 is executed, it is difficult to enter the game ball B into the first big winning hole 2005 with good timing during the small winning game.

In addition, specifically, the total opening time of the first big winning opening 2005 in the small winning game is shorter than the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 in the time saving state. For example, the first big winning opening 2005 opens for about 0.5 seconds, and then executes the first pattern for about 1.35 seconds only once. There is a small winning game in which the first pattern is executed once after repeating the second pattern of opening for about a second and then closing for about 0.7 seconds twice.

Even if the game ball B can be entered into the first big winning hole 2005 with good timing during the small winning game, the variation time of the special figure 2 is very long, so the ball that can be obtained per unit time In addition, the game cannot be smoothly progressed. Therefore, in the low-probability short-time state, the player basically hits left and advances the game so as to enter the game ball B into the first start hole 2002 .

On the other hand, in the time saving state (low probability time saving state and high probability time saving state), the variation time of the special figure 2 is set short. Specifically, for example, the variation time (for example, about 1 second) of the special figure 2 shortened deviation variation (variation in which the reach effect is not executed) is set shorter than the shortest variation time (for example, about 4 seconds) of the special figure 1 It is done, and when deviation variation starts in the state where there is a hold of special figure 2 in the time saving state, the reduction deviation variation is selected at a high rate (for example, about 90%). Therefore, in the time-saving state, the player executes a so-called right-handed hit, and advances the game so as to enter the game ball B into the second start port 2004, thereby smoothly and without reducing the number of balls. You can proceed with the game.

Here, since the second starting port 2004 is downstream of the gate part 2003 in the flow path of the game ball B on the game board 5, most of the game balls B heading for the second starting port 2004 passes through the gate portion 2003 before reaching the . Also, the first big winning opening 2005 opened during the small winning game is located downstream of the second starting opening 2004 in the flow path of the game ball B on the game board 5 . When the second starting hole 2004 is open, the game ball B heading for the first big winning hole 2005 enters the second starting hole 2004 and does not reach the first big winning hole 2005. - 特許庁That is, in order to enter the game ball B into the first big winning hole 2005, it is necessary for the game ball B to pass over the second start hole 2004 when the second start hole 2004 is closed.

However, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 when winning a normal hit is long (for example, about 6 seconds). Most of the balls B enter the open second starting hole 2004 and do not reach the first big winning hole 2005 . Therefore, in the time-saving state, the player can enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 and frequently win small wins, but cannot obtain the balls from the small win game. . In addition, the number of prize balls when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 is, for example, one, so in the time saving state, although the special figure 2 variation can be executed without almost reducing the number of balls, It is difficult to increase the number of balls.

In addition, the first big winning hole 2005 is arranged at a position where there are almost no game balls B reaching the first big winning hole 2005 when a so-called left-handed hit is performed. It also takes care of the so-called capture behavior of trying to increase the number of game balls B by alternately hitting right.

Subsequently, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, like the time-saving state, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set short (for example, about 1 second). Therefore, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the player executes a so-called right-handed hit, and advances the game so as to enter the game ball B into the second start port 2004 . Furthermore, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the opening time of the second start port 2004 when winning a normal hit is a sufficient time to enter the game ball B into the second start port 2004, and is short ( For example, about 0.7 seconds), a considerable number (for example, more than half) of the game balls B hit to the right pass over the second start opening 2004 in the closed state and pass through the first big winning opening. 2005 is reached.

That is, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the player can enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 to frequently win a small hit, and can obtain a ball by the small win game. With the above-mentioned specifications, it is possible to realize a small hit rush that makes it easier to get a small hit ball only in a high probability non-time saving state.

FIG. 513 is a transition diagram showing an example of game state transition of the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter. As described above, the variation of the special figure 1 is executed in the low probability non-time-saving state, and the variation of the special figure 2 is executed in the state other than the low probability non-time-saving state, so that the player can smoothly progress the game. can be done. On the other hand, the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the special figure 2 jackpot, and the transition from the state other than the low-probability non-time-saving state to the special figure 1 jackpot are irregular, so in FIG. ing.

In any state, when a jackpot is won, the state shifts to either a low-probability time-saving state, a high-probability short-time state, or a high-probability non-time-saving state according to the type of the jackpot. In the low-probability time-saving state, when the variation of the special figure 2 of the number of times of time-saving determined by the jackpot type that triggered the transition to the low-probability time-saving state ends, the state is shifted to the low-probability non-time-saving state. Also, in the high-probability time-saving state, when the variation of the special figure 2 of the number of times of time-saving determined by the jackpot type that triggered the transition to the high-probability time-saving state ends, the high-probability non-time-saving state, that is, the small hit rush Transition.

The transition from the high-probability non-time-saving state to the high-probability non-time-saving state seems to be a disadvantageous state transition for the player at first glance, but as described above, the small hit rush is realized in the high-probability non-time-saving state, which is advantageous for the player. state transition. Therefore, when the high-probability time-saving state ends by digesting the variation of the special figure 2 determined by the number of times of time-saving, the player can get an exhilaration rather than a decrease in interest.

[12-2. Rush rush chance production]
Hereinafter, the rush rush effect, which is an effect executed from the start of the time saving state (high probability time saving state and low probability time saving state), will be described. Rush rush chance production means that at the start of the time saving state, the current state is a time saving state, but it is unknown whether it is a high probability time saving state or a low probability time saving state. It is an effect that informs whether the state is a high-probability short-time state (that is, a state that shifts to a high-probability non-short-time state that is a small hit rush state after the end of the special 2 fluctuation of the specified number of times) or a low-probability short-time state. .

FIGS. 514, 515, and 516 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the rush rush chance effect. Figures 514, 515, and 516 illustrate an example in which the number of times of time saving is 10 times, and all variations in the time saving state are deviation variations.

(A) is a state in which the time-saving jackpot has ended. The effect display device 1600 has stopped the same decorative pattern indicating a big hit. In addition, the expected value of the winning ball at the time of jackpot winning is higher in the order of low probability jackpot with short working hours, high probability jackpot with short working hours, and high probability jackpot without short working hours. For example, when a set of "7" decorative patterns is selected, a combination of decorative patterns may be selected so that winning of a high-probability, time-saving, no jackpot is confirmed. Also, if the odd number of decorative patterns is selected than when the even number of decorative patterns is selected, the expectation of winning the high probability short time jackpot rather than the low probability short time jackpot will be higher. , a combination of decorative patterns may be selected.

In addition, an effect may be executed in which the decorative symbols are promoted during the big hit. Specifically, for example, even if the odd number matching or even number matching is stopped when the pattern is decided even though the high probability time saving jackpot is won, the promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, and the decorative pattern is promoted to "7" matching. good.

(B) is a state in which the time-saving jackpot has ended and the time-saving state has started. A display indicating that the rush rush chance has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In (C), since the time-saving state has started, the effect display device 1600 displays a display (right-handed display) prompting to execute a so-called right-handed hit and enter the game ball B into the second start opening 2004. there is At the start of the time saving state, a large right-handed display (three arrows labeled "Right-handed!!") in the middle and lower part of the production display device 1600 and a small right-handed display (" A single arrow labeled "Right hit!!") and are displayed.

(D) is a state in which the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 from the state of (C), and the first variation of the special figure 2 has started. A large right-handed display has been deleted from the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁Furthermore, in the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, a display indicating the maximum number of times of remaining time reduction is displayed. As described above, the number of times of time saving is 7 times, 8 times, or 10 times, so in the state of (D) where the variation of special figure 2 has not finished even 1 variation, the maximum value is "10 remaining times" is displayed. In addition, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Power up the character in 6 seconds!".

In addition, the power-up performance of the character is performed by using six variations from the first variation to the sixth variation of the special figure 2 in the time saving state. In the power-up effect, an image of a character wearing an aura is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the aura color steps up during the six changes.

For example, the peripheral control ROM stores a scenario management table for power-up effects. A scenario management table stores the scenario of a power-up production|presentation, and distribution about each of a low probability shortening working hours state and a high probability shortening working hours state. A scenario indicates the color of the aura at each of the six variations. In addition, in each scenario, the aura color in the final variation of the power-up production is assumed to be white, blue, green, red, and the expectation that the time saving state is high in order of the rainbow color. In addition, the rainbow color shall be selected only when the present state is a highly probable time saving state.

Also, it is desirable that the aura color does not step down (eg, white on the next variation of blue, etc.) in the six variations of each scenario. This is because there is a risk that the player's sense of expectation will be lost. Further, for example, when the final aura color in the power-up effect is the same, the lower the number of fluctuations reaching the final aura color, the higher the degree of expectation of the highly probable time-saving state may be set. Specifically, for example, when the final aura color is red, when reaching red in the sixth variation of special figure 2, and when reaching red in the fourth variation of special figure 2, The latter is more likely to be in a high-probability short-time state. In addition, the expectation degree which is a highly probable time saving state may be high for the former. This is because the expectation can be pulled until the final (sixth) change.

Also, in each scenario, one change may raise the aura color by one level, may raise it by multiple levels, or may not raise it. When the aura color is promoted by multiple stages in one change, for example, the change may step up from white to green without going through blue, or the change may step up to white, blue, and green in order. You may In each scenario, the aura color that is first displayed in the first variation of Toku-zu 2 may not be the one with the lowest degree of expectation (that is, it may not be white).

It should be noted that "6 seconds" displayed on the effect display device 1600 is an index indicating the remaining number of times the power-up effect is performed, and is different from the actual 6 seconds. In other words, for example, as will be described later, the first variation in the time saving state is "6 seconds left" (meaning that the power-up effect is performed using the remaining six variations), and the second variation is "after 5 seconds” (meaning that the power-up effect will be performed using the remaining 5 fluctuations) is displayed. That is, since the remaining time indicates the number of remaining fluctuations until the rock breaking effect is performed, the display indicating the maximum number of time reductions may not be displayed.

(E) is during the fluctuation of the first special figure 2 after the time saving state starts, and is the state of continuation of (D). The effect display device 1600 displays a character wearing an aura and a message "6 seconds left".

(F) is the state at the end of the variation of the first special figure 2 after the time saving state starts. After the state of (E), the color of the aura is promoted from white to blue until the end of the variation, and the effect display device 1600 displays a display ("power up!") indicating that the color of the aura has been promoted. to be displayed. (G) is a state in which the variation of the second special figure 2 has started since the time saving state has started. The aura color of the character remains blue, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Five seconds left". Similar effects are repeated until the variation of the fifth special figure 2.

(H) is the state during the variation of the special figure 2 of the sixth time since the time saving state started. The color of the aura is promoted to red in the 6th variation of the special figure 2, and the effect display device 1600 displays a display ("power up!") indicating that the color of the aura has been promoted. In the example of FIG. 514, red is the final aura color in the power-up effect.

(I) is the state at the end of the sixth special figure 2 after the time saving state starts. In the sixth variation, after the aura-colored step-up is completed, the introduction effect of the rock destruction effect performed in the variation of the special figure 2 from the seventh time to the tenth time is executed. In (I), "Destroy the rock!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the introductory effect. The character destroys the rock in the rock destruction presentation only when the current state is the highly probable time-saving state.

(J) is the state during the variation of the special figure 2 of the seventh time since the time saving state started. A rock destruction effect has started, and an image of a character hitting a rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . During the rock breaking effect, for example, the character is wearing a red aura, which is the final aura color of the power-up effect.

As a result, even during the rock-breaking presentation, the player never forgets the degree of expectation of the highly reliable time-saving state. Conversely, the character may not be wrapped in an aura during the rock breaking effect. This is because some players do not want other players to know the degree of expectation. If the character is encrusted with an aura during the rock destruction presentation, the aura color may be stepped up even during the rock destruction presentation.

(K) is the continuation state of (J) during the fluctuation of the seventh special figure 2 after the time saving state starts. The effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the rock is cracked but not cracked by the character hitting the rock. (L) is the state at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 of the seventh time since the time saving state started. A display (“Still!!”) indicating that the rock destruction effect is still continuing is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . After that, the same effect is repeated.

(M) is the state during the variation of the special figure 2 of the eighth time since the time saving state started. An image of the character hitting the rock again is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the rock destruction effect. (N) is the state at the end of the variation of the ninth special figure 2 after the time saving state starts. The effect display device 1600 displays a display (“I bet on this blow!”) indicating that the next variation of the special figure 2 is the last variation in which the rock destruction effect is performed.

(O) is the 10th time from the start of the time saving state (that is, the end of the time saving state) during the fluctuation of the special figure 2. An image of a character hitting a rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . The cracks in the rock may increase each time the character hits the rock. In (O), more rock cracks than in (M).

(P) is the continuation state of (O) during the variation of the 10th special figure 2 after the time saving state starts. The effect display device 1600 shows an image that successfully destroys the rock (that is, the current state is a high-probability time-saving state, and an image indicating that the transition to a high non-time-saving state occurs at the end of the fluctuation) is displayed. ing. It should be noted that after the image in which the rock has been unsuccessfully destroyed is displayed, a resurrection effect may be performed to display the image in which the rock has been successfully destroyed. (Q) is the state at the end of the variation of the 10th special figure 2 after the time saving state starts. The effect display device 1600 displays an image (“Rush rush!!”) indicating transition to a high-probability non-time-saving state.

In addition, when the number of times of working hours is 7 times in a high-probability short-time state, the image that rocks are destroyed in the 7th variation of the special figure 2 and the image that shifts to a high-probable non-time-saving state (that is, (P), (Q ), except that the remaining number of times is displayed as "remaining 4 times" at the upper left. Similarly, when the number of times of working hours is 9 times in a high-probability short-time state, the image that rocks break in the 9th variation of the special figure 2 and the image that shifts to a high-probable non-time-saving state (that is, (P), ( The image of Q) is displayed, except that the number of remaining times displayed in the upper left portion is "2 remaining times").

In addition, in the example mentioned above, the time saving state whose frequency|count of time saving is 7 times and 9 times is not selected in a low probability time saving state. If there is a low-probability time-saving state in which the number of times of time-saving is 7 times and 9 times, a rock-breaking effect that ends in failure with a small number of variations is performed, so it is not possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration. be.

Figures 516 (P') and (Q') are examples of rock destruction effects when the current state is the non-time saving state. (P ') is the continuation state of (O) during the fluctuation of the 10th special figure 2 since the time saving state started. In the rock breaking effect, the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the character fails to destroy the rock. (Q ') is the state in which the variation of the 10th special figure 2 has ended since the time saving state started. A display indicating that the rush rush chance has ended is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . After this, it shifts to a low-probability short-time state.

For example, in the power-up effect, an image of the pressing operation unit 303 and an image prompting pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected, Whether or not the aura-colored step-up is possible may be notified. Similarly, for example, in a rock destruction effect, an image of the pressing operation unit 303 and an image prompting pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected, , it may be notified whether or not rock breaking is possible.

In addition, when the variation during the time-saving state, that is, during the rush rush performance is a big win variation, the big win is notified by a performance different from the rock breaking performance, for example. This is to make the player recognize by clearly distinguishing whether the jackpot has been won or whether the transition to the high-probability time-saving state has succeeded.

As a specific effect, for example, immediately after the change starts, the shutter group is closed so as to cover the effect display device 1600 . The closed state of the shutter group is maintained for a long time (for example, about 2 minutes) according to the variation pattern, for example. After that, when the shutter group opens, an icon suggesting the type of the big win is displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁After that, the decorative pattern is stopped. On the other hand, the big hit may be notified by an effect of breaking rocks. As a result, the player cannot immediately recognize whether he or she has won the jackpot or has shifted to the high-probability time-saving state, so that the player can maintain a sense of tension.

[12-3. Production during small hit rush]
Figures 517 and 518 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect during a small hit rush. (A) is the same state as the state at the end of the final variation of the high probability time saving state, that is, FIG. 515 (Q). (B) is a state in which the high-probability non-time-saving state is fluctuating. In the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, there is displayed a display ("Rush!!") indicating that the current state is a high-probability non-time-saving state (that is, during a small hit rush).

Also, in (B), the lower right portion of the effect display device 1600 has a total winning pitch display area and a timer display area. In the total winning ball number display area, the total number of winning balls from the start of the small winning rush and the number of balls paid out by the big winning are displayed. In addition, for example, it is desirable that the number of balls paid out by entering the game ball B into a general winning opening other than the big winning opening or a starting opening is not included in the total winning number of balls.

It should be noted that, for example, the number of balls paid out by the entry of the game ball B into the general winning opening may be included in the total number of acquired balls. It is desirable to output an image, output a predetermined sound from various speakers, and output predetermined light from various lamps. This is to make the player aware that the total number of acquired balls is increasing due to the entry of the game ball B into the general winning hole.

In addition, the display of the total number of acquired balls continues until the end of the jackpot fluctuation (that is, the high probability short-time jackpot fluctuation and the low probability short-time jackpot fluctuation) that cannot necessarily be shifted to the high-probability non-time-saving state, and the jackpot At the end of the fluctuation, the count of the total number of acquired balls stops. However, if you win a big hit that does not necessarily move to a high probability non-working time state, but can then move to a high probability non-working time state again without falling into a low probability non-working time state, total acquisition again The number of balls is displayed again, and the count restarts from the value at the last count stop. In addition, if you win a jackpot that is not necessarily able to shift to a high-accuracy non-time-saving state, but you win a high-accuracy time-saving no jackpot during the time-saving state shifted by the jackpot, the high-accuracy time-saving no jackpot At the start, the total number of acquired balls may be redisplayed and counting may be restarted.

In the timer display area, the digestion time of the small winning rush counted from the start of the small winning rush is displayed. The start of the small hit rush may be the end of the high-probability short-time no jackpot game, the end of the final fluctuation in the high-probability short-time state, or the start of the first fluctuation in the high-probability no short-time state. good.

(C) is a state in which the high-probability non-time-saving state has ended the high-probability non-time-saving jackpot variation. Since the timer in the timer display area indicates the duration of the small hit rush, the timer is stopped at the end of the big hit fluctuation in the high probability non-short time period (at the end of the big hit fluctuation). (D) is during a high-probability no time-saving jackpot game. Even during the jackpot game, the total number of winning balls is displayed and added. Although the timer is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the big win, the timer may be displayed in a stopped state.

(E) is a high-probability no time-saving jackpot game, and is a continuation state of (D). When the total number of obtained balls reaches a predetermined number, the effect display device 1600 displays the arrival. The predetermined number of balls has a plurality of stages, and, for example, every time the total number of acquired balls increases by 1,000, the arrival display is performed. Therefore, in (E), the effect display device 1600 displays the display "1000 PT breakthrough!" In addition to the display of arrival, predetermined light may be output from various lamps, predetermined sound may be output from various speakers, or BGM may be changed. For example, after the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 30000 shots), it is not necessary to perform the arrival display.

In addition, for example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant or may be different. Specifically, for example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant, such as 1000 shots, 2000 shots, 3000 shots, . 20000 shots, etc. may be set so that the difference from the previous stage increases as the stage goes to the later stages.

(F) is the state immediately before the end of the jackpot game of the high-probability, time-saving, no jackpot. (G) is the state immediately after the end of the jackpot game of the high-probability no time-saving jackpot. The effect display device 1600 displays a high-probability non-time-saving state, that is, a display indicating that the small hit rush starts again. Furthermore, in (G), there is an obtained ball number history display area in the middle upper part of the effect display device 1600 . In the obtained ball number history display area, a history of the total number of the obtained balls obtained by one big win and the obtained balls obtained in the small winning rush winning the big win is displayed. In (G), 2910 balls were obtained in the big hit and the previous small hit rush, so "2910" is displayed in the winning ball number history display area.

(H) is a state in which the total number of acquired balls reaches 5000 during the small hit rush. When the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined number, the background image on the effect display device 1600 changes. The predetermined number of balls has a plurality of stages. For example, the background image changes every time the total number of acquired balls increases by 5,000. In addition, along with the change of the background image, predetermined light may be output from various lamps, predetermined sound may be output from various speakers, or BGM may be changed after the background image is changed. For example, after the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 30000 shots), the background image does not have to be changed.

In the example of FIG. 517, the total number of acquired balls is displayed every 1,000 shots, and the background image changes every 5,000 shots. . . , both the arrival display and the change of the background image are executed (in this example, the arrival display is always performed at the timing when the background image changes).

The arrival display and the change of the background image in the effect display device 1600 are executed in order according to a predetermined priority, for example. For example, since the change of the background image is performed less frequently than the display of arrival, the change of the background image can give the player a stronger sense of exhilaration than the display of arrival. Depending on whether the background image is changed first or later, the timing of giving the player a stronger sense of exhilaration differs.

Note that the arrival display and the change of the background image may be performed at the same time. Simultaneous execution of the arrival display and the change of the background image provides a synergistic effect, and can give the player a stronger sense of exhilaration than when these effects are executed alone. It should be noted that the same applies to the output of light and sound that is executed at the same time as the display of arrival and the change of the background image.

(I) is the state at the end of time-saving jackpot variation. Since the rush rush chance performance is performed after the end of the big win, at this time, it is desirable not to inform whether the big win with short working hours is a high probability big win with short working hours or a low probability big hit with short working hours.

(J) is the state at the end of time-saving jackpot variation, and is the state following (I). The total number of winning balls, the accumulated time of the timer, and the effect display device 1600 at the end of the big hit variation are displayed as a result. The reason why the result is displayed at that timing is that by winning the time-saving jackpot, it is not necessarily possible to move to a high-quality non-time-saving state (small hit rush) again without falling into a low-quality non-time-saving state. is.

(K) is a state in which the time-saving jackpot has ended. (L) is the state in which the rush rush chance has started. (M) is the state in which the final variation of the rush rush chance (the final variation of the time saving state) is changing, and the rock is being destroyed. (N) is the state at the end of the final variation, and is a state in which it is notified that the state will shift to a high-probability non-time-saving state. (K), (L), (M), and (N) are the same as in FIGS. 514(A), 514(B), 515(P), and 515(Q), respectively. Description is omitted.

(O) is a state in which the high-probability non-time-saving state is fluctuating. When it is possible to return to the high-probability non-time-saving state again without falling into the low-probability non-time-saving state, for example, the display of each display area is as follows. The timer display in the timer display area takes over the value at the end of the previous high-probability short-time state. In addition, the total number of acquired balls in the total number of acquired balls display area displays the value obtained by adding the number of balls obtained in the previous time-saving jackpot to the value at the end of the previous high probability non-time-saving state. be. Also, an image corresponding to the total number of acquired balls is displayed as the background image. In addition, in the obtained ball number history display area, the history of the total number of the obtained balls obtained by the previous time-saving jackpot and the obtained balls in the small winning rush winning the time-saving jackpot is further displayed. These histories are displayed, for example, about the last 10 big hits that have been won without falling into a low-probability short-time state.

As a result, if it is possible to return to the high probability non-time-saving state again without falling into the low probability non-time-saving state, it is possible to display the previous state, and the player straddles the low probability non-time-saving state. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of balls that can be obtained without gambling. In addition, if the total number of acquired balls and the timer are reset each time the high-accuracy non-time-saving state ends, the possibility of the display of these values becoming large decreases, and the player is uplifted. The display content is as described above, because it will not be possible to give a sense of feeling.

In addition, as described above, the total value of the acquired balls during the one-time jackpot game and the acquired balls in the high probability non-time-saving state (small win rush) immediately before the big win game is displayed in the acquired ball number history display area. Therefore, a numerical value larger than the expected value of the winning ball per jackpot game can be displayed using the winning ball number history display area, so that an uplifting feeling can be given. Further, for example, the display mode may be changed according to the value displayed in the number-of-balls-hit-history display area. Specifically, if the number is less than 5000, the number is blue, if the number is 5000 or more and less than 10000, the number is red, and if the number exceeds 10000, the number is rainbow-colored. In addition, although the last 10 times are displayed, from the 11th time onwards, the numerical value obtained by totaling the numerical values of the 1st to 10th times may be displayed.

[12-4. Performance during the jackpot]
Below, the production during the big hit will be described. For example, music that can be played during the high-probability no time-saving jackpot is added each time a high-probability no time-saving jackpot is won without falling into a low-probability non-time-saving state. For example, only the song A can be selected in the first high-probability no time-saving jackpot, which is won without crossing the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the song B can be further selected in the second high-probability no time-saving jackpot. There is, music C can be further selected in the third high-probability no time-saving big hit, and music D can be further selected in the fourth and subsequent high-probability no time-saving big hit.

In addition, in the second and later high-probability, time-saving, no jackpots, the player can select a song to be played from the selectable songs by performing an operation using a predetermined operation unit. In addition, when the player does not select a song, for example, the song A in the first high-probability short-time no jackpot won without crossing the low-probability non-time-shortening state, The song in the second high-probability short time no jackpot It is assumed that B plays music C in the third high-probability non-time-saving jackpot, and music D in the fourth and subsequent high-probability non-time-saving jackpots.

Moreover, the music played during the high-probability no time-saving jackpot may continue to flow even during the high-probability non-time-saving state that shifts after the high-probability no time-saving jackpot ends. Further, even in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the music may be selectable by the player's operation of the predetermined operation unit.

FIG. 519 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect during the high-probability, short-working hours no jackpot. Concretely, by inputting a predetermined command (hidden command) during the high-probability time-saving no jackpot, all the songs will be described as being selectable.

(A) is a state in which the second high-probability short working hours no jackpot, which has been elected without falling to the low-probability short working hours state, has started. (B) is a state in which the first round of the high probability jackpot is being executed. A music selection box and an image explaining a music selection operation are displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In addition, since it is the second high-probability time-saving no jackpot that has been won without falling into a low-probability non-time-saving state, music A and music B can be selected, and music is not accepted by the user's input to the operation unit. B is selected.

These images are displayed, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives a round start command for the first round from the main control MPU. Further, for example, at the same timing, an operation reception period for the operation unit for executing a music selection operation starts. The operation acceptance period ends, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives a round end command for the final round from the main control MPU.

In the example of FIG. 519, by operating the rotary operation unit 302, the cursors for selecting music A and B are moved, and by pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a, the currently playing music is moved to the cursor. changes to the music pointed by .

Also, the hidden command operation acceptance period starts when the peripheral control MPU receives the first round round start command from the main control MPU, and ends when it receives the second round round end command. . (C) is the state after the hidden command is entered in (B). All songs (songs A to D) are selectable.

Note that the hidden command is, for example, a command to press and hold the central pressing operation section 303a (for example, pressing for 3 seconds or longer). As described above, the operation acceptance period of the hidden command overlaps with the operation acceptance period of music selection.

In music selection, the peripheral control MPU detects that the central pressing operation unit 303a has changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state and that the pressed state is not a long press (in the above example, the pressed state did not continue for more than 3 seconds). ), perform song determination.

If the central pressing operation unit 303a is changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state, and the player intends to execute the hidden command, the music is determined. may mistakenly think that the operation of is wrong, and may not continue pressing until the long-pressing state, which is a hidden command. In addition, if the music is determined when the central pressing operation unit 303a is changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state while the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the long-pressed state, the song is always determined when the hidden command is executed. Decisions are made, which may cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, when the above-described conditions are satisfied, determination of music is executed.

It should be noted that, for example, in the operation for notifying the win-loss result of the ready-to-win effect, and in the determination operation on the character selection screen, etc., which will be described later, when the central pressing operation part 303a changes from the pressed state to the non-pressed state, , the center pressing operation portion 303a may be determined to have been operated.

[13. Demo screen production]
[13-1. Normal demo screen production]
An example of the demonstration screen when the variation is not executed will be described below. FIG. 520 is an example of a demo screen timetable. In the time table, the contents displayed on the effect display device 1600, the display time of the contents of the display, whether the volume adjustment jog can be accepted, whether the volume light amount adjustment jog can be accepted, whether BGM is playing, and a predetermined movable body (role) In this chapter, it is defined whether or not the back-rear movable decorative body 3110) is in a fallen state.

When the volume adjustment jog can be accepted, for example, by rotating the rotary operation unit 302, an image showing the volume output from the pachinko machine 1 can be displayed and the volume can be adjusted. In a state in which the volume/light amount adjustment jog can be accepted, for example, by rotating the rotary operation unit 302, an image showing one of the volume and the amount of light can be displayed, and the one can be adjusted, and the image is displayed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in this state, an image showing the other of volume or light intensity is displayed and the other can be adjusted.

Further, as described above, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is a vertically movable decorative body. The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is positioned at the retracted position above the game board 5 or the appearance position at the center of the game board 5 according to the effect state.

A specific flow of production on the demo screen will be described below. First, a variation or a big hit is executed (NO1). At the end of variation or jackpot, the decorative symbols are stopped on the effect display device 1600 (NO2). After that, when there is no suspension of variation, the determined decorative design is kept in a stopped state (NO3). In NO1 to NO3, the volume adjustment jog is accepted, the volume/light amount adjustment jog is not accepted, fluctuating BGM is playing, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is not in a falling state, that is, is in the retracted position. However, in NO1, there may be a prohibited section in which acceptance of the volume adjustment jog is prohibited, such as during a predetermined ready-to-win effect or during a predetermined round of big wins.

Subsequently, a predetermined image is displayed (NO4-1). Subsequently, a telop image (also referred to as a volume light amount adjustment telop) indicating that it is possible to transition to the volume light amount adjustment screen while the predetermined image is displayed, and a character for determining the production state during the later change. A telop image (also called a character selection telop) indicating that a transition to the selection screen is possible is displayed (NO4-2).

For example, the video reproduced in NO4-1 and NO4-2 is video for 30 seconds, and is loop-reproduced between NO4-1 and NO4-2. In NO4-1 and NO4-2, the volume control jog cannot be accepted, the volume/light amount control jog can be accepted, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is at the retracted position. However, although BGM is playing in NO4-1, the BGM fades out from the start of NO4-2 (volume decreases and eventually stops).

Subsequently, a model demo movie of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed (NO5), after which the manufacturer's logo is displayed (NO6), then a jog/button caution movie is displayed (NO7), and then a common demo screen within the manufacturer (Goto Action prevention movie) is displayed (NO8).

Furthermore, after that, while the predetermined image is being displayed, a volume/light amount adjustment telop and a character selection telop are displayed (NO9). The display contents of NO9 are the same as those of NO4-2. After the display contents of NO9 are displayed, the process returns to NO5. In NO5 to NO9, the volume control jog cannot be accepted, the volume/light amount control jog can be accepted, and BGM is not played.

The operation of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described below. At the start of the model demo movie in No. 5, the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves downward and is in a falling state, that is, it is at the appearing position. After that, in NO6 to NO9, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 maintains the appearing position. In NO9, when shifting to the volume/light amount adjustment screen or the character selection screen, the back-rear movable ornament 3110 may be moved to the retracted position in order to make the effect display device 1600 easier to see. In this case, for example, after the display of the volume/light amount adjustment screen or the character selection screen is completed, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position again.

In NO5 to NO9, the rear movable decorative body 3110, which is not located at the retracted position, moves to the retracted position when the game ball B enters the starting port (first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004). In NO5, when the game ball B enters the start opening while the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is falling from the retracted position to the appearing position, for example, the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is detected at the timing of detecting the entering ball. to raise As a result, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be quickly moved to the retracted position simultaneously with the start of the variation corresponding to the entering ball, and the performance using the performance display device 1600 of the variation can be visually recognized as much as possible. done.

In addition, in NO5, when the game ball B enters the start opening while the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is falling from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is once dropped to the appearance position. It may be raised after the This is because, if the falling back movable decoration body 3110 suddenly starts rising at the same time as the ball is entered, some players misunderstand this as an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit.

Further, the operation of the rear movable decorative body 3110 may be determined according to the variation pattern of the variation executed by the ball entering. For example, a variation pattern will be described in which an effect of lowering the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 at the start of variation is performed. In NO5 to NO9, a variation pattern is selected in which the game ball B is entered while the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is positioned at the appearing position, and the effect that the back-rear movable decoration 3110 descends at the start of variation is executed. shall have been

In this case, for example, at the same time as the ball is entered, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is once raised to a retracted position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum descending position of the descending effect, and then the descending effect is executed. When the descending effect is an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, it is desirable to execute the descending effect without canceling it (that is, to generate the descending effect with a delay). Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, a specific irregular effect (for example, emission of a predetermined lamp attached to the rear movable decorative body 3110 or output of a predetermined sound from a speaker) may be performed. The back rear movable decorative body 3110 may be raised to the retracted position while performing a specific irregular effect.

Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, a specific irregular operation of the rear movable decoration 3110 (for example, reciprocating the rear movable decoration 3110 up and down at a predetermined amplitude a predetermined number of times) may be performed. good. Even if the descending performance is a performance with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the player can be given a sense of expectation by executing these irregular processes instead of the descending performance. In addition, in the first place, in NO5 to NO9, when the back movable decorative body 3110 is not in the retracted position, a variation pattern in which the back movable decorative body 3110 descends at the start of the fluctuation is executed (the downward performance is executed at the start of the fluctuation effect pattern) may be prohibited. In addition, although the selection of the variation pattern is not prohibited (there is a possibility that the descending effect will appear), the descending effect may not be executed when the variation pattern is selected. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that the descent effect might have been selected even when the descent effect was not executed.

In addition, in NO5, the game ball B enters the starting hole while the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is moving to the appearance position, and at the start of the variation, an effect is executed in which the back-rear movable decoration 3110 descends. is selected.

Specifically, in this case, for example, at the same time as entering the ball, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is once raised to a retracted position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum descending position of the descending effect, and then the descending effect is performed. Execute. It should be noted that the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 may be once moved to the appearance position before the upward movement (that is, the lowering effect is generated with a delay). Also, for example, instead of the descending effect, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 may be raised while performing a specific irregular effect. It should be noted that the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 may be once moved to the appearing position before the upward movement. Also, in such a case, selection of the variation pattern (effect pattern in which a downward effect is executed at the start of the variation) may be prohibited in the first place.

Also, in NO5 to NO9, when the back rear movable decoration 3110 is located below the retracted position, the game ball B enters the starting opening, and at the start of fluctuation, another movable body (back rear movable decoration 3110 and is selected at the time of entering the ball. In this case, for example, by first moving the back rear movable decorative body 3110 to the retracted position and then moving the other movable bodies, interference between the movable bodies is avoided. In addition, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is at the appearance position and the other movable body (movable body different from the rear movable decorative body 3110) operates, it does not interfere with the movable rear decorative body 3110 at the appearance position. 2, the other movable body is operated while the back-back movable decoration 3110 is at the appearing position, and after the other movable body returns to the initial position, the back-back movable decoration 3110 is moved to the retracted position. may In such a case, the movement of the back movable decorative body 3110 to the retracted position and the movement of a movable body different from the back movable decorative body 3110 may be performed at the same time.

Further, for example, in the variation pattern (production pattern), the other movable body (a movable body different from the back-rear movable decorative body 3110) may not be operated. At this time, the above-described irregular effects and irregular motions may be executed for the back rear movable decorative body 3110 or the other movable body. Also, in such a case, selection of a variation pattern (effect pattern) in which the effect of moving the other movable body to the movable range of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 at the start of variation may be prohibited in the first place.

In addition, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is at the appearing position, part of the effect display device 1600 is hidden. Therefore, some players feel that the viewing condition of the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 in NO5 to NO9 is not good, and such players want to see the images in a good viewing condition.

For such a player, the game ball B enters the starting hole (when the game ball B enters the starting hole, fluctuations start and these images (for example, the model demo movie shown in FIG. 520 stops) The rear-back movable decorative body 3110 may be raised to the retracted position by a trigger other than (due to the end of the time image, etc.). As a specific trigger, for example, there is an operation of a predetermined operation section (for example, the outer circumference pressing operation section 303b).

When the game ball B enters the start opening while the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is ascending to the retracted position by a trigger other than the game ball B entering the start opening, the back-rear movement is possible. The decorative body 3110, for example, continues the rising motion and returns to the retracted position. In addition, while the rear-back movable decoration body 3110 is ascending to the retracted position, the game ball B enters the starting hole, and the performance pattern determined based on the prize-winning causes the rear-back movable decoration body 3110 to descend. In the case of the effect pattern, the back movable decorative body 3110 may be moved downward after continuing the lifting operation of the back movable decorative body 3110 and returned to the retracted position, or the back movable decorative body 3110 may be lowered. The descent effect may be executed even during the ascent of 3110. - 特許庁In addition, when the game ball B enters the start opening with the back rear movable decorative body 3110 returning to the retracted position due to a trigger other than the game ball B entering the start opening, for example, as it is, Maintain the retracted position.

It should be noted that the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is at the appearance position (the decorative pattern of No. 2 is also shown in the stop image of No. 9) is, for example, at the end of the fluctuation (No. 2 ) may be displayed in a reduced size, or may be displayed in the same size. When the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, the display size of the decorative pattern is changed, for example, at No. 5 when the back movable decorative body 3110 starts to descend, when the lowering ends, or at the time of NO. 3 when the confirmed pattern is displayed. . When the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, it is preferable to display it in an area that does not overlap with the moving range of the rear movable decorative body 3110. You may make it overlap.

In NO5 to NO9, an example was described in which the back movable decorative body 3110 is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600, but in place of or in addition to the back movable decorative body 3110, another movable body is used in the effect display device. It may be located on the front of 1600. However, when a plurality of movable bodies are positioned in front of the effect display device 1600, it is preferable to use a plurality of movable bodies whose positions after movement do not overlap (contact). Further, in NO5 to NO9, since the image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the movable body that makes the image invisible is not moved. In particular, it is desirable not to make the explanation for the player such as the volume light amount adjusting telop invisible. It should be noted that even if the position of the movable body after movement overlaps with the position where such an explanation is displayed, it is once moved to the front of the effect display device 1600 in NO5, and when such an explanation is displayed, The movable body may be returned to its original position. Also, the position and size of explanatory displays for the player, such as volume/light amount adjusting telops, may be changed according to the position of the movable body.

[13-2. Another example of volume adjustment method]
Another example of the volume control method will be described below. FIG. 521 is an explanatory diagram of an example of screen transition for volume adjustment. (A) is the state in which the determined decorative symbols are stopped after the fluctuation is stopped, that is, the state of NO3 in FIG. (B) is the state where the loop image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, that is, the state of NO4-1 in FIG.

(C) is a state in which a loop image and a character selection telop are displayed on the effect display device 1600 . It is different from NO4-2 in FIG. 520 in that the volume light amount adjustment telop is not displayed. In the state of (C), when the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the character selection screen is displayed. In the example of FIG. 521, unless the character selection screen is passed through, the volume adjustment (adjustment and setting of the output sound output from various speakers) is performed. omitted) is not possible, unlike the example in FIG.

(D) is a state in which the character selection screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by pressing the central pressing operation section 303a in the state of (C). A character can be selected by rotating the rotary operation portion 302, and the selected character can be determined by pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a.

It should be noted that the character selected here appears on the effect display device 1600 at the time of a predetermined effect, performs a predetermined dialogue effect, or performs a predetermined action. In other words, depending on the selected character, the subsequent performance mode changes. Also, depending on the selected character, the contents of the presentation (for example, the lines and actions described above) differ when the character appears. Also, for example, the sound volume of the dialogue during the production differs for each character. Also, for example, the BGM differs depending on the selected character.

(E) is a state in which a character is determined by pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a in the state of (D). When a character is determined, for example, the dialogue of the character is output from the speaker. The dialogue is output at a volume level similar to that of the character's dialogue production performed during a change, for example.

For example, many players feel that the speech production by character A is loud even at volume 3 (five levels of volume (1 is the lowest volume, 5 is the highest volume)), and the speech production by character B is not noisy even at volume 5. Many players feel it. By making it possible to adjust the volume after actually listening to the character's lines when the character is decided, the player can select the appropriate volume for himself/herself.

(F) is the state after character selection. After the character is selected, the character selection screen is cleared, and a display different from the volume control screen, such as the aforementioned loop video, is displayed. The reason why such a screen is displayed before the transition to the volume control screen becomes possible is to prevent the player from making the volume control a mere task.

Specifically, for example, it is assumed that a character A with a loud dialogue effect is selected on the character selection screen. At this time, if the screen shifts to the volume control screen immediately after character A is determined, the player will simply reduce the volume without thinking about anything. On the other hand, by temporarily displaying a display different from the above-described volume control, the player loses consciousness from the character he or she has selected, so some players may forget the character they have selected by the time volume control becomes possible. there is Since the player reduces the volume while faintly remembering that he/she has selected character A, he or she reconfirms that character A is the character he or she has selected when the dialogue of character A appears, thereby providing a sense of security. and rejoicing.

In (G), the effect display device 1600 displays a loop image, a character selection telop, and a sound volume/light amount adjustment telop. (H) is a state in which the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated in the state of (G) to shift to the volume/light amount adjustment screen. By rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the sound volume is changed, and by pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a, the screen shifts to the light amount adjustment screen. Although not shown, on the light amount adjustment screen, turning the rotary operation unit 302 changes the light amount, and pressing the central push operation unit 303a shifts to the volume adjustment screen.

(I) is a state in which the effect display device 1600 displays the loop image again. For example, on the volume control screen or the light intensity control screen, when a predetermined time elapses after the last operation of the rotary operation unit 302 or the central pressing operation unit 303a, the loop image is displayed again.

In addition, when the volume adjustment screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the change starts, the volume can be adjusted continuously, and the image for adjusting the volume is displayed to improve the visibility of the effect during the change. To enable continuous display in a manner that does not significantly interfere. As a result, it is possible to adjust the volume while confirming the actual volume during fluctuation.

In addition, although an example in which it is not possible to move to the volume/light intensity adjustment screen without going through the character selection screen has been described, in addition to or instead of going through the character selection screen, if a specific condition is not met, the transition to the volume/light intensity adjustment screen is made. Even if you can't. The specific conditions include, for example, the entry of the game ball B into the general winning hole where the prize ball is obtained when entering the game, and the elapse of a predetermined time (or a combination thereof).

It should be noted that the predetermined time may be lengthened or shortened, for example, depending on the operation status of the operation means that can be operated by the player. Further, when the volume (output sound) can be changed, the volume (output sound) may be changed without going through the character selection screen thereafter. Also, the changed volume (output sound) may end at the end of a specified number of fluctuations. In addition, in the specific production during fluctuation, the production may proceed with a volume (output sound) unique to the specific production instead of the selected volume (output sound). Further, after the character is selected and before the transition to the volume control screen, a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, so that the number of volume patterns that can be selected on the volume control screen may be increased ( For example, when the predetermined operation is not performed, 5 levels of volume (output sound) can be selected, but when the predetermined operation is performed, 10 levels of volume (output sound) can be selected. etc).

[14. Upstart production]
Hereafter, the upstart performance will be described. The rising production is one of the productions executed during the SP reach (which is a special production, and the SP reach that appears in the following explanation also corresponds to the special production). The SP ready-to-win is a ready-to-win effect that is more likely to be selected in the big hit variation and less likely to be selected in the losing variation as compared with the normal ready-to-win effect. That is, the SP reach is a ready-to-win effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the normal ready-to-win effect. In the upstart production, a display indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed on the production display device 1600, and when the line "From ~ to ~" to be described later is displayed, the production display device 1600 is displayed after the line is displayed. The jackpot expectation displayed in is promoted.

FIG. 522 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a rising effect. (A) is a state in which the rise effect has started during the SP reach. The effect display device 1600 displays, for example, the image of the central pressing operation section 303a in a blurred state. Subsequently, in (B), the background color of the image of the center pressing operation portion 303a on the effect display device 1600 is changed. It is assumed that the background color after the change is blue or red. It is also assumed that the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit of the change, the more likely red is to be selected as the background color after the change, rather than the blue.

Subsequently, in (C), the effect display device 1600 displays the words "ka-kara-no-", and the image and background color of the central pressing operation portion 303a are erased. In addition, in (C), the image of the center pressing operation portion 303a and the background color may be displayed continuously. When the line is displayed, the degree of expectation for a big hit is promoted after that. Subsequently, in (D), the line is erased from the effect display device 1600, and the image of the center pressing operation section 303a is again displayed in a blurred state. For example, at the timing when the line is deleted from the effect display device 1600, the background color of the image of the central pressing operation portion 303a is upgraded from blue to red.

Subsequently, in (E), the blurry image and the background color of the central depressing operation portion 303a are erased, and the large image (red large push display) of the red central depressing operation portion 303a is clearly displayed on the production display device. 1600, prompting the user to press the central pressing operation portion 303a. The image of the center pressing operation unit 303a displayed at this time includes, for example, a small blue image (small blue push display), a large blue image (large blue push display), and a large red image (large red push display). push display), and a large rainbow-colored image (large rainbow push display). It is assumed that the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of blue small push display, blue large push display, red large push display, and rainbow large push display, and the rainbow large push display is selected only for the big win variation.

In the state of (E), the central pressing operation part 303a is in the operation valid state, and when the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed in the operation valid state, it is notified whether the variation being executed is a big win variation or a losing variation. be done. In (F), it is announced that the variation is a big hit variation.

Note that the effect from when the blurred image of the central depressing operation unit 303a is displayed in (A) to immediately before the clear image of the central depressing operation unit 303a is displayed in (E) is the slanting display effect. The effect from when a clear image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed to when the display of the image ends is also called a button display effect.

FIG. 523 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the upstart effect. In the example of FIG. 522, the line "Kara~no~" is displayed in the stimulating effect, and the background color in the stimulating effect is promoted, but in the example of FIG.の～” is displayed, and the button image in the button display effect is promoted.

(A) and (B) are the same as FIGS. Subsequently, in (C), the blurred image and the background color of the central depressing operation portion 303a are erased, the large blue push image is displayed in a clear state on the effect display device 1600, and the central depressing operation portion 303a is depressed. are encouraged to do so.

Subsequently, in (D), the effect display device 1600 displays the words "ka-kara-no-" so as to be superimposed on the image of the central pressing operation portion 303a. In addition, in (D), the image of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the display prompting the pressing may be deleted so that the player's attention is focused on the words "ka~~~~~no~". Subsequently, in (E), the line "ka~ra~no~" is deleted from the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when the line is deleted, the blue large push image is promoted to the red large push image. . (F) is the same as FIG. 522(F), so the description is omitted.

Note that when the promotion effect is performed during the button display effect, the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is valid during the period from when the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in the button display effect to when the promotion effect appears. may be invalid. Since the operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is effective during the period, it is possible to satisfy the player who wants to know the result of the win/lose as soon as possible. In addition, since the operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is disabled during this period, it is possible to satisfy the player who wants to enjoy the effect to the end. When the operation is first invalid, it is confirmed that the promotion performance is performed, and the player can feel an uplifting feeling.

In this way, when the operation is invalid despite the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a being displayed, the button display is performed in order to avoid confirming that the promotion effect is to be performed. Regardless of whether or not the promotion effect is performed during the effect, the operation of the central pressing operation part 303a may be enabled for a predetermined time after the start of the button display effect.

In addition, in the rallying effect, there may be a pattern in which only the button display effect is executed without executing the fanning effect. The type of image of the central pressing operation unit 303a that can be displayed in the button display effect may be different between when the fan effect is executed and when only the button display effect is executed without the fan effect. .

Specifically, for example, in the pattern in which the fan effect is executed, only the large blue push, the large red push, and the large rainbow push can be displayed in the button display effect, but in the pattern in which the fan effect is not executed, the blue button is displayed. Suppose a small push, a blue big push, a red big push, and a rainbow big push can be displayed. As a result, the pattern in which the fanning performance is executed has a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the pattern in which the fanning performance is not executed.

Also, in such a case, it is desirable that the pattern in which the stimulating effect is executed has a higher appearance frequency than the pattern in which only the button display effect is executed without the stimulating effect being executed. This is because, as described above, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the pattern in which the fanning effect is executed. Further, for example, in a pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed, the BGM is played in the button display effect, but in the pattern in which the fanning effect is executed, the BGM is played in the fan effect, but the BGM is stopped in the button display effect and there is no sound. state is desirable. As a result, it is possible to produce a sense of tension in the button display production in the pattern in which the fanning production with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is executed.

Further, for example, in a pattern in which a fan effect is executed only when the variation is a big hit variation, when the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed during the valid period of the central pressing operation portion 303a in the button display effect. A pattern in which an effect in which the vibration speaker 354 vibrates is executed may be executed.

FIG. 524 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing at which the promotion effect is performed in the rising effect. The promotion effect can be executed at any of timings 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 524, for example. Timing 1 is immediately after the start of the fan effect (for example, the timing of (A) in FIG. 522 or the timing immediately after the start of (B)). At timing 1, the player is in a state of not being able to recognize or slightly recognizing the first background color in the fanning performance. can give a sense of surprise.

Timing 2 is the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fan effect (for example, the timing of FIG. 522(C)). At the timing 2, the player can completely recognize the first background color in the stimulating effect, so if the background color is blue, for example, the player will be disappointed, but the promotion effect is performed at the timing 2. This disappointment can be eliminated.

Timing 3 is simultaneous with the start of the button display effect (for example, timing at the start of FIG. 523(C)). In the example of FIG. 524, it is assumed that the effective period of the center pressing operation portion 303a ends at the same time when the button display effect ends.

At the timing 3, the player is in a state of not being able to recognize the type of the image of the central pressing operation part 303a displayed in the button display effect, so that the promotion effect at the timing 3 gives the player a sense of surprise. can be done. Also, when the promotion effect is performed at the timing 3, at least the image (blue and small push) with the lowest expectation for the big win is displayed, regardless of the timing when the player has not yet recognized the type of the image of the central pressing operation section 303a. You can get an uplifting feeling because it is confirmed that there is no.

Timing 4 is immediately after the start of the button display effect (for example, timing immediately after the start of FIG. 523(C)). Timing 4 is specifically, for example, 0.008 seconds after the start of the button display effect, which is the timing at which the player can operate the central pressing operation section 303a, but it is difficult. At the timing 4, the player is in a state of being weak in recognition of the type of image of the central pressing operation portion 303a displayed in the button display effect, so that the player can be given a sense of surprise when the promotion effect occurs.

In addition, for the player who knows that the promotion effect can occur at timing 4, for example, before the start of the button display effect, the central pressing operation part 303a is hit repeatedly, and the valid period starts. Therefore, it is possible to provide another game feature such as whether the pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a can be executed prior to the promotion effect.

Timing 5 is the timing after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the button display effect (however, the first half of the effective period of the central pressing operation section 303a). At timing 5, the player can completely recognize the type of the image of the central pressing operation section 303a. This discouragement can be resolved by

Timing 6 is timing after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the button display effect (however, the second half of the effective period of the central pressing operation section 303a). At timing 6, since a considerable amount of time has passed since the image of the central pressing operation part 303a was displayed, the promotion effect can be shown to the player who has given up on the appearance of the promotion effect. Therefore, a sense of surprise can be provided.

Timing 7 is just before the end of the button display effect. By executing the promotion effect at the timing 7, for example, even if the player is prompted to press the central pressing operation part 303a, the promotion effect can be shown to the player who has no intention of operating the central pressing operation part 303a. . Further, for example, even if the button display effect starts, if the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a does not start until the promotion effect is generated, the promotion effect is executed at the timing 6 or the timing 7, thereby causing a freeze. A performance similar to a performance can be realized, and the player can have a strong sense of expectation.

In addition, when the promotion effect is executed after the start of the button display effect, pressing of the center pressing operation section 303a may be used as a trigger for execution of the promotion effect. Specifically, for example, from the start of the button display effect to the timing of the promotion effect (for example, one of timings 4 to 7), the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, but the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is disabled. It is said that Then, at the timing of the promotion effect, the effective period of the operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a starts.

When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed within the effective period, promotion effect is generated, and the operation is disabled during the promotion effect. Then, the button image after the promotion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the valid operation period starts again. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed during the valid operation period, the result of the hit/lose in the variation is reported.

Further, for example, although the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts at the start of the button display effect, the central pressing operation unit 303a may not be activated until the promotion effect timing (for example, any of the timings 4 to 7) after the button display effect starts. When the operation unit 303a is pressed, a promotion effect may occur. After that, when the center pressing operation section 303a is pressed during the effective period after the button image after the promotion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the winning/losing result in the variation is reported. In addition, it is desirable that the pattern for performing the promotion effect after the start of the button display effect is selected only when the big win is changed (that is, it is a pattern in which the big win is confirmed). Assuming that the pattern is selected in the losing variation, the player operates the central pressing operation section 303a expecting that the result of winning or losing will be notified by the button effect, but unexpected development (whether it is a big hit or not) occurs. This is because there is a risk that it will become a shoulder watermark because it is a development that is not announced.

Further, for example, although the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts at the start of the button display effect, the central pressing operation unit 303a may not be activated until the promotion effect timing (for example, any of the timings 4 to 7) after the button display effect starts. When the operation unit 303a is pressed, an effect (for example, a dialogue effect such as "Don't be hasty! You'll be promoted soon!") may be executed to make the player expect the promotion effect to occur. In such a case, the promotion effect is not performed at the timing when the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed as described above, but the promotion effect is performed at the predetermined promotion timing.

Further, for example, when the promotion effect is generated after the start of the button display effect, immediately after the line "Kara~no~" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the promotion effect is executed again once after the promotion, and then The button display effect may be executed again. In this case, the promotion target by the promotion effect may be the background color that appeared in the previous fan effect, the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the button display effect, or both. good.

Specifically, for example, if the hype production ends with a blue background, and after the blue small push display is displayed in the button display production, "From ~ from ~ no ~" is displayed, then it is promoted to a red background. A button display effect with a small blue push display may be performed. Also, specifically, for example, when the fan effect ends with a blue background, and after the blue small push display is displayed in the button display effect, "from-from-no-" is displayed, after that, the blue background is performed again, and a button display effect with a large red push display may be performed.

Further, in the above-described example, an example in which the promotion effect is performed only in one of the fanning effect and the button display effect has been described, but the promotion effect may be performed in both. In addition, the promotion effect may be executed a plurality of times within one fan effect and one button display effect. Although an example in which the background color changes as an effect effect has been described, in addition to the background color, it is displayed before the center pressing operation section 303a is displayed and overlaps with the area where the center pressing operation section 303a is displayed. There is no need to be particular about the background color, such as changing the color of the effect (such as a gathering of lights) displayed in .

[15. Suspension notice effect]
[15-1. Suspension notice effect by suspension color change]
In this embodiment, the pending display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the pending number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310, but until the pending display is extinguished, the display mode of the pending display is changed, it is possible to execute a suspension notice performance suggesting a degree of expectation for a big hit with respect to the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the suspension display. Also, during the display period of the pending display, a pending change effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the pending display will change can be executed.

Specifically, based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is established), the number of pending designation command and the pre-determination command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 . Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the command analysis process of step S601, when the hold number designation command and the advance determination command are received, the hold number specified from the hold number designation command (number of pending memories) and advance judgment information specified from the advance judgment command (either big hit, small win, reach loss, or loss) is selected, and the decision set in the hold notice decision table is selected. By comparing the value with the read random number for determining pending notice, the type of the pending notice pattern set in the pending notice determination table is determined.

In addition, in the pending notice decision table, the judgment value for each pending notice pattern is different for each advance judgment information (big hit, small hit, reach loss, or loss) specified from the advance judgment command. The appearance rate of the notice pattern is different.

In addition, when the game ball wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is established), the number of reservations (the number of reservations stored) specified from the number of reservations designation command increases, so that the effect display One additional pending display is displayed on the device 1600 . On the other hand, when starting the variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special patterns) based on the reserved display (start condition is satisfied), the number of reservations (the number of reservations stored) specified by the number of reservations designation command is reduced. , erases the pending display on the effect display device 1600 . During the display period from when the pending display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the pending display is erased, the display mode of the pending display is displayed based on the pending notice pattern. Each time the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on another pending display is started (the start condition is established), the display mode of the pending display can be changed.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative design (variable display of the special design) based on the reserved display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the reserved display is erased. Even after the variable display (variable display of special symbols) is started, the pending display may be continuously displayed and the display mode of the pending display may be changed. In such a case, before and after the start of the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the suspended display, the position where the suspended display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 moves in the same manner as other suspended displays. , and may suggest the possibility that the display mode of the pending display will change due to the execution of the pending change effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 525, 526, and 527, a description will be given of a reserved color determination table in which a plurality of types of reserved color patterns are set for each reserved number (number of reserved memories) specified by the reserved number designation command. do. The pending notice determination table is stored in the ROM of peripheral control board 1510 .

FIG. 525(A) is a pending color determination table used when the game ball B enters the starting hole during non-suspending and variable non-execution. FIG. 525(B) is a pending color determination table used when game ball B enters the starting hole during variable execution without holding. FIG. 526(C) is a pending color determination table used when the game ball B enters the starting hole with one pending state. FIG. 527(D) is a pending color determination table used when the game ball B has entered the starting hole with two pending. FIG. 527(E) is a pending color determination table used when the game ball B enters the starting hole in a state where there are three pending. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use the pre-determining command to determine the reserved color during non-suspended and variable non-execution.

The reserved color determination table defines a pattern indicating a reserved color at a timing when the reserved color can be changed, a distribution of the pattern for the winning fluctuation, and a distribution for the losing fluctuation. Note that the start of the 1 change means the time when the change starts in the state where the hold of the color change object by the pattern is the first hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed in the next change). is. Similarly, when the second variation starts, the variation is started in the state where the suspension of the color change object by the pattern is the second suspension (that is, the variation corresponding to the suspension is executed in the next variation). It is time. Similarly, when the retention 3 variation starts, the variation is in a state where the retention of the color change target by the pattern is the third retention (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention is executed in the third variation ahead). It's time to start.

The peripheral control MPU changes the reserved color at each timing according to the color indicated by the pattern. It should be noted that the allocation in the reserved color determination table is determined in advance so that the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow. In addition, the distribution is predetermined so that the rainbow color is selected only when the big hit changes.

In addition, in each pattern of the reserved color determination table, a change to a reserved color with a low expectation of a big hit is not performed. Specifically, for example, after the reserved color becomes blue, it does not return to white. This is because, if there is a possibility of changing to a reserved color with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, the player cannot get a sense of expectation even if the reserved color becomes a color with a high degree of expectation.

In addition, the reserved color determination table has a pattern in which multiple stages of color promotion are executed. Specifically, for example, there is a pattern in which the retained color changes from white to red by skipping blue and green. Due to the presence of such a pattern, for example, at the final timing of the pending color change, even if it remains white, there is still a possibility that it will suddenly change to a color with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. You can keep your hopes up until the end.

Further, for example, a reserved color of blue or higher may be selected only for reach fluctuations, or a reserved color of red or higher may be selected only for fluctuations in which SP reach is executed. In addition, when a variation is suspended in a state in which a jackpot variation is included in the variations being executed or suspended, the peripheral control MPU forcibly changes the pending color change pattern for the variation to white (i.e. standard colors).

FIG. 528 is an example of a changing suspended color determination table. In the variable pending color determination table, during the variable execution, the pattern indicating the pending color at the timing when the variable pending color can change, the distribution of the hit fluctuation of the pattern, the distribution of the losing fluctuation, and the fluctuation for each fluctuation pattern Per pending color at start, defined in . That is, the peripheral control MPU determines the pending color change pattern during variation according to the retained color at the start of the variation, the variation pattern of the variation, and whether the variation is a hit variation or a loss variation.

In the example of FIG. 528, three promotion timings are defined for each variation pattern, but the number of promotion timings may differ for each variation pattern. Also, the promotion timing itself may be different for each variation pattern. For example, in the variation pattern to be executed in which the SP reach is varied, promotion timings include, for example, when the reach is established, when the SP reach is developed, and when the second half of the SP reach is started. Note that the degree of expectation for a big hit and the change pattern of each reserved color are the same as those in the reserved color determination table.

FIG. 529 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a suspension notice effect by a suspension color change. (A) is a state in which there is no pending change and the change is being made. (B) is a state in which the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002 while the variation is being performed. In (B), the reserved color determination table of FIG. 525(B) is referenced, and the reserved color at the time of winning and at the start of variation is determined to be green.

(C) is the state after the variation in (B) is completed. (D) is the state where the change corresponding to the green hold has started. (E) is a state in which reach has developed in the fluctuation. At (E), the hold remains green. (F) is a state in which SP reach has developed in the fluctuation. At (F), the hold remains green. (G) is the state in which the second half of SP reach has started in the variation. At the start of the second half of SP Reach, the hold turned red.

[15-2. Suspension notice effect due to gacha coin change]
So far, the suspension notice effect by the suspension color change has been described. Hereinafter, a description will be given of the suspension notice effect due to the suspension being displayed as a gacha coin and the suspension being changed. In the suspension notice effect, for example, when winning a prize, the suspension is displayed in the form of coins (hereinafter referred to as gacha coins), and at the timing when the suspension moves, the number of coins increases or coins different from the normal mode (hereinafter , called rare gacha coins).

Then, for example, at the start of the variation corresponding to the suspension, the performance display device 1600 executes the gacha gacha the same number of times as the number of gacha coins and rare gacha coins, and obtains the same number of suspension displays. Then, the pending display showing the variation currently being executed changes to the pending display of the color with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit among the obtained pending displays. It should be noted that the change of the pending display to the color with the highest degree of expectation for the big hit is not limited, and the change to any of the displayed pending displays may be performed. In addition, although the reservation of the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin is displayed, the reservation of the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin may be displayed without executing the gacha gacha at the start of the variation corresponding to the reservation.

A gacha coin reservation determination table in which multiple types of gacha coin reservation patterns are set for each reservation number (reservation storage number) specified from the reservation number designation command will be described with reference to FIGS. 530, 531, and 532 . Note that the gacha coin reservation determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 .

FIG. 530(A) is a gacha-coin reserve decision table used when game ball B enters a starting hole during no reserve and variable non-execution. FIG. 530(B) is a gacha coin reservation determination table used when the game ball B has entered the start opening during variable execution without reservation. FIG. 531(C) is a gacha-coin reserve decision table used when the game ball B has entered the starting hole with one reserve. FIG. 532(D) is a gacha-coin reservation determination table used when the game ball B has entered the start opening with two reservations. FIG. 532(E) is a gacha-coin reservation determination table used when the game ball B has entered the starting hole with three reservations. In addition, it is not necessary to use a prior determination command to determine gacha coin suspension during no suspension and variable non-execution.

Similar to the reserved color determination table, the gacha coin reserved determination table contains patterns indicating the type and number of gacha coins at the timing when the reserved color can be changed, the distribution of the winning fluctuation of the pattern, the distribution of the losing fluctuation, is defined.

The peripheral control MPU changes the type and number of gacha-coins at each timing according to the type and number of gacha-coins indicated by the pattern. In addition, the distribution in the gacha coin reservation determination table is predetermined so that the expectation of a big hit is higher in the order of 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins, 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, and 5 rare gacha coins. It is Moreover, even five rare gacha coins with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit may be selected due to a loss variation.

As with the reserved color determination table, in each pattern of the reserved gacha coin determination table, a change to a gacha coin with a low expectation of a big hit is not performed. Further, similar to the reserved color determination table, the reserved gacha coin determination table has a pattern in which the gacha coin is promoted in multiple stages. In addition, when the variation is suspended while the variation being executed or suspended includes the variation of the jackpot, the peripheral control MPU is forced to display the normal white suspension instead of the gacha coin suspension. You may do so.

In the illustrated gacha coin reserve determination table, when the gacha coin reserve is displayed, the gacha coin is always displayed from the time of winning, but for example, normal white reserve is displayed at the time of winning. , There may be a pattern in which the hold changes to a gacha hold by the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold. However, it is desirable that there is no pattern that changes to gacha coins after the reserved color is promoted to blue or higher. This is because there is a possibility that the expectation that the reserved color has been promoted will be lowered.

FIG. 533 is an example of a gacha-coin reserved color correspondence table. In the gacha coin reserved color correspondence table, the correspondence between the type and number of gacha coins at the start of the fluctuation and the reserved color with the highest expected jackpot among the reserved display acquired by the gacha gacha at the start of the fluctuation, and the jackpot fluctuation and loss A distribution is defined in which the corresponding response for each variation is selected.

The gacha-coin pending color correspondence table is defined so as not to cause a situation in which a gacha-gacha with a gacha-coin is executed but only a white pending display can be obtained. This is because if such a situation occurs, the player will not have a sense of anticipation for the effect in which the gacha gacha is executed.

Note that "coin" in the reserved color column indicates that the game is not executed and the change is executed while the display of the reserved gacha coin or the rare gacha coin is displayed. In the gacha coin reservation determination table, the degree of expectation for a big hit when the gacha gacha is not executed is set low, but in the case of 5 rare gacha coins, which is the aspect with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit as shown in Fig. 533, the gacha gacha is executed. If not, it may be set so that the jackpot is decided.
Also, the gacha-coin reserved color correspondence table does not have to include patterns in which gacha-gacha is not executed. That is, in this case, when the reserved display of gacha coins or rare gacha coins appears, the reserved display always changes to the reserved display having the degree of expectation of a big hit equal to or higher than the blue reserve.

In addition, regarding the jackpot change, the allocation to "coin", which indicates that the change is executed while the display of the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin is displayed, is 1 gacha coin and 3 gacha coins. , 5 gachacoins, 1 rare gachacoin, or 5 rare gachacoins, the rate is set lower than the rate of change to the colored pending display (in the case of 1 coin, 32/ It remains a coin at 128, but changes to some color at 96/128). This is to prevent the game from ending with coins as much as possible because expectations are generally higher when the display changes to a colored pending display.

In addition, according to the distribution indicated by the gacha coin reserved color correspondence table, for a plurality of reserved displays acquired using a plurality of gacha coins or rare gacha coins, the reserved color with the highest expectation of a big hit is determined. The pending display colors other than the highly anticipated pending colors are randomly determined, for example.

Specifically, for example, if three coins have been won and it is decided to display red as the reserved color, the reserved color indicated by the remaining two coins is expected to exceed red. It means that it randomly decides from "coin", "blue", "green", and "red" excluding rainbow colors with Also, instead of random, for example, "blue", "green" and "red" are pattern 1, "green", "green" and "red" are pattern 2, and "blue", "red" and "red" are pattern 3. A plurality of patterns may be provided for each number of coins and final color, and one of them may be determined. Also, when not deciding on the reserved color with the highest expectation of a big hit (when deciding one of the displayed reserved colors), for example, pattern 2 is more likely to be promoted to red than pattern 1. should be set.

In the gacha-coin reserved color correspondence table, colors of all reserved gacha-coins acquired by a plurality of gacha-coins or rare gacha-coins may be defined. In this case, even if the reserved color with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit is the same, the distribution may be set so that the greater the number of reserved displays having that reserved color, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit (specifically is, for example, using 3 gachacoins to acquire the pending display of ``red, blue, and white'' than when the pending display changes to red. The expectation of a big hit is higher when the pending display changes to red.)

After changing to a normal reserved display with a color at the start of the fluctuation due to the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin, the change pattern of the reserved display in the fluctuation is determined using the pending color determination table during fluctuation in FIG. 528 . In other words, even if the gacha coin reserve notice is changed to the colored normal reserve display, the reserve change pattern by the reserve color is used as in the case where the reserve color change notice continues. However, for each pattern of the pending color determination table during fluctuation in FIG. good.

In the above example, the effect that the gacha coin reserve changes to the reserve color display due to the gacha gacha is performed at the start of the change in the reserve corresponding to the gacha coin, but it is executed at another timing after the start of the change. good too. The timing includes, for example, immediately before establishment of reach, immediately after establishment of reach, and when SP reach develops when SP reach is executed. However, for example, when an image prompting the operation of a specific operation unit is displayed during the ready-to-win effect, and the effect prompting the operation of the operation unit is executed, the final timing must be before the start of display of the image. is desirable.

In addition, for example, if the final reserved color is the same, the reservation color It is desirable to set the distribution in the determination table, the gacha coin reserved color correspondence table, and the like.

In the above example, the number of stages of gachacoin reserve (5 stages of 1 gachacoin, 3 gachacoins, 5 gachacoins, 1 rare gachacoin, 5 rare gachacoins) and the number of stages of reserved colors (5 stages of white, blue, green, red, and iridescent) are the same, but may be different. In addition, when the number of stages is different, it is desirable that the number of stages of holding gacha coins is larger. Since the gacha coin reserve is finally changed to the color reserve, the player recognizes the final degree of expectation for the big win by the color reserve. In other words, if the number of stages of reserved colors is large, it is difficult for the player to grasp the final degree of expectation for big wins unless he/she remembers the order of the degree of expectation for big wins of all colors.

Although illustration is omitted, the peripheral control ROM stores, for example, a sorting in which a gacha coin pending display is selected and a sorting in which a normal pending display (a colored pending display including white) is selected as a hold at the time of winning. and a table defined for each variation pattern is stored. The peripheral control MPU refers to the table to select gacha coin pending display or normal pending display, and according to the selected display mode, refers to the gacha coin pending color correspondence table or the pending color determination table to change the pending change. determine the pattern.

The jackpot expectation when the gacha coin hold display is selected is generally set higher than the jackpot expectation when the normal hold display is selected, but the jackpot expectation is the lowest gacha coin hold (gacha It is assumed that the highest reserve (red) that can be selected even if the normal reserve display is lost, has a higher expectation of a big hit than one coin).

FIG. 534 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a gacha-coin reserve notice effect. (A) is a state in which there is no pending change and the change is being made. (B) is a state in which the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002 while the variation is being performed. In (B), the gacha coin reserve determination table of FIG. 530 (B) is referenced, and the reserve display at the time of winning is determined to be "one gacha coin", and the reserve display at the start of fluctuation is determined to be "three gacha coins". 534 is a diagram when red is determined as the reserved color in FIG. 533. FIG.

(C) is the state after the variation in (B) is completed. (D) is a state in which a change corresponding to the hold changed to gachacoin has started. At the start of the change, the pending display that was "one gacha coin" has changed to "three gacha coins". (E) is a state in which three gacha coins are used to perform a gacha gacha effect three times. The gacha coin reserved color correspondence table is referred to, and green is determined as the reserved color with the highest expectation for a big hit. Therefore, in (E), among the three pending displays obtained by the gacha-gacha effect, the one with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit is green.

(F) is the continuation state of the change. The pending display corresponding to the change is changed to green with the highest expectation of a big hit among the three pending displays obtained by the gacha-gacha effect. (G) is the state in which reach has developed in the variation. At (G), the hold remains green. (H) is a state in which SP reach has developed in the fluctuation. At (H), the hold remains green. (I) is the state in which the second half of SP reach has started in the variation. At the start of the second half of SP Reach, the hold turned red.

After the gacha coin pending notice changes to the normal pending display (colored pending display including white), the change mode of the pending display is the same as when the gacha coin pending notice is not passed, so (G), (H ) and (I) are the same as in FIGS. 529(E), (F) and (G), respectively. In addition to this, for example, the three pending displays obtained by the gacha-gacha effect are set to "blue", "green", and "red", and the state of FIG. The timing of color promotion, such as showing the final color before the reach start shown in , may be determined as appropriate.

[16. Reach collapse pseudo-continuous performance]
The reach collapse pseudo-continuous effect will be described below. First, the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. Pseudo-continuous production is a production in which the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is executed multiple times during one fluctuation of the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device. . ``Finishing the variation of the decorative symbols'' means, for example, a mode in which a part or all of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes that the variation in the decorative symbols has ended, and In some cases, pseudo-run symbols (symbols in which a pseudo-run is confirmed when this symbol stops) are stopped. A pseudo-continuous production in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called an N-run pseudo-continuous production. The following natural number) is called the M-th pseudo-continuous effect.

In addition, while suggesting to the player that there is a possibility that the action may be executed again during one fluctuation of the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device, the action is actually executed again. A production that does not perform is called a “pseudo fake production”. In addition, although two consecutive pseudo-continuous effects are executed, there is also a pseudo fake effect in which the execution of the third pseudo-continuous effect is suggested but the third pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. Hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous effect is also simply referred to as "pseudo-continuous effect" or "pseudo-continuous effect".

Pseudo continuous effect occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the decorative pattern change is executed again during one time fluctuation of the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device. When it is decided to do so, the peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo-continuous design in at least one of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU causes a character such as "Continue!" It should be noted that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are odd-numbered or even-numbered and reach-free) may be pseudo-continuous symbols.

Whether or not a pseudo-run is executed in each variation, and the number of pseudo-runs when the pseudo-run is executed are defined in the variation pattern. In addition, the selection rate of the variation pattern in the variation pattern table is determined so that the greater the number of pseudo-runs, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

FIG. 535 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach collapse pseudo continuous effect. FIG. 535(A) shows a state in which fluctuation has started. Subsequently, in (B), the left decorative design stops, and the right decorative design is the same design as the left decorative design, for example, it is about to stop in a swinging manner (it is about to reach the reach state). In (C), the decorative pattern maintains the state of (B), and an image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to prompt the player to press the central pressing operation portion 303a.

(D) is the state immediately after the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in (C). The decorative symbols that were about to enter the ready-to-win state start to fluctuate again, and the effect display device 1600 displays a display ("x2!") indicating that the second pseudo-run has started.

Subsequently, in (E), the left decorative design is stopped again, and the right decorative design is the same design as the left decorative design, and is about to stop, for example, in a swaying manner. Also, a display (“x2”) indicating that the second pseudo-run is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In (F), the decorative pattern maintains the state of (E), and an image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to prompt the player to press the central pressing operation portion 303a.

It is assumed that the same effect is repeated and the fourth pseudo-run is performed. In (G), the decorative pattern maintains the state of (E), and an image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to prompt the player to press the central pressing operation portion 303a. A display (“x4”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to indicate that the fourth pseudo-run is currently being executed.

(H) is a state in which although the center pressing operation part 303a is pressed in (G), a reach is formed without collapsing the decorative pattern which was about to reach a reach state. The reach state is formed by the decorative symbols of an even number. It is assumed that the expected value of the winning ball obtained by the big hit is large in the order of even numbers, odd numbers other than 7, and 7 of the decorative symbols. A display (“x4”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to indicate that the fourth pseudo-run is currently being executed. It should be noted that although it has been explained that it is about to reach the reach (the vertical positions of the left and right decorative patterns are slightly different), from the state of reaching the reach (the vertical positions of the left and right decorative patterns are the same), as shown in FIG. As in (c), the effect display device 1600 may display an image prompting the user to press the central pressing operation portion 303a.

FIG. 536 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a ready-to-win symbol promotion effect that is executed following the ready-to-win collapse pseudo-continuous effect. The reach symbol promotion effect is an example of SP reach. FIG. 536(I) shows a state in which the ready-to-win symbol promotion effect has started. Characters such as "Raise the ready-to-win pattern!" are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the ready-to-reach symbol promotion effect, for example, even-numbered reach is promoted to odd-numbered reach or 7-reach, or odd-numbered reach is promoted to 7-reach. Here, even number reach<odd number reach<7 reach is advantageous in order (for example, easy to win big). In particular, this 7 reach is a very hot effect (for example, the expectation of a big hit is over 80%). In (I), the display showing the number of pseudo-runs has been deleted from the effect display device 1600 because the reach collapse effect has ended.

Subsequently, in (J), the effect display device 1600 displays an image prompting the user to operate the central pressing operation section 303a. Note that a white effect image is displayed in the background of the image of the central pressing operation portion 303a. In addition, in (J), for example, the decoration pattern during reach is displayed in a manner of swaying.

(K) is a state in which the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in (J) and the ready-to-win pattern is successfully promoted. A display (“promotion!!!”) indicating that the ready-to-win symbols have been promoted is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In addition, the decorative pattern has been promoted to odd reach. Also, the color of the background effect image changes from white to blue.

For example, the color of the effect image of the ready-to-win symbol promotion effect background is white for even-numbered reach, blue for odd-numbered reach other than 7, and red for 7-ready. Even if promotion of the ready-to-win symbol fails, a ready-to-win effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect) is performed by the relevant ready-to-reach symbol, winning or losing is announced, and the symbol is determined.

Subsequently, at (L), the character "Promote the ready-to-win pattern!" Subsequently, in (M), the effect display device 1600 displays an image prompting the user to operate the center pressing operation section 303a. Also, at this time, for example, the decoration pattern during reach is displayed in a manner of shaking.

(N) is a state in which the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in (M) and the ready-to-win pattern is successfully promoted. A display (“promotion!!!”) indicating that the ready-to-win symbols have been promoted is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In addition, the decorative pattern has been promoted to 7 reach. Also, the color of the background effect image changes from blue to red. Although illustration is omitted, after that, a ready-to-win effect (for example, an SP ready-to-win effect) is performed with 7 symbols, winning or losing is announced, and the symbol is determined.

It should be noted that, from the end of the first period during which the reach collapse pseudo-continuous effect, which is the production of the same aspect (reach pattern aspect) that is repeated, is performed, and from the end of the first period, the final reach symbol is determined (the reach symbol promotion effect) It is desirable that the second period is longer when compared with the second period up to the last). Since the player pays the most attention to the winning/losing result of the variation, the longer the second period in which the winning/losing result is notified more directly, the more the player's interest can be maintained. Since the degree of expectation for a big win of reach is set to an exceptional numerical value, the longer the second period than the first period, the longer the player can be provided with an uplifting feeling.

Further, it is desirable that the number of times the central pressing operation portion 303a is prompted to press during the first period is greater than the number of times the pressing of the central pressing operation portion 303a is prompted during the second period. As the time from the start of variation to prompting the operation of the operation unit becomes longer, the player tends to think that if the operation of the operation unit is prompted, the result of the variation will be notified by the operation. . Therefore, if the number of times that the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is prompted is large in the second period after a long elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation, the player will have to prepare himself for each operation, which may cause fatigue. The number of times is as described above.

In addition, it is desirable that the time interval between the presentations for prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation portion 303a repeatedly performed in the first period is shorter than the time interval between the presentations for prompting the central pressing operation portion 303a repeatedly performed in the second period. Hereinafter, the effect that prompts the user to press the central pressing operation portion 303a is also called an operation request effect. As described above, the second period is more direct than the first period in that the result of winning or losing is announced. because it is not possible to maintain In addition, the time interval between the effects for prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation portion 303a repeatedly performed in the first period is such that the first effect for prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation portion 303a is displayed in the second period after the end of the first period. It is for the same reason that it is shorter than the time interval until.

Further, it is desirable that the operation valid period in one operation request effect in the second period is longer than the operation valid period in one operation request effect in the first period. This is because there are players who want to slowly perform the pressing operation in the second period with a feeling of tension, because the second period is more direct than the first period in that the result of winning or losing is announced more directly.

Depending on the contents of the ready-to-win pseudo-continuous effect (for example, the number of times of pseudo-continuous is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3 times)), the operation request effect may not be executed even if the SP ready-to-win state develops after that. However, it is desirable that the ratio of execution of the operation request effect in the SP reach is higher than the ratio of the operation request effect not being executed in the SP reach that develops after the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect of reach collapse. As a result, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling due to the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect of reach collapse.

As described above, in the examples of FIGS. 535 and 536, the display mode of the operation request effect in the first period is one type, but the display mode of the operation request effect in the second period is a plurality of types (with a blue effect). display, and display with red effect).

Further, after the operation request effect is started, the effect display device 1600 may display a timer (which may be a gauge or the like) indicating the remaining operation effective period. In this case, the time from the start of the operation request effect to the display of the timer in the first period is shorter than the time from the start of the operation request effect to the display of the timer in the second period.

Further, although not shown, when the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the second period, a predetermined movable body may move according to the result of hit or drop. Specifically, for example, if it is a big hit variation, the movable body operates, and if it is a losing variation, the movable body does not operate. On the other hand, when the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the first period, the movable body does not move regardless of the result of the hit or drop.

Also, the movable body may operate when the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the first period, but the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the second period. (For example, the direction and amount of motion of the movable body are different, or the movable body that operates is different).

Also, in the first period, a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) may be executed when the reach collapses and the pseudo-run starts. A plurality of types of such specific effects may exist. Further, depending on the type of specific effect, it may be made to appear such that the degree of expectation for the big hit increases and the next reach collapse is determined.

In addition, when a specific effect with high expectations appears, it is desirable not to lower expectations in the specific transition effect (specifically, for example, when a green cut-in effect appears, a blue (The cut-in effect does not appear). Further, in the first period, the predetermined movable body may operate when the reach collapses and the pseudo-run starts. Note that the motion of the movable body may be the same each time, or the motion or the character that moves may differ depending on the current number of pseudo-runs.

In addition, although a plurality of operation request effects are executed in the first period, the time interval between the operation request effects may be gradually shortened, or the time interval between the operation request effects may be shortened after the predetermined number of times. may However, for example, the time interval between the operation request effect immediately before the last and the last operation request effect may be longer than the time interval between other operation request effects.

[17. Sugoroku stage production]
The production during the Sugoroku stage will be described below. The sugoroku stage is an example of a specific production state, and the game progresses with the sugoroku production being performed during the fluctuation. Specifically, the sugoroku map is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates during the fluctuation, and when the rotation stops, the number indicated by the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 The character drawn on the Sugoroku map advances through the squares. An effect indicated by the square where the character is stopped is executed in the variation or pending variation.

It should be noted that the rotation operation of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 does not necessarily have to be performed in all variations. In a variation in which the back-bottom-middle-rotation decorative body 3310 does not rotate, for example, the character does not move between squares, that is, the character stays in the same square. In addition, as an opportunity to start the sugoroku stage, it is possible to shift to the sugoroku stage with a predetermined probability at the start of the fluctuation, or to stay in the sugoroku stage for a predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the advantageous game state. Alternatively, the transition may be made as part of the look-ahead effect using the pre-determination command described above.

FIGS. 537 and 538 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect on the sugoroku stage. (A) is the state immediately before the fluctuation starts. A large decorative pattern is stopped at the center of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁In addition, nothing is displayed in the squares of Sugoroku. It is also assumed that there are three pending changes at the point in time (A). (B) is the state where the fluctuation has started. A large decorative pattern starts to change at the center of the effect display device 1600 .

In (C), the large decorative pattern in the middle of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the small decorative pattern in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600 is changed. Also, at the timing when the large decorative pattern is erased, a display indicating the content of the effect is displayed on the squares. Also, for example, at this timing, the back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 starts rotating. In addition, at the timing of (B), the rotation of the back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 may be started.

In (D), the underside middle rotating decoration 3310 stops rotating. The number of the back-bottom-middle rotary decoration 3310 positioned at the top indicates the number of squares that the character advances. In (D), the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 points to "2".

At (E), the character moves two squares. "X" in the square after moving two squares indicates that no special effect is performed. Therefore, no special effect is performed, and the decorative symbols are stopped at (F). It should be noted that a large decorative design is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600 when the decorative design is stopped.

In (G), the camera for photographing the sugoroku stage is moved so that the character is positioned in the last square among the squares of the sugoroku displayed on the effect display device 1600 . perform the performance. The end of (G) is the same as (A). Then, at (H), the next variation starts. The details of (H) are the same as those of (B). After that, the same effect is repeated.

(I) is the state in which the final variation of the Sugoroku stage is being executed, and the details are the same as (C). (J) is the continuation state of the final variation. In (J), while rotating the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310, a rising motion (a motion different from the rotating motion) is performed so as to approach the reserved display area (reserved display area for the change) in the effect display device 1600. do. Note that the raising operation can only be performed at the final variation. When the rising action is performed, the content of the squares of the Sugoroku changes to one with a high expectation of a big hit. The contents of the squares that were "x", "?", and "x" in the state of (I) are all changed to "reach" in the state of (J).

In addition, it is set so that the probability of the rising action being performed is higher when the final fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation than when the final fluctuation is a losing fluctuation, that is, when the rising action is performed It is desirable that the degree of expectation for a big win in the fluctuation is higher than the degree of expectation for a big win when the rising action is not performed. As shown in (K), the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 may hide part or all of the reserved display area, or may not cover the reserved display area even though it approaches the reserved display area.

Further, the lifting operation may be performed after the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is stopped (that is, after the number is determined). However, it is desirable that the start of the rising motion is later than the start of the rotating motion in the final fluctuation. This is because, as described above, when the rising motion is performed, the degree of expectation for a big win increases, and the player can have expectations for the rising motion even after the start of the spinning motion.

(K) is the continuation state of the final variation. In (K), the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 returns to the initial position while rotating. It should be noted that it may return to the initial value after the back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 stops rotating. In (K), the hold in the hidden hold display area is changed from the normal display to the blue hold display (hold display with a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal hold display).

In addition, the rotating motion of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be executed even in variations in the production state other than the Sugoroku stage. It is desirable that the probability that the rotation motion is executed in each of a plurality of consecutive fluctuations in the performance state other than the stage is set lower. This is because the player can enjoy the sugoroku more when the character progresses through the squares in the sugoroku stage more frequently.

On the other hand, there may be an effect state in which the probability that the rotation motion is executed in each of a plurality of consecutive variations is set higher than in the Sugoroku stage. This is because the effect state in which the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, which seems to be provided for the Sugoroku stage at first glance, rotates continuously, can provide the player with a sense of surprise.

In addition, although an example in which the back-lower-middle rotary decorative body 3310 rotates has been described, an operation that changes the position may be performed instead of an operation that does not change the position, such as a rotating operation. For example, while the back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 rotates, it may rise slightly (the rising width is smaller than the rising motion in the final fluctuation).

[18. Specific Zone Production]
The effect of the specific zone will be described below. Examples of the specific zone include the pine zone and the super pine zone. The Matsu zone is, for example, a zone that rushes into the Sugoroku stage in the previous chapter. Also, the ultra-pine zone is, for example, a zone that can be entered regardless of the stage.

It should be noted that, for example, entry into these specific zones is executed as a look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect is a effect in which an effect suggesting the outcome of the pending variation is executed before the pending variation starts. The peripheral control MPU refers to the special symbol pre-determination command for the reserved special symbol variations, which is transmitted from the main control MPU, and each of the reserved special symbol variations is a hit variation (that is, a big hit variation or a small hit variation ) is determined (read-ahead determination), and a look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result.

After entering the pine zone and ultra-pine zone, the state of entering these zones continues until the change corresponding to the prefetched hold (also referred to as the prefetch target change). It is assumed that the variation corresponding to the look-ahead-determined hold of the pine zone and the ultra-pine zone has a high probability of hitting the jackpot. In addition, it is assumed that the expectation for the big hit of the look-ahead object change is higher when entering the ultra-pine zone than when entering the pine zone. In addition, while the big hit variation is being executed or suspended, it is desirable that the pine zone and super pine zone, in which the newly suspended variation is the prefetch target variation, are not executed.

539 and 540 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the pine zone production. (A) is the state in which the variation during the Sugoroku stage is executed. The second pending variation to the running variation in (A) is the look-ahead target variation. From the variation of (A), the look-ahead effect for the look-ahead target variation is performed. In (A), an effect is executed in which the character stops at a square labeled "pine zone". (B) is a continuation state of the fluctuation of (A). A display indicating that the player has entered the pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

In (C), a decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600. In FIG. Also, a display indicating that the player is staying in the Matsu zone ("In Matsu zone...") is displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. At (D), the variation has ended. Also in the next variation of (C), for example, the same effects as in (C) and (D) are executed.

(E) is a state in which a look-ahead target change has started. Subsequently, the effect display device 1600 displays a display indicating that the player is staying in the Matsu zone. (F) is a state in which the reach is established in the look-ahead target fluctuation. In the state that the reach is established, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is deleted from the effect display device 1600 .

In this way, when a specific effect with a high expectation of a big hit is being executed, such as the timing when reach is established, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is erased. It is possible to draw attention to the fact that a specific effect is being executed for a player who has paid a lot of attention to what is inside. Also, if the fact that the player is staying in the pine zone is constantly displayed, the player may feel tense and tired. It should be noted that the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone may be erased multiple times. Specifically, for example, it may be deleted each time the execution of the pseudo-run is confirmed.

In other words, before the SP reach production (rock-paper-scissors game production to be described later) starts, a specific timing , etc.), it is preferable to temporarily erase the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone.

At (G), the reach state continues. In (G), the effect display device 1600 displays again the display indicating that the player is staying in the Matsu zone. (G) is the timing at which the player waits for whether or not the SP reach will develop. , Remembering that it is in the Matsu zone, development to SP reach can be expected.

(H) is a state in which a rock-paper-scissors game presentation, which is SP reach, has started. The rock-paper-scissors game effect is an SP reach that develops with the change of the prefetch target in the pine zone and the super pine zone. The rock-paper-scissors game effect is, for example, an effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win is extremely high among the SP ready-to-win effects (for example, the expectation for a big win is the second highest after the SP ready-to-win effect which is selected only when the big win fluctuates). In addition, even if you enter the pine zone, the rock-paper-scissors game effect will not necessarily be executed, but if you enter the ultra-pine zone, the rock-paper-scissors game effect will always be executed. It shall be

Further, when the rock-paper-scissors game effect is started, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600, and the display is erased even during the rock-paper-scissors game effect. This is because the rock-paper-scissors game presentation is a presentation with an extremely high degree of expectation for a big win, and draws the player's attention to the rock-paper-scissors game presentation. For this reason, it is desirable that the expectation of a big win is set higher at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game presentation than at the time of entering the pine zone.

(I) is a continuation state of the rock-paper-scissors game presentation. Rock-paper-scissors shouts are displayed on the effect display device 1600 . At (J), a rock-paper-scissors game is performed in a rock-paper-scissors match production. A friend character's hand is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600 , and an enemy character's hand is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600 . At (J), the effect display device 1600 displays a state in which the teammate character has won the rock-paper-scissors match against the enemy character (that is, the change is notified that the change is a big win change). At (K), the effect display device 1600 notifies that the player has won the big win, and the decorative symbols are stopped in the combination of the big win.

541 and 542 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of super pine zone production. The entry into the super pine zone is executed as, for example, a pending notice effect. Specifically, for example, the hold is displayed in a form indicating the possibility of entering the ultra-pine zone (hereinafter also referred to as a super-pine suggestive hold). In addition, a display in a form indicating that the hold is confirmed to enter the ultra-pine zone (hereinafter also referred to as a super-pine confirmed hold), for example, when a prize is won, the hold corresponding to the winning is displayed as a super-pine suggestive hold, At the timing when the suspension of the normal display mode is moved, it changes to the ultra-suggestion suspension.

(A) is a state in which a change is in progress and three changes are pending. (B) is the state of (A) in which a new change is suspended. In (B), when the new pending prize is won, the supermatsu suggestion pending (holding described as "supermatsu?"). , and may be displayed in a different color (eg, red) from the standard color (eg, white).). Supermatsu suggestion suspension is suspension of look-ahead target variation. (C) is the state in which the change has ended.

(D) is the state where the next fluctuation has started. (E) is a continuation state of the variation of (D). In (E), the effect display device 1600 is executing a dialogue effect suggesting entry into the ultra-pine zone ("It might be a super-pine zone..."). (F) is the state at the end of the fluctuation. In (F), the effect display device 1600 displays a display ("...") indicating that entry into the ultra-pine zone was not possible although entry into the ultra-pine zone was suggested.

(G) is the state after the next variation of (F) starts. One super pine suggested reservation has been moved. In addition, at (G), the line production suggesting entry into the ultra-pine zone (“It might be really the ultra-pine zone!”) is displayed again. The dialogue production in (G) is a production with a higher expectation of entering the ultra-pine zone than the dialogue production in (E). In the case where the performance suggesting entry into the ultra-pine zone is executed a plurality of times in this way, it is desirable to prevent the degree of expectation for entering the ultra-pine zone from decreasing in the multiple performances.

In (H), the effect display device 1600 displays an indication confirming that the player will enter the ultra-pine zone. As shown in (H), at this timing, the super-high-performance suggested suspension may be changed to the super-high-performance confirmed suspension. In the example of FIG. 541, at the timing when the display confirming entry into the super-pine zone appears, the super-pine suggestion pending changes to the super-pine confirmation pending, but before this timing, the super-pine confirmed pending. may appear. In addition, in the example of FIG. 541, the entry into the ultra-pine zone from the performance suggesting entry into the ultra-pine zone is performed over two fluctuations, but it may be performed in one fluctuation.

In (I), the decoration pattern is displayed in the center, and the effect display device 1600 displays a display indicating that the player is staying in the ultra-pine zone. In addition, the super pine confirmed pending has changed to a pending display in a mode of high expectation (in (I), a red pending display). For example, in this state, fluctuations are digested.

(J) is a state in which the prefetch target variation has started. (K) is a state in which a reach is established in the look-ahead target fluctuation. As with the pine zone, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600 when reach is established.

In this way, when a specific effect with a high expectation of a big hit is being executed, such as the timing when the reach is established, the display indicating that the player is staying in the ultra-pine zone is erased. It is possible to draw attention to the fact that a specific effect is being executed for a player who has paid a lot of attention to what is inside. Also, if the super-pine zone is always displayed, the player may feel tense and get tired. It should be noted that the display indicating that the user is staying in the ultra-pine zone may be erased multiple times. Specifically, for example, it may be deleted each time the execution of the pseudo-run is confirmed.

In other words, as in the above-mentioned pine zone, a specific timing (at the time when the reach is established, at the time when the display confirming the pseudo-continuation appears, When performing (emphasizing) production related to the occurrence of reach or pseudo-continuation), it is preferable to temporarily erase the display indicating that the player is staying in the ultra-pine zone.

At (L), the reach state continues. At (L), similarly to the pine zone, the effect display device 1600 again displays a display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone. Since the ultra-pine zone is in a state in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the pine zone, the player can get a sense of exhilaration again by displaying the display of staying in the ultra-pine zone again.

(M) is a state in which a rock-paper-scissors game presentation, which is SP reach, has started. As described above, when entering the super pine zone, a rock-paper-scissors game effect is always executed. At (M), the display indicating that the player is staying in the ultra-pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600 again. As a result, it is possible to strongly appeal to the player that the rock-paper-scissors game effect has started.

(N) is a continuation state of the rock-paper-scissors game presentation. Rock-paper-scissors shouts are displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In addition, at (N), the effect display device 1600 displays again the display indicating that the user is staying in the ultra-pine zone. As mentioned above, the super pine zone has higher expectations for a big hit than the pine zone. Therefore, in the rock-paper-scissors game production, the display is performed at the timing when the game is actually being played, so that the player is uplifted by the synergistic effect of the two highly anticipated productions of the rock-paper-scissors game production and the ultra-pine zone. you can get a feel.

At (O), a rock-paper-scissors game is being played in a rock-paper-scissors match production. A friend character's hand is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600 , and an enemy character's hand is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600 . At (O), the effect display device 1600 displays a state in which the teammate character has won the rock-paper-scissors match against the enemy character (that is, it is notified that the change is a big win change).

Also, at (O), the display indicating that the player is staying in the ultra-pine zone is deleted from the effect display device 1600 . This is because at the timing when the winning/losing result of the variation has already been reported, only the winning/losing result is important for the player, and whether or not the player stays in the ultra-pine zone is not important. At (P), the effect display device 1600 notifies that the player has won the big win, and the decorative symbols are stopped in the combination of the big win.

In addition, I explained an example in which the Super Pine Zone starts after the Super Pine Suggestion Suspend appears, but if you cannot enter the Super Pine Zone even though the Super Pine Suggestion Hold has appeared, for example, the Super Pine Suggestion Hold Even during the corresponding change, although it is suggested to enter the super pine zone, a production that fails to enter is performed.

Also, in the above-mentioned example, no special effects were executed for the fluctuations that were not the target fluctuations while staying in the Pine Zone or the Super Pine Zone. Continuous production etc. suggesting ) may be executed. Also, the entry into the pine zone and the ultra-pine zone may be executed by a normal effect (a part of the effect performed within one variation) that is not the look-ahead effect. Specifically, for example, an effect suggesting entry into the pine zone or the ultra-pine zone, an effect of entering the pine zone, and a rock-paper-scissors game may be executed in one variation.

In principle, entering the Pine Zone is done by stopping the character in the squares that indicate the Pine Zone in the Sugoroku stage, so unlike the Super Pine Zone, it is possible that the Pine Zone will not be indicated by the pending display. desirable. If the reserved display on the Sugoroku stage indicates the pine zone, the contents of the squares of the Sugoroku that are not displayed until after the change has started will be suggested by the reserved display, which may reduce the enjoyment of the Sugoroku. Because there is

In addition, in the above-mentioned pine zone and super pine zone, for example, at the stage where reach occurs, an example of deleting the display indicating that you are staying in the pine zone or super pine zone was explained, but before the display image ( An image different from the display image (for example, a reach-emphasizing effect, etc.) may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the higher priority side. In short, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone or the super pine zone cannot be recognized by the player (or, although it is displayed superimposed, the player is staying in the pine zone or the super pine zone only slightly). is visible).

[19. Hold peek effect]
A pending peek effect, which is an example of a pending notice effect, will be described below. FIG. 543 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a holding peek effect. (A) is the state in which variation is being executed. Three variations are reserved in (A). In (B), a character appears from below the effect display device 1600 and does not hide the pending display corresponding to the variation currently being executed (the pending display positioned at the bottom center of the effect display device 1600). part (partially means fully hiding a predetermined number (e.g. 1) of the pending 4 and/or partially hiding each of the pending 4 (i.e. fully showing pending for all 4) is hidden). Note that the character may hide the entire reserved display area. Also, the pending display corresponding to the variation currently being executed by the character (the pending display positioned at the bottom center of the effect display device 1600) may be hidden.

In (C), the character disappears from the effect display device 1600, and a portion of the pending display hidden by the character (the third pending in FIG. 543) is changed to a green pending display with a high degree of expectation. is changing. (D) is the end of the variation. The decorative symbols are stopped in a combination that indicates that the variation is an outlier variation. As in the example of FIG. 543, when hiding only the pending display, it is desirable that the pending peek effect is executed only when the variation being executed is a loss variation.

In addition, when the suspension peek effect is executed in the variation in which the normal deviation variation pattern (the one with the long variation time (for example, about 10 seconds) among the variation patterns in which the special effect such as the ready-to-win effect is not executed) is selected 543, the character does not appear at the start of the fluctuation, but appears after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation. In addition, in a shortened variation pattern (a variation pattern with a short variation time (for example, less than 10 seconds) among variation patterns in which special effects such as reach effects are not executed), when the pending peek effect is executed, at the start of the fluctuation or The character may appear after a very short period of time (shorter than the above-described 3 seconds) (for example, after 0.5 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation.

In addition, before (B), an inciting effect of the pending peeping effect may be performed. Specifically, in the fanning effect, for example, a character appears on the effect display device 1600 and approaches the reserved display area, but does not hide the reserved display area. Also, an effect may be performed in which the character disappears without hiding the reserved display area after the effect is performed. In addition, in the above-described shortened variation pattern, since the variation time is short, it is desirable not to perform the fanning effect or to perform it for a short time (for example, about 1 second). Further, when such a fan effect is performed and the character hides the reserved display area, the reserved display may be changed without fail.

In the example of FIG. 543, some of the pending displays hidden by the character have changed, but there may be a pattern in which all pending displays change, or there may be a pattern in which all pending displays do not change. may

It should be noted that, even if the pending display is of a color having the same degree of expectation for a big win, for example, the expectation for a big hit is higher when the pending peek effect is passed than when the pending peek effect is not passed. do. As a result, the player can get an uplifting feeling when the pending peeping effect is executed. Conversely, even if the reserved display is of a color having the same degree of expectation for a big win, the degree of expectation for a big win may be higher when the reserved peek effect is not passed than when the reserved peek effect is passed. . Expectations of players in a hold peek performance in which the hold display changes with high probability or always at the time of occurrence but the degree of expectation for a big win is suppressed, and a normal hold color change performance in which the degree of expectation for a big win is high although the occurrence is unpredictable. You can balance your senses.

Also, as in the example of FIG. 543, it is desirable that the effect display device 1600 notifies the change of the pending display by the fact that the character has retreated from the pending display. If the character suggests that there is a change in the reserved color or the reserved color after the change before the character withdraws, the period during which the player feels a sense of tension in the reserved peek effect will be shortened, and the interest will decrease. It is from.

However, for example, a light emitter different from the effect display device 1600 (for example, a lamp or LED attached to the front wall portion 2101 of the starting port unit 2100, or a lamp or LED provided near the starting port unit 2100) is emitted in the same color as the reserved color displayed on the effect display device 1600, before the character retreats in the effect display device 1600 (that is, before the changed reserved color is displayed), the light emitter may emit light in the reserved color. The player normally plays the game while mainly looking at the effect display device 1600, but by feeling the change due to the change in the color of the luminous body that slightly enters the field of vision, the player can have a sense of anticipation. .

Since the purpose is to make the player recognize the change in the color of the light emitter before the change in the reserved color of the effect display device 1600, the effect (control for) that the reserved color of the effect display device 1600 changes is provided. The timing of execution is before the timing of executing the effect of changing the color of the light emitter, or even at the same timing, before the change of the reserved color of the effect display device 1600, the player is notified by the change of the light emitter color. If it can be made to recognize, there is no problem.

In addition, it is preferable to cause the light emitter to emit light in a reserved color (for example, white) in a normal display mode immediately before causing the light emitter to emit light or just before changing the emission color of the light emitter. Specifically, for example, when the pending color of the pending display on the effect display device 1600 changes from blue to green, the emission color of the light emitter changes from blue to white before the change of the pending color on the effect display device 1600. , and then change from white to green. Although an example in which the reserved color in the normal display mode is white has been described, there is no problem as long as the color is not limited to white and is not likely to be selected as the reserved color after promotion in this reserved change effect. In addition, when white display is performed, it does not matter whether the light is lit or blinked. If it is lit, it is possible to make the liquid crystal be watched, and if it is blinking, it is possible to appeal that the hold change is being performed.

In such a case, it is desirable that the time during which the luminescent color of the light emitter emits white light is extremely short (for example, the time is shorter than the shortest variation pattern among all the variation patterns). This is because if the light-emitting body emits white light for a long time, the player may be misled if the pending display changes to white with a low expectation of a big win.

It should be noted that if the suspension display mode in the effect display device 1600 is a special mode suspension that cannot be expressed only by color (for example, the above-mentioned super-pine suggested suspension), the light emitter is, for example, in the effect display device 1600 Emitting in a color not used in the pending color change (e.g., if the effect display device 1600 is capable of performing a pending color change of white, blue, green, red, or iridescent, the emitter will emit purple) Alternatively, the suspension display mode is expressed by executing light emission of a predetermined pattern. The predetermined pattern of light emission includes, for example, a pattern in which red light blinks, a pattern in which red light and green light are alternately emitted, and the like.

Also, in the example of FIG. 543, a series of effects in which the character hides the pending display and retreats is performed only once, but this effect may be performed multiple times. When the effect is executed a plurality of times, the mode of the pending display may change each time, the mode of the pending display may change at least once, or the mode of the pending display may not change even once. good too.

In addition, it is desirable that the holding peek effect is performed only for the holding of the special figure 1. Mainly when the game is progressing with the variation of special figure 2, for example, very short variation time is often selected like the time saving state, so it is necessary to execute the holding peek effect at high speed , there is a risk of confusing the player.

Also, a plurality of types of characters may exist in the pending peek effect. Each of the plurality of characters may have different expectations, or some or all of the characters may have the same expectations. This expectation level may be a pending change expectation level in the pending peeping effect, or may be a big hit expectation level in the pending variation. Specifically, for example, it is assumed that character A, character B, and character C have higher retention expectation levels in that order, and character C is selected only when a retention change is performed. Further, for example, character B may have a higher degree of waiting change expectation than character A, but character A may have a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than character B in the case of holding change. The character A and the character B may have the same pending change expectation degree and the big hit expectation degree, and the character C may be set to have a higher pending change expectation degree and the big hit expectation degree than the character A and the character B.

It should be noted that it is desirable that the pending peek effect is performed only when the variation during execution is lost, but the variation during execution is non-reach variation or reach variation that does not have high expectations for a big hit (for example, normal reach is lost It is further desirable that the pending peeping effect is performed only in the case of fluctuations, etc.). That is, it is desirable not only when the variation under execution is the big win variation, but also when the variation is a ready-to-win performance with a high expectation of a big win, such as SP ready-to-win, not to occur.

Supposing that a suspended peek effect occurs during a variation in which SP reach is executed, the player thinks that the variation in suspension has a higher degree of expectation than the variation that is currently being performed, and the SP This is because there is a risk that expectations for reach will fade.

[20. Still image effect]
The still image rendering will be described below. The static image effect is a effect in which the effect display device 1600 displays a dynamic display in parallel with the display of the still image. A still image during a still image production is a static image that was displayed as a dynamic display until just before the start of the still image production (for example, an object (sprite) such as a character image or background image). Alternatively, it may be a still image whose display is started simultaneously with the start of the still image effect. When the still image rendering ends, the still image is released from stillness, and the still image changes to dynamic display. Further, when the still image effect is finished, the still image may be erased and a new dynamic display may be displayed.

It should be noted that the stillness of an image in this chapter includes not only a complete stillness, but also a mode sufficient to make the player recognize that the image is still. Specifically, for example, an image (object) slightly shaking, an effect applied to the image (object), an image (object) slightly enlarged or reduced, etc. include.

[20-1. Rocket production]
Figures 544, 545, and 546 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the rocket effect. Rocket effect is an example of SP ready-to-win effect in which still image effect may be executed.

When the rocket effect, which is an example of the SP ready-to-win effect, starts, a display indicating that the rocket effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in (A). In (B), the effect display device 1600 displays an image of a character A (a character with a white head in the drawing), a line "Ignite the fuse!" .

In (C), the image of character A has been erased from effect display device 1600 . Also, in (C), the fuse is shorter than in the state of (B) (that is, the spark travels along the fuse). In (D), the character A is displayed again on the effect display device 1600, and the line by the character A, "Fuel is insufficient! The rocket cannot be launched at this rate!" is further displayed. In (D), the fuse is shorter than in (C).

In (E), the effect display device 1600 displays an image of a character B (a character with a black head in the figure) and a line by the character B saying "Replenish the fuel before the spark reaches the rocket!" It is In (E), the fuse is shorter than in (D).

In (F), the effect display device 1600 displays an image of the character B and a line by the character B saying "We'll get there in 5 seconds!" Also, in (F), the rocket is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a zoomed-in state near the fuse, and the fuse is shorter than in the state of (E). Until (M) described later, the rocket is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a zoomed-in manner near the fuse.

In (G), the effect display device 1600 displays the line "Refill in 3 seconds!" The image "Replenish in 3 seconds!" is displayed until the end of FIG. 545(N), which will be described later. In (G), the fuse is shorter than in (F). That is, from the start of (B) to the start of (G), a dynamic effect was performed in which the spark traveled along the fuse and the fuse gradually shortened. On the other hand, from the start of (G) to the end of (M) described later (immediately before the timing of notifying the result of the special lottery), a still image effect in which the image of the fuse and the spark is still is executed.

In (H), the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the character A lifts the fuel. In (I), the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the character A is about to throw fuel. In FIG. 545(J), the effect display device 1600 displays an image of character A throwing fuel.

In (K), the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the character A tries to lift the fuel. At (L), the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the character A lifts the fuel. The images of character A and fuel in (K) and (L) are the same as the images of character A and fuel in FIGS. 544 (G) and (H), respectively.

544(G) to 545(J), character A tries to lift the fuel, lifts the fuel, tries to throw the fuel, and throws the fuel. From FIG. 545(K), the second series of effects starts, and until (L), the series of effects ends in the middle.

At (M), the image of the character A and the fuel is erased from the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device 1600 displays the rocket image with the spark and the fuse still. At (N), the static image is released, sparks reach the rocket from the fuse, and the image of the successful launch of the rocket, that is, the image announcing that the special lottery result is a big hit is produced by the effect display device 1600. is displayed in At (O), the effect display device 1600 displays an image indicating that the special lottery result is a big win, saying "Big win! Congratulations!".

FIG. 546 is an example of the final stage of the rocket effect when the special lottery result is a loss. In FIG. 546 (N′) following FIG. 545 (M), the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the spark disappears in the middle of the fuse and the launch of the rocket fails, that is, an image informing that the special lottery result is a loser. is displayed. At (O'), an image is displayed indicating that the special lottery result is a loss of "Unfortunate...". Even if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, at the timing of (N) in FIG. 545, an image as shown in (N') in FIG. Often, after that, a resurrection effect (for example, a resurrection effect such as shown in FIG. 545(N) or a resurrection-only effect) may be performed.

It should be noted that the display mode of the character A and the fuel, which are dynamic displays during the static image presentation, may indicate the result of the special lottery. Specifically, for example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, characters such as "Chance" are displayed on the clothes worn by the character A during the still image presentation compared to when the special lottery result is a loss. is displayed, or the fuel is displayed in a specific color (for example, red) during the still image effect.

Also, an example is shown in which a plurality of dynamic displays (character A and fuel) are displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the still image effect, but the number of dynamic displays may be one. In addition, when a plurality of dynamic displays can be displayed during the still image effect, establishment of a specific condition during the still image effect (for example, game ball B enters a predetermined winning hole) is satisfied. Taking this as an opportunity, the number of dynamic displays may be increased.

Specifically, for example, each time the game ball B enters the predetermined winning hole during the static image presentation, characters cheering for the character A are additionally displayed one by one up to a predetermined number (for example, five). may be The additionally displayed character repeats, for example, one or more times a cheering effect, which is an example of a series of effects made up of a plurality of effect elements. 544 and 545, similar to the repetition of the series of effects shown in FIGS. (N is a natural number), the cheering effect may end after the effect A or B is executed in the N-th repetition of the series of effects (N is a natural number).

In addition, when a plurality of characters are additionally displayed, it is desirable that the timing of the cheering effects by the plurality of characters be synchronized. That is, when a new character is additionally displayed, the cheering effect of the new character is started in synchronization with the schedule of the cheering effect being executed by the additional display character already displayed. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the character has been additionally displayed, and also attracts the player's attention to the cheering effect by the plurality of characters. In addition to or instead of the additional display, the effect display device 1600 may display a display indicating the number of characters that have been additionally displayed or the number of characters that are scheduled to be additionally displayed.

Of the dynamic displays during the still image presentation, it is desirable that only the ones that have been displayed since the start of the still image presentation (that is, the character A and the fuel) indicate the result of the special lottery. In other words, it is desirable that the dynamic display added by satisfying the above-described specific condition after the start of the still image effect does not indicate the special lottery result. This is because, if all these dynamic displays suggest a special lottery result, the player may be confused.

It is desirable that the dynamic display during the still image rendering be displayed in a corner or other area other than the central portion of the rendering display device 1600 (lower right corner in the examples of FIGS. 544 and 545). Also, the display size of the dynamic display during the still image presentation is preferably smaller than the display size of the still image (the rocket including the fuse and sparks in the examples of FIGS. 544 and 545). The special lottery result is announced only for the rocket after it has been released from rest, and is intended to draw attention to the rocket rather than the dynamic display.

In addition, the color of the title display in FIG. The degree of expectation may increase in order. Further, a plurality of types of title display may be provided even when the still image effect is not executed. For example, the degree of expectation for a big hit is 1% for white where static image effects are not performed, 5% for red when not performed, 100% for rainbows when not performed, 10% for white when performed, 20% for red when performed, and 20% for red when performed. 100% rainbow. When the red color is the same when the still image effect is executed and when it is not executed, the red color when the still image effect is executed has a higher expectation for a big win.

In addition, when white when the still image performance is executed and red when the still image performance is not executed are compared, white when the still image performance is executed has a higher expectation of big win. In other words, the title display color and the presence or absence of a still image effect indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit. The expectation of a big win may be higher when the still image effect is executed in a lower title display color than when it is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player even if white is displayed in the title display displayed before the still image effect is executed.

In addition, it is desirable not to illuminate the lamp, output sound from the speaker, move the movable body, etc., in time with the dynamic display during the still image presentation. The special lottery result is announced only for the rocket after it has been released from rest, and is intended to draw attention to the rocket rather than the dynamic display.

The outline of the rocket presentation explained using FIGS. 544 to 546 is summarized as follows. First, a dynamic effect is performed in which the spark travels along the fuse and the fuse of the rocket gradually shortens, after which the fuse and the spark stop (the rocket is also stationary). Then, while the fuse and the spark are stationary, the character A and the fuel are dynamically rendered. At the same time when the fuse and the spark are released from stillness, the dynamic presentation of the character A and the fuel is completed, and the presentation of the special lottery result (successful or unsuccessful launch of the rocket) is executed.

FIG. 547 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a schedule of dynamic presentation of character A and fuel after the start of still image presentation in the rocket presentation. Each element in FIG. 547 represents the element of the series of effects described above. Element 1 is a state in which character A is trying to lift fuel, as shown in FIG. Element 3 is the state in which character A is about to throw fuel, as shown in FIG. 544(I), and element 4 is the state in which character A throws fuel, such as in FIG. 545(J).

Pattern A is an effect pattern in which element 1 and element 2 are executed after the first series of effects, and then a rocket launch success effect or launch failure effect (that is, a effect to notify the result of a special lottery) is executed. be. In FIGS. 544 to 546 described above, the effect of pattern A was executed.

Pattern B is an effect pattern in which element 1 and element 2 are executed after the second series of effects, and then a rocket launch success effect or launch failure effect is executed. Pattern C is an effect pattern in which element 1 and element 2 are executed after the third series of effects, and then a rocket launch success effect or a rocket launch failure effect is executed.

In other words, patterns A, B, and C are effect patterns in which a series of effects end halfway and a rocket launch success effect or a rocket launch failure effect is executed. On the other hand, pattern D is an effect pattern in which a rocket launch success effect or a rocket launch failure effect is executed after a series of effect just five times. In this respect, since pattern D is a different pattern from patterns A, B, and C, the results obtained when pattern D is selected are greater than when patterns A, B, and C are selected. However, it is desirable that the selection rate of each pattern is set so as to increase the expectation of a big hit. Assuming that pattern D, which has the longest duration of the still image presentation, has a low degree of expectation for the big win, there is a high possibility that the special lottery results will be lost despite the player's expectation of the still image presentation for a long period of time. This is because a situation in which the player is strongly discouraged frequently occurs. Pattern D may be set to be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit.

In addition, since the time of the still image production increases in the order of pattern A < pattern B < pattern C, for example, the expectation of a big hit increases in the order of pattern A < pattern B < pattern C (≤ pattern D). In addition, it is desirable that the selectivity of each pattern is set. Assuming that the degree of expectation for a big win in a pattern with a long period of still image presentation is low, there is a high possibility that the special lottery results will be lost despite the player's expectation for a long period of time in the still picture presentation. This is because situations that strongly discourage

As described above, in any effect pattern, a series of effects are executed one or more times during the still image effect. As a result, the standstill is not resolved until at least one series of performances has progressed, so that the player can mentally prepare for the performance in which the special lottery result is notified during that time, and thus the player can Excessive tension can be suppressed.

On the other hand, as described above, a plurality of effect patterns with different numbers of times of a series of effects to be executed are predetermined. As a result, after the series of performances has progressed once, it is difficult for the player to predict at what timing the performance in which the result of the special lottery will be notified will be executed, so that the player feels tense after the series of performances has progressed once. can be provided. In other words, since the effect pattern shown in FIG. 547 is predetermined, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate sense of tension during the still image effect.

It should be noted that although it is difficult to predict at what timing the effect of notifying the special lottery result will be executed, as shown in FIG. ing. In the example of FIG. 547, after element 2 or element 4 is executed. If, after all elements (1 to 4), there is a possibility that the special lottery results will be announced, the tension will continue and the player will feel fatigued. Because it could happen.

In all the production patterns shown in FIG. 547, a series of productions starting from element 1 and progressing in the order of element 2, element 3, and element 4 are repeatedly executed. There may be an effect pattern in which the order of the elements in or the element at the start is different from the effect pattern shown in FIG. Specifically, for example, there may be an effect pattern in which a series of effects progressing in the order of element 3, element 4, element 1, and element 2 are repeated. Further, for example, there may be an effect pattern in which a series of effects progressing in the order of element 4, element 2, element 1, and element 3 are repeated.

It should be noted that, in the above-described example, an example in which the still image effect is executed during the SP reach is explained, but for example, before reaching the reach state (that is, during the variable display of all the decorative symbols), the still image effect may be executed, or a still image effect may be executed after entering the reach state and before starting the SP reach. In addition, a still image effect may be executed as an effect suggesting that the ready-to-reach state will be reached, or a still image effect may be executed as an effect to suggest that the SP reach starts after the reach state is reached and before the start of the SP reach. may be performed. Also, a series of effects may be started before the still image effect is performed (for example, the series of effects may be executed one or more times by the start of the still image effect, or the first A still image effect may start during a series of effects).

[20-2. Battle performance]
Figures 548, 549, and 550 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a battle effect. The battle effect is an example of the SP ready-to-win effect in which a still image effect may be executed. When the battle effect, which is an example of the SP ready-to-win effect, starts, a display indicating that the battle effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in (A). In (B), the main character (white character) and the enemy character (black character) are displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In (C), the main character and his lines are displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In (D), the effect display device 1600 displays the enemy character and the dialogue of the enemy character.

In (E), the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the main character and the enemy character jump on each other. In (F), the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the hero and enemy characters attack each other in the air. In (G), the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the main character and the enemy character land.

From the start of (G) to the end of FIG. 549 (J) described later (immediately before the timing of notification of the special lottery result), a still image effect in which the images of the main character and the enemy characters are still is executed. At (H), the images of the hero and enemy characters are still. Also, in (H), an image of a friendly character (a hatched character) is displayed with a band-aid (a letter "bond" in a circle) in a first-aid kit.

At (I), the images of the hero and enemy characters are still stationary. Also, in (I), the effect display device 1600 displays an image of a teammate character putting a bandage in a first-aid kit (characters "wrapped" in a circle). In FIG. 549(J), the images of the hero and enemy characters are still still. In addition, in (J), the effect display device 1600 displays an image of a teammate character putting tweezers (the character "pi" in a circle) in a first-aid kit.

In (K), the effect display device 1600 displays an image of a teammate character putting gauze (a letter "ga" in a circle) in a first-aid kit. At (K), before the friendly character finishes putting gauze into the first-aid kit, that is, before the series of effects in which the friendly character puts things in the first-aid kit ends, the stillness of the image of the enemy character is released and the main character stands up. An effect display device 1600 displays an image of an enemy character lying down and a display indicating that the main character has won. In addition, in (K), after the friend character finishes putting gauze into the first-aid kit, stillness of the image of the enemy character may be canceled.

In the example of FIG. 549, the image of the hero in (J) is the same as the image of the hero in (K) (the pose has not changed), and the hero remains stationary from (J) to (K). , the stillness may be released for the main character as well. At (L), the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Big win! Congratulations!"

Like the battle production, the still image production is executed immediately before the special lottery result is notified, thereby making it possible to give the player a sense of tension, but since the player does not know when the stillness will be resolved, the still image production is being performed. must be tense throughout. Therefore, by performing a dynamic display during the static image presentation, it is possible to distract the player and, in turn, to relieve the tension.

In addition, a player who sees the still image effect in the battle effect learns that the special lottery result is notified immediately before the dynamically displayed friend character finishes putting the gauze into the first-aid kit. When executed, the user can enjoy the presentation without being overly tense until the friend character starts putting gauze into the first-aid kit.

When the dynamic display during the still image effect is in a specific mode, the dynamic display mode may be selected so that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is high. Specifically, for example, when the bandage in (I) is red, compared to when the bandage is white, the selection rate of the effect is increased so that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is higher. is set.

However, if the selection rate of the specific mode is high, the expectation of the big win due to the appearance of the dynamic display itself during the still image presentation increases, and the player loses interest in the appearance of the specific mode. Therefore, when the dynamic display during the still image production appears, the appearance rate of the specific mode is low (for example, 1/4 or less), and even if the special lottery result is a big hit, the specific mode is desirably determined so that the selectivity of is low (for example, 1/2 or less).

Also, multiple dynamic displays may be displayed during the still image presentation. When a plurality of dynamic displays can be displayed during the still image effect, it is determined that a specific condition during the still image effect (for example, the game ball B enters a predetermined winning hole) is satisfied. The number of dynamic displays may be increased as a trigger.

Specifically, for example, each time the game ball B enters the predetermined winning hole during the static image effect, one friend character may be additionally displayed up to a predetermined number (for example, five). . It should be noted that the additionally displayed ally character also performs the same effect as the ally character in FIGS. 548(H) to 549(K), for example. In addition, when a plurality of teammate characters are displayed, it is desirable that the effects of the plurality of teammate characters are synchronized. That is, when a new teammate character is additionally displayed, the cheering effect of the new teammate character is started in synchronization with the schedule of the cheering effect being executed by the already displayed teammate character. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the character has been additionally displayed, and also attracts the player's attention to the cheering effect by the plurality of characters.

Of the dynamic displays during the still image presentation, it is desirable that only the teammate characters displayed from the start of the still image presentation suggest the special lottery result. In other words, it is desirable that the dynamic display added by satisfying the above-described specific condition after the start of the still image effect does not indicate the special lottery result. This is because, if all these dynamic displays suggest a special lottery result, the player may be confused.

It is desirable that the dynamic display during the still image rendering be displayed outside the central portion of the rendering display device 1600 (the lower right corner in the examples of FIGS. 548 and 549). Also, it is desirable that the display size of the dynamic display during the still image presentation is smaller than the display size of the still images (the main characters and the enemy characters in FIGS. 548 and 549). The reason why the special lottery result is notified is to draw attention to the enemy character and the main character after the stillness is released.

In addition, it is desirable not to illuminate the lamp, output sound from the speaker, move the movable body, etc., in time with the dynamic display during the still image presentation. The reason why the special lottery result is notified is to draw attention to the enemy character and the main character after the stillness is released.

Also, dynamic display by the teammate characters in FIGS. 548(H) to 549(K) may be executed even before the start of the still image effect. As a result, the player can confirm the dynamic display by the ally characters before the static image effect starts, and the special lottery results are offered to the players who have seen the static image effect during the battle effect in the past. It is possible to remind the timing of notification.

It should be noted that although it is difficult to predict at what timing the special lottery result notification effect will be executed, similar to the series of effects and schedules of the rocket effect (Fig. 547), the special lottery result notification effect will be performed. The timing of execution is defined as a specific timing. For example, the result of the special lottery is notified just before the friend character finishes putting bandages in the first-aid kit or just before the friend character finishes putting bandages in the gauze. If there is a possibility that the special lottery results will be announced immediately before the end of all the elements, the tension will continue and the player may get tired. be.

Note that, for example, like the dynamic display during the static image rendering of the rocket rendering described above, the dynamic display of the teammate character during the static image rendering may be a rendering in which a series of renderings are repeated one or more times. Specifically, for example, an effect in which the friendly character puts a bandage into the first-aid kit, an effect in which the friendly character puts a bandage in the first-aid kit, an effect in which the friendly character puts tweezers in the first-aid kit, and an effect in which the friendly character puts gauze in the first-aid kit. , may be repeatedly executed one or more times.

In addition, the color of the title display in FIG. The degree of expectation may increase in order. Further, a plurality of types of title display may be provided even when the still image effect is not executed. For example, the expectation of a big hit is 1% for white where static image effects are not executed, 5% for red where static image effects are not executed, 100% for rainbows that are not executed, 10% for white where static image effects are executed, and 20% for red where static image effects are executed. , 100% of rainbows run, and so on. If the red color is the same when the still image effect is executed and when it is not executed, the red color when the still image effect is executed has a higher expectation of a big hit, and the red color when the still image effect is executed. When white is compared with red when the still image effect is not executed, white when the still image effect is executed has a higher expectation of a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player even if white is displayed in the title display displayed before the still image effect is executed.

Also, a series of effects by the ally character may be started before the still image effect is performed (for example, the series of effects may be executed one or more times before the start of the still image effect). , the still image effect may start during the first series of effects).

FIG. 550 is an example of an effect when the still image effect is not executed during the battle effect. Following FIG. 548(G), the process shifts to FIG. 550(H'). At (H'), the stillness of the image of the enemy character is released, and the effect display device 1600 displays an image of the enemy character falling while the main character is standing, and a display indicating that the main character has won. Also, in (H'), an image of a friend character putting a bandage in a first-aid kit similar to that in FIG. 548(H) is displayed.

In (I'), the effect display device 1600 continues to display an image in which the main character is standing and the enemy character is lying down, and a display indicating that the main character has won. Also, in (I'), an image of a teammate character putting a bandage in a first-aid kit similar to that in FIG. 548(I) is displayed.

At (J'), the effect display device 1600 continues to display an image in which the main character is standing and the enemy character is lying down, and an indication that the main character has won. Also, in (J'), an image of a teammate character putting tweezers in a first-aid kit similar to that in FIG. 549(J) is displayed.

At (K'), the effect display device 1600 continues to display an image in which the main character is standing and the enemy character is lying down, and a display indicating that the main character has won. Also, in (K'), an image of a teammate character putting gauze in a first-aid kit similar to that in FIG. 549(K) is displayed. Subsequently, at (L'), a display similar to that of FIG. 549(L) is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this way, the presence of a case where the still image effect is executed and a case where the still image effect is not executed during the battle effect can increase the timing to give the player a sense of tension.

An example in which the still image effect is executed before the notification of the special lottery result during the battle effect and an example in which it is not executed have been described. The dynamic effect during the static image effect (effect of the friendly character putting things in the first-aid kit) when it is performed and the dynamic effect executed after the special lottery result notification when the static image effect is not performed are common. is desirable.

Since these are common, for example, a player who has seen the dynamic production executed after the notification of the special lottery result when the still image production is not performed can understand the dynamic production and the notification of the special lottery result. Since the simultaneity of is memorized, when the player sees the dynamic effect during the still image effect, he/she can be more strongly aware that the special lottery result will be announced soon. In addition, since a player who has seen the dynamic effect during the still image effect remembers that the special lottery result is notified after the dynamic effect is started, the special lottery result is not performed without the still image effect being performed. If the dynamic effect is executed after being notified that the lottery result is lost, the real special lottery result will be announced after the dynamic effect (that is, the revival effect will be performed) And you can have a sense of expectation.

In addition, the selection rate of the effect is determined so that the expectation of the jackpot when the still image effect is performed before the notification of the special lottery result during the battle effect is higher than the expectation of the jackpot when the still image effect is not performed. It is desirable that Since the static image effect is a effect that gives the player a feeling of tension, it is possible to provide the player with many situations in which a big win is announced in exchange for the feeling of tension. Conversely, the selection rate of the production is set so that the expectation of the jackpot when the still image production is performed before the notification of the special lottery result during the battle production is higher than the expectation of the jackpot when the still image production is not performed. may be defined. This makes it possible to provide many players with a situation in which a big win is reported and a feeling of exhilaration can be obtained at once, even when the static image performance is not performed and the player does not feel the tension so much.

If the static image effect is not executed and the special lottery result is a loser, an image of the main character lying down while the enemy character is standing and the main character being defeated are shown in FIG. 550(H'). is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and continues until FIG. 550(K'). Even if the main character is defeated, a dynamic display similar to that shown in FIGS.

In addition, when the still image effect is executed and the special lottery result is a loser, in FIG. The effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the main character is lying down while the character is standing, and an indication that the main character has been defeated. After this, the dynamic display in which the friend character puts things in the first-aid kit is continuously executed while the image in which the main character is lying down while the enemy character is standing is displayed.

The continuously executed dynamic display is, for example, a series of effects in FIGS. 548(H) to 549(K), or a series of effects that are repeatedly executed. In this case, for example, the size of the dynamic display of the friendly character is not changed until the series of effects at least one time or more is completed, and the size of the dynamic display of the friendly character is changed at a predetermined timing exceeding once. increase the After that, the series of presentations is terminated, and for example, an image of the ally character treating the main character is displayed, and the decorative pattern of the combination that is not matched is displayed.

It should be noted that when a still image effect is performed during the battle effect, in FIG. may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to indicate that the player has been defeated. In other words, an effect may be executed to temporarily make the player think that the special lottery result is a loss.

In this case, in the same way as the above-described effect in which the result of the special lottery is a loser, following FIG. , is continuously displayed, and further, the effect by the ally character is also continued. For example, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the main character fell down, a resurrection effect is performed to notify that the special lottery result is a big hit. In the resurrection effect, for example, an image is displayed in which the ally character is treating the main character, and the main character makes a fist pose while lying down.

Note that the resurrection effect may be performed, for example, at a predetermined timing before the dynamic display of the size of the friendly character has not yet changed, or at a predetermined timing after the size of the friendly character is increased. may Further, it may be set such that one of these two types of timing is selected according to a predetermined selection rate, and the resurrection effect is executed at the selected timing. In this case, it is desirable that the selectivity of the two types of timing is different. When the resurrection performance is executed at the timing when the selection rate is low, the player can be surprised and the player's sense of exhilaration can be improved at once. Although two types of timing have been described, there may be two or more types of timing.

Incidentally, the series of effects executed in the battle effect may end in the middle of the series of effects. Specifically, for example, the above-mentioned production of the friendly character putting a bandage into the first aid kit (element 1), the production of the friendly character putting bandages into the first aid kit (element 2), the production of the friendly character putting tweezers into the first aid kit (element 2), In a series of effects executed in the order of element 3) and the effect (element 4) in which the friendly character puts gauze into the first-aid kit, element 1, element The series of effects may end immediately after execution of element 2 or element 3.

551 and 552 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of the battle effect. Differences from FIGS. 549 and 550 will be described. In FIGS. 551 and 552, a timer effect is added. 551(A) to (F) are the same as those in FIGS. 549(A) to (F), respectively, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In (A), for example, a timer is displayed on the effect display device 1600 simultaneously with the start of the battle effect, that is, the start of the title display, and the timer value starts to decrease. A timer is a dynamic display whose timer value decreases over time. The initial value of the timer in (A) is 30 seconds. Although the timer is displayed in the lower right portion of the effect display device 1600, it may be displayed in another position as long as the player can recognize the content of the battle effect.

In (A) to (E), the timer value decreases as time elapses. At (E), the timer value becomes 0 seconds. In (F), a message "Maybe..." is displayed in the area where the timer value was displayed.

Still image production starts from (G). In (G), in the area where the timer value was displayed, a display of "heat or intense heat?" In (H), in the area where the timer value was displayed, a display of "Super heat!" is displayed, indicating that the special lottery result is a big win and the degree of expectation is very high. The displays in the areas where the timer was displayed in (F) to (H) are all expectations suggestive displays suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit in the special lottery result. Note that the expectation level suggestion display does not necessarily have to be displayed in the area where the timer was displayed.

Also, from (F) to (H), the expectation suggestive display changes across the start of the still image presentation. The expectation suggestive display maintains dynamic display before and after the start of the still image presentation. It should be noted that the display area and display contents of the expectation suggestive display may be different as long as the player can recognize that the effect is within the timer effect.

The light emission mode of various lamps when the expectation level suggestion display is performed may be a light emission mode corresponding to the expectation level suggestion display, or the expectation level indicator may be changed from the start of the expectation level suggestion display to the start of the still image production. After the still image effect is started in the light emission mode corresponding to the suggestive display effect, the light emission may be changed to correspond to the still image effect.

In the example of FIG. 551, the expectation level suggestion display changes across the start of the still image effect, but the timer value may decrease across the start of the still image effect. That is, the timer value decrease start timing may be before the start of the still image effect, and the timing at which the timer value becomes 0 seconds may be after the still image effect is started. In this case, the timer display maintains dynamic display before and after the start of the still image presentation.

The light emission mode of various lamps when the timer display is performed across the start of the still image effect may be the light emission mode corresponding to the timer display, or the light emission mode may be the light emission mode corresponding to the timer display, or the time from the start of the timer display to the start of the still image effect. In the light emission mode corresponding to the timer display effect, after the still image effect is started, the light emission corresponding to the still image effect may be performed.

Subsequently, in (I), the expectation suggestive display that maintained the dynamic display over the start of the still image effect is erased, and the timer effect ends. That is, the display is the same as when the timer effect is not executed. That is, the timer effect ends during the still image effect before the special lottery result is announced. Since what is important for the player is the notification of the special lottery result after the still image effect rather than the expectation level suggestive display, it is possible to end the timer effect before the notification so that the player can concentrate on the still image effect. desirable.

In addition, the expectation suggestive display, which is a dynamic display, is executed across the start of the still image production, but the time from the start of the expectation suggestive display to the start of the still image production is longer than that of the still image production. It is desirable that the time from the start to the end of the expectation level suggestion display be short. When the still image effect is completed, the special lottery result is announced, but if the expectation level suggestive display is executed as a dynamic display for a long time even after the still image effect is started, the player's attention is kept on the expectation level suggestive display. This is because there is a risk of excessively reducing the sense of tension due to the still image presentation because the viewer is attracted to the .

552(J) to (M) are the same as FIGS. 548(I) to 549(L), respectively, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

It should be noted that the sound output from various speakers in response to the expectation level indication display is one shot (that is, the sound that is output only once without being repeated), and after the output of this one shot (the player After the sound of this one shot is no longer audible), the static image presentation ends, the dynamic display starts, and the special lottery result is displayed.

Note that the timer effect may end before the start of the still image effect, that is, before the start of the still image effect, that is, in a state in which the dynamic display is being performed, without the timer effect straddling the start of the still image effect. Specifically, for example, the timer value becomes 0 seconds before FIG. 551(H), the expectation suggestive display is displayed from FIG. An image rendering may be started.

However, when the timer effect ends before the start of the still image effect, the expectation of the big win is higher than when the timer effect is not executed, but the timer effect is executed over the start of the still image effect. It is desirable that the selection rate of the production is set lower than the expected degree of the big hit in the case of the game. This is because the simultaneous execution of the timer effect and the still image effect gives the player a synergistic sense of expectation due to the two effects, rather than the simultaneous execution thereof. Also, the effect in which the timer effect is executed over the start time of the still image effect may be selected only when the special lottery result is a big win (that is, the effect of finalizing the big win).

As described above, by causing the timer to appear and displaying the expectation level suggesting display after the timer value reaches 0 seconds, the player can expect the expectation level suggesting display to appear from the time the timer appears. .

Note that the timer effect may appear in SP reach, movie reach, etc., other than the battle effect. Moreover, it is desirable that the selection rate of the timer performance is determined so that the expectation of the big win when the timer performance appears is higher than the expectation of the big win when the timer performance does not appear in the variation pattern of the same kind. Moreover, it is desirable that there is no variation pattern in which the timer effect always appears.

It should be noted that although the timer effect in which the timer value decreases is explained here, the timer is not displayed in FIGS. 551 (A) to (E), and dynamic Only the expectation level suggestion display as a display may be performed. Assuming that the expectation level suggestion display is a still image in such a case, the expectation level suggestion display does not necessarily appear in the battle production, so the player does not expect the expectation level suggestion display to appear. There is a risk of not noticing the expectation level indication display. Therefore, as described above, the expectation suggesting display is a dynamic display spanning before and after the start of the still image effect.

In addition to the timing described above, the timer display start timing is, for example, at the start of fluctuation, during all decorative design fluctuations, at the time of left decorative design stop, at the time of right decorative design stop, after establishment of reach and before start of SP reach, or It may be a predetermined timing after the start of the SP reach and before the notification of the result of the special lottery.

Decrease of the timer value may start at the same time as the timer is displayed, or may start to decrease after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the timer was displayed. If the timer value starts to decrease after a certain period of time has elapsed since the timer was displayed, the timer value will not be displayed when the timer is displayed, but will be displayed when the timer value starts to decrease. may

In addition, the timing at which the timer value becomes 0 seconds is, in addition to the above-mentioned timings, for example, during all decorative design fluctuations, when the left decorative design is stopped, when the right decorative design is stopped, after the reach is established and before the start of the SP reach, after the start of the SP reach. Moreover, it may be at a predetermined timing before notification of the result of the special lottery, or at timing of notification of the result of the special lottery. It should be noted that, for example, the timing for starting the decrease of the timer value and the timing for the timer value to reach 0 seconds are selected, and the initial value of the timer is determined based on the selected timing.

Note that a plurality of timers may be displayed simultaneously in the timer effect. In this case, the display start timing, the timer value decrease start timing, and the timer value reaching 0 seconds may be different for each of the plurality of timers. Further, in this case, the effects executed after the timer values of the plurality of timers become 0 seconds may be different. In this case, a display suggesting that a plurality of timers are displayed at the same time, a display suggesting the number of timers to be displayed at the same time, or the like may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 before execution of the timer effect.

In addition, a plurality of timer effects are executed in order in one variation (that is, a new timer is displayed after the timer value of one timer reaches 0 seconds and then the corresponding timer is hidden). may In this case, different effects may be executed after the timer values of the plurality of timers reach 0 seconds. Further, when the timer effect is executed a plurality of times, during and before the timer effect is executed, a display indicating that the timer effect will be executed after this, a display indicating the number of times the timer effect will be executed after this, etc. may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

The performance selection rate is set so that the degree of expectation for a big win when a plurality of timers are displayed in order or at the same time is higher than the degree of expectation for a big win when only one timer is displayed. Further, when a plurality of timers are displayed in order or simultaneously, for example, the expectation suggestive display, which is a dynamic display that is displayed after the last timer value among the plurality of timers reaches 0 seconds, is displayed as a still image effect. straddles the start of As a result, the player can be made to understand that the still image effect is directly linked to the notification of the special lottery result, and attention can be drawn to the still image effect.

Further, when a plurality of timers are displayed simultaneously or in sequence, the still image effect may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, for example, the expectation suggesting display, which is a dynamic display that is shown after the timer value reaches 0 seconds, is executed across each start of the still image effect. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's attention to each of the plurality of still image effects.

Note that the timer effect may be executed as the look-ahead effect. In this case, for example, display and decrement of the timer value start from the fluctuation before the look-ahead target fluctuation, and the timer value becomes 0 seconds at the look-ahead target fluctuation. It should be noted that although the timer effect has been described in FIG. 551, another dynamic display effect may be executed instead of the timer display, which is dynamic display.

[20-3. Reel production]
553 and 554 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of reel effects. The reel effect is an example of an SP ready-to-win effect in which a still image effect may be executed.

At (A), a reel effect, which is an example of the SP ready-to-win effect, starts. A title image (for example, "Align the same numbers on a straight line of the reels!") may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the start of the reel effect. When the reel effect starts, the image of the reel of the slot is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the image in which the number of the reach state is stopped is displayed on the middle stage of the left reel and the middle stage of the right reel. The numbers displayed on the middle stage of the left reel and the middle stage of the right reel remain stationary until the reel effect ends. Further, in the reel image in (A), a state in which the middle reel is further fluctuating is displayed.

In (B), the fluctuation speed of the middle reel gradually decelerates, and the same number as the reach state number appears on the top of the middle reel. In (C), the number stops between the upper middle reel and the middle reel, and after 10 seconds, the number stops at either the upper middle reel or the middle reel ("After 10 seconds Stop either way!” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

The display ``Stop either way in 10 seconds!'' is a performance suggesting execution of a countdown performance, which will be described later, and is displayed in the same area as the countdown performance, which will be described later. In addition, in order to clearly recognize that the countdown effect to be described later is being executed, it is possible to display a message ``Stop either way in 10 seconds!'' in an area larger than the area in which the countdown effect is displayed. In this case, a part or the whole may overlap with the area where the countdown effect is displayed.

From (C) to FIG. 554 (N), which will be described later, the numbers on the reels are stopped, that is, the still image effect is executed. Also, a countdown display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 from (D) to FIG. 554 (N). In (D), a countdown display (“10”) indicating the remaining 10 seconds is displayed. Also, in (D), two cheering characters are displayed at the left end and right end of the effect display device 1600, and the cheering effect is executed from (D) to FIG. 554 (N). The cheering effect and the countdown display effect are dynamic display effects during the still image effect. In (D), the two support characters are holding folding fans downward.

In (E), a countdown display (“9”) indicating the remaining nine seconds and two cheering characters holding fans on the right with both feet on the ground are displayed. In (F), a countdown display (“8”) indicating the remaining 8 seconds and two cheering characters holding fans on the left with both feet on the ground are displayed. In (G), a countdown display (“7”) indicating the remaining 7 seconds and two cheering characters holding a folding fan on the right side while kicking one leg are displayed.

In (H), a countdown display ("6") indicating the remaining 6 seconds and two cheering characters holding folding fans facing downward are displayed as in (D). In (I), a countdown display (“5”) indicating the remaining five seconds and two support characters holding fans on the right side with both feet on the ground are displayed as in (E). . In FIG. 554(J), there is a countdown display (“4”) indicating the remaining 4 seconds, and two cheering characters holding folding fans on the left with both feet on the ground as in FIG. 553(F). is displayed.

In (K), a countdown display (“3”) indicating the remaining three seconds and two cheering characters with one leg kicked out and holding a fan on the right side as in FIG. 553 (G) are displayed. ing. In (L), a countdown display (“2”) indicating two seconds remaining and two cheering characters holding folding fans on the right side with both feet on the ground are displayed as in FIG. 553 (D). ing. In (M), a countdown display ("1") indicating one second remaining, two support characters holding folding fans facing downward, and two support characters are displayed as in FIG. 553 (E). there is

In (N), a countdown display (“0”) indicating 0 seconds remaining and two cheering characters holding folding fans on the left with both feet on the ground are displayed as in FIG. 553 (F). ing. 553(D) to 554(N) during the still image production, as dynamic display, a countdown display that counts down for 10 seconds and a series of productions by two support characters are repeated. is running. The countdown display is not a series of repetitive effects, that is, it is an aperiodic effect.

Note that the series of effects (supporting effects by the support characters) as the dynamic display is, as described above, in the examples of FIGS. It is a production of holding a fan on the left and right with both feet on the ground, holding a fan on the left and right with both feet on the ground, and holding a fan on the right with one leg kicked out.

The countdown display, which is an aperiodic effect, and the display of the cheering effect by the cheering characters, which is a periodic effect, may be displayed close to each other or overlapped with each other. If they are displayed in places far from each other, there is a risk that one of the presentations will be missed. In this way, by making the countdown display and the cheering effect display easier to see at the same time, players who want to pay attention to the countdown display and want to gradually raise their mood while timing the notice of the special lottery result can enjoy the cheering effect. It is possible to meet the needs of both a player who pays attention and wants to always feel better during the reel performance.

Also, the visibility of one of the countdown display and the display of the cheering effect may be made higher than the visibility of the other. Specifically, for example, only one of them is covered with an effect, one of them is covered with a larger effect than the other, or the display size of one is made larger than the display size of the other. By increasing the visibility of the countdown display more than the visibility of the cheering effect, it becomes easier to gradually raise the mood as the countdown progresses. becomes easier to increase.

After the countdown display of (N) becomes 0, stillness in the still image effect is released. That is, the decoration image of the middle reel displayed on the effect display device 1600 is slowly started again. At (O), the numbers on the middle reels move from the upper stage to the middle stage, and the same numbers stop on a straight line, and it is announced that the special lottery result is a big win.

It should be noted that, for example, if a specific condition is satisfied during the still image rendering, the still image rendering may be forcibly released from stillness. . At a predetermined timing after the start of the still image effect (for example, a period from 7 seconds to 3 seconds remaining in the countdown display), a plurality of game balls B are shot from a predetermined starting port by operating the handle 182. Winning or a case where a plurality of game balls B pass through the gate portion 2003 that normally starts the symbol variation is an example of the specific condition.

Of the dynamic effects (supporting effects for the support characters) during the static image effects, the series of effects described above may have a plurality of display modes. Specifically, for example, there are a plurality of colors of clothing for the support character (for example, when red is selected, the expectation of a big hit is set to be higher than when white is selected). . In addition, a series of effects consists of a plurality of display modes (display modes of each support character in FIGS. 553(D) to (G)). may exist. On the other hand, among the dynamic effects during the still image effects, it is desirable that the non-periodic effects (the countdown display in the examples of FIGS. 553 and 554) have a single display mode. In other words, even if the mode of the series of effects changes, it is desirable that the mode of the non-periodic effects does not change. In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 553 and 554, since the timing of notifying the result of the special lottery is notified in an aperiodic manner, the aperiodic effect does not change, so that the player can accurately take the timing. can.

It should be noted that a suggestive effect suggesting that a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed during the still image effect will be displayed may be executed before the start of the still image effect. The suggestive effect may be executed even when a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed during the still image effect are not executed (that is, a so-called fake effect may exist).

The suggestive effect is preferably an effect that allows the player to guess that a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed will be displayed. Specifically, for example, at the timing of FIG. An example of the suggestive effect is to execute an effect such that effects are gathered on the character. As a result, the player can guess the appearance of the support character, and thus have a sense of anticipation. In addition, it is desirable that the aperiodic effect described above is not executed while the suggestive effect is being executed. This is to suppress the player's attention to the non-periodic performance from being lowered by the suggestive performance in a situation where the display of a series of performances that can be repeatedly executed during the still image performance is not confirmed.

In addition, it is desirable to change the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp or output a predetermined sound from a speaker in accordance with the countdown display. The result of the special lottery is the most important concern for the player, and the result of the special lottery is notified after the countdown display is finished. improves. However, in order to prevent the player from feeling too tense, it is desirable that the predetermined lamp light emission mode and the predetermined sound mode are as follows.

For example, the predetermined lamp is extinguished or kept lit (that is, does not blink). Further, for example, only some lamps in the door frame or the game board repeat a predetermined lighting pattern, and the other lamps are turned off or kept turned on. Also, in order to prevent the player from feeling too tense, for example, it is desirable that the predetermined sound is not BGM (Background Music) but SE (Sound Effect).

Also, during the countdown display, for example, a part or the whole of the countdown display may be made invisible (or difficult to see) by covering the front side of the countdown display with a concealing image when viewed from the player. However, it is desirable not to make the countdown display invisible in the latter half of the still image presentation. This is because the countdown display effect can make the player have a strong sense of anticipation, especially in the second half, so that such anticipation is not diminished.

[20-4. Bee extermination performance]
555 and 556 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the bee extermination effect. The bee extermination effect is an example of an SP ready-to-win effect in which a still image effect may be executed.

When the bee extermination effect, which is an example of the SP ready-to-win effect, starts, a display indicating that the bee extermination effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 555(A). In (B), the effect display device 1600 displays a display for introducing a bee-killing practice effect. In (C), a display indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit when the queen bee is exterminated, and that the central pressing operation part 303a should be pressed in order to exterminate the queen bee, and the central pressing operation part 303a. is displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

In (D), the effect display device 1600 displays a display indicating that the special lottery result is not a big win even if the soldier bee is exterminated. In (E), the effect display device 1600 displays a display indicating the start of bee extermination practice. At (F), the performance of bee extermination practice is started. In (F), a sleeping queen bee (a large bee located in the center of the effect display device 1600), a plurality of soldier bees, an aim for exterminating the bees, and an operation instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a ("Set the timing Aim and press!” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . The practice effect is a dynamic effect in which each of a plurality of soldier bees moves as a dynamic display. Also, the sight is moving. In addition, the sleeping queen bee is, for example, slowly moving up and down (displayed in the lower part of the effect display device 1600 in (F)), but the sleeping queen bee is sticking out her nose lantern, It may be moving in such a manner that the chisel is swaying.

In (G), the dynamic effect continues, the queen bee shaking and moving to the upper part of the effect display device 1600, the plurality of moving soldier bees, the moving aim, and the operation instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a. and are displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In (H), the effect display device 1600 displays an indication that the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed and the insecticide is sprayed.

In the bee extermination effect, when the moving aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, pressing the central pressing operation section 303a displays an image in which the queen bee has been exterminated. In (J), the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed at the timing when the moving aim is on the soldier bee, so the queen bee cannot be exterminated. Accordingly, in (I), the effect display device 1600 displays an indication ("Fu... I was saved") indicating that the queen bee could not be exterminated.

Also, in the practice rendering, if the central push operation unit 303a is pressed when the moving aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, for example, the display in (I) indicates that the queen bee has been defeated. and the display in FIG. 556(J), which will be described later, is replaced with a display such as "Keep up the good work!" In other words, even if a display indicating that the queen bee has been exterminated (display indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit) is performed in the practice effect, FIGS.

Note that the practice effect may be set so that the queen bee cannot be exterminated without fail. For this reason, for example, the aim is moved to a position other than the queen bee or only to the soldier bee, or even if the aim can be moved to a position where the queen bee can be exterminated, even if the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed at that position, the queen bee cannot be moved. An image is displayed in which the extermination of the character has failed.

Also, if the special lottery result is a big hit, the practice effect may be set so that the queen bee can be exterminated without fail. For this purpose, for example, the aim is moved only to a position that is not on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, or, although it is possible to move only other positions, the insecticide injection area is increased so that the queen bee is included in the injection destination. , etc. are executed.

Subsequently, in FIG. 556(J), the effect display device 1600 displays a display for introducing the actual effect of exterminating bees. This display indicates that the actual production starts with the soldier bees exterminated in advance. In (M), a stationary queen bee, a plurality of stationary soldier bees, a moving aim, and an instruction to operate the central depressing operation unit 303a (“Aim for the right timing and press!”) are displayed. ing. Also, the stationary soldier bees in (K) are not located on the queen bee.

In (L), at the timing when the aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, the central pressing operation part 303a is operated, and the effect display device 1600 displays an indication that the queen bee is being sprayed with insecticide. In (M), an image indicating that the queen bee has been successfully exterminated, that is, an image indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit is displayed. At (M), the static display of the queen bee until just before is released. In (N), there is displayed a display indicating that the special lottery result was a big win ("Big win! Congratulations!!").

If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, in order to be able to exterminate the queen bee in the actual production, for example, only the position where the aiming is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee is moved, or only the other position is moved. Although it is possible, it is desirable to perform effects such as enlarging the injection area of the insecticide so that the injection destination includes the queen bee. By forcibly exterminating the queen bee in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistake in operating the center pressing operation portion 303a when the special lottery result is a big win.

Also, if the result of the special lottery is a loser, in order to prevent the queen bee from being defeated in the actual production, for example, the aiming position is moved to a position other than the queen bee or only on the soldier bee, or the queen bee can be eliminated. Although the aim can be moved to a position, even if the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed at that position, an image of failure to exterminate the queen bee is displayed.

In the example described above, only the central pressing operation part 303a is used for the bee extermination effect, but a plurality of operation parts may be used. Specifically, for example, the rotation operation unit 302 may be used to move the aiming. Further, for example, it is set such that the insecticide is sprayed by pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a in the practice performance, and the insecticide is sprayed by pressing the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b in the performance performance. good too.

As described above, in the actual production of the bee extermination production, during the still image production (that is, when the still image of the queen bee and the plurality of soldier bees is displayed), the pressing instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. , when the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the result of the special lottery is announced. In other words, since the operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is important during the performance, the player's sense of tension is excessively increased. Therefore, the player is more likely to make a mistake in operating the central pressing operation portion 303a.

In order to suppress the player's excessive tension and reduce the occurrence of operation errors, a practice effect is executed before the actual performance. As mentioned above, in the practice production, the soldier bees move and get in the way, making it difficult to exterminate the queen bee. As a result, the player can operate the central pressing operation part 303a with ease without feeling as much pressure as in the practice performance in the actual production, and operation errors are reduced, thereby improving the player's sense of satisfaction.

It should be noted that the actual production time (while the aim is moving and the central pressing operation portion 303a is enabled) is longer than the time during the practice presentation (when the aiming is moving and the central pressing operation portion 303a is enabled). time) should be longer. As a result, the player's operation errors in the actual performance are reduced, and the player positively operates the center pressing operation section 303a in the actual performance.

Further, in the performance effect, multiple presses of the central pressing operation section 303a may be received. In this case, in the actual performance, for example, an insecticide is sprayed each time the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed while the aiming is moving, and a performance is executed in which the queen bee can be easily exterminated. Therefore, the production is performed so that the expectation of a big hit as a result of the special lottery is higher in the case of the appearance of the performance effect in which the pressing of the central pressing operation part 303a is accepted only once than in the case of only the performance effect in which the pressing of the central pressing operation part 303a is accepted only once. It is desirable that the selectivity of As a result, the player's willingness to operate the central pressing operation portion 303a can be enhanced.

Similarly, in the practice effect, multiple presses of the central press operation section 303a may be accepted. In this case, in the practice effect, for example, the insecticide is sprayed each time the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed while the aiming is moving, and a effect is executed in which the queen bee can be easily exterminated. Therefore, the production is performed so that the expectation of a big hit as a result of the special lottery is higher when the practice effect of accepting the press of the central pressing operation part 303a only once appears than when the practice effect of accepting the press only once appears. It is desirable that the selectivity of As a result, the player's willingness to operate the central pressing operation portion 303a can be enhanced.

Also, the success rate of exterminating the queen bee in the actual production may be set differently depending on the result of the practice production (success or failure in exterminating the queen bee). For example, in the display in FIG. 556 (J), the line "It seems difficult indeed" (display that appears based on the fact that the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed) is displayed when the expectation of a big hit is low, When the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, it is desirable to replace the line with a line such as "I failed, but I was close to it." As a result, when the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, the player's willingness to operate the center pressing operation section 303a in the actual performance can be improved. Further, for example, the effect that the queen bee is always successfully exterminated in the practice effect may be set so as to be selected only when the special lottery result is a big win. Also, as described above, in the practice effect, the queen bee may always be exterminated unsuccessfully. In other words, the display of FIG. 556(J) may be made to appear only when the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed.

In addition, although the aim is displayed dynamically in both the practice performance and the actual performance, it is desirable that the movement of the aim be a regular movement (for example, a figure-of-eight movement or the like, which is displayed repeatedly). This makes it easier for the player to press the central pressing operation part 303a at the timing when the aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee. Also, the sights used in the practice performance and the performance performance may be selected from a plurality of types of sights, and it is desirable that the degree of expectation for a big win is set differently depending on the plurality of types of sights selected. For example, the selection rate of these targets is determined so that the expectation of a big win is low when the size of the target is small, high when the size of the target is large, and extremely high when the size of the target is extra large. It is Also, for example, the selectivity of these sights is changed so that the expectation of a big win is low when the aim is blue, the expectation of a big hit is high when the aim is green, and the expectation of a big hit is extremely high when the aim is red. It is defined.

Also, the number of selectable sights may differ between the practice effect and the actual effect. For example, the number of selectable sights in the actual performance may be greater than, less than, or the same as the number of selectable sights in the practice effect.

If the number of sights selectable in the production production is greater than the number of sights selectable in the practice production, for example, two types of sights, small and large, can be selected in the practice production, and small and large in the production production. Three types of sights, a large sight and an extra-large sight, are selectable. At this time, an extra-large aiming with an extremely high degree of expectation for a big hit is selected only for the actual production, so that the player can raise his expectations at once in the actual production.

Also, if the number of sights selectable in the actual performance is greater than the number of sights selectable in the practice rendition, for example, in the practice rendition, it is possible to select three types of sights: a small sight, a large sight, and an extra-large sight. In the actual performance, two types of sights, a large sight and an extra-large sight, can be selected. At this time, since there is a possibility that the extra-large aiming is selected even in the practice effect, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened at the time of the practice effect. In addition, since the small target with the lowest degree of expectation for a big hit is not selected in the actual performance, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced even during the actual performance.

Also, if the number of sights that can be selected in the performance production is the same as the number of sights that can be selected in the practice production, for example, in the practice production, three types of sights can be selected: a small aim, a large aim, and an extra-large aim. Three types of aiming, a small aim, a large aim, and an extra-large aim, can be selected even in the actual performance. At this time, since the degree of expectation similar to that of the actual production is shown in the practice production, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the practice production and the actual production.

In addition, the selected aim in the practice production and the performance production may be selected according to the selection rate set for each, or according to the selection ratio set as the combination of the aim selected in the practice production and the production production. may be selected. However, in any case, it is desirable that a target with a lower degree of expectation for a big hit than the target selected in the practice presentation is less likely to be selected or not selected in the actual performance. As a result, it seems to the player that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher in the real production than in the practice production, so that the expectation can be maintained or improved.

Specifically, when targets to be selected in the practice performance and the performance performance are selected separately, the selection rate in the performance performance of the target with a low expectation of a big hit is lower than the selection rate of the target in the practice performance. is set. Also, for example, a target with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the target selected in the practice effect may be forcibly selected in the actual performance.

In addition, when the selected sights in the practice production and the performance production are selected as a combination, the selection rate of the combination in which the aim in the production production is lower in the expectation of a big hit than the aim in the practice production is the selection rate of the other combinations. set lower. In addition, the selection target may not include a combination in which the aim in the actual performance is lower than the expectation in the practice performance.

It should be noted that it is desirable not to output sound from various speakers in order to make the player concentrate on the operation of the central pressing operation section 303a in the actual performance. If a sound is to be output, it is desirable that only the sound corresponding to the dynamic display, such as the sound of moving the sight, be output. In practice production, BGM or the like may be output from a speaker. In addition, in order to make the player concentrate on the operation of the central pressing operation part 303a in the performance effect, various lamps provided in the door frame 3, the game board 5, etc. are not flashed (that is, turned off or kept turned on). is desirable.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a movable body (not shown) imitating a tool used for exterminating bees (for example, a can of insecticide, an insect net, etc.). The movable body can move on the front side of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. At this time, the movable body is used instead of aiming in the bee extermination effect. For example, in the practice effect and the actual effect, when the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed, the movable body moves to the front side of the queen bee in the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front.

At this time, it is desirable that the movement mode of the movable body differs between when the queen bee is successfully exterminated in the practice performance and when the queen bee is successfully exterminated in the actual performance. For example, in a practice effect, if the queen bee is successfully exterminated, it is desirable not to move the movable body significantly (a dynamic display in which the queen bee moves around the initial position of the movable body on the back side in a front view is displayed by the effect display device 1600). ). This is because if the movable body moves significantly, the player may misunderstand that the result of the special lottery is a big win. On the other hand, in the actual production, when the queen bee is successfully exterminated, the movable body may move greatly.

FIGS. 557 and 558 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of the bee extermination effect. Differences from FIGS. 555 and 556 will be described. Figures 555 and 556 show an example in which a low-difficulty production effect is executed after a high-difficulty practice effect, but in the example of Figures 557 and 558, the difficulty level is set a plurality of times (for example, a maximum of 2 times). A low practice performance can be executed. In addition, the difficulty level of the actual production is high, instead of being able to execute the practice production multiple times.

By performing a plurality of low-difficulty practice effects in this way, the player can become accustomed to the operation of the central pressing operation section 303a and relax. In addition, a player who has become accustomed to the operation of the central pressing operation part 303a through a plurality of practice performances and whose tension has been relieved can enjoy the real performance by feeling the elements of capture in the highly difficult performance.

Following FIG. 555(C), it transitions to FIG. 557(D'). In (D'), even if the soldier bee is exterminated, the result of the special lottery is not a big hit, the practice effect is started with the soldier bee exterminated in advance, and the practice effect is performed twice. The display shown is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . At (E'), the effect display device 1600 displays a display indicating the start of the first practice effect.

In (F′), as in FIG. 556 (K), a stationary static representation of a queen bee, stationary static representations of multiple soldier bees, and a dynamic representation of a moving sight , and an operation instruction for the central pressing operation portion 303a ("Push at the right timing!") are displayed. Also, the stationary soldier bees in (F') are not located on the queen bee.

In (G'), the effect display device 1600 displays an indication that the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed at a timing when the aim is not on the queen bee, and the insecticide is sprayed. Accordingly, at (H'), similarly to FIG. 555(I), the effect display device 1600 displays an indication that the queen bee could not be exterminated.

At (I'), the effect display device 1600 displays a display indicating the start of the second practice effect. (J'), (K'), and (L') are the same as (F'), (G'), and (H'), respectively.

In FIG. 558(M'), the production display device 1600 displays a display indicating that the production production will start and that the soldier bee and the queen bee are moving in the production production. In (N′), a moving static representation of a queen bee, a plurality of soldier bees each representing a moving dynamic representation, a dynamic representation for exterminating the bees, a sight, and a central pressing operation part 303a. and are displayed on the effect display device 1600 . (O') is the same as (N').

In (P'), at the timing when the aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, the central pressing operation unit 303a is operated, and the effect display device 1600 displays an indication that insecticide is being sprayed on the queen bee. . At (Q'), an image indicating that the queen bee has been successfully exterminated, that is, an image indicating that the special lottery result is a big win is displayed, and the soldier bees are still moving. When the queen bee has been successfully exterminated, the display may indicate that not only the queen bee but also the soldier bee have been exterminated. (R') is the same as in FIG. 556(N).

As described above, in the examples of FIGS. 557 and 558, the practice effect can be executed a plurality of times (up to two times) in the bee extermination effect. In addition, the queen bee and the soldier bee are moving in the performance production, but the queen bee and the soldier bee are stationary in the practice production.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, there may be a surprise performance pattern in which the queen bee is exterminated in the practice performance and the special lottery result can be notified as it is (that is, the actual performance is not executed). Even in this case, there is a possibility that after the special lottery result judging effect (practice effect) with a still image effect, the special lottery result judging effect (actual effect) with a dynamic effect that is not a static image effect will be executed. However, after the special lottery result big hit judge effect (performance effect) by the dynamic effect which is not the still image effect, the special lottery result judge effect (practice effect) by the still image effect is not executed.

However, even if there is a surprise effect pattern, it is desirable that the selection rate of the surprise effect pattern is lower than the selection rate of the other patterns (for example, 1/10 or less of the selection rate of the other patterns). Since the selection rate of the surprise performance pattern is low, the excitement of the player can be improved at once by winning the surprise performance pattern. This is because there is a risk that the player's sense of expectation for the actual performance will decrease.

Note that at least one practice effect may be replaced with an operation explanation effect. The operation explanation effect is, for example, an effect in which the effects (F') to (G') or (J') to (K') are automatically executed without the player's operation. Specifically, for example, the operation explanation presentation does not display a prompt to operate the central pressing operation portion 303a, does not enable the operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a, and is triggered by the lapse of a predetermined time. It differs from the practice effect in that the effect of injecting the agent is displayed and the result of the retreat is displayed. Note that the surprise effect pattern described above may be applied to the operation explanation effect.

Note that, for example, in the above-described practice performance and performance performance, the queen bee may be enlarged and displayed by zooming in on the central portion of the performance display device 1600 while the queen bee is stationary. This makes it easier to aim at the queen bee. Further, the above-described model effect may also be zoomed up. Also, in the example of FIG. 558, the queen bee is moving in the actual performance, but only the soldier bee may move and the queen bee may be stationary.

[20-5-1. Reach performance where Daruma fell down]
FIGS. 559 and 560 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a ready-to-reach effect in which Mr. Daruma falls. The ready-to-win effect in which Mr. Daruma fell is an example of the SP ready-to-win effect in which a still image effect may be executed. In the following, the still image effect includes not only the effect in which the dynamic display is executed together with the display of the still image, but also the effect in which only the still image is displayed.

In the Reach production where Mr. Daruma fell, if the main character plays the demon of "Mr. It's a big hit. After the main character shouts "Mr. Further, when the variation is a loss variation, an effect in which the main character is touched by a non-demon is generated in the ready-to-reach effect in which Mr. Daruma falls down.

FIG. 559(A) shows a state in which the ready-to-reach effect in which Mr. Daruma has fallen is started after the ready-to-reach mode of the decorative pattern is shown. In (A), in the effect display device 1600, the main character utters the line "Daruma-san ga~", during which dynamic display is performed in which four non-demons gradually approach the main character. In (B), the main character utters the line "I fell!". Furthermore, in (B), when the hero character finishes saying the line, he turns to the non-demon and stops, and until the hero character finishes saying the line, the movement of the non-demon stops, and a still image production starts.

In (C), the still image effect continues, and for example, the main character and non-demons remain stationary in the state at the end of (B). In (D), two of the non-demons cannot stand being still and move, so that the still image effect ends. Non-demons that have moved in (D) do not appear after (E), which will be described later. Note that even if the still image in the still image effect from (B) to (C) is canceled, the special lottery result corresponding to the change is not announced. That is, in (D), none of the non-demons move, and none of the non-demons touch the main character.

Subsequently, in (E), on the effect display device 1600, the main character utters the line "Da~~ru~~ma~~", during which the remaining two non-demons gradually approach the main character. display is taking place. In (F), the main character utters the line "Sa~~n~~ga~~", during which dynamic display is performed in which the remaining two non-demons gradually approach the main character.

In (G), as in (B), the main character utters the line "I fell!". Furthermore, in (G), as in (B), the main character turns back to the non-demon when he finishes saying the line, and the movement of the non-demon stops before the main character finishes saying the line. Image production starts.

It should be noted that the stop position of each non-demon in (G) is a position very close to the main character (specifically, the main character says ``Mr. The position is such that the player recognizes that the non-oni will definitely be touched by the main character within the period. Therefore, if all the non-demons are defeated at the end of the still image production starting from (G) (if the still image production starting from (G) ends when all the non-demons move), the special lottery result will be If it is a big hit and the non-demon survives even after the still image presentation starting from (G) ends, the special lottery result is lost. That is, the still image effect starting from (G) can function as a judge effect indicating the result of the special lottery.

The still image rendering continues until FIG. 560(J), which will be described later. In (H), the still image presentation continues, and the line "Can you stop for another 5 seconds?" is displayed by the main character. In (I), a 5-second countdown display declared by the main character's lines in (H) begins.

In FIG. 560(J), there is a display indicating that the countdown has 4 seconds remaining. In (K), a display indicating that the countdown has 3 seconds left is displayed, and the still image production ends when the two non-demons cannot stand still and move. In the example of (K), the remaining two non-demons are moving in the middle of the countdown. A demon can move at any time.

In addition, for example, the timing at which the special lottery result is notified may be the same depending on whether the special lottery result is a big win or a loss. Specifically, for example, if the special lottery result is a big hit, the non-demon cannot stand still and moves at the timing when the remaining countdown reaches 0 seconds, and if the special lottery result is a loss, At the timing when the remaining countdown reaches 0 seconds, an effect is generated in which the main character is touched by a non-demon.

In (L), the main character utters the line "Find all the non-demons!" indicating that all the non-demons have been defeated, that is, the special lottery result is a big hit. In (M), an image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to notify that the special lottery result is a big win, saying "Big win! Congratulations!".

In addition, if the special lottery result is a loser, for example, there is a non-demon who survives without moving even when the countdown starting from FIG. The still image effect ends at the timing when the time reaches 0 seconds, or after a predetermined time has elapsed since the time has reached 0 seconds. Then, while the main character is uttering the line "Mr. Daruma fell down!"

As described above, the countdown starts after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the still image presentation. That is, even if the static image effect starts, the special lottery result is not shown at least until the countdown display starts, so the player does not get overly tense until the countdown display starts.

Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the standstill is released and the dynamic display is started at some timing until the countdown reaches 0 seconds, and when the special lottery result is a loss, the countdown is performed. becomes 0 seconds, the quiescence is lifted and the dynamic display begins. In this way, the countdown display ends before the end of the still image effect. In the example of , it is also a display showing the timing to show the special lottery result). Therefore, after the countdown display is displayed, the player's sense of tension and anticipation can be heightened at once.

In the ready-to-win performance in which Mr. Daruma falls, the special lottery result is not shown at the end of the first still image performance, but the special lottery result is shown at the end of the second still image performance. By showing the result of the special lottery along with canceling the still image, the still image effect can give the player a sense of tension, but there are not a few players who experience an excessively high sense of tension. Therefore, the player can become accustomed to the still image production by executing a series of productions not showing the special lottery result at the end of the still image production before the series of productions showing the special lottery result at the end of the still image production. In the static image presentation, the player can be given an appropriate sense of tension that is not excessive.

Hereinafter, the still image effect in which the special lottery result is not shown after the still image effect is finished is also called a non-informing still image effect, and the still image effect in which the special lottery result is shown after the still image effect is finished is also called an informing still image effect.

The non-informative still image performance is prepared to make the player accustomed to the still image performance, and gives the player a sense of expectation by allocating a long time to the informing still image performance which is important for the player. be able to. On the other hand, the period of the notification still image effect may be shorter than the period of the non-notification still image effect. Since the non-informative still image effect is long, the player can get used to the still image effect in advance and does not become overly tense in the informing still image effect. The informing still image effect functions as a winning/losing informing effect leading to the notification of the winning/losing result of the special lottery, and the non-informing still image effect functions as a preparation effect for mental preparation.

In addition, a reach effect in which the period of the notification still image effect is longer than the period of the non-notification still image effect (hereinafter also referred to as a reach effect in which the first Daruma falls), and a non-notification still image There may be both a ready-to-reach effect in which Mr. Daruma has fallen (hereinafter also referred to as a ready-to-reach effect in which the second Mr. Daruma has fallen) in which the period of the notification still image effect is shorter than the period of the effect.

In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for big win when the ready-to-win performance in which the first daruma falls is generated is higher than the degree of expectation for big win in the case of the ready-to-win performance in which the second daruma falls. By doing so, when the period of the informing still image effect is longer than the period of the non-informing still image effect, the expectation of the big hit becomes higher, and the longer the stationary period in the informing still image effect, the more special the player becomes. Immediately before the announcement of the lottery results, tension and expectations can be heightened at once.

On the other hand, the degree of expectation for big win when the ready-to-win performance in which the first daruma falls down may occur may be lower than the degree of expectation for big win in the case of the ready-to-win performance in which the second daruma falls. By doing so, when the period of the non-notification still image effect is longer than the period of the notification still image effect, the expectation of the big hit is high, and when the stationary period in the non-notification still image effect is long, the game The user can get a sense of anticipation from an early stage (before starting the presentation of the notification still image).

In addition, in the still image effect in the ready-to-reach effect in which Mr. Daruma falls, a plurality of poses in which the non-demon stops may be prepared. For example, the poses of the non-demons are selected in the order of two-legged <one-legged <swan poses, such that the non-demon has a high probability of moving when the game is released from rest, that is, the probability of a big hit is high. However, in the ready-to-reach performance in which Mr. Daruma falls down, it is desirable that the posture of standing on both legs, which is the least likely to win a big hit, appears at the highest rate. By facilitating the selection of the pose with the lowest degree of expectation for a big hit, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling excessive tension.

In particular, the performance in which the non-demon stops in the swan pose (the performance with the highest degree of expectation for the big win) may be executed only in the variation of the big win (that is, in this case, the appearance of the swan pose indicates the confirmation of the big win). As a result, the player can feel impatiently waiting for the release of the stillness in the still image presentation, especially when the player stands still in a pose with a high expectation of a big win.

In addition, the main control MPU selects a variation pattern in which the Daruma-san falls ready-to-reach effect is executed, but these stop poses of non-demons during the Daruma-san falling ready-to-reach effect receive commands from the main control MPU. may be selected as an advance notice effect by the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU may suddenly select a pose with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, standing on one leg) in the first non-notification still image effect, or may select a pose with a high degree of expectation for a big hit in the last notification still image effect. You may choose a pose with a high . In the non-informative still image performance executed first, when a pose with a high degree of expectation for a big win is suddenly selected, the player can be given a sense of expectation from an early stage, and the informing still image performance executed last. If a pose with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is selected in , the player can immediately heighten the sense of tension and expectation immediately before the special lottery result is announced.

In addition, in the reach effect where Mr. Daruma fell, for example, in the non-notification still image effect that is executed first, compared to the ratio of selecting a pose with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, standing on one leg), it is executed last The ratio of selecting a pose with a high degree of expectation for a big hit in the informing still image effect is low. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of expectation from the first non-reporting still image.

On the other hand, in the reach effect in which Mr. Daruma fell, compared to the ratio of selecting a pose with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, standing on one leg) in the non-informed still image effect that is executed first, the notified still that is executed last In the image effect, a high percentage of poses with high expectations for big wins may be selected. As a result, the player can enjoy up to the final notification still image performance without giving up on the appearance of the performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win.

In addition, in the reach effect in which Mr. Daruma fell, compared to the ratio of selecting a pose with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, standing on one leg) in the non-informative still image effect that is executed first, the last informing static In the image effect, the ratio of selecting poses with a high degree of expectation for a big hit may be the same. As a result, the player has a certain degree of anticipation for the non-informative still image production, and even if a pose with a high degree of expectation for a big hit does not appear in the non-informative still image production, the final informing still image production is possible. You can get some hope.

Note that the still image effect may be executed three times or more in the ready-to-reach effect in which Mr. Daruma falls. In this case, for example, by setting only the end of the last still image effect as the notification still image effect, it is possible to further suppress the player's sense of tension.

In addition, from the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the non-notification still image effect (the period in which the main character says "Daruma-san ga~" and "I fell down!" In the dynamic display effect period immediately before the notification still image effect (Fig. 559 (D) to (F), the main character period) should be longer. As a result, the period of dynamic display immediately before the notification still image effect can be lengthened, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved during that period. On the other hand, the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the non-notification still image effect may be longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. As a result, the period of motion display immediately before the non-informative still image performance can be lengthened, and the player can be given a sense of expectation that the highly expected performance will be performed in the non-informative still image performance. .

Also, for example, the period of the non-notifying still image effect is longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notifying still image effect. As a result, the player can enjoy the notification still image effect while maintaining the tension heightened by the non-report still image effect. On the other hand, the period of the non-notifying still image effect may be shorter than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notifying still image effect. As a result, the player's sense of tension heightened by the non-informative still image effect can be temporarily lowered, so that the player does not feel excessive tension in the informing still image effect.

Also, for example, the period of the notification still image effect is longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. As a result, the player can enjoy the notification still image effect while maintaining the tension heightened by the non-report still image effect. On the other hand, the period of the notification still image effect may be shorter than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. Thus, the informing still image performance is started in a state in which the player's sense of tension heightened by the non-informing still image performance is once reduced, and furthermore, the player does not become too tense in the informing still image performance.

In addition, although the example in which FIG. 559(A) starts after the ready-to-win mode of the decorative design is shown, the non-notifying still image effect is executed before the ready-to-reach mode of the decorative design is shown, and the non-notifying still image effect After the completion of , the ready-to-reach mode may be shown, and then the notification still image effect may be executed. By executing the non-informative still image performance before the ready-to-win state is shown, the player expects that the decorative pattern will stop in the ready-to-win state after the still image is released in the non-informative still image performance. can be done.

In addition, after the non-informative still image production as described above, the notification still image production is executed, and the reach effect in which Mr. Daruma falls down, and the Daruma-san in which only the notification still image production is performed without the non-informative still image production is performed. Both of the falling reach effect may exist. In this case, rather than the reach effect in which only the notification still image effect is performed without the non-report still image effect, the Daruma has fallen down, in which the notification still image effect is executed after the non-notification still image effect. It is desirable that the ready-to-win effect has a low appearance rate but a high degree of expectation for a big hit. Thus, when the non-informative still image performance appears, the degree of expectation for a big win is high, so even a player who is already accustomed to the still image performance can get a sense of expectation from the appearance of the non-informative still image performance. .

As described above, when executing the notification still image effect, although the dynamic display immediately after the end of the notification still image effect shows the special lottery result (for example, FIG. 560 (K)), the display of the still image is finished. A specific special lottery result can be determined after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, FIG. 560(M)). For example, as shown in Fig. 560 (M), a video that directly notifies that a big hit is displayed, or three sets of decorative patterns are displayed so that a specific special lottery result can be determined. ing.

Note that the predetermined time is shorter than, for example, the period of the notification still image effect. As a result, the player can determine the specific result of the special lottery while maintaining the sense of tension due to the presentation of the notification still image. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the period of the notification still image effect. As a result, the player can discriminate the state in which the tension caused by the notification still image effect is relaxed, and the specific result of the special lottery.

Also, the predetermined time is shorter than the period of the non-notification still image effect, for example. This makes it possible to impress the player with the non-announcement still image effect compared to the period until the specific lottery result is announced. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the period of the non-notification still image effect. As a result, rather than the non-informative still image presentation in which the special lottery result is not shown, the player is impressed with the predetermined time when the specific special lottery result is shown, and the player's sense of tension and expectation can be heightened during the predetermined time. can.

Note that the predetermined time is, for example, shorter than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. This makes it possible to impress the player with the dynamic display compared with the period until the specific lottery result is announced. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the dynamic display effect period immediately before the notification still image effect. As a result, the player can be impressed by the predetermined time when the specific special lottery result is shown rather than the dynamic display in which the special lottery result is not displayed, and the player's sense of tension and expectation can be heightened during the predetermined time.

Also, in the non-notification still image rendering, it is desirable that the BGM that was playing just before is playing as it is. As a result, although the image is still, the BGM remains as it is, so that the player can recognize that the non-informative still image effect is a series of effects continuing from the previous effect, and the still image is displayed. Even if it is done, it does not make the player too nervous. On the other hand, it is desirable to stop the BGM or lower the volume of the BGM in the notification still image effect. As a result, not only the image is frozen, but also the BGM is stopped or reduced, so that even a player accustomed to the still image effect can feel a certain degree of tension in the notification still image effect.

Further, when the notification still image rendering ends and the dynamic display starts, a predetermined movable body may be operated. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the player can easily recognize the special lottery result by operating a predetermined movable body at the timing, thereby improving the player's sense of exhilaration. On the other hand, when the non-notification still image effect ends and the dynamic display starts, it is desirable not to move the movable body. This is because the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big win although the effect for indicating the special lottery result continues even after the non-notifying still image effect.

A predetermined sound may be output when the notification still image effect ends and the dynamic display starts. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the player can easily recognize the special lottery result by outputting a predetermined sound at the timing, thereby improving the player's sense of exhilaration. On the other hand, when the non-notification still image effect ends and the dynamic display starts, it is desirable not to output the predetermined sound. This is because the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big win although the effect for indicating the special lottery result continues even after the non-notifying still image effect.

In the example described above, the countdown display starts when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the still image effect, but the countdown display may start at the same time as the start of the still image effect. Further, as described above, the still image rendering may end simultaneously with the end of the countdown. Therefore, when the countdown display starts at the same time as the start of the still image effect and ends at the same time as the end of the still image effect, the countdown display is a display showing the entire period of the still image effect itself. In this case, the player can see the countdown display and see the timing when the still image effect will end, so he can mentally prepare himself.

In addition, when the countdown display indicates part of the period of the still image effect and ends at the same time as the end of the still image effect, for example, the countdown display period in the still image effect is longer than the countdown non-display period in the still image effect. may be the same, or may be shorter. In order to suppress the player's sense of tension in the countdown display, the longer the countdown display period in the still image effect, the more the player's excessive sense of tension and anticipation can be suppressed. On the other hand, the shorter the countdown display period in the still image effect, the more the player's sense of anticipation and tension can be improved.

Also, if the countdown display indicates a period of part of the still image effect, starts after the start of the still image effect, and ends before the end of the still image effect, for example, the countdown display period in the still image effect is , the total countdown non-display period (i.e., the total of the period from the start of the still image presentation to before the countdown display and the period from the end of the countdown display to the end of the still image presentation), or even if it is the same. Good or short.

Note that the countdown display may be started before the start of the still image effect and ended during the execution of the still image effect (before or at the end). As a result, as described above, the player can prepare mentally by looking at the countdown display during the still image presentation and timing the end of the still image presentation, and the countdown display can be started before the start of the still image presentation. By looking at it, the start timing of the still image effect can be measured, and mental preparation can be made even before the start of the still image effect.

In the example described above, the countdown display is performed only in the notification still image effect, but the countdown display may be performed in the non-notification still image effect as well. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for a big win when the countdown display is executed in the non-informing still image effect is higher than the degree of expectation for a big win when the countdown display is not executed in the non-informing still image effect. The countdown display suppresses the player's sense of tension, but if the degree of expectation for a big win is low even though the countdown display is executed a plurality of times, it is difficult to obtain the sense of tension and the frequency of obtaining an uplifting feeling due to the big win. This is because the price is not expensive, and thus it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, the degree of expectation for a big win when the countdown display is executed in the non-informing still image effect may be lower than the degree of expectation for the big win when the countdown display is not executed in the non-informing still image effect. As a result, the less the number of times of suppressing the feeling of tension, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win.

Also, the period of the countdown display executed in the informing still image effect may be longer, the same, or shorter than the period of the countdown display executed in the non-informing still image effect. .

Since a special lottery result is displayed after the notification still image effect is completed, the player's sense of tension tends to increase in the notification still image effect compared to the non-report still image effect. Therefore, since the period of the countdown display executed in the informing still image effect is longer than the period of the countdown display executed in the non-informing still image effect, the effect of suppressing the player's sense of tension is increased. On the other hand, since the countdown display period executed in the informing still image performance is shorter than the countdown display period executed in the non-informing still image performance, it is possible to meet the needs of the players who want a sense of tension.

In the non-notification still image effect, the countdown display may be performed during a part of the non-notification still image effect, or the countdown display may be performed during the entire period of the non-notification still image effect.

When the countdown display is executed during a part of the still image effect, the pattern of the countdown display period is as follows: (1) The countdown display starts at the start of the still image effect and before the end of the still image effect; (2) Pattern B in which the countdown display starts after the start of the still image effect and ends before the end; (3) Countdown display starts after the start of the still image effect; And there is a pattern C that ends when the still image effect ends.

When the countdown display is executed during a part of the non-notification still image effect, it is desirable to select the effect in the order of Pattern B<Pattern C<Pattern A so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases. Since the special lottery result is not displayed after the non-informative still image effect is finished, the non-informative still image effect is less likely to attract the player's interest than the informing still image effect. Therefore, by setting a pattern A in which the countdown display starts simultaneously with the start of the non-notification still image effect and a pattern C in which the countdown display ends at the same time as the end of the non-notification still image effect is set high. , the player can be made to pay attention to the non-notification still image performance from the start to the end.

On the other hand, when the countdown display is executed during a part of the notification still image effect, it is desirable to select the effect in the order of Pattern A<Pattern B<Pattern C so as to increase the expectation of a big hit. That is, in the notification still image effect, the later the start timing of the countdown display and the later the end timing, the higher the expectation of a big hit. However, once the countdown display starts, the user can enjoy the production while hoping that the countdown will not end prematurely.

When pattern B with a low degree of expectation for big wins appears in the non-informative still image effect, pattern C with a high degree of expectation for big wins is selected in the informing still image effect in order to suppress subsequent declines in the interest of the player. It is desirable that it is determined so that it is always selected.

If the timing at the end of the static image effect and the timing at which the countdown display ends are the same, the countdown display may be made recognizable for a predetermined period even after the timing at which the still image effect ends. Specifically, for example, at the same time that the countdown display reaches "0", the static image effect ends and the dynamic display starts, but the countdown display of "0" may remain displayed for a predetermined period thereafter, or the countdown display may continue. Effects such as enlarging the display, making the countdown display translucent, or covering the countdown display with effects such as smoke may be performed. As a result, it is possible to leave the afterglow of the countdown display for the player.

The length of the countdown non-display period in the non-informing still image effect is preferably longer than the length of the countdown non-display period in the informing still image effect. Since the special lottery result is not displayed after the non-informative still image effect, by lengthening the countdown non-display period, it is possible to attract the player's attention and give them a sense of tension. On the other hand, the length of the countdown non-display period in the non-informing still image effect may be shorter than the length of the countdown non-display period in the informing still image effect.

Also, the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the length of the entire period of the non-informing still image effect may be greater than the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the length of the entire period of the informing still image effect. desirable. To draw the player's attention and give a sense of tension by increasing the proportion of the countdown non-display period in the entire period of the non-informative still image performance since the special lottery result is not shown after the non-informative still image performance. can be done. On the other hand, the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the length of the entire period of the non-notifying still image effect is smaller than the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the length of the entire period of the notifying still image effect. good.

[20-5-2. Another example of reach production where Daruma fell down]
FIG. 561 shows another example of the ready-to-win effect in which Mr. Daruma fell down. In FIGS. 559 and 560, an example in which the non-informing still image effect is executed only once has been described, but in FIG. 561, the non-informing still image effect is executed a plurality of times.

Following FIG. 559(D), it shifts to FIG. 561(E'). That is, (E') is the state immediately after the end of the first non-notification still image effect. In (E'), in the effect display device 1600, the main character utters the line "Mr. At (F'), the main character utters the line "I fell!". Furthermore, at (F'), the main character turns back to the non-demon when he finishes saying the line, and the movement of the non-demon stops before the main character finishes saying the line.

At (G'), the still image effect continues, and for example, the main character and the non-demon remain still in the state at the end of (F'). In (H'), the non-oni did not move even after a predetermined time had passed since the still image effect started, so the still image effect ended and the image displayed in (G') faded out. . Also, the image gradually fades out from (H') to (I').

The effect of (J') is the same as in FIG. 559(E), and the subsequent effects are the same as in FIGS. 559 and 560. Since the special lottery result is not shown even after (I') ends and the dynamic effect starts, the still image effect up to (I') is the non-notification still image effect.

As described above, at the end timing of the first non-announcement still image effect (FIGS. 559(C) to (D)), the still image is not faded out (the still image is not subjected to effects, etc.), and the motion is performed as it is. display is switched to That is, at the moment of switching to the dynamic display, the player cannot recognize the entire still image that has been displayed as the non-notification still image. On the other hand, at the end timing of the second non-announcement still image effect ((H') to (I') in FIG. 561), the still image fades out to switch to dynamic display.

In this way, in one ready-to-win effect in which Mr. Daruma falls down, by performing a plurality of non-notifying still image effects, the player becomes more accustomed to the still image effect, and the player feels excessively nervous about the still image effect. can be suppressed.

On the other hand, as the number of non-reporting still image effects increases, the player may become bored with the non-reporting still image effects. Therefore, when a plurality of non-informative still image effects are performed in one reach effect in which Mr. Daruma falls, the image is faded out at the end of some of the non-informative still image effects. , and even if the non-notification still image performance is performed a plurality of times, the player is not bored. Note that even when the non-informing still image effect is performed only once in the ready-to-win effect in which Mr. Daruma falls, the image may be faded out at the end of the one non-informing still image effect.

It is desirable that the fade-out time in the non-informing still image effect accompanied by fade-out is shorter than the image static time in the non-informing still image effect. This is because, if the fade-out time is longer, there is a possibility that the tension heightened by the display of the still image in the non-notification still image effect will completely disappear within the fade-out time. In addition, in order to temporarily alleviate the tension caused by the display of the still image, the fade-out time when the image fades out after the non-notification still image effect is completed is longer than the image still time in the non-notification still image effect. good too.

In the example of FIG. 561, after the image displayed in the non-notification still image effect is completely erased by fading out, the dynamic display of "Mr. However, the dynamic display of “Mr.

Specifically, for example, from the timing of (H') or (I'), the dynamic display of "Mr. In this case, for example, a semi-transparent faded-out image is superimposed on the dynamic display of "Daruma-san fell down" in (J'). As a result, it is possible to dynamically display "Mr.

Also, a first display time, which is the display time of the still image in the non-notification still image effect with image fade-out, and a second display time, which is the display time of the still image in the non-notification still image effect without image fade-out. , may be the same or different in length. For example, if the degree of expectation for a big hit of reach that Mr. Daruma has fallen differs depending on whether or not a non-notification still image effect accompanied by a fade-out appears, the difference between the first display time and the second display time causes the player to display the non-notification still image. By paying attention to the display time during the production, you can feel more tension and anticipation.

For example, by making the second display time longer than the first display time, the length of the second display time can be brought close to the length of the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time. By maintaining a balance between the lengths of the time periods, the player can be impressed by the effects of both. However, in order to keep the length of time between presentations in balance, it is desirable that the second display time is shorter than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time. The length of the second display time may be longer than the total length of the first display time and the fade-out time.

On the other hand, since the second display time is shorter than the first display time, the difference between the length of the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time and the length of the second display time can be increased. , a series of effects consisting of a non-notification still image effect and a fade-out can strongly impress the player.

Also, the length of the third display time, which is the display time of the still image in the notification still image effect, and the length of the first display time may be the same or different. For example, by making the third display time longer than the first display time, it is possible to heighten the sense of tension in the notification still image for notifying the special lottery result. Especially when the third display time is longer than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time, the effect is remarkable. The third display time may be longer than the first display time, and the third display time may be shorter than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time.

In addition, as described above, depending on the aspect of the still image in the still image production, the degree of expectation for the big hit may differ (for example, the non-demon may stand on both legs, stand on one leg, or take a swan pose. different expectations for the jackpot). For example, after a non-notification still image production in which a still image with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a non-demon standing on one leg or a swan pose) is displayed, a fade-out is performed to display a still image with a high probability of a big hit. The player can recognize it more clearly, and the player's expectation can be improved.

On the other hand, for example, after the non-notification still image production in which a still image with a low expectation of a big hit (for example, a non-demon standing on both feet) is displayed, the still image is immediately erased by not executing the fade-out and the next Since the transition is made to the production of , the disappointment of the player can be suppressed. In the case of a non-informative still image effect with multiple non-informative still image effects with different expectations, there is a fade, and in the case of a non-informative still image effect without multiple non-informative still image effects with different expectations, there is no fade. , may be

It should be noted that when the image is faded out, it is desirable not to maintain the lighting mode of the lamp that was performed in the previous non-notification still image effect. Specifically, for example, when the image is faded out, the dynamic display immediately after (when the main character says “Mr. da! As a result, the player can recognize that the non-notification still image effect has ended at the time when the fade-out of the image starts, and the player can turn his or her attention to the next effect.

Also, when the fade-out of the image is being executed, it is desirable not to maintain the sound that was output in the previous non-notification still image effect. Specifically, for example, when the image is faded out, the dynamic display immediately after (the main character says “Mr. A sound corresponding to the production) is output. As a result, the player can recognize that the non-notification still image effect has ended at the time when the fade-out of the image starts, and the player can turn his or her attention to the next effect.

In the example of FIG. 561, the non-informative still image effect without image fade-out and the non-informative still image effect with image fade-out are performed within one change (the reach effect in which the Daruma falls down). However, one of these non-announcement still image effects need not be performed within a single Mr. Daruma Fall Reach effect.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 561, after the non-informing still image effect without image fade-out, the non-informative still image effect with image fade-out was executed. After that, the non-notification still image rendering without image fade-out may be executed. By executing the non-notification still image effect accompanied by the fade-out of the image, the player feels the afterglow of the non-notification still image effect due to the fade-out, so that the non-notification not accompanied by the fade-out of the image executed after that is performed. You can also enjoy the still image production.

It should be noted that the non-notification still image presentation may be ended by an image effect other than fade-out, as long as it can leave a lasting impression on the player. For example, changing the contrast, brightness, and/or transparency of an image, and monochromeizing or colorizing the image are examples of such image effects. Another example of such an image effect is to superimpose another image or moving image on the image displayed in the non-notification still image effect. Also, instead of fading out, for example, a part or the whole of the image is displayed in a manner such as cracking or opening a hole, and the display content of the image is partially or entirely changed, resulting in a non-notifying static state. Image rendering may end.

In addition, even if it is possible to perform both the reach effect in which Mr. Daruma falls down, which performs a non-notification still image effect with a fade-out, and the reach effect in which Mr. Daruma falls, which does not perform a non-notification still image effect with a fade-out. good. If both can be executed, it is desirable that the ready-to-win effect in which Mr. Daruma falls down, which performs the non-notification still image effect with fade-out, has a higher degree of expectation for a big hit. If the effect is accompanied by a fade-out, it is possible to leave a lingering impression of the still image effect, but if the expectation for the big win is low despite this, the player will have a strong impression that the special lottery result will be a loss, and the Daruma doll will fall. This is because there is a risk that interest in the reach performance will fade.

On the other hand, for example, the expectation of a big hit is higher for the ready-to-win production in which Mr. Daruma falls without performing the non-notifying still image production with fade-out than in the ready-to-reach production in which Mr. Daruma falls down with the non-informing still image production with fade-out. It can be expensive. As a result, with regard to the reach effect in which the Daruma-san falls down, which performs the non-informative still image production with a fade-out, the lingering effect of the fade-out leaves an impression on the player, and the Daruma-san falls down without performing the non-informative still image production with a fade-out. As for the ready-to-win effect, it is possible to leave an impression on the player due to the high possibility of a big hit, and to leave an impression on the player with good balance between both effects.

It should be noted that the image may be faded out at the end of the informing still image effect as well. By fading out the image at the end of the notification correct image performance, for example, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, the player feels the afterglow of the performance leading to the big win, and can get an exhilaration. .

[20-6. Notification process selection reach effect]
Figures 562, 563, and 564 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the notification process selection ready-to-win effect. The notification process selection ready-to-win effect is an example of an SP ready-to-win effect in which a still image effect may be executed.

In FIG. 562(A), the decorative pattern is stopped in the ready-to-win state. In (B), the notification process selection ready-to-reach effect has started. Further, in (B), a still image effect is started. In (B), on the left side of the effect display device 1600 is an image of a gauge for suggesting the degree of expectation that the special lottery result in the variation being executed will be a big hit, and on the right side of the effect display device 1600 is an image of the execution The image of the patrol lamp for announcing the special lottery result in one shot (that is, directly indicating whether the special lottery result is a big hit or not without suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win) is static. displayed as an image.

In (C), the image of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed in the central part of the effect display device 1600 while the image of the gauge and the image of the patrol lamp corresponding to the notification process selection reach effect are displayed as still images. In addition, one of the gauge image and the patrol lamp image (gauge image in (C)) is displayed in the same bright manner as in (B), and the other (pattern image in (C)) is displayed in a darkened manner. .

In the image of the effect operation section 301, a display is displayed indicating that the notification method indicated by the image displayed in a bright mode is selected by pressing the central pressing operation section 303a. In addition, by operating the rotation operation unit 302, the image of the effect operation unit 301 can be switched between an image displayed in a bright mode and an image displayed in a dark mode (that is, a notification method can be selected). There are indications that it can be done. Note that the image of the effect operation unit 301 may be displayed as a still image. It may be displayed as a dynamic display such as moving arrows in the image.

When the player presses the center pressing operation section 303a in (C), or when a predetermined time has passed since the image of the effect operation section 301 was displayed in (C), the notification method displayed in a bright mode is selected. be done. In addition, when a predetermined time has passed since the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) is displayed, one of them (for example, the expectation level suggestion) may be forcibly selected, or the expectation level suggestion or one shot may be selected at random. Notification may be selected.

In (C), both the image of the gauge and the image of the patrol lamp may be displayed in a bright mode without changing from the state of (B). In this case, for example, in (C), when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated to the left, the expectation suggestion is selected, and when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated to the right, the one-shot announcement is selected. An image suggesting a selection method by operation is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . Also, in this case, when a predetermined time has passed since the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) was displayed, for example, one of them (for example, the expectation level suggestion) is forcibly selected, or the expectation level suggestion is randomly selected. Alternatively, one-shot notification is selected.

(D) is a state in which one-shot notification is selected in (C). In (D), the still image effect is completed and the stillness is released, and only the patrol lamp image is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600 . Then, in (D), a dynamic display in which a patrol lamp lights up is displayed as a display indicating that the special lottery result in the variation was a big win. In (E), an image is displayed that more clearly notifies that the special lottery result is a big hit. Note that a predetermined movable body may be moved in (D).

In addition, for example, if the special lottery result in the change is a loss, dynamic display is performed in (D), for example, in which the effect display device 1600 turns dark without the patrol lamp shining, and in (E) "Unfortunately . . . Loss" is displayed to notify that the special lottery result is a loss.

Fig. 563(D') shows a state in which the expectation suggestion is selected in Fig. 562(C). At (D'), the still image effect is completed and the stillness is released, and only the image of the gauge is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the message "Charge the gauge!" is displayed. The gauge can be accumulated up to 8 stages, and at (E'), the gauge is accumulated up to 3 stages, and a display ("Still!") indicating that there is still an opportunity to accumulate the gauge is displayed on the production display device 1600. is displayed. It should be noted that, for example, only when the special lottery result is a big hit, the gauge may be set to accumulate up to 8 levels, which is the maximum value.

It should be noted that, after the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) is displayed, if the expectation degree suggestion is forcibly selected after a predetermined time has elapsed without the central pressing operation unit 303a being operated, It is not necessary to increase the number of stages of the gauge in (D'). There is a possibility that the player did not operate the center pressing operation section 303a because he did not want to know the degree of expectation, and this is to satisfy the desire of such a player.

At (F'), the state returns to the same state as in Fig. 562(C). However, the number of stages of the gauge displayed as a still image may reflect the number of stages accumulated in the immediately preceding effect as in (F'), or the gauge is completely accumulated as in (C). It may be displayed without it.

(G') is a state in which the expectation suggestion is selected in (F'). At (G'), similarly to (D'), the still image effect is terminated and the still image is released, and only the image of the gauge is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the message "Charge the gauge!" be done. However, it differs from (D') in that the gauge is accumulated from the number of stages accumulated in the immediately preceding performance.

At (H'), the gauge has accumulated up to four levels, and a display ("more and more!") is displayed on the effect display device 1600, suggesting that there is still an opportunity to accumulate the gauge. (I') returns to the same state as (F').

Then, when the expectation level suggestion is selected and a series of effects for filling the gauge is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, five times), the expectation level suggestion effect ends at the end of the predetermined number of times of the effect for filling the gauge, and the current display is displayed. A display is made to suggest that the number of stages of the gauge displayed indicates the degree of expectation for a big win ("So far!" in (J')). (J') is the state at the end of the performance for charging the gauge for the predetermined number of times. In the state of (J'), the gauge is accumulated up to 6 stages.

In (H'), the image of the gauge is darkened and the image of the patrol lamp is displayed in a bright mode. Furthermore, although the image of the effect operation section 301 is displayed, the display prompting the user to press the central pressing operation section 303a is displayed, but the display prompting the user to operate the rotation operation section 302 is not displayed. In other words, after performing the effect of charging the gauge a predetermined number of times, the one-shot notification is forcibly selected at (H'). In other words, the number of stages of the gauge in (J') indicates the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Fig. 564 (I') shows the state in which the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in (J'), and indicates the special lottery result by turning on or off the patrol lamp as in Fig. 562 (D). Note that when a predetermined time has passed since the display of (J') started, the process shifts to (I') in FIG. 564 even if the central pressing operation portion 303a is not pressed. Subsequently, in (J'), similarly to FIG. 562(E), an image is displayed that notifies more clearly that the special lottery result is a big win.

In addition, after selecting the expectation level suggestion, a still image effect for selecting the notification method is performed again (for example, Fig. 563 (F'), (I')), but the one-shot notification is selected in the still image effect. In this case, a special lottery result is announced by displaying patrol lamps as shown in FIG. 562(D).

The still display of the still image effect gives the player a feeling of tension and anticipation, but some players feel that the static image lacks interest. Therefore, as described above, in the notification process selection reach effect, in the still image effect, the method of notifying the special lottery result can be selected from expectation suggestion or one-shot notification. It can arouse interest in performance.

Also, as mentioned above, while it is possible to select multiple times for the expectation level suggestion or one-shot announcement in the still image production, it seems that only the one-shot announcement patrol can be selected in the last still image production. is set. As a result, in the notification process selection ready-to-win effect, the special lottery result is finally indicated by one-shot notification. Furthermore, in the notification process selection ready-to-win effect, the expectation level suggesting effect can be selected a plurality of times, so that the player's sense of expectation can be gradually increased. Furthermore, since it is possible to switch to the one-shot announcement even after selecting the expectation level suggesting effect one or more times, the player can know the special lottery result at the stage when the player is satisfied with the level of expectation, which eventually leads to the player's satisfaction. never boring.

In the above example, when the expectation level suggestion was selected, the number of stages of the gauge increased in the production of filling the gauge, but the number of stages of the gauge did not increase and the production ended with the previous level. You may For example, when the gauge is below a predetermined stage (eg, 0 stage) even after completion of the performance of charging the gauge a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), a big win may be determined.

When the gauge is accumulated, for example, the player is urged to repeatedly hit the operation unit such as the central pressing operation unit 303a, and the number of stages of the gauge is increased according to the number of repeated hits so that the gauge is accumulated. may be broken. However, the maximum number of stages of the gauge in the performance to accumulate the gauge each time is determined by a predetermined allocation based on the result of the special lottery before the performance starts, and after reaching the maximum number of stages, the operation part is repeatedly hit. However, it shall not reach a stage equal to or greater than the maximum number of stages.

As described above, the still image effect executed in the notification process selection reach is the effect (Fig. 562 (C)) in which both the expectation level suggestion and the one-shot announcement can be selected, and when the expectation level suggestion is selected A first still image effect in which the repeated hit effect is not executed, and a second still image effect in which the repeated hit effect is executed when the expectation level suggestion is selected. Further, the still image effect executed in the notification process selection reach includes a third still image effect (Fig. 563 (H')) in which only one-shot notification can be selected.

The effective period of the effect operation unit 301 may differ depending on the type of still image effect. For example, after the third still image effect, the special lottery result, which is the most important for the player, is forcibly shown. is preferably longer than the valid periods in the second still image effect and the first still image effect. In addition, when the expectation degree suggestion is selected in the second still image effect, a continuous hit effect is performed in which the player can enjoy confirming the expectation level by the player's own operation. It is desirable that the effective period of the second still image effect is longer than the effective period of the first still image effect so that the second still image effect can be executed as quickly as possible.

Further, the size of the image of the effect operation section 301 displayed during the still image effect may differ depending on the type of the still image effect. For example, after the third still image effect, the special lottery result, which is the most important for the player, is forcibly shown. is preferably larger than the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the second still image effect and the first still image effect. In addition, when the expectation degree suggestion is selected in the second still image effect, a continuous hit effect is performed in which the player can enjoy confirming the expectation level by the player's own operation. It is desirable that the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the second still image effect be larger than the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the first still image effect so that the effect can be executed in a timely manner.

Further, in the above-described example, the one-shot notification is selected by operating the center pressing operation unit 303a in the third still image rendering, but a plurality of operation units (for example, the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation, etc.) The one-shot notification may be selected by prompting the user to operate the operation unit selected from the unit 303b and the rotary operation unit 302) and operating the operation unit. In this case, for example, a difference may be provided in the degree of expectation for a big hit depending on the operation unit selected.

Also, the image of the effect operation unit 301 may appear at the same time as the start of the still image effect, or may appear after the start of the still image effect. Also, the length of time from the start of the still image effect to the appearance of the image of the effect operation unit 301 may differ depending on the type of still image effect. For example, the time from the start of the still image effect to the appearance of the image of the effect operation unit 301 is longer in the order of the third still image effect>the second still image effect>the first still image effect.

After the third still image effect, a special lottery result is shown, after the second still image effect when the expectation level suggestion is selected, the continuous hit effect is executed, and when the expectation level suggestion is selected, the first static effect is performed. After the image effect, the degree of expectation is suggested without executing the repeated hit effect. In other words, the effects that are important to the player are performed in the order of the third still image effect>the second still image effect>the first still image effect. By lengthening the time until the image appears, it is possible to give the player a mental preparation period for the operation for starting the important performance.

In the above example, after a predetermined amount of time has passed since the expectation level suggestion was selected, the gauge gradually builds up to the specified level, but at the same time when the expectation level suggestion is selected, even if the gauge accumulates to the specified level good. As a result, the player can immediately confirm the degree of expectation. In this case, at the same time that the expectation level suggestion is selected, the gauge may gradually fill up to the predetermined level, or at the same time as the expectation level suggestion is selected, the gauge will reach the specified level without going through the intermediate stages. good too.

In addition, when the expectation degree suggestion is forcibly selected after a predetermined time has elapsed without the center pressing operation section 303a being operated, for example, the image of the effect operation section 301 is displayed from FIG. 562(C). An erased image may be displayed, and in this case, the number of stages of the gauge may not be changed. As a result, since the player recognizes that the degree of expectation does not increase unless the performance operation section 301 is operated, the player can be given an incentive to operate the performance operation section 301 . However, in the final effect in which the expectation level suggestion can be selected, the gauge It is desirable that an effect in which is accumulated is executed.

In the above example, the number of stages of the gauge was 0 at the timing before the player selected the expectation level suggestion (the timing of FIG. 562(B)). All may be accumulated. However, in the case where it is determined that the state in which the gauge is fully charged is a confirmed jackpot, if the gauge is completely charged at the timing, the jackpot is confirmed at the timing and the player selects the notification process. Since there is a risk that the ready-to-win effect will not be enjoyed until the end, in such a case, it is desirable that at most the gauge is partially filled at the timing.

In addition, the image of the production operation unit 301 in the final state may be mixed with effects, or the color may be changed according to the degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, if the gauge is a predetermined number of stages or more, it is red, and if the gauge is If it is less than the number of stages, white, etc.) may be used. As a result, not only the gauge but also the image of the effect operation section 301 can make the player feel a sense of expectation.

In addition, in the notification process selection reach effect, the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the selection effect other than the last in which both the expectation degree suggestion and the one-shot announcement can be selected, and the effect in the last selection effect in which only the one-shot announcement can be selected The image of the operation unit 301 may be common. As a result, since the image of the performance operation part 301 does not change even in the final state, the player guesses the degree of expectation for the big win only by the stage of the gauge, so the player's consciousness is concentrated on the performance for filling the gauge. be able to.

Further, for example, the display period of the image of the effect operation section 301 and the effective period of the effect operation section 301 (the central pressing operation section 303a and the rotation operation section 302) are the same. In the selection effect, the display of the image of the effect operation unit 301 may be started before the start of the valid period of the effect operation unit 301. The final selection effect is the player's expectation in the notification process selection ready-to-win effect. This is an effect that can be enjoyed in the highest state, and by starting the display of the image of the effect operation part 301 before the start of the effective period of the effect operation part 301, the player can surely perform the last selection operation. can go and enjoy.

Also, the effective period of the effect operation unit 301 in the last selection effect in which only one-shot notification can be selected is the effective period of the effect operation unit 301 in the selection effects other than the last one in which both the expectation level suggestion and the one-shot notification can be selected. Longer is preferable. As a result, the player can surely perform the final selection operation and enjoy it. Note that the effective period of the effect operation unit 301 in the last selection effect in which only the one-shot announcement can be selected is the effective period of the effect operation unit 301 in the selection effects other than the last in which both the expectation level suggestion and the one-shot announcement can be selected. It can be shorter or the same.

In addition, when the expectation degree suggestion effect is selected, the still image effect is executed multiple times, but even in the dynamic display executed between the plurality of still image effects, the expectation degree suggestion and the one-shot You may display the image of the production|presentation operation part 301 in selection effects other than the last which can select both of announcements. This allows the player to mentally prepare for the selection operation in the next still image presentation.

[20-7. Hold gathering performance]
FIGS. 565 and 566 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a holding gathering effect. The pending gathering effect is an example of an effect in which a still image effect may be executed. In FIG. 565(A), all decorative symbols are in motion, and there are three pending. In (A), five pending indications are displayed. A corresponding pending indication.

In the state of (A), the game ball B enters the starting port (the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004), and by acquiring a new hold, there is a possibility that the holding gathering effect will start. be. (B) is a state in which the holding gathering effect is started by the above-described trigger. Since the game ball B has entered the starting hole and acquired a new hold, there are four holds in (B). When the pending gathering effect is started, the effect that the great devil appears on the effect display device 1600 is executed.

At (C), the still image presentation starts, and the Great Demon King who appeared at (B) is displayed as a still image for a predetermined time. Note that the pending display on the effect display device 1600 does not change in the still image effect.

In (D), the still image effect is finished, and the effect in which the main character appears on the effect display device 1600 is executed by dynamic display. In (E), the main character utters the line "Holding gathering chance!"

In (F), in the effect display device 1600, the suspension displays that have moved above the main character are combined to form one sphere (hereinafter also referred to as courage sphere). As a result, the pending display is temporarily not displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In (G), a state in which the main character is throwing a ball of courage is displayed. (H) shows a state in which the Great Demon King catches the ball of courage thrown by the main character.

In (I), the still image effect is started, and the Great Demon Lord catching the ball of courage is displayed as a still image. In FIG. 566(J), which will be described later, the still image effect also functions as a judge effect, in order to notify that the special lottery result is a big win.

In FIG. 566(J), the static image effect is completed and the stillness is released, and the special lottery result of either the pending variation or the running variation of "WIN!!" on the effect display device 1600 is a big hit. There is a display indicating that

Subsequently, in (K), in addition to the display of (J), a hold display is displayed in the original area, and a display is performed to indicate which special lottery result corresponds to which hold is a big win. In the example of FIG. 566, the pending display corresponding to the next variation of the variation being executed lights up with an effect, and the special lottery result corresponding to this variation is a big hit. In addition, in (J) and (K), all decorative designs are changing.

The appearance timing of the effect indicating that the special lottery result is a big win (the effect in (K), hereinafter also referred to as the big win effect) may be just before or at the end of the variation being executed. As a result, the player's sense of tension can be maintained until the end of the variation being executed.

In the illustrated example, the big hit effect has a size that covers the pending display corresponding to the big hit variation, but it may have a size smaller than the pending display. Specifically, for example, the big win effect may be an effect that occurs only inside the pending display corresponding to the big win variation (the inside of the pending display is illuminated, etc.).

Also, the big win effect may overlap a part of the pending display corresponding to the big win, and part of the big winning effect may protrude from the pending display. Also, the big win effect may overlap at least a part of the pending display corresponding to the big win, and may be displayed in a layer (that is, a layer on the near side from the player's point of view) that takes precedence over the pending display in the effect display device 1600. . That is, in this case, at least part of the pending display is hidden by the big hit effect.

In addition, if all the special lottery results of the pending variation and the variation being executed are lost, for example, in (J), all the special lottery results are lost like "Unfortunately..." A display is made to indicate that this is the case, and the suspension display is displayed again on the effect display device 1600 in the same manner as (B) to (D), that is, in a normal manner.

In addition, when there is a big hit change in the variation being executed and the variation being held, the big win effect may be displayed after performing the same effect as the loss as described above. In this case, after the losing performance, the big win effect may be displayed after displaying ``WIN!!'' as a revival performance, or the revival performance itself may be performed without displaying ``WIN!!''. may be At this time, the big-hit effect may be the variation after the next time of the variation under execution, and may be started from the variation before the big-hit variation.

In addition, if there is no big hit variation in the variation being executed and the variation in suspension, the variation in suspension is quickly digested after the suspension gathering effect is completed (specifically, for example, the variation time is 2 seconds or less It is desirable that a variation pattern of short magnitude is selected). The player will not be interested in the variation that turns out to be a loss in the special lottery result. This is because it will make you less interested.

Further, when there is a jackpot variation in the variation being executed and the variation in suspension, the variation prior to the variation in the jackpot may or may not be digested at high speed. By quickly digesting the fluctuations before the big win fluctuations, the fluctuations for which the special lottery result is found to be a loss can be quickly terminated and the game can be shifted to the big win game, which gives the player a great playing time. Improve efficiency. On the other hand, when the fluctuations before the big win fluctuation are not digested at high speed, the player's feeling of elation for winning the big win can be maintained during the period of these fluctuations which are not digested at high speed.

As described above, in the pending gathering effect, it is notified whether or not there is a variation in which the special lottery result is a big hit among the variation being executed and the variation being suspended. Since there are 5 fluctuations when the fluctuations during execution and the fluctuations during suspension are totaled, the pending collective performance is successful according to the degree of expectation for a big hit in the 5 fluctuations. For example, if the special lottery result of the variation being executed is a loss and the special lottery result of the next variation being held is a big hit, the variation being executed will produce a loss performance in the normal performance, but the suspension set In the performance, a performance showing a big hit is performed in the variation during the execution. In other words, the opportunity for appearance of an effect that takes a long time to appear is reduced, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

As described above, at the end of the first still image effect (that is, the still image effect with the pending display being displayed), it is determined whether or not there is a big hit change among the changes being executed and the changes being held. Do not show judgment results.

It should be noted that, for example, after the first still image effect is completed, the pending change effect may be performed until the pending display is no longer performed on the effect display device 1600 (for example, the period of FIG. 565(D)). Specifically, for example, the hold change effect is performed so that the variation jackpot expectation level corresponding to the hold display changed to red is higher than the variation jackpot expectation level corresponding to the hold that does not change the hold display. conduct. The tension given to the player by the first still image effect is temporarily relieved by the end of the still image effect, but by performing the pending change effect at the timing described above, the game can be played even during the period until the ball of courage is formed. It can give people hope.

In the example of FIG. 565, the pending gathering chance is executed at (E) and the courage sphere is formed at (F), but even if the holding gathering chance fails and the courage sphere is not formed, the effect is executed. good. Specifically, in (F), formation of the sphere of courage fails, each pending display returns to its original position, and the position of the pending display remains displayed without moving until the change ends. Instead of (G) and (H), for example, the main character attacks the Great Satan with his bare hands, and instead of (I), a still image of the Great Satan after being attacked is displayed. (ie, a still image different from (I) is displayed). After that, similarly to FIG. 566(J), it is notified whether or not there is a big hit variation among the variation being executed and the variation being held.

Incidentally, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the case where the still image production as a judge production is performed after succeeding in the pending meeting chance is higher than the degree of expectation for a big hit in the case where the still image production as a judge production is carried out after the failure in the holding gathering chance. . In other words, when the holding meeting chance fails and the still image production and still image are canceled while the holding display is displayed, the special lottery result is notified, and the holding meeting chance is successful and held. The degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the still image effect and the cancellation of the still image are performed in a state where the display is not displayed and the special lottery result is notified.

It should be noted that when the pending display is displayed during the still image effect, the pending display may be dynamic display. For example, each hold display is displayed in a swaying or rotating manner, or the brightness of each hold display changes even if the hold display itself is stationary, or the effect that the hold display wears changes. may By dynamically displaying the pending display during the static image presentation, the dynamic display and the static image are contrasted and recognized to stand out from each other.

Incidentally, it is preferable that the big win effect be displayed continuously until the variation for the suspension indicating that the big win is completed. This is because it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

However, on the other hand, if the display that the big win is confirmed is displayed for a long time (until the change to the hold indicating that the big win is completed), the next player will look at me with disgust, which is unpleasant. There is a possibility that the change may occur, so for example, it will be displayed until just before the change being executed ends, until the change being executed ends, or until the next change of the change being executed starts. may be displayed only for a relatively short period of time.

This comparatively short time means, for example, a time shorter than the period of static display (I), a period of less than half of the period of dynamic display (J), or less than half of the period of dynamic display (J). It is preferable to set the period and the second half period of (J) of the dynamic display. By erasing the fluctuation during execution or at the start of the next fluctuation of the fluctuation during execution, the player's consciousness is directed to the big win game state, so the player prepares for the big win game (for example, how to hit at the start of the big win). be conscious of changing to right-handed, etc.).

In the above example, the big win effect is displayed until the end of the variation in which the special lottery result is a big win, but it may be deleted during the execution of the variation in which the special lottery result is a big win and before the end. . As a result, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the big win effect, but also to the effect during fluctuations in which the special lottery result is a big win.

When erasing the big-hit effect, the big-hit effect may be suddenly erased, or the big-hit effect may be erased gradually (for example, the transparency of the big-hit effect may be increased to gradually erase it). By suddenly erasing the big win effect, the player will not be left with a lingering impression of the big win effect, so that the player's consciousness can be quickly directed to the big win game. Further, by gradually erasing the big win effect, it is possible to leave the afterglow of the big win effect to the player and strengthen the impression of the big win effect.

Further, when erasing the big win effect, another effect may be applied to the big win effect before erasing it. Specifically, for example, after applying another effect on top of the big-hit effect to make the big-hit effect unrecognizable, the other effect is erased, or another effect is applied on top of the big-hit effect. is made recognizable, the big hit effect is erased together with the other effect. By multiplying the big win effect with another effect and erasing it, it is possible to leave the afterglow of the big win effect to the player and strengthen the impression of the big win effect.

[20-8. Split reach effect]
Figures 567 and 568 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the split ready-to-win effect. The split ready-to-reach effect is an example of a ready-to-reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed. In FIG. 567(A), all decorative designs are changing.
When the degree of expectation of big win differs depending on the decorative pattern stopped in the ready-to-win state (for example, the degree of expectation of big win is higher in the ready-to-win state in the “7” pattern than in the ready-to-win state of other decorative patterns), the reach with the low degree of expectation to win the big win. When the decorative symbols stop in this state, there is a risk that the player's sense of exhilaration will decrease. In the split ready-to-win effect, a plurality of timings are provided for determining the decorative symbols to be stopped in the ready-to-win state, so that the player's exhilaration can be prevented from decreasing.

In (B), the display area in the effect display device 1600 is divided into two upper and lower parts, and the same reach effect (a main character (white character in the figure) and an enemy character (black character in the figure) are displayed in the upper and lower display areas). production) is executed as a dynamic display. However, in one (upper) display area, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are stopped in a reach state, and in the other (lower) display area, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are fluctuating. be.

In (C), following (B), the same reach effect is executed as dynamic display in the upper and lower display areas, and the hero character and the enemy character hit each other. In addition, in (C), similarly to (B), in one (upper) display area, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped in a reach state, and in the other (lower) display area , The left decorative design and the right decorative design are changing.

In (D), of the upper and lower display areas divided in (B) to (C), the display area (upper display area) in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected. Furthermore, in (D), the display contents of the selected display area are displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the still image effect starts. In the still image effect, for example, the display content displayed in the upper display area at the end of the period (C) is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600 as a still image. Even during the still image production of (D), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped (still) in the ready-to-win mode.

In (E), the still image effect is completed, the stillness is released, and the dynamic display is resumed. In (E), as a display showing the result of the special lottery, an image in which the main character lost to the enemy character, a display of "Unfortunate...", and a decorative pattern stopped due to a combination of failures are displayed. After the still image effect of (D) ends, the special lottery result is shown in (E), so the still image effect of (D) also functions as a judge effect.

Fig. 568 (D') shows a state in which the display area (lower display area) in which the left decorative design and the right decorative design are changing is selected after (C). At (D'), the display content of the selected display area is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the still image effect is started. In the still image effect, for example, the display content displayed in the lower display area at the end of the period (C) is displayed as a still image on the entire effect display device 1600 . In addition, in (D'), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are changed and displayed even during the still image presentation.

At (E'), the still image effect is completed, the still image is released, and the dynamic display is resumed. In (E'), the battle effect between the main character and the enemy character is performed again, and at the same time, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern change while the ready-to-reach state is formed (which decorative pattern stops in the ready-to-reach state). (E') is unknown). Furthermore, at (E'), a display saying "Which symbol will give you a reach?" is displayed.

At (F'), the battle effect between the main character and the enemy character continues, and the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped in the ready-to-win state. At (G'), the still image effect starts. After the still image effect of (G') ends, the special lottery result is shown in (H'), which will be described later, so the still image effect of (G') also functions as a judge effect.

In addition, in the still image rendering in (G'), the same still image as the still image in FIG. 567(D) is displayed. In other words, when the display area in the reach state is selected from the state of split display, and when the display area in the non-reach state is selected from the state of split display and then goes through (D') to (F'), The still image in the still image production is common. As a result, the impression of the still image can be strongly planted in the player.

At (H'), the still image effect is completed, the still image is released, and the dynamic display is resumed. At (H'), as a display showing the result of the special lottery, an image in which the main character wins over the enemy character, a display of "Victory!!"

As described above, the display area is divided into upper and lower parts immediately after the start of the split ready-to-win effect, and the decorative pattern stops in the ready-to-win state while the ready-to-win effect is performed in one display area, and the ready-to-win effect is performed in the other display area. Also, the decorative pattern is fluctuating without stopping in the reach state.

As a result, since it is not possible to know which decoration pattern is ready-to-win until the predetermined time elapses after the start of the split ready-to-win performance, the player can get tension and expectation even after the start of the ready-to-win performance. Further, by executing the still image effect after one display area is selected from the divided display areas, the player can be made to strongly recognize which display area has been selected.

Further, when a display area with varying decorative patterns is selected from the divided display areas, after the still image effect is executed, an effect for recognizing which decorative pattern will cause the ready-to-win state is performed. The expectation of the player can be improved by making the decorative pattern stationary in the ready-to-win state after performing the dynamic display.

The expected degree of jackpot when a display area with varying decorative patterns is selected from among the divided display areas is the expected degree of jackpot when a display area with stopped decorative patterns in the ready-to-reach state is selected. A higher setting is desirable. This is because when a display area with fluctuating decorative patterns is selected, there is still the possibility of reaching a ready-to-win state with decorative patterns with high expectations for big wins (for example, a ready-to-reach state with "7" patterns). be.

However, in the display area where the decorative symbols are stopped in the ready-to-win state, when the ready-to-win state is formed by decorative symbols with a high degree of expectation for big hits (for example, “7” symbol), the decorative symbols fluctuate. The degree of expectation for big win when the display area is selected may be set lower than the degree of expectation for big win when the display area in which the decorative symbols are stopped in the ready-to-win state is selected.

Note that in the still image effect (Fig. 567 (D), Fig. 568 (D')) after one display area is selected from the divided display areas, an effect prompting the operation of a predetermined operation unit is executed. good too. In this case, for example, when the predetermined operation unit is operated, the stillness is canceled and the effect progresses.

It should be noted that the number of types of operation units that may be prompted to operate in the still image effect (Fig. 568 (D')) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected, the decorative pattern is in the reach state. It is desirable that the number of types of operation units that may be prompted to be operated in the still image presentation (FIG. 567(D)) after the stopped display area is selected is larger.

Specifically, for example, in the still image effect after a display area with varying decorative patterns is selected, there is a possibility that only the central pressing operation unit 303a is prompted to operate, and the decorative patterns are in the reach state. In the still image effect after the stopped display area is selected, there is a possibility that the operation of either the central pressing operation section 303a or the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b will be prompted.

As described above, the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the ready-to-reach state is selected also functions as a judgment effect, so for example, depending on the operation unit that prompts the operation, the degree of expectation of the judge effect may differ. Therefore, it is better that there is a possibility that more operation units are operated.

In addition, even if the number of types of selectable operation parts is the same, the type of image that prompts the operation in the still image effect (Fig. 568 (D')) after the display area with varying decorative patterns is selected It is desirable that the number of types of images prompting the operation in the still image effect (FIG. 567(D)) after the display area in which the decorative symbols are stopped in the ready-to-reach state is selected is larger than the number.

Specifically, for example, in the still image effect after a display area with varying decorative patterns is selected, there is a possibility that only an image in which the central pressing operation portion 303a is displayed in white or red is displayed. In the still image production after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the ready-to-reach state is selected, an image in which the central pressing operation portion 303a is displayed in white or red, or a main character is displayed inside the central pressing operation portion 303a. You may see an image with

As described above, the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the ready-to-reach state is selected also functions as a judgment effect. It is better to have the possibility of displaying more images in order to have different expectations of the .

In addition, the display area where the decorative pattern is stopped in the ready-to-reach state is selected from the effective period of the operation unit in the still image effect (Fig. 568 (D')) after the display area where the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected. It is desirable that the effective period of the operation unit in the still image effect after the operation (Fig. 567(D)) is longer. When the operation unit is operated during the still image production after the display area where the decorative symbols are stopped in the ready-to-reach state is selected, the judgment production starts, so the player can operate the operation unit during the still image production. There is a demand for certainty, and for that reason a long validity period is desirable.

Also, in the still image effect (Fig. 568 (D')) after the display area with the changing decorative pattern is selected, it is desirable that the BGM that was playing just before is still playing. On the other hand, it is desirable that the BGM be stopped or the volume of the BGM lowered in the still image rendering (Fig. 567(D)) after the display area where the decorative symbols are stopped in the ready-to-win state is selected. Thereby, the movement of the left decorative design and the right decorative design and the BGM are linked (the BGM flows while the left decorative design and the right decorative design are fluctuating, and the BGM stops or becomes smaller in the ready-to-win state). In particular, in the still image effect in the reach state, not only the image is frozen, but also the background music is stopped or reduced, so that the feeling of tension can be increased.

However, it is desirable to output the effect sound corresponding to the effect prompting the operation of the operation unit even in the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the ready-to-win state is selected. This is to surely prompt the player to operate the operation unit.

It should be noted that when the dynamic display is started after the still image production (Fig. 567(D)) after the display area with the changing decorative pattern is selected, a predetermined movable body may be operated. may For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the player can easily recognize the special lottery result by operating a predetermined movable body at the timing, thereby improving the player's sense of exhilaration. On the other hand, it is desirable not to move the movable body when the dynamic display starts after the static image presentation (FIG. 568(D')) after the display area with the changing decorative pattern is selected. . This is because the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big win even though the effect for indicating the special lottery result continues after the still image effect.

Also, when the dynamic display starts after the still image presentation (FIG. 567(D)) after the display area with the changing decorative pattern is selected, a predetermined sound may be output. good too. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the player can easily recognize the special lottery result by outputting a predetermined sound at the timing, thereby improving the player's sense of exhilaration. On the other hand, when the static image effect (FIG. 568(D')) after the display area with the changing decorative pattern is selected and the dynamic display is started, the predetermined sound is not output. is desirable. This is because the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big win even though the effect for indicating the special lottery result continues after the still image effect.

Note that the series of effects shown in FIGS. 568(E') to (F') may be repeated. Specifically, for example, in the first (F') production, the decorative pattern (for example, "6" pattern) with a low degree of expectation for a big hit is in a ready-to-win state, and then the (E') production is performed again. will be Then, in the second production of (F'), the ready-to-win state is reached with a decorative pattern (for example, "7" pattern) with high expectation for a big hit, and the production progresses to (G'). By advancing the performance in this way, even if the player is in a ready-to-win state with a decorative pattern with a low expectation for a big win in the first (F') performance, the player's expectation can be suppressed from being lowered.

In addition, in the split display in FIGS. 567(B) to (C), different effects may be performed in one display area and the other display area. As a result, the player can enjoy two kinds of effects with one variation. Further, when the expectations for the big hits displayed in the respective display areas are different, the player can select not only whether the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state, but also which of the performances with the different expectations for the big wins. You can watch Ruka with a sense of tension and anticipation.

In addition, when an effect with a different degree of expectation for a big hit is executed in each of the divided display areas, for example, an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit in the display area where the decorative pattern is stopped in the ready-to-win state may change the decorative pattern. An effect with a low degree of expectation for a big hit is being executed in the displayed area. As described above, the degree of expectation for a big hit when the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected is lower than the degree of expectation for a big hit when the display region in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected. By executing an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win in the display area where the symbols are stopped in the ready-to-win state, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player when the display area is selected.

On the other hand, when an effect with a different degree of expectation for a big hit is executed in each of the divided display areas, for example, an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win is executed in the display area where the decorative pattern is stopped in the ready-to-win state, and the decorative pattern fluctuates. An effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is executed in the displayed area. As described above, the degree of expectation for a big hit when a display area in which decorative patterns are fluctuating is selected is higher than the degree of expectation for a big hit when a display area in which decorative patterns are stopped in the ready-to-reach state is selected. By executing a performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win in a display area in which patterns are changing, when the display area is selected, an extremely high degree of expectation for a big win can be obtained, thereby greatly improving the player's exhilaration. be able to.

[21-1. Cut selection effect]
During the execution of the variation, the expectation of the big hit in the variation, such as the suspension change performance of the suspension that indicates the variation, the look-ahead suspension change performance, the pseudo-continuous performance, the advance notice performance of the variation, the reach performance, and the zone change performance, etc. Various productions showing are executed. Although these effects can arouse anticipation, some players find these effects annoying. A cut selection effect provided for such a player, in which the effect can be cut, will be described.

In addition, the pending change effect indicating the change is, for example, by changing the mode of the pending display corresponding to the change being executed among the pending displays displayed on the effect display device 1600, suggesting the degree of expectation for the big hit being executed. It is a performance to do. The look-ahead pending change effect is, for example, an effect that changes the mode of the pending display corresponding to the pending variation among the pending displays displayed on the effect display device 1600 to indicate the degree of expectation for the big hit of the pending variation. be.

In addition, as described above, the pseudo-continuous effect is that the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the variation of the decorative pattern is performed multiple times during one time fluctuation of the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device. It is a performance to be executed. The ready-to-win performance is a performance in which the middle decorative pattern is changed while the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped at the same pattern, and the variation during execution is expected to be a big win variation.

The forewarning effect of the change is, for example, in the variation being executed, foreshadowing that the ready-to-win effect will be executed, foreseeing a specific ready-to-win effect that may be executed, or It is a production that foretells the production state. The zone change effect is, for example, an effect that shifts the effect state to a zone in which a specific effect is executed to raise expectations for a big hit. The zone change performance may be executed as a look-ahead performance to increase the expectation for the pending variation big win, or it may be executed for increasing the expectation for the variation big win being executed.

569, 570, 571, 572, and 573 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the cut selection effect. FIG. 569(A) shows the state at the end of the variation immediately before the cut selection effect is executed. In (A), the decorative symbols are stopped at the combination of misalignment, and the normal background (a road and two trees on the side of the road) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

The background is an image that has a lower priority than the decorative pattern in the effect display device 1600 (that is, it is arranged in a layer on the back side as seen from the player), and is generally displayed in the effect display device 1600. This is the image with the lowest priority among the images in the The normal background is the background with the lowest expectation of a big hit among the backgrounds displayed during variation in each game state except for the big win game and the small win game. In addition, the normal background is also displayed when the design is determined in the loss variation.

(B) is the state at the start of variation in which the cut selection effect is executed. The normal background is displayed continuously from the previous variation, and the variation of the decorative pattern is started. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that the normal background is displayed in the variation in which the cut selection effect is performed. (C) is a state in which the left decorative pattern is stopped in the variation. (D) is a state in which the right decorative symbol is stopped in a non-reach state in the variation.

(E) is a state in which the middle decorative symbol called "run" (hereinafter also referred to as pseudo-run symbol) is about to stop. When the pseudo-run symbol stops (including a temporary stop in a slightly swaying manner), it is determined that the pseudo-run starts or progresses. In (F), an indication ("x2") indicating that the pseudo-run symbol stops and the second pseudo-run starts is displayed in the variation. In addition, in order to make the player more likely to recognize the start of the pseudo-run and improve the player's sense of anticipation, the normal background is not displayed (that is, invisible) at (F).

It should be noted that the fact that an image is “not displayed” on the effect display device 1600 means that the image itself is not displayed, and that the image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 but has a higher priority than the image. This is a concept that includes both being covered by an image and being invisible.

(G) is a state in which the pseudo-run of the second run has started and all the decorative symbols have started to change again, the pending display indicating the change changes to blue, and the expectation of a big hit is improved. there is (H) is a state in which the left decorative symbol is stopped in the second pseudo-run. Although not shown, "x2" may be displayed in (G) and (H) so that the second pseudo-run is being executed.

(I) is a state in which the cut selection effect has started. In (I), a message explaining an effect scheduled in the future for the change is displayed. In FIG. 570 (J), the effect that will continue in the future (the effect that expects a big hit, such as the advance notice effect and the pending change effect that are determined at the start of the fluctuation) will continue to be displayed, or the effect that will continue from now on (the effect that will be A message is displayed that suggests that two options are available: cut (not display) the special lottery result by cutting (not displaying) the performance that expects a big hit, such as the advance notice performance and the pending change performance.

It should be noted that during execution of the cut selection effect (Fig. 569 (I), Fig. 570 (J), and Fig. 570 (K)), the normal background and suspension (the suspension (suspension corresponding to the variation during execution), and all holds 1 to 4), and the decorative pattern is not displayed (ie, is not visible). Although not shown, the fourth symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600 even during execution of the cut selection effect. The fourth pattern is, for example, a pattern indicating a special lottery result displayed on the effect display device 1600 (for example, a corner area on the effect display device 1600), and is a pattern displayed in a smaller size than the decorative pattern. is.

This makes it easier for the player to recognize these two options. In the illustrated example, the cut selection effect is executed after the second pseudo-run. desirable.

It should be noted that the cut selection effect is executed after the effect of confirming the second pseudo-run in which the normal background is invisible. By executing the production that enhances the expectation of a big hit by making the normal background invisible, before the cut selection production, I feel that the expectation of a big hit will also improve for the cut selection production. Some players improve.

At (K), a screen is displayed in which it is possible to select whether to continue the scheduled performance as it is or cut the scheduled performance and show the result of the special lottery. It should be noted that the game machine 1 is provided with a cross key that can be operated by the player, and selection is made using the cross key. By providing the cut selection performance, it is possible to meet the wishes of both players who want to thoroughly enjoy the expected performance and players who want to know the result immediately.

(L) is the state immediately after "Continue as is" is selected in (K) of the cut selection effect. A display (“x3”) indicating that the pseudo-run symbol is stopped and the third pseudo-run is started is displayed. Also, at (L), the background is normally not displayed (that is, it is invisible). In other words, when "Continue as is" is selected, an effect for increasing the degree of expectation for a big hit is executed even after the cut selection effect.

(M) is a state in which the third pseudo-run has started and all decorative symbols have started to change again. (N) is a state in which the left decorative symbol is stopped in the third pseudo-run, and the pending display indicating the change changes to green, and the degree of expectation is improved. (O) is a state in which the right decorative symbol is stopped in the ready-to-reach state in the third pseudo-run. (P) is a reach state in which a display of "CHANCE!" is displayed to indicate that the degree of expectation is improved.

(Q) is a state in which the ready-to-win decorative pattern moves to the upper left and upper right parts of the effect display device 1600, and the normal background fades out in order to shift to the SP ready-to-win effect. (R) is a state in which the faded-out normal background is completely invisible. In (Q) and (R), the hold display is displayed as it is without fading out, but it may be faded out in the same manner as the background.

FIG. 571(S) shows the state at the start of the first half of the SP reach, in which the title image of the first half of the SP reach is displayed. During the SP reach, basically the reach state decoration pattern and the pending display are displayed. (T) is a state in which titles in the first half of the SP reach are deleted. (U) is a state in which a specific effect in the first half of the SP reach has started. The first half of the SP reach in FIG. 571 is an effect in which the main character catches the flying rock, throws the rock away, and progresses to the second half of the SP reach.

In (V), an image of the main character catching a rock is displayed. In (W), an image of the main character throwing rocks is displayed. In (X), an image is displayed indicating that the main character has succeeded in the first half of the SP reach mission. (Y) is a state in which the movable body has moved to a position covering the effect display device 1600 . By covering the effect display device 1600 with the movable body, a part of the decorative pattern and the reserved display are not visible. Note that part or all of the pending display indicating the change may be rendered invisible by the movable body. Further, the movable body may make all of the decorative symbols invisible, or may make all of the reserved display invisible.

(Z) shows a state in which the latter half of the SP reach has started, and the title image of the latter half of the SP reach is displayed. In the latter half of the SP reach, a battle between the main character and the enemy character occurs, and if the main character wins, a big win is announced, and if the enemy character wins, a loss is announced. In addition, in (Z), the movable body that appeared in (X) returns to the reference position, and the effect display device 1600 as a whole is in a visible state. In addition, at (Z), the pending display indicating the variation changes to red, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is improved.

In (A2), an image is displayed in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other. In FIG. 571 (B2), an image is displayed in which the main character and the enemy character are attacking each other. In addition, in (B2), the pending display indicating the variation changes to gold, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is improved.

In (C2), an image is displayed in which the main character is defeated by the enemy character. In (D2), the middle decorative symbols are stopped, and the decorative symbols are stopped in a misaligned combination. After that, for example, the display other than the pending display on the effect display device 1600 is faded out and erased. At this time, the pending display may be faded out together. After that, for example, on the normal background, in addition to the reserved display, the combination decorative pattern that is lost is displayed, the decorative patterns are completely stopped, and the pattern is determined.

In the case of a big win variation, instead of (C2), an image of a state in which the main character wins over the enemy character is displayed, and instead of (D2), the decorative patterns are stopped with a combination of big wins. After that, for example, the display other than the pending display on the effect display device 1600 is faded out and erased. At this time, the pending display may be faded out together. After that, for example, on the normal background, in addition to the reserved display, the combination decorative pattern of the jackpot is displayed, the decorative patterns are completely stopped, and the pattern is fixed.

In (D2), after the decorative patterns are stopped due to the combination of misalignment, the display other than the reserved display is faded out and erased, and then the normal background is made recognizable or the normal background is made recognizable. It is desirable to output the normal BGM or the normal lamp after a predetermined time has passed since. This is because the player can prepare for the next change with normal BGM and normal ramps. Also, even if there is no suspension of the next change and the display screen shifts to the demo screen after a predetermined time has passed, it is desirable to continue outputting the normal BGM and the normal lamp. The normal BGM is the BGM with the lowest expectation of a big hit among the BGM output during variation in each game state excluding the big win game and the small win game, and the normal lamp is each game except the big win game and the small win game. In the state, it is the lamp pattern with the lowest expectation of a big hit among the lamp patterns output during variation.

Note that the cut selection effect may appear again after "Continue as is" in FIG. 570(K) is selected. This is because there is a possibility that although the player has selected to continue the scheduled production, the player may feel that the production is redundant if he/she actually continues. If the timing of the cut selection effect is the same as the scheduled appearance timing of the effect, it is desirable that the cut selection effect is preferentially displayed. The timing for reappearing the cut selection effect is, for example, after the timing at which it is confirmed that the third pseudo-run will be entered and until the reach is established (after (M) or (N) in FIG. 570), the first half of the SP reach. immediately before the start (after FIG. 570(R)), and so on. That is, in one variation, the number of times the normal background becomes invisible due to effects other than the cut selection effect is equal to or greater than the number of times the cut selection effect is executed.

Fig. 573(K') shows the same state as Fig. 570(K), but cuts the effect and shows a state in which the cursor is selected to "quickly want to know" for indicating the special lottery result. (L') is a state in which "quickly want to know" is selected in (K'). Since it is selected to cut the effect, the effect in the middle is largely (all) cut, and at (L′), an image ( That is, an image indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed. In other words, when "quickly want to know" is selected, no advance notice effect for increasing the degree of expectation for a big hit is performed after the cut selection effect.

In (M'), similarly to FIG. 572 (D2), the middle decorative design is stopped, and the decorative design is stopped by a combination of disengagement. Even if the effect is drastically cut, the variable time selected at the time of winning does not change, so a message is displayed at (N') indicating that time is left. The message (N') may be displayed, for example, until the variable time ends, or may be displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) before the variable time ends.

If the message is erased a predetermined time before the end of the variable time period, then, for example, in the effect display device 1600, on the normal background, in addition to the suspended display, the missing combination decorative pattern is displayed, and the decorative pattern is completely displayed. , and the pattern is determined. In addition, a predetermined movable body may operate after the normal background is displayed and before the decorative pattern is completely stopped. However, the predetermined movable body does not operate with the maximum movable width as shown in FIG. It is desirable to

In this case, it is desirable not to output normal BGM or normal lamps after the normal background becomes recognizable. This is to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the next variation will start soon even though there is enough time before the next variation starts. In addition, it is desirable that the normal BGM and the normal lamp are not output even if the demo screen is displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed without waiting for the next change.

As indicated by the message (M'), there is a considerable amount of time between the display of the special lottery result and the end of the variable time, so the player can complete other errands during that time. In addition, as in the illustrated example, in the case where many productions with a high degree of expectation for a big hit are scheduled to be executed in spite of the loss fluctuation, by cutting these productions with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, It reduces the disappointment that the player would have felt had he not cut.

It should be noted that, for example, in the event that the variation being executed or the variation that is on hold for the next time onwards is a winning, if the winning game starts while the player is doing other errands, the player will be inconvenienced. Along with the message may be an indication of the remaining variation time of the running variation, as this may provide a benefit.

It should be noted that, for example, when displaying a screen where the start or continuation of the pseudo-continuity is confirmed (when the pseudo-continuation pattern is stopped), or just before the start of the SP reach, the expectation of a big hit is expected after the background is usually made invisible. From the first time, which is the time until the effect that improves the degree of improvement is executed, the time from when the normal background becomes invisible in the cut selection effect until “I want to know quickly” is selected and the change ends The second time, which is time, is longer. As a result, when the effect is cut, the player can secure sufficient time to complete other errands. However, it is desirable that the total of the first time in one fluctuation is longer than the second time.

On the other hand, the second time may be shorter than each of the first times. For players who do not have any particular business, and want to suppress disappointment when they do not win despite the appearance of a performance with high expectations for a big hit, the special lottery results are available for players who select ``I want to know quickly''. This is because if the time from the presentation to the end of the change is long, the time to feel bored will be long.

Similarly, in order to allow the player to secure sufficient time to complete other errands when the effect is cut, the second time is set, for example, from the start of the effect that increases the expectation of a big win. It is longer than the third time which is the time until the end and the fourth time which is the time from the start of the performance for improving the degree of expectation for big win to the execution of the performance for actually improving the degree of expectation for big win. On the other hand, the second time may be shorter than the third time and the fourth time so that the player who selects "I want to know quickly" in the cut selection presentation does not feel bored for a long time.

From the fifth hour, which is included in the fourth hour, from the start of the performance for improving the degree of expectation for the big win to the execution of the performance for actually improving the degree of expectation for the big win, the performance for actually improving the degree of expectation for the big win is executed. It is desirable that the 6th time from when the game is played to the end of the performance that improves the degree of expectation for a big win is longer. This is because, if the performance for actually improving the degree of expectation for a big win is executed at an early timing, the player will become bored during the longer sixth hour. On the other hand, the sixth time may be shorter than the fifth time. This is because there are also players who want to enjoy the performance of the sixth hour, which is a long period of time, by recognizing an improvement in the degree of expectation for a big win at an early timing.

In addition, it is desirable that the cut selection effect appears only in a specific variation pattern (for example, less than half of all variation patterns). This is because if the cut selection effect appears in many variation patterns, the player who does not particularly want to cut the effect will find it troublesome to select "continue as is" each time, and the interest will decrease. In particular, in a variation pattern of shortened variation (a variation pattern with a short variation time that is selected only when there are a predetermined number of holds or more), there is no need to cut the effect, so the cut selection effect does not appear.

The specific pattern includes, for example, a variation pattern in which the first half of the SP reach is performed, and a variation pattern in which the first half and the second half of the SP reach are performed. Since the cut selection performance appears in such a variation pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, even a player who does not want to cut the performance can have expectations for the appearance of the cut selection performance itself.

It should be noted that the cut selection effect may always occur when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is designed so that the player can always select the performance mode at the start of the variation and switches to the selected performance mode from the next variation, the switching of the performance mode is It is an example under a specific condition, and the cut selection effect may be generated without fail with a change that selects switching the effect mode.

In addition, in the cut selection effect, if "I want to know quickly" (i.e. cut the effect) is selected, the announcement effect in the middle (the special lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation during execution will be a big hit or not However, the announcement effect such as the revival effect (that is, the special lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation during execution directly indicates whether it is a big hit or a loss). The effect to notify) may be executed without being cut. The notification effect such as the resurrection effect is a effect that maximizes the player's exhilaration and has an extremely low appearance frequency (premium) effect, so it is also suitable for players who cut the effect in the cut selection effect. , is an extremely important performance.

When the notification effect is performed when the effect is cut in the cut selection effect, for example, the notification effect may be performed between (M') and (N'), and the message of (N') is It may be displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) before the end of the variable time, and the notification effect may be performed after the predetermined time has passed.

[21-2. Reach change effect]
Hereinafter, the ready-to-win change effect, which is an effect in which the player himself/herself can select and change the content of the ready-to-win effect being executed during the variation, will be described. 574, 575, and 576 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the reach change effect.

FIG. 574(A) shows a state in which decorative symbols are in a ready-to-win state and a display of "CHANCE!" indicating that the degree of expectation is further improved is displayed, as in FIG. 570(P). In (A), the normal background is displayed. Further, in (A), the pending display indicating the variation is displayed in green, which indicates a higher expectation for a big hit than in the normal display mode.

(B) is a state in which the decorative symbols in the ready-to-win state move to the upper left and upper right portions of the effect display device 1600, and the decorative symbols fade out and disappear in order to shift to the SP ready-to-win effect. (C) is a state in which the faded-out decorative pattern is completely invisible. In (C), the pending display indicating the change has changed to red, which indicates a higher probability of a big hit. In addition, in (B) to (C), not only the decorative pattern but also the normal background may be faded out and erased in the same way as in FIGS. 572(Q) to (R).

(D) is an SP ready-to-win effect with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit among the ready-to-win effects that can be executed by the pachinko machine 1 (excluding a ready-to-win effect such as full spin reach). title is displayed. A special background image (a flame-like background in the figure) is displayed during the execution of "Shura no End Reach". Since ``Shura no end reach'' is an SP reach performance with high expectation for big win, when the background image for exclusive use is displayed, the expectation for big win is higher than when the normal background is displayed. Hereinafter, the dedicated background image will also be referred to as a high-expectation background.

(E) is a state in which the reach change effect has started. In (E), a message is displayed indicating that the player will be embarrassed if the change is a loss change, although the "end of the shura" reach with a high expectation of a big hit is executed. It is In (F), a message is displayed indicating that it is possible to change the ready-to-win effect to the effect of "small fry's marching reach", which is the least expected of the SP ready-to-win games.

In (G), a screen is displayed in which it is possible to select whether to continue the presently-executed ``Reach for the End of Shura'' production or to change to the ``Reach for small fish's advance'' production. The ready-to-win effect can be selected using the cross key in the same manner as the cut selection effect described above. By providing the reach change effect, it is possible to attract attention from players who want to enjoy the highly anticipated ``reach to the end of the shura'' and other players by executing the ``reach to the end of the shura''. It is possible to meet the needs of both the player who wants to avoid (especially the player who does not want to attract attention especially when it is a losing variation).

As shown in the figure, during the reach change effect, it is desirable that the high-expectation background is displayed continuously from the display of the title of "Reach at the end of the asura". This is because, if the high-expectation-level background is once erased regardless of the player's will, the player's sense of expectation may be lost.

(H) is the state immediately after ``strongest reach 'End of Asura'' is selected in reach change production (G), and is the continuation state of 'end of Asura reach' (D). . In (H), an image is displayed in which the hero character goes to the enemy character to help the heroine character. In (I), an image is displayed in which the main character confronts the enemy character and is accumulating power. In FIG. 575(J), an image is displayed in which the main character and the enemy character are hitting each other.

In (K), an image of the main character falling down is displayed, that is, an image indicating that the special lottery result is a loser (if the special lottery result is a big hit, in (K), the main character is not the main character but the enemy is displayed). An image of the character falling down is displayed). At (L), the middle decorative patterns are stopped, and the decorative patterns are stopped with a winning combination (if the result of the special lottery is a big win, the decorative patterns are stopped with a big winning combination at (L)). After that, for example, when the special lottery result is a loss, the display other than the pending display on the effect display device 1600 is faded out and erased, and for example, the combined decorative pattern of the lost in addition to the pending display is displayed on the normal background. is displayed, the decorative pattern is completely stopped and the pattern is determined, and when the special lottery result is a loss, the display on the effect display device 1600 is not faded out, and a dedicated background of "Shura no end reach" is displayed. The pattern is determined by completely stopping the decorative pattern of the combination of the big win on the image.

Fig. 576(G') shows a state similar to Fig. 574(G), but in a state where the cursor is selected on ".Weakest reach 'advance of small fish'". (H') is a state in which ". weakest reach 'advance of small fish'" is selected in (G') and "advance reach of small fish" is started. In addition, when the player does not operate the cross key, for example, the "minor marching reach" may be forcibly selected. In particular, if the player does not operate the cross key in the losing variation, it is preferable to force the player to select the ``advance reach of small fish''.

In addition, for example, a fake reach change effect may occur, and in the fake reach change effect, a predetermined "small fish march" or "small fish march reach" is set without requiring an operation by the player. is automatically executed.

It should be noted that, since "small fish marching reach" is an SP reach with a low expectation for a big hit, the normal background is displayed even during the reach performance in order to prevent the player from having excessive expectations. In addition, as shown in the figure, even if the reach production is changed to the low-expectation "small fish marching reach", the pending display is the same as when the reach change production enters (including before entering) (red in the figure) ). As a result, it is difficult to attract the attention of other players because the ``advance reach of small fish'' with a low degree of expectation for a big hit is being executed, and furthermore the pending display in a mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed. can secretly maintain a sense of anticipation.

In (I'), an image is displayed that foretells that rocks will fall from above the main character. At (J'), rocks are falling from above the main character, and an image is displayed indicating that if the main character can avoid the rocks, the game will be a big hit. At (K'), an image is displayed in which the main character cannot avoid the rock and is crushed by the rock, that is, an image indicating that the special lottery result is a loser. At (L'), the middle decorative design is stopped, and the decorative design is stopped in a misaligned combination. Thereafter, for example, each decorative pattern moves to its normal position and the pattern is determined.

In addition, since "Small Fish's Marching Reach" is a reach performance with low expectations for big hits, in order not to give players excessive expectations, it is not a dedicated sound effect, BGM or lamp, but it is usually is not executed).

It should be noted that the execution time of "small fry's marching reach" is the time when "small fish's marching reach" is selected in FIG. is preferably shorter than the time until the This is because the "small fish marching reach" is a simple ready-to-win performance with a low expectation of a big hit, and the player may get bored if it takes a long time. Even if "small fry's marching reach" is selected, the variable time is unchanged, so during the execution of "small fish's marching reach", the pattern is hidden to match the time, and the "wait a while" is displayed. Please" message may be displayed.

In addition, it is desirable to make the decorative pattern once unrecognizable when the screen is switched to "small fish's marching reach" is selected in the reach change effect. As a result, the player can expect that the tenpai pattern during reach will be promoted (for example, a reach with a decorative pattern "7" has a higher expectation for a big hit than a reach with other decorative patterns).

In addition, when "small fish's marching reach" is selected in the reach change effect and the screen is switched to "small fish's marching reach", the image of the effect display device 1600 may be blacked out, or "the end of the shura" may be displayed. An effect that does not appear in either of "Reach" and "Reach of Small Fries" may be displayed. By displaying such a special switching screen, the player can have a sense of anticipation even when the player selects the "minor marching reach".

In addition, when ``Small fish's marching reach'' is selected in the reach change effect and the screen switches to ``Small fish's marching reach'', the start screen of ``Small fish's marching reach'' will be displayed so that it can be gradually recognized. You may Specifically, for example, the start screen is gradually faded in from a translucent state, or the movable body is moved onto the effect display device 1600 when the screen is switched, and then gradually returned to the reference position. or Note that when the start screen is gradually made recognizable, the decorative pattern may be displayed so as to be gradually recognizable.

On the other hand, in the reach change effect, if "small fish's marching reach" is selected and the screen switches to "small fish's marching reach", a special switching screen will be displayed. In spite of this, since some players do not want to see unnecessary effects, the start screen of "small fish marching reach" may be displayed so as to be immediately recognizable. In addition, when making the start screen instantly recognizable, the decorative design may be displayed so as to be immediately recognizable.

Further, the start screen may be made recognizable gradually, but the decorative pattern may be displayed so as to be immediately recognizable, or the start screen may be made recognizable immediately, but the decorative pattern may be gradually recognized. You may display it so that it becomes possible.

In the above-mentioned example, when switching to the start screen of "Small fish's marching reach", the same hold display as when entering the reach change effect was displayed, but the hold display was the default with the lowest jackpot expectation. You may return to a display mode, and you may make a reservation display non-display. As a result, even the hold display will be the default display or non-display with the lowest expectation when the ``advance reach of small fish'' with low expectations for big hits is being performed, so it is possible to attract attention from other players. sex is extremely low.

It should be noted that even when displaying the same hold display as when entering the reach change effect in the "small fish's marching reach", in order to suppress unnecessary attention from other players, the "small fish's marching reach" After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of "Advance Reach", the pending display may be returned to the default display or may be hidden.

In addition, the predetermined time is, for example, longer than the time (that is, the display time of the high-expectation background) from the title display of "Shura's end reach" to the end of the reach change effect after selecting "Minor fish's march reach". can be longer or shorter. If the predetermined time is longer than the display time of the high-expectation background, and the high-expectation background has a higher expectation for a big hit than the reserved display,

In addition, the predetermined time is, for example, the time it takes for the screen to switch to "small fish's marching reach" when "small fish's marching reach" is selected in the reach change effect (that is, the high-expectation background becomes unrecognizable. It may be longer or shorter than the time from the time until the normal background becomes recognizable).

In addition, for the predetermined time, for example, when "small fish's marching reach" is selected in the reach change effect and the screen is switched to "small fish's marching reach", the start screen of "small fish's marching reach" is gradually changed. It may be longer or shorter than the time from the start of display of the start screen until the start screen can be completely recognized when the start screen is recognized.

In addition, it is good to have a dedicated BGM for "Shura's End Reach" because it is a reach performance with extremely high expectations for a big hit, but for "Small Fish's March Reach" it is a reach performance with low expectations for a big hit. It is desirable that the BGM during normal fluctuations, rather than the BGM of the original, plays or is silent.

Also, for example, during the period from the start of the reach change effect to the end of the explanation of the reach change effect (Fig. 564 (E) and (F)), the dedicated BGM of "Shura no end reach" is played as it is, and the reach can be selected (FIG. 564(G)), the dedicated BGM is turned off and switched to silence. Since the reach selection screen is silent, the player can calmly consider which reach to select.

In addition, it is desirable that the silent state time in the reach change effect is longer than the non-silent state time in the reach change effect. This is because if the silent state continues for a long time during the game, the other players may notice the anomaly and eventually attract the attention of the other players. On the other hand, the silent state time in the ready-to-win change effect may be shorter than the non-silent state time in the ready-to-win change effect so as to make the player think slowly about which ready-to-win effect to select.

In addition, it is good to perform a lamp output of a dedicated pattern, which is a reach production with extremely high expectations for a big hit, for “Shura no end reach”, but for “small fish march reach”, because it is a reach production with low expectations for a big hit, It is desirable to output the same lamp as during normal variation or when the symbol is stopped, not in the reach state.

In addition, during the reach change effect, the lamp output of the dedicated pattern that was output in "Shura no end reach" may be continued, but on the reach selection screen, the player can calmly select which reach. It is desirable to stop the lamp output of the dedicated pattern in order to make the user think about whether to continue.

In addition, it is good to operate the movable body because it is a reach production with an extremely high expectation of a big hit for "Shura's End Reach", but because it is a reach production with a low expectation for a big hit, it is movable. It is desirable that the body does not move, or if it moves, it moves only within a predetermined width (for example, 1/2 or less of the movable width). However, in the case where the "small fish marching reach" is selected in the big hit variation, in order to give the player a sense of exhilaration, for example, when the shaking variation that looks like all the decorative symbols are stopped is being performed. , the movable body may be moved wider than the predetermined width.

Also, for example, if the movable body moves from the reference position and is fixed to the position after the movement between the start of "Shura no end reach" and the start of the reach change effect, the reach change effect is in progress. Alternatively, the movable body may remain fixed at the position after the operation. This is to allow the player to recognize that the "End of Shura reach" has started even during the reach change effect. After that, in the reach change effect, when "small fish's marching reach" is selected, a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the screen switches to "small fish's marching reach", the timing of winning or losing notification, or the timing of pattern confirmation etc.) to return the movable body to the reference position.

In the above example, in the reach change effect, it is possible to select "Shura's Marching Reach", which has the highest jackpot expectation among SP reach, and "Small fish marching reach", which has the lowest jackpot expectation among SP reach. However, in addition to or instead of the "small fish's marching reach", it may be possible to select a reach with the lowest degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, a normal reach).

[21-3. Sound presence/absence hold change effect]
The sound presence/absence hold change effect will be described below. Normally, when the state of the hold display changes, it changes with a sound effect. A performance with sound in which is promoted to a mode with high expectation of big hit, and a performance without sound in which the mode of suspension display is not promoted to a mode with high expectation of big hit by making the pending display invisible without accompanied by sound effect. It is viable.

In the presence or absence of sound hold change effect, if the effect with sound is performed, the hold may further change to the degree of expectation of the big hit in the variation (that is, the game after the effect with sound is performed) In the process of progressing, the sound presence/absence change effect that makes it possible to execute the sound presence/absence change change effect again continues), and if the soundless effect is performed, the hold is more likely to hit the jackpot in the variation It means that it is determined that there is no change in the mode (that is, the sound presence/absence suspension change effect in which the sound presence/absence suspension change effect is not executed again in the process of progressing the game after the soundless effect is performed ends). do. Therefore, the player wishes that in the sound presence/absence suspension change effect, the effect with sound does not appear and the effect with sound continues.

FIG. 577 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sound presence/absence hold change effect. (A) is the state at the end of the variation immediately before the sound presence/absence hold change effect is executed. (B) is a state in which a change is started in which a sound presence/absence hold change effect is executed, and all decorative symbols are changed.

(C) is a state in which the left decorative pattern is stopped. In (C), an effect with sound is performed, a sound effect "Pilone!" (D) is a state in which it is possible to recognize that the smoke that has appeared due to the presentation with sound is hidden, and the hold indicating the change has been promoted to blue. Since the presentation with sound has been performed, there is a possibility that the presentation with or without sound pending change will continue, and that the presentation will change to a mode of pending display with a high degree of expectation for a big hit.

It should be noted that the timing of outputting the sound effect in the effect with sound may be before, at the same time as, or after the appearance timing of the display that hides the hold display indicating the change. By outputting the sound effect prior to the appearance timing of the display, the player can quickly understand that the hold status will be promoted, and thus the player's sense of expectation will be improved at once. By outputting the sound effect at the same time as the appearance timing of the display, the synergistic effect of hearing and vision can improve the player's sense of anticipation. By outputting the sound effect after the appearance timing of the display, when the display appears, the player watches with a sense of tension whether the performance to be performed from now on is the performance with sound or the performance without sound. can be done.

(E) is a state in which the right decorative pattern is stopped in a non-reach state. In (E), the effect with sound is performed, the sound effect "Pilone!" (F) is a state in which it is possible to recognize that the sword that has appeared due to the effect with sound has broken and the hold indicating the change has been promoted to green. Since the presentation with sound has been performed, there is a possibility that the presentation with or without sound pending change will continue, and that the presentation will change to a mode of pending display with a high degree of expectation for a big hit.

(G) is a state in which a pseudo-run symbol indicating that a pseudo-run is started is stopped in the middle decorative symbol. In (G), no sound effect is performed, and the suspension display indicating the change is rendered unrecognizable by a display in which a pink heart pierces the suspension display without sound effects. (H) is a state in which the heart that has appeared due to the silent effect expands, and the suspension of the change continues to be unrecognizable. By making the hold display unrecognizable even in the soundless production, the player can have a slight sense of expectation that the hold may be promoted even in the soundless production (the effect described above). If the timing of outputting the sound is later than the timing of the appearance of the display that hides the hold display, it is possible to create the expectation.

In (I), it is possible to recognize that the heart expands, fades out and is not displayed, and the suspension indicating the change remains green. Since the no-sound effect is performed, the sound presence/absence pending change effect is terminated, and in the change, the change to a mode with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than green is not performed. It should be noted that even in the soundless production, it may be a specification that outputs sound effects, and even in this case, after the execution of the soundless production (that is, even if the pending display becomes recognizable, the production that has not been promoted (after being executed), it is better to prevent the pending display from being promoted in the change, but it is not limited to preventing the pending display from being promoted.

In the production with sound and the production without sound, a common production image is used for the display that makes the pending display unrecognizable (the image of smoke, the image of the sword, and the image of the heart in the illustrated example), but the production without sound is If performed, a dedicated effect image may be used. For example, the pink heart effect images in (G) and (H) are used only for the effect without sound, and when the heart effect image is used in the effect with sound, the red heart effect image is used. It is better to be able to By preparing a special effect image in the soundless effect (an image that is not in the effect that makes the hold display that is displayed when the hold change in the sound effect is unrecognizable) is prepared, for example, a pachinko machine with earphones attached Even a player who does not listen to the sound output from 1 can easily recognize that the pending display color will not be promoted any more.

In addition, after the no-sound effect is executed, it is desirable not to execute the effect of making the pending display unrecognizable until the change ends. This is because, if an effect that makes the suspension display unrecognizable is executed after the soundless effect is executed, the player may misunderstand that the sound presence/absence change effect is not finished yet.

In addition, after the effect without sound is executed (especially when the change effect with or without sound is ended with a hold display (for example, blue color) with a low expectation of a big hit), it becomes difficult to maintain the player's interest in the change. Therefore, during the period from the execution of the soundless production until the pattern is fixed and stopped, even if the announcement production that makes the player expect a big win (excluding the big win confirmation production that announces the big win) is not executed. good. Also, as for the decorative design, as shown in FIG. 577(A), only the swing fluctuation is performed around or near the position displayed when the decorative design is fixed and stopped. Although it is desirable to continue to execute the swing fluctuation until the time of , the decorative pattern may be changed to a fluctuation different from the swing fluctuation when the big win fixing performance appears during the swing fluctuation.

Although the pending display indicating the variation is unrecognizable in the effect with sound, the player may forget the pending display color before the start of the effect with sound. For example, if the original pending display color is blue, even if it is promoted to green, the expectation of a big hit is not so high. is high. That is, depending on the pending display color before the start of the effect with sound, there is a difference in the sense of expectation that the player feels during the effect with sound. Therefore, when the hold display indicating the change in the effect with sound is unrecognizable, a second liquid crystal or a predetermined light emitting device that is a display device different from the effect display device 1600 (hereinafter these devices will be referred to as a second hold display) (referred to as a display device) may indicate a pending display color before the start of the effect with sound. Similarly, in the silent effect, the second pending display device may indicate the pending display color before the start of the silent effect.

In addition, in the production with sound, when the second holding display device shows the holding display color before the start of the production with sound, a predetermined production is performed so that the holding display shown by the second holding display device is also unrecognizable. A pending display may be promoted.

In addition, when the second holding display device shows the pending display color before the start of the silent production in the silent production, a predetermined time after the end of the silent production (for example, the holding display on the production display device 1600 in the silent production Although the pending display on these devices immediately becomes unrecognizable after a period of time shorter than the time for making the display invisible, it is desirable not to immediately make the pending display on the effect display device 1600 unrecognizable. The hold display on the second hold display device is only an auxiliary display for confirming the hold display color when the hold display on the effect display device 1600 becomes unrecognizable, so the soundless effect ends. This is to return the player's attention to the effect display device 1600 where the main effect is performed after it is indicated that the reserved color is not promoted.

Data used for executing the sound presence/absence hold change effect and processing for executing the sound presence/absence hold change effect will be described below. FIG. 578 is an example of a final pending color sorting table showing final color sorting of pending display when sound presence/absence pending change effect is performed in loss variation. FIG. 579 is an example of a final pending color sorting table showing the final color sorting of the pending display when the sound presence/absence pending change effect is performed in the big hit variation. These final reserved color distribution tables are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example.

The final reserved color distribution table defines the final reserved color for each variation pattern. The distribution of the final reserved colors is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of white<blue<green<red<gold. The rainbow colors are selected only in jackpot variations, ie the reserved colors for jackpot determination.

FIG. 580 is an example of a pending color sorting table at the start of variation, which shows the sorting of pending colors at the start of the variation in which the sound presence/absence pending change effect is performed. The reserve color distribution table at the start of fluctuation is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example. The suspension color distribution table at the start of fluctuation defines the suspension color at the start of variation of the suspension color at the start of variation in which the sound presence/absence suspension change effect is executed for each final suspension color.

In other words, when the peripheral control MPU decides to execute the sound presence/absence hold change effect, the final hold color is determined from the final hold color sorting table based on the variation pattern, and based on the determined final hold color, when the variation starts A reserved color at the start of fluctuation is determined from the reserved color sorting table.

FIG. 581 is an example of a hold change timing table that defines the timing at which the sound presence/absence hold change effect can be executed. The pending change timing table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example.

In the example of FIG. 581, the timings at which the sound presence/absence change effect can be executed are when the left decorative symbol is stopped, when the right decorative symbol is stopped, when the first pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped, and when the second pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped, the left decorative symbol is stopped. When the right decorative symbol stops in the second pseudo run, when the second pseudo run stops, when the left decorative symbol stops in the third pseudo run, when the right decorative symbol stops in the third pseudo run, When the reach telop occurs, when the title is displayed in the first half of the SP reach, when the production of the first half of the SP reach is started, in the middle of the first half of the production of the SP reach (predetermined timing), when the second half of the SP reach is developed, When the title is displayed in the second half of the SP reach, the second half of the SP reach production The time of start, the middle stage (predetermined timing) of the latter half of SP reach, and the last cut-in time of the latter half of SP reach are defined.

Note that the timing shown in FIG. 581 is merely an example, and the presence/absence of sound hold change effect, which is the effect of making the hold display unrecognizable, may be executed at other timings as well. For example, at the time of an advance notice effect indicating that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuation will be executed, at the time of a full-screen pre-reading notice effect (a notice effect in which one moving image is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600), the normal reach effect is changed to the SP. Timing to develop into a ready-to-win production, at the time of the production indicating whether or not to branch to the latter half of the SP reach in the first half of the SP reach, at the time of a specific notice production (for example, a notice showing that the SP reach will start from now), SP When the expectation level of the jackpot increases during the reach (for example, the red character "chance" is displayed), when the predetermined movable body moves, and when the state transitions or not (for example, when the 50th change ends) Assuming that there is a time saving state A that ends and a time saving state B that ends when 100 fluctuations are completed, it is determined whether the time saving state during the stay is the time saving state A or the time saving state B in the 50th change of the time saving state. There is a production to notify (that is, a production to notify whether it will fall to the normal state or the time saving state will continue).

At an early timing such as when the left decorative pattern is stopped or when the right decorative pattern is stopped, the player can perform the change with or without sound, which is a production that makes the holding display unrecognizable, so that the player can make the change from an early stage. can be expected to be a jackpot variation. In addition, at the time when the pseudo continuous pattern is stopped, when the reach telop occurs, and at the timing when the jackpot expectation rises, such as the jackpot expectation increase production during SP reach, by making it possible to execute the sound presence or absence hold change production, The player's expectation can be improved by a synergistic effect.

In addition, by making it possible to execute a sound presence/absence hold change effect, which is a production that makes the hold display unrecognizable after the ready-to-win state is formed, even if the ready-to-win effect develops in the form of the hold display with a low degree of expectation for a big hit. However, since there is still a possibility that the status of the pending display will be promoted, the player can maintain his sense of anticipation. Especially in the first half of the SP reach and the second half of the SP reach (particularly late timing such as the last cut-in in the second half of the SP reach), by making it possible to execute the sound presence/absence change performance, the SP is displayed in the form of a hold display with a low expectation of a big hit. A player does not lose hope for a big win until the end even in a state in which reach is being executed.

At the time of the notice effect that indicates that the pseudo-continuation may be executed, the full screen pre-reading notice effect, and the notice effect such as the specific notice effect that improves the expectation for the change, it is an effect that makes the pending display unrecognizable. By making it possible to execute a certain sound presence/absence hold change performance, the expectation of the big hit is improved by the hold change, so the player's expectation that the possibility of actually executing the performance of the announced content is high. can be improved.

In addition, by making it possible to execute the presence or absence of sound hold change effect, which is the effect that makes the hold display unrecognizable at the time of the branch effect of whether the state transitions, for example, when the time-saving state ends You can also expect that you might win the jackpot in the running variation. In particular, if the game machine of the type (so-called falling type) in which the opportunity to end the probability variation is performed by lottery, the effect is still exhibited.

In addition, since the final color in the sound presence/absence change effect includes low expectations for big hits such as white and blue, even if the sound presence/absence change effect is performed even when the decorative pattern does not form the ready-to-win state good. That is, for example, when the left decorative pattern is stopped, when the right decorative pattern is stopped, and when the full screen pre-reading notice is set as the timing at which the sound presence/absence change effect can be executed, the decorative pattern does not form a reach state. can also perform a sound presence/absence hold change effect.

Further, for example, when the left decorative pattern is stopped, when the right decorative pattern is stopped, and only when the full screen pre-reading notice is set as the timing at which the sound presence/absence suspension change effect can be executed, even in the fluctuation forming the ready-to-win state, the ready-to-win state It is possible to end the sound presence/absence holding change performance before forming the ready-to-win state, and the player's attention can be focused on the sound presence/absence holding change effect before forming the ready-to-win state and on the ready-to-win performance after forming the ready-to-win state. can. It should be noted that the corresponding effects performed at the timing shown in FIG. 581 (for example, if the left decorative pattern is stopped, the left decorative pattern stops) ) are displayed, the player can recognize both effects, although the pending display is unrecognizable.

FIG. 582 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed each time the timing shown in FIG. 581 comes, in the variation during execution of the sound presence/absence hold change effect. When the timing comes, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the effect non-execution flag is ON (S5821). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the effect non-execution flag is ON (S5821: YES), the process ends.

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the effect non-execution flag is off (S5821: NO), it determines whether the current pending display mode is the final pending color (S5822). If the peripheral control MPU determines that the current hold display mode is the final hold color (S5822: YES), it either executes neither the effect with sound nor the effect without sound, or executes the effect without sound. are divided according to a predetermined allocation (for example, 2/3 of the former and 1/3 of the latter) (S5823).

Subsequently, in step S5823, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute a no-sound effect (S5824). When the peripheral control MPU determines not to execute the silent effect (S5824: NO), it ends the process. When the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the soundless effect (S5824: YES), it sets the effect non-execution flag to ON (S5825) and ends the process. As a result, when the no sound effect is executed, the sound presence/absence change effect is terminated (the sound presence/absence change effect is not displayed in the subsequent progress of the game).

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the current pending display mode is not the final pending color (S5822: NO), the peripheral control MPU executes promotion lottery according to a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4) (S5826). The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the promotion lottery in step S5826 has been won (S5827). If the peripheral control MPU determines that the promotion lottery was not won (S5827: NO), the process ends.

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the promotion lottery has been won (S5827: YES), the performance with sound is performed to upgrade the pending display mode (S5828), and the process ends. However, even if it is determined that the promotion lottery was not won, the peripheral control MPU determines that the current timing is the last timing at which it is possible to execute the last change effect with or without sound in the variation pattern being executed. If it is determined, it is desirable to forcibly perform a sound effect to upgrade the state of the hold display to the final color.

In addition, the promotion probability of the promotion lottery in step S5826 may differ depending on the current timing and the current reserved display color. For example, the promotion probability may be higher or lower as the current timing is closer to the last timing at which the last sound presence/absence hold change effect can be executed. Also, for example, the closer the current reserved display color is to the final color, the higher or lower the promotion probability may be. Also, in one performance with sound, the reserved color may be promoted only by one stage, or the reserved color in multiple stages may be promoted.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 581 and other timings described in paragraph [5264], the promotion lottery in step S5826 is performed, and if the soundless change effect is selected, the presence or absence of sound in the progress of the subsequent game Although the pending change effect is not displayed, the change effect with sound may appear even after the change effect without sound appears. Even in such a case, the rate of occurrence of no sound is higher than that of sound. As a result, the player can have a slight expectation that the change effect with sound may be revived even if the change effect without sound is executed.

[21-4. Suspension & zone change effect]
The holding & zone change effect will be described below. The hold & zone change effect is that multiple chance times arrive in the hold & zone change effect, and at each chance time, either a specified sound effect is produced or a specified sound effect is not produced. . When a predetermined sound effect sounds in the chance time, a hold change is performed, and when a predetermined sound effect does not sound in the chance time, a zone change is performed. Therefore, in the hold & zone change effect, depending on the current situation in the chance time, the player thinks "I want an effect with a sound effect!" or "I want an effect without a sound effect!" The production that changes what you think is the hold & zone change production. A detailed description will be given below.

Figures 583 and 584 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the hold & zone change effect. FIG. 583(A) shows the state at the end of the variation immediately before the variation in which the hold & zone change effect is performed. (B) is the state at the start of variation in which suspension & zone change effect is performed. All decorative symbols start to change, and the pending display indicating the change changes to blue. (C) shows a state in which the suspension & zone change effect has started, and the title of the suspension & zone change effect is displayed. In addition, in (C), the display position has moved to the upper left part of the effect display device 1600 while all the decorative symbols are being changed.

In (D) to (G), the hold & zone change effect will be explained. At (D), it is shown that there are 10 chances to change the manner and zone of the pending display. (E) indicates that a hold change is performed when a predetermined sound effect is played, and that a zone change is performed when a predetermined sound effect is not played.

In (F), the performance display device 1600 displays a table showing the degree of expectation for a big hit corresponding to the pending display color and the zone. At the point of time (F), the reserve color is blue and the zone is the normal zone, so the corresponding big hit expectation "1%" is displayed with shading.

It should be noted that the mode displayed in the hold & zone change effect is assumed to be three of blue, green, and red. shall be higher. It should be noted that, when the pending display is red, if an effect of sound effect occurs in the chance time, the pending display mode will return from red to blue, that is, the change in the pending display mode will be looped. do.

In other words, there is a situation where the expectation of a big hit is lowered when a sound effect occurs (for example, the pending display mode is red and the pending display mode becomes blue when a sound effect occurs). , even if the state of the pending display is red, which is the highest expectation for a big hit, the performance can be performed with a sense of tension. In addition, by looping the state of the hold display in the hold change, the change to the hold display with a high degree of expectation for a big hit can be shown to the player a plurality of times, so that the player's expectation can be improved many times. can.

In addition, the zones to stay in the hold & zone change are usually five zones: Conqueror, Conqueror, Conqueror, and Conqueror. It should be higher in the order of extinction < overlord = hegemony. In other words, the zone change from overlord to overthrow is a zone change that lowers the expectation of a big hit. Also, when the zone is supremacy, if an effect in which the sound effect is not played occurs at chance time, the zone returns from supremacy to champion, that is, the change of the zone is looped.

In other words, there is a situation where the expectation of a big hit decreases when an effect without sound effects occurs (for example, if the zone is a quest for supremacy and an effect without sound effects occurs, the zone becomes normal). Even if you become the overlord or overlord with the highest expectation for a big hit, you can face the production with a sense of tension. In addition, since the zone loops in the zone change, the player can be shown the change to the zone with a high degree of expectation for a big hit a plurality of times, so that the player's sense of expectation can be improved many times.

Also, as described above, in the zone change, even if the zone changes from the normal zone to the champion zone, the level of expectation for big wins does not change, but when the zone changes from the champion zone to the champion zone, the level of expectation for big wins increases sharply. As a result, it is possible to realize a well-balanced presentation in which the change from the normal zone to the conqueror zone teases the player, while the change from the conqueror zone to the conqueror zone raises the player's expectations at once. .

For convenience of explanation, the hold change and zone change in the hold & zone change effect are assumed to change only one step at each chance time. Since the effect mode is changed, it is synonymous with changing the effect mode.

In (G), a message is displayed indicating that the shaded portion in the table in (F) is the current state. (H) is a state of preparation for suspension & zone change effect. The effect display device 1600 displays a gauge 5831 indicating the remaining time of the suspension & zone change effect and a zone display 5832 indicating the current zone state.

In (H), the arrow displayed at the bottom left of the gauge 5831 moves to the right with the lapse of time, and when it moves to the bottom right of the gauge 5832, the suspension & zone change effect ends. Also, each time the arrow moves to a blacked-out portion of gauge 5831, either a hold change or a zone change is performed. In other words, each blackened portion in the gauge 5831 means a chance time in the hold & zone change effect. In the illustrated example, 10 chance times are executed.

(I) is a state in which the arrow displayed under the gauge 5831 has begun to move to the right in the hold & zone change effect. FIG. 584(J) shows a state in which the first chance time has arrived in the hold & zone change effect. In (J), a predetermined sound effect "Pilone!!" Impossible.

Since the sound effect sounded during the first chance time, it is confirmed that the hold change will occur. It can be expected that Similarly, if no sound effect is played during chance time, it is desirable to make both the mode of the hold display and the current zone unrecognizable. In addition, by erasing the mode of the pending display indicating the change and the current zone indicated by the zone display 5832, covering it with another image, or hiding it with a movable body to make it invisible, even if it is unrecognizable good.

(K) is the state immediately before the end of the first chance time. Since the sound effect sounded during the first chance time, the pending display indicating the change changes from blue to green, and the zone remains the normal zone. It is preferable that the sound effect "Pillow!!" is still output when the pending display indicating the change from blue to green becomes recognizable. This is because a synergistic effect is produced between the sense of anticipation obtained visually by the suspended display after the change and the sense of anticipation obtained by hearing the sound effects, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

In addition, during execution of the hold & zone change effect, it is desirable that BGM dedicated to the hold & zone change effect is output in order to increase the player's sense of expectation. Even when the hold change is performed at the chance time, the dedicated BGM is output as it is.

In addition, for example, from the time from when the pending display becomes unrecognizable in the chance time until the changed pending display becomes recognizable, the zone display 5832 after the change after the zone display 5832 becomes unrecognizable in the chance time takes a long time to become recognizable. Since the appearance frequency of the zone change effect is lower than that of the hold change effect that is executed in various effects other than the hold & zone change effect, it takes a long time for the player to recognize the zone after the change. can provide tension to

Conversely, from the time from when the pending display becomes unrecognizable in the chance time until the changed pending display becomes recognizable, the zone display 5832 after the change becomes unrecognizable in the chance time. The time required to become recognizable may be short. This is because the zone change effect has a lower appearance frequency than the pending change effect, and some players want to know the zone after the change as soon as possible.

(L) is a state in which the second chance time has arrived in the hold & zone change effect. At (L), the effect sound "Pilone!!" output at the timing of (J) does not sound, and the state of the pending display indicating the change and the current zone indicated by the zone display 5832 are unrecognizable. . Note that a different sound effect from the sound effect "Pillow!!" output at the timing of (J) may be output as a false effect.

(M) is the state immediately before the end of the second chance time. Since the sound effect did not sound in the second chance time, the pending display indicating the change remains green, and the zone changes from the normal zone to the champion zone. In order to give the player a sense of anticipation at an early stage, a display showing the zone after change ("Hao?" in the figure) is produced before the content of the zone display 5832 after change becomes recognizable. It may be displayed on the display device 1600 . After that, at each chance time, an effect with or without a sound effect is produced.

When the zone change is performed at chance time, for example, at the timing when the zone indicated by the zone display 5832 becomes unrecognizable, the dedicated BGM for the hold & zone change effect is muted, and the zone after the change is recognized. BGM corresponding to the zone after a predetermined time change from the timing when it becomes possible is output. As a result, even a player who has not seen the zone change can recognize the zone after the change by the BGM. It should be noted that, after the predetermined time has passed, it is preferable to output the exclusive BGM of the hold & zone change effect again.

By performing the holding & zone change effect as shown in Figures 583 and 584 with one change, it is possible to execute the holding change of the change multiple times and the zone change multiple times in one change, and the game It is possible to realize a performance with a sense of tension that greatly raises and lowers the expectations of the audience.

FIG. 585 is an example of the chance time frequency table. The chance time number table is a table used for determining the number of chance times in the hold & zone change effect, and is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example.

When the peripheral control MPU decides to execute the suspension & zone change effect, it determines the combination of the suspension color and the zone (the final suspension color and the final zone) at the end of the suspension & zone change effect. It should be noted that the distribution for selecting the combination of the final reserved color and the final zone in the jackpot fluctuation and loss fluctuation is predetermined so that the jackpot expectation is the value of the table shown in FIG. 583 (F). .

The peripheral control MPU refers to the chance time number table, and selects one chance time number from the number of chance times corresponding to the combination of the determined final reserved color and final zone (number of times indicated by "○" in the figure). to decide. For example, if the final pending color is blue and the final zone is normal, the peripheral control MPU determines the number of chance times from either 5, 8, or 11 times. Note that for each combination of the final reserved color and the final zone, the distribution for selecting the corresponding number of chance times is, for example, even (that is, for example, if the final reserved color is blue and the final zone is normal, 5 times, 8 times, or 11 times are each selected with a probability of 1/3).

When the variation for which the hold & zone change effect is executed is a jackpot variation, the peripheral control MPU has a probability of 6/10 to sound an effect (that is, a hold change) and an effect at a probability of 4/10 at each chance time. Effect is executed by sorting without sound (that is, zone change). Further, when the variation for which the hold & zone change effect is executed is a loss variation, the peripheral control MPU has a probability of 4/10 that the sound effect sounds and a probability of 6/10 that the sound effect sounds at each chance time. Executes no performance.

However, in the hold & zone change production, in order to reach the final hold color and final zone, there are restrictions on the number of times the production with sound effects and the production without sound effects are executed. There is a scene where the execution of the non-production is determined.

Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the hold & zone change effect starts when the hold display is blue and the zone is the normal zone, the final hold color is blue and the final zone is the overlord zone, and the number of chance times is 10. times. In this case, according to the table in FIG. 583(F), a total of 10 presentations with sound effects and presentations without sound effects are executed, and from the blue suspension display and normal zone, the blue suspension display and overlord zone are reached. In order to do so, it is necessary to execute 3n times of effects with sound effects and 5m+2 times of effects without sound effects.

Here, both n and m are integers of 0 or more, and since 3n+(5m+2)=10, (n,m)=(1,1). Therefore, in this case, it is necessary to execute the presentation with sound effect three times and the presentation without sound effect seven times.

For example, when the performance with sound effect is executed three times before the last chance time, there is a restriction that the performance with sound effect cannot be executed any more. Therefore, in this case, after the presentation with sound effect is performed three times, the presentation without sound effect is always performed regardless of the distribution described above. Similarly, if the effect with sound effect is executed 7 times before the chance time before the last, there is a restriction that the effect without sound effect can not be executed any more, so the effect without sound effect is executed 7 times. After that, the effect without sound effect is always executed regardless of the distribution described above.

It should be noted that, compared to various effects other than hold & zone change effects, zone change effects with a low appearance frequency can provide players with a stronger sense of anticipation. A zone change may be performed by executing a none effect.

For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the hold change and zone change in the hold & zone change effect are performed only once in one chance time. , may be changed in a plurality of stages in one chance time. For example, using a plurality of stages of change, zone change may be performed only once in the hold & zone change effect, and only hold change may be carried out in the remaining chance time. A greater number of pending changes than zone changes can provide a stronger sense of anticipation. Fewer zone changes allow the player to concentrate on zone changes.

Only one pending change may be performed and only zone changes may be performed during the remaining chance time. By executing the zone change more times than the pending change, the player can enjoy many zone changes that appear less frequently and can give a stronger sense of expectation.

It should be noted that, in the next variation after a predetermined ready-to-win effect (for example, SP ready-to-win), the holding & zone change effect may be executed without fail. This is in order to regain the player's sense of expectation, who has been discouraged by the failure of the predetermined ready-to-win effect. In that case, in order to reduce the player's disappointment, the zone change may be performed without sound effects at the first chance time.

In the examples of FIGS. 583 and 584, the normal background is not displayed in the hold & zone change effect, but the normal background may be displayed. For example, in the hold & zone change production, before and after the hold change or zone change is performed, the background dedicated to the hold & zone change production may change to the normal background (that is, the hold display and zone after the change can be recognized. changes to the normal background when it becomes). In particular, for example, when a change in hold or a change in zone to demote the jackpot expectation is made (that is, when the hold display or zone after demotion becomes recognizable), by changing to the normal background, It is possible to make the player more strongly aware that the has been demoted.

In addition, the normal background may be displayed before and after the pending change or zone change is performed (that is, the pending display or zone before the change is recognizable, the pending display or zone is unrecognizable, and The normal background is displayed through the hold display before the change and the state where the zone is recognizable). In particular, for example, the hold change is an effect that is also executed in various effects other than the hold & zone change effect, so even if a special background is displayed, it may just be a sense of anticipation. This is because some players feel skeptical.

In the above example, both the hold change effect and the zone change effect are included in the hold & zone change effect, so it was explained as if the hold change effect and the zone change effect constitute one effect. However, the above-described pending change effect and the above-described zone change effect may be different effects. That is, there may be a variation in which only the above-described holding change effect is performed, or there may be a variation in which only the above-described zone change effect is performed.

[21-5. Light production in front of the wind]
The lighting effect in front of the wind will be described below. In the light effect in front of the wind, at the start of the effect, the suspension display indicating the variation is displayed in gold, which is the aspect with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit. Then, as time passes, it becomes difficult to recognize the suspension display indicating the change (for example, the transparency gradually increases, the area gradually decreases, etc.).

Then, at a predetermined timing, when the pending display becomes completely unrecognizable, when the pending display becomes recognizable again, the pending display is changed (degraded) to a form with a low degree of expectation for a big hit. ing. Further, when the suspension display does not become unrecognizable at the predetermined timing, the suspension display is displayed in the same manner. In other words, the player expects that the hold display will not become completely unrecognizable in the light effect in front of the wind. In the following, there are four types of holding display modes displayed in the light effect in front of the wind, ie, blue, green, red, and gold.

FIG. 586 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a lighting effect in front of the wind. (A) is the state at the end of the variation immediately before the windward lighting effect is executed. (B) is the state at the start of the variation in which the windward lighting effect is executed. All decorative patterns start to change, and the background usually becomes invisible. In addition, the title image of the light effect in front of the wind is displayed, and furthermore, the mode of the pending display indicating the variation is changed to gold, which indicates the highest degree of expectation for a big hit.

In (C), the effect display device 1600 displays a timer set to 15 seconds remaining. When the timer reaches 15 seconds, 10 seconds, and 5 seconds, a demotion in the form of a pending indication of the change can be performed. In the example of FIG. 586, at the timing of 15 seconds remaining, the status of the pending display is not demoted.

(D) is a state in which three seconds have passed since (C), and the suspension display indicating the change has gradually become more transparent and difficult to recognize. (E) is a state in which the remaining timer time is 10 seconds. An image of smoke is displayed over the pending indication of the variation, making the pending indication of the variation completely unrecognizable. In addition, although the pending display itself indicating the change is recognizable, the mode of the pending display indicating the change may be made unrecognizable (for example, the pending display indicating the change is grayed out (in the pending change effect color that is not selected) or replace it with an image of another shape).

(F) is a state in which one second has passed after the suspension display indicating the change has become completely unrecognizable. In (F), the image of smoke displayed in (E) is erased, and the suspended display showing the change is recognizable. Furthermore, the pending display indicating the change has been demoted to red. Thereafter, similar effects are executed with the lapse of time. In addition, when the state of the hold display is demoted in the light effect of the wind, it is desirable not to output the sound effect when the state of the hold display is promoted in the other hold change effect. This is to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the state of the pending display has been promoted.

In addition, for example, the time when the pending display indicating the change in (E) is made unrecognizable makes the pending display indicating the change unrecognizable in another pending change effect (that is, the effect in which the mode of the pending display is promoted). shorter than time. Making the suspension display unrecognizable by the light effect in front of the wind is synonymous with demoting the status of the suspension display. Decrease can be suppressed.

Conversely, the time during which the pending display indicating the variation is rendered unrecognizable in (E) may be longer than the time during which the pending display indicating the variation is rendered unrecognizable in other pending change effects. Making the suspension display unrecognizable by the light effect in front of the wind is synonymous with demoting the suspension display mode. It is possible to make the player gradually accept the status over time, and soften the shock of the player when he/she sees the state of the suspension display after the demotion when the suspension display becomes recognizable.

Further, the time during which the pending display indicating the change in (E) is rendered unrecognizable may be the same as the time during which the pending display indicating the relevant change is rendered unrecognizable in another pending change effect. Because these times are the same, the player can expect, even for a moment, that the hold has been promoted when the hold display becomes recognizable again in the light effect in front of the wind.

In addition, when the pending display indicating the change is rendered unrecognizable in (E), the pending displays corresponding to other variations (for example, all pending displays) may also be rendered unrecognizable. In this case, when the pending displays corresponding to other fluctuations are made recognizable again, these pending displays may be changed so as to increase the degree of expectation for big wins. As a result, it is synonymous with demotion to become unrecognizable with respect to the pending display showing the change, but since other pending displays are promoted when they become unrecognizable, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment. can.

In (G), in the light effect in front of the wind, the hold display indicating the change is finally demoted to green. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the variation in which the light effect in front of the wind is executed, and the holding display indicating the variation in the light effect in front of the wind is demoted from the gold color with the highest expectation for the big win, for example, the timing when the big win is announced. , it is better to return the pending display indicating the change to gold. By redisplaying the gold holding display with the highest degree of expectation for the big win, a performance like a resurrection performance can be realized, and the player can be made to strongly recognize that the big win has been won.

After the kazemae light effect is completed, the gold pending display is displayed repeatedly with high and low transparency, and the gold pending display is fully recognized (for example, by maximizing transparency, or by covering the smoke image as in the kazemae light effect). When it becomes unrecognizable, it is preferable to display a red pending display with the next highest expectation of a big hit afterward, and to display a gold pending display as it is when it is not completely unrecognizable. As a result, even after the light effect in front of the wind is finished, the effect similar to the light effect in front of the wind is executed, so that the player can feel the afterglow of the light effect in front of the wind.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 586, the light production in front of the wind was executed in a state where all the decorative patterns were fluctuating (a state in which the reach was not formed), but when a predetermined reach production was executed, or a predetermined When it is confirmed that the ready-to-win effect will be executed, the light effect in front of the wind may be executed. General reach production is to improve the player's expectation with the reach production itself, or to improve the player's expectation by cut-in images during the reach production, lines and messages in red letters, etc. When the performance occurs, the suspension is promoted, etc., but when the ready-to-win performance is executed, the suspension display is temporarily changed to the mode with the highest expectation for the big hit, giving a startling feeling, but during the reach. Since the effect that makes people expect to maintain the hold is novel (in the extreme, it can be said that it is an effect that disregards the reach effect). It is preferable to execute the light effect in front of the wind when the reach effect is low.

In the above example, when the pending display becomes unrecognizable and the pending display becomes recognizable again, the pending display mode is always demoted. When it becomes unrecognizable, the holding display in the same manner as before becoming unrecognizable may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide surprise and joy to the player who was disappointed when the pending display became unrecognizable and the state of the pending display was demoted.

However, although the light effect in front of the wind is an effect that the state of the pending display is demoted, it is an effect that can display many gold pending displays with the highest expectations for the big hit, so it is better not to perform the effect that the state of the pending display is promoted. good. In addition, since the pending promotion performance in which the mode of pending display is promoted is frequently executed in addition to the lighting performance in front of the wind, there is no need to daringly execute the performance in which the mode of pending display is promoted in the lighting performance in front of the wind. Therefore, it is better for the player to feel better if the suspension promotion effect is executed in an effect other than the light effect in front of the wind, and the suspension is promoted with a specific sound effect.

FIG. 587 is an example of a windward light hold change table. The light in front of the wind pending change table includes the mode of the pending display at the end of the light in the wind (final color), the mode of the pending display at the start of the light in the wind (start color), and each changeable timing (remaining time of the timer: 15 seconds, 10 seconds and 5 seconds) after the change (including the case where there is no change). The windward light hold change table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example. In the example of FIG. 587, the number of changeable timings is three, but the number is not limited to this and may be any number. The greater the number of changeable timings, the more the player can be given the thrill that the state of the pending display may be demoted, and the less the number of changeable timings, the more the player can be given a sense of security.

The peripheral control MPU determines the final color and the starting color when it decides to execute the lighting effect in front of the wind. It should be noted that, in the Kazemae Light Retention Change Table, the start color is defined to be a mode other than blue, which has the lowest chance of winning a big hit, but in the example of FIG. defined. Also, in the windward light holding change table, the final color is defined to be selected in a manner that is less than or equal to the expected jackpot of the starting color.

In the changeable timing table, it is defined that the mode of suspension display below the expected degree of big hit of the mode of suspension display before the variable timing is selected. Also, in the example of FIG. 587, the pending display mode is defined to be lowered by one step at each changeable timing. That is, for example, if the final color is blue, the demotion is performed after the hold display becomes unrecognizable at least twice in the light effect in front of the wind. It should be noted that a plurality of stages of demotion may be executable at each changeable timing.

In addition, if the suspension display indicating the change is unrecognizable and the player is demoted in the light effect in front of the wind, the timing when the suspension display indicating the change becomes unrecognizable may come before the middle of the fluctuation time of the change. desirable. When the timing at which the pending display indicating the variation becomes unrecognizable comes in the second half of the variation time of the variation, the pending display mode with a high expectation of a big hit is displayed for a long time, and then the mode of the pending display is demoted. This is because there is a risk that the expectation of the player, which has been maintained for a long period of time, may suddenly drop.

It should be noted that, even in effects other than the light in front of the wind effect, the effect of making the holding display indicating the change unrecognizable may be executed, but the effect for making the holding display showing the change unrecognizable is executed in the light in the wind direction. It is desirable to make the pending display indicating the change unrecognizable by using a different effect from (the effect of covering the pending display indicating the change with an image of smoke). This is because, if the holding display indicating the change is rendered unrecognizable in the same performance as the light performance in front of the wind, the player feels uneasy that the state of the holding display will be demoted in the same way as the light performance in front of the wind.

In the example of FIG. 587, the intervals between the changeable timings in the windward lighting effect are constant (every 5 seconds), but the intervals may be different. For example, because the interval between the second and third variable timings is longer than the interval between the first and second variable timings, the demotion of the suspension display mode is concentrated in the first half of the light effect in front of the wind. Therefore, if the player is not demoted in the first half, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of security. For example, because the interval between the second and third variable timings is shorter than the interval between the first and second variable timings, the demotion of the pending display mode is concentrated in the second half of the light effect in the wind. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the performance until the second half without relaxing.

In addition, when the suspension display mode is demoted multiple times in the light effect in front of the wind, the image that makes the suspension display mode unrecognizable and the sound effect that is output when demoting are the same each time. There may be, or part or all of them may be different. Since the images and sound effects are the same, it is possible for the player to calmly accept the second and subsequent demotions in the mode of the hold display. Due to the difference in images and sound effects, the player feels that if a different image appears or a different sound effect is output in the second and subsequent demotions, the player may not be demoted in the manner of the pending display. , you can hold a little hope.

In addition, when the demotion is performed in the mode of suspension display in the light effect in front of the wind, a predetermined movable body may be operated in order to make the player clearly recognize that the demotion will be performed. However, since this is only a demotion effect, if the amount of movement of the movable body is increased, there is a risk that the player's feelings will be disturbed. is desirable.

In the above example, only the hold display corresponding to the change being executed in the light effect in the wind was unrecognizable and demoted. The hold indication corresponding to the second hold) may also be rendered unrecognizable. In this case, when Ho1 to Ho4 are made recognizable again, it is desirable to upgrade the state of the pending display. As a result, even if the degree of expectation for a big hit during the variation being executed is lowered by the light performance in front of the wind, the player can have a sense of expectation for the variation in the suspension in which the mode of the suspension display is upgraded.

[21-6. Blackout production]
The blackout effect will be described below. In the blackout effect, the display of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the decorative pattern, the suspended display, and the normal background become invisible. When a predetermined time elapses after the state of being completely blacked out, the blackout gradually dissolves, and the decorative pattern, the reserved display and the normal background become visible, and at this time, the reserved display mode is the degree of expectation for a big win. may have changed to a higher one.

Below, there are five types of pending display in the blackout effect, default (displayed in black in the figure), blue, green, red, and gold. shall be high.

FIG. 588 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a blackout effect. (A) is the state at the end of the variation immediately before the variation in which the blackout effect is executed. A normal background is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and all decorative patterns are stopped. (B) is the state after the start of the variation in which the blackout effect is executed. All decorative patterns are changing.

(C) is a state in which the overall brightness of the effect display device 1600 is gradually decreasing (approaching black), and although the decorative pattern, the hold display, and the normal background are recognizable, they become difficult to recognize. there is In (D), the brightness of the entire effect display device 1600 is lowered to the lowest (0), and it is in a blackout state. In the blackout state, decorations, reserved indications, and normal backgrounds are unrecognizable.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the blackout state was completely established, the brightness of the effect display device 1600 as a whole gradually increases in (E), and the blackout state is resolved. In (E), the decorative pattern, reserved display, and normal background are still recognizable, but difficult to recognize. It should be noted that the mode of pending display has been upgraded from the default to blue. In (F), the brightness of the effect display device 1600 as a whole is completely restored, and the decorative pattern, the suspended display, and the normal background are completely recognizable. Even if the blackout state is resolved, the decorative pattern and the normal background may remain invisible. This is to make the player pay attention to whether or not the status of the pending display has changed.

FIG. 589 is an example of a blackout time table. The blackout time table is a table that defines distribution for determining the time during which the blackout is completely blacked out in the blackout effect and the state of the suspended display that becomes recognizable again after the blackout is resolved. The blackout time table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example.

After deciding to execute the blackout effect, the peripheral control MPU decides whether the blackout time is short or long according to a predetermined probability. It should be noted that the predetermined probability is determined so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when long is selected than when short is selected (for example, the variation that executes the blackout effect is not a variation , short is selected by 224/256 and long is selected by 32/256, and when the variation for executing the blackout effect is a jackpot variation, short is selected by 64/256 and long is selected by 192/256. ).

The peripheral control MPU refers to the distribution indicated by the blackout time table and selects the length of the complete blackout time. In the example of FIG. 589, 3 seconds or 5 seconds are selected when short is selected, and 15 seconds or 20 seconds are selected when long is selected. When the blackout effect is executed, the shortest time of long is set to be at least twice the shortest time of short so that the player can easily determine whether long or short is selected. desirable. In the example of FIG. 589, the shortest time of long, 15 seconds, is three times as long as the longest time of short, 5 seconds.

Note that the shorter the blackout time (for example, when short is selected than when long is selected), the decoration pattern, suspension display, and normal background after the blackout ends will be displayed. longer time to

The peripheral control MPU refers to the distribution indicated by the blackout time table, and determines the mode of post-blackout suspension display corresponding to the selected time. In the blackout time table, the allocation is determined such that the longer the completely blackout time is, the more likely the reservation display in the form of the higher expectation of the big win is to be selected.

In this way, the shorter the time of complete blackout, the lower the expectation of a big hit. A specific sound effect may be output at a predetermined timing when it becomes recognizable to increase the player's sense of anticipation. When long is selected, since the player's expectation is sufficiently high due to the blackout, it is not necessary to output the sound effect after the blackout.

In addition, in the pending display that becomes recognizable again after the blackout when short is selected, the default sorting is greater than the sum of the sorting modes other than the default. On the other hand, the default split is less than the sum of the non-default mode splits in the pending display that becomes recognizable again at the end of the blackout when long is selected. In this way, the large difference in the selection rate of the pending display of the default mode between when short is selected and when long is selected makes it possible to recognize that long has been selected (for example, complete blackout If more than 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the game, it will be known that long has been selected).

It is desirable that the variable display mode of the decorative symbols when the decorative symbols become recognizable again after the blackout is different between when short is selected and when long is selected. For example, when short is selected, the decorative pattern is only slightly swaying, but when long is selected, the decorative pattern is swaying violently. Further, for example, when short is selected, the face of the character drawn in the decorative pattern is expressionless, but when long is selected, the face of the character drawn in the decorative pattern is smiling. You can let it be.

In this way, by making the variable display modes of the decorative symbols after the end of the blackout different, the player can see the decorative symbols even in the state after the blackout, so that the player can determine whether the short is selected or the long is selected in the blackout effect. is selected (since the suspension display mode can be changed in ways other than the blackout effect, if it is not possible to completely specify whether or not the blackout effect has been performed only by the suspension display mode there is).

It should be noted that the blackout effect may be performed a plurality of times in one variation. As a result, even if the first blackout effect does not change to a hold display with a high degree of expectation for a big win, the player can maintain his sense of expectation.

In the plurality of blackout effects, short and long may be mixed, short may be selected for all, or long may be selected for all. Further, for example, the blackout effect may be executed a plurality of times before forming the ready-to-win state of the decorative pattern, the blackout effect may be executed before and after the ready-to-win state is formed, or the ready-to-win state may be executed. may be executed a plurality of times after forming the blackout effect.

Since it takes a long time to execute multiple blackout effects, if you want to execute multiple blackout effects before forming the ready-to-reach state, the blackout effect will be executed multiple times until the ready-to-reach state is formed. In order to end it, it is preferable to start the blackout effect as the effect at the start of the fluctuation.

Even if the blackout effect is performed only once, the blackout effect may be started as the effect at the start of the variation. A blackout effect is performed at the start of fluctuation, so that the player cannot grasp what is happening at first, but when the blackout ends and the mode of the pending display changes, surprise and sudden increase. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of anticipation.

In addition, when the blackout effect is performed after the ready-to-win state is formed, it is desirable that the blackout effect ends before the timing of announcing win or loss in the ready-to-win effect. This is because the player's amusement is not enhanced even if an effect relating to the pending change is executed after the winning/losing notification timing.

It should be noted that the mode for making the pending display, the decorative pattern, and the normal background unrecognizable may differ depending on whether the short mode is selected or the long mode is selected. For example, when short is selected, blackout is always performed, and when long is selected, blackout is performed with a predetermined probability (9/10), and effect display is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10). If the red color is displayed on the entire device 1600 and the pending display, the decorative pattern, and the normal background cannot be recognized, it is confirmed that it is long when the red color is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600. Expectations can be dramatically increased.

Contrary to the example of FIG. 589, in the blackout time table, the longer the length of the completely blackout time, the more likely it is that the hold display with the lower expectation of a big hit will be selected. may be defined.

[22. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100, a transparent guide is provided behind the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. A light radiation plate 3113 and a rear decoration substrate 3114 are provided, and mounted on the front surface of the rear decoration substrate 3114 in each of the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c formed on the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted so as to be accommodated therein. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114 are caused to emit light, the light from the first LEDs 3114a is emitted from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c to the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113. and is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Become. Light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 passes through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 that constitute the decorative member and is irradiated forward, so that the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The light-emitting decorative members (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) are decorated with light emission.

At this time, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflection portions 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decoration body Since the 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are decorated with light emission, the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 compared to the case where the light is emitted from the first LED 3114a toward the front. The distance until the light is emitted forward can be increased, and the light from the first LED 3114 a can be widely diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 . Therefore, when the first LED 3114a is caused to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused, and it is possible to suppress the appearance of point-like light emission. The sheet 3112 can be evenly decorated with luminescence to make it look beautiful, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In the rear movable decorative body 3110, since the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the plate-like decorative members (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimension in the front-rear direction is reduced. This makes it easy to secure a space for arranging the back rear movable decoration 3110, and arranges other production members (back upper front rotary decoration 3410, back upper rear rotary decoration 3440, etc.). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can easily secure a space for playing and which can entertain the players more by providing various performance members.

Furthermore, the decorative member (back rear movable decorative body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has embossed portions such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since it is composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first outline portion 3112a, the embossed portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decorative portion 3150, and the embossed portion can provide a three-dimensional effect. A sense of depth can be imparted to the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided behind by the lens effect. Therefore, the embossed portion of the decorative body 3111 and the picture pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 allow the player to see a three-dimensional decoration (decorative portion 3150) with a sense of depth. Even if the dimension in the front-rear direction) is reduced, the decoration effect does not decrease, and the player's interest can be attracted and entertained. It is possible to reliably achieve the effects described above.

In addition, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as a first outline portion 3112a behind the decoration body 3111 having relief portions such as the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c. Since the transparent decoration 3112 is provided, the decoration 3111 can be made to look like it is colored with the pattern color of the decoration sheet 3112 without coloring the transparent decoration 3111, and the cost of the decoration 3111 can be reduced. can be made In addition, by changing the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, the decoration (decoration portion 3150) of the decoration body 3111 (rear rear movable decoration body 3110) can be easily changed. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily adapted.

In addition, the first outline portion 3112a of the decoration sheet 3112 has a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern as the decoration portion 3150 is displayed by interference fringes of light. Light from the hologram of the first contour portion 3112a, light from other LEDs and effect display devices 1600, etc. provided in the pachinko machine 1, light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. By hitting the portion of , a predetermined hologram can be seen by the interference fringes of light, so the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved by the hologram, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the hologram Thus, a three-dimensional effect can be imparted to a part of the decorative part 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and even if the movable decorative body 3110 is made thin, the player does not feel thinness.

Furthermore, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is configured by a hologram, the holograms are the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having the embossed portion such as 3111c, the lens effect of the embossed portion can impart a sense of depth to the pattern such as the hologram, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest. Possible decorations 3150 can be shown to the player. In addition, since the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique to form the hologram portion, thereby suppressing an increase in cost.

In addition, in the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened, and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the transparent decorative body The pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be used to decorate up to the outer periphery of the 3111, and since there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (the decorative part 3150), the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is given a sense of openness. It can be used and the decoration can be made to look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110 (the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, and the decorative effect of the back movable decorative body 3110 can be fully exhibited, and the back movable decorative body can be exhibited. The decoration of 3110 can strongly attract the player's interest, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player can be provided.

Since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flat, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, light is generated between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. The pattern of the first contour part 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body 3111, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be fully exhibited. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, it is possible to minimize the front-to-rear dimension of the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 and realizing the above-described effects.

Furthermore, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the external shape of the decorative body 3111, and the design of the decorative sheet 3112 can decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111). Therefore, by making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the back movable decorative body 3110 continuous with the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be given to the player. It is possible to show the game, to give the player a visual impact to draw attention to the player, and to entertain the player with a large decoration, thereby suppressing the loss of the player's interest.

In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a plurality of first LED accommodation portions 3113c in which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are accommodated from behind, the light guide radiation plate 3113 accommodates the first LEDs 3114a. By accommodating the first LED 3114a in the portion 3113c from behind, it is possible to bring the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 closer to each other as much as possible. The thickness in the direction can be made thin, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably embodied.

In addition, the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated in the first LED accommodation portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED accommodation portion 3113c into the plate thickness. Therefore, compared to the case where light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (for example, the central portion) where light from the outer peripheral surface does not easily reach. However, by providing the first LED housing part 3113c in the part and irradiating the light from the inner surface, the part can be brightly emitted, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) can be evenly decorated with light.

Furthermore, since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is of the side-view type, the first LED 3114a can be accommodated only by accommodating the first LED 3114a in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and emitting light. A pachinko machine 1 capable of emitting light from the inner surface (light receiving portion 3113i) of the portion 3113c in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and having the above-described effects is surely embodied. be able to.

In addition, substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e. Even if the decoration (decorative part 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflecting part 3113e. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like.

It should be noted that the back movable decorative body 3160 and the back movable decorative body 3170 can also achieve the same effects as described above. It should be noted that the periodical shaking, rotation, etc. of the pending display and the periodical shaking, rotation, etc. of the decorative pattern may be a series of effects that are repeatedly executed in the dynamic display during the static image effect.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the game machine is not limited to this. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

In the above-described embodiment, as the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, the third decorative projection 3111c, and the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 are used. and the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, but limited to this not something to do. For example, the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 may be made into one decoration member, and the decoration part 3150 may be provided on the decoration member.

<Slot machine>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below by taking a slot machine as an example of a game machine and referring to the drawings. In the following, the reference numerals described so far are reset, and the reference numerals described so far and the reference numerals described below indicate different things even if they are the same. 590 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 591 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine with the door-shaped front member omitted, FIG. 592 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 593 omits the door-shaped front member. FIG. 594 is an enlarged view of Z1 part of FIG. 593, FIG. 595 is an enlarged view of Z1 part of FIG. 593 showing the state in which the connector holder is moved, and FIG. Fig. 597(a) is an enlarged view of the Z2 part of Fig. 596, Fig. 597(b) is an enlarged view of the Z2 part of Fig. 596 showing the state in which the connector holder has been moved; 598 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 597(a), FIG. 599 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 600 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. 601 is the case member from behind. 602(a) and 602(b) are perspective views of the main parts of the case member for explaining the temporarily fixed state of the connector holder, FIG. 603 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, and FIG. 604 is the wiring relay member. 605 and 606 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder, FIG. 607 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 608 is a perspective view of the stopper showing another form, FIGS. FIG. 610 is a cross-sectional view of the main part showing the guide structure of the case member, FIG. 611 is a partial perspective view of the variable pattern display device showing another form of the handle, and FIG. FIG. 613 is a cross-sectional view of the main part showing the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the variable pattern display device, FIG. 614 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, and FIG. 616 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 615, FIG. 617 is a rear view of the slot machine as seen from the back side of the slot machine, and FIG. 618 is a part of the slot machine showing the power supply. FIG. 619 is a perspective view of the power supply device as seen from below, FIG. 620 is a cross-sectional view of the side plate of the outer main body and the main part of the power supply device in another form, and FIG. 621 is another form. 622 is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member with the transparent plate and the light emitting unit disassembled; FIG. 623 is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member with the transparent plate disassembled; Figure 625 is an exploded/assembled perspective view of the hinge metal fittings, Figure 626 is a diagram showing the chain of the hinge metal fittings, Figure 627 is the door-shaped front face FIG. 628 is a cross-sectional plan view of the essential parts showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening, FIG. 629 is a perspective view of the upper half of the door-shaped front member seen from the back 630 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the connector cut in the vertical direction, FIG. 631 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part of the door-shaped front member showing another example of the hinge metal fitting, and FIG. FIG. 633 is a perspective view showing the state in which the front opening/closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG. 634 is a perspective view showing the state in which the door-shaped front member is opened while the connector is connected.

As shown in FIGS. 590 and 591, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment of the present invention has a box-shaped outer body 100 with an open front surface, and a laterally opening door-shaped outer body 100 having a rotating shaft 100a on the front surface of the outer body 100. a door-shaped front surface member 200 rotatably attached to the body; a pattern variation display device 300 for varying a plurality of patterns by driving means; 400 and an image display 500 for displaying an arbitrary image.

[1. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 590 to 593, the outer body 100 has side plates 102, 102 attached to the left and right sides of a bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 placed on top of the side plates 102, 102 to form a vertically elongated "mouth" in front view. A letter-shaped frame is formed, and a back plate 104 is fixed to the back of the frame to form a box shape with an opening only at the front. The left and right side plates 102, 102 are trapezoidal with the front edges slightly tilted backward, so that the opening of the outer body 100 has a backward tilt. In addition, on the top plate 103, a plurality of (in the embodiment, a plurality of 4) through holes 132, 132 . . .

[1-1. Outer body - partition plate]
A shelf-shaped partition plate 105 is provided in the outer body 100 at approximately the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal, and as shown in FIGS. 590 and 591, has a substantially convex shape with a projecting stepped portion 106 in the center. , and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixed to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 . A mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 is formed with a cylindrical projection (not shown) by burring (metal processing in which a short cylindrical projection is raised while enlarging the hole diameter of the pilot hole with a punch). The cylindrical projection is driven into a small hole (not shown) preformed in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 for positioning. Wiring openings 109 are formed between the partition plate 105 and the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 at the deepest portions on both sides thereof.

[1-1-1. Outer body - partition plate - lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer body 100, there are provided a medal ejection device 110 for ejecting medals, which are game media, into the medal receiving tray 201 at the lower front portion of the door-shaped front member 200, and a medal ejection device 110. A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[1-1-1-1. Outer main body - partition plate - lower space - medal release device]
The medal ejection device 110 has a device main body 110a with a built-in driving means and a medal storage hopper 110b attached thereto. Certain medals are sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. The hopper 110b is provided with an overflow gutter 110d for discharging overflowing medals, and the above-described auxiliary medal storage box 111 faces below the tip of the overflow gutter 110d. Any currently known mechanism may be adopted for the medal ejection mechanism of the medal ejection device 110, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[1-1-1-2. Outer main body - partition plate - lower space - power supply]
As shown in FIGS. 615 to 619, the power supply device 112 is attached to the inner corner portion where the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100, the side plate 102 on the left side when facing the front, and the back plate 104 intersect each other. there is The power supply device 112 is for supplying electricity to the electrical components such as the medal release device 110, and is a component that easily generates heat. A mouth 104a is opened.

A device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is made of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, so that it becomes easy to detect unauthorized work on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 619) of the power supply device 112 or the like. The device case 112a includes an upper plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear plate 112c that faces the rear plate 104 of the outer body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear plate 112c, and a It is formed of a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary portion between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered manner, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 619) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a facing the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is not covered and is in an open state. blocked.

As shown in FIGS. 615 and 616, the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b. It is designed to slip one side of the. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is closed by the guard portion 102b, so foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 620 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is groove-shaped. In this example, the edge of the top plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly protruded toward the side plate 102, and the guard portion 102b extends beyond the edge of the upper plate 112b. It is designed to fit into a groove.

In this way, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the side that abuts on the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 has an open structure without a cover and is closed by the side plate 102 during use, the device case 112a can be inserted into the device case 112a. The substrate 112s and the like can be easily assembled using the open surface, and workability is improved because there is no need to attach a cover to the open surface after the substrate 112s and the like are assembled in the device case 112a.

A large number of ventilation holes 112g, 112g, . . The device case 112a is lifted by legs 112h, 112h . Therefore, relatively cold air from the lower layer can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g, . . . of the bottom plate 112r. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiation port 104a of the outer body 100, the cold air behind the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. In addition, if an inverted L-shaped stepped portion 112j (see FIG. 619) is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a to raise the ventilation space 112i, the height of the leg portion 112h and the heat radiation port 104a can be reduced. The ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a even if there is a deviation in height.

[1-1-1-2-1. Outer body - Partition plate - Lower space - Power supply - Fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes a mounting piece 112k perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion projecting from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. It is fixed to the outer body 100 by a combination of 112m and the heat radiation port 104a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 .

That is, the outline of the heat radiation opening 104a is formed smaller than the outline of the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply unit 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiation opening 104a. A projection 112m protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is positioned to be in contact with the heat radiation port 104a, and is a horizontal projection that is inscribed in the upper side of the heat radiation port 104a to prevent the power supply device 112 from being lifted up. It is composed of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical projecting piece 112m-2 inscribed in the vertical side of the heat radiation port 104a to resist the overturning motion of the power supply device 112. As shown in FIG. Therefore, by simply pushing the power supply device 112 along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 and inserting the protrusion 112m into the heat radiation port 104a, the rear surface (back side) of the device case 112a can be lifted upward (lifted) and shown in FIG. Fixing in the right direction (rollover) is completed at . Of course, the movement of the power supply unit 112 is restricted downward by the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100 and is restricted by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 toward the left in FIG. With a simple operation of fitting the protrusion 112m, the movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted in directions other than the pulling direction.

On the other hand, a mounting piece 112k projecting from the front plate 112d is provided with a plurality of through holes 112p for screws. As a result, the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted also in the pulling direction, so that the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer body 100 with a single wood screw 112q.

[1-1-1-2-2. Outer body - partition plate - lower space - power supply - power cord]
A power cord (not shown) is connected to the power supply device 112 for receiving electricity from the outside. Conventionally, a bulging portion was provided beside the heat radiation port 104a and the power cord was pulled out from there. The power supply of the slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing, and the power cord must be put out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for such a case. When the slot machine 1 is moved, the power cord may rub against the ground or be caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the heat radiation port 104a of the embodiment, the cord outlet 104b is extended upward from the upper side, and the power cord is pulled out therethrough. This ensures a sufficient height for hanging the bundled power cords in the air. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord during the manufacturing process of the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present invention, the installation is completed only by setting the power supply device 112 to the inner corner portion of the outer body 100 and screwing in one wood screw 112q. Significant labor saving in mounting work is possible. In addition, in the present invention, since fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, especially when the part to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to see and can be fixed securely. . By the way, conventionally, it was necessary to screw a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112, and in particular, the screws fixed to the back plate 104 were difficult to see and could be forgotten.

Further, since the heat radiation port 104a is necessary as a means for cooling the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiation port 104a is used for fixing the power source device 112, there is almost no extra process or cost. On the contrary, since the position of the heat radiation port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing, the cooling efficiency is improved. In addition, if the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the projection 112m for attachment can also be integrally formed, so that the cost is almost negligible. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the stepped portion 112j of the device case 112a, which are useful as countermeasures against heat generation of the power supply device 112, can be implemented at almost no cost.

[1-1-2. Outer body - partition plate - upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in the space above the partition plate 105 in the outer body 100, and a wiring relay member 113 serving as the core of wiring means to be described later is provided on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. 590 and 591), and a vent hole 133 for heat radiation is formed in the back plate 104 above the wiring relay member 113. As shown in FIG.

[2. Door-shaped front member]
The front side of the door front member 200 is shown in FIG. 592, and the back side of the door front member 200 is shown in FIG. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal receiving tray 201 on the lower side of the front side, and an operation section 202 is provided substantially in the center of the front side. The operation unit 202 includes an insertion slot 203 for inserting medals, a performance button 204 that can be operated by the player, and an inserting (pulling) medal from the medals stored as data in the memory of the main board 409, which will be described later. 1 insert button 205 for instructing a drop), a MAX insert button 206 for instructing the insertion of the maximum number (for example, 3) that can be used in one game, and medals stuck in a medal selector 207, which will be described later. a medal return button 208 for returning the medal to the medal receiving tray 201, a storage cancellation switch 209 for inputting a medal storage cancellation command (release command due to payment) stored as data in the memory of the main board 409, A starting lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300 and three reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c for stopping the respective reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is an example, and the configuration is not limited to this.

A medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the slot 203, and a medal gutter 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207, and a return gutter 213 is connected to the bottom. The medal selector 207 is a known device that switches the flow path by turning on and off a built-in solenoid (not shown). In addition, in a state where the insertion of medals is refused, such as when the number of medals exceeds the prescribed number, the flow path is set to the return gutter 213 side. The tip of the medal gutter 212 faces the inside of the hopper 110b of the medal ejection device 110 when the door-shaped front member 200 is placed over the front surface of the outer main body 100. The medals flowing through the medal gutter 212 reach the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return gutter 213 is connected to the medal tray 201 on the front side, and the medals flowing from the slot 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return gutter 213 return to the medal tray 201 .

[2-1. Door-shaped front member - see-through window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is sized to cover the entire front surface of the outer body 100, and its upper half is a see-through window for games covered with a transparent plate 214a, as shown in FIGS. 622 and 623. It has become 214. The see-through window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display 500 and the pattern variation display device 300 can be seen vertically. The regions of the display body 500 and the variable pattern display device 300 are visually divided into upper and lower regions. Thus, if one sheet of transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display body 500 and the variable pattern display device 300, the positions of the image display body 500 and the variable pattern display device 300 are reversed. can be used as is.

[2-2. Door-shaped front member - see-through window - transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a is made of a transparent synthetic resin (e.g., methacrylic resin containing rubber that has excellent impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical properties, and in this embodiment, "Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30" manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. is used. ) is formed into an inverted trapezoid and spreads upward, and edge members 214b bulge out toward the front side facing the player on the periphery of the three sides (the left and right sides and the upper side) excluding the bottom side. 214b, 214b are integrally molded during resin molding using a resin molding mold. When the edge member 214b is formed integrally with the peripheral edge of the flat transparent plate 214a, the edge member 214b acts as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. Even if it is large enough to cover both the image display member 500 and the variable pattern display device 300 as shown in , bending and distortion are unlikely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 624, the rim member 214b has a shell structure (it is not solid but has a shell-like structure with a space inside, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). A light-emitting unit 217 and, if necessary, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or letters on its surface are incorporated in the inner space.

Although FIG. 623 shows the light emitting unit 217 attached to the door-shaped front member 200, the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted in the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integrated component.

The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to the illustrated one, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Also, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the peripheral edge of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided on at least one side.

622 and 623, reference numeral 218 denotes fixing members provided at the left and right corners of the transparent plate 214a. (not shown), it is stopped in the state of FIG. 623 fitted between the edge members 214b. While the fixing member 218 serves as a corner decoration in appearance, the through holes 200a and 214d (see the enlarged view of FIG. 622) provided in the upper corner portions of the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a, respectively. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door-shaped front member 200, and thus functions like a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door-shaped front member 200. FIG.

622 to 624, reference numeral 217a denotes a luminous body of the luminous unit 217, and 217b a reflecting member for supporting the luminous body 217a. The reflecting members 217b of the left and right light emitting units 217 are angled so as to reflect the light from the rod-shaped light emitters 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. In the configuration in which the light-emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light-emitting body 217a can be arranged closer to the front side of the slot machine 1, so it looks like a lighthouse at the tip of the cape. , which is advantageous if the light is to be emitted towards the surroundings. In addition, the reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect the light of the light emitting body 217a (the combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) toward the upper part of the slot machine 1. ing.

The light-emitting unit 217 having the above structure can perform an effect to appeal the occurrence of the big win to the surroundings by lighting up especially when the big win occurs during the game. By performing such a highly appealing performance to the surroundings, it is possible to attract the attention of the player who has won the big win, and the gazes of many people give the player a sense of superiority, thereby making the game even more lively. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operating rate will improve by appealing to the surroundings that the big win is coming out.

The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the structure described above, and the plate-like bottom side of the door-shaped front member 200 faces the groove 219 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 623) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The transparent plate 214a is inserted obliquely from the front surface and fitted into the fixture. It is fixed with screws 603 (see FIG. 590) passed from the back. FIG. 624 shows the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 cut at this time, and as is clear from this FIG. is forcibly inserted, there is almost no room for the tip of the foreign matter to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, an excellent crime prevention effect is exhibited.

[2-3. Door type front member - lock device]
A lock device 215 is provided on one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200 to be opened and closed using a dedicated key (not shown).

[3. Pattern variation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, and incorporates and accommodates, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that can be individually rotated by a drive means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. It has a device case 302 for playing games, and a game is played by combining a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of reels 301a, 301b, and 301c.

The device case 302 has a deformed hexagonal prism shape with three sides facing the front (player) removed from a sideways octagonal prism. A right side plate 306, a left side plate 307 on the same side, a vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, an upper swash plate 309 provided between the top plate portion 305 and the rear plate 308, a bottom plate 304 and a rear plate 308 The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c have a box shape surrounded by a lower swash plate 310 provided between them, and part of the arcs of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c protrude from the front of the device case 302. As shown in FIG.

In addition, a handle 311 is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 and can be changed between a use state in which a finger can be hooked and a non-use state in which the top plate portion 305 is laid down. It is designed to be carried around.

The configuration in which the top plate portion 305 of the apparatus case 302 is provided with the handle 311 that can be changed as described above is closely related to measures to increase the strength of the case member 400 . That is, in the embodiment, as will be described later, the opening 401 of the case member 400 is provided with a reinforcing bar 402 to give the opening 401 of the case member 400 sufficient strength to cantilever the image display member 500 . Since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it clearly becomes an obstacle to putting the apparatus case 302 in and out of the case member 400. As shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the handle 311 is changeable and laid down on the top plate portion 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the apparatus case 302 can pass under the reinforcing bar 402 without difficulty. Therefore, it is only by providing the handle 311 that can be changed as described above on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 that the reinforcing bar 402 can be provided in the opening portion 401 of the case member 400 in a direction crossing the opening portion 401. Become. Incidentally, in the conventional apparatus case, the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle.

In the embodiment, the handle 311 has a structure in which it swings between the upright use state and the reclined non-use state. The form is not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 611, two belt loops 314, 314 are cut and raised in the top plate portion 305, and the belt loops 314, 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather, and have retaining portions 315, 315 at both ends. The belt-shaped handle 311 provided is inserted, and the top plate portion 305 can be used in a state where it can be hooked with a finger, such as by pulling up the center from the unused state shown in FIG. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to a lying down state and a non-use state.

593 and 600, a flange-shaped lower handle 316 is projected from the bottom plate 304 of the apparatus case 302 of the embodiment. By pulling, it is easy to put in and take out the case member 400 .

[4. Case material]
The case member 400 has a size that substantially matches the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404, 404 erected on both left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and the bottom plate 403. It is box-shaped with an opening 401 at the front, comprising a rear plate 405 erected on the rear edge and a top plate 406 covering the rear plate 405 and the upper surfaces of the side plates 404 and 404 .

The case member 400 has a bottom plate 403 made of metal, side plates 404, 404, a rear plate 405, and a top plate 406 made of synthetic resin. Members 407 , 407 , 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 crossing the opening 401 is spanned between the reinforcing members 407 , 407 of the side plates 404 , 404 . The area below the reinforcement crosspiece 402 serves as an installation area for the variable pattern display device 300, and the opening 401 above the reinforcement crosspiece 402 serves as an installation area for the image display body 500. A region surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display 500 is allocated as a wiring work space 408, and a main board 409 as a main control board is mounted on the inner wall surface of the rear panel 405 of the wiring work space 408. A control board (for example, a sub-board 510 (see FIG. 633)) other than the main board 409 is also mounted in the wiring work space 408 .

The top plate 406 of the case member 400 is formed with skylight portions 443, 443 as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443, 443 are divided into two by sandwiching a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406, each of which is aligned with the axis passing through the through holes 132, 132 of the outer body 100. It is located in an area including the intersection and is opened sufficiently wider than the through holes 132, 132, . . . However, the front peripheral edge of the skylight portion 443 is brought close to the through hole 132 positioned on the front side. By doing so, the through hole 132 can be found by fumbling around the periphery of the skylight part 443, so even if the worker cannot look into the skylight part 443, the position of the through hole 132 can be determined quickly and easily. Here, the skylight portion 443 also functions as the opening of the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylights 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, it is possible to reduce the weight and further reduce the burden on workers during transportation and replacement.

As shown in FIGS. 591, 594, 595 and 601, a plurality of bosses 410 protrude from the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, and the bosses 410 are attached to the rear plate of the outer body 100. It is positioned by being fitted into boss holes 114, 114 pre-machined in 104. As shown in FIG. 591 and 594, the bosses 410, 410 are provided near a wiring window 411, which will be described later, while the boss holes 114, 114 on the side of the outer body 100 are near the wiring relay member 113. This makes it possible to accurately position the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 .

On the other hand, the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 is formed with a recessed stepped portion 412 as shown in FIG. A tapered portion 413 that expands rearward is provided at the end of the recessed stepped portion 412 on the rear plate 405 side. Fitting with the recessed step portion 412 can be performed smoothly. The case member 400 is guided straight into the back of the partition plate 105 by fitting the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the projecting step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 in this manner. A groove-shaped rail member 115 is laid on the plate 105 or integrally press-molded, while a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 so that the wheel 414 rolls in the groove of the rail member 115. good too. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 610, a projecting rail member 116 is laid on the partition plate 105 or integrally press-molded, and on the other hand, flanges 415, 415 are formed on both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400. The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the flanges 415 , 415 of the wheel 414 .

The case member 400 is stopped at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105 by a rocking lever-shaped stopper 117 shown in FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 590 and 591, the stopper 117 is axially attached to the front end of the partition plate 105 and two fixtures 118, 118 vertically provided on the top plate 103. 607, and a non-operating posture in which the case member 400 is not engaged as shown by the imaginary line in FIG. regulate movement. If the stopper 117 is shaped like a key as shown in FIG. 608 and engaged with the hook 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

612, the stopper 117 pivotally attached to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is positioned to face the locking hole 442 penetrating through the corners of the side plate 404 and the top plate 406 of the case member 400, as shown in FIG. When the case member 400 is pushed into a predetermined position, switching between the operating posture and the non-operating posture can be performed from the inside of the case member 400 .

A wiring window 411 in the form of an elongated hole is formed in the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 so as to penetrate the rear plate 104 of the outer body 100 . The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the variable pattern display device 300 installed in the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. , and the horizontally long empty space 417 above the upper swash plate 309 (or the horizontally long triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main board 409) and the back. It functions as an opening connecting the plates 104 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 594 and 601, the case member 400 is provided with a temporary fixing member 418 in the form of a shelf plate (hereinafter also referred to as a "temporary fixing shelf") at approximately the middle position of the height of the empty space 417. In addition, recesses 419 , 419 serving as wiring passages leading to the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400 are formed outside the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411 .

If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified based on the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the variable symbol display device 300, the wiring window 411 is located on the reel 301a of the variable symbol display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c, and the horizontal plane HH, which passes through the highest position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. It can also be said that it is arranged.

[5. Image display body]
The image display body 500 is, for example, a panel-type unit configured with at least a liquid crystal display (or a plasma display, an organic EL display, etc.) capable of displaying an image, and the front opening of the case member 400 can be opened and closed. It also functions as a front opening/closing member 90 (see FIG. 633) that closes the door. The image display unit 500 is rotated by the hinge fitting 420 attached to the reinforcing member 407 provided on the left side plate 404 of the case member 400 in FIG. freely supported.

Further, as shown in FIG. 633, a sub-board 510 is attached to the rear surface side of the image display body 500 . Therefore, the image display 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the sub-board 510 can be integrally configured, which facilitates handling and eliminates the need for wiring to connect the two. The complexity of the space 408 can be suppressed. In addition, when the image display body 500 is opened, the sub-board 510 pops out from the case member 400, so that the workability of the sub-board 510 can be significantly improved.

[5-1. Image display body - hinge metal fitting]
625 is an exploded/assembled perspective view of the hinge metal fitting 420. FIG. Since the hinge fitting 420 has a vertically symmetrical structure, the upper portion will be mainly described. The hinge fitting 420 is fixed to a fixing member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, a rotating member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line area 500s in FIG. 625), and the rotating member 420b. It consists of a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect the member 420a.

The fixing member 420a of the hinge metal fitting 420 has a horizontal fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate, one end of a long link 420d is attached to the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e with a pin P1, and a short link is attached to the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is rotatably supported by a pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge metal fitting 420 has a horizontal bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf plate. One end of the short link 420c is rotatably attached to the pin P4.

Thus, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 form a four-bar rotary chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. A so-called double-lever mechanism is constructed in which a fixed piece 420e facing a bearing piece 420f is used as a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 626(a) to 626(c), both of these lever mechanisms approximate the rotational trajectory of the image display member 500 to the rotational trajectory centered on the rotational axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200. Therefore, each pin position is set. In other words, the hinge fitting 420 functions as a mechanism for moving the center of rotation, and even if the rotational position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotational outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the rotational outer edge of the image display member 500 will remain unchanged. The distance from the edge side is kept substantially constant.

Note that the long link 420d and the short link 420c are provided with superimposed regions 420g and 420h so that they overlap vertically when the image display body 500 is rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the long link 420d is superimposed). The region 420g is swollen in a triangular shape so as to overlap with the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c), and pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The long link 420d and the short link 420c are connected by aligning them coaxially and inserting a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown) into the pin holes 420i and 420j, thereby locking both lever mechanisms and displaying the image display. 500 in the open position.

[5-2. Image display - lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 600 and 601, of the vertical reinforcing members 407 of the case member 400, the reinforcing member 407 opposite to the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 (on the right side in FIG. 600) is locked. A piece 421 is pivoted, and when the locking piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. The image display body 500 is locked at the position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the opposite direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display member 500 is released, and the hinge metal fitting 420 becomes rotatable. Normally, before the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100, the image display member 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation. The display body 500 is unlocked and made rotatable.

[5-3. Image display body - connector]
By the way, apart from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, the case member 400 is provided with the image display member 500 that can be opened and closed. In this case, the door-shaped front member 200 on the near side must first be opened, and then the image display body 500 on the far side must be opened. .

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the image display member 500 is rotated in the same direction as the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display member 500 are connected by an appropriate connector. 700, and the image display member 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. FIG. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display member 500 also rotates in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. In other words, the image display member 500 rotates together with the door-shaped front member 200, so that not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 can be visually recognized by one lateral opening operation.

Here, as described above, the door-shaped front surface member 200 and the image display member 500 of the embodiment are configured such that the locus of rotation of the image display member 500 is aligned with the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front surface member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge metal fitting 420 . Although the locus of rotation is approximated to the locus of rotation with the center of rotation at Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 629 and 630, the connector 700 of the embodiment forms a fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface of the free end side of the image display body 500, and slides inside the fixed sheath member 701. A rod 702 is housed in a free state, and the tip of the rod 702 is rotatably connected to the rear surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the lock device 215) by a stop shaft 703. be. By doing this, as shown in FIG. 628, the image display member 500 opens and closes together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200 as if it were an accessory part of the door-shaped front member 200, and the two members at that time open and close. The rod 702 of the connector 700 moves in and out of the fixed sheath 701 to absorb the relative displacement of motion.

The maximum projection length when the rod 702 protrudes most from the rotation outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is It is set based on the distance between the rotational outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (the position of the stop shaft 703 ) and the rotational outer edge of the image display member 500 . Therefore, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the coupler.

The stop shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, and 215b formed by bending a portion of the base member 215a of the lock device 215 so as to be vertically movable, and is always biased downward by a spring 703a. It is Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved upward against the force of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached and detached by moving upward to float the lower end. That is, it is possible to insert a stop shaft 703 from above into a shaft hole portion 702a formed at the tip portion of the rod 702 and hold it by the biasing force of a spring 703a.

629, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700. The rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is attached to the fixed sheath member 701. It is intended to be housed and held inside, and is engaged with a hook wall 702b at the end of a groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent blind movement of the rod 702. As shown in FIG. The rod 702 has a knob 706 protruding from its side surface in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction. By picking the knob 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702, the stopper 704 is unlocked. It's like A retaining piece 701a is suspended from the bottom surface of the fixed sheath member 701 on the distal end side and is inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702 . When the rod 702 protrudes most, the retaining piece 701a abuts against the hook wall 702b to prevent the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 629, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion projecting from the rear surface of the image display member 500 on the outer edge side of rotation. The engaging portion 509 engages with the reinforcing bar 402 crossing the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display member 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 600, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided with a slide-type guide portion 402a inclined downward toward the image display member 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. The engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is made of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably (exchangeably) attached to the image display body 500. there is

By the way, the relative displacement of the movement caused by the difference in the rotational trajectory between the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display member 500 can be reduced by using a flexible wire as well as the extendable rod type connector 700 as described above. can also be absorbed. However, if the connector is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will collide with the stopped image display member 500 while the door-shaped front member 200 is open when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, impairing smoothness. There is a risk. On the other hand, for example, an urging means such as a coil spring may be provided in the image display member 500 so as to always urge it in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image display member 500 pulls the connector by the action of the urging force and closes by itself, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display member 500 do not collide with each other. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display member 500 together is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge metal fitting 420, which is one element for co-rotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the double lever mechanism as described above, and is centered around a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. 630 and 631. It may be a simple one that rotates the image display body 500 .

The image display member 500 is attached to the case member 400 with a hinge structure so that the image display member 500 can be rotated like a door. When the above lock piece 421) is added, the case member 400 is kept locked in principle with the case member 400 attached to the outer body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling. In that case, the image display 500 can block important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the sub-board 510) in the wiring work space 408, which is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. .

A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500 . It is designed to be grasped. In addition, a handle opening 422 is formed in the front central portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (the reinforcing band 444 between the skylight portions 443 and 443), and the top plate 406 can be grasped with a finger passed through the handle opening 422. A reinforcing member 407 is provided for gripping. Therefore, the case member 400 can use the handle opening 422 and the gap 10 properly depending on the place and posture to be handled. For example, when transporting the case member 400 before incorporating it into the outer body 100, it is better to use the handle 422 to carry it in the form of a bag for better balance. As described above, the handle 422 is hidden behind the outer body 100 and fingers cannot be put into it. A lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 593 and 600) of the apparatus case 302 protrudes from the front center of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. By holding the lower handle 316 and pushing or pulling it, the outer body 100 can be opened. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integral with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with screws. equal to

[5-4. Image display body - frame member]
The image display member 500 has a size that covers almost the entire area above the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400 . A frame member 501 is integrally hung from the lower side of the image display member 500. The frame member 501 encloses the region below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, the front region of the variable pattern display device 300 in a frame shape. The reels 301 a , 301 b , 301 c of the variable symbol display device 300 are framed by the frame member 501 . The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface on which a suitable pattern or the like is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 includes a light-emitting source such as an LED, a light-emitting control board for controlling the light-emitting source, and a decorative member arranged in front of the light-emitting source and capable of transmitting light. department is provided. Here, a combination of the image display member 500 and the frame member 501 will be described below as a front opening/closing member 90 (see FIG. 633).

[5-4-1. Image display body - frame member - lighting device]
Lighting devices 502 are provided on the upper and lower sides of the back side of the frame member 501, and the patterns of the pattern variation display device 300 are illuminated brightly by the lighting devices 502. FIG. Since the frame member 501 is vertically installed under the image display body 500 and is close to the variable pattern display device 300, the light source can be brought closer to the variable pattern display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 into the frame member 501. can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 is characterized in that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low amount of light compared to the conventional lighting device.

A lighting device 502 exemplified as an embodiment is, as shown in FIG. A large number of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged in 503, and the lower lighting device 502 has LEDs 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is covered with, for example, a milky-white translucent cover plate 505. On the other hand, the upper illumination device 502 is arranged with an LED 504 facing downward inside a translucent cover 507 having an upward U-shaped cross section and having, for example, a milky white color.

The lighting device 502 on the upper side is installed obliquely downward toward the player side, ie, the transparent plate 214a side from right below, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is changed so that the center line L (see the enlarged view of FIG. 593) of the main irradiation area of the LED 504 having relatively strong directivity is directed obliquely to the transparent plate 214a. It is inclined obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

Also, if a rod-shaped light emitter such as a fluorescent lamp is adopted as the light source of the illumination device 502, the substrate 503 in FIG. The center line of the main irradiation area, which is directed by the total sum of the reflected light, may be set so as to obliquely hit the rear surface of the transparent plate 214a. If the illumination target of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a as described above, even if part of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, there is almost no effect.

According to experiments, when the illumination direction of the illumination device 502 is directed toward the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, specific portions of the curved reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are strongly reflected, making it difficult to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is directed obliquely with respect to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are illuminated through the transparent plate 214a. It was confirmed that a wide range became bright and easy to see. The reason for this is that the light emitted from the illumination device 502 strikes the transparent plate 214a fitted in the see-through window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused throughout, or the transparent plate 214a is brightly illuminated, It is presumed that a wide range of 301b and 301c appears bright or that it is due to their synergistic action.

The structure of the upper lighting device 502 as described above can also be adopted for the lower lighting device 502, and of course it can also be adopted only for the lower lighting device 502 as shown in FIG. In FIG. 621, the lighting device 502 on the upper side of FIG. 593 is arranged on the lower side, and the lighting device 502 on the lower side is arranged on the upper side. , and "lower" should be read as "upper".

By the way, when an LED is adopted as the light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) it is driven at a low voltage, so the conventional LED is driven at a high voltage (for example, about 800 V at start-up and about 600 V at operation). (b) has a longer life than cold-cathode tubes; (c) is more durable than cold-cathode tubes, which are glass tubes; (e) it is lighter than a cold cathode tube used in combination with an inverter, so that the load on the hinge fitting 420 supporting the image display body 500 is reduced.

[6. Wiring means]
For example, the medal release device 110 and the power supply device 112 attached to the outer main body 100, and for example the insertion buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 on the operation portion 202 of the door-shaped front member 200 (hereinafter collectively referred to simply as " ) and, for example, the main substrate 409 in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as "case member side electric parts" as a general term for the electric parts on the case member side). properly connected. In the slot machine 1 of the embodiment, since the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 633 and 634) consisting of the front opening/closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer main body 100, replacement of the model unit 50, etc. is possible. At this time, a rational wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the body-side electric parts (housing-side electric parts) and the case-side electric parts.

[6-1. Wiring means-wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 593 and 594, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. there is The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of connector boards (two large and one small in the embodiment) housed between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120 (hereinafter referred to as 122 and 123, which may also be referred to as a "connector connection terminal board".

Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. A connector 124 paired with a connector 425 at the tip of a harness 424 is provided.

On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 1, it can move vertically and can also move horizontally. This small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 paired with a connector 427 at the tip of a harness 426 connected to the case member side electric parts other than the main board 409 . The connector 125 and the connector 124 are of a substrate-fixing type that are fixed to the printed circuit board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standard connectors are used.

A cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support tube 128 protruding horizontally from the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. and a tunnel-like wiring duct 129 projecting forward.

The body-side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 passes through the wiring duct 129 or is bundled with a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 projecting from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. 590, it is distributed to the side plates 102, 102 of the outer body 100 as shown by the one-dot chain line L in FIG. The wiring openings 109 provided at the back of the partition plate 105 are connected to the electrical components on the main body side, respectively. Of course, if there is a body-side electrical part (for example, an external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. Connected as is.

The following technical idea can be grasped from the wiring means explained so far.

(a) The rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is provided with a horizontal plane passing through the center of rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the variable symbol display device 300 and a horizontal plane passing through the highest position of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. A wiring window 411 is formed at a height at which the lower side of .

(b) A wiring relay member 113 is installed on the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 to relay the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts.
(c) A vertical wiring path is formed along the inner surfaces of the side plates 102 of the outer body 100 for the wiring to pass through.
(d) Lead the body-side wirings 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 to the side of the case member 400, and connect them to the body-side electrical components through the wiring path from there.

In the gaming machine having the components (a) to (d) above, the body-side wiring 119 does not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer body 100 do not pass. Since the wiring path provided along (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 599)) is detoured, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. , Compared to the conventional configuration, that is, the main body side wiring 119 descending approximately the center of the back plate 104 and passing behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the diameters of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are reduced. You can make it bigger. It should be noted that the larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the impact during rotation.

[6-2. wiring means-connectors 425, 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include a connector 425 at the end of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and a case member side other than the main board 409 . Connectors 427 at the ends of harnesses 426 connected to electrical components are connected respectively.

These two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, plate-like attachment pieces 431 having a through hole 430 in the approximate center and protruding from both sides of the holder main body 429, and and a well-known button-shaped panel fastener 432 (trade name "Nairatch": registered trademark) attached to the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, and the wiring relay member 113 as shown in FIGS. A mounting piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and a button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the mounting piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Therefore, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support tube 128, which is the fixing means, and is also fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 are not disconnected.

[6-2-1. Wiring relay board-connectors 425, 427-temporary fixing shelf]
The connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113 as described above. 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400 .

594, 595, 601, and 602, the temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf plate-like member facing the wiring window 411 from the inside of the case member 400, and is shown in FIG. A substantially horizontal bench portion 433 on which the connector holder 428 is placed, bench side plates 434 erected on both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inward claw pieces 435, 435 projecting from each bench side plate 434. , 435. Between the central one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 and the other two upper and lower claws, there is a space for fitting the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428. As shown in FIG. One bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure with a finger hook portion 436 extending from its tip. It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily removed from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 in the warped state. The imaginary line in FIG. 597(a) shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook 436 is bent into a key shape. I can do it comfortably.

Then, as shown in FIG. 595, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435, 435, 435 of the side plate 434 of the bench. The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 by fitting between the 435 . Of course, even though it is temporarily fixed, the connector holder 428 is set to have sufficient strength to prevent the connector holder 428 from being detached from the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400. The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the ends of the harnesses 424 and 426 hit the parts inside the case member 400, There is no danger of damaging itself.

Then, as shown in FIG. 597(b)→FIG. 597(a), in the wiring process after fixing the case member 400 to the outer main body 100, one bench side plate 434 is warped outward as described above. If the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where its mounting piece 431 abuts on the support tube 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connector of the wiring relay member 113. 124 and 125 (details of which will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in in that state to lock the attachment piece 431 to the support cylinder 128 . 594 and 595, if a guide rail 440 for guiding is provided on the bench portion 433, the connector holder 428 can be simply pushed inward, which improves workability. improves.

The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 as a support base, and is separated from the case member so that it does not come into contact with the outer body due to vibration during transportation. Even if the 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, no unreasonable load is applied.

From the explanation so far, the following technical ideas can be grasped.
(a) a box-shaped outer body with an open front and a back panel covering the back, and equipped with a power supply and other electrical parts on the body side;
(b) a model unit provided with a case member that is detachable from the outer main body and provided with a pattern change display device for changing a plurality of patterns and other electric parts on the case member side;

(c) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body for relaying body-side wiring connected to the body-side electrical component and case-side wiring connected to the case member-side electrical component;
(d) a connector attached to the tip of the case-side wiring;
(e) a connector holder attached to the connector;
(f) a temporary fixing member provided on the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder;

(g) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) temporarily fixing the connector holder to the temporary fixing member before the model unit is attached to the outer body. (i) a gaming machine characterized in that the connector holder is replaced with a fixing means from a temporary fixing member in a state that the model unit is attached to the outer body, and the connector of the connector holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

In the game machine described above, the attachment of the model unit 50 to the outer body 100 and the connection of the connectors are performed separately. , a system in which the connectors are automatically connected by the operation of pushing the model unit 50 into the outer body 100. FIG. However, in this method, if the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation, a large load is applied to the connector coupling portion, so there is a problem of reliability, and a countermeasure is costly. be.

The gaming machine of the present invention has a structure in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. In contrast, a game machine is also conceivable in which the door-shaped front member is divided into two stages, upper and lower, and the upper door-shaped front member is used as a component on the model unit 50 side. However, in such a game machine, when an excited player hits the upper door-shaped front member during a game, a direct impact is applied to the connector connection portion, which may cause the connection of the connector to become unstable. There is a problem that a new crime prevention structure is required for the seams between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a structure in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-shaped front member 200. Further, After connecting the connector holder 428 to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is combined with the part (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer body 100 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even if a low-cost general connector that is soldered to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transport or during play. Moreover, since only the model unit 50 is to be replaced when the model is changed, and the door-shaped front member 200 is not to be replaced, the load on the game hall for changing the model is reduced.

[6-2-2. Coupling of Connectors 425, 427 and Connectors 124, 125]
The connectors 425 and 427 are attached to one connector holder 428 as described above. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 at a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113 . However, as a practical matter, the structure in which the independent elements of the two connectors 425, 427 and the connector holder 428 are brought together and integrated into one body poses a difficult problem of "precise positioning" of the connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125. encounter. That is, unless the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is accurate, the connectors 425, 124 and the connectors 427, 125 cannot be collectively connected. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of a mass-produced product. As a means of solving such problems, it is possible to use a so-called drawer connector, which has a mechanism for increasing flexibility during connection without soldering to the printed circuit board, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 serving as the board supporting member are divided, the connectors 124 and 125 are mounted respectively, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is used for wiring. A direction orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (here, "perpendicular" is not limited to strictly 90 degrees). , which means about 90 degrees in socially accepted terms). In such a configuration, when the connector holder 428 is aimed at the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative positions of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves to compensate for the deviation. Due to the corrective movement, the connection between connector 427 and connector 125 is also possible.

In the amusement machine described above, if the connector holder is operated while aiming at the connector on the terminal board for connecting the connector, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative positions of the other connectors due to manufacturing errors or the like, Since the non-fixed connector connecting terminal board floats together with the connector and moves to correct the misalignment and absorbs the error, it is possible to connect connectors to each other without alignment. Therefore, it is possible to collectively connect a plurality of systems of connectors using one connector holder. Moreover, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive connector that is soldered to a printed circuit board, for example, a DIN standard connector, and the cost is also low.

Further, the connector holder is securely fixed to the wiring relay member and, by extension, to the back plate of the outer main body via the wiring relay member by fixing means such as Nairatch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via a flexible harness, and even if the model unit moves, the flexible harness absorbs the movement, so the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder. . Therefore, even if there is relative movement between the outer body and the model unit due to vibrations during transportation, the connector holder moves together with the outer body and is not interfered with by the model unit, so the connector can be connected. No load on the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector coupling is very high.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is allowed to float and the large connector 425 and the connector 124 are set as the reference for coupling the connectors 425 and 124 are compared to the opposite configuration. , 427 and 125 can be easily combined. This is because the smaller connector board 123 can be handled with less force, and automatic correction of misalignment is easier. Also, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 598, the connectors 425 and 124 are connected before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors can easily be aligned with each other.

Further, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 598, a chamfered portion C ( By forming a chamfer (either a straight chamfer or a curved chamfer), the guiding action along the taper of the chamfer C improves the connection between the connectors.

In addition to the configuration in which the connector substrates 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are movable as in the embodiment, either one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side can be made movable. , the same effect as described above can be obtained in that case as well. A specific example of such a connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, a holder main body 429 of a connector holder 428 is provided with a receiving tube 429a having an internal thread. A loose hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted in the connector 427, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move relative to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the free hole 427a and the receiving tube 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be integrated and fixed to the mounting plate 120 . Moreover, although two connectors are treated as one connector group in the embodiment, the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

In the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 593 and 601, the back side of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the variable pattern display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438 , 438 penetrating the side plate 404 (or the rear plate 405 ) of the case member 400 are formed near both ends of the cable groove 437 . The wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the variable pattern display device 300 and the main board 409, etc. In FIG. The cable 313 (see FIG. 601) of the reel board 312 provided on the non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 is pulled out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is connected as shown in FIG. The cable 313 is housed in the cable groove 437, and the end of the cable 313 is returned into the case member 400 from another wiring port 438 and connected to the main substrate 409 and the like. Cable stoppers 439 are provided at predetermined intervals in the cable groove 437 so that the cable 313 does not drop out of the cable groove 437 .

Thus, the main board 409 and the like and the reel board 312 are both case-member-side electrical components inside the case member 400, and originally, there is no need to pull out the cable 313 out of the case member 400. FIG. The reason why the case member 400 is purposely provided with the wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 to allow the cable 313 to detour around is as follows.

Considering the workability of wiring for inserting and removing the connector in a limited space, the installation location of the reel board 312 is the non-hinged side of the door-shaped front member 200 among the side surfaces of the variable pattern display device 300 (device case 302). is preferred. If, on the contrary, the reel board 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the fully opened door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 590) and the reel board 312 are in close proximity. This is because, since they face each other, it is not possible to secure a large working space necessary for inserting/removing the connector.

On the other hand, however, if the connection portion of the boards (main board 409, sub-board 510, image display 500, etc.) to which the reel board 312 is to be connected is located on the side of the case member 400 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front face member 200, , the cable 313 traverses the interior of the case member 400 . As a result, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is pulled out.

On the other hand, if the wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 are provided in the case member 400 so that the cable 313 is detoured outwardly as in the embodiment, the trouble of the cable 313 as described above does not occur. In addition, the wiring work is more efficient when the device case 302 is slightly pulled out from a predetermined position. There is room to speak. Therefore, the cable 313 is slackened when the device case 302 is set at a predetermined position, and the slackness of the cable 313 increases depending on the amount of pulling out. If the cable 313 has a large amount of slack, the cable 313 is placed in the triangular space created between the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 and the corner portion of the case member 400 at the far end of the case member 400 , which is horizontally aligned with the wiring port 438 . The loose part of the can be released.

Further, when the cable groove 437 is bulged toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, the space between the inner part of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 is provided. Useful for effective use of dead space. The wiring using the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 need not be limited to the cable 313 of the reel substrate 312, and can be applied to all cables crossing the inside of the case member 400.

In addition, reference numeral 441 in FIG. 600 denotes a functional separation relay terminal board.

The slot machine 1 constructed as described above is shipped from the factory in the state of a finished product in which the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the game hall as it is. At this time, as shown in the imaginary line in FIG. When fixing with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display member 500 are opened, the fixing member 601 is inserted through the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 from the inside of the case member 400 through the skylight portion 443, and furthermore, The fixing member 601 is tightened through the skylight portion 443 with a tool 602 such as a screwdriver to fixedly connect the top board 103 of the outer body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the game machine installation island. Since a plurality of through holes 132 are provided, any one of them can be selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper crosspiece 600 vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper crosspiece 600 can be selected. Also, if the through-hole 132 to be used is changed when the game machine is completely replaced, it is possible to prevent the harmful effect of opening the fixing member 601 at the same position of the upper rail 600 (so-called hollowing).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 614, a gap S is formed between the outer body 100 and the case member 400, and heat generated from the image display body 500 and the like is transferred to a cooling fan (not shown) of the image display body 500. , from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400, through the gap S, to the vent 133 of the back plate 104, and from there to the inside of the game machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier and closes the gap S in a wide range. The air is positively released to the outside from the air vent 133 of the back plate 104 located higher. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[7. Symbols of each reel, symbol row]
As shown in FIG. 635, each reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a pattern row (a total of 21 symbols shown with array numbers 0 to 20), which is composed of a plurality of types of symbols arranged at regular intervals. A reel band (pattern band) with a symbol) is attached. FIG. 635 shows a state in which the pattern rows written on the respective reel bands 321a, 321b, 321c attached to the respective reels 301a, 301b, 301c are developed in a plane. In order to identify the symbols arranged in the symbol row, the above array numbers are written for convenience. In FIG. 635, the reel 301a to which the reel band 321a is attached is shown as the left reel, the reel 301b to which the reel band 321b is attached as the middle reel, and the reel 301c to which the reel band 321c is attached as the right reel. , the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are referred to as necessary.

Each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged in each symbol row. 636 (see FIG. 636 described below).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 635, the types of patterns are "red '7' pattern (hereinafter referred to as 'red 7 pattern')" and "blue '7' pattern (hereinafter referred to as 'red 7 pattern'). Blue 7 design)”, “BAR design”, “Cherry design with cherry design”, “Watermelon design with watermelon design”, “Replay design”, “Bell design” "Bell pattern", "Pattern written as "righteousness" (hereinafter referred to as "righteous design")", "Pattern written as "positive" (hereinafter referred to as "positive design") " be. Depending on the number of stars drawn in the bell, the bell design can be divided into "bell 1 design" with one star and "bell 2 design" with two stars. can.

In FIG. 635, there are two "red 7 patterns" of array numbers 3 and 6 on the reel band 321a, one of array number 12 on the reel band 321b, and one of array number 10 on the reel band 321c. One corresponds. The "Blue 7 pattern" corresponds to one arrangement number 16 for the reel band 321a, one arrangement number 3 for the reel band 321b, and one arrangement number 15 for the reel band 321c. The "BAR pattern" corresponds to one of arrangement number 11 for the reel band 321a, two arrangement numbers 6 and 9 for the reel band 321b, and one arrangement number 2 for the reel band 321c. "Cherry pattern" is one of array number 10 for reel band 321a, three array numbers 1, 14, and 17 for reel band 321b, and array numbers 7 and 14 for reel band 321c. corresponds to two. There are five "replay symbols" of array numbers 1, 4, 7, 12 and 17 for the reel band 321a, and array numbers 0, 5, 8, 11 and 11 for the reel band 321b. The five array numbers 1, 5, 8, 13, and 17 correspond to the reel band 321c. "Bell 1 pattern" has three array numbers 13, 15, and 18 for the reel band 321a, and five array numbers 2, 7, 10, 15, and 18 for the reel band 321b. , array numbers 9, 12 and 16 correspond to the reel band 321c. "Bell 2 pattern" corresponds to three array numbers 2, 5 and 8 in the reel band 321a, and two array numbers 0 and 4 in the reel band 321c. There are three "watermelon patterns" of arrangement numbers 9, 14 and 19 for the reel band 321a, two arrangement numbers 4 and 13 for the reel band 321b, and arrangement number 3 for the reel band 321c.・The 6th, 11th, and 20th numbers correspond. The "right pattern" corresponds to one arrangement number 20 for the reel band 321a, one arrangement number 19 for the reel band 321b, and one arrangement number 18 for the reel band 321c. "Regular pattern" corresponds to one of array number 0 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 18 in the reel band 321c. It should be noted that the types of symbols are only examples, and are not limited to these types.

[8. frame member]
FIG. 636 shows an enlarged view centering around the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401 in the slot machine 1 viewed from the front. According to FIG. 636, a pattern display window 401 is formed in the central portion of the frame member 501, and around the pattern display window 401 are a plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs (corresponding to "various indicators" to be described later). are shown to be placed. Part of the three reels (reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is made visible through the symbol display window 401. FIG. In addition, it is shown that the effect display surface of the image display body 500 is arranged above the frame member 501, and the image and the like (including moving images) displayed on the image display body 500 can be visually recognized by the player. It's becoming Below, each of the above configurations shown in FIG. 636 will be described in detail.

[8-1. Pattern display window]
As shown in FIG. 636, from the symbol display window 401, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol rows of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are visible. The three positions where this pattern is displayed are, from the top, "upper row (or upper row position)" (for example, the position where "Bell 1 pattern" of reel 301a is displayed), "middle row (or middle row position)" (for example, , the position where the "replay symbol" of the reel 301b is displayed), and the "lower stage (or lower stage position)" (for example, the position where the "Bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301c is displayed).

From the above, in the symbol display window 401, it is possible to display "the number of stages.times.the number of reels" of symbols. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of 9 symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 by "the number of stages (3).times.the number of reels (3)".

Various lamps are provided at the left end of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, hereinafter referred to as the display panel 501) (on the left side when viewed from the pattern display window 401). , "BET3" is the BET lamp (BET lamp) 614. The BET lamp numbers (numbers 1, 2, and 3 of the above "BET1", "BET2", and "BET3") are Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets, the number corresponding to the number of medals bet): "1" is one bet (the number of medals bet is one), "2" 2 bet (the number of medals bet is 2), and "3" corresponds to 3 bet (also called MAX bet, the number of medals bet is 3).

A valid arrangement is determined according to the number of bets. This "valid row" is also called a valid line. Hereinafter, it will be collectively referred to as an effective line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is judged to be displayed as a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one effective line. That is, even if each symbol constituting a symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, each symbol must not be aligned on any of the activated lines (i.e., a predetermined winning combination). If the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not aligned on the activated line), it will not be determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination has been displayed. In this way, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not arranged on the activated line, it is judged that the combination mode of the symbols (that is, the combination of the missing symbols) has been displayed.

Next, the number of bets and the pay line will be specifically described. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an example, in principle, it is prescribed or recommended that the game be played with 3 coins (the prescribed number is 3). However, in the bonus state, the game is played with two coins (the prescribed number is two). Also, the activated lines in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment are two lines, namely, a linear line extending upward to the right (ascending line) and a linear line extending downward to the right (lower right line). Specifically, in the pattern display window 401 in FIG. are displayed (that is, the lines 623a falling to the right) are the only valid lines.

Note that the number of bets and pay lines are not limited to the above examples. For example, the effective line may be a line visible to the player in the symbol display window 401, and may be, for example, a line of one or more straight lines, a mountain-shaped line, a V-shaped line, or the like. Also, the number of valid lines is not limited to two, and one or more valid lines may be set. Further, the number of effective lines may be changed according to the number of medals bet in the game.

The combination of the symbols on the activated line displayed in the symbol display window 401 in FIG. 636 is "Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" displayed on the lower right line 623a which is one of the activated lines. Since this combination of symbols is a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination (replay combination), in the next game, an automatic bet is made without inserting medals, and the same game as the previous game is executed again. It becomes possible to Even if "Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" is displayed on the active line, it is difficult for the player to grasp at a glance which combination of symbols is displayed. However, by displaying the symbol combination of ``replay symbol--replay symbol--replay symbol'' on the middle line which is not the active line, the player can understand that the player has won the replay. As with the above-mentioned replay combination (replay combination), it is possible to prepare a symbol combination in which it is difficult to grasp the established combination at first glance on the activated line, but it is difficult to grasp the established combination when viewed from the entire symbol display window 401. As for the symbol combinations for other winning combinations, similar symbol combinations may be prepared. At this time, even if it is difficult to grasp the winning combination at first sight only from the activated line, when viewed from the entire symbol display window 401, the winning combination of the winning combination (symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the activated line). It is possible for the player to easily grasp what has been done.

[8-2. Various indicators]
As shown in FIG. 636, the display panel 501 has lighting (or A plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs capable of blinking are arranged. Various indicators other than the special display LED 612 among such a plurality of indicators will be described.

The error lamp 604 starts lighting (or flashing) when some trouble, failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as an "error") occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, indicating that an error is currently occurring. This is a lamp that has the role of informing the players (including hall staff) of the status. In FIG. 636, near the error lamp 604, the characters “ERR” are drawn to abbreviate the error. Since it is difficult to indicate the details of the error only by lighting or blinking the error lamp 604, the slot machine 1 can display information indicating the details of the error that has occurred on the separately provided special display LED 612. .

The section display lamp 605 starts lighting (or blinking) when the number-of-games management process, which will be described later, is started, and turns off when the number-of-games management process ends. In other words, the section display lamp 605 is a lamp that has a role of informing the players (including hall staff) that the number of games is being managed. The lighting (or blinking) of the section display lamp 605 may be started at any timing within the game in which the game number management process is started. "In the game where the game number management process has started" means the period from when the start lever 210 is operated to when game media (medals, credit data) can be inserted to execute the next game (game If the result of the game in which the number management process is started is a replay, it corresponds to the period until an automatic bet is made. For example, when a special winning combination is selected in an internal lottery, there are a plurality of modes including a mode in which game media can be inserted immediately, and a mode in which so-called freeze processing is performed and game media can be inserted after several seconds. It may be determined with a predetermined probability in one of the modes. In the case of a mode in which a game medium can be inserted several seconds after a so-called freeze process is performed, a liquid crystal effect or a reel effect is performed during the so-called freeze process to make the player expect that the number-of-games management process will start. A stimulating performance may be performed. The conditions for starting the number-of-games management process will be described later.

The replay lamp 606 has a role of informing the player that the game can be played again (the game can be played again without betting new medals) when the game result is replay (described later). In FIG. 636 , characters “REP” are drawn near the replay lamp 606 to abbreviate replay.

The start lamp 608 is a lamp that starts lighting (or blinking) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet, and has a role of prompting the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation). In FIG. 636, the character “STR” is drawn near the start lamp 608 for abbreviation of start.

The medal IN lamp 610 is a lamp that has a role of prompting the player to bet by continuously lighting (or blinking) until the number of bets reaches the maximum (MAX bet). In FIG. 636, characters “INS” are drawn near the medal IN lamp 610 for abbreviation of insert (insertion of game value).

The accumulated number display LED 613 displays the accumulated number of medals (gaming value) that can be used by the player by inserting medals by the player or paying out medals according to the game result. This is a display that serves to inform the player of the number of accumulated medals, and is composed of two horizontally arranged 7-segment LEDs (the left is a reserved number display LED 613a and the right is a reserved number display LED 613b). For example, when the upper limit of the number of medals that can be used by the player is set to 50 and the upper limit number is reserved, "5" is displayed in the reserved number display LED 613a and the reserved number display LED 613b is displayed. By displaying "0", the number of accumulated medals of "50" is displayed so as to be identifiable by the player.

BET lamps 614 (614a to 614c) indicate the number of BETs when a BET operation is performed to bet medals (gaming value) up to a prescribed number before the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game. The indicator has a role of informing the number of bets (BET number) of the game value in one game by displaying, and is composed of three lamps corresponding to the BET number. Specifically, when the number of BETs is 1, the BET lamp 614c is lit, and when the number of BETs is 2, the BET lamp 614b is lit in addition to the BET lamp 614c, and the maximum number of BETs is 3 (MAXBET). Then, when the BET lamp 614a is lit, all the BET lamps 614a to 614c are lit.

It is assumed that the displays of these displays described above are controlled by the main substrate 409 (see FIG. 637 described later).

In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp that notifies the winning of the bonus game, which will be described later, and a 7-segment LED that displays the cumulative number of medals paid out in the bonus game, etc., and counts the bonus game, etc. are separately provided. good too.

Further, the indicators such as the stored number display LED 613 and the special indicator LED 612 (described later) are not limited to the 7-segment LEDs as long as the information to be displayed by the indicators can be displayed. For example, the number of segments may be different from "7" (14 segments or 16 segments), and instead of LEDs, LCDs (liquid crystal displays), VFDs (VFDs), organic ELs, etc. may be used. may

[8-3. Special display LED]
The special display LED 612 has a role of displaying the number of payouts to notify the player of the number of payouts of the game value by displaying the number of payouts when there is a payout of medals (game value) associated with the game result. The display is composed of two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs (left side special display LED 612a, right side special display LED 612b). Specifically, a two-digit number can be displayed using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b, and when 15 medals are paid out according to the game result, the medals are paid out one by one. At the same time, by changing the display contents such as "01", "02", ..., "15", it is possible to inform the player of the payout state of the game value (medals) in real time.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 has a role of indicating instruction function for displaying instruction contents by the "instruction function" in the game, in addition to the role of displaying the number of payouts. Details of the "instruction function" will be described later, but as an overview, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that an instruction is issued by the "instruction function" when a predetermined condition is met, the special display LED 612 , information indicating the pressed positions and stop order of the reels 301a to 301c (which can be read as the pressed order and pressed positions of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the stop operation) etc. is displayed as an instruction function display, and according to the content of the display When the reel 301 is stopped, a game result advantageous to the player is provided.

In addition, in the instruction function, the performance that affects the generation of instructions (specifically, the lottery related to the instruction function, management of state transitions, etc.) is controlled by the main board 409. Specifically, the lottery related to the instruction function The main board 409 manages not only the control of state transitions, but also the indication function display on the special display LED 612 . On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the result of determination by the main substrate 409, a display means other than the display destination of the instruction function display (for example, the image display 500) can also instruct the instruction function of the same content. can also be displayed, such display may be controlled by a peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) other than the main board 409. FIG. The connection relationship between the special display LED 612, the main board 409, and the sub-board 510 is illustrated in FIG.

To explain with a specific example, when a small combination of pushing order (in this example, any of "Bell 1 of pushing order" to "Bell 6 of pushing order") is selected as a winning combination during the ART game, the main board 409 (especially Under the control of the CPU 1110), the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content of the "appropriate pushing order" corresponding to the winning small winning pushing order. Therefore, when the player understands the display contents of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612, the player can recognize the proper pressing order. On the other hand, when information similar to the display contents of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510 by a command or the like, the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 receiving the command It is possible to cause the image display 500 to display an image showing the "push order". A specific display example of the indication function display will be described later in [10-3-6].

In the slot machine 1, it is possible to display such an instruction function in such a manner that one of the display devices in the display panel 501 also serves the function (in this example, the special display LED 612 that displays the number of payouts is displayed). be done). In other words, the special display LED 612 displays the indication function and the number of payouts. By separating the respective display periods, for example, the two can be displayed without confusion. In this embodiment, the function of displaying the number of payouts is also used, but a display having other functions may also be used, or a display dedicated to displaying the instruction function may be provided.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error is detected as an abnormal state, the error lamp 604 lights up to notify the occurrence of the error, while the special display LED 612 can identify the type of the error. It also has the function of displaying error information on the The display timing of the instruction function display, the payout number display, and the error information display will be described later in [10-3-7] and the like.

[9. Internal configuration of the slot machine]
FIG. 637 schematically shows the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc., which are equipped in the slot machine 1. FIG. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for overall control of the progress of the game, and the main board 409 is mounted with a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input/output interface 1116, and the like. The main board 409 has a function of influencing the result of the game (acquisition of game value). RT state control means for controlling the RT state, ART first prize lottery means for performing the ART first prize lottery, a hell state when the number of games is not being managed, and a plurality of advantages when the number of games is being managed game state control means for controlling to any of the states; instruction function control means for executing control relating to whether or not to allow operation of the instruction function; number of games for managing the number of games played by the player It has game number management control means for executing management processing, payout control means for payout of medals as prizes based on winning combinations, and the like. Details of each of these means will be described later.

637, the slot machine 1 includes a door open detection switch for detecting the open state of the door-shaped front member 200, a storage release switch 209 (stored medal settlement switch), and a medal selector 207. Equipped with a lever detection sensor in the medal selector provided inside, and stop button LEDs (stop button LED_1, stop button LED_2, stop button LED_3) that can be lit around each of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. These configurations are controlled by the main board 409 .

The above-described one-sheet insertion buttons 205 and 206, the start lever 210, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, the retention release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons use sensors (not shown). can detect the operation by the player and output the detected operation signal to the main board 409 . Specifically, when the starting lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the variable symbol display device 300 (starting rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a is output. , 211b and 211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 301a, 301b and 301c are output to the main board 409 respectively.

The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are hereinafter referred to as left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c, respectively, as required. The corresponding reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c are called left reel stop button 211a, middle reel stop button 211b and right reel stop button 211c.

The slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main substrate 409, and various signals are input to the main substrate 409 from these devices. The devices include the symbol variation display device 300, the medal release device 110, and the like.

The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, right reel drive motor 341c). The reel drive motor is a stepping motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can rotate and stop independently. displayed while changing to

Position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c are provided for detecting reference positions for rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. (left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, the main board 409 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

Inside the medal selector 207, the above-described solenoid 207a and insertion sensor 207b are installed. The insertion sensor 207 b detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 409 . When the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state, inserted medals are detected by the inserted medals sensor 207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the path to the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out, and insertion of medals cannot be accepted. The medals flowing through the return gutter 213 return to the medal tray 201.例文帳に追加At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is also disabled, so that neither betting by inserting medals nor pooling of medals is performed.

The medal ejection device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the paid out medals one by one in the ejection port 110c. It is In addition, the game medal auxiliary storage box 111 is provided with a medal full sensor 111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds the predetermined number is output to the main board. output to 409. At this time, the image display 500, the special display LED 612, the error lamp 604, and the like display an error indicating an abnormality in the accumulation of medals, thereby notifying the player, hall staff, etc. of the abnormality (Fig. 681 described later). Equivalent to the "auxiliary storage full error" shown in ).

On the other hand, from the main substrate 409, control signals are output to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal release device 110. FIG. That is, the main board 409 outputs drive pulse signals for controlling the start and stop of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c. In addition, the medal ejection device 110 receives a drive signal from the main substrate 409 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and upon receipt of this, the medal ejection device 110 pays out medals. At this time, if the medal release device 110 does not have enough medals to be paid out, or if there are no medals at all, the detection of the number of medals by the payout sensor 110e will be delayed. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has passed, the payout sensor 110e outputs a signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the payout of medals to the main board 409. In response to this signal, the main board 409 notifies that an error has occurred in the payout of medals. The content to be notified is displayed on the error lamp 604, the special display LED 612, the image display body 500, etc., and the occurrence of an abnormality is notified to the player, hall staff, etc. equivalent). The main substrate 409 and various indicators (error lamp 604, start lamp 608, special display LED 612, stored number display LED 613, etc.) are connected by harnesses, for example, and the main substrate 409 is connected to each of these indicators via corresponding ports. It is possible to operate the lighting and display in

The slot machine 1 includes a sub-board 510 as a peripheral board different from the main board 409. The sub-board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input/output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, an AMP (audio An amplifier) 1126, a sound source IC 1128, and the like are mounted. The sub board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409 and controls the display of the image display 500 , light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 502 and the operation of the speaker 512 .

Furthermore, when the main board 409 is provided with an external relay terminal board 131, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game arcade via this external relay terminal board 131. FIG. The external relay terminal board 131 has a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, paid-out medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main substrate 409 to the hall computer 1200 . It should be noted that the connection configuration in FIG. 637 is merely an example of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main substrate 409 but also peripheral substrates other than the main substrate 409 (for example, the sub substrate 510) may be connected to the external relay terminal plate 131. Various signals can be transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131 from various boards connected to the relay terminal board 131 and output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131 . Specifically, various game information managed by the sub-board 510 and emergency information that can be managed by the sub-board 510 (for example, error information that notifies malfunctions and troubles of component parts of the slot machine 1) are stored in the hall. It becomes possible to output to the computer 1200 .

In addition, the power supply device 112 is attached with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1, and can be operated only when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened. Among these, the power switch 112v is for turning ON/OFF the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for setting values (settings 1 to 6, for example) among a plurality of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) with different probability of winning a role. , and is configured so that hall officials can change from one set value to another set value. The reset switch 112u is used to clear an error that has occurred in the slot machine 1, and is operated together with the setting key switch 112t when changing settings. Note that these switches described above may be installed on the main board 409 .

The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1 . In the game using the slot machine 1, when the player operates the starting lever 210 after deciding the number of medals to bet, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c rotate, and then the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c. is operated, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c are controlled to stop, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the active line, and if necessary Accordingly, the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded. However, since the number of sliding frames is determined when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated, the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line is determined when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated. . Therefore, the game result may be determined when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are operated instead of judging the game result from the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line.

As described above, reel strips 321a, 321b and 321c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b and 301c, respectively (see FIG. 635). Then, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed in the symbol display window 401 (combination of symbols displayed on the activated line). It is determined whether or not a combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, in the symbol display window 401, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the aforementioned effective lines (the upward right line 623b and the downward right line 623a).

In this example, it is explained that there are two activated lines, but if the slot machine 1 has a plurality of activated lines, symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations are displayed on each of the plurality of activated lines. It is determined whether there is As a result, when it is determined that a plurality of winning combinations of symbols are displayed, the amount of medals to be paid out corresponding to each displayed winning combination is added up. In the slot machine 1, a predetermined number (for example, 15) can be defined as the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out per time (9 in this embodiment). In such a case, if the total number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination displayed on multiple activated lines exceeds the upper limit, the predetermined number of medals of the upper limit will be paid out and the upper limit will be exceeded. Minutes are truncated. In addition, the amount exceeding the upper limit value is not paid out by dividing it into the next and subsequent games.

In the following, a case where a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the activated lines will be described as a combination of symbols corresponding to a (predetermined) winning combination (this is referred to as a winning combination symbol). It is said that the combinations are complete, or that the symbols for the winning role are complete.

The symbols of the slot machine 1 include “red 7 symbols”, “blue 7 symbols”, “BAR symbol”, “cherry symbol”, “replay symbol”, “bell 1 symbol”, “bell 2 symbol”, and “watermelon symbol”. , ``right pattern'' and ``regular pattern''. The pattern is easy to understand and easy to identify. The easiness of identification as used herein refers to the degree to which the player can easily identify the symbols while the reels are rotating or when the reels are stopped. These symbols can be easily stopped in the symbol display window 401 so that the symbols are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player performs the stop operation because of the colors and the size of the symbols even while the reels are rotating. (that is, it is easy to see). Furthermore, as can be seen from Fig. 635, ``right pattern'' and ``right pattern'' can also be read as ``justice'' in the form of two patterns forming a circle. , and only one is arranged in each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, so that it is easy to spot.

These patterns are only symbolic patterns (only one pattern does not correspond to a winning combination), but when they are combined in a predetermined manner, they become a combination of patterns corresponding to a winning combination. . That is, a predetermined game privilege is provided. The combinations of symbols allowed for each winning combination shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 will be described below.

[9-1. Combination of winning role and design]
Winning combinations (including winning combinations) and corresponding symbol combinations in the internal lottery executed by the internal lottery execution means will now be described with reference to FIGS. 638-643. FIG. 638 is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for a winning combination when the setting is 1. FIG. FIG. 639 is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery for the winning combination when the setting is 2. FIG. FIG. 640 is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery for the winning combination when the setting is 3. FIG. FIG. 641 is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for a winning combination when the setting is 4. FIG. FIG. 642 is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for a winning combination when the setting is 5. FIG. FIG. 643 is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for a winning combination when the setting is 6. FIG. The lottery tables (also called hit value determination tables) shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 are stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like. In the slot machine 1, internal lottery execution means of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 executes an internal lottery, which will be described later in detail.

[9-1-1. Overview of instruction function]
It is assumed that the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, which will be described below, has, as an example of a function provided in a game machine, an instruction function using a small win in the order of pressing. As for the push order bells 1 to 6, the matching bell pattern can be displayed only when the order in which the reel stop buttons 211 are operated is proper. In a gaming machine having an instruction function, the ART first-hit lottery executed by the ART first-hit lottery means of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the first ART hit is successful.

When the ART first prize lottery is won, the ART game is started. In the ART game, the reels are stopped according to the instruction by instructing the proper pushing order that can expect the largest number of medals to be paid out, mainly when the pushing order bells 1 to 6 are selected as the winning combination in the internal lottery. To enable a player who has performed an operation to acquire many medals. On the other hand, during a game period other than the ART game (non-ART), the instruction of the above-described order of pushing is not performed, so that it is possible to make it unreliable to obtain medals in the proper order of pushing, and medals are awarded for each game state. It can bring about a difference in the expected number of medals to be acquired and the consumption pace of medals. Such an instruction function is an example of a function that the slot machine 1 has, and detailed processing thereof will be described later.

Further, to supplement the pressing order, since the slot machine 1 uses three reels 301a to 301c, the pressing order (the order in which the reels 301 are stopped) is "left-middle-right", "left- There are six patterns: right-middle, middle-left-right, middle-right-left, right-left-middle, and right-middle-left. In the following description, the pressing order is called "forward press", "pinch press", "intermediate forward press", "middle reverse press", "reverse pinch press", and "reverse press". 638 to 643, the "pressing order 123" described in the remark 1 column corresponds to the pressing order (forward pressing) of "left-middle-right", and the "pressing order 132" corresponds to "left-right- Pressing order 312 corresponds to the pressing order of "right-left-middle" (reverse pinching press), and "pressing order 213" corresponds to the pressing order of "middle-left-right". , "Press order 321" corresponds to the press order (reverse press) of "Right-Middle-Left", and "Press order 231" corresponds to "Middle-Right-Left". corresponds to the order of pressing (middle reverse pressing).

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a procedure for stopping the reels 301, the left reel 301a is operated during a game in which no pushing order instruction is given, such as a period in which an ART game is not played (non-ART). is first stopped (that is, the stop operation is first performed on the reel stop button 211a) "left push ("forward push" or "pinch push")" is recommended, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c If a stop operation that does not follow the recommended procedure, such as stopping the game first, is performed, measures that are disadvantageous to the player, such as temporary suspension of the ART lottery, may be taken.

For example, when the winning combination is a winning combination corresponding to a small winning combination (push order bell in this example), the stop number in the slot machine 1 is determined by the reel stop button 211 (individually, the reel stop button 211a, the reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c), the mode of the stop roll is different depending on the pressing order. Such a difference in the mode of the stop roll can be realized, for example, as follows. That is, as the winning combination corresponding to the "push order bell", there are a plurality of types of winning combinations each associated with an appropriate push order (specifically, "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 1" shown in FIGS. For example, if the winning combination is "push order bell 1", the order (left, middle, right) corresponds to the "appropriate push order") is prepared, and an internal lottery is conducted. A plurality of types of conditional devices are allowed to operate according to different combinations for each selected winning combination. At this time, according to the pressing order of the reel stop button 211, under priority control (for example, "number priority control" or "symbol combination number priority control") in which the symbol drawing control when stopping the reel 301 is different. By being set to be executed, it is possible to vary the mode of the stopping number based on the order of pressing, and as a result, it is possible to differentiate the number of payouts.

Here, "number priority control" means that the number of payouts at the time of winning (when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the activated line) is the highest when the operation of multiple condition devices is permitted. It is a pull-in control that gives priority to conditional devices that increase in number, draws the symbol combination corresponding to the conditional device from among the "possible symbols" to the effective line, and stops. In addition, "symbol combination number priority control" means that when the operation of a plurality of condition devices is permitted, the condition device that can display the maximum number of symbol combinations that can be displayed by the "drawing-in symbols" is prioritized. Then, the drawing control that draws the pattern corresponding to the conditional device onto the activated line and stops it.

Then, for example, "push order bell 1", in which the forward push is the "appropriate push order", is selected as a winning combination, and the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is "appropriate push order (left, middle, right order)". ', the drawing control is performed by the above-mentioned "number of sheets priority control". At this time, in the case of the "appropriate pushing order", the conditional device for the 8-card combination with the largest payout number at the time of winning is given priority, and the symbol combination for the 8-card combination is drawn onto the effective line. On the other hand, in the case of "inappropriate pushing order", a conditional device with a 1-card hand or a conditional device with a 0-card hand is given priority, and a symbol combination with a 1-card hand or a 0-card hand is drawn onto the effective line. Thus, when "Push Order Bell 1" is selected as the winning combination, if the reel 301 is stopped in the "Proper Push Order", the 8-card combination is awarded, while "Incorrect Push Order" is awarded. , the reels 301 are stopped in a winning combination (1-coin combination, 0-coin combination) in which the number of payouts is smaller than that of the 8-coin combination.

The symbols that can be drawn onto the effective line when the reel 301 is stopped are limited based on the position of the reel 301 when the reel stop button 211 is operated to stop (specifically, for example, a maximum of 4 frames). drawing is allowed), depending on the timing of this stop operation (push timing), patterns that can be drawn and patterns that cannot be drawn occur. As a result, the mode of the stop result differs depending on the pressing timing, and the priority of the condition device according to the pressing timing is also set in advance.

In this way, in the slot machine 1, when a winning combination associated with the "appropriate pushing order" is won, a plurality of conditional devices are allowed to operate, and different priority controls are applied to drawing-in control of symbols on the reels 301. By setting the , when a game based on the "appropriate pushing order" is played, a privilege (e.g., comparison It can be stopped with a stop roll that can award a payout of as many medals as possible.

Also, although not illustrated in FIGS. 638 to 643, other small pressing order combinations may be prepared separately from the pressing order bells 1 to 6, or a pressing order replay combination may be used. When using the push order replay combination, for example, when the condition device of "up rise 1 + normal maintenance repeat" shown in FIGS. "Raise response 1" is displayed and transitions to a high response state (for example, from RT1 to RT2), and if the stop operation is performed in an inappropriate pressing order, "Normal maintenance response" is displayed and transitions to a high response state. It is preferable not to However, in this case, regardless of the order in which the stop operation was performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed, and the benefit of the replay game (running the next game without inserting game media (medals, credit data), and internal The privilege of receiving a lottery) will be granted.

The above is the outline of the instruction function of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. In the following explanation, the ART game using the push-order bell as described above is taken as an example of a special game advantageous to the player, but the special game advantageous to the player in the slot machine 1 is limited to the ART game. However, it includes other advantageous game states (for example, bonus game, AT game, RT game, etc.). Also, the instruction function is not limited to the instruction function using the pressing order. may be used.

[9-1-2. Type of winning role]
The lottery tables shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 will be described. In the slot machine 1, different lottery tables are prepared according to the RT state, and FIGS. Internal states and bonus states are shown. In this specification, the general state, bonus internal state, and bonus state are also included in the RT state. Here, the general state is a state in which neither the bonus game nor RT is in progress, the bonus flag has not been established, and the state is controlled after the bonus game ends. The bonus internal state is a state in which a bonus (specifically, BB1, BB2, which will be described later) is won by an internal lottery, and the winning establishment state of the bonus is carried over without shifting to the bonus state. The bonus state is an advantageous game state that is shifted to when a bonus (specifically, BB1, BB2, which will be described later) is won by an internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is displayed. Although BB1 and BB2 are shown as bonuses in FIGS. 638 to 643, other types of bonuses can be installed in the slot machine 1, such as RB bonuses, single bonuses (SB), and the like. You may prepare. In such a case, it is necessary to prepare a state corresponding to each bonus, but a detailed description of each state is omitted because it is the same as in a general gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, the winning probability (or set number) for each winning combination is determined for each RT state. An internal lottery is carried out using the lottery table thus obtained. In the slot machine 1, when a winning combination is won as a result of an internal lottery, a conditional device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the activated conditional device is displayed on the active line. reel stop processing is performed. Then, when some winning combination is indicated by the symbol combination displayed on the activated line, medals are paid out based on the winning combination. In the payout of medals based on the winning combination, the payout number of medals may be set to differ according to the RT state and the number of bet medals (specified number) in the game. At this time, it is preferable to separately prepare a lottery table corresponding to the prescribed number.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, one condition device and one reel control pattern correspond one-to-one. A plurality of conditions may be established for the winning combination. By doing so, it is possible to prepare a plurality of patterns of stopping symbols (combination of symbols displayed on the active line) for one winning combination.

Winning hands shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 can be broadly classified into bonus hands (BB1, BB2), small hands (watermelon, cherry, bell), and replay hands (replay hands). If you do not win any of the roles, it is called "lost". Strictly speaking, "lost" is not a winning combination, but for the sake of convenience, it may be included in the winning combination below.

Here, to briefly explain each combination, the "bonus combination" is a combination that triggers the execution of the bonus game, and specifically, "BB1" and "BB2" correspond to the bonus combinations. In the "replay combination (replay combination)", BET processing (a state and processing in which the start lever 210 can be operated), which will be described later, is performed without inserting medals, and the next game can be executed (replay). is a role. A "small combination" is a combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out depending on the win, and the number of medals to be paid out differs according to the minor combination displayed on the activated line. Incidentally, as described above, the winning combination "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 may also be collectively called "push order bell". 638 to 643, the number of payouts for the pressing order bell is described in a plurality of ways because the number of payouts may vary depending on the stop order and stop position of the reel 301. FIG. On the other hand, the "common bell" is a bell combination in which the bell pattern can always be stopped regardless of the pressing order. Details of each winning combination will be described later.

Specific roles such as a watermelon role, a cherry role, and a replay role are provided in addition to the normal roles (normal watermelon role, normal cherry role, normal maintenance replay role (shown as normal maintenance role in FIGS. 638 to 643). , special roles (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special sustaining replay role (shown as special sustaining replay in FIGS. 638 to 643) are included in the winning roles. Details of these special roles will be described later. In this specification, a concept that includes both a normal watermelon combination and a special watermelon combination is simply referred to as a watermelon combination or watermelon, and similarly, a concept that includes both a normal cherry combination and a special cherry combination is simply referred to as a cherry combination. A concept that includes both normal and special sustaining Replay hands, referred to as hands or cherries, is simply referred to as Sustaining Replays, Sustaining Replays, or Sustaining Replays.

Further, as for the sustaining replay combination, in addition to the normal sustaining replay combination and the special sustaining replay combination, the winning combination includes a special sustaining replay combination (illustrated as a special sustaining replay combination in FIGS. 638 to 643). The details of this special maintenance replay combination will also be described later.

Also, "lost" means that no winning combination has been selected as a result of the internal lottery for the winning combination. In the case of "lose", the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped, except when the condition of the bonus combination is carried over (that is, the internal state of the bonus combination).

In case of the bell regardless of pressing order, 9 medals are paid out regardless of the pressing order, whereas in the case of the pressing order bell, if the pressing order is improper, one medal is paid out or no payment is made. . Therefore, by allocating the set numbers in this way, when the bonus state is controlled (bonus game), the player's hand-held tokens can be increased without decreasing.

In addition, even if the result of the internal lottery is not "lost" and one of the winning combinations (bonus combination, replay combination, small combination) is won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination will be subjected to attraction control, which will be described later. A stop operation (an operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) is performed at an appropriate timing (push position) aiming to be stopped within the symbol display window 524 (more strictly, the valid lines 623a and 623b) within the possible range. If not, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed on the active line. Therefore, as a result of the lottery, if any combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the active line even though one of the combinations is won, the result will be described later in the same manner as when "lost" is selected. At step S6 in FIG. 644, it is determined that the game result is a loss. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing (push position) for a bonus combination or a rare small combination (watermelon combination, cherry combination), the corresponding combination of symbols will not be displayed on the effective line. However, for other general small wins (push order bell, common bell) and replay wins, the corresponding combination of symbols can be displayed on the active line even if the stop operation is performed at any timing. (However, it is also necessary to perform the stop operation in the proper order for the roles that require the order of pushing). In addition, when the game result is a loss despite winning some kind of winning combination, the fact that the winning combination based on the winning combination was lost is not displayed at random, instead of displaying the "lost" symbol combination. A predetermined symbol combination (stopped number) shown is controlled to be displayed in the symbol display area. The symbol combination (stopped eye) displayed at the time of such a loss is hereinafter referred to as "zero (or zero)".

In addition, in the description of the present embodiment, the expression “bell zero” is used for “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6”. Missing bells means that when the winning order of the bells is determined according to the correct order of pushing for each winning combination, the stop operation is performed in an incorrect order of pushing the bells. This means that the symbol combination of the bell combination that yields a payout is not stopped, and another symbol combination that seems to have lost the bell combination is displayed. When such a bell is dropped, the bell drop is displayed as a stop payout, and a payout (including no payout) less than the original bell match is made.

In addition, in the description of the present embodiment, the expression "unbalanced" may be used in addition to the above-mentioned "zero". "Discrete (discrete)" is not a "matched pattern" in which the player can relatively easily recognize the characteristics of the stopping pattern, but a stopping pattern that looks like a combination of different patterns (so-called ("discrete"). In other words, "random eyes" is one of the classifications related to the display mode of the symbol combination, and even a random eye does not necessarily mean a loss, so medals may be paid out.

[9-1-3. Election form of elected role]
The winning combinations illustrated in FIGS. 638 to 643 include a winning combination (single combination) in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity, and a winning combination in which multiple winning combinations are selected at the same time. A role (simultaneously elected role) is also included. When a single combination is won, subsequent reel stop control is performed based on the operation of a conditional device based on the winning combination. However, when a simultaneous winning combination is won, subsequent reel stop control is performed based on simultaneous activation of condition devices based on respective winning combinations included in the simultaneous winning combination. Then, in the reel stop control when the simultaneous winning combination is won, a predetermined priority (for example, priority such as "replay>small combination>bonus" or "replay>bonus>small combination"). Accordingly, the reel stop processing is performed while the symbol combination of the winning combination is allowed to be displayed, and the benefit corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the combination of minor wins, the method of setting the effective line, etc., control may be performed so that simultaneous wins are won together. Benefits are paid out according to the winning role. In any case, the small winning combination is a "non-carrying winning combination" that can be won only in the winning game, and the winning status of the winning combination that did not win in the winning game is not carried over to the next game. Even if simultaneous winning of a role is selected, medals corresponding to the minor role are not paid out for the minor role that could not be won in the winning game.

In addition, when a bonus combination and a minor combination are won at the same time, the combinations selected in this way are also called double combinations. When a bonus combination and a minor combination are won at the same time, the condition devices corresponding to the respective winning combinations are activated at the same time in the same way as in the case of simultaneous winning of small combinations, and a predetermined priority (for example, "re- The reel stop processing is performed while the symbol combination of the winning combination is allowed to be displayed according to the order of priority such as "play>small win>bonus" or "replay>bonus>small win". Payout of benefits will be performed. However, with respect to the bonus hand, even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game as described above, the winning state of the bonus hand is carried over until the symbol combination of the bonus hand is displayed in the next game and thereafter. can be a “carry-over role”. Specifically, the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is a "carry-over combination". Also, a replay role or a small role (for example, a bell role) is a "non-carry-over role". Even when the "carry-over combination" and the "non-carry-over combination" are simultaneously won by winning the overlapping combination, which symbol combination is allowed to be displayed is controlled by the reel stop processing. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the "carry-over role" is not displayed in the winning game, the winning establishment state of the "carry-over role" is carried over to the next game or later. However, in such a "next game", when another minor winning combination is won, both the "carrying-over winning combination" and the "another minor winning combination" are won, but in this case, Since they are selected in different lottery opportunities (games), they do not correspond to overlapping roles.

In the case of simultaneous winning, it is determined based on the setting of priority in the reel stop processing which combination of symbols corresponding to which winning combination is preferentially displayed on the active line.

In the following, the winning roles roughly classified above will be explained in detail.

[9-1-4. Bonus role]
Winning hands “BB1” and “BB2” shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 are bonus hands. When a bonus combination is selected as a winning combination, the corresponding condition device "BB1" is activated, reel stop processing is performed, and a privilege is provided based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, a bonus game (BB game) is executed by displaying a symbol combination (matching "red 7") corresponding to the conditional device "BB1" on the active line. This bonus game is a game in which the player has an opportunity to collect medals intensively over a plurality of games. The bonus game is advanced using the lottery table shown in the state. The bonus game ends when the number of bonus games exceeds a specified upper limit (for example, 30 games) or when the cumulative number of payouts in the bonus game exceeds a specified number (for example, 200). When the bonus game ends, the bonus state is shifted to the general state. Even if the symbol combination of "BB1" or "BB2" is displayed on the active line, no medals are paid out as a prize.

Here, the symbol combinations corresponding to 'BB1' and 'BB2' are arranged so that they cannot necessarily be pulled onto the active line depending on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 (see FIG. 635). However, "BB1" and "BB2" are carry-over roles that can carry over the winning flag, and even if the corresponding symbol combinations are not displayed (not aligned) in the winning game, the winning state will be established in the next game and thereafter. The game is played as a bonus internal state until the symbol combination is carried over and the symbol combination is stopped.

When a replay combination or a minor combination is won as a result of an internal lottery while the bonus internal state is being controlled, a winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority.

[9-1-5. role of replay]
The winning combination “Replay” shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 is a winning combination of replay (replay combination). When a replay combination is won, a condition device for replay is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is allowed to be stopped displayed on the effective line (either line 623a or 623b). Processing (step S5 in FIG. 644) is performed. In the slot machine 1, when a replay is won, the symbol combination of the replay combination is controlled so that it is always displayed on the effective line, so that it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay combination has been completed, and as a result, a privilege of the replay combination is obtained. In the next game, automatic betting is performed without inserting medals again or betting operation (operation for inserting accumulated medals), and replaying of the same game as the previous game is possible. Note that even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the active line, medals are not paid out as a prize.

The replay hands include a maintenance replay hand (indicated as "maintenance replay" in FIGS. 638 to 643), an up replay hand (indicated as "up replay" in FIGS. 638 to 643), and a lower replay hand (in FIGS. 638 to 643). 638 to 643, the 7-matched replay role (indicated as "7-matched lip" in Figures 638 to 643) and the 7-matched fake replay role (indicated as '7-matched fake clip' in Figures 638 to 643). be. A sustained replay hand is a replay hand that does not transition to the RT state and maintains the current RT state. The up replay hand includes up replay hand 1 that can be selected only in RT1 and up replay hand 2 that can be selected only in RT2, and up replay hand 1 functions as a transition hand from RT1 to RT2, Up replay hand 2 functions as a transition hand from RT2 to RT3. The down replay hand is a hand that can be selected only in RT3, and functions as a transition hand from RT3 to RT2. The 7-matched replay combination is a replay combination that can be selected only in RT3, and when the 7-matched replay combination is selected in RT3, it functions as a combination to which the ART game is added. The 7-match fake replay role is a replay role that is selected only in RT3 in the same way as the 7-match replay role, and even if it is selected by the internal lottery, the ART game is not added.

As for the maintenance replay role, the normal maintenance replay role and the special maintenance replay role can be selected independently by internal lottery, while the special maintenance replay role, 1 higher replay role, 2 higher replay roles, and 7 lower replay roles are available. The replay combination and the 7-matched fake replay combination are not selected independently in the internal lottery, and are always selected together with the normal maintenance replay combination.

When "special maintenance replay + normal maintenance replay", which is a winning combination of the special maintenance replay role and the normal maintenance replay role, is selected by internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed "left-middle-right". When the stop operation is performed in order (forward press), the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance replay role is displayed on the active line, and the other press order (reverse press, pinch press, reverse pinch press, middle forward push, middle reverse When the stop operation is performed by pressing ), the symbol combination corresponding to the normal maintenance replay combination is displayed on the active line. If "special maintenance reply + normal maintenance reply" is selected by an internal lottery in a hell state in which the number of games is not being managed, the hell state is shifted to an advantageous state. In addition, in the advantageous state during the game number management process, if "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" is selected by internal lottery in advantageous states A to D, it shifts to advantageous state E, and in advantageous state E "special If "Maintenance Lip + Normal Maintenance Lip" is selected by an internal lottery, the addition of the ART game is confirmed.

In the event that "Raising Replay 1+Normal Sustaining Replay", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the Raising Replay Role 1 and the Normal Sustaining Replay Role, is selected by an internal lottery, the reel stop buttons 211 are pressed in the order of "Right-Middle-Left". When the stop operation is performed with (reverse press), the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and the other pressing order (forward press, pinch press, reverse pinch press, middle forward push, middle reverse push) ), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the active line.

When "Raising replay 2 + normal sustaining replay", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the ascending replay role 2 and the normal sustaining replay role, is selected by internal lottery, the reel stop buttons 211 are pressed in the order of "right-left-middle". When the stop operation is performed with (reverse pinching press), the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 2 is displayed on the active line, and the other pressing order (forward press, pinching press, intermediate press, reverse press, intermediate reverse press) ), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the activated line.

When the “lower replay + normal maintenance replay”, which is a simultaneous winning combination of the lower replay role and the normal maintenance replay role, is selected by internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of “middle-left-right” ( When the stop operation is performed in the middle forward press), the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay role is displayed on the active line, and in other pressing orders (forward press, sandwich press, reverse sandwich press, reverse press, middle reverse press) When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the active line.

When "7 matching replay + normal maintaining replay", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the 7 matching replay role and the normal maintenance replay role, is selected by internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed "right-middle-left". If the stop operation is performed in the order (reverse push) and at an appropriate timing (timing at which 7 symbols can be drawn in), the symbol combination corresponding to the 7-matched replay combination (sequence of 7 symbols) is displayed on the active line, and other than that. If the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing (forward press, pinch push, reverse pinch push, middle forward push, middle reverse push), or if it is reversed but not stopped at an inappropriate timing, it corresponds to the role of maintenance replay. A symbol combination is displayed on the active line.

When "7-matching fake replay + normal maintenance replay", which is a combination of a 7-matching fake replay role and a normal maintenance replay role, is selected by an internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is set to "right-middle-left". When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order (reverse pressing), the symbol combination (7th zero) corresponding to the 7 matching fake replay role is displayed on the active line, and the other pressing orders (forward pressing, pinching, reverse pinching) are displayed on the active line. When a stop operation is performed by pressing, middle forward pushing, middle reverse pushing, the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the active line.

A feature of the game privilege of the replay game is that instead of paying out medals, an automatic bet is made in the next game without consuming new medals. Further, since the replay is a winning combination that does not involve payout of medals, for example, by increasing the winning probability, even if the winning frequency increases, there is little disadvantage for the hole. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, in the normal state (general state), the probability of winning is approximately once in 6 to 7 times. This makes it possible to keep the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed period of time) within a certain range to some extent. In other words, it is possible to give the winning role of replay the role of suppressing the excessive consumption of medals in the progress of the game.

In addition, the symbols forming the pattern combination corresponding to the replay combination are evenly arranged on the respective reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (for example, the symbols forming the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination and the symbols forming the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination) By setting other symbols (symbols that do not constitute a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination) to be placed between the symbols that constitute the combination of the corresponding symbols, from 1 to a maximum of 4, The combinations of symbols corresponding to the replay combination can be aligned without the need for eye pressing. In such a case, if the priority order of the displayed winning hand is set to "replay (replay hand)>small hand>bonus", if the replay hand condition device and other hand (small hand and bonus hand) Even if the conditional device is activated at the same time, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination will always be stop-displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the other combination will not be stop-displayed.

[9-1-6. Bell role]
Next, the bell combination as the winning combination will be described. This bell combination is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals when won. In this embodiment, in addition to the above-described push order bell 1 to push order bell 6, there is a common bell whose push order is irrelevant. When a common bell is selected by an internal lottery, a combination of bell patterns is displayed on the active line regardless of the order in which the reel stop buttons 211 are operated.

[9-1-6-1. No matter the order of pressing the bell]
First, a description will be given of a bell regardless of pressing order (common bell) in which the degree of winning at the time of winning (the winning rate and the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning) does not change depending on the pressing order of the reel 301 .

638 to 643 is selected as a winning combination, any corresponding symbol combination is always stopped on the effective line regardless of the order and timing of pushing the reels. The condition device operates as follows. Therefore, when such a conditional device is activated, regardless of the stop order and stop timing of the reel stop button 211 by the player, the symbol combination of the bell role is stopped and displayed, thereby winning the bell role and winning the prize. A payout of medals (8 medals) corresponding to the number is given as a privilege.

[9-1-6-2. Bell]
Next, the pressing order bell, in which the degree of winning (the winning rate and the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning) can change depending on the pressing order of the reels 301, will be described.

The winning combinations “Push order bell 1” to “Push order bell 6” shown in FIG. . As described above, "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" are each associated with one of the six appropriate push orders (see FIG. 638).

In FIG. 638, the winning probabilities of "Push order bell 1" to "Push order bell 6" are set to be equal. Winning probabilities for each of "ordered bell 1" to "push order bell 6" may be arbitrarily distributed under the condition that the above total value is satisfied. In this way, the winning probabilities can be evenly distributed (each winning probability of the six-choice bell can be made equal) with respect to the six proper pressing orders in the "push order bell", and there is no limitation to the specific pressing order. It is possible to make it difficult for the order to be selected in the correct order of pushing. In such a case, in the normal game in which the first stop of the left reel 301a is recommended, it is possible to suppress the winning rate of the pushing order bell, and the payout rate in the normal game can be suppressed by the ART game or the like. It is also possible to increase the payout rate in the special game.

According to FIGS. 638 to 643, "push order bell 1" is the winning role of the push order bell role in which forward push is the proper push order, and "push order bell 2" is the proper push order as pinch push. "Push order bell 3" is the winning role of the push order bell role with the proper push order of pinching, and "Push order bell 4" is the winning role of the push order bell with the proper push order. "Push order bell 5" is the winning role of the push order bell role that makes reverse push the proper push order, and "Push order bell 6" is the middle reverse push. is the winning role of the push order bell role with the appropriate push order. Therefore, the "push order bell" in this embodiment is a so-called "six-choice bell" in which the appropriate push order is divided into six. It should be noted that, of course, setting of such an appropriate pressing order can be freely set within a predetermined limit at the stage of designing the game machine.

In this way, 8 medals will be paid out for winning the role of the bell only when the stop operation is performed in the proper order of pushing the bells "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6". , and if the stop operation is performed in an inappropriate order, "Bell Zero" will be displayed on the active line, and there will be fewer benefits than when the bell wins (1 or 0 medal payout) is awarded.

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the non-ART state, which is not the ART state, the left push (forward push or sandwich push) is recommended. Therefore, when a game is played according to the recommended procedure in the non-ART state, the appropriate pressing order other than the left press (forward press or sandwich press) (specifically, the push order bell 1 to the push order Even if Bell 6) is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the Bell combination cannot be displayed on the activated line. However, if it becomes an ART game, an appropriate pressing order is instructed, and a stop operation according to the instructions is permitted, so that it is possible to easily win the bell role when winning the pressing order bell. If the player unfairly obtains medals by performing a stop operation that differs from the recommended procedure during non-ART, the overall medal payout will be reduced by taking measures such as temporarily suspending the ART lottery. may be adjusted appropriately.

Also, in the slot machine 1, it is not necessary to recommend a specific pressing order as described above. For example, except when an instruction function is displayed during an ART game, when a specific pressing order is not recommended, the player may perform the stop operation in any desired pressing order. , there is no recommended procedure, so there is no need to make adjustments (measures such as temporary suspension of the ART lottery) in the case of ``unfairly obtaining medals by performing a stop operation that differs from the recommended procedure'' as described above. becomes. It should be noted that if a specific pressing order is not a recommended procedure, it is desirable to make the winning probability for each pressing order the same in the pressing order minor combination. By making the probability of winning the same for each order of pushing, the expected value of the ball output can be equalized regardless of the order of pushing, so that the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind in the order of pushing. can.

[9-1-7. Rare small role]
Rare small roles as prize-winning roles include a watermelon role and a cherry role. The watermelon combination is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out five medals when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the active line. The cherry combination is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out (two) medals when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the active line.

[9-1-8. special role]
As described above, the watermelon role, the cherry role, and the maintenance replay role include the normal watermelon role, the normal cherry role, and the normal maintenance replay role, as well as the special watermelon role, the special cherry role, and the special maintenance replay role, respectively. there is If a special watermelon combination, a special cherry combination, or a special maintenance replay combination is selected in an internal lottery when the game state related to the execution of the indication function display is the hell state, which will be described later, the transition destination from the hell state is in an advantageous state. Any one of A to E is determined. That is, in the hell state, the special watermelon combination, the special cherry combination, and the special maintenance replay combination function as triggers for transition to an advantageous state (criteria for ending the hell state). The determination probability of the transition destination when these special roles are selected by internal lottery in the hell state will be described later. When the game state related to the execution of the indication function display is one of the advantageous states A to E, the special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, or special maintenance replay combination is selected by an internal lottery. Even if the player is selected, the same process as when the normal watermelon, normal cherry, or normal maintenance replay combination is selected is performed (the game medium payout process is performed as a prize, but the hell state and the advantageous state are different). no transition processing between them). That is, the special role is a role that exhibits a function different from that of the normal role only when the player is in hell. Note that the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display includes whether or not the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed, and if the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed, the instruction function display is executed. It refers to multiple game states with different conditions for

In addition, the transition from hell state to advantageous state is performed by selecting a special watermelon role, a special cherry role, or a special sustaining replay role in an internal lottery during the hell state, and the combination of symbols corresponding to these special roles. Although it is preferable that the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is displayed on the effective line, the special watermelon role, It may be performed when a special cherry winning combination or a special maintenance replay winning combination is selected.

Also, as can be seen by referring to FIGS. 638 to 643, the probability of being selected by the internal lottery for normal hands (normal watermelon, normal cherry, normal sustaining reps in RT2 and RT3) differs depending on the settings. However, (especially the probability of overlapping roles is different), for special roles (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance replay role), the probability of being selected by internal lottery is the common probability for all settings. In particular, although not shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, the winning value assigned to each special role in the random number range of 0 to 65535 is unique and common to all settings. For example, assuming that the random number assigned as the winning value of the special watermelon is 10000-10448, the winning value of the special watermelon is 10000-10448 for all setting values 1-6. The same is true for special cherries and special sustain replays.

The above are the respective winning combinations in the slot machine 1 and the combinations of symbols corresponding to the respective winning combinations.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment can be set to any one of settings 1 to 6 by a person involved in the hall. , BB2, "BB2 + normal watermelon", "BB2 + normal cherry", normal watermelon, normal cherry, push order bells 1-6, common bell, normal maintenance lip, "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", "raise lip 2 + normal maintenance The winning probabilities are different for "Rip", "Lower Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", "7 Match Rip + Normal Rip", and "7 Match Fake Rip + Normal Rip". On the other hand, the winning probabilities for the special roles (special watermelon, special cherry, and special sustaining riff) are common to settings 1 to 6, and changing the settings does not change the winning probability for the special role. That is, the winning probability of this special role functioning as a trigger role for transition from the hell state to the advantageous state is a probability common to all settings. However, the probability of winning a special watermelon, the probability of winning a special cherry, and the probability of winning a special maintenance lip may be set 1 to 6 in common, or the probability of winning a special watermelon, the probability of winning a special cherry, and the probability of winning a special maintenance lip. is different for each setting, the synthesis probability of the special watermelon, special cherry and special sustaining lips may be common in settings 1-6. Although not shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, a so-called bonus combination such as BB1 may also be divided into a special BB1 combination and a normal BB1 combination. For example, in FIGS. 638 to 643, the probability that the BB1 hand is selected is 44/65536. 33/33, and the probability that the normal BB1 hand is selected can be 11/65536. In this case, if it is intended to be common to all settings, the probability of BB1 being selected is generally different for each setting. By providing a set difference in the probability of being selected, it is preferable to provide a range in the ball payout rate.

Also, the symbols are not limited to the symbols and combinations of symbols described above. Moreover, in addition to the above-mentioned patterns, it is also possible to newly provide a plurality of types of patterns. The types of winning combinations can be further increased or reduced. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not limited to being provided without fail, and a necessary type of winning combinations may be selected as appropriate.

For example, a bonus winning combination and a minor winning combination (or a replay combination) may be set to be won in duplicate, or only when the reels 301 are stopped in the proper order of pushing, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination will appear on the active line. A replay combination of the displayed pressing order may be provided.

Further, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination (bell combination in this embodiment) is displayed on the activated line is determined based on the order in which the reel stop buttons 211 are stopped. Instead of , a small combination of pressing positions determined based on the timing at which the reel stop button 211 is operated to stop may be prepared. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the small push position combination is when the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed at an appropriate stop timing (push position) or when it is performed at an inappropriate stop timing. , are small wins showing different winning modes. When such a small combination of push positions is installed, in the ART game, by instructing the player to easily recognize the appropriate push position, when the small combination of push positions is won, the game can be played. It is possible for a player to easily win a corresponding role and win many medals.

The player of the slot machine 1 performs an internal lottery based on the lottery probability of the winning combination (FIGS. 638 to 643), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, the number of payouts, and the arrangement of the symbols (FIG. 635). In some cases, it is possible to find a game method in which the maximum payout can be expected in a situation where the winning combination selected by the player cannot be known. Such a game method is hereinafter tentatively referred to as a “maximum efficiency hitting method”. When the game is played with the maximum efficiency hitting method, depending on the stop position of the reels, it is difficult to draw the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination onto the effective line (watermelon role, cherry role). , chance lottery, etc.), in consideration of their winning probability and the number of payouts, at a specific timing that maximizes payout in terms of expected value, one of the reel stop buttons 211 is pressed and stopped. By performing the depressing operation of the remaining reel stop buttons 211 at an appropriate timing according to the pattern mode, the combination of symbols corresponding to a plurality of types of winning combinations can be drawn in, and a lot of payouts are obtained. In other words, the maximum efficiency hitting method can be said to be a game method that minimizes the possibility of missing a winning combination.

[10. Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds according to the processing procedure on the control program executed by the main substrate 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 and the like).

FIG. 644 is an example of a main routine showing a basic processing procedure for one game in slot machine 1 . First, in step S1, initial setting is executed in preparation for the start of the game. Especially when the power is turned on, the connection and operation status of the various devices mentioned above are checked, and the existence of backup data is confirmed. to run. If backup data does not exist, a predetermined process such as setting a predetermined initial value is executed.

In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the slot 203, or by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or the single insertion button 205) if there are medals already stored. and waits for the operation of the starting lever 210 . That is, the BET process is executed until the number of bets for one game is determined and the start lever 210 becomes operable. In addition, when the slot machine 1 is a special-purpose machine for playing three tokens in which the game can be executed by inserting three tokens, the one-insert button 205 may not be provided.

In step S3, the game is started by operating the starting lever 210, which is in a state of waiting for operation in step S2, and an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether any winning combination will be the result of the internal lottery. Execute. This internal lottery process is a stage before all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that start rotating in the subsequent step S4 are in a stopped state (become in a stopped state by a player's stop operation). This is executed to determine whether the winning hand of the game will be the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to one of the winning combinations, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination appears on the activated line when the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. Stopping is allowed.

Next, in step S31, instruction function processing is performed as processing relating to the instruction function of ART (so-called ART navigation). In the instruction function processing, not only is the winning of the ART game and the start thereof determined, but ART navigation is executed to teach (instruct) the player the pressing order and the like during the ART game. Details of the instruction function processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 647 and the like.

In the instruction function processing of this example, the main board 409 manages all of the central controls related to the instruction function (ART initial lottery, determination of the number of ART games, execution of the ART game, transition of the RT state, display of the instruction function, etc.). do. On the other hand, the sub-board 510 manages auxiliary control related to the instruction function (such as navigation display on the image display 500). The display contents of the display are limited to those according to the determination result of the instruction function by the main substrate 409 (the contents which are not different from the instruction function display). Note that, in the slot machine 1, the instruction content of the instruction function (which may be read as the display content of the instruction function display) is determined by the main board 409 based on the winning combination in the game. The display contents of the instruction function display displayed on the special display LED 612 under the control of the main board 409 and the display contents of the navigation display displayed on the image display 500 or the like under the control of the sub-board 510 are paired. The correspondence is not limited to one, and may be one-to-n (multiple patterns). That is, when the main board 409 performs some instruction function display on the special display LED 612, the sub-board 510 executes the navigation display on the image display 500 or the like in a display mode corresponding to the instruction function display. The specific display mode of the navigation display need not be limited to one type, and the navigation display may be performed in any one of a plurality of display modes corresponding to the instruction function display. good. In such a case, it may be determined by the sub board 510, or may be designated by the main board 409, which display mode should be used for the navigation display. Further, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the configuration described above, and for example, the main board 409 may perform all the processing related to the instruction function processing.

In addition, in the instruction function processing of step S31 shown in this example, the processing contents regarding the instruction function of ART are determined based on the result of the internal lottery processing in step S3. Here, since the internal lottery process is performed each time the game is executed, the ART first winning lottery based on the result of the internal lottery process is also performed each time the game is executed. In addition, it is preferable that the instruction function process is finished before the reel rotation process of step S4 described below is started.

Next, in step S4, reel rotation processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c upon completion of the internal lottery processing in step S3. In this reel rotation process, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c start to rotate, the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are validated. An operation effective lamp (not shown) is lit to indicate that the operation has been completed, and a timer count is started until the next reel rotation process is executed. The effective operation lamps are lamps built into the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c.

In step S5, the player's pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are accepted, and the operation effective lamps are extinguished in the order of acceptance, and reel stop processing is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. to run.

In the next step S6, when it is determined in step S5 that all the lines 301a to 301c are in a stopped state, whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on the "valid line" A determination process for determining a winning combination is executed based on whether the combination mode is displayed. Specifically, by collating ``display contents displayed on the active line (symbol combination mode)'' and ``symbol combination allowed to stop on the activated line corresponding to the winning combination''. Judge the winning role. Further, the determination processing in step S6 may be determined based only on the "display contents (combination mode of symbols) displayed on the activated line". In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the line (lower right line 623a) on which the "bell symbol-replay symbol-bell symbol" shown in FIG. 636 and the "BAR symbol-replay symbol-right symbol" are displayed. The two lines on which is displayed (line 623b rising to the right) are defined as "effective lines". However, the number of active lines is not limited to this.

In step S7, medal payout processing based on the content of the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step S6 is executed. Also, if the winning combination determined in step S6 is a winning combination that requires a change in the RT state, such as Type 2 BB, change the RT state (change the RT state shown in FIGS. 638 to 643). Executes the granting of various game benefits by replaying, etc.

The above is the basic processing procedure of one game of the slot machine 1 . Here, steps S2 (BET processing) to step S4 (reel rotation processing) are internal processes triggered by a series of external operations (starting operations) performed by the player. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S31, step S4) are collectively called start-up process. A specific description of this start-up process will be given below.

[10-1. Start processing]
FIG. 645 specifically shows each process performed in the startup process.

In the starting process, first, in step S101, operation of the medal insertion button 205 or the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. If there is a MAX bet operation or medals are inserted, the determination in step S101 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S102. In addition, this judgment is the insertion of medals equivalent to the MAX bet (that is, insertion of 3 or more medals in the case of a game with the prescribed number of 3, and insertion of 2 or more medals in the case of a game with the prescribed number of 2) It is assumed that the bet is satisfied only when the button 205 or the button 206 for inserting one card, which is a maximum bet, is operated.

In the next step S102, as reception processing, the number of bets (in this example, only MAX bets) is determined, and the active line lamp corresponding to the number of bets is turned on. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when three medals are inserted when the specified number is three, two lines, an upward right line 623b and a downward right line 623a, become valid lines. turn on the lamp.

In step S103, the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the starting lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated and, in that case, whether the operation of the starting lever 210 has been accepted. When the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated in the previous step S103, if the player's operation of the starting lever 210 is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

Further, in step S101, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied until the player performs a bet operation or inserts medals, or the maximum bet is not reached, and the process proceeds to step S104. At this time, the determination in step S104 is also not satisfied, and the process returns to step S101 to repeat the subsequent processes.

Also, the replay game does not require a new medal bet. When a MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in replay game processing, which will be described later, the game is automatically placed in a MAX bet state. This satisfies the determination of step S101.

In step S105, the operation of the starting lever 210 is invalidated in response to the operation of the starting lever 210 in step S104.

Next, in step S106, when the starting lever 210 is operated, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate, and a random number is extracted (obtained) based on the operation of the starting lever 210. FIG. One random number is extracted from 0 to 65535 as this random number. After the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. It should be noted that the timing of extracting the random number at this time may be performed immediately after the start lever 210 is operated, or may be performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds later), etc., depending on the programming process. Appropriate extraction timing can be set.

In step S107, a hit determination (collation of random numbers) is performed to determine which winning combination corresponds to the extracted random number (hereinafter referred to as an extracted random number). In this hit determination, extracted random numbers are compared with a hit value determination table, which will be described later. The collation of random numbers performed here means determining whether or not the extracted random numbers correspond (match, match) with the random numbers of a predetermined winning combination. For example, when the winning random number of BB1 is 0 to 43, if the extracted random number is any one of 0 to 43, it is determined that BB1 is winning. At this time, when it is determined that the extracted random number corresponds to any winning combination, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned ON. The winning probabilities for each winning combination in the winning judgment performed by collating the extracted random numbers with the winning judgment table are as shown in FIGS. Note that the odds of winning are different for "BB1+Normal Watermelon", "BB2+Normal Cherry", normal maintenance Lip in RT2, and "Lower Lip+Normal Maintenance Lip" in RT3. However, the winning probabilities that differ according to the setting are not limited to these, and the winning probabilities of BB1, BB2, normal watermelon and normal cherry may differ according to the setting.

In the flag processing, when a hit value determination table that serves as a determination reference is determined when matching extracted random numbers in the game, a game state flag such as a BB game in-progress flag, which will be described later, is referred to. A hit value determination table (lottery table) in the game is determined. That is, the hit value determination table corresponding to the game state flag (RT state flag) that is ON in the game is set, and the extracted random value is collated. As the game state flags, flags corresponding to the RT states are prepared respectively. Then, when both the during-bonus flag and during-bonus flag are in the OFF state, the normal-state flag is always set to the ON state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it will be a "lost" that does not correspond to any winning combination, and none of the conditional devices will be activated. Here, when any conditional device is ON (actuated/established), it is possible to align the symbol combinations corresponding to the established conditional device. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which none of the conditional devices are established, it is impossible to align the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination on the activated line. Steps S106 and S107 described above are for performing a random number lottery inside the slot machine 1, and hereinafter, these steps are collectively referred to as an internal lottery, an internal lottery, or the like. Note that the processes from the extraction of the random number to the flag processing correspond to the internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 644 described above).

As described above with reference to FIG. 644, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the instruction function process shown in step S31 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 645, this instruction function processing may be executed as part of the flag processing in step S107 of FIG. 645, or after the flag processing in step S107 is completed, may be executed until the wait timer times out.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at a predetermined timing when flag processing or instruction function processing is executed, a group of conditional devices allowed to operate based on the winning combination, instruction contents of the instruction function generated, etc. , at least part of the information determined by the main board 409 side is notified from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) by command communication (corresponding to the "instruction information command" described later). Note that the commands for notifying these pieces of information may be appropriately grouped commands.

In addition, the command transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) as a result of the instruction function processing performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can employ the following command mode. . That is, the winning combination is grouped based on the type of the winning combination and the pressing order of the reel stop button 211, etc., and for the winning combination selected by the internal lottery, the group containing the winning combination can be identified. Commands can be sent from board 409 to a peripheral board (eg, sub-board 510). The classification criteria for grouping the winning combinations are not limited to the above example, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, when the presence or absence of the pressing order is added to the classification criteria, all the bells included in the pressing order bell (push order bell 1 to push order bell 6) are grouped into one group, and the common bell role as the bell regardless of the pressing order. are grouped separately, the bell roles can be divided into groups according to the presence or absence of the pressing order. At this time, the bell role is divided into a bell-push-order group and a bell-push-order-independent group. Also, the replay combination is the same, and for example, it may be divided into a group of replays in order of pushing and a group of replays in normal order (regardless of the order of pushing). Also, all the winning combinations may be grouped only by the presence or absence of the pressing order, and in such a case, all the winning combinations can be divided into a group with pressing order or a group without pressing order. Also, instead of grouping the winning combination, condition devices based on the winning combination may be grouped. The commands for notifying such grouped winning combinations will be described in more detail below.

First, regarding the transmission of the command for notifying the grouped winning combination, when the instruction function display is executed, a command that allows all of the details of the grouped winning combination to be understood (so-called "perfect navigation" command). may be sent. At this time, since the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize information such as what type of winning combination the selected winning combination is and in what order of pressing, the reel stopping method is advantageous for the player. It is possible to display a navigation display (so-called "complete navigation") that can reliably indicate.

In addition, regarding the transmission of a command for notifying the grouped winning combination, if the instruction function display is executed, a command (for example, only the first stop can be instructed) that shows part of the grouped winning combination "partial navigation") may be transmitted. At this time, since the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize some information about the selected winning combination, a navigation display that can partially instruct the reel stop method that is advantageous to the player (for example, only the first stop) can be displayed. so-called "partial navigation") can be displayed.

Further, as for the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, if the indication function display is not executed, a command may be transmitted in which the details of the grouped winning combination are unknown. At this time, the sub board 510 that has received the command can recognize that the selected winning combination is a winning combination included in the group based on the group indicated by the command, and whether or not the instruction function display can be executed. , unable to recognize any further information. For example, although it is known that the winning combination is one of the pushing order bells, the proper pushing order and specific details of the winning combination ("push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6") ) can be recognized to the extent that it is not known. Note that a command for notifying a grouped winning combination when such indication function display is not executed may be considered as a "condition device command".

Furthermore, when the indication function display is executed, the grouped small wins need not be limited to the push order bell, and may be grouped including other wins (for example, push order replay). . That is, in this case, even if the pressing order bell is selected as the winning combination or if another combination is selected, if the appropriate pressing order is the same, a command indicating the same group is transmitted. means Also, even if the instruction function display is not executed, the small wins to be grouped need not be limited to the bells in order of pressing, and other wins may be included in the grouping. , the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) that received the command cannot determine the type of the winning combination (whether it is another combination or a bell), and the winning combination is indicated in a state unrelated to the indication function display. (For example, if the instruction function is not executed, it is not possible to display navigation on the image display 500 indicating that another winning combination has been won.) It is preferable to send commands by grouping them according to the type of winning order, such as replay) separately.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can reduce the capacity consumed by the main board 409 by transmitting a command for notifying the winning combination grouped in this way, and the peripheral board side can independently determine the winning combination and its combination. Determination of the pressing order can be suppressed.

In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous starting process (specifically, the game immediately before the current game) has timed out (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). This timer, called a wait timer, measures the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from when the reels start spinning in the current game to when the reels start spinning in the next game. It is. Here, when the wait timer has timed out (4.1 seconds have already passed), this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S109. Also, this determination loops until the wait timer expires.

In step S109, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started. When the speed of rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b and 301c becomes constant, the effective operation lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c are turned on. This lighting informs the player that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is valid.

In the slot machine 1, the reels that have started to rotate continue to rotate at the above constant speed until the player's stop operation (pressing of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) is accepted. .

Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, and the wait timer is started until the next starting process, and the starting process ends.

[10-2. Internal Lottery Probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of matching of the extracted random numbers) is allowed as the corresponding winning combination (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding winning combination) in the game. Here, when the corresponding winning combination is allowed, the conditional device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is activated, and the information of this activated conditional device is used as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery for subsequent processing (reel stop processing, judgment processing, payout processing, etc.).

In the slot machine 1, a range of random numbers (called an extraction range) for random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 65535 (that is, 2 to the 16th power=65536 random numbers). In this embodiment, the random number value of the extraction range is set to 0 to 65535 for convenience, but it is needless to say that it is not limited to this. If the random number extraction range is expanded, the range of random numbers that can be extracted (the so-called denominator) is correspondingly increased, so that a phenomenon in which a specific random number is extracted unevenly is less likely to occur.

Random numbers corresponding to each winning combination are assigned in advance within the extraction range. For example, when a random number value corresponding to the winning combination "BB1" is selected from among the random number values within the extraction range ("0" to "65535" in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment), the result of the internal lottery means "BB1 won", and BB1, which is a conditional device, is processed as an information command in the game. Also, by using this, the winning probability of BB1 (probability that BB1 is selected as a result of internal lottery, lottery probability) can be calculated from the extraction range and the random value corresponding to BB1. In the examples of FIGS. 638 to 643, the winning probability of BB1 in the general state is [total number of random numbers corresponding to BB1/total number of random numbers within the extraction range] of 384/65536.

Random numbers corresponding to all the winning combinations are determined in this way, and these random numbers are called winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In addition, if there are multiple winning values, for example, if the winning value of the predetermined combination is set to consecutive random numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" within the extraction range, the winning value of this predetermined combination The range of values is a random number from "1" to "4". Then, when it is determined (verified) that the extracted random number corresponds to any one of the random numbers "1" to "4", it means "won the predetermined combination" as a result of the internal lottery. In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, a single combination (for example, BB1, BB2, watermelon, cherry, common bell, maintenance replay) that wins only one winning combination is prepared. However, as described above, in addition to such a single winning combination, a simultaneous winning combination in which a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously won may be prepared. When such a duplicate combination is prepared, the winning value of the overlapping combination is also included in the aforementioned winning value.

Accordingly, the range of winning values is determined for all the winning combinations, and it is determined by internal lottery whether or not the extracted random number falls within the range of winning values for any of the winning combinations. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of winning values for any of the winning combinations, it is a loss. That is, the range of winning values for losing is outside the range of winning values for all winning combinations. Note that the winning value is also called winning tolerance value.

By the way, a single winning combination means one winning combination corresponding to one extracted random number value, and a simultaneous winning combination means a multiple winning combination (for example, two) corresponding to one extracted random number value. corresponds to In other words, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the simultaneous winning combination, it means that all of the plurality of winning combinations have been won. At this time, the condition devices corresponding to the respective winning combinations of the plurality of winning combinations are established at the same time (the operation is permitted). However, even if a plurality of conditional devices corresponding to each winning hand are established at the same time, the priority of the conditional device for the simultaneous winning hand is set. It is not always possible to stop on the effective line. For example, when a replay combination and a bonus combination are won at the same time, if the replay combination is given priority, the reel stop processing in step S5 is performed so as to give priority to the replay combination. Since the corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the activated line regardless of the pressing order or pressing timing, as a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be stopped on the activated line and is always replayed. symbol combination will be stopped.

Further, according to FIGS. 638 to 643, during the bonus, the hit value of the bell (common bell) regardless of the pressing order, which can be expected to win (or be established) regardless of the pressing timing and the pressing order in the stop operation, is within the extraction range. occupies everything. In this embodiment, when a replay is established, an automatic bet is made and the next game is provided without consuming medals, and eight medals are paid out when the bell is won regardless of the order of pressing. Therefore, when the bonus game is executed, a large amount of medals are paid out during the execution period of the bonus game (during the bonus).

Incidentally, as can be seen from FIGS. 638 to 643, in the slot machine 1 of this example, a special role (special watermelon , special cherries, special maintenance lips) is determined using the internal lottery random value used in the internal lottery (lottery of the condition device). Therefore, there is no need to use a new random number different from the internal lottery random number. Therefore, it is possible to create new game features using the hell state and the advantageous state while improving the efficiency of the control load, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[10-3. RT state control processing]
The RT state control processing performed in the slot machine 1 will be described below.

[10-3-1. RT state transition control process]
FIG. 646 is an example of a block diagram illustrating RT state transitions. Note that RT state transition control is executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409 .

When the data values in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 are cleared (RAM cleared), the normal state (RT0) is entered. The replay combination probability in the general state (combination probability of maintenance replay combination, up replay combination 1, up replay combination 2, down replay combination, 7 matching replay combination and 7 matching fake replay combination) is about 1/7.3. . In such a general state, when the game is executed for a certain period of time, the number of medals that the player bets to execute the game becomes larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within this certain period of time. . That is, the general state is a state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game. In addition, in FIG. 646, the replay combination probability is expressed as the RP combination probability.

In a general state, even though one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by an internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is not operated to stop in an appropriate order, and 0 bells. When the zero point is displayed on the effective line, the CPU 1110 controls to shift from the normal state to RT1. The replay combining probability at RT1 is approximately 1 in 7.3. In such RT1, when the game is executed for a certain period of time, the number of medals that the player bets to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within this certain period of time, as in the general state. more people.

In RT1, when the internal lottery selects "upper lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of the higher lip 1 is displayed on the activated line, the CPU 1110 shifts from RT1 to RT2. to control. When the RT state is shifted from RT1 to RT2, the basic ART game is started on the condition that the ART initial winning lottery is won, and the basic ART is in progress. In this specification, the general term for games during basic ART, during a special zone (to be described later), and during preparation for a special zone is called an ART game. However, when the RT1 shifts to the RT2 in a state in which the ART first prize lottery is not won, the basic ART game is not performed, and the indication function display and the ART game number addition lottery, which will be described later, are not performed. However, it is assumed that the instruction function display does not operate when the ART first prize lottery is not won and the replay high probability state (e.g., corresponding to RT2 in this example) is controlled, and the push order bell is won. However, if the payout rate exceeds "1", the above-described game count management process may be started. This is because the state in which the payout rate exceeds "1" is advantageous to the player.

During the ART game, an ART game is executed in which the instruction function can be continuously operated over a plurality of games (the instruction function display can be continuously performed over a plurality of games). Specifically, when any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery, the CPU 1110 controls so that an instruction function display, which will be described later, is performed. Further, the sub-board 510 also performs control so that display is performed in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 . Also, the replay combination probability in RT2 is about 1/1.6. In such RT2, when the game is executed for a fixed period, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game is larger than the number of medals bet by the player for executing the game within the fixed period. That is, RT2 in which the instruction function display is performed is a state in which the number of medals increases as the player executes the game. However, the number of ART games is set to 50 for one shot, and the game ends after 50 games unless a lottery to add to the number of ART games, which will be described later, is won. Specifically, if the ART game number addition lottery is won during the ART game, the ART game number is added, and the ART game continues until the added ART game number is consumed in addition to the above 50 games, which will be described later. An indication function display is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery for adding the number of ART games is not won, an instruction function display, which will be described later, is performed from the start of the basic ART game until 50 games have been played. finish. At the same time, the display by the sub-board 510 in accordance with the instruction contents of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 also ends. When the display by the sub-board 510 according to the instruction contents of the instruction function is completed, even if any one of "Press order bell 1" to "Press order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed. Proper shutdown operation sequence is not specified. Then, when the 0th bell zero is displayed on the active line, the CPU 1110 controls to shift from RT2 to RT1. Even if the basic ART game ends, RT2 is maintained until the 0th bell is displayed on the active line. It will not be done.

In terms of probability, "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" are not selected in the internal lottery during the ART game, and the specified number of games ( If the lottery for adding the number of ART games is not won, 50 games may be lost, and if the lottery for adding the number of ART games is won, the sum of 50 games and the added number of games may be lost. In such a case, even if the prescribed number of games is played, the ART game continues until the command function is displayed, and the ART game ends when the command function is displayed once. is configured to

Also, in this example, one shot of the ART game is set to 50 games, but it is needless to say that the number of games is not limited to 50 games.

In this example, the ART game continues until the specified number of games such as 50 games is completed. The number of cards that the ART game continues may be managed.

In addition, during the basic ART, if any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery, the appropriate stop operation order of the reel stop button 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display. Therefore, as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to this instruction function display, the RT state is maintained at RT2 (however, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lifting lips 2 is displayed, the RT state is shifted to RT3). However, although one of "Push order bell 1" to "Push order bell 6" was selected by an internal lottery and the proper stop operation order of the reel stop button 211 was clearly indicated by the indication function display, If the reel stop button 211 is not operated in accordance with this instruction function display, the 0th bell is displayed on the active line, and the control of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 shifts from RT2 to RT1.

In RT2, when 'up replay 2+normal maintenance reup' is selected by internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 2 is displayed on the effective line, control is performed to shift from RT2 to RT3. When the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT3, the player is in the specialized zone, and there is a high probability that an ART game will be added (details will be described later). In this RT3 as well, the CPU 1110 mounted on the main substrate 409 displays an instruction function, which will be described later, when any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by an internal lottery. controlled to be Further, the sub-board 510 also performs control so that display is performed in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 .

Note that the specialized zone ends after 5 games. Specifically, when "lower replay + normal maintenance replay" is selected in the internal lottery, if it is in the special zone (if 5 games have not been completed), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay role will be Control is performed so that an instruction function display, which will be described later, is performed so as to be displayed. On the other hand, if 5 games have been played since the start of the special zone when "lower replay + normal maintenance replay" is selected in the internal lottery, the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay role will be displayed. 638 to 643). Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination is displayed, the CPU 1110 controls to shift from RT3 to RT2. Further, when the 0th sheet bell is displayed on the effective line at RT3, the CPU 1110 controls the RT state to shift from RT3 to RT1. The replay combination probability at RT3 is about 1 in 1.6. When five games have been played since the start of the special zone but the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination has not yet been displayed, the game is controlled to the basic ART game under the RT state of RT3. The lottery state during ART at this time is a high probability state. Therefore, even during the specialized zone or during the preparation of the specialized zone, just like during the basic ART, if any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is clearly indicated by the indication function display, and the RT state is maintained at RT3 as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to the indication function indication. When the stop button 211 is operated and the zeroth bell is displayed on the effective line, the process is shifted to RT1.

In any of the normal state, RT1, RT2 and RT3, when a bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated (bonus is established), the inside of the bonus is entered. The inside of the bonus is a state in which the bonus game has not yet started although the bonus flag is established. That is, when the bonus combination is won in the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated. Even if the symbol combination is not displayed in the next game and thereafter, the operation continues until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line. The replay composite probability within the bonus is approximately 1 in 7.3. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus symbol is displayed on the active line inside the bonus (when the bonus is won), the bonus game is started and the bonus is in progress. During such a bonus, when the game is played for a certain period of time, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game is greater than the number of medals wagered by the player for executing the game within this certain period of time. . When the bonus game ends, the state returns to the general state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 controls the RT state to any one of the general state (RT0 state), RT1 state, RT2 state, RT3 state, bonus internal state, and bonus state. be. On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment has an instruction function, and the execution of an ART game in which the instruction function can operate continuously over a plurality of games is basically performed in such an RT state. is controlled by a system different from the control of As described above, the ART game with such an instruction function is mainly executed in RT2 or RT3, but if the conditions for executing the ART game are satisfied (for example, winning the ART execution lottery), it can be executed in any RT state. , ART games can be run. However, this is not the case when it conflicts with restrictions such as rules. For example, the ART game cannot be executed in the bonus state. In the following, the state control processing related to the pointing function will be described in detail.

[10-3-2. Lottery related to ART]
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the following lottery is performed as a lottery related to ART. First, there are an ART initial winning lottery and an ART initial winning lottery state transition lottery as a lottery related to ART performed in a normal game state (hell state, advantageous state A to advantageous state D) which is neither an ART game nor a bonus. Also, as lotteries related to ART performed during the ART game (during the basic ART, during the specialized zone, or during the preparation of the specialized zone), there are a specialized zone lottery and a lottery for adding the number of ART games. In addition, the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409 selects an ART initial state as a lottery state related to ART in a normal game state (non-ART, RT1, RT2 and RT3 in which no instruction function occurs) that is neither an ART game nor a bonus game. Control to one of a plurality of lottery states (advantage state A to advantage D) with different degrees of winning lottery advantage, and when neither the normal game state nor the bonus (during the ART game), a special zone lottery or It is controlled to one of a plurality of lottery states (art middle low probability state, ART middle high probability state, middle special zone, special zone preparing) with different degrees of advantage of the lottery adding the number of ART games.

The state of hell is a state in which the operation of the instruction function is not determined, and if a special role is selected in the internal lottery in the state of hell, the game shifts to one of the advantageous states A to E, and in these advantageous states A to E. , the operation of the indicating function is definitely determined once (indicating function display is always performed once). In addition, when one game is played in the hell state, the winning probability of the ART game played 50 times (probability of transition to advantageous state E) is determined by internal lottery for special roles (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special (maintenance replay combination) is selected and the probability that the transition destination is determined to be in an advantageous state E in the transition destination determination lottery (step S6012) when the special combination is selected in the internal lottery. .

During the ART game, the CPU 1110 controls the lottery state related to ART to any one of the medium-art low probability state, the medium-art high probability state, the specialized zone ready state, and the specialized zone state. The ART medium-low probability state, the ART medium-high probability state, the specialized zone preparation state, and the specialized zone state are collectively referred to as the lottery state during ART. The ART medium-low probability state is a lottery state in which the odds of winning in the special zone lottery and the lottery with the number of ART games added are relatively low. The ART medium-high probability state is a lottery state in which the odds of winning in the special zone lottery or the lottery with the number of ART games added are relatively high, which are performed in non-normal times (ART flag ON). The specialized zone preparation state is a lottery state when the specialized zone lottery is won but the specialized zone has not yet started (that is, although the specialized zone lottery has been won, the RT state has not yet been shifted to RT3. state). A specialized zone state is a lottery state in a specialized zone.

As described above, both the specialized zone state and the specialized zone ready state are lottery states related to ART that are controlled when the specialized zone lottery is won in the ART middle-low probability state or the ART middle-high probability state. be. In addition, the CPU 1110 is in the ART lottery state during the basic ART (lottery state related to ART neither in the specialized zone nor in the preparation of the specialized zone) only when it is controlled to the ART medium-low probability state and the ART medium-high probability state. is to be controlled to either the middle-ART low-probability state or the middle-ART high-probability state based on the result of the lottery state transition lottery during ART. This lottery state transition lottery during ART is performed using an during-ART lottery state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 664 to be described later. In the ART medium-low probability state, a lottery for transition to the ART medium-high probability state is performed with a probability corresponding to the conditional device operated in response to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, in the ART medium-high probability state, a lottery for transition to the ART medium-low probability state is performed with a probability corresponding to the conditional device operated in accordance with the result of the internal lottery. Specific transition probabilities in the lottery state transition lottery during ART are as shown in FIG. 664 to be described later.

Specific winning probabilities in the special zone lottery are as shown in FIG. 665 to be described later. A special zone lottery is run every game during non-normal times, depending on conditional devices activated as a result of the ART lottery state and the internal lottery. If you win the special zone lottery, when the internal lottery in the game after that selects "Raise Lip 2 + Normal Maintain Lip", the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "right-left-middle" (reverse The instruction function is displayed by the CPU 1110 so that the stop operation is performed by pinching and pressing, and the sub-board 510 performs display according to the instruction contents of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 . When the player stops operating the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 2 is displayed on the effective line, the RT state shifts from RT2 to RT3, and the special zone is started. be. However, in this embodiment, it is configured so that only when Watermelon, Cherry, or Lost is selected in the internal lottery in the medium-low probability state or the medium-high probability state of the ART, the special zone can be won. Therefore, in the specialized zone state and the specialized zone preparation state, the result of the specialized zone lottery is always non-winning. Note that the specialized zone state ends after 5 games, as described above. After that, as described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination is displayed, the game moves from RT3 to RT2, but the lottery state during ART at this time is controlled to a high probability state.

The lottery for adding the number of ART games is performed in the case of the advantageous state B (when the ART game is executed when the sign game is completed) and according to the lottery state during ART and the conditional device activated as a result of the internal lottery. This is done when the special zone lottery is not won. However, the special zone lottery and the ART game number addition lottery may be performed at the same time. The addition lottery for the number of ART games includes an addition determination lottery for determining whether or not to add the number of ART games, and an addition game for determining the number of games to be added when it is decided to add the number of ART games. and a number-determining lottery. Specific winning probabilities in the addition determination lottery are as shown in FIGS. 656 and 662, which will be described later. Further, the specific number of ART games to be added in the addition game number determination lottery is as shown in FIGS. 657 to 660 and 662(b) described later.

The number-of-addition-games determination lottery is a lottery that is performed when the number-of-additions-games determination lottery is won. , the number of games to be added is determined according to the results of the internal lottery. In addition, when the ART medium-high probability state, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery using FIG. 658 described later. Similarly, when in the special zone, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of internal lottery using FIG. 659 described later, and when preparing for the special zone, using FIG. Then, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery. However, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance + normal maintenance" or "normal maintenance", the specific lottery probability in the number of additional games determination lottery is shown in Fig. 662 ( a), and the number of games to be added when winning the number-of-additional-games determination lottery is as shown in FIG. 662(b).

[10-3-3. Instruction function processing]
As described in step S31 of FIG. 644, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, after the main board 409 selects a winning combination by the internal lottery process in step S3 (see FIGS. 638 to 643 for lottery tables). When the main board 409 performs the central processing of the instruction function processing and the special display LED 612 displays the occurrence of an instruction (instruction function display), the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) issues an instruction of the same content. Instructions for functions can be displayed with effects on other display devices (navigation display, instruction generation effect). Although the display mode of the instruction function display and the navigation display may vary, both displays are required to have display contents in accordance with the instruction contents of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 .

FIG. 647 is a diagram for explaining a rough flow of instruction function processing. In FIG. 647, a series of processes executed by the main board 409 and a series of processes executed by the sub-board 510 in response to a command from the main board 409 are shown together with respect to the instruction function process performed by the slot machine 1. ing. FIG. 648 is a flow chart showing an example of processing related to generation of the pointing function executed by the main substrate 409 among the pointing function processing shown in FIG. First, referring to FIG. 647, the outline of instruction function processing will be described. I will explain the flow of the game including.

Various flags are used in the following explanation of the pointing function processing, and these flags are stored in the memory (for example, the RAM 1114 of the main substrate 409 and the RAM 1122 of the sub substrate 510) in the board that executes the pointing function processing. It is an internal flag that is held, and the value is rewritten or read by the CPU or the like (for example, CPU 1110 or CPU 1118) of each board. Also, when flags with the same name are used between the main board 409 and the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510), these internal flags basically have a common data format. It is assumed that the value of the flag is synchronized by transmitting a signal such as a command to .

In addition to the internal flags described above, variable data may also be used. These variable data are also stored in the memory of the substrate (for example, the RAM 1114 in the case of the main substrate 409 and the The values are stored in the RAM 1122), and the values are read or rewritten by the CPU or the like (for example, the CPU 1110 in the case of the main board 409 and the CPU 1118 in the case of the sub board 510).

First, in step S61 in FIG. 647, the main board 409 executes processing regarding whether or not to generate the pointing function (processing related to generation of the pointing function). More specifically, it determines the winning or losing of the ART initial lottery, determines whether the ART game can be started, and determines the number of ART games to be continued.

Then, when it is determined to generate the instruction function as a result of the processing related to the generation of the instruction function, the main board 409 causes the special display LED 612 to display the instruction function display based on the winning combination of the game. Processing is performed (step S62). By means of this indication function display, it is possible to indicate the proper stopping order of the small wins in the pressing order established during the ART, or to indicate that predetermined symbols should be arranged in a predetermined stopping order.

In the case of a game in which the main board 409 determines that it is not necessary to display the instruction function in step S61, no specific instruction function display is performed on the special display LED 612 in step S62.

While the main board 409 displays the instruction function in step S62 based on the result of the processing related to the generation of the instruction function in step S61, the same information as the display content (instruction content) in the instruction function display is displayed by a command or the like. It is transmitted to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) (instruction information command). If the instruction function is not displayed, the fact may be notified by an instruction information command, or the instruction information command may not be transmitted. However, if the instruction information command is not transmitted, it is necessary for the receiving side to determine whether the command has not been received after a predetermined time has elapsed. By doing so, the peripheral board (sub-board 510) not only can recognize whether or not the instruction function is to be displayed in the game based on the reception of the instruction information command, but also enables the display of the instruction function. The display content (instruction content) can also be grasped.

After receiving the instruction information command from the main board 409, the peripheral board (here, the sub-board 510) performs the processes shown in steps S63 to S65 in FIG. 647 based on the information included in the instruction information command. In the instruction function processing shown in FIG. 647, the processing (step S61) related to the generation of the instruction function is first executed by the main board 409, but the subsequent processing by the main board 409 and the sub-board 510 (specifically, , the processing of step S62 and the processing of steps S63 to S65) do not limit the execution timing of each other's processing.

First, in step S63, the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) determines whether or not the instruction function display is performed (or has been performed) in the game, and the instruction function display is performed (or performed). ) (YES in step S63), an instruction generation rendering process is performed as the process of step S64. Further, when the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) determines in step S63 that the instruction function display is not performed (or was not performed) (NO in step S63), the instruction is given as processing in step S65. Perform function-related processing.

The instruction generation effect processing in step S64 is an "instruction generation effect" for instructing the player about the stop order and stop position of the reels 301 (target symbols, ie, the timing of the stop operation), etc., on the image display 500 or other display devices. is a process for displaying a so-called ART navigation or the like. It should be noted that the content of the instruction shown to the player by the instruction generation effect is limited to the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display process. For example, even though the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating "forward push" by the instruction function display, it is not allowed that the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is "reverse push". In addition, even if the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating "forward push" and indicates that "the left reel 301a should be stopped first" as an instruction by the instruction generation effect content, the second A case in which the reel 301b to be stopped is not instructed is also not allowed. In addition, the fact that the instruction content by the instruction generation effect is limited to the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 is not limited to the above-described pressing order, and is a guideline for the pressing location in the instruction function display. It also applies if the That is, for example, even though the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating that "7 red symbols should be aimed at all reels" by the instruction function display, the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is "BAR symbol." It is not permissible to make players aim for , or to make players aim for red 7 symbols only on some reels.

In addition, as for the specific form of the command generation effect, various forms of effect are conventionally known, such as displaying the pressing order and patterns on the liquid crystal screen, lighting the LEDs associated with the respective reels 301a to 301c, and the like. and any or a combination of them may be used.

The instruction function-related processing in step S65 is performed when the instruction function display is not displayed on the special display LED 612 (for example, a game during non-ART, a game in which a winning combination is won regardless of the order of pressing even in ART, etc.). This is a process for displaying a predetermined effect screen or the like. In addition, among the above-mentioned "winning hands regardless of pressing order", there are not only winning hands that can be expected to pay out the maximum number of coins regardless of the game method when winning, such as Bell, which can be played in any game method. Winning combinations in which the maximum number of payouts cannot be expected or are not obtained are included. To explain in detail, it not only includes the winning combination (for example, the watermelon combination) that can be obtained when playing with a game method (equivalent to the above-mentioned "maximum efficiency hitting method") that can expect the maximum payout, but also " A winning combination that cannot be obtained when the game is played with the "maximum efficiency hitting method" (for example, a symbol combination using symbols arranged on the opposite side of the symbol arrangement of the reel 301 to the symbol combination of the watermelon role described above is prepared. A so-called "chance combination", which is a one-piece combination that is judged to be a prize when the combination of symbols is stopped, is also included.

The instruction function process is completed by performing the processes of steps S61 to S65. Each process (steps S61 to S65) performed as the instruction function process by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 will be described in detail below.

[10-3-4. Processing Related to Generation of Instruction Function]
The flow of the game including the processing related to the generation of the instruction function shown in step S61 of FIG. 647 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, at step S601 in FIG. 648, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games management flag is ON. The number-of-games management flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not the number-of-games management process is in progress. If it is OFF, it means that the game number management process is not performed (that is, hell state). If the number-of-games management flag is ON (YES in step S601), the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, the number of games executed during the game number management process (the number of games executed by the player while the game number management flag is set to ON) is counted. Specifically, when one game is executed during the game number management process, 1 is added to the game number counter GC as the number of games executed during the game number management process. After that, the process proceeds to step S603.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the advantageous states A to E and the withdrawal state are prepared as states during the number-of-games management process, and the game is controlled to one of these advantageous states.

Here, an overview of each of the advantageous states A to E and the pullback state will be briefly described. Advantageous state A is a state in which 32 games are set as the ceiling, and when the indicating function is displayed once in the game after these 32 games are executed, the advantageous state A ends and the state shifts to hell state. . Advantageous state B is a state in which 32 games are set as the ceiling, and after the 32 games are executed, the state is shifted to advantageous state E, which will be described later. Advantageous state C is a state in which 32 games are set as the ceiling, and when the 32 games are executed, the next game is shifted to advantageous state D, which will be described later. In the advantageous state D, 10 games are set as a chance zone (hereinafter referred to as "CZ"), and during the 10 games as CZ, rare small roles (watermelon role, cherry role) are selected by internal lottery. If it is played, there is a 100% chance that it will move to the advantageous state E from the next game, and if one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery, there is a 1/4 probability. Although the next game is shifted to the advantageous state E, if the CZ ends without being shifted to the advantageous state E, the state is shifted to hell. Advantageous state E is a state in which the instruction function flag is set to ON and the execution of the ART game is permitted, and includes a ready state until the RT state is changed from RT1 to RT2, an ART game being executed, and an advantageous state E. include. In this advantageous state E, the instruction function operates continuously for a specified number of games (in this example, "50 games + α" (α is the number of additional games)) as long as the number of games counter GC does not exceed a predetermined threshold value. Although it is possible, when the specified number of ART games is completed, the game ends unless the number of ART games is added. After the advantageous state E ends, as long as the number-of-games management flag is ON (as long as the number-of-games counter GC does not exceed a predetermined threshold value), the game is controlled to pullback state A or pullback state B, which will be described later.

It should be noted that in this example, the advantageous state does not end and the hell state does not occur without the indicating function being displayed even once. However, when it is controlled to one of the advantageous states A to E (especially advantageous state A), and the instruction function display is not performed even once during the game number management process. Even if the player is not selected, if a bonus combination that increases the number of medals is selected by an internal lottery, the indication function may not be displayed as special processing (special processing executing means).

By the way, in many conventional slot machines, when an ART initial lottery is won, a precursor game is played over a plurality of games (for example, 32 games), and the ART game is executed after the precursor game is executed. rice field. In such a conventional slot machine, even if the ART first winning lottery is not won, there is a possibility that the ART first winning lottery is won (for example, a rare small winning combination is selected in an internal lottery). , etc.), an omen game is executed. That is, after the precursor game is executed, the ART game may or may not be executed. By executing an expectation performance during the portent game that gives the player the expectation that the player has won the ART first prize lottery, the player's interest in the portent game can be attracted.

However, in such a conventional slot machine, if the ART first winning lottery is not won despite the fact that the precursor game has been executed, the player is greatly disappointed. In particular, if the result of the ART first prize lottery is not made clear until the set precursor game is completed, the player has to play the precursor game even though there is a possibility that he has not won the ART first prize lottery. If the ART first prize lottery is not won, the interest is remarkably lowered. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the ART first winning lottery is won in the hell state and the transition destination is determined to be one of the advantageous states A to C (that is, the ceiling game (premonitor game) When the transition destination is determined to the set advantageous state), the indication function display is always performed once when the set ceiling game is completed. As a result, the player is not forced to execute the precursory game when there is a possibility that the player may not have won the ART first prize lottery, and the precursory game is determined to be performed once the indication function display. will be executed. Moreover, since the degree of profit for the player after the precursor game is consumed differs depending on the advantageous state, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest without losing the significance of the precursor game. . In this example, the instruction function display is always performed once when the set ceiling game (omen game) is completed. It is not limited to those performed only when the ceiling game is completed. For example, unless the result of the ART first prize lottery can be grasped when the instruction function display is executed, the instruction function display may be activated in the middle of the precursor game. ``A form in which the result of the ART first prize lottery can be grasped at the time when the instruction function display is performed'' means that when the instruction function display is operated once during the precursor game, the instruction function is displayed in the middle of the precursor game. This corresponds to a mode in which, when the display is activated, it can be understood that the ART game will not be executed at that time.

Further, as described above, the hell state is a state in which the execution of the instruction function display has been confirmed, and the advantageous state is a state in which the execution of the instruction function display has been confirmed. However, execution of the indication function display is not confirmed in the pulled back state. Therefore, when defining a hell state and a non-hell state (advantageous state A-advantage state E, pullback state A and pullback state B), the hell state is a state in which it is impossible to allow the execution of the indication function display. , and the non-infernal state is the state in which the execution of the indication function indication can be permitted.

Also, in the advantageous state A, the advantageous state B, and the advantageous state C of this example, 32 games are set as the ceiling, but it goes without saying that the ceiling is not limited to 32 games. It is preferable to set the number of games to 32 games or less.

Also, in the advantageous state D of this example, 10 games are set as the CZ, but it is needless to say that the number of games set as the CZ is not limited to 10 games.

In the processing after step S603, processing according to the state is performed. Specifically, when it is determined in step S603 that the flag for advantageous state A is ON (YES in step S603), processing for advantageous state A is performed (step S604). If it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous state A flag is OFF (NO in step S603), the process advances to step S605 to determine whether or not the advantageous state B flag is ON (step S605). If it is determined in step S605 that the flag for advantageous state B is ON (YES in step S605), processing for advantageous state B is performed (step S606). If it is determined in step S605 that the advantageous state B flag is OFF (NO in step S605), the process advances to step S607 to determine whether or not the advantageous state C flag is ON (step S607). If it is determined in step S607 that the flag for advantageous state C is ON (YES in step S607), processing for advantageous state C is performed (step S608). If it is determined in step S607 that the advantageous state C flag is OFF (NO in step S607), the process advances to step S609 to determine whether or not the advantageous state D flag is ON (step S609). If it is determined in step S609 that the flag for advantageous state D is ON (YES in step S609), processing for advantageous state D is performed (step S610). If it is determined in step S609 that the advantageous state D flag is OFF (NO in step S609), the process advances to step S611 to determine whether or not the advantageous state E flag is ON (step S611). If it is determined in step S611 that the flag for the advantageous state E is OFF (YES in step S611), the advantageous state E processing is performed (step S612). If it is determined in step S611 that the advantageous state E flag is OFF (NO in step S611), the process advances to step S613, and the pullback state processing is performed (step S613).

If it is determined in step S601 that the number-of-games management flag is OFF (NO in step S601), the process advances to step S614 to perform hell state processing.

Hereinafter, the hell state processing, each processing in the advantageous states A to E, and the withdrawal state processing will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 649 to 655. FIG. 649 to 655 are flowcharts showing an example of each process executed by the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 649 is a flow chart showing an example of hell state processing. FIG. 650 is a flowchart showing an example of advantageous state A processing. FIG. 651 is a flowchart showing an example of advantageous state B processing. FIG. 652 is a flowchart showing an example of advantageous state C processing. FIG. 653 is a flow chart showing an example of the advantageous state D processing. FIG. 654 is a flowchart showing an example of advantageous state E processing. FIG. 655 is a flowchart illustrating an example of pullback state processing.

[10-3-4-1. Hell state processing]
In the hell state, first, it is determined whether or not a special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special sustaining replay combination) has been selected by internal lottery (step S6011). In step S601, when it is determined that one of the special roles (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special sustaining replay role) has been selected in the internal lottery (YES in step S6011), the selected special role A migration destination determination lottery (step S6012) is performed according to the type of the. This transfer destination determination lottery is a lottery for determining the advantageous state of the transfer destination, and the transfer destination is determined from among the advantageous states A to E.

In the transfer destination determination lottery in step S6012, the player is determined to be in the advantageous state A with a probability of 59600/65536, to be in the advantageous state B with a probability of 3935/65536, and to be in the advantageous state C with a probability of 2000/65536. , is determined to be in the advantageous state D with a probability of 1/65536, and is determined to be in the advantageous state E with a probability of 1/65536. Note that the slot machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that a person involved in the hall or the like can arbitrarily change any of the settings 1 to 6, and each winning combination is selected in an internal lottery for each of these settings. are different. However, the probability of selecting a special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special maintenance replay combination) in the internal lottery is set to be the same for any of setting 1 to setting 6. Here, the probability that the special watermelon role is selected, the probability that the special cherry role is selected, and the probability that the special sustaining replay role is selected may be common in setting 1 to setting 6, or each special role may be selected. Although the probabilities of being issued differ for each setting, the combined probability of selecting a special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special sustaining replay combination) may be common to settings 1-6.

When the transition destination is determined in step S6012, the transition destination is determined in steps S6013 to S6016, and the game state flag corresponding to the transition destination is set to ON.

Specifically, when it is determined that the transition destination is in advantageous state A (YES in all of steps S6013 to S6016), the advantageous state A flag is set to ON (step S6017). After that, the process proceeds to step S6018, and the number of ceiling games is set to 32 games (TA←32). After that, the process proceeds to step S6019, and the precursor flag is set to ON.

If it is determined that the transition destination is in advantageous state B (YES in steps S6013 to S6015 and NO in step S6016), the advantageous state B flag is set to ON (step S6022). After that, the process proceeds to step S6023, and the number of ceiling games is set to 32 games (TB←32). After that, the process proceeds to step S6019, and the precursor flag is set to ON.

Also, if it is determined that the transition destination is advantageous state C (YES in steps S6013 and S6014 and NO in step S6015), the advantageous state C flag is set to ON (step S6024). After that, the process proceeds to step S6025, and the number of ceiling games is set to 32 games (TC←32). After that, the process proceeds to step S6019, and the precursor flag is set to ON.

When the portent flag is set to ON in step S6019, the hell state flag is set to OFF (step S6020), the number of games management flag is set to ON (step S6021), and the hell state processing ends. do.

In addition, when the number of ceiling games is set, the premonition effect is performed until the games of the ceiling game number are completed. However, during the omen production (until the ceiling game number of games is digested), if you win the ART first lottery or the bonus role (BB1, BB2) is selected by the internal lottery, The ART game and the bonus game are executed even if all the games of the ceiling game number are not completed.

Also, if it is determined that the transition destination is the advantageous state D (YES in step S6013 and NO in step S6014), the advantageous state D flag is set to ON (step S6026). After that, the process proceeds to step S6027, and the number of CZ games is set to 10 games (CZ←10). At this time, the ceiling game number is not set (the ceiling game number may be set to 0). Thereafter, the hell state flag is set to OFF (step S6020), the number-of-games management flag is set to ON (step S6021), and the hell state processing ends.

If it is determined that the transition destination is in advantageous state E (NO in step S6013), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6028). After that, the process proceeds to step S6029, and the number of ART games is set to 50 games (ART←50). When the number of ART games ART is set to 50 games (YES in step S6129), the ART flag is set to ON (step S6030). After that, the hell state flag is set to OFF (step S6020), the number-of-games management flag is set to ON (step S6021), the hell state processing ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

If the internal lottery does not select a special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special sustaining replay role) (NO in step S6011), steps S6012 to S6021 are skipped and the game is played. The number management state is not started (the state is not shifted to the advantageous state), and the hell state continues.

By the way, if the transfer destination determination lottery in step S6012 is performed in the hell state, regardless of the result of the lottery, the state will be shifted to an advantageous state, and the instruction function display will always be performed once. The determination of whether or not the special combination is won (step S6011) and/or the transfer destination determination lottery (step S6012) corresponds to the ART first hit lottery in the hell state. However, when defined as "ART game execution lottery", the determination of whether or not a special role was won in the internal lottery (step S6011) does not correspond to the "ART game execution lottery", and the transfer destination determination lottery Only (step S6012) corresponds to "art game execution lottery".

Also, in the hell state, when it is determined that a special combination has been selected in step S6011 (YES in step S6011), and the lottery for determining the transition destination is performed in step S6012, the number-of-games management flag is set to ON, The game number counter GC starts counting from the next game. Even if it is in hell and the bonus game is being executed, if it is determined that the special role has been selected in step S6011 (YES in step S6011) and the lottery for determining the transfer destination in step S6012 is performed, The number-of-games management flag is set to ON, and counting of the number-of-games counter GC is started from the next game. Therefore, in this case, if the transition destination is one of the advantageous states A to C, the ceiling game will be completed during the bonus game, and if the transition destination is the advantageous state D, the chance zone ( CA) is executed, and if the transition destination is the advantageous state E, the bonus game ends and the ART game starts when the RT state shifts to RT2 (controlled to RT0 after the bonus game ends). It will be done. It should be noted that when the number-of-games management process is started (when the game state related to the indication function display shifts from the hell state to the advantageous state), except for the special processing described above (that is, when the number-of-games management process is selected by an internal lottery), the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, comparing the period during which the number-of-games management flag is set to ON and the period during which it is set to OFF, the period during which the flag is set to ON is longer. The period during which the number management flag is set to ON is configured to be 70% or less of the entire game period. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decline in interest is preferably suppressed while suppressing gambling.

[10-3-4-2. Advantageous state A processing]
In the advantageous state A, first, in step S6031, processing for finishing the ceiling game is performed. Specifically, each time a game is executed, the ceiling game number set as 32 games is subtracted by 1 (TA←TA-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the ceiling game number in step S6031, it is then determined whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (step S6032). ). The predetermined threshold value G is a value set so that the number of medals as game media paid out to the player in one game number management process does not exceed a prescribed value. In this example, if the specified value is N, the predetermined threshold value G is set to a value obtained by dividing N by the slope value (the net increase in the number of cards per game). For example, when it is specified that the number of game media paid out to a player in one game number management process does not exceed 3000, and the slope value is 2 [pieces/game], the predetermined threshold G is 1500 games. set. However, in slot machines equipped with bonus games, a value obtained by subtracting the number of bonus games that can be completed in the shortest time from the above G may be set as the predetermined threshold value. For example, if it is specified that the number of game media paid out to a player in one game number management process does not exceed 3000, the slope value is 2 [pieces/game], and the number of bonus games that can be completed in the shortest time is 34 games. Then, 1466 games are set as the predetermined threshold.

If the number-of-games counter GC counted during the number-of-games management process is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6032), the process proceeds to step S6034, and an ART first-hit lottery is performed (step S6034). The ART first hit lottery performed in step S6034 is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state E. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" or "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART initial lottery is as shown in Fig. 661. . In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is neither "special maintenance + normal maintenance" nor "normal maintenance", the winning probability in the ART first lottery is set to 1/65536. there is FIG. 661 is a table used for the ART initial winning lottery when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character" or "normal maintenance character".

Here, the ART first hit lottery performed in step S6034 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance + normal maintenance", the winning probability in the ART first lottery performed in step S6034 is as shown in Figure 661 ("special maintenance + normal maintenance"). time column), it is determined based on the difference K between a predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining game number K until the end of the game number management process). be done.

Specifically, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is a first prescribed number or more, ART The winning probability in the first lottery is 65536 out of 65536 (that is, 100%). In addition, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first prescribed number, the ART first winning lottery The odds of winning are 4 in 65536. The above-mentioned first prescribed number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first prize lottery, the number of games (50 games in this embodiment) is predetermined. is preferably a value that can be digested without terminating prematurely. In the present embodiment, the number of ART games to be executed when the ART initial lottery is won is 50 games (when the additional lottery is not won), so the first prescribed number is 50 games or more. Although it is preferable to have one, it is not limited to this. However, since the ART game does not start immediately even if the ART first prize lottery is won, it is preferable to set the number of games to (50 games+α) in consideration of the number of games to be prepared. In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games+α) games. Therefore, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 100 games or more, there is a 100% probability that the ART will be the first hit. If the lottery is won and the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than 100, the probability of winning the ART initial lottery is only 4/65536. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the winning probability in the ART first prize lottery becomes relatively small. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the ART first hit probability when the number K of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is less than the first prescribed number (4/65536 in this example) is made lower than the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the first prescribed number. , the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process while keeping the winning rate the same as compared with the case where the winning probability in the ART first prize lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. It is also possible to produce a further effect such as realizing a game property that increases the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when K is the first specified number or more. becomes.

Also, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is the normal maintenance reply, as shown in FIG. is 4/65536.

In the above-described embodiment, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the first specified number. Based on whether there is or not, the winning probability in the ART first lottery is determined to be one of two stages of high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). Yes, but not limited to this. For example, when the probability of winning in the ART first prize lottery is set in multiple stages, and the combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is K. The winning probability in the ART first-hit lottery may be gradually lowered as the number becomes smaller.

If the ART initial lottery is won (YES in step S6035), the process proceeds to step S6036, and the number of ceiling games is set to 0 (TA←0). Thereafter, the portent flag is set to OFF (step S6037), the advantageous state A flag is set to OFF (step S6038), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6039), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. (step S6040), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6041). Thereafter, the process advances to step S6042 to perform RT state transition processing.

RT state transition processing in step S6042 is processing for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when the internal lottery selects "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintain Lip", the instruction function is activated in step S6041, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "right-middle-left". An instruction function is displayed so that a stop operation is performed by (reverse press). When the player stops operating the reel stop button 211 according to the display of the instruction function, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 performs transition control from RT1 to RT2. Then, on the condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 has been performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6043), the process for advantageous state A ends, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if the internal lottery does not select "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintain Lip", or if the player does not follow the instruction function display, RT1 is switched to RT2 in step S6042. transition control is not performed. When the internal lottery did not select "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", the ART flag is not set to ON in step S6043, but the player did not follow the instruction function display. In this case, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6043, although the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S6042. It should be noted that until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the instruction function display is performed when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected in the internal lottery. In other words, when the internal lottery in RT1 selects "up replay 1 + normal maintenance replay", when the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, control is performed to shift to RT2. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 1 is not displayed on the active line due to the failure to follow the indication function display, RT1 is maintained, but the ART flag is set to ON. In addition, according to the lottery tables in FIGS. 638 to 643, "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintain Lip" corresponds only to one push order condition device, but there are six push orders like the push order bell. It is preferable to have a corresponding conditioning device.

The ART flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not an ART game is in progress. When it is ON, it means that ART is in progress, and when it is OFF, it means that ART is not in progress. , that is, it means that it is not in ART.

When the ART initial lottery in step S6034 is not won (NO in step S6035), the process proceeds to step S6044, and it is determined whether or not the number of ceiling games is 0 (TA=0). If the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6044), the process does not proceed to step S6053 (that is, the processing of steps S6053 to S6061 is not performed), and the advantageous state A is continued without transitioning to the hell state. be.

If the ART first winning lottery is won (YES in step S6035), the advantageous state A ends and shifts to the advantageous state E even if the ceiling number of games is not completed, while the ART first winning lottery is won. If not (NO in step S6035), the advantageous state A continues until the ceiling number of games is completed. However, although not shown in FIG. 650, even if the ART initial lottery is lost (NO in step S6035) and the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6044), the internal lottery will result in a bonus role. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. During the execution of this bonus game, an ART first winning lottery is performed with a probability of 328/65536, and if the ART first winning lottery is won, the state immediately shifts to an advantageous state E after the bonus game is finished. On the other hand, if the ART initial lottery is not won during execution of the bonus game, the ceiling game is set to 32 games (TA←32), and the advantageous state A processing is performed again.

If it is determined in step S6044 that the number of ceiling games is 0 (TA=0) (YES in step S6044), the process proceeds to step S6053, where the number of games counter GC during the game management process, that is, the game number counter GC currently being continued is counted. After the count is started (after the number-of-games management flag is set to ON), it is determined whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once (step S6053). The determination of whether or not the indication function has been displayed even once is made by an internal lottery after the count of the number of games counter GC is started (while the section display lamp 605 is lit (or flashing)). Any one of "Press order bell 1" to "Push order bell 6" is selected, and the maximum payout number (in this example, 8 This corresponds to the judgment as to whether or not the stop operation mode for paying out the coins has been instructed even once.

In step S6053, when it is determined that the indicating function has been displayed once or more during the number-of-games management process (YES in step S6053), the indicating function flag is set to OFF (step S6054), and the precursor flag is OFF. (step S6055), the advantageous state A flag is set to OFF (step S6056), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6057), and the number of games management flag is set to OFF (step S6058). After that, the process proceeds to step S6059, the number-of-games counter GC is set to 0 (step S6059), the advantageous state A processing ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

If it is determined in step S6053 that the instruction function has not been displayed even once during the game number management process (NO in step S6053), the number of times of instruction is set to 1 (step S6060). A function flag is set to ON (step S6061). As a result, even if the ceiling game number TA (32 games in this example) has already been played in the advantageous state A processing, it is determined that the indicating function display has not been performed even once. , the transition to the hell state does not occur until the instruction function display is performed at least once, and the instruction function display is always performed once during the number-of-games management process.

However, although not shown in FIG. 650, if the bonus game is executed after the count of the number-of-games counter GC has started, even if the instruction function is displayed after the count of the number-of-games counter GC has started. has not been performed even once (even if NO is determined in step S6053), the processing of steps S6054 to S6059 is performed, and the advantageous state A is shifted to hell state. For example, the hell state is shifted to the advantageous state A, and the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is selected by the internal lottery without winning the ART initial lottery, and the bonus game is executed, but the bonus game is being executed. If the ART initial lottery is not won even in the first lottery, the ceiling game is set to 32 games after the bonus game is finished, and the advantageous state A time processing is performed again, the instruction function display is not performed, and the ceiling game is 32. When the game is completed, although the instruction function display is not performed even once after the transition from the hell state to the advantageous state A, the advantageous state A is shifted to the hell state.

In step S6032, if it is determined that the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process exceeds the predetermined threshold value G (NO in step S6032), the process proceeds to step S6053, and during the game management process , it is determined whether or not the indicating function has been displayed even once (step S6053). In this step S6053, if it is determined that the indicating function display has been performed one or more times during the game number management processing (YES in step S6053), the processing of steps S6054 to S6059 is performed, and then the advantageous state A Time processing ends and returns to the main routine.

By the way, considering the combination probability (26280/65536) that any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery and the predetermined threshold value G (1500 games), the probability is Although it can only occur with an extremely low probability from a technical point of view, it is probabilistic that the instruction function display is not performed even once after the game counter GC starts counting, and the game counter GC reaches a predetermined threshold value. There may be a case where it is determined to exceed G (NO in step S6032 and NO in step S6053). In this case, the processing of steps S6054 to S6059 is not performed, the number of times of instruction is set to 1 (step S6060), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6061). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (the number of games counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function display is not performed and the instruction function is not immediately shifted to the hell state. The advantageous state A is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function is displayed once during the number-of-games management process.

Further, as described above, even after the set number of ceiling games TA (32 games in this example) has been completed, if the indication function display is not performed even once during the number of games management process, hell will occur. Since the advantageous state A continues without transitioning to a state, the number of remaining ceiling games TA may become negative as a result of the subtraction processing being performed in step S6031. Therefore, when the ceiling game number TA, whose initial value is 32 games, becomes 0 by executing the game, the ceiling game number TA is set to "FF", and when the ceiling game number TA is "FF" , as long as the advantageous state A continues without shifting to hell state or advantageous state E, the processing of step S6031 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6044. As a result, even if the advantageous state A continues after the number of ceiling games TA becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. It becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Also in step S6031, when the number of remaining ceiling games TA becomes negative, even if the game is executed, the number of remaining ceiling games TA is kept set to "FF". ” instead of keeping it at “00”. Also, the number of remaining ceiling games TA has been described as a subtraction method in which it is subtracted each time a game is played, but it is needless to say that an addition method in which it is added each time a game is played may be used.

In this example, when the ceiling game number TA, which was initially 32 games, becomes 0 by executing the game, the ceiling game number TA is set to "FF". , to keep 00 instead of setting to "FF".

In this example, the initial value of the number of ceiling games TA is set to 32 games, and the subtraction method in which the number of ceiling games TA is subtracted each time a game is executed has been described. .

[10-3-4-3. Advantageous state B time processing]
In the advantageous state B, first, in step S6071, processing for finishing the ceiling game is performed. Specifically, each time a game is executed, the number of ceiling games set as 32 games is subtracted by 1 (TB←TB-1).

After 1 is subtracted from the number of ceiling games in step S6071, it is determined whether the number of games counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the number of games management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example). is determined (step S6072). If the number-of-games counter GC is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6072), the process proceeds to step S6073, and an ART game-number addition lottery is performed (step S6073). Advantageous state B is a state in which it is determined that when the number of ceiling games TB is completed, the state is shifted to advantageous state E, and at least 50 ART games are to be executed. The lottery for adding the number of games is a lottery for determining whether or not to add the number of ART games. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" or "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART game number addition lottery is shown in Fig. 662 (a) That's right. In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is neither "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" nor "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART game addition lottery is set to 1/65536. ing.

The number of games to be added when winning the ART game number addition lottery is as shown in FIG. 662(b). It should be noted that, in the case of "when ``special maintenance rhyme + normal maintenance rhyme'' is not won" shown in FIG. This includes not only when neither of the "rep" is included, but also when the role selected by internal lottery is "normal maintenance".

Here, the lottery for adding the number of ART games performed in step S6073 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART game number addition lottery performed in step S6073 is a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining game number K until the end of the game number management process).

Specifically, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the remaining game number K until the end of the game number management process is the second prescribed number or more, ART The winning probability in the lottery for adding the number of games is 65536 out of 65536 (that is, 100%). In addition, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the remaining game number K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number, the ART game number addition lottery The probability of winning is 4/65536. The above second prescribed number can be set arbitrarily, but even if ART games are added based on winning the ART game number addition lottery, the ART game is a value that can be digested without ending halfway. is preferably In the present embodiment, when the ART game number addition lottery is won, a maximum of 300 games are added, so it is preferable that the second prescribed number is 300 games or more, but it is not limited to this. do not have. Therefore, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 300 games or more, there is a 100% probability that the number of ART games will be If the additional lottery is won and the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than 300 games, the probability of winning the ART game number addition lottery is only 4/65536. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the probability of winning in the ART game number addition lottery is relatively small. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle despite the fact that the ART game has been terminated. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of ART games added when the number K of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number The winning probability in the lottery (4/65536 in this example) is the winning probability (65536 in this example) in the ART game number addition lottery when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the second specified number. 65536), compared to the case where the winning probability in the ART game number addition lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process, the game can be played with the same winning rate. It is said that it is possible to realize a game property that increases the winning probability (65536 out of 65536 in this example) in the ART game number addition lottery when the number K of remaining games until the end of the number management process is a specified number or more. Further effects can also be produced.

Also, as shown in FIG. 662(b), regarding the number of games to be added when winning the ART game number addition lottery, the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance letter + normal maintenance letter". , the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is different between the second specified number or more and the second specified number less than the second specified number. Specifically, when the role selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance + normal maintenance", the role selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance + normal maintenance". Compared to , it is set so that the number of games to be added is large. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the number of ART games to be added when winning the ART game number addition lottery is relatively small. Even if the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle despite the addition of the ART game, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player.

In the above-described embodiment, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the second specified number. Based on whether there is or not, the winning probability in the ART game number addition lottery is determined to be one of two stages: high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). but not limited to this. For example, if the probability of winning in the lottery for adding the number of ART games is set in multiple stages, and the combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process As K becomes smaller, the winning probability in the lottery for adding the number of ART games may be gradually lowered.

After that, the process proceeds to step S6074, and it is determined whether or not the number of ceiling games is 0 (TB=0). If the number of ceiling games is 0 (YES in step S6074), the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6075), the advantageous state B flag is set to OFF (step S6076), and the advantageous state E flag is set to ON. (Step S6077), the number of ART games is set (Step S6078), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (Step S6079). Thereafter, the process advances to step S6080 to perform RT state transition processing.

In addition, in step S6073, instead of the ART game number addition lottery, an ART first hit lottery may be performed. In this case, after the number of ceiling games TB is set to 0, the process proceeds to step S6074.

RT state transition processing in step S6080 is processing for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when the internal lottery selects "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintain Lip", the instruction function is activated in step S6079, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "right-middle-left". An instruction function is displayed so that a stop operation is performed by (reverse press). When the player stops operating the reel stop button 211 according to the display of the instruction function, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 performs transition control from RT1 to RT2. Then, on the condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 has been performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6081), the advantageous state B time processing ends, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if the internal lottery does not select "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintain Lip", or if the player does not obey the instruction function display, RT1 is switched to RT2 in step S6080. transition control is not performed. When the internal lottery did not select "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", the ART flag is not set to ON in step S6081, but the player did not follow the indication function display. In this case, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6081, although the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S6080. It should be noted that until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the instruction function display is performed when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected in the internal lottery. In other words, when the internal lottery in RT1 selects "up replay 1 + normal maintenance replay", when the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, control is performed to shift to RT2. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 1 is not displayed on the active line due to the failure to follow the indication function display, RT1 is maintained, but the ART flag is set to ON. Also, as described above, it is preferable to have a conditional device corresponding to six types of pressing orders, such as a pressing order bell, for the "lifting lips 1 + normal maintenance lips".

In step S6078, if the additional lottery in step S6073 is not won, the number of games for one shot of the ART game (50 games in this example) is set. The number of games (50+α) obtained by adding the number of games α to be added is set.

In step S6074, if it is determined that the number of ceiling games is not 0 (TB=0) (if determined as NO in step S6074), regardless of whether or not the ART game addition lottery in step S6073 has been won. , steps S6075 to S6081 are not performed. That is, the advantageous state B is continued without shifting to the hell state.

If it is determined in step S6072 that the number of games counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value (NO in step S6072), it is determined whether or not the indicating function has been displayed even once during the game management process. (step S6082). That is, after the game number counter GC starts counting (while the section display lamp 605 is lit (or blinking)), an internal lottery will be conducted to select one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6". is selected, and the stop operation mode for paying out the maximum number of payouts (eight in this example) among the winning prize payout numbers corresponding to the "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is instructed even once. It is determined whether or not

In the advantageous state B, when the ceiling game number TB is completed, the state is shifted to the advantageous state E and the ART game is executed. (NO in step S6072). For example, the hell state is shifted to the advantageous state E, the ART game is executed, and the ART game is added. In the case of being shifted to the advantageous state B in the continued state (for example, in the case of winning the ART first prize lottery in the pullback mode and being shifted to the advantageous state B), the ceiling game TB is completed in the advantageous state B. In some cases, the number of games counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example). In such a case, if the instruction function display is performed even once, the transition from the advantageous state B to the hell state is forcibly performed. In rare cases, it may not be done even once. In that case, even if it is in the advantageous state B, it will not be shifted to the advantageous state E (without the ART game being executed), and after displaying the instruction function once, forcibly, Advantageous state B is shifted to hell state. As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (the number of games counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function display is not performed and the instruction function is not immediately shifted to the hell state. The advantageous state B continues until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed once during the number-of-games management process.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S6072 that the number-of-games counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value (NO in step S6072), then in step S6082 whether or not the indicating function was displayed during the number-of-games management process. No is determined. If it is determined in step S6082 that the instruction function has not been displayed even once during the game number management process (NO in step S6082), the number of times of instruction is set to 1 (step S6089), and an instruction function flag is set. is set to ON (step S6090). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6082 that the instruction function has been displayed during the game number management process (YES in step S6082), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6083), and the precursor flag is set to OFF. (step S6084), the advantageous state B flag is set to OFF (step S6085), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6086), and the number of games management flag is set to OFF (step S6087). After that, the process proceeds to step S6088, the number-of-games counter GC is set to 0 (step S6088), the advantageous state B time process ends, and the process returns to the main routine. As a result, when the hell state is shifted to one of the advantageous states A to E and the counting of the game number counter GC is started, even if the game number counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value, There is no transition from the advantageous state B to the hell state without the indicating function being displayed even once, and the indicating function is displayed once before being transferred to the hell state.

Further, if it is determined in step S6072 that the number of games counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold (NO in step S6072), after the set ceiling number of games TB (32 games in this example) is completed, Even so, if the indication function is not displayed even once during the number-of-games management process, the advantageous state B continues without transitioning to the hell state. The number of remaining ceiling games TB may become negative. Therefore, when the number of ceiling games TB whose initial value is 32 games becomes 0 by executing the game, the number of ceiling games TB is set to FF, and when the number of ceiling games TB is FF, a state of hell or As long as the advantageous state B continues without transitioning to another advantageous state, the process of step S6071 is not performed. As a result, even if the advantageous state B continues after the number of ceiling games TB becomes 0 by executing the game, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. It becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Also in step S6071, when the remaining ceiling game number TB becomes negative, even if the game is executed, the remaining ceiling game number TB remains set to "FF". ” instead of keeping it at “00”. Also, the number of remaining ceiling games TB has been described as a subtraction method in which it is subtracted each time a game is executed, but it is needless to say that it may be an addition method in which it is added each time a game is executed.

[10-3-4-4. Advantageous state C process]
In the advantageous state C, first, in step S6091, processing for finishing the ceiling game is performed. Specifically, each time a game is executed, the number of ceiling games set as 32 games is subtracted by 1 (TC←TC-1).

After 1 is subtracted from the number of ceiling games in step S6091, whether or not the number of games counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the number of games management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example). is determined (step S6092). If the number-of-games counter GC is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6092), the process proceeds to step S6094, and an ART first hit lottery is performed (step S6094). The ART first hit lottery performed in step S6094 is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state E. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either ``special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip'' or ``normal maintenance lip'', the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is as shown in Fig. 661 . Also, if the hand selected in the internal lottery is neither "special maintenance + normal maintenance" nor "normal maintenance", the winning probability in the ART first lottery is set to 1/65536. there is

Here, the ART first-hit lottery performed in step S6094 is performed in the same manner as the ART first-hit lottery performed in step S6034. That is, when the combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance + normal maintenance", the winning probability in the ART initial lottery performed in step S6094 is as shown in Fig. 661 ("special maintenance + normal maintenance ” column at the time of winning), based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining game number K until the end of the game number management process). determined by

Specifically, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is the first prescribed number or more, ART The winning probability in the first lottery is 65536 out of 65536 (that is, 100%). In addition, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance letter + normal maintenance letter", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first prescribed number, the ART first winning lottery The odds of winning are 4 in 65536. The above-mentioned first prescribed number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first prize lottery, the number of games (50 games in this embodiment) is predetermined. is preferably a value that can be digested without terminating prematurely. In the present embodiment, the number of ART games to be executed when the ART initial lottery is won is 50 games (when the additional lottery is not won), so the first prescribed number is 50 games or more. Although it is preferable to have one, it is not limited to this. However, since the ART game does not start immediately even if the ART first prize lottery is won, it is preferable to set the number of games to (50 games+α) in consideration of the number of games to be prepared. In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games+α) games. Therefore, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 100 games or more, there is a 100% probability that the ART will be the first hit. If the lottery is won and the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than 100, the probability of winning the ART initial lottery is only 4/65536. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the winning probability in the ART first prize lottery becomes relatively small. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the ART first hit probability when the number K of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is less than the first prescribed number (4/65536 in this example) is made lower than the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the first prescribed number. , the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process while keeping the winning rate the same as compared with the case where the winning probability in the ART first prize lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. It is also possible to produce a further effect such as realizing a game property that increases the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when K is the first specified number or more. becomes.

Also, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is the normal maintenance reply, as shown in FIG. At all times, the odds of winning in the ART first lottery are 4 in 65536.

In the above-described embodiment, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the first specified number. Based on whether there is or not, the winning probability in the ART first lottery is determined to be one of two stages of high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). Yes, but not limited to this. For example, when the probability of winning in the ART initial lottery is set in multiple stages, and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is K. The winning probability in the ART first-hit lottery may be gradually lowered as the number becomes smaller.

If the ART first hit lottery is won (YES in step S6095), the process advances to step S6096, and the number of ceiling games is set to 0 (TC←0). Thereafter, the portent flag is set to OFF (step S6097), the advantageous state C flag is set to OFF (step S6098), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6099), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. (step S6100), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6101). Thereafter, the process advances to step S6102 to perform RT state transition processing.

RT state transition processing in step S6102 is processing for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when the internal lottery selects "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintain Lip", the instruction function is activated in step S6101, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "right-middle-left". An instruction function is displayed so that a stop operation is performed by (reverse pressing). When the player stops operating the reel stop button 211 according to the display of the instruction function, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 performs transition control from RT1 to RT2. Then, on the condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 has been performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6103), the process for advantageous state C is completed, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if the internal lottery does not select "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintain Lip", or if the player does not obey the instruction function display, RT1 moves to RT2 in step S6102. Although no transition control is performed, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6103. It should be noted that until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the instruction function display is performed when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected in the internal lottery. In other words, when the internal lottery in RT1 selects "up replay 1 + normal maintenance replay", when the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, control is performed to shift to RT2. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 1 is not displayed on the active line due to the failure to follow the indication function display, RT1 is maintained, but the ART flag is set to ON.

If the ART initial lottery is not won in step S6094 (NO in step S6095), the process advances to step S6104 to determine whether or not the number of ceiling games is 0 (TC=0). If the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6104), the processing of steps S6106 to S6109, which will be described later, is not performed. That is, the advantageous state C is continued.

If the ART first hit lottery is won (YES in step S6095), the advantageous state C ends and shifts to the advantageous state E even if the ceiling game number is not completed, while the ART first hit lottery is won. If not (NO in step S6095), the advantageous state C continues until the ceiling number of games is completed. However, although not shown in FIG. 652, even if the ART initial lottery is lost (NO in step S6095) and the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6104), the internal lottery will result in a bonus role. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. During the execution of this bonus game, an ART first winning lottery is performed with a probability of 328/65536, and if the ART first winning lottery is won, the state immediately shifts to an advantageous state E after the bonus game is finished. On the other hand, if the ART initial lottery is not won during the execution of the bonus game, the ceiling game is set to 32 games (TC←32), and the advantageous state C processing is performed again.

If it is determined in step S6104 that the number of ceiling games is 0 (TC=0) (YES in step S6104), the portent flag is set to OFF (step S6106), and the advantageous state C flag is set to OFF ( Step S6107), the advantageous state D flag is set to ON (step S6108). Then, in step S6109, 10 games are set as the number of games in the chance zone (CZ←10), the processing for advantageous state C ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

If it is determined in step S6092 that the number of games counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value G (NO in step S6032), the process proceeds to step S6112, and the instruction function is displayed even once during the game management process. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S6112). Here, if it is determined that the indicating function display has been performed once or more (YES in step S6112), the indicating function flag is set to OFF (step S6113), the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6114), The advantageous state C flag is set to OFF (step S6115), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6116), and the number of games management flag is set to OFF (step S6117). After that, the process proceeds to step S6118, the number-of-games counter GC is set to 0 (step S6118), the advantageous state C process is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine.

By the way, in the advantageous state C, as in the case of the advantageous state A, the combined probability (26280/65536 ) and a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games), the probability of occurrence is extremely low. It may be determined that the number-of-games counter GC has exceeded the predetermined threshold value G (NO in step S6092 and NO in step S6112) without any game being played. In this case, the processing of steps S6113 to S6118 is not performed, the number of times of instruction is set to 1 (step S6119), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6120). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (the number of games counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function display is not performed and the instruction function is not immediately shifted to the hell state. The advantageous state C is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function is displayed once during the number-of-games management process.

In addition, when the number of games counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value, even after the set ceiling number of games TC (32 games in this example) has been completed, an instruction is given during the number of games management process. If the function is not displayed even once, the state of advantage C does not shift to the hell state, but the state of advantage C continues. Therefore, as a result of the subtraction processing in step S6091, the number of remaining ceiling games TA may become negative. can occur. Therefore, when the ceiling game number TA, whose initial value is 32 games, becomes 0 by executing the game, the ceiling game number TC is set to "FF", and when the ceiling game number TC is "FF", As long as the advantageous state C continues without transitioning to hell or other advantageous state, the processing of step S6091 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6104. As a result, even if the advantageous state C continues after the number of ceiling games TC becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, interruption of the game due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 can be avoided. It becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Also in step S6091, when the remaining ceiling game number TC becomes negative, even if the game is executed, the remaining ceiling game number TC is set to "FF". ” instead of keeping it at “00”. Further, although the number of remaining ceiling games TC has been described as a subtraction method in which it is subtracted each time a game is executed, it is needless to say that it may be an addition method in which it is added each time a game is executed.

[10-3-4-5. Advantageous State D Time Processing]
In the advantageous state D, first, in step S6131, the CZ game is finished. Specifically, each time a game is executed, the number of CZ games set as 10 games is subtracted by 1 (CZ←CZ-1).

If 1 is subtracted from the number of CZ games in step S6131, then whether or not the number of games counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the number of games management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example) is determined (step S6132).

If the number-of-games counter GC counted during the number-of-games management process is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6132), the process proceeds to step S6134, and an ART first-hit lottery is performed (step S6134). The ART initial winning lottery performed in step S6134 is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state E, and is set to a higher probability than any of the advantageous states A to C. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 663 , when a rare small combination (watermelon combination, cherry combination) is selected in the internal lottery, the winning is 65536 out of 65536 (100%) probability. If any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected in the lottery, the ART first lottery of step S6134 is performed so that the probability of winning is 16384 out of 65536 (25%). is done. Also, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" or "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART first winning lottery is as shown in FIG. is. Incidentally, when the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is selected by the internal lottery in the CZ in the advantageous state D and the bonus game is executed, the bonus will be executed as long as the number-of-games counter GC does not exceed the threshold value G. After the game is executed, the game is shifted to the advantageous state E, and it is determined that the ART game will be executed.

Here, the ART first hit lottery performed in step S6134 will be described in detail. When the role selected by the internal lottery is a rare small role (watermelon role, cherry role) or "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" or normal maintenance lip, ART first hit performed in step S6134 The winning probability in the lottery is as described above (Fig. 663 and FIG. 661 (as shown in the column when winning the normal maintenance reply)). On the other hand, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance riff + normal maintenance riff", the winning probability in the ART initial lottery performed in step S6134 is as shown in Fig. 661 ("special maintenance riff + normal As shown in the "maintenance reply" column at the time of winning), the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining game number K until the end of the game number management process) determined based on

Specifically, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is a specified number or more, the ART first hit The odds of winning in the lottery are 65536 out of 65536 (ie 100%). In addition, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the specified number, the probability of winning in the ART first winning lottery is 4/65536. The prescribed number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first prize lottery, the predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment) is halfway. A value that can be digested without terminating in is preferred. In this embodiment, the number of ART games to be executed when the ART initial lottery is won is 50 games (when the additional lottery is not won), so the prescribed number is 50 games or more. is preferred, but not limited to this. However, since the ART game does not start immediately even if the ART first prize lottery is won, it is preferable to set the number of games to (50 games+α) in consideration of the number of games to be prepared. In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games+α) games. Therefore, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 100 games or more, there is a 100% probability that the ART will be the first hit. If the lottery is won and the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than 100, the probability of winning the ART initial lottery is only 4/65536. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the winning probability in the ART first prize lottery becomes relatively small. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the ART first hit probability (this In this example, 4/65536) is lower than the ART first hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than a specified number. Compared to the case where the winning probability in the ART initial lottery is constant regardless of the number of games counter GC counted during the management process, the number of remaining games K until the end of the number of games management process is the specified number while keeping the winning rate the same. It is also possible to produce a further action and effect that it is possible to realize a game property in which the ART first hit probability (in this example, 65536/65536) is increased.

Also, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is the normal maintenance reply, as shown in FIG. As mentioned above, the winning probability in the ART first lottery is always 4/65536.

In the above-described embodiment, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", whether the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the prescribed number. Based on whether or not, the winning probability in the ART first lottery is determined to be one of two stages of high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). , but not limited to. For example, when the probability of winning in the ART initial lottery is set in multiple stages, and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is K. The winning probability in the ART first-hit lottery may be gradually lowered as the number becomes smaller.

If the ART first hit lottery is won (YES in step S6135), the process proceeds to step S6136, and the number of CZ games is set to 0 (CZ←0). Thereafter, the portent flag is set to OFF (step S6137), the advantageous state D flag is set to OFF (step S6138), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6139), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. (step S6140), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6141). Thereafter, the process advances to step S6142 to perform RT state transition processing.

The RT state transition processing in step S6142 is processing for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when the internal lottery selects "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintain Lip", the instruction function is activated in step S6141, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "right-middle-left". An instruction function is displayed so that a stop operation is performed by (reverse press). When the player stops operating the reel stop button 211 according to the display of the instruction function, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 performs transition control from RT1 to RT2. Then, on the condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 has been performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6143), the advantageous state D time processing ends, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if the internal lottery does not select "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintain Lip", or if the player does not obey the command function display, RT1 moves to RT2 in step S6142. transition control is not performed. When the internal lottery did not select "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", the ART flag is not set to ON in step S6143, but the player did not follow the indication function display. In this case, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6143, although the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S61042. It should be noted that until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the instruction function display is performed when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected in the internal lottery. In other words, when the internal lottery in RT1 selects "up replay 1 + normal maintenance replay", when the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, control is performed to shift to RT2. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 1 is not displayed on the active line due to the failure to follow the indication function display, RT1 is maintained, but the ART flag is set to ON. Also, as described above, it is preferable to have a conditional device corresponding to six types of pressing orders, such as a pressing order bell, for the "lifting lips 1 + normal maintenance lips".

When the ART initial lottery in step S6134 is not won (NO in step S6135), the process proceeds to step S6144, and it is determined whether or not the number of CZ games is 0 (CZ=0). If the number of CZ games is not 0 (NO in step S6144), the processing of steps S6153 to S6160, which will be described later, is not performed. That is, the advantageous state D is continued without shifting to the hell state.

If the ART first hit lottery is won (YES in step S6135), the advantageous state D ends and shifts to the advantageous state E even if the number of CZ games has not been completed, while the ART first hit lottery is won. If not (NO in step S6135), the advantageous state D continues until the CZ number of games are completed. However, although not shown in FIG. 653, even if the ART initial lottery is lost (NO in step S6135) and the number of CZ games is not 0 (NO in step S6144), a bonus role is played in the internal lottery. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. During the execution of this bonus game, an extra lottery is performed in which the number of ART games is added with a probability of 328/65536, and if the extra lottery is won, immediately after the bonus game ends, the state is shifted to the advantageous state E. , the ART game is executed including the added number of games. On the other hand, if the additional lottery is not won during the execution of the bonus game, 50 games are set as the number of ART games (ART←50), and immediately after the bonus game ends, the state is shifted to the advantageous state E, and 50 games are played. The ART game of the game is executed.

If it is determined in step S6144 that the number of CZ games is 0 (CZ=0) (YES in step S6144), the process advances to step S6153 to determine whether the indicating function was displayed even once during the game management process. It is determined whether or not (step S6153).

In step S6153, when it is determined that the indicating function has been displayed once or more during the number-of-games management process (YES in step S6153), the indicating function flag is set to OFF (step S6154), and the advantageous state D flag is set. is set to OFF (step S6155), the hell flag is set to ON (step S6156), and the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF (step S6157). After that, the process proceeds to step S6158, the number-of-games counter GC is set to 0 (step S6158), the advantageous state D time process ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

By the way, in the advantageous state D, as in the case of the advantageous state A and the advantageous state C, the combination probability ( 26280/65536) and the predetermined threshold value G (1500 games), the probability is extremely low. It may be determined that the number of games counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value G without the function being displayed even once (NO in step S6132 and NO in step S6153). obtain. In this case, the processing of steps S6154 to S6158 is not performed, the number of times of instruction is set to 1 (step S6159), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6160). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (the number of games counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function display is not performed and the instruction function is not immediately shifted to the hell state. The advantageous state D continues until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed once during the number-of-games management process.

Also, as described above, even after the set number of CZ games CZ (10 games in this example) has been completed, if the instruction function is not displayed even once during the number of games management process, hell Since the advantageous state D continues without transitioning to the state, the remaining CZ game number CZ may become negative as a result of the subtraction processing being performed in step S6131. Therefore, when the number of CZ games CZ whose initial value is 10 games becomes 0 by executing the game, the number of remaining chance games CZ is set to "FF", and the number of chance games CZ is "FF". Sometimes, as long as the advantageous state D continues without transitioning to the hell state or the advantageous state E, the processing of step S6131 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6144. As a result, even if the chance game (CZ) is continued after the number of chance games CZ has become 0 due to the execution of the game, interruption of the game due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 can be avoided. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

In step S6131, when the number of remaining chance games CZ becomes negative, even if the game is executed, the remaining number of chance games CZ remains set to "FF". It may be a process of keeping "00" instead of setting to . Also, the number of remaining chance games CZ has been described as a subtraction method in which it is subtracted each time a game is played, but it is needless to say that it may be an addition method in which it is added each time a game is played.
[10-3-4-6. Advantageous State E Processing]
Advantageous state E is a process during the ART game. In this advantageous state E, first, in step S6171, the ART game digestion process is performed. Specifically, each time a game is executed, the number of ART games preset in steps S6040, S6067, S6100, S6140 or S6197 is subtracted by one (ART←ART-1).

After 1 is subtracted from the number of ART games in step S6171, whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example). is determined (step S6172).

If the number-of-games counter GC counted during the number-of-games management process is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6172), the process proceeds to step S6173 to determine whether or not the player is in the specialized zone (step S6173).

If it is determined in step S6173 that it is not in the specialized zone (YES in step S6173), the above-described specialized zone lottery is performed using the specialized zone lottery table in FIG. 665 (step S6174). If the special zone lottery in step S6174 is won (YES in step S6175), the process proceeds to step S6176, and RT state transition processing is performed (step S6176).

The RT state transition processing in step S6176 is processing for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when the internal lottery selects "up lip 2 + normal maintenance lip", the instruction function is activated, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "right-left-middle" (reverse pinching). The instruction function display is performed so that the stop operation is performed by pressing ). When the player stops operating the reel stop button 211 in accordance with the instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 2 is displayed on the activated line, and the CPU 1110 performs transition control from RT2 to RT3. When the special zone lottery is won, the ART lottery state is shifted from the ART medium low probability state or the ART medium high probability state to the special zone ready state. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 2 is displayed on the activated line, the specialized zone preparation state is shifted to the specialized zone state.

In step S6177, an addition determination lottery is performed. In step S6177, a lottery is first drawn to determine whether or not the number of ART games is to be added. A lottery will be held to determine whether the game will be added. Then, in step S6180, the number of additional games N determined by the number of additional games determination lottery is added (ART←ART+N). As described above, the lottery for determining the number of additional games is performed using FIGS. 656 and 662(a), and the lottery for determining the number of additional games is performed using FIGS. 657 to 660 and 662(b). FIG. 656 is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery to determine the number of additional games, FIG. 657 is an example of a lottery table to be used for a lottery to determine the number of games to be added when the ART middle-low probability state is shown, and FIG. 658 is an ART middle-high probability state. FIG. 659 is an example of a lottery table used in the lottery to determine the number of additional games when , and FIG. It is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery for determining the number of games to be added to .

It should be noted that when it is determined in step S6173 that it is in the specialized zone (NO in step S6173), steps S6174, S6175 and S6176 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S6177. Also, when it is determined in step S6175 that the special zone lottery in step S6174 has been lost (NO in step S6175), step S6176 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6177.

In step S6181, the during-ART lottery state transition lottery is performed using the during-ART lottery state transition lottery table shown in FIG. As described above, this lottery state transition lottery during ART is a lottery for determining whether the lottery state during ART during basic ART should be controlled to either the low-probability state during ART or the high-probability state during ART. Then, based on the result of the lottery state transition lottery during ART in step S6181, lottery state transition processing during ART in step S6183 is performed.

To be more specific, in the ART medium-low probability state, referring to "low→high" in FIG. is performed (step S6181), and if this transition lottery is won (YES in step S6182), the transition is controlled to the ART medium-high probability state (step S6183). If the transfer lottery in step S6181 is lost (NO in step S6182), step S6183 is skipped, the processing related to the generation of the instruction function ends, and the ART medium low probability state is maintained. In addition, in the ART medium-high probability state, referring to "high → low" in FIG. We (step S6181), if this transfer lottery is won (YES in step S6182), the transition to the ART middle low probability state is controlled (step S6183). If the transition lottery in step S6181 is lost (NO in step S6182), step S6183 is skipped, the processing relating to the generation of the instruction function ends, and the ART medium-high probability state is maintained. The during-ART lottery state transition lottery in step S6181 is performed using the during-ART lottery state transition lottery table shown in FIG. FIG. 664 is a lottery table used for the lottery state transition lottery during ART. "Low" shown in FIG. 664 means "low probability state during ART", and "high" shown in FIG. 664 means "high probability state during ART". The lottery state transition lottery during ART is executed each time the internal lottery is performed (every time the game is executed) in both the high probability state during ART and the low probability state during ART.

If it is determined that the addition determination lottery in step S6177 has been lost (NO in step S6178), the flow advances to step S6184 to determine whether the ART game has been completed. In the ART game completion determination performed in step S6184, it is determined whether or not all the ART games to be executed have been completed. If it is determined that all the ART games to be executed have been completed (YES in step S6184). , the advantageous state E flag is set to OFF (step S6185), the retraction state flag is set to ON (step S6186), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6187), and the ART flag is set to OFF (step S6188), the advantageous state E processing ends, and the process returns to the main routine. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6184 that the ART game to be executed has not been completed (NO in step S6184), the process advances to step S6181 to continue the ART game.

Although not shown in FIG. 654, there is a step of judging the RT state when the final game of the ART game is over (when YES is judged in step S6184). If the RT state determined here is RT1, the pullback state A flag is set to ON in step S6186, and if it is RT2, the pullback state B flag is set to ON. The retraction states A and B will be described later.

In step S6172, if it is determined that the number-of-games counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value (1500 games in this example), that is, the number of games played by the player in the number-of-games management process exceeds the predetermined threshold value. If it is determined that it exceeds (NO in step S6172), the process proceeds to step S6190, and it is determined whether or not the indicating function is displayed even once during the game management process (step S6190). If it is determined during the game management process that the instruction function has been displayed (YES in step S6190), it is determined whether or not the ART flag is ON (step S6191).

When it is determined that the ART flag is ON in step S6191 (YES in step S6191), the ART flag is set to OFF (step S6192), and the advantageous state E flag is set to OFF (step S6193). The function flag is set to OFF (step S6194), the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF (step S6195), and the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6196). After that, the process proceeds to step S6197, the number-of-games counter GC is set to 0 (GC←0), the advantageous state E processing is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine. That is, when the number of games counted during the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold value (NO in step S6172), even if the ART game is in progress (the ART game Even if the termination condition is not satisfied (even if the prescribed number of games (50 games in this example) has not been completed), the ART game being executed will be forcibly terminated in the middle. If it is determined in step S6191 that the ART flag is OFF (NO in step S6191), step S6192 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6193.

By the way, in the advantageous state E, as in the case of the advantageous state A, the advantageous state C, and the advantageous state D, one of the "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by an internal lottery. Considering the combination probability (26280/65536) and the predetermined threshold G (1500 games), the probability of occurrence is extremely low, but the game number counter GC starts counting. If it is determined that the number-of-games counter GC has exceeded the predetermined threshold value G without the indicating function display being performed even once after that (determined as NO in step S6172 and determined as NO in step S6190). case) is also possible. In this case, the processing of steps S6191 to S6197 is not performed, the number of times of instruction is set to 1 (step S6198), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6199). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (the number of games counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function display is not performed and the instruction function is not immediately shifted to the hell state. The advantageous state E is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed once during the number-of-games management process.

Further, as described above, even after all the ART games to be executed (50 games+α in this example) have been completed, the instruction function is not displayed even once during the game number management process. If not, the state of advantage E does not shift to the hell state, and as a result of the subtraction processing in step S6171, the number of remaining ART games ART may become negative. Therefore, when the number of ART games ART, whose initial value was (50 games + α), becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, the number of ART games TA is set to "FF", and the number of ART games TA is set to "FF". , the processing in step S6171 is not performed as long as the advantageous state E continues without transitioning to the hell state or the pullback state, and a YES determination is made in step S6184. As a result, even if the advantageous state E continues after the number of ART games ART becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In step S6171, if the remaining ART game number ART becomes negative, even if the game is executed, the remaining ART game number ART remains set to "FF". It may be a process of keeping "00" without setting to . Also, the number of remaining ART games ART has been described as a subtraction method in which the number is subtracted each time a game is played, but it is needless to say that an addition method in which the number is added each time a game is played may be used.

The lottery for determining the number of ART games to be added in step S6177 and the lottery for determining the number of games to be added in step S6179 will now be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the lottery for determining the number of ART games added in step S6177 is as shown in Fig. 662(a). , is determined based on the difference K between a predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining game number K until the end of the game number management process).

Specifically, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the remaining game number K until the end of the game number management process is the second prescribed number or more, ART The winning probability in the lottery for determining the number of games added is 65536 out of 65536 (that is, 100%). In addition, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number, the number of ART games is added. The winning probability in the decision lottery is 4/65536. The above second prescribed number can be set arbitrarily, but even if ART games are added based on winning the lottery for determining the number of ART games, the ART games can be digested without ending halfway. A value that can be In this embodiment, when winning the lottery for determining the number of ART games to be added, a maximum of 300 games are added, so the second prescribed number is preferably 300 games or more, but is limited to this. not a thing Therefore, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 300 games or more, there is a 100% probability that the number of ART games will be If the lottery for determining the number of ART games is won and the number of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than 300 games, the lottery for determining the number of ART games to be added to the number of ART games is won only with a probability of 4/65536. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the probability of winning the lottery for adding the number of ART games becomes relatively small. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle despite the addition. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the number of ART games when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number The probability of winning in the addition determination lottery (4/65536 in this example) is the winning probability in the addition determination lottery of ART games when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is the second specified number or more (this example In 65536/65536), by making it lower than 65536/65536), the winning probability in the ART game number addition determination lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. To realize a game property that increases the winning probability (65536/65536 in this example) in an ART game number addition lottery when the remaining game number K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or more than a specified number while keeping the rate the same. It is also possible to produce a further action and effect that it becomes possible to

Also, as shown in FIG. 662(b), the number of games to be added in the number-of-addition-games determination lottery in step S6179 when winning the number-of-ART-games number-of-addition determination lottery was also selected by an internal lottery. When the winning combination is "special sustaining reply + normal sustaining reply", the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is different between the second prescribed number or more and the second prescribed number less than the second prescribed number. Specifically, when the role selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance + normal maintenance", the role selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance + normal maintenance". Compared to , it is set so that the number of games to be added is large. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the number of ART games added in step S6179 when winning the lottery for determining the number of ART games is relatively small. It is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player even if the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle despite winning the addition decision lottery and adding the ART game. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the second specified number. Based on whether there is, the probability of winning in the lottery for adding the number of ART games will be determined in one of two stages: high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536) However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the probability of winning in the lottery for determining the number of ART games is set in multiple stages, and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance letter + normal maintenance letter", the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process As the number of games K becomes smaller, the winning probability in the lottery for determining the number of ART games to be added may be gradually lowered. In addition, in the above, when the role selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance + normal maintenance", we explained that the winning probability in the lottery for adding the number of ART games will be changed, but the winning Without changing the probability (65536/65536), refer to the table used for lottery to determine the number of additional games when the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process shown in FIG. 662(b) is less than the second specified number. You may make it That is, the number of games to be added in the number-of-additional-games determination lottery may be changed without changing the winning probability in the number-of-ART-games-additional-determination lottery.

[10-3-4-7. Retraction State Processing]
The withdrawal state is controlled after the end of the advantageous state E when all the number of ART games to be played are completed and the number of games counter GC does not exceed the predetermined threshold value G (when determined as YES in step S6184). In this example, a pull-back state A and a pull-back state B are prepared. The winning probability of the ART initial lottery is set higher than the advantageous states A to C and the advantageous state E in both pullback states A and B, and is set lower than the advantageous state D, but is advantageous. It may be set higher than state D.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, in principle, the RT state is not changed from RT2 to RT1 during the ART game. Although one of them was selected and the proper stop operation order of the reel stop buttons 211 was clearly indicated by the instruction function display, the reel stop button 211 was not operated according to this instruction function display, and the reel stop button 211 was not operated. When the zero point is displayed on the effective line, the control of the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 shifts from RT2 to RT1. In this example, as described above, if the RT state is RT1 when the final game of the ART game ends (when the determination is YES in step S6184), control is made to the pullback state A, and the final game of the ART game ends. When the RT state is RT2, the pullback state B is controlled. Since the withdrawal state is determined according to the RT state when the final game of the ART game ends, even if the RT state is RT2 when the final game of the ART game starts, the final game of the ART game In the game, when the zeroth bell is displayed on the effective line, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT1, so that control is made to the withdrawal state A. FIG.

The following is a description of the pullback state processing. In the pullback state, an ART initial winning lottery is first performed in accordance with the pullback state each time the game is executed (step S6201). The probability of winning in this ART initial lottery is as shown in the ART initial lottery table in Fig. 661 when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance + normal maintenance". 666 is shown in the ART initial winning lottery table in the pullback state when the winning combination selected in is a combination other than "special sustaining riff + normal sustaining riff". When the combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", as shown in FIG. are doing. On the other hand, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is a combination other than "special maintenance rip + normal maintenance rip", as can be seen by referring to FIG. Then, the pull-back state B is more advantageous than the pull-back state A in that it is easier for the player to win the ART first winning lottery.

Here, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the ART first hit lottery performed in step S6201 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance riff + normal maintenance riff", the winning probability in the ART initial lottery performed in step S6201 is as shown in Fig. 661 ("special maintenance riff + normal time column), it is determined based on the difference K between a predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining game number K until the end of the game number management process). be done.

Specifically, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is the first prescribed number or more, ART The winning probability in the first lottery is 65536 out of 65536 (that is, 100%). In addition, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance letter + normal maintenance letter", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first prescribed number, the ART first winning lottery The odds of winning are 4 in 65536. The above-mentioned first prescribed number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first prize lottery, the number of games (50 games in this embodiment) is predetermined. is preferably a value that can be digested without terminating prematurely. In the present embodiment, the number of ART games to be executed when the ART initial lottery is won is 50 games (when the additional lottery is not won), so the first prescribed number is 50 games or more. Preferably. However, since the ART game does not start immediately even if the ART first prize lottery is won, it is preferable to set the number of games to (50 games+α) in consideration of the number of games to be prepared. In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games+α) games. Therefore, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 100 games or more, there is a 100% probability that the ART will be the first hit. If the lottery is won and the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than 100, the probability of winning the ART initial lottery is only 4/65536. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the winning probability in the ART first prize lottery becomes relatively small. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the ART first hit probability when the number K of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is less than the first prescribed number (4/65536 in this example) is made lower than the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the first prescribed number. , the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process while keeping the winning rate the same as compared with the case where the winning probability in the ART first prize lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. It is also possible to produce a further effect such as realizing a game property that increases the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when K is the first specified number or more. becomes.

Also, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is the normal maintenance reply, as shown in FIG. is 4/65536.

In the above-described embodiment, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the first prescribed number. Based on whether there is or not, the winning probability in the ART first lottery is determined to be one of two stages of high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). Yes, but not limited to this. For example, when the probability of winning in the ART initial lottery is set in multiple stages, and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is K. The winning probability in the ART first-hit lottery may be gradually lowered as the number becomes smaller.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the end of the advantageous state E, as long as the number-of-games management flag is ON (as long as the number-of-games counter GC does not exceed a predetermined threshold value), the winning probability in the ART initial lottery increases. Although it is controlled to a pullback state relatively higher than normal (for example, advantageous state A, advantageous state C, hell state), it is not limited to this. Only when the difference K from the number-of-games counter GC counted during the process (the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process) is, for example, a third specified number or more, the pullback state may be controlled. good. In this case also, if the remaining number of games K after the end of the advantageous state E until the end of the number-of-games management process is, for example, less than the third specified number, the pullback state is not controlled. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle despite the execution of the ART game. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest. After the advantageous state E ends, the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining game number K until the game number management process ends) is, for example, the third regulation. If it is less than the number, the number-of-games management process may be terminated to shift to hell, or the number-of-games management process may continue, but the winning probability in the ART initial lottery will be the same as in the above-mentioned normal time. A probability (for example, 1/65536) may be used.

If the ART initial lottery in step S6201 is won (YES in step S6202), is the number of games counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the number of games management process equal to or less than a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example)? It is determined whether or not (step S6205).

If it is determined that the game number counter GC is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6205), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6206), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games (step S6206). S6207), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6208). Thereafter, the process advances to step S6209 to perform RT state transition processing.

The RT state transition processing in step S6209 is processing for shifting the RT state. This is because the RT state transition processing in step S6209 is processing for transitioning the RT state from RT1 to RT2 as preparation processing for the execution of the ART game. This is so that the pullback state A in which the state is RT1 is shifted to RT2. After that, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6210).

If the number-of-games counter GC reaches the predetermined threshold value G in step S6205 (NO in step S6205), the process proceeds to step S6211, and the instruction function is displayed even once during the game management process. It is determined whether or not it has been read (step S6211). If it is determined during the game management process that the indicating function has been displayed (YES in step S6211), the withdrawal state flag is set to OFF (step S6212). Specifically, if the current retraction state is the retraction state A, the retraction state A flag is set to OFF, and if the current retraction state is the retraction state B, the retraction state B flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, if the instruction function flag is ON (YES in step S6213), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6214), and the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF (step S6215). If it is determined in step S6213 that the instruction function flag is OFF (if it is determined to be NO in step S6213), step S6214 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6215, where the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF. (step S6215). After that, the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6216), the number-of-games counter GC is set to 0 (step S6217), the pullback state processing is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine.

By the way, even in the pullback state, as in the case of the advantageous state A, the advantageous state C, the advantageous state D, and the advantageous state E, one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by internal lottery. Considering the synthetic probability (26280/65536) of being selected and the predetermined threshold value G (1500 games), the probability is extremely low. When it is determined that the number-of-games counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value G without displaying the instruction function once after the count is started (NO in step S6205 and NO in step S6211). is determined)). In this case, the processing of steps S6212 to S6217 is not performed, the number of times of instruction is set to 1 (step S6218), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6219). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (the number of games counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function display is not performed and the instruction function is not immediately shifted to the hell state. The pullback state is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed once during the game number management process.

When the number of games counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value (1500 games in this example) (NO in step S6205), it is normally determined in step S6213 that the instruction function flag is OFF (step It is determined as NO in S6213). However, very rarely, as described above, it may be determined as NO in step S6211 and the instruction function flag is set to ON in step S6219. In this case, it is determined in step S6213 that the instruction function flag is ON (YES in step S6213).

Also, when the number of games counter GC reaches the predetermined threshold value G in step S6205 (when determined as NO in step S6205), regardless of the result of the ART first winning lottery, the hell state is entered. . More specifically, when the number-of-games counter GC reaches a predetermined threshold value G in step S6205, even if the ART first prize lottery in step S6202 is won, the ART game is not executed and the pullback state is reached. , the state is shifted to the hell state, and the counting of the number-of-games counter is terminated (the number-of-games management process is terminated).

When it is determined that the ART initial winning lottery in step S6201 has not been won (NO in step S6202), a pulling-back state maintenance lottery is performed (step S6203). The form of this maintenance lottery is determined based on the difference K between a predetermined threshold value G and the number of games counter GC counted during the number of games management process (remaining number of games K until the number of games management process ends).

More specifically, the maintenance lottery in step S6203 is such that when the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or greater than the third specified number, the draw-back state A is selected with a probability of 49/50. A maintenance lottery is performed (i.e., you lose with a probability of 1/50), and if you are in the pullback state B, a maintenance lottery is performed so that you win with a probability of 19/20 (i.e., a probability of 1/20). lose the election). Therefore, when the pull-back state A and the pull-back state B are compared, the pull-back state B is easier to win the ART first winning lottery, but the pull-back state B is more difficult to maintain than the pull-back state A.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the remaining game number K until the end of the game number management process is less than the third specified number, a maintenance lottery common to the pullback state A and the pullback state B is performed. That is, the maintenance lottery is performed so that the player wins with a probability of 7/50 regardless of whether the player is in the pulled-back state A or the pulled-back state B (losing with a probability of 43/50). In this way, when the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or greater than the third specified number, the state of withdrawal A is more likely to be maintained in the state of withdrawal than the state B of withdrawal, but the number-of-games management process ends. When the remaining number of games K is less than the third specified number, regardless of whether the pullback state is A or B, the pullback state is shifted to the hell state with a relatively high probability. . As a result, if the remaining game number K until the end of the game number management process is small, the winning probability in the maintenance lottery becomes relatively small. A situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", winning in the maintenance lottery when the number of games K remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than the third specified number The probability (in this example, 7/50) is the winning probability in the maintenance lottery when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the third prescribed number (in this example, if the pullback state A is 49/50, and 19/20 in case of pullback state B), the winning probability in the maintenance lottery is made constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. It is possible to realize a game property that increases the probability of winning in the maintenance lottery when the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or more than the third prescribed number while keeping the odds of winning the same. It is possible to produce further effects such as becoming.

The above-mentioned third specified number can be set arbitrarily, but if the maintenance lottery is won and the pullback state is maintained, the ART game will be executed considering that there is a relatively high probability of winning the ART first prize lottery. A predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment) should preferably be a value that allows the game to be played without ending halfway when the game is played. In the present embodiment, the number of ART games to be executed when the ART first prize lottery is won is 50 games (when the additional lottery is not won), so the third specified number is 50 games or more. Although it is preferable to have one, it is not limited to this.

In the above-described embodiment, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the remaining game number K until the end of the game number management process is less than the third specified number. Based on whether or not there is a winning probability in the maintenance lottery, there is a high probability (49/50 for pullback state A, 19/20 for pullback state B) and a low probability (50/50 7), but is not limited to this. For example, if the probability of winning in the maintenance lottery is set in multiple stages and the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance letter + normal maintenance letter", the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is small. The winning probability in the maintenance lottery may be gradually lowered as the number increases.

If the maintenance lottery in step S6203 is lost (NO in step S6204), the process advances to step S6211, in which it is determined whether or not the indicating function has been displayed even once during the game management process. (Step S6211). If it is determined during the game management process that the indicating function has been displayed (YES in step S6211), the processes of steps S6212 to S6217 described above are performed (that is, it is determined that the state is shifted to hell). ), and the pullback state processing is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine. On the other hand, if it is determined during the game management process that the instruction function is not displayed (NO in step S6211), the processes of steps S6212 to S6217 are not performed, and the number of instructions is set to one ( Step S6218), the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6219).

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number-of-games management process is started when the hell state is shifted to the advantageous state. During the number-of-games management process (that is, during the advantageous state or the withdrawal state), unless a specific condition is satisfied (for example, unless there is a bonus game execution history (execution history during the number-of-games management process)). , it is ensured that the indicating function is displayed once (see FIGS. 650 to 655). The instruction function display referred to here means that when a winning combination in which the number of payouts of game media differs depending on the stop operation mode (for example, the order or position of pressing) of the reel stop button 211 is selected by an internal lottery, the number of payouts is determined. It means an instruction display that is performed so that the operation is performed in the stop operation mode with the largest number of In this example, when "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" are selected by the internal lottery, the stop operation is performed in the order corresponding to the 8 coins with the highest number of payouts. The instruction display performed corresponds. Therefore, when a combination other than a combination with a different number of game media to be paid out is selected by the internal lottery when the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211 is different, the selected combination is designated (stop operation mode Even if it is instructed (navigated) which combination is selected by the internal lottery instead of the instruction of , the instruction does not correspond to the indication function display here. In this case, for example, the largest payout number (in this example 8 for "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6")), even if it is instructed that a combination with a larger number of payouts has been selected, the instruction is the instruction function display here. does not correspond to In addition, when the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211 is different, a combination with a different number of payouts of game media is selected by an internal lottery, and although the stop operation mode is instructed, the player disobeys the instruction. , even if the stop operation is not performed in the manner in which the number of payouts is maximized, the instruction function display referred to here is assumed to have been performed. Furthermore, if the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211 is different, the subsequent RT state will be different (for example, "up lip 1 + normal maintenance lip 1" in this example corresponds), and it must be operated in an appropriate stop operation mode. For example, when a replay combination for which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is not displayed is selected by an internal lottery, even if a stop operation mode instruction is made, the instruction is also equivalent to the instruction function display here. do not.

By the way, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the ART game (including during the special zone and during preparation for the special zone), as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated in accordance with the instruction function display, RT2 or RT3 to RT1 However, if the reel stop button 211 is operated without following the instruction function display, RT2 or RT3 may be shifted to RT1. In other words, it is a game feature in which the player has the right to choose whether the state after the end of the advantageous state E is to be controlled to the pullback state A or to be controlled to the pullback state B. I can say. Therefore, the state after the end of the advantageous state E is divided into a pull-back state A in which it is difficult to win the ART first prize lottery but the pull-back state is likely to be maintained, and a pull-back state in which it is easy to win the ART first prize lottery but the pull-back state is difficult to maintain. The player himself/herself can select in which of the states B the game is to be played. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in ART games, which tend to be monotonous by simply digesting the game. In addition, even if the reel stop button 211 is operated without following the instruction function display and the RT2 or RT3 shifts to RT1, after the ART game ends, control is made to the pullback state A in which the pullback state is easily maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In particular, as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to the instruction function display during the ART game (including during the specialized zone and during the preparation of the specialized zone), it is controlled to the pull-back state A, so the game to select the pull-back state B. The player selects a high-risk, high-return game compared to the pullback state A, such as being likely to be shifted to the hell state but more likely to win the ART first winning lottery. As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether the state after the end of the advantageous state E is a relatively low-risk low-return state or a relatively high-risk high-return state is determined by the game. can be selected according to the wishes of the person.

However, when the player attempts to select the pullback state B with a relatively high risk and high return, RT2 or RT3 with a relatively high replay combination probability is shifted to RT1 with a relatively low replay combination probability. have to take the risk of If there are many remaining games in the ART game, there is a possibility that one of "Press order bell 1" to "Press order bell 6" will be selected by internal lottery before the ART game ends. Although it is expensive, the number of medals paid out to the player as a prize during the ART game is reduced accordingly (in some cases, the number of medals consumed for the execution of the game is more than the number of medals paid out as a prize). There is a risk that it will increase. On the other hand, when the number of remaining ART games is small, the number of medals to be paid out to the player during the ART game can be increased. , there is a risk that any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" will not be selected. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the pullback state is determined according to the RT state at the time when the final game of the ART game ends, it is possible to shift to RT1 in the final game of the ART game. is preferred. However, it is not always the case that any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery in the final game of the ART game. Therefore, it is preferable for a player who intends to select pullback state B to be persistent so as not to shift to RT1 until the last minute of the ART game. It is possible to look forward to deciding when to shift to RT1.

In addition, some players do not want the relatively high-risk, high-return pullback state B themselves, but the indication function display performed during the ART game (including during the special zone and during preparation for the special zone). Although there are cases where the reel stop button 211 is accidentally operated without hesitation, it can give the game a sense of tension during the ART game (including during the specialized zone and during the preparation of the specialized zone). Moreover, even if the player does not desire the pullback state B, the game is played under the condition that the ART first winning lottery probability is relatively high, so the player does not feel a sense of loss.

As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the transition from RT2 or RT3 to RT1 occurs during the ART game (including during the specialized zone and during preparation for the specialized zone), the number of additional games Even if the ART game or the like continues to be digested without stopping the progress of the ART game or the like while performing the decision lottery, the ART first winning lottery probability is controlled to the pull-back state B, so that the deterioration of interest can be suppressed.

By the way, as described above, in step S602, when one game is executed during the game number management process, the game number counter GC is incremented by 1 as the number of games executed during the game number management process. In the slot machine 1 of this example, the predetermined threshold is set to 1500 games, and when the threshold is exceeded, the game number management flag is forcibly set to OFF. never exceed 1500. However, since the number-of-games management process continues until the indication function is displayed at least once during the number-of-games management process, the number-of-games counter GC may exceed 1500 games, although the probability is very low. obtain. In particular, in the slot machine 1 of this example, since the processing of the number-of-games counter GC is performed with 8 bits, only up to 65536 games can be counted. However, it cannot be said that the number-of-games counter GC will probabilistically exceed 65536 games. Therefore, in this example, when the number-of-games counter GC reaches the threshold value of 15000 games in step S602, the number-of-games counter GC is set to FF. When the number-of-games counter GC is FF, NO is determined in steps S6032, S6072, S6092, S6031 and S6172. As a result, even if the instruction function display is not executed during the game number management process, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409, thereby suppressing the loss of interest. It becomes possible to

[10-3-5. Production processing at the time of winning]
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is constructed such that an effect operation lottery is performed based on the result of the internal lottery, and an effect capable of giving the player a sense of expectation is executed based on the result of the effect operation lottery. . Specifically, the internal lottery result information is sent as a command from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510), and the sub-board 510 that receives this command executes the effect operation lottery based on the internal lottery result information. Then, control is performed so that the effect mode determined by the effect operation lottery is displayed on the image display body 500 or the like, and a sound effect is also performed at the same time.

Fig. 667 is the effect operation lottery table when the internal lottery is won at RT1, Fig. 668 is the effect operation lottery table when the internal lottery is won at RT2, Fig. 669 is the effect operation lottery table when the internal lottery is won at RT3 is. As can be seen from FIGS. 667 to 669, in the internal lottery, BB1, "BB1+watermelon", "BB1+cherry", BB2, "BB2+watermelon", "BB2+cherry", watermelon, cherry, "push order bell 1" ~ "Push order bell 6", common bell, maintenance replay, "up lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", "up lip 2 + normal maintenance lip", "lower lip + normal maintenance lip", "7 matching lip + normal maintenance lip" And when one of a plurality of roles such as "fake riff with 7 matching + normal maintenance riff" is won, an effect can be executed. Of these multiple roles, for other roles excluding maintenance replay and "raise replay 1 + normal maintenance replay", even if the RT state is any of RT1 to RT3, when winning in the internal lottery The production activation probability is the same. On the other hand, with respect to the maintenance replay and the "raise replay 1 + normal maintenance replay", the effect activation probability when winning the internal lottery differs depending on which of the RT states RT1 to RT3 is.

It should be noted that, in the winning combination column of FIGS. 667 to 669, only the winning combinations (see FIGS. 638 to 643) are described in each state of RT1 to RT3. The table used for the effect operation lottery is not necessarily limited to the effect tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3 as shown in FIGS. 667 to 669, respectively. For example, a common table may be prepared for data with the same effect operation probability, and tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3 may be prepared only for data with different effect operation probabilities. FIG. 670 is another example of the effect operation lottery table. To explain using FIG. 670, for example, among the winning combinations shown in the columns of winning combinations in FIGS. For the winning combination except for "lower riff + normal maintenance riff", "7 matching riff + normal maintenance riff" and "7 matching fake riff + normal maintenance riff", a common effect operation lottery is shown in Fig. 670(a). Prepared as a table, among the winning combinations shown in the columns of winning combinations in FIGS. 670(b) to 670(d), as shown in FIGS. 670(b) to 670(d), corresponding to RT1 to RT3 A table in which performance operation probabilities are set may be prepared. For example, as shown in FIGS. 667 to 669, when production tables corresponding to each of RT1 to RT3 are prepared, there are lottery tables for "the number of RT states x the number of winning hands (condition devices)". Therefore, there is a problem that the data volume becomes enormous, and the development period is extended due to the need for a large verification period, etc. On the other hand, the bonus is not established and the replay synthesis probability is There are multiple RT states (RT1 to RT3) with different values, and there is a possibility of transitioning between these multiple RT states. Although the activation probability is changed, the effect activation probability when winning a winning combination that is not a winning combination that transitions between multiple RT states (rare small combinations such as cherry and watermelon) is won does not change. In other words, for a winning role (replay role) whose winning probability changes depending on the RT state, replays will occur frequently even if the effect is activated unless the performance activation probability is changed according to the winning probability. However, there is no need to prepare multiple lottery tables for the winning roles (bonus roles (BB1, BB2) and minor roles (Bell, Watermelon, Cherry)) for which the winning probability does not change depending on the RT status. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity, and especially when the main 409 has to control, the effect is particularly remarkable because the capacity is limited.

Specifically, when the RT state is RT1, if the internal lottery wins the maintenance replay or the "up replay 1 + normal maintenance replay", the effect is performed with a probability of about 1/2. Since the normal game state before the start of the ART game (the game state before winning the ART initial lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the up-lip 1 is displayed on the activated line) is also RT1, in such a game state. , the effect is performed with a probability of approximately 1/2. On the other hand, when the RT state is RT2 or RT3, the production is performed at a very low probability as compared with RT1. Hereinafter, RT1 will be referred to as a low replay state with a relatively low replay synthesis probability, and RT2 and RT3 will be referred to as high replay states with a relatively high replay synthesis probability.

When comparing the above-mentioned low-rep state and high-rep state, the replay synthesis probability is higher in the high-rep state, but the high-rep state is a state in which production is more difficult than in the low-rep state. When the performance is performed, the player expects that he or she has won a bonus (BB1, BB2) or a rare small combination (watermelon, cherry) that can be expected to be the first hit of ART. However, if the performance is frequently performed in a high-rep state, there is a risk that the player will not have such expectations when the performance is performed, and the performance itself will be troublesome. There is a risk. Therefore, in this example, it is possible to make the performance more difficult in the high response state than in the low response state, thereby appropriately giving the player a sense of expectation when the performance is performed. It should be noted that, in such a game, the player has the right to choose whether the RT state after the end of the ART game is controlled to a high response state or a low response state. It can be said that it is a game element. Therefore, the RT state after the end of the ART game is divided into RT1, in which it is difficult to win a specific role (replay in this example) but the effect activation probability is high, and RT1, in which it is difficult to win a specific role (replay in this example), but the effect activation probability The player himself/herself can select in which state the game is to be played, RT2 or RT3, which has a lower . Even when considered in this way, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in ART games, which tend to be monotonous by simply digesting the game. Also, for a player who wants to select the RT state after the end of the ART game, RT1 where the effects can be performed with high frequency, it is preferable to be persistent so as not to shift to RT1 until the last game of the ART game is approached. , since it is possible to shift to RT1 at an early point, it is possible to enjoy at what point to shift to RT1. As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the ART game is shifted from RT2 or RT3 to RT1, the lottery for determining the number of additional games is performed, and the progress of the ART game or the like is not stopped. Even if the player continues to consume the game, since the highly anticipated performance is performed with high frequency in the RT state after the ART game is finished, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

656 to 670, as shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, special roles (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special sustaining replay role) and normal roles (normal watermelon role, normal cherry role) , normal maintenance replay roles) are not shown separately. This is because when a special role is selected by an internal lottery, it functions as a special role only when it is in hell, and when the number-of-games management flag is set to ON, the internal lottery. This is because even if a special role is selected in , the function as a special role is not exhibited. That is, when the number-of-games management flag is set to ON, if a lottery is performed using any one of the tables shown in FIGS. will be For example, referring to the table in FIG. 663 used in the ART first prize lottery that is performed during the game number management process and not during the ART game, a special watermelon and a normal watermelon as a single role in the internal lottery Even if any of the watermelons (see FIGS. 638 to 643 for all) are selected, the ART first-hit lottery will be conducted with reference to watermelons as a single combination shown in the table of FIG.

As described above, by performing the processing of each step shown in FIG. Processing after step S62 of the processing related to the generation of the indicated function is performed.

[10-3-6. Instruction function display processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main board 409 determines to generate the instruction function as a result of the instruction function generation processing (specifically, for example, when winning a small win in the order of pushing during the ART game), , the instruction content based on the winning combination of the game is displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display (instruction function display processing). In the instruction function display process, the main board 409 selects the display mode of the instruction function display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from among a plurality of display modes prepared in advance (for example, display data is held in the ROM 1112 or the like). . The instruction function display displayed using the special display LED 612 will be described in detail below.

First, an example of indication function display in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 636, the slot machine 1 is provided with two 7-segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) arranged side by side. The indication function is displayed by displaying .

671 and 672 are diagrams for explaining indication function display. FIG. 671 shows the display mode of the special display LED 612a, and FIG. 672 shows the display mode of the special display LED 612b. In both FIGS. 671 and 672, the alphanumeric characters displayed on the 7-segment LED are shown in the "segment display" column, and the contents of the displayed alphanumeric characters are shown in the "content" column. Further, in FIG. 672, the "navigation display" column shows a display outline of the effect display (navigation display) on the image display body 500 or the like when the corresponding instruction function display is performed, and the "purpose of use" column shows the Situations and situations in which the indication is used are indicated. The navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 will be described later.

In the instruction function display of this example, the following rule is provided as an example of the rule regarding the instruction function display.

(1) Two 7-segment LEDs (7-segment) are used to display the instruction function (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). The special display LED 612a displays information indicating a rough place to push, and the special display LED 612b displays information indicating the order of pushing.

(2) Regarding the period during which the indicating function display is performed, the indicating function display is started and the last spinning reel 301 is started at least before acceptance of the pressing operation (reel stop operation) on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started. The display on the special display LED 612 is switched from the instruction function display to the payout number display at the timing when the player releases the reel stop button 211 on which the reel stop operation corresponding to is performed. That is, the instruction function display period and the payout number display period do not overlap. In addition, when the game value (medals) is not paid out as a result of the game, that is, when the number of payouts is "0", the number of payouts may not be displayed. As a supplementary requirement, if the instruction function display is performed and the payout number display is not performed, the instruction function display shall be canceled (hidden) at the same timing as when the payout number display is performed. Alternatively, the instruction function display may be continued until the payout process is completed.

(3) In a game in which the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function, when one of the spinning reels 301a to 301c is first stopped, the stopped reel displays the instruction function ( When the special display LED 612b) is not the reel indicated as the reel to be stopped first (that is, when a reel different from the instruction content is first stopped), the pressing timing of the reel stop button 211 is the instruction function display. (Special display LED 612a) Even if the timing does not correspond to the position indicated as a guideline for the pushing location (that is, if the reel stop operation is performed at a position different from the instruction content), all The display mode of the special display LED 612 is not changed until the stop operation on the reel 301 is completed.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to generate the instruction function, the main board 409 determines what kind of instruction content is to be displayed on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b as the instruction function display. Determined based on the winning hand. First, the contents of instructions that can be determined by the main substrate 409 will be briefly described using FIGS. 671 and 672. FIG.

The main circuit board 409 arbitrarily determines the instruction content of the "guideline for pushing place" displayed on the special display LED 612a within the range that does not negate the "appropriate pushing place" based on the winning combination of the game. be able to. Specifically, for example, when "BB1 (seven red symbols)" is selected as the winning combination, the main board 409 determines the instruction content to display "2" (seven red symbols) on the special display LED 612a. However, since the game method aiming at "red 7 symbols" is not denied, it is also possible to determine the instruction content to display "0" (not specified).

In addition, the main board 409, similarly to the instruction content of the "guidelines for pushing places", sets the instruction content of the "push order" displayed on the special display LED 612b to the "appropriate push order" based on the winning combination of the game. The content of the instruction can be determined arbitrarily within the range that does not negate the For example, it is assumed that an instruction function is generated in a game in which "push order bell 1", in which the forward push is the "appropriate push order", is selected as a winning combination. At this time, the main board 409 can determine the instruction content of the "push order" to be "left, middle, right" (six-push order), and according to the display example of FIG. 672 (details will be described later), , "1" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. In addition, as the instruction content to clarify only the "left" of the first stop without clarifying the second stop and the third stop, the instruction content may be "left first (2 options)". According to the display example of 672 (details will be described later), "A" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. In addition, from the condition that the "appropriate pressing order" is not denied, the instruction content of the pressing order should include at least the game procedure according to the "appropriate pressing order". That is, as the instruction contents with the possibility that the left reel 301a is stopped at the first stop, "left first or right first" (seg display "E" in FIG. 672) and "left first or middle first" (see FIG. 672) The segment display "F" in 672) may be used as the instruction content, or the instruction content (seg display "0" in FIG. 672) to make the pressing order unknown.

Next, display examples shown in FIGS. 671 and 672 will be specifically described. First, referring to FIG. 671, there are 4 types of "0 (not specified)", "1 (chance symbol)", "2 (red 7 symbol)", and "3 (BAR symbol)" as a guideline of the pushing position. A number is displayed. When "0" is displayed as a guideline for the pressing position, it means that the guideline for the pressing order is not specified, that is, the operation at a specific stop timing in the game is not instructed. Even if there is, when the reel stop button 211 is pressed (unspecified stop operation) without being conscious of the stop timing, it is not always the case that a symbol combination based on some winning combination will be aligned on the activated line. That is, in a game in which "no specification" is selected, if the symbol combination based on the winning combination is to be stopped without fail, a predetermined stop timing that can prevent the winning combination from being missed, as in the above-described maximum efficiency hitting method. It is required to perform the stop operation with Specifically, for example, when "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" are won during ART, "0" is displayed in the special display LED 612a, but the push order bell is the proper push order. As long as the stop operation is performed in order, it is possible to arrange the combination of symbols for the bell role regardless of the stop timing (no omission). On the other hand, for example, if the special display LED 612a displays "0" when the winning combination is a combination that may be missed depending on the stop timing (for example, a watermelon combination), the stop timing is not considered. If the reel stop button 211 is pressed down, there is a possibility that the watermelon role may be lost. It is necessary to press the reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing.

Here, it is preferable that the symbol used as a guideline for the pushing position is a symbol that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize while the reels 301 are rotating. Even if it is allowed to do so, it is not always necessary to stop the symbol on the active line.

Further, as for the symbols corresponding to "1" to "3" shown in FIG. 671, the corresponding symbols may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the "chance symbol" that is the object of "1" may be a "positive" symbol or a "righteousness" symbol, or may be applied to other symbols. Also, the target symbol of "2" may be a "blue 7" symbol instead of a red 7 symbol. Note that the seg display shown in FIG. 671 is merely an example, and the seg display pattern can be increased or decreased within a range that can be displayed by the special display LED 612a. For example, a segment display may be added for patterns other than those illustrated in FIG. 671 (for example, a watermelon pattern). In addition, the symbol set as a guideline for the pushing place is not limited to one. For example, a segment display such as "either 7 red symbols or 7 blue symbols" is set as a guideline for the pushing place. may Also, as is common to FIGS. 671 and 672, the correspondence between "contents" and "segment display" does not need to be one-to-one, and a plurality of "segment displays" showing the same "content" are prepared. may

Next, referring to FIG. 672, 16 display patterns are set for display, and alphanumeric characters "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" are assigned as the display contents of the segment display. . The meaning of each display pattern will be described in detail below. It should be noted that when displayed in 7 segments, capital letters "B" and "D" may not be distinguishable from numerals "8" and "0", respectively. are displayed in lower case.

The display "0" in the special display LED 612b is used when the pressing order is not limited (the pressing order does not matter). However, as described in the "Usage" column, it is not only used when the winning combination does not require any pressing order. You can use it even if you don't. Winning roles regardless of pressing order include pushing order bells and replays, as well as low winning roles (rare roles) such as chances, watermelons, and cherries. Therefore, when the instruction function display is performed when the rare combination is won, the display in the special display LED 612b becomes "0", but at this time, the navigation display shows expectations such as "Chance!" You can let it do it. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest or teach the player that the game is unusual and highly anticipated. Also, in the latter case where the player does not dare to instruct the pushing order when the winning combination is a winning combination that can be won by alternatives, the proper pushing order is not instructed. .

The display "1" to "6" in the special display LED 612b is used when the stopping order of each of the three reels 301a to 301c is determined as an appropriate pressing order, and the so-called 6-option pressing order is displayed. can be done. When the instruction function display displays the pressing order of six options, the navigation display indicates at least the reel to be stopped first and the reel to be stopped second. Thirdly, reels to be stopped are clear in the process of elimination, but may be explicitly specified.

In addition, the indications "7" to "9" on the special display LED 612b are used when it is determined which one of the three reels 301a to 301c should be stopped first as an appropriate pushing order. , it is possible to display the so-called 3-option pressing order. When the instruction function display displays three options of the pressing order, the navigation display instructs the reel to be stopped first.

When the pressing order such as "1" to "9" is displayed in the special display LED 612b, when the stop operation is performed according to both the display in the special display LED 612a and the display in the special display LED 612b, the largest payout is performed. A game result advantageous to the player is provided, such as winning a winning order bell in the stop type with the number of sheets. As described above, in order to obtain a stop system that provides the largest number of payouts, it is necessary to perform a stop operation at an appropriate timing in the case of a winning combination that may result in a dropout.

In addition, "providing a game result advantageous to the player" mentioned in the preceding paragraph includes "preventing the provision of a game result unfavorable to the player". Specific examples will be described below. For example, a pressing order replay is prepared in which different symbol combinations are stopped depending on the pressing order, and when the winning of the pressing order replay is performed, if a stop operation is performed according to a "specific pressing order", the blue 7 pattern alignment is stopped. Suppose it is possible. For example, when it is internally determined that the number of ART games will be added by winning the push order replay during ART, this blue 7 pattern set is used as one of the effects to teach the addition. do. When such a push order replay is won, if the number of ART games is added, displaying the "specific push order" with an instruction function leads to the provision of "advantageous game results for the player". On the other hand, when the number of ART games is not added even though the replay of the pushing order is won, if the "specific pushing order" is displayed as an instruction function, it is assumed that the blue 7 pattern alignment has stopped due to the stop operation according to the instruction. However, since "advantageous game results for the player" in which the number of ART games is added is not provided, "game results unfavorable to the player" are provided. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the provision of such "game results unfavorable to the player", if the number of ART games is not added at the time of winning the above-mentioned push order replay, "a specific push It is possible to display an instruction function for the pressing order that avoids "order". Since the game is played according to such instruction function display, the blue 7 pattern matching that does not add the number of ART games does not appear. can be suppressed", and as a result, "advantageous game results are provided to the player".

On the other hand, the display "A" to "F" in the special display LED 612b, unlike the case where "1" to "9" are displayed, indicate "part" of the pressing order that can lead to advantageous game results for the player. Used for display. For example, the display "A" only indicates that the left reel 301a should be stopped first, and does not indicate whether the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped second. The player must select (either 2) which reel to stop second. Also, for example, display "d" only indicates that the left reel 301a should not be stopped first, and does not indicate whether the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped first. Then, even if the proper pushing order (for example, the middle reel 301b) is selected at the first stop, at the second stop, either of the remaining two spinning reels 301 (in this case, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c) is selected. By making the user choose whether to stop In addition, if the proper pushing order is satisfied only by the selection at the first stop, two choices can be made.

In this way, when the special display LED 612b displays the pressing order such as "A" to "F", even if the stop operation is performed according to the displayed content, the pressing order is not always correct. However, when an appropriate pressing order can be finally selected, advantageous game results are provided to the player, such as winning of the pressing order bell in the stop type with the largest number of payouts.

Although display examples of the special display LEDs 612a and 612b have been described above, actually, a two-digit value combining these is displayed on the special display LED 612 to indicate the instruction content in the game.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function display of the first example is performed, and the instruction function display is performed in a display mode in which the instruction content can be easily grasped. A proper reel stop operation can be performed while looking at the display LEDs 612a and 612b, and a more advantageous game result can be expected than when the instruction function display is not performed. In addition, by making it easier to attract the player's attention to the display on which such instruction function display is performed, it is possible to create a game feature that has not been available in conventional gaming machines.

In addition, the display examples shown in FIGS. 671 and 672 do not necessarily require all the symbols and the pressing order as a guideline for the pressing position, and the symbols and the pressing order are appropriately grouped. By adopting such a display example, it is expected that the amount of data required for the main board 409 to display the pointing function can be reduced.

[10-3-7. Instruction generation effect processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 displays the pointing function with the special display LED 612 based on the result of the pointing function generation process, while displaying the same information as the display content (instruction content) in the pointing function display. By transmitting the instruction information command, the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) is notified of the contents of the instruction. Then, the sub-board 510 that has received such an instruction information command causes the image display 500 or the like to display an instruction generation effect (so-called navigation display) along the display contents of the instruction function display (instruction generation effect processing).

That is, when the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment generates the instruction function, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function, and at the same time, the image display 500 displays the same navigation display as the instruction content of the instruction function. By doing so, the content of the instruction is announced in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

644, the display mode of the navigation display controlled by the sub-board 510 has a one-to-one relationship with the display mode of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409. However, if the display content does not conflict with the instruction content of the instruction function display, the sub-board 501 may determine the display mode for navigation display from among a plurality of display modes (1:n correspondence relationship). ).

As a display example of the navigation display, for example, when "push order bell 2" is selected in the internal lottery, "1" is displayed at the corresponding position of the left reel 301a, "3" is displayed at the corresponding position of the middle reel 301b, and "3" is displayed at the right reel. By displaying "2" at the corresponding position of 301c, the stop order of the left/right/center pinch pressing is instructed. In this navigation display, further, based on the content of the instruction information command that the pressing order bell has been won, the display color of the image showing the stopping order is changed to yellow, which reminds of the bell, or the reel to be stopped next (for example, , when all the reels 301 are rotating, it is the reel to be stopped first, and when two reels are rotating, it is the reel to be stopped second. You can also highlight it.

Further, in the navigation display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction content displayed on the image display 500 may be notified (or assisted) by voice output. is the left reel 301a, an example of outputting a voice saying "Left!" When performing voice output, different voice outputs (for example, characters, lines, intonation, etc.) can be used properly. By performing the navigation display including the voice output in this way, it is possible to more reliably notify the player of the instruction content and to increase the interest of the player by providing the navigation display which changes according to the game situation. can be expected.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by enabling the instruction function display and the navigation display to be displayed in parallel, it is possible to more reliably inform the player of the instruction contents of the instruction function.

FIG. 673 is a timing chart showing an example of display periods by various displays. In FIG. 673, the vertical axis indicates various display devices, etc., and the horizontal axis indicates the display period, such as at what timing the display or transmission is performed in the process of progressing one game. .

First, each item described on the vertical axis of FIG. 673 will be described. The instruction information 801 corresponds to an instruction information command. When the instruction information 801 is ON, it means “send”, and the instruction information command is transmitted from the main substrate 409 to the sub substrate 510 . When the instruction information 801 is OFF, it means "standby", and no instruction information command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510 .

The instruction function 802 corresponds to an instruction function controlled by the main substrate 409, and when the instruction function 802 is ON, it means "display", and the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function. When the instruction function 802 is OFF, it means "non-display", and the special display LED 612 does not display the instruction function.

The number of payouts 803 corresponds to the number of game values paid out as a result of the game, and when the number of payouts 803 is ON, it means “display”, and the number of payouts is displayed by the special display LED 612 . When the payout number 803 is OFF, it means "non-display", and the special display LED 612 does not display the payout number. Information about the number of payouts is stored in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, and depending on the storage location in the RAM 1114 and program processing, it can be displayed again even after the power is turned off.

The seg error 804 corresponds to displaying the details of the error (for example, type and content) on the segment LED when an error is detected. , details of the error are reported (error display). When the segment error 804 is OFF, it means "non-display", and no error display is performed on the special display LED 612 .

The liquid crystal navigation 805 corresponds to the navigation display of the instruction function controlled by the sub-board 510 , and when the liquid crystal navigation 805 is ON, it means “display”, and the navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display 500 . When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is OFF, it means "non-display", and no navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display unit 500 . It should be noted that the liquid crystal navigation 805 provides navigation display with content consistent with the display content of the instruction function 802 . Although detailed description is omitted, data related to display by the sub-board 510 such as the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 is stored in the RAM 1122 of the sub-board 510, and can be read back as appropriate even if the power is cut off. and

The liquid crystal error 806 corresponds to displaying the details of the error (for example, type and content) on the liquid crystal display when an error is detected. Details of the error are notified on the liquid crystal screen of the display 500 . When the liquid crystal error 806 is OFF, it means "non-display", and details of the error are not notified on the liquid crystal screen of the image display unit 500 . In addition, in the liquid crystal error 806, an error notification is performed with the content that does not contradict the notification in the segment error 804. FIG.

The error occurrence 807 indicates the state of occurrence of an error, but in this figure, it may be read that the main board 409 detects the error. When the error occurrence 807 is ON, it means that an error has occurred (an error has been detected) at the timing when the error occurrence 807 has turned ON. not). Note that if the error occurrence 807 turns off after turning on, it means that the error was resolved at the timing when it turned off.

The display and transmission of the instruction information 801 to the segment error 804 are managed by the main board 409 , and the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and the liquid crystal error 806 are managed by the sub board 510 .

In addition, in FIG. 673 and other drawings, the "first stop button" is the reel stop button 211 pressed first among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c corresponding to the spinning reels 301a to 301c. means that Similarly, the "second stop button" means the reel stop button 211 that is operated to stop the reel 301 second, and the "third stop button" means that the reel 301 is stopped third (that is, last). means the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation is performed.

Next, the display period (including the transmission period and the like) of each display etc. shown in FIG. 673 will be described. The timing chart in FIG. 673 is shown under the condition that the game was played without any error during the AT in which the instruction function was executed and no payout occurred in the game.

In FIG. 673, according to the instruction information 801, the instruction information command is transmitted when the start lever 210 is pressed down. Further, according to the instruction function 802, the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 indicates that the stop operation for all the reels 301 is completed from the timing when the operation of pressing the reel stop button 211 can be accepted (pressing of the third stop button). displayed up to Further, according to the liquid crystal navigation 805, the navigation display starts when the reel 301 starts rotating, and ends at the same timing as the instruction function display. In the example of FIG. 673, the start of the navigation display precedes the start of the instruction function display. Since it is the same as the instruction content in the function display, the navigation display is performed with the same content as the instruction function display. However, the display order is not necessarily limited to such a display order.

In addition, in the timing chart of FIG. 673, the timing of “start accepting pressing of stop button” and the timing of turning on the instruction function 802 appear to be the same. , the special display LED 612 does not start to display the indication function. That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the "display" of the instruction function 802 is performed prior to the timing of "start accepting pressing of the stop button". Also, the instruction function display is executed prior to the start of acceptance of pressing the stop button. The timing of such "stop button depression acceptance start" and "instruction function display" is the same in timing charts shown in other examples.

Also, in FIG. 673, the start timing of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is set to the timing when the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted, and the start timing of the navigation display on the image display 500 is set to the start of rotation of the reel 301. However, these are examples of display timings. That is, in the slot machine 1, at any timing during the period from when the start lever 210 is pressed to when the reel stop button 211 can be pressed, the display (instruction function display and display navigation) is displayed. may be started.

[10-4. Reel stop processing]
When the starting process is completed, an operation (stopping operation, that is, pressing of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) for stopping the reels continuing to rotate at a constant speed is awaited. FIG. 673 shows, as an example, the contents of reel stop processing by the “table method”. The flow of processing for reel stop control will be described below.

In the reel stop processing, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected according to a conditional device operated in accordance with the result of the internal lottery in the game. In this reel stop control table, patterns corresponding to all condition devices on a one-to-one basis are prepared in advance, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409 as read-only table data.

When the reel stop control table is selected based on the conditional device established in step S201, a standby state is entered until the pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, it is determined whether the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c have already stopped, or the state in which the first reel stop flag is not ON (F=0, that is, OFF). state), and also determines whether any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c has been pressed. Until all reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processing from step S202 is repeated.

Here, as described above, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are accepted (stop operation procedure) is "forward press", "pinch press", "middle forward press", and "middle reverse press". 673, but in the following description of FIG. 673, for the sake of convenience, the order of these presses will be the reel stop button 211 pressed first. , and classified into three pressing orders. That is, the case where the first stop reel is the left reel 301a is called "forward push", the case where the first stop reel is the middle reel 301b is called "intermediate push", and the case where the first stop reel is the right reel 301c is called "reverse push".

In step S202, it is determined whether a flag indicating that the left reel 301a is in a stopped state (left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF=0), and furthermore, whether or not the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. do. In step S201, if the left reel stop button 211a is first (first) pressed according to the stop operation procedure of "forward pressing" from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, step S202. is satisfied, and the process moves to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F=0). The "first reel" here means the reel to which the stop operation is received first or to be stopped first. In this example (“forward push”), the stop operation of the left reel 301a is accepted first, so the first reel stop flag is in the OFF state (F=0). Therefore, the determination of step S203 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S204.

In the next step S204, first reel stop processing is performed for the left reel 301a. In this first reel stop processing, control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

In step S206, reel stop control tables for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c are determined. As described above, the effective lines of the slot machine 1 are only two lines, the upward-sloping line and the downward-sloping line. At this point, only one stop control table exists for the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c). can decide. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (the left reel 301a in this case) (this is called a stop symbol, the same shall apply hereinafter), especially the symbols at the upper or lower position may become the winning symbol. If the symbol is a valid symbol, a reel stop control table is selected which enables the corresponding winning combination symbols of the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) to be aligned on the effective line based on the corresponding symbol. It will be.

In step S207, the first reel stop flag is turned ON (F=1), and the process proceeds to the next step S208.

Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is turned ON (LF=1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Then, in step S209, it is determined whether or not all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF is only turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Execute.

Then, when the processes after step S202 are executed again, since the left reel 301a is already stopped, the determination of step S202 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, it is determined whether a flag (middle reel stop flag MF) indicating that the middle reel 301b is in a stopped state is OFF (MF=0), and furthermore, whether or not the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been accepted. do. Here, since the stopping operation procedure of "forward pressing" is followed, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination of step S210 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S211.

In step S211, it is determined whether or not the first reel stop flag is OFF (F=0) as in step S203. At this time, the first reel stop flag is already ON (F=1), so this determination is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, as middle reel stop processing, control of the stop position of the corresponding winning combination symbol based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206). to run. At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second reel to be stopped (the second reel), steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned ON (MF=1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

Then, in step S209 again, only the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in a stopped state, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and in a stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202 to repeatedly execute the subsequent processes.

Furthermore, in the processing after the third step S202, first, in step S217, it is determined whether or not the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF=0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, since the processing of subsequent steps S218, S220, etc. is the same as the processing after step S210 (steps S211, S213), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is turned ON (MF=1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are in the stopped state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop processing ends.

Since the same explanation as above can be given for the stop operation procedure of the "middle push", the details are omitted. However, in the case of the "reverse push" stop operation procedure, since there are some differences from the above explanation, it will be explained below.

The difference between the "reverse push" stop operation procedure and the above "forward push" or "middle push" stop operation procedure is step S221 (determination of the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop process). be. That is, in the "reverse push" stopping operation procedure, if only the right reel 301c is in a stopped state and if there is any winning symbol in the lower position among the stopping symbols of the right reel 301c, there are still two valid symbols. It is possible to align the corresponding winning combination symbols on any of the lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of arranging corresponding winning combination symbols on any activated line are prepared, and one of them is selected.

[10-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the above-described reel stop processing, reel stop control is performed to draw the winning combination symbol (corresponding winning combination symbol) corresponding to the established flag into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control). Specifically, when the reel stop operation by the player is accepted, the range within which the reels can be stopped within the symbol display window 401 (the range within which the relevant winning combination symbols can be drawn, for example, 4 symbols) minute) is determined in advance, and when there is a corresponding winning combination symbol within that range, control is executed to pull it into the symbol display window 401 and stop the reels. In addition, the "range that can be drawn" here means the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel from when the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. say. For example, if the drawable range is set to 4 symbols at maximum, when the stop operation of the reel is accepted, the reel can be rotationally moved up to 4 symbols from that position as a base point.

Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning combination symbol in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is accepted, the corresponding winning combination symbol is within a range in which it can be drawn. If so, it is possible to move the corresponding winning combination symbol into the symbol display window 401 and then stop it. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player presses for the corresponding winning combination symbol slightly early, if the winning combination symbol is within the drawable range, the winning combination symbol is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of a dropout (a situation in which the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination cannot be obtained and the game privilege disappears due to the fact that the symbols of the winning combination cannot be arranged).

In the slot machine 1, when a conditional device corresponding to a replay combination or a common bell whose pressing order is unquestionable is activated, it is possible to arrange the corresponding winning combination symbols without requiring the player's eye pressing. This is because, for the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to each of the replay combination, the bell combination, etc., the corresponding winning combination symbols are arranged every four symbols at maximum (see the figure above). 635). In the reel pull-in control, when the maximum number of pull-ins is set to 4 (4 frames), the symbols arranged at intervals of up to 4 as described above are always effective regardless of the timing (push position) of the push. It is possible to pull into the line.

Specifically, for example, when the replay symbols are arranged in the middle row when a predetermined replay combination is won, focusing on the replay symbols, on the left reel 301a, there are at most other symbols between the replay symbols. 4 pieces are arranged (see Fig. 635). Thus, in the left reel 301a, no matter where the stop operation is accepted on the reel, as long as the conditional device corresponding to the replay combination is operating, the replay symbols are always drawn to any of the effective lines and stopped. be able to.

In addition, when the result of the internal lottery is that the bonus combination and the minor combination are overlapped, the small combination is preferentially drawn over the bonus symbols. When a double combination of a bonus combination and a minor combination is won, even if a symbol combination corresponding to the minor combination is displayed in the winning game, the bonus combination is maintained after the next game and the next game. In the game in which the subsequent minor combination (or replay combination) was not established, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed.

The above is an example of the reel stop processing by the table method. Apart from this, there is reel stop processing by a control system, but since known processing can be applied to this as well, a specific description is omitted here. Further, in the present embodiment, either the control method or the table method of reel stop processing may be executed, and which method should be adopted may be appropriately determined when constructing the control program.

[10-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop processing is completed, the main circuit board 409 determines whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines in the symbol display window 401 (the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is displayed). or not). FIG. 675 specifically describes the contents of this determination processing.

When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop processing, it is determined whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines (corresponding to the winning It is determined whether or not the combination mode of the symbols to be played is displayed. Incidentally, a stop eye when all the reels 301 are in a stopped state is called a stop eye.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether a bonus game is in progress. This is to determine whether a predetermined game status flag (for example, a bonus game flag) is ON or OFF. If the bonus game in-progress flag is ON, the determination in step S301 is satisfied, so the process proceeds to step S302. Further, if the bonus game in-progress flag is OFF, the determination in step S301 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S312.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is a bonus symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination). Determining the symbol combination will be explained with a concrete example. If the bonus is BB1 shown in FIGS. It can be determined that the 2 types of BB symbols (bonus symbols) have stopped when such a pattern arrangement stops on any oblique line. In this way, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbols has stopped on the activated line (YES in step S302), bonus game start processing for starting the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the processing ends. do. The bonus game start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not a bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is a replay symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination).If it is determined to be a replay symbol, replay game processing is executed ( step S305). In this replay game process, a MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number as the bet number in the current game (MAX bet in this example). Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay. After the process of step S305, the replay winning flag is turned OFF (step S306), and the process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a replay symbol (NO in step S304), the next determination process is that the symbol combination is a minor combination symbol (a symbol combination indicating a minor winning combination). ) (step S308). When it is determined in step S308 that the symbol is a minor winning combination, as the process of step S309, a specified number of medals corresponding to the aligned minor winning combination are paid out. put out). Then, the payout number of medals is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). As a result, the player is notified (announced and displayed) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the small winning combination has been paid out. Then, after the process of step S309 is completed, the corresponding minor winning flag is turned OFF (step S310), and the process is completed.

If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not a minor combination symbol (NO in step S308), none of the determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 are satisfied, and no The design of the winning role is not complete. In addition, the resulting number at this time is also called "losing number (combination mode of disjointed symbols)". In such a case, a losing process is executed (step S311). In the losing process, if the winning flag that is ON at this time is a winning flag other than a bonus, the winning flag is turned OFF. If none of the winning flags is ON (at this time, the losing flag is ON), the losing flag is turned OFF. After the losing process in step S311, the determination process is terminated.

The processing from step S302 to step S311 is executed when the control is in the normal state or the bonus internal state. Next, processing after step S312 that is performed when the determination in step S301 is not satisfied will be described. The processing here is processing executed during a bonus game (BB game) controlled to a bonus state.

In step S312, it is determined whether or not bonus game payout symbols are aligned on the activated line. The term "bonus game payout symbol" as used herein refers to a generic term for symbol combinations in which medals are paid out by being aligned during the bonus game. It is a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination whose payout is defined in the state or internal state, but a special bonus exclusive combination may be prepared. When affirmative determination is obtained in step S312, a prescribed number of medals are paid out according to the bonus game payout symbols that are aligned (step S313). In the medal payout process, a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal release device 110 and the number of payout medals is displayed on the payout number display LED 612 . Through such a medal payout process, the player is notified (announced and displayed) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the bonus game payout combination has been paid out.

Subsequent to step S313, in step S314, bonus game end determination processing for determining whether or not to end the bonus game is executed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 677), and then the determination processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step S312 that the bonus game payout symbols have not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is turned OFF (step S315), and the process is terminated. As a pattern of NO in step S312, it is conceivable that the payout combination at the time of the bonus game was won but was not won, and the case that the payout combination at the time of the bonus game was not won. In the process of step S315, in the former case, the establishment flag of the bonus game payout combination is turned off, and in the latter case, the losing flag is turned off. In addition, in the case that a special bonus role that is guaranteed to be won during the bonus game is prepared, and furthermore, when the special bonus role is won, the winning of the bonus role is possible without failing, the process of step S315 is executed. May be omitted.

The processing of steps S301 to S315 described above is the game state determination processing performed by the main board 409 (especially the CPU 1110), and then the ART game determination processing is performed in step S320.

Since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has an instruction function as described above, determination processing (ART game determination processing) regarding continuation and termination of the ART game, management of the number of games, etc. is performed for each game. There is a need to do. The ART game determination process is executed by the main board 409 because it corresponds to the performance process that affects the generation of instructions.

It should be noted that the timing at which the ART game determination process is performed may be an appropriate timing in the determination process shown in FIG. Assume that the ART game determination process of step S320 is performed later. Details of the ART game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[10-5-1. Bonus game start processing]
If the determination at step S302 in FIG. 675 described above is satisfied, the bonus game start process is executed. This bonus game start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether a bonus flag (for example, a BB flag) is ON. If the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process moves to step S404. In step S404, the bonus game flag is turned ON and the bonus flag is turned OFF. Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count during the bonus game is cleared. As a result, the cumulative payout number is accumulated from the next game. Then, from the next game, the bonus game is started with the number of bets equal to the specified number for the bonus game (in this example, the specified number for the BB game is 2).

Moreover, when the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402, and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where the bonus symbols are aligned even though the bonus flag is OFF. That is, it can occur either when some illegal means (for example, cheating) is performed, or when the slot machine 1 malfunctions. Therefore, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and the above-mentioned LED or the like is displayed to inform the occurrence of the error.

[10-5-2. Bonus game end determination process]
Next, the bonus game end determination processing in step S314 in FIG. 675 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S451, in response to the payout of medals in step S313 of FIG. 675, the number of payouts for the game is added to the cumulative number of payouts during the bonus game.

Next, in step S452, it is determined whether or not the cumulative number of payouts has exceeded the total number of payouts (for example, 200) defined for each bonus. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454 to display the cumulative number of payouts during the bonus game (displayed in the number of payouts display LED 612, etc.). may be displayed here).

On the other hand, if the determination at step S452 is not satisfied, the in-bonus game flag is turned OFF (step S460), and the process ends.

[10-5-3. ART game judgment processing]
FIG. 678 is a flowchart showing the procedure of ART game determination processing. As described above in [10-3-3], etc., the ART game is a game that is executed based on the fact that the ART is won in the ART lottery. When the player wins the winning combination of the pressing order bell), instruction information such as "appropriate pressing order" is displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), and an instruction effect (navigation display) in accordance with the instruction function display is displayed. It is displayed on the image display 500 or the like. The ART game determination process is a determination process regarding the start, continuation, end, etc., of such an ART game, and is executed by the main board 409 (especially the CPU 1110) which is the control body of the ART. An example of the ART game determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, an outline of the ART game will be explained. The ART game is started when the conditions for starting the ART game are satisfied, and is continuously executed in subsequent game periods until the conditions for ending the ART are satisfied. [10-3-3] As described in the instruction function processing below, when the conditions for starting the ART game are satisfied, a predetermined internal flag (ART flag) is turned ON to start the ART game, When the ART game ends, the ART flag is turned OFF. Information such as internal flags related to ART games such as ART flags and information such as the number of ART games to be described later are held in a memory (for example, RAM 1114) within the main board 409 that controls the ART games. Similar information may also be held in a memory (eg, RAM 1122).

The conditions for starting the ART game (conditions for turning on the ART flag) are described in detail below in [10-3-2]. That is.

In step S501 in FIG. 678, as the first process of the ART game determination process, the current ART flag is compared with the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game to determine whether or not the ART flag has been turned ON. That is, in step S501, it is determined whether the ART flag has changed from OFF to ON from the previous game to the current game. Assume that the value of the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game is stored separately. If it is determined that the ART flag is turned ON (YES in step S501), the number of ART games at the start of ART is set (step S502), and the process ends. The number of ART games at the start of ART (so-called initial number of games) may be set in advance as a fixed number of games, or the number of games may be determined by lottery when ART is won, or determined by other methods. However, as an example here, it is assumed that the initial number of games determined in the instruction function process is set as the number of ART games at the start of ART.

By performing the process of step S502, the ART game is started from the next game. At the start of the ART game, an effect is performed to indicate the start of the ART game and the number of ART games to the player (for example, display of an ART start screen).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S501 that the ART flag has been turned ON, that is, if the ART flag is OFF, or if the ART flag has been ON since the previous game (NO in step S501), the ART flag is turned ON. It is determined whether it is ON (step S505), and if the ART flag is ON (YES in step S505), it is determined whether it is not in the special zone (step S506). Here, if it is determined that the ART flag is ON and it is not in the specialized zone (YES in step S505 and NO in step S506), it means that one of the ART games has been played. , the value of the number of ART games is subtracted by "1" (step S507). If it is determined in step S506 that it is in the specialized zone (YES in step S506), the number of ART games is not subtracted, skipping step S507 and proceeding to step S508. If it is determined in step S505 that the ART flag is not ON (NO in step S505), the ART game is not in progress, so the process ends.

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the number of games at the start determined at the start of the ART game, an addition function of adding the number of ART games based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the ART game. Suppose we have When the number of ART games is added, a predetermined internal flag (additional flag) is turned ON, and the number of ART games to be added (number of added games) is determined. The condition for determining the addition is not particularly limited, and may be the winning of a specific winning combination in the combination lottery, or may be determined based on some other lottery result. Also, the method of determining the number of additional games is not limited to any particular method. Then, the processing of steps S508 to S510 below is processing performed when the function of adding the number of ART games is provided.

First, in step S508, it is determined whether or not the addition flag is ON. If the addition flag is ON (YES in step S508), the number of addition games is added to the current number of ART games (step S509), and the addition flag is turned OFF (step S510). As a result, the number of remaining ART games is increased by the added amount, and the continuation period of ART games which is advantageous for the player is extended.

After the processing of step S510 (after the processing of step S506 if the addition function is not provided), it is determined whether or not the current number of ART games is "0" (step S511). satisfies the end condition of the ART game, the ART flag is turned OFF (step S512), and the process is terminated. At this time, not only the end of the ART game is clearly indicated to the player, but also information about a series of ART games (for example, the total number of payout medals in the ART game, the number of ART games continued, etc.) is also clearly indicated to the player. can be

If it is determined in step S511 that the current number of ART games is not "0" (NO in step S511), the ART game end condition is not satisfied, and the process ends without changing the ART flag. As a result, the ART game is continued in subsequent games.

The ART game determination process described in FIG. 678 is an example of processing in the case where the game period controlled to the game state for the ART game (ART game period) is a method in which one count is subtracted for each game. , when the ART game period is managed by another subtraction method (for example, a method in which the ART game period is determined by the number of appearances of ART navigation), it is desirable to perform an appropriate ART game determination process according to the subtraction method. .

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an internal flag (for example, an ART start flag) indicating the start of the ART game may be prepared separately from the ART flag for the ART game determination process. The ART start flag is an internal flag that is turned ON when the ART first prize lottery is won and the ART game start condition is satisfied. In such a case, in a series of processes by the ART game determination process, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the ART start flag is ON. After setting the number, the ART flag is turned ON and the ART start flag is turned OFF. should be

[10-6. Control of production operation]
The above is an example of control mainly by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, control of various effect operations is executed by the sub-board 510 in accordance with the progress of the game. This is executed by the sub board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118 and the like) based on various commands (information commands, output signals) output from the main board 409 . Various commands output from the main board 449 as described above are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122 . Then, based on the command, a mode of presentation prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such presentation modes are stored in the ROM 1120 as a presentation mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of presentation modes corresponding to the commands are prepared.

For example, the effect mode includes one that is completed only in the game (hereinafter referred to as a single effect mode) and one that is performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as a continuous effect mode). Of these, the one-shot production mode includes a production that suggests the winning flag (suggestion production, notification production, details will be described later), a production that informs the payout of medals (payout appearance, it may be possible to inform the number of payouts), etc. There is

Unlike the effect (announcement effect) that directly informs the player of the winning flag, the suggestive effect refers to the effect that indirectly informs the player of the winning flag. , to perform a display or the like that expresses a color or the like. In addition, the suggestion effect is performed even when there is no winning flag (that is, in the case of losing). In this case, the effect is such that it is difficult to notice that the player has lost (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken as any winning combination). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the game is a failure.

For example, when the winning flag is a bonus hand or when the ART first prize lottery is won, the notification effect clearly informs the player of the result of the game, such as "Bonus confirmed!" or "ART win!" that can be informed. This effect is more effective when executed for winning combinations that are particularly pleasing to the player, such as bonuses and ART (because there is a possibility that a large amount of medals can be obtained). That is, when the player wins the ART first prize, etc., it can have the meaning of congratulating him or her.

It should be noted that the various effects described above can be executed as image display by the image display unit 500, sound effect generation by the speaker 512 or the like, light emission or lighting by LED decoration or the like. Such an effect mode can make it difficult for the player to have a boring impression when the player has been playing the game for a long time. Note that the mode of presentation is not limited to being executed by the image display 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, or the like. For example, instead of the image display 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. In addition, dolls that imitate characters, movable models, etc., side reels (for example, placed in a different position from each reel, and can be started and stopped as part of the production without depending on the player's operation) Alternatively, a lighting such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a revolving lamp) may be provided to execute various effects. By adopting such a method, it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[10-7. Number of games management process]
By the way, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the number-of-games management process for managing the number of games by the number-of-games management control means of the CPU 1110 . The number-of-games management control means of the CPU 1110 starts the number-of-games management process (starts counting the number of games) when a predetermined start condition is met, and starts the game when a predetermined end condition is met. By ending the number management process (finishing the game number counting process), the number of games played by the player during the game number management process as a specific section is counted, and the number of games is managed. When a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the game number management process is terminated, the number of games counted in the game number management process is initialized and reset to zero.

The above-described predetermined start condition for starting the number-of-games management process is a transition from the hell state to another state (advantageous state A to advantageous state E). That is, when it is determined that the instruction function display will be performed at least once or more immediately or after a plurality of games (for example, 32 games) have been completed, the number-of-games management process is started. Therefore, the number-of-games management process is started from the next game in which the special combination is selected by the internal lottery in the hell state.

Further, the above-described predetermined end condition for ending the game number management process is that the number of games counted during the game number management process is set to a predetermined threshold value (in this example, 1500 games as described above). ) has been reached and the instruction function has been displayed one or more times (first condition), and even if the number of games counted during the game number management process has not reached a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function display has not been performed. The game state related to the execution must shift from the advantageous state to the hell state (second condition). When either one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the number-of-games management process ends. For example, when the ceiling game is completed without winning the ART first prize lottery, even if the number of games counted during the game number management process does not reach the predetermined threshold value, the instruction function display cannot be executed. The game state involved transitions from favorable to infernal. When one of the above two conditions is satisfied in the number-of-games management process, the number-of-games management process ends. Here, the transition of the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display from the advantageous state to the hell state may be performed immediately after the ART game is finished, or after the withdrawal state after the ART game is finished. You can move to

In this embodiment, the instruction function display is always performed at least once during the number-of-games management process, but this is not essential. That is, the first condition may be that the number of games counted during the number-of-games management process reaches a predetermined threshold value (that the indication function display has been performed one or more times during the number-of-games management process). may be excluded from the conditions).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the start condition for starting the number-of-games management process is compared with the condition for ending the number-of-games management process, the start condition for starting the number-of-games management process is higher. is configured to be Therefore, when comparing the period in which the number-of-games management flag is set to ON and the period in which the number-of-games management process is set to OFF, the period in which the number-of-games management flag is set to ON is longer. ing. However, the period during which the number-of-games management flag is set to ON should not exceed 70% of the total period (the sum of the period for which the number-of-games management flag is set to ON and the period for which it is set to OFF). It's becoming Note that the period during which the number-of-games management flag is set to ON is the period during which control is performed in one of the advantageous states A to E and the pullback state. maximum. Also, the period in which the number-of-games management process is set to OFF is the period in which the state of hell is controlled. In this hell state, the execution of the ART game is not confirmed (in other words, the operation of the instruction function display is not permitted, and the above-mentioned conditional devices are grouped), but the ART The probability of winning in the initial lottery (the probability of being determined as YES in step S6011) is 1/20, and it is configured so that winning can be achieved by executing games less than 32 games set as the ceiling number of games. there is As a result, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest while suppressing the gambling aspect.

In addition, the CPU 1110 of the slot machine 1 has ART game forcible termination means, and this ART game forced termination means is capable of controlling the number of games counted in the game number management process even if the ART game is being played. When the number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value, the ART game is immediately forcibly terminated. However, if the instruction function display is not executed even once during the game number management process, even if the number of games counted in the game number management process (the game number counter GC) reaches the predetermined threshold value. , the hell state is not entered until the instruction function display is executed once. Therefore, even if the number of games counted in the game number management process (the game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold during the ART game, as long as there is no bonus game execution history during the game number management process, The ART game continues until the instruction function display is executed once. Conversely, if there is a bonus game execution history during the number-of-games management process, even if the indication function display is not executed even once during the number-of-games management process, the number of games is counted in the number-of-games management process. When the number of games played (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value, the state is shifted to hell, so if the ART game is in progress, the ART game is forcibly terminated.

Furthermore, the CPU 1110 of the slot machine 1 also has instruction function display execution right extinguishing means. This instruction function display execution right extinguishing means counts the number of games (the number of games When the counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value, a process of canceling the granted right to display the indication function is executed. However, even in this case, if the instruction function display is not executed even once during the game number management process, even if the number of games counted in the game number management process (the game number counter GC) reaches the predetermined threshold value. Even if it does, it will not transition to the hell state until the instruction function display is executed once. Therefore, even if the number of games counted in the number-of-games management process (the number-of-games counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function display will remain at 1 unless there is a bonus game execution history during the number-of-games management process. The granted execution right of the instruction function display is maintained without being extinguished until the display is executed once. Conversely, if there is a bonus game execution history during the number-of-games management process, even if the indication function display is not executed even once during the number-of-games management process, the number of games is counted in the number-of-games management process. When the number of games played (the number of games counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value, the state shifts to hell, so even if the right to execute the instruction function display has been granted, the right to execute the instruction function display is extinguished. Become. The right to execute the instruction function display corresponds to the right to execute an ART game in which the instruction function can operate continuously over a plurality of games, or the right to operate the instruction function display only once (one game). In addition, the state in which the right to execute the instruction function display is granted includes the state during the omen game (while the ceiling game is being played) and the ready state (the ceiling game is finished and the instruction function flag is set to ON, but the RT state is set). RT1 state) corresponds.

In the game after the ART game is forcibly terminated in this way, the game state related to the execution of the pointing function display is controlled to hell state. Even if the ART game is forcibly terminated, the RT state remains at RT2 or RT3, and shifts to RT1 based on the appearance of the 0th bell. Thus, by forcibly ending the ART game based on the number of games counted in the game number management process reaching a predetermined threshold value, the number of game media as prizes can be reduced in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the accidental occurrence of a situation in which a large amount of money is given, and furthermore, it is possible to suppress unnecessarily arousing the gambling spirit.

Even if the number of games (the number of games counter GC) counted in the game number management process during execution of the bonus game reaches a predetermined threshold value, the bonus game is not terminated halfway and is executed to the end. be.

Further, when the BB is won and the bonus game is executed in the hell state, the game state related to the execution of the indication function display during this bonus game remains controlled to the hell state unless the special role is won. Up to And if you are in this hell state and win a special role (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance riff) during the bonus game, the transition destination is any of the advantageous states A to D For example, the number-of-games management flag is set to ON, the count of the number-of-games counter GC is started, and the state of hell is shifted to the advantageous state of the transition destination. However, if the transition destination is in an advantageous state E, the number-of-games management flag is set to ON and the count of the number-of-games counter GC is started. It will be started when it is migrated. It should be noted that the lottery related to the execution of the instruction function display (art first prize lottery, etc.) may not be performed during the bonus game or inside the bonus. For example, even if a special role is selected by the internal lottery, the transfer destination determination lottery in step S6012 may not be performed, and whether or not it is a special role may not be determined in step S6011. (that is, it is the same as when a normal hand is selected). However, in the game in which the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is selected by the internal lottery, a lottery (art first prize lottery, etc.) related to the execution of the indication function display may be performed.

[10-8. Overall game flow]
An overall game flow in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 679 is a time chart showing an example of the overall game flow. Before explaining the overall flow of the game, each control state in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be sorted out and explained.

First, the slot machine 1 of this example is viewed from the viewpoint of the RT state, the general state is controlled after the bonus game is finished, the RT1 is controlled when the 0-piece bell appears, and the replay 1 is performed at RT1. RT2 is controlled when a symbol combination corresponding to 1 appears or when a symbol combination corresponding to a lower replay appears in RT2, RT3 and BB1 are controlled when a symbol combination corresponding to a higher replay 2 appears in RT2. or a bonus internal state controlled when BB2 is won but the symbol combination corresponding to these has not appeared, or a bonus state in which the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 or BB2 appears and the bonus game is being executed. Otherwise, it is controlled by the RT state control means.

In addition, from the viewpoint of the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display, the hell state in which the execution of the instruction function display is not yet confirmed and the instruction function display is confirmed to be executed at least once or more. It is controlled by the indicator function control means to be in one of the states A to E and the retracted state. As described above, the advantageous state includes the advantageous state E controlled by the ART game in which the indication function display can be continuously operated over a plurality of games, and the advantageous state E with different expectations for shifting to the advantageous state E. States AD and a retracted state are provided.

Further, the instruction function control means sets the instruction function flag to either an ON state in which operation of the instruction function is permitted or an OFF state in which operation of the instruction function is not permitted. Activation of the instruction function by the instruction function control means is not allowed unless the ceiling game number is completed even if the player wins the ART first prize lottery. Permission is canceled (OFF) when the game ends.

Further, the game number management control means sets the game number management flag to an ON state in which the game number management control is performed (the number of games played by the player is counted), and an ON state in which the game number management control is performed (the number of games played by the player is counted), and a game number management control is not performed (the game OFF state in which the number of games played by the player is not counted). The number-of-games management control by the number-of-games management control means is not executed in the hell state (OFF), but is executed based on transition from the hell state to one of the advantageous states A to E (ON). .

In addition, from the viewpoint of the game state that the player can grasp (hereinafter referred to as "appearance state"), the general game state in which the number of ceiling games is not set and the execution of the instruction function display is not confirmed, A sign game state in which execution of the instruction function display is confirmed and the ceiling game number is set, a single instruction state in which the instruction function display is performed only once, and an instruction function flag is set to ON after the ceiling game number is completed. (a state in which the execution of the ART game is ready, that is, a state in which the ART game can be executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the enhanced replay 2 appears), the symbol combination corresponding to the enhanced replay 2 appears, and the ART The player can grasp that the player is in one of the ART state during the game and the pullback state (pullback state) after the ART game is over.

The instruction function is allowed to operate in the above-mentioned preparation state and ART state, and is not allowed to operate in the general game state, precursor game state, and pullback state. However, regarding the predictive game state and the CZ state (advantageous states A and D in this embodiment), the state (predictive game state and CZ state) must be played for a predetermined number of games (32 games in advantageous state A, and 32 games in advantageous state D). 10 games), but not limited to this, when the predetermined number of games has been played, an internal lottery will be held to select "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6". If one of them is selected, the pressing order may be instructed, and when the predetermined number of games is completed, the state of hell may be immediately transitioned.

The number-of-games management control is not executed in the normal game state, but is started based on the selection of a special winning combination in an internal lottery (that is, transition from hell state to advantageous state). Further, when it is determined that the number of games executed by the player exceeds a predetermined threshold value during the game number management process (the game number management flag is ON), it is determined that the instruction function display has been executed one or more times. As a condition (except when a bonus game is executed), the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF.

Next, the overall game flow will be explained. When the RT state is RT1 and the game state related to the execution of the pointing function display is the hell state, the appearance state is the normal state. In the normal state, both the instruction function flag and the number-of-games management flag are OFF. Then, when a special role (a special watermelon role, a special cherry role, a special sustaining replay role) is selected by an internal lottery in the hell state and transitioned to one of the advantageous states A to E, the number of games is managed. A flag is set to ON. As a result, the appearance state is changed from the normal game state to the premonitory game state (when transitioning to advantageous states A to C), CZ (when transitioning to advantageous state D), or ART game (when transitioning to advantageous state E).

In the precursor game state, the number of ceiling games is set, and the indication function flag is set to OFF. Then, when the number of ceiling games is completed, the instruction function flag is set to ON. In FIG. 679, first, the control is made to the advantageous state A, and after the instruction function display is executed only once, the state is shifted to the hell state, and the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF.

After that, when a special role is selected by an internal lottery in the hell state and transitioned to one of the advantageous states A to E, the number of games management flag is set to ON, and the appearance state changes to the general game. state to the precursor game state. FIG. 679 shows a mode in which the state of hell is shifted to the advantageous state B. FIG.

When the ceiling game is completed in the advantageous state B, the appearance state shifts from the premonitory game state to the ready state, and the indicating function flag is set to ON. Then, when "up replay 1 + normal maintenance replay" is selected by an internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay 1 is displayed by the player's stop operation based on the indication function display, the RT state is reached. is shifted from RT1 to RT2, and the first ART game shown in FIG. 679 is started (art state). When the ceiling game is completed in the advantageous state B and the premonitory game state is shifted to the preparation state, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the advantageous state B to the advantageous state E.

During the ART game (during the ART state), the instruction function flag is set to ON, so even if "lower response + normal maintenance response" is selected in the internal lottery, the player will be able to select the instruction function based on the instruction function display. The RT state is maintained at RT2 as long as is stopped, but if the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay is displayed by the stop operation against the instruction function display, the RT state is maintained while the instruction function is maintained. It will be shifted from RT2 to RT1. However, when "up replay 1 + normal maintenance replay" is selected in the internal lottery and the stop operation is performed based on the instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay 1 is displayed and the RT state is displayed. returns from RT1 to RT2.

Also, even if the instruction function flag is OFF, when the internal lottery selects "upper lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", the symbol combination corresponding to the higher lip 1 is obtained by the player's stop operation. It may appear incidentally. In this case, the RT state is shifted from RT1 to RT2, but the ART game is not started because the number of ceiling games has not been completed. Then, when the zeroth bell is displayed, the RT state is changed from RT2 to R1.

When the first ART game shown in FIG. 679 ends, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the game state related to execution of the instruction function display shifts from the advantageous state E to the withdrawal state. The RT state is maintained at RT2 unless the 0th bell is displayed, but when the 0th bell is displayed, the state is changed from RT2 to RT1.

The withdrawal state ends when the player loses the maintenance lottery, and accordingly, on the condition that the instruction function display is executed at least once (excluding the case where the bonus game is executed), the instruction function display cannot be executed. The game state involved is transitioned from the pullback state to the hell state. However, when the number of games counted by the number-of-games management control means reaches the threshold during the pullback state, and if the instruction function display is executed one or more times, the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF, and the instruction function display is performed. The game state related to the execution of is shifted from the pullback state to the hell state.

In this example, when the first ART game ends, the number of games counted by the game number management control means has not reached the threshold value. It is shown. When the ART initial lottery is won in the withdrawal state, the instruction function flag is set to ON, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the advantageous state E, and the second ART game shown in FIG. 679 is started. be. At this time, if the RT state has been shifted to RT1, the ART game is started with the shift from RT1 to RT2, but if the RT state is maintained at RT2, the ART game is immediately started. However, in this case, even if the RT state is maintained at RT2, the ART game may be started after several games have been executed. Then, when the second ART game shown in FIG. 679 ends, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display shifts from the advantageous state E to the withdrawal state.

In this example, when the second ART game ends, the number of games counted by the game number management control means has not reached the threshold value, and in FIG. is shown. When BB1 is selected by the internal lottery, the RT state until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is displayed becomes the bonus internal state, and when the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is displayed, the bonus state is entered. A bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means.

Regardless of whether or not the bonus game is executed, if the ART initial winning lottery is not won in the pullback state and the maintenance lottery is lost, the pullback state ends, the normal game state is entered, and the indication function display is not executed. The relevant game state is shifted from the withdrawal state to the hell state, and the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF. Further, even if the bonus game is being executed, if the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF, the game state related to the execution of the indication function display shifts to the hell state.

In FIG. 679, during the bonus state (while the bonus game is being executed), it is determined that the ART first prize lottery will be won and the state will be shifted to, for example, an advantageous state B, and the ceiling game of 32 games is set as a premonitory game state. A broken state is shown. At this time, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the hell state to the advantageous state, and the number-of-games management flag is set to ON. When the bonus game ends, the RT state shifts from the bonus state to the normal state (RT0), and when the 0th bell is displayed in the normal state, the RT state shifts from the normal state (RT0) to RT1. be done.

In FIG. 679, when the bonus game ends, the premonitory game state continues because the ceiling game has not been completed. Then, when the zeroth bell is displayed, the RT state is shifted from the normal state (RT0) to RT1, and when the ceiling game is completed and the instruction function flag is set to ON, the appearance state is the premonitory game state. to the ready state.

After that, when "up replay 1 + normal maintenance replay" is selected by the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay 1 is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT1 to RT2, as shown in FIG. The third ART game is started, the ART state is entered, and the game state related to the execution of the pointing function display is shifted to the advantageous state E.

During the third ART game, when the number of games counted during the game number management process (that is, the number of games played by the player after the game number management flag is set to ON) reaches the threshold, the game is started. The number management flag is set to OFF, and the game number management process ends. When the number-of-games management process ends, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the ART game in progress is forcibly terminated. At this time, the ART game is forcibly ended halfway even if the prescribed number of games has not been completed. When the ART game is forcibly ended in this way, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display shifts to the hell state, and the appearance state changes to the general game state.

Note that even if the number of games counted during the game number management process (that is, the number of games played by the player after the game number management flag is set to ON) reaches the threshold value, the game number management process If the instruction function display has not been executed even once during the game, transition to the hell state is avoided until the instruction function display is executed at least once, and if the ART game is in progress, the ART game continues The indicating function flag is also kept ON. When the instruction function display is performed once, the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF, and the game-number management process is terminated. Terminated, the game state associated with the execution of the indication function display is transitioned to the hell state.

However, if even one bonus game is executed during the number-of-games management process, even if the instruction function is not displayed even once during the number-of-games management process, When the counted number of games (that is, the number of games played by the player after the game number management flag is set to ON) reaches the threshold value, the game number management flag is set to OFF and the game number management process is started. When the game ends, the command function flag is set to OFF, the ART game being executed is forcibly terminated, and the game state related to the execution of the command function display shifts to the hell state.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 679, when the ART first prize lottery is won during execution of the bonus game (during the bonus state) and the state is shifted to an advantageous state, the number of games counted during the number-of-games management process reaches the threshold value, the game number management flag is set to OFF and the game number management process ends, and the instruction function flag is set to OFF, the ART game being executed is forcibly terminated, and the game state related to the execution of the indicating function display shifts to the hell state.

Even if the ART game is forcibly terminated, the RT state is maintained at RT2 as long as the 0th bell is not displayed. migrated. In FIG. 679, even after the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display has transitioned to the hell state, it is controlled to RT2 for a while, and then shifted from RT2 to RT1.

Then, when a special winning combination is selected by the internal lottery in the hell state and the game state related to the execution of the indication function display shifts from the hell state to one of the advantageous states A to E (in FIG. 679, The state of transition to the advantageous state C is shown), the number-of-games management flag is set to ON, and the number-of-games management process is started. Then, when the state is shifted to the advantageous state in which the number of predictive games is set, the appearance state changes from the general game state to the predictive game state.

Although FIG. 679 does not show a mode in which the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT3, the special zone lottery is won (YES in step S606), and the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 2 is on the effective line. , the RT state is transitioned from RT2 to RT3, resulting in a specialized zone state.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of this example, when it is shifted to the advantageous state D, it is shifted to the chance zone (CZ). Illustration of the chance zone (CZ) is omitted in the state column.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the period during which the number-of-games management flag is set to ON (the period during which the control is in an advantageous state) and the period during which the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF (hell state). When compared with the period during which the number-of-games management flag is set to ON, the period during which the number-of-games management flag is set to ON is higher. The period of stay is set not to exceed 70%. In the hell state, which is the period in which the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF, the instruction function display is not executed, but the probability of a special winning combination being selected in the internal lottery is higher than the 32 games set as the ceiling number of games. It is configured so that a special role can be selected by executing a few games. Moreover, even if the transition destination when the special combination is selected is not the advantageous state B or the advantageous state E, when the transition destination is the advantageous state C or the advantageous state D, the player is given a sense of anticipation for the ART game. can give. Therefore, when the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value G, the game number management process is terminated and the hell state is entered. Since the anticipation of the execution of the ART game is increased compared to , it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest while suppressing gambling.

[10-9. Processing when an abnormal state occurs]
Processing performed when an abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail.

In the slot machine 1, when an abnormal state occurs during a game, an error is notified according to the type of the detected error. In particular, in the case of an error that can be detected by the main substrate 409, the error lamp 604 lights up (or flashes), and the special display LED 612 can display the type of error. Note that the special display LED 612 normally displays the indication function and the number of payouts. Abrupt state also includes abrupt power failure, although the error may not be detected.

If an abnormal condition such as the one described above occurs, it is necessary to cancel the error in order to return to the normal game state (if the power is turned off, the error display should not remain after the power is restored). The method of error cancellation differs depending on the error that has occurred, but in many cases it is necessary to turn off the power (OFF/ON).

[10-9-1. Clear RAM]
Here, clearing of data values in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main substrate 409 (RAM clearing) will be described.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, at the time of specific operations such as setting changes and power OFF/ON, the data values held in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 are erased or initialized within the address range corresponding to each operation. A clearing process (RAM clearing) for rewriting to a value is performed. Therefore, even when the error cancellation process is performed, there is a possibility that part of the data held in the RAM 1114 will be cleared when the power is turned off and on.

However, if the error cancellation process is performed while the instruction function is displayed, or if the power is cut off while medals are being paid out, the data used to display the instruction function and the number of payouts will be cleared by clearing the RAM. , A case that hinders the continuation of the game is assumed. In the slot machine 1, in view of such a problem, the target range of RAM clear in the RAM 1114 is determined in advance.

FIG. 680 is a diagram for explaining data blocks in RAM. FIG. 680 shows an internal image of the RAM 1114, with the upper end being the beginning of the memory address and the lower end being the end of the memory address. For example, the unused area 1114z is a data area in which data is not read or written (in other words, a data area other than the used area), and is gathered at the terminal end of the memory address. As shown in FIG. 680, in RAM 1114, a plurality of "areas" are predetermined according to the types of data to be stored. Also, as the target range of RAM clear, five types of "clear range 0" to "clear range 4" are defined. Note that each clear range may include the unused area 1114z.

First, the clear range of RAM clear will be described. The "clear range 0" means a target range equivalent to a total erase, which is basically never performed. That is, RAM clearing in the clear range 0 is not performed by normal maintenance or error processing. From another point of view, the data values in the set value data area 1114a are not cleared except when RAM clear is performed in the clear range 0. FIG. This means that the set value data area 1114a is basically not cleared.

The "clear range 1" means the target range for RAM clearing when starting to change settings by operating the setting key switch 1112t. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 680, all data areas below the door flag area 1114b are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a is not cleared.

The “clear range 2” means a target range for RAM clearing when resetting is performed by operating the reset switch 112u. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 680, the data areas below the lamp ON data area 1114d are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to door monitoring timer area 1114c are not cleared.

The “clear range 3” means a target range for RAM clearing at the end of the bonus. RAM clearing from clear range 0 to clear range 2 requires work by a hall clerk, etc. as a trigger for each RAM clear, but RAM clearing at the end of the bonus is automatically performed by internal processing after the bonus ends. executed as expected. In clearing the RAM at the end of the bonus, specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 1114i is not cleared.

The "clear range 3" is also a target range for RAM clearing when the power is simply turned off and on. That is, when the power is turned off and on without changing settings or performing a reset operation, the data area targeted by the "clear range 3" is cleared. Since the instruction function display area 1114i is not included in the "clear range 3", the instruction contents of the instruction function are not cleared by turning the power OFF/ON.

The "clear range 4" means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the start of each game. RAM clearing at the start of each game is automatically executed by internal processing when, for example, the starting lever 210 is operated with the number of medals bet determined. In clearing the RAM at the start of each game, specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. Timer area 1114k is not cleared.

Next, each data area shown in FIG. 680 will be briefly described. A setting value set in the slot machine 1 is stored in the setting value data area 1114a.

The door flag area 1114b stores information indicating the open/closed state of the door-shaped front member 200 (or the front opening/closing member 90), and the door monitor timer area 1114c stores the door-shaped front member 200 (or the front opening/closing member 90). Stores time information for recognizing that it is open.

The lamp ON data area 1114d stores information about lighting of lamps (for example, the replay lamp 606, the start lamp 608, and other indicators arranged on the display panel 501). Information indicating the number of credits (the number of stored medals) is stored in the credit number area 1114e. In the credit display area 1114f, information for displaying the number of stored medals on the stored number display LED 613 is stored. The payout number area 1114g stores information indicating the number of payouts (the number of medals to be paid out) indicating how many gaming values have been paid out in the game. Information for displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the special display LED 612 is stored in the payout display area 1114h. The instruction function display area 1114i stores information corresponding to the contents of instructions by the instruction function for displaying the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 .

The replay insertion number area 1114j stores the number of gaming values inserted during the replay operation (the number of medals inserted during replay). The interrupt check timer area 1114k stores timer information necessary for executing interrupt processing.

Information indicating the error display state displayed on the special display LED 612 is stored in the display flag area 1114l. The payout number of game values to be paid out as a result of the game is stored in the payout medal area 1114m. Information indicating whether or not gaming value can be inserted is stored in the insertable number area 1114n. The inserted medal count area 1114o stores the number of gaming values inserted before the start of the game. The random number storage area 1114p stores a random number used in the condition device.

In this way, in the RAM 1114 of the main substrate 409, by setting the range in which the RAM is cleared for each of various actions (when setting is changed, when the power is turned off/on, etc.), it can be expected to realize efficient memory control.

The RAM 1114 has a defined range (capacity) that can be used as a storage area of the main board 409 in the game machine, and data such as programs must be stored within the defined range. However, in recent years, for processing related to test signals and processing related to fraud, data related to programs for the processing is stored in an unused area outside the specified range (for example, unused area 1114z in FIG. 680). is allowed. However, the use of such unused areas is limited to gaming machines having an instruction function.

Further, in the slot machine 1, whether or not to re-display the data that was displayed before the RAM was cleared after the RAM is cleared after the power is turned off or the like is determined by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 (or the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510). ) can be determined for each type of data. That is, the CPU 1110 (or CPU 1118) may refer to the data stored in the data area that has not been cleared from the RAM and re-display the data as much as possible when the power is restored. , payout number display data, navigation display data, etc.) can be redisplayed theoretically, but may not be redisplayed by program control. At this time, referencing the data saved in the stack point of the RAM 1114 is also included.

[10-9-2. error indication]
Next, an error display on the special display LED 612 will be described. FIG. 681 is a diagram for explaining error display by special display LEDs. In the slot machine 1, when an error described in the "notification type" column of FIG. By displaying such a predetermined segment, the type of the detected error is identifiably notified. Of the errors shown in the "notification type" column of FIG. Board 409 is notified. The errors shown in FIG. 681 are part of the errors that can be detected by the slot machine 1, and there are errors that can be detected by the main board 409 or the sub-board 510 in addition to the errors shown.

An outline of each error shown in the "notification type" column in FIG. 681 will be described below.

"RAM error" is an error notified when the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is broken. On the other hand, "communication error (series code error)" is detected when there is an error in the series code transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510, but since it is detected by the sub-board 510, a special display is made. No error is displayed on the LED 612 .

"Changing setting" or "Checking setting" is not an error, but is described in FIG. The setting values of the slot machine 1 are stored in the setting value data area 1114a of the RAM 1114, for example. It should be noted that the notification timing of "setting changing" is set at the start of a predetermined setting change operation, and the notification timing of "setting checking" is set at the start of a predetermined setting confirmation operation.

"Illegal payout error" is an error notified when an abnormal payout occurs. Specifically, except when medals are dispensed from the hopper 110b by the operation of the drive means (not shown) of the medal release device 110, a payout count switch (not shown. A switch for counting the number of paid out medals, for example, provided in the medal release device 110) is turned on. In addition, in FIG. 681, the notification priority is set differently depending on whether the timing at which the error is detected is "when the main game is not stopped" or "when the main game is stopped". Higher priority is given to detection when the main game is not stopped. However, regardless of the timing of detection, the special display LED 612 displays the same segment of "HF".

``Introduced medal passing time 1 error'', ``Introduced medal passing time 2 error'', ``Medal passing order 1 error'', ``Medal passing order 2 error'', ``Medal passing interval time error'', and ``Introduced medal reverse error'' , is an error notified when there is an abnormality in the process from when medals are inserted from the medal slot 203 to when they reach the hopper 1110b. The anomaly here includes an anomaly related to the passing path of medals, as well as an anomaly due to the insertion of foreign objects other than medals.

In the slot machine 1, when a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 is detected to pass by the insertion sensor 207b (when the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state), the lever sensor, selector sensor, and shoot sensor are detected. The hopper 110b is reached while the passage is detected at . A lever sensor, a selector sensor, and a shoot sensor are sensors provided in the medal selector 207, and detect passage of medals at predetermined positions (not shown). Also, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the route to the insertion sensor 207b is locked out, so even if the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, the medal is returned via the medal selector 207 and the return gutter 213. It is returned to the tray 201 for use. When the medal whose passage is detected by the insertion sensor 207b does not move through such a normal process (specified medal passage sequence), the main board 409 detects the presence or absence of detection by each sensor, the detection time, etc. Detect each of the above errors.

Provide a brief description of each error. "Inserted medal passing time 1 error" is an error notified when medals (including foreign objects other than medals) remain near the inserted sensor 207b. It is detected when it continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). "Inserted medal passing time 2 error" is an error notified when medals (including foreign objects other than medals) remain near the lever sensor. (eg 500ms) is detected. The detection target period for the "inserted medal passing time 2 error" is always, but the notification timing of the error is set at the start of reception of medals (or at the end of the game, such as after completion of payout processing).

"Medal passing order 1 error" is an error notified when medals are detected by the selector sensor even though medals are not detected by the lever sensor (OFF). More specifically, the error is detected when the lever sensor does not detect medals for a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms) before the selector sensor detects the passage of medals. "Medal passing order 2 error" is an error notified when medals are not detected by the shoot sensor after medals are detected by the selector sensor. More specifically, the error is detected when the shoot sensor does not detect medals within a predetermined period (for example, 400 ms) after the selector sensor detects the passage of medals.

"Medal passing interval time error" is an error notified when a medal passes in a manner that is not expected in normal times. Specifically, in each sensor provided in the medal selector 207, some object is detected at a passing interval shorter than the shortest token passing interval (that is, the passing interval when medals are continuously inserted) assumed in normal operation. The error is detected when the passing situation is detected for a predetermined frequency (for example, 5 times in a row).

The "inserted medal reverse error" is an error that is notified when the medal moves in a route other than the specified medal passing sequence, particularly when a reverse motion is detected. Specifically, each sensor provided in the medal selector 207 (insertion sensor 207b, lever sensor, selector sensor, shoot sensor, etc.) is detected based on the detection order of medal detection.

Also, "discharged medal jam error", "discharged medal empty error", and "auxiliary storage box full error" are errors notified when there is an abnormality related to the dispensation or storage of medals. An outline of each error will be described. First, a "payout medal jam error" is an error notified when medals are jammed during medal payout from the hopper 110b. Specifically, the error is detected when the payout count switch is in the ON state for a predetermined period (for example, 200 ms) or longer. Further, the "payout medal empty error" is an error notified when the medals in the hopper 110b become empty. Specifically, when the medals are not normally paid out from the hopper 110b and the payout is retried (payout retry), the payout count switch is not turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 1500 ms) after the payout retry. If not, the error is detected. Further, the "auxiliary storage box full error" is an error notified when the auxiliary storage box 111 for medals is full. Specifically, when the medal full sensor 111a of the auxiliary medal storage box 111 detects the storage of medals exceeding a predetermined standard, the error is detected.

The “Priority” column in FIG. 681 indicates the priority of reporting between errors. In this example, the above priority means the priority when multiple errors are detected at the same time. , the display contents are not changed. However, the priority of the error display in the slot machine 1 is not limited to this, and in the above example, the display may be switched to an error with a higher priority detected later. In addition, a display example of the special display LED 612 is shown in the "SEG" column. In any case, when a plurality of errors are detected in the slot machine 1, the game cannot be restarted (the next game can be played) unless the errors are cleared.

In addition, in the "notification method" column, when the "image" is "o", an image for notifying an error is displayed on the image display unit 500, for example. However, the "video" notification image is required to have a display content that is the same as the error display on the special display LED 612 . When the “sound” is “o”, the notification sound is output from the speaker 512, for example. When the "lamp" is "o", for example, the error lamp 604 lights up or blinks. In addition, in notification by sound output, lamp output, etc., the notification mode may be changed according to the priority of the detected error. For example, when an error with a high priority is detected, an error with a low priority You may make it the alerting|reporting form which compares and emphasizes.

Further, in the "reset reset" column, it is indicated whether or not the error can be reset by resetting by operating the reset switch 112u. For errors that can be reset, the data area of "clear range 2" (see FIG. 680) of the data stored in the RAM 1114 is cleared when the error is cleared by resetting.

Further, when "immediately" is written in the "response" column, it means that the error can be detected on the main substrate 409 side while the slot machine 1 is in operation. For example, when an illegal payout error is detected, the main board 409 immediately issues a command notifying of the detection. That is, even if it is described as "immediately", it is not necessary to display the error immediately when the error is detected. (before the start of the process), an error may be displayed. The illegal payout error is a highly urgent error that means that the gaming value has been illegally paid out.

[10-9-3. Error processing]
In the following, the process (error occurrence process) when the error described in the previous chapter occurs in the slot machine 1 during the game will be described. The specific details of the processing when an error occurs differ depending on what requirements the slot machine 1 has regarding errors. Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 has a requirement definition (first requirement definition) regarding errors as shown below, and the details of error occurrence processing that is performed in such a case will be described.
(1) Do not group multiple errors based on importance (eg, strong errors and weak errors).
(2) Even if an error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued and the error is displayed after the game is over.
(3) Even if an error is detected during the game, the instruction function display is continuously displayed.

FIGS. 682 and 683 are flow charts (parts 1 and 2) for explaining the processing when an error occurs in this embodiment. Figures 682 and 683 are combined into one flow chart, and this flow chart shows the overall processing procedure for one game based on the processing procedure shown in Figure 644, and further details the processing performed when an error occurs. showing. Note that FIGS. 682 and 683 show an example of the processing procedure when the game progresses when the power is off (that is, when the power is not turned off). On the other hand, FIG. 684, which will be described later, is a flowchart showing a processing procedure example of the power failure recovery processing in this embodiment. In FIG. 684, the processing procedure is also applied when the power is turned off/on in the processing of FIGS. 682 and 683.

[10-9-3-1. Error Occurrence Processing (When Power is Off)]
682 and 683, the processing procedure for one game including the processing when an error occurs (when the power is off) will be described. Since the overall processing flow overlaps with the series of processing shown in FIG. 644, detailed description of the already explained processing will be omitted. 682 and 683 are executed by the main board 409 (mainly by the CPU 1110) unless otherwise specified. In addition, in order to make it easy to understand the situation in which each process is performed, the correspondence with the "game machine state" shown in FIG. 674 is also shown.

First, in FIG. 682, after a prescribed number of gaming values (more specifically, medals) have been inserted as described in the BET processing of FIG. is started (step S801). Such a game flow corresponds to "insert medal" to "press start lever" shown in FIG.

When the start lever 210 is pressed and the game is started, an internal lottery process is performed (step S802), and a condition device whose operation is permitted based on the winning combination is acquired (step S803).

Next, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the special display LED 612 is in a section in which the indication function can be displayed. Here, the section in which the instruction function can be displayed means a game (for example, during an ART game) in which the instruction function can be displayed by the instruction function. It should be noted that, up to this point, it has mainly been explained that the indication function is displayed during the ART game, but in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific game period other than the ART game (e.g. The indication function display may be performed even in the chance zone (CZ) where it is easy to do so. In such a case, an affirmative determination is obtained in step S804 even in games other than the ART game.

If it is determined in step S804 that the indication function display is possible (specifically, if the main board 409 determines that the indication function is to be used) (YES in step S804), in step S803 Based on the acquired condition device, the instruction content by the instruction function is determined (step S805). Next, the instruction content determined in step S805 is stored in the instruction function display area 1114i of the RAM 1114 (step S806).

After that, the rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S807). The timing of step S807 corresponds to "reel rotation start" shown in FIG. Then, by transmitting an instruction information command to the sub-board 510, the instruction content by the instruction function is notified (step S808). As a result, the sub-board 510 can cause the image display unit 500 or the like to perform navigation display at a predetermined display timing for navigation display based on the received instruction information command. In the slot machine 1, the transmission of the instruction information command in step S808 may be performed before the start of rotation of the reels 301 (step S807).

Thereafter, the instruction content stored in the RAM 1114 in step S806 is displayed on the special display LED 612 at a predetermined display timing regarding the instruction display function (instruction function display) (step S809). Specific display examples of the indication function display are as shown in FIGS. 671 and 672. FIG. Also, the predetermined display timings for the “navigation display” and “instruction function display” are as described above with reference to FIG. Then, after the instruction function is displayed in step S809, in step S810, acceptance of pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S804 that the indication function display is not possible (specifically, if the main board 409 does not determine that the indication function is to be used) (NO in step S804). , the rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S811) without performing the processing related to the instruction function as shown in steps S805, S806, S808, and S809, and acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211a is started ( step S812).

Steps S810 and S812 correspond to "reel stop button depression accepted" shown in FIG. After the process of step S810 or step S812 is performed, the process proceeds to step S813.

In step S813, the player presses the first stop button (the first stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 673 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S813 corresponds to the “first stop button pressed” shown in FIG.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error is detected between the pressing of the first stop button in step S813 and the subsequent pressing of the second stop button (step S814). If no error is detected in step S814 (NO in step S814), the process of step S815 is performed. If an error is detected in step S814 (YES in step S814), the process of step S819 is performed. In FIG. 683, when an error is detected in step S814, the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reel 301 during rotation. The process of step S819 may be performed after the reel stop operation is performed on the remaining reels 301 . This also applies to step S816. For the processing after such error detection, different priorities (importance) may be provided according to the types of errors, and processing may be selectively used based on the priority. For example, an error such as "HF (unauthorized payout error)", which is unlikely to occur in a normal game situation, should be given a high priority. Then, when such a high-priority error is detected, it is better to perform the process of step S819 without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the remaining reel 301 in rotation. preferable.

In step S815, the player presses the second stop button (the second stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 673 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S815 corresponds to the “press second stop button” shown in FIG.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error is detected between the pressing of the second stop button in step S815 and the subsequent pressing of the third stop button (step S816). If no error is detected in step S816 (NO in step S816), the process of step S817 is performed. If an error is detected in step S816 (YES in step S816), the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reel 301 that is rotating.

In step S817, the player presses the third stop button (the third stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 673 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S817 corresponds to the “press down of third stop button” shown in FIG.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected during a predetermined period of time after pressing the third stop button in step S817 (for example, until all reels 301 are stopped). (step S818). After that, regardless of whether or not an error is detected in step S818, the process of step S819 is performed.

In step S819, the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is ended. However, if it is determined in step S804 that the indicating function display is not possible (NO in step S804), the indicating function display is not performed in step S809, so special processing needs to be performed in step S819. no.

After that, in step S820, all the reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it becomes possible to determine winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the active line. The timing of step S820 corresponds to "stop all reels" shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 683, the processing of steps S819 and S820 is performed regardless of whether an error has been detected during the game up to that point. depending on whether Specifically, if no error has been detected during the game up to that point, the process from step S821 is performed, and if an error has been detected during the game up to that point, the process starts from step S825. is done.

First, in step S821, it is determined whether or not a game value has been paid out, as a normal process in which no error has been detected during the game thus far. In the game value payout, when it is confirmed that the winning combination is stopped based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line, the game value corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. If it is determined in step S821 that there is no payout (NO in step S821), the game is terminated because no error has been detected. When it is determined that there is a payout in step S821 (YES in step S821), the display of the number of payouts on the special display LED 612 is started (step S822), and a game value (medal) payout process is performed (step S823). . After that, since no error is detected, the game is terminated.

On the other hand, as processing when an error has been detected during the game up to that point, first, it is determined whether or not game value is paid out (step S824).

The processing of step S824 is the same as the processing when no error is detected (step S821), and is performed when it is determined that there is a payout (YES in step S824). The processing of (payout processing) is the same.

However, when an error has been detected during the game up to that point, the processes of steps S826 and S827 are performed in order to cause the special display LED 612 to display an error. When the payout process is performed in step S823, after the payout process is finished, the number of payouts displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared (step S825), and then the processes after step S826 are performed. When it is determined in step S824 that there is no payout, the processing from step S826 onwards is performed as it is.

In step S826, the special display LED 612 is caused to display the type of error detected so far (error display). A display example of the error display is as shown in FIG. After that, an error release process corresponding to the error notified by the error display by the hall clerk, sales office, etc. is performed (step S827), and the game ends.

By performing the processing shown in FIGS. 682 and 683, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment displays the instruction function and the number of payouts on the special display LED 612 when an error is detected during the game. It is possible to notify the type of the detected error to the player, hall staff, or the like by displaying the error without interruption.

[10-10. Modification]
In addition, in the present embodiment, a method of reducing the disappointment that may be given to the player due to the fact that the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle even though the ART game is executed after winning the ART first prize lottery. , the winning probability in the ART initial lottery executed in steps S6034, S6094, S6134, and S6201 is calculated as the difference K ( It is determined based on the number of remaining games (K) until the end of the game number management process. Similarly, the winning probability in the ART game number addition lottery in step S6073 and the addition determination lottery in step S6177, and the number of games to be added in the addition game number determination lottery in step S6179 are also determined by the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process. It is determined based on K. Furthermore, the winning probability in the maintenance lottery in step S6193 is also determined based on the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process. However, the method of reducing the disappointment that may be given to the player due to the forced termination of the ART game being executed is not limited to the above method. For example, the effect image displayed on the image display 500 by the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 and the instruction function display processing executed by the main board 409 also forcefully terminate the ART game in progress. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player. An effect image displayed on the image display 500 will be described below with reference to FIG. At the same time, instruction function display processing will also be described. Note that FIG. 685 is an example of an effect image related to the addition determination lottery and the addition game number determination lottery.

The effect image displayed on the image display 500 by the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 is the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process). It is determined based on the number of games (K). Similarly, the aspect of the instruction function display process executed by the main board 409 is also determined based on the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process.

First, the case where the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or greater than the fourth prescribed number will be described. During the execution of the ART game, when the addition determination lottery in step S6177 is won, and the number of addition games in the ART game is determined by the addition game number determination lottery in step S6179, the image display 500 displays FIG. , an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed. Although such an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 makes the player expect that the player has won the addition decision lottery in the ART game, even if the player loses the addition decision lottery in step S6177, there is a predetermined probability. Since it is displayed, even if an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed, it does not determine that you have won the addition determination lottery of the ART game.

685(b) is displayed on the image display body 500 even if the player operates the effect button 204 after an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed in the event that the player loses in the addition determination lottery of the ART game. A broken image is displayed.

When the player wins the addition determination lottery of the ART game, an image prompting the operation of the production button 204 is displayed, and the player operates the production button 204, the image display 500 displays FIGS. , the number of additional games is displayed. FIG. 685(c) shows that the number of games to be added is 20 games, FIG. 685(d) shows that the number of games to be added is 70 games, and FIG. ) indicates that the number of games to be added is 300 games.

In FIG. 685, "Remaining 30G" displayed on the upper left indicates that the number of remaining ART games is 30, and "TOTAL 1400" displayed on the lower right indicates that the number of games is being managed. , the game number counter GC is 1400. In this embodiment, when the number of games counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the number of games management process reaches a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example), the number of games management process ends and the advantageous state changes to hell. "TOTAL
1400" means that the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is 100 games.

Next, the case where the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the fourth prescribed number will be described. During the execution of the ART game, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance letter + normal maintenance letter", with a probability of 65536 out of 65536, you win the addition decision lottery in step S6177. When the number of games to be added to the ART game is determined by the lottery for determining the number of games to be added in step S6179, the number of games K remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is greater than or equal to the fourth prescribed number. Similarly, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed (FIG. 685). As described above, the image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 makes the player expect that the player has won the addition decision lottery in the ART game. is displayed at a predetermined probability, even if an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed, it does not determine that the addition determination lottery of the ART game has been won.

When the player loses the lottery for determining the addition of the ART game, even if an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed and the player operates the effect button 204, the image display body 500 does not show the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process. The lost image shown in FIG. 685(b) is displayed in the same manner as when the number of games K is equal to or greater than the fourth specified number.

However, if the player wins the addition decision lottery of the ART game, an image prompting the operation of the production button 204 is displayed, and the player operates the production button 204, the addition decision lottery of step S6177 is won, and the addition game of step S6179 is won. Even if the number of ART games added by the number determination lottery is determined, the images shown in FIGS. is displayed. Then, when the number of ART games already indicated to the player is completed (when the ART game executed when the addition is not performed is completed), the ART game is actually added and the ART game is internally performed. Even if the game continues, the image display 500 displays an end effect image indicating that the ART game has ended. Therefore, although the ART game continues internally, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the ART game is continuing. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle even though the ART game has been continued. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged, and furthermore to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

However, when the hand selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance rip + normal maintenance rip", the ART game is added with a probability of 65536 out of 65536, so the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance rip is When displayed on the activated line, the player will know that the ART game will be added at that time. Therefore, when the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or greater than the fourth prescribed number, the instruction function display is performed in such a manner that the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance reply is displayed on the active line (in order). When the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the fourth specified number, the pattern combination corresponding to the special sustaining reply is not displayed on the active line. An indication function display is performed. Specifically, out of the four pressing orders excluding forward pressing (pressing order of 123) and reverse pinching pressing (pressing order of 312), the pressing order determined by equal probability is displayed. there is Here, not only the forward press (the order of 123) but also the reverse pinching press (the order of pressing 312) are excluded from the indication function display because, as can be seen by referring to FIGS. This is because the order of pressing ) is an indication function display performed so that the up replay 2, which triggers the transition to the specialized zone, is displayed on the effective line. Therefore, in order to avoid rushing into the special zone even though the special zone lottery has not been won, there are four ways except for the forward press (press order of 123) and reverse pinch press (press order of 312). , the instruction function display of the pressing order determined by the equal probability is performed. This is because entering the specialized zone is rare, and one of the four pressing orders is frequently instructed, so that the player can get lost in this. In addition, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is a normal sustaining response, one of the six pressing orders is determined with an equal probability, and a stop operation is urged in this determined pressing order. The instruction function display is performed as follows. As a result, when the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the fourth specified number, even if the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance + normal maintenance", It is unlikely that the player will grasp this.

The above fourth prescribed number can be set arbitrarily, but even if an ART game is added, the ART game will not end in the middle, and all ART games, including the added number of games, will be consumed. It is preferably a value that can be In this embodiment, since the maximum number of ART games to be added is 300 games, the fourth specified number is preferably 350 games or more in consideration of the initial number of ART games.

In addition, in this modified example described above, when the addition of the ART game is performed, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the fourth prescribed number, the lost image shown in FIG. 685(b) is displayed. is always displayed, but it is not limited to this. For example, even if an ART game is added and the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the fourth prescribed number, when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 685(b)) 685(b) may be displayed. Further, the above-mentioned constant condition may be changed according to the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process (for example, when the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is reduced). (e.g., the probability of displaying a wrong image increases in proportion to the In this case as well, even if the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance character will be placed on the effective line so that the player will not be aware of this. The indication function is displayed in a manner that is not displayed.

In addition, in this modified example described above, based on whether or not the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the fourth prescribed number, although the ART game is added, the Whether or not to display the failed image shown in b) is determined, but the criterion for whether or not to display this failed image does not necessarily have to be based on whether the number is less than the fourth prescribed number. . For example, the number of remaining ART games including the number of added ART games is compared with the number K of remaining games until the end of the game number management process, and the number of remaining ART games including the number of added ART games is determined by the end of the game number management process. When it is determined that the remaining number of games is smaller than the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process, an image indicating that the ART game has been added is displayed, and the number of remaining ART games including the added number of ART games is completed. When it is determined that the remaining number of games is greater than the number K of games up to, a losing image may be displayed. In this case as well, even if the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance character will be placed on the effective line so that the player will not be aware of this. The indication function is displayed in a manner that is not displayed.

In addition, in this modification, when the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the fourth prescribed number, the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6177 is won, and the number of games to be added is determined by the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6179. Even if the number of ART games has been determined, the image display 500 displays a failure image indicating that no additional ART games will be played, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, adding a smaller number of games than the number of games actually added so as to give the player the impression that the ART game will not be forcibly terminated in the middle even if the ART game is added. The image display 500 may display an image indicating that the operation has been performed. For example, if the number of remaining ART games is 30 and the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is 50, adding 50 ART games will reduce the number of remaining ART games. 80 games. However, since the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is 50 games, the remaining 80 games of the ART game cannot be completely played. will be forcibly terminated. Therefore, even if the number of ART games actually added is 50 games, the number of games (20 games or less) that is smaller than the number of games actually added (50 games) was added. is displayed on the image display 500. However, in that case, it is better to display the actual number of games to be added to the data of the number-of-addition lottery table. This is because if a numerical value not included in the data of the number-of-addition lottery table is displayed as an additional value, the player may notice it. However, in such a case, there may be a difference between the threshold of 1500 games and the number of ART games currently being played (displayed). In that case, if the difference is smaller than the minimum number of additional games that actually exists in the data of the number-of-additional-games lottery table, an ending effect image, which will be described later, is executed, and if it is larger, the number of ART games is "0". 685 may be performed based on actual numerical values in the data of the number-of-additional-games lottery table. As described above, it is possible to give the player the impression that all the ART games including the added number of games have been completed, and the player is disappointed because the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. It is possible to suppress the fact that it gives In this case as well, even if the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance character + normal maintenance character", the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance character will be placed on the effective line so that the player will not be aware of this. The indication function is displayed in a manner that is not displayed.

By the way, although it was decided that the ART game would be added, the image display 500 displayed a failing image, or added a smaller number of games than was actually added. When an image indicating that is displayed on the image display 500, the ART game is continued internally. Therefore, it is preferable that the image display 500 displays an end effect image indicating the end of the ART game before the remaining number of games K until the end of the number-of-games management process becomes zero. As a result, even if the ART game being executed is forcibly terminated in the middle, it appears that the ART game has ended in appearance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress disappointment of the player due to the lack of interest, and furthermore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In this modified example, as described above, the effect image displayed on the image display 500 by the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 and the instruction function display processing executed by the main board 409 interrupt the ART game being executed. A method for reducing the disappointment that may be given to the player by forcibly ending the game will be described by taking as an example the addition determination lottery in step S6177 and the addition game number determination lottery in step S6179, which are processes executed during the ART game. However, it is not limited to this, and can be applied to the ART initial lottery in steps S6034, S6094, S6134, and S6201, the ART game addition lottery in step S6073, and the maintenance lottery in step S6203.

The gaming machine represented by the slot machine 1 described in the present embodiment can be expressed as a technical concept in addition to the gaming machine described in claim 1.

The game machine of Technical Concept 1 is

A gaming machine comprising a plurality of symbol rows that can be variably displayed and stop operation means for stopping the variably displayed symbol rows, wherein a game result appears when the stop operation means is operated,
an instruction control means capable of instructing an operation mode of the stop operation means;
Advantageous game executing means capable of executing an advantageous game capable of continuously generating an instruction of an operation mode of the stop operation means by the instruction control means;
addition lottery means for performing an addition lottery related to an increase in the number of games to be played in the advantageous game;
A performance control means that controls a predetermined performance and can be controlled to perform a performance based on the result of the additional lottery;

As a game state related to the execution of the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means, either an instruction-allowed state in which the execution of the instruction is permitted or an instruction-disabled state in which the execution of the instruction is not permitted. an indication state control means controllable to

instruction state transition control means capable of causing a transition from the instruction allowable state to the instruction disallowed state based on the fact that, in the instruction allowable state, a parameter that can be updated as the game progresses satisfies a predetermined condition; ,
with
The production control means is

and means for performing control based on parameters that can be updated as the game progresses, including whether or not to perform an effect based on the result of the additional lottery in the instruction allowable state. .

The gaming machine described in the above technical concept is equipped with an advantageous game (for example, an ART game) capable of continuously generating instructions for the operation mode of the stop operation means. This type of gaming machine is also provided with winning lottery means for performing a winning lottery for a winning combination each time the game is executed.

In the winning lottery, a plurality of winning combinations are drawn, and prizes are given to the player when the stop operation means is operated in an appropriate operation mode or when the stop operation means is operated in an inappropriate operation mode. Indicators with different amounts of playing media are included. The instruction role corresponds to "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" in this embodiment, and when operated in an appropriate operation mode, for example, 8 game media are given as a prize, When operated in the operation mode, for example, 1 or 0 game media are given as a prize (if 0, no game media are given as a prize). The appropriate operation mode and the inappropriate operation mode correspond to cases in which the pressing order is correct and cases in which the pressing order is incorrect, but is not limited thereto. For example, when the timing of stop operation of the stop operation means (reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) is correct, for example, eight game media are given as a prize, and the timing of stop operation of the stop operation means is determined as an appropriate operation mode. If the answer is incorrect, for example, 1 or 0 game media may be given as a prize (if 0, no game media are given as a prize) as an inappropriate operation mode.

Although not described in the above technical concept, the gaming machine of this technical concept is an advantageous game that performs a lottery for execution of an advantageous game that can continuously generate an instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means over a plurality of games. An execution lottery means is provided. The ability to continuously generate an instruction for the operation mode of the stop operation means that it is possible to continuously generate an instruction to prompt the stop operation means to be operated in an appropriate operation mode over a plurality of games. means that Therefore, the execution lottery for the above-mentioned advantageous game corresponds to the transition destination determination lottery described in this embodiment in the case of an instruction-disabled state (hell state) described later, and the instruction-allowed state (advantageous state or withdrawal state) described later. If so, it corresponds to the "ART initial lottery", the "additional determination lottery", etc. described in the present embodiment. Note that the internal lottery in the hell state described in the present embodiment is a lottery from which a special combination can be selected, but does not correspond to the above-mentioned "advantageous game execution lottery". This is because even if a special role is selected in the internal lottery, it is only determined that the hell state will transition to an advantageous state, and an advantageous game (ART game) that can occur continuously over multiple games ) is not a lottery to determine the execution.

Furthermore, the game machine of this technical concept comprises display means (image display body 500) for performing a predetermined display effect. The display means is controlled by the effect control means (corresponding to the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510) so as to perform effects based on the results of the advantageous game execution lottery and the additional lottery results. For example, a confirmation effect that you have won the lottery for the execution of the advantageous game, an expectation effect that indicates that you may have won the lottery for the execution of the advantageous game, an additional confirmation effect that indicates that you have won the additional lottery, and an additional lottery. The display means displays the number of advantageous games and the like added by winning the prize. It should be noted that the display means may also perform a display effect for instructing the operation mode of the stop operation means.

An advantage game (for example, an ART game) is executed when the result of the lottery is a specific result. That is, if the result of the lottery is a specific result, the advantageous game is executed immediately or after a plurality of games are executed, and the advantageous game is executed during the advantageous game. If the result of the lottery (additional lottery) is a specific result, an advantageous game is added and the execution period is extended.

A plurality of lottery states with different degrees of expectation for obtaining a specific result are prepared as a lottery state in which an advantageous game execution lottery is carried out. In the present embodiment, as the lottery state during execution of an advantageous game, there are prepared a low probability state in ART, a high probability state in ART, a special zone in progress, and a special zone in preparation. In addition, hell state, advantageous states A to E, and pullback state are prepared as the lottery state when the advantageous game is not being executed, but it is not necessarily limited to this.

Also, as a game state related to the execution of the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means, there is either an instruction allowable state in which the execution of the instruction is permitted or an instruction disallowed state in which the execution of the instruction is not permitted. configured to be controllable. The command-allowed state corresponds to the advantageous state described in this embodiment, and the command-disabled state corresponds to the hell state described in this embodiment. It should be noted that even if the instruction is allowed, the instruction function flag described in the present embodiment is not necessarily set to ON, but an instruction can be given at a desired timing (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied). A feature flag can be set to ON. On the other hand, the instruction disabled state is defined as an advantageous state when the instruction function flag cannot be set to ON and the instruction function flag is set to ON.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the number-of-games management flag is set to ON corresponds to the instruction-allowed state, and the period during which the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF corresponds to the instruction-disabled state. .

In addition, when a special role (special watermelon, special cherry, special sustaining riff) is selected by internal lottery, the instruction disabled state is shifted to the instruction permitted state. Here, as the instruction allowable state, a plurality of states with different degrees of expectation for execution of an advantageous game are prepared. When the instruction disabled state is shifted to the instruction permitted state, the counting means counts parameters that can be updated as the game progresses. The parameter here is the number of games executed in this embodiment, but is not limited to this. and the difference), or the number of times the above-mentioned indicator is selected by an internal lottery.

When the parameter counted by the counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the instruction permitting state ends and the instruction disabling state is entered. In this embodiment, when a parameter (for example, the number of games played) counted in an advantageous state A to an advantageous state E as an instruction allowable state or a withdrawal state reaches a threshold value, the instruction allowable state ends and an instruction disabled state is reached. is transferred to It should be noted that if the above parameters reach the threshold value during execution of an advantageous game (for example, an ART game), even if the advantageous game being executed is in the middle Even if the number of games has not been played), the instruction allowing state ends and the instruction disabling state is entered, so the advantageous game being executed is forcibly terminated.

The above parameters are updated as the game progresses, and the update method may be a method of updating by addition as the game progresses, or a method of updating by subtracting from the specified value as the game progresses. It may be a method. For example, if the above parameter is "the number of games played", if the update method is an addition update method, 1 will be added when one game is played, and if the subtraction update method is used, the default value will be changed after one game is played. 1 is subtracted. In this embodiment, when one game is played, the number of played games is incremented by 1, and when the number of played games reaches the threshold value, the instruction acceptance state ends. On the other hand, if the subtraction updating method is used, 1 is subtracted from the above threshold when one game is executed, and when the threshold becomes 0, the indication allowable state ends.

In this embodiment, when the number of staying games in the instruction allowing state is compared with the number of staying games in the instruction disallowing state, the number of staying games in the instruction allowing state is higher. In addition, when the counted parameter reaches the threshold value in the instruction allowable state, the state is shifted to the instruction disallowed state. In the hell state as an instruction impossible state, although transition to an advantageous state is not confirmed, the degree of expectation that the ART game will be executed (expectation degree of transition to advantageous state B or advantageous state E) is at least It is configured to be higher than the expected degree of execution of the ART game in the advantageous state A. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest while suppressing gambling.

By the way, when a parameter (for example, the number of games played) counted in the advantageous states A to E as the instruction-allowed state or the withdrawal state reaches a threshold value, the instruction-allowed state is shifted to the instruction-disabled state. In the gaming machine of this technical concept, as the above parameter approaches the above threshold value, it is possible to discourage the player when winning the extra lottery related to the addition of the number of games to be executed in the advantageous game. become more sexual. For example, if the above parameter is the "number of games played", if the "number of remaining games until the above threshold is reached" is smaller than the "number of advantageous games to be executed as advantageous games", the advantageous game is being executed. Then, the advantageous game is forcibly ended in the middle, and even if the player wins the lottery for executing the advantageous game, the player may be disappointed.

Therefore, in the game machine of this technical idea, the performance based on the result of the additional lottery performed by the display means (image display body 500) is controlled based on the parameters that can be updated as the game progresses. That is, when the above parameter reaches a specified value (for example, when the number of games executed in the instruction allowable state reaches the specified number of games), the display means (image display unit 500) adds The content of the presentation based on the result of the lottery can be changed. Specifically, when the above parameter reaches the specified value, when the extra lottery is won, the effect that indicates that the winning is done (hereinafter referred to as "pre-regulation extra effect") is performed with a relatively high probability. , When the above parameter reaches the specified value, when you win the extra lottery, the effect that indicates that you have won and the effect that indicates the number of games that have been added ) is performed only with a relatively low probability, and in most cases, only normal effects (for example, the same effects as when losing an additional lottery) are performed. If an effect indicating that the additional lottery has been won or an effect indicating the number of games added is performed, the player will be given a sense of exhilaration, but the effect indicating that the additional lottery has been won If the effect indicating the added number of games is not performed, it is suppressed to give the player a sense of exhilaration. As a result, it is possible to suppress disappointment after giving the player a sense of exhilaration, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. It should be noted that, when the above parameters reach the specified value and the additional lottery is won, the effect indicating that the winning has been won or the effect indicating the number of games that have been added may not be performed at all stochastically. good.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this technical concept, the probability of performing an effect indicating that the player has won an additional lottery or an effect indicating the number of games added to the winning lottery is determined based on the specified value as "additional effect before the specified value". , and the probability that the "additional effect after regulation" is performed are set in two stages, but instead of this, it may be set in multiple stages. In this case, as the difference in the number of games between the above threshold and the above parameter (that is, the number of games remaining until the above threshold is reached) becomes smaller, an effect indicating that the winning of the advantageous game execution lottery is won. It is preferable to gradually decrease the probability of performing an effect indicating the added number of games.

In addition, in the game machine of this technical concept, even if the above parameter reaches the specified value, even if the additional lottery is won, the probability is lower than before the above parameter reaches the specified value, but the additional lottery Although an effect indicating that you have won or an effect indicating the number of games added is performed, this is not limited to this, and if the above parameters have reached the specified value, even if you win the extra lottery Neither the effect indicating the winning nor the effect indicating the number of added games is performed, or the effect indicating that the number of added games is not displayed but the winning of the additional lottery is performed. It is also possible to perform an effect indicating the number of falsely added games, which is smaller than the number of games actually added by the added lottery. When performing an effect indicating a false number of additional games that is less than the number of games actually added by the additional lottery, an effect indicating the number of games that is smaller than the difference between the above threshold value and the above parameter is performed. is preferred.

In addition, in the game machine of this technical concept, after the above parameters reach the specified value, the effect indicating that the additional lottery has been won or the effect indicating the number of games added is not performed or relatively In addition to these, even if the advantageous game is continued internally due to the addition of an advantageous game, it is visible from the outside that the advantageous game was continued. In order to make it difficult to grasp, when the number of advantageous games already indicated to the player has been completed, the advantageous game end effect is performed, and the effect indicating that the advantageous game is being executed is ended. preferably. In this way, after the effect indicating that the advantageous game is being executed despite the continuation of the advantageous game, the advantageous game is executed instead of the effect indicating that the advantageous game is being executed. An effect (for example, the same effect as during normal operation (when an advantageous game is not being executed)) is performed in such a way that the fact that the game is in progress cannot be perceived. As a result, the possibility of the player realizing that the advantageous game has been continued is reduced, and the advantageous game is forcibly terminated in the middle even though the advantageous game has been continued by winning the extra lottery. It is possible to suppress disappointment of the player due to the fact that the game is overwhelmed, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. However, even if the player is prevented from grasping that the advantageous game has been continued, the instruction control means executes the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means (in this case, the player is notified that the advantageous game has been continued). It feels the same as when the operation mode of the stop operation means is instructed when it is not).

[11. Omen production]
In this chapter, an example of an indication effect of the slot machine 1 will be described. The slot machine 1 of this chapter performs an AT (assist time) entry lottery, which is an example of an advantageous gaming state, when a normal game is executed. The AT game (first special game state) starts after the premonitory game (selected from the game).

AT is an advantageous game in which a winning minor role can be paid out more easily than in a normal game by executing an effect indicating the winning minor role type using the image display 500 and the speaker 512. This is an example of a state.

Details will be described later, but in the slot machine 1 of this chapter, a small winning combination of middle 1st bell is won with a high probability (for example, 1/4.37 as described later) in each game. In this chapter, the middle 1st bell means that when the middle reel 301b is first stopped after starting the symbol variation display device 300, the bell is on a predetermined line (for example, upward to the right) in the symbol variation display device 300. A large number of medals (for example, 10) can be paid out evenly, and when the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is stopped first, a bell is displayed on one line in the symbol variation display device 300. It is a small winning combination that does not match and the payout of medals cannot be received.

For example, when winning the middle 1st bell during the AT game, with a higher probability than the normal game (eg 1/1 during the AT game, 0/1 during the normal game excluding the sign game), the starting lever Immediately after the pressing operation of 210, it is notified that the middle 1st bell has been won (for example, "1" is displayed at the position directly above the middle reel 301b of the image display body 500, or "Middle" is displayed from the speaker 512). !” is output). As a result, during the AT game, it becomes easier to receive the payout of 10 coins at the middle 1st bell than during the normal game.

[11-1. Various tables for foreshadowing]
In the following, first, the probability of winning a minor combination, the probability of winning a state transition, and the like in the slot machine 1 of this chapter will be described. FIG. 686 is an example of a minor combination lottery table. The minor combination lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. In the small combination lottery table, the lottery value of each small combination for each state (that is, when the AT flag is OFF (during a normal game) and when the AT flag is ON (during an AT game)), The number of medals to be paid out when the combination is aligned on a predetermined line (generally called an effective line) on the symbol variation display device 300 is defined.

The winning probability of each minor combination is the quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by the total value (65536) of the lottery values of all minor combinations in the relevant state. For example, the winning probability of weak watermelon when the AT flag is OFF is 300/65536. In this chapter, the number of payouts and the lottery value are common when the AT flag is OFF and when the AT flag is ON. As described above, the value in the probability column (winning probability) can be calculated from the lottery value of each minor combination, so the minor combination lottery table does not need to include the probability column.

In the example of FIG. 686, the lottery values of middle 1st bell, special bell, replay, and losing are higher than the lottery values of other small wins. A small combination with a low winning rate, which does not correspond to any of the middle 1st bell, special bell, replay, and loss, is also called a rare small combination.

FIG. 687 is an example of an AT initial winning lottery table. The AT initial winning lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409, for example. In the AT first winning lottery table, the AT first winning lottery value in a normal game (excluding an AT precursor game (hereinafter simply referred to as a precursor game)) is defined for each minor combination won in the game. there is The AT first winning lottery that is performed during the normal game is also called an A1 lottery, and the AT first winning lottery that is performed during a relief state game to be described later is also called a D1 lottery.

The denominator of the lottery value of the AT initial winning lottery table is 65,536. For example, when weak watermelon is won during the normal game, AT is won with a probability of 3000/65536, and the game shifts to the sign game. In addition, in this chapter, the lottery value is common in the A1 lottery and the D1 lottery. In addition, in the example of FIG. 686, the AT lottery table includes probability columns, and the value of each probability column can be calculated as the quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by 65536, which is the denominator. The table need not contain a probability column.

FIG. 688 is an example of a precursor game number lottery table. (a) is a number-of-prediction-games lottery table when the AT wins the first hit during a normal game, and (b) is the number-of-predictions-games lottery table when the AT wins the first hit during a relief state game. is. The portent game number lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409, for example. The premonitory game number lottery when the AT is won in the normal game is also called the A2 lottery. The premonitory game number lottery when the AT is won in the relief state game is also called a D2 lottery, and the D2 lottery includes two types of lotteries (D2-1 lottery and D2-2 lottery). The details of the D2-1 lottery and the D2-2 lottery will be described later.

The probability of winning the number of precursor games is the quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by the total value (65536) of the lottery values of the number of precursor games in the relevant state. For example, the winning probability of the number of precursor games of 5 games during the normal game (A2 lottery) is 4096/65536. In this way, the value in the probability column (winning probability) can be calculated from the lottery value of each number of precursor games, so the lottery table for number of precursor games does not need to include the probability column.

In the example of FIG. 688(a), when the AT wins during the normal game, 5 games, 8 games, 16 games, or 32 games are selected, and the winning rate is 5 games<8 games<16 games. <32 games are the highest. In addition, in the example of FIG. 688(b), when AT wins during the relief state game, 0 game, 1 game, 2 games, 3 games, or 4 games are selected, and the winning rate is D2- In the case of one lottery, the probability increases in the order of 4 games < 3 games < 2 games < 1 game < 0 games, and the probability of selecting the precursor of 4 games is extremely high, and the probability of selecting the precursor of the other number of games is high. In the D2-2 lottery, the number of precursor games of 0 is most likely to be selected, and the number of precursor games of 4 is the least likely to be selected.

FIG. 689 is an example of an AT stock lottery table. Although the details will be described later, in principle, the precursory game consists of the latter half of the precursory game (third special game state), which is the last four precursory games, and the first half precursory game (third special game state), which is the precursory game before the latter half of the precursory game starts. 2 special game state). (a) is an AT stock lottery table referred to during the first half of the omen game, and (b) is an AT stock lottery table referred to during the second half of the omen game. The AT stock lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409, for example.

If the AT stock lottery is won during the omen game, the AT game is stocked. The stocked AT game is released, for example, after the end of the AT game that rushes after the precursor game, for example, after the precursor game or without the precursor game.

In the AT stock lottery table, the AT stock lottery value is defined for each minor combination won in the game. The AT stock lottery during the first half of the omen game is also called the B1 lottery, and the AT stock lottery during the second half of the omen game is also called the C1 lottery.

The denominator of the lottery value of the AT stock lottery table is 65536. For example, if a weak watermelon is won during the first half of the omen game, the AT stock is won with a probability of 1500/65536. In this chapter, the AT stock lottery values for each small combination are different in the B1 lottery and the C1 lottery. Also, in the example of FIG. 689, the AT stock lottery table includes probability columns, and the value of each probability column can be calculated as the quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by 65536, which is the denominator. The table need not contain a probability column.

FIG. 690 is an example of a pseudo-bonus lottery table. The pseudo-bonus lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 . A pseudo bonus is an example of an advantageous gaming state. For example, it is possible to win a pseudo bonus during normal games and AT games including precursor games.

When the pseudo-bonus is won, the pseudo-bonus precursor games within a predetermined number of games are executed. After the pseudo-bonus precursor game is completed, when a specific small win (for example, replay) is established, the reels are stopped in a predetermined pressing order to start the pseudo-bonus from the next game. The predetermined pressing order is notified by the image display 500 or the speaker 512, for example.

In the predetermined pressing order, when the player aims at a bonus symbol (for example, "7" or "BAR") and presses, the bonus symbol is formed in a predetermined shape (for example, "7.7.7"). , “BAR BAR BAR”, “7 7 BAR”, etc.).

During the pseudo bonus, for example, the lottery value of the minor combination probability table similar to that when the AT flag is ON is referred to. During the pseudo-bonus, an effect indicating the type of the won minor role is executed using the image display 500 and the speaker 512, as in the AT, and compared to the normal game, the payout of the won minor role is increased. can be received easily.

The pseudo-bonus ends with a predetermined ending condition. The fact that a predetermined number of games have been played since the start of the simulated bonus, the fact that a predetermined number or more of medals have been paid out since the start of the simulated bonus, and the fact that a predetermined number of small wins have been achieved since the start of the simulated bonus are all examples of the predetermined number of games. is an example of the termination condition of .

In this way, the bonus symbols are arranged in a predetermined shape (for example, "7.7.7", "BAR.BAR.BAR", "7.7.BAR", etc.) to start the section where medals are increased. In , it is commonly called a pseudo-bonus because it is very similar to the real bonus, but the details of the pseudo-bonus in this chapter will be described later.

FIG. 691 is an example of an AT initial game number lottery table. The AT initial game number lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 . The AT initial game number lottery table defines the number of AT games for each state at the time of the lottery when the AT first win or AT stock is won.

The denominator of the lottery value of the AT initial game number lottery table is 128. For example, when AT is first hit during a normal game, the probability that AT's initial number of games is 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, and 300 games is 32/128. The expected values of the number of AT initial games in the A1 lottery, B1 lottery, C1 lottery, and D1 lottery are 162.5 games, 112.5 games, 96.875 games, and 193.75 games, respectively. That is, the expected value of the number of AT initial games is large in the order of relief state game > normal game (excluding precursor game) > early precursor game > latter half precursor game.

FIG. 692 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of stop shapes of various bells. (a) is an example of a stop type common bell. When the common bell is won, the bells stop in the middle stages of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c regardless of the order in which the reels are stopped, and 10 medals are paid out.

(b1) is an example of a stop form when the middle reel 301b is stopped first when the middle 1st bell is won. In this case, the bells stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the upper stage of the right reel 301c (aligned upward to the right), and 10 medals are paid out. (b2) is an example of a stop form when the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is stopped first when the middle 1st bell is won. In this case, the bells do not stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, and the bells do not align horizontally or obliquely, and the bells do not come to rest, and medals are not paid out.

(c1) is an example of a stop form when the middle reel 301b is first stopped when the special bell is won when the AT flag is off (that is, when AT is not in progress). In this case, the bells stop at the lower stages of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c (bottom alignment), and two medals are paid out. (c2) is an example of a stop form when the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is stopped first when the special bell is won while the AT flag is off (that is, when AT is not in progress). In this case, although the bells stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the bells do not align horizontally or diagonally and stop in a losing fashion, and one medal is paid out.

(c3) is an example of a stop form when the middle reel 301b is first stopped when the special bell is won while the AT flag is on (that is, during AT). In this case, the bells stop at the upper stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the lower stage of the right reel 301c (aligned downward to the right), and 10 medals are paid out. (c4) is an example of a stop form when the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is stopped first when the special bell is won while the AT flag is on (that is, during AT). In this case, the bells do not stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, and the bells do not align horizontally or obliquely, and the bells do not come to rest, and medals are not paid out. That is, the special bell is controlled to stop the reels differently depending on whether AT is in progress (whether the AT flag is ON) (control is executed to vary the symbols to be displayed).

[11-2. Concrete example of omen effect]
FIGS. 693 and 694 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the portent effect. (A) is the state when the lever is turned on in the first half of the omen game. (A) is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won. If the special bell or the middle 1st bell is won during the first half of the omen game, the reel pressing order for paying out 10 medals (the maximum number of payouts in the middle 1st bell winning game) (the push to stop the middle reel 301b first) order) is executed at a predetermined rate, and the player can obtain 10 medals by following the instructions of the effect.

The predetermined ratio may be the same as the ratio at which the push order effect is executed in the AT game, but is lower than the ratio at which the push order effect is executed in the AT game, and in the normal game excluding the sign game It may be higher than the rate at which the pressing order effect is executed. For example, when the special bell or the middle 1st bell is won in the AT game or the normal game, the execution ratio of the pushing order effect is 1/1 and 0/1 respectively, and when the middle 1st bell is won in the first half of the omen The execution ratio of the pressing order effect is 1/2.

Specifically, for example, on the image display 500, enemy characters are displayed directly above the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c. Also, the enemy character in the center is displayed in such a manner that it appears to be in front of the other enemy characters, and the number "1" is displayed below the enemy character in the center. Furthermore, the special display LED 612b displays "8" indicating that the pressing order for the middle reel 301b to be the first stop is correct (see FIG. 672).

In addition to the display effect using the image display body 500 and the like, in the instruction effect of the pressing order, the speaker 512 outputs a voice such as "It's in the middle!" It may be illuminated more strongly than the right reel 301c to indicate that the middle reel 301b should be stopped first.

In (B), the player stops the middle reel 301b first and then stops all the reels according to the instruction in (A). In the symbol variation display device 300, the bells are aligned upward to the right, and 10 medals are paid out. The image display 500 displays an image in which three enemy characters are knocked down and an image with "10 GET!" indicating that 10 cards have been paid out. Also, the special display LED displays "10" indicating that 10 coins have been paid out.

(C) is the state when the lever is turned on in the second half of the omen game. (C) is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won. If the middle 1st bell is won during the second half of the omen game, an instruction performance different from that during the first half of the omen is executed. That is, an effect indicating the pressing order of reels in which 10 medals cannot be acquired (here, the pressing order to stop the left reel 301a first) is executed, and the player can obtain one coin by following the instruction of the effect. medal can be obtained.

Specifically, for example, on the image display 500, enemy characters are displayed directly above the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c. Also, the left enemy character is displayed in such a manner that it appears to be in front of the other enemy characters, and the numeral "1" is displayed below the left enemy character.

Also displayed is the line "Left!" indicating that the left reel 301a should be stopped as the first stop. Furthermore, the special display LED 612b may display "7" indicating that the pressing order with the left reel 301a as the first stop is correct (see FIG. 672), or the special display LED 612b may not light up.

In FIG. 693, the background image on the image display 500 is not drawn, but for example, there may be a period during which the background image is displayed. The background image in the omen second half game) may be different. Also, the period during which the background image is displayed is longer in (A) than in (C), for example. In (C), the number of games remaining until the start of the AT is small, so the player's attention is drawn to the main effect rather than the background image.

In (D), the player stops the left reel 301a first and then stops all the reels according to the instruction in (C). In the variable symbol display device 300, the bells are stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, and the bells are not aligned in a horizontal line or diagonally, and are stopped in a losing manner, and one medal is paid out. Further, the image display 500 displays an image in which three enemy characters are knocked out and defeated, and an image with "1 GET!" indicating that one card has been paid out. . Also, the special display LED displays "1" indicating that one coin has been paid out. In addition, in (B) and (D), the mode of the image displayed on the image display body 500 is common, but for example, since the number of medals paid out is larger in (B), more effects are displayed. An image in a different mode may be displayed, such as displaying an image in a mode that includes .

(E) is the state when the lever is turned on in a game in which a rare small win is won in the latter half of the omen. Incidentally, even when a small rare combination is won in the first half of the omen, the same effects as (E) and (F), which will be described later, are performed. In (E), it is assumed that a strong cherry has been won. If a rare small winning combination is won during the latter half of the omen game, for example, an image indicating a chance (“CHANCE!”) and an image of an enemy character are displayed on the image display 500 .

The image size of the enemy character is desirably larger than the image size of the character displayed when the lever is turned on in the game in which the middle 1st bell is won. Also, for example, the clothes of the enemy character, the aura that the enemy character wears, or the color of the enemy character itself may indicate the winning rare small role (for example, red if the winning role is cherry, watermelon). green, etc.). In (E), since the strong cherry is won, for example, an enemy character wearing red clothes may be displayed.

FIG. 694(F) shows a state in which the player wins a cherry on the symbol variation device 300 in (E). Two medals are paid out. If a strong cherry is won, it is possible to align cherries in the lower row of the left reel 301a, the middle row of the middle reel 301b, and the upper row of the right reel. The image display 500 displays an image in which the enemy character that appeared in (E) is pushed away and defeated. Also, the special display LED displays "2" indicating that two coins have been paid out.

(G) is the state when the lever is turned on in the final game in the latter half of the omen (that is, the game immediately before the start of AT). In the final game in the second half of the omen, a rock-paper-scissors effect will be performed. In (G), an image indicating that rock-paper-scissors will start is displayed on the image display 500 . The hand displayed on the left side of the image display body 500 is the hand of the friend character, and the hand displayed on the right side is the hand of the enemy character. In addition, in (G), similarly to (C), the middle 1st bell is won, and an effect indicating the pressing order for stopping the left reel 301a first is executed.

It should be noted that the middle 1st bell has been won, and the effect indicating the pressing order for stopping the left reel 301a first may be displayed until the end of the game. A pressing order for first stopping the left reel 301a until the result of the final game is displayed (for example, after a predetermined time has passed since the start lever 210 was pressed, or when the second stop button is pressed). You may delete the effect that indicates . This is to make the player concentrate on the rock-paper-scissors effect.

(H) is the state after the player stops the left reel 301a first and then all the reels according to the instruction in (G) in the final game in the latter half of the omen (that is, the game immediately before the start of AT). is. An image display body 500 displays an image in which an ally character wins over an enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors performance, an image informing that an AT game is entered, and an image indicating that one payout has been made.

(I) is the state when the lever is turned on in the AT start game. An image indicating that an AT game lasting at least 100 games has started (AT start! 100G!) is displayed on the image display 500 . Also, (I) is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won. When the middle 1st bell is won during the AT game, an effect showing the order of pressing the reels for paying out 10 medals is executed, and the player can acquire 10 medals by following the direction of the effect. .

As described above, in the first half of the omen state, when the middle 1st bell or the special bell is won, the middle push instruction (that is, the instruction to stop the middle reel 301b as the first stop) appears, so the player can win more medals. You can do it and your interest will improve. Furthermore, in the latter half of the omen state, when the middle 1st bell or special bell is won, a left push instruction (that is, an instruction to stop the left reel 301a as the first stop) appears, so an extreme increase in the number of medals acquired by the player is suppressed. and the hole loss can be suppressed. In other words, in the premonitory state of this chapter, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and reduce the burden on the hall without depending on the setting of the AT transition probability of the slot machine 1 .

[11-3. Various flows for foreshadowing]
FIG. 695 is a flowchart showing an example of flag processing in step S107 in FIG. First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 draws a winning combination according to the random number extracted in step S106 of FIG. 645 and the lottery value shown in the minor combination probability table of FIG. 686 (S6721). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether AT_FLG is off (S6722). If AT_FLG is on, it indicates that the current state is the AT state; if it is off, it indicates that the current state is not the AT state.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT_FLG is on (S6722: NO), it executes the process when the AT_FLG is on (S6723) and ends the flag process. Details of step S6723 will be described later. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT_FLG is off (S6722: YES), it determines whether or not the AT_ZN_FLG is off (S6724).

If AT_ZN_FLG is on, it indicates that the current state is the AT's precursor state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the current state is not the AT's precursor state. Note that AT_ZN_FLG is a general term for AT_ZN_FLG1 and AT_ZN_FLG2, which will be described later. AT_ZN_FLG being on means that it is on when at least one of AT_ZN_FLG1 and AT_ZN_FLG2 is on, and AT_ZN_FLG being off means that both AT_ZN_FLG1 and AT_ZN_FLG2 are off.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG is on (S6724: NO), it executes the process when AT_ZN_FLG is on (S6725) and ends the flag process. Details of step S6725 will be described later. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG is off (S6724: YES), it determines whether or not AT_ST_FLG is off (S6726). When AT_ST_FLG is on, it indicates that the AT is stocked (that is, the AT stock lottery has been won but the stocked AT has not been released), and when it is off, the AT is stocked. Indicates that there is no state.

When the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 determines that AT_ST_FLG is on (S6726: NO), it executes the process when AT_ST_FLG is on (S6727) and ends the flag process. Details of step S6727 will be described later. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT_ST_FLG is off (S6726: YES), it determines whether or not the KYUSAI_FLG is off (S6728). When KYUSAI_FLAG is on, it indicates a relief state, and when it is off, it indicates a non-relief state.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the KYUSAI_FLG is on (S6728: NO), it executes the process when the KYUSAI_FLG is on (S6729) and ends the flag process. Details of step S6729 will be described later. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that KYUSAI_FLG is off (S6728: YES), it refers to the AT first winning lottery table and conducts an AT first winning lottery (A1 lottery) (S67210).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the AT is won in the AT first winning lottery in step S67210 (S67211). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT has not been won (S67211: NO), the flag processing ends. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT has been won (S67211: YES), the AT initial game number lottery is performed by referring to the A1 lottery column of the AT initial game number lottery table (FIG. 691) (S67212). .

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs a lottery for the number of precursor games (A2 lottery, FIG. 688) with reference to the lottery table for the number of precursor games (S67213). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of winning precursor games exceeds 4 games (5 games or more) (S67214).

When determining that the number of precursor games is four or less (S67214: NO), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns on AT_ZN_FLG2 (S67215) and ends the flag processing. If AT_ZN_FLG2 is on, it indicates that the current state is the AT's late precursor state, and if it is off, it indicates that the current state is not the AT's late precursor state.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of precursor games is 5 or more (S67214: YES), it turns on AT_ZN_FLG1 (S67216) and ends the flag processing. If AT_ZN_FLG1 is on, it indicates that the current state is the AT's early precursor state, and if it is off, it indicates that the current state is not the AT's early precursor state.

FIG. 696 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during an AT precursor, that is, processing when AT_ZN_FLG is on (S6725). First, the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 determines whether AT_ZN_FLG1 is on (S6731).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG1 is on (S6731: YES), it notifies the sub board 510 that AT_ZN_FLG1 is on, and the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 sets the effect state 1 ( S6732). The effect state 1 is a state of effect in which an operation instruction effect for stopping the middle reel 301b first is executed when the winning combination is "middle 1st bell" and "special bell". Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the AT stock lottery table for the B1 lottery, executes the AT stock lottery (B1 lottery) (S6733), and proceeds to step S6738 to be described later.

When determining that AT_ZN_FLG1 is off (S6731: NO), CPU 1110 of main board 409 notifies sub-board 510 that AT_ZN_FLG1 is off (AT_ZN_FLG2 is on), and CPU 1118 of sub-board 510 sets the effect state 2 (S6734). The effect state 2 is a state of effect in which an operation instruction effect for stopping the left reel 301a first is executed when the winning combination is "middle 1st bell" and "special bell".

Only one of the effect state 1 and the effect state 2 can be set. That is, if the process of step S6731 or step S6734 is executed in a state where one of the effect states has already been set, for example, after resetting the effect state that has already been set, the process of step S6731 or step S6734 is executed. Alternatively, a new rendering state may be overwritten without resetting the set rendering state.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not C1_KINSHI_FLG is off (S6735). When C1_KINSH_FLG is on, it indicates that the C1 lottery is prohibited, and when it is off, it indicates that the C1 lottery is not prohibited.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that C1_KINSHI_FLG is off (S6735: YES), it refers to the AT stock lottery table for the C1 lottery, executes the AT stock lottery (C1 lottery), and transitions to step S6738. do. In the AT stock lottery table described above, the AT stock win rate is set lower in the C1 lottery (that is, in the latter half of the omen and C1_KINSHI_FLG off) than in the B1 lottery (that is, in the first half of the omen). If the winning rate of the AT stock is set low, the burden on the hole can be suppressed, and furthermore, in the second half of the omen, a rock-paper-scissors effect is executed to inform the propriety of the AT stock, so the winning rate of the AT stock is low. This is because the interest of the player is less likely to decrease.

When CPU 1110 of main board 409 determines that C1_KINSHI_FLG is on (S6735: NO), CPU 1110 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery table, executes a pseudo-bonus lottery (C2 lottery), and transitions to step S6738.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the lottery in the step immediately before step S6738 (that is, one of the B1 lottery, C1 lottery, or C2 lottery) has been won (S6738). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the lottery has not been won in the step immediately before step S6738 (S6738: NO), the process proceeds to step S67311, which will be described later.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the lottery in the step immediately preceding step S6738 has not been won (S6738: YES), the AT initial game number lottery table is referred to, and the stock AT initial game number lottery is executed. It does (S6739). If the number of games of the pseudo-bonus is fixed, or if the condition for ending the pseudo-bonus is that a given number of given small wins are established, the processing of step S6739 may not be executed. When the number of pseudo-bonus games is determined by lottery, the number of pseudo-bonus games is determined in step S6739 using, for example, a pseudo-bonus game number lottery table (not shown).

Further, when the pseudo bonus is won, the pseudo bonus is immediately activated, for example. Specifically, after the result of the game next to the game in which the pseudo-bonus was won (more specifically, the result of the game in which the pseudo-bonus was won and the pseudo-bonus was won), the pseudo-bonus is started after a predetermined time (period) has passed. (The state transitions to a pseudo-bonus state.) The predetermined time (period) is, for example, the time (period) from when all the reels stop to when the payout of medals ends), and the pseudo-bonus starts. That is, there is no pseudo-bonus precursor game. Further, since there is no premonitory game for the pseudo bonus, the effect indicating whether the pseudo bonus is appropriate (the effect corresponding to the rock-paper-scissors effect before the start of the AT) may not be executed. Also, the digested game during the pseudo bonus may be subtracted from the precursor game. Thus, for example, the pseudo bonus can be started while the second half of the omen game is being consumed, and when the second half of the omen game ends during the pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus is executed over the second half of the omen game and the AT game. be able to.

Subsequently, CPU 1110 of main substrate 409 turns on AT_ST_FLG (S67310). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 subtracts 1 from the number of remaining precursor games (S67311). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of remaining precursor games is 4 (S67312). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games is 4 (S67312: YES), it turns off AT_ZN_FLG1 and turns on AT_ZN_FLG2 (S67313).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the effect state 1 is set (whether or not AT_ZN_FLG1 is ON) (S67314). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the effect state 1 is not set (whether AT_ZN_FLG1 is off) (S67314: NO), it ends the process when AT_ZN_FLG is on.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the effect state 1 is set (AT_ZN_FLG1 is ON) (S67314: YES), it executes a predictor puncture lottery (S67315). The omen puncture lottery is a lottery for eliminating ATs that have already been won (first winning ATs and stock ATs) and ending the omen state. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the omen puncture lottery has been won (S67316). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the blowout sign lottery has not been won (S67316: NO), the process when AT_ZN_FLG is on ends.

When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the omen blowout lottery has been won (S67316: YES), it turns off all the flags (S67317), turns on KYUSAI_FLG (S67318), and ends the processing when AT_ZN_FLG is on. do. In other words, although the AT disappears by winning the predictive puncture lottery, it is possible to enter the relief state.

In other words, even if the player wins the AT lottery and shifts to the first half of the omen, the game does not necessarily shift to the latter half of the omen. You can proceed with the game. Therefore, the slot machine 1 of this chapter can provide the player with a thrill even during the precursor, unlike the precursor of the conventional slot machine which merely provides a sense of security.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games is not 4 (S67312: NO), it determines whether or not the number of remaining precursor games is 0 (S67319). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games is not 0 (S67319: NO), the process proceeds to step S67314. When it is determined that the number of remaining precursor games is 0 (S67320: YES), AT_ZN_FLG is turned off (S67321), and the process when AT_ZN_FLG is on is terminated.

FIG. 697 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when AT is stocked, ie processing when AT_ST_FLG is on (S6727). First, the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 sets the rendering state 1 (S6741). In other words, in the stocked AT omen, when the middle 1st bell and the special bell are won, the middle push instruction appears, that is, the same state as the omen first half. In addition, in step S6741, instead of the production state 1, the production state 2 (that is, the same state as the latter half of the omen) may be set.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether AT_STZN_FLG is off (S6742). When AT_STZN_FLG is on, it indicates a stocked AT precursor state, and when it is off, it indicates a non-stocked AT precursor state.

When the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 determines that AT_STZN_FLG is on (S6742: NO), the process proceeds to step S6745, which will be described later. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_STZN_FLG is off (S6742: YES), it sets 5 games as the number of AT stock precursor games (S6743).

Note that the number of precursor games for the AT stock precursor may not be five games, but it is desirable that it is shorter than the average number of precursor games for the first winning AT (the average number of precursor games in the A2 lottery). This is because, although ATs are stocked, if a large number of games are required before the ATs are released, the player loses interest. Also, when AT_FLG is off and AT_ST_FLG is on, the precursor game is always set through step S6743, so the AT stock is never released without going through the precursor after the AT ends. . In other words, the AT's Renso always goes through the AT Stock Omen.

The CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 turns on AT_STZN_FLG (S6744). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 subtracts 1 from the number of remaining portent games in the AT stock (S6745). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of remaining portent games in the AT stock is 0 (S6746). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games in the AT stock is not 0 (S6746: NO), it ends the process when AT_ST_FLG is on.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games in the AT stock is 0 (S6746: YES), it turns off AT_STZN_FLG (S6747), turns off AT_ST_FLG (S6748), and End the process.

As described above, the AT stock precursor is in the same state as the first half of the AT first hit, and the production state 2 is not set in the AT stock precursor. That is, in the AT stock precursor, the AT stock is released without going through the same state as the second half of the precursor of the first hit of the AT.

FIG. 698 is a flow chart showing an example of the relief state process, that is, the process when KYUSAI_FLG is on (S6729). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 notifies the sub-board 510 that KYUSAI_FLG is on, and the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 executes the operation instruction effect to stop the left reel 301a for the first time regardless of the winning combination. (S6751).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the AT first winning lottery table and executes the AT first winning lottery (D1 lottery) (S6752). It should be noted that the initial winning probability in the D1 lottery is the same as the initial winning probability in the A1 lottery (FIG. 687). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the AT first winning lottery (D1 lottery) is won (S6753). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT initial lottery (D1 lottery) is not won (S6753: NO), it turns off the KYUSAI_FLG (S6754), and ends the processing when the KYUSAI_FLG is on.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT first winning lottery (D1 lottery) is won (S6753: YES), it refers to the AT initial game number lottery table and executes the AT initial game number lottery (S6755). ).

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the number-of-prediction-games lottery table for the D2 lottery, and executes the lottery for the number of precursory games. However, in the game before the game in which the omen puncture lottery was won, if the player played the game according to the instruction for the operation instruction (that is, stopped the reels according to the notified order of pushing the reels), D2- 1 lottery will be held and if the instructions are not followed, D2-2 lottery will be held.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of winning precursor games exceeds 4 games (5 games or more) (S6757). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of precursor games is four or less (S6757: NO), it turns on AT_ZN_FLG2 (S6758), and terminates the process when KYUSAI_FLG is on. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of precursor games is 5 or more (S6757: YES), it turns on AT_ZN_FLG1 (S6759), and ends the process when KYUSAI_FLG is on.

FIG. 699 is a flow chart showing an example of processing after all the reels are stopped. The process in FIG. 699 is performed immediately after YES in step S209 in FIG. 673, for example. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether AT_ZN_FLG2 is on (S6761). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG2 is off (S6761: NO), the process proceeds to step S6765, which will be described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG2 is ON (S6761: YES), it determines whether or not left-press navigation (that is, an operation instruction presentation to stop the left reel 301a for the first time) has occurred in the game. is determined (S6742). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the left push navigation has not occurred (S6742: NO), the process proceeds to step S6765, which will be described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the left-press navigation has occurred (S6742: YES), it determines whether or not the center reel 301b was pressed in the game (ie, whether the middle reel 301b was the first stop) (S6763). ). When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the center has not been pressed (that is, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is the first stop) (S6763: NO), the process proceeds to step s6765, which will be described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the key has been pressed (S6763: YES), it turns on C1_KINSHI_FLG (S6764). In other words, in the latter half of the omen (the state in which the effect state 2 is set), if the middle press is made despite the occurrence of the left-press navigation, C1_KINSHI_FLG is set and the C1 lottery is not performed. (See step S6735). As a result, when the middle 1st bell or the special bell is won in the latter half of the omen, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the middle reel 301b first and winning 10 medals.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the game is the game immediately before AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S6765). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the game is not the game immediately before AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S6765: NO), the process proceeds to step S6767, which will be described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the game is the game immediately before AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S6765: YES), the sub board 510 is given a left push navigation command, that is, the left reel 301a is stopped as the first stop. A command for executing an effect indicating what to do is notified (S6766).

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of remaining precursor games is 0 (S6767). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining games of the precursor games is not 0 (S6767: NO), it ends the processing after the reels are completely stopped shown in this flowchart.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games is 0 (S6767: YES), it executes a freeze effect for 10 seconds (S6768). During the freeze effect, even if the starting lever 210 is pushed down, the reels are not started. Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 turns on AT_FLG (S6769), and ends the processing after all the reels are stopped shown in this flowchart.

[11-4-1. Concrete example 2 of omen production]
FIG. 700 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect. Fig. 700(A) shows the state in which the AT game started in Fig. 694(I) has ended. As described above, it is assumed that the AT stock has been won according to the left push navigation in the second half of the omen shown in FIGS. 693(E) to 694(F). In (A), the image display 500 displays the results of the AT game (for example, the total number of continuous AT games and the number of won medals).

(B) is a state in which the precursor game of the AT stock has started. Since he has an AT stock, he immediately enters the AT stock precursor game after the AT ends. As described above, the AT stock precursor game is in the same production state as the first half of the precursor at the time of the first hit of the AT. (B) is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won, and a middle push instruction appears when the lever is turned on.

(C) is the final game of the AT stock precursor game. This is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won, and a middle push instruction appears when the lever is turned on. Furthermore, since this is the final game of the precursor game, the rock-paper-scissors effect is executed and the teammate character wins. (D) is the stock AT's starting game.

The AT emitted in diagram 700 was acquired in the latter half of the aura, as previously described. In addition, if the player did not follow the left push navigation in the second half of the omen game, C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on. In other words, the reels were stopped in the pressing order in which the number of obtained medals decreased in the middle 1st bell or the special bell.

In this way, in the precursors of the AT stocked according to the operation instructions disadvantageous to the player, the second half of the precursors in which the operation instructions disadvantageous to the player appear is not passed through, thereby suppressing the loss of interest of the player.

Incidentally, as described above, in step S6741, instead of the effect state 1, the effect state 2 may be set. As a result, the stocked AT omen is in the same state as the latter half of the omen, so the number of medals obtained by the player decreases, and the burden on the hole can be suppressed.

Further, for example, in step S6741, a lottery may be performed, and according to the result of the lottery, the effect state 1 or the effect state 2 may be selected and set, or the player's operation (for example, the effect button 204 before the lever is turned on). It may be possible to select the effect state 1 or the effect state 2 by the operation of pressing ), or to change the selection rate of the effect state 1 and the effect state 2 in the lottery by the player's operation.

In addition, when the selection rate of the presentation state can be changed by the operation of the player, the selection rate of the presentation state may be changed by the operation mode. Specifically, for example, when the number of times the effect button 204 is pressed before the lever is turned on is less than 100 times, the effect state 1 is set, and when the number of times the effect button 204 is pressed before the lever is turned on is 100 times or more. If there is, set the rendering state 2. As a result, when the number of presses of the effect button 204 is small (less than 100 times), the time required for the pressing operation is small and the AT can be entered quickly. will appear, and the number of medals consumed until the AT rushes will increase. On the other hand, if the number of times the effect button 204 is pressed is large (100 times or more), the time required for the pressing operation is long and it takes time to enter the AT, but the effect state 1 is set, so the middle-press navigation is performed. Appears, it is possible to suppress the number of medals consumed until the AT rushes. In this way, different game properties can be provided according to the player's operation.

Also, in the release of the AT stock as well, the first half of the precursor and the second half of the precursor may be passed through in the same way as the first hit of the AT.

693(E) to 694(F), that is, in the second half of the first-hit AT omen game, when the AT stock is won in the state of following the left-press navigation, the AT stock is won. The precursor game is not executed until the first winning AT starts. In addition, after the end of the first hit AT, it is not notified except for the final game of the predictive game, and it is notified that the AT will be executed in the final game of the predictive game (it is notified that it was stocked). It is desirable that By not announcing the winning of the AT stock until the release of the first winning AT, the player does not know whether the AT stock exists or not, so that the player can enjoy the game with a sense of tension after the first winning AT is finished.

Further, as described above, in the lottery for obtaining the number of AT initial games, the C1 lottery has a smaller average number of games and a lower advantage than the A1 lottery. In other words, the average number of games and the degree of advantage are higher in the AT first hit after the end of the second half of the omen than in the AT stock won when following the left-push navigation in the latter half of the omen. In the second half of the AT Omen, when the rest of the Omen games are completed, the AT starts. If the AT stock acquired in the latter half of the AT Omen is more advantageous than the first hit of the AT, the player can earn a large amount of medals in a short period of time. This is because the burden on the hole will increase because the player will acquire it.

[11-4-2. Concrete example 3 of omen production]
FIG. 701 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect. (A) is the lever-on state of the game during the second half of the omen. In the game of (A), a special bell is won, and left-press navigation appears to indicate that the left reel 301a should be stopped as the first stop, as in FIG. 693(C). As described in the AT first hit table in FIG. 688 and the AT stock lottery table in FIG. is desirable.

(B) is a state in which the middle reel 301b is stopped first in the game, and then all the reels are stopped. Since the middle reel 301b is stopped first when the special bell with AT_FLG is off is won, the bells are stopped at the bottom of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c, and two medals are paid out. That is, according to the left push navigation, the number of medals to be paid out is larger than when the left reel 301a is first stopped (in this case, one medal is to be paid out). Also, on the image display 500, a rare character with a folding fan appears, and a rare effect of cheering appears.

In (B), the middle reel 301b is stopped first even though the special bell has been established in the latter half of the omen and the left navigation has occurred, so step S6764 is executed and C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on. In other words, a situation disadvantageous to the player occurs that the AT stock lottery is not performed.

However, if only the AT stock lottery is prohibited, the player will be in an extremely disadvantageous situation. Therefore, when C1_KINSHI_FLG is on, the AT stock lottery is not performed, and instead a pseudo-bonus lottery that is advantageous to the player in step S6737 is performed. will take place. It is desirable that the winning rate of the pseudo-bonus is much lower than the winning rate of the AT stock lottery (AT stock lottery table in FIG. 689, pseudo-bonus lottery table in FIG. 690). This is to prevent the player from creating an advantageous situation despite ignoring the left push navigation.

In addition, the above-mentioned rare effect can appear only when pressing the middle button (that is, the same operation as when following the navigation that appears in the first half of the omen) even though the left-push navigation was displayed in the second half of the omen ( It is a production that does not appear depending on the result of a lottery such as a lottery for a winning role or an AT lottery, and it is also a production that does not appear if you operate according to the navigation). Even when C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on by pressing the button in the middle and the player is put in a disadvantageous situation, the player's interest can be suppressed by making the rare effect appear. Although the AT stock lottery may be performed when C1_KINSHI_FLG is ON, it is desirable that the winning rate when C1_KINSHI_FLG is ON is lower than when C1_KINSHI_FLG is OFF.

(C) is a state when the lever is turned on in a game in which a rare small win (strong cherry) is won in the second half of the next game precursor of (B). In (C), no special presentation is performed. In (D), the player wins a cherry on the symbol variation device 300 in (C). Also in (D), no special effect is performed.

In the games (C) and (D), although a pseudo-bonus lottery is performed, the winning rate is extremely low compared to the AT stock lottery. Here, for example, if a special effect such as AT stock lottery (effects such as FIG. 693 (E) and FIG. 694 (F)) is performed, the winning rate of the pseudo bonus is extremely low. As described above, it is desirable that special effects are not performed, as it will make people expect.

Incidentally, in a game in which the left push navigation is performed in the latter half of the omen, even if the right reel 301c is first stopped, C1_KINSHI_FLG is not turned on. This is because if the C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on in all operations other than the first stop of the left reel 301a, the player is afraid of making an operation mistake and becomes overly tense, and more medals than expected may be paid out. because there is no In other words, by setting the conditions for turning on C1_KINSHI_FLG (reducing the rate at which the AT lottery is executed) to be the same as the pressing order in the first half of the omen, it is possible to create tension between the first half of the omen and the latter half of the omen. can.

In the above example, when the special bell is won when the AT_FLG is off, two medals are awarded if the middle reel or the right reel is stopped for the first time, and one medal is awarded if the left reel is stopped for the first time. However, one medal may be paid out when the middle reel or the right reel is first stopped, and two medals may be paid out when the left reel is first stopped.

As a result, when the special bell is won in the latter half of the omen, if the player presses the middle button instead of following the left-press navigation, not only will C1_KINSHI_FLG be turned on, but also the number of medals acquired by the special bell will decrease, so the player can use the left-press navigation. will follow.

In the latter half of the omen, when a gaming method (a game in which the middle reel 301c is first stopped) is performed in which the rate at which the lottery for transition to the AT state is executed decreases, the rate at which the lottery for transition to the AT state is executed is reduced. Although it decreases, from the point of view of simply paying out medals, the rate at which the lottery for transition to the AT state is executed is higher than in the gaming method (the game in which the left reel 301a is first stopped).

[11-4-3: Another example 3 of omen production]
FIG. 702 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the portent effect. FIG. 702(A) shows the same state as FIG. 700(D), that is, a game started by an AT stocked during the AT's first hit. In the flow chart and the lottery table described above, one AT is stocked when the AT stock lottery is won, but a plurality of AT stocks may be won in one AT stock lottery. That is, for example, when the AT stock lottery is won, the stock number lottery is performed. Here, it is assumed that a plurality of AT stocks have been acquired in the game in the second half of the omen shown in FIGS. 693(E) to 694(F).

For example, a predetermined number (eg, 10) or less AT stock can be acquired in one AT stock lottery, but in order to prevent the number of medals acquired by the player from becoming excessive, the stock number is limited in the stock number lottery. The smaller the number, the higher the selection rate (for example, the minimum stock number of 1 is 49152/65536, 2 is 8192/65536, etc.).

(B) is the state in which the AT has ended. An effect similar to that shown in FIG. 700(A) is performed. (C) is the game with the second stocked AT precursor started. Even if the AT ends in (B), the AT stock remains, so the second stock AT precursor starts from the next game after the AT ends in (B). In (C), a rock-paper-scissors effect is executed to notify whether or not the second stock AT can enter.

In this way, for each stock AT, a notification effect (rock-paper-scissors effect) indicating whether or not the stock AT can enter the game immediately before the start of the stock AT is executed. However, as for the notification effect when the AT stock is won, although it may be executed for the first AT stock, it is desirable not to execute it for the second and subsequent AT stocks. If the notification effect is executed even when the second and subsequent AT stocks are won, the player can easily predict the number of stocks in advance, and the player loses interest in the notification effect (rock-paper-scissors effect) indicating whether or not the stock AT can be started. Because you might lose it.

(D) is a state in which all reels are stopped according to the left navigation in the game of (C). Here, too, the notification effect is not performed. (E) is the next game after (D), and the AT has started. As shown in (E), in the game started by the AT, an effect is executed to notify that the AT will start for the first time.

Incidentally, as shown in (C) to (E), one game is selected as the number of games for the second stock AT. In this way, when a plurality of AT stocks are won, it is desirable that the number of games shorter than the number of games of the first stock AT omen is selected as the maximum number of omen games for the second and subsequent stock ATs. . This is because if the number of games for the second and subsequent stock ATs is long even though a plurality of AT stocks have been won, the player's sense of frustration increases.

However, even for the second and subsequent stock ATs, it is desirable that the number of precursor games is 1 or more (that is, 0 games are not selected). This is because if the number of predictive games for the second and subsequent stock ATs is 0, the player will be exhausted by the consecutive ATs, and the burden on the hole will be excessive. On the other hand, the number of premonitory games for the second and subsequent stock ATs may be 0, and in this case, a large amount of medals can be obtained quickly by consecutive ATs.

In addition, when the maximum number of stocks (10 pieces) is acquired in one AT stock effect, it is desirable that the second and subsequent stock AT precursors are all in one game. As a result, since the stock AT starts at the harbinger of one game, the player can guess that the maximum number of stocks has been acquired before releasing all the stocks, and the player has a sense of anticipation. increase.

Note that, when a predetermined operation is performed and a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery may be conducted to increase the number of precursor games for the second and subsequent stock ATs. The predetermined operation is, for example, an operation of pressing the one-card insertion button 205 in front of the starting lever 210 three times, and the predetermined condition is, for example, a lottery for a winning combination by pressing the starting lever 210 . As a result, the player's operation can lengthen the omen, so that the interest of the player who wants to enjoy the omen effect is improved. Also, if a rare effect or the like is performed in the lottery, the interest of the player is not lowered. Even if the start lever 210 is pressed after pressing the insert button 206 different from the one-sheet insert button 205, the lottery for delaying the release of the AT is not executed. In the above example, the number of precursor games for the second and subsequent stock ATs is increased, but the number of precursor games for the first stock AT may be increased similarly.

[11-4-3: Concrete Example 4 of Omen Effect]
FIG. 703 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect. (A) shows the state when the lever is turned on in the final game in the first half of the omen, and the same effect as in FIG. 693 (A) is performed. (B) is a state in which all the reels are stopped in the final game of the first half of the omen. In (B), the condition of step S6765 in FIG. 699 is satisfied, and the process of step S6766 is executed. That is, in (B), the left push navigation appears.

Specifically, in (B), the speaker also outputs the line "Left!" In this way, in the first half of the Omen, the mid-press navigation appears, but before the second half of the Omen begins (more precisely, when the first half of the Omen game ends and before the next game starts). In addition, by notifying the player that the left reel 301a should be the first stop, it is possible to suppress reel pushing order errors in the second half of the omen. As a result, it is possible to prevent C1_KINSHI_FLG from being turned on during the latter half of the omen, that is, to prevent the AT stock lottery from being performed, by suppressing reel pressing order mistakes in the latter half of the omen.

(C) is a state in which all the reels are stopped in the final game of the first half of the omen, and is a continuation state of (B). In (C), the image display 500 displays a line "Left!" indicating that the left reel 301a should be the first stop. The displayed lines are the same as those displayed when the lever is turned on in the second half of the omen. In addition, the line "Left!" da!” (for example, in FIG. 693(C), hereinafter also referred to as small left push). In addition, in (C), the operation instruction line ("Left!") is continuously output from the speaker.

(D) is the state when the lever is on in the first game of the latter half of the omen. The effect of (D) is the same as that of FIG. 693(C), but for example, the large left press line that appeared in (C) is continuously displayed, and the operation instruction line from the speaker (" Left!”) is still output.

(E) is the state when the lever is turned on in the first game in the second half of Omen, and is a continuation of (D). Although the large left push line is still displayed on the image display 500, output of the operation command line ("Left!") from the speaker has ended. If words are output from the speaker all the time, there is a possibility that other nearby players will interfere with the game, so it is desirable that the output of the sound of words is finished before the display of the words. Further, the large left push line is continuously displayed until the game is first stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress reel pressing order errors in the starting game in the latter half of the omen. On the other hand, the display of the dialogue may end earlier than the output of the dialogue sound. This is because there are also players who want to enjoy the performance at the time of a sign using the image display 500 .

Note that, for example, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 measures the time from when the left-push navigation command is transmitted in step S6766 to when the start lever 210 is pressed, and notifies the sub-board 510 of it. For example, when the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 determines that the measurement time has elapsed since the large left push line was displayed, it erases the large left push line. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the measurement time elapses, the large left push line may be erased before the start lever 210 is pushed, or after the start lever 210 is pushed and before the reel first stops.

In this way, when a sufficient amount of time has passed since the large left push line was displayed, and the player has been sufficiently notified of the order of pushing, the large left push line is erased and another effect is played. can attract people's attention. Instead of measuring the measurement time, the large left push line may be erased after a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds) has elapsed.

It should be noted that in the case where the large left push line is erased after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the predetermined time is set so that the large left push line can be displayed across the first game and the next game in the second half of the omen. (Specifically, for example, about 5 seconds, which is longer than the shortest time of one game, 4.1 seconds). may be defined (specifically, for example, about 3 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest time of one game, 4.1 seconds, or the wait time when the game is completed at the fastest speed (that is, the maximum wait time (approximately 1.5 seconds, which is shorter than (approximately 2.5 seconds)).In addition, when the predetermined time is set so that the large left-pressing line is erased during the first game in the second half of the omen, "1 game 4.1 seconds+freeze time>predetermined time", which is the shortest time of the game, should be executed in the first game in the latter half of the sign.

In FIG. 703, since the starting lever 210 is pressed before the large left push line is erased, the large left push line is still displayed. A left-pressing line (that is, a line displayed when the lever is turned on when the special bell or middle 1st bell is won in the latter half of the omen) may be displayed. The display is continuously displayed until the first stop of the reel is performed.

(F) is a state in which the left reel 301a is stopped first in the games of (D) and (E), and then all the reels are stopped. In (F), the large left push line is deleted, and the same effect as in FIG. 693(D) is performed.

In the example of FIG. 703, the display size of the large left-pressing dialogue is larger than the display size of the small left-pressing dialogue, but the display size and display position of these dialogues may be the same. In this case, as in the above-described example, the lines displayed when all the reels are stopped in the first half of the omen end game can be continuously displayed even when the lever is turned on in the second half of the omen start game. It is not necessary to send the left push navigation command to the sub board 510 when the lever is on.

In this case, the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 displays the line based on the command transmitted in step S6766 even when the lever is turned on. By not transmitting the command again when the lever is turned on, it is possible to avoid failure or delay in receiving the command by the sub-board 510, and it is possible to avoid problems with the display of the large left push line.

It should be noted that in the second half of the omen game in which the large left push line is displayed continuously from (C), if the middle reel 301b is first stopped without following the instruction of the large left push line, the large left push line is displayed. You may extend the display time of , or you may display a small left press line.

Further, when the middle reel 301b is first stopped in a state where the large left push line has already been erased in the second half of the omen game, the large left push line may be redisplayed, or the small left push line may be displayed again. may be displayed. By these processes, it is possible to make the player who made a mistake in the pressing order in the latter half of the omen understand the correct pressing order.

In the preceding game number lottery table (FIG. 688), the number of precursor games at the time of AT first winning is 5 games or more, but the number of precursor games of 4 or less may be selectable. When the number of precursor games of 4 or less is selected in the initial hit of AT, for example, the second half of the precursor of one game is executed, and the previous precursor game is the first half of the precursor.

When the number of games in the latter half of the omen is one game, it is desirable that the large left-pressing line is erased during the one game at the latest (for example, three seconds after the start of display). If the number of games in the second half of the omen is 1 game, there is a high possibility that the fixed effect that informs the AT rush will be executed in the 1 game, so it is possible to display the large left push line during the entire period of the 1 game. This is because such a fixed effect (the above-described rock-paper-scissors effect) may be hindered, and the player's interest may decrease. However, even in such an omen second half game consisting of only one game, when the middle reel 301b is first stopped after erasing the large left push line, the large left push line is redisplayed or the small left push line is displayed. You may display dialogue.

[11-4-4: Concrete Example 5 of Omen Effect]
FIG. 704 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect. The effect shown in FIG. 704 is an example of the effect performed when AT_ZN_FLG2 is on, that is, in the latter half of the omen. (A) is the state when the lever is turned on in a game in which a rare small win is won in the latter half of the omen. In (A), an effect similar to that in FIG. 693(E) is performed. In the game (A), it is assumed that the weak watermelon has been won. However, the enemy character displayed in (A) may be displayed in a manner that represents a watermelon (for example, the enemy character's clothes are green).

In addition, when the left reel 301a is stopped at the first stop, the weak watermelons are aligned upward to the right (that is, watermelons stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the upper stage of the right reel 301c) or are aligned downward to the right. (That is, the watermelon stops at the upper stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the lower stage of the right reel 301c). It is a watermelon pattern in which a watermelon stops on the lower stage of the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c.

(B) is a state in which the middle reel 301b is stopped as the first stop in the game of (A). Stop the middle reel 301b as the first stop when the weak watermelon is established in the second half of the omen (that is, perform the same operation as when following the instruction (middle push navigation) when the special bell and the middle 1st bell are established in the first half of the omen) ) and a predetermined message are displayed on the image display unit 500 .

The predetermined message may be, for example, ``It doesn't matter if you press the middle button, but if you press the left button first, the probability of winning is higher! Oh! (Hereinafter, also referred to as a kind message.) is displayed (in the figure, the above-mentioned message is omitted, and "You can also press the middle key...") is displayed. The kind message may not only be displayed on the image display 500, but may also be output as sound from the speaker.

(C) is a state in which all reels are stopped and weak watermelons are aligned. The kindness message is erased, and the same effect as in FIG. 694(F) is performed. In addition, as described above, when the middle reel 301b is stopped at the first stop, the watermelons are arranged in the bottom row. Therefore, when the middle reel 301b is stopped at the first stop, assuming that the maximum number of sliding frames of each reel is 4, in order to align the watermelons, the watermelon should It is necessary to press the reel stop button at the timing of being positioned at a frame two steps up (one of these five frames in total).

On the other hand, when the left reel 301a is stopped at the first stop, the watermelon can be aligned either upwards to the right or downwards to the right. Therefore, when the left reel 301a is stopped at the first stop, in order to align the watermelons, the watermelons on the left reel must be placed on the lower, middle, upper, or one to four frames above the upper (total of seven frames). ), the left reel stop button 211a should be pressed. That is, when the left reel 301a is stopped at the first stop, the player has more time to perform the eye pressing.

Therefore, by displaying the kind message in (B), even a player playing the slot machine 1 for the first time can know an appropriate playing method. In addition, in order to reduce the data volume, instead of the message in (B), the dialogue "Left!" may be displayed.

In addition, it is desirable that the kind message is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of display. This is because the player feels that if the kind message is displayed even after the passage of time sufficient for the player to fully understand the content of the kind message, the effect performed on the image display 500 is hindered. be.

Further, even after the predetermined time has passed and the kindness message is hidden, it is desirable to be able to display the kindness message by pressing the middle reel stop button 211b without pressing the starting lever 210 again. . This is to make it possible to guide the game method again to the player who could not read the message while the message was being displayed. In other words, it is possible to display a plurality of kind messages in one game.

Although the kind message can be redisplayed without pressing the starting lever 210 again, when the number of remaining precursor games is 0 and the freeze effect is being executed (the process of step S6768 in FIG. 699 is executed). ), it prevents the display of kind messages from starting. This is to allow the player to concentrate on enjoying the AT game in a situation where the number of remaining precursor games is 0 and the AT game will start from the next game.

In the 10-second freeze effect, for example, the screen suddenly blacks out in the first half of the 5 seconds, and the blackout state continues. For example, an effect of displaying a message such as "Congratulations!" It should be noted that the kind message that started to be displayed before the start of the freeze effect is erased by the time the latter five seconds of the freeze effect starts at the latest.

That is, when the AT starts in the game following the game in which the kind message is displayed, the time required for the game is the game progress time plus 10 seconds of the freeze time, so the kind message is displayed once. longer than the

Also, when the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again while the kindness message is being displayed, only the kindness message display time may be set again while the kindness message continues to be displayed. Further, when the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again while the kindness message is being displayed, the effect of displaying the kindness message may be restarted from the beginning. By performing these processes, the kind message is displayed until the predetermined time elapses after the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again. Therefore, even if the player is slowly reading the message, the display time of the kind message can be extended and the kind message can be read to the end.

On the other hand, even if the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again while the kind message is being displayed, it is not necessary to reset the kind message display time and redo the kind message effect, that is, the kind message being executed. It does not have to affect the display effect. Some players press the middle reel stop button 211b several times in succession in order to stop the middle reel 301b without fail. This is to avoid that

In the example of FIG. 704, the kind message has already been erased at the time of (C), but since the kind message contains information that is advantageous to the player, the starting lever 210 is pushed and the next message after the kind message is displayed is displayed. Even if the game starts, it is desirable to continue displaying the kind message until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the kind message display. In this way, the kind message can be displayed across a plurality of games (two games) in the second half of the omen. It can also be displayed in only one game.

However, when the game starts two games after the display of the kind message is started, it is desirable to forcibly hide the kind message even if a predetermined time has not passed since the display of the kind message was started. This is because there is a high possibility that the player thinks that the kind message information is not necessary, and proceeds with the game one after another.

At this time, a new effect due to the depression of the starting lever 210 is executed. Prioritize. This allows the player to more reliably understand the game method. Further, for example, although the display of the kind message takes precedence over the display by the new effect, the new effect may take precedence over the kind message effect with respect to sound and light emission. As a result, the player can enjoy new performances while making the player understand the game method.

Also, for example, the new effect may take precedence over the kind message effect for all of display, sound, and light emission. That is, in this case, the kind message is erased at the same time when the new effect is started. As a result, in particular, if the new effect is, for example, an effect with a high degree of AT expectation, the player's sense of expectation is improved compared to the case where the kind message continues to be displayed.

As described above, the kind message is basically displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), but some players feel that the kind message information is unnecessary. Therefore, for example, at the start of the AT game, the kind message is hidden. Furthermore, the 10-second freeze in step S6768 may not be executed. As a result, even if the kind message is displayed in the final omen game, the kind message can be erased by pressing the starting lever 210 to immediately start the AT's first game.

Also, in this case, although the freeze effect is executed in step S6768, the freeze time may be shortened. For example, if the freeze time is 0.5 seconds and the game is played at the fastest speed, the display time of the kind message is 0.5 seconds of the freeze time and the playing time of one game considering the weight. 0.1 second is added to 4.6 seconds, and the display time of the kind message (5 seconds) can be shortened.

[11-4-5: Concrete Example 6 of Omen Effect]
FIG. 705 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect. (A) shows the state when the lever is turned on in the game following the game in which the puncture lottery in step S67315 was won in the first half of the omen, that is, the game in the relief state. As described above, after winning the flat tire lottery, the process of turning off all flags in step S67317 is performed, so the relief state is entered after the precursor state has ended.

By providing the puncture lottery as a precursor in this manner, the load on the hole can be reduced because even if the transition to the precursor does not necessarily lead to an AT. On the other hand, by making it possible to enter the relief state after the omen puncture, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

In (A), an image of an enemy character is displayed on the image display 100 . Further, the image display 500 has left-push navigation (that is, an operation instruction similar to when the lever is turned on when the special bell or middle 1st bell is won in the first half of the omen). In addition, the enemy character's dialogue for left-push navigation is displayed. It is desirable that the enemy characters and lines are displayed in a manner that makes the player feel that following the line will cause a disadvantage to the player, but the instruction to press the middle button is not directly displayed. Also, a display such as "Don't be deceived by enemy characters!!" may be displayed together.

(B) is a state in which the middle reel 301b is first stopped without following the left push navigation in (A). The image display body 500 displays an image in which the enemy character is damaged. (C) is a state in which all reels are stopped. An image of an enemy character being blown away is displayed.

In (B), when the left reel 301a is first stopped according to the navigation in (A), for example, the win rate of the AT in the relief state game decreases, or the number of AT initial games when the AT wins The situation becomes disadvantageous for the player, such as a decrease in the average value. When the left reel 301a is stopped at the first stop, for example, the image display body 500 may display an image of an enemy character attacking to suggest that the situation is at a disadvantage. good. In this way, it is possible to provide the player with a strategy element by adopting a specification in which an advantageous lottery can be obtained when the player does not follow the left push navigation.

In the relief state game, the setting may be such that the AT first winning lottery can be received only when the reels are stopped in the order of pushing the correct answer. For example, the pressing order of the correct answer includes four pressing orders (middle→right→left, middle→left→right, right→left→middle, right→middle→ Left) may be a specification in which only one is correct (the probability of being able to receive the AT first lottery is 25%, and the difficulty of receiving the lottery is high), or three are correct. (that is, the probability of receiving the AT first winning lottery is 75%, and the difficulty of receiving the lottery is low).

In this case, in the relief state game, when the reels other than the left reel 301a are stopped as the first stop, but the correct order of pressing is not correct, an image of an attack by an enemy character is displayed in (C), for example. good too.

It should be noted that when the AT lottery is won in the rescue state, if the game in which the omen puncture lottery was won is played according to the operation instructions (middle-press navigation) in the first half of the omen, the operation instructions are displayed on the omen game lottery table of D2-1. If the game is played without complying, the number of precursor games lottery table of D2-2 is used (see FIG. 688 for all), and the number of precursor games is drawn in step S6756.

In the example of FIG. 688, for example, although the number of precursor games can be selected from 0 to 4 games, if the operation instruction is followed (when using the number of precursor games lottery table of D2-1), the maximum number of games Number 4 games are selected with a very high percentage. In the game in which the omen puncture lottery is won, if the operation instruction in the first half of the omen is not followed, the relief state may not be entered in the first place. This is to penalize players who do not play as instructed. Incidentally, even if the AT is not won at the first time, it is desirable that the relief state game is finished in one game. The player can enjoy the relief state game with a sense of tension by setting the relief state for only one game.

(D) is the state when the lever is turned on in the next game in the relief state. It is assumed that the AT is won at the first hit in the relief state, and that the premonitory state is entered in (D). It is desirable that the navi showing the push order does not appear in the signs up to the winning AT in the relief state. As described above, by not displaying the navigation indicating the pressing order, the player does not know whether or not an omen has occurred, so that the player can get a sense of tension. In addition, since the number of premonitory games for the winning AT in the relief state game is four at most, even if the navigation indicating the pressing order is not displayed, the number of medals acquired by the player does not decrease significantly.

On the other hand, the push order navigation may be displayed even after the next game in the relief state. For example, it is possible to select by lottery how many games the push order navigation can be displayed after the end of the relief state. For example, the pressing order can be displayed only in the relief state game>The pressing order can be displayed up to the first precursor game after the relief state game >The pressing order can be displayed until the second precursor game after the relief state game >Relief state game The selection ratio in the lottery is set so that the push order can be displayed up to the 3rd omen game after the end>the push order can be displayed until the 4th omen game after the relief state game is finished.

It should be noted that a freeze effect may be performed in the game that has transitioned to the relief state (for example, in (A)). In the freeze effect, first, all reels are stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). For example, when a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the effect button 204 ten times or more) is performed during five seconds of this stop state, an AT first winning lottery is performed in the relief state game, and when it is not performed, relief is performed. In the state, the AT first hit lottery may not be performed.

When the predetermined operation is performed and the AT first winning lottery is performed, for example, the AT first winning lottery is performed by rotating the reel in the normal direction (normal reel rotation direction) even though it is frozen. to notify. On the other hand, if the predetermined operation is not performed and the AT first winning lottery is not performed, for example, the reels are kept stopped or reversely rotated to indicate that the AT first winning lottery was not performed. inform.

In addition, in order to receive the AT first winning lottery in the relief state, an operation with a higher degree of difficulty than the operation of pressing the effect button 204 ten times or more during five seconds while the reels are stopped in the above example may be required. Specifically, for example, the effect button 204 is pressed 20 times or more in 5 seconds while the reels are stopped, or the reels are stopped for 3 seconds (that is, shorter than the shortest playing time (4.1 seconds) of one game). time), and the performance button 204 is pressed ten times or more while the reels are stopped. In other words, the relief state may be a game state provided for a time shorter than the shortest game time (4.1 seconds) of one game.

It should be noted that, for example, when the AT is first hit in the relief state, the freeze effect may be executed in the final game of the precursor, so that the time may be longer than that of the other games of the precursor. As described above, when the AT is won in the relief state, the navigation does not appear in the omen, so a sudden freezing effect is performed to inform the player of the winning of the AT first hit, thereby increasing the player's excitement. be able to. In addition, in order to make the player associate AT winning, it is desirable that the AT winning effect in the relief state be similar to the AT winning effect (rock-paper-scissors effect) in the case of going through the aforementioned sign.

[12. Chance zone production]
In this chapter, an example of the chance zone effect of the slot machine 1 will be described. The slot machine 1 in this chapter refers to a normal game (although it is the above-mentioned advantageous section, a game in which no instruction is issued for the above-mentioned small winning combination (or an instruction is issued only at an extremely low probability) is hereinafter referred to as An AT entry lottery, which is an example of an advantageous game state, is performed when an AT game is executed, and when an AT is won in the lottery, the AT game starts. After winning the AT game, the AT game may start after the number of premonitory games selected by lottery (for example, selected from 0 to 32 games).

In addition, the slot machine 1 of this chapter performs a chance zone (hereinafter also referred to as CZ) entry lottery during execution of a normal game, and when the CZ is won in the lottery, a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) of CZ games are started. . While the CZ game is an example of a normal game, it is also an advantageous game state in which the AT can be won with a higher probability than in the normal game other than during the CZ game. After winning the CZ game, the CZ game may be started after the number of premonitory games selected by lottery (for example, selected from 0 to 16 games). Further, an instruction may be generated when the above-described small winning combination is won during the CZ game.

[12-1. Various tables]
In the following, first, the probability of winning a minor combination, the probability of winning a state transition, and the like in the slot machine 1 of this chapter will be described. FIG. 706 is an example of a minor combination lottery table. The minor combination lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. In the small combination lottery table, the lottery value of each small combination for each state (general medium and BB (big bonus) inside), and the small combination won in the pattern variation display device 300 are given. The number of medals to be paid out when aligned on a line (a line generally called an effective line) is defined. The minor lottery is also called the A-1 lottery.

If you win the BB during the general public, you will move to the inside of the BB. When predetermined symbols are aligned on the symbol variation display device 300 inside the BB, the BB game starts, and after the BB game ends, the game returns to the general area.

Inside the BB, the probability of winning a replay is set higher than in general. In the slot machine 1 of this chapter, when a small winning combination is won in a game inside the BB, the small winning combination is won in preference to the predetermined symbols. In the example of FIG. 706, it is extremely rare for BB to win even within BB because a small winning combination (65535/65536) is established within BB with a very high probability. Furthermore, most of the normal games and AT games are executed within the BB because the BB is generally won with a high probability (1/7.30).

Even if the slot machine 1 is turned off or the setting is changed while inside the BB, the state remains inside the BB. However, when the RAM is cleared, the state is initialized and the game is started from normal.

In addition, in the BB in the slot machine 1 of this chapter, the number of medals does not increase or only a very small number of medals increases (for example, a BB game in which two medals are paid out in a two-play game is played until a predetermined number of medals are paid out or a predetermined number of medals are paid out). A so-called zero bonus that is executed for the number of games). Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of this chapter, the medals are increased not by the bonus but by the AT game.

Note that the common bell is a bell that is aligned regardless of the order in which the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are stopped. XYZ bells (X, Y, and Z are different numbers of 1, 2, and 3, respectively), which are pressing order bells, stop the left reel 301a at the Xth stop, the middle reel 301b at the Yth stop, and the right reel 301c at the Yth stop. The bells are aligned only when the reels are stopped in the Z direction. If the reels are stopped in any other order, the bells are not aligned on the reels and the payout cannot be received or the number of bells is less than when the bells are won. (for example, 1 sheet) is paid out. For example, in a game in which 213 bells are established, the bells are aligned only when the middle reel 301b is stopped at the first stop, the left reel 301a at the second stop, and the right reel 301c at the third stop.

The probability of winning each minor combination is the quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by the total value (65536) of the lottery values of all minor combinations in the relevant state. Since it can be calculated from the lottery value, the minor combination lottery table does not need to include the probability column. This is the same for other tables to be described later. In addition, in this chapter, the number of payouts is the same for general players and BB players.

FIG. 707 is an example of an AT initial winning lottery table. The AT initial winning lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409, for example. In the AT initial winning lottery table, AT initial winning lottery values in normal games other than CZ games are defined for each minor combination won in the game. The AT first winning lottery that is performed during a normal game excluding the CZ game is also called a B-1 lottery.

FIG. 708 is an example of a CZ shift lottery table. The CZ transfer lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409, for example. In the CZ transition lottery table, lottery values for winning CZ in normal games other than CZ games are defined for each minor combination won in the game. A CZ transition lottery that is performed during a normal game other than a CZ game is also called a B-2 lottery.

FIG. 709 is an example of an AT initial winning lottery table referred to at the start of each game during CZ (that is, when the lever is turned on (when the start lever 210 is operated)). The AT initial winning lottery table of FIG. 709 is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409, for example. In the AT initial winning lottery table in FIG. 709, the lottery value for winning the AT when the lever is turned on in the CZ game is defined for each minor combination won in the game. The AT first hit lottery that is performed when the CZ game lever is turned on is also called the B-3 lottery.

FIG. 710 is an example of an AT first hit lottery table that is referenced during a pseudo-game during CZ. The AT initial winning lottery table in FIG. 710 is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409, for example. In the AT initial winning lottery table of FIG. 710, the lottery value for winning the AT during the pseudo game is defined for each minor combination won in the game. The AT first winning lottery that is performed during the simulated game of the CZ game is also called the B-4 lottery.

It should be noted that pseudo-game is the following production. A freeze effect is started at a predetermined timing when the game is started or after the game is started. During the freeze effect, for example, each reel may be stopped, or may be rotated forward or backward. A predetermined trigger during the freeze effect (for example, operation of the starting lever 210, or elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the freeze effect) causes each reel to enter a pseudo-stoppable state. In addition, when the reels are stopped at the start of the freeze effect, the reels are assumed to rotate before the pseudo-stoppable state is entered.

In the state where each reel can be pseudo-stopped, each reel is pseudo-stopped by a predetermined trigger (for example, a predetermined time has passed since the start of rotation, or pressing of each reel stop button during rotation). A pseudo-stop is, for example, a state in which the player can recognize the symbols corresponding to each frame, but the reels are not completely stopped (for example, the reels are slightly swaying). It should be noted that the reels may be automatically pseudo-stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the rotation without pressing the reel stop button.

After the pseudo-stop of each reel, a predetermined trigger (eg, elapse of a predetermined time from the pseudo-stop, operation of the starting lever 210, etc.) ends the freeze effect, and reel rotation in the actual game starts.

In addition, as described above, since the pseudo-game is just a kind of production, the small combination that seems to have won in the pseudo-stop during the pseudo-game is not actually established, and the payout corresponding to the small combination is not accepted. That is, during the pseudo game, not only the image display 500 but also each reel (stop system by pseudo stop) functions as a means for displaying effects.

Also, during a normal game, after pressing each reel stop button, for example, it is possible to stop the reels by slipping up to 4 frames, but during the reel rotation during the pseudo game, the reel stop button can be stopped. In the case where the reels are pseudo-stopped by pressing, there is no need to set an upper limit on the number of frames that can be slipped. That is, during the pseudo-game, the reels can be pseudo-stopped in the stop mode determined by the time the reel stop button is pressed, regardless of when the reel stop button is pressed. It should be noted that, as in the case of the normal game, it is also possible to allow only four frames at maximum to slide.

Also, although the details will be described later, if the game is continued while the one-insert button 205 is kept pressed during CZ, AT is won with a higher probability than when the pressed state is not maintained. Table 2 is referred to in the B-4 lottery when the single-insert button 205 is kept pressed, and Table 1 is referred to in the B-4 lottery when the button 205 is not kept pressed.

Although it is troublesome for the player to play the game while keeping the one-insert button 205 depressed, the AT win rate increases, so the machine discount (ball payout rate) improves. On the other hand, by executing the game while maintaining the pressed state of the one-insert button 205, it becomes difficult for the player to execute the game with a so-called full wait (specifically, the player can use one hand to play the game). Since it cannot be used for the operation to progress), the increase and decrease in the number of balls paid out per unit time becomes gradual, making it easier for the hall to predict the number of balls paid out, which in turn makes it easier to make a business plan.

In order to prevent the button 205 from being pressed down regardless of the player's operation, the structure of the button 205 is such that the upper surface of the peripheral part around the button and the upper surface of the button are substantially flat. (It is desirable to have a structure in which even if an object having a certain weight and a flat bottom is placed on the one-piece insertion button 205, the one-piece insertion button 205 will not be pressed down.).

In addition, during the CZ, even if the one-card insert button 205 is not kept pressed down, AT is won with a higher probability than in the normal game, so for players who want to play a large number of games anyway, one-card insertion is possible. It is also possible to choose not to press the button 205 .

FIG. 711 is an example of an AT addition lottery table. The AT addition lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409, for example. In the AT addition lottery table, a lottery value for winning the AT addition is defined for each minor combination won in the game.

The AT additional lottery is executed instead of the AT first winning lottery (B-1 lottery), for example, during AT sign and when the lever is turned on during AT. When the AT add-on lottery is won, an AT add-on game number lottery is performed with reference to an AT add-on game number lottery table, which will be described later, and the selected number of AT games is added. The AT addition lottery is also called the C-1 lottery.

FIG. 712 is an example of an AT addition game number lottery table. The number-of-AT-additional-games lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. In the AT addition lottery table, a lottery value for winning each AT addition game number is defined. The lottery for the number of AT-added games is also called a C-2 lottery.

FIG. 713 is an example of a specialized zone transfer lottery table. The specialized zone transfer lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409, for example. Although the details will be described later, during AT, instead of the CZ shift lottery, a shift lottery to a specialized zone is executed. The specialized zone transfer lottery is also called a C-3 lottery. Note that the specialized zone is a zone in which the number of games of each game AT is added with a very high probability.

FIG. 714 is an example of a red 7 stop pattern table. The red 7 stop pattern table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. Although details will be described later, a pseudo game is performed during CZ, and when a game is executed in a predetermined procedure during CZ, an AT first hit lottery is performed. stops, and the stopping pattern of the right reel 301c is determined by referring to the red 7 stopping pattern table.

AT expectation degree in each game in CZ is suggested by the stop position of red 7 of the pseudo game right reel 301c in the game. For example, in the example of FIG. 714, the AT expectation is high in the order of middle red 7>upper red 7>lower red 7>bottom frame (one frame below lower) red 7>. In particular, the middle red 7 is selected only when the AT is won, that is, it is an outcome that determines the AT win.

FIG. 715 is an example of pattern arrangement on each reel in the slot machine 1 of this chapter. FIG. 716 is an explanatory diagram showing an image of reels in CZ. As shown in FIG. 716, in the slot machine 1 of this chapter, a transmissive liquid crystal 301ca is arranged so as to cover the upper stage of the right reel 301c, and a transmissive liquid crystal 301cb is arranged so as to cover the lower stage of the right reel.

During the CZ (at least during the pseudo-game during the CZ), images are displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb, and the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c become invisible. In a state other than the CZ state, the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb do not display an image, and may be in a transparent state. good too.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 714, when Red 7 stops on the upper stage (extremely hot) than when Red 7 stops on the lower stage of the right reel 301c during CZ (slightly hot), There are high expectations for AT winning. According to the pattern arrangement in FIG. 715, the symbols on the middle row of the right reel 301c are blank when Red 7 stops on the lower row of the right reel 301c and when Red 7 stops on the upper row of the right reel 301c.

Therefore, by displaying an image on the transmission liquid crystal 301ca and the transmission liquid crystal 301cb during the CZ to make the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c invisible, when the blank stops in the middle stage of the right reel 301c, the player cannot recognize whether the red 7 has stopped on the upper stage or the lower stage of the right reel 301c.

Although details will be described later, by executing a specific operation during CZ, the images displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb are erased, and the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c are made visible. can also

The slot machine 1 may have a movable body capable of covering the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c instead of the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb. In this case, for example, the initial position of the movable body is a position where the symbols on each reel are visible, and during CZ, the movable body moves to a position covering the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c, and the right reel 301c The upper and lower stages of are made invisible.

[12-2. Specific example of CZ production]
First, in order to facilitate understanding of the outline of the CZ game, an example of the CZ effect will be described prior to the flow chart for executing the CZ game. Figures 717, 718, and 719 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect during CZ. FIG. 717(A) shows a state in which all the reels of the game in which CZ is won are stopped. In the game winning CZ, a freeze effect for 5 seconds is generated from the time when the reels are completely stopped, and since the operation of the starting lever 210 is not accepted during the freeze effect, the next game, which is the start game of CZ, can be started. Can not. When the freeze effect starts, a message indicating that the CZ has been won is displayed on the image display 500. - 特許庁For example, CZ is continuously executed for a maximum of 10 games, and when AT is won, CZ is terminated in that game and AT starts from the next game.

(B) is a state in which all the reels of the game in which CZ is won are stopped, and is a continuation of (A). In (B), the freeze effect continues from (A). A message is displayed on the image display 500 indicating that the AT lottery given preferential treatment during the CZ can be received if the one-card insertion button 205 is kept depressed during the CZ.

Further, an image of the one-card insertion button 205 with an arrow is displayed on the image display 500 in order to make the player recognize that the one-card insertion button 205 is pressed. In addition, an image of the MAX input button 206 may also be displayed on the image display 500 in order to allow the player to start the next game, which is the starting game of CZ.

(C) is a state in which the freeze effect in (B) is released, the lever is turned on, and the CCZ game is started (state at the time of lever-on). In CZ, a pseudo-game starts when the lever is turned on. The image display 500 continues to display the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 with an arrow. Further, since the CZ has started, the image of the one-insert button 205 is given an effect in order to make the image of the one-insert button 205 more impressive to the player.

In addition, as described above, if the single-insert button 205 is kept pressed during CZ, it is possible to receive a preferential AT lottery during CZ. disappear). In addition, in particular, in the AT first winning lottery table for CZ in FIG. If it is a cherry, the lottery value is 0, that is, no AT lottery is performed. In other words, if the single-insert button 205 is not kept pressed, not only is preferential treatment for the lottery value not available, but also the frequency of the AT lottery is reduced compared to the case where the button 205 is kept pressed.

Therefore, in order not to make the player forget to keep pressing, the image showing the continuous operation instruction of the one-insert button 205 is continuously displayed even if the pseudo-game ends and shifts to the main game, and the CZ Even if it shifts to the pseudo-game performed in the 2nd game, it continues and is displayed. In other words, the continuous operation instruction for the one-insert button 205 can be displayed across a plurality of games, and is continuously displayed until the CZ ends (until the game state shifts to a game state different from the CZ). It is a thing.

It should be noted that not only during the CZ game, but also during the CZ when the game is not progressing (between the third stop during the CZ and the operation of the start lever 210), the continuation of the single insert button 205 An image showing an operation instruction may be displayed. For example, this is to ensure that even a player who starts playing the game in the slot machine 1 in the middle of the CZ recognizes the operation instruction for the one-card insertion button 205 . In order to ensure that the operation instruction is recognized, a so-called demo screen or the like is not displayed while the game is not progressing in the CZ (between the third stop in the CZ and the operation of the start lever 210). is preferable.

After the operation instruction for the one-insert button 205 in (B) appears, a telop image (“Keep pressing 1 BET!”) indicating an instruction to keep pressing the one-insert button 205 as shown in FIG. 719 is displayed. is preferably displayed on the image display 500 .

This telop image is also desirably kept displayed until, for example, the end of CZ (including a state in which the game is not progressing) even after the game is over. Due to the drawing space, the display of the telop image is omitted in the drawing of the CZ effect such as FIG. 717 .

Also, in FIG. 717(C), the lamps provided on the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are illuminated, and the lamp provided on the right reel 301c is not illuminated, and the player presses the reel stop button to be operated. You can make it easier to understand. Also, images are displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb, and visual recognition of the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c is obstructed.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the pseudo game in CZ, when the first stop of the right reel 301c (the stop during the pseudo game indicates the pseudo stop), the AT no lottery flag is turned ON in the pseudo game. , the AT will not be elected. Therefore, a message indicating an instruction to stop the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b before the right reel 301c (that is, an instruction to operate the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b) is displayed on the image display 500. there is

Furthermore, in order to make the instructions easier for the player to understand, the image display 500 displays the images of the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b with effects, and the image of the right reel stop button 211c. , and are displayed.

(D) is a state in which the left reel 301a and middle reel 301b are stopped according to the instruction in (C). During the pseudo-game of CZ, if each of the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b is stopped at the first stop or the second stop aiming at red 7 in the middle row (that is, the upper frame within 4 frames from the middle row or the middle row) If the reel stop button is pressed at the timing when the red 7 is positioned at ), the red 7 stops in the middle stage of the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c. It should be noted that red 7 may be stopped in the middle stage regardless of the pressing timing of the reel stop button as long as the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are respectively stopped at the first stop or the second stop.

Also, since the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped and only the right reel 301c is rotating, the image display 500 has cross marks on the images of the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b. and a display in which the right reel stop button 211c is applied with an effect are displayed. Also, on the image display 500, a message indicating an instruction to stop the red 7 (that is, an instruction to operate the right reel stop button 211c) is displayed in the middle row of the right reel.

Also, in order to make the instructions easier to understand, the lamps provided on the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b may not emit light, and the lamp provided on the right reel 301c may emit light.

(E) is a state in which the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped, and is a continuation of (D). For example, it is the same as (D) except that a message is displayed on the image display 500 indicating that if the red 7 stops on the middle stage of the right reel 301c, it is extremely hot.

(F) is a state in which the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped, and is a continuation of (E). As described with reference to FIG. 714, in the pseudo game during CZ, the AT winning expectation varies depending on the stop position of red 7 on the right reel 301c. In addition, due to the pattern arrangement of the right reel 301c described above, when the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c are obstructed by the transmission liquid crystal 301ca and the transmission liquid crystal 301cb, red 7 stops on the upper or lower stage of the right reel 301c. If so, the player cannot recognize which of them the red 7 has stopped.

Therefore, for players who want to know the exact stop position of red 7, the images of the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb are erased according to the amount of operation of the starting lever 210, for example, although the details will be described later. The upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c are gradually made easier to see.

In (F), as an instruction to operate the starting lever 210, for example, an image of the starting lever 210 is displayed on the image display unit 500 together with an arrow. A message is displayed indicating that it is OK. In other words, the instruction in (F) is not an effect for notifying or suggesting the result of the AT lottery, but an operation instruction for improving the visibility of the reels. In addition, since the pseudo-game is an effect to the last, the reel during the pseudo-game is a part of the effect display. In other words, the instruction in (F) can also be said to be a display for canceling the display (display of the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb) that hinders the visibility of the effect display. Note that, for example, the instruction to operate the starting lever 210 in (F) may be displayed until the starting lever 210 is operated.

In (C) to (E), instructions for two operation units, the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the reel stop button, appear at the same time. Instructions for the operation unit appear at the same time.

For example, in (C), an operation instruction for a reel stop button for stopping the left and middle reels is displayed, and in (D) to (F), an operation instruction for a reel stop button for stopping the right reel is displayed. As described above, the operation instruction for the reel stop button can be displayed multiple times in one game (including pseudo game and main game).

In addition, in (D) to (F), when the right reel is stopped according to the operation instruction for the reel stop button for stopping the right reel, as shown in FIG. That is, there is a case where the lottery result is notified directly (when the middle red 7 stops, AT is confirmed), and a case where AT winning is expected (when the upper red 7 or the lower red 7 stops, there is a chance).

It should be noted that even if AT is won in CZ, as shown in FIG. is set lower than the probability of stopping (7/8). This is because, if the probability of red 7 stopping in the middle stage is set high, the player loses expectations for the AT lottery result in the game at the time when red 7 does not stop in the middle stage, and there is a risk that the player's interest may decrease. be.

FIG. 718 (G) shows a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as the third stop during the pseudo game during CZ according to the instructions in (D) to (F), and the instruction display for the reel stop button is also erased. there is In (G), the red 7 is stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 301c. During the simulated game of CZ, if red 7 is aimed at the upper row of the right reel 301c and the third stop is made (that is, at the timing when red 7 is positioned on the upper row or one frame above the upper row, the reel stop button is pressed. If pressed), the red 7 will stop at the stop position determined using the red 7 stop pattern table. Note that the red 7 may stop at the stop position determined using the red 7 stop pattern table for the right reel 301c regardless of the pressing timing of the reel stop button.

Also, in (G), the player does not follow the operation instruction for the starting lever 210, and the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c remain invisible due to the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb. Also, in (G), since the red 7 is stopped in the middle row of the right reel 301c, a message (GoodJob!!) is displayed on the image display 500 indicating that there is a high possibility of winning AT.

Although details will be described later, the remaining time of the freeze effect is overwritten to 5 seconds after the third stop of the pseudo game. In other words, when 5 seconds have passed since the third stop, the freeze effect ends and reel rotation in a normal game starts. Also, during these 5 seconds, the AT lottery result notification effect can be executed. In (G), an image of the main character used for the notification effect is displayed on the image display 500 . In (G), an image of the main character standing is displayed.

Even after the third stop, an image with an arrow for instructing to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed on the image display 500 until the CZ ends. In the CZ game, there is a possibility that a plurality of games will be played continuously, and if the pressing of the one-card insert button 205 is canceled in the middle, the AT winning rate in the game after the cancellation will decrease by pressing the one-card insert button 205. This is because it will decrease compared to the case of continuing.

(H) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as the third stop during a pseudo game during CZ, and is a state continued from (G). At (H), the freeze effect is continuing. The image display 500 displays a message indicating that the result of the AT lottery will be announced by hitting the MAX input button 206 repeatedly, and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow.

(I) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during a pseudo game during CZ, and is a continuation state of (H). In (I), the freeze effect is continuing. An image display 500 displays a message instructing to repeatedly hit the MAX input button 206 and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow.

In (H) and (I), instruction effects for the two operation units of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 appear. As described above, in FIGS. 717(C) to 717(E) as well, the instruction effects for the two operation parts appeared, and these two operation parts were the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the reel stop button. In this way, while instruction effects are executed for a plurality of operation parts, the player executes various operations by changing the operation part to be operated, so the player carefully observes the instruction effects. I never get tired of playing games.

(J) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as the third stop during a pseudo game during CZ, and is a continuation state of (I). In (I), the freeze effect is continuing. It is assumed that the player has followed the instruction to repeatedly hit the MAX input button 206 . The image display 500 displays an image of the main character wearing an aura and a message (Yes!!) indicating that the AT has been won.

It should be noted that (J) is informed that the AT has been elected, but details will be described later, but if the AT is elected in the simulated game in the CZ, the game that has shifted to the present game after the simulated game is still Since it is designed not to enter the AT state, if you erase the character wearing the aura displayed in (J) in the game or the instruction, the game will stop when the game ends. Therefore, it is preferable to continue to display the character wearing the aura and the instructions displayed in (J) until the game shifts to the AT state.

In addition, when the MAX input button 206 is not hit repeatedly, the AT lottery result is notified after the end of the freeze effect and by the end of the normal game started immediately after the pseudo game. If the AT has not been won, for example, even if the MAX input button 206 is hit repeatedly, the main character will not be wrapped in an aura and will collapse by the end of the freeze effect.

In addition, in order to leave the player with an aftertaste of the execution of the CZ, the instruction effect of the start lever 210 may be displayed even at the start of the normal game after the end of the CZ across the CZ. However, in a normal game that is not a pseudo-game, if the reels are hidden, the difficulty of eye-pushing increases and there is a possibility that the player may miss a small winning combination, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is desirable to display on the image display 500 . At this time, the images of the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb obstruct the visibility of the effect image displayed on the image display 500, and when the start lever 210 is operated, the images of the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb are displayed on the image display. 500 to improve the visibility of the effect image.

FIG. 720 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of effects during CZ. Following the effects of FIGS. 717(A) to (F), the effects of FIG. 720 are performed. Differences from FIG. 718 will be mainly described. In (G2), according to the instructions in (D) to (F), the right reel 301c is stopped as the third stop during the pseudo game during CZ. In (G2), symbols other than red 7 are stopped on the middle row of the right reel 301c. If Red 7 is stopped at the upper or lower stage of the right reel 301c, the blank will be stopped at the middle stage. the bell is stopped.

Also, in (G2), the player does not follow the operation instruction for the starting lever 210, and the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c remain invisible due to the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb. Also, in (G2), since the red 7 is not stopped in the middle row of the right reel 301c, there is a message indicating that the possibility of winning the AT is not high, but there is still a chance (it's too early to give up!! ) is displayed on the image display 500 . Also, in (G2), an image of the fallen main character is displayed on the image display 500 .

(H2) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during a pseudo game during CZ, and is a state following (G2). At (H2), the freeze effect is continuing. A message indicating that the result of the AT lottery is announced by repeatedly hitting the MAX input button 206 (if the main character stands up by repeatedly hitting the MAX input button 206, the AT is won, and if not, the character is not won), and the MAX with an arrow. An image of the input button 206 is displayed on the image display 500 .

(I2) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as the third stop during a pseudo game during CZ, and is a state following (H2). At (I2), the freeze effect is continuing. An image display 500 displays a message instructing to repeatedly hit the MAX input button 206 and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow.

(J2) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as the third stop during a pseudo game during CZ, and is a state following (I2). (J2) is an effect when AT is not won in CZ. A message (boo...) indicating that the AT was not won and the main character who could not stand up are displayed. It should be noted that, although not shown, if AT is won with CZ, the same effect as in FIG. 718(J) is performed except that Red 7 is not stopped in the middle row of the right reel 301c. .

(H2) is a state in which the simulated game has ended, and is a continuation state of (J2). A message indicating that the simulated game has ended is displayed on the image display 500 . Further, the operation instruction image for the one-sheet insertion button 205 is still displayed.

(I2) is a state in which the simulated game has ended and the main game has started. However, it is assumed that a weak chance combination or a strong chance combination has been selected as the winning combination when the lever is turned on. Here, the weak chance role is "Bonus symbol" on the upper stage of the left reel 301a, "Bonus symbol or watermelon" on the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and "Red 7" on the upper stage of the right reel 301c (Red 7 is on the middle stage of the right reel 301c). unstoppable) is a stoppable losing eye. Further, the strong chance combination is a stoppable losing combination of "bonus symbol" on the upper left reel 301a, "bonus symbol or watermelon" on the middle reel of the middle reel, and "red 7" on the middle reel of the right reel.

After the pseudo game ends, for example, when a predetermined time elapses, or when the starting lever 210 is operated, the game starts. The effect of (I2) is the same as that of FIG. 717(C). When a weak chance combination or a strong chance combination is selected as a winning combination at the time of lever-on, if the AT lottery in the pseudo game cannot be won, an effect similar to CZ may be performed in this game. That is, after (I2), the same effects as those after (D) are performed in this game.

In this game in such a case, by executing the same instruction effect as in the pseudo game, the player can reawaken the expectations of the player who was disappointed because he could not win the AT in the pseudo game. .

As in the example of the small combination lottery table in FIG. 706, the appearance rate of the strong chance combination (that is, the probability that the red 7 stops in the middle stage of the right reel 301c) is the same as the appearance rate of the weak chance combination (that is, the probability that the right reel 301c It is desirable that the probability that the red 7 does not stop in the middle row is lower than that. As a result, even in the pseudo game, even when the same effect as in the pseudo game appears in the main game, the red 7 does not stop in the middle of the right reel 301c than the probability that the red 7 stops in the middle of the right reel 301c. probability is higher. In other words, the effect in the pseudo game and the effect similar to the pseudo game in the main game do not arouse excessive expectations.

FIG. 721 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the amount of operation of the starting lever 210 during a pseudo-game of the CZ game and the visibility of the pattern on the lower row of the right reel 301c hidden by the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb. In FIG. 721, the relationship between the lower stage of the right reel 301c and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb will be described, but the same applies to the relationship between the upper stage of the right reel 301c and the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca.

As described above, since an image is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb during CZ, the entire lower stage of the right reel 301c is prevented from being visually recognized until the starting lever 210 is operated. (A) shows the visual recognition state when the starting lever 210 is operated to the position of 3/10 of the maximum movable width from the initial position. In this case, for example, the image in the upper 3/10 of the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb is erased, and the pattern in that portion becomes visible. (B) shows the visual recognition state when the starting lever 210 is operated to the position of 8/10 of the maximum movable width from the initial position. In this case, for example, the image in the upper 8/10 of the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb is erased, and the pattern in that portion becomes visible.

That is, when the 11th blank pattern stops in the middle of the right reel 301c in the pseudo game, by following the operation instruction of the starting lever 210 in FIG. 717 (F), the visibility of the reel is improved and the player It is possible to know the stop position of Red 7 and thus the degree of AT expectation. On the other hand, for the player who does not want to know the AT expectation level until the notification effect (continuous hitting effect of the MAX input button 206) is performed, the AT expectation level cannot be known by ignoring the operation instruction of the start lever 210. , can maintain tension.

Note that the amount of operation of the starting lever 210 is determined in real time. For example, when the starting lever 210 is operated to 10/10 of the maximum movable range, the image of the upper 10/10 of the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb is erased (i.e., all visible), but when the player moves the starting lever 210 When the applied force is weakened and the starting lever 210 is operated only up to 3/10 of the maximum movable width, the image is erased only up to the upper 3/10 of the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb. In other words, the player needs to maintain the operation state of the starting lever 210 in order to maintain good visibility of the reels.

As described above, keeping the one-card insertion button 205 pressed during CZ gives preferential treatment to the AT lottery value. In order to improve the viewing condition of the reels while receiving preferential AT lottery, the single insertion button 205 and the start lever 210 are arranged at a distance that a general adult can operate simultaneously with one hand. It is desirable that

However, even with such an arrangement, it is difficult for the player to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the starting lever 210 at the same time. When 3/10 or more are visible or all symbols on the reel (10/10) are visible), when the reserve release switch 209 (stored medal settlement switch) is operated, the start lever 210 is operated. The predetermined visual recognition state may be maintained even if the operation of .

The instruction to operate the starting lever 210 to improve the viewing condition of the reels may be erased at the timing after the starting lever 210 is operated in accordance with the operation instruction (for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation). If the operation instruction is displayed while the right reel is completely visible (10/10 is visible), the display of other effects may be hindered, and the player may not be fully entertained. because there is

In principle, the operation instruction is displayed every game during the CZ, but as described above, the player operates the retention release switch 209 and selects to maintain the state in which the visibility state is good. In this case, since the intention of the player has been confirmed, the operation instruction may not be displayed at all in subsequent games in the CZ.

In addition, when selecting to maintain the state in which the visibility state is good and not displaying the operation instruction at all, the maintained visibility state is changed (for example, from 8/10 to 5/10 Therefore, when the retention release switch 209 is operated again, it is desirable to initialize the visible state before the change (0/10, ie, the invisible state). Further, the timing for instructing the operation of the starting lever 210 for improving the visibility of the reel is not the timing for operating the retention release switch 209 again, but is displayed after the timing for operating the retention release switch 209 again. (Timing displayed every game during CZ). Further, in this way, the maintenance and release may be repeated each time the retention release switch 209 is pressed.

In addition, after the second stop of the pseudo game of the CZ start game, the operation instruction is displayed, but before the display of the operation instruction (for example, after the first stop and before the second stop in the pseudo game) The starting lever 210 Even when operated, the degree of visibility of the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c (the display range of the image displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb) may be changed. If the starting lever 210 is operated before the second stop of the pseudo-game and the degree of visibility of the upper and lower right reels 301c is changed, for example, the instruction may not be displayed after the second stop. , whether or not to execute the display of the instruction may be determined by a lottery based on a predetermined allocation.

It should be noted that if the start lever 210 is not operated in spite of the operation instruction being displayed, there is a possibility that the player may not have noticed the operation instruction. It can be displayed continuously.

In addition, as described above, by maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205, a preferential AT lottery can be received, and by pressing the right reel stop button 211c (stop type of the right reel 301c), the lottery The result can be suggested, or if the reel stop buttons are not pressed in the correct order of pressing, the AT lottery cannot be received. In other words, it can be said that the maintenance of the pressed state of the one-card insertion button 205 and the operation of the reel stop button are closely related to the transition to the AT game. Therefore, for each of the operation instruction instructing to keep the single-insert button 205 pressed down and the operation instruction instructing the operation of the reel stop button, there are a plurality of types of production variations (for example, a display mode with or without an effect). , different display sizes, etc.) are provided. By having various production patterns, the player does not get tired of these operation instruction productions, and can perform operations more reliably.

On the other hand, when the start lever 210 is operated, the visibility of the effect display is improved, but the maintenance of the one-insert button pressed state and the operation of the reel stop button are closely related to the transition to the AT game. It does not mean that Therefore, it is desirable that the operation instruction to operate the starting lever 210 has only one pattern of presentation (although a plurality of variations of presentation may be provided).

[12-3. Various flows for CZ production]
Next, an example of processing for realizing the CZ effect will be described. FIG. 722 is a flow chart showing an example of flag processing in step S107 of FIG. This flowchart shows an example of processing until each reel stop button becomes effective. First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 draws a winning combination (A-1 lottery) according to the random number extracted in step S106 of FIG. 645 and the lottery value shown in the small combination lottery table of FIG. 706 (S70001). ).

The CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 conducts an AT initial winning lottery (B-1 lottery) according to the minor combination won in step S70001 and the lottery value shown in the AT initial winning lottery table in FIG. 707 (S70002).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the AT is the first hit in the B-1 lottery (S70003). When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the AT first hit is won (S70003: Yes), it sets the AT flag to ON (S70004) and sets 100 to the AT counter (counter for counting the number of remaining AT games). is set (S70005), and the flag processing ends.

When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that AT has not been won in the first hit (S70003: No), the CZ shift is performed according to the small combination won in step S70001 and the lottery value indicated by the CZ shift lottery table in FIG. A lottery (B-2 lottery) is conducted (S70006). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the CZ shift is won in the B-2 lottery (S70007).

When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the CZ shift is won (S70007: Yes), it sets the CZ flag to ON (S70008) and sets 10 to the CZ counter (counter for counting the number of remaining CZ games). (S70009), and the flag processing ends. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the CZ shift has not been won (S70007: No), the flag processing ends.

FIG. 723 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed when all reels are stopped (when the reels are stopped (third stop)). The processing in FIG. 723 is executed instead of the ART game determination processing in step S320 in FIG. First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the AT flag is on (S70101). When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the AT flag is on (S70101: Yes), it transmits an AT command to the sub circuit board 510 (S70102), and ends the process.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT flag is off (S70101: No), it determines whether the CZ flag is on (S70103). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the CZ flag is off (S70103: No), the process ends.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the CZ flag is on (S70103: Yes), it transmits a CZ start command to the sub board 510 (S70104). Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 executes freeze processing for 5 seconds (S70105). The CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 executes, for example, the effects described with reference to FIGS. 717(A) and (B) during this 5-second freeze.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the one-sheet insertion button 205 has been pressed (S70106). When the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 determines that the one-sheet insertion button 205 has been pressed (S70106: Yes), it sets the pressing maintenance flag to ON (S70107), and ends the process. When the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 determines that the one-sheet insertion button 205 has not been pressed (S70106: No), the process ends.

It should be noted that the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 continues to monitor whether the one-sheet insertion button 210 is pressed during CZ (that is, while the CZ flag is ON) even after the flag for keeping the pressing down is set to ON, for example. , when it is detected that the one-piece insertion button 210 is not pressed, the pressing maintenance flag is reset to OFF. As a result, during the CZ, when the pressing of the one-card insertion button 210 is interrupted, the preferential AT lottery cannot be received. It should be noted that the determination of whether to keep the one-sheet insertion button 205 depressed in step S70106 may be performed until the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the next game. In other words, if the one-card insertion button 205 is pressed when the lever is turned on in the CZ starting game, the pressing maintenance flag may be set to ON.

FIG. 724 is a flowchart showing an example of flag processing in step S107 of FIG. 645 when the CZ flag is on. First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 draws a winning combination (A-1 lottery) according to the random number extracted in step S106 of FIG. 645 and the lottery value shown in the minor combination lottery table of FIG. 706 (S70201). ).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 subtracts 1 from the value of the CZ counter (S70202). The CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 conducts an AT first winning lottery (B-3 lottery) according to the minor winning combination won in step S70201 and the lottery value shown in the CZ AT first winning lottery table in FIG. 709 (S70203).

The CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines whether or not the AT is the first hit in the B-3 lottery (S70204). When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the AT first hit is won (S70204: Yes), it sets the AT flag to ON (S70205) and sets 100 to the AT counter (counter for counting the number of remaining AT games). set (S70206), set the CZ flag to off (S70207), and proceed to step S70208, which will be described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the first AT win has not been won in the B-3 lottery (S70204: No), the CPU 1110 sets the freeze time to 1 hour and starts the freeze process (S70208). During this freeze, a pseudo-game shown in FIG. 717(C) or the like is performed.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 starts pseudo rotation of each reel (reel rotation in pseudo game) (S70209). The CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 sets each reel stop button to a valid state for pseudo-stopping the reels (S70210), and ends the process. Although reel rotation and stoppage in a pseudo-game are a kind of effect, only the main board 409 can execute the process of rotating and stopping the reels, so these processes are executed by the main board 409. In addition, especially in this chapter, the AT winning rate changes depending on the operation mode during the pseudo game, that is, there is a process that affects the number of balls released during the pseudo game.

FIG. 725 is a flow chart showing an example of processing at the time of the first simulated stop in the simulated game during CZ. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the first pseudo-stop was the left reel 301a (that is, whether or not the left reel stop button 211a was pressed) (S70301). When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the left reel 301a has made the first pseudo-stop (S70301: Yes), it controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops in the middle stage of the left reel 301a, and ends the process. .

When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the first pseudo-stop is not the left reel (S70301: No), it determines whether the first pseudo-stop is the middle reel 301b (that is, whether the middle reel stop button 211b has been pressed). Determine (S70303). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the first pseudo-stop is the middle reel 301b (S70303: Yes), it controls the middle reel 301b so that the red 7 stops in the middle stage of the middle reel, and ends the process.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the first pseudo stop is not the middle reel 301b (S70303: No), that is, when it determines that the first pseudo stop is the right reel 301c, it sets the AT non-lottery flag to ON. (S70305), the right reel 301c is controlled so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the right reel 301c (S70306), and the process ends. By the process of step S70305, in the pseudo game in CZ, when the right reel 301c is first pseudo stopped, it becomes impossible to receive the AT lottery in the pseudo game.

FIG. 726 is a flow chart showing an example of processing at the time of the second simulated stop in the simulated game during CZ. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the second pseudo-stop was the left reel 301a (that is, whether or not the left reel stop button 211a was pressed) (S70401). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the second pseudo-stop is the left reel 301a (S70401: Yes), it determines whether the AT non-lottery flag is ON (S70402).

When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the AT non-lottery flag is ON (S70402: Yes), it controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the left reel 301a (S70403), and executes the process. finish. When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the AT non-lottery flag is off (S70402: No), it controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops in the middle stage of the left reel 301a (S70404), and presses the hold down flag. is on (S70405).

When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the hold down flag is ON (S70405: Yes), the AT first winning lottery (B-4 lottery) is executed by referring to Table 2 of the AT first winning lottery table in FIG. It does (S70406). When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the hold-down flag is off (S70405: Yes), the AT first winning lottery (B-4 lottery) is executed by referring to Table 1 of the AT first winning lottery table in FIG. It does (S70407).

Following step S70406 or step S70407, CPU 1110 of main board 409 determines whether or not AT has been won in the B-4 lottery (S70408). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT has not been won (S70408: No), the process ends.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT has been won (S70408: Yes), it sets the AT flag to ON (S70410), sets the AT counter to 100 (S70411), and sets the CZ flag to OFF. (S70411), the process ends.

In step S70401, when the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the second pseudo-stop was not the left reel 301a (S70401: No), it determines whether the second pseudo-stop was the middle reel 301b (that is, the middle reel stop button 211b is depressed). (S70412).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the second pseudo-stop is the middle reel 301b (S70412: Yes), it determines whether the AT non-lottery flag is ON (S70413).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT non-lottery flag is ON (S70413: Yes), it controls the middle reel 301b so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the middle reel 301b (S70415), and executes the process. finish. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT non-lottery flag is off (S70413: No), it controls the middle reel 301b so that the red 7 stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b (S70416), and proceeds to step S70405. Transition.

In step S70412, when the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the second pseudo-stop is not the middle reel 301b (S70412: No), that is, if it determines that the second pseudo-stop is the right reel 301c, AT no lottery The flag is set to ON (S70417), the right reel 301c is controlled so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the right reel 301c (S70418), and the process is terminated. By the process of step S70417, in the pseudo game in CZ, when the second pseudo stop of the right reel 301c, it is not possible to receive the AT lottery in the pseudo game.

Further, by stopping the left reel 301a or the middle reel 301b as the first pseudo stop and the second pseudo stop, respectively, it is possible to receive a lottery using the AT first hit lottery table for CZ with preferential lottery values. . Furthermore, by continuing to press the one-sheet insertion button 205 by the processing of steps S70405 to S70406 described above, a lottery using table 2 with a more preferential lottery value among the AT first hit lottery tables for CZ is received. be able to.

In the above example, if the AT non-lottery flag is off after the second simulated stop, the B-4 lottery is executed according to the hold-down flag. When the B-4 lottery is performed according to the above, and the AT no lottery flag is turned on, if the AT winning is won, the AT winning is canceled (the AT flag is turned off and the AT counter value is set to zero). redo) specification.

FIG. 727 is a flow chart showing an example of processing at the time of the third simulated stop in the simulated game during CZ. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the third pseudo-stop was the left reel 301a (that is, whether or not the left reel stop button 211a was pressed) (S70501).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the third pseudo-stop is the left reel 301a (S70501: Yes), it controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the left reel 301a (S70502), The freeze time of the freeze being executed is overwritten to 5 seconds (S70503), and the process ends. In this case, since the AT lottery is not performed, in this overwritten 5-second freeze, for example, the image display 500 is displayed as follows: It is preferable to display a message such as "Hey!".

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the third pseudo-stop was not the left reel 301a (S70501: No), whether or not the third pseudo-stop was the middle reel 301b (that is, whether the middle reel stop button 211b was pressed). (S70504). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the middle reel 301b is stopped in the third pseudo stop (S70504: Yes), it controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the middle reel 301b (S70505), The process transitions to step S70503.

When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the third pseudo-stop was not the middle reel 301b (S70504: NO), the AT winning/losing result in the game (lottery result in FIG. 710) and the red 7 stop pattern table in FIG. According to, the stop pattern of the right reel 301c in the pseudo game is drawn (S70506). Then, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 controls the right reel 301c according to the stop pattern determined in step S70506 (S70505), and transitions to step S70503.

FIG. 728 is a flow chart showing an example of processing at the third stop of the main game of the game in which the pseudo game is executed. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the AT flag is on (S70601). When the CPU 1110 of the main circuit board 409 determines that the AT flag is on (S70601: Yes), it transmits an AT start command to the sub circuit board 510 (S70602), and ends the process.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT flag is off (S70601: No), it determines whether the value of the CZ counter is 0 (S70603). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the value of the CZ counter is not 0 (S70603: No), the process ends. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the value of the CZ counter is 0 (S70603: Yes), it sets the CZ flag to OFF (S70604) and transmits a CZ end command to the sub board 510 (S70605). , terminate the process.

[12-4. Specific example 1 of CZ production]
In the above-described example of the effect during the CZ, the game property is that red 7 is pressed during the pseudo game, but a game property that does not require the eye press may be adopted in at least a part of the game of the CZ.

Specifically, in the above example, in the pseudo game, if the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are respectively stopped at the first stop or the second stop aiming at red 7 in the middle stage (that is, 1 to 4 from the middle stage or middle stage) If you press the reel stop button at the timing when red 7 is positioned on the frame above the frame, you can stop red 7 in the middle row. Also, in a pseudo-game, if you aim for the red 7 on the upper row of the right reel 301c and make the third stop (that is, if you press the reel stop button at the timing when the red 7 is positioned on the upper row or one frame above the upper row), We were able to stop the red 7 at the stop position determined using the red 7 stop pattern table. Hereinafter, a game including such a pseudo game is also referred to as a game with pressing.

On the other hand, CZ of this chapter, in the pseudo game, if the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped as the first stop or the second stop, and the right reel 301c is stopped as the third stop, each reel stop button Red 7 stops in the middle stage of the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b regardless of the pressing timing, and the red 7 stops at the stop position determined using the red 7 stop pattern table for the right reel 301c. May include games to play. Hereinafter, such a game is also referred to as a non-pressing game. In the non-pressing game, since it is not necessary to aim at the red 7 in the middle row in the pseudo game, the operation instructions for the respective reel stop buttons in FIGS. 717(C) to (F) do not appear.

In the non-pressing game, the red 7 is stopped at the middle stage of the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the simulated game, and the red 7 is stopped on the right reel 301c without pressing any reel stop buttons. Red 7 may stop at the stop position determined using the stop pattern table.

It should be noted that, for example, when a game without eye pressing can be executed as in this chapter, the B-4 lottery (S70405 to S70411) based on the hold-down flag and the lottery for the stop pattern of the right reel (S70506) are, for example, It is executed when the lever is on (after step S70202 of the CZ flag processing in FIG. 724).

For example, when winning the AT lottery (B-3 lottery or B-4 lottery), for example, a game with a hit is executed at a rate of 3/4, and a game without a hit is performed at a rate of 1/4. . In addition, for example, when the AT lottery (B-3 lottery and B-4 lottery) is not won, for example, a game with spot pushing is executed at a rate of 1/8, and a game without spot pushing is executed at a rate of 7/8. is executed. In this way, since the game with a hit and the game without a hit are determined, when the game with a hit is executed (when an operation instruction for the reel stop button appears), there is no hit. The degree of expectation for AT winning is higher than when the game is executed (when no operation instruction for the reel stop button appears).

However, whether a game with spot pressing or a game without spot pressing is performed depends on the AT lottery result, but does not directly depend on the right reel stop pattern lottery result (that is, the right reel's stop pattern lottery result). It is preferable that a stop pattern lottery result is referred to and a lottery is not made to determine whether to run a game with a hit or a game without a hit. If whether a game with spot pressing or a game without spot pressing directly depends on the stop pattern lottery result of the right reel, the player can more easily predict the stopping system of the right reel. This is because there is a risk that the player will not be able to enjoy the game with a push button.

The probability of winning the AT in the B-4 lottery is 1/11.96 when the AT hold down flag is off, and 1/10.62 when the AT hold down flag is on. Considering the sorting of the game with push and the game without push, the frequency with which the game with push is executed is lower than the frequency with which the game without push is executed. On the other hand, as described above, when AT is won, the ratio of executing the game with pushing is higher than the ratio of executing the game without pushing. As a result, the game with spot pressing is executed at a rate of less than half of one game, so that the player feels that the game with spot pressing is rare, and the rate exceeds half when the AT is won. , so that the player can enjoy the game with pressing while having high expectations for the game with pressing.

It should be noted that when a game with a hit is executed, a hit effective period (reel stop button effective period) may be determined. In this case, if the reel stop button is not pressed within the valid period of eye pressing, the reels are stopped as if the reel stop button was pressed at the end of the valid period. In addition, the effect image (effect image of the effective reel stop button and the effect image repeatedly displayed as if to emphasize the effective reel stop button) indicating that it is during the effective period of the eye push is an image It may be displayed on the display 500 . As a result, the player needs to execute the eye-pushing within the time limit, and can enjoy the game property of measuring his own eye-pushing skill. Note that the effect image may indicate the remaining time of the effective period of eye pressing.

It should be noted that, when a hit is performed within the hit effective period, it is desirable not to erase the effect image immediately, but to completely erase it after a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel stop button was pressed. As a result, the player can leave a lingering impression of anticipation in the game with a push button.

Further, when the eye pressing is executed within the eye pressing effective period, a pattern of immediately erasing the effect image and a pattern of not immediately erasing the effect image may be selected by lottery. In this case, it is desirable that the distribution of these patterns is determined so that the AT winning expectation is higher for the pattern that immediately erases the effect image than for the pattern that does not immediately erase the effect image. .

Also, for example, a plurality of effective pushing periods are determined in one simulated game, such as a first simulated stop effective period of 3 seconds and a second simulated stop effective period of 5 seconds. , and the length can be different. For example, as the notification timing of the AT lottery result approaches (that is, when the second simulated stop is performed rather than when the first simulated stop is performed), some players become more tense. Since the effective period of the second pseudo-stop pressing is set to be longer than the valid period, the second pseudo-stop can be carefully performed even in a high tension, and is likely to be successful.

In addition, when many reel rotations other than the reel to be stopped come into view, some players find it difficult to press, so the second pseudo-stop (state in which only two reels are rotating) By setting the first pseudo-stop (state in which all reels are rotating) spot-pressing valid period longer than the valid period, the first pseudo-stop spot pressing can be carefully performed. , more likely to succeed.

It should be noted that even if a plurality of effective periods of pushing are determined in one game with pushing, the effect image described above indicating that the effective period of pushing is still valid and the remaining effective period is displayed. is desirable.

In the simulated game of the game with a hit, if the normal stop control of up to 4 frames is used, for example, in the first simulated stop, if the hit fails and the red 7 is placed in the middle row of the left reel 301a. can not be stopped, the left reel 301a may be pseudo-rotated again and an instruction to press the left reel stop button 211a again may be displayed. In this case, in the second first pseudo-stop, it is preferable to stop the output of the BGM to make a silent state or turn off the lamp in order to make the player concentrate on the eye-pushing and not to fail. Also, in the second first pseudo-stop, for example, the BGM or the lamp lighting pattern may be changed to arouse anticipation.

If the eye pressing fails even in the second first simulated stop, the third first simulated stop may be performed. In this way, the left reel stop button 211a may be pushed many times until the eye-pushing is successful, but each time the same effect is repeatedly displayed for the left reel stop button 211a. However, it is better to set an upper limit number.

Also, a game may be executed in which a pseudo-stop with pressing and a pseudo-stop without pressing are mixed. Specifically, for example, in a simulated game in one game, the first simulated stop is a blind push (if you aim for red 7 in the middle of the left reel 301a or the middle reel 301b, it will stop), and the second simulated stop is a blind game. No press (red 7 stops in the middle of the left reel 301a or middle reel 301b regardless of the timing of pressing the reel stop button), third pseudo-stop with eye push (aim red 7 within the frame of the right reel 301c) For example, a game in which red 7 stops according to the selected right reel stop system pattern may be executed.

In such a game, the operation instruction effect of the reel stop button is displayed in the simulated stop with eye pressing, and the operation instruction effect of the reel stop button is not displayed in the simulated stop without eye pressing. As described above, the operation instruction for starting lever 210 shown in FIG. 717(F) may be displayed before the first pseudo-stop.

In such a situation, for the first pseudo-stop and the third pseudo-stop, the operation instructions for the three operation units consisting of the one-sheet insertion button 205, the starting lever 210, and the reel stop button are displayed, and for the second pseudo-stop , operation instructions for two operation units consisting of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the starting lever 210 are displayed. By reducing the number of operation units to be operated in the second simulated stop in this manner, the operation burden on the player is reduced, and fatigue can be suppressed.

In a situation where a plurality of simulated stops with eye pressing is performed, for example, in the first simulated stop, when the left reel 301a or the middle reel 301b is stopped according to the operation instruction for the reel stop button, AT You may perform the production|presentation which shows the winning expectation of . Specifically, for example, when red 7 is stopped in the middle stage, an expectation-increasing effect (for example, changing the background color of the image display 500 to red or changing the BGM, etc.) is executed. As a result, the player's willingness to follow the operation instructions is improved.

Further, after the second pseudo-stop, when an operation instruction to the reel stop button is followed, an effect of notifying the result of the AT lottery may be executed. Specifically, for example, if AT wins, Red 7 always stops in the middle stage in the second simulated stop, and if AT does not win, Red 7 always stops in a place other than the middle stage in the second simulated stop. Just do it. As a result, the player's willingness to follow the operation instructions is improved.

Even in a game in which simulated stops with and without pressing are mixed, if multiple simulated stops with pressing are executed, the reel stop button for the simulated stop is activated. The length of the period may vary. In this case, some players feel more nervous as the notification timing of the AT lottery result approaches. By setting the effective period of effective pushing to be longer, it is possible to carefully perform the pushing for the pseudo-stop that will be performed later even in a high tension, and it becomes easier to succeed. On the other hand, when many reel rotations other than the reel to be stopped come into view, some players find it difficult to press, so it is performed earlier than the effective period of the reel stop button for the pseudo stop that will be performed later. The validity period of the pseudo-stop reel stop button may be set longer.

As described above, when the AT is won in the CZ, the AT starts from the next game in which the AT is won, without intervening an omen or normal game. In addition, when the AT is won with one or more games remaining in the CZ, the CZ for the number of games remaining when the AT was won may be started immediately after the end of the AT, without intervening the normal game. . With such specifications, it is possible to win the AT multiple times in the CZ of 10 games, and the CZ and AT alternate without intervening the normal game, such as CZ → AT → CZ → AT. situation arises.

In such a situation, the player may get tired of the CZ effect and the AT effect because the CZ and AT are continuously performed alternately. Therefore, in such a situation in which CZ and AT are performed alternately without intervening a normal game, the production mode and BGM during CZ and AT may be changed.

In this case, for example, at the start of the CZ and AT or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, an image or the like imitating the production button 204 (and/or the cross key, etc.) is displayed, thereby changing the production mode or BGM. You can direct. The operation instructions for the effect button 204 for changing the effect mode and BGM are the operation instruction for maintaining the pressed state of the above-described one-insert button 205, the operation instruction for each reel stop button, and the operation instruction for the start lever 210. can be displayed at the same time as at least one operation instruction of In other words, it is possible to simultaneously display operation instructions for up to four operating means, thereby presenting more options to the player and providing new operability.

[12-5. Specific example of CZ production 2: Eye-pushing practice production]
As described above, in the simulated game during CZ, the image display of the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb hinders the visibility of the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c. is by no means low. Also, as described above, by operating the starting lever 210 during the pseudo-game, although it is possible to remove the hindrance of visual recognition of the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c, the state of operating the starting lever 210 must be maintained. Since the player returns to the inhibited state, the difficulty level of eye pressing while maintaining the operation of the starting lever 210 is not low. Furthermore, if the pseudo game is advanced according to the operation instruction, the right reel 301c will be pseudo-stopped as the third pseudo-stop, and the stop system of the right reel 301c of the third pseudo-stop suggests the result of the AT lottery. Alternatively, since the notification is given directly, the player becomes more nervous about the third simulated stop, and the possibility of failing in the eye pressing increases.

Therefore, in the CZ described below, it is possible to make the player practice eye pressing before executing the third simulated stop.

FIG. 729 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the effect during CZ (eye pressing practice effect). In the slot machine 1, a transmissive liquid crystal 301aa is arranged so as to cover the upper stage of the left reel 301a, and a transmissive liquid crystal 301ab is arranged so as to cover the lower stage of the left reel. By displaying images on the transmissive liquid crystal 301aa and the transmissive liquid crystal 301ab, respectively, it is possible to prevent the upper and lower stages of the left reel 301a from being visually recognized. The slot machine 1 may have a movable body capable of covering the upper and lower stages of the left reel 301a instead of the transmissive liquid crystal 301aa and the transmissive liquid crystal 301ab. The slot machine 1 also has a visual state change button 216 with a switch.

(A) shows the state where the game of CZ has started (the state when the lever is turned on), and an effect similar to that shown in FIG. 717(C) is executed. (B) is the start state of the eye-pushing practice effect in the pseudo game. In (A), when the visual recognition state change button 216 is pressed once or long pressed (the ON state of the visual recognition state change button 216 is detected for a predetermined time), the eye pressing practice effect is started. In (B), an image is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301aa and the transmissive liquid crystal 301ab, and visual recognition of the upper and lower stages of the left reel 301a is obstructed.

Further, in (B), an image of an angel descending is displayed on the image display 500, and an instruction to operate the starting lever 210 is displayed, saying, "You want to practice. Please operate the starting lever." Also, as in FIG. 717(F), an image of the starting lever 210 with an arrow may be displayed on the image display 500 in order to make the operation instruction more comprehensible.

(C) is a state in which the eye-pushing practice effect is being performed in the pseudo game, and is a state following (B). An operation instruction to stop the red 7 on the left reel 301a (that is, an operation instruction for the left reel stop button 211a) is displayed on the image display 500 as an angel's line ("Let's stop the red 7 on the left reel"). there is

(D) shows a state in which the starting lever 210 is operated in accordance with the operation instruction of the starting lever 210 . The images of the transmissive liquid crystal 301aa and the transmissive liquid crystal 301ab are erased, and the upper and lower stages of the left reel 301a are visible. Note that the relationship between the operation amount of the starting lever 210 and the visual recognition state of the upper and lower symbols of the left reel 301a is the same as that shown in FIG. 721, for example. Further, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the operating state of the starting lever 210 is maintained, the operation instruction for the starting lever 210 may be erased as shown in (D).

(E) is a state in which the left reel 301a is stopped in the spot pressing practice effect. In (E), the left reel 301a is successfully hit, the red 7 stops in the middle row, and the angel's words praising the player are displayed.

After the eye-pushing practice effect is completed, the left reel 301a is pseudo-rotated again, and the process returns to the effect of (A). It should be noted that, even for players who do not have confidence in their ability to press their eyes after practicing only once, if the visual recognition state change button 216 is pressed once or long pressed again after returning to (A), The eye-pushing practice effect may be restarted (the number of executable times of the eye-pushing practice effect in one pseudo game may not be limited).

It should be noted that only the left reel 301a may be made operable during the eye-pushing practice effect. That is, it is not necessary to activate only the left reel stop button 211a and not activate the middle reel stop button 211b and the right reel stop button 211c.

Incidentally, the practice effect may be executable during a normal game other than the CZ or during the AT, for example, regardless of the simulated game during the CZ (that is, the game may be executable in any state). That is, when the visual recognition state change button 216 is pressed once or long pressed (the ON state of the visual recognition state change button 216 is detected for a predetermined time) during the normal game or AT, the eye pressing practice effect may be started.

It should be noted that the pseudo-game is not performed during the normal game or AT, and since the reel is an area showing the pattern indicating the lottery result rather than the effect, when executing the blind practice effect during the normal game or AT In this case, the actual reel arrangement, reel rotation speed, and transmissive liquid crystal may be displayed on the image display 500 to simulate the actual reel arrangement. The visibility of the reel may be lowered within a range that does not overlap the effective line. Further, for example, even when the game is not being executed, for example, by pressing the effect button 204, even if the game is not being executed, even if it is possible to perform the eye-pushing practice effect. good. In this case, since the game is not being executed, for example, the image display body 500 is used instead of the reels, and the performance of eye-pushing practice is performed. Also, even when the game is not being executed, if the visibility state change button 216 is pressed once or long pressed (the ON state of the visibility state change button 216 is detected for a predetermined time), only a pseudo game may be performed. As a result, the player can easily practice without consuming game media.

Since the ratio of CZ games to the total number of games is not so high, by making it possible to execute the eye-pushing practice effect at various timings, even players who are not good at eye-pushing can practice sufficiently. It can be piled up, the success rate of spotting in the simulated game during the actual CZ is increased, and the expectation in the simulated game is improved.

It should be noted that the visual recognition state change button 216 is a button for starting the eye-pushing practice effect, so it is an operation unit that does not affect the progress of the normal game. In particular, players who are good at pushing their eyes have few opportunities to use the visual state change button 216, so the visual state change button 216 is used in normal games. buttons) are not placed. Specifically, for example, the visible state change button 216 is a panel arranged between the lower panel (the medal receiving tray 201 and the reel stop button) and generally displays the model title of the slot machine 1. panel).

In addition, the vertical position of the lower panel in the normal arrangement when playing the slot machine 1 is close to the vertical position of the hopper 110b. In order to reduce the manufacturing cost of the slot machine 1, the switch for detecting pressing of the visibility state change button 216 may also be used as the switch for counting the medals dispensed from the hopper 110b.

However, when these switches are also used, the eye-pushing practice effect is not performed only by pressing the visual state change button 216, and only when the visual state change button 216 is kept pressed for a predetermined time or longer. It is preferable that the player can perform the performance of the practice of pushing the eyes. It is desirable that the predetermined time is, for example, longer than the time taken for one medal to be dispensed from the hopper 110b. Even if a plurality of medals are paid out in succession, the medals are paid out one by one in order, so the visibility state change button 216 repeats the ON state and the OFF state each time one medal is paid out. . Therefore, if the predetermined time is longer than the time for one medal to be paid out from the hopper 110b, the payout of the medals will not start the spot pressing practice effect.

It should be noted that an image instructing the pressing of the one-card insertion button 205 is displayed even during the practice effect so that the player does not forget that if the one-card insertion button 205 is continuously pressed, the AT lottery with preferential treatment can be received. It should remain visible.

[12-6. Pseudo game during normal game]
In the above example, the CZ in which the pseudo-game is performed has been described, but the pseudo-game may also be performed in a normal game that is not a CZ game. In the pseudo-game in the normal game, if the order of pushing the reels is correct, the bells are pseudo-stopped in the middle stage of the reels, and the AT is won. In addition, even if the correct answer is not given in the order of pressing, with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4), the bells are aligned upward to the right, and the AT is elected by a simulated stop, and with a predetermined probability (3/4), it is lost. The eyes (the bells do not align in a straight line) stop pseudo-stopping and the AT is not won.

In the normal game, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a pseudo game is won. Specifically, for example, when the lever is turned on in the normal game, a preparation lottery is performed, and when the preparation lottery is won, a pseudo-game lottery is performed. It is assumed that the winning rate in the preliminary lottery is, for example, 1/2. Then, in the pseudo game lottery, the pseudo game is won with a probability of 1/50.

In addition, in the normal game, if the one-card insert button 205 is repeatedly hit (an operation for the same operation means as the one-card insert button 205 in the CZ, but the action of the player is different), the winning rate in the preparation lottery increases. increase. The odds of winning the preliminary lottery when the one-card insertion button 205 is hit repeatedly are 1/1.8. In other words, it is advantageous for the player to continuously hit the single-insert button 205 every game. As for the definition of repeated hits, when the time from when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is turned off to when it is turned on again is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 500 ms), it is processed as repeated hits.

In the normal game, if the one-insert button 205 is kept pressed (long press instead of repeated hits) (that is, if the operation for giving preferential treatment to the AT winning rate during the CZ pseudo-game is executed in the normal game), preparation The odds of winning the preliminary lottery are extremely low (for example, 1/65536) even if the lottery is not performed or is performed. Players can be entertained by advanced game features such that advantageous situations can be obtained by performing different operations on the one-card insertion button 205 during the CZ and in the normal game.

FIG. 730 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pseudo-game executed during a normal game. In this chapter, in addition to the transmissive liquid crystal 301aa, the transmissive liquid crystal 301ab, the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca, and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb, the slot machine 1 includes the transmissive liquid crystal 301ba so as to cover the upper stage of the middle reel 301b, and the lower stage of the middle reel 301b. A transmissive liquid crystal 301bb is arranged to cover the . By displaying images on the transmissive liquid crystal 301ba and the transmissive liquid crystal 301bb, respectively, it is possible to prevent the upper and lower stages of the middle reel 301b from being visually recognized. The slot machine 1 may have a movable body capable of covering the upper and lower stages of the middle reel 301b instead of the transmissive liquid crystal 301ba and the transmissive liquid crystal 301bb.

(A) shows the state immediately after the end of CZ, and the reels are stopped. At the timing when CZ ends and switches to the normal state (normal game) (for example, after a predetermined time has passed since the third stop reel stop button was pressed in the final CZ game), one card as shown in (A) An operation instruction prompting repeated hitting of the input button 205 is displayed on the image display 500 . Further, it is indicated in the operation instruction that it becomes easier to win the pseudo-game by repeatedly hitting the one-insert button 205 .

In addition, if you follow the operation instruction, it will be easier to win the pseudo game, that is, the situation will be advantageous to the player, and the operation instruction is important information for the player. It should be displayed in hours. Specifically, the display time of the operation instruction may be, for example, longer than 4.1 seconds (for example, 5 seconds), which is the shortest playing time of one game of the slot machine 1 (time-up time of the wait timer). desirable. Therefore, the operation instruction can be displayed over a plurality of games.

In addition, instead of specifically determining the display time of the operation instruction, the operation instruction is displayed until the game is started for the first time (when the start lever 210 is operated) after the transition to the normal state after the end of the CZ. good too. In addition, the display time of the operation instruction (for example, 5 seconds longer than 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest playing time of one game of the slot machine 1) has elapsed, or the first game that has shifted to the normal state after the end of CZ is started. The operation instruction may be erased when any one of the operations (starting lever 210 is operated) is satisfied.

It should be noted that after the display of this operation instruction is erased, the single-insert button 205 is not repeatedly hit, or is not repeatedly hit but is long-pressed as in the case of CZ, and a predetermined condition is satisfied ( If the predetermined condition is satisfied and the preparatory operation before the winning combination lottery is performed), the operation instruction prompting repeated hitting of the one-insert button 205 may be displayed again. Note that a preparatory operation for the winning combination lottery, such as inserting medals or pressing the MAX insert button 206, is an example of the predetermined condition.

Therefore, for example, after switching from the CZ to the normal game and after the operation instruction for the one-insert button 205 is displayed and erased, while pressing the one-insert button 205 for a long time, medals are inserted. , Are you willing to accept the lottery as it is? Such an idiot! Hit 1 BET in rapid succession...", etc., are displayed.

Note that the mode of the operation instruction (first operation instruction) that appears when switching from the CZ to the normal game is the same as the mode of the operation instruction (second operation instruction) that is redisplayed during the normal game. may be different.

Specifically, for example, the display time, display size, and display position of the operation instruction in the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction, presence/absence of sound output at the same time as the operation instruction, and the volume and output of the sound The time and the like may be changed.

For example, the longer the display time of the operation instruction, the larger the display size, and the closer the display position is to the center of the image display 500, the stronger the impression of the operation instruction. In addition, the impression of the operation instruction can be strengthened when the sound is output rather than when the operation instruction is not output at the same time. Also, the higher the sound volume and the longer the output time, the stronger the impression of the operation time.

In addition to performing a long-pressing operation of the one-card insertion button 205 during the CZ, if a long-pressing operation is performed when shifting to the normal game, it is rather disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, by executing the first operation instruction in a manner that leaves a strong impression (for example, making the display time of the first operation instruction longer than the display time of the second operation instruction), the player can switch from the CZ to the normal state. , the operation method of the one-sheet insertion button 205 can be reliably changed.

In addition, there are players who do not see the operation instruction properly or forget to repeat the operation even though they are playing the game at the time of the operation instruction immediately after the end of the CZ. Therefore, by performing the second operation instruction in a manner that gives a stronger impression than the first operation instruction (for example, the display time of the second operation instruction is longer than the display time of the first operation instruction), such It is possible to prevent the player from forgetting the continuous hitting operation.

In addition, for example, when it takes a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction to be displayed and erased, the pseudo game is won within the predetermined time and the pseudo game starts Also, it is desirable that the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction is not erased until the predetermined time has elapsed. For example, if the display of the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction is erased at the start of the pseudo-game, the player may forget to repeatedly press the insert button 205 due to the impact caused by the appearance of the pseudo-game. It is from. In this case, during the pseudo-game, the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction, the operation instruction for the reel stop button, and the operation instruction for the starting lever 210 are displayed at the same time.

Also, a player who does not see the operation instruction immediately after the end of the CZ (for example, another player is playing during the CZ and immediately after the end of the CZ, and the player changes after that) inserts one I don't know that hitting the button 205 repeatedly will give me a favorable situation. In addition, since the slot machine in which the operation of the one-insert button 205 affects the lottery result is not generally known, the second operation instruction is given in a manner that gives a weak impression to the player who has not completed the game of CZ. is executed, the operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 itself may be dubious. Therefore, if the second operation instruction is performed in a manner that gives a strong impression (for example, the display time of the second operation instruction is longer than the display time of the first operation instruction), the player will be prompted to perform such repeated hit operations. can increase motivation.

Next, (B) is the state when the lever is turned on in the normal game in which the dummy game is won. The pseudo-game during the normal game is activated when the lever is turned on in the game in which the pseudo-game lottery is won, but it may occur after an indication within a predetermined number of games is interposed. However, if both the simulated game during the normal game and the CZ are won when the lever of the normal game is turned on, the CZ is executed with priority, and the simulated game of the normal game is extinguished or carried over after the end of the CZ and executed. do.

When the pseudo-game starts, images are displayed on the transparent liquid crystal 301aa, the transparent liquid crystal 301ab, the transparent liquid crystal 301ba, the transparent liquid crystal 301bb, the transparent liquid crystal 301ca, and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb, respectively, and the pieces other than the middle row of all the reels are prevented from being visually recognized. be done.

In addition, if you win the pseudo-game during the normal game, press order of 6 options (left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, right → middle → left). Each pressing order has an equal selection probability (1/6 for each). When the player depresses each reel stop button according to the selected pressing order to pseudo-stop the reels, the bells are aligned in a straight line in the middle row and the AT is won.

In (B), the line "Guess the order of pressing and align the bells!" indicates an operation instruction for each reel stop button.

(C) is the state when the lever is turned on in the normal game in which the dummy game is won, and is the state following (B). The image of each reel stop button is still displayed. Furthermore, by operating the starting lever 210, the image of each transmissive liquid crystal is erased, and the message indicating that the upper and lower stages of each reel become visible, and the image of the starting lever 210 with an arrow are displayed in the image. Displayed on display 500 , each indicates an operation instruction for starting lever 210 .

When the starting lever 210 is operated during a pseudo-game of the normal game, the image of each transmissive liquid crystal is erased to such an extent that the upper and lower stages of each reel can be visually recognized. If the order of pressing the reels is correct and the bells are aligned in the middle stage, the winning of the AT can be recognized even if the upper and lower stages cannot be visually recognized.

On the other hand, if the order of pushing the reels is not correct, the bells are not aligned in the middle row. As described above, even if the correct answer cannot be given in the order of pressing the reels, the bells are aligned upward to the right with a predetermined probability, and the AT is won. Further, when the correct order of pressing the reels cannot be obtained and the AT is not won, the bell stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and then the losing eye stops.

Therefore, when the bells do not line up in the middle row and the bells are pseudo-stopped in the middle row of the middle reel 301b, the player can determine the result of the AT lottery without looking at the lower row of the left reel 301a and the lower row of the right reel 301c. can't Details will be described later, but when a predetermined time has passed since the third pseudo stop in the pseudo game, the result of the AT lottery is notified, but for the player who cannot wait for it, the winning result by operating the above-described starting lever 210 can be checked quickly.

The trigger for erasing the image of the operation instruction for the start lever 210 is the same as the trigger for erasing the image for the operation instruction for the start lever 210 during the CZ described above, for example. Also, the relationship between the amount of operation of the starting lever 210 and the area where the image is not displayed in each transmissive liquid crystal is the same as the relationship described with reference to FIG. 721, for example.

(D) is a state in which the order of pressing the reels in the pseudo game cannot be correctly answered, the bells are not aligned in the middle row, and the bells are pseudo-stopped in the middle row of the middle reel 301b. In (D), since each transmissive liquid crystal blocks the visibility of the upper and lower stages of each reel, it cannot be determined whether or not the AT has been won.

(E) is a state in which the starting lever 210 is operated after the state of (D). By operating the starting lever 210, the image of each transmissive liquid crystal is erased, and the upper and lower stages of each reel are also visible. In (E), the bells are aligned upward to the right and the AT is won. Further, in (E), the start lever 210 is kept depressed for a predetermined time, so the image of the start lever 210 with an arrow, which is the operation instruction image, is erased.

(F) is the state at the end of the simulated game. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the third pseudo stop, the image of each transmissive liquid crystal is erased even if the start lever 210 is not operated, and whether or not the bells are aligned upward to the right, that is, AT is won. The image display unit 500 also informs whether or not the image display device 500 is on. After the effect of (F), the simulated game ends and the rotation of the reels of the normal game starts.

In addition, when the starting lever 210 is operated by a predetermined amount (for example, 5/10 of the maximum movable width from the initial position of the starting lever 210) or more after the third pseudo stop, it is determined whether or not the bells are aligned upward to the right. , the image displayed on the image display 500 may be changed to an image that notifies the result of the AT lottery.

Therefore, when the result of the AT lottery is notified after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the third pseudo-stop, the player who cannot wait for the predetermined time operates the starting lever 210 to allow the predetermined time to elapse. In the case where the result of the AT lottery is notified without waiting, and although the player recognizes the result of the AT lottery by operating the starting lever 210 and seeing the numbers on the reels, the notification is performed after the lapse of a predetermined time. There are cases and cases.

Although illustration is omitted, when the correct order of pressing the reels is correct and the bells are aligned in the middle row, a display indicating that the AT has been won is displayed on the image display 500, and the pseudo game is finished and normal The reel rotation of the game starts.

As explained in this chapter, if the player does not repeatedly hit the one-card insertion button 205 during the normal game, the player cannot receive an advantageous lottery. There is also a possibility that the operation cannot be continued.

Therefore, in order not to give the player only a disadvantageous situation by not executing the repeated hitting operation, the single insert button 205 is not repeatedly hit (Also, if a long press operation similar to the operation during CZ is performed, ) When the starting lever 210 is operated (when the game is started), the pressing order navigation may be displayed at a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100). When each reel stop button is pressed according to this push order navigation, the bells are aligned in the game (this game, not a pseudo game), and medals can be paid out. However, since it is still an operation performed without following the continuous hitting instruction of the one-insert button 205, it is better not to perform a special AT lottery even if the pressing order navigation is followed.

It should be noted that the above-described pseudo-game may always occur in the first normal game after the end of the CZ. By doing so, it is possible to give a player who has failed to win the AT in the CZ a great chance of winning the AT again, thereby suppressing the disappointment of the player.

In addition, for example, in a pseudo game during a normal game, after starting to display an operation instruction for the starting lever 210 in FIG. An operation instruction for each reel stop button and an operation instruction for the starting lever 210 may be displayed at the same time.

It should be noted that, if the pushing order in the pseudo-game is not correct, the following lottery and production may be performed. If the pressing order is not correct, the bell is ten-plyed upward to the right in the second pseudo-stop stage. Then, a lottery is conducted at the time of the third pseudo-stop, and in the lottery, the bells are pseudo-stopped with the above-described predetermined probability (for example, 1/4) in a row rising to the right, and the AT is won. However, if the one-piece insert button 205 is repeatedly hit before the third pseudo-stop, the probability higher than the predetermined probability (for example, 1/3.5) in the lottery is that the bells will rise to the right and pseudo-stop. Let me win the AT.

Therefore, when the second simulated stop (that is, the preparatory operation for performing the lottery at the time of the third simulated stop described above) is performed, an operation instruction prompting the repeated hitting operation of the one-card insertion button 205 (for example, "If you hit 1 BET repeatedly, and/or an image of the one-card insert button 205 with an arrow) is displayed to encourage the player to repeatedly hit. At the timing when the operation instruction prompting the continuous hitting operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed, the operation instruction is simultaneously displayed on the right reel stop button 211c, and at least the operation instruction for the start lever 210 is simultaneously displayed if the start lever 210 is not operated. is displayed.

By performing such lottery and performance when the pressing order in the pseudo game is not correct, the player who emphasizes the AT winning rate repeatedly hits the one insert button 205, and the player who desires smooth progress of the game. Different game features can be selected according to the player's taste, such as performing the third simulated stop without repeatedly hitting the one-card insertion button 205 .

The operation instruction prompting the repeated pressing of the single-insert button 205 may, for example, be flashed for a predetermined period of time (that is, displayed by repeating the display state and the non-display state a plurality of times), and then erased. It may be erased after continuing only the state for a predetermined time. In addition, for example, in order to make the player repeatedly hit the one-piece insertion button 205 and to make the bells rise to the right with a high probability to pseudo-stop, an operation instruction is given to the right reel stop button 211c for a predetermined period of time. Alternatively, these predetermined times may be set shorter than the display time of the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c in order to make the player concentrate on the pseudo stop operation of the reels.

In addition, the operation instruction prompting the continuous hitting operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is performed a plurality of times (for example, the preparatory operation for the lottery at the time of the third simulated stop such as the first simulated stop and the second simulated stop). ) may be executed.

Further, when the operation instruction prompting the continuous hitting operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c, from the voice corresponding to the operation instruction prompting the continuous pressing operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205, The sound corresponding to the right reel stop button 211c is preferentially output (for example, the prioritized sound is output at a higher volume than the non-prioritized sound, or the non-prioritized sound is not output and is given priority. (Even if the non-prioritized audio started outputting first, the output of the non-prioritized audio is stopped and then the prioritized audio is output.) etc.), or the sound corresponding to the operation instruction prompting the continuous hitting operation of the one-card insertion button 205 may be output preferentially over the sound corresponding to the right reel stop button 211c. Also, these sounds may have the same priority (for example, they may be output at the same volume at the same time).

When the operation instruction prompting the repeated hitting operation of the one-sheet insert button 205 is displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the starting lever 210, the sound corresponding to the operation instruction prompting the repeated hitting operation of the one-sheet insert button 205 and the starting lever 210 The relationship between the corresponding sound and the sound corresponding to the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c and the start lever 210 when the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c is displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the start lever 210 The same applies to the relationship between the voice corresponding to .

Further, when the operation instruction prompting the continuous hitting operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c, the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction prompting the continuous pressing operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 The lamp corresponding to the right reel stop button 211c is preferentially output (for example, the lamp with priority emits light with a stronger light intensity than the lamp with no priority, or the lamp with no priority is not output and is given priority. (Even if the non-prioritized lamp started output first, the output of the non-prioritized lamp is stopped and the prioritized lamp is output), etc. ), or the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction prompting the continuous hitting operation of the one-card insertion button 205 may be output preferentially over the lamp corresponding to the right reel stop button 211c. Also, these lamps may have the same priority (for example, the same amount of light may be output at the same time).

A lamp corresponding to the operation instruction prompting the continuous pressing operation of the single-sheet insertion button 205 and the starting lever 210 when the operation instruction prompting the continuous pressing operation of the single-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the starting lever 210. The relationship between the corresponding lamp and the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c and the start lever 210 when the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c is displayed simultaneously with the operation instruction for the start lever 210 The same applies to the relationship between the lamps corresponding to .

Since it is easier for the player to recognize the operation instruction corresponding to the prioritized sound, it is preferable to set the priority of the sound corresponding to the operation instruction of the operation to be surely performed by the player. Similarly, since the player can easily recognize the operation instruction corresponding to the prioritized lamp, it is preferable to set the priority of the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction of the operation to be surely performed by the player. .

In addition, if the timing of outputting the sound corresponding to the operation instruction prompting the continuous hitting operation of the one-insert button 205 overlaps with the timing of outputting another effect sound, the operation instruction prompting the continuous pressing operation of the one-insert button 205. may be output with priority over the other effect sound, or the other effect sound may be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the operation instruction prompting the continuous hitting operation of the one insert button 205. may have the same priority.

Further, when the timing of outputting the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction prompting the continuous hitting operation of the one-insert button 205 overlaps with the timing of outputting the lamp corresponding to another effect, the continuous hitting operation of the one-insert button 205 is performed. The lamp corresponding to the prompting operation instruction may be output with priority over the lamp corresponding to the other effect, or the lamp corresponding to the other effect may correspond to the operation instruction prompting the continuous hitting operation of the input button 205. It may be output with priority over the lamp to be output, or may have the same priority.

In the above-described example, when the pseudo-game is executed during the normal game, the AT is won with a higher probability than the normal game where the pseudo-game is not executed, but the pseudo-game during the normal game is, for example, It may be executed as a mere effect in which the AT lottery is not performed during the pseudo-game, such as the fortune-telling effect shown below. That is, there is no difference in the AT winning rate between the normal game in which the pseudo game in which the fortune-telling effect is executed and the normal game in which the pseudo game is not performed.

Specifically, for example, in a pseudo-game in which a fortune-telling effect is executed, if the order of pressing the reels is correct, the bells are pseudo-stopped and aligned in the middle of the reel, and even if the order of pressing is not correct, a predetermined probability is set. At (for example, 1/4), the bells are lined up to the right and the quasi stop occurs, and with a predetermined probability (3/4), the bells do not line up in a straight line and the quasi stop occurs.

Then, for example, when the bells are aligned in the pseudo stop, at the end of the pseudo game (Fig. 730 (F)), instead of the message "Congratulations on winning AT!" There might be!” is displayed on the image display unit 500 . On the other hand, if the bells do not ring due to the simulated stop, at the end of the simulated game, instead of the message "Congratulations on winning the AT!" It is displayed on the image display 500 . Also, instead of the message "Are you winning the AT?" By performing such a fortune-telling effect in the pseudo game, the player can be entertained without increasing the AT winning rate (that is, without increasing the burden on the hall).

[12-7. Specific example 3 of CZ production]
Another example of the CZ effect will be described below. In the above-described example, by keeping the one-sheet insertion button 205 pressed during CZ, it was possible to receive an advantageous AT lottery. In this chapter, when the 1-card insertion button is kept pressed during CZ, the shortest game time (wait timer time-up time) of one game of the slot machine 1 during CZ is 4.1 seconds, If the pressed state is not maintained, the shortest game time becomes longer (for example, it becomes 10 seconds, which is twice as long as 4.1 seconds).

For example, the player gives an operation instruction to the one-card insertion button 205 during CZ (the message displayed on the image display 500 in FIG. 717(B), or the message displayed on the image display 500 in FIG. The start lever 210 is operated to draw a winning combination without performing an operation indicated by the image of the one-card insert button 205, etc.) or after performing an operation different from the operation indicated by the operation instruction. In this case, the timeout time of the wait timer of 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest playing time of the slot machine 1, is extended to 10 seconds. This lengthens the time spent per game during CZ.

It should be noted that even if the shortest game time remains 4.1 seconds while maintaining the pressed state of the one-insert button 205 during CZ, it is possible to play with one hand while maintaining the pressed state of the one-insert button 205. Since it is necessary to progress through the game, it is difficult for even a player who is accustomed to the game to complete the game in 4.1 seconds. In other words, even if the one-card insertion button 205 is kept pressed down, the time taken for one game during the CZ becomes longer.

In addition, when the single-insert button 205 is not kept pressed during CZ, the shortest game time is extended from 4.1 seconds to 10 seconds, which is twice as long as 4.1 seconds. However, if the average playing time for one game exceeds twice 4.1 seconds, the shortest playing time after extension does not have to be twice or more than 4.1 seconds (for example, The shortest game time after the change may be set to about 7 seconds).

In this way, by lengthening the minimum playing time during the CZ and increasing the average playing time of the game, the load on the hole can be alleviated. In addition, the player who is playing the CZ can enjoy the CZ effect by lengthening the average consumption time during the CZ.

Furthermore, as the average consumption time in the CZ increases, a person who is not playing the slot machine 1 in the CZ (for example, a player playing in another slot machine around the slot machine 1 in the CZ , people who pass by the slot machine 1 in the CZ) can be frequently shown the games in the CZ, and their interest in the slot machine 1 can be attracted.

For example, the AT winning rate in each game when the one-piece insert button 205 is kept pressed during CZ is the AT first hit table in CZ in FIG. 709, the AT first hit lottery table in FIG. is about 1/10.43. Also, as described above, the CZ continues until the AT winning game or until 10 games are played, so if calculated from the AT winning rate in each game in the CZ, the CZ lasts an average of 6.67 games.

Further, according to the minor win lottery table in FIG. 706, the AT first win lottery table in FIG. 707, and the CZ transition lottery table in FIG. Therefore, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of normal games played in one day by 6.67×1/603 is the average number of CZ games played in one day. Assuming that 4000 normal games are executed in one day, an average of 44.2 CZ games are executed in one day.

For example, if ten slot machines 1 are installed in the hall, a total of 442 CZ games are executed by the ten machines. Assuming that 442 games are played in the usual minimum playing time (4.1 seconds), the CZ games are played for a total of 1814 seconds on ten slot machines 1 in one day. Therefore, if the minimum playing time is doubled, the CZ game will be executed for a total of 1814 seconds (approximately 30 minutes) longer in one hole in one day. The enjoyment of the slot machine 1 can be sufficiently notified even to those who do not play the game.

In addition, after performing an operation (for example, repeated hitting operation) other than long pressing of the single insert button 205, or after performing no operation, when the starting lever 210 is operated (when the game is started) However, in order to reduce the burden on the hole described above, in principle, the optimal (for not extending the shortest playing time) operation instruction (long press of the one insert button 205) is not displayed. is good.

On the other hand, in such a case, for example, an operation instruction such as the message in FIG. For example, an effect may be applied or moved), or the display of the message and the image of the one-insert button 205 may be emphasized at the same time.

However, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) are played in succession in which the shortest playing time is extended, the player may not have the intention to play the normal shortest playing time (4.1 seconds). There is no need to restate or highlight the above message because the

When games with the minimum playing time extended are played continuously for a predetermined number of games, for example, "I told you that if you press and hold the 1 BET button for a long time, the game will take less time to complete, but I... You are going to nullify the goodwill of Mr. Ishikawa...I'm sorry." It is better to display it differently. Such a different display makes it easy for the player who has not noticed the operation instruction to redisplay the message or highlight the image of the insert button 205 to notice the new display. It is from.

However, if the special condition is met while the game with the extended shortest playing time is being played, the shortest playing time may be shortened (or returned to the original 4.1 seconds, 4. may be shortened to values greater than 1 second and less than 10 seconds). This is to prevent the player from being inconvenienced by excessively lengthening the average digestion time. However, when returning the minimum playing time to the original 4.1 seconds, it is desirable to restore it after the game in which the minimum playing time has been extended, that is, after the next game.

It should be noted that operating the storage release switch 209 (storage medal settlement switch) and operating the effect button 204 (for example, pressing once or pressing for a long time) during the execution of the game in which the shortest playing time has been extended is prohibited. , are all examples of the above-described special conditions.

Also, in the case where the slot machine 1 is designed to allow the lottery of winning hands during execution of the game with the extended shortest playing time, winning during execution of the game with the extended shortest playing time is possible. The lottery for the role is also an example of the above-described special condition. It should be noted that it is permissible for a winning combination to be drawn during execution of a game with an extended minimum playing time (even if the shortest playing time is extended, the game with the extended shortest playing time is still being played) The shortest playing time is extended by enabling the lottery for the winning combination, that is, allowing the lottery for the winning combination to be performed multiple times in one game. Disadvantages can be mitigated.

However, if the game is designed to permit the drawing of a winning combination during execution of a game in which the minimum playing time is extended, it is desirable to set an upper limit on the number of times of drawing. For example, the number of lotteries that can be executed depending on the number of medals (maximum credits) that can be inserted into the slot machine 1 (50/3 = 16.666 . . . less than 16 times) is the upper limit.

If the lottery is executed up to the maximum number of times, the minimum playing time in the next game may be returned to the normal 4.1 seconds, or if the lottery is executed even once, the next game will be The shortest game time may be returned to the usual 4.1 seconds.

In addition, if the game is designed to allow the drawing of a winning hand during execution of a game with the extended minimum playing time, the winning hand of the drawing at the time of lever-on of the game with the extended shortest playing time is a bonus. (a winning combination in which the conditional device is activated until the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus is completed; also called a carrying-over combination), and a winning combination in a lottery performed during execution of a game in which the shortest playing time is extended. There are cases where it is a bonus.

In this case, for example, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus won when the lever is turned on is displayed on the reels, the bonus game state of the bonus is entered, and the end condition of the bonus game state (for example, the number of payout medals is specified). When the number (for example, 300 or more) is satisfied, the bonus game state ends. Then, from the first game after the end of the bonus game state, the reels can be stopped by a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus won during the execution of the game in which the shortest playing time is extended, and the symbol combination is displayed on the reels. When displayed, a bonus game state for a new bonus is started.

Further, in the case described above, regarding the bonus won by lottery during execution of the game in which the shortest playing time is extended, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is not displayed, and the state is shifted to the bonus game state. good too. By generating the bonus game state in this way, the player perceives consecutive bonuses as if they were a single bonus with which a large amount of medals can be obtained. The upper limit of the number of medals that can be obtained with one bonus is stipulated by the rules, but due to consecutive bonuses (the bonus symbols are not aligned in the second bonus), the player cannot obtain medals exceeding the rules. You can feel like you are getting paid for it. In addition, in this continuous bonus, it is preferable to perform an effect such that a plurality of bonuses appear as one bonus, for example, the display of the cumulative number of medals acquired in the bonus is counted continuously without resetting.

In addition, even in a game in which the shortest playing time is extended, an operation instruction to keep the single insertion button 205 pressed, an operation instruction to press each reel stop button in a pseudo game, and a good visibility state of each transparent liquid crystal It is possible to display three instructions at the same time, which are operation instructions for operating the starting lever 210 for. It should be noted that the processing for extending the shortest playing time is not limited to the CZ described above, and may be performed during the CZ (for example, a special special zone described later) performed during the AT.

[12-8. CZ (specialized zone) that shifts during AT]
The CZ executed during AT will be described below. When AT is won, the initial number of games (for example, 50 games or more) is determined. In addition, based on the winning hand in the AT game or the AT precursor game, a lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed, or the mode shifts to a mode in which the number of AT games is added with an extremely high probability (for example, 1/2). The number of AT games can be increased by holding a lottery or a lottery for moving to a special zone that increases the number of AT games per game.

This makes it possible to realize AT games with a number of games exceeding the initial number of games determined at the time of AT winning. Also, when winning the push order bell (123 bell, 132 bell, 213 bell, 231 bell, 312 bell, or 321 bell) during the AT game, the probability is higher than in the normal game (for example, 1 during the AT game). /1, 0/1 during the normal game except for the precursor game), and the correct pressing order is reported immediately after the start lever 210 is operated (for example, at a position directly above each reel of the image display 500). A number indicating the pressing order is displayed, and a voice such as "It's in the middle!" is output from the speaker 512). As a result, the game can be enjoyed while increasing medals during AT.

The slot machine 1 of this chapter is equipped with specialization zones, which are CZs in the AT, and the specialization zones include normal specialization zones and special specialization zones. When a special zone is won during AT, for example, a normal special zone is selected with a probability of 3/4, and a special special zone is selected with a probability of 1/4. The normal specialized zone is a general specialized zone in which the number of AT games is increased every game. On the other hand, the special specialization zone is a specialization zone in which a lottery is held as to whether or not to enter the specialization zone, the details of which will be described later.

In the special special zone, when the special zone is won again, instead of moving to a new special zone as it is, it is returned to an AT state that is not a special zone, and for example, a predetermined number of AT games are played. After digesting it, move it to a new specialized zone. The predetermined number of games in this case is, for example, less than the initial number of AT games (for example, 50 games), or less than the average number of games for one AT including the number of games added to the initial number of AT games, A short number of games is desirable.

However, in the special zone, when the number of remaining games of the AT is small when the player wins the special zone again, the AT may end before completing the predetermined number of games. Therefore, at the end of the special zone, for example, AT games shorter than the initial number of AT games (for example, 20 games) should be added. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the AT state until entering the specialized zone again after finishing the special specialized zone.

In addition, it is desirable to start the specialized zone from the game following the game won in the transfer lottery to the specialized zone. By doing so, it is possible to move to the specialized zone before the AT ends. Also, if the remaining number of AT games becomes zero after the start of the special zone and before the end of the special zone, it is desirable to continue the AT state until the end of the special zone. By doing so, all acquired specialized zones can be digested during AT.

Next, an example of the production in the specialized zone will be explained. The illustration of the normal special zone is omitted because the effects are the same as those of the special zone in a general slot machine. In the normal specialized zone, for example, when the lever is turned on in each game, the number of additional games is determined based on the winning combination, and an effect indicating the degree of expectation appears based on the winning combination or the determined number of additional games. Then, for example, the determined number of additional games is notified using the image display 500 or the like at the time of the third stop. Note that the normal specialized zone ends after a fixed predetermined number of games (eg, 10 games).

FIG. 731 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect in the special zone. Regardless of the number of games played, the special zone ends, for example, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the transition to the special zone. (A) is the state at the end of the game in which the player wins the special zone. A display indicating that the player has won the special zone is displayed on the image display 500 .

(B) is the state when the lever is turned on in the game following (A), that is, the starting game of the special zone. When the lever is turned on, a timer is set for the time (for example, 60 seconds) until the end of the special zone. And the game is about how many normal special zones you can stock up in 60 seconds. You can also stock specialized zones.

It should be noted that the pseudo-game is continuously performed during these 60 seconds. If you hold down the 1 BET button during the special zone, the special zone stock probability will double, but the timer speed until the end of the special zone will be doubled (that is, shortened to 30 seconds at the shortest). ). As a result, when the single-insert button 205 is kept pressed, more lotteries can be executed per unit time than when the button 205 is not kept pressed. When not maintained, the user can enjoy the special specialized zone for a longer time than when the pressed state is maintained. Note that the time until the end of the special zone is not limited to one fixed value (60 seconds), and for example, one value may be selected from a plurality of values.

(B) shows an operation instruction message indicating that if the one-piece insert button 205 is held down, the AT lottery will be given preferential treatment, but the time advances at double speed, and an image of the one-piece insert button 205 with an arrow. An operation instruction image and are displayed. After that, a pseudo-game similar to the CZ described above is performed.

Specifically, when the special zone is won, a pseudo-game similar to that of FIG. 717 (B) to FIG. 718 (J) is shown. F) is followed by simulated games similar to those shown in FIGS. 719(G2) to (J2). Then, the pseudo game is repeated until the timer value becomes zero. It should be noted that, when the timer value becomes zero, the simulated game being executed may be forcibly terminated to end the special special zone, or the special specialized zone may be terminated at the end of the simulated game being executed. good too. It should be noted that a telop image may always be displayed in the specialized zone as well, as in the CZ, to indicate that the one-sheet insert button 205 shown in FIG. 719 should be kept depressed.

It should be noted that, for example, in order not to arouse the gambling spirit of the player too much, the upper limit of the number of specialized zones that can be stocked in one special zone (for example, 10) may be set. desirable. Also, even if you stock multiple special zones in one special special zone, each special zone will be released instead of releasing the stocked multiple special zones in succession. A predetermined number of normal AT games (that is, AT games that are not in the specialized zone) should be inserted between them. That is, the game progresses in the order of the end of the special specialized zone→normal AT→specialized zone→normal AT→ . . .

In addition, during the simulated game in the special special zone, a notification effect may be performed to notify that each of the winning stocks has been won, or a part or all of the stock may not be subjected to the notification effect. (That is, the player does not know the number of winning stocks (however, the number is greater than or equal to the reported number)). Further, the display in the notification effect may be erased at the timing of shifting to the normal AT game once, or may be executed across the normal AT game.

In addition, since the special special zone can serve as an opportunity for greatly increasing the number of medals obtained, the special special zone gives the player a strong sense of tension. Therefore, in order to relieve the player's own tension and play with all one's might, for example, when pressing the reel stop button for the first simulated stop and the second simulated stop in the simulated game, in the special zone ( Or the period from the special special zone to the next normal AT) can be changed, or the tone of the message displayed on the image display 500 can be changed (for example, "Master! Red in the middle of the right reel"). Please stop 7!"). It should be noted that these operation means for changing the BGM and messages are the same operation means when viewed in terms of reel stop buttons, and if each reel stop button is regarded as an individual operation means, they are regarded as different operation means. can also

Also, since the special zone ends with the lapse of time, for example, a countdown of the remaining time of the special zone may be displayed on the image display 500 so that the player can recognize the remaining time. The countdown starts, for example, when the special zone is started (that is, when the lever is turned on), and the countdown progresses at double speed when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed. In addition, at the start of the special zone, the countdown of the remaining time is not displayed, and the countdown is performed at the timing of the first simulated stop, the second simulated stop, or the third simulated stop in the simulated game (for example, the first time) may be displayed.

For example, if a countdown is displayed at a timing after the lever is turned on without displaying a message directly announcing or indirectly suggesting a special specialized zone as shown in FIGS. 731 (A) and (B), At this point, the player does not know whether the normal specialization zone or the special specialization zone has started. Then, at the timing of the simulated stop, a countdown is suddenly displayed, and the player can recognize that it is a special special zone, so the sense of anticipation increases at once.

Also, when there are multiple special zone times (for example, 60 seconds and 120 seconds are determined by lottery), when the countdown display is performed at a timing after the lever is turned on, for example, it is shown as 30 seconds. It is possible to conceal whether the special special zone is 60 seconds or 120 seconds, or to make the player recognize that the special special zone is 120 seconds when indicated as 90 seconds, thereby heightening expectations. .

Note that the operation means for changing the BGM and tone of messages in the special special zone described above and the operation means for displaying the countdown (that is, for announcing the type of special zone) are the same. There may be, or there may be different. By keeping these operation means the same, the change of BGM, the change of tone, and the notification of the special zone can all be caused by the operation of the same operation means. Although it is difficult to get a sense of anticipation, it is possible to have a great sense of anticipation for the operation of the same operation means. On the other hand, by making these operation means different, the player can have a sense of anticipation for the operation of each of the different operation means.

[12-9. Relevance between instruction effects for different operation units in CZ 1]
In the following, the relevance of instruction effects for different operating units in CZ will be described. As described above, during the simulated game during the CZ, the image display 500 displays an instruction to keep the single insertion button 205 depressed, an operation instruction to each reel stop button, and an operation instruction to the start lever 210 .

Keeping the one-card insertion button 205 depressed is an operation related to the result of the lottery, and when this operation instruction is erased, the player can stop pressing the one-card insertion button 205 and receive an advantageous lottery. There is a risk. Also, if the operation instruction for each reel stop button is erased, the player may not know whether to stop each reel. In addition, when the operation instruction for the start lever 210 is erased, the player misunderstands that the visibility of the reels cannot be improved, and the degree of difficulty of eye pressing during the simulated game increases, resulting in a decrease in interest. There is a risk. Therefore, by making it possible to display three operation instructions on the image display 500 at the same time, these problems can be solved.

Below, while the three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, the operation instructions are displayed in the following order: an instruction to keep the single insertion button 205 depressed, an operation instruction to each reel stop button, and an operation instruction to the start lever 210. Let's start with an example.

That is, in this example, first, an operation instruction for the one-card insertion button 205 related to the lottery result in CZ is displayed to make the player understand the lottery method. Then, an instruction to press the reel stop button is issued to quickly stop the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b that do not indicate the lottery result. Then, the operation instruction of the starting lever 210 is displayed to improve the visibility of the right reel 301c suggesting the lottery result, and the player's attention is focused on the right reel 301c.

The effect of displaying the operation instructions in this order will be described below. First, as shown in FIG. 717(B), when it is decided to shift to CZ, the explanation of CZ is executed in the state before shifting to CZ. In this explanation, for example, it is instructed to keep the one-sheet insertion button 205 pressed as described above. Since some players do not know which operation unit the one-sheet insert button 205 is, as described above, the image of the one-sheet insert button 205 (the image imitating the one-sheet insert button 205) is used in this explanation. It is preferable to display it on the display body 500 .

As shown in FIG. 717(C), when the CZ starts, the explanatory text indicating the instruction to keep pressing the one-insert button 205 is erased, but the instruction to keep pressing the one-insert button 205 is displayed in the game. It is desirable that the image of the one-sheet insert button 205 is continuously displayed so that the operator can continue to recognize it. Further, when the image of the one-insert button 205 is continuously displayed, the image may be continuously displayed without changing the display size in order not to change the recognition of the operation of the one-insert button by the player. , Since it is considered that the player has received and understood the explanation of the mechanism of CZ, the display size of the image may be changed to be smaller than when the explanation was displayed, or the one insert button 205 Since keeping the button pressed is an important operation related to the lottery result, the display size of the image may be changed to be larger than when the explanation is displayed.

Note that the image may be displayed, for example, as a cycle effect in which blinking, movement, or the like is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle. If you want to continue displaying the image without changing the display size at the timing of deleting the explanation, you may inherit the cycle that continues from when the explanation is displayed, or restart the cycle at that timing. You can start.

Specifically, for example, display image 1, display image 2, and display image 3 are displayed as a cycle effect in which three display images are repeatedly displayed in this order. is displayed, at the timing of erasing the explanation, the cycle effect may be continued by displaying the display image 3, which is the image next to the display image 2, inheriting the cycle, or the cycle effect may be continued. The display image 1, which is the start image, may be displayed to restart the cycle effect.

Also, when the explanation is deleted, the display size of the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be changed to a similar size (for example, about 0.7 times to 1.3 times). The presentation mode of the image of the one-insert button 205 may be changed before and after the explanation is erased. Specifically, for example, even if the display size of the image of the one insert button 205 is changed, even if it is not changed, the cycle effect itself (for example, the amount of movement, the display position, and the blinking speed, etc.) may be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player that the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed and maintained after the explanation is erased.

Subsequently, while an operation instruction to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed, the image display 500 displays the operation instruction contents for each reel stop button. In addition, since there is a premise that the one-sheet insertion button 205 will be kept pressed according to the content of the instruction to keep the one-sheet insertion button 205 pressed, the image of each reel stop button showing the operation instruction for each reel stop button is displayed, the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may not necessarily be displayed.

When an image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 (an image instructing to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button) and an image of each reel stop button (an image instructing to press each reel stop button) are displayed at the same time, currently While a sound or a lamp notifying that the state of is CZ is output, a sound corresponding to the operation instruction of each reel stop button (for example, pressing the right reel stop button 211c like "Right!" ) or a lamp (for example, the lamp provided for the right reel stop button 211c is caused to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue)). Thereby, the player can surely recognize that the operation of the reel stop button is required.

Further, when giving an operation instruction for each reel stop button, for example, some lamps provided in the slot machine 1 as lamps corresponding to the operation instruction (for example, a lamp provided for the reel stop button to be pressed) lamps), and the other lamps continue to emit lamps indicating that the current state is controlled by CZ.

Subsequently, while an operation instruction to keep the one-sheet insertion button 205 pressed and an operation instruction to press each reel stop button are displayed, the instruction contents of the operation of the start lever 210 are displayed on the image display 500. be done. Since it is assumed that the one-sheet insert button 205 will be kept pressed according to the instruction to keep the one-sheet insert button 205 pressed, the image of the start lever 210 indicating the operation instruction for the start lever 210 is displayed. The image of the one-sheet insert button 205 does not necessarily have to be displayed when the button 205 is displayed.

In addition, even if the operation is performed according to the operation instruction of the starting lever 210, it only improves the visibility of the effect display, and it is considered that the operation of the reel stop button is more important than the operation of the starting lever 210. be done. Therefore, when the images of the respective reel stop buttons are displayed, the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the image of the starting lever 210 do not necessarily have to be displayed.

When the image of the single insert button 205 and the image of the starting lever 210 are displayed at the same time, and when the image of each reel stop button and the image of the starting lever 210 are displayed at the same time, the current state is CZ. Among the output of sounds and lamps notifying that something is happening, a sound corresponding to an instruction to operate the starting lever 210 (for example, a sound instructing to press down the starting lever 210, such as “strike the lever!”) and a lamp (for example, to cause a lamp provided near the start lever 210 to emit light in a predetermined color) preferentially. Thereby, the player can surely recognize that the operation of the starting lever 210 is requested.

Further, when instructing the operation of the starting lever 210, only a part of the lamps provided in the slot machine 1 (for example, the lamps provided for the reel stop buttons to be pressed) are illuminated as lamps corresponding to . , for the other lamps, continue to illuminate the lamps indicating that the current state is controlled by CZ.

As described above, an operation instruction (first operation instruction) to keep the single insertion button 205 depressed, an operation instruction (second operation instruction) to each reel stop button, and an operation instruction to the start lever 210 (third operation instruction). , can be displayed at the same time. When displaying a plurality of operation instructions at the same time, at least a part of the plurality of operation instructions may be displayed overlapping or may be displayed without overlapping.

By superimposing at least a part of a plurality of operation instructions, a player can recognize that the images of the plurality of operation instructions are integrated to form one large operation instruction display, and motivation for operation is improved. do. Furthermore, by displaying at least part of a plurality of operation instructions in an overlapping manner, it becomes easier to secure a space for displaying effects other than operation instructions on the image display 500, and various display effects are realized using the space. can do. On the other hand, by displaying a plurality of operation instructions without overlapping, the player can easily identify each of the plurality of operation instructions, which makes it easier to understand the game method during the simulated game.

Display patterns (1) to (4) when a plurality of operation instructions are displayed at the same time will be described below.

(1) A pattern in which the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction are displayed simultaneously, and the third operation instruction is not displayed. When the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction are displayed in an overlapping manner, the first operation instruction should be displayed closer to the user than the second operation instruction (in other words, only the first instruction should be visible in the overlapping portion). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving a preferential lottery. When the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction are displayed in a superimposed manner, the second operation instruction is displayed closer to the player than the first operation instruction, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the pressing instruction of each reel stop button. Since the player presses each reel stop button at an early timing, the simulated game can proceed smoothly. Further, when the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction are displayed without overlapping, the player can identify each operation indicated by both instructions, and both operations can be performed more reliably. .

(2) A pattern in which the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed simultaneously, and the second operation instruction is not displayed. When the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction are superimposed and displayed, the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving a preferential lottery, can be displayed by displaying the first operation instruction on the nearer side than the third operation instruction. It becomes easier for the player to recognize it. When the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction are superimposed and displayed, by displaying the third operation instruction closer to the player than the first operation instruction, the player can easily recognize the operation instruction of the starting lever 210. The player can surely operate the starting lever 210 to improve the viewing condition of the reels and proceed with the simulated game, thereby improving the interest. Further, when the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed without overlapping, the player can identify each operation indicated by both instructions, and both operations can be reliably performed.

(3) A pattern in which the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed simultaneously, and the first operation instruction is not displayed. When the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction are superimposed and displayed, by displaying the second operation instruction closer to the player than the third operation instruction, the player can easily recognize the operation instruction of the reel stop button. After stopping the left reel 301a and middle reel 301b that do not indicate the lottery result, the player can concentrate on the operation of improving the visibility of the right reel 301c that indicates the lottery result. When the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed in an overlapping manner, by displaying the third operation instruction closer to the player than the second operation instruction, the player can easily recognize the operation instruction of the starting lever 210. The player can first operate the starting lever 210 to make the reels visually recognizable, and then concentrate on the operation of stopping the reels. Further, when the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed without overlapping, the player can identify each operation indicated by both instructions, and both operations can be reliably performed.

(4) A pattern in which the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction are displayed simultaneously. The patterns include, for example, the following patterns (4a) to (4h) by overlapping displays of respective operation instructions.
(4a) A pattern in which each of the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction is displayed overlapping both of the other two operation instructions.
(4b) A pattern in which the first operation instruction overlaps the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction, but the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed without overlapping.
(4c) A pattern in which the second operation instruction overlaps the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction, but the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed without overlapping.
(4d) A pattern in which the third operation instruction overlaps the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction, but the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction are displayed without overlapping.
(4e) A pattern in which the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction overlap, but the third operation instruction is displayed without overlapping either the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction.
(4f) A pattern in which the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction overlap, but the second operation instruction is displayed without overlapping either the first operation instruction or the third operation instruction.
(4g) A pattern in which the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction overlap, but the first operation instruction is displayed without overlapping with either the second operation instruction or the third operation instruction.
(4h) A pattern in which each of the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction is displayed so as to overlap any of the other two operation instructions.

In the pattern (4a), since all the operation instructions overlap each other, the player is given the impression that the three operation instructions are integrated, and the integrated operation instruction easily catches the player's eye. Become. Furthermore, the total display area for the three operation instructions is reduced, and the wide area of the image display 500 can be effectively utilized for other presentations.

In the pattern (4a), there may be an area where the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction all overlap (that is, the display area for the first operation instruction and the display area for the second operation instruction). The intersection of the display area and the display area of the third operation instruction is not an empty set), and the area may not exist (that is, the intersection is an empty set).

In pattern (4a), by displaying the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction in order from the front, the one-sheet insertion button 205 is kept pressed, each reel stop button is pressed, and the start lever 210 is pressed. The impression that the player has for each operation can be strengthened in order of operation. In other words, the player is made to strongly recognize the first operation instruction, which is the operation for receiving the preferential lottery, to surely maintain the depressed state of the one-card insertion button 205, and to strongly recognize the operation of each reel stop button. , the pseudo game can be smoothly progressed, and the player's recognition of the operation instruction of the starting lever 210, which is not directly related to the progress of the pseudo game, can be weakened.

In the pattern (4a), the first operation instruction, the third operation instruction, and the second operation instruction are displayed in order from the front, so that the single insert button 205 is kept pressed, the start lever 210 is operated, and each reel stop button is pressed. The impression that the player has for each operation can be strengthened in the order of pressing. In other words, the player is made to strongly recognize the first operation instruction, which is the operation for receiving the preferential lottery, to surely maintain the depressed state of the one-insert button 205, and strongly recognize the operation of the starting lever 210. By improving the visibility of the right reel 301c indicating the lottery result, interest can be improved, and the player's recognition of the operation instructions of the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b, which do not indicate the lottery result, can be weakened.

In pattern (4a), by displaying the second operation instruction, the first operation instruction, and the third operation instruction in order from the front, each reel stop button is pressed, the single insert button 205 is pressed, and the starting lever 210 is pressed. The impression that the player has for each operation can be strengthened in order of operation. In other words, the operation of each reel stop button is extremely strongly recognized to make the pseudo game proceed smoothly, the player is strongly recognized to the first operation instruction to maintain the pressed state of the one insert button 205 as much as possible, and the pseudo game It is possible to weaken the player's recognition of the operation instruction of the starting lever 210, which is not directly related to the progress.

In the pattern (4a), the second operation instruction, the third operation instruction, and the first operation instruction are displayed in order from the front, so that each reel stop button is pressed, the start lever 210 is operated, and the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed. The impression that the player has for each operation can be strengthened in the order of maintenance. In other words, the operation of each reel stop button is strongly recognized to smoothly progress the pseudo-game, and the operation of the starting lever 210 is strongly recognized to improve the visibility of the right reel 301c indicating the lottery result, thereby improving interest. By weakening the player's recognition of the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving a preferential lottery, excessive payout of medals can be suppressed, and the burden on the hall can be suppressed.

In the pattern (4a), the third operation instruction, the first operation instruction, and the second operation instruction are displayed in order from the front, thereby operating the start lever 210, holding down the one-sheet insertion button 205, and pressing and holding each reel stop button. The impression that the player has for each operation can be strengthened in the order of pressing. In other words, by making the operation of the starting lever 210 extremely strongly recognized, and by improving the visibility of the right reel 301c indicating the lottery result, interest is enhanced, and the player is made to strongly recognize the first operation instruction, thereby making the one-card insertion button 205. is maintained as much as possible, and the player's recognition of the operation instructions of the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b, which do not indicate the lottery result, can be weakened.

In pattern (4a), by displaying the third operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the first operation instruction in order from the front, the operation of the start lever 210, the pressing of each reel stop button, and the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 are performed. The impression that the player has for each operation can be strengthened in the order of maintenance. In other words, the operation of the starting lever 210 is strongly recognized to improve the visibility of the right reel 301c indicating the lottery result, thereby enhancing interest, and the operation of each reel stop button is strongly recognized to smoothly progress the pseudo-game. By weakening the player's recognition of the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving a preferential lottery, excessive payout of medals can be suppressed, and the burden on the hall can be suppressed.

In pattern (4a), the positional relationship before and after the three operation instructions may be a three-block relationship. Specifically, for example, in the portion where the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction overlap, the first operation instruction is displayed in front of the second operation instruction, and the portion where the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction overlap. , the second operation instruction is displayed in front of the third operation instruction, and the third operation instruction is displayed in front of the first operation instruction in the portion where the third operation instruction and the first operation instruction overlap. . However, in this case, in the portion where all of the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction overlap, for example, any one operation instruction may be displayed, or an image other than each operation instruction may be displayed. May be displayed or left blank.

In patterns (4b) to (4d), one operation instruction overlaps another two operation instructions, but the other two operation instructions are displayed without overlapping each other. This gives the player the impression that the three operation instructions are integrated, making it easier for the player to notice the integrated operation instruction, and the other two operation instructions do not overlap each other. Therefore, compared to pattern (4a), it is easier for the player to identify each operation instruction.

In patterns (4e) to (4g), one operation instruction does not overlap two other operation instructions, but the other two operation instructions are displayed in an overlapping manner. As a result, the player can completely distinguish the one operation instruction from the other two operation instructions, and can easily execute the one operation instruction. On the other hand, it gives the player the impression that the other two operation instructions are integrated, and the integrated operation instruction easily catches the player's eye.

In patterns (4b) to (4g), the anteroposterior relationship of the display positions of the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction is the same as described for pattern (1) above. The anteroposterior relationship of the display positions of the three operation instructions is the same as that described in pattern (2) above, and the anteroposterior relationship of the display positions of the second and third operation instructions is the same as that of pattern (3). The content is the same as described.

In the pattern (4h), since the operation instructions are displayed without overlapping each other, the player can easily identify all the operation instructions, so that the operation indicated by each operation instruction can be reliably and easily executed.

It should be noted that, for example, when the images of the one insert button 205, each reel stop button, and the starting lever 210 are displayed as operation instructions, these images start to be displayed with a special effect (for example, the The image may fade in and start to be displayed, or the image of the operation unit disassembled into a plurality of parts may be assembled to form the image of the operation unit and start to be displayed, etc.), The display of the image may be started in the same manner as during display.

For example, an image of an operation instruction started to be displayed with such a special effect is displayed in front of other images of operation instructions. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the image and more reliably perform the operation indicated by the image even during the display of the image with the effect after the start of the display. On the other hand, the image of the other operation instruction may be displayed in front of the image of the operation instruction that started to be displayed with a special effect. As a result, the player can pay attention to the image with the special effect when it is accompanied by the effect, and pay attention to the other image located in front after the effect is finished. To allow a player to recognize instructions in a well-balanced manner.

Further, when the images of the one-sheet insertion button 205, each reel stop button, and the starting lever 210 are displayed as operation instructions, each of these images may have a plurality of display modes. Also, the AT winning expectation may be indicated by these multiple display modes (for example, when the image of the reel stop button with a large size is displayed, the AT winning expectation is high, and the image of the reel stop button with a small size is displayed, the AT winning expectation is low, and when the image of the red 1-card insert button 205 is displayed, the AT winning expectation is high, and the image of the white 1-card insert button 205 is displayed. In some cases, AT winning expectation is low, etc.).

For example, among images having a plurality of display modes, an image with a high AT win expectation is displayed in front of other operation instruction images. As a result, the player can easily recognize the image in which the AT winning expectation is high, and thus the player's expectation is improved. On the other hand, an image of another operation instruction may be displayed in front of such an image with a high AT winning expectation. For example, even if an image of a reel stop button with a high expectation of AT winning is displayed, it is not always possible to win AT, so an image of the one insert button 205 for receiving a preferential lottery. is displayed closer to the player's side to prompt the player to keep pressing the one-card insertion button 205, which is more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the operation of the reel stop button during the pseudo game is an operation performed for the progress of the pseudo game, not an operation for receiving a preferential lottery, especially the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b , it does not indicate the lottery result even if the operation is executed. Therefore, in particular, the image of the operation instruction of the reel stop button can be displayed with the above-described special effect, or by having a plurality of types of display modes as described above. It is possible to increase the expectation and motivation for pressing the .

When a plurality of operation instructions are displayed at the same time, at least part of the timing at which all sounds corresponding to each of the plurality of operation instructions are output may overlap, or only some of the sounds may be output. At least part of the output timings may overlap, or the output timings for all sounds may not overlap at all.

If the output timings of the sounds corresponding to the operation instructions overlap, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize these operation instructions by ear. Increase. On the other hand, with regard to the sound of operation instructions whose output timing does not overlap with the sound of other operation instructions, the player can easily recognize the operation instruction indicated by the sound by ear, and the operation indicated by the operation instruction can be executed more reliably. easier.

Specifically, for example, the sound of an instruction to keep the one-card insertion button 205 pressed for receiving a preferential lottery is overlapped with the sound of other operation instructions so that the player can clearly recognize it. First, for the instruction to press each reel stop button related to the progress of the pseudo game and the sound of the operation instruction of the starting lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reel, in order to improve the sense of speed of the production, at least the output timing Duplicate some.

Also, when a plurality of operation instructions are displayed at the same time, for example, all sounds corresponding to each of the plurality of operation instructions may be output, or only a part of the sounds may be output. By outputting all sounds, it is possible for the player to recognize all instruction contents by ear. Also, the reason why only some of the sounds are output is that if all the sounds are output, the player will not be able to understand the instructions indicated by many of the sounds and will be confused. In the case of outputting only part of the sound, for example, the priority (for example, instruction to keep pressing the single insert button 205 for receiving a preferential lottery> to improve the visibility of the reel showing the lottery result (instruction to operate the starting lever 210) > instruction to press each reel stop button that may not indicate the lottery result) is predetermined in order of priority), and a predetermined number (1 It is preferable to output a sound corresponding to one or two operation instructions.

Further, when outputting sounds corresponding to each of a plurality of operation instructions, each sound may have a volume difference. Also in this case, for example, the priority (for example, an instruction to keep pressing the single insert button 205 for receiving a preferential lottery > an instruction to operate the starting lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reel indicating the lottery result > The order of pressing the reel stop buttons, which may not indicate the lottery result, has a higher priority).

Note that when a plurality of operation instructions are displayed at the same time, at least part of the timing at which all the lamps corresponding to the plurality of operation instructions emit light may overlap, or only some of the lamps may emit light. At least a part of the timing may overlap, or the timing of light emission of all the lamps may not overlap at all.

If the light emission timings of the lamps corresponding to the operation instructions overlap, the player is more likely to hesitate about which operation unit to operate, but since many lamps light up at the same time, the player's sense of expectation is improved. On the other hand, with respect to the operation instruction sound whose emission timing does not overlap with that of other operation instruction lamps, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the operation instruction indicated by the lamp, and it becomes easier for the player to more reliably execute the operation indicated by the operation instruction. .

Specifically, for example, the lamp for instructing to keep the one-card insertion button 205 pressed for preferential treatment in the lottery is overlapped with the light emission of other operation instruction lamps so that the player can clearly recognize it. First, regarding the light emission of the lamp of the operation instruction of the start lever 210 for improving the visibility of the pressing instruction of each reel stop button related to the progress of the pseudo game and the visibility of the reel, in order to improve the player's expectation Overlap at least part of the timing.

Further, when a plurality of operation instructions are displayed at the same time, for example, all lamps corresponding to each of the plurality of operation instructions may be illuminated, or only some of the lamps may be illuminated. By lighting all the lamps, the player can recognize all instruction contents by the lamps. The reason why only some of the lamps are illuminated is that if all the lamps are illuminated, the player cannot understand the instructions indicated by the many lamps and is confused. When only some of the lamps are illuminated, for example, the priority (for example, instruction to keep pressing the single insert button 205 for receiving a preferential lottery> start to improve the visibility of the reel indicating the lottery result Operation instruction of lever 210 > Instruction to press each reel stop button that may not indicate the lottery result) is predetermined in order of priority, and a predetermined number (one or 2), the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction may be lighted.

Further, when the lamps corresponding to each of a plurality of operation instructions are caused to emit light, for example, the light emission patterns of some or all of the lamps may be changed. Also in this case, for example, the priority (for example, an instruction to keep pressing the single insert button 205 for receiving a preferential lottery > an instruction to operate the starting lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reel indicating the lottery result > (Instructions to press each reel stop button, which may not indicate the lottery result, have higher priority) are predetermined, and correspond to a predetermined number (1 to 3) of operation instructions from the lowest priority. It is recommended to change the light emission pattern of the lamp to be used.

Further, for example, when at least part of the lamps to be used overlaps in light emission of the lamps respectively corresponding to a plurality of operation instructions, for example, the lamp corresponding to only one operation instruction among the plurality of operation instructions Light emission is performed. In this case, for example, the priority (for example, an instruction to keep pressing the single insert button 205 for receiving a preferential lottery > instruction to operate the starting lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reel indicating the lottery result> lottery The order of pressing the reel stop buttons, which may not indicate a result, is predetermined), and it is preferable to light the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction with the highest priority. Further, when at least part of the lamps to be used overlaps in the light emission of the lamps corresponding to the plurality of operation instructions, for example, the light emission of the lamps corresponding to the plurality of operation instructions is executed in order, for example. may

[12-10. Relevance between instruction effects for different operation units in CZ 2]
Below, among the three operation instructions that can be displayed simultaneously, the operation instructions are displayed in the following order: an instruction to keep the single insertion button 205 depressed, an operation instruction to the start lever 210, and an operation instruction to each reel stop button. Let's start with an example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 730, the slot machine 1 includes transmissive liquid crystal 301aa, transmissive liquid crystal 301ab, transmissive liquid crystal 301ba, transmissive liquid crystal 301bb, transmissive liquid crystal 301ca, and transmissive liquid crystal 301cb covering the upper and lower stages of each reel. shall be Then, it is assumed that during the simulated game of CZ, an image is displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal, and the visibility of the upper and lower stages of each reel is reduced.

In this example, first, an operation instruction for the one-card insertion button 205 related to the lottery result in CZ is displayed to make the player understand the lottery method. Next, by displaying an operation instruction for the starting lever 210, the player can understand the game property of eye-pushing in the CZ pseudo-game. And finally, the operation instruction for each reel stop button is displayed, and the pseudo game is advanced.

By displaying the operation instruction for the start lever 210 before the operation instruction for each reel stop button, for example, a player who is not good at eye pressing can operate the start lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reels. , and the player who is good at pushing does not dare to operate the starting lever 210, and performs the pushing in the pseudo game with only the middle row of each reel visible. It is possible to provide a way of enjoying a simulated game that matches the skill of the player.

Also, even a player who is good at eye-pushing can smoothly progress the game by performing eye-pushing in a state in which all the pieces on the reel are visible rather than in a state in which only the middle stage of the reel is visible. Therefore, the operation instruction for the starting lever 210 is displayed before the operation instruction for each reel stop button is displayed.

The pattern in which each operation instruction is displayed at the same time, the overlapping of images of each operation instruction in the pattern, and the relationship between sounds and lamps corresponding to each operation instruction are the same as those described above.

[12-11. Relevance between instruction effects for different operation units in CZ 3]
Below, while the three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, the operation instructions are displayed in the following order: an operation instruction for each reel stop button, an instruction to keep the single insertion button 205 depressed, and an operation instruction for the start lever 210. Let's start with an example.

During CZ, by keeping the single-insert button 205 pressed down, a preferential lottery can be received, but some players feel that keeping the button pressed down is a heavy physical burden. Moreover, if the player tries to simulate stop each reel in accordance with the operation instruction of each reel stop button while maintaining the pressed state, there is a possibility that the one-card insertion button 205 is erroneously released.

Therefore, in the CZ of this chapter, up to a predetermined number of times (for example, once) during the CZ, even if the one-insert button 205 is kept pressed down, it is possible to receive a preferential lottery. Specifically, for example, even if the pressing of the single-insert button 205 is interrupted after the hold-down flag is turned on during CZ, the hold-down flag remains on as long as the number of interruptions is within a predetermined number of times. , when the number of times of suspension exceeds a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined time (for example, within 10 seconds) has passed since the suspension, the hold-down flag is set to off.

FIG. 732 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the CZ effect. Mainly, the difference from the presentation in FIG. 717 will be explained. (A) is a state in which only the left reel 301a is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game of the starting game of CZ, for example, a continuation state of FIG. 717(C). Also, in (A), it is assumed that the one-sheet insertion button 205 is kept pressed (that is, the hold-down flag is ON).

(B) shows a state in which pressing of the one-sheet insert button 205 is interrupted from the state of (A). If the pressing of the one-piece insert button 205 is interrupted, the effect displayed on the image display 500 is the same as (A). At the time of (B), the AT lottery has not yet been performed, and even if the pressing of the one-card insertion button 205 is interrupted after the first simulated stop is performed, one card is inserted again before the second simulated stop is performed. Since the AT lottery can be received when the button 205 is continuously pressed, the effect state of (A) is maintained in (B).

(C) shows a state in which the middle reel 301b is pseudo-stopped while the one-sheet insertion button 205 is being interrupted. When the middle reel 301b is stopped while pressing the single insert button 205 is interrupted, the operation instruction for the single insert button 205 displayed from the start of the CZ was emphasized (specifically, Aspects different from the image of the one-insert button 205 displayed from the start of the CZ, such as the size is large) Operation instructions for the one-insert button 205 (for example, the image of the one-insert button 205 and the message "Keep pressing!" message) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that unless the one-card insertion button 205 is kept depressed, the preferential lottery cannot be received.

As explained in FIG. 726, the slot machine 1 is a specification in which the AT lottery during the pseudo game is performed at the time of the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game. Since a lottery using table 1 in FIG. 710 (that is, a lottery in which the AT winning rate is not given preferential treatment) is performed, if the second pseudo-stop is performed while the single-insert button 205 is kept pressed down, this will occur. Thus, in addition to the operation instruction for the one-piece insert button 205 that has been displayed from the beginning, the emphasized operation instruction for the one-piece insert button 205 is displayed.

Therefore, at the timing when the operation instruction for the one-piece insert button 205 is displayed, the one-piece insert button 205 is not pressed, so the operation instruction has the meaning of warning as well as calling attention. (In addition to displaying the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205, it is preferable to simultaneously display a message "Keep pressing!").

However, since the pseudo game itself can proceed without maintaining the pressing of the one-insert button 205, as described above, the operation instruction of the one-insert button that was displayed from the start of the CZ and the emphasized 1 An operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c is also displayed together with an operation instruction for the insert button 205. FIG.

It should be noted that the operation instruction of the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205 is replaced by another operation instruction (in the example of (C), the message "Stop the red 7 in the middle of the right reel!", the image of the right reel stop button 211c, and the The image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 displayed from the start of the CZ) may be superimposed on or may be displayed without superimposing. In the case of overlapping display, the position and manner in which the operation instruction and the other operation instruction are visible (for example, the operation instruction displayed on the front side is displayed translucently or blinks). is desirable.

When the operation instruction for the one-sheet insert button 205 displayed from the start of the CZ and the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet insert button 205 are displayed at the same time, the one-sheet insert displayed from the start of the CZ is displayed. It is desirable to output a voice corresponding to the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 instead of outputting a voice corresponding to the operation instruction of the button 205 . This is because the instruction contents themselves in these two operation instructions are the same, so it is sufficient to output only the warning sound in the operation instruction of the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205 .

(D) is a continuation of (C), in which pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is suspended. This is the same as FIG.

(E) is a continuation of (D), in which pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is suspended. 717(F), except that the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed on the image display 500. FIG. It is considered that the operation instruction to keep the single insert button 205 pressed, which is the operation for receiving the preferential lottery, is more important than the operation instruction of the right reel stop button 211c and the operation instruction of the start lever 210. Therefore, the operation instruction to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 emphasized is continuously displayed.

However, since it is possible to improve the visibility of the right reel 301c and proceed with the pseudo game without maintaining the pressing of the one-insert button 205, the one-insert button that was displayed from the start of the CZ In addition to the operation instruction and the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205, the operation instruction of the right reel stop button 211c and the operation instruction of the start lever 210 are also displayed.

However, there are some players who feel that the physical burden of holding down the single-insert button 205 is heavy and that they do not need to receive preferential lottery. The display of the operation instruction may be erased when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of display. In addition, when the one-card insert button 205 is long pressed again (maintains the pressed state), it is considered that the player has recognized the instruction to press the emphasized one-card insert button 205, so the display is erased. good too. In addition, when the AT lottery during the pseudo game is performed with the one-sheet insertion button 205 pressed and maintained resumed (the second pseudo stop is performed), an advantageous AT using the table 2 in FIG. 710 Since the lottery has been held, the display may be deleted.

Further, the operation instruction of the emphasized one-piece insertion button 205 may be continuously displayed only once for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), or may be continuously displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) and for a predetermined time (for example, 1 seconds) may be displayed repeatedly a plurality of times (for example, 5 times).

(F) is a continuation of (E), in which a predetermined time has passed since the display of the operation instruction for the highlighted one-piece insert button 205 started, or the one-piece insert button 205 has been pressed and held again. be. Since the operation instruction for the highlighted one-piece insertion button 205 has been erased, the state is the same as in FIG. 717(F).

In addition, the last AT lottery in the CZ ends with the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game of the final game of the CZ. Therefore, after the second simulated stop of the simulated game of the final game of CZ, interrupting the pressing of the one-insert button 205 does not affect the lottery, so even if the pressing of the one-insert button is interrupted, it is emphasized. However, it is not necessary to display the operation instruction for the one-sheet insertion button 205 .

It should be noted that the freeze may be applied without fail after all the reels of the main game are stopped in the final game of CZ. For example, during the freeze, on the image display 500, "Congratulations!" You may display the display which shows a result, such as. It should be noted that during the freeze (during the period from when all the reels are stopped until the next game is started (reels are rotated)), even if pressing of the one-card insertion button 205 is interrupted, the emphasized one-card insertion button 205 operation instructions may not be displayed.

Although an example has been described in which the hold-down flag is not set to OFF even if the holding of the one-sheet-insert button 205 is interrupted until the predetermined number of times, when the predetermined number of times is a plurality of times, the emphasized 1 There is a possibility that the operation instruction of the insert button 205 may be displayed multiple times (if it is displayed multiple times in one game, or it is displayed only once in one game, may appear multiple times in an advantageous state to be executed).

Moreover, when the operation instruction for the one-piece insert button 205 that is emphasized is displayed, there is a possibility that a new opportunity for displaying the operation instruction for the one-piece insert button 205 that is emphasized will be met. In this case, when the new opportunity is satisfied, the operation instruction for the emphasized one-piece insert button 205 may be newly displayed, or the operation instruction for the already emphasized one-piece insert button 205 is displayed. Therefore, a new operation display may not be performed, or a new operation display may not be performed, but the display time of the new operation display may be added to the display time of the already displayed emphasized operation instruction.

[12-12. Relevance between instruction effects for different operation units in CZ 4]
Below, while the three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, the operation instructions are displayed in the order of an operation instruction for each reel stop button, an operation instruction for the start lever 210, and an instruction for keeping the single insert button 205 depressed. Let's start with an example. Also in the CZ of this chapter, up to a predetermined number of times (for example, once) during the CZ, even if the one-insert button 205 is kept pressed down, it is possible to receive a preferential lottery.

FIG. 733 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the CZ effect. Mainly, the difference from the presentation in FIG. 717 will be explained. (A) is a state in which the left reel and the middle reel are pseudo-stopped in a pseudo-game during CZ, which is the same state as in FIG. 717 (D). An operation instruction for the one-card insertion button 205 and an operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c, which have been displayed since the start of CZ, are displayed. Also, in (A), the one-sheet insertion button 205 is kept pressed.

(B) is a continuation of (A) and is in the same state as in FIG. 717 (E). In addition to the operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the operation instruction of the right reel stop button 211c displayed from the start of Z, there are three operation instructions of the start lever 210 for improving the visibility of the reel. is displayed. Also, in (B), the one-sheet insertion button 205 is kept pressed.

(C) is the state of (B) in which the one-sheet insertion button 205 is suspended. In the state where three operation instructions are displayed, for example, if the pressed state of the one-piece insert button 205 is interrupted, the operation instruction of the one-piece insert button 205 displayed is emphasized from the start of CZ (specifically Specifically, a mode different from the image of the one-sheet insert button 205 displayed from the start of the CZ, such as the size is large) Operation instruction for the one-sheet insert button 205 (for example, the image of the one-sheet insert button 205 and "press Continue!” is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that unless the one-card insertion button 205 is kept depressed, the preferential lottery cannot be received.

As explained in FIG. 726, the slot machine 1 is a specification in which the AT lottery during the pseudo game is performed at the time of the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game. , a lottery using table 1 in FIG. 710 (that is, a lottery in which the AT winning rate is not given preferential treatment) is performed. 710, there is a risk that the lottery using table 2 in FIG. , and in addition to the highlighted one-sheet insertion button 205 are displayed.

Therefore, at the timing when the operation instruction for the one-piece insert button 205 is displayed, the one-piece insert button 205 is not pressed, so the operation instruction has the meaning of warning as well as calling attention. (In addition to displaying the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205, it is preferable to simultaneously display a message "Keep pressing!").

However, since the pseudo game itself can proceed without maintaining the pressing of the one-insert button 205, as described above, the operation instruction of the one-insert button that was displayed from the start of the CZ and the emphasized 1 An operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c is also displayed together with an operation instruction for the insert button 205. FIG.

It should be noted that the operation instruction of the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205 is different from other operation instructions (in the example of (C), the message "If you want to check where the red 7 has stopped, operate the start lever!" The image of the lever 210, the image of the right reel stop button 211c, and the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 displayed from the start of the CZ) may be superimposed or displayed without being superimposed. However, when they are displayed in a superimposed manner, the position and manner in which the operation instruction and the other operation instruction are visible (for example, the operation instruction displayed on the front side is displayed translucently or blinks). etc.).

When the operation instruction for the one-sheet insert button 205 displayed from the start of the CZ and the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet insert button 205 are displayed at the same time, the one-sheet insert displayed from the start of the CZ is displayed. It is desirable to output a voice corresponding to the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 instead of outputting a voice corresponding to the operation instruction of the button 205 . This is because the instruction contents themselves in these two operation instructions are the same, so it is sufficient to output only the warning sound in the operation instruction of the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205 .

It should be noted that, in the example of FIG. 733, after (B) (that is, after the second pseudo stop) to interrupt the pressing of the single insert button 205, the AT lottery in the pseudo game has ended, that is, the Lottery using table 2 in FIG. 710 (that is, lottery in which the AT winning rate is preferentially treated) is performed in the pseudo game. In other words, by the time after the second simulated stop of the simulated game of the next game, it is possible to restart holding down the single insert button 205 and receive the lottery using the table 2 of FIG. 710 again in the simulated game. be.

Therefore, for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the pressing of the single-sheet insert button 205 was interrupted in the state (B), even if the operation instruction for the emphasized single-sheet insert button 205 is displayed. Good, in the state of (B), when the pressing of the one-insert button 205 is interrupted and a predetermined operation up to the second pseudo-stop of the pseudo-game of the next game is executed (for example, the (pseudo-game It is also possible to display an operation instruction for the emphasized one-card insertion button 205 when the lever is turned on (that is, when a lottery for a winning combination is executed).

Note that the emphasized operation instruction for the one-piece insert button 205 may be erased after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since it appeared, or may be erased at the timing when the one-piece insert button 205 is held down again. It is preferable to erase at the timing (the timing at which the second pseudo stop is performed) when the pseudo game lottery is performed in a state where the one-sheet insertion button 205 is resumed to be pressed. Further, the operation instruction of the emphasized one-piece insertion button 205 may be continuously displayed only once for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), or may be continuously displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) and for a predetermined time (for example, 1 seconds) may be displayed repeatedly a plurality of times (for example, 5 times).

In (D), since the one-piece insert button 205 is held down again, the emphasized operation instruction for the one-piece insert button 205 is erased, and the state is the same as in FIG. 717(F).

In addition, the last AT lottery in the CZ ends with the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game of the final game of the CZ. Therefore, after the second simulated stop of the simulated game of the final game of CZ, interrupting the pressing of the one-insert button 205 does not affect the lottery, so even if the pressing of the one-insert button is interrupted, it is emphasized. However, it is not necessary to display the operation instruction for the one-sheet insertion button 205 .

It should be noted that the freeze may be applied without fail after all the reels of the main game are stopped in the final game of CZ. For example, during the freeze, on the image display 500, "Congratulations!" You may display the display which shows a result, such as. Note that even if pressing of the one-piece insert button 205 is interrupted while the freeze (the display) is being performed, the emphasized operation instruction for the one-piece insert button 205 may not be displayed.

Although an example has been described in which the hold-down flag is not set to OFF even if the holding of the one-sheet-insert button 205 is interrupted until the predetermined number of times, when the predetermined number of times is a plurality of times, the emphasized 1 There is a possibility that the instruction to operate the insert button 205 will be displayed multiple times.

Moreover, when the operation instruction for the one-piece insert button 205 that is emphasized is displayed, there is a possibility that a new opportunity for displaying the operation instruction for the one-piece insert button 205 that is emphasized will be met. In this case, when the new opportunity is satisfied, the operation instruction for the emphasized one-piece insert button 205 may be newly displayed, or the operation instruction for the already emphasized one-piece insert button 205 is displayed. Therefore, a new operation display may not be performed, or a new operation display may not be performed, but the display time of the new operation display may be added to the display time of the already displayed emphasized operation instruction.

[12-13. Relevance between instruction effects for different operation units in CZ 5]
Below, while the three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, the operation instructions are displayed in the order of the operation instruction for the start lever 210, the instruction to keep pressing the single insertion button 205, and the operation instruction for each reel stop button. Let's start with an example. The CZs in this chapter and the next chapter differ in the specifications of the CZ from the example described above. Hereinafter, CZ in this chapter and the next chapter will also be referred to as CZ2.

As shown in FIG. 735 and the like, the slot machine 1 in this chapter and the next chapter has transmissive liquid crystals 301aa, 301ab, 301ba, 301bb, 301ca, and 301cb covering the upper and lower stages of each reel. , shall be provided. Then, it is assumed that during the simulated game of CZ, an image is displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal, and the visibility of the upper and lower stages of each reel is reduced.

As for CZ2, a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games, but ends with an AT winning game when AT winning) are executed similarly to CZ, and a pseudo game is performed at the start of each game. In the simulated game of CZ2 as well, an instruction to aim for red 7 appears in the middle of each reel. However, in the simulated game of CZ2, when the player presses the reel stop button, the reels do not slip and stop (so-called "bitter stop") in the frames at the pressing timing. That is, in the simulated game, the player can stop the red 7 in the middle stage without fail by pushing the red 7 to the middle stage.

In the pseudo game of CZ2, in addition to or instead of the AT lottery at the time of the second pseudo stop executed in CZ, at the time of the first pseudo stop, the second pseudo stop, and the third pseudo stop, red 7 is stuck in the middle stage, an AT lottery is executed. This AT lottery is also called the B-5 lottery. In other words, CZ2 has a game quality that requires the technique of pushing red 7 to the middle row during a simulated game.

In addition, the pseudo game of CZ2 is a game that pushes the red 7 to the middle row, but an image is displayed on each transparent liquid crystal, and the visibility of the upper and lower rows of each reel is hindered, and only the middle row can be seen (so-called 1 With the window open), many players find it difficult to push.

Therefore, in CZ2 as well as in CZ, when the starting lever 210 is operated during the pseudo game, the image of each transmissive liquid crystal is erased, and all frames of each reel are visible (so-called all windows (3 windows) open state) becomes. However, in order to give an incentive to players who are good at eye-pushing, the AT lottery value when red 7 is stuck in the middle row with all windows open is higher than the AT lottery value when red 7 is stuck in the middle row with one window. It is assumed that the AT lottery value in the case of stopping at 10 is given preferential treatment.

In addition, in the state where the one-sheet insert button 205 is not kept pressed (that is, when the pressed state flag is off), the one-sheet insert button 205 is higher than the AT lottery value when the red 7 is stuck in the middle row. It is assumed that the AT lottery value in the case where red 7 is stuck in the middle stage while the pressed state of is maintained (that is, the pressed state flag is ON) is preferentially treated.

FIG. 734 is an example of an AT lottery table showing lottery values of an AT lottery executed when red 7 is stuck in the middle row at each pseudo stop of CZ2. As described above, the AT lottery value with one window open is more favorable than the AT lottery value with all windows open (table 4 is more favorable than table 3, and table 6 is more favorable than table 5). is being used). In addition, as described above, the lottery value obtained when the single-insert button 205 is kept pressed is more favorable than the lottery value obtained when the button 205 is not maintained pressed. (Table 6 is treated more favorably than

In the example of FIG. 734, the lottery value (5000) in the case where red 7 is stopped by opening one window without maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insert button 205 (Table 4) is the pressed state of the one-sheet insert button 205. is higher than the lottery value (3500) in the case of keeping all the windows open and red 7 getting stuck (Table 5). In other words, if one button 205 is kept depressed and red 7 is stuck in the middle row, and one window is open and red 7 is stuck, red 7 will drop with one window open. Stopping the bitterness has a greater contribution rate to the preferential treatment of the lottery value of the B-5 lottery. There are many players who feel that it is more difficult to stop the red 7 with one window open than to stop the red 7 in the middle stage while keeping the one-insert button 205 pressed, and it is more difficult. This is to give incentives for performing

CZ2 will be described below (mainly the differences from CZ). 735 and 736 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect of CZ2. FIG. 735(A) shows a state in which all reels are stopped in a game in which CZ2 is won. In the game in which CZ2 is won, as in the game in which CZ is won, a freeze effect is generated for 5 seconds from the time when the reels are completely stopped. cannot be started.

When the freeze effect is started, a message indicating that CZ2 has been won is displayed on the image display 500. - 特許庁For example, CZ2 is continuously executed for a maximum of 10 games, and when AT is won, CZ2 is terminated in that game and AT starts from the next game.

(B) is a state in which all the reels of the game in which CZ2 is won are stopped, and is a continuation of (A). In (B), the freeze effect continues from (A). In CZ2, a message is displayed indicating that the player can obtain an advantageous result by pushing hard.

(C) is a state in which all the reels of the game in which CZ2 is won are stopped, and is a continuation of (B). For example, from the timing of (C), an image is displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal and one window is opened.

In (C), by operating the starting lever 210, an operation instruction ("starting lever You can change the size of the window by pressing. If you hit the button successfully with one window, it's super hot!" and an image of the starting lever 210 with an arrow) are displayed.

As described above, the selection of one window open state or all windows open state is the operation that most contributes to the lottery value of the B-5 lottery. appears earlier than the operation instruction for the one-card insertion button 205 and the operation instruction for each reel stop button.

In addition, since it is necessary for the player to confirm whether or not he/she can successfully push the button with one window open, the operation of the start lever 210 is performed before CZ2 starts as shown in (C). An instruction (that is, an operation instruction for increasing the visibility of the reel effect) is performed.

For example, when the start lever 210 is operated before the start of CZ2 as shown in (C), the image of each transmissive liquid crystal may be erased and all windows may be opened. Also, in this case, the image may be displayed again on each transmissive liquid crystal before the start of CZ2 to restore the opening of one window. As a result, the player can confirm the one-window open state and the all-window open state, making it easier to decide which one to play the simulated game. Also, before the start of CZ2, the state with one window open and the state with all windows open may be checked multiple times.

It should be noted that, during the simulated game of CZ2, it is always possible to erase the image displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal, so the operation instruction for the starting lever 210 (for example, the image of the starting lever 210) can be executed during CZ (at least It is desirable that the display be continued until the image of each transmissive liquid crystal is erased).

735 and 736, an example will be described in which the starting lever 210 is not operated, that is, the pseudo-game is progressed in the state of one window in which an image is displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal.

(D) is the state (the state when the lever is turned on) in which the freeze effect up to (C) is canceled and the game of CZ2 is started. In CZ2, a pseudo-game starts when the lever is turned on. An operation instruction (a message "If you keep pressing 1 BET, you will get more preferential treatment in the lottery!" and an image of the one-card insertion button 205 with an arrow) is further displayed as an image. Displayed on body 500 .

In addition, by continuing to press the one-piece insert button 205 during the simulated game of CZ2, it is possible to receive a preferential AT lottery, so an operation instruction for the one-piece insert button 205 during CZ2 (for example, insert one image of button 205) is preferably displayed continuously. Also, after (D), it is desirable that a telop image indicating an instruction to keep pressing the one-sheet insert button 205 is displayed on the image display 500 as shown in FIG.

(E) is the state at the start of the simulated game of CZ2, and is the continuation state of (D). An operation instruction for pressing each reel stop button (a message “Aim for red 7!” and an image of each reel stop button with an effect) is further displayed on the image display 500 . In the pseudo game of CZ2, the stop order of the reels does not matter, that is, even if the reels other than the right reel 301c are stopped in the third pseudo-stop, the lottery will not be disadvantageous.

(F) is a state in which the left reel 301a is pseudo-stopped according to the operation instruction for each reel stop button that appeared in (E). In addition to the three operation instructions, an image of the main character is displayed. In (F), since the red 7 was successfully stuck in the middle row of the left reel 301a and the B-5 lottery was accepted, for example, the message "GOOD!!" be. If red 7 fails to stop in the middle row, the B-5 lottery cannot be accepted, so a message "BAD..." is displayed as shown in Fig. 736 (F'). be done.

In addition, for example, when red 7 is pseudo-stopped in the middle stage (that is, when the B-5 lottery is received) while the single-insert button 205 is not kept pressed, or when the stop position is simply pseudo-stop 732, the operation instruction for the single insert button 205 is displayed on the image display 500 as shown in FIG. may This is to have the player receive a more preferential lottery.

FIG. 736(G) shows a state in which all the reels are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. The image display 500 displays a message indicating that the result of the AT lottery will be announced by hitting the MAX input button 206 repeatedly, and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow.

(H) is a state in which all reels are pseudo-stopped in a pseudo game, and is a state following (G). In (I), the freeze effect is continuing. An image display 500 displays a message instructing to repeatedly hit the MAX input button 206 and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow.

(I) is a state in which all the reels are pseudo-stopped in a pseudo-game, and is a continuation of (H). It is assumed that the player has followed the instruction to repeatedly hit the MAX input button 206 . The image display 500 displays an image of the main character wearing an aura and a message (Yes!!) indicating that the AT has been won.

In addition, when the MAX input button 206 is not hit repeatedly, the AT lottery result is notified after the end of the freeze effect and by the end of the normal game started immediately after the pseudo game. If the AT has not been won, for example, even if the MAX input button 206 is hit repeatedly, the main character will not be wrapped in an aura and will collapse by the end of the freeze effect.

In addition, in order to leave the player with an aftertaste of the execution of the CZ, the instruction effect of the start lever 210 may be displayed even at the start of the normal game after the end of the CZ across the CZ. However, in a normal game that is not a pseudo-game, if the reels are hidden, the difficulty of eye-pushing increases and there is a possibility that the player may miss a small winning combination, which is disadvantageous to the player. should be displayed on At this time, the images simulating the respective transmissive liquid crystals interfere with the visual recognition of the effect image displayed on the image display 500, and when the start lever 210 is operated, the images simulating the respective transmissive liquid crystals are erased from the image display 500. This is done so that the visibility of the effect image is improved.

[12-14. Relevance between instruction effects for different operation units in CZ 6]
Below, while the three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, the operation instructions are displayed in the order of the operation instruction for the start lever 210, the operation instruction for each reel stop button, and the instruction for keeping the single insertion button 205 depressed. Let's start with an example. The CZs in this chapter and the next chapter differ in the specifications of the CZ from the example described above. Hereinafter, CZ2 is executed also in this chapter.

In the simulated game of CZ2, it is difficult to keep Red 7 stuck in the middle row with one window open, while the AT win rate is not high with all windows open. Therefore, in CZ2 of this chapter, before the first simulated stop in which the B-5 lottery can be executed, a practice effect for practicing the hard push is executed. The practice performance is realized by a pseudo-game in which the reels come to a halt, but the AT lottery is not executed during the practice performance.

Also, in the practice effect, by operating the starting lever 210, the image of each transmissive liquid crystal can be erased and the state of one window open can be changed to the state of all the windows open, so that the player can change his/her own. It is possible to confirm in advance whether the eye pressing skill is suitable for opening one window or opening all windows through the practice effect.

FIG. 737 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the effect of CZ2. Fig. 737 (D2) shows a state in which the pseudo-game of the practice effect has started, which is a continuation state of Fig. 735 (C). When the practice effect is started, the reels are pseudo-rotated, and each reel stop button becomes effective. An operation instruction to press each reel stop button (a message “Start practice! Aim for red 7!”, and an image of each reel stop button with an effect) is displayed on the image display 500 .

(E2) is a state in which the left reel 301a is first simulated stopped in the practice effect. Although I tried to press the eye with one window open, the red 7 was not stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 301a. and make it three windows!" is displayed to prompt the player to operate the starting lever 210 again. As a result, it is possible to carry out eye pressing with a degree of difficulty suitable for the player (one window open or all windows open).

(F2) is a state in which all the reels are pseudo-stopped in the practice effect. Since the actual simulated game (that is, a simulated game in which the B-5 lottery can be executed at each simulated stop) will start from now on, an operation instruction for the start lever 210 and an operation instruction for each reel stop button are displayed. In the practice effect, if the starting lever 210 is operated to change the state to open all the windows, for example, in (F2), an image is displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal, and the state is returned to the state in which one window is open. . In addition, in one practice, there are players who can not decide whether to open one window or all windows, and players who are not confident in pushing, so it is possible to execute multiple practice effects in one simulated game. good too.

(G2) is a state in which the actual simulated game in CZ2 has started. For example, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the end of the practice performance, or a predetermined operation unit (for example, performance button 204) is operated, the reels are simulated to rotate, and the actual simulated game starts. (G2) is the same as FIG. 735(D) except that the image of each reel stop button is displayed as the operation instruction image. After (G2), transition to FIG. 735(E).

[13. Seesaw game production]
The seesaw game effect executed in the slot machine 1 of this chapter will be described below. The reel arrangement in the slot machine 1 of this chapter is the same as that shown in FIG. Although the details will be described later, in the seesaw game effect, the medals move to the seesaw function mounted on the slot machine 1, and when the player operates the starting lever 210, the angle of the seesaw part in the seesaw function is adjusted. can be done. If the medals can be retained on the seesaw portion for a predetermined time or more, the seesaw game effect is successful, and advantageous results can be obtained for the player.

On the other hand, if the medals cannot be retained on the seesaw portion for the predetermined time and the medals are dropped from either end of the seesaw portion, the seesaw game effect has failed. unable to obtain favorable results.

In principle, when the seesaw game effect that wins during the normal game (when the AT flag is OFF) is successful, a lottery for entering the AT is performed. In addition, when the seesaw game effect that wins during the AT game (when the AT flag is ON) is successful, a lottery for adding the number of AT games is basically performed.

[13-2. Slot machine equipped with a seesaw function]
The structure of the slot machine 1 on which the seesaw accessory is mounted will be described below. FIG. 738 is a perspective view of slot machine 1 equipped with a seesaw accessory. FIG. 739 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine 1 (excluding the outer body 100) on which the seesaw accessory is mounted. FIG. 740 is a front view showing an outline of a seesaw accessory.

In FIGS. 738 and 739, of the configurations already explained with the exploded perspective view of the slot machine in FIG. 590 and the perspective view of the slot machine in FIG. , the description and description of the reference numerals are omitted. Also, in FIG. 739, the outer body 100 is the same as the outer body 100 in FIG. 590, so the description is omitted. Furthermore, for convenience of explanation, the description of the later-described door portion 555 is omitted in FIG. 739 .

The slot machine 1 of this chapter has a box-shaped seesaw function 550 of substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The seesaw accessory 550 is attached to the upper left part of the transparent plate 214a when viewed from the rear. The image display body 500 of this chapter has a concave portion 500a for storing the seesaw function 550 in the upper right part in the front view. It has a claw portion 556 . The seesaw box 551 has a door portion 555 that can be opened and closed on the back side.

The seesaw portion 552 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape whose longitudinal direction is the horizontal direction in a front view. The seesaw portion 552 has a convex portion along the longitudinal side of the seesaw portion 552 on the front side in the front view to prevent medals from falling forward in the front view. Further, the seesaw portion 552 is provided with a weight sensor (not shown) for detecting whether medals are staying on the claw portion 556 . A movable piece 552 a and a movable piece 552 b are provided along both side surfaces of the seesaw portion 552 . The movable piece 552a and the movable piece 552b can move vertically upward.

The shaft portion 553 fixes the seesaw portion 552 to the seesaw box 551 . A stepping motor (not shown) rotatable in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front is mounted on a fixing portion 553a that fixes the shaft portion 553 and the seesaw portion 552 together. The angle of the seesaw portion 552 can be adjusted in the left-right direction in front view by rotating the stepping motor in the left-right direction in front view according to the amount of operation of the start lever 210 in the left-right direction.

A stepping motor (not shown) rotatable in the front view depth direction is mounted on the fixed portion 553a. The seesaw portion 552 can be tilted in the front view depth direction by detecting the long press of the effect button at a predetermined timing and rotating the stepping motor in the front view depth direction.

The claw portion 556 is provided on the line of intersection between the upper surface of the seesaw box 551 and the right side surface when viewed from the front, and extends in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. The claw portion 556 is provided at substantially the same position as the seesaw portion 552 in the depth direction. Moreover, the claw portion 556 has a tip portion 557 that is a movable piece. Further, the claw portion 556 is provided with a weight sensor (not shown) for detecting whether medals are staying on the claw portion 556 .

A seesaw success tube 558 and a seesaw failure tube 559 are provided on the bottom of the seesaw box 551 . The seesaw success tube 558 has an opening 558a extending rearward along the long side of the bottom surface of the seesaw box 551 . The bottom surface of the seesaw box 551 is formed with an opening 559 a directly connected to the seesaw failure tube 559 .

The internal diameters of the seesaw success tube 558 and the seesaw failure tube 559 are larger than the medal diameter. The ends of the seesaw success tube 558 and the seesaw failure tube 559 that are not connected to the seesaw box are led to the return gutter 213 . The seesaw success tube 558 and the seesaw failure tube 559 are equipped with sensors (not shown) for detecting medals that have passed. Note that the seesaw success tube 558 and the seesaw failure tube 559 are desirably made of a transparent material so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the pattern display device 300 . Note that in FIG. 738, the seesaw success tube 558 and the seesaw failure tube 559 are omitted because they are made of a transparent material.

In addition, an opening/closing member (not shown) is provided on the medal gutter 212 in this chapter. Normally, the opening/closing member is closed, but when the opening/closing member is opened, the medal gutter 212 has a size that allows medals to pass through. Form an opening. Further, the opening/closing member is equipped with a sensor capable of detecting medals when the medals pass through the opening formed when opened.

The slot machine 1 includes a conveyor 561 that starts from the vertically downward position of the opening/closing member and extends to the left in the rear view, and a claw part 556 of the seesaw accessory 550 that starts from the left end of the conveyor 561 in the rear view. and a conveyor 562 extending therefrom.

The transport path of medals in the seesaw game effect will be described below. In the game in which the seesaw game effect starts, the player needs to insert four medals. In the game, when the insertion sensor 207b detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 and the main board 409 receives the detection signal of the third medal, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 opens and closes the medal gutter 212. The member is released, the conveyor 561 and the conveyor 562 are operated counterclockwise in rear view, and the operation of the starting lever 210 (up and down operation) becomes effective, and the game can be progressed.

When the fourth medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 203 in a state in which the game can be progressed (a state in which three medals have been inserted), the opening and closing member on the medal gutter 212 is opened for the corresponding medal. The medals drop onto the conveyor 561 from the opening formed by the action, and are conveyed onto the conveyor 562 by the conveyor 561 and conveyed to the claw portion 556 of the seesaw accessory 550 by the conveyor 562 . The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 closes the opening/closing member upon receiving the medal detection signal from the sensor provided on the opening/closing member.

In the case of inserting medals from the credit (storage device), after the prescribed number of three medals are inserted from the credit (storage device), the opening/closing member is opened and one medal is inserted. falls onto the conveyor 561 .

At this point, the angle formed by the claw portion 556 and the tip portion 557 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 90°), and the claw portion 556 can hold the conveyed fourth medal. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives a medal detection signal from the sensor provided on the claw portion 556 for a predetermined time or longer, the CPU 1110 operates the starting lever 210 for adjusting the inclination of the seesaw portion 552 (for advancing the game). (left and right operations different from the up and down operations) are enabled. Moreover, both the up-down operation and the left-right operation of the starting lever 210 may be enabled when the third medal is inserted.

Further, when the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives a medal detection signal from the sensor provided on the claw portion 556 for a predetermined time or longer, the CPU 1110 stops the conveyors 561 and 562 .

After the predetermined timing of the seesaw game effect, when the player operates (for example, pressing the start lever 210), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 detects that the angle between the claw portion 556 and the tip portion 557 is a predetermined value (for example, 180°) or more, the medals held by the claws 556 fall to the seesaw portion 552 . Also, since the starting lever 210 is pressed (up and down operation) with three medals inserted, a lottery for a winning combination is performed and the game is started.

When the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 does not receive the medal detection signal from the sensor provided on the claw portion 556 for a predetermined time or longer, the CPU 1110 restores the angle formed between the claw portion 556 and the tip portion 557. The tip 557 is activated.

If the medal falls from either end of the seesaw portion 552 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after starting to stay in the seesaw portion 552, the medal passes through the seesaw failure tube 559 from the opening 559a and is returned. It moves to the gutter 213 and returns the fourth medal to the player. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives the detection signal from the sensor provided in the seesaw failure tube 559, it transmits to the sub board 510 a signal indicating that the seesaw game effect has failed, and the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 A performance corresponding to failure of the seesaw game performance is executed.

When a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the medal started staying on the seesaw portion 552 without falling, the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 moves the movable pieces 552a and 552b of the seesaw portion 552 vertically upward. operate to The movable piece 552a and the movable piece 552b after the action serve as walls at both ends of the seesaw portion 552, preventing medals from falling from both ends of the seesaw portion 552. Further, the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 operates a stepping motor provided in the seesaw portion 552 and capable of rotating in the left-right direction in a front view to return the angle of the seesaw portion 552 to the horizontal.

The CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 opens the door portion 552 to the rear side, and operates a stepping motor provided in the seesaw portion 552 that is rotatable in the front view depth direction according to the player's operation, thereby opening the seesaw portion 552. Tilt in the front view depth direction. As a result, the medals staying on the seesaw portion 552 pass through the seesaw success pipe 558 through the opening 558a and move to the return gutter 213, and the fourth medal is returned to the player.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives the detection signal from the sensor provided in the seesaw success tube 558, it transmits to the sub board 510 a signal indicating that the seesaw game effect has succeeded, and the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 An effect corresponding to the success of the seesaw game effect is executed.

Further, when the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409 receives a detection signal from a sensor provided in the seesaw success tube 558, it operates a stepping motor provided in the seesaw portion 552, which is rotatable in the depth direction when viewed from the front. The inclination of the portion 552 in the depth direction in the front view is restored (horizontally). The transport path of the medals in the seesaw game effect has been described above.

[13-3. Overview of Seesaw Game Production]
Various tables for realizing the seesaw game effect will be described below. FIG. 741 is an example of a minor combination lottery table for the slot machine 1 of this chapter. In the minor combination lottery table in FIG. 741, the payout number of the pressing order bells is basically nine, but it changes depending on the pressing order mode and the game situation. Details will be described later.

FIG. 742 is an example of a seesaw game effect entry lottery table. The seesaw game effect entry lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409, for example. In the seesaw game effect entry lottery table, the lottery value for winning the seesaw game effect in games other than games in which the seesaw game effect is executed (including normal games and AT games) is defined for each minor hand won in the game. It is

During the normal game, in addition to the AT winning from the seesaw game effect, for example, an AT first winning lottery using the AT first winning lottery table of FIG. 707 is performed.

Figures 743 and 744 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a seesaw game effect performed during a normal game, and show an example of a case where the seesaw game effect fails. When the seesaw game effect is won in the normal game, when the reels of the normal game are all stopped, an effect is performed to notify that the seesaw game effect has been won. state.

In FIG. 743(A), the lost symbols are stopped on the symbol variation display device 300 . A message is displayed on the image display 500 indicating that the seesaw game effect has been won and that if the seesaw game effect is successful, the AT will be won. FIG. 743(A) to FIG. 744(I), which will be described later, show the state when all the reels of the normal game are stopped, and the seesaw game effect itself has not started.

It should be noted that if the push order bell is won during the execution of the seesaw game effect that was won in the normal game, no matter which push order bell is won, the reverse push (that is, the order of the right reel 301c, the middle reel 301b, and the left reel 301a) 743(B), the reel stop control is changed so that 3 coins are paid out when the game is terminated by pressing the reverse reel. A message is displayed on the image display 500 indicating that the game can be progressed without reducing medals. Also, in FIG. 743(B), a reverse push guide image (consisting of a leftward arrow and numbers indicating the stop order of each reel displayed in the arrow) is displayed in the area corresponding to the upper part of each reel of the image display 500. Press order navigation) is displayed.

In FIG. 743(C), a message is displayed on the image display 500 indicating that the seesaw game effect will be explained. In FIG. 743(D), a message is displayed on the image display 500 indicating that it is necessary to insert four medals into the medal selector 207 in the seesaw game effect.

In FIG. 743(E), a message indicating that when four medals are inserted into the medal selector 207, the fourth medal will move to the seesaw accessory 550, and an image simulating the seesaw accessory is displayed. It is displayed on the display 500 . In FIG. 743(F), a message indicating that the fourth medal will be returned to the medal receiving tray 201 via the return gutter 213 when the seesaw game effect is completed, and an image simulating a seesaw accessory are displayed as images. Displayed on body 500 .

In FIG. 744(G), a message is displayed on the image display 500 prompting the user to operate the starting lever 210 to adjust the inclination of the seesaw section 552 and to keep the medals on the seesaw section 552 for five seconds. In addition, by displaying an image simulating the starting lever 210 on the image display body 500, the player is urged to operate the starting lever 210, and by operating the starting lever 210 to the left and right, the seesaw portion 552 tilts. change.

In FIG. 744(H), a message indicating whether or not medals are likely to fall from the seesaw portion 552 (that is, whether the expectation is low or high) is indicated by the emission color of the LED mounted on the seesaw portion 552; , and an image simulating a seesaw accessory are displayed on the image display 500 .

In FIG. 744(I), there is guidance for inserting four medals, the fourth inserted medal stays on the claw portion 556 of the seesaw accessory 550, and the tip portion 557 operates when the starting lever 210 is operated. A message is displayed on the image display 500 indicating that the medal will move from the claw portion 556 to the seesaw portion 550 by pressing. Also, an image simulating a seesaw accessory 550 is displayed on the image display 500 .

FIG. 744(J) shows the state of the next game of FIG. 744(I), that is, the state of the game in which the seesaw game effect is performed when the lever is turned on. The seesaw game effect is realized by a pseudo-game started by turning on the lever, and during the pseudo-game, the reels rotate reversely in a frozen state (that is, an invalid state in which the reels do not stop even if each stop button is pressed). In FIG. 744(J), medals are staying on the seesaw portion 552 . In addition, in a game in which a seesaw game effect is executed, a reverse push guide image (an image with a number written inside a left-pointing arrow), a gauge indicating the remaining medal retention time until AT acquisition, a cheering message, is displayed on the image display 500 .

In FIG. 744(K), the medal could not stay in the seesaw part 552 for 5 seconds and was dropped into the seesaw failure tube 559, and the sensor in the seesaw failure tube 559 detected the medal, that is, the seesaw game effect. failed to acquire an AT.

In FIG. 744(K), a reverse-press guidance image, a message indicating that the seesaw game effect has failed (“Unfortunately…hope for next time!”), and a character image indicating that the seesaw game effect has failed (folding fan ) are displayed on the image display 500 .

After a predetermined time from when the sensor in the seesaw failure tube 559 detects the medal, the frozen state is released (i.e., the stop button becomes effective), and when the stop button is pressed, for example, the missing eye or the previous stop eye stops. Then, when the pseudo game is completed and a predetermined operation unit (eg, starting lever 210 or MAX input button 206) is operated or a predetermined time (eg, 5 seconds) elapses, this game (normal game in which the reel rotates 4 forwards) starts.

Figures 745 and 746 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a seesaw game effect performed during a normal game, showing an example of a successful seesaw game effect. Fig. 745(K') shows a state continued from Fig. 744(J), in which the seesaw game effect is successful (that is, medals can be retained on the seesaw portion 552 for 5 seconds). In FIG. 745(K'), the movable pieces 552a and 552b of the seesaw portion 552 are lifted, and the tilt of the seesaw portion 552 is horizontally fixed. Also, the door portion 555 is opened. The reel is also stopped.

In addition, in FIG. 745(K'), an effect button long press guide image and a reverse press guide image (that is, two operation guide images) are displayed. The effect button long press guidance image is a message indicating that if the effect button 204 is kept pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) or more, the seesaw portion 552 tilts in the depth direction when viewed from the front and the medal moves to the seesaw success tube 558 . and an image imitating the effect button 204 with an effect and an arrow. Also, the image display body 500 displays a character celebrating winning an AT with a folding fan turned sideways.

Note that the length of time the effect button 204 is pressed for a long time until the seesaw portion 552 tilts may not be the predetermined time but may be indefinite. The predetermined time is determined by predetermined distribution, for example, such as 2 seconds for 32/128 distribution, 3 seconds for 64/128 distribution, and 5 seconds for 32/128 distribution. Further, for example, the predetermined time may be set to be longer as the number of credits, which indicates the accumulated amount of medals, is larger.

FIG. 745(L) shows that the seesaw part 552 is tilted in the depth direction in front view, the medal passes through the open door part 555 and moves to the seesaw success tube 558, and the sensor attached to the seesaw success tube 558 is the state in which the medal has been detected. Even if the effect button 204 is pressed and held according to the effect button long-press guidance image, the special sound effect corresponding to the long press of the effect button 204 is not output, and the BGM is not changed (output during the seesaw game effect). It is desirable to not change the background music that is being played). At the time of FIG. 745 (K′), it is sufficiently suggested that the AT will be won, so if a special sound effect is output here or the BGM is changed, the player will have an excessive sense of expectation (AT This is because there is a risk that the player will be granted additional benefits other than the acquisition of .

Also, in FIG. 745(L), the movable pieces attached to both ends of the seesaw portion 552 have returned to their reference positions. In addition, the image display 500 displays a message indicating that the AT has been won ("AT won!"), a reverse-press guide image, and a long-press effect button guide image (that is, two guide images). . Note that the medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213 . The reels are also stopped in FIG. 745(L).

FIG. 745(M) is a continuation of FIG. 745(L), in which a message is displayed on the image display 500 indicating that there is a chance to increase the number of AT games to the acquired AT. Also, a reverse-press guidance image and a long-press effect button guidance image are displayed on the image display 500 . In addition, as will be described later, the number of AT games that can be added in one additional chance is at most two games, and since it is only given a profit that is not large for the player, the effect button long press guidance image If a message forcing an operation such as "Keep pressing and holding!" It continues to display messages indicating that something will happen if an operation is performed on

Even after it is confirmed that the seesaw game effect is successful and the AT is won, the effect button long-press guidance image is displayed on the image display 500, so that there is a chance to add an AT after the seesaw game effect is successful. is being executed, it is possible to strongly impress the player that the seesaw game effect has been successful, so that the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained. Furthermore, since the player strongly remembers that the effect button should be pressed for a long time after the seesaw game effect is successful, the player will not be confused about the operation in the next seesaw game effect.

Further, in the state where the AT extra chance is being played, the reels rotate in reverse at a higher speed than when the seesaw game is being played. As a result, the player can feel more exhilarated with winning the AT and with the addition.

Here, it is assumed that an additional chance will always appear after winning an AT, but whether or not an additional chance is performed depends on a predetermined distribution (for example, 32/128 when an additional chance is performed, 96/96 when not performed). 128) may be determined.

In FIG. 745(N), an effect for increasing the number of AT games is performed. Here, if the starting lever 210 is operated with good timing, the number of AT games is increased. The operation guide display of the starting lever 210 here is a guide display indicating that a suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed.

Specifically, the black-filled portion of the gauge displayed on the image display 500 moves to the right, and at least a part of the black-filled portion overlaps the shaded portion of the gauge. If the starting lever 210 is operated at , the number of AT games is successfully added. However, if the player does not operate the starting lever 210 for a long time, the hall will be disturbed, so a predetermined effective time (for example, 2 seconds) of the starting lever 210 is provided.

On the other hand, if the starting lever 210 is operated at a timing when even a portion of the blackened portion does not overlap with the shaded portion of the gauge, the addition of the number of AT games fails, and the game shifts to the main game. Alternatively, the effects after FIG. 746(S), which will be described later, or the effects of FIG. 747, which will be described later, may be executed. It should be noted that the blackened portion may continue to move left and right within the gauge until the start lever 210 is operated, or when it reaches the right end of the gauge, the same effect as when the topping fails is performed. may be broken.

In this way, in the seesaw game effect, the operation of the starting lever 210 (horizontal operation different from the operation (vertical direction) for advancing the game) causes the seesaw portion 552 to continue to retain medals, and the operation of the starting lever 210 ( It is possible to provide a new game feature in which the player's operation technique is directly linked to the player's profit by matching the timing of the operation (vertical direction) for advancing the game (vertical operation similar to the vertical operation), and by extension, the game. You can increase your interest.

In addition, in FIG. 745 (N), a starting lever operation guide image, which is an image of the start lever 210 for prompting the operation of the start lever 210, a reverse push guide image, and an effect button long press guide image (that is, three operation guidance image) is displayed on the image display 500 .

FIG. 745(O) shows the state after the start lever 210 is operated in FIG. 745(N). A message is displayed on the image display indicating that it will be notified later (FIG. 745(P)) whether or not the operation timing of the starting lever 210 in (N) is the timing at which the addition of the number of AT games can be obtained. Also, a reverse-press guidance image and a long-press effect button guidance image are displayed on the image display 500 .

In addition, as described above, the three guidance images, that is, the reverse-press guidance image of FIG. The displayed state shifts to a state in which two guidance images, that is, the reverse-press guidance image in FIG. Continue spinning. This is because the stop number of the reel informs whether the addition is appropriate and the number of addition games ((P) described later). In FIG. 745(O), immediately after the start lever 210 is operated, the reels continue to rotate in the reverse direction, so the player's sense of tension can be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 745 (N), when the start lever 210 is operated at the timing when at least part of the blackened portion overlaps with the hatched portion of the gauge, the reel temporarily Stop (Fig. 745 (P) to be described later). Note that the predetermined time may be selectable from a plurality of values such as 8 seconds, 10 seconds, or 15 seconds. In this case, it is desirable that the selection rate is determined such that the longer the predetermined time is selected, the higher the expectation that a more advantageous result will be obtained (for example, the additional success (2 games 16/128 for 8 seconds, 32/128 for 10 seconds, 80/128 for 15 seconds, and 32/128 for 7 seconds, 64/128 for 10 seconds, and 15 seconds for a successful addition (1 game added). is 32/128, and 7 seconds is selected at 80/128, 10 seconds at 32/128, and 15 seconds at 16/128 when the addition fails). By doing so, the player can get an exhilarating feeling the longer the reverse rotation of the reels continues after the start lever 210 is operated.

It should be noted that the operation guidance image of the starting lever 210, which is hidden in FIG. A state in which three guidance images, that is, the guidance image, the effect button long-press guidance image, and the operation guidance image of the start lever 210, is displayed at the same time may be employed). For example, in FIG. 745(O), there are white and red as the display colors of the message "Come on!" Suppose that the selectivity of colors is defined. In other words, when the starting lever 210 is operated in accordance with the operation guide image of the starting lever 210 newly displayed in FIG. 745(O), the display color of the message in FIG. can be executed.

Also, before the predetermined time until the reel is temporarily stopped has elapsed, instead of the operation guide image for the starting lever 210, an operation guide image for another operation unit such as the MAX input button 206 is displayed. (That is, the three guidance images, ie, the reverse push guidance image, the effect button long push guidance image, and the operation guidance image of the MAX input button 206, may be displayed at the same time). It should be noted that even if an operation guide image for another operation unit is displayed instead of the operation guide image for the start lever 210, the player who is playing idle may operate the same operation unit many times. Therefore, even if the guide image is displayed again, the operation of the starting lever 210 may be enabled while the operation guide image of another operation unit is being displayed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 745(O), before the predetermined time elapses, the operation guide image of the start lever 210 or the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206 is displayed, and the operation is performed according to the operation guide image. , it is preferable to display the result of the addition even before the reels are temporarily stopped. As a result, the player who wants to know the result of the addition as soon as possible can follow the operation guidance, and the player who wants to feel the tension until the end can wait for the reels to temporarily stop.

Further, the operation guidance image for the start lever 210 and the MAX input button 206 may be displayed multiple times during the predetermined time until the reel is temporarily stopped. In that case, if the starting lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 is operated other than the last display of the plurality of times, the result of the addition may be displayed, but a display suggesting the result of the addition (for example, It is desirable that the ratio of performing the above-mentioned white display or red display) is higher than the ratio of not performing the display suggesting the result of addition. As a result, even when the starting lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 is operated other than the last display of the plurality of times, the player's expectation can be extended to the second half of the performance. When the starting lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 is operated at the end of the plurality of times, it is preferable to display the result of the addition even before the reel is temporarily stopped.

Further, for example, the first display of the plurality of times displays only the operation guidance image for the start lever 210, and the last display of the plurality of times displays the operation guidance image for the start lever 210 lever and the MAX input button 206. Thus, the final display may have a larger number (types) of operation units for which operation guidance is provided than the initial display. As a result, the number of displayed operation guide images increases (the number of types increases), so that the player can have fun deciding which operation unit to operate (which type of operation unit will be displayed) at the end. can give.

Further, for example, the first display of the plurality of times displays an operation guide image for the starting lever 210 and the MAX input button 206, and the last display of the plurality of times displays the operation of only one of the starting lever 210 lever or the MAX input button 206. For example, the number of operation units to be guided for operation may be smaller in the final display than in the first display, such as displaying a guidance image. As a result, the number of displayed operation guide images is reduced, so that the player can enjoy anticipating which operation section will be narrowed down in the end.

Also, before the predetermined time elapses, if the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206, which is an operation unit that is different from the operation guide image of the starting lever 210, is not displayed as shown in FIG. When the operation guidance image is displayed (that is, the same operation guidance image is displayed again) <When the operation guidance image of the MAX input button 206, which is a different operation unit, is displayed, the degree of expectation is increased in this order. A selection rate may be set. If the operation guide image of the start lever 210 is displayed again, the player thinks that something will happen, and if the guide image of the operating part different from the start lever 210 is displayed, the player feels uncomfortable. It is because I think that I can expect an addition because I will remember it.

In addition, when the operation guide image of the start lever 210 or the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206 is displayed before the predetermined time elapses, the player is given a sense of tension to report the result of the addition. , the BGM may be muted, the output volume of the BGM may be increased or decreased, the BGM itself may be changed, or a special sound effect may be output. Also, at this time, in order to give the player a sense of tension to notify the result of the addition, the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) is replaced with a still image (although the effect image is slightly shaken or enlarged or reduced). (including a mode that the player feels still), enlarge or reduce the effect image, change the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) to a single color (such as gold or blackout) or multiple colors (such as rainbow) You can display it with .

Before the predetermined time elapses, the operation unit is operated according to the operation guidance image of the start lever 210 or the operation guidance image of the MAX input button 206, and when AT addition is notified, a predetermined movable body operates (for example, , the shutter 301d, which will be described later, returns to the reference position after covering half of the reel). At this time, the BGM output volume may be increased or decreased, the BGM itself may be changed, or a special sound effect may be output. Also, at this time, the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) may be a still image (including a mode where the effect image is slightly shaken, enlarged or reduced, but the player feels still), or may be enlarged or reduced, and the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) may be displayed in a single color (eg, gold or blackout) or in multiple colors (eg, rainbow).

Further, the display color of the image of the starting lever 210 or the operation guidance image of the MAX input button 206 displayed before the predetermined time elapses may be changed, or these images may be given an effect (that is, There may be a plurality of display modes of the operation guidance image of the starting lever 210, and there may be a plurality of display modes of the operation guidance image of the MAX input button 206). However, it is desirable that the degree of expectation is set higher when the display color is changed or the effect is applied.

In addition, when the operation guide image for starting lever 210 is displayed in FIG. It is desirable to continue to output the BGM that was output immediately before the display of the operation guide image in order not to overheat the operation guide image. The BGM may be silenced, the output volume of the BGM may be increased or decreased, the BGM itself may be changed, or a special sound effect may be output. Also, at this time, in order not to overheat the expectation, it is desirable to continue to display the background of the effect image that was displayed immediately before the operation guide image was displayed, but at an early timing. In order to give the player a sense of tension, the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) is replaced with a static image (including a mode in which the effect image is slightly shaken or enlarged or reduced, but the player feels still). ), the effect image may be enlarged or reduced, and the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) may be displayed in a single color (eg, red or blackout) or in multiple colors (eg, rainbow).

According to the operation guidance image for the starting lever 210 displayed in FIG. 745(N), the starting lever 210 was operated to move to the state shown in FIG. is displayed), it is desirable not to operate the movable body in order not to stir up the expectation too much. However, in order to give the player a sense of tension from an early timing, even if the predetermined movable body operates (however, according to the operation guidance image of the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 redisplayed in FIG. 745 (O) It is desirable that the operation distance and operation time are short compared to the operation of the movable body when the operation is performed). In some cases, the movable body may be operated by sorting such as 32/128 (that is, when the movable body is operated, the winning expectation for adding the number of AT games is high).

Also, when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the operation guidance image for the starting lever 210 displayed in FIG. 745(N) and the state of FIG. For this reason, it is desirable to continue to output the BGM that was output immediately before the operation was performed. , the BGM itself may be changed, or a special sound effect may be output. Also, at this time, in order not to overheat the expectation, it is desirable to continue to display the background of the effect image that was displayed immediately before the operation was performed, but the background of the effect image (or Effect image itself) to a static image (including a mode where the effect image is slightly shaken, enlarged or reduced, but the player feels still), the effect image is enlarged or reduced, or the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) may be displayed in a single color (eg, red or blackout) or multiple colors (eg, rainbow).

In addition, the display color of the operation guidance image for the start lever 210 displayed in FIG. There may be multiple modes). However, it is desirable that the degree of expectation is set higher when the display color is changed or the effect is applied. Also, the operation guidance image of the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 redisplayed in FIG. 745(O) is more expected than the operation guidance image of the start lever 210 displayed in FIG. 745(N). The operation of the starting lever 210 displayed in FIG. 745(N) may be performed rather than the operation guidance image of the starting lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 redisplayed in FIG. 745(O). The guide image may be arranged so that a mode with a high degree of expectation is more likely to be selected.

In addition, from the operation valid time of the starting lever 210 (for example, 2 seconds as described above) for suggesting the degree of expectation of addition in FIG. It is desirable that the valid operation time of the starting lever 210 corresponding to the operation guide image of the start lever 210 and the valid operation time of the MAX input button 206 corresponding to the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206 are longer. Since this operation is performed in a situation where the addition is confirmed, it is intended to provide the player with an exhilarating feeling for a long time.

Subsequently, in FIG. 745(P), a message indicating that the number of AT games has been added and the number of games (for example, two games) is displayed on the image display 500 . It should be noted that the message indicating the number of games does not directly indicate the number of games as shown in Fig. 745(P). Often in this case, for example, the total number of add-on games is reported when the add-on chance is completely finished and the main game is returned to.

Red 7 (three identical symbol combinations) are aligned in the middle row of the reels. In FIG. 745 (N), if the operation of the start lever 210 is successful, a lottery for the number of AT-additional games is conducted, and the winner is a 2-game or 1-game addition. When the starting lever 210 is successfully operated, a lottery for the number of games to be added is performed by, for example, adding one game at 96/128 and adding two games at 32/128.

If two games are won (advantageous results are obtained), the reels are temporarily stopped (the reels are If you win one game (no favorable result), for example, the same stop as the last game (this game) The reels are temporarily stopped at a roll or a stop roll in which the red 7 is tenpai (the red 7 is stopped in the same stage or diagonally on 2 of the 3 reels) but the red 7 is not aligned. Also, when winning two games (when the same symbol combination is displayed), after a predetermined period of time during which the reels are temporarily stopped, a special state (such as a special zone) can be entered. good.

In addition, the reel is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time in FIG. It is desirable that the stop time is different from any time from when the start lever 210 is operated until the reel is temporarily stopped (for example, 5 seconds shorter than any time until the reel is temporarily stopped). In addition, it is desirable that the time during which the reels are temporarily stopped should not be selectable from a plurality of values and should take only one value. When the reels are temporarily stopped, the result has already been reported. Therefore, if a plurality of temporary stop times are prepared, for example, if the temporary stop time is long, more games than the announced number of additional games will be played. This is because there is a risk that the player will have excessive expectations, thinking that the number of games has been increased.

In addition, in FIG. 745(P), a reverse-press guidance image and a long-press effect button guidance image are displayed on the image display 500 . In the pseudo game, the reels are temporarily stopped rather than completely stopped, but the reels may be completely stopped in the pseudo game. However, when the reels are completely stopped even in a pseudo game, a pseudo game is designed near a predetermined lamp or LED in order to make the player aware that the pseudo game is being performed. A light emitter such as an LED may be caused to emit light, or an image having a predetermined size (for example, a message such as "Pseudo-game is in progress" or "FREE PLAY") may be displayed on the image display 500. FIG.

In FIG. 745(P), after the above-mentioned predetermined time has passed since the rotation of the reel has stopped, a special condition (for example, another additional lottery is held, the number of credits is a predetermined number or more, etc.) is satisfied. In this case, another chance to add is given as shown in FIG. 746(Q). On the other hand, if the special condition is not satisfied after the predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation of the reel stops, the starting lever 210 is operated as described later without rotating the reel in the reverse direction again (that is, the game based on the fact that the operation that triggers the progress of is operated), the game shifts to this game.

In FIG. 746(Q), the additional chance is performed again, and the same effect as in FIG. 745(M) is performed. If the additional chance succeeds in this way, the additional chance may loop. For example, when the above special conditions are satisfied, the loop rate is selected by predetermined distribution (for example, 64/128 for 50% loop rate, 48/124 for 66%, 15/128 for 80%, 1 for 90%) /128 distribution). Then, when the additional chance is successful, a lottery is drawn according to the selected loop rate to determine whether the additional chance is performed again. Note that the additional chance may be continued as long as the additional chance succeeds until the predetermined number of (for example, 10) additional chances are completed.

It should be noted that the reel rotation time at the first additional chance is longer than the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) at the first additional chance, for example, 10 seconds. As a result, the player can increase the expectation of whether the addition will be made over a long period of time during the rotation of the reel, and since the reel stop time is short, the player can smoothly reach the second chance to add the addition. You can end the chance to advance or add on.

Also, the reel rotation time in the first additional chance may be the same as the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) in the first additional chance, for example. As a result, the rotation of the reel and the stop of the reel are performed at the same tempo, so that the player can sense the length of time of the rotation of the reel, thereby facilitating the timing of the end of the reel stop.

Also, the reel rotation time at the first additional chance may be shorter than the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) at the first additional chance, and may be, for example, 3 seconds. As a result, the player's fatigue can be suppressed by shortening the time during which he or she feels a sense of tension as to whether or not the addition is made, and the time during which the player feels an exhilaration when the addition is made can be lengthened.

It should be noted that the reel rotation time for the second and subsequent additional chances is longer than the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) for the first additional chance, for example, 7 seconds. As a result, after the reel stop smoothly progresses to the second and subsequent additional chances, the reel rotation time is long for the second and subsequent additional opportunities, so there is a sense of expectation for how many games will be added. can be increased.

Also, the reel rotation time in the second and subsequent additional chances may be the same as the reel stop time (eg, 5 seconds) in the first additional chance, for example. As a result, the rotation of the reel and the stop of the reel are performed at the same tempo, so that the player can sense the length of the time of the reel stop, thereby facilitating the timing of the end of the second and subsequent reel rotations. .

Also, the reel rotation time in the second and subsequent additional chances may be shorter than the reel stop time (eg, 5 seconds) in the first additional chance, and may be, for example, 3 seconds. As a result, the player's fatigue can be suppressed by shortening the time during which he or she feels a sense of tension as to whether or not the addition is made, and the time during which the player feels an exhilaration when the addition is made can be lengthened.

Further, the reel rotation time for the second and subsequent additional chances is shorter than the reel rotation time for the first additional chance, for example. As described above, in the second and subsequent additional chances, the reel rotation time is short, and the number of AT games is added one after another in a short time, so the player can feel exhilarated.

In addition, the reel rotation time for the second and subsequent additional chances is selected at a predetermined selection rate from a plurality of times shorter than the reel rotation time for the first additional chance, such as 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 7 seconds. may In this case, it is preferable that the longer the reel rotation time is, the higher the add-on expectation is, similar to the reel rotation time at the first chance to add.

Further, the reel rotation time for the second and subsequent additional chances is the same as the reel rotation time for the first additional chance, for example. As a result, the player can sense the length of the reel rotation for the first time, thereby facilitating the timing of the end of the second and subsequent reel rotations.

Also, the reel rotation time for the second and subsequent additional chances is longer than the reel rotation time for the first additional chance, for example. Since the number of medals obtained by the player increases when the second and subsequent additions are performed, the rate of increase in medals can be suppressed by taking time to spin the reels for the second and subsequent times.

In addition, in order to give the player a sense of surprise by starting reel rotation without realizing the reel rotation start timing in the next additional chance, the reel rotation time in the additional chance is different from the reel stop time in the additional chance. It may be a different time (that is, a time that cannot be selected as the reel stop time)

Although the comparison between the reel rotation time and the reel stop time in the additional chance and the comparison between the reel rotation times in the additional chance have been described, the reel rotation time may be read as the reel average rotation time, and the reel stop time may be read as the reel average rotation time. It may be read as average stop time. By selecting the rotation time of the reel from a plurality of times by predetermined distribution, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the timing of notification of whether the addition is successful or not, and a sense of surprise can be provided. By selecting the stop time of the reel from a plurality of times by predetermined allocation, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the timing of the start of the next chance to add, and a feeling of surprise can be provided.

In FIG. 746(R), a message is displayed on the image display body 500 indicating that the number of AT games in one game has been increased, and the reels are temporarily stopped at the same stop point as the last game stop point. 745(P) except that

It should be noted that, as in the first additional chance, after FIG. 746(Q), an effect may be performed to incite whether or not the player has won the prize in the same manner as in FIG. 745(O). is erased, the effect may proceed without displaying the operation guide image, the operation guide image of the starting lever 210 may be redisplayed, or a different operation such as the MAX input button 206 may be performed. You may display the operation guidance image of part.

By re-displaying the operation guide image of the starting lever 210, the player has a sense of anticipation that there may still be an opportunity to operate the starting lever 210 (that is, the additional chance will continue). In addition, by displaying the operation guidance image of the different operation unit, the player can get a sense of anticipation that further benefits can be obtained by operating the other operation unit. The degree of expectation depending on whether or not the operation guidance image is displayed, the performance mode of the operation guidance image (display mode, BGM, movable body), etc. in the rendering are the same as in FIG. 745(O).

However, if the shortest time (3 seconds) is selected from a plurality of times such as 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 7 seconds as the time for the reels to spin reversely in the second and subsequent chances, the shortest time In order not to impair the exhilaration of increasing the number of AT games, the operation guide image of the starting lever 210 is not redisplayed and the operation guide images of different operation units such as the MAX input button 206 are not displayed. is desirable. Further, when the operation guide image of the starting lever 210 or the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206 is displayed and the operation is performed according to the operation guide image, even before the reel is temporarily stopped as described above. The result of the addition is displayed, but if the operation guide image is displayed when the shortest time (3 seconds) is selected as the reel reverse rotation time, the player will be able to It is likely that the operation cannot be completed. In other words, the player feels stress if the operation cannot be completed even though the player intends to perform the operation, and the additional result is displayed when the operation is completed by the end of the shortest time. The timing is just slightly faster. Therefore, as described above, when the shortest time (3 seconds) is selected as the reel reverse rotation time, the operation guidance image of the start lever 210 is redisplayed and a different operation unit such as the MAX input button 206 is operated. It is desirable not to display the guidance image.

It should be noted that although the above-mentioned special conditions (for example, an additional lottery is held) and the fact that the additional chance will be played again are determined, the number of additional games may be "+1" or "+2" each time. As mentioned above, red 7 will be aligned when two games are added, and red 7 will be tennated when one game is added (however, although they are tenned, they will not be aligned). In addition, when one game is added, a predetermined distribution may stop the red 7 tenpai or the losing one red 7 not even tenpai.

At this time, there is a pattern 1 in which, after the reels are temporarily stopped when red 7 is aligned (that is, "+2"), the reel is temporarily stopped when red 7 is aligned at the next chance. Similarly, there are a pattern 2 of Red 7 Tenpai (ie, "+1") temporary stop→Red 7 Tenpai pseudo-stop and a pattern 3 of Loss (ie, "+1") temporary stop→Loss temporary stop. In the patterns 1 to 3, since the number similar to that of the last chance to be added is stopped in the next chance to be added, the expectation of the player is not unnecessarily increased or decreased.

In addition, there are pattern 4 of red 7 temporary stop→red 7 tenpai temporary stop and pattern 5 of red 7 temporary stop→loss temporary stop. In pattern 4 and pattern 5, since the number of additional games is smaller in the later additional chance, the player can be made to think that the additional chance loop is about to end and prepare for the loop. Player disappointment can be reduced when .

In addition, there are a pattern 6 of temporary stop of failure→temporary stop of red 7 and pattern 7 of temporary stop of red 7 tenpai→red 7 temporary stop. In pattern 6 and pattern 7, since the number of games to be added is larger in the later addition chance, the player's sense of exhilaration can be gradually enhanced.

In addition, there are a pattern 8 of Red 7 Tenpai temporary stop → Lost temporary stop and a Pattern 9 of Loss temporary stop → Red 7 Tenpai temporary stop. In patterns 8 and 9, although the number of games to be added is the same, the number of stop outcomes is different, so even if only the same number of games as the previous time is added, the player does not get tired of the temporary stop performance of the reels.

FIG. 746(S) shows a state in which the loop rate lottery for the additional chance was lost (the additional lottery was not performed). A message is displayed on the image display body indicating that the loop lottery for the additional chance was lost and the lottery for the number of additional games was not performed. In addition, the reels are temporarily stopped at the stop number where the red 7 is not aligned even though the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are full of red 7 (Fig. 746 (displaying the result of the additional lottery) R) continues to display the stop roll). Also, a reverse-press guidance image and a long-press effect button guidance image are displayed on the image display 500 .

In FIG. 746(T), the image display 500 displays a message indicating that a special movie will be provided as an apology for not winning the loop lottery for the additional chance. By displaying the special movie, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player who is disappointed after the loop of the extra chance has ended. Also, a reverse-press guidance image and a long-press effect button guidance image are displayed on the image display 500 . It should be noted that even after the additional lottery is not performed, the stop numbers of the reels are continuously displayed. This is to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the game has started when the reels rotate.

In FIG. 746(U), the reverse press guide image and the long press effect button guide image are erased, and the special movie is displayed on the image display 500 . The slot machine 1 of this chapter is equipped with a shutter 301d which is a movable body for covering the entire reel and making the (temporary) stop dot invisible.

At the start of the special movie, the shutter 301d is closed to cover the entire reel (making the symbol combination indicating that no advantageous result was obtained unrecognizable, as shown in FIG. 746(T)), thereby deterring the player. A special movie can be drawn to the player's attention, and thus the player can be entertained. In order to entertain the player, the special movie is a premium effect (movie that appears when the expectation of winning AT is extremely high (e.g., 99% or more), and the appearance rate is extremely low (e.g., normal game or AT game). 1/32768 or less) movie), or does not appear in the effects executed in the normal game or AT game (that is, the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 does not select at the start of the game (lever on)) Exclusive movie or it is desirable to

As shown in FIG. 746(U), it is desirable that no guide image is displayed in order to make the player concentrate on the special movie. When the input button 206 is operated), a reverse push guide image is displayed to confirm the push order in this game, and when a predetermined time has passed since the start of display of the special movie, operation guidance of the start lever 210 is provided. An image may be displayed to change the effect state (for example, the sound output in the effect, the display mode of the effect, etc.). This allows the player to complete preparations for the main game while the special movie is being displayed.

Also, during the special movie, the reverse press guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image may be continuously displayed from (T). As a result, the same guidance image as after the success of the seesaw game is displayed, so that the player can enjoy the satisfaction of obtaining an advantageous result due to the seesaw game effect and additional chances even during the display of the special movie. can chew.

FIG. 746(V) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the start of the special movie. When the 1-card insert button 205 is pressed, the shutter 301d is opened and the contents of the final addition are reconfirmed by visually recognizing the reels again (as described above, the results of the 1-game and 2-game additions are temporarily stopped). (because it is different) is displayed on the image display 500. Since the special movie itself is not uncommon for players who have played the slot machine 1 in this chapter extremely many times, it is more interesting to be able to reconfirm how much advantageous results they have obtained rather than the special movie. because it rises.

In the state shown in FIG. 746(V), the one-card insertion button 205 is pressed (the slot machine in this chapter has a specified number of three cards, and pressing the one-card insertion button 205 only once activates the operation of the starting lever 210). However, when the operation means for advancing the game (the player's intention is felt) is operated (based on the operation), the shutter 301d is opened, and the entire reel (symbols on the reel) ) becomes visible, and the special movie displayed on the image display 500 is erased.

It should be noted that while the shutter 301d is closed, all the reels remain stopped. You can reconfirm the stop eye before the closure of the. Also, while the shutter 301d is closed, all the reels may be rotated, and when the shutter 301d is opened, the reels may be stopped to be the same as the stop in (T).

Also, when the one-card insertion button 205 is pressed before the end of the special movie to make the combinations of symbols on all the reels visible, the reels become visible at a predetermined ratio (for example, 16/128). At approximately the same time as (for example, within 0.5 second difference), the reel may be rotated and then automatically stopped. At this time, the stopping point of the automatic stop may be aligned with red 7 (that is, the stopping point of the 1st game in FIG. The stopping point at 746(T) may be displayed.

At this time, for example, the setting is made so that the probability of being promoted to red 7 is higher than the probability of the stopping dot being displayed in (T). For example, the probability of being promoted to red 7 is 1/200, and by displaying the stopping point in FIG. In addition, by displaying the same symbol combination, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of exhilaration due to the start of the AT game. Also, the setting may be made such that the probability of displaying the stopping point in FIG.

By doing so, the player can have anticipation even during the special movie after the extra chance is over. Also, before the end of the special movie, press the one-insert button 205 three times (or press the MAXBET button when there are three or more medals in the credit (storage device)) and hit the starting lever 210 to play the game. Also in the case of proceeding with , the above-described promotion effect for the stopping eye may be performed.

In the above example, the special movie is displayed when the additional AT game number is not won in the additional chance (that is, when the player is disappointed). A special movie may be displayed if the player goes through a disappointing situation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 746 (R), when the number of AT games won in the addition chance was the lowest (no advantageous result was obtained), the lowest number in (R) A special movie effect from FIG. 746(U) may be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the number of additional games was announced. In particular, in this case, if the one-card insertion button 205 is pressed in FIG.

Further, for example, a background image suggesting staying in a high-probability state (a state in which it is easy to win AT or CZ, or a state in which it is easy to win in addition to the number of AT games) in the normal game and AT game is displayed on the image display 500. Although it was displayed, if it switches to a background image that suggests staying in a low probability state (a state that is difficult to win AT or CZ or difficult to win in addition to the number of AT games), low A special movie effect from FIG. 746(U) may be executed after a predetermined time has passed since the background image suggesting that the player is staying in the probability state is displayed.

Further, for example, if the power is turned on after a state in which the slot machine 1 cannot be played due to a power failure due to a lightning strike or the like, a special movie from FIG. You may perform a performance.

Part of the effects that can be displayed during the normal game or the AT game may be displayed during the special movie. For example, when there is a first effect that appears during the normal game and a second effect that has a higher AT winning expectation than the first effect (for example, both appear when the start lever 210 is operated (that is, when the lever is turned on). It is preferable to display part of the second effect in the special movie in the AT win expectation suggesting effect). As a result, the player who knows the second effect can remember the time when the AT was won with that effect and can immerse himself in the afterglow, and the player who does not know the second effect can play the second game in the subsequent normal game. When the effect appears, it is possible to get a sense of anticipation by thinking that the effect has a high degree of expectation for winning an AT because it is a effect that appears in a special movie.

As described above, if the starting lever 210 is operated while the special movie is displayed, the pseudo game ends and the game shifts to the main game. Since it is troublesome, it is preferable to shift to the main game when a predetermined time elapses in order to shift from the pseudo game to the main game. A special movie is preferably created in accordance with this predetermined time, but in order to save the capacity of the ROM 1120 of the sub-board 510, a movie of a time shorter than this predetermined time is repeated multiple times. You may make it display.

Furthermore, if the duration of one movie is short, it may be possible to change the line of sight of the player by making the combination of symbols on the reels visible between the movies that are repeated a plurality of times. At this time, an image that appears during the normal game or the AT game (for example, background image) may be displayed on the image display 500 between the movies in order to make the player pay attention to the combination of symbols on the reels. .

In addition, in FIG. 746(T), the reason why the effect button long press guidance image is displayed even after the additional chance ends is as follows. When the seesaw game effect is successful and the effect button 204 is pressed and held for a long time, the seesaw portion 552 tilts in the front view depth direction. After that, even if the performance button 204 is long pressed, the seesaw portion 552 will not tilt again in the front view depth direction in the pseudo game.

Here, for example, in FIG. 746 (S), one dummy medal falls from the claw portion 556 to the seesaw portion 552 at a predetermined rate (eg, 1/1000) when the additional chance ends. Therefore, in this case, the dummy medal cannot be moved to the seesaw success tube 558 unless the long depression of the effect button 204 is continued until the dummy medal falls to the seesaw portion 552 .

Further, when the dummy medal can be moved to the seesaw success tube 558, the number of AT games is added. Therefore, the effect button long-press guidance image is displayed even after the additional chance ends so that the player can obtain an advantageous result. The dummy medals are stored in a predetermined storage position (not shown) in the slot machine 1, and if the lottery with a predetermined ratio in FIG. The dummy medal returns to the retracted position (not shown) regardless of whether the medal can be moved to the claw portion 556 and moved to the seesaw success tube 558 or not.

However, since the special movie itself is a valuable special effect, it is possible to erase the effect button long press guidance image and display only the special movie as described above, or display only the special movie and the special effect. The display of the movie and the effect pressing guide image may be alternately repeated.

It should be noted that when the medals can be moved to the seesaw success tube 558, the number of AT games is increased. In order to make the game more enjoyable, it is better to add the game at a predetermined rate (for example, 1/10 adds 1 game, 1/20 adds 2 games). Since there are players who prefer the slot machine 1 with large technical intervention elements, if medals can be moved to the seesaw success tube 558, the number of AT games may be increased.

In addition, when the lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed based on the movement of medals to the seesaw success tube 558, although the special movie itself is valuable, it is advantageous for the player to add the number of AT games. Since the result is more exhilarating for the player, the display of the special movie is ended, and the reel is displayed at almost the same time (for example, within 0.5 seconds difference) as the timing when the reel becomes visible. should be rotated.

[13-4. Practice performance]
FIG. 747 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an additional chance practice effect in the seesaw game effect. Following FIG. 746(S), that is, when the additional chance loop lottery is not won and the additional chance ends, the additional chance practice presentation starts in FIG. 747(T′). In FIG. 747 (T'), a message is displayed indicating that the practice effect can be started. In addition, in FIG. 747 (T′), a reverse press guide image and a long press effect button guide image are displayed on the image display 500 . The practice performance is performed with the reels temporarily stopped.

It should be noted that the time from FIG. 746(S) to FIG. T′) (the time from when the result of the additional lottery is shown to when the practice effect starts), the former The latter is shorter than the

In the practice effect, the same effect as the operation effect of the starting lever 210 in the above-described additional chance can be performed in a state where the reels are temporarily stopped. Since the reels are rotating in the actual additional chance presentation, even if the player wants to concentrate on the display of the image display body 500, the spinning reels become distracting and it becomes difficult to concentrate. Difficulty is high because it becomes difficult to grasp the operation timing of . On the other hand, since the reels are temporarily stopped in the practice effect, the player can easily concentrate on the display of the image display body 500 and grasp the operation timing of the start lever 210 easily, so the degree of difficulty is low.

Since the frequency of appearance of the seesaw game effect is by no means high, the appearance of the practice effect allows the player to improve the operation of the starting lever 210 in the additional chance. Further, if the practice effect is executed after the operation of the starting lever 210 fails in the additional chance, the player who is not good at the operation can be made to practice. Although there are cases where the above-mentioned special movie effect is performed without executing this practice effect, it is also possible to assign each person by lottery, or each time the extra chance fails, the special movie effect and the practice effect will be performed. They may appear alternately. It should be noted that, in the case of allocation by lottery, it is preferable to set a higher ratio of allocation to the practice effect than to the special movie effect, because the practice effect leads to actual profit.

It should be noted that, after the end of the additional chance, according to a predetermined allocation (for example, 96/128 to execute the practice effect, 32/128 not to execute the practice effect), it is determined whether or not the practice effect is performed, and the practice effect is not executed. In this case, the above-described special movie effect is executed. The reason why the priority of the practice effect is higher than that of the special movie effect is that it leads to the player's actual benefit.

In FIG. 747 (U'), in order to lower the difficulty of the practice effect, the practice effect is performed while the reels (symbol combination indicating the result of the additional lottery) are kept displayed. The display contents on the image display 5000 are almost the same as those in FIG. 745(N). However, the purpose is to make the player practice, and in order not to misunderstand that it is added, the operation guidance image prompting the operation of the start lever 210 is changed from that displayed in FIG. 745 (N). displayed in a smaller size. In FIG. 747(U′), after the message “Practice is available” is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the same guide display as in FIG.

Instead, the ratio of the size of the blacked-out portion and/or the shaded portion of the gauge displayed on the image display 500 to the size of the gauge is added to the size of the gauge so that the player can easily operate successfully in the practice presentation. It can be increased from time to time, or the movement speed of the blacked out part of the gauge can be added and decreased from the time of the chance production. Thus, by lowering the difficulty level of the practice effect and making it easier for the player to succeed in the operation, the player can easily remember the sense of accomplishment upon success.

On the other hand, by intentionally increasing the difficulty and practicing, in order to make it easier to succeed in the actual performance, we reduced the percentage and increased the movement speed of the blacked out part of the gauge to make it faster than during the chance production. good too. By increasing the degree of difficulty in this way, it is possible to give a greater sense of accomplishment when the game is successful, and to make the player confident that even if he or she fails, the actual game will be easier and he will manage.

In order to make the player concentrate on practice, the BGM played in FIG. to zero or fade out) or suppress the volume. This muting or volume suppression of the BGM may be performed in accordance with the timing when the operation guide image of the start lever 210 is displayed, or may be performed at a predetermined timing after the operation guide image of the start lever 210 is displayed. may be broken.

In addition, in order to avoid a situation in which the display of the image display body 500 in FIG. 747(U') may be displayed by the transmissive liquid crystal of the movable body to display the same content as the display of the image display body 500 in FIG. 747(U').

At this time, the transparency of the display of the transparent liquid crystal may be lowered to make the reel pattern completely invisible, or the transparency may be increased to display the reel pattern (partially or entirely). ) may be set to a visible state although the visibility level is deteriorated.

In FIG. 747 (V'), a message is displayed indicating that when the practice effect starts, pressing the MAX input button 206 returns to the main game. This is because the player who is good at the operation in the additional chance effect feels that the practice effect is unnecessary. In addition, the image display 500 displays a gauge for a practice performance, a reverse-press guidance image, and a performance button long-press guidance image.

FIG. 747(W') shows a state in which the player presses the MAX input button 206 in FIG. 747(V'). After the practice effect is completed, the pseudo game is shifted to the main game, and the reels are rotating forward (Since the pseudo game is transferred to the main game, the rotation of the reels is rotated by performing random delay processing. Note that the random delay processing is a well-known technique, so the description is omitted). Also, a number indicating reverse pressing is written on the top of each reel of the image display 500 . Also, since the reel to be pressed first is the right reel 301c, the light emitter provided on the right reel 301c is lit. In the above example, the practice effect is performed at the end of the pseudo game, but the practice effect may be performed during the main game performed following the pseudo game.

Note that even if the start lever 210 is operated with good timing and succeeds in the practice effect (that is, the start lever 210 is operated at the timing when at least part of the blackened portion of the gauge overlaps with the shaded portion), it is only practice. Since there are no AT games, the number of AT games will not be added. However, when the start lever 210 is successfully operated, the lamp emits light in a manner that is different from the effect that appears during the game and that appears based on the lottery results when the start lever 210 is operated. Or (dedicated light emission pattern) sound effect (dedicated sound effect) and BGM (dedicated BGM) may be played. Thus, by preparing a dedicated effect, the player's motivation for the success of the practice effect increases. In addition, by performing such dedicated effects (light emission, sound, and/or BGM) that cannot appear during the main game, there is an effect that the player does not misunderstand that the practice effect is the main game. be.

On the other hand, if the operation timing of the starting lever 210 is not correct in the practice performance, the lamps will not emit light in these dedicated light emission patterns, nor will the dedicated sound effects or dedicated BGM be played.

Note that the above-described special movie effect may be executed after the practice effect is performed. For example, after the practice effect is executed after the additional chance effect is executed, the player is tired from operating the starting lever 210 aiming at timing, so a valuable special movie is shown to encourage the player. You can relax and be entertained at the same time.

In addition, if practice can be executed multiple times in one simulated game, the skill of the player will increase and it will be easier to succeed in the additional chance, so there is a risk that the ball output rate will increase, and the burden on the hall will increase. Because of this risk, it is desirable that the exercise can only be performed once. Further, practice may be performed only once after the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on.

If the practice can be executed only once, it is preferable to erase the guidance of the practice performance displayed in FIG. In addition, in situations where the ball output rate can be increased (when the design value is such that the ball output rate does not change much even if the skill of all players increases), it is possible to practice multiple times. or there may be no limit to the number of times of practice.

When the practice is successful, it is preferable to display a message such as "Congratulations on your success! Let's do our best in the actual performance!" This message is desirably different from the message when the starting lever 210 is operated in the add-on chance (“Which one?” in FIG. 745(O)). This is because if the same message is used in the actual game and practice, the player may misunderstand that the number of AT games will be increased.

[13-5. Fate's two-choice production]
FIG. 748 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the additional chance effect in the seesaw game effect (fate two-choice effect). The additional chance in FIG. 748 is not the operation timing of the start lever 210 as described in FIG. It is decided whether or not to add

When the two-choice effect of fate is performed, for example, when the seesaw game effect is successful, the loop rate is selected in a predetermined distribution (for example, 64/128 for a loop rate of 50%, 48/124 for 66%, and 48/124 for 80%). % is 15/128 and 90% is 1/128).

Further, it is selected to win an additional AT game number when the starting lever 210 is struck from above or below according to a predetermined distribution. The predetermined distribution is predetermined, for example, the correct answer is 48/128 when hit from above, and the correct answer is 80/128 when hit from below. AT winning rate is high.

Furthermore, when the starting lever 210 is hit from the correct direction and the AT game number addition is won, the number of games to be added is determined according to a predetermined distribution (for example, 1 game addition 64/128, 2 games addition 64/128).

Following FIG. 745(M), in FIG. 748(N''), a fateful two-choice effect is executed as an extra chance. In FIG. 748 (N''), the reels continue to rotate at high speed in reverse, and a message (title display) indicating that the two-choice challenge of fate has started is displayed on the image display 500. In FIG. Also, a reverse-press guidance image and a long-press effect button guidance image are displayed on the image display 500 .

In FIG. 748(O''), the image display 500 displays a message indicating guidance to hit the starting lever 210 from above, which is an example of a guidance display as a request effect requesting operation of the starting lever 210. In FIG. . A reverse press guide image and a long press effect button guide image are displayed on the image display 500 . In FIG. 748 (P''), a message ("ka...") is displayed on the image display 500 to indicate that there is a possibility that the starting lever 210 can be operated in a direction other than hitting it from above. Also, a reverse-press guidance image and a long-press effect button guidance image are displayed on the image display 500 .

In FIG. 748 (Q''), the image display 500 displays a message indicating guidance to hit the starting lever 210 from below, which is an example of a guidance display as a request effect requesting operation of the starting lever 210. In FIG. . Also, a reverse-press guidance image and a long-press effect button guidance image are displayed on the image display 500 .

FIG. 748 (R'') shows the state after the start lever 210 is hit from above or below. By this operation, a message (“Which one is it?”) is displayed on the image display 500 as to whether or not the player has won the additional AT game number. Also, a reverse-press guidance image and a long-press effect button guidance image are displayed on the image display 500 .

It should be noted that when FIG. 748 (O'') is displayed, the operation of the starting lever 210 is effective only for operation from above. Further, when FIG. 748 (Q'') is displayed, the operation of the starting lever 210 only from below is effective. Further, when FIG. 748 (R'') is displayed, the operation of the starting lever 210 from above and below is effective.

Therefore, the player who hits the starting lever 210 from above at the time of FIG. ''), the player who hits the starting lever 210 from below has an advantage (as described above, there are many distributions where hitting the starting lever 210 from below is the correct answer).

In other words, it is designed so that players who are not accustomed to slot games and whose game speed is slow are more advantageous. There is no suggestion or instruction to "hit the start lever from the bottom!"). From the timing of FIG. 748 (O''), the operation for the operation from below the starting lever 210 may be enabled. This is because it is troublesome for the player who has experienced the additional chance many times to wait for the timing at which the operation from below becomes effective.

However, since the ball output rate is higher when the starting lever 210 is hit from below, in order to reduce the burden on the hole, the starting lever 210 is moved upward when FIG. Operations may be valid for operations from above and below.

It should be noted that when the correct operation direction of the starting lever 210 is correct and the number of AT games is increased, a display similar to that shown in FIG. 745(P) or FIG. The reels are temporarily stopped at the same stopping point as in (P) and FIG. 746(R). Further, according to the selected loop rate, it is determined whether the re-additional chance will be played.

It should be noted that when the additional chance loops, the effect (timing effect) that determines whether or not the number of AT games can be added depending on the timing of the starting lever 210 described with reference to FIG. An effect (operation direction effect) in which whether or not the number of AT games can be added may be mixed. In this case, for example, when the addition of the number of AT games is determined and the loop lottery is won, which effect is executed in a predetermined distribution (for example, distribution of timing effect 64/128, operation direction effect 64/128) Alternatively, a selection screen for the timing effect and the operation direction effect may be displayed to allow the player to select which effect to execute.

Also, if the correct answer cannot be obtained for the operation direction of the starting lever 210 and the addition of the number of AT games cannot be obtained, it may be shifted to this game, or the production (special movie display) after FIG. 746 (T) ) may be performed.

Note that FIG. 748 (O''), i.e., the operation guidance for hitting the starting lever from above (hereinafter also referred to as guidance from above) is displayed, and FIG. 748 (Q''), i.e., the operation for hitting the starting lever from below For example, the mode of presentation differs from that in which guidance (hereinafter also referred to as guidance from below) is displayed, as follows.

In the state where the guidance is displayed from above, it is desirable that the volume of the BGM continues from the time of FIG. 748 (N''). When the start lever 210 is hit from above, although the probability of winning the additional AT game number is low, if the volume is suppressed or muted here, the player will be guided from above. may be misunderstood as the final timing of the two-choice presentation of fate, and the starting lever 210 may be struck from above, resulting in a loss. On the other hand, when the starting lever 210 is hit from above and when the starting lever 210 is hit from below, there is no extremely large difference in the expected increase in the number of AT games. also has a sufficient expected value, the background music may be suppressed or silenced.

On the other hand, the state where the guidance is displayed from the bottom is a state where the final timing of the two-choice effect of fate is approaching, and since both choices are presented, the BGM is suppressed to increase the tension. or muted.

The operation effective time of the start lever 210 when the guidance from the top displayed first (the fact that the guidance from the top is displayed before the guidance from the bottom is omitted below) is displayed after the guidance from the bottom is displayed. It is desirable that the operating effective time of the starting lever 210 is shorter than the effective time of operation of the start lever 210 when (the fact that the guidance from the bottom is displayed after the guidance from the top is omitted below) is displayed. By shortening the operation effective time of the starting lever 210 when the guidance is displayed from above, even if the player prematurely hits the starting lever 210 from above, the operation will not be effective. , the direction in which the starting lever 210 is struck can be reconsidered after looking at both options.

When the guidance is displayed from the top and the guidance is displayed from the bottom, the expectation level (expectation level of winning the extra lottery) is enhanced (for example, `` Hit the start lever from above! Hit from below!" is displayed in red letters, and the degree of expectation varies depending on the guide display itself for the operation means).

For example, if the message "Hit the start lever from above!" 6/10 is divided into white letters and 4/10 is red letters. It is desirable that the If the expectation level suggestion effect is displayed frequently when the guidance is displayed from above, the probability of winning the additional AT game number is low, but it is misunderstood that the probability is high. This is because there is a risk that the operation of the starting lever 210 will be continued.

In addition, guidance may be displayed from above, but guidance may not be displayed from below. If the message in 8/10 is white text and 2/10 is red text, and the guidance is displayed from the top and then the guidance is displayed from the bottom, White letters and 8/10 are red letters, so that when the message in the guidance from the top is displayed in a highly expected manner, the message from the bottom is more likely to be displayed later. It is desirable that

In addition, at the start of the two-choice challenge of fate, forcibly at a predetermined ratio (that is, even if the starting lever 210 is hit from above or below) It may be possible not to win the addition of the number of AT games, forcibly It is desirable that the guidance from the top is displayed but the guidance from the bottom is not displayed after that when the addition of the number of AT games is not won. No matter how the starting lever 210 is operated, the addition of the AT game number is not won, so the player's expectations are not overly stirred up by not displaying guidance from the bottom of the high expectations. Also, at this time, when the starting lever 210 is struck from above, it is desirable to be informed that the addition of the number of AT games has not been won after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This is to give the players even a little sense of expectation, even though they did not forcibly win the prize for adding the number of AT games.

Further, even if the guidance is displayed from above, the guidance may not be displayed from below at a predetermined rate (for example, less than 5/10). It is valid only for the operation (that is, even if the starting lever 210 is hit from below, the winning of the AT game is not won). At this time, if the expectation increase effect appears when the guidance is displayed from above, it will be easier for the guidance from the bottom to be displayed after the guidance from the top compared to the case where it does not appear. good too. In addition, when there is a possibility that the guidance from the bottom is not displayed after the guidance is displayed from the top, even if the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from the top, the AT is added at a predetermined ratio (for example, 6/10). (that is, the two-choice effect of fate always fails).

When the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from above when the guidance is displayed from above, and after operating the starting lever 210 according to the guidance from below when the guidance is displayed from below This is displayed based on the operation of the start lever 201 during a predetermined period until the display of whether or not the hitting direction is correct (the same display as in FIGS. 745(P) and 746(R)) is performed. (For example, cut-in of a character image displayed in red, light emission of a lamp in a predetermined pattern, or predetermined sound effect) may be performed. However, if the guidance is displayed from above, it will not be performed on 8/10, but will be performed on 2/10, and if the guidance is displayed from below, it will be performed on 6/10. Like the sorting of 4/10 that is not performed, the appearance frequency is lower when the starting lever 210 is operated following the guidance from below than when the starting lever 210 is operated following the guidance from above. It is also desirable that the number of patterns of the expectation level increasing effect is smaller when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from below.

As mentioned above, in the case where there is a possibility that the guidance will not be displayed from the bottom after the guidance is displayed from the top, at this time, it is better if the expectation level increase effect appears when the guidance is displayed from the top. , the guidance from the bottom may be more likely to be displayed after the guidance from the top compared to the case where the guidance does not appear.

If you follow the guidance from the bottom, the probability of winning more AT games is higher, so if you dare to follow the guidance from the bottom, there is no need to perform an excessive expectation increase effect, and it is necessary to increase the variation. because there is no

The effect that appears when the starting lever 210 is operated in accordance with the guidance from above when the guidance is displayed from above is preferably a performance that does not indicate whether the number of AT games is to be increased. If a player who does not know that the guidance appears from below prematurely operates the starting lever 210 according to the guidance from above and an effect indicating whether or not the number of AT games is increased appears, the player This is because there is a risk of misunderstanding that the timing at which the guidance appears from above is the final timing of the fateful two-choice presentation, and that the guidance cannot be seen from below forever, resulting in a loss.

Specifically, the effect that appears when the starting lever 210 is operated in accordance with the guidance from above when the guidance is displayed from above is a production that only shows the added degree of expectation (for example, the character A is displayed. If the character B is displayed, the expectation is 80%, and if the character B is displayed, the expectation is 50%. If a white message is displayed, it is desirable to be an effect indicating that the expectation is 50% and that the number of AT games is added to the winning.

On the other hand, when the guidance is displayed from below and the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from below, it is desirable that the effect that appears indicates whether or not the number of AT games should be increased. Since all the options are presented to the player at the timing when the guidance is displayed from below, the player benefits even if the effect indicating whether the number of AT games is increased or not is executed when following the guidance from below. This is because there is no difference in

If the guidance is followed from above, an effect is executed that does not indicate whether or not the number of AT games has been increased. Then, if the player realizes that the probability of winning is higher when following the guidance from below with the addition of the number of AT games, the ball output rate will increase and the burden on the hall will increase, so the guidance from below was followed. Even if it is a case, an effect that does not indicate the success or failure may be executed.

In other words, when the starting lever 210 is hit from above while the guide is displayed from above, the degree of expectation is shown and the propriety of adding the number of AT games is not notified, so the game is like a post-announcement, and from below. When the starting lever 210 is hit from below while the guidance is displayed, the propriety of increasing the number of AT games is announced, so the game is like a previous announcement.

It should be noted that, when guidance is followed from above, an effect indicating whether or not the additional lottery is won may be executed. If an effect indicating a win is displayed, although it is more advantageous to operate later, there will be many players who operate first. Suppressed.

When the guidance is displayed from above and the starting lever 210 is not operated without following the guidance from above, a special effect (the above-mentioned effect that does not indicate whether the number of AT games is increased or not) is executed. 748 (P'') described above. On the other hand, even if the starting lever 210 is not operated without following the guidance from below when the guidance is displayed from below, after a predetermined period of time (the effective time during which the operation from below is valid) It is desirable that a special effect (for example, a dancing character is displayed) is executed after the game ends. A special performance that was not displayed when the guidance from above was not followed is displayed when the starting lever 210 was not operated without following the guidance from below, so that the number of AT games is higher when the guidance from below is followed. It can be implied that there is a high probability of winning on top of .

In addition, in FIG. 748 (R''), if the message "Which one is it?" When a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the process may be performed assuming that the starting lever 210 has been hit from above.

If the starting lever 210 is not hit from above after the guidance appears from above, the propriety of increasing the number of AT games will be notified after the first predetermined time has passed, but after the guidance has appeared from below If the starting lever 210 is not struck from then on, the propriety of adding the number of AT games is notified after a second predetermined time shorter than the first predetermined time has passed. This is because there is a higher probability that the person who follows the guidance from the bottom will be elected to add the number of AT games. Further, by hitting the starting lever 210 from below according to the guidance, the propriety of increasing the number of AT games may be notified.

It is desirable that the movable body does not operate when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from above when the guidance is displayed from above. On the other hand, when the guidance is displayed from below and the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from below, it is desirable that the movable body moves all or part of the movable width. If the movable body operates while the guidance is displayed from above, the player continues to operate the start lever 210 from above, misunderstanding that the probability of winning the additional AT game number is low, but misunderstanding that the probability is high. This is because there is a risk that

In addition, the movable body is operated a predetermined number of times before the guidance is displayed from above, and the movable body is operated a number of times greater than the predetermined number of times from the end of the display of the guidance from the top to the start of the display of the guidance from the bottom. The actuation may suggest that it is advantageous to operate the starting lever 210 following guidance from below. However, when each operation guidance is displayed, it is better not to move the movable body in order to ensure that the player recognizes the operation guidance. Also, before the guidance is displayed from above, and after the guidance from above is displayed and before the guidance is displayed from below, all the movable bodies may be operated, or some of the movable bodies may be operated. You may do so.

Moreover, it is desirable that the time from the start of the display of the guidance from the top to the end thereof is longer than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body before the guidance from the top is displayed. This is because if the movable body is moved for a long time before the guidance is displayed from above, the player's sense of anticipation will increase, and there is a risk that the start lever 210 will be hit prematurely when the guidance is displayed from above. Conversely, the time from the start to the end of displaying the guidance from above may be shorter than the time from the start to the end of the action of the movable body before the guidance from above is displayed. This is because the player's sense of anticipation can be heightened by lengthening the operation time of the movable body rather than having the player properly recognize the operation guidance with a low AT additional winning probability.

In addition, the time from the start of guidance display to the end of the guidance display from the top may be shorter than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body between the end of the guidance display from the top and the start of the guidance display from the bottom. desirable. This is because, by moving the movable body for a long time after the guidance is displayed from above, it can be suggested that following the guidance from below has a higher probability of winning an AT addition. Conversely, the time from the start of the guidance display from above to the end is longer than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body between the end of the guidance display from the top and the start of the guidance display from the bottom. may This is for the purpose of making the player aware that there is an option to hit the start lever 210 from above even though the AT addition winning probability is low, and because there is a sufficient probability that the AT addition winning will not be won even if the guidance is followed from below, the movable body is also used. This is to prevent the operation from being performed for a long period of time so as not to stir the expectation too much.

Moreover, it is desirable that the time from the start of the display of the guidance from the bottom to the end thereof is longer than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body before the guidance from the top is displayed. If the movable body is moved for a long time before the guidance is displayed from above, the player's sense of anticipation increases, and there is a risk that the start lever 210 will be hit prematurely when the guidance is displayed from above. This is because, by making the time longer than that, it is possible to make the player sufficiently recognize the operation with a high AT-addition winning probability. Conversely, the time from the start to the end of displaying the guidance from below may be shorter than the time from the start to the end of the action of the movable body before the guidance from above is displayed. If the movable body is moved for a long time before the guidance is displayed from above, the player's sense of anticipation increases, and there is not enough time for the player to fully recognize the operation with a high AT-additional winning probability. It is possible to reduce the burden on the hall by increasing the possibility of operating according to the guidance from a low position.

In addition, the time from the start of the display of the guidance from the bottom to the end of the display may be shorter than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body between the end of the guidance display from the top and the start of the guidance display from the bottom. desirable. Since the player pays attention to the movement of the movable body while the movable body is moving, by moving the movable body for a long time after the guidance is displayed from above, the guidance is given from the bottom immediately after the movement of the movable body is finished. It is possible to make the player recognize the guidance that is displayed and has a high degree of expectation for AT addition winning. Conversely, the time from the start of the display of guidance from the bottom to the end is longer than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body between the end of the guidance display from the top and the start of the guidance display from the bottom. may Even if the movable body is operated for a long time, there is a sufficient probability that the player will not win the AT addition even if the player follows the guidance from below.

It should be noted that, in the two-choice effect of fate, whether or not to add the number of AT games was determined depending on the operation method of the starting lever 210, but the more times the operation guidance of the starting lever 210 appears, the more the operation guidance of the starting lever 210 As the number of operation opportunities increases, an additional chance to increase the number of AT games (hereinafter also referred to as an effect of how many times the operation can be performed) may be performed.

In this case, for example, when the addition of the number of AT games is decided and the loop lottery is won, a predetermined distribution (for example, timing effect 40/100, two-choice effect of fate 35/100, how many times you can operate the effect 25 /100 split) determines which bonus chances are played.

If the effect of how many times can be operated is selected, for example, if the number of AT games to be added is selected in advance, and if the number of AT games to be added is won, the number of operations is 1: 10/100, 2: 35/ 100, 3 times: distributed as 55/100, and if you do not win the addition of the number of AT games, the number of operations will be distributed as 1 time: 65/100, 2 times: 25/100, 3 times: 10/100. .

The effect of how many times it can be operated is executed during a pseudo-game (that is, during the reverse rotation of the reels) like the timing effect and the two-choice effect of destiny. The presentation of how many times the operation can be performed is first performed by an operation guide image of the starting lever 210 (including an image simulating the starting lever 210), an image indicating the first operation (for example, a message “First time!”), is displayed. If the starting lever 210 is operated within the operation valid period when the number of times of one operation is selected, FIG. 745(O) is displayed, and then FIG. 746(R), the effects of FIG. 746(S) are executed.

When the number of times of operation is selected to be two, an image (for example, " There is still more!” is displayed.

Then, in the second operation guidance, an operation guidance image of the starting lever 210 (including an image simulating the starting lever 210) and an image indicating the second operation (for example, a message "2nd time!!"). and is displayed. If the starting lever 210 is operated within the valid period of the second operation when the number of times of operation is selected to be two, then FIG. 745(O) is displayed, and then FIG. ), FIG. 746(R), FIG. 746(S) effects are executed.

When the number of times of operation is selected to be 3, an image (for example, " Next is the last!!") is displayed.

In the third operation guidance, an operation guidance image of the starting lever 210 (including an image simulating the starting lever 210) and an image indicating that the operation is the third time (for example, a message "3rd time!!!"). When the number of times of operation of 3 is selected, if the starting lever 210 is operated within the effective period of the third operation, FIG. 745(P), 746(R), 746(S) and (P) are executed accordingly.

It should be noted that, as the operation guidance continues for the first time, the second time, and the third time, the display during the operation guidance may be displayed with a high degree of expectation. For example, in the first operation guidance, the background image, the image of the starting lever 210, and the message "First time!" is displayed in green, and in the third operation guide, the background image, the image of the starting lever 210, and the message "3rd time!!" are displayed in red. Further, for example, the display size of the image of the starting lever 210 may be increased as the operation guidance continues for the first time, the second time, and the third time.

Also, when the first operation guidance develops to FIG. 745(O), when the second operation guidance develops to FIG. 745(O), the degree of expectation for the display in FIG. A high display may be used. Specifically, for example, when the first operation guidance progresses to FIG. When it develops to , the background image and the text "Come on!" are displayed in green.

In this way, by performing the additional chances with different operation methods such as the timing effect, the two-choice effect of destiny, and the effect of how many times the operation can be performed, the player is not bored and all kinds of additional chances are provided. Since it is difficult to grasp the trick of operation, it is difficult to increase the ball output rate, and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

[13-6. Seesaw game performance during AT]
Figures 749, 750, 751, 752, and 753 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the seesaw game effect executed during the AT. Differences from the normal seesaw game presentation will be mainly described below. During the AT, for example, when a predetermined rare combination (a small combination with a low probability (eg, 1/30 or less)) is established, there is a high probability (eg, over 1/10), and a predetermined regular combination (a high probability (eg, 1/10)) is established. For example, with a low probability (for example, 1/1000 or less) when winning a small role) (specifically, for example, when a weak watermelon included in the predetermined rare role is established, 1/8, the predetermined rare If the strong watermelon included in the role is established, a lottery will be held to enter the special zone (1/4), and if the pushing order bell included in the predetermined normal role is established, the special zone will be entered. The specialized zone continues for 10 games, and a seesaw game effect is executed every game. When each seesaw game effect in the specialized zone is successful, the number of AT games is added.

In addition, the odd-numbered games (1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, and 9th games) in the specialization zone are called specialization zone A. A control change is made to That is, if the reels are stopped by reverse pressing in the main game in the special zone A, 9 coins can be paid out.

The even-numbered games (2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th games) in the specialization zone are called specialization zone B, and the control is changed so that 132 bells (5 payouts) is forcibly established in specialization zone B. is done. That is, if the reels are stopped by pinching in this game in the specialized zone B, five coins can be paid out. Therefore, in the 10 games in the specialized zone, the game in the specialized zone A and the game in the specialized zone B are played alternately. Since the technique of forcibly winning a winning combination and the technique of changing the control table for stopping the reels are well-known techniques, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 749(A) shows the state when all the reels of the game in which the special zone is won are stopped. In (A), a message is displayed on the image display 500 indicating that the number of AT games will be increased if the seesaw game effect is successful. In FIG. 749(B), the description of the seesaw game effect has started, and the same display as in FIG. 743(C) is performed. In the seesaw game effect executed in the normal game, an explanation was displayed that the 321 bell was forcibly established and the reverse push was performed (Fig. 743(B)), but the player follows the navigation during the AT. Also, because the seesaw game during AT increases medals (because it contradicts the message "You can enjoy the seesaw game without reducing medals too much!"), the seesaw game in the specialized zone Such display is not performed in production.

749(C), (D), (E), (F), and FIGS. 750(G) and (H), the contents displayed on the image display 500 (description of the seesaw game effect) are shown in FIG. Since the display contents are the same as those in (D), (E), (F), and FIGS.

FIG. 750(I) shows the state of the next game in FIG. 750(H), that is, the state of the game in which the seesaw game effect of the first game (specialized zone A) of the specialized zone is performed when the lever is turned on. The seesaw game effect in the specialized zone is realized by a pseudo game started by turning on the lever, and the reels rotate in the reverse direction, similar to the seesaw game effect normally executed.

Also, in FIG. 750 (I), medals are retained on the seesaw portion 552, and a reverse push guidance image as a batting style effect showing a batting method advantageous to the player and the remaining medals up to the addition of the number of AT games are displayed. A gauge indicating the staying time and a support message are displayed on the image display 500 .

FIG. 750(J) shows a state in which the seesaw game effect is successfully performed by operating the starting lever 210 in the horizontal direction (an operation different from the operation for advancing the game (vertical direction)). In FIG. 750(J), the movable pieces 552a and 552b of the seesaw portion 552 are lifted, and the inclination of the seesaw portion 552 is fixed horizontally. Also, the door portion 555 is opened. Also, in FIG. 750(J), the effect button long press guide image and the reverse press guide image (that is, two guide images) are the characters celebrating the addition of the number of AT games with the fan turned sideways, and the image display body. 500 is displayed.

In FIG. 750(K), the effect button 204 is long pressed according to the effect button long press guidance image, and the seesaw portion 552 is tilted in the front view back direction, and the medal passes through the open door portion 555. It is in a state in which it moves to the seesaw success tube 558 and the sensor attached to the seesaw success tube 558 detects the medal. Also, in FIG. 750(K), the movable pieces attached to both ends of the seesaw portion 552 have returned to their reference positions. In addition, the image display 500 displays a message indicating that the AT game number addition has been won ("AT addition!"), a reverse press guidance image, and a performance button long press guidance image (that is, two guidance images). It is Note that the medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213 .

FIG. 750(L) is a continuation of FIG. 750(K), in which a message indicating that there is a chance to increase the number of AT games (additional chance) is displayed on the image display 500. FIG. Also, a reverse-press guidance image and a long-press effect button guidance image (that is, two guidance images) are displayed on the image display 500 . As with the seesaw game effect won during the normal game, even after it is confirmed that the seesaw game effect is successful and the win is made to add to the number of AT games, the effect button long-press guidance image and the image display 500 are displayed. is displayed in

In addition, while the additional chance is being played, the reels rotate in reverse at a higher speed than when the seesaw game is being played. It should be noted that here, it is assumed that an additional chance will always appear after the seesaw game effect is successful and the addition of the number of AT games is won. , 32/128, 96/128 not to take additional winning chances) may be determined.

In FIG. 751(M), an effect for increasing the number of AT games is performed. Here, as in FIG. 745(N), when the starting lever 210 is operated with good timing (vertical operation similar to the operation (vertical direction) for advancing the game), the number of AT games is increased. However, a predetermined valid time (for example, 2 seconds) of the start lever 210 may be provided similarly to the additional chance in the normal seesaw game effect. In addition, in (M), the starting lever operation guide image of the start lever 210 for prompting the operation of the start lever 210, the reverse push guide image, and the effect button long press guide image (that is, three guide images) are displayed. displayed on the image display.

FIG. 751(N) shows the state after the start lever 210 is operated in FIG. 751(M). A message is displayed on the image display to indicate whether or not the operation timing of the starting lever 210 in FIG. Also, a reverse-press guidance image and a long-press effect button guidance image (that is, two guidance images) are displayed on the image display 500 .

In FIG. 751(O), a message indicating that the number of AT games has been added and the number of games (two games) is displayed on the image display 500 . Red 7s are aligned in the middle row of the reels (three identical symbol combinations). If the operation of the starting lever 210 is successful in (M), a lottery for the number of games to be added to AT is performed, and the player wins the addition of two games or one game. When the starting lever 210 is successfully operated, a lottery for the number of games to be added is performed by, for example, adding one game at 96/128 and adding two games at 32/128.

Similar to the AT addition chance developed from the seesaw game production that rushed into the normal game, if you win 2 games (advantageous results are obtained), red 7 is complete (3 identical pattern combinations) If the reels are temporarily stopped in this state and one game is won (no advantageous result is obtained), for example, the same stopping point as the previous game (main game), or red 7 tenpai. The reels temporarily stop at the stop point where the red 7 is not aligned even though the red 7 is aligned. Also, in FIG. 751(O), the image display 500 displays a reverse press guide image and a long press effect button guide image (that is, two guide images).

In FIG. 751 (P), the image display body 500 includes a message indicating that the start lever 210 is operated to shift to the main game, a reverse push guide image, and a long press effect button guide image (that is, two guide images). is displayed in

Subsequently, FIG. 751(Q) shows a state in which the starting lever 210 is operated in FIG. 751(P), and the game is started. Since this game is the first game in the specialized zone, a band indicating that it is in the specialized zone A is displayed on the image display 500 (not the band, but a background image, etc., indicating that it is in the specialized zone A). ). Also, a number (reverse press) indicating the stop order of each reel is displayed at a position above each reel of the image display 500 . FIG. 751(R) shows a state in which 321 bells are stopped according to the stop order, the bells are aligned in the middle stage of the reels, and 9 medals are paid out.

FIG. 752(S) shows the lever-on state in the second game of the specialized zone. A pseudo-game is started and a seesaw game effect is started. Since the second game of the special zone is the special zone B, 132 bells is established. Instead of the reverse push guidance image, a pinching guidance image (the number 132 displayed in the upper left part of the image display body 500 and the characters "Pinching!" 750(I) except that a combination of ) is displayed.

FIG. 752(T) shows a state in which the seesaw game effect has been successfully performed, and is the same as FIG. FIG. 752(U) shows that the seesaw part 552 is tilted in the depth direction in the front view, the medal passes through the open door part 555 and moves to the seesaw success tube 558, and the sensor attached to the seesaw success tube 558 is the state in which a medal is detected, and is the same as FIG.

FIG. 752(V) shows a state in which a message indicating that there is a chance to increase the number of AT games (additional chance to increase the number of AT games) is displayed on the image display 500. This is the same as FIG. 750(L) except that the guidance image is displayed.

Fig. 752 (W) shows a state in which an effect for increasing the number of AT games is being performed, and instead of the reverse push guidance image, a pinching and hitting guidance image is displayed, except that Fig. 751 ( M). Fig. 752(X) shows the state after the start lever 210 is operated in Fig. 752(W). N).

FIG. 753(Y) shows a state in which a message indicating that the number of AT games has been added and the number of games (2 games) is displayed on the image display 500, instead of the reverse push guidance image. 751(O), except that the pinch guide image is displayed. FIG. 753(Z) shows a state in which a message is displayed indicating that the start lever 210 is operated to shift to the main game, and instead of the reverse push guidance image, a pincer strike guidance image is displayed. Except for this, it is the same as FIG. 751(P).

FIG. 753(AA) shows a state in which the starting lever 210 is operated in FIG. 753(Z) and the game is started. Since this game is the second game in the specialized zone, a band indicating that it is in the specialized zone B is displayed on the image display 500 . In addition, numbers indicating the stop order of each reel are displayed at a position above each reel of the image display 500 . FIG. 753(AB) shows a state in which 132 bells are stopped according to the stop order, the bells are arranged diagonally to the right and downward of the reel, and 5 medals are paid out.

If the seesaw game effect in the special zone fails, the game shifts to the main game by operating the starting lever 210 or after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) passes without executing the extra chance. Also, if the AT addition chance in the special zone fails, the screen for the number of games to be added is not displayed, and when the start lever 210 is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the main game is started. Transition.

In the above example, in the 10 games in the specialized zone, the game in the specialized zone A and the game in the specialized zone B are played alternately. In the second game, if 132 bells (5 medals are paid out) are obtained according to the guide image of pinching, 321 bells (9 medals are paid out) are established from the 3rd game onwards in the specialized zone even in even-numbered games. A reverse push guidance image may be displayed by pressing the button. In this case as well, special zone A may be displayed in even-numbered games after the third game of the special zone, or special zone B may be displayed even though 321 bells are established.

However, if all the 321 bells are established in the even-numbered games after the third game in the specialized zone and the reverse push guide image is displayed, the ball output rate increases and the burden on the hole increases. It is preferable that the guidance image is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds longer than 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game) has elapsed since it was displayed. Also, even if a predetermined time has not passed since the pinching guide image was displayed, the pinching punch image is erased before the game in which the pinching punch guide image is displayed ends (for example, at the time of the second stop). may As a result, a player who did not notice the pinching guide image or misunderstood that pinching was not necessary because it was erased, will be able to achieve 132 bells in the even-numbered games after the third game in the specialized zone, and the ball output rate will be increased. Since it cannot be raised, the burden on the hall is reduced.

However, since the slot machine 1's ball output rate is still designed on the premise that 321 bells will be obtained in the even-numbered games after the third game in the specialized zone, the pinching guide image is erased after a predetermined period of time. , and its display size is desirably larger than the reverse-press guidance image. In addition, as described above, it is important to follow the guidance of the pincer strike guide image in the second game of the specialized zone, so the pincer strike guide image is highlighted (for example, displayed by blinking, or displayed multiple times). ).

In addition, since the player may forget how to hit after the pinching-hitting guidance image is deleted, the pinching-hitting guidance image may be redisplayed when a special condition is satisfied as a remedy. . For example, in the first game of the specialized zone, when following the guidance of the reverse push guidance image, a re-display lottery of the pinching guidance image (for example, 1/2 won, 1/2 lost) is performed, and the re-display lottery is performed. Winning the display lottery is an example of a special condition. As such, the special condition is desirably a condition that is satisfied when the operation guidance (guidance of the reverse push guidance image) for the first game of the specialized zone is followed.

It should be noted that when the pinching guide image that is redisplayed when the above-described special condition is satisfied, it may be displayed with the above-described emphasized display. In addition, if 132 bells are obtained according to the guide image of the pincer strike guide image in the second game of the specialized zone, 321 bells can be obtained in all games from the third game onward in the specialized zone, so the number of acquired bells has increased, or A blessing effect may be executed to bless the transition to a state in which a large amount of medals can be obtained (a state in which all nine bells are controlled). When the blessing effect is performed, for example, the reels are stopped after the second game of the specialized zone is finished and before the third game (that is, the game in which the 321 bell is established and the reverse push guidance image is displayed). A frozen state remains, and the blessing effect is executed in the frozen state.

It should be noted that, for example, in the case of executing the blessing effect, a special condition (for example, the start lever 210, etc.) is set during the blessing effect without executing the payout of five medals at 132 bells at the end of the second game. The payout of the five medals may be executed by satisfying the condition (based on operation of the operation unit, etc.). Further, during the blessing performance, 4 medals out of the 5 medals were paid out, and the remaining one medal was operated by the starting lever 210 to start the third game of the special zone. It may be paid out at some time (during execution of the third game). By delaying the payout of medals in this way, the player feels uncomfortable at the end of the second game, and wonders if something advantageous will happen to the player. It is possible to have a sense of anticipation, such as being able to make the player feel as if he/she has won more than 15 medals, which is the number of medals to be paid out.

It should be noted that if the guidance of the pincer strike guide image in the second game of the specialized zone is not followed, the number of payouts will be 0 because the bells will not line up on the reels in that game, and the number of payouts will be 0 in the third game of the specialized zone. It is also possible that 132 bells are established in all the games after the first game, and the pincer punch guide image appears. In this way, when the guidance is not followed in the second game of the specialized zone, the ball output rate is reduced, so the player can face the second game of the specialized zone with a sense of tension.

In addition, if you do not follow the guidance of the pincer strike guidance image displayed in the second game of the specialized zone (also referred to as the front pinch strike guide image) and the guidance of the pinch strike guidance image of the second game of the specialized zone, three games will be performed. The display mode may be different from or the same as the pinching guide image (also referred to as the rear pinching guide image) displayed after the second pinching.

By making it easier for the player to recognize the pre-sandwich hitting guide image, there is an advantage that the player is more likely to receive the benefits (321 bells are established) after the third game of the specialized zone, but the disadvantage is that the burden on the hole increases. There is By making it easier for the player to recognize the post-sandwich hitting guide image, there is an advantage that the player can easily recognize the pushing order after the third game that has been changed due to the player's mistake in the pushing order, but the number of payouts is small. There is a demerit that the burden on the state hole increases because the guidance image of the 132 bell is easy to recognize. For example, by adopting the following display mode, it is possible to determine the ease of recognition of the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image.

For example, a plurality of pinching guide images may be displayed for both the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image. Specifically, for example, the pinching guide image in the upper left part of the image display body 500 shown in FIG. may be displayed in the center of the However, with regard to the front pinching guide image, the large size front pinching guide image displayed in the center of the image display unit 500 is displayed only once to make it difficult to recognize. The post pinching guide image displayed on the display body 500 is displayed a plurality of times to facilitate recognition.

Further, for example, the back pinching guide image displayed in the third game of the special zone is displayed from the middle of the second game of the special zone in order to inform the player of the just-changed pushing order. It may be easier to recognize. Specifically, for example, at the second stop of the second game in the specialized zone (at the time of the second stop, it is determined whether or not the keys have been pressed in the correct order), the rear pinch guide image is displayed.

Further, the display position of the image display member 500 may be different or the same between the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image. For example, the front squeezing guidance image may be displayed in the center of the image display 500 to make it easier to recognize, and the rear squeezing guidance image may be displayed in the upper left part of the image display 500 to make it difficult to recognize. . Conversely, the rear squeezing guide image may be displayed in the center of the image display 500 to make it easier to recognize, and the front squeezing guide image may be displayed in the upper left part of the image display 500 to make it difficult to recognize. good.

Also, the length of display time may be different or the same between the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching punch guide image. For example, in order to make it easier to recognize the front squeezing guide image, it is displayed for a longer time than the rear squeezing guide image. Conversely, in order to make it easier to recognize the rear squeezing guide image, it may be displayed for a longer time than the front squeezing guide image.

Note that the sound effect output when the front pinching guide image is displayed, the number of times it is output, and the volume are and may be the same or different. For example, with respect to the front squeezing guide image, since the pushing order is as expected for the player, the sound effect corresponding to the front squeezing guide image (for example, "It's a pinching strike!" corresponding to the pressing order) is played only once. It is sufficient to output it, but since the rear pinching strike guide image is displayed when the pressing order is changed, the image corresponding to the rear pinching strike guidance image is displayed in order to inform the player of the changed pressing order. It is desirable to output a sound effect (for example, "Sandwiching!" corresponding to the pressing order) multiple times.

In addition, since the payout rate of balls increases when both the front pinching-hitting guidance image and the rear pinching-hitting guidance image are followed, from the viewpoint of the player's benefit, the corresponding effect sound is output multiple times. Alternatively, from the viewpoint of increasing the burden on the hall, the corresponding sound effect may be output only once. In addition, since the ball payout rate increases particularly when following the front squeezing guidance image, the corresponding sound effect is played only once when the front squeezing guidance image is displayed, and when the rear squeezing guidance image is displayed, there is no response. A sound effect may be output multiple times.

Further, for example, in the first game of the specialized zone, if the re-display lottery of the front squeezing guide image performed according to the guidance of the reverse push guide image is lost, the front squeezing guide image will be played in the second game of the specialized zone. Even if the hitting guide image is displayed, the corresponding sound effect may not be output. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the effect sound is not output at the same time as the front squeezing guide image and the front squeezing guide image is not displayed again, which is a severe situation for the player, that is, it is easy to reduce the burden on the hole. Even if the special conditions as described above are not satisfied, it is not necessary to output the corresponding sound effect when the front nipping and hitting guide image and the rear nipping and hitting guide image are displayed.

For each of the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image, the output of the corresponding sound effect may be started before the display of the pinching guide image is started, or the display of the pinching punch guide image may be started. At the same time, the output of the corresponding sound effect may be started, or the corresponding sound effect may be output after the start of the display of the pinching guide image.

By starting the output of the corresponding effect sound simultaneously with the start of the display of the squeezing guidance image, the guidance can be visually and aurally appealed at the same time, so that the player can surely recognize the squeezing guidance. Also, in general, there are individual differences in visual and auditory reaction speeds (there are also individual differences in which of the visual and auditory reaction speeds is faster), but it is possible to respond before the pinching guide image is displayed. If you start outputting the sound effect to do so, it will be easier for people whose hearing response speed is lower than that of sight to recognize both at the same time. For people with high auditory reaction speed, it is easy to recognize both at the same time.

For each of the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image, the display time of the pincer punching guide image and the output time of the corresponding sound effect may be the same, or the display time of the pincer punching guide image may be longer than the display time of the pincer punching guide image. The output time of the corresponding sound effect may be longer, or the output time of the corresponding sound effect may be shorter than the display time of the pinching guide image.

Since the display time of the squeezing guide image and the output time of the corresponding sound effect are the same, it is easy to recognize that the squeezing guide image and its output sound are an integral presentation. Since the output time of the corresponding sound effect is longer than the display time of the pinching guide image, the sound effect is output for a long time even when the sound volume in the hall is large, so that the player can easily notice the sound effect. Since the output time of the corresponding effect sound is shorter than the display time of the pinching guide image, the player can be made to concentrate on the effect displayed on the image display body 500.例文帳に追加

Regarding matters not mentioned above, the seesaw game effect (including the additional chance effect) during the AT, and the time and timing at which the effect is executed, are not described above. ) can be the same as in Specifically, for example, in the seesaw game production (including additional chance production) during AT, the display mode of each guide image, the length and timing of the display time, the rotation mode of the reel, and the length and timing of the rotation time, Matters not explained above regarding the output mode and output time of sound effects and BGM, the light emission mode of light emitters, the length and timing of light emission time, and the operation mode of movable bodies (Including additional chance production) can be the same. However, since this is a seesaw game effect during the AT, it is not possible to adopt a mode of effect that relies on the fact that the normal game is in progress.

[13-7. Sudden seesaw game production]
In the above example, the seesaw game effect starts from the next game in which the seesaw game effect is won. 754, the seesaw game effect will be described.

FIG. 754 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sudden seesaw game effect. FIG. 754(A) shows the state when the lever is turned on in the winning game, in a sudden seesaw game effect. The sudden seesaw game effect is realized by the main game rather than the pseudo game. Therefore, each stop button is effective during the execution of the seesaw game effect, and while the seesaw game effect is being executed, each stop button can be stopped to receive payout of medals.

In addition, when the player suddenly wins the seesaw game effect in a game in which the order of pressing the bell is established, an image that guides the order of pressing the bell (in FIG. 754(A), the 321 bell is established, so the image is reversed). display. As a result, the player can get an exhilaration by suddenly winning the seesaw game effect and receiving a payout by the pushing order bell.

In a game in which the seesaw game effect is suddenly won, the medal moves to the claw portion 556 of the seesaw accessory 550 at the same time as the lever is turned on, the tip portion 557 operates, and the medal falls from the claw portion 556 to the seesaw portion 552. - 特許庁

In the above-described seesaw game effect, four medals are thrown and the fourth medal moves to the claw portion 556, but in the sudden seesaw game effect, the dummy medal plays the role of the fourth medal. The dummy medals are stored in a predetermined storage position (not shown) in the slot machine 1, and when the seesaw game suddenly starts, the dummy medals move from the storage position to the claw portion 556, and the seesaw game succeeds. , or failure, the dummy medal returns to the storage position (not shown).

Note that in the sudden seesaw game effect, the seesaw game is started without performing the seesaw game effect described above (FIGS. 743(C) to 744(I)). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a surprise, but the medals may be moved to the seesaw portion 552 after inserting a moving image explaining the seesaw game effect.

In FIG. 754(A), medals are staying on the seesaw portion 552 . In addition, in FIG. 754(A), an image display of a reverse push guide image as a batting style effect showing a batting method advantageous to the player, a gauge showing the remaining medal retention time until AT acquisition, and a cheering message are displayed. Displayed on body 500 .

FIG. 754(B) shows a state in which the seesaw game effect is successful. In FIG. 754B, the movable piece 552a and the movable piece 552b of the seesaw portion 552 are raised, and the inclination of the seesaw portion 552 is fixed horizontally. Also, the door portion 555 is opened. A reverse press guide image and a long press effect button guide image are displayed on the image display 500 . Note that the medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213 .

In FIG. 754(C), the production button 204 is long pressed to tilt the seesaw part 552 in the front view direction, the medal passes through the open door part 555, moves to the seesaw success tube 558, and the seesaw This is a state in which a sensor attached to the success tube 558 has detected medals. Furthermore, the movable pieces attached to both ends of the seesaw portion 552 have returned to their reference positions. Also, the image display 500 displays a message indicating that the AT has been won, a reverse-press guidance image, and a long-press effect button guidance image. Note that the medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213 .

FIG. 754(D) shows a state in which all the reels in this game are suddenly stopped in a seesaw game effect. When all the reels are stopped, it becomes a frozen state. At a predetermined rate (for example, 1/2) that suddenly succeeds in the seesaw game production, you win the chance to add the number of AT games, and when you win the chance to add the number of AT games, the freeze state of FIG. 754 (D) and Become. Even if the seesaw game performance is suddenly successful, if the opportunity to add the number of AT games is not won, the game will not be frozen even if the game ends, and the AT will start from the next game. That is, if the additional chance is not won, the AT for the initial number of games will be the chance to start, and if the additional chance is won, the AT for the number of games added to the initial number of games will be the chance to start.

In FIG. 754(D), while the movable pieces 552a and 552b of the seesaw portion 552 are raised, one medal falls to the seesaw portion 552 again. This freeze state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

FIG. 754(E) shows the state after the freeze state has ended. In FIG. 754(E), an effect button long press guidance image is displayed. When the performance button is pressed long in the state of FIG. 754 (E), the performance button 204 is long pressed and the seesaw part 552 is tilted in the front view back direction, and the medal passes through the open door part 555 and the seesaw success. It moves to tube 558, and the number of AT-added games is reported. Also, when it is detected that a medal has passed through the opened door portion 555, the effect button long press guidance image is erased.

As described above, since the sudden seesaw game effect is realized by this game, all the reels can be stopped by operating each stop button during the seesaw game. In other words, for example, while the medals are being paid out for all the small wins, the effect button long-press guidance image may be displayed after five seconds, which is the time for the medals to stay in the seesaw portion 552, has passed. obtain.

When the performance button long-press guidance image is displayed while medals are being paid out, it is desirable to temporarily stop the medal delivery in order to make the player concentrate on the long-press guidance of the performance button 204.例文帳に追加For example, when it is determined that 9 medals have been paid out by aligning 321 bells, the timing of paying out the fifth medal and the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed since the medals were retained on the seesaw portion 552 are determined. , are the same, the fifth medal is paid out, and the payout is temporarily stopped without paying out the sixth medal. In other words, the main board 409 controls the payout of medals, and the main board 409 also performs the process of stopping the control of the payout of medals. ing.

In addition, since the payout was temporarily stopped in order to make the player concentrate on the effect button long press guide image, when the effect button long press guide image was erased is detected), the payout should be resumed. If the starting lever 210 is operated before the resumed payout is finished, the next game can be started. Note that even if the next game is started while the payout is being made, the same processing is performed when the start lever is operated when the payout is not being made, and the payout is made during the game. However, the payout sound is output. When the next game starts and each reel spins, it is desirable to complete the payout by the time the next game ends after the remaining payout is made even though the reels are spinning. This is because if the remaining payouts are not completed before the next game is finished, there is a possibility that the payouts for two games will be mixed and the player will be confused when a new payout is obtained in the next game.

However, the maximum number of medals paid out in one game of the slot machine is 15, and there may be a case where the next game ends before the restarted payout is completed. In that case, it is better to finish the resumed payout as soon as possible (not cause confusion), so the reels (symbol fluctuations) will not rotate. It is better to intermittently execute the payout process whether it is stopped or not.

It should be noted that, for example, if the game in which the seesaw game effect suddenly started is finished within 5 seconds (the shortest time for one game is 4.1 seconds), 5 seconds, which is the time for the medals to stay in the seesaw portion 552, has elapsed. before you can start the next game. That is, the seesaw game effect can be suddenly executed over a plurality of games (two games). In this case, there is a possibility that the seesaw game is won suddenly in the second game as well. In that case, the seesaw game should be suddenly stocked, and the seesaw game should be suddenly started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed.

In addition, in the state where the main game is finished (the state where the reels (symbol fluctuations) are stopped), suddenly the seesaw game effect is completed, and the 5-second period in which the medals are retained on the seesaw portion 552 ends. is displayed, if the start lever 210 is operated, the next game is started. When the next game is started, it is desirable to display the effect button long-press guidance image at the same position and size as the previous game even when the next game is started. If the display position or display size of the effect button long press guide image displayed across the game is changed, it may become difficult for the player to recognize the effect button long press guide image.

[13-8. Another example when the seesaw game production fails]
FIG. 755 is an explanatory diagram showing another example when the seesaw game effect fails. FIG. 755(A) shows the state where the seesaw game has started, which is the same as FIG. 744(J). FIG. 755(B) shows that the seesaw game effect failed, that is, the medals could not be retained on the seesaw portion 552 for a predetermined time (5 seconds) after the seesaw game started, and the medals were pulled from the end of the seesaw portion 552. has been dropped. Tokens falling from the end of the seesaw portion 552 move from the opening 559 a through the seesaw failure tube 559 to the return gutter 213 . In other words, when the stay time of the medals on the seesaw portion 552 is less than a predetermined time (5 seconds), even if the medals stay on the seesaw portion 552, the effect button long press guidance image is not displayed.

FIG. 755(C) shows the state immediately after the seesaw game effect fails. In FIG. 755(C), when the seesaw game effect fails, the game immediately shifts to the real game instead of the failure effect in the pseudo game. When shifting to the main game, for example, random delay processing is performed for each reel, and each reel rotates normally (forward rotation). When the seesaw game performance fails and the seesaw game performance failure performance is performed, some players are strongly discouraged, so the occurrence of such disappointment can be suppressed by quickly returning to the main game. Also, in FIG. 755(C), a reverse-press guidance image is displayed.

In addition, when the seesaw game effect fails and the game returns to the main game, the game can be executed in the shortest 4.1 seconds by combining the pseudo game in which the seesaw game effect is performed and the main game. . For example, if the player has already acquired AT for a number of games that cannot be consumed by the closing time of the hall, it is better for the player to advance the game quickly than to acquire more AT games. Since the rate is increased, even in a game in which a seesaw game effect is performed, the seesaw game is made to fail so that it can be executed in 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game.

On the other hand, in the seesaw game effect, the fact that the medals were able to stay in the seesaw portion 552 for 5 seconds means that the game in which the seesaw game effect was executed could not be executed within 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game. means that In this way, when the seesaw game effect is successful and a result advantageous to the player is awarded, the ball output speed can be suppressed by preventing the game from proceeding in the shortest possible time.

In the seesaw game effect, the seesaw game effect is successful (the movable piece of the seesaw part 552 is 552a may operate to display the effect button long press guidance image). In this case, even in a game in which a seesaw game effect is performed, the game can be progressed in the shortest time while winning AT or winning the number of AT-added games.

It should be noted that even if the seesaw game effect is set to whether medals can be retained in the seesaw portion 552 for a time shorter than 4.1 seconds (for example, 2 seconds), which is the shortest time required to complete one game. 745(K'), in the seesaw game effect, the reverse press guidance image, the effect button long press guidance image, and the operation guidance of the start lever 210 (that is, the operation guidance for the three operation units) are displayed at the same time. Although they are displayed, it is desirable that the length of time that they are displayed simultaneously is longer than a certain length of time in order to ensure that all operations are understood by the player. Conversely, the length of time during which these operations are simultaneously displayed may be shorter than the specific time in order to suppress an increase in the number of paid balls by making it difficult for the player to grasp each operation. 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game, is an example of the specific length of time.

For the same reason as described above, in the seesaw game effect, the length of time when the reverse press guidance image, the effect button long press guidance image, and (operation guidance for the two operation units) are displayed at the same time are It may be longer or shorter than the specific time.

In the seesaw game effect, after the reverse-press guidance image and the effect button long-press guidance image are displayed, the operation guidance for the start lever 210 is further displayed, and the operation guidance for the three operation units is displayed at the same time. However, the length of time from the start of the game in which the seesaw game effect is performed to the display of the operation guidance for the starting lever 210 may be longer or shorter than the specific length of time.

The length of time from the start of the game in which the seesaw game performance is performed until the operation guidance of the start lever 210 is displayed is shorter than the specific length of time, so that the seesaw game performance can be speedily advanced. can increase the ball output speed. In addition, since the length of time from the start of the game in which the seesaw game effect is performed to the display of the operation guide for the start lever 210 is longer than the specific length of time, the seesaw game effect takes time. Therefore, the ball output speed can be reduced. 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game, is an example of the specific length of time.

For the same reason as described above, the length of time from the start of the game in which the seesaw game effect is performed to the display of the effect operation guide image may be longer or shorter than the specific time. good too.

[13-9. Another example of a chance to add a seesaw game effect]
FIG. 756 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the additional chance performed in the seesaw game effect. In the example of the additional chance explained using FIG. (For example, 8/128), regardless of the operation timing of the starting lever 210 of the next chance to add, you may forcibly win the addition of the number of AT games.

The example of FIG. 756 is an example of forcibly winning the addition of the number of AT games when the seesaw game effect is successful. FIG. 756(A) shows a state in which an additional chance has started, and is the same as FIG. 745(M).

In FIG. 756(B), as in FIG. 745(N), a message prompting the user to operate the starting lever 210 at the correct timing, an image simulating the starting lever 210, and a gauge indicating the timing are displayed as images. 500 is displayed. However, in FIG. 756 (B), the image simulating the starting lever 210 is displayed as a special display (for example, rainbow), so that when the seesaw game effect is successful, the number of AT games has already been won. is shown.

It should be noted that, when the seesaw game effect is successful, the starting lever 210 during the extra chance is displayed as a special display (for example, rainbow) at a predetermined ratio (for example, 60/128) when the additional AT game number has already been won. can be

In addition, although it is possible to execute a special display (for example, rainbow) when the number of AT games has already been won, the operation mode of the starting lever 210 (timing, hitting from above or hitting from below) , etc.), it is desirable that the appearance ratio is less than 1/2.

In addition, when the special display (for example, rainbow) is displayed, the same sound effect as when the special display is not displayed (the image imitating the starting lever 210 in the normal mode is displayed) may be output, or the normal A sound effect different from the sound effect when an image simulating the starting lever 210 of the mode is displayed may be output. The same is true for the luminous body, and when the special display (for example, rainbow) is displayed, the luminous body emits light in the same manner as when the special display is not displayed (the image imitating the starting lever 210 in the normal mode is displayed). Alternatively, the light emission mode may be different from the light emission mode when an image simulating the starting lever 210 in the normal mode is displayed. However, when outputting different sound effects, it is desirable to display different lighting modes.

When the seesaw game effect is successful, if you do not win the additional AT game number, and if the winning or not of the additional AT game number is determined by the operation timing of the starting lever 210, the starting lever 210 during the additional chance is specially displayed ( For example, it is not displayed in a rainbow), but is displayed in a normal mode.

As a result, when the starting lever 210 is displayed with a special display (for example, rainbow) during the additional chance, the player can get a sense of exhilaration by winning the additional AT game number, and during the additional chance. Since it is understood that there is no need to operate the starting lever 210 by aiming at the timing, it is possible to suppress the feeling of fatigue caused by aiming at the timing during the additional chance. In addition, in FIG. 756(B), the image display 500 displays a reverse-press guidance image and a long-press effect button guidance image.

FIG. 756(C) shows the state in which the starting lever 210 is operated in FIG. 756(B), which is the same state as in FIG. 745(O). FIG. 756(D) shows a state in which the number of AT-added games is announced, which is the same state as in FIG. 745(P).

In FIG. 756(D), when the starting lever 210 is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the game shifts to the main game as shown in (E). In this way, in FIG. 756 (B), when the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow) to notify in advance that the addition of the AT game number is confirmed, the player is sufficiently It is desirable that the additional opportunity does not loop because it was able to give a sense of exhilaration to

As a result, after the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed as a special display (for example, rainbow), even if the operation guidance for the two operation units, the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long push guidance image, is displayed. Furthermore, the operation guidance for the operation portion of the starting lever 210 is displayed, and the operation guidance for the operation portion 3 is not displayed. Therefore, after notifying the number of additional games in FIG. 756(D), the main game is started as shown in FIG. 756(E).

Also, for example, an upper limit (for example, 5 times) is provided for the number of loops of the additional chance, and when the upper limit is reached (that is, the last) additional chance is won, the image of the starting lever 210 is forcibly displayed. You may display by special display (for example, rainbow). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the disappointment that the upper limit of the number of loops is reached and the additional chance does not loop any more.

The image of the starting lever 210 is displayed as a special display (for example, rainbow) in both the chance to add on the first loop and the chance to add when the upper limit of the loop is reached, thereby making the player feel hopeful and discouraged. can be sufficiently suppressed, it is desirable not to display the above-mentioned special movie or practice effect at the end of the simulated game after displaying the image of the starting lever 210 with a special display (for example, rainbow).

Note that when the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed as a special display (for example, rainbow), the additional chance may be further looped. As a result, for example, at the opportunity to add the number of AT games one time before the upper limit of the number of loops, the number of AT games is forcibly won, and the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow), and then the loop lottery is won. , At the chance to add the upper limit of the number of loops, the number of AT games is forcibly won, and the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow). Since the image of the starting lever 210 can be displayed twice (for example, continuously) in a special display (for example, rainbow), it is possible to greatly improve the player's sense of expectation.

Also, for example, although the image of the starting lever 210 was not displayed as a special display (for example, rainbow) at the opportunity to add one time before the upper limit of the number of loops, by hitting the starting lever 210 with good timing, the number of AT games is won. Then, when the loop lottery is won and the chance of adding the upper limit of the number of loops is reached, as a privilege for reaching the upper limit of the number of loops, the number of AT games is forcibly won, and the start lever 210 is pushed. Images may be displayed in a rainbow.

In the above example, the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed as a special display (for example, rainbow) regardless of the operation timing of the starting lever 210 when forcibly won the lottery to increase the number of AT games. However, the image of the starting lever 210 may be displayed as a special display (for example, a rainbow) even in the slot machine 1 in which the lottery for forcible winning is not performed.

For example, at a predetermined rate when the AT addition chance is performed, the ratio of the size of the blackened part and/or the shaded part of the gauge indicating the operation timing of the start lever 210 to the size of the gauge is increased more than usual, Lower the movement speed of the blackened part of the gauge than usual, and lower the difficulty of the operation timing of the start lever 210 (However, although the difficulty of the operation timing is lowered, it does not always succeed. ), it is also possible to increase the expectation of winning the number of AT-added games.

In this way, when the difficulty level of the operation timing of the start lever 210 is lowered, the image of the start lever 210 is specially displayed in order to show the player that the expectation of winning the number of AT-added games is higher than that of normal operation timing. (for example, rainbow). In addition, when the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow) and the starting lever 210 is operated, as soon as the starting lever 210 is operated, it may be notified whether the number of AT games is added or not, After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the starting lever 210 was operated, the propriety of adding the number of AT games may be notified.

In addition, a special display (for example, rainbow) of the starting lever 210 that can be displayed when the AT game number addition lottery has already been won and the effect displayed when the starting lever 210 is operated and the AT game number addition lottery Although the lottery has not been won, the operation of the starting lever 210 is the operation of winning the AT game number addition lottery (operating with good timing, hitting from above, etc.) The effect displayed is the same. However, if it is different, the special display (for example, rainbow) of the starting lever 210 is more flashy (for example, the display size is large, and the display has many colors). It is preferable that the output sound of BGM or sound effect used is large, or the amount of light emitted from the light emitter is large).

[13-10. Another example of seesaw game production during AT]
FIGS. 757 and 758 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of the seesaw game effect executed during AT. In FIG. 749 and the like, an example of winning the seesaw game effect according to a predetermined probability in each game during AT was explained, but in addition to the lottery with the predetermined probability, in FIG. 757 and FIG. For example, when all the reels are stopped in the game immediately before the AT start game, or when the MAX input button 206 is pressed or the lever is turned on in the AT start game, the seesaw game effect starts after a predetermined time has elapsed.

FIG. 757(A) shows the state of the AT start game when the lever is turned on. The 321 bell has been established, and the image display 500 displays a display to guide the reverse push. Also, a timer indicating the remaining time is displayed on the image display 500, and when 100 seconds have passed, the seesaw game effect will start.

Also, the image display 500 displays the number of AT's remaining games. The shortest time for one game is 4.1 seconds, and the seesaw game effect is performed 100 seconds after the start of the AT. starts. The initial number of AT games is set to 30 games, which is larger than the 25 games, in order to entertain the player by performing at least one seesaw game performance whenever the AT is entered.

In the seesaw game effect that is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the AT, it is desirable not to give a result that is advantageous to the player, such as increasing the number of AT games. Instead, a special image that does not appear in other effects or a message, etc., should be displayed. For example, if a seesaw game effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the AT and a seesaw game effect is performed after a predetermined time has passed since the end of the seesaw game effect, the seesaw game effect will be successful. If an advantageous result is given in such a case, it would be more advantageous for the player to progress the game slowly, which could lead to a delay in the progress of the game and an increase in the burden on the hole. desirable.

Also, for example, before the elapse of 100 seconds, if the general AT additional game number lottery (additional lottery in which the seesaw game effect described above is not performed) is won, the general AT additional game number lottery When winning (additional lottery in which the seesaw game is not performed), the result is not reported (or partly reported (for example, if 20 games are added, only 10 games are reported)), and the time of the time A seesaw game played in the course of the game may also be notified. By doing so, the player can be made to recognize that an advantageous result has been awarded even though no advantageous result has been awarded.

Instead of directly indicating the number of seconds remaining until the start of the seesaw game with a timer, for example, a 10-step gauge is displayed, and the gauge accumulates by one step every predetermined number of seconds (for example, 10 seconds). The seesaw game effect may be started at the timing when the gauge is accumulated up to the stage. This is because if the timer directly indicates the number of seconds remaining until the start of the seesaw game, the player may be distracted by the timer and play the game in a hurry, which may result in making a mistake in the pressing order. be.

In addition, a predetermined lottery (for example, winning 32/128, non-winning 96/128) may be performed when AT is won, and if the lottery is won, the gauge is set to a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value (for example, 5 stages The seesaw game effect may be started at the timing when the number of eyes is accumulated. As a result, the player can expect a seesaw game effect even in the state in which the gauge is in the process of being filled up to the 10th level.

FIG. 757(B) shows a state in which all the reels are stopped in the order in which they were pressed in the game of FIG. 757(A), and bells are aligned in the middle row. The display of the number of remaining AT games is decreased by one game, and the timer indicating the remaining time until the seesaw game effect is advanced by 5 seconds.

FIG. 757(C) shows a state in which the timer indicating the remaining time until the seesaw game effect reaches zero seconds. When the timer reaches 0 seconds, a message indicating that the seesaw game is starting is displayed on the image display 500, indicating that the seesaw game will be performed in the next game.

In FIG. 757(C), when all the reels are stopped, the timer indicating the remaining time until the start of the seesaw game effect is 0 seconds, but the game is being executed (while the wait timer is operating and reel When the remaining time reaches 0 second during rotation), the effect being executed is stopped, a message indicating that the seesaw game is to start is displayed on the image display 500, and the seesaw game effect is executed in the next game. be.

Figures 757(D), (E), (F), Figures 758(G), and (H) show the state of the game in which the seesaw game effect is executed when the lever is turned on. Similar to (C), (D), (E), (F), and FIG. 745 (G).

FIG. 758(I) shows a state in which the seesaw game has started with medals falling on the seesaw portion 552 . Since this seesaw game effect is executed in the main game, the reels rotate forward. A reverse push guide image, a gauge indicating the remaining time of the seesaw game, and a cheering message are displayed on the image display 500 .

FIG. 758(J) shows a state in which the seesaw game effect is successful. The movable piece 552a and the movable piece 552b of the seesaw portion 552 are raised, and the inclination of the seesaw portion 552 is fixed horizontally. Also, a special image consisting of an image of a standing character and a message "GOOD" is displayed. Also, a reverse-press guidance image and a long-press effect button guidance image are displayed on the image display 500 .

FIG. 758(K) shows a state in which the effect button 204 is long-pressed in the state of FIG. At this time, the operation guidance for the starting lever 210 similar to that shown in FIG. 745(N) is further displayed, and the reverse push guidance image, the performance button long push guidance image, and the operation guidance for the three operation sections are displayed at the same time. .

FIG. 758(L) shows a state in which the starting lever 210 is operated in a timely manner in the state of FIG. and the hatched portion overlap). The image display 500 displays a special message of congratulations on the timely operation, a reverse-press guidance image, and a long-press effect button guidance image. Note that the medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213 .

In the above example, when all the games are played in the shortest time (4.1 seconds), the seesaw game effect is performed only once after the predetermined time has elapsed. By doing so, the seesaw game may be played a plurality of times (twice). For example, when the seesaw game effect triggered by the passage of time can be executed twice in one AT, when the operation guidance of the starting lever 210 in FIG. 758 (K) of the first seesaw game effect is followed. may display a message indicating that the AT is still continuing. If the seesaw game effect is forcibly executed a plurality of times each time the AT is entered, the player can become accustomed to the operation of the seesaw game.

Also, for example, if the number of initial games is selected from two types, 30 games and 60 games, in a predetermined distribution (30 games 64/128, 60 games 64/128), when 30 games are selected, A seesaw game effect is executed at least once after a predetermined time has passed, and when 60 games are selected, a seesaw game effect is executed at least twice after a predetermined time has passed.

Also, in this case, for example, although 60 games were selected as the initial number of games, 30 games were announced, and when the start lever 210 was operated in good timing in FIG. An effect may be performed to notify that the player has won the prize. It should be noted that the fact that the player has actually won 60 games will eventually be understood once the AT is consumed, so even if the starting lever 210 is not operated in FIG. , the notification effect may be performed.

Further, for example, if the seesaw game effect is successful after the lapse of a predetermined time and the starting lever 210 is operated with good timing, the normal game effect state after the end of the AT may be changed. Specifically, for example, the production stage is changed, or the displayed main character is changed. Also, at this time, a list of selectable presentation states may be displayed, and the player may select the presentation state to change the presentation state of the base game after the AT is finished.

Further, for example, when an AT is won in a normal game and another AT is won during a precursor game before the AT starts, the AT won during the precursor game is stocked. The stocked AT starts after the first winning AT ends and the precursor games within a predetermined number of games (for example, normal games within 5 games) are played. In this case, when the seesaw game effect due to the passage of time in the AT game that was first won succeeds and the start lever 210 is operated in good timing in FIG. 758 (K), a display ( For example, a message such as "stock x 1") may be sent.

In addition, depending on the state of operation of the starting lever 210 by the player (for example, the larger the amount of operation of the starting lever 210 (the longer the operating range from the initial position is equal to or greater than a predetermined value), the seesaw game effect is performed. It may be possible to subtract the remaining time until . For example, every time you play 5 games in a row with full weight (that is, 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for each game), the remaining time is subtracted by 30 seconds, or a predetermined small combination (for example, a push order bell) The remaining time is subtracted by 30 seconds each time a payout is received five times. As a result, the seesaw game presentation can be reached quickly by advancing the game quickly.

The above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but it is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines other than slot machines, such as pachinko machines and gaming machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such specific configurations, but various modifications and equivalents within the spirit of the appended claims. including configuration.

1 Slot machine 10 Gap 21 Transparent plate 50 Model unit 90 Front opening/closing member 100 Outer body 100a Rotating shaft 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 102a Convex portion 102b Guard portion 103 Top plate 104a Radiation port 104b Cord outlet 105 Partition plate 106 Projection step portion 107 Installation Piece 108 Mounting piece 109 Opening 110 Medal release device 110a Device main body 110b Hopper 110c Release port 110d Overflow gutter 110e Payout sensor 111 Auxiliary storage box for game medals 111a Medal full sensor 112 Power supply device 112a Device case 112b Top plate 112c Rear plate 112d Front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slanted plate 112g Ventilation hole 112h Leg 112i Ventilation space 112j Step 112k Mounting piece 112m Projection 112m-1 Projection 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 112s Board 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay Member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Main body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 Opening 128 Support cylinder 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay Terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent 200 Door-shaped front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation unit 203 Medal slot 205 Single insert button 206 MAX insert button 207 Medal selector 207a Solenoid 207b Insert sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage Release switch 210 Starting lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Center reel stop button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal gutter 213 Return gutter 214 See-through window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Lock device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitter 217a-1 Light source 217a-2 Light guide plate 217b Reflecting member 218 Fixing member 219 Groove 300 Pattern variation display device 301a Left reel (first reel)
301b middle reel (second reel)
301c right reel (third reel)
302 Device case 303 Driving means 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate portion 305 Top plate portion 306 Right side plate 307 Left side plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper swash plate 310 Lower swash plate 311 Handle 312 Reel board 313 Cable 315 Retaining portion 316 Handles 321a to 321c Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Center reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Center reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Design display window 402 Reinforcing bar 402a Guiding part 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcement member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main substrate 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Recessed stepped portion 413 Tapered portion 414 Wheel 415 Flange 416 Hook portion 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 420 Hinge fitting 420a Fixing member 420b Times Moving member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Overlapping area 420h Overlapping area 420h Overlapping area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle opening 423 Case-side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receptacle tube 430 Through hole 431 Attachment piece 432 Button-shaped panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Claw piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Engaging Stop hole 443 Skylight portion 444 Reinforcement band 449 Main board 500 Image display 500s Dashed line area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Lighting device 503 Substrate 505 Translucent cover plate 506 Tube frame 507 Translucent cover 508 Receiving portion 509 Engaging portion 510 Sub-substrate 512 Speaker 550 Seesaw accessory 551 Seesaw box 552 Seesaw portion 552a Movable piece 552b Movable piece 553 Shaft 554 Stepping motor 555 Door portion 556 Claw portion 557 Tip portion 558 Seesaw success tube 559 Seesaw failure tube 560 Conveyor 561 Conveyor 600 Upper rail 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start lamp 610 Medal IN lamp 612 (612a , 612b, 612c) Special display LED
613 (613a, 613b) Storage number display LED
614 BET lamp 623a Lower right line 623b Upper right line 700 Connector 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Prevention piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hook wall 703 Stop shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Pick piece 1110 CPU
1112 ROMs
1114 RAM
1116 input/output interface 1130 input/output interface 1200 hall computer

Claims (1)

Lottery means for acquiring lottery information regarding a win based on the establishment of a starting condition and executing a lottery based on the lottery information;
symbol variation executing means for executing symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition;
a performance determining means for determining a performance from among a plurality of performances based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means;
an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means;
an effect display means capable of displaying the effect executed by the effect execution means;
holding means for storing the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied although the establishment of the start condition is satisfied;
holding display means for displaying on the effect display means a holding display corresponding to each of the lottery information stored by the holding means and the lottery information corresponding to the variation being executed,
The plurality of productions are
A specific effect that makes the pending display displayed on the effect display means unrecognizable;
a first effect in which the specific effect is displayed when a specific time elapses after the execution of the symbol variation is started and the reserved display is rendered unrecognizable;
Even if the specific time elapses after the start of execution of the pattern variation, the reserved display is recognizable without the specific effect being displayed, and the specific performance is made at a predetermined timing after the specific time elapses. a second effect in which an effect is displayed to render the pending display unrecognizable;
In the pattern variation in which the first performance is executed, a special performance can be displayed in a situation before the specific time elapses after the start of the pattern variation, and the pattern in which the second performance is executed. Also in the variation, the special effect can be displayed in a situation before the specified time has elapsed after the symbol variation is started,
Expectations for winning are higher in the second production than in the first production,
There is a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect,
The third effect is displayed before the reserved display is made unrecognizable when making the reserved display to be recognized out of the reserved displays unrecognizable and re-recognizing the reserved display made unrecognizable. a holding display is displayed in a mode in which the expectation of winning is higher than the mode in which the winning is expected, and a specific sound is output based on the display of the holding display in the mode in which the expectation of winning is high;
The specific sound is not output when the hold display made unrecognizable by the first effect and the second effect is re-recognized,
When re-recognizing the hold display made unrecognizable by the first effect without outputting the specific sound, the hold display is made unrecognizable by the second effect without outputting the specific sound. Make it possible to be the same as the hold display when re-recognizing the hold display,
The on-hold display when re-recognizing the on-hold display made unrecognizable by the first effect without outputting the specific sound is more successful than the mode displayed before the on-hold display is made unrecognizable. is not displayed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, and the holding display made unrecognizable by the second effect is re-recognized without the specific sound being output. It is not displayed in a mode with a higher expectation of winning than the mode that was displayed before being disabled,
The time during which the pending display is rendered unrecognizable by the first effect and the second effect is different from the time during which the pending display is rendered unrecognizable by the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images